JP2024045734A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To improve the interest of games.
[Solution] A gaming machine is a means for displaying an unplayed pending display area capable of displaying a number of unplayed pending display information corresponding to the number of special information acquired when a game ball enters a ball entering means. and a means for displaying a previously executed pending display area in which a predetermined number of pending display information corresponding to a game round after the execution of the game round operation can be displayed as already executed pending display information. The unexecuted pending display information has at least a first display mode and a second display mode that is a higher level than the first display mode. All the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas is in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode. In this case, a predetermined type of gaming operation can be displayed as a gaming operation.
[Selection diagram] Figure 601

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various perspectives such as structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the interest of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and simplifying the structure (for example, Patent Document 1).

Various technical improvements have also been made with the aim of improving the soundness of gaming, such as discovering and deterring fraudulent acts by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

JP2011-172988A

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvements have been made for the purpose of increasing the interest of gaming, reducing the processing load on gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying structure, and providing healthier gaming. Improvements in technology are desired.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following forms.

[Form] (This embodiment is mainly based on the following 12th embodiment and its modification 15)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information acquired when a game ball enters the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit;
unexecuted pending display means for displaying an unexecuted pending display area capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition for each game;
A game time control means for controlling the game time operation when one game time operation is defined as the start of the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game operation. ,
special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player after the end of the gaming operation when the determining means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is determined from the highest to the lowest set corresponding to the level of the possibility. Suspension changing means suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted suspension display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting the direction of change in the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
an already executed pending display area that can display a predetermined number of pending display information corresponding to the gaming session after the gaming session operation is executed by the gaming session control section as already executed pending display information;
Equipped with
The display mode of the unexecuted pending display information includes at least a first display mode at the lowest level among the plurality of stages, and a second display mode at a higher stage than the first display mode. have,
All the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas is in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the second display mode. 1. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the case of the display mode 1, the gaming operation in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the gaming operation.

According to the above embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern and a display surface which are variably displayed on a pattern display device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery etc. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/lose table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a drop-off lottery win/loss table used when conducting a drop-off lottery. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/lose table used when conducting a lottery to open an electric gimmick. 2 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device and the display control device. 13 is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing when a drop-out lottery is won in a play before the guaranteed number of plays is reached. It is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game play before the guaranteed number of games is reached. This is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing when it is determined that a reach occurs in the reach determination without winning the falling lottery and not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game play before reaching the guaranteed number of games. be. It is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface of a symbol display device when a battle performance or a result announcement performance is being executed. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a battle performance. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a result announcement performance executed after a battle performance. 13 is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing when a drop-out lottery is won in a play round after the guaranteed number of plays has been reached. This is a timing chart that explains the processing in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 in the case where, in a play round after the guaranteed number of plays is reached, the player does not win the fall-out lottery but wins the jackpot in the win lottery. This is a timing chart that explains the processing in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 in the case where, in a play round after the guaranteed number of plays is reached, the player does not win the fall-out lottery but wins the jackpot in the win lottery. This is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing when the player does not win the fall lottery, wins the jackpot in the winning lottery, and wins the first to lose mode in the mode selection lottery in the game play after reaching the guaranteed number of games. be. This is a timing chart that explains an example of the processing when, in a play round after the guaranteed number of plays is reached, a player does not win the drop-out lottery, wins a jackpot in the win lottery, and wins the late drop mode in the mode selection lottery. A timing chart illustrating an example of processing when it is determined that a reach occurs in the reach determination without winning the falling lottery and not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game play after the guaranteed number of games has been reached. It is. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting holes. It is a flowchart which shows a destination determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance processing for a through ball. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal process. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows pending information shift processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a gaming state determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a fall determination process. It is a flowchart which shows hit determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows variable time setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games. It is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation end process. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. A flowchart showing the large prize opening and closing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of an ending period. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for power supply support. 4 is a flowchart showing an electric utility opening/closing control process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by audio-light side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for game play presentation. 13 is a flowchart showing the game play presentation setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a presentation pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of plays. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of setting a presentation pattern after a guaranteed number of plays. It is a flowchart showing a process for executing a game round performance. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 5 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a high probability mode success/failure table provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 1. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a mode selection table provided in a pachinko machine of variant example 2. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine according to a second embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative patterns that are variably displayed on the pattern display device and the display surface of the pattern display device. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a special drawing lottery, a regular drawing lottery, etc. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a special figure propriety judgment table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a special figure type judgment table. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special line opening and closing scenario selection table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the general drawing pass/fail determination table. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a general map type determination table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a normal power switching scenario selection table. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of an audio emission control device and a display control device. It is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of processing executed in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the performance performed in the pachinko machine of a 2nd embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the performance performed in the pachinko machine of a 2nd embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for the normal figure starting gate. This is a flowchart showing the ball entry processing for the special chart starting hole. A flowchart showing the ball entry processing for the V entry port. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows general figure fluctuation time setting processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern change stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal electric accessory control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing normal power switching processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern variation start processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a special chart variation time setting process. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation stop processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a special electric feature control process. 13 is a flowchart showing special line opening and closing processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound/light side MPU; 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed in an MPU of the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a presentation executed in a pachinko machine according to a modified example of the second embodiment. It is an explanatory view explaining an example of the performance performed in the pachinko machine of the modification of the second embodiment. It is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine as a third embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. An explanatory diagram explaining the delay mechanism 202 and the V winning mechanism 210. It is an explanatory diagram showing a liquid crystal pattern and a display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing contents of various counters used for a winning lottery and the like. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a propriety table for the first starting port. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the propriety table for the 2nd starting port. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the distribution table for the first starting port. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table for the second starting port. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the jackpot type determined by a game ball entering a V winning hole (1st V winning hole V1 2nd V winning hole V2). An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/lose table used when conducting a lottery to open an electric gimmick. A block diagram showing mainly the electrical configuration of an audio and light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the flow of a game in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of specific suggestion production. 13 is a flowchart outlining a process for setting the effects in a game round (also called a game round effect setting process). 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. A flowchart showing the ball entry processing for the starting hole. 13 is a flowchart showing a destination determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a through ball entry process. A flowchart showing the ball entry processing for the V entry port. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows pending information shift processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a hit determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation end process. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an opening/closing scenario setting process. A flowchart showing the large prize opening and closing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electrical support. It is a flowchart which shows electric role opening/closing processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound/light side MPU 92. It is a flowchart showing processing for game round performance. It is a flowchart showing game run production pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart showing game ball distribution mode detection processing. An explanatory diagram explaining the game ball count memory area. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed in an MPU 102 of the display control device 100. 5 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. This is an explanatory diagram that explains a specific suggestion effect that drives a driving part. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an arrangement position of a detection sensor. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of modified example 5. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of modified example 6. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of Modification 7; FIG. 13 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine according to a fourth embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern and a display surface which are variably displayed on a pattern display device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of various counters used in winning lotteries, etc. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/lose table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/lose table used when conducting a lottery to open an electric gimmick. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of an audio emission control device and a display control device. An explanatory diagram showing an example of changes in the first starting port holding area and the held digestion area. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a change of a 2nd starting port holding area and a holding extinguishing area. It is an explanatory view explaining a display mode of a hold display icon. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance when petals are displayed on the display surface of the pattern display device. FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a method of displaying petals of the first to fourth types. It is an explanatory view showing the behavior of the third type petal. It is an explanatory view showing the state of the first reservation display icon when the special 1/reservation 1 petal moves along the target reservation arrival trajectory. It is an explanatory view showing how the fourth type petal acts on the pattern displayed on the display surface of the pattern display device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. A flowchart showing the ball entry processing for the starting hole. 13 is a flowchart showing a destination determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a through ball entry process. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal process. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 13 is a flowchart showing a hold information shift process. It is a flowchart which shows hit determination processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation end processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for power supply support. 4 is a flowchart showing an electric utility opening/closing control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound/light side MPU; 13 is a flowchart showing a pending command handling process. 13 is a flowchart showing an update process when a ball goes in. An explanatory diagram explaining the memory area for hold effects. 13 is a flowchart showing a parameter setting process for hold effect. 3 is a flowchart illustrating display level upper limit setting processing. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an upper limit table. It is a flowchart showing a game round performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an update process at the start of fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd type petal effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd kind petal effect setting process for 1st starting opening hold|maintenance. A flowchart showing the petal effect setting process for Special 1 and Reserve 1. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a petal trajectory lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the petal effect setting process for Special 1 and Hold 2. It is a flowchart which shows the petal effect setting process for Special 1 and Hold 3. A flowchart showing the petal effect setting process for Special 1 and Reserve 4. A flowchart showing the third type petal effect setting process for the second start port hold. It is a flow chart which shows pending display change setting processing. A flowchart showing the first start port hold display change setting process. A flowchart showing the second start port hold display change setting process. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing. A flowchart showing the first start port hold display change setting process in variant example 1. It is a flowchart which shows petal display change processing. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as a 5th embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is an explanatory view showing a display surface of a pattern display device. It is an explanatory view showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing contents of various counters used for a winning lottery and the like. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a validity table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a win/loss table for reach determination. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a win/fail table used when executing an electric accessory opening lottery. 2 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device and the display control device. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a character-based stage. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a non-character stage. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a battle performance and a result announcement performance. 13 is a timing chart showing the display modes of the changing and stopping symbols, the special reach screen presentation, and the background image. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic diagram of stage transitions executed in a pachinko machine. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the manner of stage transition in a character stage. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the manner of stage transition in a non-character stage. 5 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting holes. It is a flowchart which shows a destination determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance processing for a through ball. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal process. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows pending information shift processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows variable time setting processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation end process. 13 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. A flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the large prize opening. 13 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of an ending period. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for power supply support. It is a flowchart which shows electric utility opening/closing control processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound/light side MPU; 3 is a flowchart illustrating pending command handling processing. It is a flowchart which shows update processing at the time of ball entry. 13 is a flowchart showing the game play presentation setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance pattern setting process. A flowchart showing the process of setting a presentation pattern for a big win. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a reach distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the production pattern setting process for when a reach occurs and is out. It is a flowchart which shows the production pattern table reference process for super reach/miss. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a warrior character lottery table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a warrior character judgment value correspondence table. A flowchart showing the process of referring to the performance pattern table for special reach/miss. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process for the time of reach non-occurrence/missing. 13 is a flowchart showing an update process at the start of fluctuation. 13 is a flowchart showing a stage production process. 13 is a flowchart showing a stage transition process in a character stage. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a stage lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the stage transition process in a non-character type|system|group stage. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing. It is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 in a pachinko machine 10 of a sixth embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of music data and its performance form as background art. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the data structure of data stored in a ROM for audio data. It is an explanatory diagram showing each composition of music A 1st data A1 and music A 2nd data A2. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the configurations of first data B1 of a song B and second data B2 of a song B. FIG. 7 is a timing chart showing a reproduction procedure for music A in the sound output LSI 97. FIG. 9 is a timing chart showing a reproduction procedure for music B in the sound output LSI 97. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the data structure and performance form of a piece of music A in a reference example. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a BGM process. 13 is a flowchart showing a BGM playback start process. 13 is a flowchart showing a BGM continuous playback process. 7 is a flowchart showing a playback start execution process executed in the sound output LSI 97. FIG. 13 is a timing chart showing a reproduction procedure for song A by the sound output LSI 97 in the first modified example. 13 is a flowchart showing a BGM continuous playback process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st time 2nd data reproduction process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd data reproduction process from the 2nd time. 7 is a flowchart showing a playback start execution process executed in the sound output LSI 97. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a predetermined period that defines transmission timing in Modification 5. FIG. It is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine in a 7th embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern and a display surface which are variably displayed on a pattern display device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in winning lotteries, etc. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a validity table. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a winning/losing table for the lottery for opening electric gimmicks. FIG. 7 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of an audio emission control device and a display control device according to a seventh embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a power switch of a 7th embodiment typically. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating another example of the power switch. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another example of a power switch. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU of the seventh embodiment when the power is turned on. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process performed by the main side MPU of 7th Embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by a main MPU in the seventh embodiment; 23 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main MPU in the seventh embodiment; 23 is a flowchart showing a power supply monitoring process executed by a main MPU in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the entry process for the starting hole performed by the main side MPU of 7th Embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a destination determination process executed by a main MPU in the seventh embodiment; 12 is a flowchart illustrating ball entry processing for through gates executed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing executed by the main side MPU of the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the pending information shifting process executed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing executed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a hit determination process executed by a main MPU in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process executed by the main MPU according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the game state transition processing executed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening/closing process executed by the main side MPU of the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of an ending period executed by a main MPU in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the electric support processing executed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an electric utility switching control process executed by the main MPU of the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an acoustic/optical side MPU in the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a startup date and time information storage process executed by the audio/optical side MPU of the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing an electrical interruption type determination process executed by the sound and light side MPU of the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing an activation type determination process executed by the sound and light side MPU of the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the sound-light side abnormal power outage flag handling process which the sound-light side MPU of 7th Embodiment performs. 23 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sound/light side MPU of the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing an audio/optical side power cut-off process executed by an audio/optical side MPU in the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the RTC performance process executed by the sound/light side MPU of the seventh embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram explaining an RTC performance execution judgment table. A flowchart showing the processing for stationary suggestion performance executed by the sound and light side MPU in the seventh embodiment. An explanatory diagram illustrating a movable object for presentation provided in a pachinko machine according to a first modified example of the seventh embodiment. It is an explanatory view explaining the movable object for performance with which the Pachinko machine of modification 1 of a 7th embodiment is provided. 23 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU in a twelfth modified example of the seventh embodiment; 12 is a flowchart illustrating power supply monitoring processing executed by the main MPU in Modification 12 of the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing an electrical interruption type determination process executed by the audio-visual side MPU in the twelfth modified example of the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the audio-optical side power interruption process which the audio-optical side MPU performs the modification 12 of 7th Embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing power supply monitoring processing executed by the main MPU in Modification 13 of the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power interruption type determination process which the audio-optical side MPU performs in the modification 13 of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the audio-optical side power interruption process which the audio-optical side MPU performs the modification 13 of 7th Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as an 8th embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is an explanatory view showing a starting port unit. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls when the distribution piece part is in the first position Q1. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls when the distribution piece part is in the second position Q2. An explanatory diagram showing the first route in the starting port unit. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a second route in the starting port unit. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a third route in the starting port unit. It is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern and a display surface which are variably displayed on a pattern display device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in winning lotteries, etc. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the first starting port. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the second starting port. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a win/loss table for reach determination. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a win/fail table used when executing an electric accessory opening lottery. 2 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device and the display control device. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of play in pachinko machine 10. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing various aspects of a low-probability low-support state, a low-probability high-support state, a high-probability high-support state, and a high-probability low-support state. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting holes. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a falling hole. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal process. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start process for the 1st starting port. A flowchart showing the pending information shift processing for the first starting port. A flowchart showing the determination process for the first starting port. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the variable time for 1st starting ports. A flowchart showing the process of acquiring variable time information during a low-probability, low-support state for the first starting port. A flowchart showing the process of acquiring variable time information during a low probability high support state for the first starting port. It is a flowchart which shows the highly accurate high support state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the 1st starting port. A flowchart showing the process of acquiring variable time information during a high probability low support state for the first starting port. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st fluctuation stop processing. A flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing for the second starting port. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation information shift process for 2nd starting gates. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process for a 2nd starting opening. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the variable time for 2nd starting ports. A flowchart showing the process of acquiring variable time information during a low-probability, low-support state for the second starting port. A flowchart showing the process of acquiring variable time information during a low probability high support state for the second starting port. A flowchart showing the process of acquiring variable time information during a high probability high support state for the second starting port. It is a flowchart which shows the highly accurate low support state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the 2nd starting port. 13 is a flowchart showing the second fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. It is a flowchart which shows opening/closing scenario setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows opening time setting processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a process performed when an opening period flag is ON. 13 is a flowchart showing a process performed when an opening/closing process period flag is ON. A flowchart showing the large prize opening and closing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process when an ending period flag is ON. 13 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of an ending period. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for power supply support. 13 is a flowchart showing an electric utility switching process. 13 is a flowchart showing a game ball distribution control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound/light side MPU; 12 is a flowchart illustrating pending command handling processing. It is a flowchart which shows update processing at the time of ball entry. 13 is a flowchart showing the game play presentation setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a display mode switching process. A flowchart showing the special 1 game round presentation setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a first effect pattern setting process. A flowchart showing the process of setting a presentation pattern for a low-probability, low-support state for the first starting port. A flowchart showing the process of setting a presentation pattern for a low probability high support state for the first starting port. A flowchart showing the process of setting a presentation pattern during a high probability high support state for the first starting port. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process in the high-accuracy low support state for the 1st starting opening. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for setting the special 2 game play presentation. 13 is a flowchart showing a second effect pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process in the low-accuracy low support state for the 2nd starting opening. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process in the low precision high support state for the 2nd starting opening. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process in the high precision high support state for the 2nd starting opening. It is a flowchart which shows the performance pattern setting process in the high-accuracy low support state for the 2nd starting opening. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed in an MPU of the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. An explanatory diagram showing a starting port unit in a modified example. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine according to a ninth embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns and display surface that are variably displayed on the pattern display device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery etc. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the first starting port. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the propriety table for the 2nd starting port. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/lose table for a drop lottery. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/lose table used when conducting a lottery to open an electric gimmick. 2 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device and the display control device. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game in a pachinko machine. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. A flowchart showing the ball entry processing for the starting hole. It is a flowchart which shows a destination determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a through ball entry process. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 13 is a flowchart showing a hold information shift process. It is a flowchart which shows a fall determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows variable time setting processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation end process. It is a flowchart which shows processing for time saving grant. 13 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening opening/closing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a shutter opening and closing process. A flowchart showing the V prize determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of an ending period. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for electric utility support. 4 is a flowchart showing an electric utility opening/closing control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound/light side MPU; 12 is a flowchart illustrating pending command handling processing. It is a flowchart showing a game round performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a fluctuation start. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a 10th embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern and a display surface which are variably displayed on a pattern display device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery etc. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the first starting port. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the second starting port. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a success/failure table for a fall lottery. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/lose table used when conducting a lottery to open an electric gimmick. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of an audio emission control device and a display control device. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game in the pachinko machine 10. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. A flowchart showing the ball entry processing for the starting hole. It is a flowchart which shows a destination determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a through ball entry process. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 13 is a flowchart showing a hold information shift process. 13 is a flowchart showing a fall determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows variable time setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation end processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing for time saving grant. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening opening/closing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a shutter opening and closing process. It is a flowchart which shows V winning prize determination processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electrical support. 4 is a flowchart showing an electric utility opening/closing control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound/light side MPU; 13 is a flowchart showing a pending command handling process. 13 is a flowchart showing the game play presentation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows production pattern setting processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an update process at the start of fluctuation. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed in an MPU of the display control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game in a pachinko machine of modification 1. FIG. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table for the first starting hole provided in a pachinko machine of variant example 2. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of play in a pachinko machine of variant example 2. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a validity table (for low probability mode) for the second starting port in Modification 3; FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game in a pachinko machine according to modification 3. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of control when transitioning from a high-accuracy high support state to a high-accuracy low support state in modification example 13. A timing chart showing an example of control when transitioning from a high-probability high-support state to a high-probability low-support state in variant example 14. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of control when transitioning from a high-accuracy high support state to a high-accuracy low support state in modification example 15. It is a front view of the game board in modification 18. FIG. 15 is an oblique view of a pachinko machine according to an eleventh embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns and display surface that are variably displayed on the pattern display device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery etc. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a validity table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/lose table used when conducting a lottery to open an electric gimmick. 2 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device and the display control device. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a change of a 1st start opening holding area and a holding extinguishing area. An explanatory diagram showing an example of changes in the second start port holding area and the held digestion area. This is an explanatory diagram showing a case where a jackpot is included in the special 1 reservation during normal play. It is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuating display and an omen notice performance (first time) regarding special 1 reservation 1. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display and an omen notice performance (second time) regarding Special 1 Pending 2. This is an explanatory diagram showing the changing display and premonition preview performance (third time) for Special 1 Reserve 3. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the number of appearances of a precursor preview performance and a planned execution performance. This is an explanatory diagram showing the variable display, reach performance, and stop display for Special 1 Reserve 4. This is a time chart showing a series of performances for Special 1 Retention 1 to Special 1 Retention 4 on a time axis. It is an explanatory view showing the basic concept of the continuous holding performance adopted in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing how Special 1 is reserved in Case 1. This is a time chart that explains the presentation for special 1 hold executed by special 1 hold continuous presentation processing in case 1, and the presentation for special 2 hold executed by special 2 hold presentation processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing how special 1 is reserved in case 2. It is a time chart illustrating the performance for the special 1 hold executed by the special 1 hold continuous performance process and the performance for the special 2 hold performed by the special 2 hold effect process in case 2. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the color of the same color of the pattern and the performance scheduled to be performed. This is an explanatory diagram showing a series of presentations executed during a game round for Special 2 Reserve 1. 3 is a time chart showing Comparative Example 1. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing how Special 1 is reserved in Case 3. This is a time chart that explains the presentation for special 1 hold executed by special 1 hold continuous presentation processing in case 3, and the presentation for special 2 hold executed by special 2 hold presentation processing. An explanatory diagram showing the content of the charge performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing a series of performances executed in the game round for special 2 reservation 1. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. A flowchart showing the ball entry processing for the starting hole. It is a flowchart which shows a destination determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance processing for a through ball. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a game play control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows pending information shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows hit determination processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation end process. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening opening/closing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electrical support. It is a flowchart which shows electric utility opening/closing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by audio-light side MPU. 12 is a flowchart illustrating pending command handling processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the game play presentation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows production pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a fluctuation start. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing. An explanatory diagram conceptually showing the state of special 1 reservation in variant example 10. It is a time chart explaining the performance regarding special 1 reservation performed by special 1 reservation continuous performance processing and the performance regarding special 2 reservation performed by special 2 reservation performance processing in modification 10. It is a time chart explaining the performance regarding special 1 reservation performed by special 1 reservation continuous performance processing and the performance regarding special 2 reservation performed by special 2 reservation performance processing in modification 11. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a 12th embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns and display surface that are variably displayed on the pattern display device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery etc. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a validity table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/lose table used when conducting a lottery to open an electric gimmick. 2 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device and the display control device. It is an explanatory view showing a display screen where first reservation related information is displayed in a sub-area. It is an explanatory diagram showing how the unplayed pending display area, the variable execution pending display area, and the executed pending display area change as the game progresses. It is an explanatory view showing a display screen on which second reservation related information is displayed in a sub-area. An explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a reservation change pattern lottery table for reference conditions. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a change in display color due to a hold change notice. An explanatory diagram explaining the data structure of the memory area for special 1 hold performance. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an overview of execution pending notice processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for removing the same color when the color is not matched. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing how each hold display area changes in case 1. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing how each hold display area changes in case 2. FIG. An explanatory diagram showing how each pending display area changes in case 3. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing how each hold display area changes in case 4. FIG. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing how each hold display area changes in case 5. FIG. An explanatory diagram showing how each pending display area changes in case 6. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing how each hold display area changes in case 7. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows a destination determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance processing for a through ball. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal process. 13 is a flowchart showing a game play control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows pending information shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows hit determination processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation end process. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. A flowchart showing the large prize opening and closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electrical support. It is a flowchart which shows electric utility opening/closing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by audio-light side MPU. 12 is a flowchart illustrating pending command handling processing. It is a flowchart showing a game round performance setting process. It is a flowchart which shows production pattern setting processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an update process at the start of fluctuation. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing how each hold display area changes in case 8. FIG. An explanatory diagram showing how each pending display area changes in case A. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing how each hold display area changes in case A. FIG. An explanatory diagram showing how each pending display area changes in case A. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing how each hold display area changes in case B. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing how each hold display area changes in case B. FIG. An explanatory diagram showing how each pending display area changes in case B.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS An embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
<<1>> First embodiment (mainly corresponds to the feature group lA to the feature group lH of <<Z>> below):
<2> Second embodiment (mainly corresponds to the feature group mA to feature group mR of <Z> below):
<3> Third embodiment (mainly corresponds to the feature group nA to the feature group nN in <Z> below):
<4> Fourth embodiment (mainly corresponds to the feature group oA to the feature group oJ in <Z> below):
<<5>> Fifth embodiment (mainly corresponds to the feature pA group to the feature pL group in <<Z>> below):
<<6>> Sixth embodiment (mainly corresponds to the feature group qA to the feature group qM in <<Z>> below):
<7> Seventh embodiment (mainly corresponds to the feature group rA to the feature group rV in <Z> below):
<8> Eighth embodiment (mainly corresponds to the feature group sA to feature group sV in <Z> below):
<<9>> Ninth embodiment (mainly corresponds to the feature group tA to feature group tP in <<Z>> below):
<<10>> Tenth embodiment (mainly corresponds to the feature group uA to the feature group uU and the feature group uIA to the feature group uIM in <<Z>> below):
<<11>> Eleventh embodiment (mainly corresponds to the feature group vA to the feature group vR in <<Z>> below):
<<12>> Twelfth embodiment (mainly corresponds to the feature group wA to the feature group wT in <<Z>> below):
Application to other configurations:
<Z> Regarding the feature group extracted from each of the above embodiments, etc.:

<<1>> First embodiment:
《1-1》Structure of gaming machine:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter also referred to as a "pachinko machine") as a first embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, this outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back side of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window 18 is formed in the approximate center of the front door frame 14. Resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided around the window 18. The electric parts are composed of light-emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role in enhancing the presentation effect by lighting or blinking during each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, etc. In addition, a glass unit 19 consisting of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the open window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board through the glass unit 19 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed into a box shape with an open top surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls ejected from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed into a box shape with an open top surface. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and by operating the lever 23, the player can switch the outlet 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided at the front of the periphery of the upper tray 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation unit that allows the player to perform input operations for the game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

On the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, simply referred to as the "right side"), an operating handle 25 for the player to operate is provided. When the player operates (rotates) the operating handle 25, game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting the operation of the game ball launching mechanism, a wait button 25b that stops the launch of game balls by the game ball launching mechanism when pressed by the player, and a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a turns on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in response to the amount of rotation, and game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball launch button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, simply referred to as the "left side"). When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, a game ball is launched to the front of the game board with a predetermined launch strength, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front of the game board with the same launch strength as when the rotation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can perform a so-called "right hit". In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is configured to be launched to the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. That is, the player can grasp the operating handle 25 to turn on at least the touch sensor 25a, and then operate the game ball launch button 26 to launch the game ball in response to the operation of the game ball launch button 26.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. Control equipment for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board that has a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is constructed so that traces of opening and closing remain. For example, a seal is affixed to an openable/closable location, and when the board box is opened, the words "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The audio light emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands sent from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on commands sent from the audio emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays symbols and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The firing control device 80 controls the game so that when an instruction to fire a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 that is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a slope that is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and gently sloped so that the game balls flow downstream. A tank rail 55 having a tank rail 55, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, receiving game balls from the case rail 56 and paying out a predetermined number of game balls according to instructions from a payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the power necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. The power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By turning the power switch 88 ON/OFF, the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

A plurality of openings passing through the game board 30 in the front and back direction are formed. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning opening 36. The game balls that enter each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are placed in the individual openings formed on the gaming board 30. be guided. Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 includes a special figure unit 37, a regular figure unit 38, and a round display section 39.

As shown in the figure, the general winning opening 32 is a ball entry opening member that forms an entry opening through which a game ball can enter, and multiple general winning openings are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (Figure 2).

The first starting hole 33 is a ball entry hole member that forms a ball entry hole through which a game ball can enter. The first starting hole 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting hole 34 is an entrance member that forms an entrance through which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed. In addition, the second starting hole 34 is provided with an electric device 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole that penetrates vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that triggers a lottery to open the electric role 34a. Specifically, when a game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the passing as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric role opening lottery). If the electric role opening is selected as a result of the internal lottery, the electric role 34a transitions to an electric role opening state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is disposed upstream of the second start port 34 in the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that passes through the through gate 35 can flow down the game area PA after passing through and enter the second start port 34. Note that in this embodiment, even if a game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 is provided with a large winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 36a. When a big win is won as a result of an internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60 and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state and a closed state when a big win is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by a ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. In other words, when a big win is won as a result of a winning lottery based on a ball entering the first starting hole 33, the opening/closing execution mode is entered in which a ball can enter the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36. Similarly, if a big win is won as a result of a winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, the game moves to an open/close execution mode in which the ball can enter the large winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

An outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the general winning hole 32, the first starting hole 33, the second starting hole 34, or the variable winning device 36 are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each configured with a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display section 37a is a display section for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed variably or statically based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display section 37a is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. , causes the first symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. When the lottery ends, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop display the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second pattern display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern refers to a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 34. When a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is performed, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a variable second pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a stationary second pattern corresponding to the lottery result.

The period from when the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b starts to be displayed until it is stopped is also referred to as the variation time. call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a until the time when the first symbol is stopped and displayed is also called the first variation time, and The time period from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to the time it is stopped and displayed is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first reservation display section 37c and a second reservation display section 37d, which are made of LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are held. The first reservation display section 37c displays the number of reservations at the first starting port 33 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. Further, in this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are held. The second reservation display section 37d displays the number of reservations at the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit.

The general map unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When a lottery to open an electric reel is held triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the general map unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to light up, flash, or display in a predetermined manner. When the lottery to open an electric reel is completed, the general map unit 38 displays in a predetermined manner corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light-emitting display unit in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of rounds that will occur in the open/close execution mode, or a display corresponding thereto. A round is a game in which the open/close door 36b remains open until one of the following conditions is met: either a predetermined upper limit duration has elapsed, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have entered the variable winning device 36. The number of rounds varies depending on the type of jackpot that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of rounds when the open/close execution mode is started, and ends when the open/close execution mode ends and a new game round begins.

The special drawing unit 37, the general drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured with segment displays or light-emitting displays using LED lamps, but may be configured with various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery results, such as, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display device.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged approximately at the center of the gaming area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the symbol display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first pattern display unit 37a displays a variable or predetermined display based on a ball entering the first starting hole 33, the pattern display unit 41 displays a variable or predetermined display of the pattern accordingly. Also, when the second pattern display unit 37b displays a variable or predetermined display based on a ball entering the second starting hole 34, the pattern display unit 41 displays a variable or predetermined display of the pattern accordingly. The pattern display unit 41 is not limited to display effects triggered by a ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, but also performs display effects during the opening and closing execution mode to which the mode is shifted when a jackpot is won. Details of the pattern display unit 41 are explained below.

Figure 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns and display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. Figure 4(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. As shown in Figure 4(a), patterns showing the numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. Note that as the variably displayed patterns, patterns in which the numbers 1 to 8 are each accompanied by an image of a character or the like may be used.

Figure 4(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in the figure, three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, left, center, and right, are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the numbers 1 to 8 shown in Figure 4(a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and a variable display is performed in which each pattern row scrolls from top to bottom or bottom to top with a periodicity. As shown in Figure 4(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one pattern is displayed in a stopped state on the pay line L for each pattern row. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, a variable display is started in which the patterns of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with a periodicity. Then, the scrolling symbols are switched from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, each of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displays a predetermined symbol in a static display state. When the variable display of the symbols ends and the display is static, if the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined combination of symbols is formed on the valid line L. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the valid line L. Note that the manner of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned manner, and various modes of the variable display of the symbols can be adopted, such as the number of symbol rows, the number of valid lines, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows, and the number of symbols in each symbol row.

Here, the term "game round" refers to the period from the start of the variable display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b until the end of the variable display and the stop display. A unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery regarding the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. be. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information every game. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first symbol display section In either the second symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, after the segment display is displayed in a variable manner, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the pachinko machine 10 displays the symbol display device for each game. At step 41, after a predetermined symbol row is displayed in a variable manner, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit gaming time consists of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a first reservation display area Ds1 and a second reservation display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. The number of balls to be held based on the number of balls entering the first starting port 33 is displayed in the first holding display area Ds1. In the second reservation display area Ds2, the number of reservations based on the number of balls entering the second starting port 34 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, the number of reserved game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 3, a pair of nails (also known as life nails or navel nails) 42 (42a, 42b) are provided above the first starting hole 33. The probability of the game ball entering the first starting hole 33 changes depending on the distance between the pair of nails 42a, 42b.

《1-2》Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that includes elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a ROM 63 that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. It is equipped with a RAM 64 which is a memory for storing data. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may be provided with some of the functions that the MPU 62 has. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). The input port of the main control board 61 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 and the power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85. The main control board 61 receives a stable 24V DC power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the dispensing control device 70, etc., and supplies power to each device. The power supply device 85 also has a capacitor (not shown), and continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period of time when a power failure occurs or when the power switch 88 (Figure 2) is turned off.

In addition, various detection sensors 67a to 67e are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided at various winning ports such as the general winning port 32, the first start port 33, the second start port 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. Based on the signals from the various detection sensors 67a to 67e, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 judges whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entry port, and judges whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 35. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the game ball entering the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, and executes a lottery to open the electric device based on the ball entering the through gate 35.

The output port of the main control board 61 includes a variable prize drive part 36c that opens and closes the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36, and an electric accessory drive part 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , and the main display section 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed. Also, if the electric role opening is selected as a result of the electric role opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric role drive unit 34b so that the electric role 34a is opened. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the main display unit 45. Also, when the type of jackpot is determined in the opening and closing execution mode and the number of rounds to be played in the opening and closing execution mode is determined, the MPU 62 executes display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45.

The payout control device 70 and the sound and light emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. For example, the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command to the payout control device 70 based on the winning judgment result. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a ball is identified as having entered the general winning hole 32, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, when a ball is identified as having entered the first starting hole 33, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when a ball is identified as having entered the second starting hole 34, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 1 game ball is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A firing control device 80 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 . The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met. Further, the operation handle 25 and the game ball firing button 26 are connected to the firing control device 80.

The audio and light emission control device 90 receives various commands sent from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 sends various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the audio and light emission control device 90 controls the operation of various lamps 47, which are light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, the operation of the speaker 46, and controls the display control device 100. In addition, the performance operation button 24 is connected to the audio and light emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by the player at a specified timing, the audio and light emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, etc. to perform a game performance that reflects the operation.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound and light emission control device 90. Specifically, based on various commands received from the sound and light emission control device 90, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination that will ultimately be stopped and displayed, as well as grasping whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach performance, and the content of the advance notice performance executed in each game round. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game round, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, setting the display on the main display section 45, setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting jackpot types such as probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results. A reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed. A fall random number counter CF is used for the fall lottery to decide whether to end the high probability mode (also referred to as high probability gaming state). The "high probability mode" is a gaming state that is started by winning a variable jackpot, and is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is relatively higher than in the low probability mode.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. In addition, the change type counter CS is used to determine the change time in the first and second pattern display sections 37a and 37b of the main display section 45, and in the pattern display device 41. Furthermore, the electric device opening counter C4 is used for the electric device opening lottery to determine whether or not the electric device 34a of the second starting hole 34 is opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CF, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF at the timing of ball entry is stored in the pending information storage area. 64b is stored in the first reservation area Ra in chronological order. Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF at the timing of ball entry are set to the number 1 in the pending information storage area 64b. 2 storage area Rb in chronological order.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be explained. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 1199, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering the first starting port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is determined to be a jackpot. It is determined whether or not. In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is determined by the value of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. As a result, the execution areas AE of the determination processing execution area 64c are moved in the order in which they were acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot.

Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the first reserved area Ra of the reserved information storage area 64b at the time when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, and is stored in the second reserved area Rb of the reserved information storage area 64b at the time when the game ball enters the second starting hole 34.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the judgment process execution area 64c, and if the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, it determines the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the judgment process execution area 64c. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped on the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referenced.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described in detail. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. The game ball is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some combinations of symbols that have the possibility of forming a combination of symbols that correspond to a jackpot are stopped for some of the multiple symbol arrays displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and in that state, symbols are displayed variably in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined active line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 4(b), a symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach state. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, the reach line is formed, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a reach effect. This includes a method in which a combination of symbols in which a reach line is formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, a decision is made as to whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

Next, the details of the fall random number counter CF will be explained. The fall random number counter CF is used when executing a fall lottery, which is a judgment as to whether or not to end the high probability mode, in a game state in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode. If the fall lottery is won, the lottery mode for the game round is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

The falling random number counter CF is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value. The falling random number counter CF is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 when the game ball enters the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34. Specifically, the updated value of the falling random number counter CF is stored in the first reserved area Ra of the RAM 64 when the game ball enters the first start hole 33, and the updated value of the falling random number counter CF is stored in the second reserved area Rb of the RAM 64 when the game ball enters the second start hole 34. The value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the first reserved area Ra or the second reserved area Rb is then moved to the execution area AE, and is then compared with the winning/losing table (winning/losing table for falling lottery) stored in the falling lottery table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not to end the high probability mode.

Next, the details of the change type counter CS will be explained. The change type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the change time in the first pattern display section 37a and the second pattern display section 37b, and the change time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41. The change type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The change type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is repeatedly updated during the remaining time in the normal processing. The buffer value of the change type counter CS is acquired when the change display in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b starts, and when the change pattern is determined when the pattern display device 41 starts changing the pattern. When determining the change time in the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b, the change time table stored in the change time table memory area 63h of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be explained. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 in the electric role execution area 64e A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory opening lottery) is held to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, in the electric role playing area 64e, the win/fail table (the win/fail table for the electric role-playing object lottery) stored in the object lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role-playing object opening counter C4 are determined. The information is compared, and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the fall random number counter CF is special information in the present invention. corresponds to In addition, at least one of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is held. Also called information.

Next, the validity table will be explained. The win/fail table is table data for comparing with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode as the lottery modes for winning lots, and when drawing a winning lottery in the low probability mode, the win/fail table for the low probability mode is referred to, and the winning lottery mode is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode. When drawing a winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table. FIG. 7(a) shows a success/failure table for low probability mode (for low probability mode), and FIG. 7(b) shows a success/failure table for high probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), five values from 0 to 4 are set in the low probability mode win/fail table as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7(b), in the high probability mode win/fail table, 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 (16 to 1199) are outliers. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the low probability mode is the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the high probability mode. included in the group. However, as long as the probability of a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

Although not adopted in the win/lose table in this embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

A "small win" is a result that triggers a transition to the opening and closing execution mode in which the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger a transition to either the lottery mode or the support mode. In contrast, a "miss" is a result that does not trigger a transition to the opening and closing execution mode, and further does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode or the support mode.

Next, the types of jackpots will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes.
(1) The manner of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode. (2) A lottery mode for a winning lottery after the opening and closing execution mode ends. (3) A support mode for the electric device 34a of the second starting hole 34 after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

In the pachinko machine 10, as the above-mentioned (1) opening and closing execution mode of the variable winning device 36, a high frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency of winning in the variable winning device 36 is relatively high and low between the start and end of the opening and closing execution mode. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed multiple times (for example, 16 times) between the start and end of the opening and closing execution mode, and each opening can be set to continue until 30 seconds have passed or until the number of balls that enter the opening and closing door 36b reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed twice between the start and end of the opening and closing execution mode, and each opening can be set to continue until 0.2 seconds have passed or until the number of balls that enter the opening and closing door 36b reaches 6.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is shorter than the firing cycle of game balls. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, winning of game balls does not substantially occur. However, it may be set so that winnings of game balls can occur even in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode.

The number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed, the time limit for opening each time, and the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed are arbitrary, as long as the frequency of winning in the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. Specifically, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed, the time limit for opening each time is longer, or the number of times the opening limit for opening each time is larger than in the low-frequency winning mode. To clearly distinguish between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that winning in the variable winning device 36 does not actually occur.

As the lottery mode for the winning lottery after the above (2) opening/closing execution mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 can be set to a high probability mode in which the winning lottery is performed using a high probability winning/losing table as the winning/losing table, and a low probability mode in which the winning lottery is performed using a low probability winning/losing table as the winning/losing table. As explained using FIG. 7, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher when the winning lottery is performed using the high probability winning/losing table than when the winning lottery is performed using the low probability winning/losing table.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, the game balls continue to be launched into the game area PA in the same manner. When compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role opening lottery in the electric role-playing object opening lottery using the electric role-playing object opening counter C4. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role-playing role in the electric role-playing lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time period for opening the electric accessory 34a once when an electric role opening win may be set is longer than that in the low-frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in this embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric role 34a is opened when the electric role opening is won may be set to be greater than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the opening time of the electric role 34a is set to be longer. Also, in the case where the electric role opening is won in the high-frequency support mode and the electric role 34a is opened multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state may be set to be shorter than the opening time of one. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured between one electric role opening lottery and the next electric role opening lottery may be set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of the ball landing in the second starting hole 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in the establishment of the conditions for obtaining special information.

In this embodiment, if the winning lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to allocate the jackpot type. The allocation of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as an allocation table in the allocation table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 8(a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 8(b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to during a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33, and the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to when drawing a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33. It is referred to when drawing a winning lottery based on the number of game balls that enter the game. The two allocation tables function as a reference table for allocating the jackpot type, but in this embodiment, they also function as a reference table for allocating the first drop mode and the second fall mode in the mode selection lottery. Details of the mode selection lottery will be described later.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting hole in FIG. 8(a), the distribution table for the first starting hole has the following jackpot types set based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33: 16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot.

In the 16R definite variable jackpot and the 8R definite variable jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode, and the winning lottery mode (hereinafter simply referred to as "lottery mode") after the opening/closing execution mode ends. ) is the high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, which is a jackpot. The difference between the 16R fixed jackpot and the 8R fixed jackpot is that the number of openings of the door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is different, and the 16R fixed jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R fixed jackpot is 8 (8 rounds).

In the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a low probability mode, and the support after the opening/closing execution mode is completed. It is a jackpot that the mode becomes high frequency support mode. The number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is eight times (eight rounds).

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 from "0 to 99", "0 to 64" correspond to a 16R probability variable jackpot, and "65 to 89" correspond to an 8R probability variation jackpot. "90-99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, three types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the aspects of jackpots are diversified. When these three types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R probability variable jackpot, followed by the 8R probability variable jackpot next, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player in this way, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 8(b), the distribution table for the second starting port includes jackpot types based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 34. A 16R probability-variable jackpot, an 8R probability-variable jackpot, and an 8R regular jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 from "0 to 99", "0 to 74" correspond to a 16R probability variable jackpot, and "75 to 89" correspond to an 8R probability variation jackpot. "90-99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won, the type of jackpot is distributed based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the second jackpot. This is different from the case where a jackpot is won based on the ball entering the starting hole 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

In this embodiment, as described above, the type of jackpot set in the distribution table for the first starting port and the type of jackpot set in the distribution table for the second starting port are the same, but instead, they may be configured differently. Furthermore, the types of jackpots defined by each distribution table do not have to be limited to three types, and may be, for example, four types including a 16R normal jackpot, or two types, five types or more. Furthermore, the number of times that the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening and closing execution mode does not have to be limited to 8R or 16R, and may be other numbers such as 4R or 5R.

In addition, in the case of a losing result in the winning lottery, there is no transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and no change in the lottery mode and support mode occurs. When sorting the type of jackpot, if it is a 16 probability strange jackpot or an 8R probability strange jackpot, as explained earlier, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends will be the high probability mode. This state continues until the next time a jackpot is won in a winning lottery or a winner is won in a fall lottery.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also determines the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. Decide the display mode. In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Figure 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the fall lottery win/loss table used when executing the fall lottery. As shown in Figure 9, the fall lottery win/loss table has three values, 0, 1, and 2, set as the values of the fall random number counter CF that will result in a win in the fall lottery. Ninety-seven values, from 3 to 99, set as the values of the fall random number counter CF that will result in a loss. That is, in a game in the high probability mode, the probability of a fall in which the fall lottery is won, the high probability mode ends, and the mode becomes low probability is 3/100, and the probability of a fall in which the fall lottery is lost and the high probability mode continues is 97/100. Note that in this embodiment, the fall lottery is not executed in a game in the low probability mode.

Figure 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/lose table (win/lose table for the lottery to open electric reels) used when executing the lottery to open electric reels.

FIG. 10(a) shows a win/fail table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory opening lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 10(a), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 as the value of electric accessory opening counter C4, which is the winning of electric accessory opening. Value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the low-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the low-frequency support mode, the electric role model 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

Figure 10 (b) shows a winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) used in the high-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 10 (b), the winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) has 462 values from 0 to 461 set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in winning the electric role opening. Four values from 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in losing. In other words, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the electric role opening is won during the high-frequency support mode, the electric role opening is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting port 34 is set to be higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode by the electric accessory opening lottery table. .

《1-3》Electrical configuration of audio light emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

Figure 11 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 (Figure 5) are omitted. The audio and light emission control board 91 provided in the audio and light emission control device 90 is equipped with an MPU 92. The MPU 92 is an element that incorporates a CPU, ROM 93, RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control device 60 and the production operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, as well as a display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for the background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 mediates the reading and writing of data by adjusting the timing of the MPU 102, video RAM 107, etc., and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

《1-4》Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, after shifting to the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues as a support mode until the number of games reaches a predetermined guaranteed number of games. The "guaranteed number of games" is the number of games guaranteed to be played continuously in the high-frequency support mode, and is, for example, 100 times. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, after shifting to the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is guaranteed up to 100 times, which is the guaranteed number of games. After the guaranteed number of games exceeds 100, if the low probability mode is set as the lottery mode at that time, the support mode is shifted from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. Even after the number of games in the high-frequency support mode reaches 100, if the high-probability mode is continued as the lottery mode at that point, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode.

FIG. 12 is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing when a player wins a lottery in a game before reaching the guaranteed number of games. FIG. 12(a) shows a lottery mode state and a support mode state. In FIG. 12, the numbers shown in brackets (for example, [1], [60]) indicate the number of times the game has been played since the high-frequency support mode was started.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a player wins a guaranteed jackpot through a winning lottery and the open/close execution mode ends, the lottery mode transitions to the high probability mode and the support mode transitions to the high frequency support mode. If the player wins the fall lottery in a game before the number of games played since the high frequency support mode started reaches the guaranteed number of games (60 in the illustrated example), the lottery mode transitions to the low probability mode. Then, from the 60th game, the winning lottery is executed in the low probability mode. Meanwhile, with regard to the support mode, even if the player wins the fall lottery in the 60th game, the high probability mode ends, and the mode transitions to the low probability mode, the high frequency support mode continues until the 100th game is played since the high frequency support mode started.

FIG. 12(b) shows the states of the production, lottery mode, and support mode that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment executes in the 60th game in which the player wins the falling lottery. In this example, up to the 60th game (from 1st to 59th), no one wins in the fall lottery, winning lottery, or reach lottery, so up to the 59th game, the winning lottery in each game A normal performance (also referred to as a normal performance) for announcing the results and lottery results is executed. Then, in the 60th game round in which the player wins the falling lottery, for example, a battle performance (hereinafter also referred to as a battle performance) in which the player's character and the enemy's character face off is executed.

The battle performance is an effect that is executed before the result announcement performance that announces the results of the fall lottery and the winning lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, three types of battle performances are prepared: normal battle performance, life and death battle performance, and advantage battle performance. The normal battle performance is an effect that suggests that the result corresponds to one of the results that are advantageous to the player (win), the results that are disadvantageous to the player (lose), and the results that can be said to be neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player (draw). The life and death battle performance is an effect that suggests that the result corresponds to one of the results that are advantageous to the player (win) and the results that can be said to be neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player (lose). The advantage battle performance is an effect that suggests that the result corresponds to one of the results that are advantageous to the player (win) and the results that can be said to be neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player (draw). In the play times before the guaranteed number of plays is reached, the normal battle performance is executed as the battle performance. That is, in the example case of FIG. 12(b), the normal battle performance is executed as the battle performance.

After the battle presentation is executed, a result announcement presentation is executed to announce the results of the fall-out lottery and the win lottery. In the result announcement presentation, a presentation corresponding to the results of the fall-out lottery and the win lottery is executed. Specifically, if the fall-out lottery is won but the win lottery does not win a jackpot, a defeat presentation is executed in which the player's character is defeated. Regardless of the result of the fall-out lottery, if the win lottery wins a jackpot, a victory presentation is executed in which the player's character wins. If the fall-out lottery is not won and the win lottery does not win a jackpot, and a reach occurs, a draw presentation is executed in which the player's character and the enemy character draw. In the example of FIG. 12(b), the fall-out lottery was won in the 60th play, so a defeat presentation is executed as the result announcement presentation.

The timing of the transition from high probability mode to low probability mode as a result of winning the fall lottery in the 60th game round is the same as the timing of the start of the 60th game round in which the fall lottery was won. In other words, when the fall lottery is won in the 60th game round, the lottery mode immediately transitions from high probability mode to low probability mode. As for the support mode, the high frequency support mode continues as described above.

FIG. 13 is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game play before the guaranteed number of games is reached.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a player wins a probability-variable jackpot in a winning lottery, the lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode, the support mode shifts to a high-frequency support mode, and then the high-frequency support mode starts. If you win a jackpot in the winning lottery in a game before the number of games played after reaching the guaranteed number of games (in the illustrated example, 60 times), the 60th game ends and the opening/closing execution mode is changed. The lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at the starting timing (that is, the timing immediately after the winning result announcement performance ends). On the other hand, the support mode also shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the 60th game ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts. That is, when the guaranteed number of games has not been reached, both the lottery mode and the support mode are reset to the lower side at the timing when the game period in which the jackpot was won ends and the opening/closing execution mode is started.

In the example of FIG. 13, the normal presentation is executed up to the 59th play, since the fall lottery, the winning lottery, and the reach lottery are not won up to the 60th play (1st to 59th play). Then, in the 60th play, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, a battle presentation and a result notification presentation that notifies the player that the jackpot has been won in the winning lottery are executed. As explained above, in the play before the guaranteed number of plays is reached, the normal battle presentation is executed as the battle presentation, which is a presentation that suggests that the result will be a win, a loss, or a draw. That is, in the example of FIG. 13, the normal battle presentation is executed as the battle presentation.

FIG. 14 shows that in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game rounds before reaching the guaranteed number of games, the player did not win the fall lottery, did not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, and reached in the reach determination (so-called off reach). ) is a timing chart illustrating an example of a process when it is determined that an error occurs. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a winning lottery results in a variable jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode, the support mode shifts to a high frequency support mode, and then , did not win the fall lottery and did not win the jackpot in the winning lottery during the number of games played before the number of games played after the high-frequency support mode started reached the guaranteed number of games (60 times in the illustrated example) FIG. 14 shows the processing when it is determined that a reach (missing reach) occurs in the reach determination.

In the 60th game in which the player does not win the fall lottery, does not win the jackpot in the win lottery, and is determined in the reach judgment to be a reach (miss reach), a normal battle presentation that may suggest either a win, a loss, or a draw is executed, and then a draw presentation in which the player's character neither wins nor loses is executed as the result announcement presentation. In the game in which the player does not win the fall lottery, and does not win the jackpot in the win lottery, regardless of whether a reach occurs or not, the lottery mode remains in the high probability mode, and the support mode remains in the high frequency support mode.

Figure 15 is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 when the above-mentioned battle effect or result notification effect is being executed. When the battle effect or result notification effect is being executed, the display surface 41a is divided into a first display area 41aS and a second display area 41aL. In the first display area 41aS, the variable and stationary display of symbols is executed. Specifically, during the variable time of the unit play time, the variable display of symbols is executed, and during the stationary time, the stationary display of symbols is executed. Meanwhile, in the second display area 41aL, the battle effect or result notification effect is executed.

Figure 16 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a battle presentation. Figure 16 (a) shows an example of a normal battle presentation, Figure 16 (b) shows an example of a life-and-death battle presentation, and Figure 16 (c) shows an example of a superiority battle presentation. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, an image (moving image) in which a female character on the player's side and a male character on the enemy's side face off against each other is displayed as a battle presentation, but this image is different for each type of battle presentation. In the life-and-death battle shown in Figure 16 (b), the swords held by both characters are larger than those held by the normal battle shown in Figure 16 (a), suggesting that the outcome of the battle can only be victory or defeat. In the superiority battle shown in Figure 16 (c), the sword held by the female character on the player's side is larger than that held by the male character on the enemy's side, suggesting that the player's side is superior and that the outcome of the battle can only be victory or a draw (i.e., there is no loss). In each battle performance, the images shown in Figures 16(a) to 16(c) are displayed in the second display area 41aL of the display surface 41a, and sound and light accompanying the images are output from the speaker 46 and various lamps 47.

The images of the normal battle effect, the life-or-death battle effect, and the superior battle effect described above are just examples, and the images are not limited to these. In this embodiment, each battle production had almost the same overall composition, with a female character on the player's side facing off against a male character on the enemy's side, and only the swords held by the characters were different. Alternatively, the overall composition may be completely different depending on the type of battle performance. In short, a normal battle performance is a performance that can suggest that the outcome of a battle is a victory, a defeat, or a draw, while a life-or-death battle performance is a performance that can indicate that the outcome of a battle is a victory or a defeat. A dominant battle performance is a performance that can suggest that the result of a battle is either a victory or a draw. It can also be an aspect. Furthermore, even if the above-mentioned effects cannot be obtained, if they are different from each other, what kind of effects should be used for each of the normal battle effect, life-or-death battle effect, and superiority battle effect? You can also do it. The reason why the normal battle performance, life-and-death battle performance, and dominant battle performance are made to be different from each other is to change the sense of urgency and anticipation given to the player depending on the type of battle performance. If this is not desired, the normal battle performance, the life-or-death battle performance, and the superiority battle performance can each have the same performance content.

FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a result announcement performance executed after the battle performance. FIG. 17(a) shows a victory performance as a result announcement performance, FIG. 17(b) shows a defeat performance as a result announcement performance, and FIG. 17(c) shows a draw performance as a result announcement performance. In the victory performance, as shown in FIG. 17(a), an image (moving image) of a female character on the player's side rejoicing at victory is displayed in the second display area 41aL (FIG. 15) of the display surface 41a, and the image is The accompanying sound and light are outputted to a speaker 46 and various lamps 47. In the example of FIG. 13 in which the player wins a jackpot in the winning lottery, a victory effect is executed as a result announcement effect.

In the defeat presentation, as shown in FIG. 17(b), an image (moving image) of the player's female character feeling sad about defeat is displayed in the second display area 41aL of the display surface 41a, and sound and light accompanying the image are output from the speaker 46 and various lamps 47. In the example of FIG. 12 where the fall lottery has been won, a defeat presentation is executed as the result announcement presentation.

In the draw effect, as shown in FIG. 17(c), an image (moving image) informing the player that the female character on the player's side has not lost is displayed in the second display area 41aL (FIG. 15) of the display surface 41a, and sound and light accompanying the image are output from the speaker 46 and various lamps 47. In a game in which the number of games played since the high frequency support mode was started has not reached the guaranteed number of games, the player has not won the fall lottery, and has not won the jackpot in the win lottery, and a reach has occurred, a draw effect is executed as a result notification effect. Note that each of the win effect, defeat effect, and draw effect can be replaced with other images (moving images) instead of the images (moving images) shown in FIG. 17(a) to FIG. 17(c). In short, the victory presentation can be any image that notifies the player that the result is favorable, the defeat presentation can be any image that notifies the player that the result is unfavorable, and the draw presentation can be any image that notifies the player that the result is neither favorable nor unfavorable.

Next, a case will be described in which the player wins the fall lottery in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, and the case where the player wins the jackpot in the winning lottery.

FIG. 18 is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing when a player wins a lottery in a game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached. In FIG. 18(a), a variable probability jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to high probability mode, the support mode shifts to high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode starts. In the game after the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games (120 times in the illustrated example), the player wins the lottery and the lottery mode changes to the low probability mode and the support mode changes to the low frequency support mode. This shows the case where the data has been migrated. Even if you win the fall lottery in the 120th game, the lottery result in the fall lottery will be reflected in the lottery mode of the winning lottery in that game, just as if you won the fall lottery in the 60th game. . That is, in the example of FIG. 18(a), in the 120th game, the player wins the falling lottery and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. Then, from the 120th game, a winning lottery is executed in the low probability mode.

As explained above, after the support mode has been switched to the high-frequency support mode, if the number of plays reaches the guaranteed number of plays (100), it will switch to the low-frequency support mode. However, even if the number of plays in the high-frequency support mode reaches 100, if the lottery mode at that time is still in the high-probability mode, the high-frequency support mode will continue as the support mode. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 18(a), if the drop lottery is won on the 120th play, the high-probability mode will continue until the 120th play, and the high-frequency support mode will continue. Then, when the drop lottery is won on the 120th play, and the lottery mode switches from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, the support mode will also switch from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Figure 18 (b) shows the effects, lottery mode, and support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment in the 120th play round when the fall lottery is won. In this example, neither the fall lottery nor the winning lottery is won up to the 120th play round (1st to 119th), so up to the 120th play round, a normal effect (also called a normal effect) is executed to notify the results of the winning lottery in each play round and the lottery results. Then, in the 120th play round when the fall lottery is won, a battle effect is executed. Here, the life and death battle effect described earlier (see Figure 16 (b)) is executed as the battle effect.

After executing the life-and-death battle performance, a result announcement performance for announcing the lottery results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery is executed. In the result announcement performance, a performance corresponding to the lottery results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery is executed. Specifically, if the player wins the falling lottery and does not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, a defeat effect in which the player's character is defeated, as shown in FIG. 17(b), is executed. If a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, a victory effect in which the player's character wins, as shown in FIG. 17(a), is executed regardless of the result of the falling lottery. In the case of FIG. 18(b), the player wins the fall lottery in the 120th game, but does not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, so a defeat performance is executed as a result announcement performance.

In addition, as a result of winning the falling lottery in the 120th game run, the timing of shifting from high probability mode to low probability mode coincides with the timing at which the 120th game winning the falling lottery starts. There is. That is, when the player wins the falling lottery in the 120th game, the lottery mode immediately shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. Further, as the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. The timing at which the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode is almost the same as the timing at which the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. Therefore, the low-frequency support mode is entered almost simultaneously with the start of the 120th game.

Next, we will explain the process that is performed when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a play count after the guaranteed number of plays has been reached. Below, before explaining the process that is performed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, we will explain the process that is performed by the pachinko machines of Comparative Example 1 and Comparative Example 2.

FIG. 19 is a timing chart illustrating processing in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 when, in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, the player does not win the fall lottery but wins the jackpot in the winning lottery. Specifically, FIG. 19 shows that in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, a jackpot with variable probability is won in the winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode changes to the high probability mode and the support mode changes to the high frequency support mode. After that, after the number of games played since the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games (120 times in the illustrated example), a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and the opening/closing is executed. A case is shown in which the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode and the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode at the start of the mode.

In the 120th game round in which the player does not win the fall lottery but does win the jackpot in the win lottery, a battle presentation is executed, and then a victory presentation in which the player's character wins is executed as the result announcement presentation. Then, when the 120th game round in which the jackpot was won ends and the opening and closing execution mode begins (i.e., when the victory result announcement presentation ends), the lottery mode transitions from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and the support mode transitions from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. In other words, when the game round in which the jackpot was won ends and the opening and closing execution mode begins, both the lottery mode and the support mode are reset to the low side.

Here, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, in the game round after the guaranteed number of games is reached, if the player wins the fall lottery but does not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, the game machine performs the same lottery mode and support mode as the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, that is, the operation shown in FIG. 18. Comparing FIG. 18(b) with FIG. 19, it can be seen that the manner of change in the support mode is different between the two during the period from the start to the end of the 120th game round. During this period, if the player does not win the fall lottery but wins the jackpot in the winning lottery, the game machine is in the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 19, whereas if the player wins the fall lottery but does not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, the game machine is in the low frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 18(b). Therefore, assuming a pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 that executes both the process shown in FIG. 18(b) and the process shown in FIG. 19, the player can know whether or not he has won the drop lottery in the 120th play by checking the open/closed state of the electric role 34a (FIG. 3) to see whether the high-frequency support mode has ended and transitioned to the low-frequency support mode before the result announcement performance is executed.

Specifically, if the player can confirm that the electric role 34a (FIG. 3) stops opening and closing before the result announcement performance is executed during the 120th play, the player can predict that the high-frequency support mode ends and transitions to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the 120th play, and that the player has won the fall lottery during the 120th play. As a result, the player can predict the type of result announcement performance that will be executed after the battle performance is executed. In other words, when the game has been played 100 times or more in high probability mode and the game is in high frequency support mode, when the battle performance starts, it is not clear whether the player's character or the enemy's character will win until the result is announced (i.e., it is not clear until the result is announced whether the player will win the drop lottery or the jackpot in the winning lottery). However, the player can predict during the battle performance that the player's character will lose the battle (win the drop lottery) by checking the open/closed state of the electric role 34a during the period when the battle performance is being performed. As a result, there are cases where the battle performance and the result announcement performance cannot give the player a sense of tension or anticipation regarding the results of the drop lottery and the winning lottery in the 120th game. This is the issue of Comparative Example 1.

Figure 20 is a timing chart that explains the process when, in a pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, in a play round after the guaranteed number of plays is reached, the player does not win the fall lottery but wins a jackpot in the winning lottery. Specifically, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, a sure-variable jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the lottery mode transitions to the high probability mode, and the support mode transitions to the high frequency support mode. Then, in the 120th play round after the high frequency support mode is started, the player does not win the fall lottery but wins a jackpot in the winning lottery, and the lottery mode transitions to the low probability mode at the start of the open/close execution mode.

In the 120th game in which the player does not win the fall lottery but wins the jackpot in the win lottery, a battle presentation is executed, and then a victory presentation in which the player's character wins is executed as the result announcement presentation. When the 120th game in which the jackpot is won starts, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, and when the 120th game in which the jackpot is won ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts (i.e., immediately after the victory result announcement presentation ends), the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. That is, when the number of play times in the high probability mode has been continuously executed for the guaranteed number of play times (100 times) or more, and when the fall lottery is not won but a jackpot is won in the win lottery, the timing at which the support mode transitions from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode is the timing at which the play time in which the jackpot was won ends and the open/close execution mode starts (see FIG. 19) in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, whereas in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, the timing is the timing at which the play time in which the jackpot was won starts (i.e., at the start of the play time), which is the difference.

Comparing FIG. 18(b), which is an example of winning the falling lottery, with FIG. 20, which is an example of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, it can be seen that the manner of change in the support mode is the same from the start to the end of the 120th game. Therefore, the player cannot recognize whether he won the falling lottery or the jackpot in the winning lottery in the 120th game before the result notification performance is executed from the open/close state of the electric role 34a (FIG. 3). In other words, the player cannot predict the type of result notification performance (whether it is a winning performance or a losing performance) that will be executed after the battle performance is executed. Therefore, the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, which executes the process shown in FIG. 18(b) when the falling lottery is won in a game after the guaranteed number of games is reached, and executes the process shown in FIG. 20 when the jackpot is won in a game after the guaranteed number of games is reached, can solve the above-mentioned problem of Comparative Example 1.

However, even with the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, the following problem occurs.

According to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, in the game round after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, if you win the fall lottery or win the jackpot in the winning lottery, the support mode is activated at the timing when the game round starts. shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, and the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3) stops opening and closing operations. In the game after reaching the guaranteed number of games, if you do not win the falling lottery and do not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, the support mode maintains the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessories 34a ( Figure 3) continues the opening/closing operation. Therefore, by confirming that the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3) continues to open and close even after the start of the game, the player can avoid falling lottery in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached. It is possible to predict that the player did not win and also did not win the jackpot in the winning lottery.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, the battle performance executed in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached corresponds to not winning the falling lottery and not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. Even if it is a performance that suggests a superiority battle, it is confirmed that the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3) continues to open and close, indicating that it is a draw, that is, winning the falling lottery. Moreover, since it is possible to predict that the player did not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, the dominant battle performance becomes meaningless. In other words, the battle performance executed in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached is only meaningful as a life-and-death battle performance in which the only outcome of the battle is victory or defeat. As a result, according to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, there was a problem in that it was not possible to widen the range of battle effects executed in the game rounds after the guaranteed number of games was reached.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment solves both the problems of Comparative Example 1 and Comparative Example 2 by having the following configuration.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment wins a probability-variable jackpot through a winning lottery, shifts the lottery mode to a high probability mode, shifts the support mode to a high-frequency support mode, and then, after the high-frequency support mode starts, guarantees games. There are two modes for changing the support mode when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game after the number of games has been reached (for example, the 120th game). The two modes are hereinafter referred to as "first drop mode" and "last drop mode." In this embodiment, which mode to adopt, the first drop mode or the second drop mode, is determined by a lottery (hereinafter referred to as mode selection lottery), and the results of the mode selection lottery are as follows: The configuration is such that the player is not notified.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is achieved as a result of a winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. However, regarding the mode selection lottery, when a jackpot is achieved as a result of a winning lottery, , the jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine whether the mode is first drop mode or last drop mode. If a jackpot is achieved in the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the first-fall mode is selected using the distribution table for the first starting port shown in FIG. 8(a). If the game ball enters the second starting port 33 and there is a jackpot in the lottery based on the game ball entering the second starting port 33, the second starting port is distributed as shown in FIG. 8(b). A table is used to determine whether the mode is first drop mode or last drop mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39", "65 to 89", and "90 to 99" correspond to the first drop mode. "40 to 64" corresponds to the late fall mode. That is, in the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 64" that are associated with the 16R probability variable jackpot as the distribution result of the jackpot type, "0 to 39" are "40 to 64" are associated with the first drop mode, and "40 to 64" are associated with the last drop mode. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "65 to 89", which is associated with the 8R probability variable jackpot as the distribution result of the jackpot type, is associated with the first drop mode. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "90 to 99", which is associated with the 8R normal jackpot as the distribution result of the jackpot type, is associated with the first drop mode.

In the allocation table for the second starting port, among the jackpot type counter C2 values of "0-99", "0-49", "75-89", and "90-99" correspond to the first-fall mode, and "50-74" corresponds to the last-fall mode. In other words, in the allocation table for the second starting port, among the jackpot type counter C2 values of "0-74" to which a 16R special jackpot is associated as the allocation result of the jackpot type, "0-49" corresponds to the first-fall mode, and "50-74" corresponds to the last-fall mode. The jackpot type counter C2 value of "75-89" to which an 8R special jackpot is associated as the allocation result of the jackpot type corresponds to the first-fall mode. The jackpot type counter C2 value of "90-99" to which an 8R normal jackpot is associated as the allocation result of the jackpot type corresponds to the first-fall mode.

In this embodiment, the allocation result of the mode selection lottery for the value of the type counter C2 specified in the allocation table for the first start port is different from the allocation result of the mode selection lottery for the value of the type counter C2 specified in the allocation table for the second start port, but they may be configured to be the same.

FIG. 21 shows that in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in a game after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the player does not win the fall lottery, wins the jackpot in the winning lottery, and enters the first drop mode in the mode selection lottery. It is a timing chart explaining an example of processing when winning. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a winning lottery results in a variable jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode, the support mode shifts to a high frequency support mode, and then , after the number of games played after the high-frequency support mode started reaches the guaranteed number of games (120 times in the illustrated example), the player does not win the fall lottery, but wins the jackpot in the winning lottery. In addition, FIG. 21 shows a case where the first draw mode is won in the mode selection lottery and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode at the start of the opening/closing execution mode.

In the 120th game, where the player did not win the fall lottery, but won the jackpot in the winning lottery, and won the first drop mode in the mode selection lottery, it was suggested that he would fall under either victory or defeat. A life-or-death battle effect (see FIG. 16(b)) to be obtained is executed, and then a victory effect (see FIG. 17(a)) in which the player's character wins is executed as a result announcement effect. If you win the first drop mode in the mode selection lottery, the support mode changes from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support at the timing when the 120th game round in which you won the jackpot starts (i.e., at the start of the game round). At the timing when the 120th game in which the player won the jackpot ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts (i.e., the timing immediately after the winning result announcement effect ends), the lottery mode changes from the high probability mode. Shift to low probability mode. These changes in the performance, lottery mode, and support mode correspond to the changes in the performance, lottery mode, and support mode in Comparative Example 2 shown in FIG. 20.

Figure 22 is a timing chart for explaining an example of processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment in the case where, in a play round after the guaranteed number of plays is reached, the player does not win the drop lottery, wins a jackpot in the winning lottery, and wins the late drop mode in the mode selection lottery. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a sure-variant jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode and the support mode to the high frequency support mode, and then, in the play round after the number of plays since the high frequency support mode begins reaches the guaranteed number of plays (120 times in the illustrated example), the player does not win the drop lottery, wins a jackpot in the winning lottery, and wins the late drop mode in the mode selection lottery, and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode at the start of the opening and closing execution mode is shown in Figure 22.

In the 120th game in which the player does not win the drop lottery but wins the jackpot in the win lottery and wins the late drop mode in the mode selection lottery, a battle of superiority effect (see FIG. 16(c)) is executed that may indicate either a win or a draw, and then a victory effect (see FIG. 17(a)) in which the player's character wins is executed as the result notification effect. In the case in which the late drop mode is won in the mode selection lottery, the lottery mode transitions from the high probability mode to the low probability mode and the support mode transitions from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode at the timing when the 120th game in which the player won the jackpot ends and the opening and closing execution mode starts (i.e., the timing immediately after the winning result notification effect ends). These changes in the lottery mode and support mode are consistent with the changes in the lottery mode and support mode in the comparative example 1 shown in FIG. 19.

Comparing the case where the first-to-drop mode is selected in the mode selection lottery (FIG. 21) with the case where the last-to-drop mode is selected in the mode selection lottery (FIG. 22), when the high probability mode play count continues for more than the guaranteed play count (100 times) and a jackpot is selected in the winning lottery, the battle performance executed in that play count is a life-or-death battle performance that may indicate either a win or a loss in the first-to-drop mode, whereas it is a dominance battle performance that may indicate either a win or a draw in the last-to-drop mode. The difference is that the timing at which the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode is the timing at which the play count in which the jackpot was selected starts (i.e., the start of the play count) in the first-to-drop mode, whereas it is the timing at which the play count in which the jackpot was selected ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts in the last-to-drop mode.

FIG. 23 shows that in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in a game after reaching the guaranteed number of games, there is no winning in the falling lottery, and without winning a jackpot in the winning lottery, the reach (so-called out-of-reach) is determined in the reach determination. 12 is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing when it is determined that a reach (reach) occurs. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a winning lottery results in a variable jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode, the support mode shifts to a high frequency support mode, and then , in the game after the number of games played after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games (120 times in the illustrated example), the player does not win the fall lottery and wins the jackpot in the winning lottery. FIG. 23 shows the processing when it is determined that a reach (missing reach) will occur in the reach judgment.

In the 120th game in which the player does not win the fall lottery, does not win the jackpot in the win lottery, and is determined to have a reach (miss reach) in the reach judgment, a battle of superiority presentation (see FIG. 16(c)) that may suggest either a win or a draw is executed, and then a draw presentation (see FIG. 17(c)) in which the player's character neither wins nor loses is executed as the result announcement presentation. In a game in which the player does not win the fall lottery, and does not win the jackpot in the win lottery, regardless of whether a reach occurs or not, the lottery mode remains in the high probability mode, and the support mode remains in the high frequency support mode.

In summary, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment performs the following in a game after the guaranteed number of games is reached:
(A) is won in a drop-out draw (regardless of the outcome of a winning draw), or
(B) If you do not win the drop lottery, but win the jackpot in the win lottery and also win the first drop mode in the mode selection lottery,
A life-and-death battle presentation is executed as the battle presentation executed in the game round, and the support mode is shifted to a low-frequency support mode at the timing when the game round starts (i.e., at the start of the game round).

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games,
(C) If you do not win the falling lottery and do not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, but it is determined that a reach will occur in the reach determination, or
(D) If you do not win the fall lottery, win the jackpot in the winning lottery, and win the late fall mode in the mode selection lottery,
A superior battle performance is executed as a battle performance executed in the game round, and the support mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the game round in which the jackpot is won ends and the opening/closing execution mode is started.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the support mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode at the same timing in the above case (A) and the above case (B), so the guaranteed number of games is guaranteed. In the game round after reaching the number, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting that he has won the falling lottery based on the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3) during the battle performance. play. Furthermore, in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games, it is possible to perform a life-or-death battle effect or a dominant battle effect, so it is possible to perform a battle effect executed in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games. This has the effect of expanding the range of production.

<<1-5>> Various processes executed in the main control device:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. First, the processing executed in the main control device 60 will be described, and then the processing executed in the sound and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance each game round, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes will be explained next. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power outage signal, but a description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sl0101, a reading process is performed for the various detection sensors 67a to 67e. That is, the status of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main control unit 60 is read, the status of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is saved. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0102.

In step Sl0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Sl0103.

In step Sl0103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, fall random number counter CF, and electric role opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, fall random number counter CF, and electric role opening counter C4, and when each counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4, CF are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0104. Note that the value of the variation type counter CS is updated in the normal processing (FIG. 28) described later.

In step S10104, a ball entering process for the starting port is executed as the ball enters the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Details of the entry process for the starting port in step Sl0104 will be described later. After executing step Sl0104, the process advances to step Sl0105.

In step S10105, through ball entry processing associated with the ball entering the through gate 35 is executed. Details of the through ball entry process in step Sl0105 will be described later. After executing step Sl0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Starting ball entry processing>
Next, the ball-scoring process for the starting hole will be described. The ball-scoring process for the starting hole is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 24: S10104).

Figure 25 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the starting hole. In step Sl0201, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (starting ball entry) is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting hole 33. In step Sl0201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (Sl0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0202, where a prize ball command is set to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0203.

In step Sl0203, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a game ball has entered the first starting port 33. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl0204.

In step Sl0204, the starting pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as first starting pending number RaN), which is a value stored in the pending number storage area of the first holding area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first starting reservation number RaN indicates the number of balls being reserved based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. After that, the process advances to step Sl0209.

If it is determined in step Sl0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting hole 33 (Sl0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0205, where it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second starting hole 34 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting hole 34.

In step Sl0205, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sl0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0206, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. After that, the process advances to step Sl0207. On the other hand, in step Sl0205, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (S10205: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

In step Sl0207, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0208.

In step Sl0208, the starting pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second starting pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the second holding area Rb, is read, and the second starting pending number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second starting hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on balls entering the second starting port 34. After that, the process advances to step Sl0209.

In step Sl0209, it is determined whether the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sl0204 or step Sl0208 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step Sl0209, if the start pending number N is not less than the upper limit (Sl0209: NO), the ball entry process for this start port is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sl0209, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit (Sl0209: YES), proceed to step Sl0210, add 1 to the start pending number N in the corresponding pending area, and then proceed to step Sl0211, add 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN. Then proceed to step Sl0212.

In step Sl0212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3 and fall random number counter CF updated in step Sl0103 (FIG. 24) are stored in the first free memory area of the corresponding reserved area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the reserved number to which 1 was added in step Sl0210. Specifically, when the first start reserved number RaN is set as the processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3 and fall random number counter CF updated in step Sl0103 are stored in the first free memory area of the first reserved area Ra, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first start reserved number RaN to which 1 was added in step Sl0210. Also, if the second start pending number RbN is set as the target for processing, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF updated in step Sl0103 are stored in the first free memory area of the second pending area Rb, that is, the memory area corresponding to the second start pending number RbN to which 1 was added in step Sl0210. After executing step Sl0212, proceed to step Sl0213.

In step Sl0213, a first-time determination process is executed. The first-time determination process is a process that executes a determination of the winning lottery result (lottery result), the type of jackpot, whether or not a reach has occurred, the winning lottery result (lottery result), etc. based on the information (reserved information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF before the reserved information becomes the subject of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the first-time determination process will be described later. After executing step Sl0213, proceed to step Sl0214.

In step S10214, a process for setting a reserved command is executed. Specifically, the result of the determination process executed based on the information (reserved information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF is set as a reserved command.

The hold command indicates the occurrence of a ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the ball entering. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to check the pending information before it becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 28: Step Sl0503) of normal processing to be described later.

In addition, when the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a ball entering the first starting hole 33, it transmits a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. The display control device 100, which has received the command, changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. On the other hand, when the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a ball entering the second starting hole 34, it transmits a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. The display control device 100, which has received the command, changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls.

After executing step S10214, the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 ends the ball entry process for this starting hole.

<First Determination Process>
Next, the first-goal determination process will be described. The first-goal determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the ball-entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 25: S10213).

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the preliminary determination process uses the pending information to determine the validity of the winning lottery, the type of jackpot, the occurrence of reach, the validity of the fall lottery, etc. based on the pending information. This is a process executed before the main controller 60 becomes a target of the winning lottery.

In step Sl0301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the memory area due to the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entry process for the starting hole (Figure 25) is obtained. Then, proceed to step Sl0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to this ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the result of the judgment of the prior judgment process executed due to the ball entry before this ball entry is read from the corresponding memory area, and the presence or absence of a guaranteed jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to this ball entry and the presence or absence of a win in the drop lottery are determined to determine the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to this ball entry is executed as a game round.

In step Sl0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery for this ball entry is executed as a game round (Sl0302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0303, where the winning/losing table for the low probability mode stored in the winning/losing table storage area 63a is referenced. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0308, where, as a result of referring to the winning/losing table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Sl0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current entry is executed as a game round (Sl0302: NO), the process advances to step Sl0304, and the winning lottery based on the current entry is executed as a game round. The value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the storage area by the ball is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl0305, and it is determined whether or not the fall lottery has been won by referring to the fall determination table stored in the fall determination table storage area 63d.

In step Sl0305, if it is determined that the fall lottery has been won (Sl0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0306, where the fall winning information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h, and the process proceeds to step Sl0303. In step Sl0303, as described above, the low probability mode pass/fail table stored in the pass/fail table storage area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl0308, and as a result of referring to the low probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

If it is determined in step Sl0305 that the player has not won the drop lottery (Sl0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0307. In step Sl0307, the process refers to the win/lose table for the high probability mode to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 currently grasped corresponds to a jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0308, and the process refers to the win/lose table for the high probability mode to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 currently grasped corresponds to a jackpot.

In step Sl0308, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot (Sl0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0309, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl0310, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, if the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, refer to the first starting port distribution table. , if the ball is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the second starting port distribution table is referred to. After executing step Sl0310, the process advances to step Sl0311.

In step Sl0311, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that has been grasped this time corresponds to a variable probability jackpot. In step Sl0311, if it is determined that it corresponds to a variable probability jackpot (Sl0311: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0312, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0311 that the probability variable jackpot is not supported (Sl0311: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0313, and normal jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends.

In step Sl0308, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to a jackpot (Sl0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0314, and the value is stored in the memory area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. The stored value of the reach random number counter C3 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl0315, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl0316, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 that has been grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

If it is determined in step Sl0316 that it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach (Sl0316: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0317, and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0316 that it does not correspond to the occurrence of a reach (Sl0316: NO), the first determination process is immediately terminated.

<Incoming ball processing for through ball>
Next, the entry process for a through ball will be explained. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 24: Sl0105).

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the through ball entry process. In step Sl0401, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step Sl0401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sl0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0402, and the number of reserved accessories SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether or not. Note that the number of held accessory objects SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that are held in order to perform the electric accessory release lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of accessory objects on hold is four. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sl0401: NO), the main through ball entering process is ended.

In step Sl0402, if it is determined that the number SN of accessory items on hold is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) (Sl0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0403, and 1 is added to the number SN of accessory items on hold. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl0404.

In step Sl0404, the value of the electric role release counter C4 updated in step Sl0103 (FIG. 24) is stored in the first free memory area in the electric role reserve area 64d of RAM 64. After that, the ball entry process for the through is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sl0402, if it is determined that the value of the number of accessory items reserved SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sl0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of accessory items reserved SN is greater than or equal to the upper limit value, The through ball entry process is completed without storing the value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be explained. The normal process is a process that is started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter also referred to as "power on"). In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sl0501, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, etc. are executed. After that, the process advances to step Sl0502.

In step Sl0502, a startup command is set. The startup command is a command for instructing each control device on the sub side to start a demo video when the power is turned on. Then, proceed to step Sl0503.

In step Sl0503, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sl0502, the timer interrupt processing, or the command set in the previously executed normal processing is sent to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 70. In addition, if commands related to performance such as a start-up command, a variable command, a type command, or a hold command are set, they are sent to the sound and light emission control device 90. After executing step Sl0503, proceed to step Sl0504.

In step Sl0504, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0505.

In step Sl0505, the winning ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sl0506. In step Sl0506, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. The game round control process includes a winning lottery, setting the variable display of the patterns by the pattern display device 41, and display control of the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step Sl0506, the process proceeds to step Sl0507.

In step Sl0507, a gaming state transition process is executed to shift the gaming state. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition process will be described later. After that, the process advances to step Sl0508.

In step Sl0508, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric accessory support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is to be in an open state. Details of the electric support support process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl0509.

In step Sl0509, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sl0503). In other words, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived. If it is determined in step Sl0509 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (Sl0509: NO), in steps Sl0510 and Sl0511, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal processing. Specifically, in step Sl0510, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. In addition, in step Sl0511, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0509 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of this normal processing (Sl0509: YES), the process returns to step Sl0503 and executes each process from step Sl0503 to step Sl0508.

Note that since the execution time of each process from step Sl0503 to step Sl0508 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process will be explained. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 28: Sl0506).

Figure 29 is a flowchart showing the game play control process. In step Sl0601, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON. The open/close execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is to be transitioned to the open/close execution mode in the game state transition process described below, and is turned OFF when the open/close execution mode is to be terminated in the game state transition process.

In step Sl0601, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (Sl0601: YES), the present game round control process is ended without executing any of the processes after step Sl0602. That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, a game round is not started regardless of whether a ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sl0601: NO), the process advances to step Sl0602.

In step Sl0602, it is determined whether the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether either one of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the special figure variation display flag in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The flag during special symbol fluctuation display is turned ON when a fluctuation display is started for either the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, and is turned OFF when the fluctuation display ends.

In step Sl0602, if it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is not in the process of variable display (Sl0602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0603.

In step Sl0603, a change start process is executed to start the change display in the special chart unit 37 and the change display in the pattern display device 41. The change start process will be described in detail later. After executing step Sl0603, this game play control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0602 that the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display (Sl0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0604.

In step Sl0604, a fluctuation end process is executed to end the fluctuation display in the special symbol unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41. Note that details of the fluctuation end processing will be described later. After executing step Sl0604, the present game round control process is ended.

<Change start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 29: S10603).

Figure 30 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Sl0701, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN exceeds "0". If the total reserved number CRN is "0" or less, this means that the start reserved number is "0" for both the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. Therefore, if it is determined in step Sl0701 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" or less (Sl0701: NO), this fluctuation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0701 that the total reserved number CRN exceeds "0" (Sl0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0702.

In step Sl0702, a reserved information shift process is executed to set the reserved information stored in the first reserved area Ra or the second reserved area Rb to the state after the change started, and the process proceeds to step Sl0703. The details of the reserved information shift process will be described later.

In step Sl0703, a game state determination process is performed to determine the game state. Details of the game state determination process will be described later. After executing step Sl0703, the process proceeds to step Sl0704.

In step Sl0704, a fall determination process is performed, including the process to be performed when the fall lottery is won. The details of the fall determination process will be described later. Next, proceed to step Sl0705.

In step Sl0705, a winning determination process including a process when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is performed. Details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sl0705, the process advances to step Sl0706.

In step Sl0706, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round, in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the occurrence of a reach, etc. This is the process. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sl0706, the process advances to step Sl0707.

In step Sl0707, a variation command is set. The variation command includes whether the current game round is related to pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, or whether it is related to the pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. It includes information indicating whether the information is related to hold information, as well as information on whether reach occurs or not, and information on the variable time set in step Sl0706. After executing step Sl0707, the process advances to step Sl0708.

In step Sl0708, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and the result of the distribution determination. That is, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot, such as information on a 16R probability variable jackpot, information on an 8R probability variation jackpot, information on an 8R normal jackpot, or information on a losing result.

The variation command and type command set in step Sl0707 and step Sl0708 are sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in step Sl0503 of normal processing (Figure 28). The sound and light emission control device 90 determines the content of the presentation for that game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the presentation is executed. After executing step Sl0708, proceed to step Sl0709.

In step Sl0709, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b starts displaying a variable symbol. Specifically, when the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is not ON, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first symbol display section 37a, and variable display is started. When the second symbol display section flag is ON, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second symbol display section 37b, and variable display is started. After executing step Sl0709, the process advances to step Sl0710.

In step Sl0710, the special figure variation display flag stored in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sl0710, this variation start process ends.

<Holding information shift processing>
Next, the reserved information shift process will be described. The reserved information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 30: S10702).

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing pending information shift processing. In step Sl0801, it is determined whether the holding area that is the processing target for executing the holding information shift process is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, the reservation information stored earliest among the reservation information chronologically stored in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 6) (the reservation stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra) information) is the earliest stored reservation information (stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb) among the reservation information chronologically stored in the second reservation area Rb (FIG. 6). If it is stored in the reservation area before the reservation information (reservation information), it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the earliest among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb is the first among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb in chronological order. If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sl0801, the reservation information can be processed in the order in which it is stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

If it is determined in step Sl0801 that the reserved area to be processed is the first reserved area Ra (step Sl0801: YES), the reserved information shift process for the first reserved area is executed in steps Sl0802 to Sl0807. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0801 that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (step Sl0801: NO), the reserved information shift process for the second reserved area is executed in steps Sl0808 to Sl0813.

In step Sl0802, the first start reserved number RaN in the first reserved area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sl0803, where the total reserved number CRN is decremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0804. In step Sl0804, the data stored in the first area of the first reserved area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0805.

In step Sl0805, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the first reserved area Ra. This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas sequentially to the lower areas. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, the fourth area to the third area, and so on. After executing step Sl0805, proceed to step Sl0806.

In step Sl0806, if the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if it is not ON, that state is maintained. The second symbol display section flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the current variable display is the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl0807.

In step Sl0807, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio/light emission control device 90, which is the sub-control device, to recognize that a shift of data in the pending area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, which includes information that the pending area that is the subject of this data shift corresponds to the first pending area Ra, i.e., corresponds to the first starting port 33, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the audio/light emission control device 90. This pending information shift process is then terminated.

The shift command set in step Sl0807 is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sl0503 in normal processing (FIG. 28). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

If it is determined in step Sl0801 that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, i.e., if it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (Sl0801: NO), proceed to step Sl0808.

In step Sl0808, the second start hold number RbN of the second hold area Rb is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl0809. In step Sl0809, the total pending number CRN is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step Sl0810, in which the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl0811.

In step Sl0811, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the second reserved area Rb. This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas sequentially to the lower areas. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, the fourth area to the third area, and so on. After executing step Sl0811, proceed to step Sl0812.

In step Sl0812, if the second symbol display section flag in the various flags storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, the state is maintained. Then, proceed to step Sl0813.

In step Sl0813, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, it corresponds to the second starting port 34. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, this pending information shift process ends.

The shift command set in step Sl0813 is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sl0503 in normal processing (FIG. 28). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 issues a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

<Game Status Determination Processing>
Next, the game state determination process will be described. The game state determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 30: S10703).

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the gaming state determination process. In step Sl0901, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sl0901 that the mode is the high probability mode (Sl0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0902, where it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag in the various flags storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sl0902 that the mode is high-frequency support mode (Sl0902: YES), the process advances to step Sl0903, and the high-accuracy/high-support flag is turned on. The high probability/high support flag is a flag used by the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode (high probability/high support state). and is stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64. When the high accuracy/high support flag is ON, it is in a high accuracy/high support state. When the high accuracy/high support flag is OFF, there is no high accuracy/high support state. According to step Sl0903, it becomes possible for the MPU 62 to specify the determination result as to whether or not the game is in a high accuracy/high support state when executing this gaming state determination process. After executing step Sl0903, the process advances to step Sl0904.

In step Sl0904, a high accuracy/high support command, which is a command containing information for making the sub-side control device recognize that it is in a high accuracy/high support state, is sent as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Set. After executing step Sl0904, the gaming state determination process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0901 that the mode is not high probability mode (Sl0901: NO), or if it is determined that it is not high frequency support mode in step Sl0902 (Sl0902: NO), step Sl0903 and step Sl0904 are not executed. , the game state determination process ends.

<Fall Determination Processing>
Next, the fall determination process will be described. The fall determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 30: S10704).

Figure 33 is a flowchart showing the fall determination process. In step Sl1001, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flags storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1001 that the mode is the high probability mode (Sl1001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1002.

In step Sl1002, the winning/losing table for the fall lottery is referenced to determine whether the fall lottery has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a winning entry in the fall lottery winning/losing table (see FIG. 9) in the fall lottery table memory area 63d. In the following step Sl1003, if the result of the winning/losing determination in step Sl1002 is that the fall lottery has been won (Sl1003: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1004.

In step Sl1004, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1005, where the fall flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The fall flag is a flag for storing the result of the fall lottery. After executing step Sl1005, the process proceeds to step Sl1006.

In step Sl1006, it is determined whether or not the number of consecutively executed games in the high-frequency support mode is before reaching the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100 times) (hereinafter simply referred to as "before the guaranteed number of games"). judge. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not. Since the guaranteed number of games counter PNC indicates the number of remaining guaranteed number of games, by determining whether PNC>0, the number of consecutively executed games in the high frequency support mode can be determined. It is possible to determine whether or not the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games. In step Sl1006, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sl1006: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not before the number of guaranteed games (=after the number of guaranteed games), step Proceeding to Sl1007, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After executing step Sl1007, the main fall determination process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1006 that the game is before the guaranteed game (Sl1006: YES), the fall determination process is immediately terminated. In addition, if it is determined in step Sl1001 that the mode is not high probability mode (Sl1001: NO), or if the result of the judgment in step Sl1003 is that the fall lottery has not been won (Sl1003: NO), the main fall determination process is immediately performed. finish.

The fall determination process configured as described above realizes the variation of the lottery mode and support mode at the timing of the fall win as shown in FIG. 18 (after the guaranteed number of games, fall win).

<Hit detection process>
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 30: S10705).

Figure 34 is a flowchart showing the winning determination process. In step Sl1101, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flags storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sl1101, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (S11101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1102, and a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the high probability mode win/fail table shown in FIG. 7(b). Determine whether After that, the process advances to step Sl1104.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1101 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Sl1101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1103, where a win/loss determination is made by referring to the win/loss table for the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/loss table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 7(a). Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1104.

In step Sl1104, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination (winning lottery) in step Sl1102 or step Sl1103 is a jackpot win. In step Sl1104, if the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot win (Sl1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1105.

In steps Sl1105 to Sl1109, processing is performed to set the game result in the event of a jackpot win, and processing is performed to set the stop result.

In step Sl1105, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sl1105, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Sl1105: NO), proceed to step Sl1106, and refer to the distribution table for the first starting opening (see FIG. 8(a)). to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variable jackpot, or the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. do.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1105 that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sl1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1107, where the allocation determination is made by referring to the allocation table for the second starting hole (see FIG. 8(b)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of a 16R special jackpot, the numerical range of an 8R special jackpot, or the numerical range of an 8R normal jackpot. After executing the processing of step Sl1106 or step Sl1107, the process proceeds to step Sl1108.

In step Sl1108, a flag (jackpot flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sl1106 or step Sl1107 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R definite strange jackpot, turn on the 16R definite strange jackpot flag, if it is an 8R certain strange jackpot, turn on the 8R certain strange jackpot flag, and if it is an 8R normal jackpot, turn on the 8R normal jackpot flag. Turn it on. After executing step Sl1108, the process advances to step Sl1109.

In step Sl1109, a process for setting a stop result for a jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game round in which the jackpot will be won, it is set which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display. This is the process to do so. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63f (FIG. 5), the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sl1106 or step Sl1107 is determined. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sl1109, the process advances to step Sl1110.

In step Sl1110, it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sl1110 that the mode is the high frequency support mode (Sl1110: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1111, where it is determined whether or not the number of games continuously executed in the high frequency support mode has not yet reached the guaranteed number of games (e.g., 100 games) (= before the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0. If it is determined in step Sl1111 that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sl1111: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value has not yet reached the guaranteed number of games (= after the guaranteed number of games), the process proceeds to step Sl1112.

In steps Sl1112 to Sl1116, various processes are executed when, after the guaranteed number of plays, the player does not win the drop lottery but wins the jackpot in the win lottery.

In step Sl1112, a command after the guaranteed number of games is set. The command after the set guaranteed number of games is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sl0503 in the normal process (FIG. 28). When the audio emission control device 90 receives this command after the guaranteed number of games, it becomes possible to understand that the current game time is the game time after the guaranteed number of games. After executing step Sl1112, the process advances to step Sl1113.

In step S1113, it is determined whether the result of the allocation judgment (mode selection lottery) in step S1106 or step S1107 is the first-to-fall mode. As explained above, in step S1106 or step S1107, an allocation judgment is performed to allocate the type of jackpot as an allocation judgment, but in the game round after the guaranteed number of games is reached after the high-frequency support mode is started, a mode selection lottery is also performed to allocate the manner in which the support mode is changed when a jackpot is won in the win lottery without winning the fall lottery. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the first-to-fall mode in the allocation table for the first start port shown in FIG. 8 (a) or the allocation table for the second start port shown in FIG. 8 (b). Then, in step Sl1113, it is determined whether the result of the mode selection lottery in step Sl1106 or step Sl1107 is first-to-drop mode or not (= last-to-drop mode).

In step Sl1113, if the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode (Sl1113: YES), the process advances to step Sl1114, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1115.

In step Sl1115, the first drop mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. The first drop mode flag is a flag for storing that the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode. After executing step Sl1115, the process advances to step Sl1116.

In step Sl1116, a first-to-drop mode command is set. The set first-to-drop mode command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in step Sl0503 in the normal processing (Figure 28). When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives this first-to-drop mode command, it can determine that the result of the mode selection lottery is the first-to-drop mode. After executing step Sl1116, the win determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1110 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (Sl1110: NO), if it is determined in step Sl1111 that the guaranteed number of plays has not yet been reached (step Sl1111: YES), or if it is determined in step Sl1113 that the mode is not the first-fall mode, i.e., the last-fall mode (step Sl1113: NO), the win determination process is immediately terminated. Note that if the player wins the fall lottery and also wins a jackpot in the win lottery, the process in steps Sl1111 to Sl1116 will not be executed, since it is determined as NO in step Sl1110.

The above-mentioned processing from step Sl1101 to step Sl1107 and processing from step Sl1110 to step Sl1116 realizes the change in the lottery mode and support mode at the time of winning the jackpot in FIG. 21 (after the guaranteed number of plays, winning the jackpot, winning the first-to-win mode).

In step Sl1104, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sl1102 or step Sl1103 is not a big win (Sl1104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1117, where the reach determination table is referenced to determine whether or not a reach will occur in that game round. Specifically, the process determines whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the occurrence of a reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (Figure 5). Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1118.

In step Sl1118, if the result of the reach determination in step Sl1117 is that a reach will occur in that game round (Sl1118: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1119, where the reach occurrence flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sl1119, the process proceeds to step Sl1120.

On the other hand, in step Sl1118, if the result of the reach determination in step Sl1117 is that a reach will not occur in that game round (Sl1118: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1120 without executing step Sl1119.

In step Sl1120, a process for setting a stop result for failure is executed. Specifically, in the current game round where the result is a miss, the variable display is set to end with which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. It is processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for losing in the stop result table storage area 63f, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. , and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sl1120, the hit determination process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 30: S10706).

Figure 35 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step Sl1201, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1202.

In step Sl1202, it is determined whether or not the game is in a high probability/high support state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability/high support flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability/high support flag is a flag that is turned ON in step Sl0903 of FIG. 32. In step Sl1202, if it is determined that the high probability/high support flag is not ON (Sl1202: NO), the program proceeds to step Sl1203.

In steps Sl1203 to Sl1209, processing is performed to set the variable time in a game state that is not a high probability/high support state (a game state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode).

In step Sl1203, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot win. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R variable jackpot flag, 8R variable jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in RAM 64 is ON. If any of the flags is ON, it is determined that a jackpot win has occurred (Sl1203: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sl1204.

In step Sl1204, the jackpot variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1205, where the obtained variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, this variable time setting process is terminated.

In step Sl1203, if it is determined that the winning lottery result for the current game round is not a jackpot (Sl1203: NO), the process advances to step Sl1206, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. do. Since this process (Sl1206) is executed when there is no big hit in the winning lottery for the current game round in step Sl1203 above, in Sx1206, the reach (so-called It is determined whether it is a game round in which a hit (missing reach) occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON, and if it is ON, it is determined that a reach has occurred (Sl1206: YES), and step Sl1207 Proceed to.

In step Sl1207, the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is transitioned from ON to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1208.

In step Sl1208, the variable time table for reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl1205 described above, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the main variable time setting process ends.

In step Sl1206, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (Sl1206: NO), the process advances to step Sl1209, and the variable time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63h is referred to. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. The non-reach variable time table is a so-called out-of-reach variable time table. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl1205 described above, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the main variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Sl1202 that the high probability/high support flag is ON (Sl1202: YES), proceed to step Sl1210.

In steps S1210 to S11213, a process of setting a variable time is executed in a high probability/high support state where the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode.

In step Sl1210, the high accuracy/high support flag is changed from ON to OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sl1211.

In step Sl1211, it is determined whether the number of games continuously executed in the high frequency support mode has not yet reached the guaranteed number of games (e.g., 100 games) (=before the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0. In step Sl1211, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 (step Sl1211: YES), that is, if it is determined that the value has not yet reached the guaranteed number of games, the process proceeds to step Sl1212.

In step Sl1212, a variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games is executed. The variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games will be described later. After executing step Sl1212, this variable time setting process ends.

In step Sl1211, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sl1211: NO), that is, if it is determined that the number of guaranteed games has passed, the process proceeds to step Sl1213, Execute the variable time setting process after the number of times. The variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games will be described later. After executing step Sl1213, this variable time setting process ends.

<Variable Time Setting Process Before Guaranteed Number of Games>
Next, the variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games will be described. The variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variable time setting process (FIG. 35: S11212).

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games. In step Sl1301, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R certain variable jackpot flag, 8R certain variable jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON, it is a jackpot. Assuming that it is a win (S11301: YES), the process advances to step Sl1302.

In step S11302, a variable time table for a big win is specified from a variable time table group for the guaranteed number of games or less stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. The variable time table group for the guaranteed number of games or less includes:
(i) A variable time table for a jackpot used when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game before the number of games since the start of the high frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games (hereinafter referred to as a variable time table for a jackpot before the guaranteed number of games),
(ii) A fluctuation time table for falling used when the number of games played after the start of the high frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games, the player wins the falling lottery, and does not win the jackpot in the winning lottery (hereinafter referred to as the "falling fluctuation time table before the guaranteed number of games");
(iii) A variable time table for the occurrence of a miss reach used when a reach (so-called miss reach) occurs in a game before the number of games since the start of the high frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games, without winning the fall lottery and without winning the jackpot in the win lottery (hereinafter referred to as a variable time table for the occurrence of a miss reach before the guaranteed number of games),
In step S1302, the variable time table for before the guaranteed number of plays and for a big win, which is (i), is specified from (i) to (iii). The variable time table for before the guaranteed number of plays and for a big win is, for example, a variable time table for executing a normal battle presentation as the battle presentation and a victory presentation as the result announcement presentation (see FIG. 13). After executing step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1303.

In step Sl1303, the variable time table identified in step Sl1302 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS obtained in step Sl1201 of the variable time setting process (Figure 35). In the following step Sl1304, the variable time information obtained in step Sl1303 is set in a variable time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process prior to the guaranteed number of plays is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1301 that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a jackpot win (Sl1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1305 to determine whether or not the player has won the fall lottery for the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fall flag stored in the various flags storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1305 that the fall flag is ON (Sl1305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1306.

In step Sl1306, a fluctuation time table for falling is specified from the group of fluctuation time tables for before the guaranteed number of plays stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, the fluctuation time table for before the guaranteed number of plays and falling, which is (ii), is specified from the above-mentioned (i) to (iii). The fluctuation time table for before the guaranteed number of plays and falling is, for example, a fluctuation time table for executing a normal battle presentation as a battle presentation and executing a defeat presentation as a result notification presentation (see FIG. 12). After executing step Sl1306, the process proceeds to step Sl1303 described above, and the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1306 is referenced to obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1304, and the obtained fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the fluctuation time setting process for before the guaranteed number of plays is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl1305 that the player has not won the fall lottery for the current game round (Sl1305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1307 to determine whether a reach will occur in the current game round. If the player has not won the big win in the win lottery for the current game round in step Sl1301 above, and if the player has not won the fall lottery for the current game round in step Sl1305 above, this process (step Sl1307) is executed. Therefore, in step Sl1307, it is determined whether a reach (a so-called miss reach) will occur among the game rounds in which the player has not won the fall lottery and has not won the big win in the win lottery. Specifically, it is determined whether the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flags storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON, and if it is ON, it is determined that a reach will occur (Sl1307: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sl1308.

In step Sl1308, the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is changed from ON to OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1309.

In step Sl1309, a variable time table for occurrence of a missed reach is specified from a group of variable time tables for the guaranteed number of games and earlier stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, from the above-mentioned (i) to (iii), the variable time table for occurrence of out-of-reach, which is (iii) before the guaranteed number of games, is specified. The variable time table for occurrence of out-of-reach before the guaranteed number of games is a variable time table for, for example, executing a normal battle effect as a battle effect and executing a draw effect as a result announcement effect (see FIG. 14). After executing step Sl1309, the process proceeds to step Sl1303, and refers to the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1309 to obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl1304, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1307 that no reach will occur in the current game round (Sl1307: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1310, where the non-reach-occurrence variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63h is referenced to obtain the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. The process of step Sl1310 is the same as the process of step Sl1209 in the variable time setting process (Figure 35). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sl1304, where the obtained variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter area 64f of RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process prior to the guaranteed number of games is terminated.

<Variable time setting process after guaranteed number of games>
Next, the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games will be described. The variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variable time setting process (FIG. 35: S11213).

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games. In step Sl1401, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R certain variable jackpot flag, 8R certain variable jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON, it is a jackpot. Assuming that the winning result is determined (Sl1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1402.

In step Sl1402, it is determined whether or not the player has won the lottery for the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether the fall flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1402 that the fall flag is not ON (Sl1402: NO), the process advances to step Sl1403.

In step Sl1403, it is determined whether or not the result of the mode selection lottery for the current game round is the first drop mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the first drop mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sl1403, if it is determined that the first drop mode flag is ON (Sl1403: YES), the process advances to step Sl1404.

In step Sl1404, the first drop mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is shifted from ON to OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1405.

In step S11405, a variable time table for the big win first-drop mode is specified from a variable time table group for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. The variable time table group for after the guaranteed number of games includes:
(iv) A variable time table for a jackpot and first-to-drop mode used when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery and a first-to-drop mode is won in a mode selection lottery in a game after the number of games played since the start of the high-frequency support mode has reached the guaranteed number of games (hereinafter referred to as a variable time table for the jackpot first-to-drop mode after the guaranteed number of games),
(v) A variable time table for a jackpot and a drop-out mode used when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery and a drop-out mode is won in a mode selection lottery in a game after the number of games played since the start of the high-frequency support mode has reached the guaranteed number of games (hereinafter referred to as a variable time table for the jackpot drop-out mode after the guaranteed number of games),
(vi) A fluctuation time table for falling used when the number of games played after the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games, the player wins the falling lottery, and does not win the jackpot in the winning lottery (hereinafter referred to as the "falling fluctuation time table after the guaranteed number of games");
(vii) A variable time table for the occurrence of a miss reach used when a reach (so-called miss reach) occurs in a game after the number of games played since the start of the high frequency support mode has reached the guaranteed number of games, without winning the fall lottery and without winning the jackpot in the win lottery (hereinafter referred to as the variable time table for the occurrence of a miss reach after the guaranteed number of games),
In step S1405, the variable time table for the after guaranteed number of plays/jackpot first-drop mode, which is (iv), is specified from (iv) to (vii). The variable time table for the after guaranteed number of plays/jackpot first-drop mode is, for example, a variable time table for executing a life-or-death battle presentation as the battle presentation and a victory presentation as the result announcement presentation (see FIG. 21). After executing step S1405, the process proceeds to step S1406.

In step Sl1406, with reference to the variation time table specified in step Sl1405, variation time information corresponding to the current variation type counter CS value obtained in step Sl1201 of the variation time setting process (FIG. 35) is obtained. Subsequently, in step Sl1407, the variable time information acquired in step Sl1406 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1403 that the result of the mode selection lottery for the current game round is not the first-to-drop mode, i.e., the last-to-drop mode (Sl1403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1408.

In step Sl1408, the variable time table for the jackpot after-fall mode is specified from the group of variable time tables for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, from the above-mentioned (iv) to (vii), the variable time table for the after-guaranteed number of games/after-jackpot drop mode, which is (v), is specified. The variable time table for the after-guaranteed number of games/after-jackpot drop mode is a variable time table for, for example, executing a dominant battle effect as a battle effect and executing a victory effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 22). After executing step Sl1408, the process proceeds to step Sl1406 described earlier, and refers to the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1408 to obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1407, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games is completed.

In addition, if it is determined in step Sl1402 that the player has won the fall lottery for the current game (Sl1402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1405 without executing steps Sl1403 and Sl1404, and the variable time table for the after-guaranteed-play-count/jackpot-first-fall-out mode is identified. If the player has won the fall lottery for the game count after the guaranteed-play-count and has won the jackpot in the win lottery for the current game, the high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF in step Sl1007 of the fall determination process (Figure 33), and NO is determined in step Sl1110 of the win determination process (Figure 34), so the first-fall-out mode flag is not turned ON by step Sl1115 of the win determination process (Figure 34). For this reason, in the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of plays, in order to avoid the process of step S1403, the process of step S1402, which judges the fall flag, is provided between step S1401 and step S1403. Then, when the judgement is YES in step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1405, and the variable time table for the after guaranteed number of plays/jackpot first fall mode is specified.

If it is determined in step Sl1401 that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a jackpot win (Sl1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1409, where it is determined whether or not the player has won the fall lottery for the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fall flag stored in the various flags storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1409 that the fall flag is ON (Sl1409: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1410.

In step Sl1410, a fluctuation time table for falling is specified from the group of fluctuation time tables for after the guaranteed number of plays stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, the fluctuation time table for after the guaranteed number of plays and falling, which is (vi), is specified from the above-mentioned (iv) to (vii). The fluctuation time table for after the guaranteed number of plays and falling is, for example, a fluctuation time table for executing a life and death battle presentation as a battle presentation and executing a defeat presentation as a result announcement presentation (see FIG. 18). After executing step Sl1410, proceed to step Sl1406, refer to the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1410, and obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Then, proceed to step Sl1407, and set the obtained fluctuation time information in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the fluctuation time setting process after the guaranteed number of plays is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl1409 that the player has not won the fall lottery for the current game round (Sl1409: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1411 to determine whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. If the player has not won the big win in the win lottery for the current game round in step Sl1401 above, and if the player has not won the fall lottery for the current game round in step Sl1409 above, this process (step Sl1411) is executed. Therefore, in step Sl1411, it is determined whether or not a reach (so-called miss reach) will occur in a game round that has not won the fall lottery and has not won the big win in the win lottery. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON, and if it is ON, it is determined that a reach will occur (Sl1411: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sl1412.

In step Sl1412, the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is changed from ON to OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1413.

In step Sl1413, a variable time table for out-of-reach occurrence is specified from a group of variable time tables for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, from the above-mentioned (iv) to (vii), the variable time table for occurrence of out-of-reach after the guaranteed number of games, which is (vii), is specified. The variable time table for occurrence of out-of-reach after guaranteed number of games is, for example, a variable time table for executing a dominant battle effect as a battle effect and executing a draw effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 23). After executing step Sl1413, the process proceeds to step Sl1406, and refers to the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1413 to obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1407, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games is completed.

On the other hand, in step Sl1411, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (Sl1411: NO), the process advances to step Sl1414, and the variable time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63h With reference to , the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. The process in step Sl1414 is the same as the process in step Sl1209 of the variable time setting process (FIG. 35). Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1407, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games is completed.

<Fluctuation end processing>
Next, the variation end processing will be explained. The variation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 29: Sl0604) of the game time control process.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variation end processing. In step Sl1501, it is determined whether the variable time of the current game round has elapsed. As mentioned above, the fluctuation time is the time from when the symbol rows start fluctuating until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sl1501, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (FIG. 35) described above. The value of this set variable time information is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

In step Sl1501, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sl1501: NO), this fluctuation end processing is ended.

If it is determined in step Sl1501 that the change time has elapsed (Sl1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1502, where a process is performed to end the change of the patterns in the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round, either the first pattern display section 37a or the second pattern display section 37b. In the following step Sl1503, the special pattern change display flag stored in the special pattern change display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step Sl1503, the process proceeds to step Sl1504.

In step Sl1504, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any one of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sl1504, if it is determined that none of the flags is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a jackpot (Sl1504: NO), the process advances to step Sl1505.

In step Sl1505, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sl1505 that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Sl1505: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1506, and it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not. In step Sl1506, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 (S11506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1507, and the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1. After executing step Sl1507, the process advances to step Sl1508. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1506 that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC is less than or equal to 0 (Sl1506: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1508 without executing step Sl1507.

In step S1508, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sl1508 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Sl1508: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1509, where it is determined whether the number of games continuously executed in the high frequency support mode has not yet reached the guaranteed number of games (e.g., 100 games) (=before the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0.

If it is determined in step Sl1509 that the value of the guaranteed play counter PNC is not greater than 0 (step Sl1509: NO), i.e., if it is determined that the guaranteed play count has not yet been reached, the process proceeds to step Sl1510, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sl1510, the process proceeds to step Sl1511.

In step Sl1511, it is determined whether the fall flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1511 that the fall flag is ON (Sl1511: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1512, where the fall flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sl1512, this variable time ending process is terminated.

If it is determined that the high probability mode flag is ON in step Sl1508 (Sl1508: YES), or if it is determined that the number of games played is before the guaranteed number of games in step Sl1509 (step Sl1509: YES), steps Sl1510 to Step Sl1512 This variable time end processing ends without executing. Also, when it is determined in step Sl1511 that the fall flag is not ON (Sl1511: NO), the present variable time end process is ended without executing step Sl1512.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1505 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sl1505: NO), the process advances to step Sl1513.

In step Sl1513, it is determined whether the fall flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1513 that the fall flag is ON (Sl1513: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1514, where the fall flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sl1514, this variable time ending process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl1513 that the fall flag is not ON (Sl1513: NO), this variable time end process is terminated without executing step Sl1514.

In step Sl1504, if any of the 16R variable jackpot flag, 8R variable jackpot flag, or 8R normal jackpot flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for this game round is a jackpot win (Sl1504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1515, where the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sl1515, this variable time end process is terminated.

<Game Status Transition Processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 28: S10507).

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the gaming state transition process. In step Sl1601, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the big prize opening opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sl1601 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sl1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1602, where it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the opening period ends during the opening/closing execution mode and the large prize opening opening/closing processing period, during which the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is executed, begins, and is turned OFF when the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b ends.

If it is determined in step Sl1602 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sl1602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1603, where it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is set to ON at the start of the opening period and set to OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sl1603 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sl1603: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1604, where it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1604 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sl1604: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1605. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1604 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (Sl1604: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

In step Sl1605, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. Then, proceed to step Sl1606. In step Sl1606, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Then, proceed to step Sl1607.

In step Sl1607, an opening/closing scenario setting process for setting an opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening/closing scenario defines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game, and in this embodiment, conditions for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from the closed state to the open state (hereinafter also referred to as "opening conditions"), This is a program in which conditions (hereinafter also referred to as "closing conditions") for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from an open state to a closed state are recorded. The opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63i of the ROM 63.

The release conditions are, for example, as follows:
- The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing to start each round of play in the opening and closing execution mode.
When one of the above items is met, the opening and closing door 36b transitions from a closed state to an open state.

For example, the closing conditions are as follows.
- The elapsed time after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
- The number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening 36a after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit number.
When either one of the above two items is satisfied, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After executing step Sl1607, proceed to step Sl1608 described above.

In step Sl1608, opening time setting processing is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, an opening time of the same constant length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 seconds) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. Note that the third timer counter area T3 is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sl1608, the process advances to step Sl1609.

In step Sl1609, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in step Sl0503 in normal processing (Figure 28). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current opening and closing execution mode. Based on the received opening command, the audio and light emission control device 90 determines the content of the presentation corresponding to the opening time and the large prize opening and closing processing period, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step Sl1609, the process proceeds to step Sl1610, where the opening period flag is set to ON. After that, this game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step Sl1603 that the opening period flag is ON (Sl1603: YES), proceed to step Sl1611.

In step Sl1611, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sl1611 that the opening period has ended (Sl1611: YES), the process advances to step Sl1612 and the opening period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sl1613.

In step Sl1613, a round display start process is executed to notify the type of the current opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays information on the round related to the above output. After executing step Sl1613, the process advances to step Sl1614.

In step Sl1614, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. In the following step Sl1615, an opening/closing processing start command is set. The opening/closing processing start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing processing period has started. The opening/closing processing start command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (Figure 28: step Sl0503). After executing step Sl1615, this game state transition process is terminated.

In step Sl1602, if it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sl1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1616, and the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. The grand prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sl1616, the process advances to step Sl1617.

In step Sl1617, it is determined whether the large prize opening/closing process has been completed. Specifically, it is determined whether the large prize opening/closing process has been completed based on whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b has been opened is "0". If it is determined in step Sl1617 that the large prize opening/closing process has been completed (Sl1617: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1618. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1617 that the large prize opening/closing process has not been completed (Sl1617: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

In step Sl1618, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step Sl1619.

In step Sl1619, processing to end the round display is executed. In this processing, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step Sl1619, the process proceeds to step Sl1620.

In step Sl1620, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the ending period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as the ending time). In this embodiment, the same fixed ending time is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (i.e., 6 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4, which determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in the various counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sl1620, proceed to step Sl1621.

In step Sl1621, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sl0503 in the normal process (FIG. 28). The audio light emission control device 90 ends the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on receiving the ending command. After executing step Sl1621, the process advances to step Sl1622.

In step Sl1622, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sl1601, if it is determined that the ending period flag is ON (Sl1601: YES), the process advances to step Sl1623.

In step Sl1623, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which was set as the ending time in the ending time setting process (Sl1620), is "0". If it is determined in step Sl1620 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which was set as the ending time, is "0" (Sl1623: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1624.

In step Sl1624, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1625, and transition processing at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game after the current ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sl1625, the process advances to step Sl1626 and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sl1626, the process advances to step Sl1627.

In step Sl1627, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is "0". If the total reserved number CRN is "0", this means that the start reserved number is "0" for both the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. In step Sl1627, if it is determined that the total reserved number CRN is "0" (Sl1627: YES), proceed to step Sl1628.

In step Sl1628, a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is used to make the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, recognize that no pending information is stored in the pending information storage area 64b at the time when the symbol variation (gaming round) ends. This is a command that includes information about. This set customer waiting command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sl1628 in the normal process (FIG. 28). After executing step Sl1628, this game round control process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1627 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (Sl1627: NO), the game turn control process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in step Sl1623 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which is set as the ending time, is not "0" (Sl1623: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Big prize opening and closing process>
Next, the special prize opening opening/closing process will be described. The special prize opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 39: S11616).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step Sl1701, it is determined whether the opening/closing door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable prize winning driving section 36c. If it is determined in step Sl1701 that the door 36b is not open (Sl1701: NO), the process advances to step Sl1702.

In step Sl1702, it is determined whether the conditions for opening the opening/closing door 36b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sl1702 that the condition for opening the door 36b is satisfied (Sl1702: YES), the process advances to step Sl1703.

In step Sl1703, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl1704.

In step Sl1704, a door open command is set. The door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the door 36b has been opened. The door open command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 28: step Sl0503). After executing step Sl1704, the large prize opening open process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl1702 that the opening condition for the opening/closing door 36b is not met (Sl1702: NO), the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps Sl1703 and Sl1704.

If it is determined in step Sl1701 that the opening and closing door 36b is open (Sl1701: YES), proceed to step Sl1705.

In step Sl1705, it is determined whether the conditions for closing the opening/closing door 36b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to close the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sl1705 that the conditions for closing the opening/closing door 36b are satisfied (Sl1705: YES), the process advances to step Sl1706.

In step Sl1706, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. After that, the process advances to step Sl1707.

In step Sl1707, a door closing command is set. The door closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the door 36b is closed. The door closing command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (Figure 28: step Sl0503). After executing step Sl1707, the large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl1705 that the closing conditions for the opening and closing door 36b are not met (Sl1705: NO), the large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated without executing steps Sl1706 and Sl1707.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 39: S11625).

Figure 41 is a flowchart showing the transition process at the end of the ending period. In step Sl1801, it is determined whether the flag corresponding to the probability variable jackpot in the jackpot flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variable jackpot flag in RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sl1801, if it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON (Sl1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1802, and the 16R probability variation jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON. Turn off the flag that is ON. After executing step Sl1802, the process advances to step Sl1803.

In step Sl1803, the high probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step Sl1804, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game transitions to a gaming state in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Then the process proceeds to step Sl1805.

In step Sl1805, the guaranteed play count counter PNC provided in the various counter area 64f of RAM 64 is set to 100. The value set in the guaranteed play count counter PNC is a value indicating the number of plays when the high frequency support mode is executed with a limited number of plays. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1806.

In step Sl1806, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, proceed to step Sl1811.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1801 that the 16R special jackpot flag and the 8R special jackpot flag in RAM 64 are not ON (Sl1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1807, where the 8R regular jackpot flag in RAM 64 is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1808.

In step Sl1808, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step Sl1809, where the guaranteed number of plays counter PNC provided in the various counter area 64f of RAM 64 is set to 100. Then the process proceeds to step Sl1810.

In step Sl1810, a low probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the low probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. . After that, the process advances to step Sl1811.

In step Sl1811, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is sent to the audio emission control device 90 as a command to be transmitted. Set. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric support>
Next, the processing for electric support will be explained. The electric support support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 28: Sl0508).

Figure 42 is a flowchart showing the electric support process. In step Sl1901, it is determined whether or not support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support in progress flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support in progress flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric device 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened, and is turned OFF when the electric device 34a is returned to the closed state. In step Sl1901, if it is determined that the support in progress flag is not ON (Sl1901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1902.

In step Sl1902, it is determined whether the support win flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support win flag is a flag that is turned ON when an open state win is obtained in the electric role opening lottery to determine whether the electric role 34a is opened or not, and is turned OFF when the support in progress flag is ON. In step Sl1902, if it is determined that the support win flag is not ON (Sl1902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1903.

In step Sl1903, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Sl1903 that the value in the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sl1903: NO), the main power support process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value in the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sl1903: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1904.

In step Sl1904, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuating display of symbols in the common symbol unit 38. In step Sl1904, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sl1904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1905, and after setting the out-of-line display, the main power support process is ended. By setting the missing display, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the regular pattern unit 38 is ended with the missing display being stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1904 that it is not the timing to end the variable display (Sl1904: NO), the process advances to step Sl1906.

In step Sl1906, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0". In step Sl1906, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (Sl1906: NO), the electronic accessory support process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1906 that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0" (Sl1906: YES), the process advances to step Sl1907.

In step Sl1907, it is determined whether the game is in the open/close execution mode, and then the process proceeds to step Sl1908 to determine whether the game is in the high-frequency support mode. If the game is not in the open/close execution mode in step Sl1907 (Sl1907: NO) and is in the high-frequency support mode in step Sl1908 (Sl1908: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1909 to hold a lottery for opening the electric role. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role reserve area 64c is shifted, and if the value of the electric role opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role opening lottery is won. In addition, at the same time as the electric role opening lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (i.e., 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1910.

In step Sl1910, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sl1909 is a support win. In step Sl1910, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is a support win (Sl1910: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1911, where the support win flag is turned ON and the support win flag is set in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the electric support support process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sl1910, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not a support win (Sl1910: NO), the electric accessory support process is ended without executing the process of step Sl1911.

If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in step Sl1907 (Sl1907: YES), or if it is determined that it is not the high-frequency support mode in step Sl1908 (Sl1908: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1912, and the electric accessory opening lottery I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Furthermore, "14750" (ie, 29.5 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. After that, the process advances to step Sl1913.

In step Sl1913, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sl1912 is a support win. In step Sl1913, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sl1913: NO), the main electric role support processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1913 that the support has been won (Sl1913: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1914, where the support winning flag is turned ON, and after setting "1" in the second round counter area RC2, , ends this electronic support process.

In step Sl1902, if it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (Sl1902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1915, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. In step Sl1915, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sl1915: NO), since the symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner in the general figure unit 38, the main electric role support processing is performed as it is. end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1915 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sl1915: YES), the process advances to step Sl1916.

In step Sl1916, a winning display is set. This ends the display of the changing patterns in the normal unit 38 with the winning display stopped. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1917, where the support in progress flag is set to ON and the support winning flag is set to OFF. Then, the main electric role support process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl1901 that the support flag is ON (Sl1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1918, where an electric role opening/closing control process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 34a. After that, the electric role support process is terminated.

<Electric opening/closing control processing>
Next, the power opening/closing control process will be explained. The power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine for power support processing (FIG. 42: Sl1918).

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the power opening/closing control process. In step Sl2001, it is determined whether the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive section 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Sl2001: YES), the process advances to step Sl2002.

In step Sl2002, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. In step Sl2002, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sl2002: NO), the main power switch opening/closing control process is ended. That is, if the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

In step Sl2002, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sl2002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2003, where a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 34a to a closed state, "250" (ie, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is turned on. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sl2003, the process advances to step Sl2004.

In step Sl2004, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sl2005, where it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step Sl2005 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sl2005: NO), the main electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2005 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sl2005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2006, where the support in progress flag is turned OFF. Then, the main electric role opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step Sl2001, if it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sl2001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2007, and it is determined whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. In step Sl2007, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sl2007: NO), the main power switch opening/closing control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2007 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sl2007: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2008, and an opening process is executed to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state. . After that, the process advances to step Sl2009.

In step Sl2009, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sl2009: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2010, where it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

In step Sl2010, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is in effect (Sl2010: YES), the process advances to step Sl2011, and "800" (ie, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2009 that the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (Sl2009: YES), or if it is determined in step Sl2010 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (Sl2010: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2012, where the second timer counter area T2 is set to "100" (i.e., 0.2 sec). After that, the main electric equipment opening/closing control process is terminated.

《1-6》Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. First, the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Various processes executed in the audio emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92 will be explained.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the audio-optical side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sl2101, a command storage process is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing a received command in the audio/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62. The audio/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer to enable the storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are stored sequentially in the ring buffer and are read sequentially in the order in which they were stored. After executing step Sl2101, proceed to step Sl2102.

In step Sl2102, a game rendition process is executed. In the process for the game round performance, processing related to the performance to be executed in the game round from the start of symbol variation until it stops is performed. Details of the game presentation processing will be described later. After executing step Sl2102, the process advances to step Sl2103.

In step Sl2103, opening/closing execution mode production processing is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode performance processing, processing related to the performance during the opening period, the performance during the grand prize opening/closing processing period, and the performance during the ending period is performed. After executing step Sl2103, the process advances to step Sl2104.

In step Sl2104, other processing is executed. The other processing includes processing for displaying a video showing the game status on the pattern display device 41, processing for displaying a demo video on the pattern display device 41, and the like. Specifically, as a video showing the game status, a background video determined according to the game status determination value PN included in the game status command received from the main MPU 62 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. For example, a background video indicating that the high frequency support mode is continuing, a background video indicating that the high frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high probability mode is continuing are displayed. After executing step Sl2104, proceed to step Sl2105.

In step Sl2105, a light emission control process is executed to control the light emission of the various lamps 47. In the light emission control process, the light emission of the various lamps 47 is controlled based on the light emission data read out in each of the performance processes described above. After executing step Sl2105, the process proceeds to step Sl2106.

In step Sl2106, an audio output control process is executed to control the audio output of the speaker 46. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is executed based on the audio data read in the above-mentioned BGM process and each performance process. After executing step Sl2106, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Processing for game rendition>
Next, the game rendition processing will be explained. The game play processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 44: Sl2102).

Figure 45 is a flowchart showing the game round presentation processing. In step Sl2201, the game round presentation setting processing is executed. The game round presentation setting processing is executed when a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 62, and is processing for setting the presentation to be executed in the game round when the game round starts. The game round presentation setting processing will be described in detail later. After executing step Sl2201, the process proceeds to step Sl2202.

In step Sl2202, the game round performance execution process is executed. The game round performance execution process is executed when the game round performance setting process is set to execute a game round performance (preview performance and reach performance). Details of the game round performance execution process will be described later. After step Sl2202 is executed, this game round performance process is terminated.

<Game play performance setting process>
Next, the game round performance setting process will be described. The game round performance setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game round performance process (FIG. 45: S12201).

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the game rendition setting process. In step Sl2301, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command have been received. In step Sl2301, if it is determined that the variation command and the type command have not been received (Sl2301: NO), the main game performance setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2301 that a variation command and a type command have been received (S12301: YES), the process advances to step Sl2302.

In step Sl2302, the command for variation received this time is read out, and from the command, information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a falling win, the presence or absence of a reach, and the variation time is read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the audio-optical side MPU 92. After that, the process advances to step Sl2303.

In step Sl2303, a presentation pattern setting process is executed. The presentation pattern setting process is a process for determining and setting the presentation pattern to be executed in the current game round (the content and execution timing of the battle presentation, result announcement presentation, advance notice presentation, and reach presentation) based on the presentation pattern table. The details of the presentation pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sl2303, proceed to step Sl2304.

In step Sl2304, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game round is a 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, or 8R normal jackpot, the same symbol is displayed on the active line L of the symbol display device 41. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, if the result of the jackpot lottery in this game is a 16R probability-variable jackpot or an 8R probability-variable jackpot, the same odd-numbered symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same A combination of even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the same combination of odd symbols and the same combination of even symbols, but instead, the former is selected more than the latter. A configuration may be adopted in which the selection rate is higher, or a configuration in which the latter has a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability-variable jackpot. Further, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game round is an 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of even symbols is selected as the combination of the same symbols.

If the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game round is a losing result, it is determined from the contents of the variation command whether or not a reach has occurred. If it is determined that it corresponds to a reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which a combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L, and corresponds to a stop result in which a combination of reach symbols is established on the active line L. The information is determined as the current stop result information. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L, and the stop result is that the combination of the reach symbols is not established on the active line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stopped symbol. After executing step Sl2304, the process advances to step Sl2305.

In step Sl2305, processing for setting a variable display pattern for the current game round is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game round is specified from the contents of the fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the stop symbols set in step Sl2304 are combined. Select the corresponding variation display pattern. In addition, when selecting a variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the audio/light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process advances to step Sl2306.

In step Sl2306, information on the effect pattern, stop symbol, and variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the effect command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl2307, and the production command is sent to the display-side MPU 102. The display side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the performance content corresponding to the received performance command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sl2307, the process advances to step Sl2308, and an update process at the start of variation is executed. The update process at the start of variation is a process for updating the pending display in the first pending display area Ds1 or the second pending display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sl2308, the main game performance setting process is ended.

<Performance pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 46: S12303).

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process. In step Sl2401, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the performance pattern random number acquisition process, the performance pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c (FIG. 11) of the sound and light side RAM 94. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl2402.

In step Sl2402, it is determined whether a high accuracy/high support command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step Sl2402, if it is determined that the high accuracy/high support command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sl2402: NO), the process advances to step Sl2403.

The processing from step Sl2403 to step Sl2408 executes the jackpot effect, reach effect, and miss effect in a game that is not in a high probability/high support state.

In step Sl2403, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot based on the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 by step Sl2302 of the game round performance setting process (Figure 46). If it is determined in step Sl2302 that the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot (Sl2403: YES), proceed to step Sl2404.

In step Sl2404, the jackpot presentation pattern table stored in the presentation pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the sound/light side ROM 93 is referenced to obtain a jackpot presentation pattern corresponding to the variable time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the value of the current random number RN for the presentation pattern. The variable time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2404 is the variable time for the jackpot obtained by executing steps Sl1204 and Sl1205 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 35) executed by the main MPU 62. Therefore, the presentation pattern obtained in step Sl2404 corresponds to the variable time for the jackpot obtained by the main MPU 62. After executing step Sl2404, proceed to step Sl2405.

In step Sl2405, the presentation pattern obtained in step Sl2404 is set as the presentation pattern to be executed in the current game round. Then, this presentation pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2403 that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a jackpot win (Sl2403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2406, where it is determined whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur from the information on the presence or absence of a reach that was stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 by step Sl2302 of the game round performance setting process (Figure 46). If it is determined in step Sl2406 that a reach will occur in the current game round (Sl2406: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2407.

In step Sl2407, the system refers to the presentation pattern table for reach generation stored in the presentation pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the sound/light side ROM 93 to obtain the presentation pattern for reach generation corresponding to the variable time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the value of the random number RN for the current presentation pattern. The variable time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2407 is the variable time for reach generation obtained by executing steps Sl1208 and Sl1205 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 35) executed by the main MPU 62. Therefore, the presentation pattern obtained in step Sl2407 corresponds to the variable time for reach generation obtained by the main MPU 62. After executing step Sl2407, the system proceeds to step Sl2405 described above, and the presentation pattern obtained in step Sl2407 is set as the presentation pattern to be executed in the current game round. Then, the presentation pattern setting process is terminated.

In step Sl2406, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (Sl2406: NO), the process advances to step Sl2408.

In step Sl2408, the non-reach presentation pattern table stored in the presentation pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the sound/light side ROM 93 is referenced to obtain the non-reach presentation pattern corresponding to the variable time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the value of the random number RN for the current presentation pattern. The variable time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2408 is the non-reach variable time obtained by executing steps Sl1209 and Sl1205 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 35) executed by the main MPU 62. Therefore, the presentation pattern obtained in step Sl2407 corresponds to the non-reach variable time obtained by the main MPU 62. After executing step Sl2408, the process proceeds to step Sl2405 described above, and the presentation pattern obtained in step Sl2408 is set as the presentation pattern to be executed in the current game round. Then, this presentation pattern setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl2402 that a high accuracy/high support command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sl2402: YES), the process advances to step Sl2409.

In steps Sl2409 to Sl2411, processing is performed to set a presentation pattern in a high probability/high support state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode.

In step Sl2409, it is determined whether or not a command after the guaranteed number of plays has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sl2409 that a command after the guaranteed number of plays has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sl2409: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2410.

In step Sl2410, performance pattern setting processing before the guaranteed number of games is executed. The production pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games will be described later. After that, the main performance pattern setting process is ended.

In step Sl2409, if it is determined that the command after the number of games has been received from the main side MPU 62 (step Sl2409: YES), that is, if it is determined that the guaranteed number of games has passed, the process advances to step Sl2411.

In step Sl2411, the presentation pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of plays is executed. The presentation pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of plays is described later. After that, this presentation pattern setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games>
Next, the production pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games will be explained. The performance pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the performance pattern setting process (FIG. 47: Sl2410).

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing performance pattern setting processing before the guaranteed number of games. In step Sl2501, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot winning based on the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sl2302 of the game round performance setting process (FIG. 46). . In step Sl2501, if it is determined that the winning lottery result is a jackpot (Sl2501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2502.

In step Sl2502, a performance pattern table corresponding to the jackpot win is specified from the performance pattern table group for the guaranteed number of games and earlier stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the sound-light side ROM 93. In the performance pattern table group for before the guaranteed number of games,
(I) A performance pattern table that executes a normal battle performance as a battle performance and a victory performance as a result notification performance (hereinafter referred to as a performance pattern table for normal battle performance/victory performance);
(II) A performance pattern table that executes a normal battle performance as a battle performance and a defeat performance as a result announcement performance (hereinafter referred to as a performance pattern table for normal battle performance/defeat performance);
(III) A performance pattern table that executes a normal battle performance as a battle performance and a draw performance as a result announcement performance (hereinafter referred to as a performance pattern table for normal battle performance/draw performance);
is provided. In step Sl2502, the performance pattern table (I) for normal battle performance/victory performance is specified from among (I) to (III). After executing step Sl2502, the process advances to step Sl2503.

In step Sl2503, the performance pattern table for normal battle performance/victory performance specified in step Sl2502 is referred to, and the variation time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the performance pattern setting process (FIG. 47) in step Sl2401 are used. A performance pattern corresponding to the obtained value of the current performance pattern random number RN is obtained. The variable time read in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2503 is determined by executing steps Sl1302 to S11304 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 36) before the guaranteed number of games executed by the main MPU 62. This is the variable time before the guaranteed number of games and for the jackpot. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2503 corresponds to the variable time before the guaranteed number of games and for the jackpot obtained by the main side MPU 62. After executing step Sl2503, the process advances to step Sl2504, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2503 is set.

By executing the above-mentioned processing from step Sl2501 to step Sl2504, it is possible to perform the effects in FIG. 13 (before the guaranteed number of plays, when a jackpot is won), i.e., a normal battle effect as the battle effect and a victory effect as the result notification effect. After executing step Sl2504, the effect pattern setting processing before the guaranteed number of plays is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl2501 that the result of the winning lottery for this game round is not a jackpot win (Sl2501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2505, where it is determined whether or not the result of the falling lottery for this game round is a win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the falling lottery is a win from the information on the presence or absence of a falling win stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 by step Sl2302 of the game round performance setting process (Figure 46). If it is determined in step Sl2505 that the result of the falling lottery is a win (Sl2505: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2506.

In step Sl2506, a performance pattern table corresponding to the falling win is specified from the performance pattern table group for the guaranteed number of games and earlier stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a of the sound-light side ROM 93. Specifically, the performance pattern table (II) for normal battle performance/defeat performance is specified from among the above-mentioned (I) to (III). After executing step Sl2506, the process advances to step Sl2507.

In step Sl2507, the performance pattern table for normal battle performance/defeat performance specified in step Sl2506 is referred to, and the variation time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and step Sl2401 of the performance pattern setting process (FIG. 47) are used. A performance pattern corresponding to the obtained value of the current performance pattern random number RN is obtained. The fluctuation time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2507 is determined in step Sl1306, step Sl1303, and step This is the variable time for falling and before the guaranteed number of games obtained by executing Sl1304. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2507 corresponds to the variable time before the guaranteed number of games and for falling obtained by the main side MPU 62. After executing step Sl2507, the process proceeds to step Sl2504 described earlier, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2507 is set. Thereafter, the performance pattern setting process for the guaranteed number of games or earlier is ended.

By executing the processes of steps Sl2501, Sx2505, Sx2506, Sx2507, and Sx2504 described above, the performances in FIG. 12 (before the guaranteed number of games, falling win), that is, the normal battle performance as the battle performance and the result announcement performance It is possible to perform a defeat performance.

In step Sl2505, if it is determined that the result of the falling lottery for the current game round is not a win (Sl2505: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2508, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. . Specifically, it is determined whether or not a ready-to-reach occurs based on the information regarding the presence or absence of a ready-to-reach that is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sl2302 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 46). In step Sl2508, if it is determined that reach occurs in the current game round (Sl2508: YES), the process advances to step Sl2509.

In step Sl2509, a presentation pattern table corresponding to a miss reach is identified from the presentation pattern table group for play before the guaranteed number of plays stored in the presentation pattern table storage area 93a of the sound/light side ROM 93. Specifically, from the above-mentioned (I) to (III), a presentation pattern table for a normal battle presentation/draw presentation, which is (III), is identified. After executing step Sl2509, proceed to step Sl2510.

In step Sl2510, the effect pattern table for normal battle effects and draw effects identified in step Sl2509 is referenced to obtain an effect pattern corresponding to the variable time read out by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the value of the random number RN for the current effect pattern obtained by step Sl2401 of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 47). The variable time read out by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2510 is the variable time for the occurrence of a miss reach before the guaranteed number of games obtained by executing steps Sl1309, Sl1303, and Sl1304 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 36) before the guaranteed number of games executed by the master MPU 62. Therefore, the effect pattern obtained by step Sl2510 corresponds to the variable time for the occurrence of a miss reach before the guaranteed number of games obtained by the master MPU 62. After executing step Sl2510, the process proceeds to step Sl2504 described above, and the presentation pattern acquired in step Sl2510 is set. After that, the presentation pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of plays is terminated.

By executing the processes of steps Sl2501, Sx2505, Sx2508 to Sx2510, and Sx2504 described above, the effects in FIG. 14 (before the guaranteed number of games, out-of-reach occurrence), that is, the normal battle effect as a battle effect and the result announcement effect You can perform a draw performance.

If it is determined in step Sl2508 that no reach will occur in the current game round (Sl2508: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2511.

In step Sl2511, the non-reach presentation pattern table stored in the presentation pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the sound/light side ROM 93 is referenced to obtain the non-reach presentation pattern corresponding to the variable time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the value of the current presentation pattern random number RN. The variable time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2511 is the non-reach variable time obtained by executing steps Sl1310 and Sl1304 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 36) before the guaranteed number of games executed by the main MPU 62. Therefore, the presentation pattern obtained in step Sl2511 corresponds to the variable time for non-reach obtained by the main MPU 62. After executing step Sl2511, proceed to step Sl2504 described above and set the presentation pattern obtained in step Sl2511. Then, the presentation pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games is terminated.

<Processing for setting presentation patterns after guaranteed number of games>
Next, the effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is explained. The effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 47: S12411).

Figure 49 is a flowchart showing the process for setting the presentation pattern after the guaranteed number of plays. In step Sl2601, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current play round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot based on the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 by step Sl2302 of the play round presentation setting process (Figure 46). In step Sl2601, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot (Sl2601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2602.

In step Sl2602, it is determined whether the result of the fall lottery for the current game round is a win or not. Specifically, it is determined whether the result of the fall lottery is a win or not from the information on the presence or absence of a fall win stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 by step Sl2302 of the game round performance setting process (Figure 46). If it is determined in step Sl2602 that the result of the fall lottery is not a win (Sl2602: NO), proceed to step Sl2603.

In step Sl2603, it is determined whether or not a first-out mode command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sl2603 that a first-out mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sl2603: YES), the result of the mode selection lottery is determined to be the first-out mode, and the process proceeds to step Sl2604.

In step S12604, a presentation pattern table corresponding to a big win and a first-to-win mode win is specified from a group of presentation pattern tables for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the presentation pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the sound/light ROM 93. The group of presentation pattern tables for after the guaranteed number of games includes:
(IV) a performance pattern table for executing a life-and-death battle performance as a battle performance and a victory performance as a result announcement performance (hereinafter referred to as a performance pattern table for life-and-death battle performance/victory performance);
(V) A performance pattern table for executing a life-and-death battle performance as a battle performance and a defeat performance as a result notification performance (hereinafter referred to as a performance pattern table for life-and-death battle performance/defeat performance),
(VI) A presentation pattern table for executing a superiority battle presentation as a battle presentation and a victory presentation as a result announcement presentation (hereinafter referred to as a presentation pattern table for superiority battle presentation/victory presentation),
(VII) A performance pattern table for executing a superiority battle performance as a battle performance and a draw performance as a result announcement performance (hereinafter referred to as a performance pattern table for superiority battle performance/draw performance),
In step S12604, the effect pattern table for the life-and-death battle effect/victory effect, which is (IV), is specified from among (IV) to (VII). After executing step S12604, the process proceeds to step S12605.

In step Sl2605, the presentation pattern table for the life and death battle presentation and victory presentation identified in step Sl2604 is referenced to obtain a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the value of the random number RN for the current presentation pattern obtained in step Sl2401 of the presentation pattern setting process (FIG. 47). The variable time read out in step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2605 is the variable time for the after-guaranteed-number-of-plays/jackpot-first-drop-out mode obtained by executing steps Sl1405 to Sl1407 in the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of plays (FIG. 37) executed by the master MPU 62. Therefore, the presentation pattern obtained in step Sl2605 corresponds to the variable time for the after-guaranteed-number-of-plays/jackpot-first-drop-out mode obtained by the master MPU 62. After executing step Sl2605, proceed to step Sl2606 and set the presentation pattern obtained in step Sl2605.

By executing the processing from step Sl2601 to step Sl2606 described above, the production in FIG. 21 (after the guaranteed number of games, jackpot win, first drop mode win), that is, a life-or-death battle production as a battle production and a result announcement production. You can perform a victory performance. After executing step Sl2606, the performance pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2603 that a first-drop mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sl2603: NO), the result of the mode selection lottery is determined to be last-drop mode, and the process proceeds to step Sl2607.

In step Sl2607, a presentation pattern table corresponding to a big win and a late drop mode win is identified from the presentation pattern table group for after the guaranteed number of plays stored in the presentation pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the sound/light side ROM 93. Specifically, from the above-mentioned (IV) to (VII), a presentation pattern table for the superiority battle presentation/victory presentation, which is (VI), is identified. After executing step Sl2607, proceed to step Sl2608.

In step Sl2608, the presentation pattern table for the superiority battle presentation and victory presentation identified in step Sl2605 is referenced to obtain a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable time read out by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the value of the random number RN for the current presentation pattern obtained by step Sl2401 of the presentation pattern setting process (FIG. 47). The variable time read out by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2608 is the variable time for the guaranteed number of plays and the jackpot post-drop mode obtained by executing steps Sl1408, Sl1406, and Sl1407 in the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of plays (FIG. 37) executed by the master MPU 62. Therefore, the presentation pattern obtained by step Sl2608 corresponds to the variable time for the guaranteed number of plays and the jackpot post-drop mode obtained by the master MPU 62. After executing step Sl2608, proceed to step Sl2606 and set the presentation pattern obtained in step Sl2608. After that, the presentation pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of plays is terminated.

In addition, in step Sl2602, if it is determined that the result of the falling lottery is a win (Sl2602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2604 without executing step Sl2603, and the production pattern table for life-or-death battle production/victory production is created. Identify.

By executing the above-mentioned steps Sx2601 to Sx2603, Sx2607, Sx2608, and Sx2606, it is possible to perform the effects shown in FIG. 22 (after the guaranteed number of plays, when a jackpot is won, and when a late drop mode is won), that is, a battle of superiority effect as a battle effect and a victory effect as a result announcement effect.

In step Sl2601, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a jackpot (Sl2601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2609, and the result of the falling lottery for the current game round is a win. Determine whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the falling lottery is a winning based on the information on the presence or absence of a falling winning that is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step Sl2302 of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 46). . In step Sl2609, if it is determined that the result of the falling lottery is a win (Sl2609: YES), the process advances to step Sl2610.

In step Sl2610, a presentation pattern table corresponding to a fall win is identified from the presentation pattern table group for after the guaranteed number of plays stored in the presentation pattern table storage area 93a of the sound/light side ROM 93. Specifically, a presentation pattern table for a life and death battle presentation/defeat presentation, which is (V), is identified from the above-mentioned (IV) to (VII). After executing step Sl2610, proceed to step Sl2611.

In step Sl2611, the presentation pattern table for the life and death battle presentation and defeat presentation identified in step Sl2610 is referenced to obtain a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable time read out by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the value of the random number RN for the current presentation pattern obtained by step Sl2401 of the presentation pattern setting process (FIG. 47). The variable time read out by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2611 is the variable time for the guaranteed number of plays and fall obtained by executing steps Sl1410, Sl1406, and Sl1407 in the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of plays (FIG. 37) executed by the master MPU 62. Therefore, the presentation pattern obtained by step Sl26011 corresponds to the variable time for the guaranteed number of plays and fall obtained by the master MPU 62. After executing step Sl2611, proceed to step Sl2606 and set the presentation pattern obtained by step Sl2611. After that, the process of setting the presentation pattern after the guaranteed number of plays ends.

By executing the processes of steps Sl2601, Sx2609 to Sx2611, and Sx2606 described above, the production in FIG. 18 (falling and winning after the guaranteed number of games), that is, the life-and-death battle production as a battle production and the defeat as a result announcement production. You can also perform.

If it is determined in step Sl2609 that the result of the fall lottery for the current game round is not a win (Sl2609: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2612, where it is determined whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur from the information on the occurrence or non-occurrence of a reach stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 by step Sl2302 of the game round performance setting process (Figure 46). If it is determined in step Sl2612 that a reach will occur in the current game round (Sl2612: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2613.

In step Sl2613, a presentation pattern table corresponding to the occurrence of a miss reach is identified from the presentation pattern table group for after the guaranteed number of plays stored in the presentation pattern table storage area 93a of the sound/light side ROM 93. Specifically, from the above-mentioned (IV) to (VII), a presentation pattern table for a superiority battle presentation/draw presentation, which is (VII), is identified. After executing step Sl2613, proceed to step Sl2614.

In step Sl2614, the presentation pattern table for the superiority battle presentation/draw presentation identified in step Sl2613 is referenced to obtain a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable time read out by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the value of the random number RN for the current presentation pattern obtained by step Sl2401 of the presentation pattern setting process (FIG. 47). The variable time read out by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2614 is the variable time for the occurrence of a miss reach after the guaranteed number of plays obtained by executing steps Sl1413, Sl1406, and Sl1407 in the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of plays (FIG. 37) executed by the master MPU 62. Therefore, the presentation pattern obtained by step Sl2614 corresponds to the variable time for the occurrence of a miss reach after the guaranteed number of plays obtained by the master MPU 62. After executing step Sl2614, proceed to step Sl2606 and set the presentation pattern obtained in step Sl2614. After that, the presentation pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of plays is terminated.

By executing the above-mentioned steps Sx2601, Sx2609, Sx2612 to Sx2614, and Sx2606, it is possible to perform the effects shown in FIG. 23 (after the guaranteed number of plays, a miss reach occurs), that is, a battle of superiority effect as a battle effect and a draw effect as a result announcement effect.

If it is determined in step Sl2612 that no reach will occur in the current game round (Sl2612: NO), proceed to step Sl2615.

In step Sl2615, the non-reach presentation pattern table stored in the presentation pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the sound/light side ROM 93 is referenced to obtain the non-reach presentation pattern corresponding to the variable time read out by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the value of the current presentation pattern random number RN. The variable time read out by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2615 is the non-reach variable time obtained by executing steps Sl1414 and Sl1407 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 37) after the guaranteed number of games executed by the main MPU 62. Therefore, the presentation pattern obtained by step Sl2615 corresponds to the variable time for non-reach obtained by the main MPU 62. After executing step Sl2615, the process proceeds to step Sl2606 described above, and the presentation pattern obtained by step Sl2615 is set. After that, the presentation pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is terminated.

<Processing for executing game play performance>
Next, the game round performance execution process will be described. The game round performance execution process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game round performance process (FIG. 45: S12202).

Figure 50 is a flowchart showing the processing for executing the game round presentation. In step Sl2701, it is determined whether or not a presentation pattern that was set in the game round presentation setting processing (Figure 46) described above exists. If it is determined in step Sl2701 that a presentation pattern that was set does not exist (Sl2701: NO), the processing for executing the game round presentation ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2701 that a presentation pattern that was set exists (Sl2701: YES), the processing proceeds to step Sl2702.

In step Sl2702, the set presentation pattern is referenced, and then the process proceeds to step Sl2703 to determine whether it is time to start the play round presentation. The play round presentation referred to here is a presentation based on various presentation patterns set in the presentation pattern setting process (Figure 47). These presentation patterns store the content and timing of the presentation to be executed in that play round.

In step Sl2703, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the game round effect (S12703: NO), the process for executing the present game round effect is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2703 that it is the start timing of the game round performance (Sl2703: YES), the process advances to step Sl2704.

In step Sl2704, a video display start command corresponding to the content of the game round presentation set in the presentation pattern is sent to the display control device 100. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl2705, where light emission control processing of the various lamps 47 corresponding to the content of the game round presentation set in the presentation pattern is started. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl2706, where the sound output LSI (not shown) is caused to start playing audio data corresponding to the content of the preview presentation set in the presentation pattern. After step Sl2706 is executed, the process for executing this game round presentation is terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly include a main process that is repeatedly executed from when the power is turned on until the power is turned off, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound and light emission control device 90, and a V interrupt process that is executed when a V interrupt signal sent from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed.

After powering on, the MPU 102 executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal. Note that if a command is received and a V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, the contents of the command received from the audio and light emission control device 90 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 51 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main processing is executed when the power is turned on, and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing is described below.

In step Sl2801, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and the memories in the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 are cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written into the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. After that, the process advances to step Sl2802.

In step Sl2802, the interrupt permission setting is executed. Once the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main processing executes an infinite loop process thereafter until the power is cut off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio emission control device 90.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sl2901, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, a V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 53 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt processing is executed when a V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and an image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 is identified, and an instruction is issued to the VDP 105 to draw and display the image.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image when the drawing process or display process of the image is not completed, so that it is possible to prevent the start of drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area where the image information being displayed is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt process are described below.

In step S13001, command response processing is executed. In the command response processing, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 52) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a performance command is stored, control of the drawing and display of the image is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

If a production operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the production operation is executed. Image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command correspondence processing (Sl3001), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, and therefore there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the production is set by the audio emission control device 90 and the production is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the production are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the performance mode such as a preview performance or a stop symbol set by the sound emission control device 90, and display a performance image according to the mode. Drawing of images can be controlled so that the device 41 displays them.

In step Sl3002, a display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the contents of one frame of image to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 are specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which has been set by the command response process (Sl3001) or the like. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl3003.

In step Sl3003, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the contents of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, as specified by the display setting processing (Sl3002), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, rotation angle, etc., are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the processing proceeds to step Sl3004.

In step Sl3004, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, determined by the task process (Sl3003), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the image drawing process based on this information, and also sends the image along with the drive signal in order to display the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process on the pattern display device 41. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sl3005, and after other processing is executed, the V interrupt processing is ended. An example of specific control for executing various processes including jackpot effects in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

《1-7》Action/Effect:
As explained above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the probability variable jackpot is won by the winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode changes to the high probability mode and the support mode changes to the high frequency support mode. After that, if you win a jackpot in the winning lottery in the game after the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games after the high-frequency support mode started (= after the number of guaranteed games), if you win the jackpot in the winning lottery, the support mode will be activated. The frequent support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode, and the timing of this shift is switched between the start of the game round and the end of the game round by a lottery (=mode selection lottery). If the timing of transitioning to low-frequency support mode is at the start of a game round, a life-or-death battle effect will be executed in that game round, and the timing of transitioning to low-frequency support mode is at the end of the game round. In this case, a superiority battle effect is executed in the game round. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, in the game after the guaranteed number of games, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the performance can be performed in two ways: a life-and-death battle performance and a dominant battle performance. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to widen the range of performances in the event that a jackpot is won in the winning lottery for the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, if the falling lottery is won, or if the jackpot is won in the winning lottery without winning the falling lottery, and the mode selection lottery is In both cases where the first drop mode is won, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode at the timing when the game round starts, and the electric accessories 34a (FIG. 3) stop opening and closing operations. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing whether he or she has won the falling lottery or the jackpot in the winning lottery based on the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 34a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can give players a sense of urgency and anticipation for the results of the falling lottery and winning lottery for the game rounds after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, through the battle performance, and as a result, the game It is possible to further increase interest in the game.

Now, let us consider a pachinko machine that has only the first-fall mode and does not have the last-fall mode (= the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 described above). According to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, only a life-and-death battle performance is executed, which suggests that either a jackpot has been won in the winning lottery (a win) or a fall-off lottery has been won (a loss). Therefore, when a battle performance is started in a play round after the guaranteed number of plays is reached, the player can predict that the result will be either a jackpot win in the winning lottery or a fall-off lottery. Although it can give a sense of tension and expectation for the results of the fall-off lottery and the winning lottery, it cannot give the player a sense of security, including a draw, in the battle performance. In contrast, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot has been won in the winning lottery in a play round after the guaranteed number of plays is reached, it is possible to perform two performances, a life-and-death battle performance and a superiority battle performance, so that a battle performance including a draw by the superiority battle performance is possible, and it is possible to give the player a sense of security, including a draw, in the battle performance.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, the player wins a jackpot in the winning lottery without winning the falling lottery, and wins in the first losing mode in the mode selection lottery, and in the falling lottery. The opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 34a is the same in the winning game round. For this reason, even if the player confirms that the electric accessory 34a has stopped at the start of the game round, the player does not win the falling lottery but wins the jackpot in the winning lottery, and the game round in which he wins the first-fall mode in the mode selection lottery. It is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the following: and the game round in which the falling lottery was won. However, by confirming that the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 34a has stopped at the start of the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, you can win the jackpot in the winning lottery without winning the falling lottery, and be the first in the mode selection lottery. The player can understand that the game has been narrowed down to either the game round in which the falling mode was won or the game round in which the falling lottery was won. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game is narrowed down to one of the game times in which the jackpot was won in the winning lottery without winning the falling lottery, and the game game in which the player won the first-to-be-fallen mode in the mode selection lottery, and the game game in which he won the falling lottery. By executing a life-or-death battle effect that suggests that the player has won the lottery, it is possible to improve the player's sense of urgency and anticipation as to whether he or she has won a jackpot in the winning lottery or won the fall lottery. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, after the guaranteed number of plays is reached, the opening and closing operation of the electric role 34a is the same in a play time in which the player does not win the fall lottery, wins a jackpot in the win lottery, and wins the late-fall mode in the mode selection lottery, and in a play time in which the player does not win the fall lottery, does not win a jackpot in the win lottery, and is determined to have a reach (so-called miss reach) in the reach judgment. Therefore, even if the player observes that the electric role 34a continues to open and close in that play time, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the play times is a play time in which the player does not win the fall lottery, wins a jackpot in the win lottery, and wins the late-fall mode in the mode selection lottery, and a play time in which the player does not win the fall lottery, does not win a jackpot in the win lottery, and is determined to have a reach in the reach judgment. However, by confirming that the opening and closing operation of the electric device 34a continues in the game times after the guaranteed number of games is reached, the player can understand that the game times have been narrowed down to either one of the game times in which the player did not win the fall lottery, won the jackpot in the win lottery, and won the late drop mode in the mode selection lottery, or the game times in which the player did not win the fall lottery, did not win the jackpot in the win lottery, and was determined to have a reach in the reach judgment. Therefore, in this embodiment, by executing a superiority battle performance that suggests that the game times have been narrowed down to either one of the game times in which the player did not win the fall lottery, won the jackpot in the win lottery, and won the late drop mode in the mode selection lottery, or the game times in which the player did not win the fall lottery, did not win the jackpot in the win lottery, and was determined to have a reach in the reach judgment, the player's expectations about whether the jackpot was won in the win lottery or a miss reach has occurred can be increased, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

According to the present pachinko machine 10, in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, the player does not win the fall lottery, wins the jackpot in the winning lottery, and wins the first drop mode in the mode selection lottery; In the case where you do not win the jackpot in the winning lottery but win the falling lottery, it is possible to fall into either of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery (win) or winning the falling lottery (defeat). Since the suggestive life-or-death battle effect is executed, the life-or-death battle effect can give the player a sense of urgency and anticipation for the results of the falling lottery and winning lottery for the game rounds after the guaranteed number of games has been reached. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the present pachinko machine 10, in a play round after the guaranteed number of plays is reached, if the player does not win the drop lottery, wins a jackpot in the win lottery, and wins the late drop mode in the mode selection lottery, or if the player does not win the drop lottery, does not win a jackpot in the win lottery, and is determined to have a reach (so-called miss reach) in the reach judgment, a superiority battle presentation is executed that indicates that the player has either won a jackpot in the win lottery (a win) or has not won a jackpot in the win lottery and has not won the drop lottery (a draw). Since the superiority battle presentation can only result in a win or a draw, the player is more advantageous when the superiority battle presentation is executed than when the life and death battle presentation is executed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, the superiority battle presentation can give the player a great sense of expectation, and as a result, the interest in the game can be further improved.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, if you do not win the falling lottery and win the jackpot in the winning lottery, the life-or-death battle performance and the dominant battle performance are selected. Either of these will be executed. A life-and-death battle performance can result in defeat, but a superiority battle performance can only result in a win or a draw, so when a superiority battle performance is performed, it is better to perform a life-or-death battle performance than when a life-or-death battle performance is performed. It is highly advantageous for players. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation by making a dominant battle effect appear. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, when winning the late fall mode in which a superior battle performance can be executed, the type of jackpot is limited to the 16R probability-variable jackpot, which has the highest degree of advantage for the player (see FIG. 8). , it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the allocation table associates a highly advantageous late drop mode with a 16R sure-variable jackpot, which is the most advantageous to the player, but instead, a highly advantageous late drop mode may be associated with an 8R normal jackpot, which is the least advantageous to the player. Also, a highly advantageous late drop mode may be associated with two jackpot types, for example, a 16R sure-variable jackpot and an 8R sure-variable jackpot. With this configuration, when a late drop mode that can execute a superiority battle performance is won, the jackpot type is limited to a sure-variable jackpot that is highly advantageous to the player, so that the player can be given great expectations.

<<1-8>> Modification of the first embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as in the above embodiment will be omitted.

《1-8-1》Variation 1:
In the first embodiment described above, in the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached after the start of the high-frequency support mode (=after the guaranteed number of games), the support mode is changed in the case of winning a jackpot. Which mode to adopt, the falling mode or the late falling mode, was determined by a lottery based on the jackpot type counter C2 (=mode selection lottery), but as a modification, in the winning lottery It may also be configured to be determined by lottery based on the used jackpot random number counter C1. Specifically, it is as follows. Note that the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in Modification 1 is the same as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, so the same names and symbols are used for the same parts as in the first embodiment, and the following explanation will be used. I do.

FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a high probability mode success/failure table provided in the pachinko machine of modification 1. In the high probability mode win/fail table, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 whose win/fail result is a jackpot is the same as in the high probability mode win/fail table (see FIG. 7(b)) in the first embodiment. Further, in the high-probability mode win/fail table, out of the values 0 to 1199, values of 0 to 15, where the win/fail result is a jackpot, are associated with the allocation results of the mode selection lottery. Specifically, among the values 0 to 15 that can be a jackpot, 10 values 0 to 9 are set to the first drop mode, and six values 10 to 15 are set to the last drop mode.

In the pachinko machine of the first modified example, when the winning determination process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 determines that the mode is the high probability mode, a winning lottery is performed by referring to the winning/losing table for the high probability mode, and a mode selection lottery is performed to determine whether the mode is the first-falling mode or the last-falling mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a winning jackpot in the winning/losing table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 54, and if they match, it is further determined whether the mode is the first-falling mode or the last-falling mode depending on whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the value set for the first-falling mode or the last-falling mode as the allocation result of the mode selection lottery.

As a result, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery for a play count after the guaranteed number of plays has been reached (=after the guaranteed number of plays) since the high frequency support mode was started, it is possible to determine which of the first-drop mode and the last-drop mode to adopt as a manner of changing the support mode. Note that the processing other than the part that determines which of the first-drop mode and the last-drop mode to adopt, which is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, is the same as in the first embodiment. In addition, the various processing executed in the audio and light emission control device 90 and the various processing executed in the display control device 100 are also the same as in the first embodiment.

According to the pachinko machine of the first modification configured as described above, similar to the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, the performance when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery for the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached In addition, it is possible to widen the range of modes, and also to enable the player to predict whether he or she has won the fall lottery or won the jackpot in the winning lottery based on the opening and closing operations of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3). It can be prevented. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the first modification, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, similarly to the pachinko machine of the first embodiment.

In this modified example 1, an item for the distribution result of the mode selection lottery was added to the hit/miss table, and the distribution result of the mode selection lottery according to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 was obtained by referring to the hit/miss table. In contrast, as another modified example, the hit/miss table may remain the same as in the first embodiment, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 used to refer to the hit/miss table may be compared with a threshold value that distinguishes between the first-fall mode and the last-fall mode to determine whether the mode is the first-fall mode or the last-fall mode. Specifically, in the case of the hit/miss table for the high probability mode illustrated in FIG. 54, the threshold value that distinguishes between the first-fall mode and the last-fall mode is 10, so the determination of whether the mode is the last-fall mode or the first-fall mode is made by determining whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the time of winning the jackpot in the hit lottery is 10 or more. With this configuration, it is also possible to determine which mode, the first-fall mode or the last-fall mode, to adopt when winning a jackpot. In particular, this modified example makes it possible to reduce the processing time required for judgment when the possible values of the jackpot random number counter C1 are large, such as 65536 (2 to the power of 16).

《1-8-2》Variation 2:
In the first embodiment and its first modification, the support mode is changed when a jackpot is won in a game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached after the start of the high-frequency support mode (=after the guaranteed number of games). As a form of this, it was decided by lottery whether to adopt the first drop mode or the second drop mode. On the other hand, as a modified example, in the game play after reaching the guaranteed number of games, based on the number of play times since the high-frequency support mode was started, the first drop mode and the second fall mode are selected. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined which one to adopt. Specifically, it is as follows. The hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in the second modification is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, so the same names and symbols will be used for the same parts as in the first embodiment, and the following explanation will be used. I do.

In the pachinko machine of variant 2, a mode selection table for determining whether the first-drop mode or the last-drop mode is to be used is stored in the ROM 63 of the main control device 60.

FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the mode selection table. As shown in the figure, the mode selection table shows whether it is the first drop mode or the last drop mode for the number of games played from the 101st time, which is after the guaranteed number of games, among the number of games played since the high-frequency support mode was started. It has a data structure that associates selection results. In the example of FIG. 55, the period from the 101st to the 105th time and the period from the 109th time onward are set as the number of games in which the first drop mode is played. The period from the 106th time to the 108th time is set as the number of times the game is played in the late drop mode.

In this way, in the mode selection table, for each game after the guaranteed number of games, if you win a jackpot in the winning lottery, the support mode will be changed to either the first drop mode or the last drop mode. It is stipulated whether the mode of When the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 wins the jackpot in the winning lottery for the game after the guaranteed number of games, the MPU 62 refers to the mode selection table and provides support in the game when the jackpot is won after the guaranteed number of games. It is determined whether the manner of mode change is to be changed into a first drop mode or a later drop mode. Note that the processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 other than the part for determining which mode to adopt among the first drop mode and the second drop mode is the same as in the first embodiment. Further, various processes executed in the audio emission control device 90 and various processes executed in the display control device 100 are also the same as in the first embodiment.

According to the pachinko machine of the second modification configured as described above, similarly to the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, the performance when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery for the game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached. In addition, it is possible to widen the range of modes, and also to enable the player to predict whether he or she has won the fall lottery or won the jackpot in the winning lottery based on the opening and closing operations of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3). It can be prevented. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the second modification, it is possible to improve the interest of the game similarly to the pachinko machine of the first embodiment. Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine of Modification 2, the period after the guaranteed number of games has been reached is divided into multiple periods, and for each divided period, either the first-fall mode or the second-fall mode is selected. Since it is possible to set in advance whether or not to adopt the mode, it is possible to prevent the processing from being biased toward either the first drop mode or the last drop mode, resulting in a situation that is excessively advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to perform a production with a rich storyline.

Note that the mode selection results stored in the mode selection table shown in FIG. 55 are merely examples, and various configurations can be made, such as a configuration in which the number of times switching between the first drop mode and the last drop mode is increased. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of mode selection tables with different mode selection results are prepared in advance and the mode selection table to be used is switched. For example, in a win/fail table, a "big win" and a "small win" are provided as a result of a winning lottery, and when a small win is won, the mode selection table is switched. According to this configuration, switching between the first drop mode and the later drop mode can be performed in a variety of ways. In particular, if a configuration is adopted in which the mode selection table is switched when a small win is won, it is possible to create a configuration in which it is difficult for the player to notice that the player has won a small win in the winning lottery. , it becomes possible to switch the mode selection table.

Furthermore, the mode selection table displays the selection result of first drop mode or last drop mode for the number of games played from the 101st time after the guaranteed number of games among the number of games played since the high frequency support mode started. It was a data structure that corresponded to the data structure, but on the other hand, the selection result of first drop mode or last drop mode for the number of games played from the first time after the high frequency support mode started. It is also possible to have a configuration that associates the . In this configuration, from the first to the 100th game, the late drop mode is set (see FIG. 13).

In the second modification, the mode selection result according to the number of times of play was obtained by referring to the mode selection table. In contrast, as another modification, a configuration may be adopted in which the first-drop mode or the last-drop mode is determined by performing a calculation to compare the number of times of play with a threshold value that distinguishes between the first-drop mode and the last-drop mode without using the mode selection table. Specifically, in the mode selection table illustrated in FIG. 55, the threshold values that distinguish between the first-drop mode and the last-drop mode are 101, 106, and 109, so that the calculation process determines that the first-drop mode is selected when the number of times of play is 101 or more and less than 106, determines that the last-drop mode is selected when the number of times of play is 106 or more and less than 109, and determines that the first-drop mode is selected when the number of times of play is 109 or more. With this configuration, it is also possible to determine which of the first-drop mode and the last-drop mode is selected according to the number of times of play.

《1-8-3》Variation 3:
In the first embodiment and its first modification, the support mode is changed when a jackpot is won in a game after the guaranteed number of games has been reached after the start of the high-frequency support mode (=after the guaranteed number of games). Which mode to adopt, the first drop mode or the last drop mode, was determined by lottery. On the other hand, as a modification, a configuration may be adopted in which the first drop mode or the last drop mode is determined according to the variable time set by the variable time setting process. With this configuration as well, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, similarly to the first embodiment and its modifications.

《1-8-4》Variation 4:
In the first embodiment and the variations 1 to 3, the player is not informed of which of the first drop mode and the last drop mode is to be used. On the other hand, as a modified example, a configuration may be adopted in which the player is informed which of the first drop mode and the last drop mode is to be adopted. For example, at the start of a game round, the result of mode adoption is displayed on the symbol display device 41. According to this modification 4, when the player knows from the display on the symbol display device 41 that the late fall mode is on, the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3) stops at the start of the game round. When this is acknowledged, it can be predicted that the player has won the falling lottery in the middle of the dominant battle performance. Therefore, according to the fourth modification, the player can leave room for predicting that he has won the falling lottery during the battle performance.

In the first embodiment described above, by referring to the sorting table used when sorting the jackpot types, the selection result of the mode according to the jackpot type counter C2 is obtained. On the other hand, as another modification example, without using a distribution table, by performing an operation that compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 with a threshold value that distinguishes the first-fall mode and the second-fall mode, it is possible to determine whether the first-fall mode is It may be configured to determine whether it is in the late fall mode. Specifically, in the distribution table for the first starting port illustrated in FIG. If the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 0 or more and less than 40, it is determined that the mode is the first drop mode, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 40 or more and less than 65, the mode is determined to be the last drop mode. When the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 65 or more, it is determined that the game is in the first drop mode. With this configuration as well, it is possible to determine which of the first drop mode and the last drop mode to adopt according to the jackpot type counter C2. In the case of the first embodiment, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and the case where the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. The distribution results of the mode selection lottery according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 were configured to be different depending on the case obtained based on the entered ball, but according to this modification example 4, the distribution results are the same. .

1-8-5 Variation 5:
In the first embodiment and its modified examples, the low-frequency support mode is adopted as the first state specified by the state information in the state storage means, and the high-frequency support mode is adopted as the state other than the first state, but the first state and the state other than the first state are not limited to these. For example, the high-frequency support mode may be adopted as the first state, and the low-frequency support mode may be adopted as the second state. In addition, in the first embodiment and its modified examples, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are states that can be specified by the high-frequency support mode flag, which is the state information. Instead of this, a configuration may be made in which there are three types of support modes (for example, a low-frequency support mode, a medium-frequency support mode, and a high-frequency support mode) in which the frequency at which the electric role 34a is in an open state per unit time is divided into three stages. Furthermore, a configuration may be made in which there are n types of support modes in which the frequency is divided into n stages (n is a positive integer of 4 or more).

《1-8-6》Variation 6:
In the first embodiment and its modifications, the determination mode (lottery mode) of the determination means has a low probability mode and a high probability mode. It may be configured to have three types of probability modes divided into three stages (for example, a low probability mode, a medium probability mode, and a high probability mode). Furthermore, the configuration may have n types of probability modes in which the probability that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition is divided into n stages (n is a positive integer of 4 or more).

《1-8-7》Variation 7:
In the above-described first embodiment and its modifications, the case where the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions is explained using the case where the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. Not limited. For example, as a case where the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, a case may be employed in which a condition for executing a reach effect based on the counter value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 is satisfied.

1-8-8 Variation 8:
In the first embodiment and its modified examples, the main control device 60 sets the variable time based on various information including the high-frequency support mode, and the sound and light emission control device 90 sets the performance pattern based on various information including the high-frequency support mode. In contrast, as a modified example, a specific operation or display mode other than the above in the gaming machine, for example, a background video to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, may be set based on various information including the high-frequency support mode.

《1-8-9》Variation 9:
In the first embodiment and its variations, a battle performance (battle performance) is executed as a specific performance performed before the result announcement performance, but the above-mentioned specific performance is limited to a battle performance. There isn't. The above-mentioned specific performance may have any configuration as long as it is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility that a result announcement performance may be executed. With such a configuration, the same effects as those described in the first embodiment can be obtained.

《1-8-10》Variation 10:
In the first embodiment and its modified examples, the effects executed in one game are composed of two types of effects: a battle effect and a result announcement effect. It may be composed of three types of performances including the announcement performance. Furthermore, four or more types of effects may be used.

1-8-11 Variation 11:
In the above first embodiment and its modified example, the life and death battle presentation executed when the falling lottery is won and the life and death battle presentation executed when the player wins the jackpot in the winning lottery and the first-fall mode in the mode selection lottery are the same, but this is not limited to this. For example, the life and death battle presentation executed when the falling lottery is won and the life and death battle presentation executed when the player wins the jackpot in the winning lottery and the first-fall mode may be configured to have a part of the image constituting the life and death battle presentation different. For example, the images are similar as a whole, but the images are made so that only some players can notice the difference, which can further improve the interest of the game. In addition, in the above first embodiment and its modified example 1, the advantage battle presentation executed when the player does not win the falling lottery, wins the jackpot in the winning lottery, and wins the last-fall mode in the mode selection lottery and the advantage battle presentation executed when the player does not win the falling lottery, does not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, and is determined to have a reach (so-called miss reach) in the reach determination are the same, but this is not limited to this. For example, the former and latter battle effects may have different images. For example, the images may be similar overall, but only some players may notice the difference, which can further increase the interest of the game.

1-8-12 Variation 12:
In the first embodiment and its modified example, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery for a game after the guaranteed number of games, a life and death battle presentation and a superiority battle presentation are selectively executed in the game, but in a modified example, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery for a game after the guaranteed number of games, only one of the life and death battle presentation and the superiority battle presentation is executed in the game, and the other of the life and death battle presentation and the superiority battle presentation is executed in a game before the guaranteed number of games. For example, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery for a game after the guaranteed number of games or when a fall lottery for the game is won, a life and death battle presentation is executed in the game, and when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery for a game before the guaranteed number of games or when a fall lottery for the game and a jackpot are not won in the winning lottery for the game, a superiority battle presentation may be executed in the game. In this configuration, the superiority battle presentation may be a battle presentation of other content as long as it is different from the life-and-death battle presentation, or it may be a presentation other than a battle presentation of other content.

《1-8-13》Variation 13:
In the first embodiment and its modifications, if after reaching the guaranteed number of games, a reach (so-called missed reach) occurs in the reach determination without winning the falling lottery and without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. We have adopted a configuration in which a dominant battle effect is performed in the determined game round, but as a modified example, a reach is generated in the reach determination without winning the falling lottery and without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. Then, even in the game rounds in which it is not determined, a superior battle effect may be performed. That is, regardless of whether or not a reach has occurred in the reach determination, a superiority battle performance may be performed in a game round in which the player does not win the falling lottery and does not win the jackpot in the winning lottery. According to this modification, the same effects as those described in the first embodiment can be obtained.

1-8-14 Variation 14:
In the first embodiment and its modified example, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices, such as the main control device 60, the sound and light emission control device 90, and the display control device 100. Alternatively, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to include two control devices, such as the main control device and the sub-control device. The sub-control device may be configured to execute the various processes executed in the sound and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment and its modified example 1, the various processes executed in each of the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 do not need to be limited to the division described in the first embodiment, and it is sufficient that the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 as a whole can execute the various processes in the first embodiment.

<<2>> Second embodiment:
2-1 Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 56 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 relative to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 relative to the inner frame 13. On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine body 12, such as a main control device, a sound and light emission control device, and a display control device, are disposed. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed approximately in the center of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination parts are constituted by light emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking when a special drawing is drawn by the pachinko machine 10, when a winning prize is won, when a reach is generated, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed into a box shape with an open top surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls ejected from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and is formed into a box shape with an open top surface. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and by operating the lever 23, the player can switch the outlet 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the periphery of the upper tray 20 as an operation receiving means. The performance operation button 24 is an operation unit that allows the player to perform input operations for the game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

Furthermore, an operating handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates (rotates) the operating handle 25, game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board at a predetermined interval (0.6 seconds in this embodiment) in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting the operation of the game ball launching mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping the launch of game balls by the game ball launching mechanism when pressed by the player, and a variable resistor 25c for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a turns on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation, and the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. When the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 is less than a predetermined amount, i.e., when the launch strength of the game ball is less than a predetermined amount, the launched game ball flows down the left area of the game board when viewed from the front. The launch mode of the game ball in this case is also called "left hit". On the other hand, when the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 is more than a predetermined amount, i.e., when the launch strength of the game ball is more than a predetermined amount, the launched game ball flows down the right area of the game board when viewed from the front. The launch mode of the game ball in this case is also called "right hit".

Further, on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, a game ball firing button 26 is provided for the player to operate. When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing strength to the front of the game board, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired to the front of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and also flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can "hit the ball to the right." Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. It can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball firing button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, but it is also possible to arrange the game ball firing button 26 at another position. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged inside (periphery) of the operating handle 25 similarly to the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball firing button 26 with only his right hand.

FIG. 57 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general winning port 32, a general start gate 35, a general winning device 34, a first special winning device 57, a second special winning device 58, and an outlet 43. In particular, in this embodiment, a single resin flow path 301 through which the game ball can flow is provided in the right-side game area where the game ball can reach by "hitting to the right", and the flow path 301 is provided with the general winning device 34, the first special winning device 57, the second special winning device 58, and the outlet 43 in order from the upstream side. In this embodiment, since no nails are provided on the path from when the game ball is launched to the flow path 301, the game ball hit to the right reaches the flow path 301 in a fixed trajectory. Furthermore, in this embodiment, since no nails are provided inside the flow path 301, each game ball flowing inside the flow path 301 does not vary in behavior and flows in the same manner. Below, we will explain each component of the game board 30.

The general winning opening 32 is an opening through which a game ball can enter, and when a game ball enters, one game ball is paid out from the payout device 71 as a prize ball. In this embodiment, multiple general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30.

The normal figure starting gate 35 is a gate provided with a through hole through which a game ball can pass, and when the game ball passes through, a normal figure lottery, which is an internal lottery by the main control device 60, is executed. As a result of the general drawing lottery, when a general drawing is won, a general electric opening/closing execution mode is started in which the ordinary electric accessory 34b, which will be described later, performs an opening/closing operation. The general electric power opening/closing execution mode includes a general electric power opening period, a general electric power switching processing period, and a general electric power ending period. The normal electricity opening period is a waiting period until the opening/closing process of the normal electric accessory 34b is started, and the normal electricity opening/closing processing period is a period in which the opening/closing process of the normal electric accessory 34b is actually executed. The general electric accessory ending period is a waiting period after the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 34b is completed until the next general electric accessory lottery becomes executable. Note that even if the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed. In this embodiment, the standard figure starting gate 35 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30. In addition, in this embodiment, a general prize opening 32 is provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through the regular figure starting gate 35 can enter. More specifically, a general prize opening 32 is provided directly below the common figure starting gate 35. In addition, in the following explanation, the game ball passing through the standard pattern starting gate 35 is also referred to as "the game ball enters the standard pattern starting gate 35".

The ordinary electric winning device 34 includes a special figure starting opening 34a into which a game ball can enter, and a normal electric accessory 34b functioning as a shutter for opening and closing the entrance of the special figure starting opening 34a.

Normal electric device 34b is normally in a closed state, which means that the game ball cannot enter special game starting hole 34a. When the normal electric opening and closing execution mode described above is started, it becomes in an open state, which means that the game ball can enter special game starting hole 34a.

In this embodiment, the normal electric accessory 34b is constituted by a plate-shaped member, and in the closed state protrudes in front of the game board 30, and its upper surface forms the bottom surface of the flow path 301, The game ball is in a state where it can flow on the upper surface of the plate-like member. On the other hand, in the open state, the normal electric accessory 34b is stored at the rear of the game board 30, and the game balls that have been distributed through the distribution path 301 are transferred to the special figure provided below the ordinary electric accessory 34b. The ball is now ready to enter the starting port 34a. Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of protrusions are provided on the upper surface of the normal electric accessory 34b, and the speed of the game ball flowing on the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is reduced by the projections. As a result, the time required for the game ball to pass over the upper surface of the normal electric accessory 34b of this embodiment is 0.7 seconds or more.

The special figure starting port 34a is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and when a game ball enters, three game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71, and the internal control by the main control device 60 is performed. A special drawing lottery is executed. As a result of the special drawing lottery, when a special drawing jackpot or special drawing small winning is won, a special electric accessory (first special electric accessory 57b or second special electric accessory 58b), which will be described later, performs an opening/closing operation. mode is started. The special train opening/closing execution mode consists of a special train opening period, a special train opening/closing processing period, and a special train ending period. The special electric service opening period is a waiting period until the opening/closing process of the special electric accessory starts, the special electric service opening/closing processing period is the period when the opening/closing process of the special electric accessory is actually executed, and the special electric accessory ending period is the waiting period until the opening/closing process of the special electric accessory starts. This is a waiting period after the opening/closing process of the special electric accessory is completed until the next special drawing lottery can be executed. In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the special drawing lottery, special drawing jackpot and loss are not set, but only special drawing small winning is set. In this embodiment, when a special figure small win is won as a result of the special figure lottery, a special electric opening/closing execution mode in which the first special electric accessory 57b executes an opening/closing operation is started.

The first special electric winning device 57 includes a first grand prize opening 57a into which game balls can enter, a first special electric accessory 57b that functions as a shutter for opening and closing the entrance of the first big prize opening 57a, and a first It is provided with a V winning opening 57av provided inside the big winning opening 57a.

The first special electric device 57b is normally in a closed state that prevents the game ball from entering the first large winning opening 57a, but when the special electric opening and closing execution mode described above is started, it becomes in an open state that allows the game ball to enter the first large winning opening 57a.

In this embodiment, the first special electric accessory 57b is formed of a plate-shaped member, and in the closed state projects forward of the game board 30, and its upper surface forms the bottom surface of the flow path 301. The game ball is in a state where it can flow on the upper surface of the plate-like member. On the other hand, in the open state, the first special electric accessory 57b is stored at the rear of the game board 30, and the game balls flowing through the distribution path 301 are placed below the first special electric accessory 57b. The ball can be entered into the first big prize opening 57a. In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of protrusions are provided on the upper surface of the first special electric accessory 57b, and the speed of the game ball flowing on the upper surface of the first special electric accessory 57b is reduced by the projections. . As a result, the time required for the game ball to pass over the upper surface of the first special electric accessory 57b of this embodiment is 1.0 seconds or more.

The first large prize opening 57a is an opening through which game balls can enter when the first special electric device 57b is in an open state, and when a game ball enters, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71. As described above, in this embodiment, a V prize opening 57av is provided inside the first large prize opening 57a.

The V prize opening 57av is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and when the game ball enters, the V prize jackpot is won and the above-mentioned special electric opening/closing execution mode is started. As described above, in this embodiment, the V winning hole 57av is provided inside the first big winning hole 57a, and the game ball that enters the first big winning hole 57a is then reliably entered into the V winning hole 57av. The ball is configured to enter the ball. When a game ball enters the V winning hole 57av, a special electric opening/closing execution mode is started in which a second special electric accessory 58b, which will be described later, performs an opening/closing operation. In addition, in the following explanation, the game ball entering the V-winning hole 57av is also referred to as "winning the V-winning jackpot."

The second special electric winning device 58 includes a second grand prize opening 58a into which game balls can enter, and a second special electric accessory 58b that functions as a shutter for opening and closing the entrance of the second grand prize opening 58a. There is.

The second special electric device 58b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the second large winning opening 58a, but when the special electric opening and closing execution mode described above is started, it becomes in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second large winning opening 58a.

In this embodiment, the second special electric accessory 58b is formed of a plate-shaped member, and in the closed state protrudes forward of the game board 30, and its upper surface forms the bottom surface of the flow path 301. The game ball is in a state where it can flow on the upper surface of the plate-like member. On the other hand, in the open state, the second special electric accessory 58b is stored at the rear of the game board 30, and the game balls flowing through the distribution path 301 are placed below the second special electric accessory 58b. The ball can be entered into the second big prize opening 58a.

The second large prize opening 58a is an opening through which game balls can enter when the second special electric device 58b is in the open state, and when a game ball enters, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71. Note that the above-mentioned V prize opening is not provided inside the second large prize opening 58a.

The out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30 and at the end of the flow path 301, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entry ports are discharged from the gaming area PA through the out port 43. .

The term "entering the ball" means that the game ball passes through a specified opening or area, and includes not only the manner in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through a specified opening or area, but also the manner in which the game ball continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged from the game area PA after passing through a specified opening or area. In addition, the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 32, the special chart start opening 34a, the first large winning opening 57a, the V winning opening 57av, and the second large winning opening 58a is also referred to as winning.

Next, various display sections provided on the game board 30 will be explained.

The game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 has a special display unit 37, a regular display unit 38, and a round display section 39.

The special symbol unit 37 is equipped with a special symbol display section 37a.

The special pattern display unit 37a is a display unit that displays the special pattern in a variable manner and in a static manner. The special pattern is a pattern that is displayed in a variable manner and in a static manner when a special pattern lottery is executed triggered by a game ball entering the special pattern start hole 34a. When a special pattern lottery is executed triggered by a game ball entering the special pattern start hole 34a, the special pattern display unit 37a executes the variable display of the special pattern as a display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is performed. After that, the special pattern display unit 37a displays the special pattern in a static manner corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern lottery. Hereinafter, the time from when the variable display of the special pattern starts on the special pattern display unit 37a until when it is displayed in a static manner is also referred to as the special pattern variable time.

In this embodiment, the special symbol display section 37a is constituted by a 7 segment display in which 7 segment light emitting sections are arranged in a figure 8 shape. When a game ball enters a special pattern starting hole 34a, a 7-segment display constituting a special pattern display section 37a flashes in a predetermined manner and then lights up in a predetermined manner corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern lottery. However, the special symbol display section 37a is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may have other configurations.

The period from when the special symbol display section 37a starts to display the special symbol, when the display stops and the display stops is also called a special symbol play time. That is, a special symbol play time is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the results of the special symbol lottery, which is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the special symbol start hole 34a. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the results of one special symbol lottery for each special symbol play time. The time required for one special symbol play time is also called the unit special symbol play time. The unit special symbol play time is composed of the special symbol change time, which is the time from when the special symbol display section 37a starts to display the special symbol change time until the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed as a stopped display, and the special symbol stop time, which is the time during which the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed as a stopped display.

In addition, in a general pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the special pattern starting port 34a during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode or the variable display of special symbols, the special pattern lottery based on the entry of the game ball is performed. It has a function to suspend the execution of the special drawing drawing (also called the special drawing holding function), and is equipped with a special drawing holding display section that displays information corresponding to the number of held special drawing drawings. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment does not have the above-mentioned special figure holding function, nor is it equipped with a special figure holding display section.

The normal pattern unit 38 includes a normal pattern display section 38a and a normal pattern pending display section 38b.

The normal pattern display unit 38a is a display unit that displays normal patterns in a variable manner and in a static manner. A normal pattern is a pattern that is displayed in a variable manner and in a static manner when a normal pattern lottery is executed triggered by a game ball entering the normal pattern start gate 35. When a normal pattern lottery is executed triggered by a game ball entering the normal pattern start gate 35, the normal pattern display unit 38a executes a variable display of the normal pattern as a display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery is performed. After that, the normal pattern display unit 38a displays the normal pattern in a static manner corresponding to the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery. Hereinafter, the time from when the variable display of the normal pattern starts on the normal pattern display unit 38a until when it is displayed in a static manner is also referred to as the normal pattern fluctuation time.

In this embodiment, the normal symbol display section 38a is constituted by a 7 segment display in which 7 segment light emitting sections are arranged in a figure 8 shape. When a game ball enters the regular pattern starting gate 35, a 7-segment display constituting a normal pattern display section 38a flashes in a predetermined manner and then lights up in a predetermined manner corresponding to the lottery result of the standard pattern lottery. However, the normal symbol display section 38a is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may have other configurations.

The time from when the normal symbol display section 38a starts to display the normal symbol, until the display stops and the display stops is also called a normal symbol play time. That is, a normal symbol play time is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the result of the normal symbol lottery, which is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the normal symbol start gate 35. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the result of one normal symbol lottery for each normal symbol play time. The time required for one normal symbol play time is also called a unit normal symbol play time. The unit normal symbol play time is composed of the normal symbol change time, which is the time from when the normal symbol display section 38a starts to display the normal symbol change time until the result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed in a stopped state, and the normal symbol stop time, which is the time during which the result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the general pattern starting gate 35 during execution of the normal pattern opening/closing execution mode or fluctuating display of the normal pattern, the general pattern lottery based on the entry of the game ball is performed. It has a function of suspending the execution (also referred to as a common symbol holding function), and is provided with a common symbol pending display section 38b that displays information corresponding to the number of pending common symbol drawings.

The regular map reserved display unit 38b is a display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of reserved regular map lotteries. In this embodiment, a maximum of four regular map lotteries (four times) based on the entry of a game ball into the regular map start gate 35 are reserved. In this embodiment, the regular map reserved display unit 38b is composed of four LED lamps, and the number of LED lamps that correspond to the number of reserved regular map lotteries are lit up.

The round display section 39 is a display section that displays information corresponding to the number of round games executed in the special electric opening/closing execution mode. A round game is either the elapse of a predetermined time (maximum opening time), or the arrival of a predetermined upper limit number (maximum number of balls) into the grand prize opening. This is a game in which a special electric accessory continues to be opened until one of the conditions is met. The number of round games varies depending on the type of special symbol that triggered the transition to the special electric opening/closing execution mode. The round display section 39 starts a display corresponding to the number of round games at the start of the special electric switch opening/closing process period in the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode, and ends the display when the special electric line opening/closing process period ends. In this embodiment, the round display section 39 is configured by arranging two seven-segment displays in which seven segment light-emitting sections are arranged in a figure-eight shape. However, the round display section 39 is not limited to two 7-segment displays, and may have other configurations.

The special drawing unit 37, the general drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by segment displays or light-emitting displays using LED lamps, but may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery results, such as, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display device.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged approximately at the center of the gaming area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the symbol display device 41 are controlled by a display control device 100, which will be described later. Note that the configuration of the symbol display device 41 included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the special pattern in the special pattern display section 37a or the normal pattern in the normal pattern display section 38a changes, the pattern display device 41 changes the decorative pattern accordingly. In addition, the pattern display device 41 is not limited to changing the decorative pattern, but also displays effects during the special power opening and closing execution mode and the normal power opening and closing execution mode. Details of the pattern display device 41 are explained below.

FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing decorative symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. FIG. 58(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41.

As shown in FIG. 58(A), the symbol display device 41 variably displays symbols representing the numbers 1 to 7 as decorative symbols. Note that, as the variably displayed decorative symbols, symbols in which the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 7 are affixed with pictures of characters or the like may also be used.

FIG. 58(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As illustrated, a main display area MA and a sub display area SA are displayed on the display surface 41a. In this embodiment, the main display area MA is a large area at the center of the display surface 41a, and the sub display area SA is an area smaller than the main display area MA at the upper right side of the display surface 41a.

The main display area MA displays three decorative pattern columns Z1, Z2, and Z3, one on the left, one in the center, and one on the right. In each of the decorative pattern columns Z1 to Z3, the decorative patterns of the numbers 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 58(A) are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and in each of the decorative pattern columns Z1 to Z3, the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner, scrolling from top to bottom or bottom to top with a periodicity. Then, as shown in FIG. 58(B), after the variable display by scrolling, one decorative pattern for each decorative pattern column is displayed stopped on the active line L1.

In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35 and the variable display of the normal pattern starts in the normal pattern display section 38a, the decorative patterns in each decorative pattern row Z1 to Z3 are periodically displayed in a predetermined manner. A variable display that scrolls in the direction starts. Then, the scrolling decorative symbols are switched from variable display to standby display in the order of decorative symbol row Z1, decorative symbol row Z3, and decorative symbol row Z2. Thereafter, in synchronization with the timing at which the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display section 38a, one decorative pattern is stopped and displayed for each of the decorative pattern rows Z1 to Z3. If the result of the lottery by the main control device 60 is a hit, a predetermined predetermined number will be displayed when the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol row is finished and the display is stopped. A combination of decorative patterns is formed on the effective line L1. For example, a combination of the same decorative symbols is formed on the active line L1. Note that the manner in which the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol row are displayed in a variable manner is not limited to the above-mentioned manner, and may vary depending on the number of decorative symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of scrolling of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol row, each Various modes can be adopted as modes for displaying variations in decorative patterns, such as the number of decorative patterns in a decorative pattern row.

Next, reach in decorative patterns will be explained. The reach is the possibility that a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a win will be formed on the active line L1 in some decorative symbol rows among the plurality of decorative symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. This refers to a display state in which a certain combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and in that state, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining decorative symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a win refers to a combination of the same decorative symbols. Specifically, for example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 58(B), the decorative pattern "7" is first stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern row Z1, and then the decorative pattern "7" is displayed in the decorative pattern row Z3. A reach line is formed by the same decorative pattern "7" as Z1 being stopped and displayed, and while the reach line is being formed, the decorative patterns are scrolling in the decorative pattern row Z2 (variably displayed). ) state is called reach. When a hit occurs, the same decorative pattern as the one forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern row Z2.

The reach also includes a situation where, when a reach line has been formed, the decorative patterns in the remaining decorative pattern rows are displayed in a varying manner, and a reach effect is produced by displaying a specific character or the like as a moving image in the background screen, and a situation where the combination of decorative patterns on which the reach line has been formed is displayed in a reduced size or is hidden, and a reach effect is produced by displaying a specific character or the like as a moving image over substantially the entire display surface 41a.

In the sub display area SA, like the main display area MA, three decorative symbol rows Z4, Z5, and Z6 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the special symbol starting port 34a and the special symbol display starts to be displayed in a variable manner in the special symbol display section 37a, decorative symbols are displayed in the sub display area SA along with the start of the variable display. The variable display of will start. Then, in synchronization with the timing at which the special symbols are stopped and displayed in the special symbol display section 37a, one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line L2 for each of the decorative symbol rows Z4 to Z6. That is, in this embodiment, the decorative symbols in the sub-display area SA are synchronized with the variable display and stop display of the special symbols in the special symbol display section 37a.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), a regular map reserved display area Dn is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. The regular map reserved display area Dn displays the number of regular map lotteries reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the regular map start gate 35 (number of reserved regular map lotteries). A reserved regular map lottery is a regular map lottery that has not been executed and in which the display of the regular pattern variation to notify the lottery result of the regular map lottery has not yet started. In this embodiment, the number of reserved regular map lotteries that can be reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the regular map start gate 35 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the regular map reserved display area Dn can display reserved numbers corresponding to four reserved regular map lotteries.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58(B), on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, a blinking display and a lighting display are performed in synchronization with the fluctuating display and stop display of the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display section 38a. It includes a regular symbol synchronous display section Sync1 and a special symbol synchronous display section Sync2 that performs a blinking display and a lighting display in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display section 37a. Specifically, when the normal symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner in the normal symbol display section 38a, the common symbol synchronization display section Sync1 displays a blinking display, and the normal symbols are displayed in a stopped state in the normal symbol display section 38a. In this case, the general figure synchronization display section Sync1 lights up. In addition, when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol synchronization display section Sync2 displays a blinking display, and when the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the special symbol display section 37a, The special figure synchronization display section Sync2 displays lighting.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 is configured to display the main display area MA, the sub display area SA, the regular map pending display area Dn, the regular map synchronization display section Sync1, and the special map synchronization display section Sync2, but a configuration may be adopted in which some or all of these displays are not displayed on the display surface 41a.

《2-2》Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

FIG. 59 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that a part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Further, details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively.

A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power necessary for the main control device 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies it to each device. Supply electricity.

In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, there are various types such as a general winning opening 32, a special winning opening 34a, a regular winning opening 35, a first big winning opening 57a, a V winning opening 57av, and a second big winning opening 58a. Various detection sensors installed at the ball entrance are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether the game balls flowing down the game area PA have entered each ball entrance. Further, the MPU 62 executes a special drawing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the special drawing starting gate 34a, and executes a regular drawing drawing based on the entry of the game ball into the regular drawing starting gate 35.

Connected to the output side of the main control board 61 are a first special electric role driver 57c that opens and closes the first special electric role 57b, a second special electric role driver 58c that opens and closes the second special electric role 58b, a normal electric role driver 34c that opens and closes the normal electric role 34b, and the main display unit 45. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 controls the drive of the various drivers through these driver circuits.

Specifically, in the special electric opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the first special electric role drive unit 57c or the second special electric role drive unit 58c so that the first special electric role 57b or the second special electric role 58b is opened or closed. Also, in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the normal electric role drive unit 34c so that the normal electric role 34b is opened or closed. Furthermore, when the special pattern lottery is executed, the MPU 62 executes display control of the special pattern display unit 37a in the main display unit 45, and when the special electric opening/closing execution mode is executed, the MPU 62 executes display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. Also, when the normal pattern lottery is executed, the MPU 62 executes display control of the normal pattern display unit 38a in the main display unit 45.

Furthermore, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63b of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the special figure starting opening 34a. When the entry of game balls is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the game is played to the first grand prize opening 57a or the second grand prize opening 58a. When it is determined that a ball has entered, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The payout control device 70 is connected to the launch control device 80. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is met. In addition, the launch control device 80 is connected to the operation handle 25. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. In addition, the launch control device 80 is connected to the game ball launch button 26. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched to the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on.

The audio and light emission control device 90 receives various commands sent from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 sends various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63b of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the audio and light emission control device 90 controls the operation of various lamps 47, which are light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, the operation of the speaker 46, and controls the display control device 100. In addition, the performance operation button 24 is connected to the audio and light emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by the player at a specified timing, the audio and light emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, etc. to perform a game performance that reflects the operation.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the decorative patterns on the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of decorative patterns to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. At the same time, it grasps whether or not a reach is occurring, the content of the reach effect, the content of the effect executed while the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, and the like. In addition, in this embodiment, the time during which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is constant. Therefore, by determining the variation time of the decorative symbols, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for special drawing drawings, regular drawing drawings, etc. The various counters are used when the MPU 62 performs a special drawing lottery, a general drawing lottery, and the like. Specifically, the special symbol validity determination counter Cs1 and the special symbol type determination counter Cs2 are used for the special symbol lottery. Moreover, the special symbol variation type determination counter Cs4 is used when determining the variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a. In addition, the ordinary figure correctness determination counter Cn1 and the ordinary figure type determination counter Cn2 are used for ordinary figure lottery. In addition, the common figure reach determination counter Cn3 is used to determine whether or not a reach is generated when a decorative pattern displayed on the symbol display device 41 is moved out of position. Moreover, the normal symbol variation type determination counter Cn4 is used when determining the variation time of the normal symbols in the normal symbol display section 38a. The random number initial value counter Cini is used when setting the initial values of the special symbol validity determination counter Cs1 and the regular symbol validity determination counter Cn1.

Each of the counters Cs1 to Cs4, Cn1 to Cn4, and Cini is a loop counter that adds 1 to its counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a specified area of the RAM 64.

Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a special figure determination area 64c, a regular figure holding area 64d, and a regular figure determination area 64e. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the values of the special figure correctness determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2 at the timing of the entry are stored in the special figure determination area 64c. . Further, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, each value of the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1, the general pattern type determination counter Cn2, and the standard pattern reach determination counter Cn3 at the timing of the ball entry is The data are stored in chronological order in the general map holding area 64d.

The details of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 will be explained. The special figure winning or failing determination counter Cs1 is used to judge whether or not a special figure winning (special figure jackpot or special figure small hit) is won. The special figure correctness determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the special figure is won, is a part of the above-mentioned special figure lottery. The special figure validity determination counter Cs1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 1199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Moreover, when the special symbol validity determination counter Cs1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini at that time is read as the initial value of the special symbol validity determination counter Cs1. Note that the random number initial value counter Cini is a loop counter similar to the special symbol validity determination counter Cs1 (value=0 to 1199).

The special symbol validity determination counter Cs1 is updated regularly, and when the special symbol opening/closing execution mode is not being executed and the special symbol on the special symbol display section 37a is not being displayed in a variable manner, the game ball is placed in the special symbol starting port 34a. When the ball enters, the updated value is stored in the special figure determination area 64c at the timing of the ball entering.

The value of the special figure correctness judgment counter Cs1 stored in the special figure judgment area 64c is compared with the special figure correctness judgment table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and a special figure jackpot or special figure small hit is won. It is determined whether or not to do so. As will be described later, the special pattern jackpot and special pattern loss are not set in the special pattern validity determination table of this embodiment, so the special pattern small win will be won with a 100% probability.

Next, details of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 will be explained. The special symbol type determination counter Cs2 is used when determining the type of special symbol. The special symbol type determination, which is a determination of the type of the special symbol, is a part of the above-mentioned special symbol lottery. The special figure type determination counter Cs2 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The special symbol type determination counter Cs2 is updated periodically, and when a game ball enters the special symbol start hole 34a while the special electric opening/closing execution mode is not in progress and the special symbol on the special symbol display section 37a is not being displayed in a variable manner, the updated value is stored in the special symbol determination area 64c at the time of the ball entering, together with the value of the special symbol hit/miss determination counter described above.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a special pattern hit/miss judgment using the value of the special pattern hit/miss judgment counter Cs1 stored in the special pattern judgment area 64c. Then, from among the multiple special pattern type judgment tables stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, one special pattern type judgment table corresponding to the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment is selected, and the value of the special pattern type judgment counter Cs2 stored in the special pattern judgment area 64c is compared with the selected special pattern type judgment table to judge the type of the special pattern. Then, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the special pattern display unit 37a based on the type of the judged special pattern. In this embodiment, the results of the special pattern hit/miss judgment are all special pattern small hits, so only one type of special pattern type judgment table for special pattern small hits is prepared.

Next, the special symbol change type determination counter Cs4 will be described in detail. The special symbol change type determination counter Cs4 is used when determining the change time of the special symbol in the special symbol display unit 37a and the change time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display device 41. The special symbol change type determination counter Cs4 is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value.

The special symbol variation type determination counter Cs4 is updated once every time the normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process, and the updated value is displayed in the special symbol display section 37a. Obtained immediately before the start of the variable display of special symbols. Then, the value of the acquired special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is compared with the special figure variation time table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and the special figure variation time is determined.

Next, details of the ordinary figure validity determination counter Cn1 will be explained. The common symbol correctness determination counter Cn1 is used when determining whether or not a common symbol is won. The determination of whether or not this common symbol is a winning symbol is a part of the above-mentioned common symbol lottery. The ordinary figure validity determination counter Cn1 is configured, for example, to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 1199, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the ordinary figure correctness determination counter Cn1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini at that time is read as the initial value of the ordinary figure appropriateness determination counter Cn1.

The normal figure validity determination counter Cn1 is updated regularly, and when the game ball passes through the normal figure starting gate 35, the updated value is stored in the normal figure holding area 64d at the timing of the passing.

The value of the normal pattern validity determination counter Cn1 is stored in the normal pattern holding area 64d up to four each time a game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, and is moved to the normal pattern determination area 64e in the stored order. Then, the value of the common symbol validity determination counter Cn1 moved to the common symbol determination area 64e is compared with the common symbol validity determination table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether the common symbol wins or not. is determined.

Next, details of the ordinary figure type determination counter Cn2 will be explained. The ordinary symbol type determination counter Cn2 is used when determining the type of ordinary symbol. The ordinary symbol type determination, which is the determination of the type of the ordinary symbol, is a part of the ordinary symbol lottery described above. The ordinary figure type determination counter Cn2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The regular type determination counter Cn2 is updated periodically, and when a game ball enters the regular type start gate 35, the updated value is stored in the regular type reserve area 64d at the time of the ball's entry, together with the value of the regular type hit/miss determination counter Cn1 described above.

The value of the normal ball hit/miss judgment counter Cn1 is stored in the normal ball reserve area 64d up to four times each time a game ball enters the normal ball start gate 35, and is moved to the normal ball judgment area 64e in the order in which it was stored, together with the value of the normal ball hit/miss judgment counter Cn1 described above.

As described above, the MPU 62 uses the value of the normal pattern appropriateness determination counter Cn1 stored in the normal pattern determination area 64e to perform the normal pattern judgment. Then, from among the plurality of common figure type determination tables stored in the various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63, one common figure type determination table corresponding to the result of the normal figure judgment is selected, and one common figure type determination table is selected in the common figure determination area 64e. The value of the normal symbol type determination counter Cn2 stored in is compared with the selected ordinary symbol type determination table to determine the type of the ordinary symbol. Then, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display section 38a based on the determined type of the normal symbol.

Next, the details of the regular drawing reach judgment counter Cn3 will be explained. The regular drawing reach judgment counter Cn3 is used to judge whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the regular drawing hit/miss judgment is not a regular drawing hit. The regular drawing reach judgment counter Cn3 is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The regular game reach judgment counter Cn3 is updated periodically, and when a game ball enters the regular game start gate 35, the updated value is stored in the regular game reserve area 64d at the time of the ball entering, together with the values of the regular game hit/miss judgment counter Cn1 and the regular game type judgment counter Cn2 described above.

The value of the normal pattern reach judgment counter Cn3 is stored in the normal pattern holding area 64d up to four each time a game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, and the above-mentioned normal pattern correctness judgment counter Cn1 and It moves to the ordinary figure determination area 64e together with the value of the ordinary figure type determination counter Cn2.

When the MPU 62 determines that the normal winning combination is not a winning combination, it checks the value of the normal winning combination reach determination counter Cn3 stored in the special winning combination determination area 64c against the normal winning combination reach determination table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a winning combination will occur. Note that if the result of the normal winning combination determination in the normal winning combination lottery is a winning combination, the MPU 62 determines that a winning combination has occurred regardless of the value of the normal winning combination reach determination counter Cn3.

Next, details of the normal figure fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 will be explained. The normal symbol variation type determination counter Cn4 is used when determining the variation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display section 38a and the variation time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display device 41. The ordinary figure fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The normal symbol fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 is updated once every time the normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process, and the updated value is displayed in the normal pattern display section 38a. Normally obtained immediately before the start of the fluctuating display of symbols. Then, the value of the acquired common figure variation type determination counter Cn4 is compared with the common figure variation time table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and the common figure variation time is determined.

Next, we will explain the special drawing match determination table.

Figure 61 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special chart hit/miss judgment table. As described above, when a game ball enters the special chart start hole 34a, one value is obtained from the range of values from 0 to 1199 in the special chart hit/miss judgment counter Cs1. Then, a special chart hit/miss judgment is made to determine whether or not a special chart hit (special chart big hit or special chart small hit) will be won, based on the obtained value of the special chart hit/miss judgment counter Cs1 and the special chart hit/miss judgment table.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the special figure correctness judgment table of this embodiment, out of the 1200 values from 0 to 1199 of the special figure correctness judgment counter Cs1, all values from 0 to 1199 are determined to be small hits. The value is set as a winning value, and the value that will result in winning a special chart jackpot and the value that will result in a special chart failure are not set. In other words, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure correctness determination is that the special figure small win will be won with a probability of 100%.

"Special chart small win" is the judgment result that triggers the start of the special line opening and closing execution mode.

Next, the special figure type determination table will be explained.

Figure 62 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special symbol type determination table. As described above, when a game ball enters the special symbol start hole 34a, one value is obtained from the range of values from 0 to 99 in the special symbol type determination counter Cs2. Then, a special symbol type determination table is selected according to the result of the above-mentioned special symbol hit/miss determination, and a special symbol type determination is performed to determine the type of special symbol based on the selected special symbol type determination table and the obtained value of the special symbol type determination counter Cs2. However, as described above, in this embodiment, only a special symbol small hit is set as a result of the special symbol hit/miss determination, so the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is equipped with only a special symbol type determination table for a special symbol small hit.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the special symbol type determination table of this embodiment, among the 100 values of 0 to 99 of the special symbol type determination counter Cs2, 40 values of 0 to 39 are the special symbol A ( The special pattern small win A) is set, and the remaining 60 values from 40 to 99 are set as the special pattern B (special pattern small win B). All of the special symbol types set in the special symbol type determination table trigger the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode, but each type of special symbol is selected when the special electric opening/closing execution mode is executed. The types of special electric switch opening/closing scenarios are different.

The special electric opening/closing scenario is a control program that stores the control mode of the first special electric device 57b or the second special electric device 58b in the special electric opening/closing execution mode, and the opening/closing mode of the first special electric device 57b or the second special electric device 58b in the special electric opening/closing execution mode will differ depending on the type of special electric opening/closing scenario selected.

Next, we will explain the special call opening and closing scenario selection table.

FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special electric switch opening/closing scenario selection table.

Figure 63 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special electric opening and closing scenario selection table for special small wins. The special electric opening and closing scenario selection table for special small wins is a table for selecting a special electric opening and closing scenario corresponding to the type of special pattern when a special small win is won.

As shown in FIG. 63(A), in the special electric opening/closing scenario selection table for special chart small wins in this embodiment, special electric opening/closing scenario A for special chart small wins is set in correspondence with special pattern A, and special electric opening/closing scenario B for special chart small wins is set in correspondence with special pattern B. In other words, if a special chart small win is won in the special chart win/loss judgment and the result of the special chart type judgment is special pattern A, special electric opening/closing scenario A for special chart small wins is selected when the special electric opening/closing execution mode is executed, whereas if a special chart small win is won in the special chart win/loss judgment and the result of the special chart type judgment is special pattern B, special electric opening/closing scenario B for special chart small wins is selected when the special electric opening/closing execution mode is executed.

When the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the special chart small win is started, a 0.5 second special electric opening period is started first, and then a special electric opening/closing processing period is started. During the special electric opening/closing processing period, one round of play in which the first special electric device 57b opens is executed. The first special electric device 57b opens once in one round of play, and one round of play ends when either the first special electric device 57b opens for 1.0 second, which is the maximum opening time, or 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of balls, enter the first large winning hole 57a, is met. When the special electric opening/closing processing period ends, a 0.5 second special electric ending period is started. In addition, since it is practically impossible for 10 game balls to enter the first large prize opening 57a during the 1.0 second opening of the first special electric device 57b, the total required time for the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the special chart small win is fixed at 2.0 seconds.

When the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario B for the special chart small win is started, a 0.5 second special electric opening period is started first, and then a special electric opening/closing processing period is started. During the special electric opening/closing processing period, one round of play in which the first special electric device 57b opens is executed. The first special electric device 57b opens once in one round of play, and one round of play ends when either the first special electric device 57b opens for 1.1 seconds, which is the maximum opening time, or 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of balls, enter the first large winning hole 57a, is met. When the special electric opening/closing processing period ends, a 0.5 second special electric ending period is started. In addition, since it is practically impossible for 10 game balls to enter the first large prize opening 57a during the 1.1 second opening of the first special electric device 57b, the total required time for the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario B for the special small prize is fixed at 2.1 seconds.

Moreover, in this embodiment, in addition to the case where the special figure small hit is won in the special figure correctness determination, the special electric opening/closing execution mode is started also when the game ball enters the V winning a prize opening 57av.

FIG. 63(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the V-winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario selection table. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first large winning hole 57a and directly enters the V winning hole 57av during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for special map small winnings. , the V-winning jackpot A is won, and after the special electricity opening/closing execution mode ends, the special electricity opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot is selected, and the special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the special electricity opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot starts. be done. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the first grand prize opening 57a and directly enters the V prize opening 57av during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario B for special map small winning, After the V-winning jackpot B is won, and the special electricity opening/closing execution mode ends, the special electricity opening/closing scenario B for the V winning jackpot is selected, and the special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the special electricity opening/closing scenario B for the V winning jackpot is started.

When the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric line opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot is started, first, a special electric line opening period of 0.5 seconds is started, and then a special electric line opening/closing processing period is started. During the special electric opening/closing processing period, a round game in which the second special electric accessory 58b is opened is executed 16 times (16 rounds). The number of times the second special electric accessory 58b is opened in one round game is one, and the second special electric accessory 58b is opened for 5.0 seconds, which is the maximum opening time, in one round game. The game ends when either one of the following conditions is satisfied: or the maximum number of entering balls, 10, enters the second grand prize opening 58a. The closing period (special electric interval period) of the second special electric accessory 58b during the round game is set to 3.0 seconds. When the special electric line opening/closing processing period ends, a special electric line ending period of 0.5 seconds starts.

When the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric line opening/closing scenario B for the V winning jackpot is started, first, a special electric line opening period of 0.5 seconds is started, and then a special electric line opening/closing processing period is started. During the special electric opening/closing processing period, a round game in which the second special electric accessory 58b is opened is executed 12 times (12 rounds). The number of times the second special electric accessory 58b is opened in one round game is one, and the second special electric accessory 58b is opened for 5.0 seconds, which is the maximum opening time, in one round game. The game ends when either one of the following conditions is satisfied: or the maximum number of entering balls, 10, enters the second grand prize opening 58a. The closing period (special electric interval period) of the second special electric accessory 58b during the round game is set to 5.9 seconds. When the special electric line opening/closing processing period ends, a special electric line ending period of 0.5 seconds starts.

As described above, in the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot, the maximum opening time for one round during the special electric opening and closing processing period is set to 5.0 seconds, and the maximum number of balls that can enter is set to 10. However, since the shortest interval between launches of game balls is 0.6 seconds, only about 8 game balls can enter the second large winning hole 58a during the maximum opening period of 5.0 seconds. In other words, in the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot, the second special electric device 58b is configured not to close in less than 5.0 seconds due to 10 game balls entering during one opening of the second special electric device 58b. As a result, in the special electric opening/closing scenario A for a V-winning jackpot, regardless of the manner in which the player shoots the game ball, the length of the opening period for one round of the second special electric device 58b is fixed at 5.0 seconds, and the time length (total required time) of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for a V-winning jackpot is 0.5 seconds (special electric opening period) + 5.0 seconds (one round) x 16 (number of rounds) + 3.0 seconds (special electric interval period) x 15 (number of intervals) + 0.5 seconds (special electric ending period), which is fixed at 126.0 seconds.

Similarly, in V-winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario B, the maximum opening time for one round during the special electric opening/closing process period is set to 5.0 seconds, and the maximum number of balls to enter is set to 10, but the Since the shortest firing interval is 0.6 seconds, only about eight game balls at most can enter the second grand prize opening 58a during the maximum opening period of 5.0 seconds. That is, even in the special electric opening/closing scenario B for the V-winning jackpot, the second special electric accessory 58b is opened for 5.0 seconds due to 10 game balls entering during one opening of the second special electric accessory 58b. It is constructed so that it will not close in a shorter time than the As a result, even in the V-winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario B, the length of the opening period of one round of the second special electric accessory 58b is fixed to 5.0 seconds, regardless of the manner in which the game ball is launched by the player. , The time length of the special train opening/closing execution mode (total time required) based on special train opening/closing scenario B for the V-winning jackpot is 0.5 seconds (special train opening period) + 5.0 seconds (1 round) x 12 (number of rounds) ) + 5.9 seconds (special transmission interval period) x 11 (number of intervals) + 0.5 seconds (special transmission ending period), which is fixed at 125.9 seconds.

In this way, in the present embodiment, regardless of which special electric line opening/closing scenario is selected, V-winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario A or V-winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario B, the time length of the special electric opening/closing execution mode is (total required time) is 126.0 seconds or less. Then, the time length (total required time) of the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric switch opening/closing scenario A for the V-winning jackpot, and the time length (total required time) of the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric line opening/closing scenario B for the V-winning jackpot. time) is as small as about 0.1 seconds.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the total required time (2.0 seconds) of the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special train opening/closing scenario A for the special map small hit and the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special train opening/closing scenario A for the V-winning jackpot. The total time required (126.0 seconds) and the time (128.0 seconds, hereinafter also referred to as "total time A") is the total time required for the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special train opening/closing scenario B for special map small winnings. time (2.1 seconds) and the total required time (125.9 seconds) of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario B for the V-winning jackpot (128.0 seconds, hereinafter "total time B") ) is the same as The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described later.

Next, we will explain the general map pass/fail judgment table.

FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the normal pattern validity determination table. As described above, when a game ball enters the normal figure starting gate 35, one value is acquired from the values within the range of 0 to 1199 in the normal figure validity determination counter Cn1. Then, based on the obtained value of the common symbol validity determination counter Cn1 and the common symbol validity determination table, a common symbol validity determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the common symbol is won, is performed.

As shown in FIG. 64, in the regular drawing win/loss judgment table of this embodiment, of the 1200 values of the regular drawing win/loss judgment counter Cn1 from 0 to 1199, four values from 0 to 3 are set as values that will result in a regular drawing win, and the other values are set as values that will result in a regular drawing miss. In other words, in this embodiment, the result of the regular drawing win/loss judgment is a regular drawing win with a probability of 1/300.

“Normal power supply hit” is a determination result that triggers the start of the general power switching execution mode. On the other hand, "outside the normal map" is a determination result that does not trigger the start of the normal power switching execution mode.

Next, we will explain the general map type determination table.

FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the ordinary figure type determination table. As described above, when a game ball enters the normal figure starting gate 35, one value is acquired from the values within the range of 0 to 99 in the normal figure type determination counter Cn2. Then, the normal pattern type determination table is selected according to the result of the above-mentioned normal pattern judgment, and the normal pattern is determined based on the selected normal pattern type judgment table and the obtained value of the normal pattern judgment counter Cn1. A common figure type determination is performed to determine the type.

If the result of the above-mentioned regular map hit/miss judgment is that the regular map is a hit, regular map type judgment table 1 is selected, whereas if the result of the regular map hit/miss judgment is that the regular map is a miss, regular map type judgment table 2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 65(A), the ordinary figure type determination table 1 of this embodiment includes 40 values from 0 to 39 out of 100 values from 0 to 99 of the ordinary figure type determination counter Cn2. Normal symbol A (A per common symbol) is set, 20 values from 40 to 59 are set to normal symbol B (B per common symbol), and 15 values from 60 to 74 are normal symbols. C (C per ordinary symbol), 15 values from 75 to 89 are set to ordinary symbol D (D per ordinary symbol), and 5 values from 90 to 94 are set to ordinary symbol E ( The three values 95 to 97 are set to the normal symbol F (F per common symbol), and the two values 98 to 99 are set to the normal symbol G (F per common symbol). It is set to hit G). The types of ordinary symbols set in the ordinary symbol type determination table 1 all trigger the execution of the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode, but for each type of ordinary symbol, when the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode is executed The types of selected utility power switching scenarios are different. The normal electric power opening/closing scenario is a control program in which the mode of control of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric power switching execution mode is stored, and depending on the type of the general electric utility switching scenario that is selected, the ordinary electric role in the ordinary electric power switching execution mode is stored. The manner in which the object 34b is opened and closed is different.

As shown in FIG. 65(B), in the ordinary pattern type determination table 2 of this embodiment, all 100 values out of 100 values from 0 to 99 of the ordinary pattern type determination counter Cn2 are set to ordinary pattern Z (ordinary pattern miss). In other words, when it is determined that the ordinary pattern is a miss in the ordinary pattern hit/miss determination, the type of the ordinary pattern is determined to be ordinary pattern Z.

Next, we will explain the normal power switching scenario selection table.

Figure 66 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the normal power switching scenario selection table. The normal power switching scenario selection table is a table for selecting a normal power switching scenario corresponding to the type of normal pattern when a normal winning combination is won.

As shown in FIG. 66, in the general electric switch opening/closing scenario selection table of this embodiment, general electric switch opening/closing scenarios A to G are set corresponding to the normal symbols A to G, respectively. In other words, if the general pattern is won in the normal pattern determination and the normal pattern type determination results in normal patterns A to G, the normal pattern opening/closing scenarios A to G are selected when the normal pattern opening/closing execution mode is executed. G will be selected respectively. The details of the normal power switching scenarios A to G will be explained below.

When the normal power switching execution mode based on the normal power switching scenario A is started, a normal power opening period of 5.0 seconds is started first, and then a normal power switching processing period is started. During the normal power switching processing period, the normal electric role 34b opens once, and the opening time for each opening is set to 0.8 seconds. When the normal power switching processing period ends, a normal power ending period of 140.0 seconds is started. Note that if 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of balls that can enter, enter the special chart start port 34a during the normal power switching processing period, the normal electric role 34b will be in a closed state even before the opening time of one time, 0.8 seconds, has elapsed, and the normal power switching processing period will end. However, in this embodiment, since the shortest launch interval of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, it is configured so that 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of balls that can enter, do not enter the special chart start port 34a during the normal power switching processing period.

When the general electric power switching execution mode based on the general electric power switching scenario B is started, first, a general electric power opening period of 5.0 seconds is started, and then a general electric power switching processing period is started. During the normal electric opening/closing processing period, the ordinary electric accessory 34b opens twice, the opening time for each opening is 0.8 seconds, the total opening time is 1.6 seconds, and the ordinary electric accessory 34b opens twice, the opening time for each opening is 0.8 seconds, the total opening time is 1.6 seconds, and the ordinary electric accessory 34b opens twice. The closing period (normal power interval period) of 34b is set to 135.0 seconds. When the general electric power opening/closing processing period ends, a general electric power ending period of 140.0 seconds starts. In addition, during the normal electric switch opening/closing process period, if 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of balls, enter the special figure starting port 34a, the normal electric accessory 34b will have a total opening time of 1.6 Even before the second elapses, the state will be closed and the normal electricity opening/closing processing period will end, but in this embodiment, the shortest firing interval of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, so the normal electricity opening/closing process will end. It is configured so that ten game balls, which is the maximum number of balls that can enter, will not enter the special figure starting opening 34a during the period. The same applies to normal power switching scenarios C to G described below.

The normal power switching scenarios C to G are different from the normal power switching scenario B only in the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened and the total opening time during the normal power switching processing period, and other controls are different from the normal power switching scenario B. Same as scenario B. Specifically, the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened during the normal electricity switching processing period of the normal electricity switching scenario C is three times, and the number of openings of the normal electric accessory 34b during the normal electricity switching processing period of the normal electricity switching scenario D is three times. The number of times is 4, and the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened during the ordinary electric switching processing period of the ordinary electric switching scenario E is 5 times. The number of openings is 6 times, and the number of openings of the normal electric accessory 34b during the normal electricity switching processing period of the normal electricity switching scenario G is 7 times.

In this embodiment, the length of the closing period (normal power interval period) set in the normal power switching scenario (135.0 seconds) and the length of the normal power ending period (140.0 seconds) are both set to a time longer than the total required time (126.0 seconds) of the special power switching execution mode based on the special power switching scenario A for the V-winning jackpot and the total required time (125.9 seconds) of the special power switching execution mode based on the special power switching scenario B for the V-winning jackpot. Furthermore, the length of the closing period (normal power interval period) set in the normal power switching scenario (135.0 seconds) and the length of the normal power ending period (140.0 seconds) are both set to a time longer than the total time A (128.0 seconds) and the total time B (128.0 seconds). The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described later.

In addition, in the following explanation, winning a special pattern small hit in the special pattern judgment and determining that the special pattern is A in the special pattern type judgment is also referred to as "winning the special pattern small winning A in the special pattern lottery." express. The same applies to special symbol B. Furthermore, the fact that the winning pattern was won in the normal pattern determination and the normal pattern A was determined in the normal pattern type determination is also expressed as "winning the normal pattern A in the general pattern lottery." The same applies to normal symbols B to G.

《2-3》Electrical configuration of audio light emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

Figure 67 is a block diagram that mainly shows the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted.

The audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 includes an MPU 92 which is a calculation device that controls the entire audio emission control device 90, and a speaker 46 that generates a sound signal and operates based on the generated sound signal. It is equipped with a sound output LSI 97 that drives a sound output LSI 97 to output sound, and an audio data ROM 98 that is a memory in which various audio data are stored. The audio data ROM 98 is connected to a sound output LSI 97, and the sound output LSI 97 is connected to the MPU 92 via a signal line.

The MPU 92 is an element that incorporates a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in a portion of the area of the ROM 93. The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data, and the like, when the control programs stored in the ROM 93 are executed. For example, a flag storage area 94a, a counter area 94b, a lottery counter area 94c, and the like are provided in a portion of the area of the RAM 94. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The sound output LSI 97 is a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) that generates a sound to be reproduced based on instructions from the MPU 92 and outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46. Specifically, when the sound output LSI 97 receives a playback start command from the MPU 92, it specifies the sound that should be started playing as instructed by the playback start command, and uses the sound data corresponding to the identified sound for audio data. The sound to be read out from the ROM 98 and reproduced is generated. Then, the sound output LSI 97 outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46. Further, when the sound output LSI 97 receives a playback end command from the MPU 92, it specifies the sound to be stopped, which is instructed by the playback end command, and ends the playback of the specified sound.

The sound output LSI 97 has 16 audio channels, and can simultaneously generate up to 16 sounds, synthesize (mix), and output them from the speaker 46. The sound output LSI 97 can also set the output of the sound being played back for each audio channel to mute (mute) in accordance with instructions from the MPU 92, and can also cancel the mute setting. For an audio channel set to mute, the sound output LSI 97 reads out the corresponding audio data and generates the sound to be played back, but when mixing with the sound of another audio channel, the sound level of the audio channel that is the target of the mute setting is set to 0, or the sound of the audio channel that is the target of the mute setting is not input to the mixing circuit, so that the sound of the audio channel that is the target of the mute setting is not mixed. As a result, the sound of the audio channel that is the target of the mute setting is not output from the speaker 46.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 60 and the performance operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and the MPU 92 receives various commands from the main control device 60 and receives signals indicating the operation mode of the performance operation button 24. The speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and the display control device 100 is also connected.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 mediates the reading and writing of data by adjusting the timing of the MPU 102, video RAM 107, etc., and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

2-4 Overview of Processing by Gaming Machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

Figure 68 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. Figures 69 and 70 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the presentation executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment.

A player who plays a game in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment first operates the operation handle 25 so that the game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35 provided at the lower center of the game board 30. Adjust the firing strength of the game ball. As shown in FIG. 68, when the game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 executes the above-mentioned general pattern lottery, and displays the changing normal symbols in the normal pattern display section 38a. (time t1). Further, the audio emission control device 90 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 in conjunction with the start of the variable display of the normal symbols in the normal symbol display section 38a.

Thereafter, when the set regular symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, the main controller 60 stops and displays the fluctuating regular symbol in the normal symbol display section 38a in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery, and emits sound. The control device 90 stops and displays the changing decorative symbols in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the common symbol lottery (time t2). By checking the display mode of the normal symbols stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display section 38a or the display mode of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41, the player enters the lottery of the regular symbol lottery. Be able to recognize the results. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the result of the ordinary drawing lottery is a winning ordinary drawing, the decorative symbols that are changing in the main display area MA are displayed when the numbers in the three decorative symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are the same. The display is stopped in a certain display mode (for example, "555"). On the other hand, if the result of the general drawing lottery is out of ordinary drawings, the decorative patterns that are changing in the main display area MA are displayed in a display mode (where the numbers in the three decorative pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are not the same (do not line up)). For example, the display is stopped at "135").

The player repeatedly places game balls into the normal game start gate 35 until he wins the normal game lottery. In this embodiment, since the normal game start gate 35 is provided downstream of the normal game start gate 35, the game ball that enters the normal game start gate 35 goes straight into the normal game start gate 32, and one game ball is paid out from the payout device 71 as a prize ball.

If the normal symbol lottery results in a win, the main control device 60 stops and displays the changing normal symbol in the normal symbol display section 38a in a display mode corresponding to the type of the normal symbol win (type of normal symbol), then selects a normal power opening and closing scenario corresponding to the type of the normal symbol win (type of normal symbol), and starts a normal power opening and closing execution mode based on the selected normal power opening and closing scenario (time t2). Meanwhile, the audio and light emission control device 90 stops and displays the changing decorative symbol in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 in a display mode corresponding to the number of times the normal electric role 34b is opened in the normal power opening and closing execution mode executed after the winning of the normal symbol win.

Specifically, in this embodiment, when a normal winning pattern A is won in which the normal electric role 34b is opened once in the normal power opening and closing execution mode, the decorative pattern being changed is displayed in a display mode such as "1↓1" (a display mode in which only the decorative pattern in the central decorative pattern row Z2 is scrolled) to generate a reach, and then the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode such as "111". Also, for example, when a normal winning pattern B is won in which the normal electric role 34b is opened twice in the normal power opening and closing execution mode, the decorative pattern being changed is displayed in a display mode such as "2↓2" to generate a reach, as shown in FIG. 69(A), and then the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode such as "222" as shown in FIG. 69(B). Therefore, when a reach occurs with the decorative pattern that is changing in the main display area MA, the player can recognize the number of times that the normal electric device 34b will open in the normal power opening and closing execution mode that is executed when a normal hit is won, so the player can be given not only a sense of anticipation about whether or not he will win a normal hit, but also a sense of anticipation about the number of times that the normal electric device 34b will open after winning. The reason why the player has anticipation about the number of times that the normal electric device 34b will open will be explained later.

In the example shown in Figure 68, we will explain what happens when the regular lottery results in a regular prize B.

As a result of the utility map lottery, if the utility map B is won, the main controller 60 starts the utility power switching execution mode based on the utility power switching scenario B described above, and starts the utility power opening/closing period of the utility power switching execution mode. (time t2). As described above, in the normal power switching execution mode based on the normal power switching scenario B, the normal electric accessory 34b opens twice. Furthermore, when the general electric power opening period starts, the audio emission control device 90 starts the general electric power opening production and the right-handed hitting notification process. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70(A), a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 as a general electric line opening effect, and a special electric line opening/closing execution mode ( A performance suggesting that a so-called jackpot (so-called jackpot) will occur twice is executed. In addition, in the right-handed hitting notification process in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. The hitting instruction image GD1 is displayed, and the speaker 46 outputs a sound such as "Hit right!".

The player, who recognizes that he should "hit right" through the right hit notification process, operates the operating handle 25 to perform a "right hit". When the player performs a "right hit", the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 reaches the circulation passage 301 provided on the right side of the game area PA of the game board 30. Here, in this embodiment, it is configured so that it takes 0.7 seconds or more for the game ball to pass over the closed normal electric device 34b. In this embodiment, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 at 0.6 second intervals. Therefore, if the player continues to perform a "right hit" after the start of the right hit notification process, at least one game ball will be passing over the closed normal electric device 34b (a game ball will be placed on it).

Then, when the normal power opening period ends, the main control device 60 starts a normal power opening/closing processing period and starts opening the normal electric accessory 34b for the first time (time t3). Then, the game ball passing over the ordinary electric accessory 34b falls below the opened ordinary electric accessory 34b, and enters the special figure starting port 34a provided below the ordinary electric accessory 34b. The ball enters (time t4).

When a game ball enters the special pattern start hole 34a, the main control device 60 executes the special pattern lottery described above and starts the variable display of the special pattern on the special pattern display section 37a, and the sound and light emission control device 90 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the sub-display area SA of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 (time t4). In this embodiment, the special pattern variation time is set to 0.5 seconds every time, regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery.

After that, when the set special pattern change time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the main control unit 60 stops and displays the changing special pattern in the special pattern display unit 37a in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern lottery, and the sound and light emission control unit 90 stops and displays the changing decorative pattern in the sub-display area SA of the display surface 41a of the pattern display unit 41 in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern lottery (time t5). As described above, in this embodiment, the special pattern lottery is always configured to win a special pattern small win (special pattern small win A or special pattern small win B). For example, if the result of the special pattern lottery is special pattern small win A, the sound and light emission control unit 90 stops and displays the changing decorative pattern in the sub-display area SA in a display mode such as "777", and if the result of the special pattern lottery is special pattern small win B, the sound and light emission control unit 90 stops and displays the changing decorative pattern in the sub-display area SA in a display mode such as "333".

In the example shown in FIG. 68, a case will be described in which the special figure small winning A is won as a result of the special figure lottery.

As a result of the special drawing lottery, if the special drawing small hit A is won, the main control device 60 starts the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the above-mentioned special electric drawing opening/closing scenario A for the special drawing small winning, and The opening period starts (time t5).

Then, when the special electric opening period ends, the main control device 60 starts the special electric opening/closing processing period and starts opening the first special electric device 57b (time t6). As described above, in the special electric opening/closing processing period in the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the special chart small win, the first special electric device 57b opens once. Here, in this embodiment, it is configured so that it takes 1.0 seconds or more for a game ball to pass over the first special electric device 57b in the closed state. And, in this embodiment, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 at 0.6 second intervals. Therefore, if the player continues to "hit right" after the start of the right hit notification process, at least one game ball is passing over the first special electric device 57b in the closed state (a game ball is on it). Therefore, when the first special electric device 57b opens, the game ball passing over the first special electric device 57b falls below the opened first special electric device 57b and enters the first large prize opening 57a located below the first special electric device 57b (time t7).

When a game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a, the game ball enters the V winning hole 57av as it is (time t7). That is, in the present embodiment, if the player continues to play right-handed, he can easily insert the game ball into the first big prize opening 57a and the V prize opening 57av while opening the first special electric accessory 57b ( It has a configuration that allows the ball to enter the ball (reliably).

When the game ball enters the V-winning hole 57av, the audio emission control device 90 produces a V-winning performance that suggests that the game ball enters the V-winning hole 57av and wins the V-winning jackpot. The main controller 60 executes a production suggesting that the special train opening/closing execution mode of the round is started, and after the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special train opening/closing scenario A for the special map small win that is being executed ends, A 16-round special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the above-mentioned V winning jackpot special electric line opening/closing scenario A is started (time t8).

When the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot is started, the special electric opening/closing processing period starts after 0.5 seconds of the special electric opening period has elapsed, and the first of the 16 openings of the second special electric device 58b (the first round of round play) is started (time t9). Then, the second special electric device 58b is closed when either the maximum opening time of 5.0 seconds has elapsed or the maximum number of balls, 10, has entered is met. After the second special electric device 58b is closed, the second opening (the second round of round play) of the second special electric device 58b is started after 3.0 seconds of the closing period (special electric interval period) has elapsed. After that, after the 16th opening (the 16th round of round play) of the second special electric device 58b is completed and closed, the special electric ending period starts, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot is ended by 0.5 seconds of the special electric ending period (time t10). During the special electric opening and closing processing period of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on this V-winning jackpot special electric opening and closing scenario A, the player can win a large number of game balls as prize balls by having the game ball enter the second large prize opening 58a while the second special electric device 58b is open.

As mentioned above, in the V-winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario A, the maximum opening time for one round during the special electric opening/closing processing period is set to 5.0 seconds, and the maximum number of balls entered is set to 10. Since the shortest firing interval of game balls is 0.6 seconds, only about 8 game balls are allowed to enter the second prize opening 58a during the maximum opening period of 5.0 seconds. I can't. That is, in the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot, the second special electric accessory 58b is opened for 5.0 seconds due to ten game balls entering the second special electric accessory 58b during one opening. It is also structured so that it will not close down in a short period of time. As a result, in the V-winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario A, the length of the opening period of one round of the second special electric accessory 58b is It is fixed at 5.0 seconds, and the time length (total required time) of the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special train opening/closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot is 0.5 seconds (special train opening period) + 5.0 seconds (1 round) x 16 (number of rounds) + 3.0 seconds (special electric interval period) x 15 (number of intervals) + 0.5 seconds (special electric line ending period), which is fixed at 126.0 seconds. That is, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot in this embodiment is started for 126.0 seconds regardless of the manner in which the game ball is fired by the player and the behavior of the game ball after firing. It will be over in seconds.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time required from the time when the first opening of the normal electric device 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode begins (time t3) to the time when the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the above-mentioned V-winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario A begins (time t8) is configured to be a maximum of about 4 seconds if the player is performing a "right hit" as instructed by the right hit notification process.

In this embodiment, since the closing period (normal power interval period) in the power switching processing period of the power switching execution mode based on the power switching scenario B is set to 135.0 seconds, the normal electric accessory After 135.0 seconds have elapsed since the first closing of the electric accessory 34b, the second opening of the normal electric accessory 34b starts (time t11).

As a result, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot ends before the second opening of the normal electric accessory 34b starts. become.

Then, when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a due to the second opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the ordinary electricity opening/closing scenario B, the main control device 60 controls the above-mentioned special figure The lottery is executed, and the special symbol display section 37a starts to display the special symbols in a variable manner, and the audio emission control device 90 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the sub-display area SA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 ( time t12).

The process flow thereafter differs only in that the normal power interval period (closed period) in the normal power switching execution mode is replaced with the normal power ending period, and the process flow from time t13 to time t18 shown in FIG. 68 is the same as the process flow from time t5 to time t10 described above. The normal power ending period of the normal power switching execution mode based on the normal power switching scenario B is set to 140.0 seconds, so even if there is a reserved normal power lottery, the next normal power lottery will not be executed until 140.0 seconds of the normal power ending period that starts after the second closing of the normal electric role 34b have elapsed. In other words, the next normal power lottery is configured not to be executed before the special power switching execution mode based on the second V-winning jackpot has ended. After that, 140.0 seconds of the normal power ending period have elapsed and the normal power switching execution mode has ended (time t19).

In addition, in this embodiment, a general electric power ending effect indicating that the general electric power opening/closing execution mode ends is executed for 5 seconds before the end of the general electric power ending period. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70(B), a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 as an ending effect for the general electric power station, and a character string such as "Did you have fun? See you soon!!" indicate.

As described above, in this embodiment, the process from time t3 to time t10 is repeated a number of times corresponding to the number of times that the normal electric device 34b is opened in the normal power opening and closing execution mode. In other words, the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the 16-round or 12-round V-winning jackpot is executed a number of times corresponding to the number of times that the normal electric device 34b is opened in the normal power opening and closing execution mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 68, a case was explained in which the special chart small prize A was won in the first and second special chart lottery, and then the game ball entered the V entry port 57av and won the V entry big prize. However, if the special chart small prize B was won in the first or second special chart lottery, and then the game ball entered the V entry port 57av and won the V entry big prize, the main control device 60 will start the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the above-mentioned special power opening and closing scenario B for the V entry big prize during the normal power interval period in the normal power opening and closing execution mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the special figure starting port 34a is not provided with a special figure holding function, if the second opening of the normal electric accessory 34b starts and the game ball is placed in the special figure starting hole 34a. If the special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the special electricity opening/closing scenario for the V prize jackpot has not ended even when the ball enters, the special drawing drawing based on the entry of the game ball into the special drawing starting port 34a will not be executed. . As a result, it is impossible to win the special drawing small prize in the special drawing lottery, and it is also impossible to win the V prize winning jackpot.

Also, unlike the example shown in FIG. 68, if the player does not perform a "right hit" even though the right hit notification process is being executed, the game ball cannot enter the special chart start port 34a while the normal electric device 34b is open, or the game ball cannot enter the first large prize port 57a and the V prize port 57av while the first special electric device 57b is open. In this case, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario for the special chart small win described above and the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario for the V prize big win are not started, and the player waits for the closing period (normal power interval period) until the next opening of the normal electric device 34b in the normal power opening and closing execution mode or the normal power ending period to end.

As explained above, according to this embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times that a player can consecutively win a V-winning jackpot is determined based on the type of normal symbol. More specifically, based on the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electricity opening/closing execution mode, the upper limit number of times the special electricity opening/closing execution mode can be executed based on the V winning jackpot during the execution of the general electricity opening/closing execution mode is determined. Therefore, the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode becomes a very important factor for the player. Therefore, when a general figure is won in the ordinary figure lottery and the ordinary electric power opening/closing execution mode is executed, the player may be interested in the number of openings of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric utility opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to make the game more interesting and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, since a special jackpot is not set as a result of the special jackpot lottery, various regulations that are imposed on pachinko machines in which a special jackpot is set are not imposed. This increases the freedom of design of pachinko machines, making it possible to design and manufacture pachinko machines with a variety of playability (specifications).

In addition, this embodiment does not have a high probability mode (so-called variable probability state) in which the probability of winning a special drawing jackpot is high in the special drawing lottery, so the control can be simplified and it is possible to The various regulations that are imposed on pachinko machines are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine increases, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture pachinko machines with various playability (specs).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the high frequency support mode (so-called electric support mode) increases the probability of winning a common symbol in the common symbol lottery, and increases the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened when winning a common symbol. Since the machine does not have any mode), control can be simplified and the various regulations that are imposed on pachinko machines that have these modes are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine increases, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture pachinko machines with various gaming features.

Furthermore, since this embodiment does not have a function to hold the special drawing drawing, the special drawing holding area for holding the special drawing drawing can be omitted from the main side RAM 64, and the storage area of the main side RAM 64 can be saved. It becomes possible to effectively utilize it for other purposes.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the execution of the regular electricity opening/closing execution mode, the special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed multiple times without a substantial lottery (so-called jackpots occur consecutively). Therefore, when playing a series of jackpots in a general pachinko machine, for example, even though it is in high probability mode (so-called variable probability state), it is difficult to win the jackpot in the jackpot lottery and the next special electric opening/closing execution mode does not start easily. This makes it possible to avoid such a situation (so-called jamming).

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the general figure starting gate 35, and the general figure is won in the general figure lottery and the general electric switch opening/closing execution mode is executed, the game ball enters the normal figure starting gate 35, and when the normal figure opening/closing execution mode is executed, If the firing mode reaches 301 (the so-called "right-handed" firing mode) and the game ball is continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals, the game ball enters the special figure starting port during the normal power opening/closing execution mode. 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small winning is executed, and during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small winning, the game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small winning is executed. The game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 57a enters the V winning hole 57av, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed.

According to this embodiment, the time required from the start to the end of the normal power opening and closing execution mode can be set to a time longer than the combined time (combined time: 128.0 seconds) of the time required from the start to the end of the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart small win and the time required from the start to the end of the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning big win. More specifically, in a situation where the game ball is continuously launched at 0.6 second intervals in a launch mode (so-called "right hit" launch mode) in which the game ball reaches the circulation path 301, if the time required from the start of the normal power opening and closing execution mode to the end of the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning big win (the time from time t2 to time t10 in FIG. 68) is defined as the specific required time, the time required from the start to the end of the normal power opening and closing execution mode can be set to a time longer than the specific required time. Therefore, even after the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a special small win ends and then the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a V-winning big win ends, the normal electric opening and closing execution mode continues, and while the normal electric opening and closing execution mode continues, the normal electric device 34b may transition to an open state, allowing the game ball to enter the special starting hole 34a.

According to the present embodiment, in the case where the ordinary electric accessory 34b is won in the general figure lottery in which the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened twice or more, the special electric power accessory 34b based on the V winning jackpot is selected during the execution of the ordinary electric accessory opening/closing execution mode. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the normal electric accessory 34b transitions from the closed state to the open state, so the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot ends. becomes possible. If the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V-winning jackpot ends, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is executed again, and then the V-winning jackpot is again executed. The special electric opening/closing execution mode based on this will be executed. In other words, when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is won at a general figure that opens twice or more in the ordinary figure lottery and the ordinary electric accessory opening/closing execution mode is executed, the special electric accessory opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small winning and the V winning jackpot are executed. The special electric opening/closing execution mode based on this will be executed multiple times. When the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed multiple times, the player can have an opportunity to win a large amount of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the power switching execution mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the game ball is moved to the special figure start opening 34a while the special symbols are changing, during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit, or during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. When the ball enters the special drawing, it avoids acquiring various counter values for the special drawing lottery (in other words, it does not have a function to hold the special drawing lottery). Even if the game ball enters the special pattern starting port 34a during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a hit or during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot, the special electric opening/closing execution based on a special figure small hit will not be executed afterwards. mode will not be executed, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will also not be executed, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, we want the player to finish the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot before the timing when the game ball can enter the special figure starting port 34a comes. It can create a sense of tension.

In addition, if, unlike this embodiment, a configuration is adopted that does not avoid obtaining various counter values for the special chart lottery even if a game ball enters the special chart start port 34a during the fluctuation of the special pattern, during the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a small special chart win, or during the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot, (i.e., a configuration with a special chart lottery reservation function), if multiple game balls enter the special chart start port 34a in one opening of the normal electric device 34b, multiple special chart lotteries will be reserved, and the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a small special chart win and the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot may be executed multiple times, regardless of the number of times the normal electric device 34b is opened in the normal electric opening and closing execution mode.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, even if a plurality of game balls enter the special figure starting port 34a in one opening of the normal electric accessory 34b, one of the ordinary electric accessory 34b It is possible to realize a game in which the number of executions of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is executed once for each opening of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is predetermined regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. Therefore, the length of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot does not become longer than the predetermined length. Therefore, for example, even at the timing when the normal electric accessory 34b transitions to the open state because the length of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has become longer than a predetermined length, the special electricity It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the opening/closing execution mode has not yet ended. As a result, even when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot does not end, and even though the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player such that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is not executed and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot is configured so that the time required from start to end is a predetermined length regardless of the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after launch. This prevents the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot from ending prematurely during the normal power interval period of the normal power opening and closing execution mode, which would lengthen the period from the end of the special electric opening and closing execution mode to the next opening of the normal electric device 34b, causing the game to drag on.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the normal power switching execution mode, the normal electric accessory 34b is in the normal power interval period, which is a period from the transition from the open state to the closed state until the transition from the closed state to the open state. The length can be set to a longer time (135.0 seconds) than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (for example, 126.0 seconds). The reason for adopting such a configuration will be explained.

First, unlike this embodiment, the length of the general electric power interval period of the general electric power opening/closing execution mode is set to the time required from the start to the end of the special electric power opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (for example, 126.0 A case will be described in which a comparative example configuration is adopted in which the time is set to a shorter time (for example, 80.0 seconds).

First, in the configuration of the comparative example, a case will be described in which a game ball enters the special chart start port 34a in the first opening state of the normal electric role 34b in the normal power opening and closing execution mode. In this case, the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart small win is started, and then the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is started. After that, the first normal power interval period in the normal power opening and closing execution mode ends, and in the second opening state of the normal electric role 34b, the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is still continuing. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the special chart start port 34a, the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart small win and the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will not be started anew. After that, the second normal power interval period in the normal power opening and closing execution mode ends, and in the third opening state of the normal electric role 34b, the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has already ended, so if the game ball enters the special chart start port 34a, a new special power opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart small win will be started, and then the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will be started. In other words, in this case, the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart small win and the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will be started when the game ball enters the special chart start port 34a in the first and third opening states of the normal electric role 34b in the normal power opening and closing execution mode, but will not be started even if the game ball enters the special chart start port 34a in the second opening state.

Next, in the configuration of a comparative example, a case will be described in which the game ball does not enter the special figure starting port 34a in the first opening state of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not started, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not started. After that, the first electric power interval period in the electric power opening/closing execution mode has ended, and in the second open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has not been executed, so the game ball If the ball enters the special figure starting hole 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win will be started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will be started. After that, the second general electric power interval period in the general electric power opening/closing execution mode ends, and when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened for the third time, the special electric electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is still continuing. . Therefore, even if the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will not be newly started. After that, the third general electric power interval period in the general electric power opening/closing execution mode ends, and when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened for the fourth time, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has already ended, so the game When the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small win is newly started, and then a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot is started. That is, in this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot are in the second and fourth opening states of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode. The game starts when the game ball enters the special pattern starting port 34a, but even if the game ball enters the special pattern starting port 34a in the third open state, the game will not start. .

As such, unlike this embodiment, if the configuration of the comparative example is adopted in which the length of the normal power interval period in the normal power opening/closing execution mode is set to a time shorter than the length of the special power opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot, the timing of the start of the special power opening/closing execution mode based on a special chart small win and the special power opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot during the execution of the normal power opening/closing execution mode is not fixed, which causes the flow of the game to become complicated and makes it difficult to control the game.

Next, we will explain the case where the configuration of this embodiment is adopted, in which the length of the normal power interval period in the normal power opening and closing execution mode is set to a time (135.0 seconds) longer than the time (126.0 seconds) required from the start to the end of the special power opening and closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot.

First, in the configuration of this embodiment, a case where a game ball enters the special chart start port 34a in the first opening state of the normal electric role 34b in the normal power opening and closing execution mode will be described. In this case, the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart small win is executed, and then the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed. After that, the first normal power interval period in the normal power opening and closing execution mode ends, and in the second opening state of the normal electric role 34b, the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has already ended, so if the game ball enters the special chart start port 34a, a new special power opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart small win is started, and then the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is started.

Next, in the configuration of this embodiment, a case will be described where the game ball does not enter the special chart start port 34a in the first opening state of the normal electric role 34b in the normal power opening and closing execution mode. In this case, the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart small win is not executed, and the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed either. After that, the first normal power interval period in the normal power opening and closing execution mode ends, and in the second opening state of the normal electric role 34b, the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed, so if the game ball enters the special chart start port 34a, the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart small win will be started, and then the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will be started.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the length of the regular power interval period of the general power switch opening/closing execution mode is set to the time required from the start to the end of the special power switch opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (126.0 seconds). ) is set to a longer time (135.0 seconds), so at the timing when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is in the open state in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, it is assumed that the ordinary electric accessory 34b is in the open state. Regardless of the number of times, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not being executed or has already ended. Therefore, even though the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a when the normal electric accessory 34b is in the open state in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the V There is no possibility that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the winning jackpot will not be started. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to fix the start timing of the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win and the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot during the execution of the general electric switch opening/closing execution mode, It is possible to suppress the flow of the game from becoming complicated, and by setting the number of times that the ordinary electric accessory 34b is in the open state during the execution of the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to execute the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to set an upper limit on the number of times that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit in the middle and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be executed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the general electric accessory 34b last transitions from the open state to the closed state in the general electric utility opening/closing execution mode until the general electric drawing lottery becomes executable, which is the general electric utility ending. The length of the period can be set to a longer time (140.0 seconds) than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (for example, 126.0 seconds). The reason for adopting this configuration will be explained.

First, unlike this embodiment, if a configuration is adopted in which the length of the general electric line ending period is set to a shorter time than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. I will explain about it. In this configuration, for example, if a general drawing drawing is executed after the end of the general electricity ending period and a general drawing is won, the general electricity opening/closing execution mode is executed, and the game is played during the execution of the general electricity opening/closing execution mode. There is a possibility that the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is executed. However, in this configuration, if the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V-winning jackpot is executed immediately after the start of the general electric power ending period, the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot even after the general electrician ending period ends. The execution mode continues, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot may continue even at the timing when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a. In this case, even if the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win is not executed, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player.

In response to this, according to this embodiment, the length of the normal power ending period can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the special power opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot, so it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the special power opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot continues even after the normal power ending period has ended, and to prevent situations that are disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the length of the normal power ending period is set to be longer than the normal power interval period, so that the series of gameplay flows realized during the normal power interval period of the normal power opening and closing execution mode can also be realized during the normal power ending period of the normal power opening and closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to realize a new game in which the special power opening and closing execution mode based on a special chart small win and the special power opening and closing execution mode based on a V winning big win can be executed during both the normal power interval period and the normal power ending period in the normal power opening and closing execution mode.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be executed during the electric power interval period of the general electric switch opening/closing execution mode, so that the number of the electric power interval periods included in the general electric switch opening/closing execution mode is This is a very important element for people. Therefore, when a player wins a general map in a general map lottery and the general power switch opening/closing execution mode is executed, the player will not know how many regular power switch interval periods are included in the general power switch opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to arouse interest in the game and increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be executed multiple times between the start and the end of the general electric switch opening/closing execution mode. Whether or not the game is successful is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the player wins the general map in the general map lottery and the general power switch opening/closing execution mode is started, and the general power switch opening/closing execution mode starts. In this case, it is possible to make the player interested in how many times the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In addition, according to this embodiment, a presentation (Figures 69, 70 (A), etc.) is executed that suggests the number of times that the normal electric device 34b will open in the normal power opening and closing execution mode. Therefore, when a normal map is won in the normal map lottery and the normal power opening and closing execution mode is executed, the player can be made interested and concerned about the number of times that the normal electric device 34b will open in the normal power opening and closing execution mode, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the case of winning the normal drawing lottery (the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened ( In other words, since it suggests the number of consecutive winnings of V-winning jackpots, it can make the player feel that they want the decorative symbols with as large a number as possible to stop on the active line L1, which improves the interest of the game. can be achieved. Further, when a reach is generated by a decorative pattern with a large number, it is possible to make the player have high expectations.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the opening operation of the normal electric accessory 34b is performed at least a plurality of times for one common symbol based on the result of the common symbol lottery. When one cycle from the opening of the normal electric accessory 34b (time t3 in FIG. 68) to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (time t10) is defined as one special game round, the ordinary electric accessory 34b is defined as one special game round. One special game round is executed based on the object 34b being opened at the first timing (time t3 in FIG. 68), and the normal electric The accessory 34b is controlled to be opened. Therefore, it is possible to execute one special game a plurality of times for one common symbol in the common symbol lottery.

In addition, according to this embodiment, a limited period is generated to restrict the start of the variable display of the normal symbol. More specifically, a predetermined limited period is generated in the period from the first timing to the end of one special game round that occurs after the second timing. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the variable display of the normal symbol from starting before the end of one special game round, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a normal symbol lottery is executed even though one special game round has not ended. As a result, for example, even if the result of the normal symbol lottery is a normal symbol win that is advantageous to the player, because one special game round that has already been executed has not ended, it is possible to prevent a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, such as the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special symbol small win not being executed even if the game ball enters the special symbol start port 34a.

In addition, in this embodiment, multiple types of V-winning jackpots (V-winning jackpots A and B) are set, so not only the number of V-winning jackpots won in one utility switch opening/closing execution mode, but also the It is also possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation as to whether he or she will win the type of V-winning jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, the total time A (128.0 seconds) obtained by adding up the total time required for the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on special electric opening and closing scenario A for special small win (2.0 seconds) and the total time required for the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on special electric opening and closing scenario A for V winning jackpot (126.0 seconds) is the same as the total time B obtained by adding up the total time required for the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on special electric opening and closing scenario B for special small win (2.1 seconds) and the total time required for the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on special electric opening and closing scenario B for V winning jackpot (125.9 seconds). Therefore, the timing at which the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on special electric opening and closing scenario A for special small win is ended is the same when the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on special electric opening and closing scenario A for V winning jackpot is executed and then the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on special electric opening and closing scenario B for special small win is executed and then the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on special electric opening and closing scenario B for V winning jackpot is executed. As a result, the waiting time from the end of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot to the next opening of the normal electric device 34b will be the same, so for example, the content of the performance executed during that waiting time can be standardized.

In addition, in this embodiment, a normal game start gate 35 is provided in the lower center of the game board 30, and a normal prize entry port 32 is provided in a position where a game ball that enters the normal game start gate 35 can enter, so that a game can be realized in which a player is given prize balls while hoping to win a normal game in a normal lottery, just like a general pachinko machine in which a special game start port 34a is provided in the lower center of the game board 30.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player operates the operating handle 25 so that the game balls enter the regular figure starting gate 35, so many game balls enter the regular figure starting gate 35. It will be a ball. In this embodiment, since the game ball that enters the normal figure starting gate 35 enters the general winning hole 32, it is possible to increase the proportion of the number of prize balls from the general winning hole 32 to the total number of prize balls. can. In other words, it is possible to lower the accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls due to the action of the accessory to the total number of prize balls.

《2-5》Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. First, the processing executed in the main control device 60 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

In order to proceed with the above-described game, the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the main MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power outage signal, but a description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
71 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sm0101, a process of reading various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of the various detection sensors connected to the main control unit 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is saved. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm0102.

In step Sm0102, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the value of the random number initial value counter Cini, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter Cini is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0103.

In step Sm0103, the values of the normal winning/losing determination counter Cn1, the normal winning/losing type determination counter Cn2, the normal winning/losing reach determination counter Cn3, the special winning/losing determination counter Cs1, and the special winning/losing type determination counter Cs2 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the values of the normal winning/losing determination counter Cn1, the normal winning/losing type determination counter Cn2, the normal winning/losing reach determination counter Cn3, the special winning/losing determination counter Cs1, and the special winning/losing type determination counter Cs2, and when each of these counter values reaches its maximum value, each is cleared to 0. The updated values of each of the determination counters Cn1 to Cn3, Cs1, and Cs2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, proceed to step Sm0104.

In step Sm0104, ball entry processing for the normal pattern starting gate is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the normal pattern starting gate 35. Details of the ball entry process for the normal figure starting gate will be described later. After executing step Sm0104, the process advances to step Sm0105.

In step Sm0105, a ball entry process for the special chart start port is executed based on the game ball entering the special chart start port 34a. The details of the ball entry process for the special chart start port will be described later. After executing step Sm0105, the process proceeds to step Sm0106.

In step Sm0106, ball entry processing for the V winning hole is executed based on the game ball entering the V winning hole 57av. Details of the ball entry process for the V winning hole will be described later. After executing step Sm0106, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Ball entry process for general starting gate>
Next, a description will be given of the ball entry process for the normal figure starting gate. The ball entry process for the regular pattern starting gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (Sm0104 in FIG. 71).

Figure 72 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the normal map start gate. In step Sm0201, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the normal map start gate 35. If it is determined in step Sm0201 that a game ball has entered the normal map start gate 35 (Sm0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0202, where it is determined whether or not the number of reserved normal map lottery items SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). The number of reserved normal map lottery items SN is a value indicating the number of reserved normal map lotteries (waiting to be executed) based on the entry of a game ball into the normal map start gate 35. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved normal map lottery items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm0201 that a game ball has not entered the normal map start gate 35 (Sm0201: NO), the ball entry processing for this normal map start gate is terminated.

In step Sm0202, if it is determined that the number SN of ordinary drawings pending is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) (Sm0202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0203, and 1 is added to the number SN of ordinary drawings pending. After that, the process advances to step Sm0204.

In step Sm0204, the values of the regular winning/losing determination counter Cn1, the regular type determination counter Cn2, and the regular reach determination counter Cn3 are stored in the first free memory area in the regular reserve area 64d of RAM 64, that is, in the memory area corresponding to the regular lottery reserve number SN to which 1 was added in step Sm0203. Then, proceed to step Sm0205.

In step Sm0205, a normal figure destination determination process is executed. The ordinary figure destination determination process is based on the information (ordinary figure reservation information) of each value of the ordinary figure appropriateness determination counter Cn1, the ordinary figure type determination counter Cn2, and the ordinary figure reach determination counter Cn3 stored in the ordinary figure reservation area 64d. , the judgment results of the normal pattern lottery (the judgment results of the normal pattern validity judgment, the judgment results of the normal pattern type judgment, the judgment results of the normal pattern reach occurrence, etc.) This is a process that is determined before becoming a target of the drawing lottery. After executing step Sm0205, the process advances to step Sm0206.

In step Sm0206, a regular map hold command is set. Specifically, the result of the regular map destination determination process executed based on the information (regular map hold information) of the values of the regular map hit/miss determination counter Cn1, the regular map type determination counter Cn2, and the regular map reach determination counter Cn3 stored in the regular map hold area 64d is set as a regular map hold command.

The regular game hold command instructs the sub-side control device to transmit the determination result of the regular game destination determination process for the regular game hold information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the regular game starting gate 35. This is a command to make the figure reservation information recognized before it becomes the target of the regular figure lottery which usually involves a change in the symbol. The standard figure hold command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 75: step Sm0503) of the normal processing described later. When the audio emission control device 90 receives the common symbol holding command, the display control device issues a command to change the display in the common symbol pending display area Dn of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the common symbol lottery pending number SN. Send to 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the regular symbol holding display area Dn of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the regular symbol lottery pending number SN.

After executing step Sm0206, the ball entry process for the regular pattern starting gate is completed.

On the other hand, in step Sm0202, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved regular drawing lots SN is not less than the upper limit (Sm0202: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved regular drawing lots SN is the upper limit, the ball entry process for this regular drawing start gate is terminated without storing the values of the regular drawing win/lose determination counter Cn1, the regular drawing type determination counter Cn2, and the regular drawing reach determination counter Cn3 in the regular drawing reservation area 64d.

<Ball entry processing for special figure starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the special figure starting opening will be explained. Ball entry processing for the special figure starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 71: Sm0105).

Figure 73 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the special chart start port. In step Sm0301, whether or not a game ball has entered the special chart start port 34a is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the special chart start port 34a. In step Sm0301, if it is determined that a game ball has entered the special chart start port 34a (Sm0301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0302, where a prize ball command is set to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm0303. On the other hand, in step Sm0301, if it is determined that a game ball has not entered the special chart start port 34a (Sm0301: NO), the ball entry process for this special chart start port is terminated.

In step Sm0303, it is determined whether the special line opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The special line opening/closing execution mode flag is a flag that is turned ON when the above-mentioned special line opening/closing execution mode is started and turned OFF when the special line opening/closing execution mode ends. In other words, the special line opening/closing execution mode flag is a flag that is ON while the special line opening/closing execution mode is being executed. In step Sm0303, if it is determined that the special line opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (step Sm0303: NO), that is, if it is determined that the special line opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, proceed to step Sm0304.

In step Sm0304, it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is ON. The special symbol fluctuation flag is a flag that is turned ON when the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a starts to fluctuate, and is turned OFF when the special symbol fluctuates. That is, the special symbol fluctuation flag is a flag that is ON while the special symbol is fluctuating. In step Sm0304, if it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation flag is not ON (step Sm0304: NO), that is, if it is determined that the special symbol is not fluctuating, the process advances to step Sm0305.

In step Sm0305, the values of the special drawing hit/miss determination counter Cs1 and the special drawing type determination counter Cs2 are stored in the special drawing determination area 64c of the main RAM 64. Then, proceed to step Sm0306.

In step Sm0306, the special symbol fluctuation start flag stored in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. The special symbol variation start flag is a flag for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a, and is turned OFF when the variation of the special symbol is started, as will be described later. After executing step Sm0306, the ball entering process for this special figure starting opening is ended.

<Ball entry processing for V prize opening>
Next, the ball entry process for the V winning hole will be explained. Ball entry processing for the V winning a prize opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 71: Sm0106).

Figure 74 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the V entry port. In step Sm0401, whether or not a game ball has entered the V entry port 57av is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the V entry port 57av. In step Sm0401, if it is determined that a game ball has entered the V entry port 57av (Sm0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0402, where it is determined whether or not the V entry flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The V entry flag is ON when a game ball enters the V entry port 57av, and when the V entry flag is ON, a special electric opening and closing execution mode is started, and when the special electric opening and closing execution mode is ended, the flag is turned OFF. That is, in step Sm0402, by determining whether the V entry flag is already ON, a configuration is adopted in which the processing of steps Sm0403 to Sm0405 described below is not executed redundantly even if multiple game balls enter the V entry port 57av.

If it is determined in step Sm0402 that the V prize flag is not ON (step Sm0402: NO), proceed to step Sm0403 and turn the V prize flag ON. Then, proceed to step Sm0404 and turn ON the V prize type flag corresponding to the special symbol type flag that is ON. Specifically, for example, if the special symbol A flag is ON as the special symbol type flag, the V prize A flag is turned ON as the V prize type flag, and if the special symbol B flag is ON as the special symbol type flag, the V prize B flag is turned ON as the V prize type flag. Then, proceed to step Sm0405.

In step Sm0405, a V winning command is set. The V-winning command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that a game ball enters the V-winning hole 57av and wins the V-winning jackpot, and the type of the V-winning. The V winning command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 75: Step Sm0503) of the normal process described later. Upon receiving the V-winning command, the audio emission control device 90 activates the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the fact that the game ball entered the V-winning hole 57av and won the V-winning jackpot, the type of the V-winning, and the V-winning. A V-winning performance is executed, which is a performance that suggests that the ``V'' winning performance is to be started.

After executing step Sm0405, the ball entry process for this V winning hole is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sm0401 that no game ball has entered the V winning hole 57av (step Sm0401: NO), and when it is determined that the V winning flag is ON in step Sm0402 (step Sm0402: YES) ends the ball entry process for this V winning hole without executing the processes from step Sm0403 to step Sm0405 described above.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be explained. The normal process is a process that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

Figure 75 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sm0501, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, the initial settings of each control device associated with power-on and the validity of data stored in RAM 64 are determined. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm0502.

In step Sm0502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process advances to step Sm0503.

In step Sm0503, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sm0502, the command set in the timer interrupt processing, or the previously executed normal processing, etc., is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, the command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Furthermore, if a startup command or commands related to various effects to be described later are set, they are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step Sm0503, the process advances to step Sm0504.

In step Sm0504, the values of the regular pattern variation type determination counter Cn4 and the special pattern variation type determination counter Cs4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each value of the regular pattern variation type determination counter Cn4 and the special pattern variation type determination counter Cs4, and when each counter value reaches the maximum value, the corresponding counter value is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the regular pattern variation type determination counter Cn4 and the special pattern variation type determination counter Cs4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Sm0505.

In step Sm0505, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read. Then, proceed to step Sm0506.

In step Sm0506, a normal symbol control process which is a control process regarding the variable display of normal symbols in the normal symbol display section 38a is executed. In the normal symbol control process, control is performed such as a general symbol lottery and a variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery. Details of the normal symbol control process will be described later. After executing step Sm0506, the process advances to step Sm0507.

In step Sm0507, a normal electric role control process is executed, which is a control process related to the normal electric role 34b. In the normal electric role control process, control is performed in the normal power opening and closing execution mode to open and close the normal electric role 34b. Details of the normal electric role control process will be described later. After executing step Sm0507, proceed to step Sm0508.

In step Sm0508, a special pattern control process is executed, which is a control process related to the variable display of special patterns in the special pattern display unit 37a. In the special pattern control process, the special pattern drawing and the variable display of special patterns based on the results of the special pattern drawing are controlled. Details of the special pattern control process will be described later. After executing step Sm0508, proceed to step Sm0509.

In step Sm0509, a special electric accessory control process, which is a control process regarding the special electric accessory, is executed. In the special electric accessory control process, control in a special electric opening/closing execution mode for opening and closing the first special electric accessory 57b and the second special electric accessory 58b is performed. Details of the special electric accessory control process will be described later. After executing step Sm0509, the process advances to step Sm0510.

In step Sm0510, standby processing is executed to cause each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the standby state. Thereafter, after executing step Sm0510, the process advances to step Sm0511.

In step Sm0511, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of this normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sm0503). In other words, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived. If it is determined in step Sm0511 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of this normal processing (Sm0511: NO), in steps Sm0512 and Sm0513, the values of the random number initial value counter Cini, the normal map fluctuation type determination counter Cn4, and the special map fluctuation type determination counter Cs4 are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal processing. Specifically, in step Sm0512, 1 is added to the value of the random number initial value counter Cini, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter Cini is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. In step Sm0513, the normal map fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 and the special map fluctuation type determination counter Cs4 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, the counter is cleared to 0. The updated values of the normal map fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 and the special map fluctuation type determination counter Cs4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm0511 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of this normal process (Sm0511: YES), the process returns to step Sm0503 and executes the processes from step Sm0503 to step Sm0510.

Note that since the execution time of each process from step Sm0503 to step Sm0510 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the values of the random number initial value counter Cini, the regular figure variation type determination counter Cn4, and the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 using this remaining time, these counter values are randomly updated. can do.

<Normal symbol control process>
Next, the normal symbol control process will be described. The normal symbol control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 75: Sm0506).

Figure 76 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol control process. In step Sm0601, normal symbol change start processing is executed, which is processing for starting the change of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display section 38a. Details of the normal symbol change start processing will be described later. After executing step Sm0601, proceed to step Sm0602.

In step Sm0602, a normal pattern change stop process is executed, which is a process for stopping the change of the normal pattern in the normal pattern display unit 38a. The normal pattern change stop process will be described in detail later. After executing step Sm0602, this normal pattern control process is terminated.

<Normal symbol variation start processing>
Next, the normal symbol variation start process will be described. The normal symbol variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal symbol control process (FIG. 76: Sm0601).

Figure 77 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern change start process. In step Sm0701, it is determined whether the normal power opening and closing execution mode flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON or not. The normal power opening and closing execution mode flag is a flag that is turned ON when the normal power opening and closing execution mode is started and is turned OFF when the normal power opening and closing execution mode is ended. In other words, the normal power opening and closing execution mode flag is a flag that is ON while the normal power opening and closing execution mode is being executed.

If it is determined in step Sm0701 that the normal power opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sm0701: YES), this normal pattern change start process is terminated without executing any of the processes in step Sm0702 and subsequent steps described below. In other words, while the normal power opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the change of the normal pattern in the normal pattern display section 38a does not start. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm0701 that the normal power opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sm0701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm0702.

In step Sm0702, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is ON. The flag during normal symbol fluctuation is a flag that is turned ON when the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol display section 38a starts, and is turned OFF when the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol ends. That is, the normal symbol fluctuation flag is a flag that is ON while the normal symbol is fluctuating. In step Sm0702, if it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation flag is not ON (step Sm0702: NO), that is, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not fluctuating, the process advances to step Sm0703.

In step Sm0703, it is determined whether the number SN of ordinary drawings pending is greater than or equal to "1". In step Sm0703, if it is determined that the normal symbol lottery pending number SN is not greater than "1" (Sm0703: NO), this normal symbol variation start process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sm0703, if it is determined that the number SN of ordinary drawings pending is "1" or more (Sm0703: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0704. That is, in a situation where the normal symbol opening/closing execution mode is not being executed and the normal symbols are not changing in the normal symbol display section 38a, when the common symbol lottery pending number SN is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step Sm0704.

In step Sm0704, the number of regular lottery reserved items SN is decremented by 1. Then, proceed to step Sm0705.

In step Sm0705, a general map reserved information shift process is executed, which is a process for shifting the general map reserved information stored in each area of the general map reserved area 64d. Specifically, in the general map reserved information shift process, the general map reserved information stored in the first area of the general map reserved area 64d is moved to the general map determination area 64e, and then the general map reserved information in each area is shifted in the order of the second area → first area, the third area → second area, and the fourth area → third area. After executing step Sm0705, proceed to step Sm0706.

In step Sm0706, a regular drawing win/loss determination process is executed to determine whether or not a regular drawing wins. Specifically, in the regular drawing win/loss determination process, a determination is made as to whether or not a regular drawing wins based on the value of the regular drawing win/loss determination counter Cn1 stored in the regular drawing determination area 64e and the regular drawing win/loss determination table described above. After executing step Sm0706, proceed to step Sm0707.

In step Sm0707, a regular pattern type determination process is executed, which is a process for determining the type of regular pattern. Specifically, in the regular pattern type determination process, the above-mentioned regular pattern type determination table is selected according to the result of the regular pattern type determination, and the type of regular pattern is determined based on the value of the regular pattern type determination counter Cn2 stored in the regular pattern determination area 64e and the selected regular pattern type determination table. After executing step Sm0707, proceed to step Sm0708.

In step Sm0708, the regular pattern type flag corresponding to the type of regular pattern determined in the regular pattern type determination process in step Sm0707 is turned ON. Specifically, for example, if it is determined that the regular pattern is A in the regular pattern type determination process in step Sm0707, the regular pattern A flag is turned ON as the regular pattern type flag, and if it is determined that the regular pattern is B, the regular pattern B flag is turned ON as the regular pattern type flag. After executing step Sm0708, proceed to step Sm0709.

In step Sm0709, a normal symbol fluctuation time setting process is executed. The normal symbol fluctuation time setting process is a process for setting the fluctuation time (normal symbol fluctuation time) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display section 38a. The details of the normal symbol fluctuation time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sm0709, proceed to step Sm0710.

In step Sm0710, a command for normal figure variation is set. The normal pattern variation command includes information indicating that the current pattern change is based on the entry of the game ball into the normal pattern starting gate 35, as well as information as to whether or not a reach has occurred. Information about the normal figure fluctuation time set in step Sm0709 is included. After executing step Sm0710, the process advances to step Sm0711.

In step Sm0711, a general pattern type command is set. The ordinary symbol type command includes information on the result of ordinary symbol validity determination (whether or not the ordinary symbol is a hit) and the result of ordinary symbol type determination (the type of ordinary symbol).

The ordinary figure variation command and ordinary figure type command set in step Sm0710 and step Sm0711 are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 by the command output process (step Sm0503) of the normal process (FIG. 75). The audio emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect based on the received general pattern variation command and general pattern type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step Sm0711, the process advances to step Sm0712.

In step Sm0712, fluctuation of the normal symbols in the normal symbol display section 38a is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sm0713, and the normal figure fluctuation flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is turned on. After that, this normal symbol variation start process is ended.

<General map variable time setting process>
Next, the normal symbol variation time setting process will be described. The normal symbol variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal symbol variation start process (FIG. 77: Sm0709).

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the general figure fluctuation time setting process. In step Sm0801, the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 stored in the normal pattern fluctuation type determination counter buffer of the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sm0802.

In step Sm0802, it is determined whether the result of the normal pattern hit determination for this normal pattern change is a normal hit. Specifically, it is determined whether the normal pattern type flag corresponding to the normal hit among the normal pattern type flags stored in RAM 64 is ON, and if the normal pattern type flag corresponding to the normal hit is ON, it is determined that the result of the normal pattern hit determination is a normal hit. In step Sm0802, if it is determined that the result of the normal pattern hit determination is a normal hit (Sm0802: YES), proceed to step Sm0803.

In step Sm0803, the process refers to the regular map fluctuation time table for regular maps stored in the various table storage area 63a of ROM 63 to obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current regular map fluctuation type determination counter Cn4. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm0804, and the obtained fluctuation time information is set in a regular map fluctuation time timer counter provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64. The value of this regular map fluctuation time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm0804, the regular map fluctuation time setting process is terminated.

In step Sm0802, if it is determined that the result of the normal symbol validity determination regarding the current normal symbol variation is not a common symbol hit (Sm0802: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm0805, and the reach is determined in the current normal symbol variation. Determine whether it occurs. Since this process (Sm0805) is executed when the result of the normal symbol propriety determination regarding the current normal symbol variation in step Sm0802 is not a normal symbol hit, in step Sm0805, the normal symbol propriety determination result is normal. It is determined whether or not the variation in normal symbols that does not result in a hit is a variation in which a reach occurs. Specifically, with reference to the standard figure reach determination table stored in the various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63, the value of the standard figure reach determination counter Cn3 stored in the standard figure determination area 64e is determined as the standard figure reach determination table. If it matches the value set as reach occurrence in the table, it is determined that reach has occurred. In step Sm0805, if it is determined that reach occurs (Sm0805: YES), the process advances to step Sm0806.

In step Sm0806, the process refers to the normal map fluctuation time table for normal map misses (for reach occurrence) stored in the various table storage area 63a of ROM 63 to obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the normal map fluctuation type determination counter Cn4. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm0804, and the obtained fluctuation time information is set in the normal map fluctuation time counter provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64. Then, this normal map fluctuation time setting process ends.

In step Sm0805, if it is determined that the reach does not occur in the current variation of the normal symbol (Sm0805: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm0807, and the normal symbol off (reach non-reach) is stored in the various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63. With reference to the ordinary figure variation time table for (occurrence), the variation time information corresponding to the current value of the ordinary figure variation type determination counter Cn4 is obtained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sm0804, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the general figure fluctuation time counter provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time information stored in the regular map variable time table for regular map misses (reach not occurring) is set so that the greater the number of regular map lottery reserved numbers SN, the shorter the variable time. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration may be independent of the number of regular map lottery reserved numbers SN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of regular map lottery reserved numbers SN, the shorter the variable time. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time information stored in the regular map variable time table for regular map hits and the regular map variable time table for regular map misses (reach occurrence).

<Normal symbol fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing will be explained. The normal symbol fluctuation stop process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 76: Sm0602) of the normal symbol control process.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing normal symbol fluctuation stop processing. In step Sm0901, it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation flag is ON. In step Sm0901, if it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation flag is not ON (step Sm0901: NO), this normal symbol fluctuation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm0901 that the normal figure fluctuation flag is ON (step Sm0901: YES), the process advances to step Sm0902.

In step Sm0902, it is determined whether the normal pattern fluctuation time set in the normal pattern fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 78) has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer counter in the main RAM 64 has become "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation time has elapsed. If it is determined in step Sm0902 that the normal pattern fluctuation time has not elapsed (step Sm0902: NO), this normal pattern fluctuation stop process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm0902 that the normal pattern fluctuation time has elapsed (step Sm0902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0903.

In step Sm0903, the normal symbols that are changing in the normal symbol display section 38a are stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the normal symbol type flag that is turned ON. As a result, the normal symbols in the display mode corresponding to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery are stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display section 38a. After executing step Sm0903, the process advances to step Sm0904.

In step Sm0904, it is determined whether the normal pattern type flag corresponding to the normal pattern win is ON. In other words, it is determined whether the result of the normal pattern hit/miss judgment regarding the current normal pattern change is a normal pattern hit. In step Sm0904, if it is determined that the normal pattern type flag corresponding to the normal pattern hit is not ON (step Sm0904: NO), that is, if the result of the normal pattern hit/miss judgment regarding the current normal pattern change is a normal pattern miss, it proceeds to step Sm0905, where the normal pattern type flag that is ON (in this case, the normal pattern Z flag) is turned OFF. Then, it proceeds to step Sm0907, where the normal pattern change in progress flag is turned OFF. Then, this normal pattern change stop process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm0904 that the normal pattern type flag corresponding to a normal pattern win is ON (step Sm0904: YES), that is, if the result of the normal pattern win/loss judgment regarding this normal pattern change is a normal pattern win, the process proceeds to step Sm0906, where the normal power opening/closing execution mode flag is set to ON. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm0907, where the normal pattern change in progress flag is set to OFF. Then, the normal pattern change stop process is terminated. As a result, if the result of the normal pattern win/loss judgment regarding this normal pattern change is a normal pattern win, the normal power opening/closing execution mode is started.

<Normal electric accessory control processing>
Next, the normal electric role control process will be described. The normal electric role control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 75: Sm0507).

Figure 80 is a flowchart showing the normal electric feature control process. In step Sm1001, it is determined whether the normal power ending period flag is ON or not. The normal power ending period flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the normal power ending period and turned OFF at the end of the normal power ending period. In other words, the normal power ending period flag is a flag for determining whether or not the normal power ending period is in progress.

If it is determined in step Sm1001 that the normal power ending period flag is not ON (Sm1001: NO), proceed to step Sm1002 to determine whether the normal power switching processing period flag is ON. The normal power switching processing period flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of a normal power switching processing period and turned OFF at the end of the normal power switching processing period. In other words, the normal power switching processing period flag is a flag for determining whether or not the normal power switching processing period is in progress.

If it is determined in step Sm1002 that the normal power opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sm1002: NO), proceed to step Sm1003 to determine whether the normal power opening period flag is ON. The normal power opening period flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the normal power opening period and turned OFF at the end of the normal power opening period. In other words, the normal power opening period flag is a flag for determining whether or not it is the normal power opening period.

If it is determined in step Sm1003 that the general power opening period flag is not ON (Sm1003: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1004, and it is determined whether the general power opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. In step Sm1004, if it is determined that the general electricity switching execution mode flag is ON (Sm1004: YES), the process proceeds to a processing group for starting the general electricity switching execution mode starting from step Sm1005, which will be described later. On the other hand, in step Sm1004, if it is determined that the normal electric opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sm1004: NO), this normal electric accessory control process is ended.

In step Sm1005, a normal power switching scenario selection process is executed. The normal power switching scenario selection process is a process for selecting the type of normal power switching scenario to be referenced in the normal power switching execution mode based on the normal pattern type flag and the normal power switching scenario selection table described above. Specifically, for example, if the normal pattern A flag is ON as the normal pattern type flag, normal power switching scenario A is selected. After executing step Sm1005, proceed to step Sm1006.

In step Sm1006, general electricity opening time setting processing is executed. The general electricity opening time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the general electricity opening period (hereinafter also referred to as general electricity opening time). Specifically, in this embodiment, the general electric power opening time information is acquired from the general electric power switching scenario selected by the general electric power switching scenario selection process described above, and the acquired general electric power opening time information is stored in the general electric power generating unit provided in the RAM 64. Set the power opening time timer counter. The value of this power station opening time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm1006, the process advances to step Sm1007.

In step Sm1007, a regular power opening command is set. The set regular power opening command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal processing (Figure 75). Based on receiving the regular power opening command, the audio and light emission control device 90 sets it to execute a regular power opening performance and a right-hit notification performance. After executing step Sm1007, the process proceeds to step Sm1008, where the regular power opening period flag is set to ON. After that, this regular electric role control process is terminated.

In step Sm1003, if it is determined that the utility power opening period flag is ON (Sm1003: YES), the process advances to step Sm1009.

In step Sm1009, it is determined whether the normal power opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the normal power opening time timer counter set as the normal power opening time in the normal power opening time setting process described above is "0". If it is determined in step Sm1009 that the normal power opening period has ended (Sm1009: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1010 and the normal power opening period flag is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm1011.

In step Sm1011, the normal power switching processing period flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm1012, where a normal power switching processing period command is set. The set normal power switching processing period command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in normal processing (Figure 75). This normal power switching processing period command includes information on the number of times the normal electric role 34b was opened during the current normal power switching processing period. The audio and light emission control device 90 sets the normal power switching processing period command received to execute a performance that corresponds to the number of times the normal electric role 34b was opened. After executing step Sm1012, this normal electric role control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sm1002 that the normal power switching processing period flag is ON (Sm1002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1013, where normal power switching processing is executed. In the normal power switching processing, the opening and closing operation of the normal electric feature 34b is controlled based on the normal power switching scenario selected by the normal power switching scenario selection processing described above. Details of the normal power switching processing will be described later. After executing step Sm1013, the process proceeds to step Sm1014.

In step Sm1014, it is determined whether the normal power switching processing period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the last opening of the normal electric accessory 34b based on the normal electric opening/closing scenario has been completed and it has entered the closed state, and whether the final opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b has been completed and it is closed. When it is determined that the state has been reached, it is determined that the normal power switching processing period has ended. In step Sm1014, if it is determined that the normal electric power opening/closing processing period has not ended (Sm1014: NO), the present normal electric accessory control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1014 that the normal power switching processing period has ended (Sm1014: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1015, and the normal power switching processing period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sm1016.

In step Sm1016, a general electricity ending time setting process is executed. The general electricity ending time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the general electricity ending period (hereinafter also referred to as general electricity ending time). Specifically, in this embodiment, the general electric power ending time information is acquired from the general electric power switching scenario selected by the general electric power switching scenario selection process described above, and the acquired general electric power ending time information is stored in the general electric power generating unit provided in the RAM 64. Set the electric ending time timer counter. The value of this general electricity ending time timer counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm1016, the process advances to step Sm1017.

In step Sm1017, a normal power ending command is set. The set normal power ending command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal processing (Figure 75). After executing step Sm1017, the process proceeds to step Sm1018, where the normal power ending period flag is set to ON. After that, this normal electric prop control process is terminated.

In step Sm1001, if it is determined that the general electricity ending period flag is ON (Sm1001: YES), the process advances to step Sm1019.

In step Sm1019, it is determined whether the normal power ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the normal power ending time timer counter set as the normal power ending time in the normal power ending time setting process described above is "0". If it is determined in step Sm1019 that the normal power ending period has not ended (Sm1019: NO), this normal electric feature control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1019 that the normal power ending period has ended (Sm1019: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1020.

In step Sm1020, the regular power ending period flag is turned OFF. Then, proceed to step Sm1021, where the regular power type flag is turned OFF. Then, proceed to step Sm1022.

In step Sm1022, a normal power opening/closing execution mode end command is set. The set normal power opening/closing execution mode end command is sent to the audio/light emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal processing (FIG. 75). Then, the process proceeds to step Sm1023, where the normal power opening/closing execution mode flag is set to OFF. Then, this normal electric feature control process is terminated.

<Normal power opening/closing processing>
Next, the normal power switching processing will be explained. The normal electric opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Sm1013 in FIG. 80) of the normal electric accessory control process.

Figure 81 is a flowchart showing the normal power opening and closing process. In step Sm1101, it is determined whether the normal electric role 34b is open or not. If it is determined in step Sm1101 that the normal electric role 34b is not open (Sm1101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1102.

In step Sm1102, it is determined whether the conditions for opening the normal electric accessory 34b are satisfied. Specifically, the normal electricity switching scenario selected by the normal electricity switching scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether the opening condition for the normal electric accessory 34b set in the normal electricity switching scenario is satisfied. In step Sm1102, if it is determined that the condition for opening the normal electric accessory 34b is satisfied (Sm1102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1103.

In step Sm1103, the normal electric accessory 34b is released. After that, the process advances to step Sm1104.

In step Sm1104, a normal power opening command is set. The normal power opening command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the normal electric feature 34b has been opened. The normal power opening command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of normal processing (Figure 75: Sm0503). After executing step Sm1104, this normal power opening and closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sm1102 that the conditions for opening the normal electric feature 34b are not met (Sm1102: NO), the normal electric opening/closing process ends.

If it is determined in step Sm1101 that the normal electric feature 34b is open (Sm1101: YES), proceed to step Sm1105.

In step Sm1105, it is determined whether a closing condition for the normal electric accessory 34b is satisfied. Specifically, the normal electricity opening/closing scenario selected by the normal electricity opening/closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether the closing condition for the normal electric accessory 34b set in the normal electricity opening/closing scenario is satisfied. In step Sm1105, if it is determined that the closing condition for the normal electric accessory 34b is satisfied (Sm1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1106.

In step Sm1106, the normal electric device 34b is closed. Then, proceed to step Sm1107.

In step Sm1107, a utility power closing command is set. The normal power closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the normal electric accessory 34b has been closed. The general electricity closing command is sent to the audio light emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: Sm0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sm1107, this general power switch-on/closing process ends.

In step Sm1105, if it is determined that the closing condition for the normal electric accessory 34b is not satisfied (Sm1105: NO), the main electric power opening/closing process is directly ended.

<Special symbol control process>
Next, the special symbol control process will be described. The special symbol control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 75: Sm0508).

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing special symbol control processing. In step Sm1201, a special symbol variation start process is executed, which is a process for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a. Details of the special symbol variation start process will be described later. After executing step Sm1201, the process advances to step Sm1202.

In step Sm1202, a special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed, which is a process for stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a. Details of the special symbol fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Sm1202, this special symbol control process ends.

<Special symbol fluctuation start process>
Next, the special symbol variation start process will be explained. The special symbol fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 82: Sm1201) of the special symbol control process.

Figure 83 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change start process. In step Sm1301, it is determined whether the special line opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The special line opening/closing execution mode flag is a flag that is ON when the special line opening/closing execution mode is started and is OFF when the special line opening/closing execution mode is ended. In other words, the special line opening/closing execution mode flag is a flag that is ON while the special line opening/closing execution mode is being executed.

If it is determined in step Sm1301 that the special line opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sm1301: YES), the special pattern change start process is terminated without executing any of the processes in step Sm1302 and thereafter described below. In other words, while the special line opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the change of the special pattern in the special pattern display section 37a does not start. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1301 that the special line opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sm1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1302.

In step Sm1302, it is determined whether the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. In step Sm1302, if it is determined that the V winning flag is ON (step Sm1302: YES), this special symbol variation start process is ended without executing any of the processes after step Sm1303, which will be described later. That is, when the V winning flag is ON, the special symbols in the special symbol display section 37a do not start changing. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1302 that the V winning flag is not ON (Sm1302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1303.

In step Sm1303, it is determined whether the special pattern change flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The special pattern change flag is a flag that is ON when the special pattern in the special pattern display unit 37a starts changing and is OFF when the special pattern change ends. In other words, the special pattern change flag is a flag that is ON while the special pattern is changing. If it is determined in step Sm1303 that the special pattern change flag is ON (step Sm1303: YES), this special pattern change start process is terminated without executing any of the processes from step Sm1304 onwards described below. In other words, if the special pattern change flag is ON, the change of the special pattern in the special pattern display unit 37a is not started. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1303 that the special pattern change flag is not ON (step Sm1303: NO), that is, if it is determined that the special pattern is not changing, proceed to step Sm1304.

In step Sm1304, it is determined whether the special symbol fluctuation start flag is ON. As mentioned above, the special pattern fluctuation start flag indicates that the game ball enters the special pattern starting port 34a when the special pattern opening/closing execution mode is not in progress and the special pattern is not changing in the special pattern display section 37a. This is a flag that is turned ON in this case. In step Sm1304, if it is determined that the special symbol variation start flag is not ON (Sm1304: NO), this special symbol variation start process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sm1304, when it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation start flag is ON (Sm1304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1305. That is, when the game ball enters the special pattern starting port 34a in a situation where the special electric opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, the V winning flag is not ON, and the special pattern is not changing in the special pattern display section 37a. , proceed to step Sm1305.

In step Sm1305, the special chart change start flag is turned OFF. Then, proceed to step Sm1306.

In step Sm1306, a special pattern correctness determination process is executed, which is a process for determining whether or not a special pattern winning (special pattern large winning or special pattern small winning) is won. Specifically, in the special pattern validity determination process, based on the value of the special pattern validity determination counter Cn1 stored in the special pattern determination area 64e and the above-mentioned special pattern validity determination table, it is determined whether the special pattern is won or not. Determine whether or not. After executing step Sm1306, the process advances to step Sm1307.

In step Sm1307, a special symbol type determination process is executed, which is a process for determining the type of the special symbol. Specifically, in the special symbol type determination process, the above-mentioned special symbol type determination table is selected according to the result of the special symbol type determination, and the type of the special symbol is determined based on the value of the special symbol type determination counter Cn2 stored in the special symbol determination area 64e and the selected special symbol type determination table. After executing step Sm1307, proceed to step Sm1308.

In step Sm1308, the special symbol type flag corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the special symbol type determination process of step Sm1307 is turned ON. Specifically, for example, if it is determined that the special symbol is A in the special symbol type determination process in step Sm1307, the special symbol A flag is turned on as the special symbol type flag, and if it is determined that the special symbol is B. To do so, turn on the special symbol B flag as the special symbol type flag. After executing step Sm1308, the process advances to step Sm1309.

In step Sm1309, special figure fluctuation time setting processing is executed. The special symbol variation time setting process is a process for setting the variation time (special symbol variation time) of the special symbol in the special symbol display section 37a. Details of the special figure fluctuation time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sm1309, the process advances to step Sm1310.

In step Sm1310, a special figure variation command is set. The special figure variation command includes information indicating that the current symbol variation is based on the entry of the game ball into the special figure starting port 34a, and information on the special figure variation time set in step Sm1309. It is. After executing step Sm1310, the process advances to step Sm1311.

In step Sm1311, a special figure type command is set. The special pattern type command includes information on the result of the special pattern validity judgment (whether or not the special pattern is a hit) and the result of the special pattern type judgment (the type of special pattern).

The special figure variation command and special figure type command set in step Sm1310 and step Sm1311 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (step Sm0503) of the normal process (FIG. 75). The audio emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect based on the received special figure variation command and special figure type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step Sm1311, the process advances to step Sm1312.

In step Sm1312, variation of the special symbols in the special symbol display section 37a is started. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1313, and the special symbol fluctuation flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is turned ON. After that, this special symbol variation start process is ended.

<Special chart variable time setting process>
Next, the special symbol variation time setting process will be described. The special symbol variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 83: Sm1309).

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the special figure fluctuation time setting process. In step Sm1401, the value of the special symbol variation type determination counter Cs4 stored in the regular symbol variation type determination counter buffer of the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process advances to step Sm1402.

In step Sm1402, with reference to the special symbol variation time table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, variation time information corresponding to the current value of the special symbol variation type determination counter Cs4 is obtained. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1403, and the acquired variable time information is set in the special figure variable time timer counter provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value of this special figure variable time timer counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm1403, this special figure fluctuation time setting process is ended.

<Special symbol fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the special symbol fluctuation stop processing will be explained. The special symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 82: Sm1202) of the special symbol control processing.

Figure 85 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change stop processing. In step Sm1501, it is determined whether or not the special symbol change in progress flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sm1501 that the special symbol change in progress flag is not ON (step Sm1501: NO), this special symbol change stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1501 that the special symbol change in progress flag is ON (step Sm1501: YES), the processing proceeds to step Sm1502.

In step Sm1502, it is determined whether the special pattern change time set in the special pattern change time setting process (FIG. 84) has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the special pattern change time timer counter in the main RAM 64 has become "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the special pattern change time has elapsed. If it is determined in step Sm1502 that the special pattern change time has not elapsed (step Sm1502: NO), this special pattern change stop process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1502 that the special pattern change time has elapsed (step Sm1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1503.

In step Sm1503, the special symbol being changed in the special symbol display unit 37a is displayed in a static display mode corresponding to the special symbol type flag that is ON. As a result, the special symbol in the display mode corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed in the special symbol display unit 37a. After executing step Sm1503, proceed to step Sm1504.

In step Sm1504, it is determined whether the special pattern type flag corresponding to the special pattern win (special pattern jackpot or special pattern small win) is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol validity determination regarding the current change in the special symbol is a special symbol hit. In step Sm1504, if it is determined that the special pattern type flag corresponding to the special pattern is not ON (step Sm1504: NO), that is, the result of the special pattern propriety judgment regarding the current change in the special pattern is not the special pattern. If there is, the process proceeds to step Sm1505, and the special figure type flag that is ON is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1507, and the special figure fluctuation flag is turned OFF. After that, this special symbol fluctuation stop processing is ended. In addition, in this embodiment, since all the results of the special pattern validity determination are special pattern small wins, it is not possible to determine that the special pattern type flag corresponding to the special pattern winning is not ON in step Sm1504 and proceed to step Sm1505. do not have.

On the other hand, in step Sm1504, if it is determined that the special pattern type flag corresponding to the special pattern win is ON (step Sm1504: YES), that is, if the result of the special pattern win/loss judgment regarding the current special pattern change is a special pattern win, proceed to step Sm1506 and turn the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag ON. Then, proceed to step Sm1507 and turn the special pattern change in progress flag OFF. Then, end this special pattern change stop processing. As a result, if the result of the special pattern win/loss judgment regarding the current special pattern change is a special pattern win, the special electric opening/closing execution mode will be started.

<Special electric feature control processing>
Next, the special electric role control process will be described. The special electric role control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 75: Sm0509).

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the special electric accessory control process. In step Sm1601, it is determined whether the special electric train ending period flag is ON. The special telephone ending period flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the special telephone ending period and turned OFF at the end of the special telephone ending period. That is, the special call ending period flag is a flag for determining whether or not the special call ending period is in progress.

If it is determined in step Sm1601 that the special line ending period flag is not ON (Sm1601: NO), proceed to step Sm1602 and determine whether the special line opening/closing processing period flag is ON. The special line opening/closing processing period flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the special line opening/closing processing period and turned OFF at the end of the special line opening/closing processing period. In other words, the special line opening/closing processing period flag is a flag for determining whether or not the special line opening/closing processing period is in progress.

If it is determined in step Sm1602 that the special power opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sm1602: NO), proceed to step Sm1603 and determine whether the special power opening period flag is ON. The special power opening period flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the special power opening period and turned OFF at the end of the special power opening period. In other words, the special power opening period flag is a flag for determining whether or not the special power opening period is in progress.

In step Sm1603, if it is determined that the special electric opening period flag is not ON (Sm1603: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1604, and it is determined whether the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. In step Sm1604, if it is determined that the special electric switching execution mode flag is ON (Sm1604: YES), the process proceeds to a processing group for starting the special electric switching execution mode starting from step Sm1607, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1604 that the special electric opening and closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sm1604: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1605, where it is determined whether the V winning flag is ON or not. If it is determined in step Sm1605 that the V winning flag is ON (step Sm1605: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1606, where the special electric opening and closing execution mode flag and the V trigger flag are turned ON, and then the process proceeds to the processing group for starting the special electric opening and closing execution mode from step Sm1607 onwards, which will be described later. The V trigger flag is a flag for determining whether the trigger for the execution of this special electric opening and closing execution mode is due to a V winning. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1605 that the V winning flag is not ON (step Sm1605: NO), the special electric device control process is terminated. That is, in this embodiment, the special electric opening and closing execution mode is started not only when a special winning combination is won in the special drawing (when the special electric opening and closing execution mode flag is ON), but also when a game ball enters the V winning hole 57av and a V winning jackpot is won (when the V winning flag is ON).

In step Sm1607, special electric switch opening/closing scenario selection processing is executed. The special train opening/closing scenario selection process selects the type of special train opening/closing scenario to be referred to in the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the V trigger flag, the V winning type flag, the special figure type flag, and the above-mentioned special train opening/closing scenario selection table. This is the process of Specifically, for example, when the V trigger flag is OFF and the special symbol A flag is ON as the special symbol type flag, special symbol opening/closing scenario A for special symbol winning is selected. Further, for example, when the V trigger flag is ON and the V winning prize A flag is ON as the V winning prize type flag, the V winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario A is selected. After executing step Sm1607, the process advances to step Sm1608.

In step Sm1608, a special line opening time setting process is executed. The special line opening time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the special line opening period (hereinafter also referred to as the special line opening time). Specifically, in this embodiment, special line opening time information is obtained from the special line opening scenario selected by the above-mentioned special line opening scenario selection process, and the obtained special line opening time information is set in a special line opening time timer counter provided in RAM 64. The value of this special line opening time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time a timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm1608, proceed to step Sm1609.

In step Sm1609, a special power opening command is set. The set special power opening command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal processing (Figure 75). Based on receiving the special power opening command, the audio and light emission control device 90 sets it to execute a special power opening performance and a right-hit notification performance. After executing step Sm1609, the process proceeds to step Sm1610, where the special power opening period flag is set to ON. After that, this special electric role control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sm1603 that the special call opening period flag is ON (Sm1603: YES), proceed to step Sm1611.

In step Sm1611, it is determined whether the special call opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special train opening time timer counter set as the special train opening time in the above-mentioned special train opening time setting process is "0". In step Sm1611, if it is determined that the special electric line opening period has ended (Sm1611: YES), the process advances to step Sm1612 and the special electric line opening period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sm1613.

In step Sm1613, a round display start process is executed, which is a process for displaying the number of rounds in the current special power opening/closing execution mode on the round display unit 39. Specifically, the number of rounds set in the selected special power opening/closing scenario is read, and the read number of rounds is displayed on the round display unit 39. After executing step Sm1613, the process proceeds to step Sm1614.

In step Sm1614, the special electric opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. Then, proceed to step Sm1615 to set a special electric opening/closing processing period command. The set special electric opening/closing processing period command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (Figure 75). This special electric opening/closing processing period command includes information on the number of times the first special electric role 57b or the second special electric role 58b was opened during this special electric opening/closing processing period. The audio and light emission control device 90 sets the special electric opening/closing processing period command received to execute a performance whose content corresponds to the number of times the first special electric role 57b or the second special electric role 58b was opened. After executing step Sm1615, this special electric role control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sm1602 that the special power opening/closing processing period flag is ON (Sm1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1616, where the special power opening/closing processing is executed. In the special power opening/closing processing, the opening/closing operation of the first special electric role 57b or the second special electric role 58b is controlled based on the special power opening/closing scenario selected by the special power opening/closing scenario selection processing described above. Details of the special power opening/closing processing will be described later. After executing step Sm1616, the process proceeds to step Sm1617.

In step Sm1617, it is determined whether the special electric switching processing period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the last opening of the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b based on the special electric opening/closing scenario has been completed and the closed state has been reached, and the first special electric accessory 58b is closed. When it is determined that the last opening of the object 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b has been completed and the closed state has been reached, it is determined that the special electric opening/closing processing period has ended. In step Sm1617, if it is determined that the special electric opening/closing process period has not ended (Sm1617: NO), this special electric accessory control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1617 that the special electric switching processing period has ended (Sm1617: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1618, and the special electric switching processing period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sm1619.

In step Sm1619, a round display end process is executed, which is a process for ending the display of the number of rounds on the round display section 39. After that, the process advances to step Sm1620.

In step Sm1620, a special call ending time setting process is executed. The special call ending time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the special call ending period (hereinafter also referred to as special call ending time). Specifically, in this embodiment, special train ending time information is acquired from the special train opening/closing scenario selected by the above-mentioned special train opening/closing scenario selection process, and the acquired special train ending time information is stored in the special train ending time timer counter provided in the RAM 64. Set to . The value of this special electric ending time timer counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm1620, the process advances to step Sm1621.

In step Sm1621, a special electricity ending command is set. The set special electric ending command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 75). The audio emission control device 90 is set to execute a special electric line ending effect based on receiving the special electric line ending command. After executing step Sm1621, the process advances to step Sm1622, and the special electricity ending period flag is turned ON. After that, this special electric accessory control process ends.

In step Sm1601, if it is determined that the special electric train ending period flag is ON (Sm1601: YES), the process advances to step Sm1623.

In step Sm1623, it is determined whether the special message ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the special message ending time timer counter, which was set as the special message ending time in the special message ending time setting process described above, is "0". If it is determined in step Sm1623 that the special message ending period has not ended (Sm1623: NO), this special electric prop control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1623 that the special message ending period has ended (Sm1623: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1624.

In step Sm1624, the special message ending period flag is turned OFF. Then, proceed to step Sm1625.

In step Sm1625, it is determined whether the V trigger flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sm1625 that the V trigger flag is not ON (step Sm1625: NO), i.e., if the trigger for the current special electric opening/closing execution mode was not due to a V winning, proceed to step Sm1626, where the special chart type flag is set to OFF. Then, proceed to step Sm1628, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1625 that the V trigger flag is ON (step Sm1625: YES), i.e., if the trigger for the current special electric opening/closing execution mode was due to a V winning, proceed to step Sm1627, where the V trigger flag, the V winning flag, and the V winning type flag are set to OFF. Then, proceed to step Sm1628.

In step Sm1628, a special electric opening/closing execution mode end command is set. The set special electric opening/closing execution mode end command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 75). The sound emission control device 90 is set to end the special electric line ending effect based on receiving the special electric opening/closing execution mode end command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1629, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. After that, this special electric accessory control process ends.

<Special line switching processing>
Next, the special power switch opening/closing process will be described. The special power switch opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the special electric accessory control process (FIG. 86: Sm1616).

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing special electric switch opening/closing processing. In step Sm1701, it is determined whether the first special electric accessory 57b is open. In step Sm1701, if it is determined that the first special electric accessory 57b is not open (Sm1701: NO), the process advances to step Sm1702.

In step Sm1702, it is determined whether the opening condition of the first special electric role 57b is met. Specifically, the special electric opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric opening/closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether the opening condition of the first special electric role 57b set in that special electric opening/closing scenario is met. In step Sm1702, if it is determined that the opening condition of the first special electric role 57b is met (Sm1702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1703.

In step Sm1703, the first special electric accessory 57b is released. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sm1704.

In step Sm1704, the first special power opening command is set. The first special power opening command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the first special electric feature 57b has been opened. The first special power opening command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (Figure 75: Sm0503). After executing step Sm1704, this special power opening and closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sm1702 that the conditions for opening the first special electric feature 57b are not met (Sm1702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1708, which will be described later.

If it is determined in step Sm1701 that the first special electric feature 57b is open (Sm1701: YES), proceed to step Sm1705.

In step Sm1705, it is determined whether the closing condition for the first special electric accessory 57b is satisfied. Specifically, the special electric switch opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric switch opening/closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether the closing condition for the first special electric accessory 57b set in the special electric switch opening/closing scenario is satisfied. In step Sm1705, if it is determined that the closing condition for the first special electric accessory 57b is satisfied (Sm1705: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1706.

In step Sm1706, the first special electric accessory 57b is closed. After that, the process advances to step Sm1707.

In step Sm1707, a first special electricity closing command is set. The first special electric power closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the first special electric accessory 57b has been closed. The first special electricity closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 75: Sm0503) of the normal processing. After executing step Sm1707, this special electric switch opening/closing process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sm1705 that the closing condition for the first special electric feature 57b is not met (Sm1705: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1708, which will be described later.

In step Sm1708, it is determined whether the second special electric role 58b is open. If it is determined in step Sm1708 that the second special electric role 58b is not open (Sm1708: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1709.

In step Sm1709, it is determined whether the conditions for opening the second special electric accessory 58b are satisfied. Specifically, the special electric switching scenario selected by the special electric switching scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether the opening condition of the second special electric accessory 58b set in the special electric switching scenario is satisfied. In step Sm1709, if it is determined that the condition for opening the second special electric accessory 58b is satisfied (Sm1709: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1710.

In step Sm1710, the second special electric device 58b is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm1711.

In step Sm1711, the second special power opening command is set. The second special power opening command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the second special electric feature 58b has been opened. The second special power opening command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (Figure 75: Sm0503). After executing step Sm1711, this special power opening and closing process is terminated.

In step Sm1709, if it is determined that the opening condition for the second special electric accessory 58b is not satisfied (Sm1709: NO), this special electric opening/closing process is directly ended.

In step Sm1708, if it is determined that the second special electric accessory 58b is being opened (Sm1708: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1712.

In step Sm1712, it is determined whether the closing condition for the second special electric accessory 58b is satisfied. Specifically, the special electric switch opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric switch opening/closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether the closing condition for the second special electric accessory 58b set in the special electric switch opening/closing scenario is satisfied. In step Sm1712, if it is determined that the closing condition for the second special electric accessory 58b is satisfied (Sm1712: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1713.

In step Sm1713, the second special electric accessory 58b is closed. After that, the process advances to step Sm1714.

In step Sm1714, a second special power close command is set. The second special power close command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the second special electric feature 58b has been closed. The second special power close command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of normal processing (Figure 75: Sm0503). After executing step Sm1714, this special power opening and closing process is terminated.

In step Sm1712, if it is determined that the closing condition for the second special electric accessory 58b is not satisfied (Sm1712: NO), this special electric opening/closing process is directly ended.

《2-6》Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. First, the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Various processes executed in the audio emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92 will be explained.

Figure 88 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is executed repeatedly at a relatively short period (e.g., 2 msec). The process of each step executed in the timer interrupt process is explained below.

In step Sm3101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer to enable storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer and , are sequentially read out according to the stored order. After executing step Sm3101, the process advances to step Sm3102.

In step Sm3102, a process for general game round performance is executed. In the normal figure game round performance processing, processing related to the effect during the execution of the normal figure game round is executed. Specifically, for example, when a command for ordinary pattern variation and a general pattern type command are received, the normal pattern variation time included in the general pattern variation command and the type of normal pattern included in the general pattern type command are Based on this, processing related to variable display and static display of decorative symbols in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 is executed. After executing step Sm3102, the process advances to step Sm3103.

In step Sm3103, a normal power switch opening/closing execution mode presentation process is executed. In the normal power switch opening/closing execution mode performance processing, processing related to the performance during execution of the normal power switch opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, for example, when a general electricity opening command is received, settings are made to execute a general electricity opening performance and a right-handed notification process corresponding to the type of general electricity opening/closing scenario. Further, when a general power switch-on/close processing period command is received, a general power switch-on/close processing period effect corresponding to the type of general power switch-on/close scenario is set to be executed. Further, when a general power opening command is received, a general electric power opening effect corresponding to the type of general electric power opening/closing scenario and the number of openings of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is executed. Further, when a general electricity closing command or a general electricity ending command is received, a general electricity closing effect corresponding to the type of general electricity opening/closing scenario and the number of closing times of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is executed. Furthermore, when it is 5 seconds before the end of the general electric power ending period, a general electric power ending effect is executed. After executing step Sm3103, the process advances to step Sm3104.

In step Sm3104, processing for the special symbol game round presentation is executed. In the special symbol game round presentation processing, processing related to the presentation during the execution of the special symbol game round is executed. Specifically, for example, when a special symbol change command and a special symbol type command are received, processing related to the change display and stop display of the decorative symbol in the sub-display area SA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 is executed based on the special symbol change time included in the special symbol change command and the type of special symbol included in the special symbol type command. After executing step Sm3104, proceed to step Sm3105.

In step Sm3105, special electric opening/closing execution mode production processing is executed. In the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode performance processing, processing related to the effect during execution of the special electric current opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, for example, when a special train opening command is received, settings are made to execute a special train opening performance and right-handed notification process corresponding to the type of special train opening/closing scenario. Further, when receiving a special electric train opening/closing processing period command, settings are made to execute a special electric train opening/closing processing period effect corresponding to the type of special electric train opening/closing scenario. Further, when a special electric power release command is received, a special electric power opening effect corresponding to the type of special electric power opening/closing scenario and the number of times the special electric accessory is opened is executed. Furthermore, when a special electric train closing command is received, a special electric train interval period performance corresponding to the type of special electric train opening/closing scenario and the number of times the special electric accessory is closed is executed. Furthermore, when a special train ending command is received, a special train ending effect corresponding to the type of special train opening/closing scenario is executed. After executing step Sm3105, the process advances to step Sm3106.

In step Sm3106, processing for the V winning presentation is executed. In the V winning presentation processing, when a V winning command is received, a presentation suggesting that a V winning has been achieved is set to be executed. After executing step Sm3106, proceed to step Sm3107.

In step Sm3107, a light emission control process is executed to control the light emission of the various lamps 47. In the light emission control process, the light emission of the various lamps 47 is controlled based on the light emission data read out in each of the performance processes described above. After executing step Sm3107, the process proceeds to step Sm3108.

In step Sm3108, an audio output control process is executed to control the audio output of the speaker 46. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is executed based on the audio data read in each of the performance processes described above. After executing step Sm3108, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly include a main process that is repeatedly executed from when the power is turned on until the power is turned off, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound and light emission control device 90, and a V interrupt process that is executed when a V interrupt signal sent from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power is turned on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the contents of the command received from the audio emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sm6101, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and the memories in the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 are cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written into the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. After that, the process advances to step Sm6102.

In step Sm6102, the interrupt permission setting is executed. Once the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main processing executes an infinite loop process thereafter until the power is cut off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, a description will be given of the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio and light emission control device 90.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sm6201, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 91 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt processing is executed when a V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command memory area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and an image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 is identified, and an instruction is issued to the VDP 105 to draw and display the image.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage when the drawing process or display process of the image is not completed, so it is possible to prevent the start of drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area where the image information being displayed is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt process are described below.

In step Sm6301, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command corresponding processing, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 90) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. For example, if a video display start command corresponding to a preview performance is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the video corresponding to the preview performance is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Furthermore, if a video display start command corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the video corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

In addition, in the command response process (Sm6301), all commands stored in the command memory area at that time are analyzed, and processes corresponding to all the analyzed commands are executed. The reason for this will be explained. The command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command memory area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the performance is set by the sound and light emission control device 90 and the performance is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the performance are stored in the command memory area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the form of the performance, such as the advance performance and the stop pattern set by the sound and light emission control device 90, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that form is displayed on the pattern display device 41. Details of the command response process will be described later.

In step Sm6302, a display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the contents of one frame of image to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 are determined based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which has been set by the command response process (Sm6301) or the like. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm6303.

In step Sm6303, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the contents of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, as specified by the display setting processing (Sm6302), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, rotation angle, etc., are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the processing proceeds to step Sm6304.

In step Sm6304, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing processing, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each character, which were determined by the task processing (Sm6303), are sent to the VDP105. The VDP105 executes image drawing processing based on this information, and sends the image data drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt processing to the pattern display device 41 together with a drive signal so that the image is displayed on the pattern display device 41. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm6305, where other processing is executed, and the V interrupt processing is terminated.

As described above, this embodiment can provide the following advantages:

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times that the V-winning jackpot can be consecutively won is determined based on the type of normal symbol. More specifically, the upper limit of the number of times that the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V-winning jackpot can be executed during the execution of the normal power opening and closing execution mode is determined based on the number of times that the normal electric device 34b is opened in the normal power opening and closing execution mode, so the number of times that the normal electric device 34b is opened in the normal power opening and closing execution mode is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, when a normal symbol is won in the normal symbol lottery and the normal power opening and closing execution mode is executed, the player can be made interested and concerned about the number of times that the normal electric device 34b is opened in the normal power opening and closing execution mode, and the excitement of the game can be improved.

Further, in this embodiment, since a special figure jackpot is not set as a result of the special figure lottery, various regulations imposed on pachinko machines in which a special figure jackpot is set are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine increases, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture pachinko machines with various playability (specs).

In addition, this embodiment does not have a high probability mode (so-called high probability state) that increases the probability of winning the special jackpot in the special lottery, so control can be simplified and various regulations that are imposed on pachinko machines that have these modes are not imposed. This increases the freedom of design of pachinko machines, making it possible to design and manufacture pachinko machines with a variety of playability (specifications).

In addition, this embodiment does not have a high frequency support mode (so-called electric support state) that increases the probability of winning a normal prize in a normal prize lottery or increases the number of times that the normal electric device 34b opens when a normal prize is won, so control can be simplified and various regulations that are imposed on pachinko machines that have these modes are not imposed. This increases the freedom of design of pachinko machines, making it possible to design and manufacture pachinko machines with a variety of playability.

In addition, since this embodiment does not have a function for reserving the special drawing lottery, the special drawing reservation area for reserving the special drawing lottery can be omitted from the main RAM 64, and the memory area of the main RAM 64 can be effectively used for other purposes.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the execution of the regular electricity opening/closing execution mode, the special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed multiple times without a substantial lottery (so-called jackpots occur consecutively). Therefore, when playing a series of jackpots in a general pachinko machine, for example, even though it is in high probability mode (so-called variable probability state), it is difficult to win the jackpot in the jackpot lottery and the next special electric opening/closing execution mode does not start easily. This makes it possible to avoid such a situation (so-called jamming).

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the general figure starting gate 35, and the general figure is won in the general figure lottery and the general electric switch opening/closing execution mode is executed, the game ball enters the normal figure starting gate 35, and when the normal figure opening/closing execution mode is executed, If the firing mode reaches 301 (the so-called "right-handed" firing mode) and the game ball is continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals, the game ball enters the special figure starting port during the normal power opening/closing execution mode. 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small winning is executed, and during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small winning, the game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small winning is executed. The game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 57a enters the V winning hole 57av, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed.

According to the present embodiment, the time required from the start to the end of the normal electric switch opening/closing execution mode is the time required from the start to the end of the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit, and the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. The configuration is such that the time can be set to be longer than the sum of the time required from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode (total time: 128.0 seconds). More specifically, in a situation where the game ball is continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals in a firing mode in which it reaches the flow path 301 (a so-called "right-handed" firing mode), the normal power opening/closing execution mode is started. When the time required from the time when the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot ends (the time from time t2 to time t10 in FIG. 68) is defined as the specific required time, The configuration allows the time required to complete the process to be set longer than the specific required time. Therefore, even after the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the special map small hit ends and the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot ends, the normal electric switch opening/closing execution mode continues, and the general electric switch opening/closing execution mode continues. During the continuation of the mode, the normal electric accessory 34b may transition to the open state and the game ball may enter the special figure starting port 34a.

According to the present embodiment, in the case where the ordinary electric accessory 34b is won in the general figure lottery in which the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened twice or more, the special electric power accessory 34b based on the V winning jackpot is selected during the execution of the ordinary electric accessory opening/closing execution mode. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the normal electric accessory 34b transitions from the closed state to the open state, so the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot ends. becomes possible. If the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V-winning jackpot ends, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is executed again, and then the V-winning jackpot is again executed. The special electric opening/closing execution mode based on this will be executed. In other words, when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is won at a general figure that opens twice or more in the ordinary figure lottery and the ordinary electric accessory opening/closing execution mode is executed, the special electric accessory opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small winning and the V winning jackpot are executed. The special electric opening/closing execution mode based on this will be executed multiple times. When the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed multiple times, the player can have an opportunity to win a large amount of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the power switching execution mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the game ball is moved to the special figure start opening 34a while the special symbols are changing, during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit, or during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. When the ball enters the special drawing, it avoids acquiring various counter values for the special drawing lottery (in other words, it does not have a function to hold the special drawing lottery). Even if the game ball enters the special pattern starting port 34a during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a hit or during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot, the special electric opening/closing execution based on a special figure small hit will not be executed afterwards. mode will not be executed, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will also not be executed, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, we want the player to finish the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot before the timing when the game ball can enter the special figure starting port 34a comes. It can create a sense of tension.

In addition, if, unlike this embodiment, a configuration is adopted that does not avoid obtaining various counter values for the special chart lottery even if a game ball enters the special chart start port 34a during the fluctuation of the special pattern, during the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a small special chart win, or during the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot, (i.e., a configuration with a special chart lottery reservation function), if multiple game balls enter the special chart start port 34a in one opening of the normal electric device 34b, multiple special chart lotteries will be reserved, and the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a small special chart win and the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot may be executed multiple times, regardless of the number of times the normal electric device 34b is opened in the normal electric opening and closing execution mode.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, even if multiple game balls enter the special chart start hole 34a in one opening of the normal electric device 34b, it is possible to realize a playability in which the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a special chart small win and the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a V winning big win are each executed once for one opening of the normal electric device 34b.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is configured to be a predetermined length regardless of the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after launch, so the length of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot does not become longer than the predetermined length. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has not yet ended even at the timing when the normal electric role 34b transitions to the open state because the length of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has become longer than the predetermined length. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that is unfavorable to the player, such as the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot not ending even at the timing when the game ball enters the special chart start port 34a, and the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart small win is not executed despite the game ball entering the special chart start port 34a, and the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is predetermined regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. Since the special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot ends early during the general electricity interval period of the general electricity opening/closing execution mode, the special electricity opening/closing execution mode ends. It is possible to prevent the game from being prolonged due to a long period from when the normal electric accessory 34b is opened until the next release.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the normal power switching execution mode, the normal electric accessory 34b is in the normal power interval period, which is a period from the transition from the open state to the closed state until the transition from the closed state to the open state. The length can be set to a longer time (135.0 seconds) than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (for example, 126.0 seconds). The reason for adopting such a configuration will be explained.

First, unlike this embodiment, the length of the general electric power interval period of the general electric power opening/closing execution mode is set to the time required from the start to the end of the special electric power opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (for example, 126.0 A case will be described in which a comparative example configuration is adopted in which the time is set to a shorter time (for example, 80.0 seconds).

First, in the configuration of the comparative example, a case will be described in which a game ball enters the special chart start port 34a in the first opening state of the normal electric role 34b in the normal power opening and closing execution mode. In this case, the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart small win is started, and then the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is started. After that, the first normal power interval period in the normal power opening and closing execution mode ends, and in the second opening state of the normal electric role 34b, the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is still continuing. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the special chart start port 34a, the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart small win and the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will not be started anew. After that, the second normal power interval period in the normal power opening and closing execution mode ends, and in the third opening state of the normal electric role 34b, the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has already ended, so if the game ball enters the special chart start port 34a, a new special power opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart small win will be started, and then the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will be started. In other words, in this case, the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart small win and the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will be started when the game ball enters the special chart start port 34a in the first and third opening states of the normal electric role 34b in the normal power opening and closing execution mode, but will not be started even if the game ball enters the special chart start port 34a in the second opening state.

Next, in the configuration of the comparative example, a case will be described in which the game ball does not enter the special chart start port 34a in the first opening state of the normal electric role 34b in the normal power opening and closing execution mode. In this case, the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart small win is not started, and the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not started either. After that, the first normal power interval period in the normal power opening and closing execution mode ends, and in the second opening state of the normal electric role 34b, the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed, so if the game ball enters the special chart start port 34a, the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart small win will be started, and then the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will be started. After that, the second normal power interval period in the normal power opening and closing execution mode ends, and in the third opening state of the normal electric role 34b, the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will still be continuing. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the special chart start port 34a, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart small win and the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning big win will not be started. After that, the third normal power interval period in the normal power opening and closing execution mode ends, and in the fourth opening state of the normal electric role 34b, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning big win has already ended, so if the game ball enters the special chart start port 34a, a new special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart small win will be started, and then the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning big win will be started. In other words, in this case, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart small win and the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning big win will be started when the game ball enters the special chart start port 34a in the second and fourth opening states of the normal electric role 34b in the normal power opening and closing execution mode, but will not be started even if the game ball enters the special chart start port 34a in the third opening state.

As described above, unlike the present embodiment, the configuration of the comparative example is adopted in which the length of the general power interval period of the general power switch opening/closing execution mode is set to a shorter time than the length of the special power switch opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. In this case, the timing of the start of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot during the execution of the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode is not fixed, and the flow of the game becomes complicated. This poses a problem in that it becomes difficult to control the game.

Next, set the length of the regular power interval interval period of the general power switch opening/closing execution mode to a time (135. A case will be described in which the configuration of this embodiment is adopted in which the time period is set to .0 seconds).

First, in the configuration of this embodiment, a case will be described in which a game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a in the first open state of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit will be executed, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will be executed. After that, the first general electric power interval period in the general electric power opening/closing execution mode ends, and in the second opening state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric power opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has already ended, so the game When the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small win is newly started, and then a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot is started.

Next, in the configuration of this embodiment, a case will be described in which the game ball does not enter the special figure starting port 34a in the first opening state of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed either. After that, the first electric power interval period in the electric power opening/closing execution mode has ended, and in the second open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has not been executed, so the game ball If the ball enters the special figure starting hole 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win will be started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will be started.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the length of the regular power interval period of the general power switch opening/closing execution mode is set to the time required from the start to the end of the special power switch opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (126.0 seconds). ) is set to a longer time (135.0 seconds), so at the timing when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is in the open state in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, it is assumed that the ordinary electric accessory 34b is in the open state. Regardless of the number of times, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not being executed or has already ended. Therefore, even though the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is in the open state in the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the V There is no possibility that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the winning jackpot will not be started. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to fix the start timing of the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win and the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot during the execution of the general electric switch opening/closing execution mode, It is possible to suppress the flow of the game from becoming complicated, and by setting the number of times that the ordinary electric accessory 34b is in the open state during the execution of the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to execute the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode. It becomes possible to set an upper limit on the number of times that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small win and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be executed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the general electric accessory 34b last transitions from the open state to the closed state in the general electric utility opening/closing execution mode until the general electric drawing lottery becomes executable, which is the general electric utility ending. The length of the period can be set to a longer time (140.0 seconds) than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (for example, 126.0 seconds). The reason for adopting this configuration will be explained.

First, unlike this embodiment, a configuration will be described in which the length of the normal power ending period is set to a time shorter than the time required from the start to the end of the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. In this configuration, for example, if a normal drawing is executed after the end of the normal power ending period and a normal winning jackpot is won, the normal power opening and closing execution mode is executed, and during the execution of the normal power opening and closing execution mode, the game ball may enter the special power starting port 34a, and the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the special power small winning jackpot may be executed. However, in this configuration, if the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed immediately after the start of the normal power ending period, the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot may continue even after the normal power ending period has ended, and the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot may continue even at the timing when the game ball enters the special power starting port 34a. In this case, there is a problem that the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the special power small winning jackpot is not executed even if the game ball enters the special power starting port 34a, which puts the player in a disadvantageous situation.

In response to this, according to this embodiment, the length of the normal power ending period can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the special power opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot, so it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the special power opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot continues even after the normal power ending period has ended, and to prevent situations that are disadvantageous to the player.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the length of the general power ending period is set to a length greater than or equal to the length of the general power interval period, so that a series of The flow of the game can be similarly realized during the general electricity ending period of the general electricity opening/closing execution mode. As a result, a new system has been created that enables the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special map small hit and the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot to be executed in both the general electricity interval period and the general electricity ending period in the general electricity opening/closing execution mode. It becomes possible to realize games.

In addition, according to this embodiment, since the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be executed during the normal power interval period of the normal power opening and closing execution mode, the number of normal power interval periods included in the normal power opening and closing execution mode becomes a very important factor for the player. Therefore, when a normal power winning is won in the normal power lottery and the normal power opening and closing execution mode is executed, the player can be made interested and concerned about how many normal power interval periods are included in the normal power opening and closing execution mode, which can increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be executed multiple times between the start and end of the normal power opening and closing execution mode, so whether or not the normal power opening and closing execution mode will be started is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested and concerned about whether or not the normal power opening and closing execution mode will be started after winning the normal map in the normal map lottery, and if the normal power opening and closing execution mode is started, it is possible to make the player interested and concerned about how many times the special power opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will be executed, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, since the performance (FIG. 69, FIG. 70 (A), etc.) that suggests the number of openings of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode is executed, the ordinary electric accessory 34b is When the player wins and the normal power switch opening/closing execution mode is executed, the player can be made interested in the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal power switch opening/closing execution mode, and the game is improved. You can improve your interest.

In particular, in this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative patterns displayed in a variable and stationary manner in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 indicate the number of times that the normal electric device 34b will open if the normal lottery is won (i.e., the number of consecutive V-winning jackpots), so that the player can feel a desire for the decorative patterns with as large a number as possible to stop on the pay line L1, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Also, when a reach is reached by a decorative pattern with a large number, the player can feel great expectations.

Further, according to the present embodiment, based on the result of the general drawing lottery, the opening operation of the normal electric accessory 34b is performed at least a plurality of times for one general drawing. When one cycle from the opening of the normal electric accessory 34b (time t3 in FIG. 68) to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (time t10) is defined as one special game round, the ordinary electric accessory 34b is defined as one special game round. One special game round is executed based on the object 34b being opened at the first timing (time t3 in FIG. 68), and at the second timing (time t11 in FIG. 68) after the said one special game round ends The accessory 34b is controlled to be opened. Therefore, it is possible to execute one special game a plurality of times for one common symbol in the common symbol lottery.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a restriction period is generated to limit the start of the fluctuating display of the normal symbols. More specifically, a predetermined limited period is generated in a period from the first timing until the end of one special game round that occurs after the second timing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuating display of normal symbols from starting before the end of one special game round, so the normal drawing lottery is executed even though one special game round has not ended. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations where the As a result, for example, even though the result of the regular lottery is a regular lottery that is advantageous to the player, the game ball is not a special lottery because the 1 special game round that has already been executed has not finished. It is possible to prevent a disadvantageous situation for the player in which the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed even if the ball enters the starting hole 34a.

In addition, in this embodiment, multiple types of V-winning jackpots (V-winning jackpots A and B) are set, so not only the number of V-winning jackpots won in one utility switch opening/closing execution mode, but also the It is also possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation as to whether or not he or she will win the type of V-winning jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, the total required time (2.0 seconds) of the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special train opening/closing scenario A for the special map small hit and the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special train opening/closing scenario A for the V-winning jackpot. The total time A (128.0 seconds), which is the sum of the total required time (126.0 seconds), is the total time required for the special train opening/closing execution mode (2.1 seconds) based on the special train opening/closing scenario B for special map small winnings. Since it is the same as the total time B, which is the sum of the total time required for the special train opening/closing execution mode (125.9 seconds) based on the special train opening/closing scenario A for the special map small win, When the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V-winning jackpot is executed, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario B for the special drawing small win is executed. , the timing at which the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot ends is the same as when the special electric line opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario B is subsequently executed. As a result, the waiting time from the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot until the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b becomes the same, so for example, the content of the performance executed during the waiting time can be made common. can do.

In addition, in this embodiment, a normal game start gate 35 is provided in the lower center of the game board 30, and a normal prize entry port 32 is provided in a position where a game ball that enters the normal game start gate 35 can enter, so that a game can be realized in which a player is given prize balls while hoping to win a normal game in a normal lottery, just like a general pachinko machine in which a special game start port 34a is provided in the lower center of the game board 30.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player operates the operating handle 25 so that the game balls enter the regular figure starting gate 35, so many game balls enter the regular figure starting gate 35. It will be a ball. In this embodiment, since the game ball that enters the normal figure starting gate 35 enters the general winning hole 32, it is possible to increase the proportion of the number of prize balls from the general winning hole 32 to the total number of prize balls. can. In other words, it is possible to lower the accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls due to the action of the accessory to the total number of prize balls.

<<2-7>> Modification of the second embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be embodied in various forms without departing from the spirit of the present invention, for example, the following modifications are also possible. Note that in the modifications described below, the same configurations, processes, and effects as those of the above embodiment will not be described.

《2-7-1》Variation 1:
In the embodiment described above, just before the end of the power interval period of the power switch execution mode, a pseudo power switch ending effect that suggests the end of the power switch execution mode is executed, so that the player is temporarily informed of the power switch. After making the user think that the opening/closing execution mode has ended, it may be configured to perform a continuation performance which is a performance that suggests that the normal electricity opening/closing execution mode will actually continue without ending. This will be explained in detail below.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, in addition to the seven types of normal symbols A to G in the above embodiment, a normal symbol H (H per common symbol) is set as a result of the common symbol type determination in the common symbol lottery. , In addition to the seven types of general electric switching scenarios A to G in the above embodiment, a general electric switching scenario H is prepared. Then, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol H is the ordinary symbol H in the ordinary symbol type determination, the ordinary symbol opening/closing scenario H is selected.

Normal power switching scenario H differs from normal power switching scenario G (normal electric device 34b opens seven times) only in the length of the closure period (first normal power interval period) from the first closure to the second opening of normal electric device 34b during the normal power switching processing period, and other controls are the same as normal power switching scenario G. Specifically, in the above-mentioned normal power switching scenario G, the length of all normal power interval periods, including the first normal power interval period, is set to 135.0 seconds, whereas in normal power switching scenario H, the length of the first normal power interval period is set to 145.0 seconds, which is 10.0 seconds longer than the other normal power interval periods.

In this modified example, if a normal winning symbol H is won in the normal winning symbol lottery, the decorative symbol stops in a display mode such as "111" in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, just as in the case of winning a normal winning symbol A.

The player who recognizes the stop mode of this decorative pattern opens the normal electric accessory 34b once in the normal electricity opening/closing execution mode that is executed based on the current normal pattern winning, and executes the normal electricity opening/closing execution mode. It is recognized that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V-winning jackpot is executed once during this period.

After that, a pseudo-normal power ending performance is executed for 5 seconds from 10 seconds before the end of the first normal power interval period of the normal power switching execution mode based on normal power switching scenario H to 5 seconds before the end of the first normal power interval period, which is a performance suggesting that the normal power switching execution mode will end. Note that the content of this pseudo-normal power ending performance is the same as the content of the normal power ending performance (Figure 70 (B)) executed for 5 seconds from 5 seconds before the end of the normal power ending period described in the above embodiment to the end of the period.

FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this modification. In this modified example, as a pseudo public electricity ending effect, a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 as shown in FIG. Display. During the execution of this pseudo general electric power ending effect, a right-handed instruction image GD2 is displayed in the upper right area of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, which is an image that is a combination of a character string such as ``Right-handed'' and a right-pointing arrow. Display. This right-handed hitting instruction image GD2 has a smaller size than the right-handed hitting instruction image GD1 shown in FIG. 70(A), and is a display that is difficult to be recognized by the player.

The player who recognizes this pseudo ordinary electricity opening/closing execution effect understands that in this ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode, the special electricity opening/closing execution mode is executed only once based on the V winning jackpot, and the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode ends. I recognize that.

After that, for 5 seconds from 5 seconds before the end of the first normal power interval to the end of the first interval, a continuation effect is executed, which is an effect that suggests that the normal power opening and closing execution mode will continue without terminating. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 92(B), a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 as a continuation effect, and a character string such as "Wow! The jackpots are still coming!" is displayed. Then, during the execution of this continuation effect, a right-hit instruction image GD1 larger than the right-hit instruction image GD2 shown in FIG. 92(A) is displayed in the upper right-hand region of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and a sound such as "Hit right!" is output. This allows the player to recognize that the normal power opening and closing execution mode will continue without terminating, and that a "right hit" should be made.

As explained above, in this modified example, after the pseudo general electric power ending effect is executed, which is the effect that suggests that the general electric power switching execution mode ends, it is possible that the general electric power switching execution mode will continue without ending. Since a continuation effect that is a suggestive effect is executed, after giving the player a feeling of disappointment that the normal power switch opening/closing execution mode ends, it becomes even more difficult to realize that the normal power switch opening/closing execution mode actually continues without ending. It can create great joy and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this modification, the decorative pattern is stopped in the display mode such as "111" in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and then the pseudo general power ending effect is displayed during the first general power interval period. However, the target general electric power interval period during which the pseudo general electric power ending effect is executed is not limited to the first electric power electric power interval. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the decorative pattern is stopped in a display mode such as "333" in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and then a pseudo general power ending effect is executed during the third general power interval period. Good too. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which the pseudo general electric power ending effect is executed in any of the electric power interval periods from the second time onward. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a pseudo general electric power ending effect is executed every time during the electric power interval period. Even with such a configuration, after giving the player a sense of disappointment that the general power switching execution mode ends, it makes the player feel even greater joy when the general power switching execution mode actually continues without ending. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

《2-7-2》Variation 2:
In the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the control mode of the final round of the special electric switch opening/closing processing period in the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning is set to be a different mode from the control mode of other rounds, and in the said final round, Unless the maximum number of game balls enters the second grand prize opening 58a within a predetermined time to end the final round early, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the next V prize jackpot will not be executed. It may also be configured such that the This will be explained in detail below.

In this modified example, the second special electric device 58b is configured to open multiple times only in the final round (16th round) of the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot, and the opening time for one time in the final round is set to 0.5 seconds, the closing time until the next opening is set to 1.0 seconds, the maximum opening time is set to 30.0 seconds, the maximum number of balls entered is set to 10, and the special electric ending period is set to 0.0 seconds. Therefore, until 10 game balls enter the second big winning opening 58a in the final round, the final round will not end unless the total opening time of the second special electric device 58b reaches the maximum opening time. Specifically, the final round continues until 60 openings for 0.5 seconds and 59 closings for 1.0 seconds are reached, and the required time for the final round is a maximum of 89.0 seconds. On the other hand, since the maximum number of balls entering in the final round is set to 10, the final round ends when 10 game balls enter the second large winning port 58a, and the special electric opening and closing execution mode also ends. That is, in the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot of this modified example, the required time per round is fixed at 5.0 seconds from the first round to the fifteenth round, regardless of the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after launch, but only in the sixteenth round, the required time for one round changes significantly depending on the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after launch. And the required time for the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special electric opening and closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot of this modified example will vary between about 130 seconds and a maximum of 209.5 seconds.

In this modified example, as in the above embodiment, the normal power interval period is 135.0 seconds, and if the special power opening/closing execution mode based on a V win has not ended by the time the normal electric device 34b is next opened, the special power opening/closing execution mode based on the next V win will not be executed, which will put the player at a disadvantage. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, in the final round of the special power opening/closing scenario A for a V win jackpot, a ball entry promotion effect is executed, which is an effect that encourages the player to enter a specified number of game balls (maximum number of balls that can be entered) into the second large winning port 58a within a specified time.

FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this modification. In this modified example, as a performance to promote ball entry, a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 as shown in FIG. Do your best!" and displays the remaining time of the power grid interval period.

Then, if the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning can be completed before the general electric power interval period ends, that is, before the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the next V winning An effect suggesting that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the above is executed is executed. Specifically, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 93(B), a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and a character string such as "Congratulations!! There are still more jackpots to come!" Display.

On the other hand, if the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning cannot be ended by the end of the normal power interval period, i.e., by the next opening of the normal electric role 34b, a disappearance effect is executed to indicate that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the next V winning will no longer be executed. Specifically, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 93(C), as a disappearance effect, a sad female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and a character string such as "Sorry... The next jackpot has disappeared..." is displayed. Then, the right hit instruction image GD1 that was displayed is changed to a smaller right hit instruction image GD2.

As explained above, in this modification, in the final round of the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V-winning jackpot, the maximum number of game balls that can be entered into the second grand prize opening 58a is sent to the second grand prize opening 58a before the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b. Since it is possible to provide the player with the game of letting the ball enter the ball, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Then, as the time required for the final round becomes longer, there is a possibility that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the next V winning jackpot will not be executed. It is possible to create a feeling of impatience, such as wanting the final round to be completed before the game is released, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this modification, in the final round of the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot, a ball entry promotion performance is a performance that encourages a predetermined number of game balls to enter the second grand prize opening 58a within a predetermined time. Therefore, a new game in which a predetermined number of game balls enter the second big prize opening 58a within a predetermined time causes the special electric opening/closing execution mode to end by the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b. In addition to making the player understand the nature of the game, it is also possible to increase the player's motivation to enter a predetermined number of game balls into the second grand prize opening 58a within a predetermined time.

In addition, in this modification, if the special electric opening/closing execution mode does not end before the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b, the disappearance effect is executed, so the player is informed that the The player can be made to recognize that the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode has not ended, and can also be made to recognize that the subsequent flow of the game will change due to the fact that the special electric opening/closing execution mode has not been terminated.

Furthermore, in this modified example, special electric opening/closing scenario A for a V-winning jackpot (16 rounds, variable length) has more rounds than special electric opening/closing scenario B for a V-winning jackpot (12 rounds, fixed length), but it also has the risk that the time required for the final round will be too long, which means that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the next V-winning jackpot will not be executed. Therefore, the player can feel both a sense of happiness and tension as they take on risks in exchange for more benefits (more rounds), which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

In this modified example, the required time is not fixed only for the final round, but it is not limited to this configuration, and it may be configured such that the required time is not fixed only for certain rounds (for example, odd-numbered rounds), or the required time is not fixed for all rounds. In other words, it is sufficient to configure such that the total required time for the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot is not fixed. Even with this configuration, there is a possibility that the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the next V-winning jackpot will not be executed due to the total required time for the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot being too long, which can create tension in the player and increase the enjoyment of the game.

《2-7-3》Variation 3:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the time required for each round game that constitutes the special train opening/closing processing period of the special train opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is fixed by adopting the configuration of this modification described below. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the The configuration of this modification will be described below.

In this modification, in the V-winning jackpot special electric opening/closing execution scenario, the special electric opening period is 12.0 seconds, the number of rounds is 10, the number of openings of the second special electric accessories 58b in one round is one, and the maximum opening time is set to 0.1 seconds, the maximum number of balls to enter is 5, the special call interval period is set to 12.0 seconds, and the special call ending period is set to 5.0 seconds. In this modification, a plurality of protrusions are provided on the upper surface of the second special electric accessory 58b as speed reduction means for reducing the passing speed of the game ball, and the game ball reaches the second special electric accessory 58b. The ball will temporarily stay on the upper surface of the second special electric accessory 58b until it passes through it.

And, when the game balls are shot toward the flow passage 301 at 0.6 second intervals, and the shot game balls reach the second special electric device 58b, if the second special electric device 58b maintains a closed state for 5.0 seconds or more, a maximum of about eight game balls are retained on the upper surface of the second special electric device 58b during the closed state. And, when the second special electric device 58b opens, about eight game balls retained on the upper surface of the second special electric device 58b enter the second large winning opening 58a. Note that, although the maximum number of game balls that can enter the second large winning opening 58a is set to five, the maximum opening time of 0.1 seconds has already elapsed before it is detected that the game balls have entered the second large winning opening 58a, so the second special electric device 58b enters a closed state regardless of whether the number of game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 58a has reached the maximum number of balls. Therefore, the time required for one round will be fixed at 0.1 seconds, regardless of the mode in which the game ball is launched and the behavior of the launched game ball.

As a result, the time required for the special line opening and closing execution mode based on the special line opening and closing execution scenario for a V-winning jackpot in this modified example is 12.0 seconds (special line opening period) + 0.1 seconds (1 round) x 10 (number of rounds) + 12.0 seconds (special line interval period) x 9 (number of intervals) + 5.0 seconds (special line ending period), which is fixed at 126.0 seconds.

Even with such a configuration, the time required for the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be fixed, as in the above embodiment.

2-7-4 Variation 4:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, even if the required time of all the rounds of play constituting the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot reaches the maximum opening time, the special electric opening and closing execution mode may be configured to be surely terminated by the next opening of the normal electric role 34b in the normal electric opening and closing execution mode. The configuration of this modified example will be described below.

In this modified example, only one special electric opening and closing scenario for a V winning jackpot is set, and in this special electric opening and closing scenario, the special electric opening period is set to 5.0 seconds, the number of rounds is 16, the number of times the second special electric device 58b opens in one round is 1 time, the maximum opening time is set to 20.0 seconds, the maximum number of balls that can enter is 10, the special electric interval period is set to 5.0 seconds, and the special electric ending period is set to 5.0 seconds.

Therefore, the longest time required for each round game in this modification is 20.0 seconds, and the longest time required for the entire special train opening/closing execution mode based on the special train opening/closing scenario is 5.0 seconds (special train opening period) + 20 seconds. 0 seconds (1 round) x 16 (number of rounds) + 5.0 seconds (special electric interval period) x 15 (number of intervals) + 5.0 seconds (special electric ending period), resulting in 405.0 seconds.

Next, we will explain the shortest time required for each round of play in this modified example. In this modified example, the shortest interval between launches of game balls is 0.6 seconds, so the shortest time required for 10 game balls to enter the second large winning port 58a is about 6.0 seconds, and the shortest time required for each round of play is about 6.0 seconds. As a result, the shortest time required for the entire special line opening and closing execution mode based on the special line opening and closing scenario is 5.0 seconds (special line opening period) + approximately 6.0 seconds (1 round) x 16 (number of rounds) + 5.0 seconds (special line interval period) x 15 (number of intervals) + 5.0 seconds (special line ending period), which is about 181.0 seconds.

In this modified example, in each normal power opening/closing scenario, the normal power interval period is set to 415.0 seconds, the normal power ending period is set to 420.0 seconds, and the special power opening/closing execution mode based on the special chart small win ends in about 2.0 seconds. Therefore, in this modified example, even if the special power opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed after the first opening of the normal electric device 34b in the normal power opening/closing execution mode and the required time for all rounds of play included in the special power opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is the longest at 20.0 seconds, the special power opening/closing execution mode will surely end by the second opening of the normal electric device 34b in the normal power opening/closing execution mode.

In other words, according to this modification, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed after the first opening of the normal electric accessory 34b, and all the round game requirements included in the special electric opening/closing execution mode are executed. Even if the time is the longest, 20.0 seconds, it is possible to realize a pachinko machine 10 that can open the normal electric accessories 34b after the special electric opening/closing execution mode ends. As a result, regardless of the length of time required for multiple round games included in the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be reliably executed multiple times. It becomes possible to do so.

《2-7-5》Variation 5:
In the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned variations, during the execution of a round game during the special electric opening/closing processing period of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, information corresponding to the number of rounds of the round game being executed is displayed on the symbol display device 41. It may also be configured to be displayed on the display surface 41a. Specifically, for example, a character string such as "The first round is in progress!" may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 during the period in which the first round of the round game is being executed. .

In addition, during the special electric open/close processing period of the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, information corresponding to the number of remaining rounds of play may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. Specifically, for example, during the period when the first round of round play is being played in the special electric open/close execution mode consisting of 16 rounds of round play, a character string such as "15 times remaining" may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, during the period when the 15th round of round play is being played, a character string such as "1 time remaining" may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and during the period when the 16th round (final round) of round play is being played, a character string such as "Last!" may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of round games executed in the special electric opening/closing execution mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a specific image may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 at the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. Specifically, for example, during the special train ending period of the special train opening/closing execution mode, an image of a specific character (for example, a whale character) saying lines such as "Did you have fun? See you again!" is displayed as a specific image. It may also be configured to be displayed on the display surface 41a of the device 41. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode has ended, and also give the player a sense of fulfillment in having executed the special electric current opening/closing execution mode and a desire to continue playing the game. can do.

Further, at the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, information regarding the profits earned by the player during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, for example, during the special train ending period of the special train opening/closing execution mode, information regarding the number of game balls paid out as prize balls during the execution of the special train opening/closing execution mode (information regarding the number of game balls acquired by the player) information) may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp the profit that he or she has earned by executing the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode, and also to feel a sense of fulfillment in having executed the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode and afterward. It is possible to give the player a desire to play the game.

In addition, during a round of play in the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot, the decorative pattern may be displayed in a variable manner on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and then the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner may be displayed in a stopped manner in a predetermined display mode. Specifically, for example, immediately after a normal winning combination is won in a normal combination lottery, the number of times the normal electric device 34b will be opened due to the winning combination is not indicated to the player, and then, during the execution of the final round of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot, the decorative patterns are displayed variably on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and if the normal electric device 34b is to be opened after the special electric opening and closing execution mode ends (if consecutive wins are to be played), the decorative patterns may be displayed stopped in a display mode in which the same decorative patterns are lined up, such as "777", while on the other hand, if the normal electric device 34b is not to be opened after the special electric opening and closing execution mode ends (if consecutive wins are not to be played), the decorative patterns may be displayed stopped in a display mode in which the same decorative patterns are not lined up, such as "326". With this configuration, the decorative symbols begin to change display while a round of play is in progress, giving the player a sense of surprise and creating a sense of great anticipation about what the display mode (stop mode) of the decorative symbols will be when they are stopped and displayed.

2-7-6 Variation 6:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, if the player does not "hit right" during the period from the end of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (time t10 in FIG. 68) to the next opening of the normal electric role 34b in the normal electric opening and closing execution mode (time t11), a special right-hit notification process may be executed that notifies the player to hit right more strongly (intensely) than the normal right-hit notification process executed during other periods. The configuration of this modification will be described below.

In this modified example, as in the above embodiment, the opening time of the normal electric device 34b in the normal electric opening and closing execution mode is short, so if the player releases the game ball after confirming that the normal electric device 34b has been opened, the normal electric device 34b is already in a closed state when the game ball reaches the normal electric device 34b, and the game ball cannot enter the special chart start port 34a provided below the normal electric device 34b. And since the game ball does not enter the special chart start port 34a, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart small win is not executed, and as a result, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning big win is not executed, which is an unfavorable situation for the player.

Therefore, in this modified example, during the period from the end of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot to the next opening of the normal electric role 34b in the normal electric opening and closing execution mode, it is determined whether or not a "right hit" has been performed, and if it is determined that a "right hit" has not been performed, a special right hit notification process is executed. Specifically, in the special right hit notification process, a right hit instruction image with letters and arrows larger than the right hit instruction image GD1 shown in Figure 70 (A) is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and a voice such as "Please hit right" is output at maximum volume from the speaker 46.

Note that various configurations can be adopted as a configuration for determining whether or not "right-handed hitting" is being performed. For example, in this modification, a sensor that can detect the passage of a game ball is provided near the entrance of the flow path 301, and the interval at which the passage of a game ball is detected by the sensor is a predetermined interval (for example, 2.0 seconds). ) or more, it is determined whether or not "right-handed hitting" is being performed. If it is determined that the interval at which the passing of the game ball is detected by the sensor is greater than or equal to a predetermined interval, it is determined that a "right-handed hit" is not being performed, and on the other hand, if the interval is less than the predetermined interval. If it is determined, it is determined that "right-handed hitting" is being performed.

As explained above, in this modified example, during the period from the end of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot to the next opening of the normal electric device 34b in the normal electric opening and closing execution mode, it is determined whether or not a "right hit" has been performed, and if it is determined that a "right hit" has not been performed, the special right hit notification process is executed. This makes it possible to prevent a situation that is unfavorable to the player, such as the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a special small winning jackpot not being executed because the game ball did not enter the special chart start hole 34a, and as a result, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot not being executed either.

The notification mode of the special right hit notification process is not limited to the above notification mode, as long as it is a notification mode that notifies more strongly (intensely) than the notification mode of the normal right hit notification process, that is, a notification mode that makes it easier for the player to recognize that he or she should hit right. For example, the right hit instruction image displayed in the special right hit notification process may repeatedly expand and contract, or, for example, the right hit instruction image may flash and emit rainbow colors.

《2-7-7》Variation 7:
In the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, a configuration may be adopted in which the result of the special pattern lottery that is executed when the game ball enters the special pattern starting hole 34a includes a special pattern failure. According to such a configuration, even if a general figure is won in the general figure lottery, the general electric opening/closing execution mode is executed, and the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a, the special figure small win will not be won after that. Since there is a possibility that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the above information will not be executed, it is possible to make the players interested in the result of the special drawing lottery, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

2-7-8 Variation 8:
In the normal electric winning device 34 of the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, a special electric start port may be provided instead of the special chart start port 34a. When a game ball enters the special electric start port provided instead of the special chart start port 34a, the above-mentioned special chart lottery is not performed, and the special electric opening and closing execution mode in which the first special electric role object 57b opens and closes is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the control by omitting the counter and table for the special chart lottery, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples.

《2-7-9》Variation 9:
In the ordinary power winning device 34 of the above embodiment and each modification, a V winning hole is provided in place of the special figure starting hole 34a, and the first special electric winning device 57 (the first big winning hole 57a, the first special electric winning hole The configuration may be such that the object 57b and the V winning opening 57av) are omitted. According to such a configuration, when the game ball enters the regular symbol starting gate 35 and the regular symbol is won in the regular symbol lottery, the regular electrical opening/closing execution mode is executed. Then, if the game ball enters the V winning hole while the normal electric accessory 34b is being opened during the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed. After that, even after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot ends, the normal electric opening/closing execution mode is still continuing, and if the ordinary electric accessory 34b opens again and the game ball enters the V winning hole, The special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot will be executed again. That is, according to such a configuration, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize winning jackpot is executed multiple times per general figure without going through the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit in the above embodiment. It becomes possible to realize the configuration.

In addition, in a configuration like this modified example where the special power opening/closing execution mode based on a special small win is not executed, or where the execution period of the special power opening/closing execution mode based on a special small win is very short, if the time required from the start to the end of the normal power opening/closing execution mode can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the special power opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot, then it is possible to realize a configuration in which the special power opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot can be executed multiple times during the execution of the normal power opening/closing execution mode.

2-7-10 Variation 10:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, all the results of the special drawing lottery executed when the game ball enters the special drawing start gate 34a are set to the special drawing big win, and the first special electric winning device 57 (first big winning gate 57a, first special electric device 57b, V winning gate 57av) may be omitted. According to such a configuration, if the game ball enters the normal drawing start gate 35 and wins the normal drawing lottery, the normal electric opening and closing execution mode is executed. Then, if the game ball enters the special drawing start gate 34a while the normal electric device 34b is open during the execution of the normal electric opening and closing execution mode, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special drawing big win is executed. In the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special drawing big win, the opening and closing process of the second special electric device 58b is executed. After that, even after the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart big win is terminated, the normal electric opening and closing execution mode continues, and if the normal electric role 34b opens again and the game ball enters the special chart start hole 34a, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart big win will be executed again. In other words, according to this configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart big win is executed multiple times in one normal win without going through the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special chart small win in the above embodiment.

It should be noted that not all of the results of the special drawing lottery may be set as a special drawing jackpot, and a configuration may be adopted in which a special drawing jackpot is set as a part of the results of the special drawing drawing. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which 50% of the results of the special drawing lottery are set to be a special drawing jackpot, and the remaining 50% are set to be a special drawing loss. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the players interested in the results of the special drawing lottery, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

2-7-11 Variation 11:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, a high probability mode (so-called probability state) in which the probability of winning the special jackpot in the special drawing lottery is high may be provided. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the start of the high probability mode as a specific benefit is determined based on the game ball entering the V winning port 57av, and a configuration may be adopted in which the high probability mode is terminated when a predetermined termination condition is met in which the special drawing lottery in the high probability mode advantageous to the player is executed multiple times (for example, 100 times) after the start of the high probability mode (a number-cut probability machine, ST (special time) machine).

In addition, in this configuration, information corresponding to the remaining number of times that the special drawing will be performed in the high probability mode may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. Specifically, for example, when the remaining number of times that the special drawing will be performed in the high probability mode is 15, a character string such as "15 times remaining" may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and during the period when the special pattern is changing in the last special drawing performed in the high probability mode, a character string such as "Last!" may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. With this configuration, it is possible to arouse the player's interest and curiosity in the number of times that the special drawing will be performed in the high probability mode, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Further, a specific image may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 at the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. Specifically, for example, during the special train ending period of the special train opening/closing execution mode, an image of a specific character (for example, a whale character) saying lines such as "Did you have fun? See you again!" is displayed as a specific image. It may also be configured to be displayed on the display surface 41a of the device 41. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode has ended, and also give the player a sense of fulfillment in having executed the special electric current opening/closing execution mode and a desire to continue playing the game. can do.

Furthermore, at the end of the high probability mode, information regarding the profits earned by the player during execution of the high probability mode may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, for example, the number of times you won a special jackpot without switching from high probability mode to low probability mode (so-called consecutive winnings), and the number of game balls paid out as prize balls during the said consecutive winnings. Information regarding the number of game balls acquired by the player may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to understand the profits that he or she has earned by executing the high probability mode, and also to feel a sense of fulfillment from executing the high probability mode and to play the game thereafter. It can give motivation to.

Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which one specific benefit is determined from among multiple types of specific benefits (for example, specific benefits A and B). Specifically, for example, in a configuration that includes the above-mentioned high-frequency support mode (so-called electric support state) in addition to the high-probability mode, specific profit A starts the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. , both the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are configured to end when 100 special lottery drawings are executed without winning a special lottery jackpot.On the other hand, for specific profit B, the high probability mode and a high-frequency support mode is started, and the high-probability mode ends when 100 special lottery drawings are executed without winning a special lottery jackpot, and the high-frequency support mode ends when a special lottery is executed without winning a special lottery jackpot. It may be configured such that the lottery ends when the special drawing lottery is executed 30 times. For example, specific profit A starts a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, and in both the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, 100 special lottery drawings are made without winning a special lottery jackpot. On the other hand, specific profit B is when the special drawing lottery is executed 30 times without winning the special drawing jackpot in either the high probability mode or the high frequency support mode. The configuration may be such that the process ends at . According to such a configuration, players are not only interested in whether or not a specific benefit will be awarded, but also what type of specific benefit will be awarded if a specific benefit is awarded. It can arouse interest and interest in things such as

In addition, during the execution of the special drawing lottery in the high probability mode (while the special pattern is changing), the decorative pattern may be displayed in a variable manner on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and then the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner may be displayed in a fixed manner in a predetermined display mode. Specifically, for example, during the execution of the special drawing lottery in the high probability mode, the decorative pattern may be displayed in a variable manner in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and if the special drawing lottery is won in the special drawing lottery, the decorative pattern may be displayed in a fixed manner in which the same decorative pattern is aligned, such as "777", for example. On the other hand, if the special drawing lottery is not won in the special drawing lottery, the decorative pattern may be displayed in a fixed manner in which the same decorative pattern is not aligned, such as "326". According to this configuration, the variable display of the decorative pattern begins during the execution of the special drawing lottery in the high probability mode, so that the player can be given a great sense of expectation about what the display mode (stop mode) will be when the decorative pattern is stopped.

Furthermore, the opening operation of the ordinary electric accessory 34b may be performed at least a plurality of times per ordinary figure based on the result of the ordinary figure lottery.

In addition, if one cycle from the opening of the normal electric device 34b to the end of the high probability mode is defined as one special game round, one special game round may be executed based on the opening of the normal electric device 34b at a first timing, and the normal electric device 34b may be controlled to open at a second timing after the end of the one special game round.

Also, the configuration may be such that a restriction is placed so that the variable display of the normal symbols does not start. More specifically, the configuration may be such that a predetermined restriction period is placed during the period from the first timing to the end of one special game round that occurs after the second timing.

The special chart selection in the high probability mode can be changed between the first special chart change time (e.g., 2 seconds), which has the shortest execution time, and the second special chart change time (e.g., 180 seconds), which is the longest, depending on the game state. Even if multiple special chart selections in the high probability mode for one special game performed after the first timing are all performed in the second special chart change time, the normal electric device 34b may be configured to be opened after the end of that one special game.

In this way, according to the present modification example, since the high probability mode is provided, it is possible to improve the interest of the game more than in the above embodiment and each of the above modification examples.

<<3>> Third embodiment:
《3-1》Structure of gaming machine:
FIG. 94 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") as a third embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, this outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back side of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window 18 is formed in the approximate center of the front door frame 14. Resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided around the window 18. The electric parts are composed of light-emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role in enhancing the presentation effect by lighting or blinking during each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, etc. In addition, a glass unit 19 consisting of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the open window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board through the glass unit 19 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as loaned balls loaned from a loaning machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and launches the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front of the game board. The lower tray 21 is disposed below the upper tray 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. The bottom surface of the lower tray 21 is formed with an outlet 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged to the outside from the lower tray 21.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation section through which a player performs an input operation for a game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

On the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, simply referred to as the "right side"), an operating handle 25 for the player to operate is provided. When the player operates (rotates) the operating handle 25, game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting the operation of the game ball launching mechanism, a wait button 25b that stops the launch of game balls by the game ball launching mechanism when pressed by the player, and a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a turns on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in response to the amount of rotation, and game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "left side"). When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing strength to the front of the game board, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired to the front of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and also flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can perform what is called a "right-handed hit." Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. The back of the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with control devices for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 95 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board that has a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is constructed so that traces of opening and closing remain. For example, a seal is affixed to an openable/closable location, and when the board box is opened, the words "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio/light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The audio/light emission control device 90 controls light-emitting means such as speakers and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands sent from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands sent from the audio/light emission control device 90. The pattern display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays patterns and images for performances.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The firing control device 80 controls the game so that when an instruction to fire a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 that is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a slope that is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and gently sloped so that the game balls flow downstream. A tank rail 55 having a tank rail 55, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, receiving game balls from the case rail 56 and paying out a predetermined number of game balls according to instructions from a payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the power necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. The power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By turning the power switch 88 ON/OFF, the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

Figure 96 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to define a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. Game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism are guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flow down the game area PA. In the game area PA, multiple nails 42 are planted approximately perpendicular to the game board 30, and various gimmicks such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 has a number of openings formed therethrough in the front-to-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a first variable winning device 36. In addition, a delay mechanism 202 and a V winning mechanism 210 are disposed on the right side of the game board 30 when viewed from the front. The delay mechanism 202 and the V winning mechanism 210 will be described in detail later.

Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 includes a special figure unit 37, a regular figure unit 38, and a round display section 39.

As shown in the figure, the general winning opening 32 is a ball entry opening member that forms an entry opening through which a game ball can enter, and multiple general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (Figure 95).

The first starting hole 33 is a ball entry hole member that forms a ball entry hole through which a game ball can enter. The first starting hole 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the lower right side of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

As shown in the figure, the through gate 35 is provided in the flow path 203 of the delay mechanism 202. The through gate 35 has a through hole that penetrates vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that triggers a lottery to open the electric role 34a. Specifically, when a game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the passing as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric role opening lottery). If the electric role opening is selected as a result of the internal lottery, the electric role 34a transitions to an electric role opening state in which the electric role 34a is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is disposed upstream of the second start port 34 in the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 can flow down the game area PA after passing through and enter the second start port 34. Note that in this embodiment, even if a game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The first variable winning device 36 includes a first big winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and a first opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the first big winning opening 36a. The first opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the first big prize opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60, if a big hit or a small win is won and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the first opening/closing door 36b will open the game ball according to a preset opening/closing scenario. The state changes between an open state in which prizes can be won and a closed state. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode that is entered when a jackpot or small win is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by a ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, This is a mode in which the first opening/closing door 36b or the second opening/closing door 212b (described later) repeats an open state and a closed state. In other words, if a jackpot or small win is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33, the opening/closing operation that allows the ball to enter the first big winning opening 36a or the second opening/closing door 212b. Move to execution mode. Similarly, even if a jackpot or small win is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34, the opening/closing that allows the ball to enter the first big winning opening 36a or the second opening/closing door 212b Move to execution mode. In this embodiment, when one game ball enters the first large prize opening 36a of the first variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

Here, the delay mechanism 202 and the V winning mechanism 210 will be explained.

Figure 97 is an explanatory diagram explaining the delay mechanism 202 and the V winning mechanism 210. As can be seen from Figure 96, the delay mechanism 202 and the V winning mechanism 210 are located on the right side of the play area PA when viewed from the front, and are configured so that when a player operates the operating handle 25 to circulate a game ball to the right side of the play area PA, the game ball always circulates through the delay mechanism 202.

As shown in FIG. 97, the delay mechanism 202 includes a flow path 203. The channel 203 communicates with the V winning mechanism 210, and the game balls that have flowed into the channel 203 are guided to the V winning mechanism 210. The flow path 203 has a meandering shape from side to side with respect to the game board 30, and the time it takes for game balls flowing on the right side of the game area PA to reach the V winning mechanism 210 is determined by a nail on the right side of the game board 30. It has a delay function compared to general gaming machines that are equipped with. Note that the delay mechanism 202 is not limited to a meandering flow path, and other configurations may be adopted as long as the configuration has a function of delaying the game balls flowing on the right side of the gaming area PA from reaching the V winning mechanism 210. You may. For example, a croon with an opening at the bottom may be used, or a dynamic accessory may be used to temporarily stop the distribution of game balls and restart the distribution of game balls after a certain period of time. Good too.

A detection sensor 205 is arranged in the flow path 203 to detect the circulation of game balls. It is arranged to detect the circulation state of game balls circulating on the right side of the game board 30. In other words, the detection sensor 205 detects the state of the game ball launch operation performed by the player operating the operation handle 25 or the game ball launch button 26. The details of the detection process of the circulation state of game balls using the detection sensor 205 will be described later.

As described above, a through gate 35 is disposed in the flow path 203. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, the flow path 203 is formed so that a game ball flowing through the flow path 203 may or may not pass through the through gate 35.

The V winning mechanism 210 includes a second variable winning device 212, a detection sensor 213, a flow path 214, a flow path 215, a flow path 216, and a flow path 217. The second variable winning device 212 includes a second large winning opening 212a and a second opening/closing door 212b that opens and closes the second large winning opening 212a. As with the first opening/closing door 36b described above, the second opening/closing door 212b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the second large winning opening 212a. When a big win or small win is won as a result of an internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60 and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the second opening/closing door 212b changes state between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state according to a preset opening/closing scenario.

As shown in the figure, if the second opening and closing door 212b is open when the game ball reaches the V winning mechanism 210, the game ball that has flowed through the flow path 203 of the delay mechanism 202 enters the second large winning opening 212a and flows through the flow path 214. On the other hand, if the second opening and closing door 212b is closed when the game ball reaches the V winning mechanism 210, the game ball does not enter the second large winning opening 212a, but flows out of the flow path 203 and flows further downward through the area to the right of the game area PA.

The detection sensor 213 is a sensor that detects that a game ball has entered the second large winning opening 212a. In this embodiment, when one game ball enters the second large winning opening 212a of the second variable winning device 212, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

The flow path 214 branches into a flow path 215, a flow path 216, and a flow path 217 on the downstream side. A first distribution valve 218 and a second distribution valve 219 are arranged on the flow path 214, and the combination of open and closed states of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 (hereinafter referred to as The game balls flowing through the channel 214 are sorted into one of the channels 215, 216, and 217 according to the opening/closing pattern (also called an opening/closing pattern). Specifically, when the first distribution valve 218 is in a closed state, the game balls flowing through the channel 214 are distributed to the channel 215. When the first distribution valve 218 is in the open state and the second distribution valve 219 is in the closed state, the game balls flowing through the channel 214 are distributed to the channel 216. When the first distribution valve 218 is in an open state and the second distribution valve 219 is in an open state, the game balls flowing through the channel 214 are distributed to the channel 217. The opening/closing pattern of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 corresponds to the type of jackpot or small win that triggered the opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 to be in the open state. In the present embodiment, when a small win is won in the winning lottery, the second door 212b opens during execution of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small win. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of small wins are provided. Opening and closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set in association with each other for each type of small win. The correspondence between the types of small wins and the opening/closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 will be described later.

The flow path 215 guides the game ball to a clone 220 included in the V winning mechanism 210. The croon 220 has three first V winning ports V1 and three discharge ports 223. No matter which of the three first V winning holes V1 the game ball enters, the same process is executed by the pachinko machine 10. That is, the three channels communicating with the interior of the pachinko machine 10 from the three first V winning ports V1 arranged on the clone 220 merge into one channel or winning port inside. After the game balls flowing out from the channel 215 turn around the concave surface of the croon 220, they enter either the three first V prize openings V1 or the three discharge ports 223.

The flow path 216 guides the game ball to the discharge port 225. The flow path 217 guides the game ball to the second V winning hole V2 provided in the V winning mechanism 210.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if a game ball enters the first V winning hole V1 or the second V winning hole V2, a jackpot is confirmed. More specifically, if a game ball enters the second large winning hole 212a when the second opening and closing door 212b is open during the period in which the opening and closing execution mode is being executed, and then the game ball enters the first V winning hole V1 or the second V winning hole V2, a jackpot is confirmed. Then, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the opening and closing execution mode is executed again as a bonus for the confirmed jackpot. The type of jackpot that is confirmed when a game ball enters the first V winning hole V1 or the second V winning hole V2 will be described later. The delay mechanism 202 and the V winning mechanism 210 have been described above.

The explanation returns to FIG. 96. An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and the ball enters the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the first variable winning device 36, or the second variable winning device 212. The game balls that have not been played are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each configured with a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display section 37a is a display section for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed variably or statically based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display section 37a is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. , causes the first symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. When the lottery ends, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop display the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second pattern display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern refers to a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 34. When a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is performed, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a variable second pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a stationary second pattern corresponding to the lottery result.

The time from when the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display section 37a or the second pattern displayed on the second pattern display section 37b starts to when it stops is also called the change time. Specifically, the time from when the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display section 37a starts to when it stops is also called the first change time, and the time from when the second pattern displayed on the second pattern display section 37b starts to when it stops is also called the second change time.

The special symbol unit 37 further includes a first reserved display section 37c and a second reserved display section 37d, which are made up of LED lamps, located adjacent to the first pattern display section 37a and the second pattern display section 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting hole 33 are reserved. The first reserved display section 37c displays the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 33 by the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. Also, in this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting hole 34 are reserved. The second reserved display section 37d displays the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 34 by the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit.

The general map unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When a lottery to open an electric reel is held triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the general map unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to light up, flash, or display in a predetermined manner. When the lottery to open an electric reel is completed, the general map unit 38 displays in a predetermined manner corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light-emitting display unit in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of rounds of play that will occur in the open/close execution mode, or a display corresponding thereto. A round of play is a game in which the first open/close door 36b or the second open/close door 212b remains open until one of the following conditions is met: either the predetermined upper limit duration has elapsed, or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls have entered the first variable winning device 36 or the second variable winning device 212. The number of rounds of play varies depending on the type of jackpot that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of rounds of play when the open/close execution mode is started, and ends when the open/close execution mode ends and a new game round begins.

Note that the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display section 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the drawing process and the drawing results.

The variable display unit 40 is disposed approximately in the center of the play area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a pattern display device 41. The pattern display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the pattern display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The pattern display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first pattern display unit 37a displays a variable or predetermined display based on a ball entering the first starting hole 33, the pattern display unit 41 displays a variable or predetermined display of the pattern accordingly. Also, when the second pattern display unit 37b displays a variable or predetermined display based on a ball entering the second starting hole 34, the pattern display unit 41 displays a variable or predetermined display of the pattern accordingly. The pattern display unit 41 is not limited to display effects triggered by a ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, but also performs display effects during the opening and closing execution mode to which the mode shifts when a big win (or small win) is won. Details of the pattern display unit 41 are explained below.

FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram showing the liquid crystal symbols and the display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 98(a) is an explanatory diagram showing liquid crystal symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 98(a), liquid crystal symbols representing numbers 1 to 8 are displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41. In addition, as the liquid crystal pattern to be variably displayed, a liquid crystal pattern in which a character or other pattern is attached to each liquid crystal pattern showing the numbers 1 to 8 may be used.

FIG. 98(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, liquid crystal symbols numbered 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 98(a) are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and each symbol row is arranged periodically from top to bottom or A variable display that scrolls from the bottom to the top is performed. As shown in FIG. 98(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one liquid crystal symbol is displayed in each symbol column in a state where it is stopped on the active line L. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, a variable display in which the liquid crystal symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 periodically scroll in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each of the scrolling symbols switches from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, a state in which a predetermined liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. becomes. When the fluctuating display of the liquid crystal symbols ends and the liquid crystal symbols stop displaying, if the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of liquid crystal symbols is valid. It is formed on line L. For example, a combination of the same liquid crystal symbols is formed on the active line L. Note that the mode of fluctuating display of the liquid crystal symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned mode, but may vary depending on the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of the fluctuating display of the liquid crystal symbols in the symbol rows, each Various modes can be adopted for the variable display of the symbols, such as the number of symbols in the symbol row.

Here, the term "game round" refers to the period from the start of the variable display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b until the end of the variable display and the stop display. and the winning lottery result regarding the random number value (also referred to as special information) obtained based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 to the player. This is one unit of notification processing. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information every game. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first symbol display section In either the second symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, after the segment display is displayed in a variable manner, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the pachinko machine 10 displays the symbol display device for each game. At step 41, after a predetermined symbol row is displayed in a variable manner, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit gaming time consists of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 98(b), a first reservation display area Ds1 and a second reservation display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. The number of balls to be held based on the number of balls entering the first starting port 33 is displayed in the first holding display area Ds1. In the second reservation display area Ds2, the number of reservations based on the number of balls entering the second starting port 34 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, the number of reserved game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four, respectively. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a game round that is to be executed later in response to the reserved game balls, and which has not been executed yet, is also referred to as a reserved game round.

《3-2》Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

Figure 99 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes an audio and light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that includes elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a ROM 63 that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. It is equipped with a RAM 64 which is a memory for storing information. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may be provided with some of the functions that the MPU 62 has. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input port of the main control board 61 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 and the power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply unit 85. The main control board 61 receives a stable 24V DC power supply from the power supply unit 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply unit 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the dispensing control device 70, etc., and supplies power to each device. The power supply unit 85 also has a capacitor (not shown), and continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period of time when a power failure occurs or when the power switch 88 (Figure 95) is turned off.

In addition, various detection sensors are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided at various winning ports such as the general winning port 32, the first start port 33, the second start port 34, the through gate 35, the first variable winning device 36, and the second variable winning device 212, and the detection sensor 205 (Fig. 97) provided at the delay mechanism 202. Based on the signals from the various detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 judges whether the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entry port, judges whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 35, and judges whether the game ball has circulated through the delay mechanism 202 (detects the circulation state of the game ball). Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, and executes a lottery for opening the electric device based on the entry of the game ball into the through gate 35.

The output port of the main control board 61 includes a first variable winning drive section 36c that opens and closes the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36, and a first variable winning drive section 36c that opens and closes the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212. A second variable winning drive unit 212c that opens and closes the first distribution valve 218, a second distribution valve drive unit 219a that opens and closes the second distribution valve 219, An electric accessory drive section 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is connected to the main display section 45. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the first variable winning drive unit 36c so that the first opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed, and further, the second opening/closing door 212b is opened/closed. The drive control of the second variable prize winning drive unit 212c is executed as follows. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the first distribution valve drive unit 218a so that the first distribution valve 218 is opened and closed, and further controls the first distribution valve drive unit 218a so that the second distribution valve 219 is opened and closed. Then, drive control of the second distribution valve drive section 219a is executed. In addition, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when an electric accessory is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed.

Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a ball entering the general prize opening 32 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and a ball entering the first starting opening 33 is transmitted. If it is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and if the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34 is specified, the payout of one game ball is sent. A prize ball command corresponding to this is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A firing control device 80 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 . The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met. Further, the operation handle 25 and the game ball firing button 26 are connected to the firing control device 80.

The audio and light emission control device 90 receives various commands sent from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 sends various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the audio light emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 consisting of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game performance that reflects the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound and light emission control device 90. Specifically, based on various commands received from the sound and light emission control device 90, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination that will ultimately be stopped and displayed, as well as grasping whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach performance, and the content of the advance notice performance executed in each game round. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game round, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, setting the display on the main display section 45, setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A winning type counter C2 is used to sort out the types of jackpot results and small winning results. A reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. In addition, the change type counter CS is used to determine the change time in the first pattern display section 37a and the second pattern display section 37b of the main display section 45, and in the pattern display device 41. Furthermore, the electric role opening counter C4 is used for the electric role opening lottery to determine whether or not the electric role 34a of the second starting hole 34 is opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to its counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a specified area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 includes a reserved information storage area 64b and a judgment process execution area 64c. The reserved information storage area 64b includes a first reserved area Ra and a second reserved area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the time of the ball entering are stored in chronological order in the first reserved area Ra of the reserved information storage area 64b. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the time of the ball entering are stored in chronological order in the second reserved area Rb of the reserved information storage area 64b.

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be explained. As described above, the winning random number counter C1 is used in the winning lottery. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one in sequence within the range of 0 to 1199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value. Furthermore, when the winning random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering, and when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, the updated value is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering.

The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment process execution area 64c, where it is compared with the winning/losing table stored in the winning/losing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not it will be a big win or a small win. The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment process execution area 64c, where it is compared with the winning/losing table stored in the winning/losing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not it will be a big win or a small win.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is determined by the value of the winning random number counter C1 when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. As a result, the execution areas AE of the determination processing execution area 64c are moved in the order in which they were acquired. Then, the winning random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is compared with the winning/failure table stored in the winning/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether there will be a jackpot or a small win. be done.

Next, details of the winning type counter C2 will be explained. The winning type counter C2 is used when determining the big winning type and the small winning type. The winning type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The winning type counter C2 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the first reserved area Ra of the reserved information storage area 64b at the time when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, and is stored in the second reserved area Rb of the reserved information storage area 64b at the time when the game ball enters the second starting hole 34.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the winning type counter C2 stored in the winning type counter C2. Further, when the result of the winning lottery is a small win, the small win type is determined using the value of the win type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the winning type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. . In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot or a small win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reserve area Ra of the reserve information storage area 64b when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, and is stored in the second reserve area Rb of the reserve information storage area 64b when the game ball enters the second starting hole 34. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reserve area Ra is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c, and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a reach occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reserve area Rb is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c, and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a reach occurs. However, if the winning lottery results in a big win and the mode transitions to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some combinations of symbols that have the possibility of forming a combination of symbols that correspond to a jackpot are stopped for some of the multiple symbol arrays displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and in that state, symbols are displayed variably in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined active line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 98(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach state. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, the reach line is formed, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a reach effect. This includes a method in which a combination of symbols in which a reach line is formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, a decision is made as to whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The change type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is repeatedly updated during the remaining time in the normal processing. The buffer value of the change type counter CS is acquired when the change display in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b starts, and when the change pattern is determined when the pattern display device 41 starts changing the pattern. When determining the change time in the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b, the change time table stored in the change time table memory area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric role opening counter C4 will be described. The electric role opening counter C4 is configured to be incremented by one in the range of, for example, 0 to 465, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric role opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric role opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d is moved to the electric role execution area 64e, and then a lottery is held in the electric role execution area 64e to determine whether or not to control the electric role 34a to the open state using the value of the electric role opening counter C4. Specifically, in the electric role execution area 64e, the winning/losing table (winning/losing table for electric role opening lottery) stored in the role lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is collated with the value of the electric role opening counter C4, and it is determined whether or not to control the electric role 34a to the open state. For example, if C4 = 0, 1, the electric device 34a is controlled to an open state, and if C4 = 2 to 465, the electric device 34a is maintained in a closed state.

Note that at least one of the acquired value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the winning type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 corresponds to special information in the present invention. Further, at least one of the value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the winning type counter C2, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb is also referred to as reservation information.

Next, the validity table will be explained. The win/fail table is table data for comparing with the winning random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the winning random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment includes, as a success/failure table, a success/failure table for the first starting opening and a success/failure table for the second starting opening.

Figure 101 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the first starting port. As shown in Figure 101, in the hit/miss table for the first starting port, five values from 0 to 4 are set as the hit random number counter C1 value that results in a big hit. In addition, five values from 5 to 9 are set as the hit random number counter C1 value that results in a small hit (miss). And, of the hit random number counter C1 values from 0 to 1199, values from 10 to 1199 are misses.

A "small win" is a win/loss result that triggers a transition to an opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door of the variable winning device (in this embodiment, the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212) is opened and closed, but does not trigger a transition to support mode. In contrast, a "miss" is a win/loss result that does not trigger a transition to opening/closing execution mode, and further does not trigger a transition to support mode.

FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table for the second starting port. As shown in FIG. 102, five values from 0 to 4 are set in the win/fail table for the second starting opening as the value of the winning random number counter C1 that is a jackpot. In addition, 1195 values from 5 to 1199 are set as the values of the winning random number counter C1 that result in small wins (misses). Note that the win/fail table for the second starting opening of this embodiment does not have a value set for the win random number counter C1 that is not a small win but a miss.

Next, the jackpot type will be explained. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing a difference between the following two aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspects of opening/closing control of the variable winning device (in this embodiment, the first variable winning device 36) in the opening/closing execution mode (2) Support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening/closing execution mode ends

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the opening and closing execution mode executed when a big win is won, the first opening and closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 is opened and closed, and in the opening and closing execution mode executed when a small win is won, the second opening and closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 is opened and closed.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of opening/closing control of the first variable prize winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the first variable prize winning device 36 is controlled from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency of winnings is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the first opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed multiple times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is not performed until 30 seconds have elapsed or the first It can be set to continue until the number of balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the first opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is not performed until 0.2 sec has elapsed or the first opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed twice. It can be set to continue until the number of balls entering the field reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the first opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the first opening/closing door 36b is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, winning of game balls does not substantially occur. However, it may be set so that winnings of game balls can occur even in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode.

The number of openings and closings of the first opening/closing door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the first variable winning device during the period from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the frequency of winnings in 36 is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the first opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the number of openings and closings in the high-frequency winning mode is higher than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be larger. good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, a configuration may be adopted in which winnings to the first variable winning device 36 do not substantially occur in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the above (2) opening/closing execution mode ends, the game balls continue to be launched into the game area PA in the same manner. When compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role opening lottery in the electric role-playing object opening lottery using the electric role-playing object opening counter C4. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role-playing role in the electric role-playing lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time period for opening the electric accessory 34a once when an electric role opening win may be set is longer than that in the low-frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in this embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric role 34a is opened when the electric role opening is won may be set to be greater than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the opening time of the electric role 34a is set to be longer. Also, in the case where the electric role opening is won in the high-frequency support mode and the electric role 34a is opened multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state may be set to be shorter than the opening time of one. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured between one electric role opening lottery and the next electric role opening lottery may be set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode.

The electric device 34a is driven based on the results of the electric device opening lottery when the flow of game balls to the through gate 35 satisfies a predetermined flow condition (i.e., when game balls flow through the through gate 35), and is not driven when game balls do not flow through the through gate 35.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a ball will enter the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in fulfilling the special information acquisition condition.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the winning type counter C2. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a small win, the type of the small win is sorted using the win type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot type and small win type corresponding to the value of the win type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

Figure 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table for the first starting port. Figure 103(a) shows the big win distribution table for the first starting port, and Figure 103(b) shows the small win distribution table for the first starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referenced when drawing a winning lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33.

As shown in FIG. 103(a), jackpot A and jackpot B are set in the jackpot distribution table for the first starting port as jackpot types based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33. ing. In jackpot A, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode is 10R, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the first variable winning device 36 operates to open and close. In the jackpot distribution table for the first starting opening in Figure 103(a), the descriptions shown in brackets [ ] in the [opening/closing scenario for jackpot] column correspond to the set number of round games in the jackpot opening/closing execution mode. Correspondingly, this is a program for controlling the opening and closing of the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 (hereinafter also referred to as opening/closing scenario for jackpot). In the jackpot A, the main MPU 62 controls the opening and closing of the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 10R according to the jackpot opening/closing scenario [LOP10]. Moreover, jackpot A is a jackpot in which the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the high-frequency support mode. The number of games played in the high-frequency support mode is 100.

In jackpot B, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode is 10R, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 opens and closes. In the jackpot B, the main MPU 62 controls the opening and closing of the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 10R according to the jackpot opening/closing scenario [LOP10]. Moreover, jackpot B is a jackpot in which the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode is 0.

In the jackpot distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the winning type counter C2 from "0 to 99", "0 to 54" correspond to jackpot A, and "55 to 99" correspond to jackpot B. Compatible.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), the small prize distribution table for the first starting hole has small prize a and big prize b set as small prize types based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33.

In the small win a, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode is 1R, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 opens and closes. The descriptions shown in brackets [ ] in the [opening/closing scenario for small winnings] column of the small winning distribution table for the first starting opening in Fig. 103(b) are for the set round in the opening/closing execution mode for small winnings. A program for controlling the opening and closing of the second opening/closing door 212b, first distribution valve 218, and second distribution valve 219 of the second variable prize winning device 212 in accordance with the number of games played (hereinafter also referred to as opening/closing scenario for small winnings). call). In the small win a, the main side MPU 62 controls the opening and closing of the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable prize winning device 212 corresponding to the number of round games 1R according to the opening/closing scenario for the small win [SOPa], and Opening/closing control of distribution valve 218 and second distribution valve 219 is performed. The opening/closing scenario for small winnings [SOPa] is such that the first distribution valve 218 and An opening/closing pattern for the second distribution valve 219 is set. Specifically, the first distribution valve 218 is in the closed state at the timing when the game ball that entered the second big prize opening 212a flows through the channel 214 and reaches the first distribution valve 218, and the game ball The opening and closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set so that the liquid is distributed to the flow path 215 and easily reaches the clone 220.

In addition, when the game ball enters the V winning hole (first V winning hole V1 or second V winning hole V2) during the opening/closing execution mode started with the small win a, the jackpot is confirmed. The type of jackpot determined in this case is jackpot Va. Details of the jackpot Va will be described later.

If a game ball enters the V entry port during an opening and closing execution mode that is started due to a small win and a big win is confirmed, the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the big win confirmed by the game ball entering the V entry port is started again after the opening and closing execution mode currently being executed ends. Then, the opening and closing execution mode according to the type of big win confirmed is executed, and if a high frequency support mode is set, a predetermined number of games are played in the high frequency support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

In the small win b, the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode is 1R, and in the open/close execution mode, the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 opens and closes. In the small win b, the main MPU 62 controls the opening and closing of the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 corresponding to the number of rounds of 1R according to the opening/closing scenario [SOPb] for the small win, and also controls the opening and closing of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219. In the opening/closing scenario [SOPb] for the small win, the opening and closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set so that the game ball that entered the second large winning hole 212a when the second opening/closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the crane 220. If the game ball enters the V winning hole during the opening/closing execution mode that is started by the small win b, a big win Vb is confirmed. Details of the big win Vb will be described later.

In the small prize distribution table for the first starting port, of the prize type counter C2 values of "0 to 99", "0 to 49" corresponds to small prize a, and "50 to 99" corresponds to small prize b.

As mentioned above, the opening and closing scenario for small wins [SOPa] and the opening and closing scenario for small wins [SOPb] have the opening and closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 set so that the game ball that entered the second large winning opening 212a is easily attracted to the crane 220. However, the game ball is not necessarily attracted to the crane 220, and depending on the timing at which the game ball enters the second variable winning device 212, it may be guided to the second V winning opening V2 or the discharge opening 225.

Figure 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table for the second starting port. Figure 104 (a) shows the big win distribution table for the second starting port, and Figure 104 (b) shows the small win distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the second starting port is referenced when drawing a winning lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34.

As shown in FIG. 104(a), the jackpot distribution table for the second starting port includes jackpot C, jackpot D, and jackpot E as jackpot types based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 34. is set. In jackpot C, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode is 15R, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the first variable winning device 36 operates to open and close. In the case of jackpot C, the main side MPU 62 performs opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 15R according to the jackpot opening/closing scenario [LOP15]. Moreover, jackpot C is a jackpot in which the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the high-frequency support mode. The number of games played in the high-frequency support mode is 100.

For a jackpot D, the number of rounds played in the opening and closing execution mode is 5R, and in the opening and closing execution mode, the first opening and closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 opens and closes. For a jackpot D, the main MPU 62 controls the opening and closing of the first opening and closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of rounds played of 5R, according to the opening and closing scenario [LOP5] for the jackpot. In addition, a jackpot D is a jackpot in which the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends becomes the high frequency support mode. The number of times played in the high frequency support mode is 100.

In the case of a jackpot E, the number of rounds played in the opening and closing execution mode is 5R, and in the opening and closing execution mode, the first opening and closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 opens and closes. In the case of a jackpot E, the main MPU 62 controls the opening and closing of the first opening and closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of rounds played of 5R according to the opening and closing scenario [LOP5] for the jackpot. In addition, a jackpot E is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the number of times played in the high-frequency support mode is 0.

In the jackpot allocation table for the second starting port, of the win type counter C2 values of "0-99", "0-28" corresponds to jackpot C, "29-43" corresponds to jackpot D, and "44-99" corresponds to jackpot E.

As shown in the small prize distribution table for the second starting hole in FIG. 104(b), the small prize distribution table for the second starting hole has small prize c, big prize d, small prize e, small prize f, and small prize g set as small prize types based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 34.

In the small win c, the number of rounds in the opening and closing execution mode is 1R, and in the opening and closing execution mode, the second opening and closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 opens and closes. In the small win c, the main MPU 62 controls the opening and closing of the second opening and closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 corresponding to the number of rounds of 1R according to the opening and closing scenario [SOPc] for the small win, and also controls the opening and closing of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219. In the opening and closing scenario [SOPc] for the small win, the opening and closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set so that the game ball that entered the second large winning port 212a when the second opening and closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the crane 220. Specifically, the opening and closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set so that when the game ball that enters the second large winning opening 212a flows through the flow path 214 and reaches the first distribution valve 218, the first distribution valve 218 is in a closed state, and the game ball is distributed to the flow path 215 and easily reaches the crane 220.

In addition, if the game ball enters the V winning hole (the first V winning hole V1 or the second V winning hole V2) during the opening and closing execution mode that is started by the small winning hole a, a big win is confirmed. The type of big win that is confirmed in this case is a big win Vc. Details of the big win Vc will be described later.

In the small win d, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode is 1R, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 opens and closes. In the small win d, the main side MPU 62 controls the opening and closing of the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable prize winning device 212 corresponding to the number of round games 1R according to the opening/closing scenario for the small win [SOPd], and Opening/closing control of distribution valve 218 and second distribution valve 219 is performed. The opening/closing scenario [SOPd] for small winnings is such that the game ball that enters the second big prize opening 212a when the second opening/closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the second V prize opening V2. Opening and closing patterns of the valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set. Specifically, the first distribution valve 218 is in an open state at the timing when the game ball that entered the second big prize opening 212a flows through the channel 214 and reaches the first distribution valve 218, and the game ball When the second distribution valve 219 reaches the second distribution valve 219, the second distribution valve 219 is in an open state, and the first distribution is performed so that the game balls are distributed to the flow path 217 and easily reach the second V prize opening V2. Opening and closing patterns of the valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set.

In addition, if the game ball enters the V winning hole (the first V winning hole V1 or the second V winning hole V2) during the opening and closing execution mode that is started by the small winning hole d, a big win is confirmed. The type of big win that is confirmed in this case is a big win Vd. Details of the big win Vd will be described later.

In the small win e, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode is 1R, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 opens and closes. In the small win e, the main side MPU 62 controls the opening and closing of the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable prize winning device 212 corresponding to the number of round games 1R according to the opening/closing scenario for the small win [SOPe], and Opening/closing control of distribution valve 218 and second distribution valve 219 is performed. The opening/closing scenario [SOPe] for small winnings is such that the game ball that enters the second big prize opening 212a when the second opening/closing door 212b is in the open state is easily attracted to the second V prize opening V2. Opening and closing patterns of the valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set. Specifically, the first distribution valve 218 is in an open state at the timing when the game ball that entered the second big prize opening 212a flows through the channel 214 and reaches the first distribution valve 218, and the game ball When the second distribution valve 219 reaches the second distribution valve 219, the second distribution valve 219 is in an open state, and the first distribution is performed so that the game balls are distributed to the flow path 217 and easily reach the second V prize opening V2. Opening and closing patterns of the valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set.

In addition, when the game ball enters the V winning hole (first V winning hole V1 or second V winning hole V2) during the opening/closing execution mode started with the small win e as a trigger, the jackpot is confirmed. The type of jackpot determined in this case is jackpot Ve. Details of the jackpot Ve will be described later.

In the small win f, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode is 1R, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 opens and closes. In the small win f, the main side MPU 62 controls the opening and closing of the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable prize winning device 212 corresponding to the number of round games 1R according to the opening/closing scenario for the small win [SOPf], and Opening/closing control of distribution valve 218 and second distribution valve 219 is performed. The opening/closing scenario for small winnings [SOPf] is such that the game ball that enters the second big prize opening 212a when the second opening/closing door 212b is in the open state is easily attracted to the second V prize opening V2. Opening and closing patterns of the valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set. Specifically, the first distribution valve 218 is in an open state at the timing when the game ball that entered the second big prize opening 212a flows through the channel 214 and reaches the first distribution valve 218, and the game ball When the second distribution valve 219 reaches the second distribution valve 219, the second distribution valve 219 is in an open state, and the first distribution is performed so that the game balls are distributed to the flow path 217 and easily reach the second V prize opening V2. Opening and closing patterns of the valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set.

In addition, if the game ball enters the V winning hole (the first V winning hole V1 or the second V winning hole V2) during the opening and closing execution mode that is started by the small winning hole f, a big win is confirmed. The type of big win that is confirmed in this case is a big win Vf. Details of the big win Vf will be described later.

In the small win g, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode is 1R, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 opens and closes. In the small win g, the main MPU 62 controls the opening and closing of the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 corresponding to the number of round games 1R according to the opening/closing scenario for the small winning [SOPg], and Opening/closing control of distribution valve 218 and second distribution valve 219 is performed. The opening/closing scenario [SOPg] for small winnings is such that the first distribution valve 218 And the opening/closing pattern of the second distribution valve 219 is set. Specifically, the first distribution valve 218 is in an open state at the timing when the game ball that entered the second big prize opening 212a flows through the channel 214 and reaches the first distribution valve 218, and the game ball The second distribution valve 219 is in a closed state at the timing when the ball reaches the second distribution valve 219, and the first distribution valve 218 And the opening/closing pattern of the second distribution valve 219 is set.

In addition, if the game ball enters the V winning hole (the first V winning hole V1 or the second V winning hole V2) during the opening and closing execution mode that is started by the small winning hole g, a big win is confirmed. The type of big win that is confirmed in this case is the big win Vg. Details of the big win Vg will be described later.

In the small prize distribution table for the second starting port, of the prize type counter C2 values of "0-99", "0-32" corresponds to small prize c, "32-38" corresponds to small prize d, "39-44" corresponds to small prize e, "45-66" corresponds to small prize f, and "67-99" corresponds to small prize g.

As mentioned above, in the opening/closing scenario for small wins [SOPc], the opening/closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set so that a game ball that enters the second large winning port 212a is likely to be attracted to the crane 220; however, it is not guaranteed that the game ball will be attracted to the crane 220, and depending on the timing at which the game ball enters the second variable winning device 212, it may be attracted to the second V winning port V2 or the discharge port 225. In addition, the opening and closing scenario for small wins [SOPd], the opening and closing scenario for small wins [SOPe] and the opening and closing scenario for small wins [SOPf] have the opening and closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 set so that a game ball that enters the second large winning port 212a is likely to be attracted to the second V winning port V2, but it is not guaranteed that the game ball will be attracted to the second V winning port V2, and depending on the timing at which the game ball enters the second variable winning device 212, it may be attracted to the crane 220 or the discharge port 225. Furthermore, in the opening and closing scenario for small wins [SOPg], the opening and closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set so that the game ball that enters the second large winning opening 212a is likely to be attracted to the discharge opening 225, but it is not guaranteed that the game ball will be attracted to the discharge opening 225, and depending on the timing at which the game ball enters the second variable winning device 212, it may be attracted to the crane 220 or the second V winning opening V2.

Next, we will explain the big wins Va to Vg that are determined when the game ball enters the V winning hole (the first V winning hole V1 or the second V winning hole V2) (hereinafter referred to as V winning) during the opening and closing execution mode that is started by each of the small wins a to g.

Figure 105 is an explanatory diagram explaining the types of jackpots that are determined when a game ball enters a V winning hole (first V winning hole V1, second V winning hole V2).

As shown in the figure, the jackpot Va is a jackpot with 10R rounds in the opening and closing execution mode, and in the opening and closing execution mode, the first opening and closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 opens and closes. In the jackpot Va, the main MPU 62 controls the opening and closing of the first opening and closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of rounds of 10R according to the opening and closing scenario [LOP10] for the jackpot. In addition, the jackpot Va is a jackpot in which the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends becomes the high frequency support mode. The number of times that the game is executed in the high frequency support mode is 100 times.

In the jackpot Vb, the number of rounds played in the opening and closing execution mode is 10R, and in the opening and closing execution mode, the first opening and closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 opens and closes. In the jackpot Vb, the main MPU 62 controls the opening and closing of the first opening and closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of rounds played of 10R according to the opening and closing scenario [LOP10] for the jackpot. In addition, the jackpot Vb is a jackpot in which the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends becomes the low frequency support mode. In other words, the number of times played in the high frequency support mode is 0.

In the jackpot Vc, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode is 15R, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 opens and closes. In the jackpot Vc, the main side MPU 62 performs opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 15R according to the jackpot opening/closing scenario [LOP15]. Moreover, the jackpot Vc is a jackpot in which the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the high-frequency support mode. The number of games played in the high-frequency support mode is 100.

In the jackpot Vd, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode is 15R, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 opens and closes. In the jackpot Vd, the main side MPU 62 performs opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 15R according to the jackpot opening/closing scenario [LOP15]. Moreover, the jackpot Vd is a jackpot in which the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the high-frequency support mode. The number of games played in the high-frequency support mode is 100.

In the case of a jackpot Ve, the number of rounds played in the opening and closing execution mode is 5R, and in the opening and closing execution mode, the first opening and closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 opens and closes. In the case of a jackpot Ve, the main MPU 62 controls the opening and closing of the first opening and closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of rounds played of 5R according to the opening and closing scenario [LOP5] for the jackpot. In addition, a jackpot Ve is a jackpot in which the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends becomes the high frequency support mode. The number of times that play is executed in the high frequency support mode is 100 times.

In the jackpot Vf, the number of rounds played in the opening and closing execution mode is 5R, and in the opening and closing execution mode, the first opening and closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 opens and closes. In the jackpot Vf, the main MPU 62 controls the opening and closing of the first opening and closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of rounds played of 5R according to the opening and closing scenario [LOP5] for the jackpot. In addition, the jackpot Vf is a jackpot in which the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends becomes the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the number of times played in the high-frequency support mode is 0.

In the jackpot Vg, the number of rounds played in the opening and closing execution mode is 5R, and in the opening and closing execution mode, the first opening and closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 opens and closes. In the jackpot Vg, the main MPU 62 controls the opening and closing of the first opening and closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of rounds played of 5R according to the opening and closing scenario [LOP5] for the jackpot. In addition, the jackpot Vg is a jackpot in which the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends becomes the low frequency support mode. In other words, the number of times played in the high frequency support mode is 0.

As can be seen from FIG. 105, the number of rounds played and the number of high-frequency support mode plays are the same for jackpots Vc and Vd, and for jackpots Vf and Vg, so the processing after winning a jackpot is essentially the same. However, since the types of small wins that trigger the winning of the jackpot are different, they are set as different types of jackpots for processing purposes.

Figure 106 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/lose table (win/lose table for the lottery for opening electric reels) used when conducting the lottery for opening electric reels.

FIG. 106(a) shows a winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery used in the low-frequency support mode (for the low-frequency support mode). As shown in FIG. 106(a), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 as the value of electric accessory opening counter C4 that is the winning electric accessory. Value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the low-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the low-frequency support mode, the electric role model 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 106(b) shows a win/fail table for electric accessory opening lottery used in the high-frequency support mode (for the high-frequency support mode). As shown in FIG. 106(b), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) contains 462 values from 0 to 461 as the value of electric accessory opening counter C4 that will be the winning electric accessory. Value is set. Four values from 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the high-frequency support mode, the electric role model 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 5.0 seconds.

In this way, the winning/losing table for the electric device opening lottery is set so that the high frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second starting hole 34 than the low frequency support mode.

《3-3》Electrical configuration of audio light emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

Figure 107 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 (Figure 99) are omitted. The audio and light emission control board 91 provided in the audio and light emission control device 90 is equipped with an MPU 92. The MPU 92 is an element that incorporates a CPU, ROM 93, RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control device 60 and the production operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, as well as a display control device 100.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 is equipped with an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for the background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is implemented as an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be expressed by each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 106 and have each character ROM 106 store image data and the like. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store JPEG image data for background images stored in the program ROM 103.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are also referred to as the audio/light side MPU 92, audio/light side ROM 93, and audio/light side RAM 94, respectively, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as the display side MPU 102.

《3-4》Overview of processing by gaming machines:
[Game flow]
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine. Specifically, an accessory is released in response to a small winning win, and as the accessory is released, the game ball wins a V prize and the jackpot is confirmed. The flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained below.

Figure 108 is an explanatory diagram that explains the flow of play in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment.

When a player starts playing, the player operates the operating handle 25 to circulate the game ball to the left side of the game area PA when viewed from the front (hereinafter also referred to as left hit). Then, the game ball is placed in the first start hole 33 to start a game round (F101). Hereinafter, a game round that is started by placing the game ball in the first start hole 33 is also referred to as a first start hole game round. Note that in this explanation, the support mode is the low frequency support mode at the time when a game round starts.

Then, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the executed first starting slot game (F103), and the jackpot type is other than jackpot A (jackpot B) (F103: NO), the jackpot is won. The triggered opening/closing execution mode (round game) is executed (F104). Thereafter, the player hits the ball left-handed again to cause the game ball to enter the first starting hole 33 to execute the first starting hole game round (F101).

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is jackpot A in F103 (F103: YES), the opening and closing execution mode is executed in response to the jackpot (F105). After that, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The player circulates the game ball to the right side of the game area PA when viewed from the front (hereinafter, also referred to as right hit), and causes the game ball to enter the second start hole 34 to execute the second start hole game round (F112).

If you do not win the jackpot in the winning lottery of the first starting slot game executed in F101 (F102: NO), and if you do not win the small jackpot (F106: NO) , the game ball is hit to the left, and the game ball enters the first starting port 33 to execute the first starting port game round (F101).

In the winning lottery for the first starting port game executed in F101, if the player does not win a jackpot (F102: NO) and wins a small jackpot (F106: YES), an opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small jackpot is executed (F107). In the opening/closing execution mode, the second opening/closing door 212b opens and closes as described above. If the player hits the ball from the right and causes the game ball to enter the second large winning port 212a, circulate through the V winning mechanism 210, and cause the game ball to enter the V winning hole (F108: YES), a jackpot is confirmed. Specifically, in the open/close execution mode triggered by a small prize win, a right hit is made to cause the game ball to enter the second large prize opening 212a and circulate through the V prize mechanism 210, and when the game ball is guided to the crane 220 by distribution by the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 and the game ball enters the first V prize opening V1, or when the game ball enters the second V prize opening V2 by distribution by the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219, a V prize is won and a big prize is confirmed.

If the determined jackpot type is jackpot Va, an opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot is executed (F110). After that, the support mode becomes high-frequency support mode. The player circulates the game ball to the right side of the game area PA when viewed from the front (right-handed hit), enters the game ball into the second starting port 34, and executes the second starting port game round (F112).

On the other hand, if the type of the confirmed jackpot is jackpot Vb, the open/close execution mode is executed in response to the jackpot (F111). After that, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode. After that, the player hits the ball again with the left hand to cause the game ball to enter the first start hole 33, thereby executing the first start hole game round (F101).

In F108, if the game ball does not enter the V in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by a small win (F108: NO), the player will hit the ball again with the left hand after the opening and closing execution mode ends, causing the game ball to enter the first starting hole 33 and executing a first starting hole game round (F101).

In F112, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits the ball to the right to enter the game ball into the second starting port 34, and the second starting port game round is executed. In the winning lottery in the second starting slot game, if you win a jackpot (F113: YES) and the jackpot type is other than jackpot C or jackpot D (jackpot E) (F114: NO), you will win the jackpot. The triggered opening/closing execution mode (round game) is executed (F115). Thereafter, the player hits the ball left-handed again to cause the game ball to enter the first starting hole 33 to execute the first starting hole game round (F101).

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is jackpot C or jackpot D in the winning lottery in the second starting slot game run executed in F112 (F114: YES), the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot is executed. (F116). After that, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode again. The player hits the ball to the right and causes the game ball to enter the second starting port 34 to execute the second starting port game round (F112).

If you did not win the jackpot in the winning lottery in the second starting slot game run executed in F112 (F113: NO), and if you did not win the small win either (F117: NO) , If the executed second starting slot game is within the limit number of game times (100) to be executed as the high-frequency support mode (F118: YES), the high-frequency support mode is continued, and the game The player hits the ball to the right, causes the game ball to enter the second starting port 34, and executes the second starting port game round (F112). On the other hand, if the executed second starting slot game time exceeds the limit number of game times (100 times) to be performed as the high-frequency support mode (F118: NO), the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode, The player hits the ball to the left again and causes the game ball to enter the first starting hole 33 to execute the first starting hole game round (F101).

In the winning lottery for the second start port game executed in F112, if the player does not win a jackpot (F113: NO) and wins a small jackpot (F117: YES), an opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small jackpot is executed (F119). In the opening/closing execution mode, the second opening/closing door 212b opens and closes as described above. If the player hits the ball from the right and causes the game ball to enter the second large winning port 212a, circulate through the V winning mechanism 210, and cause the game ball to enter the V winning hole (F120: YES), a jackpot is confirmed. Specifically, in the open/close execution mode triggered by a small prize win, a right hit is made to cause the game ball to enter the second large prize opening 212a and circulate through the V prize mechanism 210, and when the game ball is guided to the crane 220 by distribution by the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 and the game ball enters the first V prize opening V1, or when the game ball enters the second V prize opening V2 by distribution by the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219, a V prize is won and a big prize is confirmed.

If the determined jackpot type is jackpot Vc, jackpot Vd, or jackpot Ve (F121: YES), an opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot is executed (F122). After that, the support mode becomes high-frequency support mode. The player hits the ball to the right again, causes the game ball to enter the second starting port 34, and executes the second starting port game round (F112).

On the other hand, if the determined jackpot type is jackpot Vf (F121: NO), an opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot is executed (F123). After that, the support mode becomes low frequency support mode. Thereafter, the player hits the ball left-handed again to cause the game ball to enter the first starting hole 33 to execute the first starting hole game round (F101).

In F120, if the game ball does not win a V prize during the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a small hit (F120: NO), the process proceeds to F118. Since F118 has already been explained, its explanation will be omitted. The flow of a series of games by the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

As explained in the game flow shown in FIG. 108, during high frequency support mode, the player hits the ball from the right to enter the second start port 34, and executes a second start port game round. At this time, as can be seen from FIG. 102, there is a high probability of winning a small prize in the winning lottery for the executed second start port game round. Also, as shown in FIG. 104, the types of small prizes that can be won in the second start port game round are small prize c, small prize d, small prize e, small prize f, or small prize g.

Here, we will consider the advantage of the player when winning each of the small wins c, small win d, small win e, small win f, and small win g.

If the small win c is won, the game ball is attracted to the crown 220 in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the small win c. If the game ball enters the first V winning hole V1 of the crown 220, the big win Vc is confirmed, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode again in the next game round to be executed. Also, if the game ball enters the discharge hole 223 of the crown 220, if the game round executed is less than the limited number of games (100 times) of the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode continues, and the player can enter the game ball into the second start hole 34 again to execute the second start hole game round. In other words, if a small win c is won before the limited number of plays (100) in the high-frequency support mode, either a big win Vc is confirmed (if the ball enters the first V winning hole V1), or the high-frequency support mode continues (if the ball enters the outlet 223), and the player is not put at a disadvantage by winning the small win c.

If the small win d is won, the game ball is attracted to the second V winning hole V2 in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the small win d. If the game ball enters the second V winning hole V2, the big win Vd is confirmed, and the support mode will be the high frequency support mode again in the next game. If the small win e is won, the game ball is also attracted to the second V winning hole V2 in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the small win e. If the game ball enters the second V winning hole V2, the big win Ve is confirmed, and the support mode will be the high frequency support mode again in the next game. If the small win f is won, the game ball is attracted to the second V winning hole V2 in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the small win f. If the game ball enters the second V winning hole V2, the big win Vf is confirmed, and the support mode will be the low frequency support mode again in the next game.

If the small win g is won, the game ball is attracted to the outlet 223 in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the small win g. If the game ball enters the outlet 223, high frequency support will continue for the next game if the number of games played through the second start port that have been played is less than the limit (100 games) for the number of games played in the high frequency support mode.

When looking at each of these small wins c, small win d, small win e, small win f, and small win g from the player's perspective, if the small win c is won, as mentioned above, the result is You won't be at a disadvantage. It is not possible to determine which of the small wins d, e, and f is the small win at the time the game ball enters the second V winning hole V2. As can be seen from FIG. 104(b), 6 win type counters C2 are allocated to the small win d, 6 win type counters C2 are allocated to the small win e, and 12 win type counters C2 are allocated to the small win f. Since the winning type counter C2 is distributed, assuming that the ball enters the 2nd V winning hole V2, the percentage of small winnings d is 25%, the percentage of small winnings e is 25%, and the percentage of small winnings e is 25%. The percentage of winning f is 50%. That is, from the player's perspective, when a game ball enters the second V winning hole V2 and a jackpot is confirmed, the probability that it is a jackpot Vf that will shift to the low frequency support mode in the future is 50%.

Therefore, if the player wins a small prize in the second start port game that is executed during the high frequency support mode, the player expects that the type of the small prize will be small prize C.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a sense of anticipation is given to the player by using the performance in the second starting opening game round executed during the high-frequency support mode. A detailed explanation will be given below.

[Setting process for effects during game play]
In this embodiment, in the second start port game times executed during the high frequency support mode, a specific suggestion effect (hereinafter also referred to as a specific suggestion effect) is executed, which suggests that there is a possibility of winning the small prize c. More specifically, in the second start port game times in which the small prize c is won, the specific suggestion effect is executed with a high probability. Note that, in the other second start port game times in which the small prize c is not won, the specific suggestion effect is executed with a lower probability than in the second start port game times in which the small prize c is won.

Figure 109 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a specific suggestion effect. Figure 109 (a) shows the display surface 41a immediately after the start of a game round in which the winning lottery result is a small winning lottery c. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, a female character CH is displayed on the display surface 41a for a short period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) immediately after the start of the game round as a specific suggestion effect, thereby suggesting that the winning lottery result in that game round is a small winning lottery c.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109(b), at the end of the variable time period, the liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the winning lottery result in the game round is stopped and displayed.

As explained in FIG. 108 above, the specific suggestion performance is executed with a high probability in the second starting opening game round in which the small win c is won, but the second starting opening gaming round in which the small winning c is won. When the player recognizes that a specific suggestion effect will be executed in In order to avoid the ball entering, there is a possibility that in a game round in which the specific suggestion performance is not performed, hitting the ball to the right may be stopped, or the shooting of the game ball itself into the game area PA may be stopped. Hereinafter, in a specific case, the action of the player to stop right-handed hitting and the action of stopping firing the game ball into the gaming area PA will also be referred to as stopping hitting. As mentioned above, from the player's perspective, assuming that the game ball enters the second V prize opening V2 and the jackpot is confirmed, the probability that the jackpot Vf will shift to the low-frequency support mode in the future is 50%, the player desires to win other small wins other than the small win c and to avoid the game ball from entering the second V winning hole V2. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player will make a stop shot in the second starting opening game round in which the specific suggestion performance is not executed.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the specific suggestion effect is executed with a high probability in the second starting port play round in which the small win c is won, and if a stop shot is detected, the execution of the specific suggestion effect in the second starting port play round in which the small win c is won is stopped. In this way, a sense of expectation is given to the player, while preventing the player from acquiring an unfair advantage that was not originally intended. Below, an overview of the above-described process is explained using a simple flowchart. The details of the process will be described later.

FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing an overview of a process for setting a performance in a game round (also referred to as a game round performance setting process).

In F201, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for the game round to be executed is a jackpot. In F201, if the result of the winning lottery for the game round to be executed is a jackpot (F201: YES), the process proceeds to F202, where a presentation pattern for the jackpot is set. Specifically, one of multiple types of presentation patterns prepared for the jackpot is selected by random number drawing according to the variable time of the game round to be set, and is set as the presentation pattern to be executed. After executing F202, the game round presentation setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, in F201, if the result of the winning lottery in the game round is not a big win (F201: NO), proceed to F203. In F203, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery in the game round to be executed is a small win or not.

In F203, if the result of the winning lottery for that game round is a small win (F203: YES), proceed to F204.

In F204, it is determined whether the type of the winning small win is small win c. In F204, if the type of the won small win is small win c (F204: YES), the process proceeds to F205, and it is determined whether or not the stopping flag is ON. The stop hit flag is turned ON when it is determined that the player is performing a stop hit in the second starting opening game that has been executed during the high frequency support mode, and the series of high frequency support modes has ended. It turns OFF in case.

While the details will be described later, the determination of whether or not the player is performing stop shot is based on the number of game balls in circulation detected by the detection sensor 205 during the period in which a game round in which the result of the winning lottery is a small win c is being executed during the high frequency support mode, and the number of game balls in circulation detected by the detection sensor 205 during the period in which a game round in which the result of the winning lottery is a small win c is being executed. In this embodiment, the determination of whether or not the player is performing stop shot is based on whether or not the value (hereinafter also referred to as the circulation frequency) calculated from the number of game balls in circulation detected by the detection sensor 205 during the period in which a game round in which the result of the winning lottery is a small win c is being executed and the value (hereinafter also referred to as the stop shot condition) calculated from the number of game balls in circulation detected by the detection sensor 205 during the period in which a game round in which the result of the winning lottery is a small win c is being executed meets a predetermined condition (hereinafter also referred to as the stop shot condition). The details of the stop shot condition will be described later.

If it is determined in F205 that the stopping flag is not ON (F205: NO), the process proceeds to F206 and a performance pattern for small hit c is set. Specifically, as described above, a performance pattern is set in which a specific suggestion performance is executed with high probability. Note that in all cases where the result of the winning lottery is a small win c, the specific suggestion performance is not set as the performance pattern, and there are cases where no specific suggestion performance is set. The decision as to whether or not to set a specific suggestion effect is made by lottery using random numbers. After executing F205, the game run performance setting process is ended.

If the type of the won small win is not small win c in F204 (F204: NO), or if it is determined that the stopping flag is ON in F205 (F205: YES), the process advances to F207. In F207, a normal performance pattern for small wins is set. Specifically, specific suggestion effects are rarely executed, and depending on the type of each small win and the fluctuating time of the game, a random number lottery is used from among multiple types of performance patterns prepared for small wins. Select one and set it as the performance pattern to be executed. After executing F207, the game run performance setting process is ended. In addition, in F207, the specific suggestion effect is not set at all as the effect pattern, but rather the specific suggestion effect is set as the effect pattern with a lower probability compared to the case where the effect pattern for small hit c is set in F206. .

In F203, if the result of the winning lottery in the game round is not a small win (F203: NO), the process advances to F208. In F208, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the game round. If it is determined in F208 that a reach occurs (a miss where a reach occurs) (F208: YES), the process proceeds to F209, and a production pattern for a reach is set. After executing F209, the game run performance setting process is ended.

If it is determined in F208 that a reach will not occur (F208: NO), the process proceeds to F210 and sets the presentation pattern for when a reach will not occur. After executing F210, the game round presentation setting process ends.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the specific suggestion effect is executed in the game round in which the winning lottery result is the small win c, the player who has recognized that the specific suggestion effect has been executed In contrast, it is possible to give a sense of expectation regarding the result of the winning lottery. Further, if it is determined that the player is playing a stop game, the specific suggestion effect will not be executed in the game round where the winning lottery result is a small win c, so that the player wishes to execute the specific suggestion effect. In this case, it is possible to suppress the player's firing operation of the game ball that would result in a stop shot. As a result, if the player's stopping action will give the player a benefit that is not planned for the gaming machine, by determining whether or not to perform a specific suggestion effect based on the presence or absence of the stopping action, It is possible to suppress the granting of benefits to unscheduled players.

In other words, if it is determined that the distribution pattern of the game balls due to the player's firing operation is a stop shot, the specific suggestion effect is not executed even if a small win c has occurred, so that a player who wishes to execute a specific suggestion effect can be encouraged to perform a game ball firing operation that is not determined to be a stop shot.

In addition, when determining the presentation for a game in which the result of the winning lottery is a small prize c, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute a specific suggestion presentation for a game in which the result of the winning lottery is a small prize c based on the distribution frequency at the detection sensor 205 for game times that have already been executed in which the result of the winning lottery is a small prize c and the distribution frequency at the detection sensor 205 for game times that have already been executed in which the result of the winning lottery is a lottery result other than a small prize c. Therefore, by comparing the distribution frequency at the detection sensor 205 for game times that have already been executed in which the result of the winning lottery is a small prize c with the distribution frequency at the detection sensor 205 for game times that have already been executed in which the result of the winning lottery is a lottery result other than a small prize c, it is possible to detect whether the player is switching the mode of the game ball launch operation between a game in which the result of the winning lottery is a small prize c and a game in which the result of the winning lottery is other than a small prize c. Therefore, for example, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not a player is intentionally trying to obtain a bonus that is not planned for the gaming machine, and based on the result of this determination, it is possible to decide whether or not to execute a specific suggestion performance.

Furthermore, the detection of the player's firing operation (specifically, the detection of a stop shot) is detected based on the circulation frequency of game balls at the detection sensor 205. Since the circulation frequency is the time average of the number of balls in circulation, it is possible to accurately detect the player's circulation mode by eliminating short-term (e.g., 1 second) noisy changes in circulation mode. In addition, the circulation frequency is correlated with the mode of firing game balls by the player. Therefore, it is possible to execute a performance that reflects the mode of firing game balls by the player, thereby improving the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, since the performance in the game round to be executed from now on is determined based on the distribution frequency in the game round in which the specific suggestion performance was executed, the firing mode of the player due to the execution of the specific suggestion performance, that is, the specific suggestion performance It can be determined whether or not to execute the specific suggestion process thereafter, taking into consideration the player's reaction to the execution and the player's psychology. In other words, when deciding whether or not to execute a specific suggestion performance, it is possible to take into account the player's reaction when the specific suggestion performance was previously executed, and the player's reaction regarding whether or not to execute the specific suggestion performance can be taken into consideration. can be controlled using feedback.

《3-5》Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. Processing executed in main control device 60 will be described first, and then processing executed in audio emission control device 90 and display control device 100 will be explained.

In order to advance each game round, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes will be explained next. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power outage signal, but a description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sn0101, reading processing for various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is saved. After that, the process advances to step Sn0102.

In step Sn0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0103.

In step Sn0103, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sn0104. Note that the value of the variation type counter CS is updated in normal processing (FIG. 116), which will be described later.

In step Sn0104, a ball entering process for the starting port is executed when the ball enters the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Details of the ball entry process for the starting port in step Sn0104 will be described later. After executing step Sn0104, the process advances to step Sn0105.

In step Sn0105, a through ball entry process is executed when the ball enters the through gate 35. Details of the through ball entry process in step Sn0105 will be described later. After executing step Sn0105, proceed to step Sn0106.

In step Sn0106, ball entry processing for the V winning hole is executed. Details of the ball entering process for the V winning hole in step Sn0106 will be described later. After executing step Sn0106, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Ball entry process for starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be explained. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 111: Sn0104).

Figure 112 is a flowchart showing ball entry processing for the starting hole. In step Sn0201, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (starting ball entry) is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting hole 33. In step Sn0201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (Sn0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0202, where a prize ball command is set to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0203.

In step Sn0203, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33. After that, the process advances to step Sn0204.

In step Sn0204, the starting pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first starting pending number RaN), which is a value stored in the pending number storage area of the first holding area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first starting reservation number RaN indicates the number of balls being reserved based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. After that, the process advances to step Sn0209.

If it is determined in step Sn0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting hole 33 (Sn0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn0205, where it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second starting hole 34 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting hole 34.

If it is determined in step Sn0205 that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 34 (Sn0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0206, where a prize ball command is set to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (Sn0205: NO), the ball entry process for this starting hole is terminated.

In step Sn0207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. After that, the process advances to step Sn0208.

In step Sn0208, the start pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number memory area of the second pending area Rb, is read out, and the second start pending number RbN is set as the target for the processing described below. The second start pending number RbN indicates the number of reserved balls based on balls entering the second start port 34. Then, proceed to step Sn0209.

In step Sn0209, it is determined whether or not the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sn0204 or step Sn0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Sn0209, if the starting pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sn0209: NO), the entry process for the main starting hole is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sn0209, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit (Sn0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0210, where 1 is added to the start pending number N of the corresponding holding area, and then the process proceeds to step Sn0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reservation number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reservation number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. After that, the process advances to step Sn0212.

In step Sn0212, the values of the hit random number counter C1, hit type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sn0103 (FIG. 111) are stored in the first free memory area of the corresponding reserve area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the reserved number to which 1 was added in step Sn0210. Specifically, when the first start reserved number RaN is set as the processing target, the values of the hit random number counter C1, hit type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sn0103 are stored in the first free memory area of the first reserve area Ra, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first start reserved number RaN to which 1 was added in step Sn0210. In addition, if the second start pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the values of the hit random number counter C1, hit type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sn0103 are stored in the first free memory area of the second pending area Rb, that is, the memory area corresponding to the second start pending number RbN to which 1 was added in step Sn0210. After executing step Sn0212, proceed to step Sn0213.

In step Sn0213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (pending information) of each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. This is a process in which a determination is made as to the presence or absence of the pending information before it becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing step Sn0213, the process advances to step Sn0214.

In step Sn0214, a process for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the result of the first determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a pending command.

The hold command indicates the occurrence of a ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the ball entering. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to check the pending information before it becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 116: Step Sn0603) of normal processing to be described later.

In addition, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the audio emission control device 90 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 to the number of hold pieces. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first pending display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the pending number. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34, the audio emission control device 90 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 to indicate the number of pending balls. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step Sn0214, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<First Determination Process>
Next, the first-goal determination process will be described. The first-goal determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for the starting-goal-goal process (FIG. 112: Sn0213).

Figure 113 is a flowchart showing the first determination process. As described above, the first determination process is a process that executes, based on the reserved information, determination of whether the winning lottery has been won, the type of jackpot, and whether a reach has occurred, before the reserved information becomes the subject of the winning lottery by the main control device 60.

In step Sn0301, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 112) is read out. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sn0302, and it is determined whether the read value of the winning random number counter C1 is the first reservation area Ra.

In step Sn0302, if it is determined that the read value of the winning random number counter C1 is the first reservation area Ra (Sn0302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0303 and refers to the success/failure table for the first starting opening. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn305, and as a result of referring to the win/fail table for the first starting opening, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Sn0302, if it is determined that the read value of the winning random number counter C1 is not in the first reservation area Ra (Sn0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn0304, and the win/fail table for the second starting opening is referred to. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sn305, and as a result of referring to the win/fail table for the second starting opening, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step Sn0305, if it is determined that the value of the winning random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot (Sn0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0306, and the winning value stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting hole this time is Ascertain the value of the type counter C2. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sn0307, and the jackpot distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, if the hit type counter C2 to be distributed this time is acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the jackpot distribution table for the first starting port is If the ball is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the jackpot distribution table for the second starting port is referred to. After executing step Sn0307, the process advances to step Sn0308.

In step Sn0308, the jackpot allocation table is referenced, and the allocated jackpot type is stored as jackpot information in the first determination process result storage area 64. Then, the first determination process is terminated.

In step Sn0305, if it is determined that the value of the winning random number counter C1 does not correspond to a jackpot (Sn0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn0309. In step Sn309, it is determined whether the read value of the hit random number counter C1 corresponds to a small win. In step Sn309, if it is determined that the value of the winning random number counter C1 corresponds to a small win (Sn0309: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0310.

In step Sn0310, the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting hole this time is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sn0311, and the small winning distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, if the hit type counter C2 to be distributed this time is acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the small winning distribution table for the first starting port If the ball is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the small winning distribution table for the second starting port is referred to. After executing step Sn0311, the process advances to step Sn0312.

In step Sn0312, as a result of referring to the small win distribution table, the distributed small win type is stored in the advance determination processing result storage area 64 as small win information. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends.

If it is determined in step Sn0309 that the value of the winning random number counter C1 does not correspond to a small win (Sn0309: NO), proceed to step Sn0313.

In step Sn0313, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting hole this time is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sn0314, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sn0315, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 that has been grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

If it is determined in step Sn0315 that it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach (Sn0315: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0316, and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn0315 that it does not correspond to the occurrence of a reach (Sn0315: NO), the first determination process is directly ended.

<Processing a through ball>
Next, the through ball scoring process will be described. The through ball scoring process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 111: Sn0105).

Figure 114 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for through play. In step Sn0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35. If it is determined in step Sn0401 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sn0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0402, where it is determined whether or not the number of reserved role objects SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). The number of reserved role objects SN is a value indicating the number of balls that have entered the through gate 35 that are reserved for the purpose of performing the electric role object release lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved role objects SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sn0401: NO), this ball entry process for through play is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sn0402 that the number of reserved reels SN is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (Sn0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0403, where 1 is added to the number of reserved reels SN. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0404.

In step Sn0404, the value of the electric role release counter C4 updated in step Sn0103 (FIG. 111) is stored in the first free memory area in the electric role reserve area 64d of RAM 64. After that, the ball entry process for the through is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sn0402, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is not less than the upper limit (Sn0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the ball entry process for through is terminated without storing the value of the electric reel opening counter C4.

<Ball entry processing for V entry hole>
Next, the ball entry process for the V winning hole will be described. The ball entry process for the V winning hole is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 111: Sn0106).

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the V winning hole. In step Sn0501, it is determined whether or not the V winning hole entry permission flag is ON. The V winning opening ball entry permission flag is used to open and close the second opening/closing door 212b, first distribution valve 218, and second distribution valve 219 in the opening/closing execution mode that is executed when a small win is won. It is turned ON when a scenario is set, and is erased when other flags indicating the status are erased in the transition process at the end of the ending period, which is executed when the opening/closing execution mode is ended.

If it is determined in step Sn0501 that the V entry port ball entry permission flag is ON (Sn0501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn0501 that the V entry port ball entry permission flag is not ON (Sn0501: NO), the ball entry process for the V entry port ends.

In step Sn0502, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the V winning hole (in this embodiment, the first V winning hole V1 or the second V winning hole V2). In step Sn0502, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the V winning hole (Sn0502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0503.

In step Sn0503, it is determined whether the V winning type flag is ON. When a jackpot is confirmed by a game ball entering the V winning port, the V winning type flag corresponding to the confirmed jackpot type is turned ON. Then, in the transition process at the end of the ending period executed when the opening and closing execution mode is ended, the V winning type flag is erased when other flags indicating the state are erased. Specifically, when a jackpot Va is confirmed, the V winning Va flag is turned ON; when a jackpot Vb is confirmed, the V winning Vb flag is turned ON; when a jackpot Vc is confirmed, the V winning Vc flag is turned ON; when a jackpot Vd is confirmed, the V winning Vd flag is turned ON; when a jackpot Ve is confirmed, the V winning Ve flag is turned ON; when a jackpot Vf is confirmed, the V winning Vf flag is turned ON; and when a jackpot Vg is confirmed, the V winning Vg flag is turned ON.

In step Sn0503, when it is determined that the V winning prize type flag is ON (Sn0503: YES), the ball entering process for the V winning prize opening is ended. In step Sn0503, if it is determined that the V prize winning type flag is not ON (Sn0503: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn0504.

In step Sn0504, the V prize type flag corresponding to the type of small prize that was won is turned ON. After executing step Sn0504, the process proceeds to step Sn0505, where a V prize command is set. After that, the ball entry process for the V prize slot is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sn0502, if it is determined that no game ball has entered the V winning hole (Sn0502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn0506. In step Sn0506, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the discharge port (discharge port 223, discharge port 225).

In step S0506, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the discharge port (Sn0506: YES), the process advances to step Sn0507. In step Sn0507, a non-V winning command is set. After that, the ball entry process for the V winning hole is ended.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be explained. The normal process is a process that is started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter also referred to as "power on"). In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

Figure 116 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sn0601, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, the initial settings of each control device that accompany power-on and the validity of data stored in RAM 64 are executed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0602.

In step Sn0602, a startup command is set. The startup command is a command for instructing each control device on the sub side to start a demo video when the power is turned on. Then, proceed to step Sn0603.

In step Sn0603, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sn0602, the command set in the timer interrupt processing, or the previously executed normal processing, etc., is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, if commands related to production such as a startup command, a variation command, a type command, a hold command, etc. are set, they are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step Sn0603, the process advances to step Sn0604.

In step Sn0604, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0605.

In step Sn0605, the prize ball count signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sn0606. In step Sn0606, a game round control process for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display section 37a, second symbol display section 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game time control process will be described later. After executing step Sn0606, the process advances to step Sn0607.

In step Sn0607, a game state transition process is executed to transition the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state transitions to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, proceed to step Sn0608.

In step Sn0608, an electric support process is executed to control the drive of the electric role 34a provided in the second starting port 34. In the electric support process, a determination is made as to whether or not to open the electric role 34a. The details of the electric support process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0609.

In step Sn0609, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sn0603). In other words, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived. If it is determined in step Sn0609 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (Sn0609: NO), in steps Sn0610 and Sn0611, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal processing. Specifically, in step Sn0610, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. In addition, in step Sn0611, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn0609 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of this normal processing (Sn0609: YES), the process returns to step Sn0603 and executes each process from step Sn0603 to step Sn0608.

Note that the execution time of each process from step Sn0603 to step Sn0608 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process will be explained. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 116: Sn0606).

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the game time control process. In step Sn0701, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

If it is determined in step Sn0701 that the opening and closing execution mode is in progress (Sn0701: YES), the game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes in step Sn0702 and onwards. In other words, if the opening and closing execution mode is in progress, a game round will not be started regardless of whether a ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn0701 that the opening and closing execution mode is not in progress (Sn0701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn0702.

In step Sn0702, it is determined whether the special symbol unit 37 is displaying a change. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is displaying a change. This determination is made by determining whether the special symbol displaying a change flag in the special symbol displaying a change flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special symbol displaying a change flag is turned ON when a change display is to be started for either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, and is turned OFF when the change display is to end.

If it is determined in step Sn0702 that the special chart unit 37 is not displaying a change (Sn0702: NO), proceed to step Sn0703.

In step Sn0703, a fluctuation start process is executed to start the fluctuation display in the special symbol unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41. Note that details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Sn0703, this game round control process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sn0702, when it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display (Sn0702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0704.

In step Sn0704, a change end process is executed to end the change display in the special chart unit 37 and the change display in the pattern display device 41. The change end process will be described in detail later. After executing step Sn0704, this game play control process is terminated.

<Change start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 117: Sn0703).

Figure 118 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Sn0801, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN exceeds "0". If the total reserved number CRN is "0" or less, this means that the start reserved number is "0" for both the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. Therefore, if it is determined in step Sn0801 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" or less (Sn0801: NO), this fluctuation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn0801 that the total reserved number CRN exceeds "0" (Sn0801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0802.

In step Sn0802, a reserved information shift process is executed to set the reserved information stored in the first reserved area Ra or the second reserved area Rb to the state after the change started, and the process proceeds to step Sn0803. Details of the reserved information shift process will be described later.

In step Sn0803, a win determination process is performed, which includes processing when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery. The details of the win determination process will be described later. After executing step Sn0803, the process proceeds to step Sn0804.

In step Sn0804, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting a variable time, which is the time required for the current game round, in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a jackpot or the occurrence of a reach. This is the process. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sn0804, the process advances to step Sn0805.

In step Sn0805, a fluctuation command is set. The fluctuation command includes information indicating whether the current game round is related to the reserved information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the reserved information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, as well as information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation time set in step Sn0804. After executing step Sn0805, proceed to step Sn0806.

In step Sn0806, a type command is set. The type command includes whether or not a big win or small win has been determined by the lottery, information on the results of the allocation judgment, and information on the loss result.

The variation command and type command set in step Sn0805 and step Sn0806 are sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in step Sn0603 of normal processing (Figure 116). The sound and light emission control device 90 determines the content of the presentation for that game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the presentation is executed. After executing step Sn0806, proceed to step Sn0807.

In step Sn0807, the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round out of the first pattern display section 37a and the second pattern display section 37b is caused to start displaying a changing pattern. Specifically, if the second pattern display section flag in RAM 64 is not ON, the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first pattern display section 37a and a changing display is started, and if the second pattern display section flag is ON, the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second pattern display section 37b and a changing display is started. After executing step Sn0807, the process proceeds to step Sn0808.

In step Sn0808, the special figure variation display flag stored in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sn0808, this variation start process ends.

<Pending information shift processing>
Next, pending information shift processing will be explained. The pending information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 118: Sn0802).

Figure 119 is a flowchart showing the reserved information shift process. In step Sn0901, it is determined whether the reserved area to be processed for executing the reserved information shift process is the first reserved area Ra. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the reserved information stored in the second reserved area Rb (Figure 100) is processed preferentially. Specifically, if reserved information is stored only in the first reserved area Ra (Figure 100), the reserved information stored in the first reserved area Ra is processed; if reserved information is stored only in the second reserved area Rb (Figure 100), the reserved information stored in the second reserved area Rb is processed; and if reserved information is stored in both the first reserved area Ra and the second reserved area Rb, the reserved information stored in the second reserved area Rb is processed preferentially.

As a modified example, a configuration may be adopted in which the reserved information stored earliest in chronological order is given priority for processing. Specifically, if the earliest reserved information stored in the first reserved area Ra (the reserved information stored in the first area of the first reserved area Ra) is stored in the reserved area earlier than the earliest reserved information stored in the second reserved area Rb (the reserved information stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb), the reserved area to be processed is determined to be the first reserved area Ra. On the other hand, if the earliest reserved information stored in the second reserved area Rb is stored in the reserved area earlier than the earliest reserved information stored in the first reserved area Ra, the reserved area to be processed is determined to be the second reserved area Rb. Such a configuration may be adopted.

If it is determined in step Sn0901 that the reserved area to be processed is the first reserved area Ra (step Sn0901: YES), the reserved information shift process for the first reserved area is executed in steps Sn0902 to Sn0907. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn0901 that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (step Sn0901: NO), the reserved information shift process for the second reserved area is executed in steps Sn0908 to Sn0913.

In step Sn0902, the first start reserved number RaN in the first reserved area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sn0903, where the total reserved number CRN is decremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0904. In step Sn0904, the data stored in the first area of the first reserved area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0905.

In step Sn0905, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the first reserved area Ra. This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas sequentially to the lower areas. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, the fourth area to the third area, and so on. After executing step Sn0905, proceed to step Sn0906.

In step Sn0906, when the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second symbol display section flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the current variable display is the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. After that, the process advances to step Sn0907.

In step Sn0907, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, it corresponds to the first starting port 33. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, this pending information shift process ends.

The shift command set in step Sn0907 is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in step Sn0603 in normal processing (FIG. 116). Based on the received shift command, the audio and light emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first pending display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the reduction in the number of pending items. The display control device 100, which receives the command, changes the display in the first pending display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the reduction in the number of pending items.

If it is determined in step Sn0901 that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, i.e., if it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (Sn0901: NO), proceed to step Sn0908.

In step Sn0908, the second start reservation number RbN of the second reservation area Rb is subtracted by 1. After that, the process advances to step Sn0909. In step Sn0909, the total pending number CRN is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step Sn0910, in which the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process advances to step Sn0911.

In step Sn0911, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sn0911, the process advances to step Sn0912.

In step Sn0912, if the second symbol display section flag in the various flags storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, the state is maintained. Then, proceed to step Sn0913.

In step Sn0913, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, it corresponds to the second starting port 34. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, this pending information shift process ends.

The shift command set in step Sn0913 is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sn0603 in normal processing (FIG. 116). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 issues a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

<Hit detection process>
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 118: Sn0703).

Figure 120 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process. In step Sn1001, the value of the hit random number counter C1 to be processed is read. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1002.

In step Sn1002, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sn1002, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Sn1002: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1003, and a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for the first starting opening. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sn1005.

On the other hand, in step Sn1002, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sn1002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1004, and a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for the second starting opening. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sn1005.

In step Sn1005, it is determined whether or not the player has won the jackpot based on the result of the win/lose determination. If it is determined in step Sn1005 that the player has won the jackpot (Sn1005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1006.

In step Sn1006, the value of the win type counter C2 is read. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1007, where the jackpot type is allocated by referring to the jackpot allocation table. Specifically, if the pending information stored in the first pending area Ra is to be processed, the jackpot type is allocated by referring to the jackpot allocation table for the first start port. If the pending information stored in the second pending area Rb is to be processed, the jackpot type is allocated by referring to the jackpot allocation table for the second start port.

Then, proceed to step Sn1008, and turn on the jackpot flag corresponding to the type of jackpot that has been allocated. Specifically, if it is jackpot A, turn on the jackpot A flag, if it is jackpot B, turn on the jackpot B flag, if it is jackpot C, turn on the jackpot C flag, if it is jackpot D, turn on the jackpot D flag, and if it is jackpot E, turn on the jackpot E flag. Note that jackpots Va to Vg (hereinafter, jackpots resulting from V winning are also referred to as V winning jackpots) are not jackpots that are won by a winning lottery during a game round, but are jackpots that are confirmed by winning V during the opening and closing execution mode that is executed as a result of a small win, and therefore are not jackpots for which the jackpot flag is turned on in step Sn1008. If a V winning jackpot is confirmed, the jackpot flag is turned on in the transition process (FIG. 126) at the end of the ending period. After executing step Sn1008, proceed to step Sn1009.

In step Sn1009, a process of setting a stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game round in which the jackpot will be won, it is set which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display. This is the process to do so. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sn1007 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sn1009, the hit determination process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1005 that the jackpot has not been won (Sn1005: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1010. In step Sn1010, it is determined whether or not the small win has been won as a result of the determination. In step Sn1010, if it is determined that the small win has been won (Sn1010: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1011.

In step Sn1011, the value of the winning type counter C2 is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sn1012, and the small win distribution table is referred to to sort out the types of small wins. Specifically, when the holding information stored in the first holding area Ra is to be processed, the small winning distribution table for the first starting opening is referred to and the small winning type is allocated. When the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb is to be processed, the small win distribution table for the second starting opening is referred to and the small win type is distributed.

Then, proceed to step Sn1013 and turn on the small win flag corresponding to the type of small win that has been assigned. Specifically, if it is a small win a, the small win a flag is turned on; if it is a small win b, the big win b flag is turned on; if it is a small win c, the small win c flag is turned on; if it is a small win d, the big win d flag is turned on; if it is a small win e, the small win e flag is turned on; if it is a small win f, the small win f flag is turned on; and if it is a small win g, the small win g flag is turned on. After executing step Sn1013, proceed to step Sn1014.

In step Sn1014, a process is executed to set a stop pattern corresponding to the type of small win. Specifically, this process is executed to set which stop result is displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b at which the variable display will end in the current game round in which a small win is won. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for small wins stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of small win allocated in step Sn1012 is obtained, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step Sn1014, the win determination process is terminated.

In step Sn1010, if it is determined that the small win has not been won (Sn1010: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1015.

In step Sn1015, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is read, and then the process proceeds to step Sn1016, where the reach judgment table is referenced. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1017, where it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred in that game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the occurrence of a reach in the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c (Figure 99).

In step Sn1017, if it is determined that a reach occurs in the game round (Sn1017: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1018, and the reach occurrence flag is turned on. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sn1018, the process advances to step Sn1019.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1017 that a reach does not occur in the relevant game round (Sn1017: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sn1019.

In step Sn1019, a process for setting a stop result for a loss is executed. Specifically, this process is for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first pattern display section 37a or the second pattern display section 37b when the variable display ends in the current game round, which results in a loss. Specifically, by referencing the stop result table for a loss in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information of the stop result data stored in the execution area AE is obtained, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step Sn1019, the real win determination process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be explained. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 118: Sn0804).

Figure 121 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step Sn1101, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is read. Then, proceed to step Sn1102.

In step Sn1102, it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been won in the winning lottery for the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if the jackpot flag is ON (Sn1102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1103.

In step Sn1103, a process for setting a variable time for jackpot is executed. Specifically, with reference to the variable time table for jackpot stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS is obtained.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time information stored in the jackpot variable time table is set so that the greater the total reserved number CRN, the shorter the variable time. Therefore, when the second reserved number RbN is "0", the greater the first reserved number RaN, the shorter the variable time, and when the first reserved number RaN is "0", the greater the second reserved number RbN, the shorter the variable time. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured not to depend on the total reserved number CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the total reserved number CRN, the shorter the variable time. It may also be set so that it is constant and not dependent on each reserved number RaN, RbN.

After executing step Sn1103, the process advances to step Sn1109.

In step Sn1102, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery for the current game round (Sn1102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1104.

In step Sn1104, it is determined whether or not a small win has been won in the winning lottery related to the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small win flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if the small win flag is ON (Sn1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1105.

In step Sn1105, a process for setting a variable time for small winnings is executed. Specifically, with reference to the small winning variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the small winning fluctuation time table is set so that the larger the total reservation number CRN is, the shorter the fluctuation time is. Therefore, when the second starting pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first starting pending number RaN is, the shorter the fluctuation time is, and when the first starting pending number RaN is "0", , the larger the second start pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration may be adopted that does not depend on the total number of reservations CRN, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the total number of reservations CRN is smaller. Further, it may be set to be constant without depending on the respective reservation numbers RaN and RbN.

After executing step Sn1105, proceed to step Sn1109.

If it is determined in step Sn1104 that the player has not won a small prize in the winning lottery for the current game round (Sn1104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1106.

In step Sn1106, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the winning lottery related to the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether the reach occurrence flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if the reach occurrence flag is ON (Sn1106: YES), the process advances to step Sn1107.

In step Sn1107, the process of setting the variable time for the occurrence of a reach is executed. Specifically, the process refers to the variable time table for the occurrence of a reach stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and obtains the variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time information stored in the reach occurrence variable time table is set so that the greater the total reserved number CRN, the shorter the variable time. Therefore, when the second start reserved number RbN is "0", the greater the first start reserved number RaN, the shorter the variable time, and when the first start reserved number RaN is "0", the greater the second start reserved number RbN, the shorter the variable time. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured not to depend on the total reserved number CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the total reserved number CRN, the shorter the variable time. It may also be set so that it is constant and not dependent on each reserved number RaN, RbN.

After executing step Sn1107, proceed to step Sn1109.

In step Sn1106, if it is determined that a reach does not occur in the winning lottery for the current game round (Sn1106: NO), the process advances to step Sn1108.

In step Sn1108, a process for setting the variable time for when a reach does not occur is executed. Specifically, the variable time table for when a reach does not occur stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time information stored in the non-reach variable time table is set so that the greater the total reserved number CRN, the shorter the variable time. Therefore, when the second start reserved number RbN is "0", the greater the first start reserved number RaN, the shorter the variable time, and when the first start reserved number RaN is "0", the greater the second start reserved number RbN, the shorter the variable time. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured not to depend on the total reserved number CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the total reserved number CRN, the shorter the variable time. It may also be set so that it is constant and not dependent on each reserved number RaN, RbN.

After executing step Sn1108, the process advances to step Sn1109.

In step Sn1109, the fluctuation time information is stored. Specifically, the acquired variable time information is set in a variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

<Fluctuation end processing>
Next, the fluctuation end processing will be explained. The variation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 117: Sn0704) of the game time control process.

FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the variation end processing. In step Sn1201, it is determined whether the variable time of the current game round has elapsed. As mentioned above, the fluctuation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to fluctuate until all the symbol rows stop, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sn1201, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (FIG. 121) described above. The value of this set variable time information is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

In step Sn1201, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sn1201: NO), this fluctuation end process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sn1201 that the change time has elapsed (Sn1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1202, where a process is performed to end the change of the patterns in the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round, either the first pattern display section 37a or the second pattern display section 37b. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1203, where the special pattern change display in progress flag stored in the special pattern change display in progress flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step Sn1203, the process proceeds to step Sn1204.

In step Sn1204, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot win or a small win win. Specifically, it is determined whether the jackpot flag (one of the jackpot A flag to the jackpot E flag) or the small win flag (one of the small win a flag to the small win g flag) in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sn1204, if neither the jackpot flag nor the small win flag is ON (Sn1204: NO), the process advances to step Sn1206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1204 that either the big win flag or the small win flag is ON (Sn1204: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1205. In step Sn1205, the open/close execution mode flag is set to ON. After that, the fluctuation end process is terminated.

In step Sn1206, it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sn1206 that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Sn1206: YES), the process advances to step Sn1207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1206 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sn1206: NO), the fluctuation termination process is directly terminated.

In step Sn1207, the value of the number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1. The number of games counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of times of games (hereinafter also referred to as the guaranteed number of games) executed in the high-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the guaranteed number of games is set as 100 times. That is, in step Sn1207, when one game is executed in the high-frequency support mode, the number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1 to count the number of games that can be played in the high-frequency support mode. After executing step Sn1207, the process advances to step Sn1208.

In step Sn1208, it is determined whether the value of the number of games counter PNC exceeds zero. That is, it is determined whether the guaranteed number of games is less than 100 times. In step Sn1208, if it is determined that the value of the number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 (the number of guaranteed games is less than 100) (Sn1208: YES), the variation end process is ended as is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1208 that the value of the play count counter PNC does not exceed 0 (the guaranteed play count has reached 100) (Sn1208: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1209, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. After that, the fluctuation end process is terminated.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 116: Sn0607) of the normal process.

Figure 123 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step Sn1301, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON or not. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the large prize opening opening and closing processing period in the opening and closing execution mode (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is the period for executing the ending performance in the opening and closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sn1301 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sn1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1302, and it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag indicates a period during which the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing operation of the first opening/closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 or the second opening/closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 is executed. It is turned ON at the timing when the big prize opening opening/closing processing period starts, and is turned OFF at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the first opening/closing door 36b or the second opening/closing door 212b ends.

If it is determined in step Sn1302 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sn1302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1303, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sn1303 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sn1303: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1304, where it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sn1304 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sn1304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1305. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1304 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (Sn1304: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

In step Sn1305, it is determined whether or not a small win has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether the small hit flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode is started due to a small winning win. In step Sn1305, if it is determined that the small hit has not been won, that is, the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the jackpot winning (Sn1305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1306.

In step Sn1306, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. That is, when starting the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot, the high-frequency support mode is stopped. After that, the process advances to step Sn1307.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1305 that a small win has been won, i.e., that the current opening and closing execution mode was triggered by a small win (Sn1305: YES), step Sn1306 is not executed and the process proceeds to step Sn1307.

In step Sn1307, an opening/closing scenario setting process is executed to set an opening/closing scenario. The opening/closing scenario determines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 212b in the round game (big prize opening/closing process), and in this embodiment, it is a program that records the conditions for transitioning the first opening/closing door 36b or the second opening/closing door 212b from a closed state to an open state (hereinafter also referred to as "opening conditions") and the conditions for transitioning the first opening/closing door 36b or the second opening/closing door 212b from an open state to a closed state (hereinafter also referred to as "closing conditions"). The opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63i of the ROM 63. The opening/closing scenario setting process will be described later. After executing step Sn1307, proceed to the above-mentioned step Sn1308.

In step Sn1308, opening time setting processing is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step Sn1308, the process advances to step Sn1309.

In step Sn1309, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (Sn0603) in the normal processing (FIG. 116). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. The audio emission control device 90 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening time and the opening/closing processing period of the big prize opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step Sn1309, the process advances to step Sn1310 and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sn1303, if it is determined that the opening period flag is ON (Sn1303: YES), the process advances to step Sn1311.

In step Sn1311, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter T3 is "0". The third timer counter T3 is a timer counter that counts down the time of the opening period. If it is determined in step Sn1311 that the opening period has ended (Sn1311: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1312, where the opening period flag is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1313.

In step Sn1313, a process for starting a round display to notify the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is identified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the identified stop result data. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round information related to the above output is displayed in the round display section 39. After executing step Sn1313, proceed to step Sn1314.

In step Sn1314, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. In the following step Sn1315, an opening/closing process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 116: Step Sn0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sn1314, the main gaming state transition process is ended.

In step Sn1302, if it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sn1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1315, and the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. The grand prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sn1315, the process advances to step Sn1316.

In step Sn1316, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has been completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has been completed depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of rounds executed is "0". In step Sn1316, if it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended (Sn1316: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1317. On the other hand, in step Sn1316, if it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not been completed (Sn1316: NO), the main gaming state transition process is ended.

In step Sn1317, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step Sn1318.

In step Sn1318, processing to end the round display is executed. In this processing, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step Sn1318, the process proceeds to step Sn1319.

In step Sn1319, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, the same fixed length of ending time is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. Note that the fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sn1319, the process advances to step Sn1320.

In step Sn1320, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sn0603 in the normal process (FIG. 116). The ending command includes information on the ending time set in the ending time setting process (Sn1320). The audio emission control device 90 executes an ending effect based on receiving the ending command. After executing step Sn1320, the process advances to step Sn1321.

In step Sn1321, the ending period flag is turned on. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sn1301, if it is determined that the ending period flag is ON (Sn1301: YES), the process advances to step Sn1322.

In step Sn1322, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sn1319), it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step Sn1322 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sn1322: YES), the process advances to step Sn1323.

In step Sn1323, the ending period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sn1324, and a transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game after the current ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sn1324, the process advances to step Sn1325.

In step Sn1325, it is determined whether the jackpot flag resulting from a V win (hereinafter also referred to as the V win jackpot flag) is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the jackpot flags, jackpot Va flag, jackpot Vb flag, jackpot Vc flag, jackpot Vd flag, jackpot Ve flag, jackpot Vf flag, and jackpot Vg flag, is ON. If it is determined in step Sn1325 that the V win jackpot flag is not ON (Sn1325: NO), proceed to step Sn1326.

In step Sn1326, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. After that, the gaming state transition process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sn1325, if it is determined that the jackpot flag due to the V winning is ON, that is, the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a small winning win, and the big winning opening in the opening/closing execution mode is determined to be ON. In the opening/closing process, if a jackpot due to winning in the V winning slot is confirmed (Sn1325: YES), the gaming state transition process is ended without turning off the opening/closing execution mode flag. If a game ball enters the V winning hole and a jackpot is confirmed in the opening/closing process of the big winning opening in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a small winning win, after the opening/closing execution mode that is currently being executed ends, the game ball will be opened and closed again by the V winning opening. In order to execute the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the confirmed jackpot, the opening/closing execution mode flag is not turned OFF but remains ON. By doing so, the opening/closing execution mode can be started again when the gaming state transition process is executed next time.

<Opening/closing scenario setting process>
Next, the opening/closing scenario setting process will be described. The opening/closing scenario setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 123: Sn1307).

FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing scenario setting process. In step Sn1401, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON. The opening/closing process in the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot win or a small win. It is determined whether it is a winning opening/closing process or a large winning opening/closing process triggered by a small win. In step Sn1401, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (Sn1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1402.

In step Sn1402, an opening/closing scenario corresponding to the type of jackpot is set. Specifically, an opening/closing scenario is set according to the type of jackpot flag (jackpot A flag to jackpot E flag, jackpot flag Va to jackpot Vg). As explained in FIGS. 103, 104, and 105, when jackpot A or jackpot B is won, the opening/closing scenario [LOP10] is set so that a 10R round game is executed. If jackpot C is won, an opening/closing scenario [LOP15] is set so that a 15R round game is executed. When jackpot D or jackpot E is won, an opening/closing scenario [LOP5] is set so that a 5R round game is executed. If the jackpot Va or jackpot Vb is won, an opening/closing scenario [LOP10] is set so that a 10R round game is executed. When the jackpot Vc or the jackpot Vd is won, an opening/closing scenario [LOP15] is set so that a 15R round game is executed. When the jackpot Ve, jackpot Vf, or jackpot Vg is won, an opening/closing scenario [LOP5] is set so that a 5R round game is executed.

After executing step Sn1402, the opening/closing scenario setting process ends.

In step Sn1401, if it is determined that the big win flag is not ON (Sn1401: NO), proceed to step Sn1403. In step Sn1403, an opening/closing scenario corresponding to the type of small win is set. Specifically, an opening/closing scenario corresponding to the type of small win flag (small win a flag to small win g flag) is set. As described in Figs. 103, 104, and 105, when a small win a is won, an opening/closing scenario [SOPa] is set. The number of rounds in the opening/closing scenario [SOPa] is set to 1R, and the opening/closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set so that the game ball that entered the second big winning opening 212a when the second opening/closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the crane 220. When a small win b is won, an opening/closing scenario [SOPb] is set. In the opening and closing scenario [SOPb], the number of rounds is set to 1R, and the opening and closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set so that the game ball that entered the second large winning opening 212a when the second opening and closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the Kluen 220. When the small winning c is won, the opening and closing scenario [SOPc] is set. In the opening and closing scenario [SOPc], the number of rounds is set to 1R, and the opening and closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set so that the game ball that entered the second large winning opening 212a when the second opening and closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the Kluen 220. When the small winning d is won, the opening and closing scenario [SOPd] is set. In the opening and closing scenario [SOPd], the number of rounds is set to 1R, and the opening and closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set so that the game ball that entered the second large winning hole 212a when the second opening and closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the second V winning hole V2. When the small winning e is won, the opening and closing scenario [SOPe] is set. In the opening and closing scenario [SOPe], the number of rounds is set to 1R, and the opening and closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set so that the game ball that entered the second large winning hole 212a when the second opening and closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the second V winning hole V2. When the small winning f is won, the opening and closing scenario [SOPf] is set. In the opening and closing scenario [SOPf], the number of rounds is set to 1R, and the opening and closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set so that the game ball that entered the second large winning opening 212a when the second opening and closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the second V winning opening V2. In the case where the small win g is won, the opening and closing scenario [SOPg] is set. In the opening and closing scenario [SOPg], the number of rounds is set to 1R, and the opening and closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set so that the game ball that entered the second large winning opening 212a when the second opening and closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the discharge opening 225. After executing step Sn1403, proceed to step Sn1404.

In step Sn1404, the V winning hole entry permission flag is turned ON. The V-winning slot entry permission flag is a flag that turns ON when an opening/closing scenario triggered by a small win is set, and only when the V-winning slot entry permission flag is ON, a ball enters the V-winning slot. In this case, it is determined that the ball has entered the V winning hole (see FIG. 115: Sn0501). By doing this, it is possible to prevent a jackpot from being confirmed when a game ball enters the V winning hole unfairly due to some unexpected malfunction or the like. After executing step Sn1404, the opening/closing scenario setting process ends.

<Big prize opening opening/closing process>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be explained. The big prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 123: Sn1315).

FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step Sn1501, the opening/closing scenario set in the opening/closing scenario setting process (FIG. 123: Sn1309) is read. After that, the process advances to step S1502.

In step Sn1502, it is determined whether the first opening/closing door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the first variable prize winning driving section 36c. If it is determined in step Sn1502 that the first opening/closing door 36b is not open (Sn1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1503.

In step Sn1503, it is determined whether the opening condition for the first door 36b is met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open the first door 36b. In step Sn1503, if it is determined that the opening condition for the first door 36b is met (Sn1503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1504.

In step Sn1504, the first opening and closing door 36b is opened. Then, proceed to step Sn1505.

In step Sn1505, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the first opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The opening/closing door opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 116: Step Sn0603) of the normal processing. After executing step Sn1505, the process advances to step Sn1509.

If it is determined in step Sn1503 that the condition for opening the first opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sn1503: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1509 without executing step Sn1504 and step Sn1505.

If it is determined in step Sn1502 that the first opening/closing door 36b is open (Sn1502: YES), proceed to step Sn1506.

In step Sn1506, it is determined whether the closing conditions for the first door 36b are met. Specifically, the opening and closing scenario set by the opening and closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to close the first door 36b. In step Sn1506, if it is determined that the closing conditions for the first door 36b are met (Sn1506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1507.

In step Sn1507, the first opening and closing door 36b is closed. Then, proceed to step Sn1508.

In step Sn1508, the first door closing command is set. The first door closing command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the first door 36b is closed. The first door closing command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of normal processing (Figure 116: step Sn0603). After executing step Sn1508, proceed to step Sn1509.

If it is determined in step Sn1506 that the closing condition for the first opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sn1506: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1509 without executing step Sn1507 and step Sn1508.

In step Sn1509, it is determined whether the second opening/closing door 212b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the second variable prize winning driving section 212c. If it is determined in step Sn1509 that the second opening/closing door 212b is not open (Sn1509: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1510.

In step Sn1510, it is determined whether the conditions for opening the second opening/closing door 212b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open the second opening/closing door 212b. If it is determined in step Sn1510 that the condition for opening the second opening/closing door 212b is satisfied (Sn1510: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1511.

In step Sn1511, the second opening/closing door 212b is opened. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sn1512.

In step Sn1512, a second door open command is set. The second door open command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the second door 212b has been opened. The second door open command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of normal processing (FIG. 116: step Sn0603). After executing step Sn1512, proceed to step Sn1516.

If it is determined in step Sn1510 that the condition for opening the second opening/closing door 212b is not satisfied (Sn1510: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1516 without executing step Sn1511 and step Sn1512.

If it is determined in step Sn1509 that the second opening/closing door 212b is open (Sn1509: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1513.

In step Sn1513, it is determined whether the closing conditions for the second opening/closing door 212b are met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to close the second opening/closing door 212b. If it is determined in step Sn1513 that the closing conditions for the second opening/closing door 212b are met (Sn1513: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1514.

In step Sn1514, the second opening and closing door 212b is closed. Then, proceed to step Sn1515.

In step Sn1515, a second door closing command is set. The second door closing command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the second door 212b is closed. The second door closing command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of normal processing (Figure 116: step Sn0603). After executing step Sn1515, proceed to step Sn1516.

In step Sn1513, if it is determined that the closing condition for the second opening/closing door 212b is not satisfied (Sn1513: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1516 without executing step Sn1514 and step Sn1515.

In step Sn1516, it is determined whether the first distribution valve 218 is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the first distribution valve drive unit 218a. If it is determined in step Sn1516 that the first distribution valve 218 is not open (Sn1516: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1517.

In step Sn1517, it is determined whether the opening condition for the first sorting valve 218 is met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open the first sorting valve 218. If it is determined in step Sn1517 that the opening condition for the first sorting valve 218 is met (Sn1517: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1518.

In step Sn1518, the first distribution valve 218 is opened. After that, the process advances to step Sn1519.

In step Sn1519, a first distribution valve open command is set. The first distribution valve open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the first distribution valve 218 has been opened. The first distribution valve open command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of normal processing (FIG. 116: step Sn0603). After executing step Sn1519, proceed to step Sn1523.

If it is determined in step Sn1517 that the opening condition for the first distribution valve 218 is not met (Sn1517: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1523 without executing steps Sn1518 and Sn1519.

If it is determined in step Sn1516 that the first distribution valve 218 is open (Sn1516: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1520.

In step Sn1520, it is determined whether the closing condition for the first sorting valve 218 is met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to close the first sorting valve 218. In step Sn1520, if it is determined that the closing condition for the first sorting valve 218 is met (Sn1520: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1521.

In step Sn1521, the first distribution valve 218 is closed. After that, the process advances to step Sn1522.

In step Sn1522, a first distribution valve close command is set. The first distribution valve close command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the first distribution valve 218 is closed. The first distribution valve close command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of normal processing (FIG. 116: step Sn0603). After executing step Sn1522, proceed to step Sn1523.

In step Sn1520, if it is determined that the closing condition for the first distribution valve 218 is not satisfied (Sn1520: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1523 without executing step Sn1521 and step Sn1522.

In step Sn1523, it is determined whether the second distribution valve 219 is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the second distribution valve driving section 219a. If it is determined in step Sn1523 that the second distribution valve 219 is not open (Sn1523: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1524.

In step Sn1524, it is determined whether the conditions for opening the second distribution valve 219 are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open the second distribution valve 219. If it is determined in step Sn1524 that the condition for opening the second distribution valve 219 is satisfied (Sn1524: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1525.

In step Sn1525, the second distribution valve 219 is opened. Then, proceed to step Sn1526.

In step Sn1526, a second distribution valve opening command is set. The second distribution valve open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the second distribution valve 219 has been opened. The second distribution valve opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 116: Step Sn0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sn1526, the big winning opening opening/closing process ends.

If it is determined in step Sn1524 that the condition for opening the second distribution valve 219 is not met (Sn1524: NO), the large prize opening opening process is terminated without executing steps Sn1525 and Sn1526.

If it is determined in step Sn1523 that the second distribution valve 219 is open (Sn1523: YES), proceed to step Sn1527.

In step Sn1527, it is determined whether the closing condition for the second sorting valve 219 is met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to close the second sorting valve 219. In step Sn1527, if it is determined that the closing condition for the second sorting valve 219 is met (Sn1527: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1528.

In step Sn1528, the second distribution valve 219 is closed. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sn1529.

In step Sn1529, a second distribution valve closing command is set. The second distribution valve closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the second distribution valve 219 has been closed. The second distribution valve closing command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 116: Step Sn0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sn1529, the big prize opening opening/closing process is ended.

In step Sn1527, if it is determined that the closing condition for the second distribution valve 219 is not satisfied (Sn1527: NO), the big prize opening opening/closing process is ended without executing step Sn1528 and step Sn1529.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 123: Sn1324).

Figure 126 is a flowchart showing the transition process at the end of the ending period. In step Sn1601, it is determined whether the small win flag is ON or not. If it is determined in step Sn1601 that the small win flag is not ON (Sn1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1602.

In step Sn1602, the value of the play count counter PNC corresponding to the type of win is set. That is, when the high frequency support mode is executed after the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot ends, the number of plays executed in the high frequency mode is set as the play count counter PNC. More specifically, the value shown in the high frequency support play count column in the jackpot allocation table in Figures 103, 104, and 105 is set. After executing step Sn1602, proceed to step Sn1603.

In step Sn1603, a flag erasing process is executed. Specifically, the flag indicating the game state is erased. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1604, where it is determined whether the value of the play count counter PNC is greater than 0. In step Sn1604, if the play count counter PNC is not greater than 0, that is, if the play count counter PNC is 0 (Sn1604: NO), the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated. More specifically, if the trigger for executing the current opening and closing execution mode is a jackpot, and the type of the jackpot is a jackpot type that does not transition to high frequency support after the opening and closing execution mode ends (for example, jackpot B or jackpot E), the play count counter PNC is set to 0 in step Sn1602 (Sn1604: NO), and the process proceeds to the end of the ending period.

If it is determined in step Sn1604 that the number of plays counter PNC is not 0 (Sn1604: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1605, where the high frequency support mode flag is set to ON. After executing step S1605, the process proceeds to step Sn1606, where the high frequency support mode command is set. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1601 that the small hit flag is ON (Sn1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1607. In step Sn1607, it is determined whether the V prize winning type flag is ON. The V winning prize type flag is a flag that turns ON when a game ball enters the V winning hole (see FIG. 115: Sn0504). In step S1607, if it is determined that the V prize winning type flag is ON (Sn1607: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1608.

In step Sn1608, the jackpot flag corresponding to the V prize winning type flag is turned on. Specifically, the V-winning Va flag is a jackpot Va flag, the V-winning Vb flag is a jackpot Vb flag, the V-winning Vc flag is a jackpot Vc flag, and the V-winning Vd flag is a jackpot. The jackpot Ve flag is turned ON for the Vd flag and the V winning prize Ve flag, the jackpot Vf flag is turned ON for the V winning prize Vf flag, and the jackpot Vg flag is turned ON for the V winning prize Vg flag.

After executing step Sn1608, proceed to step Sn1609 and execute flag clearing processing. Then, end the transition processing at the end of the ending period.

In step Sn1607, if it is determined that the V prize winning type flag is not ON (Sn1607: NO), the process proceeds to step S1609 without executing step S1608, and flag deletion processing is executed. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electricity support treatment>
Next, the electric support process will be described. The electric support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 116: Sn0608).

Figure 127 is a flowchart showing the electric support process. In step Sn1701, it is determined whether or not support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support in progress flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support in progress flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric device 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened, and is turned OFF when the electric device 34a is returned to the closed state. In step Sn1701, if it is determined that the support in progress flag is not ON (Sn1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1702.

In step Sn1702, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned ON when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. If it is determined in step Sn1702 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sn1702: NO), the process advances to step Sn1703.

In step Sn1703, it is determined whether the value of the power timer counter Td provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the electric timer counter Td is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general figure unit 38. The count value set in the power timer counter Td is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In step Sn1703, if it is determined that the value of the power timer counter Td is not "0" (Sn1703: NO), the main power support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sn1703: YES), the process advances to step Sn1704.

In step Sn1704, it is determined whether it is time to end the display of the changing patterns in the normal map unit 38. If it is determined in step Sn1704 that it is time to end the display of the changing patterns (Sn1704: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1705, where a miss display is set, and the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. By setting the miss display, the display of the changing patterns in the normal map unit 38 is terminated with the miss display stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1704 that it is not time to end the display of the changing patterns (Sn1704: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1706.

In step Sn1706, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved reels SN is greater than "0". If it is determined in step Sn1706 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is "0" (Sn1706: NO), the main power support processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1706 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is greater than "0" (Sn1706: YES), it proceeds to step Sn1707.

In step Sn1707, it is determined whether the game is in the open/close execution mode, and then the process proceeds to step Sn1708 to determine whether the game is in the high-frequency support mode. If the game is not in the open/close execution mode in step Sn1707 (Sn1707: NO) and the game is in the high-frequency support mode in step Sn1708 (Sn1708: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1709 to hold a lottery for opening the electric role. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role reserve area 64d is shifted, and if the value of the electric role opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is between 0 and 461, the electric role opening lottery is won. In addition, at the same time as the electric role opening lottery, the electric role timer counter Td is set to "750" (i.e. 1.5 sec). The electric role timer counter Td is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1710.

In step Sn1710, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sn1709 is a support win. In step Sn1710, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is a support win (Sn1710: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1711 and the support win flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sn1712, and a high-frequency support mode electric role opening/closing scenario setting process is executed. Specifically, this is a process of setting an opening/closing scenario in which an opening pattern of the electric accessory 34a is set when the electric accessory opening lottery is won in the high-frequency support mode. In the opening/closing scenario, conditions for opening the electric accessory 34a (electric opening condition) and closing conditions for the electric accessory 34a (electric closing condition) are set. In step Sn1712, after executing the electric role opening/closing scenario setting process for the high-frequency support mode, the present electric role support process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sn1710, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not a support win (Sn1710: NO), the electric role support process is ended without executing the processes of step Sn1711 and step Sn1712. .

If it is determined in step Sn1707 that the mode is the open/close execution mode (Sn1707: YES), or if it is determined in step Sn1708 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (Sn1708: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1713, where a lottery is held to open the electric role. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role reserve area 64d is shifted, and if the value of the electric role opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 or 1, the electric role opening lottery is won. In addition, at the same time as the electric role opening lottery, the electric role timer counter Td is set to "14750" (i.e. 29.5 sec). Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1714.

In step Sn1714, it is determined whether the result of the electric role opening lottery in step Sn1713 is a support win. If it is determined in step Sn1714 that the support win is not a win (Sn1714: NO), the main electric role support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1714 that the support win is a win (Sn1714: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1715, where the support win flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1716, where the electric role opening/closing scenario setting process for the low-frequency support mode is executed. Specifically, this is a process for setting an opening/closing scenario in which the opening pattern of the electric role 34a is set when the electric role opening lottery is won in the low-frequency support mode. The opening/closing scenario includes the opening condition of the electric role 34a (electric role opening condition) and the closing condition of the electric role 34a (electric role closing condition). In step Sn1716, the electric role opening/closing scenario setting process for the low-frequency support mode is executed, and then the main electric role support processing is terminated.

In step Sn1702, if it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (Sn1702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1717, and it is determined whether the value of the electric timer counter Td is "0". In step Sn1717, if it is determined that the value of the timer counter Td for the electric role is not "0" (Sn1717: NO), since the symbol in the general figure unit 38 is being displayed in a changing manner, the main electric role support processing is performed as it is. end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1717 that the value of the electric timer counter Td is "0" (Sn1717: YES), the process advances to step Sn1718.

In step Sn1718, a winning display is set. This ends the display of the changing patterns in the normal unit 38 with the winning display stopped. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1719, where the support in progress flag is turned ON and the support winning flag is turned OFF. Then, the main electric role support process is terminated.

In step Sn1701, if it is determined that the supporting flag is ON (Sn1701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1720, and an electric utility opening/closing control process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. Details of the electric switch opening/closing control process will be described later. After executing step Sn1720, this electronic role support process is ended.

<Electrical switching processing>
Next, the electric utility switching process will be described. The electric utility switching process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the electric utility support process (FIG. 127: Sn1720).

Figure 128 is a flowchart showing the electric role opening and closing process. In step Sn1801, it is determined whether the electric role 34a is open or not. If it is determined in step Sn1801 that the electric role 34a is not open (Sn1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1802.

In step Sn1802, it is determined whether the opening conditions of the set opening/closing scenario are satisfied. Specifically, in addition to counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened (one time in this embodiment) when winning one electric accessory opening lottery, the time required to maintain the closed state of the electric accessory 34a is calculated. By counting with a timer counter whether the opening timing has elapsed or not, it is determined whether the conditions for shifting the electric accessory 34a to the open state are satisfied. In step Sn1802, if it is determined that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is not satisfied (Sn1802: NO), the electric role opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1802 that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is met (Sn1802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1803.

In step Sn1803, the electric accessory 34a is opened. After executing step Sn1803, the process advances to step Sn1804.

In step Sn1804, an electric role release command is set. The electric role release command is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90 in the command output process of normal processing (FIG. 116: step Sn0603). The audio and light-emitting device that receives the electric role release command executes settings to execute the performance for electric role release. Then, the electric role opening and closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1801 that the electric accessory 34a is not in the open state (Sn1801: YES), the process advances to step Sn1805.

In step Sn1805, it is determined whether the closing condition of the electric role 34a is satisfied. If it is determined in step Sn1805 that the closing condition is not satisfied (Sn1805: NO), the electric role opening and closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1805 that the closing condition is satisfied (Sn1805: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1806.

In step Sn1806, the electric role 34a is closed. After executing step Sn1806, proceed to step Sn1807.

In step Sn1807, an electric role closing command is set. The electric role closing command is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90 in the command output process of normal processing (Figure 116: step Sn0603). The audio and light-emitting device that receives the electric role closing command executes settings to execute the performance for closing the electric role. Then, the electric role opening and closing process is terminated.

《3-6》Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. First, the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Various processes executed in the audio emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92 will be explained.

Figure 129 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is executed repeatedly at a relatively short period (e.g., 2 msec). The process of each step executed in the timer interrupt process is explained below.

In step Sn1901, a command storage process is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing a received command in the audio/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62. The audio/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer to enable the storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are stored sequentially in the ring buffer and are read sequentially in the order in which they were stored. After executing step Sn1901, proceed to step Sn1902.

In step Sn1902, processing for game round presentation is executed. In the processing for game round presentation, processing is performed for presentations to be executed during the game round from when the pattern change starts to when it stops. Details of the processing for game round presentation are described later. After executing step Sn1902, proceed to step Sn1903.

In step Sn1903, a game ball distribution mode detection process is executed. The game ball distribution mode detection process is a process for detecting the distribution mode of game balls that are fired by the player's operation of the operating handle 25 and circulate in the gaming area. By executing the game ball distribution mode detection process, the player's stop hit is detected. The game ball distribution mode detection process will be described later. After executing step Sn1903, the process advances to step Sn1904.

In step Sn1904, other processing is executed. The other processing is, for example, processing for displaying a performance video on the pattern display device 41 during the opening and closing execution mode, processing for displaying a demo video on the pattern display device 41, etc. After executing step Sn1904, the process proceeds to step Sn1905.

In step Sn1905, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in each of the above-mentioned production processes. After executing step Sn1905, the process advances to step Sn1906.

In step Sn1906, an audio output control process is executed to control the audio output of the speaker 46. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is executed based on the audio data read in the above-mentioned BGM process and each performance process. After executing step Sn1906, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Processing for game play performance>
Next, the game play presentation process will be described. The game play presentation process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 129: Sn1902).

Figure 130 is a flowchart showing the game round presentation processing. In step Sn2001, it is determined whether or not a change command and a type command have been received. If it is determined in step Sn2001 that a change command and a type command have not been received (Sn2001: NO), this game round presentation processing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn2001 that a change command and a type command have been received (Sn2001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn2002.

In step Sn2002, the command for variation received this time is read out, and from the command, the presence or absence of a jackpot or small win, the type of jackpot or small win, the presence or absence of a reach occurrence, and the variation time are read out. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the audio-optical side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sn2003.

In step Sn2003, a game round presentation pattern setting process is executed. The game round presentation pattern setting process is a process for determining and setting the presentation pattern to be executed in the current game round (the contents and execution timing of the preview presentation and reach presentation) based on the presentation pattern table. The presentation pattern setting process will be described in detail later. After executing step Sn2003, proceed to step Sn2004.

In step Sn2004, the process of setting the stop symbols is executed. In the process of setting the stop symbols, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is formed on the pay line L of the symbol display device 41 is set as the information of the current stop symbols.

If the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a losing result (including a small win), it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the content of the variation command. If it is determined that a reach has occurred, information corresponding to a stop result in which the same combination of symbols is not formed on the active line L and a reach pattern combination is formed on the active line L is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that a reach has not occurred, information corresponding to a stop result in which the same combination of symbols is not formed on the active line L and a reach pattern combination is not formed on the active line L is set as the information of the current stop pattern. After executing step Sn2004, proceed to step Sn2005.

In step Sn2005, processing for setting a variable display pattern for the current game round is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game round is specified from the contents of the fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the stop symbol information set in step Sn2004 are combined. Select the corresponding variation display pattern. In addition, when selecting a variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the audio/light side ROM 93 is referred to. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sn2006.

In step Sn2006, information on the effect pattern, stop symbol, and variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the effect command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sn2007, and the relevant production command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the performance content corresponding to the received performance command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sn2007, the process advances to step Sn2008, and an update process at the start of variation is executed. The update process at the start of variation is a process for updating the pending display in the first pending display area Ds1 or the second pending display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sn2008, the present game rendition processing is ended.

<Game play performance pattern setting process>
Next, the game round presentation pattern setting process will be described. The game round presentation pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game round presentation process (FIG. 130: Sn2003).

FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the game rendition pattern setting process. In step Sn2101, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery of the game round for which the performance pattern is set is a jackpot. Specifically, the determination is made based on the information read from the variation command and the type command in step Sn2002. In step Sn2101, if it is determined that the winning lottery result for the game round for which the performance pattern is set is a jackpot (Sn2101: YES), the process advances to step Sn2102.

In step Sn2102, a process for setting a performance pattern for a jackpot is executed. Specifically, from the performance patterns set corresponding to each jackpot type, a performance pattern corresponding to the jackpot type and the variable time set in the variable time setting process in the game round to be processed is selected and executed. Set as a performance pattern.

As explained in the variation time setting process, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variation time information stored in the jackpot variation time table is such that the greater the total number of pending pieces CRN, the shorter the variation time. is set to . Therefore, when the second starting pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first starting pending number RaN is, the shorter the fluctuation time is, and when the first starting pending number RaN is "0", , the larger the second start pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Therefore, the performance pattern set in the process of setting a performance pattern for a jackpot differs depending on the number of reservations CRN at the time when the performance pattern of the game round being processed is set.

Thereafter, the game rendition pattern setting process ends.

In step Sn2101, if it is determined that the winning lottery result of the game round for which the performance pattern is set is not a jackpot (Sn2101: NO), the process advances to step Sn2103. In step Sn2103, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery of the game round for which the effect pattern is set is a small win. Specifically, the determination is made based on the information read from the variation command and the type command in step Sn2002.

In step Sn2103, if it is determined that the winning lottery result for the game round for which the effect pattern is set is a small win (Sn2103: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn2104.

In step Sn2104, it is determined whether the type of the small win is small win c. If it is determined in step Sn2104 that the type of the small win is small win c (Sn2104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn2105.

In step Sn2105, it is determined whether the stop shot flag is ON. The stop shot flag is a flag that is set ON when it is detected in the game ball circulation state detection process that the player is performing stop shots in a game round other than the game round in which the small prize c is won. The stop shot flag is set OFF when a series of high frequency support modes is completed. In step Sn2105, if it is determined that the stop shot flag is not ON (Sn2105: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn2106. As described in the overview of the processing by the gaming machine above, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment executes a specific suggestion effect when the small prize c is won, but in order to prevent the player from performing stop shots in a game round in which the possibility of winning the small prize c is low, when the specific suggestion effect is not executed, that is, when it is detected that the player is performing stop shots in a game round in which the result of the winning lottery is a lottery result other than the small prize c, the specific suggestion effect is not executed. For this purpose, it is determined whether the stop shot flag is ON.

In step Sn2106, a process for setting the presentation pattern for small win c is performed. Specifically, as described in FIG. 108, a presentation pattern for executing a specific suggestion presentation is set. In this embodiment, multiple presentation patterns for small win c are prepared, and from the presentation patterns prepared according to the change time, a presentation pattern according to the change time in the game round to be processed is selected and set as the presentation pattern to be executed.

As explained in the process of setting the variable time, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table for small wins is set so that the greater the total reserved number CRN, the shorter the variable time. Therefore, when the second reserved number RbN is "0", the greater the first reserved number RaN, the shorter the variable time, and when the first reserved number RaN is "0", the greater the second reserved number RbN, the shorter the variable time. Therefore, the presentation pattern set in the process of setting the presentation pattern for small win c differs depending on the reserved number CRN at the time when the presentation pattern for the game round being processed is set.

Then, the game play presentation pattern setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Sn2104 that the type of small hit is not small win c (Sn2104: NO), or if it is determined in step Sn2105 that the stopping flag is ON (Sn2105: YES), step Proceed to Sn2107.

In step Sn2107, a process for setting a normal presentation pattern for a small win is executed. This presentation pattern is a presentation pattern that does not execute a specific suggestion presentation. Specifically, from the presentation patterns set corresponding to each small win type, a presentation pattern according to the small win type in the game round being processed and the variable time set in the variable time setting process is selected and set as the presentation pattern to be executed.

As explained in the process of setting the variable time, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table for small wins is set so that the greater the total reserved number CRN, the shorter the variable time. Therefore, when the second reserved number RbN is "0", the greater the first reserved number RaN, the shorter the variable time, and when the first reserved number RaN is "0", the greater the second reserved number RbN, the shorter the variable time. Therefore, the presentation pattern set in the process of setting the presentation pattern for small wins differs depending on the reserved number CRN at the time when the presentation pattern for the game round being processed is set.

After executing step Sn2107, the game play presentation pattern setting process ends.

In step Sn2103, if it is determined that the winning lottery result of the game round for which the effect pattern is set is not a small win (Sn2103: NO), the process advances to step Sn2108. In step Sn2108, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the game round to be processed. In step Sn2108, if it is determined that reach occurs (Sn2108: YES), the process advances to step Sn2109.

In step Sn2109, a process of setting a production pattern for generating a reach is executed. Specifically, a performance pattern corresponding to the variable time set for the game round to be processed is selected and set as the performance pattern to be executed.

As explained in the process of setting the variable time, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table for reach occurrence is set so that the greater the total reserved number CRN, the shorter the variable time. Therefore, when the second start reserved number RbN is "0", the greater the first start reserved number RaN, the shorter the variable time, and when the first start reserved number RaN is "0", the greater the second start reserved number RbN, the shorter the variable time. Therefore, the presentation pattern set in the process of setting the presentation pattern for reach occurrence differs depending on the reserved number CRN at the time when the presentation pattern for the game round being processed is set.

Then, the game play presentation pattern setting process ends.

In step Sn2108, if it is determined that reach does not occur (Sn2108: NO), the process advances to step Sn2110. In step S2110, a process of setting a production pattern for non-reach occurrence is executed. Specifically, a performance pattern corresponding to the variable time set for the game round to be processed is selected and set as the performance pattern to be executed.

As explained in the variation time setting process, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variation time information stored in the non-reach variation time table indicates that the greater the total number of pending pieces CRN, the shorter the variation time. It is set to be. Therefore, when the second starting pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first starting pending number RaN is, the shorter the fluctuation time is, and when the first starting pending number RaN is "0", , the larger the second start pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Therefore, the performance pattern set in the process of setting the performance pattern for non-reach occurrence differs depending on the number of pending pieces CRN at the time when the performance pattern of the game round being processed is set.

Then, the game play presentation pattern setting process ends.

<Gaming ball circulation status detection process>
Next, the game ball circulation state detection process will be described. The game ball circulation state detection process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 129: Sn1903).

Figure 132 is a flowchart showing the game ball circulation state detection process. In step Sn2201, it is determined whether or not the game is in high-frequency support mode. Specifically, in the command storage process (Sn1901) in the timer interrupt process (Figure 129), it is determined whether or not a high-frequency support mode command has been received. In step Sn2201, if it is determined that the game is in high-frequency support mode (Sn2201: YES), the game proceeds to step Sn2202.

In step Sn2202, it is determined whether a game round is in progress. Specifically, when a variation command and a type command are received, it is determined whether a game round is in progress based on the variation time included in the received information.

If it is determined in step Sn2202 that a game is in progress (Sn2202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn2203, where game ball count processing is executed.

The game ball count process calculates the number of game balls (hereinafter also referred to as the number of game balls in circulation) detected by the detection sensor 205 (see FIG. 97) of the delay mechanism 202 for each game executed during high-frequency support. This is the process of counting. Specifically, for each game run during the high-frequency support mode, information such as the lottery result of the winning lottery, the fluctuation time, and the number of circulation is stored in the game ball count provided in the work RAM 104 of the display control device 100. Store in memory area.

Figure 133 is an explanatory diagram explaining the game ball count memory area. As shown in the figure, the game ball count memory area records the winning lottery results, fluctuation time, number of circulating game balls, and circulation frequency for each game round during the period from the start of a series of high frequency support modes (high frequency support modes that are executed in response to a single big win) to the most recently completed game round. The fluctuation time column records the value of the fluctuation time for each game round based on the fluctuation time information included in the received fluctuation command. Figure 40X shows information corresponding to four game rounds, but for example, if N game rounds (N is an integer equal to or greater than 1) have been played in the high frequency support mode, information corresponding to the N game rounds is recorded in the game ball count memory area.

In the circulation number column, the number of game balls detected by the detection sensor 205 during the period in which each game round is executed is recorded. The number of game balls detected by the detection sensor 205 per unit time (1 second in this embodiment) is recorded in the circulation frequency column. The value of the circulation frequency is calculated by executing the calculation (number of game balls in circulation/fluctuating time) in a calculation process for stopping hitting determination (Sn2205) to be described later.

The explanation returns to FIG. 132. After executing step Sn2203, the process proceeds to step Sn2204, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the game round.

If it is determined in step Sn2204 that it is time to end the game round (Sn2204: YES), the process advances to step Sn2205. In step Sn2205, a calculation process for determining a stop shot is executed. Specifically, as mentioned above, from the fluctuation time for each game and the value of the number of game balls in circulation recorded in the game ball count memory area, the calculation (number of circulation / fluctuation time) is executed, The calculated value is recorded in the circulation frequency column of the game ball count memory area. In this embodiment, the unit of distribution frequency is [pieces/second]. Furthermore, in the following explanation, the notation of the unit of distribution frequency may be omitted. After executing step Sn2205, the process advances to step Sn2206.

In step Sn2206, it is determined whether or not a predetermined stop shot condition is met based on the information recorded in the game ball count memory area (hereinafter also referred to as distribution mode information). The stop shot condition is a condition for determining whether or not the player has stopped shots in a game turn other than the game turn in which the winning lottery results in a small win c, and if the stop shot condition is met, it is determined that stop shots are being executed.

In this embodiment, the following determination criteria are used to determine whether or not the stopping condition is satisfied.
- Judgment Criteria 1: If the distribution mode information has not yet been recorded in the game ball count memory area, it is determined that the stopping condition is not satisfied.
・Judgment Criteria 2: When the distribution mode information in the game round in which the small win c was won (hereinafter also referred to as the standard game round) is recorded, and the distribution frequency in the standard game round is 1.0 or more. , and if the distribution frequency is less than 1.0 in any one of the game times of the lottery results other than the most recent small winning c before and after the standard game time, the stop-hitting condition is satisfied. judge.
・Judgment Criterion 3: If information for the standard game round is recorded, and if the distribution frequency for the standard game round is less than 1.0, then the circulation frequency for other game rounds is less than 1.0. Even so, it is determined that the stopping condition is not satisfied.
・Judgment Criterion 4: If the standard game round has not been executed yet, the distribution frequency is determined by any one of the game rounds other than the standard game round that has already been executed (game rounds with lottery results other than small winning C). If the number of hits is less than 1.0, it is determined that the stopping condition is satisfied.
- Judgment Criterion 5: In cases other than the above-mentioned Judgment Criteria 1 to 4, it is determined that the stopping condition is not satisfied.

In step Sn2206, it is determined whether the stopping condition is satisfied based on the determination criteria as described above. Note that the determination criteria are not limited to the contents of the above-mentioned determination criteria 1 to 5, and other determination criteria may be adopted. For example, in the period from a game round with a small win c to the next game round with a small win c, the value of the distribution frequency in game rounds other than the small win c is higher than the distribution frequency value of the game round with a small win c. If the value is smaller than the value by a predetermined number or more, it may be determined that it is a stop shot. In addition, various judgment criteria may be used.

If it is determined in step Sn2206 that the stop shot condition is met (Sn2206: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn2207, where the stop shot flag is set to ON. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn2208.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn2201 that the mode is not high-frequency support mode (Sn2201: NO), or if it is determined in step S2202 that the game cycle is not in progress (Sn2202: NO), or if it is determined in step S2204 that the game cycle is not in progress, If it is determined that it is not the end timing (Sn2204: NO), or if it is determined that the stopping condition is not satisfied in step Sn2206 (Sn2206: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn2208 without executing step Sn2207. .

In step Sn2208, it is determined whether a low frequency support mode command has been received. In step Sn2208, if it is determined that the low frequency support mode command has been received (Sn2208: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn2209, and the game ball count memory area is reset. That is, the distribution mode information recorded in the game ball count memory area is erased. After executing step Sn2209, the process proceeds to step Sn2210, and the stopping flag is turned off. Thereafter, the game ball distribution mode detection process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn2208 that the low-frequency support mode command has not been received (Sn2208: NO), the game ball circulation status detection process is terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly include a main process that is repeatedly executed from when the power is turned on until the power is turned off, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound and light emission control device 90, and a V interrupt process that is executed when a V interrupt signal sent from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed.

After powering on, the MPU 102 executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal. Note that if a command is received and a V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, the contents of the command received from the audio and light emission control device 90 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 134 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main processing is executed when the power is turned on, and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing is described below.

In step Sn2301, an initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized, and the memory of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings required for initialization are performed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn2302.

In step Sn2302, the interrupt permission setting is executed. Once the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main processing executes an infinite loop process thereafter until the power is cut off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, a description will be given of the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio and light emission control device 90.

Figure 135 is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sn2401, a command storage process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after specifying an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, drawing and drawing of that image on the VDP 105 are performed. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image when the drawing process or display process of the image is not completed, so that it is possible to prevent the start of drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area where the image information being displayed is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt process are described below.

In step Sn2501, command response processing is executed. In the command response processing, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (Figure 135) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a performance command has been stored, control of the drawing and display of the image is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

If a production operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the production operation is executed. Image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In addition, in the command response process (Sn2501), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processes corresponding to all the analyzed commands are executed. The reason for this is explained below. The command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the performance is set by the sound and light emission control device 90 and the performance is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the performance are stored in the command storage area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the form of the performance, such as the preview performance or the stop pattern set by the sound and light emission control device 90, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that form is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

In step Sn2502, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Sn2501) etc. . Thereafter, the process advances to step Sn2503.

In step Sn2503, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which is specified by the display setting process (Sn2502), the type of character (sprite, display object) that makes up the image is determined. At the same time, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification, rotation angle, etc. are determined. After that, the process advances to step Sn2504.

In step Sn2504, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing processing, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each character, which were determined by the task processing (Sn2503), are sent to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on this information, and transmits the image data to the pattern display device 41 together with a drive signal so that the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt processing is displayed on the pattern display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sn2505, where other processing is executed, and the V interrupt processing is terminated. Above, an example of specific control for executing various processing including the big win presentation in the pachinko machine 10 has been described.

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the specific suggestion effect is executed in the game round in which the winning lottery result is the small win c, so the game recognizes that the specific suggestion effect has been executed. It is possible to give the person a sense of expectation regarding the result of the winning lottery. Furthermore, in a game round executed before a game round in which the winning lottery result is a small win c, if the distribution mode of the game ball is that the player is making a stop shot, , Since the specific suggestion effect is not executed in the game round where the winning lottery result is a small win c, if the player desires to execute the specific suggestion effect, the game ball will be stopped as a firing operation by the player. Launch operation can be suppressed. As a result, if the player's stopping action will give the player a benefit that is not planned for the gaming machine, by determining whether or not to perform a specific suggestion effect based on the presence or absence of the stopping action, It is possible to suppress the granting of benefits to unscheduled players.

In other words, if it is determined that the distribution mode of the game ball due to the player's firing operation is a stop shot, the specific suggestion effect will not be executed even though it is a small hit c, so the specific suggestion effect will not be executed. It is possible to prompt a player who desires to perform a game ball firing operation that will not be determined to be a stop shot.

In addition, when determining the performance of a game round in which the winning lottery result is a small win c, the distribution frequency at the detection sensor 205 in the game round in which the winning lottery result is a small win c among the already executed game rounds. Based on the frequency of distribution in the detection sensor 205 in the game rounds that have already been executed, the result of the winning lottery is a lottery result other than the small win c. Since it is determined whether or not to execute a specific suggestion performance in a game round where the small win is c, the distribution frequency at the detection sensor 205 in the game round where the winning lottery result is the small win c among the game rounds that have already been executed. , by comparing the distribution frequency at the detection sensor 205 in the game rounds in which the winning lottery result is a lottery result other than the small win c among the already executed game rounds, the game in which the winning lottery result is the small win c It is possible to detect whether the player is switching the mode of the game ball firing operation between the round and the game round in which the winning lottery result is other than the small win c. Therefore, for example, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the player is intentionally trying to obtain a benefit that the gaming machine has not planned for, and whether or not to execute a specific suggestion effect based on the determination result. can be determined.

Further, detection of a firing operation by a player (specifically, detection of a stop shot) is detected based on the distribution frequency of game balls in the detection sensor 205. Since the distribution frequency is the time average of the number of distributed items, it is possible to accurately detect the player's distribution mode by excluding noise-like changes in the distribution mode over a short period of time (for example, one second). Further, the distribution frequency is correlated with the manner in which the game ball is fired by the player. Therefore, it is possible to execute a performance that reflects the manner in which the game ball is shot by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the performance in the game round to be executed from now on is determined based on the distribution frequency in the game round in which the specific suggestion performance was executed, the firing mode of the player due to the execution of the specific suggestion performance, that is, the specific suggestion performance It can be determined whether or not to execute the specific suggestion process thereafter, taking into consideration the player's reaction to the execution and the player's psychology. In other words, when deciding whether or not to execute a specific suggestion performance, it is possible to take into account the player's reaction when the specific suggestion performance was previously executed, and the player's reaction regarding whether or not to execute the specific suggestion performance can be taken into consideration. can be controlled using feedback.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines, for each game round, the result of the winning lottery corresponding to the game round and the number of game balls that have circulated through the detection sensor 205 during the period in which the game round is being executed. A game ball number counting memory area is provided to store information relating to a certain number of distributed balls. The number of balls in circulation is correlated with the manner in which the game ball is fired by the player. Therefore, it is possible to execute various processes based on the lottery result of the winning lottery, the performance during the game round that reflects the lottery result, and the manner in which the game ball is fired by the player (player's reaction). For example, it is possible to feed back a player's reaction to a performance that reflects a predetermined lottery result and select a performance for a game round to be executed from now on, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, the game ball count memory area also stores the fluctuation time of each game round in association with each game round. Therefore, it is possible to calculate the frequency at which game balls circulate in a specific position in the gaming area (circulation frequency) based on the fluctuation time and the number of circulation for the relevant gaming session, and the lottery results for each gaming session can be calculated. , and the distribution frequency corresponding to the lottery result, it can be applied to various processes in the game round to be executed from now on. For example, it is possible to detect trends in the manner in which game balls are shot by the player, not only in stopping shots, and use the detection results to determine the performance in the game round to be executed from now on.

In the embodiment described above, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the high-frequency support mode or not, and when the game state is in the high-frequency support mode, the distribution mode of the game ball is detected for detecting a stop shot. That is, in the low frequency support mode, the distribution mode of game balls is not detected. More specifically, in the case of the low frequency support mode, even if a game ball passes through the detection sensor 205, it is not even stored in the game ball count memory area. Therefore, processing in the low frequency support mode can be simplified.

In addition, in this embodiment, due to the configuration of the flow path 215, the clone 220, and the flow path 217 in the V winning mechanism 210, the game ball enters the first V winning hole V1 from the time when it enters the second big winning hole 212a. It is configured such that the time it takes to reach the game ball is longer than the time from the time the game ball enters the second big winning hole 212a to the time it reaches the second V winning hole V2. It is more advantageous for the player for the game ball to enter the 1st V winning hole V1 than for the game ball to enter the 2nd V winning hole V2, and the game ball enters the 2nd big winning hole 212a. Since the time from the time when the game ball reaches the 1st V winning hole V1 is longer than the time from the time when the game ball enters the 2nd big winning hole 212a to the time when it reaches the 2nd V winning hole V2, When the game balls are distributed to the channel 215 by the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219, the player is given a sense of expectation that the game balls will enter the first V prize opening V1. However, it can be granted continuously over a long period of time. On the other hand, when the game balls are distributed to the channel 217 by the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219, there is a negative pressure on the game balls to enter the second V prize opening V2. A sense of crisis (sense of crisis) can be given to the player for only a short period of time. As a result, a gaming machine is realized that provides players with a well-balanced sense of expectation in a comprehensive manner, such as giving a sense of expectation to the player for a long time and giving a sense of crisis to the player for a short time. be able to.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment determines whether or not a winning lottery result is true.
Since the flow paths (flow paths 215, 216, 217) to which the game balls entering from the second large winning opening 212a are distributed are different, the player can be made to pay more attention to the result of the winning lottery. Furthermore, in addition to the result of the winning lottery, the player can also be made to pay attention to the way the game balls are distributed by the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219, which can increase the interest of the game.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can obtain the following effects by providing the delay mechanism 202. That is, in a game round in which the result of the winning lottery is a small win, a game ball that is launched into the game area PA before the result of the winning lottery is announced can reach the second large winning opening 212a during the period in which the second opening/closing door 212b transitions to the open state as a result of the small win, and in a game round in which the result of the winning lottery is a small win, a game ball that is launched into the game area PA after the result of the lottery is announced cannot reach the second large winning opening 212a during the period in which the second opening/closing door 212b transitions to the open state as a result of the small win.

Therefore, when it is recognized that the winning lottery result is a small win c by the notification of the winning lottery result in the game round, the game ball is fired after the notification and the game ball enters the second big prize opening 212a. , If it is recognized that the result of the winning lottery is not a small winning C or that it is a small winning other than the small winning C by the notification of the winning lottery result in the game round, the game ball will not be fired and the second major winning hole will be opened. It is possible to prevent the player from intentionally switching the firing mode of the game ball for each winning lottery result, such as not letting the game ball enter the ball into the ball 212a (for example, stopping the game ball).

<<3-7>> Modification of the third embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as in the above embodiment will be omitted.

《3-7-1》Variation 1:
In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109, the image of the character CH is displayed on the display surface 41a as the specific suggestion effect, but other effects may be adopted as the specific suggestion effect. For example, a specific suggestion effect may be performed by driving a movable accessory. FIG. 137 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific suggestion effect for driving a driving accessory.

As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 of this modification provides a movable accessory MY, which is a dynamic accessory, on the game board 30. The movable accessory MY functions as a driving means that drives the movable accessory MY so that it can be visually recognized by the player. When a specific suggestion performance is set as a performance to be executed in a game round, the movable accessory MY is driven for a predetermined period of time (2 seconds in this modification) so as to be visible to the player.

As in this modified example, by driving the movable part MY so that it is visible to the player as a specific suggestion effect, it is possible to make the player more easily aware of the execution of the specific suggestion effect. As a result, by driving the movable part MY, it is possible to more easily create a sense of expectation in the player.

《3-7-2》Variation 2:
In the third embodiment, the detection sensor 205 is placed at the upper right side of the gaming area PA in order to detect the distribution mode of game balls, but the detection sensor may be placed at another position. FIG. 138 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the arrangement position of the detection sensor. As an example, the detection sensor 230 is arranged above the guide rail 31 on the upper left side of the game area PA. By arranging the detection sensor 230 at the position shown in FIG. 138, it is possible to detect whether or not a game ball firing operation has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to detect a stop shot caused by the player switching between execution and stop of the game ball firing operation.

As another example, a configuration may be adopted in which both the detection sensor 205 on the flow path 203 and the detection sensor 230 on the upper left side of the game area PA are provided. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to perform a stop hit by switching between right-handed and left-handed hits depending on the result of the winning lottery, and to allow the player to execute and stop the game ball firing operation. It is possible to detect any type of stop shot, including a stop shot that switches between the two.

《3-7-3》Variation 3:
In the third embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 97, the delay mechanism 202 has a configuration including a flow path 203 that has a meandering shape left and right with respect to the game board 30, but other configurations may be adopted. It's okay. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the speed at which game balls circulate is basically controlled by having a channel in which protrusions are arranged. In addition, a croon with an opening at the bottom may be adopted, or a dynamic accessory may be used to temporarily stop the distribution of game balls and restart the distribution of game balls after a certain period of time. Any configuration may be adopted as long as it has a function of delaying the game balls circulating on the right side of the gaming area PA from reaching the V winning mechanism 210.

3-7-4 Variation 4:
As the information to be recorded in the game ball count memory area, a configuration may be adopted in which information is recorded that corresponds to whether or not a specific suggestion effect has been executed for each executed game round, the number of game balls circulating through the detection sensor 205 during the execution of each game round, and the variable time for each game round. Then, using such information recorded in the game ball count memory area, it may be determined whether or not the player is performing stop shots. In this case, with regard to the reference game round used for the stop shot condition, the game round in which the small win c was won was set as the reference game round in the above third embodiment, but in this modified example, the game round in which the specific suggestion effect was executed is adopted as the reference game round. Then, based on the judgment criteria for the stop shot condition in which the game round in which the specific suggestion effect was executed is adopted as the reference game round, it is determined whether or not the stop shot condition is established. In this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the player is performing stop shots in response to the execution or non-execution of the specific suggestion effect directly.

3-7-5 Variation 5:
In this modified example, when the result of the winning lottery obtained by the advance determination process is a small winning lottery c, it is determined whether or not the player has performed a stop shot based on the circulation state of the game balls in the period before the advance determination process identifies it as a small winning lottery c. As a result, when it is determined that the player has not performed a stop shot, a specific suggestion effect is executed in the period before the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is a small winning lottery c is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the player has performed a stop shot, a specific suggestion effect is not executed in the period before the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is a small winning lottery c is executed.

FIG. 139 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of modification 5. As shown in the figure, when the game time U1 is executed, there are pending game times corresponding to the game time U2 and the game time U3, and during the execution of the game time U1, the game ball corresponding to the game time U4 is placed in the second starting slot. The case where the ball enters No. 34 will be explained. In this modification, based on the special information (winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3) acquired when the game ball corresponding to the game round U4 enters the second starting port 34, , executes the destination determination process. As a result of the previous determination process, when it is specified that the winning lottery result in the game round U4 is a small win c, the number of game balls is determined for one or more game rounds executed before the identification. Based on the information recorded in the count memory area, a game ball distribution mode detection process is executed to determine whether or not a stopping condition is satisfied.

If it is determined that the stop-hit condition is not met, a specific suggestion effect is executed in a game round (game round U2 or game round U3) executed in a period before the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is small win c. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop-hit condition is met, a specific suggestion effect is not executed in a game round (game round U2 or game round U3) executed in a period before the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is small win c.

By doing this, players who wish to guess whether or not the result of the winning lottery will be a small win c before a game round is executed are made aware of the game ball firing operation. can be done. In other words, it is possible to suppress the player from making a stop shot.

3-7-6 Variation 6:
In this modified example, when the result of the winning lottery obtained by the advance determination process is a small winning lottery c, it is determined whether or not the player has performed a stop shot based on the distribution state of the game balls in the period from when it is determined that the winning lottery is a small winning lottery c to when the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is a small winning lottery c is executed. As a result, when it is determined that the player has not performed a stop shot, a specific suggestion effect is executed in the period before the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is a small winning lottery c is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the player has performed a stop shot, a specific suggestion effect is not executed in the period before the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is a small winning lottery c is executed.

Figure 140 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of modified example 6. As shown in the figure, when the game round U1 is executed, there are reserved game rounds corresponding to the game rounds U2 and U3, and the game ball corresponding to the game round U4 enters the second start hole 34 during the execution of the game round U1. In this modified example, a first determination process is executed based on special information (win random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3) acquired as a result of the game ball corresponding to the game round U4 entering the second start hole 34. If the result of the first determination process is that the result of the winning lottery in the game round U4 is small win c, a game ball circulation state detection process is executed based on the information recorded in the game ball count memory area for one or more game rounds executed after the specification, and it is determined whether or not the stop shot condition is established.

Then, if it is determined that the stopping condition is not satisfied, the game round (in this modification, game round U3 ), a specific suggestive performance is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stopping condition is satisfied, the specific suggestion effect will not be executed in the game round that is executed in the period before the game round in which the winning lottery result is small win c. .

By doing this, players who wish to guess whether or not the result of the winning lottery will be a small win c before a game round is executed are made aware of the game ball firing operation. can be done. In other words, it is possible to suppress the player from making a stop shot.

3-7-7 Variation 7:
In this modified example, when the result of the winning lottery obtained by the advance determination process is a small winning lottery c, it is determined whether or not the player has performed a stop shot based on the distribution state of the game balls in the period from when it is determined that it is a small winning lottery c by the advance determination process until the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is a small winning lottery c is executed. As a result, when it is determined that the player has not performed a stop shot, a specific suggestion effect is executed in the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is a small winning lottery c. On the other hand, when it is determined that the player has performed a stop shot, a specific suggestion effect is not executed in the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is a small winning lottery c.

FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of Modified Example 7. As shown in the figure, when the game time U1 is executed, there are pending game times corresponding to the game time U2 and the game time U3, and during the execution of the game time U1, the game ball corresponding to the game time U4 is placed in the second starting slot. The case where the ball enters No. 34 will be explained. In this modification, based on the special information (winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3) acquired when the game ball corresponding to the game round U4 enters the second starting port 34, , executes the destination determination process. As a result of the previous determination process, when it is specified that the winning lottery result in game round U4 is small win c, the game ball count memory area is stored for one or more game rounds executed after the identification. Based on the information recorded in the game ball distribution mode detection process, it is determined whether the stopping condition is satisfied or not.

If it is determined that the stopping condition is not satisfied, a specific suggestion effect is executed in a game round (in this example, game round U4) in which the winning lottery result is a small win c. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stopping condition is satisfied, the specific suggestion performance is not executed in the game round (game round U4) in which the winning lottery result is a small win c.

In this way, a player who wishes to guess the result of the winning lottery for a game round based on the effects executed in that game round can be made aware of the operation of firing the game ball. In other words, it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the shot. In addition, it is possible to determine the effects to be executed in the game round that results in a small win c, taking into consideration the psychological state that can be inferred from the player's operation of firing the game ball during the period from when a small win c is identified by the advance determination process until the game round in which the winning lottery results in a small win c is executed.

3-7-8 Variation 8:
In the third embodiment, the processes related to the determination of whether the player is performing the stop shot, such as the process of counting the number of game balls, the calculation process for the stop shot determination, and the process of determining whether the stop shot condition is satisfied, are performed only when the game is performed in the high frequency support mode, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the process related to the stop shot determination may also be performed in the low frequency support mode. In this case, the detection of the circulation number is performed by the detection sensor 230 shown in the above modified example, instead of the detection sensor 205. Then, a configuration may be adopted in which information such as the result of the winning lottery for each game, the fluctuation time, the circulation number in the detection sensor 230, and the type of the performed performance is recorded in the game ball count memory area. By adopting such a configuration of the game ball count memory area, it is possible to grasp the characteristics of the game ball launch operation by the player, such as not only the player's reaction to the small winning c, but also the state of the player's launch operation to other lottery results (the player's reaction to the lottery result) and the state of the player's launch operation to the type of the performed performance (the player's reaction to each performance), and to execute the performance taking the characteristics into consideration.

《3-7-9》Variation 9:
In the third embodiment described above, when the gaming state shifts from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode, the player is prompted to distribute the game ball to the right side of the game board 30 (to play right-handed). A configuration may be adopted in which a presentation (right-handed hitting suggestion presentation) is executed. In addition, when the game state shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, an effect (left-handed hit hint) that suggests to the player that the game ball will be distributed to the left side of the game board 30 (left-handed hit) It is also possible to adopt a configuration that executes a performance (direction). In addition, when the gaming state shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, and when the detection sensor 205 or the through gate 35 detects that a game ball has been distributed during the low-frequency support mode, the game A configuration may be adopted in which a performance (a left-handed hitting suggestion performance) is performed that suggests to the player that the game ball will be distributed to the left side of the board 30 (to play left-handed). By doing so, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in accordance with the flow of the game.

《3-7-10》Variation 10:
If the result of the winning lottery obtained by the earlier determination process is a specific lottery result (for example, a result of a non-reach occurrence, an error of a reach occurrence, a jackpot win, a small win win, etc.), the particular lottery result is determined by the earlier determination process. The distribution state of game balls in the period before obtaining the lottery results (for example, the number of game balls that entered the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, that is, the number of held balls CRN and the first starting pending A configuration may be adopted in which the performance in the game round to be executed before the game round that results in the particular lottery result is determined based on the number of pieces (RaN, second start pending number RbN, etc.). It is possible to make players who wish to guess whether or not it is a specific lottery result before the game round that will result in the specific lottery result be aware of the game ball firing operation. .

《3-7-11》Variation 11:
If the result of the winning lottery obtained by the earlier determination process is a specific lottery result (for example, a result of a non-reach occurrence, an error of a reach occurrence, a jackpot win, a small win win, etc.), the particular lottery result is determined by the earlier determination process. The distribution mode of game balls in the period before the execution of the game round that informs that the winning lottery result is a specific lottery result after acquiring the lottery result (for example, the first starting port 33 and the second lottery result) Based on the number of game balls that entered the second starting slot 34, that is, the number of held balls CRN, the first held number RaN, the second held number RbN, etc.), the game round that results in the specific lottery result is activated. A configuration may also be adopted in which the performance in the game round to be executed is determined before the game is played. It is possible to make players who wish to guess whether or not it is a specific lottery result before the game round that is the specific lottery result is executed be aware of the game ball firing operation. .

3-7-12 Variation 12:
When the result of the winning lottery obtained by the advance determination process is a specific lottery result (for example, a miss with no reach, a miss with reach, a big win, a small win, etc.), a configuration may be adopted in which the presentation to be executed in the game round resulting in the specific lottery result is determined based on the circulation state of game balls (for example, the number of game balls that enter the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, i.e., the reserved number CRN, the first start reserved number RaN, the second start reserved number RbN, etc.) during the period from when the specific lottery result is obtained by the advance determination process until the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is notified is executed, in which the result is the specific lottery result. A player who wishes to guess whether or not the lottery result is a specific lottery result based on the presentation executed in the game round resulting in the specific lottery result can be made aware of the operation of launching game balls.

《3-7-13》Variation 13:
In the third embodiment described above, when it is detected that the player is using a performance that notifies the player in advance that there is a high possibility that a specific suggestion performance will be executed when the small win c is won, or that the player is making a stop hit. In this case, an effect may be executed to inform the player in advance that the specific suggestion effect will not be executed. For example, such a performance may be performed as an opening performance during the opening period before the start of the round game after winning a jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening, or as a video performance for waiting for customers (customer waiting time). It may also be executed as a waiting video performance, demonstration video performance). In addition, the video performance for waiting for customers is performed when the execution of a game round ends and there is no game round to be executed next. In the case where the data is not stored in area Rb, and a predetermined distribution condition such as the detection sensor that detects the distribution of game balls does not detect the distribution of game balls for a predetermined period of time is met, or when the operation handle is operated by the player. This is an effect that is executed when conditions such as 25 are not performed are met.

3-7-14 Variation 14:
The criteria for the stop shot condition used to determine whether or not the player is performing stop shot are not limited to the criteria (criteria 1 to criterion 5) described in the third embodiment, and other criteria can be adopted. For example, a criterion may be adopted that determines that the player is performing stop shot when the circulation frequency in the game round executed one before the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is a small winning c is equal to or less than a predetermined value, or a criterion may be adopted that determines that the player is performing stop shot when the circulation frequency in the game round executed immediately after the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is a small winning c is equal to or less than a predetermined value. By using such simple criteria, the processing can be simplified.

《4》Fourth embodiment:
《4-1》Structure of gaming machine:
FIG. 142 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") as a fourth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, this outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back side of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window 18 is formed in the approximate center of the front door frame 14. Resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided around the window 18. The electric parts are composed of light-emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role in enhancing the presentation effect by lighting or blinking during each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, etc. In addition, a glass unit 19 consisting of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the open window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board through the glass unit 19 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as loaned balls loaned from a loaning machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and launches the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front of the game board. The lower tray 21 is disposed below the upper tray 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. The bottom surface of the lower tray 21 is formed with a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged to the outside from the lower tray 21.

A performance operation button 24 is provided at the front of the periphery of the upper tray 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation unit that allows the player to perform input operations for the game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

On the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, simply referred to as the "right side"), an operating handle 25 for the player to operate is provided. When the player operates (rotates) the operating handle 25, game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting the operation of the game ball launching mechanism, a wait button 25b that stops the launch of game balls by the game ball launching mechanism when pressed by the player, and a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a turns on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in response to the amount of rotation, and game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "left side"). When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing strength to the front of the game board, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired to the front of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and also flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can perform what is called a "right-handed hit." Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. The back of the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with control devices for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Figure 143 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the rear surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board that has a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is constructed so that traces of opening and closing remain. For example, a seal is affixed to an openable/closable location, and when the board box is opened, the words "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio/light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The audio/light emission control device 90 controls light-emitting means such as speakers and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands sent from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands sent from the audio/light emission control device 90. The pattern display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays patterns and images for performances.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to launch game balls is input from the main control device 60, the launch control device 80 controls the game ball launch mechanism to launch game balls with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there are several devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a tank rail 55 connected below the tank 54 and having a gently sloping slope so that the game balls flow downstream, a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and a payout device 71 that receives a supply of game balls from the case rail 56 and pays out a predetermined number of game balls according to an instruction from the payout control device 70.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the power necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . The ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88 switches between a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 144 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 has a number of openings formed therethrough in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. Game balls that enter the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are guided to the individual openings formed in the game board 30. The game board 30 also has a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 has a special chart unit 37, a general chart unit 38, and a round display section 39.

As shown in the figure, the general winning hole 32 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, ten game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 143).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which game balls can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole that penetrates vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that triggers a lottery to open the electric role 34a. Specifically, when a game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the passing as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric role opening lottery). If the electric role opening is selected as a result of the internal lottery, the electric role 34a transitions to an electric role opening state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is disposed upstream of the second start port 34 in the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that passes through the through gate 35 can flow down the game area PA after passing through and enter the second start port 34. Note that in this embodiment, even if a game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 is provided with a large winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 36a. When a big win is won as a result of an internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60 and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state and a closed state when a big win is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by a ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. In other words, when a big win is won as a result of a winning lottery based on a ball entering the first starting hole 33, the opening/closing execution mode is entered in which the ball can enter the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36. Similarly, if a big win is won as a result of a winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, the game moves to an open/close execution mode in which the ball can enter the large winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the general winning port 32, first starting port 33, second starting port 34, or variable winning device 36 are out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the opening 43.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display section 37a is a display section for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed variably or statically based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display section 37a is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. , causes the first symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. When the lottery ends, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop display the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display section 37b is a display section for displaying a second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display section 37b is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. , causes the second symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. When the lottery ends, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop display the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The time from when the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display section 37a or the second pattern displayed on the second pattern display section 37b starts to when it stops is also called the change time. Specifically, the time from when the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display section 37a starts to when it stops is also called the first change time, and the time from when the second pattern displayed on the second pattern display section 37b starts to when it stops is also called the second change time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first reservation display section 37c and a second reservation display section 37d, which are made of LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are held. The first reservation display section 37c displays the number of reservations at the first starting port 33 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. Further, in this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are held. The second reservation display section 37d displays the number of reservations at the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit.

The general map unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When a lottery to open an electric reel is held triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the general map unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to light up, flash, or display in a predetermined manner. When the lottery to open an electric reel is completed, the general map unit 38 displays in a predetermined manner corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode, or displays corresponding thereto. A round game is a game that is opened and closed until either the predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b remains open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display section 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends and a new game round is started.

Note that the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display section 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the drawing process and the drawing results.

The variable display unit 40 is disposed approximately in the center of the play area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a pattern display device 41. The pattern display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the pattern display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The pattern display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display section 37a displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs a variable display or a predetermined display of symbols in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. Further, when the second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. conduct. The symbol display device 41 performs not only display effects triggered by the entry of a ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also display effects during the opening/closing execution mode that is entered when a jackpot is won. . The details of the symbol display device 41 will be explained below.

FIG. 145 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 145(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 145(a), symbols representing numbers 1 to 8 are displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41. In addition, as the symbols to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol in which a character or other image is attached to each symbol representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be used.

Figure 145 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in the figure, three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, left, center, and right, are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the numbers 1 to 8 shown in Figure 145 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and a variable display is performed in which each pattern row scrolls from top to bottom or bottom to top with periodicity. As shown in Figure 145 (b), after the variable display by scrolling, one pattern is displayed in a stopped state on the pay line L for each pattern row. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, a variable display is started in which the patterns of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Then, the scrolling symbols are switched from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, each of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displays a predetermined symbol in a static display state. When the variable display of the symbols ends and the display is static, if the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined combination of symbols is formed on the valid line L. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the valid line L. Note that the manner of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned manner, and various modes of the variable display of the symbols can be adopted, such as the number of symbol rows, the number of valid lines, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows, and the number of symbols in each symbol row.

Here, a "game round" refers to the period from when the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b starts to change, the change ends, and the stop display ends, and is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the result of a winning lottery for special information acquired based on a game ball entering either the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the result of a winning lottery for one piece of special information for each game round. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a game ball entering either the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, it causes the segment display in either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to change and then causes the segment display to stop so as to display a display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information for each game round. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into either the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, it causes the pattern display device 41 to variably display a predetermined pattern sequence for each play round, and then causes the pattern sequence to be frozen so as to display a display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. The time required for one play round is also called the unit play time. The unit play time is composed of the fluctuation time, which is the time from when the fluctuation display begins to when the predetermined lottery result is frozen and displayed, and the freeze time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is frozen and displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 145(b), below the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, there is a first starting opening holding area Ds1, a holding extinguishing area Dm, and a second starting opening holding area Ds2. is displayed. The holding extinguishing area Dm is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a in the left-right direction, the first starting opening holding area Ds1 is displayed on the left side of the holding extinguishing area Dm, and the second starting opening holding area Ds2 is displayed on the left side of the holding extinguishing area Dm. displayed on the right. In the first starting port holding area Ds1, the number of held game balls based on the number of game balls entering the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second starting port holding area Ds2, the number of held game balls based on the number of game balls entering the second starting port 34 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, the number of reserved game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four, respectively. Details of the operations of the first starting port holding area Ds1, the second starting port holding area Ds2, and the holding extinguishing area Dm will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 144, a pair of nails (also known as life nails or navel nails) 42 (42a, 42b) are provided above the first starting hole 33. The probability of the game ball entering the first starting hole 33 changes depending on the distance between the pair of nails 42a, 42b.

《4-2》Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

FIG. 146 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that includes elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a ROM 63 that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. It is equipped with a RAM 64 which is a memory for storing information. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may be provided with some of the functions that the MPU 62 has. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). The input port of the main control board 61 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 and the power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85. The main control board 61 receives a stable 24V DC power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the dispensing control device 70, etc., and supplies power to each device. The power supply device 85 also has a capacitor (not shown), and continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period of time when a power failure occurs or when the power switch 88 (Figure 143) is turned off.

In addition, various detection sensors 67a to 67e are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided at various ball entry ports such as the general winning port 32, the first start port 33, the second start port 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. Based on the signals from the various detection sensors 67a to 67e, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 judges whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entry port, and judges whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 35. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, and executes a lottery for opening an electric device based on the entry of the game ball into the through gate 35.

The output port of the main control board 61 includes a variable prize drive part 36c that opens and closes the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36, and an electric accessory drive part 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , and the main display section 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable prize winning drive unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed. Further, if the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed.

The payout control device 70 and the sound and light emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. For example, the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command to the payout control device 70 based on the winning judgment result. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a ball is identified as having entered the general winning hole 32, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, when a ball is identified as having entered the first starting hole 33, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when a ball is identified as having entered the second starting hole 34, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 1 game ball is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The payout control device 70 is connected to a launch control device 80. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of a game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is met. In addition, an operating handle 25 and a game ball launch button 26 are connected to the launch control device 80.

The audio emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be explained later.

In addition, the audio light emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 consisting of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game performance that reflects the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound and light emission control device 90. Specifically, based on various commands received from the sound and light emission control device 90, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination that will ultimately be stopped and displayed, as well as grasping whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach performance, and the content of the advance notice performance executed in each game round. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game round, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, setting the display on the main display section 45, setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting jackpot types such as probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results. A reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. In addition, the change type counter CS is used to determine the change time in the first and second pattern display sections 37a and 37b of the main display section 45, and in the pattern display device 41. Furthermore, the electric device opening counter C4 is used for the electric device opening lottery to determine whether or not the electric device 34a of the second starting hole 34 is opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of ball entry is set to the first value in the pending information storage area 64b. It is stored in the reservation area Ra in chronological order. Further, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of ball entry are set in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b. are stored in chronological order.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be explained. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 1199, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering the first starting port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment process execution area 64c, where it is compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not it will result in a jackpot. The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment process execution area 64c, where it is compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not it will result in a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment process execution area 64c in the order obtained by the game ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. The jackpot random number counter C1 that has been moved to the execution area AE is then compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot will result.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the type of jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the judgment process execution area 64c, and if the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, it determines the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the judgment process execution area 64c. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped on the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referenced.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described in detail. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. The game ball is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The term "reach" refers to a display state in which some of the multiple symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 have a possibility of forming a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot, and in this state, the remaining symbol rows display a variable pattern. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 145(b), a symbol is first displayed as a stationary pattern in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is displayed as a stationary pattern in the symbol row Z3, forming a reach line, and when the reach line is formed, the variable pattern display is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is displayed as a stationary pattern in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, the reach line is formed, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a reach effect. This includes a method in which a combination of symbols in which a reach line is formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, a decision is made as to whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

Next, the details of the change type counter CS will be explained. The change type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the change time in the first pattern display section 37a and the second pattern display section 37b, and the change time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41. The change type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value.

The change type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is repeatedly updated during the remaining time in the normal processing. The buffer value of the change type counter CS is acquired when the change display in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b starts, and when the change pattern is determined when the pattern display device 41 starts changing the pattern. When determining the change time in the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b, the change time table stored in the change time table memory area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric role opening counter C4 will be described. The electric role opening counter C4 is configured to be incremented by one in the range of, for example, 0 to 465, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric role opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric role opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d is moved to the electric role execution area 64e, and then a lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric role opening lottery) is held in the electric role execution area 64e to determine whether or not to control the electric role 34a to the open state using the value of the electric role opening counter C4. Specifically, in the electric role execution area 64e, the winning/losing table (winning/losing table for electric role opening lottery) stored in the role lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is collated with the value of the electric role opening counter C4 to determine whether or not to control the electric role 34a to the open state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric role opening counter C4 corresponds to special information in the present invention. In addition, at least one of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is also called reserved information.

Next, the validity table will be explained. The win/fail table is table data for comparing with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode as the lottery modes for winning lots, and when drawing a winning lottery in the low probability mode, the win/fail table for the low probability mode is referred to, and the winning lottery mode is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode. When drawing a winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. High probability mode (also referred to as high probability gaming state) is a gaming state that is started by winning a variable jackpot, and is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is relatively higher than in low probability mode. To tell.

Figure 148 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/lose table. Figure 148(a) shows the win/lose table for low probability mode (for low probability mode), and Figure 148(b) shows the win/lose table for high probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 148(a), in the win/loss table for the low probability mode, five values from 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Among the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) is a miss. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 148(b), in the win/loss table for the high probability mode, 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Among the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 (16 to 1199) is a miss. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the low probability mode is the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the high probability mode. included in the group. However, as long as the probability of a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

Although not adopted in the win/lose table in this embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

A "small win" is a result that triggers a transition to the opening and closing execution mode in which the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger a transition to either the lottery mode or the support mode. In contrast, a "miss" is a result that does not trigger a transition to the opening and closing execution mode, and further does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode or the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be explained. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspects of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends (3) Control of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening/closing execution mode ends support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the occurrence of a ball entering the variable winning prize device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed multiple times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is not performed until 30 seconds have elapsed or the door 36b is closed. It can be set to continue until the number of balls entered reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 seconds have elapsed or the ball enters the opening/closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is shorter than the firing cycle of game balls. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no game balls enter the game ball. However, even in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the game ball may enter the game ball.

The number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened, the time limit for opening for one opening, and the number of balls that can be opened for one opening are arbitrary, so long as the frequency of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. Specifically, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed more frequently, the time limit for opening for one opening is longer, or the number of balls that can be opened for one opening is greater than in the low-frequency winning mode. To clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that balls do not actually enter the variable winning device 36.

As the lottery mode for the winning lottery after the above (2) opening/closing execution mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 can be set to a high probability mode in which the winning lottery is performed using a high probability winning/losing table as the winning/losing table, and a low probability mode in which the winning lottery is performed using a low probability winning/losing table as the winning/losing table. As explained using FIG. 148, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher when the winning lottery is performed using a high probability winning/losing table than when the winning lottery is performed using a low probability winning/losing table.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, the game balls continue to be launched into the game area PA in the same manner. When compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role opening lottery using the electric role opening counter C4. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening lottery is set higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Also, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric role 34a may be set longer when an electric role opening lottery is won than in the low-frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when an electric role release win is set is set to be greater than in the low-frequency support mode. Good too. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the electric accessory 34a is opened for a long time. In addition, in the case where the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a is opened, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is , may be set shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from when one electric accessory lottery is held until the next electric accessory lottery is held is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. It's okay.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a ball will enter the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in fulfilling the special information acquisition condition.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

Figure 149 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. Figure 149 (a) shows the distribution table for the first starting port, and Figure 149 (b) shows the distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referenced when a winning lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering the first starting port 33, and the distribution table for the second starting port is referenced when a winning lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering the second starting port 34.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting hole in FIG. 149(a), the distribution table for the first starting hole has the following jackpot types set based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33: 16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot.

The 16R and 8R probability variable jackpots are jackpots in which the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is a high-frequency winning mode, the lottery mode for the winning lottery after the opening and closing execution mode ends (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "lottery mode") is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot is the number of times the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening and closing execution mode: 16 times (16 rounds) for the 16R probability variable jackpot and 8 times (8 rounds) for the 8R probability variable jackpot.

In the 16R normal jackpot and 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is It is a jackpot that the support mode after the end becomes the high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot is that the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is different, and the 16R normal jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R normal jackpot is 8 (8 rounds).

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39" correspond to a 16R probability variable jackpot, and "40 to 64" correspond to an 8R probability variable jackpot. "65-89" corresponds to the 16R regular jackpot, and "90-99" corresponds to the 8R regular jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the form of jackpots is diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R special jackpot, followed by the 8R special jackpot, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. In this way, by setting multiple types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, monotony in the game is prevented and it is possible to increase attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 16R guaranteed variable jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "65 to 99" correspond to the 8R normal jackpot. It corresponds to

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won, the type of jackpot is distributed based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the second jackpot. This is different from the case where a jackpot is won based on the ball entering the starting hole 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

In addition, in the case of a losing result in the winning lottery, there is no transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and no change in the lottery mode and support mode occurs. When sorting the type of jackpot, if it is a 16 probability strange jackpot or an 8R probability strange jackpot, as explained earlier, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends will be the high probability mode. This state continues until the next time a jackpot is won in the winning lottery.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also determines the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. Decide the display mode. In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Figure 150 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/lose table (win/lose table for the lottery to open electric reels) used when executing the lottery to open electric reels.

Figure 150 (a) shows a winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) used in the low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 150 (a), the winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values, 0 and 1, set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in winning the electric role opening. 464 values, from 2 to 465, are set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in losing. In other words, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the low-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the electric role opening is won during the low-frequency support mode, the electric role opening is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

Figure 150 (b) shows a winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) used in the high-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 150 (b), the winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) has 462 values from 0 to 461 set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in winning the electric role opening. Four values from 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in losing. In other words, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the electric role opening is won during the high-frequency support mode, the electric role opening is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning/losing table for the electric device opening lottery is set so that the high frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second starting hole 34 than the low frequency support mode.

<<4-3>> Electrical configuration of the audio/light-emitting control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 151 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 146) are omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on a sound light emission control board 91 provided in the sound light emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is an element that includes a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control device 60 and the production operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, as well as a display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for the background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 mediates the reading and writing of data by adjusting the timing of the MPU 102, video RAM 107, etc., and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as designs and pictures displayed on the design display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap image data of various display designs and display pictures, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be expressed at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The various display pictures include pictures of petals P1 to P4, which will be described later. It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 106 and have each character ROM 106 store image data and the like in a shared manner. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store JPEG image data for background images stored in the program ROM 103.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

Overview of Processing by Gaming Machines:
Next, an overview of the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as described above, below the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, a first start port reservation area Ds1 showing the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the first start port 33, a second start port reservation area Ds2 showing the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the second start port 34, and a reserved consumption area Dm located between the first start port reservation area Ds1 and the second start port reservation area Ds2 are displayed.

FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a change in the first starting port holding area Ds1 and the holding extinguishing area Dm. In the first starting opening holding area Ds1, up to four holding display icons corresponding to each holding (each of up to four holdings) based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 33 are lined up in the left and right direction. Is displayed. In this embodiment, the hold display icon is circular, and in the example shown in FIG. A display icon H2 is shown. In the first starting opening holding area Ds1, the first holding display icon H1 is displayed at the rightmost position, and the second holding display icon H2 is displayed at the second position from the right to the left. That is, in the first starting port holding area Ds1, each time a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the holding display icons are displayed so as to increase by one from the right side to the left side.

The reserved consumption area Dm is a trapezoid whose upper base is longer than its lower base, and in the example shown in FIG. 152(a), a reserved display icon H0 is placed at the top of the reserved consumption area Dm. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a winning lottery is held when a ball enters the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, and a variable display is displayed to notify the result of the winning lottery. When this variable display starts, the reserved display icon is placed at the top of the reserved consumption area Dm. This variable display is based on the reserved (reserved information) corresponding to the reserved display icon H0 placed at the top of the reserved consumption area Dm. By observing that the reserved display icon H0 is placed at the top of the reserved consumption area Dm, the player can know that the reserved corresponding to the reserved display icon H0 is being consumed.

In the state shown in FIG. 152(a), when the variable display is finished and the display is stopped, the pending display icon H0 placed on the upper part of the pending consumption area Dm disappears. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 152(b), the first hold display icon H1 located on the rightmost side in the first start opening hold area Ds1 moves to the upper part of the hold extinguishing area Dm. At this time, in the first starting port holding area Ds1, the second holding display icon H2 located second from the right side moves (shifts) to the rightmost position. In the example shown in FIG. 152(b), the third and fourth pending display icons from the right side to the left side do not exist, but if they exist, the third pending display icons do not exist. is moved (shifted) to the second position, and the hold display icon located at the fourth position is moved (shifted) to the third position.

As a result of the movement shown in FIG. 152(b), the state shown in FIG. 152(c) is obtained. That is, the first hold display icon H1 is placed on the upper part of the hold extinguishing area Dm, and the second hold display icon H2 is displayed at the rightmost position of the first starting port hold area Ds1. At this time, a variable display is performed to notify the result of the winning lottery based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the first hold display icon H1.

As described above, each time the variable display and stop display corresponding to one game round are executed, each hold display icon displayed in the first start opening hold area Ds1 shifts from the left side to the right side. , and finally moves from the rightmost position to the upper part of the reserved digestion area Dm. Then, a fluctuating display and a stop display are executed to notify the result of the winning lottery based on the pending information corresponding to the pending display icon. In this way, in each of the hold display icons displayed in the first starting gate hold area Ds1, the hold information corresponding to each hold display icon is displayed in order from the right side to the left side (that is, in the order in which the hold was placed). Subject to a winning lottery.

Figure 153 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the change in the second start port reservation area Ds2 and the reservation digestion area Dm. In the second start port reservation area Ds2, up to four reservation display icons H corresponding to each reservation (up to four reservations) based on the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34 are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The manner in which the second start port reservation area Ds2 changes is roughly the same as the manner in which the first start port reservation area Ds1 shown in Figure 152 changes, and the direction of movement is reversed compared to the first start port reservation area Ds1. That is, each time a game ball enters the second start port 34, the reservation display icons H are displayed so that they increase by one from the left side to the right side. Each time a game is played, the reservation display icons H move one by one from the right side to the left side in the second start port reservation area Ds2, and finally move to the top of the reservation digestion area Dm, and a variable display and a stop display are executed to notify the result of a winning lottery based on the reservation (reservation information) corresponding to the reservation display icon H. In this way, for each pending display icon displayed in the second start port pending area Ds2, the pending information corresponding to each pending display icon will be the subject of a winning lottery in order from left to right (i.e., in the order in which they were pending).

The hold display icon displayed in the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 was a circle as described above, but instead of this, it may be another polygonal shape such as a triangle, a rectangle, or a pentagon. Furthermore, the hold display icon is not limited to a graphic image, but may be an image of a character, etc. The hold digestion area Dm was a trapezoid as described above, but instead of this, it may be an image of another shape such as a triangle, a rectangle, or a circle. Furthermore, the hold digestion area Dm is not limited to a graphic image, but may be an image of a character, etc. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the hold display icon moved from the first start port hold area Ds1 or the second start port hold area Ds2 to the hold digestion area Dm was configured to be placed on the top of the hold digestion area Dm, but instead of this, it may be displayed in such a way that it enters the hold digestion area Dm and disappears.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, each hold display icon can take on a plurality of display modes. In this embodiment, the display mode of the pending display icon is configured to suggest the possibility of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery. Specifically, the display mode of each pending display icon indicates the possibility that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the pending information corresponding to each pending display icon will win a jackpot in a winning lottery. Specifically, as the display mode of each pending display icon, a plurality of display modes from high to low are set corresponding to the level of the possibility. As the display mode of the pending display icon becomes higher among multiple stages (ranks up), the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the pending display icon suggests that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery. .

Figure 154 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display mode of the reserve display icon set in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. As shown in the figure, the display mode of the reserve display icon is set in multiple stages from high to low corresponding to the high and low probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. In this embodiment, the display mode of the reserve display icon is set in five levels, from high to low, namely, display level Lvr5, display level Lvr4, display level Lvr3, display level Lvr2, and display level Lvr1. The higher the display level Lvr, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot.

In this embodiment, the display mode corresponding to each display level Lvr is expressed by color. Specifically, display level Lvr5 is expressed by gold, display level Lvr4 is expressed by red, display level Lvr3 is expressed by green, display level Lvr2 is expressed by blue, and display level Lvr1 is expressed by white. Note that the display mode corresponding to each display level Lvr is not limited to a mode expressed by color, and various display modes can be adopted as long as the difference between each display level Lvr is expressed in a manner that can be recognized by the player, such as a mode expressed by a pattern, a mode expressed by a shape, or a mode expressed by a character.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, an effect is executed that changes the display mode of the hold display icon described above. For example, an effect is executed that changes a white hold display icon to blue, or a blue hold display icon to green. In this embodiment, the trigger for executing this effect is that a flower petal, which is a type of effect image displayed on the pattern display device 41, attaches to the hold display icon.

Figure 155 is an explanatory diagram showing the state when petals are displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in the figure, a large number of petals are displayed across the entire display surface 41a. Each petal moves (falls) in a dancing manner from the top to the bottom. In this embodiment, each petal is classified into one of the following types: first type petal P1, second type petal P2, third type petal P3, and fourth type petal P4.

Figure 156 is an explanatory diagram showing a method of displaying the first to fourth types of petals P1 to P4. In this embodiment, the display on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 is performed using a layer structure having at least a background layer L1 for displaying the background, a pattern row layer L2 arranged above (on the front side of) the background layer L1 for displaying the pattern row, the first start port reserve area Ds1, the reserve digestion area Dm, and the second start port reserve area Ds2 (Figure 155), and an upper layer L3 arranged above (on the front side of) the pattern row layer L2.

The first type petal P1 is displayed on the background layer L1. In this embodiment, a predetermined period is defined as the period from when a demo image is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 until the time when a player is playing a game, and during this predetermined period, a plurality of The configuration is such that the first type petal P1 is displayed on the background layer L1. As a result, at least while the player is playing the game, a plurality of (many) first type petals P1 are repeatedly displayed on the display surface 41a. In addition, instead of this configuration, the predetermined period may be configured not to include the period of the jackpot performance that is executed when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery. According to this configuration, the first type petal P1 is never displayed during the jackpot performance.

The first type petals P1 move in various directions. The first type petal P1 is displayed on the background layer L1 and flows under the symbol row when the position overlaps with the symbol row displayed on the symbol row layer L2. The first type petal P1 is for making the display surface 41a lively and has no other function. Although the configuration is such that a plurality of first type petals P1 are displayed, only one petal may be displayed.

Petals other than the first type petal P1, that is, the second type petal P2, the third type petal P3, and the fourth type petal P4 are displayed on the upper layer L3.

In this embodiment, a predetermined period is defined as the period from when a demo image is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 until the time when a player is playing a game, and during this predetermined period, a plurality of The configuration is such that the second type petal P2 is displayed on the upper layer L3. As a result, at least while the player is playing the game, a plurality of (many) second type petals P2 are repeatedly displayed on the display surface 41a. In addition, instead of this configuration, the predetermined period may be configured not to include the period of the jackpot performance that is executed when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery. According to this configuration, the second type petal P2 is never displayed during the jackpot performance.

The plurality of second type petals P2 move in various directions. The second type petal P2 is displayed on the upper layer L3 and flows over the symbol row when the position overlaps with the symbol row displayed on the symbol row layer L2. The second type petal P2 is for making the display surface 41a lively and has no other function. Although a plurality of second type petals P2 are displayed, one petal of the second type P2 may be displayed.

The third type petal P3 includes a first starting opening holding third type petal P31 that moves in a dancing manner from the upper side toward the first starting opening holding area Ds1 on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and a display surface 41a. It is classified into a third type petal P32 for holding the second starting opening which moves in a dancing manner from the upper side toward the area Ds2 for holding the second starting opening. The third type petal for first starting port holding P31 functions to perform an effect of changing the display mode of the holding display icon displayed in the first starting port holding area Ds1. The third type petal P32 for holding the second starting port functions to perform an effect of changing the display mode of the holding display icon displayed in the area Ds2 for holding the second starting port. The third type petal P31 for holding the first starting port and the third type petal P32 for holding the second starting port will be described in detail later.

In a game round in which a fourth type petal P4 is won in a specific lottery process (petal re-variation lottery process), the fourth type petal P4 moves in a dancing manner from the upper side of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 toward the pattern row, and attaches to the pattern row. When the fourth type petal P4 attaches to the pattern row, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment executes an effect that changes the variable display of the pattern row. The movement of the fourth type petal P4 and the above-mentioned effect will be explained in detail later.

In this embodiment, the first to fourth type petals P1 to P4 are configured with the same picture. Since each petal P1 to P4 moves while changing direction, its shape and size vary, but as a whole, they are configured with the same picture. For this reason, the player cannot distinguish the types of the first to fourth type petals P1 to P4. Note that if it is difficult for the player to distinguish the types, each of the first to fourth type petals P1 to P4 does not necessarily have to be the same picture, and may be configured with image data of different pictures. As a modified example, the picture of the third type petal P3 may be configured to be different from the pictures of the other types of petals P1, P2, and P4. Since the third type petal P3 has a special function (a function for executing an effect that changes the display mode of the reserved display icon) different from the function for livening up the display surface 41a, the picture of the third type petal P3 can be intentionally configured differently from the pictures of the first type petal P1, the second type petal P2, and the fourth type petal P4 in order to give the player a sense of expectation that the special function will be executed. Furthermore, as a modified example, the picture of the fourth type petal P4 can be configured differently from the pictures of the other types of petals P1 to P3. Since the fourth type petal P4 has a special function (a function for re-changing the pattern row) different from the function for livening up the display surface 41a, the picture of the fourth type petal P4 can be intentionally configured differently from the pictures of the first to third types of petals P1 to P3 in order to give the player a sense of expectation that the special function will be executed.

FIG. 157 is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the third type petal P3. The illustration is about the third type petal P31 for holding the first starting opening out of the third type petals P3. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four holding display icons are displayed in the first starting opening holding area Ds1, and four types of third type petals P31 for first starting opening holding are prepared for each holding display icon. ing. The third type petal P31 for first starting port holding toward the first holding display icon H1 located on the rightmost side in the first starting port holding area Ds1 is hereinafter referred to as special 1/holding 1 petal Pa. The third type petal P31 for first starting port holding toward the second holding display icon H2 located second from the right side in the first starting port holding area Ds1 is hereinafter referred to as special 1/holding 2 petal Pb. The third type petal P31 for first starting port holding toward the third holding display icon H3 located third from the right side in the first starting port holding area Ds1 is hereinafter referred to as special 1/holding 3 petal Pc. The third type petal P31 for first starting port holding toward the fourth holding display icon H4 located fourth from the right side in the first starting port holding area Ds1 is hereinafter referred to as special 1/holding 4 petal Pd.

Petals Pa to Pd for Special 1/Reserve 1 to Special 1/Reserve 4 perform the same operation, with the only difference being the reserved display icon they point to. Therefore, we will explain the operation of Petal Pa for Special 1/Reserve 1 as a representative example.

The special 1/hold 1 petal Pa moves along one trajectory selected from three types of trajectories prepared in advance. The three types of trajectories are composed of a common route RA that extends from the starting point R1 to a specific point R2, and individual routes RB1, RB2, and RB3 that extend in separate directions from the specific point R2. The common route RA has a length exceeding 80% of the total length of each track, and extends close to the first reservation display icon H1. The first individual route RB1 reaches the position of the first hold display icon H1. The second individual route RB2 reaches a position shifted to the right from the first hold display icon H1. The third individual route RB3 reaches a position shifted to the left from the first hold display icon H1. Of the three types of trajectories, the trajectory constituted by the common route RA and the first individual route RB1 is hereinafter referred to as a target pending arrival trajectory. Of the three types of trajectories, the trajectory configured by the common route RA and the second individual route RB2 is hereinafter referred to as the first target non-reservation trajectory. Of the three types of trajectories, the trajectory configured by the common route RA and the third individual route RB3 will be hereinafter referred to as the second target non-reservation trajectory. Note that the end point of the target pending trajectory is the display position of the pending display icon.

In this embodiment, which of the target reservation reaching trajectory, the first target non-retention trajectory, and the second target non-retention trajectory is adopted as the trajectory of the special 1/reservation 1 petal Pa is determined by a specific lottery process ( The structure is determined by a petal trajectory lottery process). Note that instead of the lottery, a configuration may be adopted in which the trajectory is changed in turn.

In this embodiment, the length of time required for the petals to move along each of the target retention trajectory, the first target non-retention trajectory, and the second target non-retention trajectory is set to, for example, 10 seconds. did. In addition, the time length required for the petals to move along the common route RA in each trajectory is 8.5 seconds, and the time required for the petals to move along the first to third individual routes RB1 to RB3 in each trajectory. The target length was set to 1.5 seconds. These time lengths are just examples, and may be replaced with other values.

Each of the petals Pb for Special 1 and Retention 2, the petals Pc for Special 1 and Retention 3, and the petals Pd for Special 1 and Retention 4 are similar to the petals Pa for Special 1 and Retention 1 described above, and each petal Pb to Pd. The vehicle moves along one trajectory selected from the target-reserved trajectory, the first target-not-reserved trajectory, and the second target-not-reserved trajectory, which are provided corresponding to the target.

It has been explained that the petals Pa-Pd for Special 1-Reserve 1 to Special 1-Reserve 4 move toward the corresponding hold display icon, but this is because it has been explained that the corresponding hold display icon exists in the first start port hold area Ds1. Even if the corresponding hold display icon does not exist in the first start port hold area Ds1, the petals Pa-Pd for Special 1-Reserve 1 to Special 1-Reserve 4 are displayed in the same way as if they exist. For example, if the value of the first hold number counter is 2 and the third hold display icon H3 and the fourth hold display icon H4 do not exist in the first start port hold area Ds1, the petal Pc for Special 1-Reserve 3 moves toward the third position from the right in the first start port hold area Ds1 (i.e., the position where the third hold display icon H3 can be displayed), and the petal Pd for Special 1-Reserve 4 moves toward the fourth position from the right in the first start port hold area Ds1 (i.e., the position where the fourth hold display icon H4 can be displayed). That is, whether or not the corresponding hold display icon is present in the first start port hold area Ds1, the display of petals Pa-Pd for Special 1-hold 1 through Special 1-hold 4 begins, and there is no difference in the trajectory of petals Pa-Pd for Special 1-hold 1 through Special 1-hold 4. In other words, petals Pa-Pd for Special 1-hold 1 through Special 1-hold 4 move toward the display position for displaying the corresponding hold display icon, regardless of whether or not a hold display icon is present at that display position.

FIG. 158 is an explanatory diagram showing the state of the first reservation display icon H1 when the special 1/reservation 1 petal Pa moves along the target reservation arrival trajectory. As shown in FIG. 158(a), the special 1/reservation 1 petal Pa that has won the adoption of the target reservation reaching trajectory in the petal trajectory lottery process and has proceeded from the common route RA to the first individual route RB1, The first individual route RB1 is moved toward the first hold display icon H1. Then, as shown in FIG. 158(b), the special 1/hold 1 petal Pa reaches the first hold display icon H1. After reaching the special 1/hold 1 petal Pa stays on the first hold display icon H1 for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). Thereby, the player can recognize that the special 1/hold 1 petal Pa has been attached to the first hold display icon H1. After that, as shown in FIG. 158(c), the attached special 1/hold 1 petal Pa disappears, and the display mode of the first hold display icon H1 changes. For example, the first hold display icon H1 changes from white to blue. That is, the pachinko machine 10 recognizes that the display mode of the hold display icon changes such that the special 1/hold 1 petal Pa reaches the first hold display icon H1 and stays (attaches) for a predetermined time. A suggestion effect is executed, and then an effect is executed to change the display mode of the first pending display icon H1. For example, an effect such as changing the first hold display icon H1 from white to blue or changing a blue hold display icon to red is performed. In this specification, the petal remaining on the hold display icon for a predetermined period of time is expressed as the petal adhering to the hold display icon.

Each of the petals Pb to Pd for special 1 and reservation 2 to special 1 and reservation 4 performs the same operation as the petal Pa for special 1 and reservation 1 described above. The pachinko machine 10 suggests that the display mode of the hold display icon changes such that each petal Pb to Pd reaches the corresponding hold display icon H2 to H4 and stays (attaches) for a predetermined time. After that, a performance that changes the display mode of the pending display icons H2 to H4 to which petals Pb to Pd are attached is performed. For example, an effect that changes the hold display icons H2 to H4 from white to blue or a effect that changes the blue hold display icons H2 to H4 to red is performed.

In the above explanation, when each petal Pa-Pd reaches each hold display icon H1-H4 and remains there for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), an effect is executed to change the display mode of each hold display icon H1-H4. However, in reality, when each petal Pa-Pd reaches each hold display icon H1-H4, a determination is made as to whether the following two conditions are met, and only if both conditions are met is an effect executed to change the display mode of each hold display icon H1-H4. The two conditions are as follows:

・Condition 1:
No shift of the hold display icon occurs during the period from when the petal reaches the hold display icon until a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed.
・Condition 2:
The display state (display level Lvr) of the pending display icon that the petal has reached is less than a preset upper limit value (hereinafter referred to as the display level upper limit value Lvm).

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 performs the following process. When a ball enters the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34 and pending information is obtained based on the ball, the display level Lvr of the pending display icon corresponding to the ball is set to 1, and the display level upper limit value Lvm of the pending display icon is set based on game results such as winning a jackpot or the occurrence of a reach. Then, when the petals Pa to Pd reach the pending display icons H1 to H4, it is determined whether or not a shift in the pending display icon occurs during the period from the time of the arrival until two seconds have elapsed (condition 1 is determined).

If it is determined that the shift of the pending display icon does not occur during the above period (condition 1 is satisfied), the display level Lvr set for the pending display icons H1 to H4 that the petals Pa to Pd have reached is the same. It is determined whether or not the display level is lower than the set upper limit value Lvm (determination of condition 2 is performed). Here, when it is determined that the display level Lvr is lower than the display level upper limit value Lvm (that is, when both conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied), an effect is created that changes the display mode of the pending display icons H1 to H4. Execute. Specifically, during the above period, the petals that have reached the hold display icon are continuously displayed at the position of the hold display icon (the petals are deleted after the above period ends), and then the display level corresponding to the hold display icon is The Lvr is increased by one level, and the display mode of the pending display icon is changed.

On the other hand, in the determination of whether the display level Lvr falls below the display level upper limit value Lvm, if it is determined that the display level Lvr does not fall below the display level upper limit value Lvm, i.e., that the display level upper limit value Lvm has been reached (i.e., condition 1 is met and condition 2 is not met), then no effect is performed that changes the display mode of the pending display icons H1 to H4. Specifically, during the above period, the petals that have reached the pending display icons are continuously displayed (the petals are erased after the above period ends), but the display mode of the pending display icons is not changed.

In addition, in determining whether or not a shift of the hold display icon does not occur during the above period, if it is determined that a shift will occur (that is, if condition 1 is not satisfied), it is determined whether condition 2 is satisfied or not. Regardless, the performance that changes the display mode of the hold display icons H1 to H4 is not executed. Specifically, when the petals Pa to Pd reach the pending display icons H1 to H4, the petals are deleted and the display mode of the pending display icons is not changed.

The petals Pa-Pd for Special 1-Reserve 1 to Special 1-Reserve 4 that perform the above-mentioned operation are repeatedly displayed during the period in which the first start port reservation area Ds1 and the second start port reservation area Ds2 are displayed. Specifically, the petals Pa-Pd for Special 1-Reserve 1 to Special 1-Reserve 4 are displayed one by one in sequence, with a predetermined interval (for example, 5 seconds) between them, during the period in which the first start port reservation area Ds1 and the second start port reservation area Ds2 are displayed. That is, during the above period, the pachinko machine 10 starts displaying the petals Pa-Pd for Special 1-Reserve 1 to Special 1-Reserve 4 one by one in this order, with an interval of the predetermined interval, and after starting to display the petal Pd for Special 1-Reserve 4, it returns to displaying the petal Pa for Special 1-Reserve 1 after the predetermined interval. In this way, petals Pa to Pd for Special 1/Reserve 1 to Special 1/Reserve 4 are repeatedly displayed.

When the pachinko machine 10 starts displaying petals Pa to Pd for special 1 and hold 1 to special 1 and hold 4, the pachinko machine 10 performs a petal trajectory lottery process to determine the target hold reaching trajectory, the first target non-holding trajectory, and so on. , it is determined which of the second target non-reserved trajectories to adopt. In the petal trajectory lottery process, if it is decided to adopt the target pending arrival trajectory, display of petals moving along the target pending arrival trajectory consisting of the common route RA and the first individual route RB1 is started. . In the petal trajectory lottery process, if it is decided to adopt the first target non-reserved trajectory, the petal trajectory that moves along the first target non-reserved trajectory consisting of the common route RA and the second individual route RB2. Start displaying. In the petal trajectory lottery process, if it is decided to adopt the second target non-reservation trajectory, the petal trajectory that moves along the second target non-reservation trajectory consisting of the common route RA and the third individual route RB3. Start displaying. The petals that have moved along the first target non-holding trajectory or the second target non-holding trajectory never reach the holding display icon, and no effect is performed to change the display mode of the holding display icon.

In addition, as mentioned above, the third type petals for special 1 and hold 1 to petals Pa to Pd for special 1 and hold 4 are displayed repeatedly while the player is playing the game, so one hold Petals Pa to Pd may be attached to the display icon multiple times. In this case, if the display level Lvr is less than the display level upper limit Lvm, an effect is performed in which the display mode of the pending display icons H1 to H4 is changed every time a petal Pa to Pd is attached. For example, if flower petals Pa to Pd are attached to each of the white pending display icons H1 to H4 twice, the first time the color changes from white to blue, and the second time the color changes from blue to green. The performance is executed.

What has been described using FIGS. 157 and 158 is the operation of the third type petal P31 for holding the first starting port. On the other hand, the third type petal P32 for holding the second starting port performs the same operation as the third type petal P31 for holding the first starting port. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, each of the special 2/hold 1 to special 2/hold 4 petals as the third type petals P32 for second starting opening holding is displayed in the second starting opening holding area Ds2. A suggestion effect is executed that suggests that the display mode of the hold display icon will change, such that each hold display icon is reached and remains (attached) for a predetermined time, and then the display mode of the hold display icon is changed. Perform a performance that changes. It is also similar to the first starting port hold side in that the display mode of the hold display icon is changed only when Conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied.

The first type petals P1 and the second type petals P2, which have the function of making the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 lively, are repeatedly displayed in large numbers, but in this embodiment, out of the large number of them, One of them moves along the same trajectory as the target pending arrival trajectory of the third type petal P3 described above, and is displayed so as to move further downward after reaching the pending display icon. Even if this type of first type petal P1 or second type petal P2 reaches the hold display icon, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icon by passing through the hold display icon is executed. Never.

FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram showing how the fourth type petal P4 acts on the pattern displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. FIG. 159(a) shows that in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the same symbol is displayed in a static manner in symbol rows Z1 and Z3, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner in symbol row Z2 in the middle. This indicates the state in which the In this state, the fourth type petal P4 moves as if dancing toward the pattern row Z2.

The state of FIG. 159(a) transitions to the state of FIG. 159(b), and symbol row Z2 is displayed as still. Note that at this time, the symbols displayed as still in symbol row Z2 are different from the symbols displayed as still in symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3. In this state, the fourth type of petal P4 reaches the last stopped symbol row Z2, and after reaching that, the fourth type of petal P4 stops on that symbol for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds). This allows the player to recognize that the fourth type of petal P4 has attached to the stopped symbol row Z2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 159(c), the attached fourth-type petal P4 disappears, and symbol row Z2 starts to change again. Next, symbol row Z2 is displayed as still, as shown in FIG. 159(d). Note that the symbols in symbol row Z2 that are displayed as still after this changing display is resumed match the symbols in symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3 that are displayed as still. In other words, symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are the same combination of symbols that will result in a jackpot.

As described above, the fourth type of petal P4 moves toward the pattern row that is being changed and attaches to the pattern immediately after the display of the pattern row stops. When the fourth type of petal P4 attaches, an effect is executed that changes the pattern row again.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the third type petal P3 among the plurality of types of petals P1 to P4 displayed on the symbol display device 41 reaches the pending display icon, and If the hold display icon remains (that is, adheres) for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds), an effect is performed to change the display mode of the hold display icon. In conventional pachinko machines that do not have such a configuration, the display mode of the hold display icon changes when the variable display starts, when the hold information shifts, or when a game ball enters the first starting port or the second starting port. It has been common practice to perform a performance that suggests a change (hereinafter referred to as a pending change suggestion performance), and then to perform a performance that changes the display mode of the pending display icon. In this conventional pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as conventional pachinko machine 1), when a variable display starts, when pending information is shifted, or when a game ball enters the first starting port or the second starting port, , at a predetermined timing, a performance that suggests a hold change is executed, and a performance that changes the display mode of the hold display icon is executed. The problem is that the timing at which the game will appear can be predicted, resulting in a lack of anticipation and sense of urgency for the player. In addition, unless a hold change suggestion effect is executed, an effect that changes the display mode of the hold display icon will not appear, so the player will only be able to change the hold display icon when the hold change suggestion effect is executed. There was no focus on the game, and the sense of anticipation and urgency for the players was further lacking.

In addition, as other conventional pachinko machines, a special character appears on the hold display icon during the variable display, and when this character appears, an effect is executed that changes the display mode of the hold display icon. There was a composition. In a pachinko machine with this configuration, if a special character does not appear, the above effect is never executed, and if a special character appears, the above effect is always executed. Similar to pachinko machines, there was a problem in that players lacked a sense of anticipation and urgency.

Furthermore, as other conventional pachinko machines, during the variable display, a mini-game-like effect for changing the hold is executed, and when the mini-game is won, an effect is executed to change the display mode of the hold display icon. There was a configuration to do so. In a pachinko machine with this configuration, if the above-mentioned hold change effect does not appear, the effect that changes the display mode of the hold display icon is never executed, so as with the conventional pachinko machine 1, There was a problem in that players lacked a sense of anticipation and urgency.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of petals repeatedly dance on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, regardless of whether or not the pending display icon is displayed.
(i) The majority of these petals (first type petal P1 and second type petal P2) cannot act on the pending display icon, even if they pass around or over the pending display icon. Without,
(ii) If you think that one of those petals (the third type petal P3 moving along the first target unreserved trajectory or the second target unreserved trajectory) moves toward the pending display icon, Just before the hold display icon, it will be removed from the hold display icon,
(iii) When you think that one of those petals (the third type petal P3 moving along the target hold arrival trajectory) has reached the hold display icon, a predetermined amount of time has passed after reaching the hold display icon. Due to the previous shift of the pending display icon, the display mode of the pending display icon does not change.
(iv) If you think that one of those petals (the third type petal P3 moving along the target holding trajectory) reaches the holding display icon and stays (attaches) for a predetermined period of time. , because the display level Lvr set for the hold display icon has already reached the display level upper limit Lvm, the display mode of the hold display icon does not change,
(v) One of the petals (the third type petal P3 moving along the target hold arrival trajectory) arrived towards the hold display icon and stayed (attached) for a predetermined time. If so, an effect that changes the display mode of the pending display icon is executed.

For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when petals are repeatedly displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the player has expectations that the display mode of the pending display icon will change. It is possible to always give a feeling of tension and tension (always as long as one of the petals is displayed), and
・The petal reached the hold display icon, but it passed past the hold display icon.
・The petals went towards the hold display icon, but the petals ended up outside the hold display icon.
・Even though the petals reached the hold display icon, the petals did not attach to the hold display icon.
- A petal has reached the hold display icon and is attached to the hold display icon (because the display level Lvr of the hold display icon has already reached the set display level upper limit Lvm) Since it is possible to give a feeling of disappointment that the display mode of the pending display icon has not changed, it is possible to give the player a further sense of anticipation and tension. Furthermore, in this embodiment, petals that can serve as a display suggesting a pending change and petals with the same pattern as the petals are always dancing, so it is expected that a display that changes the display mode of the pending display icon will appear. Since the player can always feel a sense of excitement, it is possible to give the player an even greater sense of anticipation and urgency. Therefore, with the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the first place, the effect images floating on the display surface 41a, such as flower petals, confetti, jellyfish, butterflies, etc., are intended to make the display surface 41a lively. There was no movement. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to perform an effect in which flower petals attach to the hold display icon and change the display mode of the hold display icon. You can make effective use of the petals for making.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a pattern in a pattern row in which a fourth type petal P4 among the plurality of types of petals P1 to P4 displayed on the pattern display device 41 changes from a fluctuating display state to a stopped state. , an effect is executed to restart the variable display of the symbol row. In conventional pachinko machines that do not have such a configuration, the petals do not affect the fluctuating display of the symbol rows, so if the fluctuating display of the symbol rows stops and the symbol rows no longer have the same combination of symbols. , it only gave players a sense of disappointment. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the fourth type petal P4 attaches to a symbol of a symbol row that is in a stopped state, it is possible to execute an effect that restarts the variable display of the symbol row. Because of this, it is possible to give a player who was once disappointed when the symbol rows no longer have the same combination of symbols feel surprised that the fluctuating display has resumed and give him a sense of expectation for another big hit. Therefore, with the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

《4-5》Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the processing executed in the main control device 60 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

In order to advance each game round, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes will be explained next. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power outage signal, but a description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
160 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step So0101, reading processing for the various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, it reads the states of various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and stores detection information (ball entry detection information). Thereafter, the process advances to step So0102.

In step So0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step So0103.

In step So0103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric role opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric role opening counter C4, and when each counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step So0104. Note that the value of the variable type counter CS is updated in the normal processing (FIG. 164) described later.

In step So0104, a ball entry process for the starting hole is executed in association with the ball entering the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34. Details of the ball entry process for the starting hole in step So0104 will be described later. After executing step So0104, proceed to step So0105.

In step So0105, a through ball entry process is executed when the ball enters the through gate 35. Details of the through ball entry process in step So0105 will be described later. After executing step So0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Starting ball entry processing>
Next, the ball-scoring process for the starting hole will be described. The ball-scoring process for the starting hole is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for the timer interrupt process (FIG. 160: So0104).

Figure 161 is a flowchart showing ball entry processing for the starting hole. In step So0201, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (starting ball entry) is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting hole 33. In step So0201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (So0201: YES), the process proceeds to step So0202, where a prize ball command is set to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Then, the process proceeds to step So0203.

In step So0203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 33. Then, proceed to step So0204.

In step So0204, the starting pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as first starting pending number RaN), which is a value stored in the pending number storage area of the first holding area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first starting reservation number RaN indicates the number of balls being reserved based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. Thereafter, the process advances to step So0209.

If it is determined in step So0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting hole 33 (So0201: NO), the process proceeds to step So0205, where it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second starting hole 34 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting hole 34.

In step So0205, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (So0205: YES), the process proceeds to step So0206, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. Thereafter, the process advances to step So0207. On the other hand, in step So0205, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (So0205: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

In step So0207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Thereafter, the process advances to step So0208.

In step So0208, the starting pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second starting pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the second holding area Rb, is read, and the second starting pending number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second starting hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on balls entering the second starting port 34. Thereafter, the process advances to step So0209.

In step So0209, it is determined whether the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step So0204 or step So0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step So0209, if the starting pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (So0209: NO), the entry process for the main starting hole is ended.

On the other hand, in step So0209, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit (So0209: YES), the process proceeds to step So0210, where 1 is added to the start pending number N of the corresponding holding area, and then the process proceeds to step So0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reservation number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reservation number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. Thereafter, the process advances to step So0212.

In step So0212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step So0103 (FIG. 160) are stored in the first free memory area of the corresponding reserved area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the reserved number to which 1 was added in step So0210. Specifically, when the first start reserved number RaN is set as the processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step So0103 are stored in the first free memory area of the first reserved area Ra, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first start reserved number RaN to which 1 was added in step So0210. Also, if the second start pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step So0103 are stored in the first free memory area of the second pending area Rb, that is, the memory area corresponding to the second start pending number RbN to which 1 was added in step So0210. After executing step So0212, proceed to step So0213.

In step So0213, a first determination process is executed. The first determination process is a process that executes a determination of the winning lottery result (lottery result), the type of jackpot, whether or not a reach has occurred, etc. based on the information (reserved information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 before the reserved information becomes the subject of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step So0213, proceed to step So0214.

In step So0214, a process for setting a reserved command is executed. Specifically, the result of the first determination process executed based on the information (reserved information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a reserved command.

The hold command is a command to have the sub-side control device confirm the occurrence of a ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) by the first judgment process based on the hold information acquired based on the ball entering, before the hold information becomes the subject of a winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal processing described later (Figure 164: step So0503).

In addition, when the audio emission control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the audio emission control device 90 holds the display in the first starting port holding area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change in accordance with the increase in the number of objects. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first starting opening holding area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holding symbols. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the audio emission control device 90 holds the display in the second starting port holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change in accordance with the increase in the number of objects. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second starting opening holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holding symbols.

After executing step So0214, the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 ends the ball entry process for this starting hole.

<First judgment process>
Next, the destination determination process will be explained. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 161: So0213) of the ball entry process for the starting port.

FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the preliminary determination process is based on the pending information, and determines whether the winning lottery is correct or not, determining the type of jackpot, determining whether or not a reach has occurred, etc., based on the pending information. This is a process that is executed before becoming a lottery target.

In step So0301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the memory area due to the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entry process for the starting hole (Fig. 161) is obtained. Then, the process proceeds to step So0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to this ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the result of the judgment of the prior judgment process executed due to the ball entry before this ball entry is read from the corresponding memory area, and the presence or absence of a guaranteed jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to this ball entry and the presence or absence of a win in the drop lottery are determined to determine the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to this ball entry is executed as a game round.

In step So0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round (So0302: YES), the process advances to step So0303, and the winning lottery is stored in the winning/failing table. The low probability mode validity table (FIG. 148(a)) stored in the area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step So0305, and as a result of referring to the low probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

On the other hand, in step So0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round (So0302: NO), the process advances to step So0304, and the win/fail table is stored. The high probability mode validity table (FIG. 148(b)) stored in the area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step So0305, and as a result of referring to the high probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step So0305, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot (So0305: YES), the process proceeds to step So0306 and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step So0307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, if the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, refer to the first starting port distribution table. , if the ball is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the second starting port distribution table is referred to. After executing step So0307, the process advances to step So0308.

In step So0308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that has been grasped this time corresponds to a variable probability jackpot. In step So0308, if it is determined that it corresponds to a probability variable jackpot (So0308: YES), the process proceeds to step So0309, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, in step So0308, if it is determined that the probability variable jackpot is not supported (So0308: NO), the process proceeds to step So0310, and normal jackpot information is stored in the previous judgment processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends.

In step So0305, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to a jackpot (So0305: NO), the process proceeds to step So0311, and the ball is stored in the memory area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. The stored value of the reach random number counter C3 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step So0312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step So0313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 that has been grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

In step So0313, if it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach (So0313: YES), the process proceeds to step So0314, and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, in step So0313, if it is determined that the ready-to-reach occurrence is not supported (So0313: NO), the first determination process is immediately terminated.

<Processing a through ball>
Next, the through ball scoring process will be described. The through ball scoring process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 160: So0105).

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the through ball entry process. In step So0401, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step So0401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (So0401: YES), the process proceeds to step So0402, and whether the number SN of accessory items held is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) or not Determine whether or not. Note that the number of held accessory objects SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that are held in order to perform the electric accessory release lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of accessory objects on hold is four. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (So0401: NO), the main through ball entering process is ended.

In step So0402, if it is determined that the number SN of accessory items on hold is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) (So0402: YES), the process proceeds to step So0403, and 1 is added to the number SN of accessory items on hold. Thereafter, the process advances to step So0404.

In step So0404, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step So0103 (FIG. 160) is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the electric accessory holding area 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the through ball entry process is completed.

On the other hand, in step So0402, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is not less than the upper limit (So0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than or equal to the upper limit, The through ball entry process is completed without storing the value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal processing is a processing that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state (hereinafter, also referred to as "power-on"). In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step So0501, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, etc. are executed. After that, the process advances to step So0502.

In step So0502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. Thereafter, the process advances to step So0503.

In step So0503, output data such as the start-up command set in step So0502, the timer interrupt processing, or the command set in the previously executed normal processing is sent to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 70. In addition, if commands related to performance such as a start-up command, a variable command, a type command, or a hold command are set, they are sent to the sound and light emission control device 90. After executing step So0503, proceed to step So0504.

In step So0504, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step So0505.

In step So0505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step So0506. In step So0506, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display section 37a, second symbol display section 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game time control process will be described later. After executing step So0506, the process advances to step So0507.

In step So0507, a game state transition process is executed to transition the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state transitions to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, proceed to step So0508.

In step So0508, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric accessory support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is to be in an open state. Details of the electric support support process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step So0509.

In step So0509, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step So0503). That is, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived. In step So0509, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (So0509: NO), in step So0510 and step So0511, until the execution timing of the next normal process. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step So0510, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step So0511, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So0509 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (So0509: YES), the process returns to step So0503 and each process from step So0503 to step So0508 is executed. Execute.

Note that since the execution time of each process from step So0503 to step So0508 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process will be explained. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 164: So0506).

FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the game time control process. In step So0601, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

In step So0601, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (So0601: YES), the present game round control process is ended without executing any of the processes after step So0602. That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, a game round is not started regardless of whether a ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (So0601: NO), the process proceeds to step So0602.

In step So0602, it is determined whether the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether either one of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the special figure variation display flag in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The flag during special symbol fluctuation display is turned ON when a fluctuation display is started for either the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, and is turned OFF when the fluctuation display ends.

In step So0602, if it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is not in variable display (So0602: NO), the process proceeds to step So0603.

In step So0603, a change start process is executed to start the change display in the special chart unit 37 and the change display in the pattern display device 41. The change start process will be described in detail later. After executing step So0603, this game play control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So0602 that the special chart unit 37 is displaying a variable image (So0602: YES), the process proceeds to step So0604.

In step So0604, a fluctuation end process is executed to end the fluctuation display in the special symbol unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41. Note that details of the fluctuation end processing will be described later. After executing step So0604, the present game round control process is ended.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 165: So0603) of the game time control process.

Figure 166 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step So0701, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN exceeds "0". If the total reserved number CRN is "0" or less, this means that the start reserved number is "0" for both the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. Therefore, if it is determined in step So0701 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" or less (So0701: NO), this fluctuation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So0701 that the total reserved number CRN exceeds "0" (So0701: YES), the process proceeds to step So0702.

In step So0702, a hold information shift process is executed to set the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation, and the process proceeds to step So0703. Details of the pending information shift process will be described later.

In step So0703, a winning determination process including a process when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is performed. Details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step So0703, the process advances to step So0704.

In step So0704, a variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is a process for setting a variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a jackpot or the occurrence of a reach. The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step So0704, the process proceeds to step So0705.

In step So0705, a variation command is set. The variation command includes whether the current game round is related to pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, or whether it is related to the pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. It includes information indicating whether the information is related to hold information, as well as information on whether reach occurs or not, and information on the variable time set in step So0706. After executing step So0705, the process advances to step So0706.

In step So0706, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and the result of the distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot, such as information on 16R probability-variable jackpot, information on 8R probability-variable jackpot, information on 16R regular jackpot, information on 8R regular jackpot, or information on the losing result of the winning lottery. It is.

The variation command and type command set in step So0705 and step So0706 are sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in step So0503 of normal processing (Figure 164). The sound and light emission control device 90 determines the content of the presentation for that game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the presentation is executed. After executing step So0706, proceed to step So0707.

In step So0707, the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round out of the first pattern display section 37a and the second pattern display section 37b is caused to start displaying a changing pattern. Specifically, if the second pattern display section flag in RAM 64 is not ON, the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first pattern display section 37a and a changing display is started, and if the second pattern display section flag is ON, the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second pattern display section 37b and a changing display is started. After executing step So0707, the process proceeds to step So0708.

In step So0708, the special figure variation display flag stored in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step So0708, this fluctuation start process ends.

<Holding information shift processing>
Next, the reserved information shift process will be described. The reserved information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 166: So0702).

FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing pending information shift processing. In step So0801, it is determined whether the holding area that is the processing target for executing the holding information shift process is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, the reservation information stored earliest among the reservation information stored in chronological order in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 147) (the reservation stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra) information) is the earliest stored reservation information (stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb) among the reservation information chronologically stored in the second reservation area Rb (FIG. 147). If it is stored in the reservation area before the reservation information (reservation information), it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the earliest among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb is the first among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb in chronological order. If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step So0801, the reservation information can be processed in the order in which it is stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

If it is determined in step So0801 that the reserved area to be processed is the first reserved area Ra (step So0801: YES), the reserved information shift process for the first reserved area is executed in steps So0802 to So0807. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So0801 that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (step So0801: NO), the reserved information shift process for the second reserved area is executed in steps So0808 to So0813.

In step So0802, the first start reserved number RaN in the first reserved area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step So0803, where the total reserved number CRN is decremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step So0804. In step So0804, the data stored in the first area of the first reserved area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step So0805.

In step So0805, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step So0805, the process advances to step So0806.

In step So0806, when the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second symbol display section flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the current variable display is the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. Thereafter, the process advances to step So0807.

In step So0807, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for the audio/light emission control device 90, which is the sub-control device, to recognize that the data of the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, which includes information that the reserved area that is the subject of the current data shift corresponds to the first reserved area Ra, i.e., corresponds to the first starting port 33, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the audio/light emission control device 90. After that, this reserved information shift process is terminated. The shift command set in step So0807 is sent to the audio/light emission control device 90 in step So0503 in the normal process (FIG. 164).

In step So0801, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb (So0801: NO), step Proceed to So0808.

In step So0808, the second start reservation number RbN of the second reservation area Rb is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step So0809. In step So0809, the total pending number CRN is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step So0810, in which the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process advances to step So0811.

In step So0811, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step So0811, the process advances to step So0812.

In step So0812, if the second symbol display section flag in the various flags storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, the state is maintained. Then, proceed to step So0813.

In step So0813, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, it corresponds to the second starting port 34. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, this pending information shift processing is ended.

The shift command set in step So0813 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step So0503 in the normal process (FIG. 164). Based on the received shift command, the audio light emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device for changing the display in the second starting opening holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holding pieces. Send to 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second starting opening holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holding symbols.

<Hit detection process>
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 166: So0703).

FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process. In step So0901, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step So0901 that the mode is high probability mode (So0901: YES), the process proceeds to step So0902, where a win/loss determination is made by referring to the win/loss table for high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/loss table for high probability mode shown in FIG. 148(b). Then, the process proceeds to step So0904.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So0901 that the mode is not the high probability mode (So0901: NO), the process proceeds to step So0903, and a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the low probability mode win/fail table shown in FIG. 148(a). Determine whether Thereafter, the process advances to step So0904.

In step So0904, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination (winning lottery) in step So0902 or step So0903 is a jackpot win. In step So0904, if the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot win (So0904: YES), the process proceeds to step So0905.

In step So0905, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step So0905 that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (So0905: NO), the process proceeds to step So0906, where an allocation determination is made by referring to the allocation table for the first starting hole (see FIG. 149(a)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of a 16R special jackpot, the numerical range of an 8R special jackpot, the numerical range of a 16R normal jackpot, or the numerical range of an 8R normal jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So0905 that the second symbol display section flag is ON (So0905: YES), the process proceeds to step So0907, where the allocation determination is made by referring to the allocation table for the second starting hole (see FIG. 149(b)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of a 16R special jackpot or the numerical range of an 8R normal jackpot. After executing the process of step So0906 or step So0907, the process proceeds to step So0908.

In step So0908, a flag (jackpot flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot allocated in step So0906 or step So0907 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R special jackpot, the 16R special jackpot flag is turned ON, if it is an 8R special jackpot, the 8R special jackpot flag is turned ON, if it is a 16R regular jackpot, the 16R regular jackpot flag is turned ON, and if it is an 8R regular jackpot, the 8R regular jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step So0908, proceed to step So0909.

In step So0909, processing for setting a stop result for a jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game round in which the jackpot will be won, it is set which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display. This is the process to do so. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63f (FIG. 146), the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step So0906 or step So0907 is determined. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step So0909, the hit determination process ends.

In step So0904, if the result of the winning lottery in step So0902 or step So0903 is not a jackpot win (So0904: NO), proceed to step So0910 and refer to the reach determination table to determine whether or not a reach will occur in that game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the occurrence of a reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (Figure 146). Then, proceed to step So0911.

In step So0911, if the result of the reach determination in step So0910 is that a reach occurs in the relevant game round (So0911: YES), the process advances to step So0912 and the reach occurrence flag is turned on. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step So0912, the process advances to step So0913.

On the other hand, in step So0911, if the result of the reach determination in step So0910 is that a reach will not occur in that game round (So0911: NO), the process proceeds to step So0913 without executing step So0912.

In step So0913, a process for setting a stop result for a loss is executed. Specifically, this process is for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b when the variable display ends in the current game round, which results in a loss. Specifically, by referencing the stop result table for a loss in the stop result table storage area 63f, address information for the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step So0913, the win determination process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be explained. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 166: So0704).

FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step So1001, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. After that, the process advances to step So1002.

In step So1002, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R definite variable jackpot flag, 8R probable variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If so, it is determined that the jackpot has been won (So1002: YES), and the process proceeds to step So1003.

In step So1003, a petal re-variation lottery process is executed. In this embodiment, two types of variation time are prepared as the variation time when a jackpot is won: a normal jackpot variation time and a jackpot variation time with re-variation. The "re-variation" here means the re-variation of the pattern sequence caused by the attachment of the fourth type petal P4, as explained using FIG. 159, and a jackpot variation time with re-variation is prepared as the variation time required for the game round when a jackpot is won in which this re-variation is executed. The petal re-variation lottery process is a process for determining by lottery whether or not to adopt the jackpot variation time with re-variation when a jackpot is won. Specifically, a value is obtained from a random number counter for lottery, and it is determined whether or not a value corresponding to the obtained random number counter value is present among the multiple values stored as "win" in the table data for lottery stored in ROM 63. If there is a value corresponding to the acquired random number value among the multiple values stored as "win", it is decided to adopt the jackpot variable time with re-variation, and if there is no value corresponding to the acquired random number value, it is decided not to adopt the jackpot variable time with re-variation. The random number counter for the petal trajectory lottery is provided in the various counter area 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The random number counter is updated at short intervals. After executing step So1003, proceed to step So1004.

In step So1004, it is determined whether or not to adopt the jackpot variable time with re-variation based on the result of the petal re-variation lottery process. In step So1004, if a winner is selected in the petal re-variation lottery process, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot variable time with re-variation is to be adopted (So1004: YES), the process proceeds to step So1005.

In step So1005, a petal re-fluctuation lottery winning command is set. The petal re-fluctuation lottery winning command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that the petal re-fluctuation lottery winning process has been won. The petal re-fluctuation lottery winning command set in step So1005 is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step So0503 in the normal process (FIG. 164). After executing step So1005, the process advances to step So1006.

In step So1006, with reference to the variable time table for jackpot with re-variation stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is obtained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step So1007, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the main variable time setting process ends.

On the other hand, in step So1004, if there is no winning in the petal re-fluctuation lottery process, that is, if it is determined that the variable time for jackpot with re-fluctuation is not to be adopted (So1004: NO), the process proceeds to step So1008.

In step So1008, the variable time table for normal big wins stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step So1006, where the obtained variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, this variable time setting process is terminated.

In step So1002, if it is determined that the winning lottery result for the current game round is not a jackpot (So1002: NO), the process proceeds to step So1009, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. do. Since this process (So1009) is executed when there is no jackpot winning in the winning lottery related to the current game round in step So1002, in Sx1009, the reach (so-called It is determined whether or not it is a game round in which a hit (missing reach) occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON, and if it is ON, it is determined that a reach has occurred (So1009: YES), and step So1010 is performed. Proceed to.

In step So1010, the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is changed from ON to OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step So1011.

In step So1011, the variable time table for reach generation stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step So1007 described above, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the main variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step So1009 that no reach will occur in the current game round (So1009: NO), the process proceeds to step So1012, where the non-reach variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referenced to obtain the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. The non-reach variable time table is a so-called miss variable time table. The process then proceeds to step So1007 described above, where the obtained variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter area 64f of RAM 64. The variable time setting process then ends.

<Variable end processing>
Next, the variation end process will be described. The variation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 165: So0604).

Figure 170 is a flowchart showing the variation end process. In step So1101, it is determined whether the variation time for the current game has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the pattern rows start to vary until all of the pattern rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step So1101, it is determined whether the value of the variation time information stored in the variation time counter area (various counter area 64f) of RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variation time information is set in the variation time setting process (Figure 169) described above. The value of this set variation time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started.

If it is determined in step So1101 that the variation time has not elapsed (So1101: NO), this variation end process is ended.

In step So1101, if it is determined that the variable time has elapsed (So1101: YES), the process advances to step So1102, and the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b corresponding to the current game round are selected. A process is performed to end the variation of the symbols in the symbol display section. Subsequently, in step So1103, the special figure variation displaying flag stored in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step So1103, the process advances to step So1104.

In step So1104, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot win. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R special jackpot flag, 8R special jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in RAM 64 is ON. In step So1104, if it is determined that none of the above flags are ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a jackpot win (So1104: NO), it proceeds to step So1105.

In step So1105, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step So1105 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (So1105: YES), the process proceeds to step So1106, and it is determined whether the value of the number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not. If it is determined in step So1106 that the value of the number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 (So1106: YES), the process proceeds to step So1107, and the value of the number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1. After executing step So1107, the process advances to step So1108. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1106 that the value of the number of games counter PNC is less than or equal to 0 (So1106: NO), the process proceeds to step So1108 without executing step So1107.

In step So1108, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step So1108 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (So1108: NO), the process proceeds to step So1109, where it is determined whether the value of the play count counter PNC exceeds 0.

If it is determined in step So1109 that the value of the play count counter PNC is not greater than 0 (step So1109: NO), the process proceeds to step So1110 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step So1110, this variable time ending process is terminated.

If it is determined that the high probability mode flag is ON in step So1108 (So1108: YES), or if it is determined that the value of the game number counter PNC is greater than 0 in step So1109 (step So1109: YES), , the present variable time end process ends without executing step So1110. Further, if it is determined in step So1105 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (So1105: NO), this variable time end process is ended without executing steps So106 to So1110.

On the other hand, in step So1104, if any of the 16R special jackpot flag, 8R special jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, or 8R normal jackpot flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for this game round is a jackpot (So1104: YES), the process proceeds to step So1111, where the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step So1111, this variable time end process is terminated.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 164: So0507) of the normal process.

FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the gaming state transition process. In step So1201, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the big prize opening opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step So1201 that the ending period flag is not ON (So1201: NO), the process proceeds to step So1202, where it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the opening period ends during the opening/closing execution mode and the large prize opening opening/closing processing period, during which the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is executed, begins, and is turned OFF when the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b ends.

In step So1202, if it is determined that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (So1202: NO), the process proceeds to step So1203, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step So1203 that the opening period flag is not ON (So1203: NO), the process proceeds to step So1204, and it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. In step So1204, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (So1204: YES), the process advances to step So1205. On the other hand, in step So1204, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (So1204: NO), the main gaming state transition process is ended.

In step So1205, the high probability mode flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process advances to step So1206. In step So1206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step So1207.

In step So1207, an opening/closing scenario setting process for setting an opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening/closing scenario defines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game, and in this embodiment, conditions for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from the closed state to the open state (hereinafter also referred to as "opening conditions"), This is a program in which conditions (hereinafter also referred to as "closing conditions") for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from an open state to a closed state are recorded. The opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63h of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing to start each round game in the opening/closing execution mode.
When the above-mentioned one item is satisfied, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

For example, the closing conditions are as follows.
- The elapsed time after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
- The number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening 36a after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit number.
When either one of the above two items is satisfied, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After executing step So1207, the process proceeds to step So1208 described above.

In step So1208, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as the opening time). In this embodiment, the same fixed opening time is set for each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (i.e., 6 seconds) is set in the third timer counter area T3, which determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in the various counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step So1208, proceed to step So1209.

In step So1209, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in step So0503 in the normal processing (Fig. 164). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. Based on the received opening command, the sound and light emission control device 90 determines the content of the presentation corresponding to the opening time and the large prize opening/closing processing period, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step So1209, the process proceeds to step So1210, where the opening period flag is set to ON. After that, this game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step So1203 that the opening period flag is ON (So1203: YES), proceed to step So1211.

In step So1211, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step So1211 that the opening period has ended (So1211: YES), the process proceeds to step So1212 and the opening period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step So1213.

In step So1213, a round display start process is executed to notify the type of the current opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays information on the round related to the above output. After executing step So1213, the process advances to step So1214.

In step So1214, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. In the following step So1215, an opening/closing process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 164: Step So0503) of the normal process. After executing step So1215, the main game state transition process is ended.

If it is determined in step So1202 that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (So1202: YES), the process proceeds to step So1216, where the special prize opening/closing process is executed. The special prize opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step So1216, the process proceeds to step So1217.

In step So1217, it is determined whether the large prize opening/closing process has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the large prize opening/closing process has ended based on whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b has been opened is "0". If it is determined in step So1217 that the large prize opening/closing process has ended (So1217: YES), the process proceeds to step So1218. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1217 that the large prize opening/closing process has not ended (So1217: NO), the game state transition process ends.

In step So1218, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step So1219.

In step So1219, round display termination processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step So1219, the process advances to step So1220.

In step So1220, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, the ending time of the same fixed length is set in each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. Note that the fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step So1220, the process advances to step So1221.

In step So1221, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step So0503 in the normal process (FIG. 164). The audio light emission control device 90 ends the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on receiving the ending command. After executing step So1221, the process advances to step So1222.

In step So1222, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step So1201, if it is determined that the ending period flag is ON (So1201: YES), the process advances to step So1223.

In step So1223, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which was set as the ending time in the ending time setting process (So1220), is "0". If it is determined in step So1220 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which was set as the ending time, is "0" (So1223: YES), proceed to step So1224.

In step So1224, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step So1225, and a transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game after the current ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step So1225, the process proceeds to step So1226 and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step So1226, the process advances to step So1227.

In step So1227, it is determined whether the total pending number CRN is "0". The case where the total reservation number CRN is "0" means that the number of startup reservations for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". In step So1227, if it is determined that the total pending number CRN is "0" (So1227: YES), the process advances to step So1228.

In step So1228, a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is used to make the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, recognize that no pending information is stored in the pending information storage area 64b at the time when the symbol variation (gaming round) ends. This is a command that includes information about. This set customer waiting command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step So1228 in the normal process (FIG. 164). After executing step So1228, the present game round control process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1227 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (So1227: NO), the game turn control process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in step So1223 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which is set as the ending time, is not "0" (So1223: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Big prize opening opening/closing process>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be explained. The big prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 171: So1216).

Figure 172 is a flowchart showing the large prize opening/closing process. In step So1301, it is determined whether the opening/closing door 36b is open or not. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the variable prize drive unit 36c. In step So1301, if it is determined that the opening/closing door 36b is not open (So1301: NO), the process proceeds to step So1302.

In step So1302, it is determined whether the opening condition for opening door 36b has been met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open opening door 36b. In step So1302, if it is determined that the opening condition for opening door 36b has been met (So1302: YES), the process proceeds to step So1303.

In step So1303, open the door 36b. Then, proceed to step So1304.

In step So1304, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The opening/closing door opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 164: Step So0503) of the normal processing. After executing step So1304, the big prize opening opening/closing process is ended.

In step So1302, if it is determined that the opening condition for the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (So1302: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended without executing steps So1303 and So1304.

If it is determined in step So1301 that the door 36b is open (So1301: YES), the process advances to step So1305.

In step So1305, it is determined whether the closing conditions for the opening and closing door 36b have been met. Specifically, the opening and closing scenario set by the opening and closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to close the opening and closing door 36b. In step So1305, if it is determined that the closing conditions for the opening and closing door 36b have been met (So1305: YES), the process proceeds to step So1306.

In step So1306, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. Thereafter, the process advances to step So1307.

In step So1307, a door closing command is set. The opening/closing door close command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b is closed. The opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 164: Step So0503) of the normal processing. After executing step So1307, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

If it is determined in step So1305 that the closing conditions for the opening and closing door 36b are not met (So1305: NO), the large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated without executing steps So1306 and So1307.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be explained. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 171: So1225).

FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step So1401, it is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to a variable probability jackpot is turned on in the jackpot flag. That is, it is determined whether the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON.

In step So1401, if it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON (So1401: YES), the process proceeds to step So1402, and the 16R probability variation jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is set to ON. Turn off the flag that is ON. After executing step So1402, the process advances to step So1403.

In step So1403, the high probability mode flag is turned on, and then the process proceeds to step So1404, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode. Thereafter, the process advances to step So1405.

In step So1405, a game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is set to 100. The value set in the number of games counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games played when the high frequency support mode is executed with a limited number of games played. Thereafter, the process advances to step So1406.

In step So1406, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. . Thereafter, the process advances to step So1411.

On the other hand, in step So1401, if it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag and the 8R probability variable jackpot flag in the RAM 64 are not ON (So1401: NO), the process proceeds to step So1407, and the 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step So1408.

In step So1408, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step So1409, and 100 is set in the game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step So1410.

In step So1410, a low probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the low probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. . Thereafter, the process advances to step So1411.

In step So1411, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is sent as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Set. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electricity support treatment>
Next, the electric support process will be described. The electric support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 164: So0508).

Figure 174 is a flowchart showing the electric support process. In step So1501, it is determined whether or not support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support in progress flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support in progress flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric device 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened, and is turned OFF when the electric device 34a is returned to the closed state. In step So1501, if it is determined that the support in progress flag is not ON (So1501: NO), the process proceeds to step So1502.

In step So1502, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned ON when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. If it is determined in step So1502 that the support winning flag is not ON (So1502: NO), the process advances to step So1503.

In step So1503, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In step So1503, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (So1503: NO), the present electronic role support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (So1503: YES), the process advances to step So1504.

In step So1504, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuating display of symbols in the ordinary symbol unit 38. In step So1504, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the variable display (So1504: YES), the process proceeds to step So1505, sets the out-of-line display, and then ends the main power support process. By setting the missing display, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the regular pattern unit 38 is ended with the missing display being stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (So1504: NO), the process advances to step So1506.

In step So1506, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0". In step So1506, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is "0" (So1506: NO), the process for electronic role support is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1506 that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0" (So1506: YES), the process advances to step So1507.

In step So1507, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step So1508, in which it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode in step So1507 (So1507: NO), and if it is the high-frequency support mode in step So1508 (So1508: YES), the process advances to step So1509 and a lottery for opening the electric accessories is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Further, at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, "750" (ie, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Thereafter, the process advances to step So1510.

In step So1510, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step So1509 is a support win. In step So1510, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessories opening lottery is a support win (So1510: YES), the process proceeds to step So1511, where the support win flag is turned on and set in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the electric support support process ends.

On the other hand, in step So1510, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not a support win (So1510: NO), the electric role support process is ended without executing the process of step So1511.

If it is determined in step So1507 that the mode is the open/close execution mode (So1507: YES), or if it is determined in step So1508 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (So1508: NO), the process proceeds to step So1512, where a lottery is held to open the electric role device. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role reserve area 64c is shifted, and if the value of the electric role device opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is between 0 and 190, the electric role device opening lottery is won. In addition, at the same time as the electric role device opening lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (i.e. 29.5 sec). Then, the process proceeds to step So1513.

In step So1513, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric role release lottery in step So1512 is a support win. If it is determined in step So1513 that there is no support win (So1513: NO), the process for the main electric role support ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1513 that there is a support win (So1513: YES), the process proceeds to step So1514, where the support win flag is turned ON and the second round counter area RC2 is set to "1", after which the process for the main electric role support ends.

In step So1502, if it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (So1502: YES), the process proceeds to step So1515, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. In step So1515, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (So1515: NO), since the symbol is being displayed in fluctuation in the general drawing unit 38, the main electric role support processing is performed as it is. end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1515 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (So1515: YES), the process advances to step So1516.

In step So1516, a winning display is set. As a result, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the normal pattern unit 38 is ended with the win display being stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process advances to step So1517, where the supporting flag is turned on and the support winning flag is turned off. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

If it is determined in step So1501 that the support flag is ON (So1501: YES), the process proceeds to step So1518, where an electric role opening/closing control process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 34a. After that, the electric role support process is terminated.

<Electricity switching control processing>
Next, the electric utility switching control process will be described. The electric utility switching control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the electric utility support process (FIG. 174: So1518).

FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the power opening/closing control process. In step So1601, it is determined whether the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive section 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (So1601: YES), the process advances to step So1602.

In step So1602, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the opening of the electric role 34a. In step So1602, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (So1602: NO), the main electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the duration of the opening of the electric role 34a has not ended, the main electric role opening/closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step So1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (So1602: YES), the process proceeds to step So1603, where a closing process is performed to control the electric role 34a to a closed state, and the second timer counter area T2 is set to "250" (i.e., 0.5 sec). In other words, if the second timer counter area T2, which serves as a means for measuring the duration of the open period of the electric role 34a, is "0", the electric role 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is now used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the closed period of the electric role 34a, and the second timer counter area T2 is set to "250". After executing step So1603, the process proceeds to step So1604.

In step So1604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step So1605, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". In step So1605, if it is determined that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (So1605: NO), the present electric role opening/closing control process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (So1605: YES), the process advances to step So1606 and the supporting flag is turned OFF. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

If it is determined in step So1601 that the electric role 34a is not open (So1601: NO), the process proceeds to step So1607, where it is determined whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the electric role 34a being closed. If it is determined in step So1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (So1607: NO), the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (So1607: YES), the process proceeds to step So1608, where an opening process is performed to control the electric role 34a to an open state. Then, the process proceeds to step So1609.

In step So1609, it is determined whether the device is in the opening and closing execution mode, and if it is determined that the device is not in the opening and closing execution mode (So1609: NO), the process proceeds to step So1610, where it is determined whether the device is in the high frequency support mode.

If it is determined in step So1610 that the high-frequency support mode is in effect (So1610: YES), the process proceeds to step So1611, where "800" (ie, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1609 that the opening/closing execution mode is selected (So1609: YES), or if it is determined that the high frequency support mode is not selected in step So1610 (So1610: NO), the process proceeds to step So1612, and the second Set "100" (ie, 0.2 sec) in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

<<4-6>> Various processes executed in the audio/light-emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio and light emission control device and the display control device will be described. First, the process executed in the audio and light emission control device 90 will be described, and then the process executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the audio and light emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 will be described.

Figure 176 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is executed repeatedly at a relatively short period (e.g., 2 msec). The process of each step executed in the timer interrupt process is explained below.

In step So1701, a command storage process is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing a received command in the audio/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The audio/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer to enable the storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are stored sequentially in the ring buffer and are read out sequentially in the order in which they were stored. After executing step So1701, proceed to step So1702.

In step So1702, pending command response processing is executed. In the pending command response processing, processing corresponding to the pending command among the commands stored in step So1701 is executed. Details of the pending command response processing will be described later. After executing step So1702, proceed to step So1703.

In step So1703, a game round performance setting process is executed. In the game round performance setting process, the performance to be executed in the game round from when the pattern change starts to when it stops is set. The game round performance setting process will be described in detail later. After executing step So1703, proceed to step So1704.

In step So1704, processing for the open/close execution mode presentation is executed. In the open/close execution mode presentation processing, processing related to the presentation during the opening period, the presentation during the large prize opening/closing processing period, and the presentation during the ending period is executed. After executing step So1704, proceed to step So1705.

In step So1705, second type petal effect processing is executed. In the second type petal presentation process, a process is performed to display the second type petal P2 (see FIGS. 155 and 156) on the pattern display device 41. Specifically, a production command is sent to the display control device 100 to instruct execution of a production in which the plurality of second type petals P2 move in a dancing manner from the upper side to the lower side. The production command also includes a command to set the display destination of the second type petal P2 to the upper layer L3. The display control device 100 that has received the production command causes the pattern display device 41 to display the second type petal P2 described above. In addition, instead of the configuration for transmitting the above-mentioned production command, a command for instructing the display control device 100 to play video (video) data in which a plurality of second type petals P2 move as if dancing from the upper side to the lower side is sent to the display control device 100. The above video data may be displayed on the symbol display device 41 by transmitting it. After executing step So1705, the process advances to step So1706.

In step So1706, a third type petal performance setting process is executed. In the third type petal performance setting process, the setting of the performance in which the third type petal P3 (see Figures 155 to 157) is displayed on the pattern display device 41 is performed. The details of the third type petal performance setting process will be described later. After executing step So1706, proceed to step So1707.

In step So1707, a pending display change setting process is executed. In the hold display change setting process, an effect for changing the display mode of the hold display icon is set. Details of the hold display change setting process will be described later. After executing step So1707, the process advances to step So1708.

In step So1708, background effect processing is executed. In the background effect processing, processing is performed to display a background moving image determined in accordance with a command indicating a gaming state received from the main side MPU 62 on the symbol display device 41. For example, perform processing to display a background video indicating that high-frequency support mode is continuing, a background video indicating that high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that high-probability mode is continuing. . Note that these background videos include images in which a plurality of first type petals P1 (see FIGS. 155 and 156) move as if dancing from the upper side to the lower side. After executing step So1708, the process advances to step So1709.

In step So1709, other processing is executed. The other processing is, for example, processing for displaying a demo image (video) on the pattern display device 41 when the player is not playing. After executing step So1709, the process proceeds to step So1710.

In step So1710, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission of the various lamps 47 is controlled based on the light emission data read out in each of the above-described production processes. After executing step So1710, the process advances to step So1711.

In step So1711, audio output control processing for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output of the speaker 46 is controlled based on the audio data read out in the BGM process and each production process described above. After executing step So1711, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Pending command handling process>
Next, pending command handling processing will be explained. The pending command corresponding process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 176: So1702).

FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. In step So1801, it is determined whether a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step So1801 that a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (So1801: YES), the process advances to step So1802.

In step So1802, an update process is performed when a ball is scored. In the update process when a ball is scored, a process is performed to enable the sound/light side MPU 92 to identify the number of pending information pieces acquired based on a ball scoring into the first starting hole 33, the number of pending information pieces acquired based on a ball scoring into the second starting hole 34, and the total number of these pending information pieces. Details of the update process when a ball is scored in step So1802 will be described later. In the following, the number of pending information pieces acquired based on a ball scoring into the first starting hole 33 will be referred to as the "first pending number", the number of pending information pieces acquired based on a ball scoring into the second starting hole 34 will be referred to as the "second pending number", and the total number of the first pending number and the second pending number will be referred to as the "total pending number". After executing step So1802, proceed to step So1803.

In step So1803, the hold display control process is executed. Specifically, a command for changing the display (such as the display of how many hold display icons are lined up) in the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 in correspondence with the first hold number and the second hold number identified in step So1802 is sent to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that receives the command changes the display in the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in correspondence with the first hold number and the second hold number. Specifically, the display control device 100 that receives the command specifies each display position for displaying the hold display icons H1 to H4 in the first start port hold area Ds1, and displays the hold display icons in the number corresponding to the first hold number at the display position. In addition, the display control device 100 specifies each display position for displaying the hold display icon in the second start port hold area Ds2, and displays the hold display icons in the number corresponding to the second hold number at the display positions. After executing step So1803, the hold command response process is terminated.

<Update process when the ball goes in>
Next, the update process when the ball goes in will be described. The update process when the ball goes in is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine for pending command processing (FIG. 177: So1802).

FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing update processing when a ball enters the ball. In step So1901, it is determined whether the pending command to be read this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. In step So1901, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (So1901: YES), the process advances to step So1902, and the Update processing of the first pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the optical side RAM 94 is executed. The first reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 in the sound-light side MPU 92. In the process of updating the first pending quantity counter area, the information in the first pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the pending command that is currently read. After executing step So1902, the process advances to step So1904.

In step So1901, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time was not sent based on a ball entering the first starting hole 33 (So1901: NO), that is, if it is determined that the pending command was sent based on a ball entering the second starting hole 34, proceed to step So1903 and execute an update process for the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94. The second pending number counter area is a counter area for identifying the number of pending information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting hole 34 in the sound-light side MPU 92. In the update process for the second pending number counter area, the information in the second pending number counter area is updated to the information on the number of pending information included in the command to be read this time. After executing step So1903, proceed to step So1904.

The reason why the processing in steps So1902 and So1903 is performed as described above will be explained. In this embodiment, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, if the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information related to the ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 stores the hold information. is stored and held, whereas the audio emission control device 90 recognizes that the number of pending information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending quantity counter area or the second pending quantity counter area is incremented each time a pending command is received in the audio emission control device 90, the main control device 60 actually stores the pending quantity. An inconvenience may occur that the number of pending information that has been displayed does not match the number of pending information that the audio emission control device 90 is aware of. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment described above, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of items on hold, and the audio emission control device 90 converts the command into a hold command every time it receives a hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the number of held items included is set in the first held item counter area or the second held item counter area, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

In step So1904, an update process is executed for the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The total reserved number counter area is a counter area for identifying in the sound/light side MPU 92 the sum of the number of reserved information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 and the number of reserved information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34. In this update process, the information in the total reserved number counter area is updated to the sum of the information on the number of reserved items measured in the first reserved number counter area and the information on the number of reserved items measured in the second reserved number counter area. After executing step So1904, proceed to step So1905.

In step So1905, a parameter setting process for the on-hold effect is executed. In the parameter setting process for the on-hold effect, various parameters necessary for changing the display mode of the on-hold display are set. The details of the parameter setting process for the on-hold effect are described later. After executing step So1905, the update process for the actual ball entry is terminated.

The hold effect memory area used in the hold effect parameter setting process of step So1905 will be described below. The parameters set by the hold effect parameter setting process are stored in the hold effect memory area 94d provided in the sound and light side RAM 94 provided in the sound and light emission control device 90.

Figure 179 is an explanatory diagram explaining the hold performance memory area 94d. The hold performance memory area 94d includes a first start port hold performance memory area and a second start port hold performance memory area. Figure 179(a) shows the first start port hold performance memory area, and Figure 179(b) shows the second start port hold performance memory area.

The first start port hold performance memory area is a memory area that stores various parameters required to change the display mode of the hold display icons H1 to H4 in the first start port hold area Ds1. The second start port hold performance memory area is a memory area that stores various parameters required to change the display mode of the hold display icons in the second start port hold area Ds2. Since the first start port hold performance memory area and the second start port hold performance memory area have the same configuration, the first start port hold performance memory area shown in FIG. 179(a) will be described, and the second start port hold performance memory area shown in FIG. 179(b) will not be described.

As shown in FIG. 179(a), the storage area for the first starting opening holding performance stores various parameters for each holding game time (n) for the first starting opening. The illustrated reserved game times (n=1 to 4) for the first starting opening correspond to the reserved display icons H1 to H4. That is, the reserved game times are executed in the order of the reserved game times of the first starting port (n=1) to the reserved game times of the first starting port (n=4).

As shown in the figure, the storage area for the first starting opening holding performance stores the display level upper limit value Lvm and the display level Lvr as various parameters for each holding game time (n) for the first starting opening.

The display level upper limit value Lvm is a parameter that specifies the upper limit value of how high the display level Lvr can be changed to when changing the display mode of the hold display icon. For example, a hold display icon with a display level upper limit value Lvm of 5 can have its display level Lvr changed up to 5. A hold display icon with a display level upper limit value Lvm of 3 can have its display level Lvr changed up to 3, but cannot have its display level Lvr changed to a level higher than 3, such as 4 or 5.

The display level Lvr is a parameter that indicates the level of the display mode of the current hold display icon, as explained using Figure 154.

The display level upper limit value Lvm and the display level Lvr are linked to various parameters such as the jackpot random number counter C1 for each reserved play, and the area in which they are stored shifts to the memory area for the next reserved play each time a play is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 179(a) and FIG. 179(b), the display level upper limit value Lvm and the display level Lvr parameters stored in the memory area for the reserved play of the first start port (n=4) shift to the memory area for the reserved play of the first start port (n=3) in the memory area for reserved performance of the first start port after one play is performed, and shift to the memory area for the reserved play of the first start port (n=2) in the memory area for reserved performance of the first start port after one play is performed.

In addition, the values of the display level upper limit Lvm and the display level Lvr are the values that are stored corresponding to the pending game session when a game ball enters the starting slot and there is a pending game session. It is. Therefore, as an example is shown in FIG. 179(b), for example, at a certain point in time, there are a reserved game time for the second starting port (n=3) and a reserved game time for the second starting port (n=4). If not, the values of the display level upper limit Lvm and the display level Lvr corresponding to the suspended game round are not stored. Next, a description will be given of the pending effect parameter setting process that is executed using the pending effect storage area.

<Parameter setting process for hold performance>
FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the hold effect parameter setting process. The hold performance parameter setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 178: So1905) of the update process when entering the ball.

In step So2001, display level upper limit setting processing is executed. This process is a process executed to set the display level upper limit value Lvm. Details of the display level upper limit setting process will be described later. After executing the display level upper limit setting process in step So2001, the process advances to step So2002.

In step So2002, the display level Lvr of the pending game round corresponding to the current game ball entry is set to 1. This hold effect parameter setting process is a process that is executed every time a game ball enters the starting hole.In step So2002, each time a game ball enters the start hole, the 1 is set in the display level Lvr of the storage area of the reserved game round corresponding to the entry in the first starting opening reserved performance storage area or the second starting opening reserved performance storage area. In this process, since the display level Lvr of the reserved game round corresponding to the ball entry is set to 1, the display mode is set to white corresponding to the display level Lvr of 1. In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the starting hole, the display level Lvr of the storage area of the reserved game round corresponding to the entering ball is set to 1, but for example, the display level upper limit value Lvm Within the following range, if the reach random number counter C3 acquired by the relevant entry is scheduled to perform a reach effect according to the reach determination table, the display level Lvr is set to 2, If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 obtained by the ball is a value corresponding to a jackpot win, the display level Lvr is set to a value of 2 or more. The display level Lvr may be determined based on the value. After executing step So2002, this suspension effect parameter setting process is ended.

<Display level upper limit setting process>
FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing display level upper limit setting processing. The display level upper limit setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 180: So2001) of the parameter setting process for pending performance.

In step So2101, the value of the upper limit setting counter Cm is acquired. The upper limit value setting counter Cm is used when the audio/light side MPU 92 determines the display level upper limit value Lvm. The upper limit value setting counter Cm is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 99 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. After executing step So2101, the process advances to step So2102.

In step So2102, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the reserved play round corresponding to the entry of the current game ball has won a jackpot in the winning lottery. Specifically, the determination is made based on information regarding the result of the first determination process included in the reserved command obtained by the sound/light side MPU 92 from the main side MPU 62 by the first determination process executed in response to the entry of the current game ball into the starting hole.

In step So2102, if it is determined that the pending game round corresponding to the current game ball entry has won a jackpot (So2102: YES), the process advances to step So2103.

In step So2103, the jackpot upper limit table is referenced. Specifically, the jackpot upper limit table is referenced to extract the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit setting counter Cm.

Figure 182 is an explanatory diagram showing an upper limit value table. Figure 182 (a) shows the upper limit value table for a jackpot.

The jackpot upper limit value table is table data in which each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit setting counter Cm and the value of the display level upper limit Lvm are recorded in association with each other. The sound and light side MPU 92 extracts the value of the display level upper limit Lvm corresponding to the obtained upper limit value setting counter Cm with reference to the jackpot upper limit table.

As shown in the figure, in the jackpot upper limit table, 80 values from 20 to 99 correspond to the display level upper limit Lvm=5 as the value of the upper limit setting counter Cm, and the values of the upper limit setting counter Cm The ten values 10 to 19 correspond to the display level upper limit Lvm=4, and the five values 5 to 9 correspond to the display level upper limit Lvm=3 as the values of the upper limit setting counter Cm, and the upper limit The four values 1 to 4 of the value setting counter Cm correspond to the display level upper limit Lvm=2, and the value of the upper limit setting counter Cm is 0. The value is set corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm=1. In other words, the configuration is such that the probability that the display level upper limit value Lvm becomes 5 is the highest in a pending game round in which a jackpot is won in the winning lottery.

FIG. 182(b) shows a reach upper limit value table. The reach upper limit table is an upper limit table used in step So2105, which will be described later. Like the jackpot upper limit table, the reach upper limit table is also table data in which each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit setting counter Cm and the value of the display level upper limit Lvm are recorded in association with each other. It is. In the pending game round in which reach occurs, the display level upper limit value Lvm is configured to have the highest probability of being 4, and the next highest probability to be 5 or 3.

FIG. 182(c) shows an upper limit value table for non-reach occurrence. The reach non-occurrence upper limit table is an upper limit table used in step So2106, which will be described later. In the reach non-occurrence upper limit table, as well as the jackpot upper limit table, each value of the upper limit setting counter Cm (0 to 99) and the value of the display level upper limit Lvm are recorded in association with each other. This is table data. In a pending game game in which no reach occurs, the display level upper limit value Lvm is configured to have the highest probability of being 1, and the next highest probability to be 2.

The explanation returns to FIG. 181. In step So2103, after referring to the jackpot upper limit value table, the process proceeds to step So2107.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So2102 that the reserved play corresponding to the current ball entry has not resulted in a jackpot (So2102: NO), the process proceeds to step So2104.

In step So2104, it is determined whether the pending game round corresponding to the current entry of the game ball corresponds to a game round that generates a reach. That is, it is determined whether or not the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the current pending game game corresponds to the occurrence of a reach. Specifically, based on the information regarding the judgment result of the first judgment process included in the hold command acquired by the sound-light side MPU 92 from the main side MPU 62 by the first judgment process executed in response to the ball entering the starting port this time. judge.

If it is determined in step So2104 that the reserved play turn corresponding to the current ball entry is a play turn that will generate a reach (So2104: YES), proceed to step So2105.

In step So2105, the reach upper limit table is referenced. More specifically, the reach upper limit table is referenced to extract the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the obtained upper limit setting counter Cm. Then, the process proceeds to step So2107.

On the other hand, in step So2104, if it is determined that the pending game round corresponding to the current game ball entry does not correspond to the game round that generates a reach (So2104: NO), the process advances to step So2106.

In step So2106, the non-reach upper limit table is referenced. More specifically, the non-reach upper limit table is referenced to extract the value of the display level upper limit Lvm corresponding to the obtained upper limit setting counter Cm. Then, the process proceeds to step So2107.

In step So2107, the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm extracted in either step So2103, step So2105, or step So2106 is set in the storage area for the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the current reserved play in the storage area for the first start port reserved performance or the storage area for the second start port reserved performance. After that, this display level upper limit value setting process is terminated.

<Game rendition setting process>
Next, the game run performance setting process will be explained. The game performance setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 176: So1703).

Figure 183 is a flowchart showing the game round presentation setting process. In step So2201, it is determined whether or not a change command and a type command have been received. If it is determined in step So2201 that at least one of the change command and the type command has not been received (So2201: NO), this game round presentation setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So2201 that a change command and a type command have been received (So2201: YES), the process proceeds to step So2202.

In step So2202, the command for variation received this time is read out, and information about the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a reach occurrence, and the variation time is read from the command. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the audio-optical side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process advances to step So2203.

In step So2203, a presentation pattern setting process is executed to set the presentation pattern to be executed during a game round when a jackpot occurs, when a reach occurs, etc. Details of the presentation pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step So2203, the process proceeds to step So2204.

In step So2204, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, or 8R normal jackpot, a symbol will be displayed on the active line L of the symbol display device 41. Information corresponding to a stopping result in which a combination of the same symbols is established is set as information on the current stopping symbols. Specifically, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability-variable jackpot or an 8R probability-variable jackpot, the same odd-numbered symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same A combination of even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the same combination of odd symbols and the same combination of even symbols, but instead, the former is selected more than the latter. A configuration may be adopted in which the selection rate is higher, or a configuration in which the latter has a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability-variable jackpot. Further, if the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a 16R normal jackpot or an 8R normal jackpot, the same even-numbered symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a losing result, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the content of the variation command. If it is determined that a reach has occurred, information corresponding to a stop result in which the same combination of symbols is not formed on the active line L and a reach pattern combination is formed on the active line L is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that a reach has not occurred, information corresponding to a stop result in which the same combination of symbols is not formed on the active line L and a reach pattern combination is not formed on the active line L is set as the information of the current stop pattern. After executing step So2204, proceed to step So2205.

In step So2205, a process is executed to set the variable display pattern for the current game round. In this process, information on the variable time for the current game round is identified from the content of the currently received variable command, and a variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of the variable time information and the information on the stopping symbols set in step So2204 is selected. When selecting a variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b (Figure 151) of the sound/light side ROM 93 is referenced. Then, proceed to step So2206.

In step So2206, information on the effect pattern, stop symbol, and variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the effect command. Thereafter, the process advances to step So2207, and the production command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the performance content corresponding to the received performance command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step So2207, the process advances to step So2208.

In step So2208, the update process at the start of the fluctuation is executed. In the update process at the start of the fluctuation, the first reserved number or the second reserved number is decreased by 1 at the start of the fluctuation. Details of the update process at the start of the fluctuation will be described later. After executing step So2208, proceed to step So2209.

In step So2209, the hold display control process is executed. The hold display control process is the same as the hold display control process executed in step So1803 of the hold command response process (FIG. 177). Specifically, a command for changing the display (such as the display of how many hold display icons are lined up) in the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 in correspondence with the first hold number and the second hold number identified in step So2208 is sent to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that receives the command changes the display in the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in correspondence with the first hold number and the second hold number. Specifically, the display control device 100 that receives the command specifies four display positions for displaying the hold display icons H1 to H4 in the first start port hold area Ds1, and displays the hold display icons in the number corresponding to the first hold number at the display positions. The display control device 100 also specifies four display positions for displaying the hold display icon in the second start port hold area Ds2, and displays the hold display icon in the display positions in a number corresponding to the second hold number. Furthermore, the hold display control process of step So2209 also displays the hold display icon at the top of the hold consumption area Dm. After executing step So2209, the game play presentation setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the production pattern setting process will be explained. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 183: So2203) of the game round effect setting process.

FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process. In step So2301, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the performance pattern random number acquisition process, the performance pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c (FIG. 151) of the sound and light side RAM 94. Thereafter, the process advances to step So2302.

In step So2302, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot win based on the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step So2202 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 183). . In step So2302, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot (So2302: YES), the process proceeds to step So2303.

In step So2303, it is determined whether or not a petal re-changing lottery winning command has been received. If it is determined in step So2303 that a petal re-changing lottery winning command has not been received (So2303: NO), the process proceeds to step So2304.

In step So2304, with reference to the normal jackpot performance pattern table stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 151) of the sound and light side ROM 93, the variable time read out in step So2202 (FIG. 183), A normal performance pattern for jackpot corresponding to the value of the random number RN for the current performance pattern is obtained. The performance pattern table storage area 93a of the sound and light side ROM 93 stores two performance pattern tables for storing performance patterns in the event of winning a jackpot: a normal performance pattern table for jackpots and a performance pattern table for jackpots with re-variations. Variety is available. In step So2304, a normal jackpot performance pattern table is referred to. The variation time read in step So2202 (FIG. 183) when executing step So2304 is the normal value obtained by executing step So1008 and step So1007 in the variation time setting process (FIG. 169) executed by the main MPU 62. This is the variable time for jackpot. Therefore, the performance pattern acquired in step So2304 corresponds to the normal jackpot variation time obtained by the main MPU 62. After executing step So2304, the process advances to step So2309.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So2303 that a petal re-variation lottery winning command has been received (So2303: YES), proceed to step So2305.

In step So2305, the fluctuation time read out in step So2202 (FIG. 183) with reference to the performance pattern table for jackpot with re-variation stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 151) of the sound and light side ROM 93. A jackpot performance pattern with re-variation corresponding to the value of the random number RN for the current performance pattern is obtained. The fluctuation time read in step So2202 (FIG. 183) when executing step So2306 is the recalculation time obtained by executing step So1006 and step So1007 in the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 169) executed by the main MPU 62. This is a variable time for jackpots that involves fluctuations. Therefore, the performance pattern acquired in step So2305 corresponds to the jackpot variation time with re-variation obtained by the main MPU 62. After executing step So2305, the process advances to step So2309. The jackpot performance pattern with re-fluctuation represents the jackpot performance with re-fluctuation shown in FIG. 159, and also includes the fourth type petal P4.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So2302 that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a jackpot win (So2302: NO), the process proceeds to step So2306, where it is determined whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur based on the information on the presence or absence of a reach that was stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 by step So2202 of the game round performance setting process (Figure 178). If it is determined in step So2306 that a reach will occur in the current game round (So2306: YES), the process proceeds to step So2307.

In step So2307, the system refers to the presentation pattern table for reach generation stored in the presentation pattern table storage area 93a (Fig. 151) of the sound/light side ROM 93 to obtain a presentation pattern for reach generation that corresponds to the variable time read out in step So2202 (Fig. 183) and the current value of the random number RN for the presentation pattern. The variable time read out in step So2202 (Fig. 183) when executing step So2307 is the variable time for reach generation obtained by executing steps So1011 and So1007 in the variable time setting process (Fig. 169) executed by the master MPU 62. Therefore, the presentation pattern obtained in step So2307 corresponds to the variable time for reach generation obtained by the master MPU 62. After executing step So2307, the system proceeds to step So2309.

If it is determined in step So2306 that no reach will occur in the current game round (So2306: NO), proceed to step So2308.

In step So2308, the variable time read out in step So2202 (FIG. 183) with reference to the effect pattern table for non-reach occurrence stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 151) of the sound and light side ROM 93, A performance pattern for non-reach occurrence corresponding to the value of the random number RN for the current performance pattern is acquired. The variation time read in step So2202 (FIG. 183) when executing step So2308 is the reach obtained by executing step So1012 and step So1007 in the variation time setting process (FIG. 169) executed by the main MPU 62. This is a variable time for non-occurrence. Therefore, the performance pattern acquired in step So2308 corresponds to the variable time for non-reach occurrence obtained by the main MPU 62. After executing step So2308, the process advances to step So2309.

In step So2309, the presentation pattern obtained in step So2304, step So2305, step So2307, or step So2308 is set as the presentation pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step So2309, proceed to step So2310.

In step So2310, a game remaining time setting process is executed. The game remaining time setting process is a process for setting the remaining time for the current game (referred to as the game remaining time). Specifically, a count value equivalent to the variable time read out in step So2202 (Fig. 183) is set in the timer counter area T30, which indicates the remaining game time. The timer counter area T30 is provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The count value set in the timer counter area T30 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, at 2 msec intervals. After executing step So2310, this presentation pattern setting process is terminated.

<Update process when fluctuation starts>
Next, the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game play performance setting process (FIG. 183: So2208).

FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step So2401, the command for variation received this time is related to the reservation information acquired based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33 in the current game round (hereinafter referred to as the first variation command). Or, it is determined whether the command relates to suspension information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 (hereinafter referred to as a second variation command). In step So2401, if it is determined that the fluctuation command received this time is the first fluctuation command (So2401: YES), the process advances to step So2402.

In step So2402, the first reserved number counter stored in the sound/light side RAM 94 is decremented by 1. Then, proceed to step So2403.

In step So2403, a process is executed to shift the data (display level upper limit value Lvm and display level Lvr) stored in the memory area for the first start port hold performance (see FIG. 179 (a)) stored in the sound/light side RAM 94. This shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the stored areas to the lower areas in order. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, the fourth area to the third area, and so on. After executing step So2403, proceed to step So2406.
nothing.

On the other hand, in step So2401, if it is determined that the fluctuation command received this time is not the first fluctuation command, that is, it is determined to be the second fluctuation command (So2401: NO), the process advances to step So2404, and the data is stored in the sound-light side RAM 94. The stored second pending quantity counter is decremented by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step So2405.

In step So2405, a process is executed to shift the data (display level upper limit Lvm and display level Lvr) stored in the memory area for the second start port hold performance (see FIG. 179 (b)) stored in the sound/light side RAM 94. This shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the stored area to the lower area side in order. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, the fourth area to the third area, and so on. After executing step So2405, proceed to step So2406.

In step So2406, the information in the total reserved number counter area of the sound/light side RAM 94 is updated so that the total reserved number stored in the total reserved number counter area is decremented by 1. After that, the update process at the start of the fluctuation is terminated.

<Third type petal effect setting process>
Next, the third type petal effect setting process will be described. The third type petal effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 176: So1706).

FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the third type petal effect setting process. In step So2501, a third type petal effect setting process for holding the first starting opening is executed. Details of the third type petal effect setting process for holding the first starting opening will be described later. After executing step So2501, the process advances to step So2502.

In step So2502, the third type petal effect setting process for the second start port reservation is executed. The details of the third type petal effect setting process for the second start port reservation will be described later. After executing step So2502, the third type petal effect setting process is terminated.

<Third type petal effect setting process for holding the first starting port>
Next, the third type petal effect setting process for holding the first starting opening will be explained. The third type petal effect setting process for holding the first starting opening is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 186: So2501) of the third type petal effect setting process.

Figure 187 is a flowchart showing the process for setting the third type of petal effect for the first start port hold. In step So2601, it is determined whether or not this is the first execution since the power switch 88 was switched from the OFF state to the ON state (power-on). In step So2601, if it is determined that this is the first execution since power-on (So2601: YES), the process proceeds to step So2603.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So2601 that this is not the first execution since power was turned on (So2601: NO), the process proceeds to step So2602, where it is determined whether or not 5 seconds or more have passed since the first start port reservation third type petal effect setting process was last executed. If it is determined in step So2602 that 5 seconds or more have not passed (So2602: NO), the first start port reservation third type petal effect setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step So2602 that 5 seconds or more have elapsed (So2602: YES), the process proceeds to step So2603. In other words, the processes in steps So2601 and So2602 will cause the processes in steps So2603 and after to be repeatedly executed at 5-second intervals from the time the power is turned on.

In step So2603, the value 1 is added to the variable J stored in the sound-light side RAM 94. It is assumed that the variable J is initially set to the value 0 when the power is turned on. After executing step So2603, the process advances to step So2604.

In step So2604, it is determined whether variable J is 1 or not. If it is determined in step So2604 that the variable J is 1 (So2604: YES), the process advances to step So2605.

In step So2605, special 1/hold 1 petal effect setting processing is executed. The special 1/hold 1 petal effect setting process is a special 1/hold 1 petal performance setting process that moves towards the first hold display icon H1 located on the far right side in the first starting opening hold area Ds1 displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. This is the effect processing for the 1st petal Pa (see FIG. 157). Details of the special 1/hold 1 petal effect setting process will be described later. After executing step So2605, the third type petal effect setting process for holding the first starting opening is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So2604 that the variable J is not 1 (So2604: NO), the process proceeds to step So2606, where it is determined whether the variable J is 2. If it is determined in step So2606 that the variable J is 2 (So2606: YES), the process proceeds to step So2607.

In step So2607, special 1/hold 2 petal effect setting processing is executed. The petal effect setting process for Special 1 and Hold 2 is performed when the Special 1 is directed to the second hold display icon H2 located second from the right side in the first starting opening hold area Ds1 displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. - This is the effect processing for the petal Pb for hold 2 (see FIG. 157). Details of the special 1/hold 2 petal effect setting process will be described later. After executing step So2607, the third type petal effect setting process for holding the first starting opening is ended.

If it is determined in step So2606 that the variable J is not 2 (So2606: NO), the process proceeds to step So2608, where it is determined whether the variable J is 3. If it is determined in step So2608 that the variable J is 3 (So2608: YES), the process proceeds to step So2609.

In step So2609, the petal effect setting process for Special 1 and Reserve 3 is executed. The petal effect setting process for Special 1 and Reserve 3 is an effect setting process for the petal Pc for Special 1 and Reserve 3 (see FIG. 157) that faces the third reserve display icon H3, which is the third icon from the right in the first start port reserve area Ds1 displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. Details of the petal effect setting process for Special 1 and Reserve 3 will be described later. After executing step So2609, the third type petal effect setting process for the first start port reserve is terminated.

If it is determined in step So2608 that the variable J is not 3, that is, if the variable J is 4 (So2608: NO), the process advances to step So2610.

In step So2610, the process for setting the petal effect for Special 1 and Reserve 4 is executed. The process for setting the petal effect for Special 1 and Reserve 4 is a process for setting the petal effect for Special 1 and Reserve 4 (see FIG. 157) that faces the fourth reserve display icon H4, which is the fourth icon from the right in the first start port reserve area Ds1 displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. Details of the process for setting the petal effect for Special 1 and Reserve 4 will be described later. After executing step So2610, proceed to step So2611.

In step So2611, variable J is set to 0. After executing step So2611, the third type petal effect setting process for holding the first starting opening is ended.

<Petal effect setting process for special 1 and reserved 1>
Next, a description will be given of the petal effect setting process for Special 1 and Reserve 1. The petal effect setting process for Special 1 and Reserve 1 is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 187: So2605) of the third type petal effect setting process for the first start port reserve.

Figure 188 is a flowchart showing the petal effect setting process for special 1 and reserved 1. In step So2701, a petal trajectory lottery process is executed. The petal trajectory lottery process is a process for determining by lottery which of the target reserved arrival trajectory, the first target non-reserved trajectory, and the second target non-reserved trajectory will be used as the trajectory of the petal Pa for special 1 and reserved 1 to be displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. Specifically, the above determination is made by obtaining a value from a random number counter for the petal trajectory lottery and comparing this value with a petal trajectory lottery table stored in the sound/light side ROM 93. The random number counter for the petal trajectory lottery is provided in the various counter area 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The random number counter is updated at short intervals.

FIG. 189 is an explanatory diagram showing a petal trajectory lottery table. As shown in Figure 189, among the values of the random number counter for petal trajectory lottery of "0 to 1199", "0 to 399" correspond to the target pending trajectory, and "400 to 799" correspond to the first goal. It corresponds to the unreserved orbit, and "800 to 1199" corresponds to the second target unreserved orbit.

In the petal trajectory lottery process, if the value of the acquired random number counter falls within the range of "0 to 399" that is associated with the "target pending trajectory" in the petal trajectory lottery table, the target pending trajectory is selected. Decided to adopt it. If the value of the obtained random number counter falls within the range of "400 to 799" associated with the "first target non-reserved trajectory" in the petal trajectory lottery table, the first target non-reserved trajectory is adopted. decide. If the value of the acquired random number counter falls within the range of "800 to 1199" associated with the "second target non-reserved trajectory" in the petal trajectory lottery table, if the second target non-reserved trajectory is adopted. decide.

In this embodiment, the allocation ratio of the target reserved arrival trajectory, the first target non-reserved trajectory, and the second target non-reserved trajectory in the petal trajectory lottery table is 1:1:1, but this does not have to be limited to this, and the ratio allocated to the target reserved arrival trajectory may be greater or smaller than the ratio allocated to the first target non-reserved trajectory and the second target non-reserved trajectory.

Return to Figure 188. After executing the petal trajectory lottery process in step So2701, proceed to step So2702.

In step So2702, processing is performed to display on the pattern display device 41 petals Pa for special 1 and reservation 1 that move along the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process. Specifically, if the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the target retention trajectory, the display control device 100 issues a command to display the special 1/retention 1 petal Pa that moves along the target retention trajectory. Send to. The command also includes setting the display destination of the special 1/hold 1 petal Pa to the upper layer L3. The display control device 100 that has received the command displays on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 the special 1/hold 1 petal Pa that moves along the target hold arrival trajectory.

If the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the first target non-reservation trajectory, a command to display the special 1/retention 1 petal Pa that moves along the first target non-reservation trajectory is sent to the display control device 100. Send. The command also includes setting the display destination of the special 1/hold 1 petal Pa to the upper layer L3. The display control device 100 that received the command causes the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 to display the special 1/reservation 1 petal Pa that moves in the first target out-of-reservation orbit.

If the result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the second target outer reserved trajectory, a command to display petals Pa for special 1 and reserved 1 moving along the second target outer reserved trajectory is sent to the display control device 100. The command also includes an indication that the display destination of petals Pa for special 1 and reserved 1 is to be the upper layer L3. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 displays petals Pa for special 1 and reserved 1 moving along the second target outer reserved trajectory on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. After executing step So2702, proceed to step So2703.

In step So2703, it is determined whether the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process executed in step So2701 is the target pending trajectory. In step So2703, if it is determined that the lottery result is the target pending arrival trajectory (step So2703: YES), the process proceeds to step So2704, and the trajectory of the petal Pa for special 1 and pending 1 is determined to be the target pending arrival trajectory. 1 is set in the flag F11 indicating whether or not. After executing step So2704, the process advances to step So2705.

In step So2705, the special 1/reserved 1 arrival time setting process is executed. The special 1/reserved 1 arrival time setting process is a process for setting the time length (hereinafter also referred to as the arrival time) required for the special 1/reserved 1 petal Pa to reach the first reserved display icon H1, which is the destination. Specifically, a count value equivalent to 10 seconds is set in the timer counter area T11, which determines the arrival time. The timer counter area T11 is provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The count value set in the timer counter area T11 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, at 2 msec intervals. After executing step So2705, the special 1/reserved 1 petal performance setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So2703 that the lottery result is not the target reserved reaching trajectory (step So2703: NO), the process proceeds to step So2706, and flag F11, which indicates whether the trajectory of petal Pa for special 1 and reserved 1 is the target reserved reaching trajectory, is set to 0. After executing step So2706, the petal performance setting process for special 1 and reserved 1 is terminated.

<Petal effect setting process for special 1 and reserved 2>
Next, a description will be given of the petal effect setting process for special 1 and reserved 2. The petal effect setting process for special 1 and reserved 2 is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 187: So2607) of the third type petal effect setting process for the first start port reserved.

Figure 190 is a flowchart showing the petal effect setting process for special 1 and reserved 2. In step So2801, a petal trajectory lottery process is executed. The petal trajectory lottery process is a process for determining by lottery which of the target reserved arrival trajectory, the first target reserved trajectory, and the second target reserved trajectory will be used as the trajectory of the petal Pb for special 1 and reserved 2 to be displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. Specifically, as in step So2701 of the petal effect setting process for special 1 and reserved 1 (Figure 188), a value is obtained from the random number counter for the petal trajectory lottery, and the above determination is made by comparing this value with the petal trajectory lottery table stored in the sound/light side ROM 93. After executing step So2801, proceed to step So2802.

In step So2802, processing is performed to display on the pattern display device 41 petals Pb for special 1 and reservation 2 that move along the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process. Specifically, if the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the target retention trajectory, the display control device 100 issues a command to display the special 1/retention 2 petals Pb that move along the target retention trajectory. Send to. The command also includes setting the display destination of the special 1/hold 2 petals Pb to the upper layer L3. When the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the first target non-reservation trajectory, a command to display the special 1/retention 2 petal Pb that moves along the first target non-reservation trajectory is sent to the display control device 100. Send. The command also includes setting the display destination of the special 1/hold 2 petals Pb to the upper layer L3. When the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the second target non-reservation trajectory, a command to display the special 1/retention 2 petal Pb that moves along the second target non-reservation trajectory is sent to the display control device 100. Send. The command also includes setting the display destination of the special 1/hold 2 petals Pb to the upper layer L3. After executing step So2802, the process advances to step So2803.

In step So2803, it is determined whether the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process executed in step So2801 is the target reserved arrival trajectory. In step So2803, if it is determined that the lottery result is the target reserved arrival trajectory (step So2803: YES), the process proceeds to step So2804, and flag F12, which indicates whether the trajectory of petal Pb for special 1 and reserved 2 is the target reserved arrival trajectory, is set to 1. After executing step So2804, the process proceeds to step So2805.

In step So2805, the special 1 and reserved 2 arrival time setting process is executed. The special 1 and reserved 2 arrival time setting process is a process for setting the time length (hereinafter also referred to as the arrival time) required for the special 1 and reserved 2 petal Pb to reach the second reserved display icon H2, which is the destination. Specifically, a count value equivalent to 10 seconds is set in the timer counter area T12, which determines the arrival time. The timer counter area T12 is provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The count value set in the timer counter area T12 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, at a 2 msec cycle. After executing step So2805, the special 1 and reserved 2 petal performance setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step So2803, if it is determined that the lottery result is not the target retention attainment trajectory (step So2803: NO), the process proceeds to step So2806, and the trajectory of the special 1/retention 2 petal Pb is the target retention attainment trajectory. A flag F12 indicating whether or not is set to 0. After executing step So2806, the petal effect setting process for main special 1 and reservation 2 is ended.

<Special 1/Hold 3 petal effect setting process>
Next, the special 1/hold 3 petal effect setting process will be explained. The special 1/hold 3 petal effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 187: So2609) of the 3rd type petal effect setting process for 1st start opening hold.

FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the special 1/hold 3 petal effect setting process. In step So2901, a petal trajectory lottery process is executed. In the petal trajectory lottery process, as the trajectory of the special 1/retention 3 petal Pc displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, one of the target reservation reaching trajectory, the first target non-retention trajectory, and the second target non-retention trajectory is selected. This is a process of deciding which one to adopt by lottery. Specifically, similarly to step So2701 of the special 1/hold 1 petal effect setting process (FIG. 188), a value is obtained from the random number counter for the petal trajectory lottery, and this value is stored in the sound and light side ROM 93. The above determination is made by comparing it with the petal trajectory lottery table. After executing step So2901, the process advances to step So2902.

In step So2902, processing is performed to display on the pattern display device 41 petals Pc for special 1 and reservation 3 that move along the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process. Specifically, if the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the target retention trajectory, the display control device 100 issues a command to display the special 1/retention 3 petals Pc that move along the target retention trajectory. Send to. The command also includes setting the display destination of the special 1/hold 3 petals Pc to the upper layer L3. When the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the first target non-reservation trajectory, a command to display the special 1/retention 3 petal Pc that moves along the first target non-reservation trajectory is sent to the display control device 100. Send. The command also includes setting the display destination of the special 1/hold 3 petals Pc to the upper layer L3. When the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the second target non-reservation trajectory, a command to display the special 1/retention 3 petal Pc that moves along the second target non-reservation trajectory is sent to the display control device 100. Send. The command also includes setting the display destination of the special 1/hold 3 petals Pc to the upper layer L3. After executing step So2802, the process advances to step So2803.

In step So2903, it is determined whether the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process executed in step So2901 is the target pending trajectory. In step So2903, if it is determined that the lottery result is the target pending arrival trajectory (step So2903: YES), the process proceeds to step So2904, and the trajectory of the petal Pc for special 1 and pending 3 is determined to be the target pending arrival trajectory. 1 is set in the flag F13 indicating whether or not. After executing step So2904, the process advances to step So2905.

In step So2905, the required arrival time setting process for Special 1/Hold 3 is executed. The process for setting the time required for special 1/hold 3 to reach the third hold display icon H3 (hereinafter also referred to as the required arrival time) for the special 1/hold 3 petal Pc to reach the destination, the third hold display icon H3. ). Specifically, a count value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the timer counter area T13 that determines the time required to reach the destination. Note that the timer counter area T13 is provided in various counter areas 94b of the audio/light side RAM 94. The count value set in the timer counter area T13 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. After executing step So2905, the petal effect setting process for main special 1 and reservation 3 is ended.

On the other hand, in step So2903, if it is determined that the lottery result is not the target retention attainment trajectory (step So2903: NO), the process proceeds to step So2906, and the trajectory of the special 1/retention 3 petal Pc is the target retention attainment trajectory. A flag F13 indicating whether or not is set to 0. After executing step So2906, the petal effect setting process for main special 1 and reservation 3 is ended.

<Petal effect setting process for special 1 and reserved 4>
Next, the petal effect setting process for Special 1 and Reserve 4 will be described. The petal effect setting process for Special 1 and Reserve 4 is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 187: So2611) of the third type petal effect setting process for the first start port reserve.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the special 1/hold 4 petal effect setting process. In step So3001, a petal trajectory lottery process is executed. In the petal trajectory lottery process, the trajectory of the petal Pd for special 1/retention 4 displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 is selected from among the target reservation reaching trajectory, the first target non-retention trajectory, and the second target non-retention trajectory. This is a process of deciding which one to adopt by lottery. Specifically, similarly to step So2701 of the special 1/hold 1 petal effect setting process (FIG. 188), a value is obtained from the random number counter for the petal trajectory lottery, and this value is stored in the sound and light side ROM 93. The above determination is made by comparing it with the petal trajectory lottery table. After executing step So3001, the process advances to step So3002.

In step So3002, processing is performed to display on the pattern display device 41 petals Pd for special 1 and reservation 4 that move along the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process. Specifically, if the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the target retention trajectory, the display control device 100 issues a command to display the special 1/retention 4 petals Pd that move along the target retention trajectory. Send to. The command also includes setting the display destination of the special 1/reservation 4 petals Pd to the upper layer L3. When the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the first target non-reservation trajectory, a command to display the special 1/retention 4 petal Pd that moves along the first target non-reservation trajectory is sent to the display control device 100. Send. The command also includes setting the display destination of the special 1/reservation 4 petals Pd to the upper layer L3. If the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is the second target non-reservation trajectory, a command to display the special 1/retention 4 petal Pd that moves along the second target non-reservation trajectory is sent to the display control device 100. Send. The command also includes setting the display destination of the special 1/reservation 4 petals Pd to the upper layer L3. After executing step So3002, the process advances to step So3003.

In step So3003, it is determined whether the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process executed in step So3001 is the target pending trajectory. In step So3003, if it is determined that the lottery result is the target pending arrival trajectory (step So3003: YES), the process proceeds to step So3004, and the trajectory of the petal Pd for special 1 and pending 4 is the target pending arrival trajectory. 1 is set in the flag F14 indicating whether or not. After executing step So3004, the process advances to step So3005.

In step So3005, the special 1 and reserved 4 arrival time setting process is executed. The special 1 and reserved 4 arrival time setting process is a process for setting the time length (hereinafter also referred to as the arrival time) required for the special 1 and reserved 4 petal Pd to reach the destination, the fourth reserved display icon H4. Specifically, a count value equivalent to 10 seconds is set in the timer counter area T14 that determines the arrival time. The timer counter area T14 is provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The count value set in the timer counter area T14 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, at 2 msec intervals. After executing step So3005, the special 1 and reserved 4 petal performance setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So3003 that the lottery result is not the target reserved reaching trajectory (step So3003: NO), the process proceeds to step So3006, and flag F14, which indicates whether the trajectory of petal Pd for special 1 and reserved 4 is the target reserved reaching trajectory, is set to 0. After executing step So3006, the petal performance setting process for special 1 and reserved 4 is terminated.

<Third type petal effect setting process for second start port hold>
Next, the third type petal effect setting process for the second start port reservation will be described. The third type petal effect setting process for the second start port reservation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the third type petal effect setting process (FIG. 186: So2502).

Figure 193 is a flowchart showing the process for setting the third type of petal effect for the second start port hold. In step So3101, it is determined whether or not this is the first execution since the power switch 88 was switched from the OFF state to the ON state (power-on). In step So3101, if it is determined that this is the first execution since power-on (So3101: YES), the process proceeds to step So3103.

On the other hand, in step So3101, if it is determined that it is not the first execution time since the power was turned on (So3101: NO), the process proceeds to step So3102, and the third type petal effect setting process for holding the second starting opening was executed last time. It is determined whether 5 seconds or more have passed since the In step So3102, if it is determined that 5 seconds or more have not elapsed (So3102: NO), the third type petal effect setting process for holding the second starting opening is ended.

If it is determined in step So3102 that 5 seconds or more have elapsed (So3102: YES), the process advances to step So3103. That is, through the processing of steps So3101 and So3102, the processing after step So3103 is repeatedly executed at 5 second intervals from the time the power is turned on.

In step So3103, the variable K stored in the sound/light side RAM 94 is incremented by 1. Note that variable K is initially set to 0 when the power is turned on. After executing step So3103, proceed to step So3104.

In step So3104, it is determined whether variable K is 1 or not. If it is determined in step So3104 that the variable K is 1 (So3104: YES), the process advances to step So3105.

In step So3105, a petal effect setting process for special 2 and reserve 1 is executed. The petal effect setting process for special 2 and reserve 1 is an effect setting process for the petals for special 2 and reserve 1 that face the first reserve display icon located at the leftmost position in the second start port reserve area Ds2 displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. A detailed explanation using a flowchart will be omitted, but the petal effect setting process for special 2 and reserve 1 is a process in which the petal effect setting process for special 1 and reserve 1 in FIG. 188 has been reinterpreted for special 2 (for the second start port). That is, in the special 1/reserved 1 petal effect setting process, the special 2/reserved 1 petals that move along a trajectory according to the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process are displayed, and if the lottery result determines that the target reserved arrival trajectory is to be adopted, the flag F11 is set to a value of 1 and the special 1/reserved 1 arrival time setting process is executed, whereas in the special 2/reserved 1 petal effect setting process, the special 2/reserved 1 petals that move along a trajectory according to the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process are displayed, and if the lottery result determines that the target reserved arrival trajectory is to be adopted, the flag F21 is set to a value of 1 and the special 2/reserved 1 arrival time setting process is executed. After executing step So3105, the third type petal effect setting process for the second start port reservation is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So3104 that the variable K is not 1 (So3104: NO), the process proceeds to step So3106, and it is determined whether the variable K is 2 or not. If it is determined in step So3106 that the variable K is 2 (So3106: YES), the process advances to step So3107.

In step So3107, special 2/hold 2 petal effect setting processing is executed. The special 2/hold 2 petal effect setting process is a special 2/hold 2 petal effect setting process that moves the special 2/hold 2 towards the second hold display icon located second from the left in the second start opening hold area Ds2 displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. This is the effect processing for the petals for hold 2. Although a detailed explanation using a flowchart will be omitted, the petal effect setting process for special 2 and hold 2 is the same as the petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 2 in FIG. 190 as for special 2 (for the second starting gate) The content is as follows. That is, in the special 2/retention 2 petal effect setting process, the special 2/retention 2 petals are displayed that move along a trajectory according to the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process, and the lottery result is set to match the target retention trajectory. If it is decided to adopt the system, the value 1 is set in the flag F22, and the required time setting process for special 2/hold 2 is executed. After executing step So3107, the third type petal effect setting process for holding the second starting opening is ended.

If it is determined in step So3106 that the variable K is not 2 (So3106: NO), the process proceeds to step So3108, and it is determined whether the variable K is 3 or not. If it is determined in step So3108 that the variable K is 3 (So3108: YES), the process advances to step So3109.

In step So3109, the special 2 and reserved 3 petal effect setting process is executed. The special 2 and reserved 3 petal effect setting process is an effect process for the special 2 and reserved 3 petal Pc that faces the third reserved display icon located third from the left in the second start port reserved area Ds2 displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. Although a detailed explanation using a flowchart is omitted, the special 2 and reserved 3 petal effect setting process is a content obtained by reinterpreting the special 1 and reserved 3 petal effect setting process in FIG. 191 for special 2 (for the second start port). That is, in the special 2 and reserved 3 petal effect setting process, the special 2 and reserved 3 petals that move along a trajectory according to the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process are displayed, and if the lottery result determines that the target reserved arrival trajectory is adopted, the flag F23 is set to value 1, and the special 2 and reserved 3 arrival required time setting process is executed. After executing step So3109, the process for setting the third type of petal effect for the second start port reservation is terminated.

If it is determined in step So3108 that the variable K is not 3, i.e., if the variable K is 4 (So3108: NO), proceed to step So3110.

In step So3110, the special 2 and reserved 4 petal effect setting process is executed. The special 2 and reserved 4 petal effect setting process is an effect process for the special 2 and reserved 4 petal that faces the fourth reserved display icon located fourth from the left in the second start port reserved area Ds2 displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. Although a detailed explanation using a flowchart is omitted, the special 2 and reserved 4 petal effect setting process is a content obtained by reinterpreting the special 1 and reserved 4 petal effect setting process in FIG. 192 for special 2 (for the second start port). That is, in the special 2 and reserved 4 petal effect setting process, the special 2 and reserved 4 petal that moves along a trajectory according to the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is displayed, and if the lottery result determines that the target reserved arrival trajectory is adopted, the flag F24 is set to value 1, and the special 2 and reserved 4 arrival required time setting process is executed. After executing step So3110, proceed to step So3111.

In step So3111, variable K is set to 0. After executing step So3111, the third type petal effect setting process for holding the second starting opening is ended.

<Pending display change setting process>
Next, the hold display change setting process will be explained. The hold display change setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 176: So1707).

FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the hold display change setting process. In step So3201, a first starting gate hold display change setting process is executed. Details of the first starting gate hold display change setting process will be described later. After executing step So3201, the process advances to step So3202.

In step So3202, the second start port hold display change setting process is executed. Details of the second start port hold display change setting process will be described later. After executing step So3202, this hold display change setting process is terminated.

<First start port hold display change setting process>
Next, the first start port hold display change setting process will be described. The first start port hold display change setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the hold display change setting process (FIG. 194: So3201).

Figure 195 is a flowchart showing the first start port hold display change setting process. In step So3301, the variable x stored in the sound/light side RAM 94 is set to 1. After executing step So3301, proceed to step So3302.

In step So3302, it is determined whether the flag F1x corresponding to the value of the variable x is 1. The flag F1x is a flag set by the third type petal effect setting process for the first starting opening hold in FIG. 187, and when the variable x is 1, the special 1/hold 1 petal effect setting process (see FIG. ), and if the variable x is 2, it corresponds to the flag F12 set by the special 1/hold 2 petal effect setting process (Fig. 190), and the variable x is 3. In this case, it corresponds to the flag F13 set by the special 1/hold 3 petal effect setting process (Fig. 191), and if the variable x is 4, the special 1/hold 4 petal effect setting process (Fig. 192) This corresponds to flag F14 set by. In step So3302, it is determined whether the flag F1x corresponding to the value of the variable x has a value of 1, which indicates that the trajectory of the petal is the target pending trajectory.

In step So3302, if it is determined that the flag F1x corresponding to the value of the variable x is 1, that is, it is determined that the trajectory of the petal for special 1/retention x corresponding to the value of the variable x is the target retention reaching trajectory. If so (step So3302: YES), the process advances to step So3303.

In step So3303, it is determined whether the required time for special 1/hold x corresponding to the value of variable x has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter area T1x corresponding to the value of the variable x set by the third type petal effect setting process for holding the first starting opening in FIG. 187 is "0". do. This determines whether the petal for special 1/hold x corresponding to the value of variable x has reached the display position for displaying the target hold display icon (hereinafter also simply referred to as the display position of the hold display icon). It is determined whether When the variable x is 1, by determining whether the value of the timer counter area T11 is "0", it is determined whether the special 1/hold 1 petal Pa has reached the display position of the hold display icon H1. It is determined whether or not. When the variable x is 2, it is determined whether the special 1/hold 2 petal Pb has reached the display position of the hold display icon H2 by determining whether the value of the timer counter area T12 is "0" or not. It is determined whether or not. When the variable x is 3, it is determined whether the special 1/hold 3 petal Pc has reached the display position of the hold display icon H3 by determining whether the value of the timer counter area T13 is "0" or not. It is determined whether or not. When the variable x is 4, it is determined whether the special 1/hold 4 petal Pd has reached the display position of the hold display icon H4 by determining whether the value of the timer counter area T14 is "0" or not. It is determined whether or not.

If it is determined in step So3303 that the time required for arrival for Special 1/Reserved x corresponding to the value of variable x has elapsed (step So3303: YES), proceed to step So3304.

In step So3304, it is determined whether or not a reserved display icon H1 to H4 exists at the display position reached by the special 1/reserved x petal (step So3304). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a reserved display icon exists from the first reserved number.

In step So3304, if it is determined that the hold display icon exists at the display position where the petal for special 1/hold x has reached (step So3304: YES), the process proceeds to step So3305.

In step So3305, a predetermined time (the predetermined time described earlier) from the current time (when it is determined in step So3304 that the pending display icon exists at the display position where the petal for special 1/reserved x has arrived), For example, during a period (hereinafter referred to as a predetermined period after reaching the petal) until 2 seconds have elapsed, it is determined whether or not a shift regarding the hold display icon has not occurred. When the shift of the pending display icon occurs, it is when the current game round ends, so in step So3305, it is determined whether the current game round does not end within a predetermined period after reaching the petal. . Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter area T30 indicating the remaining play time set in step So2310 of the production pattern setting process (FIG. 184) exceeds the predetermined time (2 seconds). Accordingly, it is determined whether the current game round does not end within a predetermined period of time after reaching the petal. In step So3305, if it is determined that the value in the timer counter area T30 exceeds 2 seconds, it is determined that the hold display icon has not been shifted during the predetermined period after reaching the petal (step So3305: YES), and step So3406 Proceed to.

In step So3306, a command is sent to the display control device 100 to cause the special 1/holding The display control device 100, which has received the command, continues to display the special 1 and pending X petals that have reached the pending display icon on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As a result, the petals for special 1 and pending X that have reached the pending display icon remain on the pending display icon for a predetermined time. After transmitting the command in step So3306, the process advances to step So3307.

In step So3307, the display level upper limit value Lvm of the reserved game time corresponding to the value of the variable x, which is stored in the first starting opening reserved performance storage area (see FIG. 179(a)), is read. Specifically, when the variable x is 1, the display level upper limit value Lvm of the reserved game round (1) for the first starting opening stored in the first reserved effect storage area is read. When the variable x is 2, the display level upper limit value Lvm of the reserved game round (2) for the first starting opening is read. When the variable x is 3, the display level upper limit value Lvm of the reserved game round (3) for the first starting opening is read. When the variable x is 4, the display level upper limit value Lvm of the reserved game round (4) for the first starting opening is read. After executing step So3307, proceed to step So3308

In step So3308, the display level Lvr of the reserved game time corresponding to the value of the variable x, which is stored in the storage area for the first starting opening reserved effect, is read. Specifically, when the variable x is 1, the display level Lvr of the reserved game round (1) for the first starting opening stored in the first reserved effect storage area is read. When the variable x is 2, the display level Lvr of the reserved game round (2) for the first starting opening is read. When the variable x is 3, the display level Lvr of the reserved game round (3) for the first starting opening is read. When the variable x is 4, the display level Lvr of the reserved game round (4) for the first starting opening is read. After executing step So3308, the process advances to step So3309.

In step So3309, it is determined whether the read display level Lvr is lower than the read display level upper limit value Lvm. If it is determined in step So3309 that the display level Lvr is lower than the display level upper limit Lvm (So3309: YES), the process advances to step So3310.

In step So3310, the display level Lvr of the reserved play times corresponding to the value of the variable x stored in the memory area for the first start port reserved performance is updated to a higher level by one level. Specifically, if the variable x is 1, the display level Lvr of the reserved play times (1) for the first start port stored in the memory area for the first reserved performance is updated to a higher level by one level. If the variable x is 2, the display level Lvr of the reserved play times (2) for the first start port is updated to a higher level by one level. If the variable x is 3, the display level Lvr of the reserved play times (3) for the first start port is updated to a higher level by one level. If the variable x is 4, the display level Lvr of the reserved play times (4) for the first start port is updated to a higher level by one level. After executing step So3310, proceed to step So3311.

In step So3311, a command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the display mode of the reserved display icon at a position corresponding to the value of the variable x in the first start port reserved area Ds1. Specifically, a command is sent to the display control device 100 to instruct the display mode (color) to correspond to the display level Lvr of the reserved play times (y) for the first start port updated in step So3310. The display control device 100, which has received the command, changes the display mode of the reserved display icon at the xth position from the right in the first start port reserved area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the display level Lvr of the reserved play times (y) for the first start port updated in step So3310. After executing step So3311, proceed to step So3312.

In step So3312, the flag F1x corresponding to the value of variable x is set to 0. Then, proceed to step So3313, where the variable x is incremented by 1. After executing step So3313, proceed to step So3314.

In step So3314, it is determined whether the variable x exceeds 4 or not. If it is determined in step So3314 that the variable x does not exceed 4 (So3314: NO), the process proceeds to step So3302, and the processes from step So3302 to step So3314 are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So3314 that the variable x exceeds 4 (So3314: YES), this first starting gate hold display change setting process is ended.

In step So3302, if it is determined that the flag F1x corresponding to the value of variable x is not 1 (step So3302: NO), in step So3303, the required time to reach special 1/hold x corresponding to the value of variable x has elapsed. If it is determined that the pending display icon does not exist (Step So3303: NO), or if it is determined in Step So3304 that the pending display icon does not exist (Step So3304: NO), or in Step So3305, for a predetermined period of time after reaching the petal. If it is determined that the shift for the hold display icon has not occurred (step So3305: NO), the process proceeds to step So3313, where the value 1 is added to the variable x, and the process proceeds to step So3314.

If it is determined in step So3309 that the display level Lvr is not below the display level upper limit value Lvm (So3309: NO), proceed to step So3312 without executing steps So3310 and So3311.

<Second starting gate hold display change setting process>
Next, the second starting gate hold display change setting process will be explained. The second starting gate hold display change setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the hold display change setting process (FIG. 194: So3202).

FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the second starting port hold display change setting process. In step So3401, the variable y stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 is set to 1. After executing step So3401, the process advances to step So3402.

In step So3402, it is determined whether the flag F2y corresponding to the value of the variable y is 1. The flag F2y is a flag that is set by the process of setting the third type petal effect for the second start port reservation in FIG. 193. In step So3402, it is determined whether the flag F2y corresponding to the value of the variable y is 1, which indicates that the petal trajectory is the target reservation arrival trajectory.

If it is determined in step So3402 that flag F2y corresponding to the value of variable y is 1, i.e., that the trajectory of the petal for special 2/reserved y corresponding to the value of variable y is the target reserved reaching trajectory (step So3402: YES), proceed to step So3403.

In step So3403, it is determined whether the required time for Special 2/Reserved y corresponding to the value of variable y has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter area T2y corresponding to the value of variable y, which was set by the process of setting the third type of petal effect for the second start port reserved in FIG. 187, is "0". This determines whether the petal for Special 2/Reserved y corresponding to the value of variable y has reached the display position for displaying the target reserved display icon.

If it is determined in step So3403 that the time required for Special 2/Reserved y corresponding to the value of variable y has elapsed (step So3403: YES), proceed to step So3404.

In step So3404, it is determined whether a pending display icon exists at the display position where the petal for special 2/reserved y has reached (step So3404). Specifically, it is determined from the second pending number whether a pending display icon exists.

In step So3404, if it is determined that the hold display icon exists at the display position where the petal for special 2/hold y has reached (step So3404: YES), the process proceeds to step So3405.

In step So3405, a predetermined time (the predetermined time described earlier) from the current time (when it is determined in step So3404 that the hold display icon exists at the display position where the petal for special 2 and hold y has arrived), For example, during a period (hereinafter referred to as a predetermined period after reaching the petal) until 2 seconds have elapsed, it is determined whether or not a shift regarding the hold display icon has not occurred. When the shift of the pending display icon occurs, it is when the current game round ends, so in step So3405, it is determined whether the current game round does not end within a predetermined period after reaching the petal. . Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter area T30 indicating the remaining play time set in step So2310 of the production pattern setting process (FIG. 184) exceeds the predetermined time (2 seconds). Accordingly, it is determined whether the current game round does not end within a predetermined period of time after reaching the petal. In step So3405, if it is determined that the value in the timer counter area T30 exceeds 2 seconds, it is determined that the hold display icon has not been shifted during the predetermined period after reaching the petal (step So3405: YES), and step So3406 Proceed to.

In step So3406, a command is sent to the display control device 100 to cause the petal for special 2/hold y to be continuously displayed at the display position of the reached hold display icon for a predetermined period of time after the petal has arrived. The display control device 100 that has received the command continues to display the special 2/hold y petals that have reached the hold display icon on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As a result, the special 2/hold y petals that have reached the hold display icon remain on the hold display icon for a predetermined period of time. After transmitting the command in step So3406, the process advances to step So3407.

In step So3407, the display level upper limit value Lvm of the reserved game round (y) corresponding to the value of the variable y, which is stored in the storage area for the second starting opening reserved effect (see FIG. 179(b)), is read. After executing step So3407, proceed to step So3408

In step So3408, the display level Lvr of the reserved game round (y) corresponding to the value of the variable y, which is stored in the storage area for the second starting opening reserved effect, is read. After executing step So3408, the process advances to step So3409.

In step So3409, it is determined whether the read display level Lvr is below the read display level upper limit value Lvm. If it is determined in step So3409 that the display level Lvr is below the display level upper limit value Lvm (So3409: YES), proceed to step So3410.

In step So3410, the display level Lvr of the reserved game time corresponding to the value of the variable y, which is stored in the second starting opening reserved performance storage area, is updated to a higher level by one level. After executing step So3410, the process advances to step So3411.

In step So3411, a command for changing the display mode of the hold display icon at the position corresponding to the value of the variable y in the second starting gate hold area Ds2 is transmitted to the display control device 100. Specifically, a command is sent to the display control device 100 instructing the display mode (color) to correspond to the display level Lvr of the reserved game round (y) for the second starting opening updated in step So3410. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display mode of the hold display icon at the y-th position from the left in the second starting port holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 to the second starting port updated in step So3410. It is changed in accordance with the display level Lvr of the reserved game round (y). After executing step So3411, the process advances to step So3412.

In step So3412, flag F2y corresponding to the value of variable y is set to 0. Then, proceed to step So3413, where variable y is incremented by 1. After executing step So3413, proceed to step So3414.

In step So3414, it is determined whether the variable y exceeds 4. If it is determined in step So3414 that the variable y does not exceed 4 (So3414: NO), the process advances to step So3402, and the processes from step So3402 to step So3414 are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So3414 that the variable y exceeds 4 (So3414: YES), this second starting gate hold display change setting process is ended.

In step So3402, if it is determined that the flag F2y corresponding to the value of variable y is not 1 (step So3402: NO), in step So3403, the required time to reach special 2/hold y corresponding to the value of variable y has elapsed. If it is determined that the pending display icon does not exist (Step So3403: NO), or if it is determined in Step So3404 that the pending display icon does not exist (Step So3404: NO), or in Step So3405, for a predetermined period of time after reaching the petal. If it is determined that the shift for the hold display icon has not occurred (step So3405: NO), the process proceeds to step So3413, where the value 1 is added to the variable y, and the process proceeds to step So3414.

If it is determined in step So3409 that the display level Lvr is not below the display level upper limit value Lvm (So3409: NO), proceed to step So3412 without executing steps So3410 and So3411.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main process that is executed when a command is received from the audio emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power is turned on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the contents of the command received from the audio emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step So3501, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and the memories in the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 are cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written into the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. Thereafter, the process advances to step So3502.

In step So3502, the interrupt permission setting is executed. Once the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main processing executes an infinite loop process thereafter until the power is cut off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio emission control device 90.

FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step So3601, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after specifying an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, drawing and drawing of that image on the VDP 105 are performed. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image when the drawing process or display process of the image is not completed, so it is possible to prevent the start of drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area where the image information being displayed is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt process are described below.

In step So3701, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command corresponding processing, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 184) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a production command is stored, control of drawing and display of the image is started so that the production mode specified by the production command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

If a production operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the production operation is executed. Image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In addition, in the command response process (So3701), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processes corresponding to all the analyzed commands are executed. The reason for this is explained below. The command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the performance is set by the sound and light emission control device 90 and the performance is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the performance are stored in the command storage area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the form of the performance, such as the preview performance or the stop pattern set by the sound and light emission control device 90, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that form is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

In step So3702, a display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the contents of one frame of image to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 are determined based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which has been set by the command response process (So3701) or the like. Then, the process proceeds to step So3703.

In step So3703, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the contents of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, as specified by the display setting processing (So3702), the type of character (sprite, display object) that composes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, rotation angle, etc., are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step So3704.

In step So3704, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, determined by the task process (So3703), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the image drawing process based on this information, and also sends the image along with the drive signal in order to display the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process on the pattern display device 41. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process advances to step So3705, and after other processing is executed, the V interrupt processing is ended. An example of specific control for executing various processes including jackpot effects in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

<4-7> Actions and Effects:
As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment executes an effect that changes the display mode of the reserved display icon when the third type petal P3 among the multiple types of petals P1 to P4 displayed on the pattern display device 41 reaches the reserved display icon and stays (i.e., adheres) for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds). In conventional pachinko machines that do not have such a configuration, when the variable display starts, when the reserved information shifts, or when a game ball enters the first start hole or the second start hole, an effect that suggests that the display mode of the reserved display icon will change (reserved change suggestion effect) is executed, and then an effect that changes the display mode of the reserved display icon is executed. In this conventional pachinko machine, the reserved change suggestion effect is executed at a predetermined timing, such as when the variable display starts, when the reserved information shifts, or when the game ball enters the first or second starting hole, and the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved display icon is executed, so the player can predict the timing when the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved display icon will appear, which has the problem that the player lacks a sense of expectation and tension. Also, unless the reserved change suggestion effect is executed, the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved display icon will not appear, so the player only pays attention to the reserved display icon when the reserved change suggestion effect is executed, which further lacks a sense of expectation and tension for the player.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of petals repeatedly dance on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, regardless of whether or not the pending display icon is displayed.
(i) The majority of these petals (first type petal P1 and second type petal P2) cannot act on the pending display icon, even if they pass around or over the pending display icon. Without,
(ii) If you think that one of those petals (the third type petal P3 moving along the first target unreserved trajectory or the second target unreserved trajectory) moves toward the pending display icon, Just before the hold display icon, it will be removed from the hold display icon,
(iii) When you think that one of those petals (the third type petal P3 moving along the target hold arrival trajectory) has reached the hold display icon, a predetermined amount of time has passed after reaching the hold display icon. Due to the previous shift of the pending display icon, the display mode of the pending display icon does not change.
(iv) If you think that one of those petals (the third type petal P3 moving along the target holding trajectory) reaches the holding display icon and stays (attaches) for a predetermined period of time. , because the display level Lvr set for the hold display icon has already reached the display level upper limit Lvm, the display mode of the hold display icon does not change,
(v) One of the petals (the third type petal P3 moving along the target hold arrival trajectory) arrived towards the hold display icon and stayed (attached) for a predetermined time. If so, an effect that changes the display mode of the pending display icon is executed.

For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the petals are repeatedly displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, the player can be constantly given a sense of expectation and tension (as long as any petal is displayed) as to whether the display mode of the reserve display icon will change.
・The petal reaches the hold display icon, but passes over the hold display icon.
・The petals head towards the hold display icon, but end up reaching the outside of the hold display icon.
・The petal reaches the hold display icon, but the petal does not attach to the hold display icon.
- The petals reach the reserved display icon and attach to the reserved display icon, but the display mode of the reserved display icon does not change (because the display level Lvr of the reserved display icon has already reached the set display level upper limit value Lvm). This can give the player a sense of disappointment, which can give the player an even greater sense of expectation and tension. Furthermore, in this embodiment, petals that can serve as a reserved change suggestion effect and petals with the same pattern as the petals are always flying, so the player can always have a sense of expectation that an effect that changes the display mode of the reserved display icon will appear, which can give the player an even greater sense of expectation and tension. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the effect images such as flower petals, confetti, jellyfish, butterflies, etc. floating on the display surface 41a are intended to make the display surface 41a lively, and in conventional pachinko machines, they act on the hold display to perform some action. Nothing like that happened. In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to perform an effect in which flower petals attach to the hold display icon and change the display mode of the hold display icon, so the display surface 41a is made lively. You can make effective use of the petals for making.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a pattern in a pattern row in which a fourth type petal P4 among the plurality of types of petals P1 to P4 displayed on the pattern display device 41 changes from a fluctuating display state to a stopped state. , an effect is executed to restart the variable display of the symbol row. In conventional pachinko machines that do not have such a configuration, the petals do not affect the fluctuating display of the symbol rows, so if the fluctuating display of the symbol rows stops and the symbol rows no longer have the same combination of symbols. , it only gave players a sense of disappointment. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the fourth type petal P4 attaches to a symbol of a symbol row that is in a stopped state, it is possible to execute an effect that restarts the variable display of the symbol row. Because of this, it is possible to give a player who was once disappointed when the symbol rows no longer have the same combination of symbols feel surprised that the fluctuating display has resumed and give him a sense of expectation for another big hit. Therefore, with the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the third type petal P3 reaches the display position of the reserved display icon, a process of determining whether or not the reserved display icon exists (step So3304 in FIG. 195), a process of determining whether or not the reserved display icon shifts for a predetermined period after the arrival of the petal (step So3305), and a process of determining whether or not the display level Lvr falls below the display level upper limit value Lvm (step So3309) are executed. For this reason, when a ball enters the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34 during a game round, reserved information is acquired based on the ball entry, and a new reserved display icon is added, the third type petal P3 also acts on the added reserved display icon, making it possible to execute an effect that changes the display mode of the reserved display icon. When a new reserve display icon is added during this game round, at the timing when the display of the third type petal P3 begins, the reserve display icon may not be displayed at the display position of the reserve display icon corresponding to the third type petal P3, but may be displayed at said display position by the time the third type petal P3 reaches said display position. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a new reserve display icon is added during a game round, the player is given a sense of anticipation for the petal after the fact when the display of the reserve display icon begins. Therefore, an even greater sense of anticipation can be given to the player.

<<4-8>> Modification of the fourth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be embodied in various forms without departing from the spirit of the present invention, for example, the following modifications are also possible. Note that in the modifications described below, the same configurations, processes, and effects as those of the above embodiment will not be described.

《4-8-1》Variation 1:
In the fourth embodiment described above, in the first starting opening holding display change setting process (FIG. 195) and the second starting opening holding display change setting process (FIG. 196), the petal reaches the holding display icon, and after reaching the holding display icon, a predetermined period of time is elapsed. , when it is determined that the display level Lvr has reached the display level upper limit Lvm when the shift of the pending display icon has not occurred, no special processing is performed. As a modified example, when it is determined that the display level Lvr has reached the display level upper limit Lvm, a lottery is performed (a lottery process when the display level upper limit is reached, which will be described later), and if the lottery is won, after reaching the petal. For a predetermined period, the reached petals may be continuously displayed at the display position of the reached hold display icon, and if the lottery is not won, the reached petals may be displayed so as to pass past the hold display icon. That is, in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the display level Lvr has reached the display level upper limit value Lvm, the petals that have reached the hold display icon disappear and the display mode of the hold display icon is changed. In contrast, in this modification 1, when it is determined that the display level Lvr has reached the display level upper limit value Lvm, the petals that have reached the hold display icon pass through the hold display icon. The first mode does not change the display mode (if you do not win the lottery), and the petals that reach the pending display icon are continuously displayed at the display position of the pending display icon for a predetermined period of time, and the petals that reach the pending display icon are continuously displayed at the display position of the pending display icon. The system is configured so that either one of the second mode (in the case of winning a lottery) in which the display mode of the icon is not changed can be selected. Note that instead of the lottery, a configuration may be adopted in which the first mode and the second mode are sequentially switched.

Hereinafter, specific control of the first starting gate hold display change setting process will be described. Note that the second starting port hold display change setting process is a modification of the first starting port hold display change setting process for the second starting port, and is the same process, so a description thereof will be omitted. Note that the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in Modification 1 is the same as the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, so the same names and symbols are used for the same parts as in the fourth embodiment, and the following explanation is given. I do. Regarding the software, processes other than the first starting gate hold display change setting process and the second starting gate hold display change setting process are also the same as in the fourth embodiment.

Figure 200 is a flowchart showing the first start port hold display change setting process in variant 1. The first start port hold display change setting process in variant 1 is mostly the same as the first start port hold display change setting process (Figure 195) in the fourth embodiment, with only some differences. Steps with the same processing content are given the same reference numbers as in Figure 195.

In the first start port hold display change setting process (Fig. 195) in the fourth embodiment, the process of sending a command to the display control device 100 to continue displaying the special 1/hold X petal at the display position of the reached hold display icon for a predetermined period after the petal arrives, i.e., the process of step So3306, is configured to be executed immediately after it is determined in step So3305 that no shift of the hold display icon has occurred during the predetermined period after the petal arrives (step So3305: YES). In contrast, in the first start port hold display change setting process (Fig. 200) in this modified example 1, the process is configured to be executed immediately after it is determined in step So3309 that the display level Lvr falls below the display level upper limit value Lvm (So3309: YES).

If it is determined in step So3309 that the display level Lvr is not below the display level upper limit Lvm (So3309: NO), the process proceeds to step So3309a, where the petal display change process is executed. The details of the petal display change process will be described later. After executing step So3309a, the process proceeds to step So3312.

FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing petal display change processing. In step So3801, a lottery process is executed when the display level upper limit value is reached. In the display level upper limit reaching lottery process, when it is determined that the display level Lvr does not fall below the display level upper limit Lvm, a lottery is performed to select which of the first mode and the second mode will be adopted. This is a process determined by Specifically, a value is obtained from a random number counter for a lottery when the display level upper limit is reached, and this value is compared with a table for a lottery when the display level upper limit is reached, which is stored in the sound-light side ROM 93, thereby obtaining the above-mentioned result. make a decision Note that a random number counter for lottery when the display level upper limit value is reached is provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. The random number counter is updated at short intervals.

In the table for the lottery when the upper limit of the display level is reached, of the random number counter values for the lottery when the upper limit of the display level is reached, "0 to 599" corresponds to the first mode, and "600 to 1199" corresponds to the second mode. Note that this is just one example, and the rate of winning the first mode and the rate of winning the second mode may be different. After executing step So3801, proceed to step So3802.

In step So3802, it is determined whether the lottery result of the display level upper limit reaching lottery process executed in step So3801 is in the second mode. In step So3802, if it is determined that the lottery result is the second mode (step So3802: YES), the process advances to step So3803, and the special 1/holding A command to continue displaying at the display position is sent to the display control device 100. This process is the same as step So3306 in FIG. 200. After executing step So3803, the main petal display changing process ends.

On the other hand, in step So3802, if it is determined that the lottery result is not in the second mode, that is, it is determined that the lottery result is in the first mode (step So3802: NO), the process proceeds to step So3804, A command is sent to the display control device 100 to display the flower petals so as to move them downward from the position where they reach the hold display icon. The display control device 100 that has received the command displays the special 1/holding X petal on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 so as to move it downward. As a result, the petals for special 1 and pending X that have reached the pending display icon pass through without staying at the pending display icon. After executing step So3804, the main petal display changing process ends.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 1 configured as above, when the third type petal P3 reaches the reserved display icon, the third type petal P3 passes through the reserved display icon and the display mode of the reserved display icon is not changed in a first mode, and the third type petal P3 is continuously displayed at the display position of the reserved display icon for a predetermined period of time and the display mode of the reserved display icon is not changed in a second mode. In addition, in the first start port reserved display change setting process (Fig. 200), a third mode can be taken in which the display mode of the reserved display icon is changed by executing steps So3306, So3310, and So3311. That is, when the third type petal reaches the reserved display icon, one of the first to third modes is selectively executed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, even if the petal is displayed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and tension that the display mode of the reserved display icon will change. Furthermore, it is possible to give the player a sense of disappointment when the petal reaches the reserved display icon but passes through it, and the display state of the reserved display icon does not change, which can give the player an even greater sense of expectation and tension. As a result, the pachinko machine of variant 1 can increase the excitement of the game.

As another embodiment of this modified example 1, the processing of step So3804 of the petal display change processing (Fig. 201) may be eliminated. With this configuration, in the first mode, the petal reaches the reserved display icon, but immediately thereafter the petal disappears, making it possible to give a sense of disappointment that the display state of the reserved display icon has not changed, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the pachinko machine of modified example 1.

《4-8-2》Variation 2:
In the fourth embodiment and its modifications, when the third type petal P3 reaches the display position of the pending display icon, the process of determining whether or not the pending display icon exists (step So3304 in FIG. 195), the petal arrival A configuration that executes a process for determining whether or not a shift of the hold display icon does not occur during a subsequent predetermined period (step So3305), and a process for determining whether or not the display level Lvr does not fall below the display level upper limit value Lvm (step So3309). And so. On the other hand, as a modification, the above three determinations may be performed when displaying the third type petal P3 is started. This configuration has the effect of simplifying the control process.

4-8-3 Variation 3:
In the fourth embodiment and its modified examples, when the third type petal P3 reaches the display position of the hold display icon, a process of determining whether the hold display icon exists (step So3304 in FIG. 195), a process of determining whether the hold display icon does not shift for a predetermined period after the arrival of the petal (step So3305), and a process of determining whether the display level Lvr does not fall below the display level upper limit value Lvm (step So3309) are executed. In contrast, as modified example 3, a process of determining whether the hold display icon exists or not is executed when the third type petal P3 reaches the display position of the hold display icon, and if it is determined that the hold display icon exists, the display mode of the hold display icon may be changed without executing the other two determination processes. Also, as another form of the modified example 2, when the third type petal P3 reaches the display position of the hold display icon, a process of determining whether or not the hold display icon exists and a process of determining whether or not the hold display icon shifts for a predetermined period after the arrival of the petal are executed, and the display mode of the hold display icon is changed without executing another determination process. Also, as another form of the modified example 2, when the third type petal P3 reaches the display position of the hold display icon, a process of determining whether or not the hold display icon exists and a process of determining whether or not the display level Lvr falls below the display level upper limit value Lvm are executed, and the display mode of the hold display icon is changed without executing another determination process.

《4-8-4》Variation 4:
In the fourth embodiment and its modifications, flower petals (third type petal P3) are used as moving objects that can play a role in suggesting a pending change, but instead of this, confetti, jellyfish, butterflies, etc. Other designs may also be used. In addition, in the fourth embodiment and its modifications, flower petals (fourth type petal P4) are used as the moving object for restarting the variable display, but instead of this, other objects such as confetti, jellyfish, butterflies, etc. It can also be used as a pattern. Moving objects such as flower petals, confetti, jellyfish, and butterflies have the function of enlivening the display surface 41a and enhancing the atmosphere of the performance. Since the display mode of the hold display icon and the display mode of the symbols can be changed, it is possible to effectively utilize the moving object.

《4-8-5》Variation 5:
In the fourth embodiment and its modifications, the plurality of flower petals as moving objects are displayed so as to dance (fall) from the upper side to the lower side on the display surface 41a. On the other hand, in a configuration in which the moving object is a butterfly, the butterfly is displayed so as to move in a loop within the display surface 41a. In the middle of its loop-like movement, the butterfly moves toward the pending display icon and reaches the pending display icon. When this is reached, the display mode of the hold display icon is changed. According to this configuration, since the moving object can be directed in various directions, it is possible to further give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, such as wondering when the display mode of the pending display icon will change. can. Although the butterfly moves within the entire display surface 41a, the butterfly may move within a predetermined area set within the display surface 41a instead. The predetermined area includes at least the display position of the hold display icon. According to this configuration, the range in which butterflies occur can be limited to a part of the area of the effect displayed on the display surface 41, and it is possible to correspond to various effects. In addition, although the butterfly is configured to move in a loop, it does not necessarily have to be in a single ring shape, and may have a shape in which the trajectory of movement intersects.In short, within the range of movement, the butterfly It may move in any shape as long as it is always displayed during the period.

That is, the moving object may be configured to be displayed repeatedly, for example, like a petal, or may be configured to be displayed so as to be always present for a predetermined period, for example, like a butterfly. In the above-mentioned repeatedly displayed configuration, one or more petals may always appear on the display surface 41a for a predetermined period, or there may be a period during which no petals are present. In the fourth embodiment and the modified example described above, the moving object is a tangible object such as a petal, confetti, jellyfish, or butterfly, but it is not limited to a tangible object, and it can be replaced with an intangible object such as a ray of light, a laser beam, or a radio wave. In other words, the moving object can be considered as an acting object for acting on the hold display icon or the pattern sequence, including the above-mentioned tangible and intangible objects.

4-8-6 Variation 6:
In the fourth embodiment and its modified example, four types of petals were prepared as the third type petals P31 for the first start port reservation: petals Pa for special 1/reservation 1, petals Pb for special 1/reservation 2, petals Pc for special 1/reservation 3, and petals Pd for special 1/reservation 4. In contrast, as a modified example, two types of petals are prepared as the third type petals P31 for the first start port reservation, and one type of petal is shared for special 1/reservation 1 and special 1/reservation 2, and the other type of petal is shared for special 1/reservation 3 and special 1/reservation 4. That is, the first type of petal may be configured to face either the display position of the first hold display icon H1 located first from the right in the first start port hold area Ds1 or the display position of the second hold display icon H2 located second from the right, and the second type of petal may be configured to face either the display position of the third hold display icon H3 located third from the right in the first start port hold area Ds1 or the display position of the fourth hold display icon H4 located fourth from the right. Also, one of the two types of petals may be shared for Special 1-hold 1, Special 1-hold 2, and Special 1-hold 3, and the other type of petal may be shared for Special 1-hold 4. In short, one type of petal may be shared for the display positions of two or more hold display icons (any combination is acceptable). In addition, the third type petal P32 for the second start port reservation may also be configured so that one type of petal is used for displaying two or more reservation display icons. According to this modification 6, it is difficult for the player to judge which of the multiple reservation display icons a single type of petal is heading for, which further gives the player a sense of expectation and tension.

《4-8-7》Variation 7:
In the fourth embodiment and its modifications, the third type petal P31 for first starting port retention and the third type petal P32 for second starting port retention are displayed in the first starting port retention area Ds1. The configuration is such that the display mode can be changed for both the hold display icon displayed in the second starting port hold area Ds2 and the hold display icon displayed in the second starting port hold area Ds2. On the other hand, as a modified example, only one of the third type petals P31 for first starting port retention and the third type petals P32 for second starting port retention is displayed, and the area Ds1 for first starting port retention is displayed. It is good also as a structure in which it is possible to change the display mode of only one of the hold display icon displayed in , and the hold display icon displayed in the second starting port hold area Ds2. Further, the configuration is such that both the third type petal P31 for holding the first starting port and the third type petal P32 for holding the second starting port are displayed, and at least one of them is displayed depending on the gaming state. It may also be a configuration. Specifically, for example, in the high probability gaming state, only the third type petal P32 for holding the second starting port is displayed, and in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), the third type petal P32 for holding the first starting port is displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which only the seed petals P31 are displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to further improve the sense of expectation of a high probability gaming state.

4-8-8 Variation 8:
In the fourth embodiment and its modified example, the third type petal P3 as a moving object that can play a role in the reserved change suggestion performance is configured to appear from the display start point and move toward the corresponding reserved display icon, but as a modified example, for example, a performance in which a character throws a moving object toward a corresponding reserved display icon may be configured. According to this configuration, for example, when the first reserved number is three and the character throws a ball as a moving object toward the third reserved display icon from the right side in the first start port reserved area Ds1, the reserved display icon is not displayed at the display position of the fourth reserved display icon from the right side at the time of throwing the ball, and a ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 before the thrown ball reaches the third reserved display icon, and reserved information is obtained based on the ball, and when a new reserved display icon is added, a reserved display icon may be displayed at the display position of the fourth reserved display icon from the right side. According to this configuration, when a new reserved display icon is added during a game round, the player is given a sense of expectation for the moving object after the fact when the display of the reserved display icon starts, so that the player can be given an even greater sense of expectation. In addition, in the fourth embodiment and its modified example, the fourth type petal P4 as the moving object for resuming the variable display is configured to appear from the display start point and move toward the pattern, but as a modified example, for example, a character may be configured to throw the moving object toward the pattern.

<<4-8-9>> Variation 9:
In the fourth embodiment and its modified example, the third type petals P3 that can serve as a reserve change indication performance are configured to start displaying periodically in order from reserve 1 to reserve 4, but instead of this, they may be configured to start displaying randomly from reserve 1 to reserve 4. With this configuration, it becomes more difficult for the player to time when the petals will reach the display position of the reserve display icon, which can give the player an even greater sense of expectation and tension.

《4-8-10》Variation 10:
In the fourth embodiment and its modified example, if it is determined that the shift of the pending display icon does not occur during a predetermined period after reaching the petal, the petal is displayed for a predetermined period after reaching the petal, and the reached pending display The icon is configured to be displayed continuously in the same position as the icon. This is to continue displaying the petals that have reached the hold display icon in the state that they have reached. On the other hand, for a predetermined period of time after reaching the petals, the petals can be made to blink, shine like fireworks, or change the color of the petals to other colors such as gold or rainbow colors at the display position of the reached hold display icon. The display format of the petals may be changed, such as by changing the display format of the petals. According to this configuration, it is possible to further emphasize the suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display icon will change, and it is possible to further give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency.

<<4-8-11>> Variation 11:
In the fourth embodiment and its modified example, the fourth type petal P4 acting on the variable display pattern is included in the big win performance pattern with re-variation. However, the fourth type petal P4 may be displayed in a routine other than the display of the big win performance pattern. This configuration makes it easy to change the moving path of the fourth type petal P4 acting on the variable display pattern. For example, the moving path of the fourth type petal P4 can be configured to take either a target reaching trajectory that reaches the display position of the target pattern, or a non-target trajectory that is the same as the target reaching trajectory from the starting point to the middle and reaches a position outside the display position of the pattern from the middle, just like the third type petal P3. According to this configuration, even if the fourth type petal P4 is displayed, the display mode of the pattern may or may not change. Therefore, according to this modified example 11, even if the fourth type petal P4 is displayed, the player can be given a sense of expectation and tension that the display mode of the pattern will change. Furthermore, since it is possible to give the player a sense of disappointment when the fourth type petal P4 is displayed but the display mode of the pattern does not change, it is possible to give the player an even greater sense of expectation and tension.

4-8-12 Variation 12:
In the above fourth embodiment and its variant, the display form of the hold display icon as hold identification information corresponded to the likelihood of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, but this does not have to be limited to this and may have other meanings.

《4-8-13》Variation 13:
In the fourth embodiment and its modifications, the hold display icon as the hold identification information is a picture displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined number of lamps are installed and the display form of the hold identification information is changed by changing the color of the lamps.

<<4-8-14>> Variation 14:
In the fourth embodiment and its modified examples, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices, such as the main control device 60, the sound and light emission control device 90, and the display control device 100. Alternatively, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to include two control devices, such as the main control device and the sub-control device. The sub-control device may be configured to execute the various processes executed in the sound and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment and its modified examples, the various processes executed in each of the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 do not need to be limited to the division described in the fourth embodiment, and it is sufficient that the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 as a whole can execute the various processes in the fourth embodiment.

4-8-15 Variation 15:
In the fourth embodiment and its modified examples, the predetermined period is from when the demo image is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 to when the player is playing the game, and the petals are repeatedly displayed as moving objects during this predetermined period. As described above, as a modified example, the predetermined period does not include the period of the big win presentation that is executed when the big win is won in the winning lottery. Furthermore, as a modified example 15, the predetermined period during which the moving objects are constantly displayed can be changed as follows.

The predetermined period is a period set after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. As described above, the predetermined period may be configured not to include the period of the jackpot presentation executed when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. The predetermined period may also be configured not to include the period of the reach presentation executed when the reach occurs. The predetermined period may also be configured not to include the period of the normal reach presentation executed when the normal reach occurs among the reaches. The predetermined period may also be configured not to include the period of the super reach presentation executed when the super reach occurs among the reaches. The predetermined period may also be configured not to include the period of the special reach presentation executed when the special reach occurs among the reaches. The predetermined period may also be configured not to include the period during which the RTC (real-time clock) presentation is being executed. The predetermined period may also be configured not to include the period during which a specific mode is selected in the mode selection that specifies the type of presentation of the entire game, and the game is being executed in that specific mode. The predetermined period may also be configured not to include the period during which the demo image is displayed. Note that the period excluded from the predetermined period does not have to be one period as described above, and the predetermined period may be the period excluding multiple periods selected from the various periods described above. For example, the predetermined period may be configured not to include the period of the jackpot presentation that is executed when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and the period of the reach presentation that is executed when a reach occurs. According to the configuration of this variation 15, the period during which the moving object is displayed can be narrowed down to a period that is effective for changing the display mode of the hold display icon.

《4-8-16》Variation 16:
In the fourth embodiment and its modifications, the third type petal P3 as a moving body changes the display mode of the hold display icon as specific identification information, and the fourth type petal P4 as a moving body changes the display mode of the pending display icon as specific identification information. The structure is such that the display mode of the symbols can be changed. On the other hand, as a modification, the specific identification information may be something other than the hold display icon or the design, and may be configured to be specific identification information corresponding to the special information.

<<5>> Fifth embodiment:
5-1 Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 202 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter, also referred to as a "pachinko machine") according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 relative to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 relative to the inner frame 13. On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound and light emission control device, and a display control device, are disposed. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window 18 is formed in the approximate center of the front door frame 14. Resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided around the window 18. The electric parts are composed of light-emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role in enhancing the presentation effect by lighting or blinking during each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, etc. In addition, a glass unit 19 consisting of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the open window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board through the glass unit 19 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed into a box shape with an open top surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls ejected from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed into a box shape with an open top surface. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and by operating the lever 23, the player can switch the outlet 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided at the front of the periphery of the upper tray 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation unit that allows the player to perform input operations for the game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

On the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, simply referred to as the "right side"), an operating handle 25 for the player to operate is provided. When the player operates (rotates) the operating handle 25, game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting the operation of the game ball launching mechanism, a wait button 25b that stops the launch of game balls by the game ball launching mechanism when pressed by the player, and a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a turns on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in response to the amount of rotation, and game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball launch button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, simply referred to as the "left side"). When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, a game ball is launched to the front of the game board with a predetermined launch strength, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front of the game board with the same launch strength as when the rotation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can perform a so-called "right hit". In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is configured to be launched to the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. That is, the player can grasp the operating handle 25 to turn on at least the touch sensor 25a, and then operate the game ball launch button 26 to launch the game ball in response to the operation of the game ball launch button 26.

Next, the configuration of the back of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. The back of the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with control devices for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Figure 203 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the rear surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 is equipped with a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board whose function is to mainly control the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured so that traces of opening and closing are left behind. For example, sealing stickers are affixed to the parts that can be opened and closed, and the word "opened" appears when the board box is opened.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The audio light emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands sent from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on commands sent from the audio emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays symbols and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to launch game balls is input from the main control device 60, the launch control device 80 controls the game ball launch mechanism to launch game balls with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there are several devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a tank rail 55 connected below the tank 54 and having a gently sloping slope so that the game balls flow downstream, a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and a payout device 71 that receives a supply of game balls from the case rail 56 and pays out a predetermined number of game balls according to an instruction from the payout control device 70.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the power necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. The power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By turning the power switch 88 ON/OFF, the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

Figure 204 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to define a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. Game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism are guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flow down the game area PA. In the game area PA, multiple nails 42 are planted approximately perpendicular to the game board 30, and various gimmicks such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 has a number of openings formed therethrough in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. Game balls that enter the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are guided to the individual openings formed in the game board 30. The game board 30 also has a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 has a special chart unit 37, a general chart unit 38, and a round display section 39.

As shown in the figure, the general winning hole 32 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, ten game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 203).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting hole 34 is an entrance member that forms an entrance through which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed. In addition, the second starting hole 34 is provided with an electric device 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole that penetrates vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that triggers a lottery to open the electric role 34a. Specifically, when a game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the passing as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric role opening lottery). If the electric role opening is selected as a result of the internal lottery, the electric role 34a transitions to an electric role opening state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is disposed upstream of the second start port 34 in the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that passes through the through gate 35 can flow down the game area PA after passing through and enter the second start port 34. Note that in this embodiment, even if a game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a big winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the big winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big prize opening 36a. When a jackpot is won as a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60 and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state. The opening/closing execution mode is entered when a jackpot is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by a ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and the opening/closing door 36b is in an open state. This is a mode that repeats the closed state and closed state. That is, if a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33, the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the jackpot 36a. Similarly, if a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the big winning port 36a. . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the general winning hole 32, the first starting hole 33, the second starting hole 34, or the variable winning device 36 are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each configured with a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern refers to a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 33. When a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 is held, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a variable first pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. When the lottery is completed, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a stationary first pattern corresponding to the lottery result.

The second pattern display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern refers to a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 34. When a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is performed, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a variable second pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a stationary second pattern corresponding to the lottery result.

The period from when the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b starts to be displayed until it is stopped is also referred to as the variation time. call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a until the time when the first symbol is stopped and displayed is also called the first variation time, and The time period from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to the time it is stopped and displayed is also referred to as a second variable time.

The special symbol unit 37 further includes a first reserved display section 37c and a second reserved display section 37d, which are made up of LED lamps, located adjacent to the first pattern display section 37a and the second pattern display section 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the first starting hole 33 are reserved. The first reserved display section 37c displays the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 33 by the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. Also, in this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the second starting hole 34 are reserved. The second reserved display section 37d displays the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 34 by the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit.

The general map unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When a lottery to open an electric reel is held triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the general map unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to light up, flash, or display in a predetermined manner. When the lottery to open an electric reel is completed, the general map unit 38 displays in a predetermined manner corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode, or displays corresponding thereto. A round game is a game that is opened and closed until either the predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b remains open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display section 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends and a new game round is started.

Note that the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display section 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the drawing process and the drawing results.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged approximately at the center of the gaming area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100 (FIG. 203). Note that the symbol display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display section 37a displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs a variable display or a predetermined display of symbols in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. Further, when the second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. conduct. The symbol display device 41 performs not only display effects triggered by the entry of a ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also display effects during the opening/closing execution mode that is entered when a jackpot is won. . The details of the symbol display device 41 will be explained below.

Figure 205 is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. Three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, left, center, and right, are displayed in a variable manner on the display surface 41a. Specifically, in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, patterns showing the numbers 1 to 8 are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and each pattern row is displayed in a variable manner by scrolling from top to bottom or bottom to top with periodicity. After the variable display by scrolling, one pattern for each pattern row is displayed stopped on the active line L, as shown in Figure 205.

Figure 206 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. Figure 206(a) shows the patterns showing even numbers among the patterns showing the numbers 1 to 8, and Figures 206(b) and 206(c) show the patterns showing odd numbers (7 and 5 in the figure) among the patterns showing the numbers 1 to 8. In this embodiment, the patterns variably displayed on the pattern display device 41 are divided into two types: patterns showing only numbers, and patterns in which warrior characters are added to numbers. The patterns showing only numbers are applied to patterns showing even numbers. That is, as shown in Figure 206(a), the patterns showing the number 2, the number 4, the number 6, and the number 8 are patterns showing only the numbers.

On the other hand, a pattern in which a warrior character is added to a number is applied to a pattern indicating an odd number. That is, as shown in FIG. 206(b), the pattern showing the number 7 is a pattern in which the warrior character A is added to the number 7. As shown in FIG. 206(c), the pattern showing the number 5 is a pattern in which the warrior character B is added to the number 5. Although not shown, the symbol indicating the number 3 is a symbol in which the warrior character C is added to the number 3. Although not shown, the symbol indicating the number 1 is a symbol with the warrior character D added to the number 1. In this embodiment, the warrior character A is, for example, a beautiful girl warrior character, as shown in FIG. 206(b). The warrior character B is, for example, a young warrior character, as shown in FIG. 206(c).

In this embodiment, the variably displayed patterns are composed of two types: numbers and numbers with warrior characters added. However, as a modified example, the variably displayed patterns may be composed of one of the above two types. That is, the variably displayed patterns may be composed of only numbers, or only numbers with warrior characters added. The number of warrior characters does not need to be limited to four, and may be any number equal to or less than the number of patterns. In addition, if the patterns are composed of only numbers, the number of warrior characters appearing in the performance described below may be greater than the number of patterns.

Here, a warrior character is a character that can engage in combat. Characters are people and animals that appear in works such as novels, manga, and games. Characters may include not only living things but also inorganic objects (robots, cars, battleships, etc.). Furthermore, characters only need to be judged as acting based on independent thinking, and may be personified to include conceptual things (nations, prefectures, regions, territories, domains, etc.).

Next, the change in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (Fig. 205) will be described in detail. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, a change display starts in which the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Then, the scrolling symbols switch from a change display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displays a predetermined symbol in a stopped state. When the change display of the symbols ends and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined combination of symbols is formed on the valid line L. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the valid line L. The manner in which the pattern display device 41 changes patterns is not limited to the above-mentioned manner, and various manners can be adopted for the manner in which the pattern changes, such as the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction in which the pattern changes in the pattern rows are displayed, and the number of patterns in each pattern row.

Here, a game round refers to the period from when the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b starts to change, the change ends, the display becomes stationary, and the display ends, and is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the game ball entering either the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game round. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on the game ball entering either the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, it causes the segment display to change and then stops displaying the segment display so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information in either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b for each game round. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into either the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, it causes the pattern display device 41 to variably display a predetermined pattern sequence for each play round, and then causes the pattern sequence to be frozen so as to display a display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. The time required for one play round is also called the unit play time. The unit play time is composed of the fluctuation time, which is the time from when the fluctuation display begins to when the predetermined lottery result is frozen and displayed, and the freeze time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is frozen and displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 205, the first start port reservation area Ds1, the reserved digestion area Dm, and the second start port reservation area Ds2 are displayed below the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. The reserved digestion area Dm is displayed in the center of the left-right direction of the display surface 41a, the first start port reservation area Ds1 is displayed to the left of the reserved digestion area Dm, and the second start port reservation area Ds2 is displayed to the right of the reserved digestion area Dm. The first start port reservation area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the first start port 33. The second start port reservation area Ds2 displays the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the second start port 34. In this embodiment, as described above, the number of reserved balls that have entered the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is a maximum of four each. Each reserved ball displayed in the first start port reservation area Ds1 is moved to the reserved digestion area Dm and becomes the subject of a winning lottery. In addition, each hold displayed in the second start port hold area Ds2 is moved to the hold consumption area Dm and becomes eligible for a winning lottery.

As shown in FIG. 204, a pair of nails (also known as life nails or navel nails) 42 (42a, 42b) are provided above the first starting hole 33. The probability of the game ball entering the first starting hole 33 changes depending on the distance between the pair of nails 42a, 42b.

<<5-2>> Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, a description will be given of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 207 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that includes elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a ROM 63 that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. It is equipped with a RAM 64 which is a memory for storing information. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may be provided with some of the functions that the MPU 62 has. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). The input port of the main control board 61 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 and the power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85. The main control board 61 receives a stable 24V DC power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the dispensing control device 70, etc., and supplies power to each device. The power supply device 85 also has a capacitor (not shown), and continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period of time when a power failure occurs or when the power switch 88 (Figure 203) is turned off.

Furthermore, various detection sensors 67a to 67e are connected to the input ports of the main control board 61. Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided in various ball entry openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. . Based on signals from various detection sensors 67a to 67e, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and whether or not a game ball has entered a through gate. 35 is passed. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, and also executes an electric accessory release lottery based on the entering of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 is connected to the variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, the electric role drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric role 34a of the second starting port 34, and the main display unit 45. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 controls the drive of the various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable prize winning drive unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed. Further, if the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed.

Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a ball entering the general prize opening 32 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and a ball entering the first starting opening 33 is transmitted. If it is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is sent from the main control device 60, and if the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34 is specified, the payout of one game ball is sent. A prize ball command corresponding to this is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A firing control device 80 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 . The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met. Further, the operation handle 25 and the game ball firing button 26 are connected to the firing control device 80.

The audio emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the audio and light emission control device 90 controls the operation of various lamps 47, which are light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, the operation of the speaker 46, and controls the display control device 100. In addition, the performance operation button 24 is connected to the audio and light emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by the player at a specified timing, the audio and light emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, etc. to perform a game performance that reflects the operation.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the fluctuation time of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. , the presence or absence of a reach, the contents of the reach effect, the contents of the preview effect executed in each game round, etc. are grasped. In addition, in this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

Figure 208 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for the winning lottery, etc. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, the display settings of the main display unit 45, and the setting of the pattern display of the pattern display device 41. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to allocate the jackpot type such as a guaranteed jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. The reach random number counter C3 is used for reach judgment as to whether or not a reach is generated when the pattern sequence displayed on the pattern display device 41 is changed out of the normal range.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Further, an electric accessory release counter C4 is used for an electric accessory opening lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 includes a reserved information storage area 64b and a judgment process execution area 64c. The reserved information storage area 64b includes a first reserved area Ra and a second reserved area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the time of the ball entering are stored in chronological order in the first reserved area Ra of the reserved information storage area 64b. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the time of the ball entering are stored in chronological order in the second reserved area Rb of the reserved information storage area 64b.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be explained. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 1199, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, the updated value is stored in the first reserved area Ra of the reserved information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering, and when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, the updated value is stored in the second reserved area Rb of the reserved information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is determined to be a jackpot. It is determined whether or not. In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is determined by the value of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. As a result, the execution areas AE of the determination processing execution area 64c are moved in the order in which they were acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot.

Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the judgment process execution area 64c, and if the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, it determines the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the judgment process execution area 64c. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped on the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referenced.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. The game ball is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some combinations of symbols that have the possibility of forming a combination of symbols that correspond to a jackpot are stopped for some of the multiple symbol arrays displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and in that state, symbols are displayed variably in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined active line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 205(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach state. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

Furthermore, the reach includes a situation where, when a reach line is formed, the remaining pattern rows are displayed in a varying manner, and a reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the screen effect, and a reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or hiding the combination of patterns on which the reach line is formed. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before the reach display, the decision of whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character may be made using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the types of reach are normal reach (also called normal reach), super reach, which suggests that the possibility (expectation level) of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery is higher than normal reach, and hit lottery. There is a special reach that suggests that the probability (expectation level) of winning a jackpot in the lottery is higher than the super reach. The frequency with which Normal Reach, Super Reach, and Special Reach appear is determined to be relatively high or low. Specifically, the appearance frequency of super reach is lower than the appearance frequency of normal reach, and the appearance frequency of special reach is lower than the appearance frequency of super reach. The effects of Normal Reach, Super Reach, and Special Reach will be explained in detail later.

Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. The updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the holding information is stored at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the storage area 64b. The fluctuation stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 using the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra or the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the second reservation area Rb. By referring to the time table, the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b is determined.

Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be explained. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 in the electric role execution area 64e A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory opening lottery) is held to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, in the electric role playing area 64e, the win/fail table (the win/fail table for the electric role-playing object lottery) stored in the object lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role-playing object opening counter C4 are determined. The information is compared, and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS, and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 is the special value in the present invention. Corresponds to information. In addition, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb. Also called pending information.

Next, the hit/miss table will be explained. The hit/miss table is table data for checking against the jackpot random number counter C1 when a hit lottery is held based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has a low probability mode and a high probability mode set as lottery modes for the hit lottery, and when a hit lottery is held in the low probability mode, the hit/miss table for the low probability mode is referenced, and when a hit lottery is held in the high probability mode, the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced. The high probability mode (also called the high probability game state) is a game state that is started by winning a special jackpot, and refers to a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a hit lottery is relatively higher than in the low probability mode.

Figure 209 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/lose table. Figure 209(a) shows the win/lose table for low probability mode (for low probability mode), and Figure 209(b) shows the win/lose table for high probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 209(a), in the win/lose table for the low probability mode, five values from 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Among the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) is a miss. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 209(b), in the win/lose table for the high probability mode, 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Among the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 (16 to 1199) is a miss. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit/miss table for the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit/miss table for the high probability mode. However, as long as the probability of a jackpot being determined as a result of the winning lottery is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

Although not adopted in the win/lose table in this embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

"Small win" is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is opened/closed, but does not trigger a transition for both the lottery mode and the support mode. . On the other hand, "losing" is a win/fail result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and also does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode or support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be explained. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspects of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends (3) Control of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening/closing execution mode ends support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (1) opening and closing execution mode, a high frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is relatively high and low. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed multiple times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and each opening can be set to continue until 30 seconds have passed or until the number of balls entering the opening and closing door 36b reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and each opening can be set to continue until 0.2 seconds have passed or until the number of balls entering the opening and closing door 36b reaches 6.

When the player operates the operating handle 25, the game ball launching mechanism 81 is controlled to launch one game ball into the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 seconds. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is shorter than the game ball launch cycle. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode for the low-frequency winning mode, no game balls actually enter the game area. However, the game balls may be set to enter the game area PA even in the opening/closing execution mode for the low-frequency winning mode.

The number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened, the time limit for opening for one opening, and the number of balls that can be opened for one opening are arbitrary, so long as the frequency of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. Specifically, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed more frequently, the time limit for opening for one opening is longer, or the number of balls that can be opened for one opening is greater than in the low-frequency winning mode. To clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that balls do not actually enter the variable winning device 36.

The pachinko machine 10 has a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability winning/losing table as a winning/losing table, and a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is made using a high-probability winning/losing table as a winning/losing table. A low-probability mode can be set in which a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability win/fail table. As explained using FIG. 209, it is easier to win a jackpot when a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability win/fail table than when a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability win/fail table. There is a high probability that

In the pachinko machine 10, as a support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, the game balls continue to be launched into the game area PA in the same manner. When compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role opening lottery using the electric role opening counter C4. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening lottery is set higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Also, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric role 34a may be set longer when an electric role opening lottery is won than in the low-frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when an electric role release win is set is set to be greater than in the low-frequency support mode. Good too. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the electric accessory 34a is opened for a long time. In addition, in the case where the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a is opened, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is , may be set shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from when one electric accessory lottery is held until the next electric accessory lottery is held is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. It's okay.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of the ball landing in the second starting hole 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in the establishment of the conditions for obtaining special information.

In this embodiment, if the winning lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to allocate the jackpot type. The allocation of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as an allocation table in the allocation table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

Figure 210 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. Figure 210(a) shows the distribution table for the first starting port, and Figure 210(b) shows the distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referenced when a winning lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering the first starting port 33, and the distribution table for the second starting port is referenced when a winning lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering the second starting port 34.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. There are 16R regular jackpot, 8R regular jackpot, 16R regular jackpot, and 8R regular jackpot.

The 16R and 8R probability variable jackpots are jackpots in which the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is a high-frequency winning mode, the lottery mode for the winning lottery after the opening and closing execution mode ends (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "lottery mode") is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot is the number of times the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening and closing execution mode: 16 times (16 rounds) for the 16R probability variable jackpot and 8 times (8 rounds) for the 8R probability variable jackpot.

In the 16R normal jackpot and 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is It is a jackpot that the support mode after the end becomes the high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot is that the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is different, and the 16R normal jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R normal jackpot is 8 (8 rounds).

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39" correspond to a 16R probability variable jackpot, and "40 to 64" correspond to an 8R probability variable jackpot. "65-89" corresponds to the 16R regular jackpot, and "90-99" corresponds to the 8R regular jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the aspects of jackpots are diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R probability variable jackpot, followed by the 8R probability variable jackpot, the next highest, the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player in this way, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting hole in FIG. 210(b), the distribution table for the second starting hole has a 16R guaranteed jackpot and an 8R regular jackpot set as jackpot types based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34. In the distribution table for the second starting hole, of the jackpot type counter C2 values of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" corresponds to a 16R guaranteed jackpot, and "65 to 99" corresponds to an 8R regular jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won, the type of jackpot is distributed based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the second jackpot. This is different from the case where a jackpot is won based on the ball entering the starting hole 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

If the winning lottery results in a loss, the game will not switch to the open/close execution mode, and the lottery mode and support mode will not change. If the jackpot type is a 16-variable jackpot or an 8R variable jackpot, as explained above, the lottery mode after the open/close execution mode ends will be the high probability mode, but this high probability mode state will continue until the next time the jackpot is won in the winning lottery.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and determines the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped on the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referenced.

Next, a table for reach determination (hereinafter referred to as a reach determination table) will be described. The reach determination validity table is table data for comparing with the value of the reach random number counter C3 when determining whether or not a reach occurs based on the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Figure 211 is an explanatory diagram showing a hit/miss table for reach determination. As shown in Figure 211, in the hit/miss table for reach determination, 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as hit values for reach out of the reach random number counter C3 values from 0 to 399. And, of the values from 0 to 399, values other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 (20 to 399) are set as misses, that is, values that do not win reach. In other words, in a situation where a jackpot is not won in the winning lottery, the probability of winning reach is 1/20.

FIG. 212 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory lottery) used when executing the electric accessory lottery.

Figure 212 (a) shows a winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) used in the low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 212 (a), the winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values, 0 and 1, set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in a winning electric role opening. 464 values, from 2 to 465, are set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in a losing electric role opening. In other words, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the electric role opening is won in the low-frequency support mode, the electric role opening is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

Figure 212 (b) shows a winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) used in the high-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 212 (b), the winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) has 462 values from 0 to 461 set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in winning the electric role opening. Four values from 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in losing. In other words, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the electric role opening is won during the high-frequency support mode, the electric role opening is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning/losing table for the electric device opening lottery is set so that the high frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second starting hole 34 than the low frequency support mode.

<<5-3>> Electrical configuration of the audio/light emitting control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 213 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 (Figure 207) are omitted. The audio and light emission control board 91 provided in the audio and light emission control device 90 is equipped with an MPU 92. The MPU 92 is an element that incorporates a CPU, ROM 93, RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, etc. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, etc. The details of these will be described later.

RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in ROM 93 is executed. For example, a portion of the area of RAM 94 is provided with a various flag storage area 94a, various counter areas 94b, a lottery counter area 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into a single chip for MPU 92, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control device 60 and the production operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, as well as a display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 mediates the reading and writing of data by adjusting the timing of the MPU 102, video RAM 107, etc., and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols and pictures displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

《5-4》Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 shows the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that fluctuate and stop, the screen effect when a super reach or special reach occurs, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Processing is performed to display the background image that appears on the back side (rear side).

The background image will be explained first. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment displays a background image called a stage. A stage is one type of production mode that defines the production mode, and each stage has a moving image with a story.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, two types of stages are provided: character stages and non-character stages. Character stages are stages that correspond to warrior characters. Non-character stages are stages that do not correspond to warrior characters.

214 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a character stage. In the pachinko machine 10, four character stages corresponding to the warrior characters A to D described above are provided as character stages. Specifically, a room stage of the Pretty Warrior character shown in FIG. 214(a) is provided as a character stage corresponding to the warrior character A. This stage shows the Pretty Warrior character as warrior character A spending time in her room. In addition, a room stage of the Young Warrior character shown in FIG. 214(b) is provided as a character stage corresponding to the warrior character B. This stage shows the Young Warrior character as warrior character B spending time in his room. In addition, although not shown, a room stage of the warrior character C as a character stage corresponding to the warrior character C and a room stage of the warrior character D as a character stage corresponding to the warrior character D are provided.

That is, each stage corresponding to a character-based stage is associated with one warrior character, and a video image in which the associated warrior character appears is assigned. Note that each of the stages in the rooms of the warrior characters A to D is a production in which the warrior character who is the owner of the room appears, but this does not prevent other warrior characters from appearing in addition to the warrior character. Furthermore, as a modified example, a configuration may be adopted in which the associated warrior character does not appear in the moving image of each stage of the character-based stages. In short, in the pachinko machine 10, it is sufficient that one warrior character is internally linked to each stage that corresponds to the character-based stage, and whether or not the warrior character appears in the video of the stage is determined. It doesn't matter. In this embodiment, each stage corresponding to a character-based stage is associated with a warrior character added to a pattern that is displayed in a variable manner. The stage can be a character-based stage associated with a character unrelated to the warrior character. In this case, the number of character-related stages does not need to be limited to four, and may be any other number.

FIG. 215 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a non-character stage. In the pachinko machine 10, a countryside stage illustrated in FIG. 215(a) is provided as one of the non-character stages. This stage depicts a rural landscape. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10, a city stage illustrated in FIG. 215(b) is provided as another non-character stage. This stage depicts an urban landscape. In the pachinko machine 10, an ocean stage (not shown) and an everyone's stage (not shown) are prepared as other non-character stages. The ocean stage represents ocean landscapes. The everyone's stage shows how all warrior characters A to D appear. A non-character stage is a stage that does not support warrior characters, but it does not prevent only one warrior character from appearing or multiple warrior characters from appearing. In short, one warrior character is associated with a character stage, whereas no warrior character is associated with a non-character stage. In this embodiment, the number of non-character-related stages is four, but it may be replaced by another number.

In this embodiment, stage names such as "Pretty Warrior Character Room Stage" and "Rural Stage" are displayed for each stage as a character-related stage and each stage as a non-character-related stage. , Alternatively, each stage may have a configuration in which the stage name is not displayed. Alternatively, the stage name may be displayed for a predetermined period immediately after the stage is switched, and the stage name may be hidden after the predetermined period has elapsed.

In the pachinko machine 10, one stage is selected from among the character stages and the non-character stages, and the selected stage is displayed as the background image.

Next, we will explain the screen effects that occur when a super reach or special reach occurs. As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the types of reach available are normal reach, super reach, and special reach.

In this embodiment, a normal reach is a reach that does not involve switching of the screen presentation displayed on the symbol display device 41. A reach occurs when two of the three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 stop with the same symbol, and the third symbol changes at a slower speed than before, and the speed drops even further just before the third symbol stops. As a result, the player can have a sense of anticipation that the reels will stop as they are and become a jackpot. During the presentation of a normal reach, the reels may change to a super reach or special reach, or the reels may stop in a miss state where the symbols do not line up, and then restart, entering a reach again.

The super reach is a reach accompanied by switching of screen effects displayed on the symbol display device 41. In the case of a super reach, as in the normal reach, the screen effect changes after a reach occurs with two of the three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 stopping at the same symbol. The screen effect at this time is composed of a moving image in which one of the warrior characters specified from among the warrior characters A to D described above is the main character. Specifically, for example, the screen presentation is composed of moving images based on the daily life of the warrior character as the main character. A moving image based on the daily life of a warrior character is, for example, a moving image in which the warrior character is training, devising techniques, or meditating. The screen production is a production that does not involve a confrontation with an enemy character, which will be described later. After the completion of the performance, the arrangement of symbols in which each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has stopped is displayed.

In addition, the warrior character who becomes the main character of the screen effect that is displayed when a super reach occurs is one of the warrior characters A to D added to the fluctuatingly displayed symbol. As a modification, the character may be unrelated to the warrior characters A to D added to the symbols displayed in a variable manner. However, the warrior character who becomes the main character of the screen production displayed when a super reach occurs matches one of the warrior characters associated with each stage of the character-based stages.

A special reach is a reach that involves a change in the screen presentation displayed on the symbol display device 41. In the case of a special reach, as with a normal reach, a reach occurs when two of the three symbol columns Z1 to Z3 stop with the same symbol, and then the screen presentation changes. The screen presentation at this time is composed of moving images with a warrior character selected from the warrior characters A to D described above as the protagonist. In more detail, the screen presentation is composed of a combat presentation (hereinafter also referred to as a battle presentation) in which the warrior character as the protagonist faces off against an enemy character, and a result announcement presentation that announces whether the warrior character has won or lost.

The battle performance is performed before notifying the player whether the outcome will be advantageous to the player (for example, winning a jackpot in a winning lottery) or unfavorable (for example, losing in a winning lottery). This is a performance (suggestive performance) that suggests to the player whether the result will be advantageous or disadvantageous. The result announcement performance is a performance that notifies the player of whether the result is an advantageous result or a disadvantageous result, depending on whether the warrior character has won or lost. Note that in this embodiment, the result announcement performance is a so-called dead or dead, where if the warrior character wins in the battle performance, the warrior character will survive, and if the warrior character is defeated, the warrior character will die.・This is a performance of Alive. After the end of the result announcement performance, the arrangement of the symbols in which each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has stopped is displayed.

Figure 216 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a battle presentation and a result notification presentation. Figure 216(a) shows an example of a battle presentation, Figure 216(b) shows an example of a victory presentation as a result notification presentation, and Figure 216(c) shows an example of a defeat presentation as a result notification presentation. The battle presentation shown in Figure 216(a) displays on the pattern display device 41 an image (moving image) of a confrontation between a beautiful girl warrior character as warrior character A and a monster as an enemy character. However, the battle presentation may be in other forms.

The victory effect shown in FIG. 216(b) causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image in which the warrior character A is happy with the victory. However, the victory presentation as the result presentation may be in other forms.

The defeat effect shown in FIG. 216(c) causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image in which the warrior character A has died. However, the defeat presentation as the result announcement presentation may be in other forms.

In addition, the warrior character who becomes the main character of the screen effect that is displayed when a special reach occurs is one of the warrior characters A to D added to the fluctuatingly displayed symbols. As a modification, the character may be unrelated to the warrior characters A to D added to the symbols displayed in a variable manner. However, the warrior character who becomes the main character of the screen production displayed when a special reach occurs matches one of the warrior characters associated with each stage of the character-based stages.

The screen effects (battle effects) executed during the above-mentioned special reach and the screen effects executed during the super reach (effects without battle) display the previously explained moving images. The configuration may be such that the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 output the sound and light accompanying the moving image.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the result of the reach determination is that a super reach will occur in a game round, or if a special reach will occur, a screen presentation unique to each of the super reach and special reach will be displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 in that game round, as described above.

It can also be said as follows. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, one warrior character is linked to each character-based stage, and in a play round in that character-based stage, two types of reach effects can be executed, with the linked warrior character as the protagonist. One of the two types of effects is a battle effect in which the warrior character as the protagonist faces off against an enemy character, and the other is an effect that does not involve a battle.

FIG. 217 shows the display mode of the fluctuating and stopping symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (symbols), the screen effect when super reach or special reach occurs (hereinafter also referred to as special reach screen effect), and the stage as a background image. FIG. In the figure, a plurality of game rounds are shown in which the game results progress in the order of non-reach/miss, normal reach/miss, and super reach/miss. A reach non-occurrence/miss is a game round in which a jackpot has not been won in a winning lottery, and a reach does not occur. Normal reach/missing is a game round in which no jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and a reach occurs, and the type of reach that occurs is normal reach. A super reach/miss is a game round in which a jackpot is not won in a winning lottery, but a reach occurs, and the type of reach that occurs is a super reach.

The stage as a background image is the period from the starting point t1 to the point t2 (hereinafter referred to as the t1-t2 period) in the game round where reach does not occur / miss, the game time when normal reach / miss, and the game time when super reach / miss. ) will be displayed. Here, for example, it is assumed that a character-based stage corresponding to warrior character A is displayed. During the period from point t2 to end point t3 (hereinafter referred to as t2-t3 period) in the super reach/miss game round, the stage as a background image is not displayed.

The special reach screen effect is not displayed during play times where a reach does not occur or is a miss, and during play times where a normal reach occurs or is a miss. On the other hand, during play times where a reach does not occur or is a miss, and during play times where a normal reach occurs or is a miss, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed. Specifically, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 that change and stop are displayed. As a result, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 that change and stop are displayed superimposed on the top surface (front side) of the stage as the background image.

During the t1-t2 period of the super reach/miss game round, the special reach screen effect is not displayed. On the other hand, during the t1-t2 period, symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed. Specifically, symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that fluctuate and stop are displayed. As a result, the fluctuating and stopping symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed superimposed on the top side (front side) of the stage as a background image.

A special reach screen effect is displayed during the t2-t3 period of the super reach/miss game round. On the other hand, during the t2-t3 period, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a reduced size. As a result, instead of the stage as a background image, a special reach screen effect will be displayed when a super reach occurs.

In the play round following the Super Reach Miss (assuming here that the Reach does not occur and is a Miss), the stage as the background image will continue to be the same as the previous stage that was hidden, and the Special Reach screen effect will not be displayed. Note that the display modes of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the Special Reach screen effect, and the stage in the Super Reach Big Win, Special Reach Miss, and Special Reach Big Win play rounds are the same as the display modes of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the Special Reach screen effect, and the stage in the Super Reach Miss play round shown in FIG. 217.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in a game turn in which a super reach or special reach occurs, if the stage before switching to the special reach screen presentation is a character-based stage, a warrior character that matches the warrior character linked to that character-based stage appears as the main character in the special reach screen presentation. For example, if a super reach or special reach occurs in a game turn in which the stage is a character-based stage corresponding to warrior character A, the screen presentation displayed in these reaches will feature warrior character A as the main character.

If the stage before switching to the special reach screen effect is a non-character stage, and a super reach or special reach occurs during a game round, the warrior character who appears as the main character in the special reach screen effect is determined randomly by lottery. Alternatively, if the stage before switching to the special reach screen effect is a non-character stage, the special reach screen effect may be an effect unrelated to a warrior character.

Figure 218 is an explanatory diagram that shows a schematic diagram of stage transitions executed in the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 performs gameplay by repeating stage transitions between character-based stages and non-character-based stages. Gameplay also performs stage transitions within character-based stages and non-character-based stages. These stage transitions are performed based on game results such as the results of a winning lottery, whether or not a reach has occurred, and the type of reach if a reach has occurred, as well as on hold information.

FIG. 219 is an explanatory diagram showing a mode of stage transition in character-related stages. In FIG. 219, the game result of the game round "no reach/miss" corresponds to a game round in which no jackpot has been won in the winning lottery, and no reach has occurred. The game result of a game round is "Normal reach/miss" corresponds to the case where a normal reach occurs in a game round where the winning lottery result is a losing result. The game result of a game round is "super reach/miss" corresponds to the case where a super reach occurs in a game round that resulted in a winning lottery result. The game result of a game round is "special reach/lost", which corresponds to the case where a special reach occurs in a game round that resulted in a winning lottery result. A "big hit" corresponds to a game round in which a jackpot is won in a winning lottery, and it does not matter whether or not a reach occurs and the type of reach.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the game is in a character stage and the game result of the game is a miss or no reach, the stage of that game continues (maintains) and does not transition to another stage. In other words, if there is no reach, a so-called complete miss, the stage does not transition.

Also, when the game is in a character-based stage and the game result of a game is a normal reach/miss, the stage in that game round continues and no stage transition takes place. Game rounds that result in a normal reach/miss occur frequently, so if the stage were to be transitioned every time this occurs, it would be difficult for the player to understand the storyline of the stage, and so in this embodiment, no stage transition takes place. Alternatively, a stage transition may take place when the game is in a character-based stage and the game result of a game round is a normal reach/miss. For example, a transition may be made from one stage within a character-based stage to another, or a transition may take place to a non-character-based stage.

Even if the game is in a character stage and the game result of the game is a super reach or miss, the stage in that game round continues and no stage transition is performed (i.e., the stage transition is restricted). As explained above, the screen presentation in the game round in which the super reach occurs is a moving image based on the daily life of the warrior character, and is not a dead or alive presentation like the game round in which the special reach occurs. Therefore, since a moving image in which the warrior character dies is not displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, even if the warrior character appears on the stage in the next game round, the player will not feel any discomfort. For this reason, in this embodiment, in the game round in which the game is in a character stage and a super reach occurs in a game round in which the winning lottery results in a miss, the stage in that game round continues and no stage transition is performed. Note that instead of this configuration, a configuration in which a stage transition is performed when the game is in a character stage and the game result of the game round is a super reach or miss may be used. For example, you may transition from one character-based stage to another, or you may transition to a non-character-based stage.

If the game is in a character-related stage and the game result of the game round is special reach or miss, the stage will be shifted from the character-based stage to the non-character-based stage at the end of the game round (however, there are exceptions). ). As explained earlier, the screen effect in the game round in which the special reach occurred is a dead or alive effect, so in the game round in which the result was a loss in the winning lottery, the display screen of the symbol display device 41 A moving image in which a warrior character dies is displayed at 41a (see FIG. 216(c)). For this reason, if the stage in the game round is continued and the stage is not changed, the player will be able to watch a video in which the deceased warrior character appears in the next game round as if nothing happened. There was a risk that I would feel uncomfortable watching it. In order to solve this problem, in this embodiment, if a special reach occurs in a game that is in a character-related stage and has a losing result in the winning lottery, the character-related stage is moved from the current character-related stage. The structure is such that the stage transitions to a non-character-related stage that is not directly related to the warrior character corresponding to the stage. As a result, after a player views a video of a warrior character dying in a character stage, the character stage corresponding to the dead warrior character continues, and the character stage corresponding to the deceased warrior character is continued as if nothing had happened. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling a sense of incongruity due to his/her appearance. Therefore, according to this configuration, the storyline of the performance in which the characters appear is ensured, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, there are exceptions to the configuration of transitioning from a character stage to a non-character stage when the game result of a game is a special reach miss in a character stage. Specifically, when the game result of a game is a special reach miss in a character stage, if there is information indicating that the game is a super reach or a special reach in the reserved information at the end of the game, the game does not transition to a non-character stage, but performs a different process. That is, when the game result of a game is a special reach miss in a character stage, if there is information indicating that the game is a super reach or a special reach in the reserved information at the end of the game, the game performs the process of transitioning from a character stage to a non-character stage, as described above. Note that the above-mentioned super reach does not matter whether or not a jackpot is won in a lottery. In other words, the super reach includes a super reach miss and a super reach big win. The above-mentioned special reach does not matter whether or not a jackpot is won in a lottery. In other words, special reach includes special reach miss and special reach big win.

If the game is in a character-type stage and the game result of the game round is special reach or miss, if there is information indicating that it corresponds to special reach in the pending information at the end of the game round, the game round The configuration is such that the stage continues and no stage transition is performed (Exception 1). In other words, by restricting stage transition, the configuration is such that the stage in the relevant game round is continued. According to this configuration, a moving image in which a warrior character dies is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 in the special reach screen performance, and at the end of a game round, a stage transition is not performed and Screen effects corresponding to the character stages where the deceased warrior character appears will continue to be displayed. As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is basically in the character stage, and if the game result of the game is special reach or miss, the stage transition to the non-character stage is possible. As a result, a dead warrior character will not appear as the main character in the next game stage. Nevertheless, according to the configuration of Exception 1, the dead warrior character will appear on the stage of the next game round without stage transition. Looking back, in the case of Exception 1, there is information indicating that it falls under special reach in the pending information at the end of the relevant game round, so the degree of advantage for the player (expectation level of jackpot) is expensive. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a player realizes that a stage transition will not be made in the case of a special reach/miss in a game round in a character stage state, Then, when the pending information is digested, by recognizing the production where an advantageous result is expected, specifically the battle production, it is possible to know that an advantageous result can be expected if the stage transition is not performed. can. In particular, since the above-mentioned battle performance executed when the pending information is digested is performed by the same warrior character as the previously defeated warrior character, it is difficult for the player to view the battle performance performed by the previously defeated warrior character. You can watch it one more time and avenge your defeat by winning (winning the jackpot). For this reason, the player's emotional attachment to the performance increases. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 having the configuration of exception 1, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game is in a character stage and the game result of a game round is special reach/miss, the pending information at the end of the game round indicates that it corresponds to super reach. If there is information indicating the special reach/miss of the game, the game is configured to move to a character stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the warrior character who appeared in the special reach/miss performance of the game round (Exception 2).

According to the configuration of exception 2, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a moving image of a warrior character dying in the screen performance of the special reach, and at the end of the game round, a screen performance corresponding to a character stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the deceased warrior character is displayed. In the case of exception 2, the reserved information at the end of the game round contains information indicating that it corresponds to a super reach, so the player is relatively advantageous. The super reach is less advantageous than the special reach, but more advantageous than the normal reach, so the player is relatively advantageous. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, when the player recognizes that the game round has ended and the character stage corresponding to the warrior character other than the deceased warrior character has been moved to, the player will have a sense of expectation that a favorable result will come. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 having the configuration of exception 2 can make the player have a sense of expectation that a relatively favorable result will come, and can improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, new characters (= warrior characters other than the deceased warrior character) appear after the stage transition or when the reserved information corresponding to the super reach is consumed, so the player can quickly become familiar with the new character even if it is different from the character that has appeared up until that point, and empathy with the presentation increases. This can further increase the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned exceptions 1 and 2 are provided as exceptions to the rule that when the game is in a character stage and the game result of the game is a special reach or miss, the stage transitions from the character stage to a non-character stage. However, as a modified example, it is also possible to provide only the above-mentioned exception 1 and exclude exception 2.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the machine is in a character-based stage and a jackpot is won in a winning lottery for a game round, the stage in that game round continues and no stage transition occurs, regardless of whether a reach occurs or the type of reach if a reach occurs. Since players often wish to continue playing at the same stage as when they won the jackpot, as a sign of good luck, when they win a jackpot in a winning lottery, the machine is configured not to transition to a stage. Note that instead of this configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which a stage transition occurs when the machine is in a character-based stage and a jackpot is won in a winning lottery. For example, a transition may be made from one character-based stage to another, or a transition may be made to a non-character-based stage.

FIG. 220 is an explanatory diagram showing a mode of stage transition in a non-character stage. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the game is in a non-character stage and the game result of a game round is no reach occurrence or miss, the stage in the game round is continued and no stage transition is performed. . In other words, in the case of a so-called complete miss, in which no reach occurs, the stage transition is not performed.

Also, even if the game is in a non-character stage and the game result of a game is a normal reach/miss, the stage in that game round continues and no stage transition takes place. Game rounds that result in a normal reach/miss occur frequently, so if the stage were to be transitioned every time this occurs, it would be difficult for the player to understand the storyline of the stage, and so in this embodiment, no stage transition takes place. Alternatively, a stage transition may be made when the game is in a non-character stage and the game result of a game round is a normal reach/miss. For example, a transition may be made from one stage to another within a non-character stage, or a transition may be made to a character stage.

If it is in a non-character type stage and the game result of the game round is super reach/miss, at the end of the game round, it will correspond to the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to the super reach/miss of the game round. The structure was designed to transition to a character-based stage. As explained earlier, the screen production in the game episode where Super Reach occurred was a moving image based on the daily life of a warrior character, and like the game episode where Special Reach occurred, it was a video of Dead or Alive. It's not staged. Therefore, since a moving image in which a warrior character dies is not displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, even if the warrior character appears on the stage in the next game round, the player will not be affected at all. I never feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in this embodiment, if a super reach occurs in a game that is in a non-character stage and results in a winning lottery, a character corresponding to the warrior character that appeared in the production of the super reach occurs. The configuration was designed to move to the system stage.

If it is on a non-character stage and the game result of the game round is a special reach/miss, at the end of the game round, a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach/miss of the game round. (However, there are exceptions). As explained earlier, the screen effect in the game round in which the special reach occurred is a dead or alive effect, so in the game round in which the result was a loss in the winning lottery, the display screen of the symbol display device 41 A moving image of a warrior character dying is displayed at 41a. For this reason, if the configuration is such that the stage transitions to the character stage corresponding to the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach/miss of the game round, the player will be aware that the dead warrior character will be There was a risk that I would feel a sense of discomfort as I watched a video that appeared during the game episode as if nothing had happened. In order to solve this problem, in this embodiment, if a special reach occurs in a game round that is in a non-character stage and results in a winning lottery, when a special reach occurs, at the end of the game round, The structure is such that the stage transitions to a character-based stage that corresponds to a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the special reach/miss performance. As a result, after a player views a video in which a warrior character dies in a non-character stage, the player can move to the character stage corresponding to the dead warrior character and pretend that nothing happened to the dead warrior character. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable, such as appearing in a movie. Therefore, according to this configuration, the storyline of the performance in which the characters appear is ensured, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As mentioned above, there are exceptions to the configuration in which, when the game is in a non-character stage and the game result of a game round is a special reach-miss, the game moves to a character stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the effect corresponding to the special reach-miss of that game round. Specifically, when the game is in a non-character stage and the game result of a game round is a special reach-miss, if there is information in the reserved information at the end of that game round indicating that it corresponds to a special reach, the game moves to a character stage corresponding to the warrior character that appeared in the effect corresponding to the special reach-miss of that game round (Exception A). Note that the above special reach does not matter whether or not it results in a jackpot in a lottery. In other words, the special reach includes a special reach-miss and a special reach-jackpot.

According to the configuration of exception A, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a moving image of a warrior character dying in the screen performance of a special reach in a non-character stage, and at the end of the game round, a screen performance corresponding to the character stage in which the dead warrior character appears is displayed. As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in principle, when the game result of a game round is a special reach miss in a non-character stage, the stage transition is made to a character stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the warrior character who appeared in the performance corresponding to the special reach miss of the game round, and the dead warrior character does not appear as the main character in the stage of the next game round. Nevertheless, according to the configuration of exception A, the dead warrior character will appear in the stage of the next game round. Looking back, in the case of exception A, the reserved information at the end of the game round contains information indicating that it corresponds to a special reach, so the degree of advantage for the player is high. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, when a special reach miss occurs in a game in which the non-character stage is in effect, the player recognizes that the dead warrior character will appear in the stage of the next game as if nothing had happened, and recognizes the performance that is expected to produce a favorable result, specifically the battle performance, when the reserved information is subsequently consumed, and thus knows that the appearance of the dead warrior character in the stage of the next game can be expected to produce a favorable result. In particular, since the battle performance executed when the reserved information is consumed is performed by the same warrior character as the previously defeated warrior character, the player can watch the battle performance by the previously defeated warrior character once more, and can avenge his defeat by winning. This increases the player's emotional attachment to the performance. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 having the configuration of exception A can make the player feel a sense of expectation that a favorable result will come, and can increase the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the machine is in a non-character stage and a jackpot is won in a winning lottery for a game round, the stage in that game round continues and no stage transition occurs, regardless of whether a reach occurs or the type of reach if a reach occurs. When a player wins a jackpot in a winning lottery, the player often wants to continue playing at the same stage as when the jackpot was won, as a sign of good luck, so a stage transition is not performed. Alternatively, a stage transition may be performed when the machine is in a non-character stage and a jackpot is won in a winning lottery. For example, a transition may be made from one non-character stage to another, or a transition may be made to a character stage.

<<5-5>> Various processes executed in the main control device:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. First, the processing executed in the main control device 60 will be described, and then the processing executed in the sound and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance each game round, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes will be explained next. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power outage signal, but a description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sp0101, reading processing for the various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, it reads the states of various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and stores detection information (ball entry detection information). After that, the process advances to step Sp0102.

In step Sp0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Sp0103.

In step Sp0103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric role opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric role opening counter C4, and when each counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0104. Note that the value of the variable type counter CS is updated in the normal processing (FIG. 225) described later.

In step Sp0104, a ball entry process for the starting hole is executed in association with the ball entering the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34. Details of the ball entry process for the starting hole in step Sp0104 will be described later. After executing step Sp0104, proceed to step Sp0105.

In step Sp0105, a through ball entry process is executed when the ball enters the through gate 35. Details of the through ball entry process in step Sp0105 will be described later. After executing step Sp0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Starting ball entry processing>
Next, the ball-scoring process for the starting hole will be described. The ball-scoring process for the starting hole is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for the timer interrupt process (FIG. 221: Sp0104).

FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the starting port. In step Sp0201, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. In step Sp0201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sp0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0202, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. After that, the process advances to step Sp0203.

In step Sp0203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 33. Then, proceed to step Sp0204.

In step Sp0204, the start pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start pending number RaN), which is the value stored in the pending number memory area of the first pending area Ra, is read out, and the first start pending number RaN is set as the target for processing described below. The first start pending number RaN indicates the number of balls pending based on balls entering the first start port 33. Then, proceed to step Sp0209.

If it is determined in step Sp0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting hole 33 (Sp0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0205, where it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second starting hole 34 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting hole 34.

In step Sp0205, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sp0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0206, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. After that, the process advances to step Sp0207. On the other hand, in step Sp0205, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (Sp0205: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

In step Sp0207, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34. Then, proceed to step Sp0208.

In step Sp0208, the starting pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second starting pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the second holding area Rb, is read, and the second starting pending number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second starting hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on balls entering the second starting port 34. After that, the process advances to step Sp0209.

In step Sp0209, it is determined whether the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sp0204 or step Sp0208 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step Sp0209, if the start pending number N is not less than the upper limit (Sp0209: NO), the ball entry process for this start hole is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sp0209, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit (Sp0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0210, where 1 is added to the start pending number N of the corresponding holding area, and then the process proceeds to step Sp0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reservation number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reservation number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. After that, the process advances to step Sp0212.

In step Sp0212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sp0103 (FIG. 221), and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS updated in the normal process (FIG. 225) described later. is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations added by 1 in step Sp0210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, each value of the updated jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS is updated. , is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN to which 1 was added in step Sp0210. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the updated jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS is It is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reservation number RbN to which 1 was added in step Sp0210. After executing step Sp0212, the process advances to step Sp0213.

In step Sp0213, a destination determination process is executed. The advance determination process determines the success or failure determination result of the winning lottery (lottery result) based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS. , the determination of the type of jackpot, the determination of the presence or absence of a reach, the determination of the fluctuation time, etc. are performed before the pending information becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing step Sp0213, the process advances to step Sp0214.

In step Sp0214, a process for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the result of the first determination process executed based on the information (hold information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS is set as a hold command. The determination result of the first determination process includes the result of the hit lottery described above (also called the presence or absence of a jackpot), the type of jackpot, the occurrence or absence of a reach, and the fluctuation time.

The hold command indicates the occurrence of a ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the ball entering. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to check the pending information before it becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 225: Step Sp0503) of normal processing to be described later.

In addition, when the audio emission control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the audio emission control device 90 holds the display in the first starting port holding area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change in accordance with the increase in the number of objects. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first starting opening holding area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holding symbols. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the audio emission control device 90 holds the display in the second starting port holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change in accordance with the increase in the number of objects. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second starting opening holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holding symbols.

After executing step Sp0214, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<First judgment process>
Next, the destination determination process will be explained. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ball entry process for the starting port (FIG. 222: Sp0213).

FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the preliminary determination process is based on the pending information, and determines whether the winning lottery is correct or not, determining the type of jackpot, determining whether a reach has occurred, etc., based on the pending information. This is a process that is executed before becoming a lottery target.

In step Sp0301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 222) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entering before the current ball entering is read from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether there is a probability-variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entering. The lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined by determining whether or not there is a winning lottery in the falling lottery.

In step Sp0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round, (Sp0302: YES), the process advances to step Sp0303, and the winning lottery table is stored. The low probability mode validity table (FIG. 209(a)) stored in the area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sp0305, and as a result of referring to the low probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Sp0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery for this ball entry is executed as a game round (Sp0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0304, where the winning/losing table for the high probability mode (Fig. 209(b)) stored in the winning/losing table storage area 63a is referenced. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0305, where, as a result of referring to the winning/losing table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step Sp0305, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot (Sp0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0306, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sp0307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, if the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, refer to the first starting port distribution table. , if the ball is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the second starting port distribution table is referred to. After executing step Sp0307, the process advances to step Sp0308.

In step Sp0308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that has been grasped this time corresponds to a variable probability jackpot. In step Sp0308, if it is determined that it corresponds to a probability variable jackpot (Sp0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0309, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, in step Sp0308, if it is determined that the probability variable jackpot is not supported (Sp0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0310, and normal jackpot information is stored in the previous judgment processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sp0315, which will be described later.

In step Sp0305, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to a jackpot (Sp0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0311, and the value is stored in the memory area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. The stored value of the reach random number counter C3 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sp0312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sp0313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 that has been grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

In step Sp0313, if it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach (Sp0313: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0314, and the ready-to-reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the process advances to step Sp0315. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp0313 that the reach occurrence is not supported (Sp0313: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sp0315.

In step Sp0315, a variation time advance determination process is executed in which the variation time is determined first. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting port in the ball entering process for the starting port (FIG. 222), the judgment result of the winning lottery determined up to step Sp0315, and Based on the determination result of the presence or absence of reach, the process of determining the fluctuation time is performed. In this process, the variation time is determined by the same process as the variation time setting process (FIG. 230), which will be described later. After executing step Sp0315, the first judgment process is ended.

<Incoming ball processing for through ball>
Next, the entry process for a through ball will be explained. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 221: Sp0105).

Figure 224 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for through play. In step Sp0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35. If it is determined in step Sp0401 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sp0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0402, where it is determined whether or not the number of reserved role objects SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). The number of reserved role objects SN is a value indicating the number of balls that have entered the through gate 35 that are reserved for the purpose of performing the electric role object opening lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved role objects SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sp0401: NO), this ball entry process for through play is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sp0402 that the number of reserved reels SN is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (Sp0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0403, where 1 is added to the number of reserved reels SN. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0404.

In step Sp0404, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step Sp0103 (FIG. 221) is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the electric accessory holding area 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the through ball entry process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp0402 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is not less than the upper limit (Sp0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the ball entry process for through is terminated without storing the value of the electric reel opening counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal processing is a processing that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state (hereinafter, also referred to as "power-on"). In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

Figure 225 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sp0501, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, the initial settings of each control device associated with power-on and the validity of data stored in RAM 64 are determined. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0502.

In step Sp0502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process advances to step Sp0503.

In step Sp0503, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sp0502, the command set in the timer interrupt processing, or the previously executed normal processing, etc., is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, if commands related to production such as a startup command, a variation command, a type command, a hold command, etc. are set, they are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step Sp0503, the process advances to step Sp0504.

In step Sp0504, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Sp0505.

In step Sp0505, the winning ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sp0506. In step Sp0506, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. The game round control process includes a winning lottery, setting the variable display of the patterns by the pattern display device 41, and display control of the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step Sp0506, the process proceeds to step Sp0507.

In step Sp0507, a game state transition process is executed to transition the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state transitions to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, proceed to step Sp0508.

In step Sp0508, an electric support process is executed to control the drive of the electric role 34a provided in the second starting port 34. In the electric support process, a determination is made as to whether or not to open the electric role 34a. The details of the electric support process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0509.

In step Sp0509, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step Sp0503). That is, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived. In step Sp0509, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Sp0509: NO), in step Sp0510 and step Sp0511, until the next normal process execution timing is reached. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sp0510, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Sp0511, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, in step Sp0509, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Sp0509: YES), the process returns to step Sp0503 and each process from step Sp0503 to step Sp0508 is executed. Execute.

Note that the execution time of each process from step Sp0503 to step Sp0508 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Play Control Processing>
Next, the game play control process will be described. The game play control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 225: Sp0506).

FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the game time control process. In step Sp0601, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

If it is determined in step Sp0601 that the opening and closing execution mode is in progress (Sp0601: YES), the game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes in step Sp0602 and onwards. In other words, if the opening and closing execution mode is in progress, a game round will not be started regardless of whether a ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp0601 that the opening and closing execution mode is not in progress (Sp0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0602.

In step Sp0602, it is determined whether the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether either one of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the special figure variation display flag in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The flag during special symbol fluctuation display is turned ON when a fluctuation display is started for either the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, and is turned OFF when the fluctuation display ends.

In step Sp0602, if it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is not in variable display (Sp0602: NO), the process advances to step Sp0603.

In step Sp0603, a change start process is executed to start the change display in the special chart unit 37 and the change display in the pattern display device 41. The change start process will be described in detail later. After executing step Sp0603, this game play control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sp0602, if it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display (Sp0602: YES), the process advances to step Sp0604.

In step Sp0604, a fluctuation end process is executed to end the fluctuation display in the special symbol unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41. Note that details of the fluctuation end processing will be described later. After executing step Sp0604, the present game round control process is ended.

<Change start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 226: Sp0603).

Figure 227 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Sp0701, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN exceeds "0". If the total reserved number CRN is "0" or less, this means that the start reserved number is "0" for both the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. Therefore, if it is determined in step Sp0701 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" or less (Sp0701: NO), this fluctuation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp0701 that the total reserved number CRN exceeds "0" (Sp0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0702.

In step Sp0702, a hold information shift process is executed to set the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation, and the process proceeds to step Sp0703. Details of the pending information shift process will be described later.

In step Sp0703, a winning determination process including a process when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is performed. Details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sp0703, the process advances to step Sp0704.

In step Sp0704, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round, in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the occurrence of a reach, etc. This is the process. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sp0704, the process advances to step Sp0705.

In step Sp0705, a variation command is set. The variation command includes whether the current game round is related to pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, or whether it is related to the pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. It includes information indicating whether the information is related to hold information, as well as information on whether reach occurs or not, and information on the variable time set in step Sp0706. After executing step Sp0705, the process advances to step Sp0706.

In step Sp0706, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and the result of the allocation determination. In other words, the type command includes, as information on the type of jackpot, information on a 16R special jackpot, information on an 8R special jackpot, information on a 16R regular jackpot, information on an 8R regular jackpot, or information on the result of a losing lottery.

The variation command and type command set in step Sp0705 and step Sp0706 are sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in step Sp0503 of normal processing (Figure 225). The sound and light emission control device 90 determines the content of the presentation for that game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the presentation is executed. After executing step Sp0706, proceed to step Sp0707.

In step Sp0707, the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round out of the first pattern display section 37a and the second pattern display section 37b is caused to start displaying a changing pattern. Specifically, if the second pattern display section flag in RAM 64 is not ON, the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first pattern display section 37a and a changing display is started, and if the second pattern display section flag is ON, the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second pattern display section 37b and a changing display is started. After executing step Sp0707, proceed to step Sp0708.

In step Sp0708, the special figure variation display flag stored in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sp0708, this fluctuation start process is ended.

<Pending information shift processing>
Next, pending information shift processing will be explained. The pending information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 227: Sp0702).

FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing pending information shift processing. In step Sp0801, it is determined whether the holding area that is the processing target for executing the holding information shift process is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, the reservation information stored earliest among the reservation information stored in chronological order in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 208) (the reservation stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra) information) is the earliest stored reservation information (stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb) among the reservation information chronologically stored in the second reservation area Rb (FIG. 208). If it is stored in the reservation area before the reservation information (reservation information), it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the earliest among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb is the first among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb in chronological order. If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sp0801, the reservation information can be processed in the order in which it is stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

If it is determined in step Sp0801 that the holding area to be processed is the first holding area Ra (step Sp0801: YES), holding information shift processing for the first holding area in steps Sp0802 to Sp0807 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sp0801, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step Sp0801: NO ), the reservation information shift process for the second reservation area in steps Sp0808 to Step Sp0813 is executed.

In step Sp0802, the first start reserved number RaN in the first reserved area Ra is subtracted by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sp0803, where the total reserved number CRN is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0804. In step Sp0804, the data stored in the first area of the first reserved area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0805.

In step Sp0805, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sp0805, the process advances to step Sp0806.

In step Sp0806, if the second pattern display section flag in the various flags storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second pattern display section flag is information for identifying whether the current variable display is to start from the first pattern display section 37a or the second pattern display section 37b. Then, proceed to step Sp0807.

In step Sp0807, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for the audio/light emission control device 90, which is the sub-control device, to recognize that the data of the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, including information that the reserved area that is the subject of the current data shift corresponds to the first reserved area Ra, i.e., corresponds to the first starting port 33, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the audio/light emission control device 90. After that, this reserved information shift process is terminated. The shift command set in step Sp0807 is sent to the audio/light emission control device 90 in step Sp0503 in the normal process (FIG. 225).

In step Sp0801, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (Sp0801: NO), step Proceed to Sp0808.

In step Sp0808, the second start pending number RbN in the second pending area Rb is decremented by 1. Then, proceed to step Sp0809. In step Sp0809, the total pending number CRN is decremented by 1, and proceed to step Sp0810, where the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, proceed to step Sp0811.

In step Sp0811, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sp0811, the process advances to step Sp0812.

In step Sp0812, if the second symbol display section flag in the various flags storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, the state is maintained. Then, proceed to step Sp0813.

In step Sp0813, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for making the audio/light emission control device 90, which is the sub-control device, recognize that a shift of data in the reserved area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, which includes information that the reserved area that is the subject of this data shift corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, i.e., corresponds to the second starting port 34, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the audio/light emission control device 90. After that, this reserved information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sp0813 is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sp0503 in normal processing (FIG. 225). Based on the received shift command, the audio light emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device for changing the display in the second starting opening holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holding pieces. Send to 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second starting opening holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holding symbols.

<Hit detection process>
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 227: Sp0703).

FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process. In step Sp0901, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sp0901 that the mode is high probability mode (Sp0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0902, where a win/loss determination is made by referring to the win/loss table for high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/loss table for high probability mode shown in FIG. 209(b). Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0904.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp0901 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Sp0901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0903, where a win/loss determination is made by referring to the win/loss table for the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/loss table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 209(a). Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0904.

In step Sp0904, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in step Sp0902 or step Sp0903 is a jackpot win. In step Sp0904, if the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Sp0904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0905.

In step Sp0905, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sp0905 that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Sp0905: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0906, where an allocation determination is made by referring to the allocation table for the first starting hole (see FIG. 210(a)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of a 16R special jackpot, the numerical range of an 8R special jackpot, the numerical range of a 16R normal jackpot, or the numerical range of an 8R normal jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp0905 that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sp0905: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0907, where the allocation determination is made by referring to the allocation table for the second starting hole (see FIG. 210(b)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of a 16R special jackpot or the numerical range of an 8R normal jackpot. After executing the processing of step Sp0906 or step Sp0907, the process proceeds to step Sp0908.

In step Sp0908, the flag (jackpot flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot assigned in step Sp0906 or step Sp0907 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R special jackpot, the 16R special jackpot flag is turned ON, if it is an 8R special jackpot, the 8R special jackpot flag is turned ON, if it is a 16R regular jackpot, the 16R regular jackpot flag is turned ON, and if it is an 8R regular jackpot, the 8R regular jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step Sp0908, proceed to step Sp0909.

In step Sp0909, a process for setting a stop result for a jackpot is executed. Specifically, this process is for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b when the variable display ends in the current game round in which a jackpot is won. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for a jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63f (Fig. 207), address information for the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot allocated in step Sp0906 or step Sp0907 is obtained, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step Sp0909, the hit determination process ends.

In step Sp0904, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sp0902 or step Sp0903 is not a jackpot (Sp0904: NO), the process advances to step Sp0910 and refers to the reach determination table to determine whether reach occurs in the game round. Make a determination as to whether or not. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as a reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 207). Determine whether the value matches the current value. After that, the process advances to step Sp0911.

In step Sp0911, if the result of the reach determination in step Sp0910 is that a reach will occur in that game round (Sp0911: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0912, where the reach occurrence flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flags storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sp0912, the process proceeds to step Sp0913.

On the other hand, in step Sp0911, if the result of the reach determination in step Sp0910 is that a reach does not occur in the game round (Sp0911: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0913 without executing step Sp0912.

In step Sp0913, a process for setting a stop result for failure is executed. Specifically, in the current game round where the result is a miss, the variable display is set to end with which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. It is processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for losing in the stop result table storage area 63f, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. , and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sp0913, the hit determination process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be explained. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 227: Sp0704).

Figure 230 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step Sp1001, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1002.

In step Sp1002, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot win. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R variable jackpot flag, 8R variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in RAM 64 is ON, and if any of the flags is ON, it is determined that a jackpot win has occurred (Sp1002: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sp1003.

In step Sp1003, the jackpot variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referenced to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1004, where the obtained variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, this variable time setting process is terminated.

In step Sp1002, if it is determined that the winning lottery result for the current game round is not a jackpot (Sp1002: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1005, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. do. This process (Sp1005) is executed when there is no big hit in the winning lottery for the current game round in step Sp1002, so in step Sp1005, the reach ( It is determined whether or not it is a game round in which a so-called "missing reach" occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON, and if it is ON, it is determined that a reach has occurred (Sp1005: YES), and step Sp1006 Proceed to.

In step Sp1006, the process refers to the reach occurrence/loss variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1004 described above, and the obtained variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, this variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Sp1005 that no reach will occur in the current game round (Sp1005: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1007, where the process refers to the reach non-occurrence/missed reach fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d to obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1004 described above, where the obtained fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the fluctuation time setting process ends.

<Fluctuation end processing>
Next, the fluctuation end processing will be explained. The variation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 226: Sp0604) of the game time control process.

Figure 231 is a flowchart showing the variation end process. In step Sp1101, it is determined whether the variation time for the current game has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the pattern rows start to vary until all of the pattern rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sp1101, it is determined whether the value of the variation time information stored in the variation time counter area (various counter area 64f) of RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variation time information is set in the variation time setting process (Figure 230) described above. The value of this set variation time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started.

If it is determined in step Sp1101 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sp1101: NO), this fluctuation termination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sp1101 that the change time has elapsed (Sp1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1102, where a process is performed to end the change of the pattern in the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round, either the first pattern display section 37a or the second pattern display section 37b. In the following step Sp1103, the special pattern change display flag stored in the special pattern change display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step Sp1103, the process proceeds to step Sp1104.

In step Sp1104, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any one of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sp1104, if it is determined that none of the flags is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a jackpot (Sp1104: NO), the process advances to step Sp1105.

In step Sp1105, it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sp1105 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Sp1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1106, and it is determined whether the value of the number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not. In step Sp1106, if it is determined that the value of the number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 (Sp1106: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1107, and the value of the number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1. After executing step Sp1107, the process advances to step Sp1108. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1106 that the value of the number of games counter PNC is 0 or less (Sp1106: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1108 without executing step Sp1107.

In step Sp1108, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sp1108 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Sp1108: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1109, where it is determined whether the value of the play count counter PNC exceeds 0.

If it is determined in step Sp1109 that the value of the number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sp1109: NO), the process advances to step Sp1110 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After executing step Sp1110, this variation time end process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sp1108 that the high probability mode flag is ON (Sp1108: YES), or if it is determined in step Sp1109 that the value of the play count counter PNC is greater than 0 (step Sp1109: YES), this variable time ending process ends without executing step Sp1110. Also, if it is determined in step Sp1105 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sp1105: NO), this variable time ending process ends without executing steps Sp1106 to Sp1110.

On the other hand, in step Sp1104, any one of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery related to the current game round is If it is determined that the jackpot has been won (Sp1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1111, and the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sp1111, this variation time end process is ended.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 225: Sp0507) of the normal process.

Figure 232 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step Sp1201, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON or not. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the large prize opening opening and closing processing period in the opening and closing execution mode (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is the period for executing the ending performance in the opening and closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sp1201 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sp1201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1202, where it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the opening period ends during the opening/closing execution mode and the large prize opening opening/closing processing period, during which the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is executed, begins, and is turned OFF when the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b ends.

If it is determined in step Sp1202 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sp1202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1203, where it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is set to ON at the start of the opening period and is set to OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sp1203 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sp1203: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1204, where it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sp1204 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sp1204: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1205. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1204 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (Sp1204: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

In step Sp1205, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. Then, proceed to step Sp1206. In step Sp1206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Then, proceed to step Sp1207.

In step Sp1207, an opening/closing scenario setting process is executed to set an opening/closing scenario. The opening/closing scenario determines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b in a round of play, and in this embodiment, it is a program that records the conditions for transitioning the opening/closing door 36b from a closed state to an open state (hereinafter also referred to as "opening conditions") and the conditions for transitioning the opening/closing door 36b from an open state to a closed state (hereinafter also referred to as "closing conditions"). The opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63h (Figure 207) of the ROM 63.

The release conditions are, for example, as follows:
- The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing to start each round of play in the opening and closing execution mode.
When one of the above items is met, the opening and closing door 36b transitions from a closed state to an open state.

The closing conditions are, for example, as follows:
- The time elapsed since the start of each round of play exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration (e.g., 15 seconds).
The number of game balls entering the big prize opening 36a after the start of each round of play exceeds a predetermined upper limit.
When either one of the above two conditions is met, the opening and closing door 36b transitions from an open state to a closed state.

After executing step Sp1207, proceed to step Sp1208 described above.

In step Sp1208, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as the opening time). In this embodiment, the same fixed opening time is set for each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (i.e., 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3, which determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in the various counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sp1208, proceed to step Sp1209.

In step Sp1209, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in step Sp0503 in the normal processing (Fig. 225). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. Based on the received opening command, the sound and light emission control device 90 determines the content of the presentation corresponding to the opening time and the large prize opening/closing processing period, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step Sp1209, the process proceeds to step Sp1210, where the opening period flag is set to ON. After that, this game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step Sp1203 that the opening period flag is ON (Sp1203: YES), proceed to step Sp1211.

In step Sp1211, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sp1211 that the opening period has ended (Sp1211: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1212 and the opening period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sp1213.

In step Sp1213, a process for starting a round display to notify the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is identified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the identified stop result data. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round information related to the above output is displayed in the round display section 39. After executing step Sp1213, proceed to step Sp1214.

In step Sp1214, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. In the following step Sp1215, an opening/closing processing start command is set. The opening/closing processing start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing processing period has started. The opening/closing processing start command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (Figure 225: step Sp0503). After executing step Sp1215, this game state transition process is terminated.

In step Sp1202, if it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sp1202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1216, and the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. The grand prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sp1216, the process advances to step Sp1217.

In step Sp1217, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has been completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended based on whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b has been opened is "0". do. In step Sp1217, if it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended (Sp1217: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1218. On the other hand, in step Sp1217, if it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not been completed (Sp1217: NO), the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sp1218, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step Sp1219.

In step Sp1219, processing to end the round display is executed. In this processing, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step Sp1219, the process proceeds to step Sp1220.

In step Sp1220, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, the same fixed length of ending time is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. Note that the fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sp1220, the process advances to step Sp1221.

In step Sp1221, an ending command is set. This set ending command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sp0503 in the normal process (FIG. 225). The audio light emission control device 90 ends the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on receiving the ending command. After executing step Sp1221, the process advances to step Sp1222.

In step Sp1222, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sp1201, if it is determined that the ending period flag is ON (Sp1201: YES), the process advances to step Sp1223.

In step Sp1223, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sp1220), it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step Sp1220 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sp1223: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1224.

In step Sp1224, the ending period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1225, and a transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game after the current ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sp1225, the process proceeds to step Sp1226, and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sp1226, the process advances to step Sp1227.

In step Sp1227, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is "0". If the total reserved number CRN is "0", this means that the start reserved number is "0" for both the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. In step Sp1227, if it is determined that the total reserved number CRN is "0" (Sp1227: YES), proceed to step Sp1228.

In step Sp1228, a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is a command that includes information for making the audio and light emitting control device 90, which is the sub-control device, recognize that no pending information is stored in the pending information storage area 64b at the time when the pattern change (play round) has ended. This set customer waiting command is sent to the audio and light emitting control device 90 by step Sp0503 in the normal processing (Figure 225). After executing step Sp1228, this play round control processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1227 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (Sp1227: NO), the game turn control process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in step Sp1223 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which is set as the ending time, is not "0" (Sp1223: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Big prize opening opening/closing process>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be explained. The big prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 232: Sp1216).

Figure 233 is a flowchart showing the large prize opening/closing process. In step Sp1301, it is determined whether the opening/closing door 36b is open or not. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the variable prize drive unit 36c. In step Sp1301, if it is determined that the opening/closing door 36b is not open (Sp1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1302.

In step Sp1302, it is determined whether the opening conditions for the opening door 36b are met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open the opening/closing door 36b. In step Sp1302, if it is determined that the opening conditions for the opening/closing door 36b are met (Sp1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1303.

In step Sp1303, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. After that, the process advances to step Sp1304.

In step Sp1304, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The opening/closing door opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 225: Step Sp0503) of the normal processing. After executing step Sp1304, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

In step Sp1302, if it is determined that the opening condition for the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sp1302: NO), the big prize opening opening/closing process is ended without executing steps Sp1303 and Step Sp1304.

In step Sp1301, if it is determined that the door 36b is open (Sp1301: YES), the process advances to step Sp1305.

In step Sp1305, it is determined whether the closing conditions for the opening and closing door 36b are met. Specifically, the opening and closing scenario set by the opening and closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to close the opening and closing door 36b. In step Sp1305, if it is determined that the closing conditions for the opening and closing door 36b are met (Sp1305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1306.

In step Sp1306, the opening and closing door 36b is closed. Then, proceed to step Sp1307.

In step Sp1307, a door closing command is set. The opening/closing door close command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b is closed. The opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 225: Step Sp0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sp1307, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

In step Sp1305, if it is determined that the closing condition for the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sp1305: NO), the big prize opening opening/closing process is ended without executing steps Sp1306 and Step Sp1307.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be explained. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 232: Sp1225).

FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sp1401, it is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to a variable probability jackpot among the jackpot flags is turned on. That is, it is determined whether the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sp1401 that the 16R or 8R guaranteed jackpot flag in RAM 64 is ON (Sp1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1402, where the 16R or 8R guaranteed jackpot flag in RAM 64 that is ON is turned OFF. After executing step Sp1402, the process proceeds to step Sp1403.

In step Sp1403, the high probability mode flag is turned on, and then the process proceeds to step Sp1404, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode. After that, the process advances to step Sp1405.

In step Sp1405, the number of times of play counter PNC provided in the various counter area 64f of RAM 64 is set to 100. The value set in the number of times of play counter PNC is a value indicating the number of times of play when the high frequency support mode is executed with a limited number of times of play. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1406.

In step Sp1406, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. . After that, the process advances to step Sp1411.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1401 that the 16R special jackpot flag and the 8R special jackpot flag in RAM 64 are not ON (Sp1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1407, where the 8R regular jackpot flag in RAM 64 is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1408.

In step Sp1408, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step Sp1409, where the number of plays counter PNC provided in the various counter area 64f of RAM 64 is set to 100. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1410.

In step Sp1410, a low probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the low probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. . After that, the process advances to step Sp1411.

In step Sp1411, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated.

<Electricity support processing>
Next, the electric support process will be described. The electric support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 225: Sp0508).

FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the electric role support process. In step Sp1501, it is determined whether or not it is supported. Specifically, it is determined whether the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is brought into the open state, and turned OFF when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sp1501 that the supporting flag is not ON (Sp1501: NO), the process advances to step Sp1502.

In step Sp1502, it is determined whether the support win flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support win flag is a flag that is turned ON when an open state win is obtained in the electric role opening lottery to determine whether the electric role 34a is opened or not, and is turned OFF when the support in progress flag is ON. In step Sp1502, if it is determined that the support win flag is not ON (Sp1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1503.

In step Sp1503, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f (Fig. 207) of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, at a 2 msec cycle.

In step Sp1503, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sp1503: NO), the main electronic role support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sp1503: YES), the process advances to step Sp1504.

In step Sp1504, it is determined whether it is time to end the display of the changing patterns in the normal map unit 38. If it is determined in step Sp1504 that it is time to end the display of the changing patterns (Sp1504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1505, where a miss display is set, and the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. By setting the miss display, the display of the changing patterns in the normal map unit 38 is terminated with the miss display stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1504 that it is not time to end the display of the changing patterns (Sp1504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1506.

In step Sp1506, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved reels SN is greater than "0". If it is determined in step Sp1506 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is "0" (Sp1506: NO), the main electric reel support processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1506 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is greater than "0" (Sp1506: YES), it proceeds to step Sp1507.

In step Sp1507, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode, and then the process proceeds to step Sp1508 to determine whether or not the game is in the high-frequency support mode. If the game is not in the open/close execution mode in step Sp1507 (Sp1507: NO) and is in the high-frequency support mode in step Sp1508 (Sp1508: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1509 to hold a lottery for opening the electric role. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role reserve area 64d is shifted, and if the value of the electric role opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role opening lottery is won. In addition, at the same time as the electric role opening lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (i.e., 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1510.

In step Sp1510, it is determined whether the result of the electric role opening lottery in step Sp1509 is a support win. In step Sp1510, if it is determined that the result of the electric role opening lottery is a support win (Sp1510: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1511, where the support win flag is turned ON and the second round counter area RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of RAM 64 is set to "3". The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric role 34a has been opened. Then, the electric role support processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sp1510, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not a support win (Sp1510: NO), the electric role support process is ended without executing the process of step Sp1511.

If it is determined in step Sp1507 that the mode is the open/close execution mode (Sp1507: YES), or if it is determined in step Sp1508 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (Sp1508: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1512, where a lottery is held to open the electric role device. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role reserve area 64d is shifted, and if the value of the electric role device opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is between 0 and 190, the electric role device opening lottery is won. In addition, at the same time as the electric role device opening lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (i.e. 29.5 sec). Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1513.

In step Sp1513, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric role release lottery in step Sp1512 is a support win. If it is determined in step Sp1513 that there is no support win (Sp1513: NO), the main electric role support processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1513 that there is a support win (Sp1513: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1514, where the support win flag is turned ON and the second round counter area RC2 is set to "1", after which the main electric role support processing ends.

If it is determined in step Sp1502 that the support winning flag is ON (Sp1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1515, where it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal picture unit 38. If it is determined in step Sp1515 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sp1515: NO), the image fluctuation display in the normal picture unit 38 is in progress, so the main electric role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1515 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sp1515: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1516.

In step Sp1516, a winning display is set. This ends the display of the changing patterns in the normal unit 38 with the winning display stopped. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1517, where the support in progress flag is turned ON and the support winning flag is turned OFF. Then, the main electric role support process is terminated.

In step Sp1501, if it is determined that the support flag is ON (Sp1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1518, and an electric role opening/closing control process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. Thereafter, the main electronic role support process ends.

<Electricity switching control processing>
Next, the electric utility switching control process will be described. The electric utility switching control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the electric utility support process (FIG. 235: Sp1518).

Figure 236 is a flowchart showing the electric role opening and closing control process. In step Sp1601, it is determined whether the electric role 34a is open or not. Whether the electric role 34a is open or not is determined by whether the electric role drive unit 34b is in a driven state or not. If it is determined that the electric role 34a is open (Sp1601: YES), proceed to step Sp1602.

In step Sp1602, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. In step Sp1602, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sp1602: NO), the main power opening/closing control process is ended. That is, if the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

In step Sp1602, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sp1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1603, where a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 34a to a closed state, "250" (ie, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is turned on. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sp1603, the process advances to step Sp1604.

In step Sp1604, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is subtracted by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sp1605, where it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step Sp1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sp1605: NO), the main electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sp1605: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1606, where the support in progress flag is turned OFF. Then, the main electric role opening/closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sp1601 that the electric role 34a is not open (Sp1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1607, where it is determined whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the closed state of the electric role 34a. If it is determined in step Sp1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sp1607: NO), the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sp1607: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1608, where an opening process is performed to control the electric role 34a to an open state. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1609.

In step Sp1609, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sp1609: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1610, and it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in the high frequency support mode. do.

If it is determined in step Sp1610 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (Sp1610: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1611, where the second timer counter area T2 is set to "800" (i.e., 1.6 sec). After that, the main electric switch opening/closing control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1609 that the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (Sp1609: YES), or if it is determined in step Sp1610 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (Sp1610: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1612, where the second timer counter area T2 is set to "100" (i.e., 0.2 sec). After that, the main electric equipment opening/closing control process is terminated.

《5-6》Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. First, the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Various processes executed in the audio emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92 will be described.

Figure 237 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is executed repeatedly at a relatively short period (e.g., 2 msec). The process of each step executed in the timer interrupt process is explained below.

In step Sp1701, a command storage process is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing a received command in the audio/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The audio/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer that enables the storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are stored sequentially in the ring buffer and are read out sequentially in the order in which they were stored. After executing step Sp1701, proceed to step Sp1702.

In step Sp1702, pending command handling processing is executed. In the pending command corresponding processing, processing corresponding to the pending command among the commands stored in step Sp1701 is performed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step Sp1702, the process advances to step Sp1703.

In step Sp1703, a game round performance setting process is executed. In the game round performance setting process, the performance to be executed in the game round from when the pattern change starts to when it stops is set. The game round performance setting process will be described in detail later. After executing step Sp1703, the process proceeds to step Sp1704.

In step Sp1704, processing for the opening and closing execution mode presentation is executed. In the opening and closing execution mode presentation processing, processing related to the presentation during the opening period, the presentation during the large prize opening and closing processing period, and the presentation during the ending period is executed. After executing step Sp1704, proceed to step Sp1705.

In step Sp1705, stage production processing is executed. In the stage production process, a process for displaying a screen production corresponding to the stage described above is performed. Details of the stage production processing will be described later. After executing step Sp1705, the process advances to step Sp1706.

In step Sp1706, background effect processing is executed. In the background effect processing, processing is performed to display a background moving image determined according to a command indicating a gaming state received from the main side MPU 62 on the symbol display device 41. For example, perform processing to display a background video indicating that high-frequency support mode is continuing, a background video indicating that high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that high-probability mode is continuing. . After executing step Sp1706, the process advances to step Sp1707.

In step Sp1707, other processing is executed. Other processing includes processing for displaying a demonstration image (moving image) on the symbol display device 41 when the player is not playing a game. After executing step Sp1707, the process advances to step Sp1708.

In step Sp1708, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in each of the above-mentioned production processes. After executing step Sp1708, the process advances to step Sp1709.

In step Sp1709, an audio output control process is executed to control the audio output of the speaker 46. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is executed based on the audio data read in the above-mentioned BGM process and each performance process. After executing step Sp1709, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Pending command processing>
Next, the hold command response process will be described. The hold command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 237: Sp1702).

FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. In step Sp1801, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sp1801 that a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sp1801: YES), the process advances to step Sp1802.

In step Sp1802, the currently received hold command is read, and hold information is read from the hold command. The hold information includes information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, the type of jackpot, whether or not a reach has occurred, and the variable time. The read hold information is then stored in a register in the sound/light side MPU 92. The hold information is updated and stored with information on the number of reserved items in the first start port 33 (maximum of four items) and information on the number of reserved items in the second start port 34 (maximum of four items). After executing step Sp1802, proceed to step Sp1803.

In step Sp1803, update processing at the time of ball entry is executed. In the update process at the time of ball entry, the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, A process is executed to enable the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of these pieces of pending information. Details of the updating process at the time of ball entry in step Sp1803 will be described later. Below, the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 will also be referred to as the "first reservation number", and the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 will be referred to as the "first reservation number". The number is also called the "second pending number", and the total number of the first pending number and the second pending number is also called the "total pending number". After executing step Sp1803, the process advances to step Sp1804.

In step Sp1804, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, a command for changing the display (such as the number of hold display icons lined up) in the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 is sent to the display control device 100 in correspondence with the first hold number and the second hold number identified in step Sp1803. The display control device 100 that receives the command changes the display in the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in correspondence with the first hold number and the second hold number. Specifically, the display control device 100 that receives the command specifies the display position of the hold display icon in the first start port hold area Ds1, and displays the number of icons corresponding to the first hold number at the display position. In addition, the display control device 100 specifies the display position of the hold display icon in the second start port hold area Ds2, and displays the number of icons corresponding to the second hold number at the display position. After executing step Sp1804, the pending command response process ends.

<Update process when entering the ball>
Next, update processing when a ball enters the ball will be explained. The update process when the ball enters the ball is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the pending command corresponding process (FIG. 238: Sp1803).

FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing update processing at the time of ball entry. In step Sp1901, it is determined whether the pending command to be read this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. In step Sp1901, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sp1901: YES), the process advances to step Sp1902, and the Update processing of the first pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the optical side RAM 94 is executed. The first reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 in the audio-optical side MPU 92. In the process of updating the first pending quantity counter area, the information in the first pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the pending command that is currently read. After executing step Sp1902, the process advances to step Sp1904.

In step Sp1901, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time was not sent based on a ball entering the first starting hole 33 (Sp1901: NO), that is, if it is determined that the pending command was sent based on a ball entering the second starting hole 34, proceed to step Sp1903 and execute an update process for the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The second pending number counter area is a counter area for identifying the number of pending information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting hole 34 in the sound/light side MPU 92. In the update process for the second pending number counter area, the information in the second pending number counter area is updated to the information on the number of pending items included in the command to be read this time. After executing step Sp1903, proceed to step Sp1904.

The reason why the processing of step Sp1902 and step Sp1903 is performed as described above will be explained. In this embodiment, while the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, but backup power is not supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound and light emission control device 90. For this reason, when the power supply is cut off in a situation where the reserved information related to the ball entering the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the reserved information is stored and held in the main control device 60, but the sound and light emission control device 90 understands that there is zero reserved information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area is counted up each time a reserved command is received in the sound and light emission control device 90, an inconvenience may occur in which the number of reserved information actually stored in the main control device 60 does not match the number of reserved information understood by the sound and light emission control device 90. In response to this, in the present embodiment described above, the main control unit 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of held items, and the audio/light emission control unit 90 adopts a configuration in which the information on the number of held items included in the command is set in the first held item number counter area or the second held item number counter area each time the hold command is received, thereby preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In step Sp1904, a process of updating the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the audio-optical side RAM 94 is executed. The total number of pending balls counter area indicates the sum of the number of pending information obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the sound/light side MPU 92. In this update process, the information in the total number of pending items counter area is changed to the sum of the information on the number of items on hold measured in the first number of pending items counter area and the information on the number of items on hold measured in the second number of pending items counter area. Update to. After executing step Sp1904, the update process at the time of actual ball entry is ended.

<Game rendition setting process>
Next, the game run performance setting process will be explained. The game performance setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 237: Sp1703).

FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing the game rendition setting process. In step Sp2001, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command have been received. In step Sp2001, if it is determined that at least one of the variation command and the type command has not been received (Sp2001: NO), the present game performance setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp2001 that the variation command and the type command have been received (Sp2001: YES), the process advances to step Sp2002.

In step Sp2002, the command for variation received this time is read out, and information about the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a reach occurrence, and the variation time is read from the command. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the audio-optical side MPU 92. After that, the process advances to step Sp2003.

In step Sp2003, a presentation pattern setting process is executed to set the presentation pattern to be executed during a game round, such as when a jackpot occurs or when a reach occurs. The details of the presentation pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sp2003, the process proceeds to step Sp2004.

In step Sp2004, a setting process for the stop symbols is executed. In the setting process for the stop symbols, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game is a 16R variable probability jackpot, an 8R variable probability jackpot, a 16R normal jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, information corresponding to the stopping result in which the same combination of symbols is established on the effective line L of the symbol display device 41 is set as the information for the current stop symbols. Specifically, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game is a 16R variable probability jackpot or an 8R variable probability jackpot, a combination of the same odd symbols may be selected as the combination of the same symbols, and a combination of the same even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd symbols and the combination of the same even symbols, but instead, the former may be configured to have a higher selection rate than the latter, or the latter may be configured to have a higher selection rate than the former. Also, the combination of the "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R variable probability jackpot. In addition, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game is a 16R regular jackpot or an 8R regular jackpot, a combination of the same even-numbered symbols will be selected as the combination of the same symbols.

If the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a losing result, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the contents of the variation command. If it is determined that it corresponds to a reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which a combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L, and corresponds to a stop result in which a combination of reach symbols is established on the active line L. The information is determined as the current stop result information. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L, and the stop result is that the combination of the reach symbols is not established on the active line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stopped symbol. After executing step Sp2004, the process advances to step Sp2005.

In step Sp2005, processing for setting a variable display pattern for the current game round is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game round is specified from the content of the fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the stop symbols set in the above step Sp2004 are specified. Select the corresponding variation display pattern. In addition, when selecting a variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b (FIG. 213) of the audio/light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process advances to step Sp2006.

In step Sp2006, information on the performance pattern, stop symbol, and variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the performance command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp2007, and the relevant production command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the performance content corresponding to the received performance command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sp2007, the process advances to step Sp2008.

In step Sp2008, update processing at the start of fluctuation is executed. In the update process at the start of variation, the first number of pending items or the second number of pending items is decreased by 1 at the start of variation. Details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later. After executing step Sp2008, the process advances to step Sp2009.

In step Sp2009, a hold display control process is executed. The hold display control process is similar to the hold display control process executed in step Sp1803 of the hold command corresponding process (FIG. 238). Specifically, the display in the first starting gate holding area Ds1 and the second starting opening holding area Ds2 (the holding display icon is A command for changing the display (such as how many items are lined up) is sent to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command causes the display in the first starting opening holding area Ds1 and the second starting opening holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 to correspond to the first holding number and the second holding number. change. After executing step Sp2009, the game round performance setting process is ended.

<Performance pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 240: Sp2003).

FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process. In step Sp2101, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot winning based on the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sp2002 of the game round performance setting process (FIG. 240). . In step Sp2101, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot (Sp2101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2102.

In step Sp2102, a process for setting a presentation pattern for a jackpot is executed. The process for setting a presentation pattern for a jackpot is a process for setting a presentation pattern to be executed for a presentation indicating that a jackpot has been won in the winning lottery for the current game round. The process for setting a presentation pattern for a jackpot will be described later. After executing step Sp2102, this presentation pattern setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sp2101 that the jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery for this game (Sp2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2103.

In step Sp2103, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred in the current game round. This determination is performed using the information regarding the presence or absence of reach occurrence, which was grasped in step Sp2001 of FIG. 240. In step Sp2103, if it is determined that a reach has occurred in the current game round (Sp2103: YES), the process advances to step Sp2104.

In step Sp2104, a process for setting a presentation pattern for when a reach occurs or when a miss occurs is executed. The presentation pattern for when a reach occurs or when a miss occurs is a process for setting a presentation pattern for presentations indicating that various types of reach have occurred in a play time in which a reach occurs among play times in which a jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery. The presentation pattern setting process for when a reach occurs or when a miss occurs will be described later. After executing step Sp2104, this presentation pattern setting process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sp2103, if it is determined that a reach has not occurred in the current game round (Sp2103: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2105 and executes a production pattern setting process for when a reach does not occur/miss. The performance pattern for when no reach occurs/misses is a process that is set to execute a performance when no reach occurs in a game round in which a big hit has not been won in the winning lottery and no reach has occurred. The production pattern setting process for non-reach/missing will be described later. After executing step Sp2105, the main effect pattern setting process is ended.

<Production pattern setting process for jackpot>
Next, the performance pattern setting process for jackpot will be explained. The performance pattern setting process for jackpot is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the performance pattern setting process (FIG. 241: Sp2102). The performance pattern setting process for jackpot is to determine the type of reach and set the performance pattern for jackpot according to the type of reach. Hereinafter, this jackpot performance pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the process of setting a performance pattern for a jackpot. In step Sp2201, the reach distribution table for jackpot is referred to. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment stores a reach distribution table for jackpots and a reach distribution table for when the reach occurs/misses in the reach distribution table storage area 93c (FIG. 213) of the sound-light side ROM 93. are doing.

Figure 243 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a reach allocation table. Figure 243(a) shows a reach allocation table for when a jackpot occurs, and Figure 243(b) shows a reach allocation table for when a reach occurs or is missed. In each reach allocation table, normal reach, super reach, and special reach are set as allocation results.

As shown in FIG. 243(a), the reach allocation table for a jackpot shows the correspondence between the variable time and the reach type (normal reach, super reach, special reach). As explained above, the variable time at the time of a jackpot (when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery) set by the variable time setting process (FIG. 230) executed by the main MPU 62 corresponds to the reach type. The correspondence between this variable time and the reach type is stored in the reach allocation table for a jackpot. Specifically, a variable time of 35 seconds corresponds to a normal reach, a variable time of 65 seconds corresponds to a super reach, and a variable time of 125 seconds corresponds to a special reach.

As shown in FIG. 243(b), the reach allocation table for when a reach occurs and does not occur shows the correspondence between the variable time and the type of reach (normal reach, super reach, special reach). As explained above, the variable time when a reach occurs and does not occur (when a jackpot is not won in the winning lottery and a reach occurs) set by the variable time setting process (FIG. 230) executed by the main MPU 62 corresponds to the type of reach. The correspondence between this variable time and the type of reach is stored in the reach allocation table for when a reach occurs and does not occur. Specifically, a variable time of 30 seconds corresponds to a normal reach, a variable time of 60 seconds corresponds to a super reach, and a variable time of 120 seconds corresponds to a special reach.

In step Sp2201 of FIG. 242, the ready-to-win distribution table for jackpot shown in FIG. 243(a) is read out from the ready-to-win distribution table storage area 93c and referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp2202, and as a result of referring to the reach distribution table for reach occurrence/missing in step Sp2201, the fluctuations stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sp2002 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 240) Determine whether the time information corresponds to normal reach.

In step Sp2202, if it is determined that normal reach is supported (Sp2202: YES), the process advances to step Sp2203.

In step Sp2203, the effect pattern table for normal reach/jackpot stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (Fig. 213) of the sound/light side ROM 93 is referenced to obtain the effect pattern corresponding to the variable time stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 by step Sp2002 of the game round effect setting process (Fig. 240). The effect pattern table for normal reach/jackpot is a table of effect patterns that suggest that a normal reach has occurred and that a jackpot has been won. After executing step Sp2203, proceed to step Sp2204.

In step Sp2204, the presentation pattern obtained in step Sp2203 is set as the presentation pattern to be executed in the current game round. After step Sp2204 is executed, the process of setting the presentation pattern for the main jackpot is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp2202 that the normal reach does not correspond (Sp2202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2205, and as a result of referring to the reach allocation table for when a jackpot occurs in step Sp2201, it is determined whether the variable time information stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 by step Sp2002 of the game round performance setting process (Figure 240) corresponds to a super reach.

If it is determined in step Sp2205 that the Super Reach is supported (Sp2205: YES), proceed to step Sp2206.

In step Sp2206, the effect pattern table for super reach/jackpot stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (Fig. 213) of the sound/light ROM 93 is referenced to obtain an effect pattern corresponding to the variable time stored in the register of the sound/light MPU 92 by step Sp2002 of the game round effect setting process (Fig. 240). The effect pattern table for super reach/jackpot is a table of effect patterns that indicate that a super reach has occurred and that a jackpot has been won. This effect pattern is the same as the effect pattern obtained by the super reach/miss effect pattern table reference process described later in terms of the part indicating that a super reach has occurred, but is different in terms of the part indicating the result of the winning lottery. For this reason, more specific processing contents will be described in the super reach/miss effect pattern table reference process. After executing step Sp2206, proceed to step Sp2204 described above, and set the effect pattern obtained by step Sp2206 as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round.

If it is determined in step Sp2205 that the Super Reach is not supported (Sp2205: NO), proceed to step Sp2207. If it is determined in step Sp2205 that the Super Reach is not supported, this means that the result of referencing the reach allocation table for jackpots in step Sp2201 is a Special Reach, and in this case, proceed to step Sp2207.

In step Sp2207, the performance pattern table for special reach and jackpot stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 213) of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to, and the step of the game performance setting process (FIG. 240) is performed. At Sp2002, a performance pattern corresponding to the variable time stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 is acquired. The performance pattern table for special reach and jackpot is a table of performance patterns that suggests that a special reach has occurred and that a jackpot has been won. This performance pattern is the same in the part that indicates that a special reach has occurred, compared to the performance pattern obtained by the special reach/miss performance pattern table reference processing described later, and it suggests the result of a winning lottery. There is a difference in the part that does. Therefore, more specific processing contents will be explained in the special reach/miss performance pattern table reference processing. After executing step Sp2207, the process proceeds to step Sp2204 described earlier, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sp2207 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round.

<Production pattern setting process for when reach occurs/misses>
Next, a description will be given of the production pattern setting process for reaching/missing the reach. The production pattern setting process for when the reach occurs/is out is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the production pattern setting process (FIG. 241: Sp2105). The production pattern setting process for when the reach occurs/misses is similar to the production pattern setting process for the main jackpot, in which the type of reach is determined and the production pattern for when the reach occurs/misses is set according to the type of reach. It is something to do. Hereinafter, this production pattern setting process for occurrence/missing of the reach will be described in detail.

FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process for reaching/missing. In step Sp2301, the reach distribution table for reach occurrence/missing shown in FIG. 243(b) is read out from the reach distribution table storage area 93c and referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp2302, and as a result of referring to the reach distribution table for reach occurrence/missing in step Sp2301, the fluctuations stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sp2002 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 240) Determine whether the time information corresponds to normal reach.

In step Sp2302, if it is determined that normal reach is supported (Sp2302: YES), the process advances to step Sp2303.

In step Sp2303, the effect pattern table for normal reach/miss stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (Fig. 213) of the sound/light side ROM 93 is referenced to obtain the effect pattern corresponding to the variable time stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 by step Sp2002 of the game round effect setting process (Fig. 240). After executing step Sp2303, proceed to step Sp2304.

In step Sp2304, the presentation pattern acquired in step Sp2303 is set as the presentation pattern to be executed in the current game round. After step Sp2304 is executed, the process of setting the presentation pattern for when this reach occurs or is lost is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp2302 that normal reach is not supported (Sp2302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2305, and as a result of referring to the reach distribution table for reaching/out of reach in step Sp2301, the game It is determined whether the information on the fluctuation time stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sp2002 of the production setting process (FIG. 240) corresponds to super reach.

In step Sp2305, if it is determined that super reach is supported (Sp2305: YES), the process advances to step Sp2306.

In step Sp2306, the reach type determination value VR at the time of reach occurrence/missing is set to 1. The reach type determination value VR when a reach occurs/misses is a value for determining the type of reach when a reach occurs in a game session that resulted in a loss in a winning lottery, and when it is 1, the type is super. When it is 2, it means that the type is special reach; when it is 0, it means that it is neither super reach nor special reach. After executing step Sp2306, the process advances to step Sp2307.

In step Sp2307, a process for referencing the presentation pattern table for when a super reach is missed is executed. The process for referencing the presentation pattern table for when a super reach is missed is a process for obtaining a presentation pattern by referencing the presentation pattern table for when a super reach is missed. The process for referencing the presentation pattern table for when a super reach is missed will be described later. After executing step Sp2307, the process proceeds to step Sp2304 described above, and the presentation pattern obtained in step Sp2307 is set as the presentation pattern to be executed in the current game round.

If it is determined in step Sp2305 that the Super Reach is not supported (Sp2305: NO), proceed to step Sp2308. If it is determined in step Sp2305 that the Super Reach is not supported, this means that the result of referencing the reach allocation table for when a reach occurs or is missed in step Sp2301 is a special reach, and in this case proceed to step Sp2308.

In step Sp2308, the reach type determination value VR is set to 2 at the time of reach occurrence/missing. That is, the reach type judgment value VR at the time of occurrence of a reach/miss is set to the value 2 which means that the type of the reach when a reach occurs in a game round with a losing result in a winning lottery is a special reach. After executing step Sp2308, the process advances to step Sp2309.

In step Sp2309, a process for referencing the special reach/miss presentation pattern table is executed. The process for referencing the special reach/miss presentation pattern table is a process for obtaining a presentation pattern by referencing the special reach/miss presentation pattern table. The process for referencing the special reach/miss presentation pattern table will be described later. After executing step Sp2309, the process proceeds to step Sp2304 described above, and the presentation pattern obtained in step Sp2309 is set as the presentation pattern to be executed in the current game round.

<Processing to refer to the production pattern table for super reach/missing>
Next, the super reach/miss performance pattern table reference process will be explained. The super reach/miss effect pattern table reference process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 244: Sp2307) of the reach/miss effect pattern setting process. The super reach/miss performance pattern table reference process will be described in detail below.

Figure 245 is a flowchart showing the process of referencing the performance pattern table for when a super reach is missed. In step Sp2401, it is determined whether the character stage determination value VS is 1 or not. The character stage determination value VS is a value used to determine whether the stage described above is a character stage or a non-character stage, and when it is 1 it means that it is a character stage, and when it is not 1 (=0) it means that it is a non-character stage. In step Sp2401, if the character stage determination value VS is not 1, that is, it is determined that the stage is a non-character stage (Sp2401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2402.

In step Sp2402, a warrior character lottery process is executed. The warrior character lottery process is a process for performing a lottery to identify one warrior character from the warrior characters A to D described above. Specifically, the lottery is performed by obtaining a value from the random number counter C5 for warrior character lottery and comparing this value with a warrior character lottery table stored in the sound/light side ROM 93. The random number counter C5 for warrior character lottery is provided in the various counter area 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The random number counter C5 is updated at short intervals.

FIG. 246 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the warrior character lottery table. As shown in FIG. 246, among the values of random number counter C5 for warrior character lottery of "0 to 99", "0 to 24" correspond to warrior character A, and "25 to 49" correspond to warrior characters. "50 to 74" correspond to warrior character C, and "75 to 99" correspond to warrior character D. In this embodiment, each of the warrior characters A to D is configured to win with equal probability, but instead of this, a configuration may be adopted in which each of the warrior characters A to D has a different probability of winning. After executing step Sp2402, the process advances to step Sp2403.

In step Sp2403, the warrior character judgment value VC is set based on the lottery result obtained in step Sp2402. Specifically, the lottery result is compared with the warrior character judgment value correspondence table stored in the sound/light side ROM 93 to set the warrior character judgment value VC.

Figure 247 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the warrior character judgment value correspondence table. As shown in Figure 247, the warrior character judgment value Vc of 1 corresponds to the lottery result for warrior character A, the warrior character judgment value Vc of 2 corresponds to the lottery result for warrior character B, the warrior character judgment value Vc of 3 corresponds to the lottery result for warrior character C, and the warrior character judgment value Vc of 4 corresponds to the lottery result for warrior character D. After executing step Sp2403 in Figure 245, proceed to step Sp2404.

In step Sp2401, if the character-based stage determination value VS is 1, that is, if it is determined that the stage is in the character-based stage (Sp2401: YES), step Sp2404 is performed without executing step Sp2402 and step Sp2403. Proceed to.

In step Sp2404, a performance pattern table based on the warrior character determination value VC is specified from the super reach/miss performance pattern table group stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 213) of the ROM 93. The super reach/miss performance pattern table group includes the super reach/miss performance pattern table corresponding to each of warrior characters A to D, that is, the super reach/miss performance pattern table for warrior character A, A performance pattern table for super reach/miss for warrior character B, a performance pattern table for super reach/miss for warrior character C, and a performance pattern table for super reach/miss for warrior character D. In step Sp2404, when the warrior character judgment value VC is 1, a super reach/miss performance pattern table for the warrior character A is specified, and when the warrior character judgment value VC is 2, the super reach/miss performance pattern table for the warrior character B is specified. Specify the performance pattern table for reach/miss, and when the warrior character judgment value VC is 3, specify the super reach/miss performance pattern table for warrior character C, and the warrior character judgment value VC is 4. Sometimes, a super reach/miss performance pattern table for warrior character D is specified. After executing step Sp2404, the process advances to step Sp2405.

In step Sp2405, the presentation pattern table identified in step Sp2404 is referenced to obtain the presentation pattern corresponding to the variable time stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 in step Sp2002 of the game round presentation setting process (Fig. 240). After step Sp2405 is executed, the process of referring to the presentation pattern table for super reach/miss is terminated.

After the super reach/miss effect effect pattern table reference processing is completed, the process proceeds to step Sp2304 of the reach effect/miss effect effect pattern setting process (Fig. 244), and the effect pattern acquired in step Sp2405 (Fig. 245) is It is set as a production pattern to be executed in a game round.

<Special reach/miss performance pattern table reference processing>
Next, the special reach/miss performance pattern table reference processing will be explained. The special reach/miss performance pattern table reference process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 244: Sp2309) of the reach/miss performance pattern setting process. The special reach/miss performance pattern table reference process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing special reach/miss performance pattern table reference processing. Steps Sp2501 to Sp2503 are the same processes as steps Sp2401 to Sp2403 in the super reach/miss performance pattern table reference process.

Step Sp2504 corresponds to step Sp2404 in the process of referring to the effect pattern table for when a super reach is not reached. Specifically, in step Sp2504, an effect pattern table based on the warrior character judgment value VC is identified from the group of effect pattern tables for when a special reach is not reached and is not reached, which are stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 213) of the ROM 93. After executing step Sp2504, the process proceeds to step Sp2505.

In step Sp2505, the effect pattern table specified in step Sp2504 is referred to, and the effect pattern corresponding to the variable time stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Sp2002 of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 240) is obtained. . After executing step Sp2505, the super reach/miss performance pattern table reference process is ended.

After completing the special reach/miss performance pattern table reference process, the process proceeds to step Sp2304 of the reach/miss performance pattern setting process (Fig. 244), and the performance pattern acquired in step Sp2505 (Fig. 248) is set for this time. It is set as a production pattern to be executed in a game round.

<Processing for setting performance patterns when reach does not occur or when a win does not occur>
Next, the process of setting a presentation pattern for when the reach does not occur or when the win does not occur will be described. The process of setting a presentation pattern for when the reach does not occur or when the win does not occur will be executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the presentation pattern setting process (FIG. 241: Sp2105). The process of setting a presentation pattern for when the reach does not occur or when the win does not occur will be described in detail below.

Figure 249 is a flowchart showing the process of setting a presentation pattern for when a reach does not occur and when a miss occurs. In step Sp2601, the presentation pattern table for when a miss occurs stored in the presentation pattern table storage area 93a (Figure 213) of the sound/light side ROM 93 is referenced to obtain a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable time stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 in step Sp2002 of the game round presentation setting process (Figure 240). The presentation for when a reach does not occur and when a miss occurs is a presentation that suggests that a jackpot has not been won and a reach has not occurred, and specifically, it is a presentation in which the patterns of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the pattern display device 41 are different from each other on the effective line L. After executing step Sp2601, the process proceeds to step Sp2602, and the presentation pattern obtained in step Sp2601 is set as the presentation pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Sp2602, the process of setting a presentation pattern for when a reach does not occur and when a miss occurs ends.

<Update process when fluctuation starts>
Next, the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game play performance setting process (FIG. 240: Sp2008).

FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step Sp2701, the command for variation received this time is related to the reservation information acquired based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33 in the current game round (hereinafter referred to as the first variation command). Or, it is determined whether the command relates to suspension information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 (hereinafter referred to as a second variation command). In step Sp2701, if it is determined that the fluctuation command received this time is the first fluctuation command (Sp2701: YES), the process advances to step Sp2702.

In step Sp2702, the first pending number counter stored in the audio/light side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. After executing step Sp2702, the process advances to step Sp2703.

In step Sp2403, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the first starting opening holding performance storage area (not shown) stored in the sound/light side RAM 94. This shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the storage area to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sp2403, the process advances to step Sp2406.
nothing.

On the other hand, in step Sp2701, if it is determined that the fluctuation command received this time is not the first fluctuation command, that is, it is determined to be the second fluctuation command (Sp2701: NO), the process advances to step Sp2703, and the data is stored in the sound-light side RAM 94. The stored second pending quantity counter is decremented by 1. After executing step Sp2703, the process advances to step Sp2704.

In step Sp2704, the information in the total reserved number counter area of the sound/light side RAM 94 is updated so that the total reserved number stored in the total reserved number counter area is decremented by 1. After that, the update process at the start of the fluctuation is terminated.

<Processing for stage production>
Next, the stage production processing will be explained. The stage production process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 237: Sp1705).

Figure 251 is a flowchart showing the stage production process. In step Sp2801, it is determined whether or not this is the first execution since the power switch 88 was switched from the OFF state to the ON state (power-on). In step Sp2801, if it is determined that this is the first execution since power-on (Sp2801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2802.

In step Sp2802, a process is performed to display a screen effect corresponding to the countryside stage (see FIG. 215(a)) on the pattern display device 41. Specifically, a command to display a screen effect corresponding to the countryside stage is sent to the display control device 100. The command includes an indication that the display destination is the background layer, and the screen effect corresponding to the countryside stage is displayed as the background on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. After executing step Sp2802, the process proceeds to step Sp2803.

In step Sp2803, the character stage judgment value VS is set to 0, which means that it is a non-character stage. After executing step Sp2803, proceed to step Sp2804.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp2801 that this is not the first execution since power-on (Sp2801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2804 without executing steps Sp2802 and Sp2803.

In step Sp2804, it is determined whether or not it is the end of the game round. In this embodiment, the time corresponding to the variable time read out in step Sp2002 of the game round performance setting process (FIG. 240) reaches the end of the game round by determining whether or not the time corresponding to the variable time has elapsed since the reading time. Determine whether or not. In step Sp2804, if it is determined that the game round has ended (Sp2804: YES), the process advances to step Sp2805.

In step Sp2805, it is determined whether the character stage determination value VS is 1 or not. In step Sp2805, if the character-based stage determination value VS is 1, that is, if it is determined that the stage is in the character-based stage (Sp2805: YES), the process advances to step Sp2806.

In step Sp2806, stage transition processing in the character stage is executed. Stage transition processing in the character stage will be described later. After executing step Sp2806, proceed to step Sp2808.

On the other hand, in step Sp2805, if the character-based stage determination value VS is not 1, that is, it is determined that the stage is a non-character-based stage (Sp2805: NO), the process advances to step Sp2807.

In step Sp2807, stage transition processing for non-character-related stages is executed. Stage transition processing for non-character-related stages will be described later. After executing step Sp2807, the process advances to step Sp2808.

In step Sp2808, the reach type determination value VR when a reach occurs or is missed is set to 0. After step Sp2806 or step Sp2807 is executed, the reach type determination value VR when a reach occurs or is missed is temporarily cleared to 0. After step Sp2808 is executed, this stage production process ends.

<Stage transition processing in character stages>
Next, the stage transition process in the character stage will be described. The stage transition process in the character stage is a process for controlling whether or not to transition to a stage when the stage is a character stage, and realizes the contents of Fig. 219 described above. This process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine for the stage production process (Fig. 251: Sp2806).

Figure 252 is a flowchart showing the stage transition process in the character stage. In step Sp2901, it is determined whether or not a special reach occurred (special reach/miss) in a play round that resulted in a miss in the winning lottery for the current play round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach type determination value VR when a reach occurs/misses is 2.

In step Sp2901, if it is determined that the reach type judgment value VR at the time of reach occurrence/missing is not 2, that is, if it is determined that it does not correspond to special reach/missing (Sp2901: NO), the process described below is executed. The stage transition process in the character-related stage is ended without doing so. That is,
・Game times where you won a jackpot in the winning lottery,
・If a reach does not occur in the game session that resulted in a losing result in the winning lottery,
・If a normal reach occurs in a game session that resulted in a losing result in the winning lottery,
・In any case where a super reach occurs in a game session with a losing result in a winning lottery, the stage in the current game session will be continued by completing the stage transition process in the character stage, and the stage will continue. No migration.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp2901 that the reach type determination value VR when a reach occurs and is missed is 2, that is, if it is determined that a special reach is missed (Sp2901: YES), proceed to step Sp2902.

In step Sp2902, the presence or absence of a jackpot and the change time for each reservation are ascertained from the reservation information at the end of a certain game round at this time. Specifically, the presence or absence of a jackpot and the change time for each reservation are ascertained from the reservation information stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 by step Sp1802 of the reservation command response process (Figure 238). After executing step Sp2902, proceed to step Sp2903.

In step Sp2903, it is determined whether or not there is information indicating that the game corresponds to special reach/miss or special reach/jackpot in the pending information at the end of the game round. Specifically, based on whether or not there is a jackpot in each hold as determined in step Sp2902, and whether or not the fluctuation time information in each hold as determined in step Sp2902 corresponds to special reach, special reach, miss, or It is determined whether or not there is information indicating that the game corresponds to special reach/jackpot.

In step Sp2903, if it is determined that there is information indicating that special reach/miss or special reach/jackpot is present in the pending information at the end of the game round (Sp2903: YES), the process described below is executed. The stage transition process in the character-related stage is ended without doing so. Exception 1 in FIG. 219 is realized by determining YES in step Sp2903 and exiting the stage transition process in the character-related stage.

On the other hand, in step Sp2903, if it is determined that the pending information at the end of the game round does not include information indicating that it corresponds to special reach/missing, and information indicating that it corresponds to special reach/jackpot ( Sp2903: NO), proceed to step Sp2904.

In step Sp2904, it is determined whether the reserved information at the end of the game round contains information indicating a Super Reach Miss or a Super Reach Big Win. Specifically, it is determined whether the reserved information contains information indicating a Super Reach Miss or a Super Reach Big Win based on whether or not there is a big win in each reserved ball grasped in step Sp2902 and whether or not the information on the variable time in each reserved ball grasped in step Sp2902 corresponds to a Super Reach.

In step Sp2904, if it is determined that the pending information at the end of the game round contains information indicating a Super Reach Miss or a Super Reach Big Win (Sp2904: YES), proceed to step Sp2905.

In step Sp2905, a character stage lottery process is executed. The character stage lottery process is a process for performing a lottery to identify one stage from the character stages described above, Warrior A's room stage, Warrior B's room stage, Warrior C's room stage, and Warrior D's room stage. Specifically, the lottery is performed by obtaining a value from the random number counter C6 for character stage lottery and comparing this value with a character stage lottery table stored in the sound/light side ROM 93. The random number counter C6 for character stage lottery is provided in the various counter area 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The random number counter C6 is updated at short intervals.

Figure 253 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the stage lottery table. Figure 253 (a) shows the contents of the character stage lottery table, and Figure 253 (b) shows the contents of the non-character stage lottery table. As shown in Figure 253 (a), of the values of the random number counter C6 for character stage lottery, which are "0 to 99", "0 to 24" corresponds to the stage of Warrior A's room, "25 to 49" corresponds to the stage of Warrior B's room, "50 to 74" corresponds to the stage of Warrior C's room, and "75 to 99" corresponds to the stage of Warrior D's room. In this embodiment, the stage of each room is configured to have an equal probability of winning, but instead, the stage of each room may be configured to have a different probability of winning. After executing step Sp2905, proceed to step Sp2906.

In step Sp2906, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step Sp2905 is a character stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the warrior character determination value VC.
If the warrior character judgment value VC is 1, it is judged whether the lottery result is the stage of Warrior A's room,
If the warrior character judgment value VC is 2, it is judged whether the lottery result is the stage of warrior B's room,
If the warrior character judgment value VC is 3, it is judged whether the lottery result is the stage of Warrior C's room,
If the warrior character judgment value VC is 4, it is judged whether the lottery result is the stage of Warrior D's room.

In step Sp2906, if it is determined that the result of the lottery in step Sp2905 is a character stage corresponding to the warrior character identified by the warrior character judgment value VC (Sp2906: YES), the process returns to step Sp2905 and executes the processes of steps Sp2905 and Sp2906.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp2906 that the lottery result in step Sp2905 is not a character-related stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the warrior character determination value VC (Sp2906: NO), the process advances to step Sp2907. When the determination process in step Sp2906 is executed, it is determined in step Sp2901 that the current game round is a special reach/miss, and the special reach/miss performance pattern table reference process (FIG. 248) The character judgment value VC is set to a value that specifies the warrior character appearing in the production corresponding to special reach/miss. Therefore, if it is determined NO in step Sp2906, it means that the lottery result in step Sp2905 matches the warrior character other than the warrior character who appeared in the special reach/miss performance of this game round. do. Therefore, in step Sp2906, if the lottery result in step Sp2905 is a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the performance corresponding to the special reach/miss of the current game round, the process advances to step Sp2907.

In step Sp2907, a command is sent to the display control device 100 to display a screen effect of a character-based stage corresponding to the lottery result in step Sp2905. The command includes setting the display destination to the background layer, and the screen effect is displayed as the background on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As a result, a transition is made from a character-based stage to a character-based stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the warrior character who appeared in the production corresponding to special reach/miss. After executing step Sp2907, the process advances to step Sp2908.

In step Sp2908, the warrior character determination value VC is set to a value corresponding to the lottery result in step Sp2905. in particular,
- If the lottery result is the stage of Warrior A's room, set the warrior character judgment value VC to 1,
- If the lottery result is the stage of Warrior B's room, set the warrior character judgment value VC to 2,
- If the lottery result is the stage of warrior C's room, set the warrior character judgment value VC to 3,
- If the lottery result is the stage of the warrior D's room, the warrior character judgment value VC is set to 4.

Exception 2 in FIG. 219 is realized by executing the processes from step Sp2904 to step Sp2908. After step Sp2908 is executed, the stage transition process in the character stage is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sp2904 that the pending information at the end of the game round does not contain information indicating a Super Reach Miss or a Super Reach Big Win (Sp2904: NO), proceed to step Sp2909.

In step Sp2909, a non-character stage lottery process is executed. The non-character stage lottery process is a process for performing a lottery to identify one stage from the non-character stages described above, which are the rural stage, urban stage, ocean stage, and all-player stage. Specifically, the lottery is performed by obtaining a value from the random number counter C7 for non-character stage lottery and comparing this value with the non-character stage lottery table stored in the sound/light side ROM 93. The random number counter C7 for non-character stage lottery is provided in the various counter area 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The random number counter C7 is updated at short intervals.

As shown in FIG. 253(b), among the values of the random number counter C7 for non-character stage lottery of "0 to 99", "0 to 24" correspond to the countryside stage, and "25 to 99" correspond to the rural stage. 49" corresponds to the urban stage, "50-74" corresponds to the ocean stage, and "75-99" corresponds to everyone's stage. In this embodiment, each stage has the same probability of winning, but instead, each stage may have a different probability of winning. After executing step Sp2909, the process advances to step Sp2910.

In step Sp2910, a command to display a screen effect of a non-character stage corresponding to the lottery result of step Sp2909 is sent to the display control device 100. The command includes an indication that the display destination is to be the background layer, and the screen effect is displayed as the background on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As a result, a transition is made from the character stage to the non-character stage corresponding to the lottery result. After executing step Sp2910, the process proceeds to step Sp2911.

In step Sp2911, the character stage judgment value VS is set to 0. If step Sp2901 is judged as YES, the processing from step Sp2909 to step Sp2911 is executed, thereby realizing the principle in FIG. 219. After step Sp2911 is executed, the stage transition processing in the character stage is terminated.

<Stage transition processing in non-character stages>
Next, stage transition processing in non-character-related stages will be explained. The stage transition process in a non-character stage is a process for controlling execution/non-execution of stage transition when the stage is in a non-character stage, and realizes the contents of FIG. 220 described above. . This process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the stage production process (FIG. 251: Sp2807).

FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing stage transition processing in a non-character stage. In step Sp3001, it is determined whether or not a super reach has occurred (super reach/miss) in the game round in which the winning lottery in the current game round resulted in a losing result. Specifically, it is determined whether the reach type determination value VR is 1 at the time of reach occurrence/missing.

In step Sp3001, if it is determined that the reach type determination value VR at the time of reach occurrence/missing is 1, that is, if it is determined that it is a super reach/missing, (Sp3001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp3002. .

In step Sp3002, a command is sent to the display control device 100 to display a screen effect of a character-based stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the warrior character determination value VC. The command includes setting the display destination to the background layer, and the screen effect is displayed as the background on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. in particular,
- If the warrior character judgment value VC is 1, a command is sent to display the screen effect of the stage in warrior A's room.
- If the warrior character judgment value VC is 2, a command is sent to display the screen effect of the stage in warrior B's room.
- If the warrior character judgment value VC is 3, a command is sent to display the screen effect of the stage in warrior C's room.
- If the warrior character judgment value VC is 4, a command is sent to display the screen effect of the stage of the warrior D's room.

If it is determined in step Sp3001 that a super reach miss has occurred and step Sp3002 is executed, the warrior character determination value VC will be a value that identifies the warrior character that appeared in the performance corresponding to the super reach miss, and so in step Sp3002, a screen performance of a character stage corresponding to the warrior character that appeared in the performance corresponding to the super reach miss will be displayed. After executing step Sp3002, proceed to step Sp3003.

In step Sp3003, the character-based stage determination value VS is set to 1, which indicates that the stage is a character-based stage. Exception A in FIG. 220 is realized by determining YES in step Sp3003 and executing the processes of step Sp3002 and step Sp3003. After executing step Sp3003, the stage transition process in the non-character stage is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sp3001, if it is determined that the reach type determination value VR at the time of reach occurrence/missing is not 1, that is, if it is determined that it is not super reach/missing (Sp3001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp3004.

In step Sp3004, it is determined whether or not a special reach occurred (special reach/miss) in the game round that resulted in a miss in the winning lottery for the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach type determination value VR when a reach occurs/misses is 2.

In step Sp3004, if it is determined that the reach type determination value VR at the time of reach occurrence/missing is not 2, that is, if it is determined that it does not correspond to special reach/missing (Sp3004: NO), the process described below is executed. The stage transition process in the non-character stage is ended without any change. That is,
・Game times where you won a jackpot in the winning lottery,
・If a reach does not occur in the game session that resulted in a losing result in the winning lottery,
・If a normal reach occurs in a game session that resulted in a losing result in the winning lottery,
In either case, the stage in the current game round is continued by terminating the stage transition process in the non-character stage, and no stage transition is performed.

On the other hand, in step Sp3004, if it is determined that the reach type judgment value VR at the time of reach occurrence/missing is 2, that is, if it is determined that it is a special reach/missing (Sp3004: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp3005. move on.

In step Sp3005, the presence or absence of a jackpot and the fluctuation time for each reservation are determined from the reservation information at the end of a certain game round at this time. The processing of step Sp3005 is the same as that of step Sp2902 (Figure 252) described above. After executing step Sp3005, proceed to step Sp3006.

In step Sp3006, it is determined whether the pending information at the end of the game round contains information indicating a special reach miss or a special reach jackpot. The processing of step Sp3006 is the same as that of step Sp2903 (Figure 252) described above.

In step Sp3006, if it is determined that there is information indicating that special reach/miss or special reach/jackpot is present in the pending information at the end of the game round (Sp3006: YES), the step described above is performed. Proceed to Sp3002.

As explained above, in step Sp3002, a command is sent to the display control device 100 to display the screen presentation of the character stage corresponding to the warrior character identified by the warrior character judgment value VC. In step Sp3006, if it is determined that the pending information contains information indicating a special reach miss or special reach jackpot, and step Sp3002 is executed, the warrior character judgment value VC becomes a value that identifies the warrior character that appeared in the presentation corresponding to the special reach miss, and therefore in step Sp3002, the screen presentation of the character stage corresponding to the warrior character that appeared in the presentation corresponding to the special reach miss is displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp3006 that the pending information at the end of the game round does not contain information indicating a special reach miss or a special reach jackpot (Sp3006: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp3007.

In step Sp3007, a character-based stage lottery process is executed. The character-based stage lottery process is for specifying one stage from among the character-based stages of warrior A's room, warrior B's room, warrior C's room, and warrior D's room. This is a lottery process and is the same as step Sp2905 (FIG. 252) described above. After executing step Sp3007, the process advances to step Sp3008.

In step Sp3008, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step Sp3007 is a character stage corresponding to the warrior character identified by the warrior character determination value VC. The processing in step Sp3008 is the same as that in step Sp2906 (FIG. 252) described above.

In step Sp3008, if it is determined that the lottery result in step Sp3007 is a character-type stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the warrior character determination value VC (Sp3008: YES), the process returns to step Sp3007, and step Sp3007 and executes each process of step Sp3008.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp3008 that the lottery result in step Sp3007 is not a character stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the warrior character determination value VC (Sp3008: NO), proceed to step Sp3008. When the determination process in step Sp3008 is executed, step Sp3004 determines that the current game round is a special reach miss, and the warrior character determination value VC is set to a value that specifies the warrior character that appears in the effect corresponding to the special reach miss by the special reach miss performance pattern table reference process (Figure 248). Therefore, if it is determined to be NO in step Sp3008, it means that a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the effect corresponding to the special reach miss in the current game round matches the lottery result in step Sp3007. Therefore, in step Sp3008, if the result of the lottery in step Sp3007 is a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the performance corresponding to the special reach/miss in this game round, the process proceeds to step Sp3009.

In step Sp3009, a command is sent to the display control device 100 to display a screen effect of a character-based stage corresponding to the lottery result in step Sp3007. The command includes setting the display destination to the background layer, and the screen effect is displayed as the background on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. The processing in step Sp3009 is the same as step Sp2907 (FIG. 252) described above. As a result of the process in step Sp3009, a transition is made from a non-character-related stage to a character-related stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the warrior character who appeared in the production corresponding to special reach/miss. After executing step Sp3009, the process advances to step Sp3010.

In step Sp3010, the warrior character determination value VC is set to a value corresponding to the lottery result in step Sp3007. The processing in step Sp3010 is the same as step Sp2908 (FIG. 252) described above. After executing step Sp3010, the process advances to step Sp3011.

In step Sp3011, the character stage judgment value VS is set to 1, indicating that this is a character stage. If step Sp3004 is judged as YES, the processing from step Sp3007 to step Sp3011 is executed, thereby realizing the principle in FIG. 220. After step Sp3011 is executed, the stage transition processing in the non-character stage is terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly include a main process that is repeatedly executed from when the power is turned on until the power is turned off, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound and light emission control device 90, and a V interrupt process that is executed when a V interrupt signal sent from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power is turned on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the contents of the command received from the audio emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 255 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main processing is executed when the power is turned on, and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing is described below.

In step Sp3101, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and the memories in the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 are cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written into the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. After that, the process advances to step Sp3102.

In step Sp3102, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, a description will be given of the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio and light emission control device 90.

Figure 256 is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sp3201, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage processing, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage processing are read out by the command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described later, and the processing corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after specifying an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, drawing and drawing of the image on the VDP 105 are performed. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed, and is also transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive instructions to draw the next image before the image drawing or display processing has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or display It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which image information is stored. The details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sp3301, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command corresponding processing, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 241) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a production command is stored, control of drawing and display of the image is started so that the production mode specified by the production command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

If a production operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the production operation is executed. Image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In addition, in the command response process (Sp3301), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processes corresponding to all the analyzed commands are executed. The reason for this is explained below. The command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the performance is set by the sound and light emission control device 90 and the performance is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the performance are stored in the command storage area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the form of the performance, such as the preview performance or the stop pattern set by the sound and light emission control device 90, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that form is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

In step Sp3302, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Sp3301) etc. . After that, the process advances to step Sp3303.

In step Sp3303, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the contents of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, as specified by the display setting processing (Sp3302), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, rotation angle, etc., are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step Sp3304.

In step Sp3304, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing processing, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each character, which were determined by the task processing (Sp3303), are sent to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on this information, and transmits the image data to the pattern display device 41 together with a drive signal so that the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt processing is displayed on the pattern display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sp3305, where other processing is executed, and the V interrupt processing is terminated. Above, an example of specific control for executing various processing including the big win presentation in the pachinko machine 10 has been described.

《5-7》Action/Effect:

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a super reach occurs in a game round in which the player is in the character stage and the result is a loss in the winning lottery (in the case of a super reach/miss), The configuration is such that the stage in the relevant game round is continued and no stage transition is performed (see FIG. 219). Since the screen display in the game round in which the super reach occurred is not a display in which the warrior character dies, the player will not feel any discomfort even if the warrior character appears on the stage in the next game round. do not have.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a special reach occurs in a game in which the player is in a character stage and the winning lottery results in a loss, the stage is shifted from the character stage to a non-character stage at the end of the game (however, there are exceptions). Since the screen presentation in the game in which the special reach occurs is a dead or alive presentation, the warrior character is killed in the game in which the winning lottery results in a loss. For this reason, if the stage in the game in question were to be continued and no stage transition were to be performed, the player would see a moving image of the dead warrior character appearing in the next game as if nothing had happened, which could cause a sense of incongruity. In order to solve this problem, in this embodiment, when a special reach occurs in a game in which the player is in a character stage and the winning lottery results in a loss, the stage is shifted from the current character stage to a non-character stage that is not directly related to the warrior character corresponding to the character stage. This prevents the player from feeling uneasy when, after watching a moving image of a warrior character dying in a character stage, the character stage corresponding to the dead warrior character continues and the dead warrior character appears as if nothing had happened. Therefore, this configuration ensures a story-like nature to the performance in which the characters appear, which increases the excitement of the game.

However, there is an exception to the configuration in which the stage is shifted from the character-based stage to a non-character-based stage when the game result of a game is a special reach-miss in a character-based stage. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the game result of a game is a special reach-miss in a character-based stage, if there is information indicating that the game is a special reach in the reserved information at the end of the game, the stage in the game continues and no stage shift is performed (Exception 1). According to the configuration of Exception 1, in the screen performance of the special reach, a moving image of a warrior character dying is displayed, and at the end of the game, a screen performance corresponding to the character-based stage in which the dead warrior character appears is displayed. As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in principle, when the game result of a game is a special reach-miss in a character-based stage, the stage is shifted to a non-character-based stage, and the dead warrior character does not appear as the main character in the stage of the next game. Nevertheless, according to the configuration of exception 1, the dead warrior character will appear on the stage of the next game. In contrast, in the case of exception 1, the reserved information at the end of the game contains information indicating that the game corresponds to a special reach, so the degree of advantage (expectation of a big win) for the player is high. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player recognizes that the dead warrior character will appear on the stage of the next game as if nothing had happened, when the reserved information is subsequently consumed, the player recognizes the performance that expects an advantageous result, and can know that the appearance of the dead warrior character on the stage of the next game can also be expected to bring an advantageous result. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 having the configuration of exception 1 can make the player have a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and can increase the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the game result of a game is a special reach miss in the character stage, if the reserved information at the end of the game includes information indicating a super reach, the game moves to a character stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the performance corresponding to the special reach miss of the game (Exception 2). According to the configuration of Exception 2, a moving image of a warrior character dying is displayed in the screen performance of the special reach, and at the end of the game, a screen performance corresponding to a character stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the deceased warrior character is displayed. In the case of Exception 2, since the reserved information at the end of the game includes information indicating a super reach, the degree of advantage is relatively high for the player. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, when the player recognizes that the game has been moved to a character stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the deceased warrior character at the end of the game, the player will have a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come. Therefore, a pachinko machine 10 with the configuration of exception 2 can give players a sense of expectation that a relatively favorable outcome will occur, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the game is in a non-character stage and the game result of the game round is super reach/miss, at the end of the game round, the super reach/miss of the game round is handled. The configuration is such that the stage moves to a character-based stage corresponding to the warrior character that appeared in the performance (see Figure 220). Since the screen display in the game round in which the super reach occurred is not a display in which the warrior character dies, the player will not feel any discomfort even if the warrior character appears on the stage in the next game round. do not have. Therefore, in this embodiment, if a super reach occurs in a game that is in a non-character stage and results in a winning lottery, a character corresponding to the warrior character that appeared in the production of the super reach occurs. The configuration was designed to move to the system stage.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the game result of a game is a special reach/miss in a non-character stage, the game is transitioned to a character stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the effect corresponding to the special reach/miss in that game at the end of the game (however, there are exceptions). Since the screen effect in the game in which the special reach occurs is a dead or alive effect, the effect of the warrior character dying is performed in the game in which the winning lottery results in a miss. For this reason, if the stage transition is performed to a character stage corresponding to the warrior character that appeared in the effect corresponding to the special reach/miss in that game, the player may feel uncomfortable because he or she will see a moving image in which the dead warrior character appears in the next game as if nothing had happened. In order to solve this problem, in this embodiment, when the game result is a miss in a game in which the game is in a non-character stage and a special reach occurs in a game in which the winning lottery results in a miss, the game is transitioned to a character stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the effect corresponding to the special reach/miss in that game at the end of the game. This prevents the player from feeling uneasy when, after watching a video of a warrior character dying in a non-character stage, the player transitions to a character stage corresponding to the dead warrior character, only to see the dead warrior character appear as if nothing had happened. Therefore, this configuration ensures a story-like nature to the performances in which characters appear, making the game more interesting.

However, when the game is in a non-character stage and the game result of the game is a special reach/miss, if there is information indicating that the game corresponds to a special reach in the reserved information at the end of the game, the game is transitioned to a character stage corresponding to the warrior character that appeared in the performance corresponding to the special reach/miss of the game (Exception A). According to the configuration of Exception A, in the screen performance of the special reach, a performance in which the warrior character dies is performed, and at the end of the game, a screen performance corresponding to the character stage in which the deceased warrior character appears is displayed. As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in principle, when the game is in a non-character stage and the game result of the game is a special reach/miss, the stage transition is performed to a character stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the performance corresponding to the special reach/miss of the game, and the deceased warrior character does not appear as the main character in the stage of the next game. Nevertheless, according to the configuration of Exception A, the deceased warrior character will appear in the stage of the next game. On the other hand, in the case of exception A, the reserved information at the end of the game round contains information indicating that the game is in a special reach, which is highly advantageous for the player. Therefore, with the pachinko machine 10, if the player recognizes that the dead warrior character will appear in the stage of the next game round as if nothing had happened, and recognizes the presentation that is expected to produce a favorable result when the reserved information is subsequently consumed, the player can know that the appearance of the dead warrior character in the stage of the next game round will also produce a favorable result. Therefore, with the pachinko machine 10 having the configuration of exception A, the player can have a sense of expectation that a favorable result will come, which can increase the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a super reach or special reach occurs in a game round, a screen presentation (reach presentation) consisting of a moving image with a specific warrior character as the main character is performed, but when the game round is in a character stage, the warrior character that appears as the main character in the screen presentation when the super reach or special reach occurs is configured to match the warrior character corresponding to the character stage. For example, when a super reach or special reach occurs in a game round in a character stage corresponding to warrior character A, the screen presentation displayed in these reaches has warrior character A as the main character. In conventional pachinko machines that do not have such a configuration, the degree of connection between the reach presentation and the set stage is low, so there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable. In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the warrior character corresponding to the reach presentation matches the warrior character corresponding to the character stage, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the presentation. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. Note that there may be multiple pairs of warrior characters that correspond to reach effects and warrior characters that correspond to character-based stages, and it is not necessary that all warrior characters that correspond to reach effects match warrior characters that correspond to character-based stages. Furthermore, there may be a configuration in which none of the warrior characters that correspond to reach effects match any of the warrior characters that correspond to character-based stages.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a transition is made from a non-character stage to a character stage, the character stage indicates which warrior character among the character stages the stage has been transitioned to. It is stored in the judgment value VS (see FIG. 254). Then, based on this character-based stage judgment value VS, a reach performance pattern is determined when a super reach or special reach occurs (see FIGS. 245 and 246). Looking back, the transition to the character stage is executed based on the presence or absence of a jackpot in the winning lottery, the presence or absence of a reach, and the type of reach that occurs (hereinafter these three are collectively referred to as game results). There is. For this purpose, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a warrior character judgment value VC is obtained based on the game result in the previous winning lottery, and a special reach for the warrior character specified from the obtained warrior character judgment value VC is determined.・The performance pattern for super reach will be set. In conventional pachinko machines that do not have such a configuration, the degree of connection between the reach effect and the game result of the previous game round is low, so there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the warrior character corresponding to the reach effect matches the warrior character specified based on the game results of the previous game round. It is possible to prevent the person from feeling uncomfortable with the performance.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the transition from the non-character stage to the character stage is performed based on the reserved information. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the warrior character judgment value VC is calculated based on the reserved information, and the performance pattern for the special reach and super reach for the warrior character specified from the calculated warrior character judgment value VC is set. In conventional pachinko machines that do not have this configuration, the degree of connection between the reach performance and the reserved information is low, so there is a risk that the player will feel strange. In contrast, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the warrior character corresponding to the reach performance matches the warrior character specified based on the reserved information, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling strange about the performance. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can further increase the interest of the game.

<<5-8>> Modification of the fifth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be embodied in various forms without departing from the spirit of the present invention, for example, the following modifications are also possible. Note that in the modifications described below, the same configurations, processes, and effects as those of the above embodiment will not be described.

《5-8-1》Variation 1:
In the fifth embodiment, if a special reach occurs (in the case of a special reach/loss) in a game round that results in a winning lottery result in a character-related stage, at the end of the game round, The configuration allows transition from a character-related stage to a non-character-related stage (see Figure 219). According to this configuration, unless a special reach occurs, a stage transition will not be made. Since special reach occurs relatively infrequently, there was a problem in that there were relatively few stage transitions when it was in a character stage. On the other hand, as a modified example, if the state in the character-related stage continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 games) or more, a configuration may be adopted in which the state is forcibly shifted to the non-character-related stage. According to this configuration, since the transition to the non-character stage is made after the predetermined period has elapsed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, as another modification, if the state of being in a character-related stage continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 games) or more, a lottery process is performed to switch the stage, and a winner is selected in this lottery process. It may also be configured to occasionally transition to a non-character-related stage.

As another variation, if a state in a character stage continues for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 game plays) or more, the corresponding character in the character stage may transition to a different character stage. For example, a transition may be made from a stage in a Pretty Warrior character's room to a stage in a Young Warrior character's room. This configuration also allows the player to enjoy the fun of the stage transition, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in a character-based stage, the corresponding character moves to a different character-based stage, so that when the variable display ends and the stationary display occurs, the arrangement of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is a predetermined arrangement. It may also be configured such that when the characters are arranged in this order, the transition is made to a character-based stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the arrangement. Specifically, when the specific arrangement is a reachable arrangement, a configuration may be adopted in which a transition is made to a character-based stage corresponding to a warrior character specified by the same two symbols. For example, if the patterns are arranged as shown in FIG. 205, the stage will be moved to the pretty warrior character's room stage. According to this configuration, since it is possible to associate the arrangement of the ready-to-reach symbols with the stage to which the player moves, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<<5-8-2>> Variation 2:
In the fifth embodiment, when the condition for the transition in FIG. 220 is satisfied in the non-character stage, the stage transition is performed, and when the condition for the transition is not satisfied, the stage transition is not performed. In contrast, as a modified example, when the condition for the transition in FIG. 220 is not satisfied, the current stage may be periodically transitioned to another stage in the non-character stage. For example, when the state in the non-character stage continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 times of play), the current stage, a rural stage, may be transitioned to an urban stage. According to this configuration, the stage transition is performed in the non-character stage every time a predetermined period has elapsed, so that the interest of the game can be further improved. Note that the above-mentioned stage transition is not limited to a configuration that is performed periodically, and may be a configuration that is performed non-periodically. For example, the above-mentioned stage transition may be performed when the arrangement of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 when the variable display ends and the stationary display becomes a predetermined arrangement.

<<5-8-3>> Variation 3:
In the fifth embodiment, the super reach occurrence performance pattern (for miss or big win) and the special reach occurrence performance pattern (for miss or big win) are individual ones corresponding to each warrior character A to D, but if the super reach occurrence performance pattern or the special reach occurrence performance pattern is for the same warrior character, it is the same whether the stage when the reach occurs is a character stage or a non-character stage. In contrast, as a modified example, the super reach occurrence performance pattern and the special reach occurrence performance pattern may be configured to differ depending on whether the stage is a character stage or a non-character stage. That is, the super reach occurrence performance pattern in a game round when the stage is a non-character stage may be different from the super reach occurrence performance pattern in a game round when the stage is a character stage, and may be a performance specific to the non-character stage. Also, the special reach occurrence performance pattern in a game round when the stage is a non-character stage may be different from the special reach occurrence performance pattern in a game round when the stage is a character stage, and may be a performance specific to the non-character stage. The non-character stage-specific effects may be effects in which no warrior characters appear, or effects in which a sub-character not associated with a character stage appears.

<<5-8-4>> Variation 4:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the player may specify a favorite warrior character from among the warrior characters A to D. Specifically, the player may specify a favorite warrior character by selecting one of the warrior characters A to D on the demo screen. In this configuration, when a favorite warrior character is specified, only a stage corresponding to the favorite warrior character is set in the character stage. In this case, a stage transition is performed between the character stage corresponding to the favorite warrior character and the non-character stage. According to this configuration, the player can always see the favorite warrior character in the character stage, which can give the player a sense of satisfaction. However, according to this configuration, when the player is in the non-character stage and the game result of the game round is a special reach/miss, the favorite warrior character who died in the battle performance appears in the character stage after the transition, and the player who sees this may feel uncomfortable. In order to solve this problem, as a further modified example, when the game result of the game is a special reach or miss in a non-character stage, the game may be temporarily shifted to a character stage corresponding to a warrior character different from the favorite warrior character, and then, after a predetermined period of time, the game may be shifted to a character stage corresponding to the favorite warrior character. With this configuration, it is possible to make many favorite warrior characters appear while ensuring the story nature of the performance in which the characters appear. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. In addition, the shift to the character stage corresponding to the warrior character different from the favorite warrior character may be made by, for example, specifying a warrior character by lottery from among other warrior characters different from the favorite warrior character, and shifting to the character stage corresponding to the specified warrior character.

<<5-8-5>> Variation 5:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the degree of advantage for the player when a reach occurs varies depending on the type of reach, and is the same even if the warrior characters are different within the same reach type. In contrast, as a modified example, in the non-character stage, a configuration in which the degree of advantage for the player (expectation of a big win) is changed based on the warrior character corresponding to the reach that occurs is very good. For example, when a reach occurs for warrior character D, the degree of advantage may be 4.7%, when a reach occurs for warrior character C, the degree of advantage may be 7.9%, when a reach occurs for warrior character B, the degree of advantage may be 16.6%, and when a reach occurs for warrior character A, the degree of advantage may be 94.5%. According to this configuration, since it is possible to distinguish between types of warrior characters, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

《5-8-6》Variation 6:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when the game is in a character stage and the game result of a game round is a special reach/miss, the pending information at the end of the game round indicates that it corresponds to a special reach. When there is information indicating this, the stage in the relevant game round is continued and no stage transition is performed (Exception 1). According to this configuration, the player plays the game on the same character-based stage even in the game round after the game round in which the special reach/miss has occurred. Furthermore, since there is information indicating that the pending information corresponds to special reach, the player will be defeated first by the special reach performance (i.e., battle performance) that is executed when the pending information is exhausted. You can watch another battle between the same warrior characters as the one you played, and by winning, you can avenge your defeat (win a jackpot). For this reason, as a modified example, if the above exception 1 occurs and the character remains on the same character stage, the content of the screen effect when a special reach occurs in the subsequent game round will be changed first. It may also be configured to match the screen presentation of the special reach in the game round when . The matching referred to here may be a complete match or a partial match.

Since the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 determines the variation time of the game round based on the winning or losing result of the winning lottery for the current game round, the occurrence or non-occurrence of a reach, and the value of the variation type counter CS without storing the variation time of the previous game round, the variation time changes successively, and it is difficult to completely match the reach performance. Therefore, the configuration may be such that the variation time assigned to the reserve is combined to ensure a length close to the variation time of the game round that previously became a special reach/miss. Specifically, by reading the reserved information in advance, if the variation time of the game round to be executed later is shorter than the variation time of the game round that previously became a special reach/miss, the main part of the reach performance of the game round that previously became a special reach/miss is assigned to the variation time related to the reserved information that corresponds to the special reach, and the introduction part of the reach performance is assigned to the variation time related to the reserved information that is consumed before the reserved information that corresponds to the special reach. The introduction of this reach effect is divided into multiple parts, and only the necessary part is extracted and allocated from the divided introduction parts according to the time that can be secured by the reserved information that is consumed before the reserved information corresponding to the special reach. Furthermore, the length of each divided introduction part can be extended by a small amount as necessary, and the length of the effect can be adjusted to the variable time. If there is no reserved information that is consumed before the reserved information corresponding to the special reach, the effect pattern may be set by allocating only the main part of the reach effect to the variable time related to the reserved information that is determined to be corresponding to the special reach. In addition, by reading the reserved information in advance, if the variable time in the game round that is executed later is longer than the variable time in the game round that was executed earlier, in which the special reach was a miss, a new introduction part with no characteristics may be added to the reach effect in the game round that was executed earlier, so that the content of the reach effect in the game round that is executed later roughly matches the content of the effect in the game round that was executed earlier, in which the special reach was a miss.

With the above configuration, it is possible to roughly match the screen presentation of the special reach in the game round in which the special reach occurs later with the screen presentation of the special reach in the game round in which the special reach/miss occurs first. . For this reason, it is possible to make the player recall the memory of the battle performance in which he or she lost earlier, and it is possible to arouse the player's desire to try again and win. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in place of the above configuration, the screen presentation of the special reach in the game round in which the special reach occurs later is only partially different from the screen presentation of the special reach in the game round in which the special reach/miss occurs first. It is also possible to have a configuration in which In addition, if it can be determined from the pending information that a special reach/miss has occurred, the screen effect of the special reach in the game round in which the special reach occurs later will be changed to the screen effect of the special reach in the game round in which the special reach/miss occurs first. If it can be determined that a special reach/jackpot will occur based on the pending information, the special reach screen effect in the game round in which the special reach will occur later will be changed to the game round in which the special reach/miss occurs first. It is also possible to have a configuration that is only partially different from the special reach screen effect in .

《5-8-7》Variation 7:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, a stage transition between a character-based stage and a non-character-based stage is performed at the end of a game round based on game results such as a jackpot win or reach occurrence in a winning lottery. The configuration is such that the next game round is executed at the stage after the transition. On the other hand, as a modified example, the above-mentioned stage transition may be performed at the start of the current game round based on game results such as jackpot winning and reach occurrence in the winning lottery related to the previous game round. This modification also provides the same effects as the fifth embodiment. In short, the stage transition can be made at any timing from the end of a game round related to game results such as a jackpot win or reach occurrence in a winning lottery until the start of the next game round. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the stage transition is performed at a later timing than the start of the next game round. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the stage transition is performed in the middle of the above-mentioned change in the next game round. The period of variation may be, for example, the timing immediately before a character appears in a special ready-to-reach screen performance. Furthermore, as another example of moving to a stage at a timing later than the start of the next game round, when the game round related to a game result such as a jackpot win or a reach occurrence in a winning lottery is set as the starting game round, the starting point A game one or more times after the starting game time, such as a game time after the first game time (corresponding to the next game time mentioned above), a game time after the second game time, and a game time after the third game time. A configuration may also be adopted in which the stage transition is performed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start, at the end, etc.) of the game. In the case of this configuration, for example, a dedicated switching performance may be executed in the game rounds between the starting game round and the game round where the stage transition is performed. For example, the dedicated switching performance may be a performance in which a defeated character appears in a battle performance, or a performance that shows over time what the destination stage will be after a stage transition. Alternatively, the effect may include a screen effect that allows the player to specify the stage to which the stage will be transferred.

<<5-8-8>> Variation 8:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, two types of stages, a character stage and a non-character stage, are prepared as the presentation mode, and a stage transition is performed between these two types of stages. In contrast, as a modified example, a configuration may be adopted in which a stage transition is performed between three or more types of stages including a character stage and a non-character stage. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the non-character stage is divided into a non-character stage of country A and a non-character stage of country B, and the mode of the stage transition between the character stage and the non-character stage in the fifth embodiment is applied to the stage transition between the character stage and the non-character stage of country A.

<<5-8-9>> Variation 9:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the screen effect (special reach screen effect) displayed when a super reach occurs is composed of a video based on the daily life of the warrior character, but this is not limited to this, and can be replaced with various effects as long as they do not involve a confrontation with an enemy character. For example, it may be a video based on the growth of the warrior character from childhood to adulthood, or a video based on the warrior character traveling to another country.

<<5-8-10>> Variation 10:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the screen presentation displayed when the super reach occurs is limited to the one in which the warrior character appears as the main character, but as a modified example, the screen presentation displayed when the super reach occurs may have two types: one in which the warrior character appears as the main character (character screen presentation) and one in which the warrior character does not appear (non-character screen presentation). In addition, when there are two types, as a condition for stage transition in the non-character stage shown in FIG. 220, if the game result of a game round is a super reach/miss, only if the presentation corresponding to the super reach/miss of the game round is a character screen presentation, at the end of the game round, the transition to the character stage corresponding to the warrior character who appeared as the main character in the character screen presentation is performed. On the other hand, if the presentation corresponding to the super reach/miss of the game round is a non-character screen presentation, the stage transition is not performed. According to this modified example, the number of types of screen presentation displayed when the super reach occurs can be increased, which can further improve the interest of the game.

《5-8-11》Variation 11:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the screen production that is displayed when a special reach occurs (hereinafter referred to as special reach screen production) is a battle production (battle production) in which a warrior character and an enemy character confront each other. It was composed of videos. On the other hand, as a modification, the special reach screen performance may be composed of a video of playing a game such as Go, Shogi, Renju, Othello, or Backgammon. The point is, as long as the character faces off against others, it doesn't have to involve a battle scene. Furthermore, it does not necessarily have to be a confrontation with another person, but as long as it involves a scene in which the character himself takes on a challenge and the result is announced to be favorable or unfavorable to the character (i.e., to the player). , either performance is acceptable. For example, the video may include a scene in which an idol character attempts a singer audition and is either passed or failed. Furthermore, it is not necessary that both an advantageous result and an unfavorable result be announced, and any video may be used as long as it includes at least a scene in which an unfavorable result is announced. Furthermore, if the screen effect that is displayed when a specific reach (special reach in this embodiment) occurs includes a scene in which the character performs some kind of action or movement, after the screen effect is displayed. If the same character as the character who performed the above action or movement appears on the stage, the player will feel a contradiction or discomfort, and if the screen production includes a scene where the above action or movement is performed, the specific reach is Any screen effect may be displayed when this occurs.

<<5-8-12>> Variation 12:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when the game result of a game is a special reach-miss, if the reserved information at the end of the game indicates that the game corresponds to a super reach (super reach-miss or super reach-jackpot), the game progresses to a character stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the performance corresponding to the special reach-miss of the game (Exception 2). In contrast, as a modified example, when the game result is a special reach-miss, if the reserved information at the end of the game indicates that the game corresponds to a super reach-miss, the game progresses to a character stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the performance corresponding to the special reach-miss of the game, while if the reserved information at the end of the game indicates that the game corresponds to a super reach-miss, the game progresses to a character stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the performance corresponding to the special reach-miss of the game, the game progresses to a character stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the performance corresponding to the special reach-miss of the game, while if the reserved information at the end of the game indicates that the game corresponds to a super reach-jackpot .... According to this configuration, a battle is performed in a game round, and the dead warrior character appears as the main character on the stage of the next game round, and then in the game round in which a super reach occurs, a super reach is performed (a performance based on the daily life of the warrior character), and the player is guaranteed to win the jackpot. This makes it possible to give the player a sudden joy. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, as another modified example, when the game result of a game round is a special reach/miss, if there is information indicating that the game result corresponds to a super reach/miss in the reserved information at the end of the game round, the game is shifted to a character stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the warrior character who appeared in the performance corresponding to the special reach/miss in the game round, and on the other hand, if there is information indicating that the lottery results in a jackpot (regardless of whether a reach occurs or not, and the type of reach if a reach occurs) in the reserved information at the end of the game round, the stage in the game round may be continued, and no stage shift may be performed. According to this configuration, a battle is performed in a game round, and the dead warrior character appears as the main character on the stage of the next game round, and the player is guaranteed to win the jackpot in the game round in which a normal reach or super reach occurs after that. This makes it possible to give the player a sudden sense of joy. This further increases the interest of the game.

<<5-8-13>> Variation 13:
In the fifth embodiment and its modified examples, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices, such as the main control device 60, the sound and light emission control device 90, and the display control device 100. Alternatively, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to include two control devices, such as the main control device and the sub-control device. The sub-control device may be configured to execute the various processes executed in the sound and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment and its modified examples, the various processes executed in each of the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 do not need to be limited to the division described in the fifth embodiment, and it is sufficient that the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 as a whole can execute the various processes in the fifth embodiment.

<<6>> Sixth embodiment:
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is based on the pachinko machine of the fifth embodiment described above, with a new configuration added. Below, the sixth embodiment will be described by mainly explaining the differences from the pachinko machine of the fifth embodiment. Note that in the sixth embodiment, a description of the same hardware configuration and software configuration (processing) as in the fifth embodiment will be omitted. In the sixth embodiment, the same parts as in the fifth embodiment will be described below using the same names and symbols.

《6-1》Electrical configuration of audio light emission control device and display control device:
FIG. 258 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is the same as the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment, and originally does not require a new diagram, but the parts whose explanations are omitted in the fifth embodiment will be explained in this document. In the embodiment, since it is necessary to explain in detail, the drawing of FIG. 258 is added for explanation.

The block diagram shown in FIG. 258 differs from the block diagram shown in FIG. 213 in the portion of the audio and light emission control board 91 provided in the audio and light emission control device 90. As shown in the figure, in addition to the MPU 92, which is a calculation device that controls the entire audio and light emission control device 90, the audio and light emission control board 91 is equipped with a sound output LSI 97 that generates sound signals and drives the speaker 46 based on the generated sound signals to output sound, and an audio data ROM 98, which is a memory in which various audio data is stored. The audio data ROM 98 is connected to the sound output LSI 97, and the sound output LSI 97 is connected to the MPU 92 via a signal line.

The sound output LSI 97 is a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) that generates a sound to be reproduced based on instructions from the MPU 92 and outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46. Specifically, when the sound output LSI 97 receives a playback start command from the MPU 92, it specifies the sound specified by the playback start command to start playing, and uses the audio data corresponding to the identified sound for audio data. The sound to be read from the ROM 98 and reproduced is generated (ie, reproduced). Then, the sound output LSI 97 outputs the reproduced sound from the speaker 46. Further, when the sound output LSI 97 receives a playback end command from the MPU 92, it specifies the sound specified by the playback end command to end the playback, and ends the playback of the specified sound.

The sound output LSI 97 has 16 audio channels and can simultaneously generate up to 16 sounds, synthesize (mix) them, and output them from the speaker 46.

《6-2》Background technology related to sound reproduction:
Some sounds (sounds) reproduced by sound output LSIs consist of multiple parts, such as an intro and a melody. Although sound data is recorded corresponding to each of a plurality of parts, since the sound data is played back as a whole (without interruption), a plurality of sound data may be combined into one song.

A piece of music compiled in this way may be played back in different ways depending on the situation, and general sound output LSIs may be equipped with such a function. Specifically, consider a case where one song is composed of an intro section and a loop section as shown in FIG. 259(a). For music pieces compiled in this way, both the intro part and the loop part are played back by one playback start command. On the other hand, in the performance of a pachinko machine, the intro section is the introduction to the music and is played only once, but the loop section following the intro section is sometimes intended to be played repeatedly for a predetermined period of time. In short, regarding the sound reproduction form of a pachinko machine, when playing a song consisting of an "intro part" and a "loop part", there are situations in which it is desired to play only the "loop part" in a loop.

One way to achieve this is to output a playback start command with a setting to perform loop playback from the sound emission control board to the sound output LSI, and on the sound output LSI side, the above playback start command is output. When received, the intro section and loop section are first played, then the playback position is returned to the beginning of the loop section (loop in point), and the playback position is played from the loop in point to the rear end of the loop section (loop out point). It may also be configured to be played repeatedly. Even with this configuration, as shown in FIG. 259(b), the "intro part" and the "loop part" are played back, and then only the "loop part" is played back in a loop.

On the other hand, in recent pachinko machines, so-called interactive sound expression is expected, where background music and sound effects can be changed according to the progress of the game. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in order to perform interactive sound expression, commands and data can be exchanged two-way between the MPU 92 and sound output LSI 97 of the sound emission control board 91, realizing highly interactive sound playback. Therefore, the method of playing the "intro section" and the "loop section", and then playing only the "loop section" in a loop, differs in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment from the method shown in FIG. 259. The sounds played by the MPU 92 and sound output LSI 97 of the sound emission control board 91 will be explained in detail below.

《6-3》Structure of audio data:
FIG. 260 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the data structure of data stored in the audio data ROM. The audio data ROM 98 of this embodiment includes a character-based stage sound data storage area 98a that stores sound data corresponding to the content of the screen production of the character-based stage (see FIG. 214) described earlier, and A non-character stage sound data storage area 98b is provided for storing sound data corresponding to the content of the screen presentation of the non-character stage (see FIG. 215). In addition to the two storage areas 98a and 98b, the audio data ROM 98 of this embodiment includes various storage areas that store sound data corresponding to the content of various performances, sound data such as sound effects and lines of various characters, etc. There is a storage area. In this embodiment, audio data and sound data are equivalent. Sound data is also acoustic data.

In this embodiment, the audio data ROM 98 stores audio data in MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) format. However, any format can be adopted as the audio data. That is, the audio data may be in a data format in which a sound waveform is sampled using a linear pulse code variation method, or may be data compressed using various audio compression methods such as MP3 or AAC (Advanced Audio Coding). Good too. Further, a MIDI file conforming to the MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) standard for producing various sounds may be stored in the audio data ROM 98 as audio data. In this case, the sound output LSI 97 is equipped with a MIDI sound source, reads out a MIDI file from the audio data ROM 98 for playing the sound of the type instructed to start playing by the MPU 92, and causes the MIDI sound source to produce sound according to the read MIDI file. Accordingly, the configuration may be such that the sound is played back.

In the example shown in FIG. 260, the character stage sound data storage area 98a stores two types of sound data related to a specific song (hereinafter referred to as song A): song A first data A1 and song A. Second data A2 is stored. In this embodiment, a song suitable for the screen presentation of a character-based stage is selected as the song A.

The non-character stage sound data storage area 98b stores two types of sound data related to a specific song different from song A (hereinafter referred to as song B), namely, song B first data B1 and song B second data. Data B2 is stored. In this embodiment, a song suitable for the screen presentation of a non-character stage is selected as the song B.

Figure 261 is an explanatory diagram showing the structure of the first data A1 of song A and the second data A2 of song A. Figure 261(a) shows the structure of the first data A1 of song A, and Figure 261(b) shows the structure of the second data A2 of song A.

As shown in FIG. 261(a), song A first data A1 includes song A first data_intro part A11, song A first data_main part A12, and song A first data_reverberation part A13. It consists of three parts. The three portions A11 to A13 are continuous in this order. That is, the three portions A11 to A13 are grouped to be played back in this order. In other words, song A first data_main part A12 is continuous with song A first data_intro part A11 in the playback time axis direction, and song A first data_reverberation part A13 is continuous with song A first data_intro part A11. 1 data_main part A12 is continuous in the reproduction time axis direction.

Song A recorded in the first data A1 has an intro part (prelude part or introduction part) as the beginning, a melody part that follows the intro part, and a part that ends with a lingering sound after the melody part ( There is a lingering part). Song A first data_intro part A11 records the above intro part, song A first data_main part A12 records the above melody part, and song A first data_reverberation part A13 records the above lingering sound. Part is recorded. The melody part has a length of, for example, 4 bars or 8 bars.

The reverberation portion will be further explained. For example, when an orchestral piece is adopted as the musical piece A, the sound of stringed instruments and percussion instruments leaves a relatively long reverberation. Therefore, the long reverberation of stringed instruments and percussion instruments may not end at the end of the melody portion. In this embodiment, by providing the musical piece A first data_reverberation portion A13 consecutively to the end of the musical piece A first data_main portion A12, it is possible to play the relatively long reverberation of stringed instruments and percussion instruments. Note that the musical piece A first data_reverberation portion A13 does not necessarily have to include the reverberation of the sound of stringed instruments and percussion instruments, and any data may be used as long as the sound associated with the melody portion is recorded. Here, the sound associated with the melody portion means a sound that the player does not feel strange when the sound of the data recorded in the musical piece A first data_reverberation portion A13 is switched from the sound of the melody portion to the sound of the data recorded in the musical piece A first data_reverberation portion A13, and means a sound that accompanies the melody portion. The sound associated with the melody portion can also be a sound that continues from the sound of the last sound data of the melody portion. Furthermore, the song A first data_resonance section A13 can be a section that records sounds independent of the song A first data_main section A12. The data length of the song A first data_resonance section A13 is determined experimentally or by simulation so that it is at least longer than the delay period Δt, which will be described later, when played back.

As shown in FIG. 261 (b), Song A's second data A2 is made up of two parts: Song A's second data_main part A21 and Song A's second data_lingering part A22. The two parts A21, A22 are consecutive in this order. That is, the two parts A21, A22 are grouped so that they are played consecutively in this order. In other words, Song A's second data_lingering part A22 is consecutive in the playback time axis direction to Song A's second data_main part A21. Song A's second data_main part A21 is the same data as Song A's first data_main part A12. Song A's second data_lingering part A22 is the same data as Song A's first data_lingering part A13. That is, Song A's second data A2 differs from Song A's first data A1 in that it does not have an intro section, and matches the parts of Song A's first data A1 excluding the intro section (Song A's first data_main section A12 and Song A's first data_lingering section A13).

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when playing the song A, which is composed of an intro section and a loop section, on the character stage, both the above-mentioned song A first data A1 and song A second data A2 are used. The specific procedure for playing using both data A1 and A2 will be explained in detail later.

FIG. 262 is an explanatory diagram showing each structure of the music B first data B1 and the music B second data B2. FIG. 262(a) shows the structure of the music B first data B1, and FIG. 262(b) shows the structure of the music B second data B2.

As shown in FIG. 262(a), song B first data B1 includes song B first data_intro part B11, song B first data_main part B12, and song B first data_reverberation part B13. It is composed of three parts. That is, like the song A first data A1 (FIG. 261(a)), the song B first data B1 includes the song B first data_intro part B11 which records the intro part about the song, and the melody about the song. The musical piece B first data_main part B12 which records a part of the music, and the music B first data_reverberation part B13 which records a lingering part of the music are provided. Note that the data length of the song B first data _ lingering part B13 is determined experimentally or by simulation so that it can at least exceed a delay period Δt, which will be described later, during reproduction.

As shown in FIG. 262(b), the second data B2 of the song B is made up of two parts: the second data B of the song - main part B21 and the second data B of the song - lingering part B22. That is, like the second data B B1 of the song (FIG. 261(b)), the second data B2 of the song B comprises the second data B of the song - main part B21 which records the melody part of the song, and the second data B of the song - lingering part B22 which records the lingering part of the song.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when playing music B, which is made up of an intro section and a loop section, in a non-character stage, both the first music B data B1 and the second music B data B2 described above are used. The specific procedure for playing using both data B1 and B2 will be explained in detail later.

<<6-4>> Overview of Processing by Gaming Machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

Figure 263 is a timing chart showing the playback procedure for song A in sound output LSI 97. Figure 263 shows song A first data A1 that is played on audio channel 1 in sound output LSI 97, song A second data A2 that is repeatedly played on audio channel 1, and the performance form that is obtained as a result of these playbacks.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the background images of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are character-based stages, the sound output LSI 97 plays music A in the following procedure. When transitioning to the character stage, first, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (see FIG. 258, hereinafter referred to as "sound light side MPU 92") issues a music A first data playback start command to the sound output LSI 97. CA1 is transmitted (time t1). The music A first data playback start command CA1 is a command to start the playback of the music A first data A1 as the playback target, and sets the audio channel to be played to the first of the 16 audio channels. This includes settings for the th audio channel (hereinafter referred to as "audio channel 1"). Note that there is no need to limit it to the first audio channel, and any other specific audio channel can be used.

When the sound output LSI 97 receives the song A first data playback start command CA1 from the audio/light side MPU 92, it starts the process of playing the song A first data A1 to be played back, which is specified by the song A first data playback start command CA1, in the audio channel 1 specified by the song A first data playback start command CA1. In detail, when the sound output LSI 97 receives the song A first data playback start command CA1, it identifies the song A first data A1 to be played back, which is specified by the song A first data playback start command CA1, from the audio data ROM 98, reads out the identified song A first data A1 from the beginning, and sequentially generates (i.e., plays) sounds based on the read song A first data A1 in the audio channel 1 specified by the song A first data playback start command CA1. Then, the sound output LSI 97 sequentially outputs the generated sounds from the speaker 46. Thus, in the audio channel 1, the generation and output of the sound of the first data A of the song A starts from the beginning of the intro section A11 of the first data A of the song A, and continues toward the end of the first data A of the song A. Note that a delay of a predetermined period occurs from the timing (time t1) when the sound output LSI 97 receives the first data A of the song A playback start command CA1 until the sound is generated (i.e., played) (this period Δt is also referred to as the "delay period Δt" below). The main cause of the delay is that it takes a considerable amount of time to identify the first data A of the song A to be played back, which is specified by the first data A of the song A playback start command CA1, from the audio data ROM 98 and to read out the beginning of the identified first data A of the song A. That is, after the delay period Δt has elapsed (time t1+Δt) from the timing (time t1) when the sound output LSI 97 receives the first data A of the song A playback start command CA1, the first data A of the song A is played back and output from the speaker 46. Note that in the example shown in Figure 259, a delay of a delay period occurs from the timing when the playback start command is received, but in Figure 259, for simplicity of explanation, it is shown as if no delay occurs.

Returning to FIG. 263, the sound/light side MPU 92 transmits the sound output LSI 97 to the sound output LSI 97 at the timing when the playback position of the music A first data A1 in the audio channel 1 reaches the end of the music A first data_main part A12 (time t2). A music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is transmitted to the music A second data reproduction start command CA2. The music A second data reproduction command CA2 is a command to start the reproduction of the music A second data A2 as the reproduction target, and includes a setting to set the audio channel to be reproduced as the audio channel 1.

In this embodiment, the sound output LSI 97 is configured to be able to sequentially grasp the playback position of the data being played back, that is, the position of the generated sound in the data being played back. By communicating with the MPU 92 (sound/light side MPU 92) of the audio/light emission control device 90, the playback position of the data being reproduced can be communicated to the sound/light side MPU 92. The sound/light side MPU 92 determines whether or not it is the timing at which the playback position reaches the end of the song A first data_main part A12 based on the playback position of the data being played back received from the sound output LSI 97. . In addition, instead of this configuration, the audio emission control device 90 side may store in advance the arrival time until the playback position reaches the end of the song A first data_main part A12. It may be configured to determine whether or not the reproduction position has reached the end of the song A first data_main part A12 based on whether or not the time has reached the arrival time.

When the sound output LSI 97 receives the music A second data playback start command CA2 from the sound/light side MPU 92, it starts the music A second data playback on the audio channel 1 specified by the music A second data playback start command CA2. The process of reproducing the second data A2 of the music piece A to be reproduced specified by the command CA2 is started. Specifically, when the sound output LSI 97 receives the song A second data playback start command CA2, the sound output LSI 97 selects the song A to be played that is specified by the song A second data playback start command CA2 from the audio data ROM 98. 2 data A2 is specified, the identified song A second data A2 is read out sequentially from the beginning, and the sound based on the read song A second data A2 is played on the audio channel 1 specified by the song A second data playback start command CA2. are generated (ie, reproduced) in sequence. Note that immediately before the sound based on the song A second data A2 is generated, the sound based on the song A first data A1 is generated, and the generated sound is generated from the sound based on the song A first data A1. The music A switches to the sound based on the second data A2. Then, the sound output LSI 97 sequentially outputs sounds based on the generated music A second data A2 from the speaker 46. In this way, in the audio channel 1, the sound generation and output of the song A second data A2 starts from the tip of the song A second data_main part A21, and the sound generation and output begins toward the end of the song A second data A2. and the output follows.

Note that in the sound output LSI 97, there is a delay of a delay period Δt from the timing (time t2) at which the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is received until the sound of the music A second data A2 is generated (that is, played back). occurs. The main reason for the delay is that the second song A data A2 to be played specified by the song A second data playback start command CA2 is specified from the audio data ROM 98, and the specified song A second data This is because it takes a considerable amount of time to read the beginning of A2. That is, after the delay period Δt has elapsed (time t2+Δt) from the timing (time t2) when the sound output LSI 97 received the music A second data reproduction start command CA2, the sound of the music A second data A2 is played back and the speaker outputs the sound. Output from 46. During the delay period Δt, the sound of the music A 1st data_reverberation part A13 that is continuous to the end of the music A 1st data_main part A12 is continuously generated, and when the delay period Δt elapses, the sound is The sound to be played is switched to the sound of the music A2 second data A2.

Thereafter, at the timing when the playback position of the music A second data A2 on the audio channel 1 reaches the end of the music A second data_main part A21 (time t3), the sound/light side MPU 92 causes the sound output LSI 97 to: The song A second data reproduction start command CA2 is transmitted again. The song A second data playback start command CA2 is the same as the song A second data playback start command CA2 transmitted at time t2, and is a command for starting the playback of the song A second data A2 on audio channel 1 again. It is. Note that in order to distinguish the song A second data playback start command CA2 received at time t3 from the first song A second data playback start command CA2, the second song A second data playback start command CA2 is executed as necessary. It is called command CA2. The configuration is such that the determination as to whether or not the reproduction position has reached the end of the song A second data_main part A21 is made based on the reproduction position of the data being reproduced received from the sound output LSI 97. In addition, instead of this configuration, the audio emission control device 90 side may store in advance the arrival time until the playback position reaches the end of the song A second data_main part A21. It may be configured to determine whether or not the reproduction position reaches the end of the song A second data_main part A21 based on whether or not the time has reached the arrival time.

When the sound output LSI 97 receives the second song A second data playback start command CA2 from the audio/video side MPU 92, it starts playing the song A second data A2 to be played back, which is specified by the second song A second data playback start command CA2. In detail, when the sound output LSI 97 receives the second song A second data playback start command CA2, it identifies the song A second data A2 to be played back (hereinafter also referred to as the second song A second data A2) to be played back, which is specified by the second song A second data playback start command CA2, from the audio data ROM 98, reads out the identified second song A second data A2 from the beginning, and sequentially generates (i.e., plays back) sounds based on the read song A second data A2 as audio channel 1. Note that sound based on the first song A first data A1 is being generated until just before sound based on the second song A second data A2 is generated, and the generated sound switches from sound based on the first song A first data A1 to sound based on the second song A second data A2. The sound output LSI 97 then sequentially outputs the generated sound based on the song A second data A2 from the speaker 46. In this way, in audio channel 1, sound generation and output of the second song A second data A2 begins from the beginning of song A second data_intro section A21, and sound generation and output continues towards the end of the second song A second data A2.

In addition, in the sound output LSI 97, from the timing (time t3) when the second music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is received to the time when the sound of the second music A second data A2 is generated (that is, played back). , a delay of a delay period Δt occurs. The main cause of the delay is the same as the delay that occurs after time t2. That is, after the delay period Δt has elapsed (time t3+Δt) from the timing (time t3) when the sound output LSI 97 received the second music A second data reproduction start command CA2, the second music A second data A2 is The sound is reproduced and output from the speaker 46. In the delay period Δt following time t3, the sound of the music A second data_reverberation part A22 that continues to the end of the music A second data_main part A21 of the first music A second data A2 continues. When the delay period Δt elapses, the generated sound is switched to the sound of the second music A second data A2. In this way, the music piece A second data A2 is played repeatedly.

In the manner described above, loop playback of the melody portion of song A is achieved by repeatedly playing song A's second data A2 after playing song A's first data A1. This loop playback continues until the character stage ends. When the character stage ends, the sound/light side MPU 92 sends a song A's second data playback end command to the sound output LSI 97, and when the sound output LSI 97 receives the song A's second data playback end command from the sound/light side MPU 92, it ends the loop playback of song A's second data A2.

In addition, in the above explanation, the delay period that occurs in the sound output LSI 97 from the timing (time t1) when the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 is received until the sound is reproduced, and the first music A second data The delay period that occurs from the timing when the playback start command CA2 is received (time t2) until the sound is played back, and the sound is played back from the timing when the second song A second data playback start command CA2 is received (time t3). Although the delay periods occurring until then are shown as the same Δt, these delay periods Δt are not necessarily of the same time length. Although the delay period Δt may have a different length depending on the length of the data to be reproduced, etc., in this embodiment, for convenience, the delay period is shown as Δt, assuming that it has the same temporal length.

Figure 264 is a timing chart showing the playback procedure for music piece B in sound output LSI 97. Figure 264 shows music piece B first data B1 that is played on audio channel 1 in sound output LSI 97, music piece B second data B2 that is repeatedly played on audio channel 1, and the performance form that is obtained as a result of the playback of these.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the background image is a non-character stage, the sound output LSI 97 plays music B in the procedure shown in FIG. 264.

The contents of FIG. 264 are similar to those of FIG. 263. The only difference between the contents of FIG. 264 and those of FIG. 263 is that "song A" has been replaced with "song B". That is, "song A first data A1" has been replaced with "song B first data B1", "song A second data A2" has been replaced with "song B second data B2", "song A first data playback start command CA1" has been replaced with "song B first data playback start command CB1", and "song A second data playback start command CA2" has been replaced with "song B second data playback start command CB2". The timing at which the song B first data playback start command CB1 and the song B second data playback start command CB2 are output is the same as the timing at which the song A first data playback start command CA1 and the song A second data playback start command CA2 are output, respectively. Also, as in FIG. 263, there is a delay of a delay period Δt from the timing when the song B first data playback start command CB1 is received (time t1) until the sound of the song B first data B1 is actually output from the speaker 46, and there is a delay of a delay period Δt from the timing when the song B second data playback start command CB2 is received (times t2, t3) until the sound of the song B second data B2 is actually output from the speaker 46.

As shown in the figure, the first data B1 of song B is played, and then the second data B2 of song B is repeatedly played, thereby realizing loop playback of the melody portion of song B. This loop playback continues until the non-character stage ends. When the non-character stage ends, the sound/light side MPU 92 sends a song B second data playback end command to the sound output LSI 97, and when the sound output LSI 97 receives the song B second data playback end command from the sound/light side MPU 92, it ends the loop playback of the second data B2 of song B.

Returning to the playback of song A in the character stage shown in FIG. 263. According to the configuration shown in FIG. 263, loop playback of the melody part of song A is realized by repeatedly playing back song A second data A2 after playing song A first data A1. After the sound at the end of the song A first data_main part A12 of the music A first data A1 is output from the speaker 46 (time t2), the tip of the music A second data_main part A21 of the music A second data A2 is outputted from the speaker 46 (time t2). A delay of a delay period Δt occurs before the sound is output from the speaker 46. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the music A first data A1 is configured to include a music A first data_lingering part A13 that is continuous in the time axis direction with respect to the music A first data_main part A12. Then, during the delay period Δt, the sound of the song A first data_reverberation part A13 is output. Therefore, the sound is not interrupted between the melody part of the song A and the melody part of the song A at the time of repetition (that is, the delay period Δt).

Next, this embodiment will be compared with a reference example. Figure 265 is an explanatory diagram showing the data structure and performance form for song A in the reference example. Figure 265(a) shows the structure of the reference example song A first data X1, and Figure 265(b) shows the structure of the reference example song A second data X2. Figure 265(b) shows the performance form obtained from both data X1 and X2.

In the reference example, the reference example song A first data X1 and the reference example song A second data X2 are stored in the audio data ROM. The reference example song A first data X1 corresponds to the song A first data A1 (FIG. 261) in this embodiment, and is composed of two parts, the song A first data_intro section X11 and the song A first data_main section X12. The song A first data_intro section X11 is the same data as the song A first data_intro section A11 in this embodiment. The song A first data_main section X12 is the same data as the song A first data_main section A12 in this embodiment. In other words, compared to the song A first data A1 in this embodiment, the reference example song A first data X1 does not have the song A first data_resonance section A13.

The reference example song A second data X2 corresponds to the song A second data A2 (FIG. 261) in this embodiment, and is composed of song A second data_main part X21. The song A second data_main part X21 is the same data as the song A second data_main part A21 in this embodiment. That is, the reference example music A second data X2 has a configuration in which the music A second data_lingering part A22 is not included, compared to the music A second data A2 in this embodiment.

As in the present embodiment, a case will be considered in which the music A second data X2 is played after the music A first data X1 is played. Similarly to this embodiment, the sound/light side MPU transmits the reference example music piece to the sound output LSI at the timing when the playback position of the music piece A first data X1 reaches the end of the music piece A first data_main part X12. The configuration is such that a second data playback start command is sent. According to this configuration, a delay of the delay period Δt occurs from the timing when the reference example song A second data reproduction start command is received until the sound of song A second data_main part X21 is actually output from the speaker 46. do. Since the reference example music A first data X1 does not include a lingering part that is continuous with the music A first data_main part X12, the delay period Δt is in a silent state. Although the delay period Δt is a relatively short time, for example, several tens of milliseconds, the player easily notices that the BGM becomes silent midway and feels a sense of discomfort that cannot be ignored.

On the other hand, since the music A first data A1 in this embodiment includes the music A first data_reverberation part A13 which is continuous to the music A first data_main part A12, as described above, the music A first data A1 includes the music A first data_main part A12. In comparison, during the delay period Δt between the melody part of song A and the melody part of song A, the sound of song A first data_reverberation part A13 is output, and the sound is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel an unnatural feeling that the sound is cut off in the BGM when the player is on the character stage. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the sound is similarly not interrupted even during the delay period Δt when the music A second data A2 is repeatedly reproduced.

Similarly, there is no interruption in the sound during the delay period Δt when the second data A2 of song B is repeatedly played after the first data A1 of song B is played, or during the delay period Δt when the second data B2 of song B is repeatedly played. Therefore, the player does not feel any discomfort from the sound being interrupted, even when playing background music in a non-character stage.

《6-5》Various processes executed in the audio emission control device:
Next, an example of a specific process executed by the audio emission control device 90 will be described. Note that the processing executed in the main control device 60 and the processing executed in the display control device 100 are the same as those in the fifth embodiment, and therefore descriptions thereof will be omitted in this embodiment.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the audio/light emission control device 90 (hereinafter referred to as audio/light side MPU 92). The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). This timer interrupt process is mostly the same as the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 237) executed in the audio-optical side MPU 92 in the fifth embodiment, with only a few differences. Specifically, step Sq0101 and step Sq0102 of this timer interrupt processing are the same as step Sp1701 and step Sp1702 of the timer interrupt processing in the fifth embodiment. Step Sq0103 following step Sq0102 of this timer interrupt processing is a newly added step. Steps Sq0104 to Sq0110 of this timer interrupt processing are the same as steps Sp1703 to Sp1709 of the timer interrupt processing in the fifth embodiment.

In step Sq0103, BGM processing is executed. In BGM processing, processing such as setting and playing BGM music is performed. Details of BGM processing will be described later. After executing step Sq0103, proceed to step Sq0104.

<BGM processing>
Next, BGM processing will be explained. The BGM process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 266: Sq0103).

Figure 267 is a flowchart showing the BGM processing. In step Sq0201, the BGM playback start processing is executed. In the BGM playback start processing, when transitioning from a non-character stage to a character stage, or from a character stage to a non-character stage, processing is executed to instruct the sound output LSI 97 to start playing the song A first data A1 or the song B first data B1 as BGM. Details of the BGM playback start processing will be described later. After executing step Sq0201, proceed to step Sq0202.

In step Sq0202, BGM continuous playback processing is executed. In BGM continuous playback, processing is executed to repeatedly instruct the sound output LSI 97 to start playback of the second data A2 of song A or the second data B2 of song B. Details of the BGM continuous playback processing will be described later. After executing step Sq0202, this BGM processing is terminated.

<BGM playback start process>
Next, the BGM playback start process will be explained. The BGM playback start process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine for BGM processing (FIG. 267: Sq0201).

Figure 268 is a flowchart showing the BGM playback start process. In step Sq0301, it is determined whether or not this is the first execution since the power switch 88 was switched from the OFF state to the ON state (power-on). In step Sq0301, if it is determined that this is the first execution since power-on (Sq0301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0302.

In step Sq0302, a song B first data playback start command CB1 is sent to the sound output LSI 97. The song B first data playback start command CB1 is an instruction to start playback of the song B first data B1 as the playback target, and includes a setting to set the audio channel to be played to audio channel 1. After executing step Sq0302, proceed to step Sq0303.

In step Sq0303, the old character stage determination value XVS is set to 0, which means that it is a non-character stage. The old character stage determination value XVS is a value that indicates the value of the character stage determination value VS in the previous time that this BGM playback start process was executed. As explained in the fifth embodiment, the character stage determination value VS is a value that determines whether the stage is a character stage or a non-character stage, and when it is 1, it means that it is a character stage, and when it is not 1 (= 0), it means that it is a non-character stage. After executing step Sq0303, this BGM playback start process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0301 that this is not the first execution since power was turned on (Sq0301: NO), proceed to step Sq0304.

In step Sq0304, it is determined whether the character stage determination value VS matches the old character stage determination value XVS. This determination process determines whether there has been a change in the value of the character stage determination value VS when transitioning from the previous execution of this BGM playback start process to the current execution. In step Sq0304, if it is determined that the character stage determination value VS matches the old character stage determination value XVS, that is, if it is determined that there has been no change in the value of the character stage determination value VS (Sq0304: YES), this BGM playback start process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0304 that the character-based stage determination value VS does not match the old character-based stage determination value XVS, that is, if it is determined that there is a change in the value of the character-based stage determination value VS. (Sq0304: NO), proceed to step Sq0305.

In step Sq0305, it is determined whether the character stage determination value VS is 1. In step Sq0305, if it is determined that the character stage determination value VS is 1, i.e., that the current stage is a character stage (Sq0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0306.

In step Sq0306, the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97. The music A first data reproduction start command CA1 is a command to start the reproduction of the music A first data A1 as a reproduction target, and includes a setting to set the audio channel to be reproduced as audio channel 1. After executing step Sq0306, the process advances to step Sq0307.

In step Sq0307, processing is performed to transfer the value of the character-based stage judgment value VS to the old character-based stage judgment value XVS. After executing step Sq0307, this BGM playback start process ends.

In step Sq0305, if it is determined that the character stage determination value VS is not 1, i.e., that the current stage is a non-character stage (Sq0305: NO), proceed to step Sq0308.

In step Sq0308, a music B first data reproduction start command CB1 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97. The music B first data reproduction start command CB1 is a command to start the reproduction of the music B first data B1 as a reproduction target, and includes a setting to set the audio channel to be reproduced as audio channel 1. This step Sq0308 is the same as the process of step Sq0302. After executing step Sq0302, the process proceeds to step Sq0307, where the value of the character-based stage judgment value VS is transferred to the old character-based stage judgment value XVS, and then the present BGM reproduction start process is ended.

<BGM continuous playback process>
Next, the BGM continuous reproduction process will be explained. The BGM continuous reproduction process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine for BGM processing (FIG. 267: Sq0202).

Figure 269 is a flowchart showing the BGM continuous playback process. In step Sq0401, it is determined whether the first data A1 of song A is played on the audio channel 1 and the playback position is at the timing of reaching the end of the first data A_main part A12 of song A. This determination is made by receiving information indicating the type of data being played and information indicating the playback position of the data being played from the sound output LSI 97, and based on this information, it is determined whether the first data A1 of song A is played on the audio channel 1 and the playback position is at the timing of reaching the end of the first data A_main part A12 of song A. Alternatively, the audio light emission control device 90 may be configured to store in advance the arrival time until the playback position reaches the end of the first data A_main part A12 of song A, and the determination may be made based on the type of playback start command transmitted immediately before and whether the time from the start of playback has reached the arrival time. In step Sq0401, if it is determined that Song A's first data A1 is being played on audio channel 1 and that the playback position is reaching the end of Song A's first data - main part A12 (Sq0401: YES), proceed to step Sq0402.

In step Sq0402, a song A second data reproduction start command CA2 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97. The song A second data playback start command CA2 is a command to start playing the song A second data A2 as a playback target, and includes a setting to set the audio channel to be played back to audio channel 1. After executing step Sq0402, the process advances to step Sq0403.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0401 that Song A's first data A1 is not being played on audio channel 1, or that Song A's first data A1 is being played on audio channel 1 and the playback position is not at the timing to reach the end of Song A's first data - main part A12 (Sq0401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0403 without executing step Sq0402.

In step Sq0403, it is determined whether the first data B1 of song B is being played on audio channel 1 and the playback position is at the time of reaching the end of the first data B of song B_main part B12. This determination is made by receiving information indicating the type of data being played and information indicating the playback position of the data being played from the sound output LSI 97, and based on this information, it is determined whether the first data B1 of song B is being played on audio channel 1 and the playback position is at the time of reaching the end of the first data B of song B_main part B12. Alternatively, the audio light emission control device 90 may be configured to store in advance the arrival time until the playback position reaches the end of the first data B of song B_main part B12, and the determination may be made based on the type of playback start command transmitted immediately before and whether the time from the start of playback has reached the arrival time. In step Sq0403, if it is determined that Song B's first data B1 is being played on audio channel 1 and that the playback position is reaching the end of Song B's first data - main part B12 (Sq0403: YES), proceed to step Sq0404.

In step Sq0404, a song B second data reproduction start command CB2 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97. The music B second data reproduction start command CB2 is a command to start the reproduction of the music B second data B2 as a reproduction target, and includes a setting to set the audio channel to be reproduced as audio channel 1. After executing step Sq0404, the process advances to step Sq0405.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0403 that the first data B1 of song B is not being played on audio channel 1, or that the first data B1 of song B is being played on audio channel 1 and the playback position is not at the timing to reach the end of the first data B_main part B12 of song B (Sq0403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0405 without executing step Sq0404.

In step Sq0405, it is determined whether the second data A2 of song A is being played on audio channel 1 and whether the playback position is at the time when the end of the second data A of song A_main part A21 is reached. This determination is made by receiving information indicating the type of data being played and information indicating the playback position of the data being played from the sound output LSI 97, and based on this information, it is determined whether the second data A2 of song A is being played on audio channel 1 and whether the playback position is at the time when the end of the second data A of song A_main part A21 is reached. Alternatively, the audio light emission control device 90 may be configured to store in advance the arrival time until the playback position reaches the end of the second data A of song A_main part A21, and the determination may be made based on the type of playback start command transmitted immediately before and whether the time from the start of playback has reached the arrival time. In step Sq0405, if it is determined that Song A's second data A2 is being played on audio channel 1 and that the playback position is reaching the end of Song A's second data - main part A21 (Sq0405: YES), proceed to step Sq0406.

In step Sq0406, a song A second data playback start command CA2 is sent to the sound output LSI 97. The song A second data playback start command CA2 is an instruction to start playback of the song A second data A2 as the playback target, and includes a setting that the audio channel to be played is audio channel 1. The processing of step Sq0406 is the same as the processing of step Sq0402. After executing step Sq0406, proceed to step Sq0407.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0405 that Song A's second data A2 is not being played on audio channel 1, or that Song A's second data A2 is being played on audio channel 1 and the playback position is not at the timing to reach the end of Song A's second data - main part A21 (Sq0405: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0407 without executing step Sq0406.

In step Sq0407, it is determined whether the second data B2 of song B is being played on audio channel 1 and the playback position is at the timing of reaching the end of the second data B of song B_main part B21. This determination is made by receiving information indicating the type of data being played and information indicating the playback position of the data being played from the sound output LSI 97, and based on this information, it is determined whether the second data B2 of song B is being played on audio channel 1 and the playback position is at the timing of reaching the end of the second data B of song B_main part B21. Alternatively, the audio light emission control device 90 may be configured to store in advance the arrival time until the playback position reaches the end of the second data B of song B_main part B21, and the determination may be made based on the type of playback start command transmitted immediately before and whether the time from the start of playback has reached the arrival time. In step Sq0407, if it is determined that Song B's second data B2 is being played on audio channel 1 and that the playback position is reaching the end of Song B's second data - main part B21 (Sq0407: YES), proceed to step Sq0408.

In step Sq0408, a song B second data playback start command CB2 is sent to the sound output LSI 97. The song B second data playback start command CB2 is an instruction to start playback of the song B second data B2 as the playback target, and includes a setting that the audio channel to be played is audio channel 1. The processing of step Sq0408 is the same as the processing of step Sq0404. After executing step Sq0408, this BGM continuous playback processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0407 that the second data B2 of song B is not being played on audio channel 1, or that the second data B2 of song B is being played on audio channel 1 and the playback position is not at the timing to reach the end of the second data B_main part B21 of song B (Sq0407: NO), the BGM continuous playback process ends without executing step Sq0408.

《6-6》Processing executed in sound output LSI:
Next, an example of a specific process executed in the sound output LSI 97 will be explained.

<Playback start execution process>
FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing a playback start execution process executed in the sound output LSI 97. The reproduction start execution process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec).

In step Sq0501, it is determined whether the song A first data reproduction start command CA1 has been received. If it is determined in step Sq0501 that the song A first data reproduction start command CA1 has been received (Sq0501: YES), the process advances to step Sq0502.

In step Sq0502, the process of reproducing the music A first data A1 to be played specified by the music A first data playback start command CA1 on the audio channel 1 specified by the received music A first data playback start command CA1. Start. Specifically, the sound output LSI 97 specifies the music A first data A1 to be played that is specified by the music A first data playback start command CA1 from the audio data ROM 98, and specifies the music A first data A1 as specified by the music A first data playback start command CA1. are sequentially read from the beginning, and the sounds based on the read song A first data A1 are sequentially generated (that is, reproduced) on the audio channel 1 specified by the song A first data reproduction start command CA1. Then, the sound output LSI 97 sequentially outputs the generated sounds from the speakers 46. In this way, in the audio channel 1, the sound generation and output of the music A first data A1 starts from the tip of the music A first data_intro part A11, and the sound is generated toward the end of the music A first data A1. and the output follows. In the sound output LSI 97, a delay of a delay period Δt occurs from the timing when the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 is received until the sound of the music A first data A1 is generated (that is, reproduced). The main reason for the delay is that the music A first data A1 to be played specified by the music A first data playback start command CA1 is specified from the audio data ROM 98, and the music A first data A1 that is the specified music A first data is This is because it takes a considerable amount of time to read the beginning of A1. That is, after the delay period Δt has elapsed (time t1+Δt) from the timing when the sound output LSI 97 received the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 (time t1 in FIG. 263), the sound of the music A first data A1 is played back. and output from the speaker 46. After executing step Sq0502, the process advances to step Sq0503.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0501 that the song A first data playback start command CA1 has not been received (Sq0501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0503 without executing step Sq0502.

In step Sq0503, it is determined whether the music B first data reproduction start command CB1 has been received. If it is determined in step Sq0503 that the song B first data reproduction start command CB1 has been received (Sq0503: YES), the process advances to step Sq0504.

In step Sq0504, the process of playing back the music B first data B1 specified by the music B first data playback start command CB1 is started in the audio channel 1 specified by the received music B first data playback start command CB1. In detail, the sound output LSI 97 identifies the music B first data B1 to be played back specified by the music B first data playback start command CB1 from the audio data ROM 98, reads out the identified music B first data B1 from the beginning, and sequentially generates (i.e., plays) sounds based on the read music B first data B1 in the audio channel 1 specified by the music B first data playback start command CB1. Then, the sound output LSI 97 sequentially outputs the generated sounds from the speaker 46. Thus, in the audio channel 1, the music B first data B1 starts generating and outputting sounds from the beginning of the music B first data_intro section B11, and continues generating and outputting sounds toward the end of the music B first data B1. In addition, in the sound output LSI 97, a delay of a delay period Δt occurs from the timing when the song B first data playback start command CB1 is received until the sound of the song B first data B1 is generated (i.e., played). That is, after the delay period Δt has elapsed (time t1+Δt) from the timing when the sound output LSI 97 receives the song B first data playback start command CB1 (time t1 in FIG. 264), the sound of the song B first data B1 is played and output from the speaker 46. After executing step Sq0504, proceed to step Sq0505.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0503 that the song B first data reproduction start command CB1 has not been received (Sq0503: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0505 without executing step Sq0504.

In step Sq0505, it is determined whether or not the song A second data playback start command CA2 has been received. If it is determined in step Sq0505 that the song A second data playback start command CA2 has been received (Sq0505: YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0506.

In step Sq0506, the process of playing back the song A second data A2 to be played back, which is specified by the song A second data playback start command CA2, is started in the audio channel 1 specified by the received song A second data playback start command CA2. In detail, the sound output LSI 97 identifies the song A second data A2 to be played back, which is specified by the song A second data playback start command CA2, from the audio data ROM 98, reads out the identified song A second data A2 from the beginning, and sequentially generates (i.e., plays) sounds based on the read song A second data A2 in the audio channel 1 specified by the song A second data playback start command CA2. Then, the sound output LSI 97 sequentially outputs the generated sounds from the speaker 46. Thus, in the audio channel 1, the sound generation and output of the song A second data A2 starts from the beginning of the song A second data_main part A21, and continues toward the end of the song A second data A2. In sound output LSI 97, a delay of delay period Δt occurs from the timing when song A second data playback start command CA2 is received (times t2 and t3 in FIG. 263) until sound of song A second data A2 is generated (i.e., played). If the song A second data playback start command CA2 received in step Sq0505 is the first song A second data playback start command CA2, during the delay period Δt, the sound of song A first data_lingering portion A13, which is continuous with the end of song A first data_main portion A12, is continuously generated, and when the delay period Δt has elapsed, the generated sound switches to the sound of song A second data A2. If the song A second data playback start command CA2 received in step Sq0505 is the second or subsequent song A second data playback start command CA2, during the delay period Δt, the sound of the song A second data _ reverberation section A22 that is continuous with the end of the song A second data _ main section A21 of the previous song A second data A2 continues to be generated, and when the delay period Δt has elapsed, the generated sound becomes the sound of the repeated song A second data A2. After executing step Sq0506, proceed to step Sq0507.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0505 that the song A second data playback start command CA2 has not been received (Sq0505: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0507 without executing step Sq0506.

In step Sq0507, it is determined whether or not the second data playback command CB2 for song B has been received. If it is determined in step Sq0507 that the second data playback command CB2 for song B has been received (Sq0507: YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0508.

In step Sq0508, the process of reproducing the music B second data B2 to be played specified by the music B second data reproduction start command CB2 on the audio channel 1 specified by the received music B second data reproduction start command CB2. Start. Specifically, the sound output LSI 97 specifies the music B second data B2 to be played that is specified by the music B second data playback start command CB2 from the audio data ROM 98, and specifies the music B second data B2 that is the specified music B second data B2. are sequentially read from the beginning, and the sounds based on the read music B second data B2 are sequentially generated (that is, reproduced) on the audio channel 1 designated by the music B second data reproduction start command CB2. Then, the sound output LSI 97 sequentially outputs the generated sounds from the speakers 46. In this way, in the audio channel 1, the sound generation and output of the music B second data B2 starts from the tip of the music B second data_main part B21, and the sound generation and output begins toward the end of the music B second data B2. and the output follows. In addition, in the sound output LSI 97, from the timing when the music B second data reproduction start command CB2 is received (time t2, time t3 in FIG. 264) until the sound of the music A second data A2 is generated (that is, played back). , a delay of a delay period Δt occurs. If the song B second data playback start command CB2 received in step Sq0507 is the first song B second data playback start command CB2, during the delay period Δt, the end of the song B first data_main part B12 The sound of music B first data_reverberation part A13, which is continuous to music B, is continuously generated, and when the delay period Δt has elapsed, the generated sound is switched to the sound of music B second data B2. Note that if the song B second data playback start command CB2 received in step Sq0507 is the second or subsequent song B second data playback start command CB2, during the delay period Δt, the previous song B second data B2 The sound of the music B second data_reverberation part B22 that is continuous to the end of the music B second data_main part B21 is continuously generated, and when the delay period Δt elapses, the sound generated is as follows. The sound of the previous music B second data B2 becomes the sound of the subsequent music B second data B2. After executing step Sq0508, the main reproduction start execution process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0507 that the song B second data reproduction start command CB2 has not been received (Sq0507: NO), the main reproduction start execution process is ended without executing step Sq0508.

<6-7> Actions and Effects:
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the background image is a character stage, the MPU 92 (sound/light side MPU 92) of the sound/light emission control device 90 transmits the song A first data playback start command CA1 to the sound output LSI 97, and the sound output LSI 97 receives the song A first data playback start command CA1 and starts playing the song A first data A1. Thereafter, at the timing when the playback position of the song A first data A1 played in the sound output LSI 97 reaches the end of the song A first data_main part A12 (time t2 in FIG. 263), the sound/light side MPU 92 transmits the song A second data playback start command CA2 to the sound output LSI 97. The sound output LSI 97 receives the song A second data playback start command CA2 and starts playing the song A second data A2. In the sound output LSI 97, a delay of a delay period Δt occurs between when the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is received and when the music A second data A2 starts to be reproduced. As described above, according to the configuration of the reference example that is composed of sound data that does not have a lingering portion after the melody portion, there is a problem that the reproduction of the sound data has already ended at the delay time Δt, and the sound becomes silent and is interrupted. In contrast, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the music A first data A1 has the music A first data lingering portion A13 that is continuous with the music A first data _main portion A12, the sound of the music A first data _lingering portion A13 of the music A first data A1 is reproduced during the delay period Δt, and the sound is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the sound is interrupted in the sound related to the character stage. Similarly, in the sound related to the non-character stage, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the sound is interrupted in the reproduction between the music B first data B1 and the music B second data B2. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

You can also think of it as follows. According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the sound output LSI 97 starts playing the music A first data A1, and the playback position of the music A first data A1 is after the end of the music A first data_main part A12. The reproduction of the music piece A second data A2 is started at a predetermined timing within the range from until reaching the end of the music piece A first data_lingering part A13. On the other hand, since the music A first data A1 includes the music A first data_reverberation part A13 that is continuous with the music A first data_main part A12, the music A first data A1 is The sound of A1st data_reverberation part A13 is reproduced without interruption. Therefore, the player does not feel any discomfort due to interruptions in the sound associated with the performance. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the song A first data_resonance section A13 connected to the song A first data_main section A12 is configured to record sounds associated with the melody section of song A recorded in the song A first data_main section A12, so the delay period Δt can be filled with sounds associated with the melody section of song A that was playing immediately before. Therefore, even if a delay period Δt occurs, the flow of the song is not disrupted and the awkward feeling of the sound being interrupted can be eliminated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the song A second data - main part A21 of the song A second data A2 is the same as the data recorded in the song A first data - main part A12 of the song A first data A1, so the melody part of song A recorded in the song A first data - main part A12 can be repeatedly played back.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the music A first data A1 and the music A second data A2 are played on the same audio channel 1, so that during the delay period Δt described above, the sound of music A first data_resonance section A13 of music A first data A1 is played on audio channel 1, and when the delay period Δt has elapsed, the sound of music A second data A2 is switched to the sound of music A first data_resonance section A13 and played on audio channel 1. As a result, the sound of music A first data A1 can be reliably switched to the sound of music A second data A2 without any sound interruption.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the background image is a character stage, the sound/light side MPU 92 transmits a song A second data playback start command CA2 to the sound output LSI 97, and the sound output LSI 97 receives the song A second data playback start command CA2 and starts playing the song A second data A2 (the first song A second data A2). Thereafter, when the playback position of the song A second data A2 being played in the sound output LSI 97 reaches the end of the song A second data_main part A21, the sound/light side MPU 92 transmits the song A second data playback start command CA2 to the sound output LSI 97. The sound output LSI 97 receives the song A second data playback start command CA2 and starts playing the song A second data A2 (the second song A second data A2). In the sound output LSI 97, a delay of a delay period Δt occurs between when the second music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is received and when the second music A second data A2 is started to be reproduced. As described above, according to the configuration of the reference example that is composed of sound data that does not have a lingering part after the melody part, there is a problem that the reproduction of the sound data has already ended at the delay time Δt, and the sound becomes silent and is interrupted. In contrast, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the music A second data A2 has the music A second data _lingering part A22 that is continuous with the music A second data _main part A21, the sound of the music A second data _lingering part A22 of the music A second data A2 is reproduced during the delay period Δt, and the sound is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the sound is interrupted in the sound related to the character stage. Similarly, in the sound related to the non-character stage, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the sound is interrupted in the reproduction between the music B second data B1 and the next music B second data B2. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can increase the interest of the game.

<<6-8>> Modification of the sixth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the sixth embodiment described above, and can be embodied in various forms without departing from the spirit of the present invention, and for example, the following modifications are also possible. Note that in the modifications described below, the same configurations, processes, and effects as those of the above embodiment will not be described.

《6-8-1》Variation 1:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the music A first data A1 and the music A second data A2 are played on the audio channel 1 as BGM processing in the case of a character-based stage. On the other hand, as a modified example, the music A first data A1 and the music A second data A2 may be played back while switching the audio channel to be played back between audio channel 1 and audio channel 2. . Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the music B first data B1 and the music B second data B2 are played back on the audio channel 1 as BGM processing in the case of a non-character stage. However, as a modified example, a configuration is adopted in which the first data B1 of music B1 and the second data B2 of music B are played back while switching the audio channel to be played back between audio channel 1 and audio channel 2. Good too. Note that the combination of audio channel 1 and audio channel 2 may be replaced with other channel combinations, such as a combination of audio channel 1 and audio channel 3, or a combination of audio channel 2 and audio channel 3. As long as both channels are different, any combination of audio channels can be used.

Below, an overview of the process for playing song A when the stage is a character-based stage will be explained. Note that the overview of the process for playing song B when the stage is a non-character-based stage will be similar to the overview of the process for playing song A when the stage is a character-based stage, and so will not be explained here. Furthermore, in this variation 1, explanations of the same hardware configuration and software configuration (processing) as in the sixth embodiment will be omitted. In this variation 1, the same parts as in the sixth embodiment will be explained below using the same names and symbols.

Figure 271 is a timing chart showing the playback procedure for song A in sound output LSI 97. Figure 271 shows the audio data played on audio channel 1 (1ch) and the audio data played on audio channel 2 (2ch) in sound output LSI 97, as well as the performance form obtained by mixing these.

In the pachinko machine of variant 1, when the background image is a character stage, song A is played in the sound output LSI 97 in the following procedure. When transitioning to the character stage, the sound/light side MPU 92 first sends a song A first data playback start command CA1 to the sound output LSI 97 (time t11). The song A first data playback start command CA1 is an instruction to start playback of the song A first data A1 as the playback target, and includes a setting that the audio channel to be played is audio channel 1. The song A first data playback start command CA1 is the same as the song A first data playback start command CA1 in the sixth embodiment.

When the sound output LSI 97 receives the song A first data playback start command CA1 from the audio/light side MPU 92, it starts the process of playing the song A first data A1 to be played back, specified by the song A first data playback start command CA1, on the audio channel 1 specified by the song A first data playback start command CA1. Note that in the sound output LSI 97, a predetermined delay occurs from the timing when the song A first data playback start command CA1 is received (time t11) until sound is generated (i.e., played) (this period Δt is also referred to below as the "delay period Δt").

The audio/light side MPU92 transmits a song A second data playback start command CA22 to the sound output LSI97 at the timing when the playback position of the song A first data A1 on audio channel 1 reaches the end of the song A first data - main part A12 (time t12). The song A second data playback command CA22 is a command to start playback of the song A second data A2 as the playback target, and includes a setting for setting the audio channel to be played to audio channel 2. The song A second data playback command CA22 differs from the sixth embodiment in that the audio channel to be played is set to audio channel 2, as compared to the song A first data playback start command CA1 in the sixth embodiment. The determination of whether the playback position is reaching the end of the song A first data - main part A12 is performed using the same method as in the sixth embodiment.

When the sound output LSI 97 receives the song A second data playback start command CA22 from the audio/light side MPU 92, it starts the process of playing the song A second data A2 (hereinafter also referred to as the first song A second data A2) to be played back specified by the song A second data playback start command CA22 on the audio channel 2 specified by the song A second data playback start command CA22. Note that in the sound output LSI 97, a delay of a delay period Δt occurs from the timing (time t12) when the song A second data playback start command CA22 is received until the sound of the song A second data A2 is generated (i.e., played back). That is, at time t12+Δt, the playback of the song A second data A2 starts. During the delay period Δt, the sound of the song A first data _ reverberation part A13, which is continuous with the end of the song A first data _ main part A12, is continuously played back. When the playback position of audio channel 1 reaches the end of the first data of music A_resonance section A13 (time tx1), playback of the first data of music A A1 ends. As described above, the data length of the first data of music A_resonance section A13 exceeds the delay period Δt during playback, so time tx1 is later than time t12+Δt. As a result, in the period from time t12+Δt to time tx1 (the cross-hatched portion in the figure), the first data of music A A1 continues to be played in audio channel 1. At time t12+Δt, playback of the second data of music A A21 begins in audio channel 2, so in the period from time t12+Δt to time tx, the sound of the first data of music A A1 and the sound of the second data of music A A2 are mixed and output from speaker 46.

Then, the audio/light side MPU92 sends a song A second data playback start command CA21 to the sound output LSI97 when the playback position of the song A second data A2 (hereinafter also referred to as the first song A second data A2) on audio channel 1 reaches the end of the song A second data - main part A21 (time t13). The song A second data playback start command CA21 is a command to start playback of the song A second data A2 as the playback target, and includes a setting that the audio channel to be played is audio channel 1. That is, the song A second data playback start command CA21 differs from the song A second data playback start command CA22 sent at time t12 in that the audio channel to be played is audio channel 1.

When the sound output LSI 97 receives the music A second data playback start command CA21 from the sound/light side MPU 92 at time t13, the sound output LSI 97 outputs the music A second data playback start command CA21 on the audio channel 1 specified by the music A second data playback start command CA21. The reproduction of the music A second data A2 to be reproduced specified by the second data reproduction start command CA21 (hereinafter also referred to as second music A second data A2) is started. In addition, in the sound output LSI 97, there is a delay of a delay period Δt from the timing (time t13) when the music A second data reproduction start command CA21 is received until the sound of the music A second data A2 is generated (that is, played back). occurs. That is, at time t13+Δt, the second reproduction of the music A second data A2 is started. During the delay period Δt, the sound of the music A second data_reverberation part A22 that is continuous to the end of the music A second data_main part A21 of the first music A second data A2 is continuously played. There is. When the playback position of the audio channel 2 reaches the end of the song A second data_reverberation part A22 (time tx2), the first playback of the song A second data A2 ends. During the period from time t13+Δt to time tx2 (the cross-hatched portion in the figure), the first music A second data A2 is continuously reproduced on the audio channel 2. At time t13+Δt, since the second music A second data A21 has started to be played on audio channel 1, in the period from time t13+Δt to time tx2, the sound of the first music A second data A2 is and the sound of the second song A second data A2 are mixed and output from the speaker 46. In this way, while switching the playback destination between audio channel 1 and audio channel 2 as follows: audio channel 2 → audio channel 1 → audio channel 2 →..., the music A second data A2 is played. Play on repeat.

In the manner described above, loop playback of the melody portion of song A is achieved by repeatedly playing song A's second data A2 after playing song A's first data A1. This loop playback continues until the character stage ends. When the character stage ends, the sound/light side MPU 92 sends a song A's second data playback end command to the sound output LSI 97, and when the sound output LSI 97 receives the song A's second data playback end command from the sound/light side MPU 92, it ends the loop playback of song A's second data A2.

Next, an example of specific processing executed in the audio and light emission control device 90 in this modified example will be described. The MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 in this modified example (hereinafter referred to as the audio and light side MPU 92) executes timer interrupt processing (Fig. 266) and BGM processing (Fig. 267) similar to the sixth embodiment. The processing in this modified example is the same as that in the sixth embodiment in terms of the BGM playback start processing (Fig. 268) executed in step Sq0201 of the BGM processing (Fig. 267), but differs in terms of the detailed content of the BGM continuous playback processing executed in step Sq0202.

<BGM continuous playback process executed in the audio emission control device>
The BGM continuous reproduction process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine for BGM processing (FIG. 267: Sq0202).

FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing BGM continuous reproduction processing. In step Sq0601, the second data reproduction process is executed for the first time. In the first second data reproduction process, processing for reproducing the first music A second data A2 and the first music B second data B2 described above is executed. Details of the first and second data reproduction processing will be described later. After executing step Sq0601, the process advances to step Sq0602.

In step Sq0602, the second data playback process is executed from the second time onwards. In the second data playback process from the second time onwards, the process for playing the second data A2 of song A from the second time onwards and the second data B2 of song B from the second time onwards, as previously explained, is executed. The second data playback process from the second time onwards will be described later. After executing step Sq0602, this BGM continuous playback process ends.

<First and second data reproduction processing>
Next, the first and second data reproduction processing will be explained. The first second data reproduction process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 272: Sq0601) of the BGM continuous reproduction process.

Figure 273 is a flowchart showing the first second data playback process. In step Sq0701, it is determined whether song A's first data A1 is being played back on audio channel 1 and the playback position is at the timing when the end of song A's first data - main part A12 will be reached. This determination process is the same as step Sq0401 in Figure 269 in the sixth embodiment. In step Sq0701, if it is determined that song A's first data A1 is being played back on audio channel 1 and the playback position is at the timing when the end of song A's first data - main part A12 will be reached (Sq0701: YES), proceed to step Sq0702.

In step Sq0702, a song A second data playback start command CA22 is sent to the sound output LSI 97. The song A second data playback start command CA22 is an instruction to start playback of the song A second data A2 as the playback target, and includes a setting that the audio channel to be played is audio channel 2. After executing step Sq0702, proceed to step Sq0703.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0701 that Song A's first data A1 is not being played on audio channel 1, or that Song A's first data A1 is being played on audio channel 1 and the playback position is not at the timing to reach the end of Song A's first data - main part A12 (Sq0701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0703 without executing step Sq0702.

In step Sq0703, it is determined whether song B first data B1 is being played on audio channel 1 and the playback position is about to reach the end of song B first data - main part B12. This determination process is the same as step Sq0403 in FIG. 269 in the sixth embodiment. In step Sq0703, if it is determined that song B first data B1 is being played on audio channel 1 and the playback position is about to reach the end of song B first data - main part B12 (Sq0703: YES), proceed to step Sq0704.

In step Sq0704, the music B second data reproduction start command CB22 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97. The music B second data reproduction start command CB22 is a command to start the reproduction of the music B second data B2 as a reproduction target, and includes a setting to set the audio channel to be reproduced as audio channel 2. After executing step Sq0704, the first second data reproduction process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sq0703, it is determined whether music B first data B1 is not being played on audio channel 1, or music B first data B1 is being played on audio channel 1 and the playback position is music B first data_main. If it is determined that it is not the timing to reach the end of section B12 (Sq0703: NO), the first second data reproduction process is ended without executing step Sq0704.

<Second Data Reproduction Process from Second Time onward>
Next, the second data reproduction process from the second time onwards will be described. The second data reproduction process from the second time onwards is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the BGM continuous reproduction process (FIG. 272: Sq0602).

Figure 274 is a flowchart showing the second data playback process from the second time onwards. In step Sq0801, it is determined whether the second data A2 of song A is played on the audio channel 2 and the playback position is at the timing of reaching the end of the main part A21 of the second data of song A. This determination is made by receiving information indicating the type of data being played and information indicating the playback position of the data being played from the sound output LSI 97, and based on this information, it is determined whether the second data A2 of song A is played on the audio channel 2 and the playback position is at the timing of reaching the end of the main part A21 of the second data of song A. Note that instead of this configuration, the audio light emission control device 90 may be configured to store in advance the arrival time until the playback position reaches the end of the main part A21 of the second data of song A, and the determination may be made based on the type of playback start command transmitted immediately before and whether the time from the start of playback has reached the arrival time. In step Sq0801, if it is determined that Song A's second data A2 is being played on audio channel 2 and that the playback position is reaching the end of Song A's second data - main part A21 (Sq0801: YES), proceed to step Sq0802.

In step Sq0802, a song A second data playback start command CA21 is sent to the sound output LSI 97. The song A second data playback start command CA21 is an instruction to start playback of the song A second data A2 as the playback target, and includes a setting that the audio channel to be played is audio channel 1. After executing step Sq0802, proceed to step Sq0803.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0801 that Song A's second data A2 is not being played on audio channel 2, or that Song A's second data A2 is being played on audio channel 2 and the playback position is not at the timing to reach the end of Song A's second data - main part A21 (Sq0801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0803 without executing step Sq0802.

In step Sq0803, it is determined whether or not the music B second data B2 is being played back on the audio channel 2 and the playback position has reached the end of the music B second data_main part B21. This determination is made by receiving information indicating the type of data being played back and information indicating the playback position of the data being played back from the sound output LSI 97, and based on these pieces of information, whether music B is selected on audio channel 2 or not. 2 data B2 is being played back, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the playback position reaches the end of the song B second data_main part B21. In addition, instead of this configuration, the audio emission control device 90 side stores in advance the arrival time until the playback position reaches the end of the song B second data_main part B21, so that the playback start transmitted immediately before is stored. The determination may be made based on the type of command and whether the time since the start of reproduction has reached the arrival time. In step Sq0803, if it is determined that the music B second data B2 is being played back on the audio channel 2 and that the playback position has reached the end of the music B second data_main part B21, (Sq0803 :YES), proceed to step Sq0804.

In step Sq0804, the music B second data reproduction start command CB21 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97. The music B second data reproduction start command CB21 is a command to start the reproduction of the music B second data B2 as a reproduction target, and includes a setting to set the audio channel to be reproduced as audio channel 1. After executing step Sq0804, the process advances to step Sq0805.

On the other hand, in step Sq0803, it is determined whether music B second data B2 is not being played on audio channel 2, or music B second data B2 is being played on audio channel 2 and the playback position is music B second data_main. If it is determined that it is not the timing to reach the end of section B21 (Sq0803: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0805 without executing step Sq0804.

In step Sq0805, it is determined whether or not the music A second data A2 is being played back on the audio channel 1 and the playback position has reached the end of the music A second data_main part A21. This determination process is the same as step Sq0405 in FIG. 269 in the sixth embodiment. In step Sq0805, if it is determined that the music A second data A2 is being played back on the audio channel 1 and that the playback position has reached the end of the music A second data_main part A21, (Sq0805 :YES), proceed to step Sq0806.

In step Sq0806, a song A second data playback start command CA22 is sent to the sound output LSI 97. The song A second data playback start command CA22 is an instruction to start playback of the song A second data A2 as the playback target, and includes a setting to set the audio channel to be played to audio channel 2. After executing step Sq0806, proceed to step Sq0807.

On the other hand, in step Sq0805, it is determined whether music A second data A2 is not being played on audio channel 1, or music A second data A2 is being played on audio channel 1 and the playback position is music A second data_main. If it is determined that it is not the timing to reach the end of section A21 (Sq0805: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0807 without executing step Sq0806.

In step Sq0807, it is determined whether the second data B2 of song B is being played on audio channel 1 and the playback position is about to reach the end of the second data B of song B - main part B21. This determination process is the same as step Sq0407 in FIG. 269 in the sixth embodiment. In step Sq0807, if it is determined that the second data B2 of song B is being played on audio channel 1 and the playback position is about to reach the end of the second data B of song B - main part B21 (Sq0807: YES), proceed to step Sq0808.

In step Sq0808, a song B second data playback start command CB22 is sent to the sound output LSI 97. The song B second data playback start command CB22 is an instruction to start playback of the song B second data B2 as the playback target, and includes a setting to set the audio channel to be played to audio channel 2. After step Sq0808 is executed, the second data playback process is terminated from the second time onwards.

On the other hand, in step Sq0807, it is determined whether music B second data B2 is not being played on audio channel 1, or music B second data B2 is being played on audio channel 1 and the playback position is music B second data_main. If it is determined that it is not the timing to reach the end of section B21 (Sq0807: NO), the second data reproduction process ends from the second time onward without executing step Sq0808.

<Playback start execution processing executed in the sound output LSI>
FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing a playback start execution process executed in the sound output LSI 97. The reproduction start execution process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). This reproduction start execution process is mostly the same as the reproduction start execution process (FIG. 270) executed in the sound output LSI 97 according to the sixth embodiment, with only some differences. Specifically, the contents of step Sq0905 and step Sq0907 of the main reproduction start execution process are only different from the contents of step Sq0505 and step Sq0507 of the sixth embodiment, and the contents of step Sq0901 to step Sq0904 of the main reproduction start execution process, Step Sq0906 and step Sq0908 are the same as steps Sq0501 to Sq0504, step Sq0506, and step Sq0508 of the sixth embodiment.

In step Sq0905, it is determined whether music A second data reproduction start command CA21 or music A second data reproduction start command CA22 has been received. In the sixth embodiment, the only start command that targets the second data A2 for reproduction is the second data reproduction start command CA2, whereas in this modification, the second data A2 of the song A is played back. Since the target start commands include the song A second data playback start command CA21 and the song A second data playback start command CA22, step Sq0905 includes a process of determining whether either of the two has been received. did.

In step Sq0905, if it is determined that the song A second data reproduction start command CA21 or the song A second data reproduction start command CA22 has been received (Sq0905: YES), the process advances to step Sq0906. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0905 that neither the song A second data playback start command CA21 nor the song A second data playback start command CA22 has been received (Sq0905: NO), step Sq0908 is executed. The process proceeds to step Sq0907 without doing so.

In step Sq0907, it is determined whether music B second data reproduction start command CB21 or music B second data reproduction start command CB22 has been received. In the sixth embodiment, the only start command that targets music B second data B2 for reproduction is the music B second data reproduction start command CB2, whereas in this modification, music B second data B2 is played back. Since the target start commands include the song B second data playback start command CB21 and the song B second data playback start command CB22, step Sq0907 includes a process of determining whether or not either of the two has been received. did.

If it is determined in step Sq0907 that the song B second data playback start command CB21 or the song B second data playback start command CB22 has been received (Sq0907: YES), proceed to step Sq0908. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0907 that neither the song B second data playback start command CB21 nor the song B second data playback start command CB22 has been received (Sq0907: NO), this playback start execution process ends without executing step Sq0908.

In the pachinko machine of this modified example configured as described above, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the music A first data A1 and the music A second data A2 are consecutively transmitted on the character stage. There is no interruption in the sound during playback. Furthermore, when the music A second data A2 and the next music A second data A2 are played back in succession, the sound does not interrupt. Even in the non-character stage, when the music B first data B1 and the music B second data B2 are continuously played back, the sound is not interrupted. Furthermore, when the music B second data B1 and the next music B second data B2 are played back in succession, the sound is not interrupted. For this reason, the player does not feel that the sound is interrupted in the BGM between the character stage and the non-character stage. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of this modification, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine of this modification is configured to play music A first data A1 and music A second data A2 while switching the audio channel to be played between audio channel 1 and audio channel 2. . Therefore, during the delay period Δt described above, the sound of the music A 1st data_reverberation part A13 of the music A 1st data A1 is played on the audio channel 1, and when the delay period Δt has elapsed, the sound of the music The sound of the A second data A2 is reproduced. When the delay period Δt has elapsed, the unplayed part of the music A1 data_reverberation part A13 of the first data A1 is continuously played on the audio channel 1, so this unplayed sound is not played. During this period, the second data A2 of the song A played on the audio channel 2 is superimposed. As a result, immediately after the sound of music A first data A1 is switched to the sound of music A second data A2, the sound of music A first data A1 and the sound of music A second data A2 are You can mix and switch sounds smoothly. Similarly, in the pachinko machine of this modification, the music A second data A2 and the next music A second data A2 are played back while switching the audio channel to be played back between audio channel 1 and audio channel 2. Therefore, immediately after the sound of song A second data A2 is switched from the sound of song A second data A2 to the next song A second data A2, the sound of song A second data A2 and the next song A second data A2 are changed. The sound can be mixed and the sound can be switched smoothly. Immediately after the sound of music A second data A2 is switched from the sound of music A second data A2 to the next music A second data A2, the sound of music A second data A2 and the next music A second data A2 are changed. is mixed, it is possible to output the sound recorded in the song A first data_reverberation part A13 for a longer time than in the sixth embodiment.

《6-8-2》Variation 2:
In the sixth embodiment and its variations, music A corresponding to the character stage and music B corresponding to the non-character stage are prepared, and when transitioning between the character stage and the non-character stage, the BGM The composition is such that the songs can be switched. On the other hand, as a modified example, stages classified as character-based stages (stages in the rooms of warrior characters A to D) and stages classified as non-character-based stages (rural stages, urban stages, It is also possible to prepare music corresponding to the ocean stage and everyone's stage, and to switch the music as BGM when there is a transition between these subclassified stages. According to this configuration, it is possible to switch the music as BGM more precisely.

《6-8-3》Variation 3:
In the sixth embodiment and its modifications, the music A first data A1 and the music A second data A2 (or the music B first data B1 and the music B second data B2) are records of sounds related to the music. However, as a modified example, the data may be data in which sounds such as sound effects and lines of various characters are recorded. Also in this modification, while the first sound data in which these sounds are recorded, the sound/light side MPU 92 transmits the second sound data in which the above-mentioned sounds are recorded to the sound output LSI. By transmitting a command instructing the start of playback of the first sound data and the second sound data, the player does not feel an unnatural feeling that the sound is interrupted during the playback between the first sound data and the second sound data. Therefore, with the configuration of this modification, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<<6-8-4>> Variation 4:
In the sixth embodiment and its modified examples, the first data A1 of the musical piece is divided into three parts, namely, the first data A_intro section A11, the first data A_main section A12, and the first data A_lingering section A13, and the second data A2 of the musical piece is divided into two parts, namely, the second data A_main section A21 and the second data A_lingering section A22. In contrast, as a modified example, the first data A1 of the musical piece and the second data A2 of the musical piece may not be divided into a plurality of parts. In other words, the first data A1 of the musical piece and the second data A2 of the musical piece may be sound data in which one continuous sound is recorded, and may not be divided into a plurality of parts in terms of data management. In this configuration, the sound/light side MPU 92 determines the timing for transmitting the next sound data reproduction command to the sound output LSI 97 during the reproduction of the sound data as follows. Specifically, the sound and light emission control device 90 is configured to store in advance the time required for the playback position to reach the timing, and determines whether the playback position is at the timing based on whether the time from the start of playback has reached the time. With the configuration of this modification, as with the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort due to the sound being interrupted during playback between the first data A1 of the song A and the second data A2 of the song A. Therefore, the configuration of this modification can improve the interest of the game. Similarly, as a modification, the first data B1 of the song B and the second data B2 of the song B may be configured not to be divided into multiple parts.

<<6-8-5>> Variation 5:
In the sixth embodiment and its modified examples, the timing (hereinafter also referred to as the transmission timing) at which the song A second data playback start command CA2 (song A second data playback start command CA21 or song A second data playback start command CA22) is transmitted from the sound/light side MPU 92 to the sound output LSI 97 is the timing at which the end of the song A first data_main part A12 of the song A first data A1 is reached, or the timing at which the end of the song A second data_main part A21 of the song A second data A2 is reached (hereinafter also referred to as the end timing). In contrast, as a modified example, the transmission timing may be configured to be within a predetermined period including the end timing, without strictly coinciding with the end timing.

FIG. 276 is an explanatory diagram showing the predetermined period that defines the transmission timing. Figure 276(a) shows the case where the transmission timing matches the termination timing, Figure 276(b) shows the case where the transmission timing is the earliest within the predetermined period, and Figure 276(c) shows the case where the transmission timing coincides with the termination timing. The slowest case is shown. As described above, the sound output LSI 97 requires a delay period Δt from the timing when the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is received until the sound is generated. Therefore, when the transmission timing is Ta, the time when the reproduction of the music A second data A2 is started is Ta+Δt. It is necessary to determine the transmission timing Ta so that this time Ta+Δt falls within the period TT during which the song A first data_lingering part A13 can be reproduced. In other words, if the time Ta+Δt falls within the period TT in which the music A first data_lingering part A13 can be reproduced, the transmission timing Ta can be any timing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 276(b), when time Ta+Δt becomes the timing of the tip of song A first data_reverberation part A13, the transmission timing Ta is the most transmitted timing within the predetermined period. It gets faster. As shown in FIG. 276(c), when time Ta+Δt becomes the timing of the end of song A first data_reverberation part A13, the transmission timing Ta becomes the latest within the predetermined period. That is, the transmission timing Ta shown in FIG. 276(c) is changed from the transmission timing Ta shown in FIG. The song A second data reproduction start command CA2 can be transmitted at any timing within the range (this is within a predetermined period) from the end of the data_lingering part A13 to a timing earlier by the delay time Δt. That is, the length of the predetermined period matches the length of the song A first data_lingering part A13. With this configuration as well, the player does not feel that the sound is interrupted during reproduction between the music A first data and the music A second data A2. Therefore, with the configuration of this modification, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<<6-8-6>> Variation 6:
In the sixth embodiment and its modified example, the song A first data A1 includes the song A first data_intro section A11, the song A first data_main section A12, and the song A first data_lingering section A13. However, as a modified example, the song A first data A1 may include the song A first data_main section A12 and the song A first data_lingering section A13 without including the song A first data_intro section A11. According to this configuration, the song A first data A1 has the same configuration as the song A second data A2. In this configuration, the sound data recorded in the song A second data_main section A21 may be different from the sound data recorded in the song A first data_main section A12. For example, the sound data recorded in the song A second data_main section A21 may be the same melody part of the song A as the sound data recorded in the song A first data_main section A12, but may be arranged to be up-tempo. With this configuration, it is possible to change the atmosphere of song A and repeatedly play back the melody part. Similarly, song B first data B1 may be configured to include song B first data_main section B12 and song B first data_lingering section B13 without including song B first data_intro section B11. Also, the sound data recorded in song B second data_main section B21 may be configured to be different from the sound data recorded in song B first data_main section B12.

《6-8-7》Variation 7:
In the sixth embodiment and its modifications, only one type of music A second data A2 is prepared, but as a modification, multiple types of music A second data A2 are prepared. A prepared configuration may also be used. Each of the plurality of types of song A second data A2 is a melody part of the same song A, but has a configuration in which the arrangement of the song is different from each other. For example, the first song A second data A2 may be of normal tempo, and the second song A second data A2 may be of up-tempo. Then, the second song A data A2 to be used may be configured to be switched between the first song A second data A2 and the second song A second data A2 depending on the gaming state. . Specifically, for example, in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), the first song A second data A2 is used, and in the high probability gaming state, the second song A second data A2 is used. It is also possible to use a configuration using . According to this configuration, the BGM of the stage can further improve the expectation of a high probability gaming state. In other words, so-called interactive sound expression, in which BGM and sound effects can be changed according to the progress of the game, becomes even more possible. Similarly, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of music B second data B2 are prepared.

《6-8-8》Variation 8:
In the sixth embodiment and its modifications, the song A second data A2 is configured to include the song A second data_main part A21 and the song A second data_lingering part A22. As a modification, a configuration may be adopted in which the song A second data_lingering part A22 is not provided. According to this modification, by having a configuration in which the second song A data is played only once following the first song A data, in the playback between the first song A data and the second song A data A2. , the player does not feel any discomfort due to the sound being interrupted. Therefore, with the configuration of this modification, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

《6-8-9》Variation 9:
In the sixth embodiment and its modifications, the data length of the music A first data_reverberation part A13 and the data length of the music A second data_reverberation part A22 are determined by the music A second data reproduction start command in the sound output LSI 97. It has been determined experimentally or by simulation to be a length that can at least exceed the delay period Δt required from the timing when CA2 is received until the sound is reproduced. In addition, in the sixth embodiment and its modifications, the timing at which the MPU 92 (sound and light side MPU 92) of the audio emission control device 90 transmits the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 to the sound output LSI 97 is set to By making the playback position of the A first data A1 coincide with the timing when the music A first data_main part A12 reaches the end, the music A second data A2 can be played before the music A first data A1 is finished playing. was set to start playing. On the other hand, as a modification, the sound-light side MPU 92 adjusts the timing of transmitting the music A second data reproduction start command CA2, so that the music A second data is transmitted after the music A first data A1 has been reproduced. The configuration is such that playback of data A2 can be started. That is, by adjusting the timing of transmitting the music A second data reproduction start command CA2, the sound-light side MPU 92 starts the reproduction of the music A second data A2 after the reproduction of the music A first data A1 is completed. state (hereinafter referred to as the first state) and a state (hereinafter referred to as the second state) in which the reproduction of the music A second data A2 starts before the reproduction of the music A first data A1 is completed. The structure has been designed to allow for both. In the first state, that is, the state where the playback of the song A second data A2 starts after the playback of the song A first data A1 is completed, the playback position of the song A first data A1 is the song A first data_main In the case where the period from the timing of reaching the end of part A12 to the start of reproduction of music A second data A2 exceeds the time length during reproduction corresponding to music A first data _ lingering part A13. be. In the second state, that is, the state in which the reproduction of the music A second data A2 starts before the reproduction of the music A first data A1 is completed, the reproduction position of the music A first data A1 is the music A first data _ The period from the timing when the end of the main part A12 is reached until the reproduction of the music A second data A2 starts is less than or equal to the time length during reproduction corresponding to the music A first data_reverberation part A13. This is the case.

In the first state, the playback of the first data A of the song A ends at the end of the first data A_resonance section A13 (or the playback of the second data A2 ends at the end of the second data A_resonance section A22) before the playback of the second data A of the song A starts, and a silent state occurs between the playback of the first data A of the song A and the playback of the second data A2 of the song A. In contrast, in the second state, the playback of the second data A2 of the song A starts without a silent state. In this modified example, for example, the first state is taken when the possibility (expectation) of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is high, and the second state is taken when the expectation of winning a jackpot is not high, so that when a silent state occurs, the player can have a sense of expectation that he or she may have won a jackpot. Therefore, according to this modified example, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<<6-8-10>> Variation 10:
In the sixth embodiment and its modified examples, sound data has been described as an example of the performance data, but instead of this, the performance data may be data in which a variable display pattern of an image such as a pattern or picture displayed on the pattern display device 41 is recorded. Also, instead of the data in which a variable display pattern of an image is recorded, data in which various images to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 are recorded may be used. Furthermore, the performance data may be replaced with data in which the light emission pattern of a light-emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs is recorded. Even with these modified examples, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the performance is interrupted. Therefore, the configuration of this modified example can improve the interest of the game.

《6-8-11》Variation 11:
In the sixth embodiment and its modifications, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices such as the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100. A configuration including two control devices, such as a device and a sub-control device, may also be used. The sub-control device may be configured to execute various processes executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the sixth embodiment. Further, in the sixth embodiment and its modifications, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 are not limited to the classification described in the sixth embodiment, and 60, 90, and 100 as long as they can execute the various processes in the sixth embodiment.

<<7>> Seventh embodiment:
7-1 Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 277 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter, also referred to as a "pachinko machine") in the seventh embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 is provided with an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 relative to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 relative to the inner frame 13. On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound and light emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window 18 is formed in the approximate center of the front door frame 14. Resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided around the window 18 of the front door frame 14. The electric parts are composed of light-emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role in enhancing the presentation effect by lighting or blinking during each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, etc. In addition, a glass unit 19 consisting of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the open window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board through the glass unit 19 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed into a box shape with an open top surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls ejected from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and is formed into a box shape with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and by operating the lever 23, the player can switch the outlet 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided at the front of the periphery of the upper tray 20 as an operation receiving means. The performance operation button 24 is an operation unit that allows the player to perform input operations for the game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

Furthermore, an operating handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates the operating handle 25, game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting the operation of the game ball launching mechanism, a wait button 25b that stops the launch of game balls by the game ball launching mechanism when pressed by the player, and a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a turns on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation, and game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. Control equipment for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

Figure 278 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, each of these control units is provided on the rear surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 includes a main control board that has a function of controlling the main game and a function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing (also called traces of opening or unsealing). For example, a seal sticker is attached to the openable and closable parts, and the word "unsealed" appears when the board box is opened. The main control device 60 also includes a RAM clear switch 66a for clearing (erasing, initializing) the RAM mounted on the main control board, a setting key insertion section 66b which is a keyhole into which a setting key can be inserted to execute a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode described later, a setting change switch 66c for changing the setting information in the setting change mode, and an information display section 45z capable of displaying various information such as setting information.

The information display unit 45z is configured by arranging four 7-segment displays adjacent to each other in a horizontal row. Each 7-segment display has seven segment light-emitting parts and a DP light-emitting part that indicates a decimal point. Depending on whether or not these light-emitting parts emit light, it is possible to display various numerical values, letters, symbols, etc., such as "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", "9", "0", "b", "L.", and "6." In this embodiment, the seven segment light-emitting parts and the DP light-emitting part are configured with red LEDs (light-emitting diodes). In the following, the 7-segment display arranged at the left end is also referred to as the left end 7-segment display, the 7-segment display arranged adjacent to the right side of the left end 7-segment display is also referred to as the left middle 7-segment display, the 7-segment display arranged adjacent to the right side of the left middle 7-segment display is also referred to as the right middle 7-segment display, and the 7-segment display arranged adjacent to the right side of the right middle 7-segment display and arranged at the right end is also referred to as the right end 7-segment display.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio/light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The audio/light emission control device 90 controls light-emitting means such as speakers and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands sent from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands sent from the audio/light emission control device 90. The pattern display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays patterns and images for performances.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70, a firing control device 80, and a power supply device 85. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The firing control device 80 controls the game so that when an instruction to fire a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. The power supply device 85 includes a power switch 85a, and when the power switch 85a is turned on with a power terminal (not shown) connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, external power supplied from the commercial power source is turned on. , the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. convert it into necessary operating power and supply it to each of these devices.

In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 that is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a slope that is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and gently sloped so that the game balls flow downstream. A tank rail 55 having a tank rail 55, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, receiving game balls from the case rail 56 and paying out a predetermined number of game balls according to instructions from a payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

Next, we will explain the game board. The game board is removably attached to the front of the inner frame 13.

Figure 279 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to define a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. Game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism are guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flow down the game area PA. In the game area PA, multiple nails 42 are planted approximately perpendicular to the game board 30, and various gimmicks such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 includes a special figure unit 37, a regular figure unit 38, and a round display section 39.

The general winning openings 32 are openings through which game balls can enter, and multiple openings are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71. In this embodiment, three general winning openings 32a, 32b, and 32c are provided as the general winning openings 32. Hereinafter, the general winning opening 32a will also be referred to as the first winning opening 32a, the general winning opening 32b will also be referred to as the second winning opening 32b, and the general winning opening 32c will also be referred to as the third winning opening 32c.

The first starting hole 33 is an entrance through which a game ball can enter. The first starting hole 33 is located at the lower center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a normal electric accessory.

The through gate 35 includes a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to perform a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the passage as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery). As a result of the internal lottery, if an electric role release is won, the electric role accessory 34a shifts to an electric role release state in which it becomes an open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged upstream of the second starting port 34 with respect to the downstream direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after passing through and enters the second starting port 34. It is possible for the ball to enter the starting port 34. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 includes a big winning hole 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the big winning hole 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big prize opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). If a jackpot or small jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which opening/closing processing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter into an open state in which game balls can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

In addition, an outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the various ball inlets are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game in which the ball entered the first starting hole 33, the second starting hole 34, the first winning hole 32a, the second winning hole 32b, the third winning hole 32c, the big winning hole 36a, and the out hole 43 The balls are configured to merge into a discharge passage provided on the back side of the game board 30, and the discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor that detects the game balls. As will be described later, in this embodiment, the number of game balls fired onto the game board 30 can be determined by detecting the game balls with the discharge path detection sensor.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each configured with a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern refers to a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 33. When a winning lottery is triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 33, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display the first pattern in a variable or predetermined manner as a display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. When the lottery is completed, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display the first pattern corresponding to the lottery result in a stationary manner. Hereinafter, a game round in which a winning lottery is executed in response to a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 is also referred to as a game round for the first starting hole.

The second pattern display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern refers to a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 34. When a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is performed, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display the second pattern in a variable or predetermined manner as a display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display the second pattern corresponding to the lottery result in a stationary manner. Hereinafter, a game round in which a winning lottery is performed triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is also referred to as a game round for the second starting hole.

Here, the time period from when the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b starts to be displayed in a variable manner until it is stopped and displayed. Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a until the time when the first symbol is stopped and displayed is also called the first variation time, and The time period from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to the time it is stopped and displayed is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first reservation display section 37c and a second reservation display section 37d, which are made of LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b.

The first reserve display unit 37c displays the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 33 by the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the first starting hole 33 are reserved.

The second reserve display unit 37d displays the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 34 by the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the second starting hole 34 are reserved.

The general map unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When a lottery to open an electric reel is held triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the general map unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to light up, flash, or display in a predetermined manner. When the lottery to open an electric reel is completed, the general map unit 38 displays in a predetermined manner corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light-emitting display unit in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of rounds that will occur in the open/close execution mode, or a display corresponding thereto. A round is a game in which the open/close door 36b remains open until one of the following conditions is met: either a predetermined upper limit duration has elapsed, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have entered the variable winning device 36. The number of rounds varies depending on the type of jackpot that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of rounds when the open/close execution mode is started, and ends when the open/close execution mode is ended.

Note that the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display section 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the drawing process and the drawing results.

The variable display unit 40 is disposed approximately in the center of the play area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a pattern display device 41. The pattern display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the pattern display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured with various display devices, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display section 37a displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays a variable display or a predetermined display of symbols in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. I do. Further, when the second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays a variable display of the symbol or a predetermined display according to the variable display or a predetermined display. will be displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to displaying a variable symbol or a predetermined display triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also when a jackpot is won. It also displays effects during the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The details of the symbol display device 41 will be explained below.

Figure 280 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns and display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. Figure 280(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. As shown in Figure 280(a), patterns showing the numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. Note that as the patterns that are variably displayed, patterns in which each of the numbers 1 to 8 is accompanied by an image of a character or the like may be used.

Figure 280 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in the figure, three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, left, center, and right, are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the numbers 1 to 8 shown in Figure 280 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and a variable display is performed in which each pattern row scrolls from top to bottom or bottom to top with periodicity. As shown in Figure 280 (b), after the variable display by scrolling, one pattern is displayed in a stopped state on the pay line L for each pattern row. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, a variable display is started in which the patterns of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Then, the scrolling symbols are switched from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, each of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displays a predetermined symbol in a static display state. When the variable display of the symbols ends and the display is static, if the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined combination of symbols is formed on the valid line L. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the valid line L. Note that the manner of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned manner, and various modes of the variable display of the symbols can be adopted, such as the number of symbol rows, the number of valid lines, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows, and the number of symbols in each symbol row.

Here, a play round is one unit of processing for notifying a player of the results of a winning lottery for special information acquired based on winning at either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies a player of the results of one winning lottery for one piece of special information for each play round. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on winning at either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, it causes the segment display to change and then stops displaying the segment display so that the display corresponds to the lottery result for the acquired special information in either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b for each play round. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a winning entry in either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, it causes the pattern display device 41 to variably display a predetermined pattern sequence for each play round, and then causes the pattern sequence to be frozen so that it corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. The time required for one play round is also called the unit play time. The unit play time is composed of the fluctuation time, which is the time from when the fluctuation display begins to when the predetermined lottery result is frozen and displayed, and the freeze time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is frozen and displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 280(b), a first pending display area Ds1 and a second pending display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. The first pending display area Ds1 displays the number of pending balls based on winning at the first starting hole 33. The second pending display area Ds2 displays the number of pending balls based on winning at the second starting hole 34. Note that in this embodiment, as described above, the number of pending game balls that have won at the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34 is a maximum of four each.

《7-2》Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

Figure 281 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes an audio and light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 is equipped with a main control board 61 that is responsible for the main control of the game. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62 that is composed of elements with multiple functions. The MPU 62 is equipped with a CPU 62x that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc. when the CPU 62x executes the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 is also equipped with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit that functions as a random number generator. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by other elements.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port.

A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and when the power switch 85a is turned on, the main control device 60, payout control device 70, etc. Converts into operating power and supplies power to each device. Further, in this embodiment, the power supply device 85 includes a power switch state detection sensor 85b and a capacitor 87 as a backup power source. The power switch state detection sensor 85b is a sensor capable of detecting the state (ON state or OFF state) of the power switch 85a. The capacitor 87 continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period when a power outage occurs or when the power switch 85a is turned off.

The input side of the main control board 61 is also connected to ball entry detection sensors 44a-44h provided at each ball entry port. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 determines whether the game ball flowing down the play area PA has entered the start port, the prize port, or the big prize port, and whether the game ball has passed through the through gate or the discharge passage (out port). Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the game ball's entry into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34.

The input side of the main control board 61 is also connected to the RAM clear switch 66a, the setting key insertion section 66b, and the setting change switch 66c.

Connected to the output side of the main control board 61 are the variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, the electric role drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric role 34a of the second starting port 34, the main display unit 45, and the information display unit 45z described above. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 controls the drive of the various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed. Also, if the electric role opening lottery results in a win, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric role drive unit 44b so that the electric role 34a is opened. Furthermore, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the main display unit 45, and in the opening and closing execution mode, executes display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45.

Furthermore, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 32 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the first starting opening 33. When the entry of game balls into the second starting port 34 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when the entry of game balls into the second starting port 34 is identified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A firing control device 80 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 . The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met. Further, the operation handle 25 is connected to the launch control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotational operation. A game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

The audio emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. Specifically, the audio light emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 made of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 is also controlled. Further, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game performance that reflects the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the fluctuation time of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. , the presence or absence of a reach, the contents of the reach effect, and the contents of the effect executed while the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are being displayed in a variable manner are grasped. In addition, in this embodiment, the stop time which is the time when the 1st liquid crystal pattern or the 2nd liquid crystal pattern is stopped and displayed is fixed. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

Figure 282 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for the winning lottery and the like. The various counters are provided in various counter areas of the RAM 64, and are used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, the display settings of the main display unit 45, and the setting of the pattern display of the pattern display device 41. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when allocating the jackpot type. The reach random number counter C3 is used for reach judgment as to whether or not a reach is generated when the pattern sequence displayed on the pattern display device 41 is changed to an off-target state.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. In addition, the change type counter CS is used to determine the change time in the first pattern display section 37a and the second pattern display section 37b of the main display section 45, and in the pattern display device 41. Furthermore, the electric role opening counter C4 is used for the electric role opening lottery to determine whether or not the electric role 34a of the second starting hole 34 is opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of ball entry is stored in the pending information storage area. 64b is stored in the first reservation area Ra in chronological order. Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, each value of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of ball entry is set to the number 1 in the pending information storage area 64b. 2 storage area Rb in chronological order.

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be explained. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 1199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering the first starting port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the winning/failure table stored in the winning/failure table storage area of the ROM 63, resulting in a jackpot. It is determined whether or not. In addition, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the winning/failure table stored in the winning/failure table storage area of the ROM 63, and the value of the winning random number counter C1 is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the winning/failure table stored in the winning/failure table storage area of the ROM 63, and the value of the winning random number counter C1 is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c. It is determined whether or not.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment process execution area 64c in the order obtained by the game ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. Then, the winning random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is compared with the winning/losing table stored in the winning/losing table storage area of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not it will result in a jackpot.

Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 39, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the judgment process execution area 64c, and if the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, it determines the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the judgment process execution area 64c. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped on the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referenced.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. The game ball is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63, and the reach is determined. It is determined whether or not this occurs. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63, and the reach is determined. It is determined whether or not this occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The term "reach" refers to a display state in which some of the multiple symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 have a possibility of forming a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot, and in this state, the remaining symbol rows display a variable pattern. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 280(b), a symbol is first displayed as a stationary pattern in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is displayed as a stationary pattern in the symbol row Z3, forming a reach line, and when the reach line is formed, the variable pattern display is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach. Then, when a jackpot occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is displayed as a stationary pattern in the symbol row Z2.

The reach also includes a reach effect in which, when a reach line is formed, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a varying manner while a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background screen, and a reach effect is performed by reducing or hiding the symbol combination on which the reach line is formed and then displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, the reach random number counter C3 or another counter may be used to determine whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character.

Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and at the time the symbol display device 41 starts variation of the symbol. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, a fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric role opening counter C4 will be described. The electric role opening counter C4 is configured to be incremented by one in sequence within the range of, for example, 0 to 465, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric role opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric role opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d is moved to the electric role execution area 64e, and then a lottery is held in the electric role execution area 64e to determine whether or not to control the electric role 34a to an open state using the value of the electric role opening counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0, 1, the electric role 34a is controlled to an open state, and if C4 = 2 to 465, the electric role 34a is maintained in a closed state.

In addition, at least one of the obtained values of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the electric role opening counter C4, and the variable type counter CS corresponds to special information in the present invention. In addition, at least one of the values of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is also called reserved information.

Next, the hit/miss table will be explained. The hit/miss table is table data for checking against the hit random number counter C1 when a hit lottery is drawn based on the hit random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has a low probability mode and a high probability mode set as lottery modes for the hit lottery, and when a hit lottery is drawn in the low probability mode, the hit/miss table for the low probability mode is referenced, and when a hit lottery is drawn in the high probability mode, the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced.

The main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has multiple settings (hereinafter also referred to as "lottery settings") with different probabilities of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. Specifically, even in the same low probability mode, there are six lottery settings ("lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6") with different probabilities of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. The specifics are explained below.

The main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is provided with six types of win/lose tables for the low probability mode corresponding to each of the six lottery settings from "lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6". The main control device 60 then executes the winning lottery by referring to the win/lose table corresponding to the set lottery setting. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is set to lottery setting 1 and the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the main control device 60 executes the winning lottery by referring to the win/lose table for the low probability mode corresponding to lottery setting 1.

FIG. 283 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table. FIG. 283(a) shows a win/fail table for the low probability mode corresponding to lottery setting 1, and FIG. 283(b) shows a win/fail table for the high probability mode. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 283(a), the win/fail table for the low probability mode corresponding to lottery setting 1 includes values for winning the jackpot among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from 0 to 1199. , 0 to 4 are set. Although not shown in the drawings, this embodiment includes a winning/failure table for the low probability mode corresponding to lottery setting 2 to lottery setting 6. , 0 to 1199 of the winning random number counter C1, six values of 0 to 5 are set as values for winning the jackpot. In addition, in the win/fail table for the low probability mode corresponding to lottery setting 3, seven values from 0 to 6 are set as values for winning the jackpot among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from 0 to 1199. There is. In addition, in the win/fail table for the low probability mode corresponding to lottery setting 4, eight values from 0 to 7 are set as values for winning the jackpot among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from 0 to 1199. There is. In addition, in the win/fail table for the low probability mode corresponding to lottery setting 5, nine values from 0 to 8 are set as values for winning the jackpot among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from 0 to 1199. There is. In addition, in the win/fail table for the low probability mode corresponding to lottery setting 6, 10 values from 0 to 9 are set as values for winning the jackpot among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from 0 to 1199. There is.

That is, in this embodiment, the larger the number following "lottery setting", the higher the probability of winning the winning lottery in the low probability mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283(b), the win/fail table for the high probability mode includes 16 values from 0 to 15 as values for winning the jackpot among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from 0 to 1199. is set. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery than the low probability mode. In addition, in this embodiment, no matter which one of the six lottery settings is set, in the high probability mode, the winning lottery is executed with reference to the same win/fail table. That is, in the high probability mode, the probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery is the same regardless of the lottery setting. However, as another configuration, even in the high probability mode, the larger the number following "lottery setting", the higher the probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery.

In this embodiment, the six-stage lottery settings can be changed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the administrator who manages the pachinko machine 10 changes the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10, first, the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the setting key is turned off. Insert the setting key into the insertion portion 66b (keyhole). Then, the inserted key is turned to the setting change side (ON side) (for example, turned clockwise). Then, with the RAM clear switch 66a pressed down (turned ON) and all the frame release switches and door release switches turned ON, the power switch 85a is turned ON to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 10. do. Then, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode. Note that the frame release switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door release switch is a switch that is turned on when the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13. This is a switch that is sometimes turned on.

When the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the setting change mode, information indicating the current lottery settings (hereinafter also referred to as setting information) is displayed on the information display section 45z described above. For example, if the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is "lottery setting 1", "1" is displayed on the information display section 45z. Then, each time the administrator presses the setting change switch 66c, the setting information displayed on the information display section 45z changes from "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6". → “1” → “2”, etc. (in ascending order).

When the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is set to the administrator's desired value, if the administrator turns the setting key from the setting change side to the original position, the lottery setting will be changed to the lottery setting that corresponds to the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z. Specifically, for example, when the administrator presses the setting change switch 66c and "6" is displayed on the information display unit 45z, and then turns the setting key from the setting change side (ON side) to the original position (OFF side), the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 will be changed to "lottery setting 6."

In this way, according to the present embodiment, by changing the lottery settings in the pachinko machine 10, the probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery can be changed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration having six stages of lottery settings is adopted, but the lottery settings are not limited to six stages, and for example, a configuration having lottery settings of five stages or less or seven stages or more may be adopted. good.

Further, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that it is possible to check which lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set when the power is turned on. Specifically, in this embodiment, when an administrator who manages a pachinko machine 10 checks the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10, first, the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the setting key is turned off. Insert the setting key into the insertion portion 66b (keyhole). Then, the inserted key is turned to the setting change side (ON side) (for example, turned clockwise). Then, with at least one of the RAM clear switch 66a, frame opening switch, and door opening switch turned OFF, the power switch 85a is turned ON to turn on the power to the Pachinko machine 10. Then, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting confirmation mode. In the setting confirmation mode, current setting information is displayed on the information display section 45z, but the setting information cannot be changed. When the administrator turns the setting key from the setting change side (ON side) to the original position (OFF side), the pachinko machine 10 ends the setting confirmation mode.

Next, the types of jackpots will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes.
(1) The number of times (number of rounds) the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed in the opening and closing execution mode
(2) Aspects of the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode. (3) A lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) for the winning lottery after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

As an aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (2) opening/closing execution mode, the occurrence of a game ball entering the variable winning device 36 (winning) between the start and end of the opening/closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds have elapsed or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. can do. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is set to continue opening once in the opening/closing execution mode until 1.6 seconds have elapsed or until the number of balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. Can be done.

The opening limit time for one opening of the opening/closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are based on the frequency of occurrence of balls entering the variable prize winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the winnings in the high-frequency winning mode are higher than in the low-frequency winning mode, the door 36b can be opened in any manner. Specifically, it is only necessary that the high-frequency winning mode has a longer opening time limit for one opening or a larger opening limit number for one opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, a configuration may be adopted in which winnings to the variable winning device 36 do not substantially occur in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, multiple types of winning modes are not provided as the opening/closing execution mode, and during the opening/closing execution mode, the above-mentioned high frequency winning mode is used. That is, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds pass or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10.

In this embodiment, if the winning lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to allocate the jackpot type. The allocation of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as an allocation table in the allocation table storage area of the ROM 63.

FIG. 284 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 284(a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 284(b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to during a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33, and the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to when drawing a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33. It is referred to when drawing a winning lottery based on the number of game balls that enter the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting opening in FIG. 284(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting opening 33 are 16R certain variable jackpot, 8R certain variable jackpot, 16R normal A jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot and 8R probability variable jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, the win/fail lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is It is a jackpot that the support mode after the end of is the high-frequency support mode.

The 16R normal jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are jackpots in which the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is a high-frequency winning mode, the win/lose lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a low-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 13" correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "14 to 27" correspond to the 8R normal jackpot. "28-33" corresponds to the 16R regular jackpot, and "34-39" corresponds to the 8R regular jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the form of jackpots is diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R special jackpot, followed by the 8R special jackpot, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. In this way, by setting multiple types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, monotony in the game is prevented and it is possible to increase attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting hole in FIG. 284(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a 16R guaranteed jackpot and an 8R regular jackpot are set as jackpot types based on the second starting hole 34. In the distribution table for the second starting hole, of the jackpot type counter C2 values of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" corresponds to a 16R guaranteed jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to an 8R regular jackpot.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot is as follows: This is different from the case where a jackpot is achieved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also determines the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b. Decide the display mode. In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as the support mode of the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode can be set so that the frequency with which the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 opens per unit time is relatively high or low when compared with a situation in which the launch of game balls into the game area PA continues in a similar manner.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the probability of winning the electric role opening lottery using the electric role opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. The probability of winning the electric role opening lottery in the electric role opening lottery is made higher in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. Also, in the high frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric role 34a once a winning electric role opening is set longer than in the low frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in this embodiment, in the case where the electric role is won in the high-frequency support mode and the electric role is opened several times, the electric role is opened several times. The closing time until the open state starts may be set shorter than the opening time for one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from when one electric accessory lottery is held until the next electric accessory lottery is held is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. It's okay.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a game ball will enter the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in fulfilling the special information acquisition condition.

FIG. 285 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory release lottery) used when executing the electric accessory release lottery.

FIG. 285(a) shows a winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery used in the low-frequency support mode (for the low-frequency support mode). As shown in FIG. 285(a), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 as the value of electric accessory opening counter C4 that will be the winning electric accessory. Value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the low-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the low-frequency support mode, the electric role model 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 285(b) shows a win/fail table for electric accessory opening lottery used in the high-frequency support mode (for the high-frequency support mode). As shown in FIG. 285(b), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) contains 462 values from 0 to 461 as the value of electric accessory opening counter C4 that is the winning electric accessory. Value is set. Four values from 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the high-frequency support mode, the electric role model 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting port 34 is set to be higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode by the electric accessory opening lottery table. .

<<7-3>> Electrical configuration of the audio/light-emitting control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 286 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the audio light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 of the seventh embodiment. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted.

The audio/light emission control board 91 provided in the audio/light emission control device 90 is equipped with an MPU 92, which is a calculation device that controls the entire audio/light emission control device 90, and an RTC 97 (real-time clock) that can output current date and time information that can identify the current date and time. The MPU 92 and RTC 97 are connected via a signal line so that they can communicate with each other.

The MPU 92 is an element that incorporates a CPU 92x, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. The CPU 92x executes various control programs stored in the main ROM 63. The ROM 93 is a memory that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 92x, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a portion of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with various table storage areas that store performance pattern tables, and the like. The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data, and the like, when the CPU 92x executes a control program. For example, a portion of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a in which various flags are stored, and a startup date and time information storage area 94b in which startup date and time information, which will be described later, is stored. It is not essential that the CPU 92x, the ROM 93, and the RAM 94 are integrated into a single chip, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The RTC 97 has a function of measuring the current date and time, and includes an RTC control section 97a, a register 97b, and an RTC power source 97c.

The RTC control unit 97a uses (controls) the register 97b to perform various controls such as measuring the current date and time. The register 97b has a register table consisting of a plurality of registers, and this register table includes a clock register 97b1 and a startup date and time information storage area 97b2.

The clock register 97b1 is a register for clocking the current date and time, and the register value as the current date and time information is updated every second. In this embodiment, the current date and time information in the clock register 97b1 includes information that can identify the current "year", "month", "day", "hour", "minute", and "second".

The RTC power supply 97c is a power supply dedicated to the RTC 97, which is different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the RTC control unit 97a and the register 97b even in a power-off state when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Therefore, the time register 97b1 can update the current date and time information even in a power outage state. In this embodiment, a button type battery is used as the RTC power source 97c.

The startup date and time information storage area 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94 is a storage area into which the current date and time information clocked by the clock register 97b1 is written immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is started. Hereinafter, the current date and time information read from the clock register 97b1 and written into the startup date and time information storage area 94b is referred to as startup date and time information. In this embodiment, the startup date and time information stored in the startup date and time information storage area 94b includes information that can identify the "year," "month," "day," "hour," "minute," and "second" at a specific timing after the pachinko machine 10 is started. Details of the process in which the current date and time information clocked by the clock register 97b1 is written into the startup date and time information storage area 94b as startup date and time information will be described later.

The audio/emission control board 91 is provided with input/output ports, respectively. The main control device 60 and the production operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the audio emission control board 91, and the MPU 92 receives various commands from the main control device 60 and receives predetermined signals from the production operation button 24. . A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the audio emission control board 91, and a display control device 100 is also connected thereto.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 is equipped with an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is implemented as an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

《7-4》Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained.

In this embodiment, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 executes a power supply monitoring process that monitors the drive voltage supplied to each device, such as the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10, and when it is determined that the drive voltage is below a predetermined value, executes a main power cutoff process, which is a process for responding to a cutoff in the supply of power. The main power cutoff process is a process that saves the registers of the main CPU 62x to the main RAM 64, etc. The main power cutoff process will be described in detail later.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the drive voltage has become less than a predetermined value, the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is operated from the ON state to the OFF state prior to the main side power cutoff process. The driving voltage may have decreased due to a power outage, or the power switch 85a of the island equipment where the pachinko machine 10 is installed has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. It is determined whether the drive voltage has decreased due to the operation.

Figure 287 is an explanatory diagram that shows a schematic diagram of the periphery of the power switch 85a provided in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. Figure 287 (A) shows the power switch 85a in the OFF state, and Figure 287 (B) shows the power switch 85a in the ON state. In this embodiment, the power switch 85a is a rocker switch that connects/disconnects an electrical circuit by alternately pressing both ends of the operation button. Note that the structure of the power switch 85a itself is similar to that of a general rocker switch, so detailed structure of the contact parts of the power switch 85a itself is omitted in Figure 287.

As shown in FIG. 287, in this embodiment, a power switch state detection sensor 85b is provided that can detect whether the power switch 85a is in the OFF state or the ON state. In this embodiment, a push-button type momentary-operated electrical contact sensor (switch) is used as the power switch state detection sensor 85b, which is pressed down to close the contacts and output a high-level signal when the power switch 85a is in the ON state, and when the power switch 85a is in the OFF state, the contacts are opened and a low-level signal is output. The main MPU 62 can determine the state of the power switch 85a (OFF state or ON state) based on the signal from this power switch state detection sensor 85b.

The power switch 85a is not limited to the rocker switch described above, and various types of switches can be used. For example, as shown in FIG. 288, a toggle switch with a lever-shaped (rod-shaped) operation part, or as shown in FIG. 289, a rotary switch with a rotating operation part, or other various switches can be used. FIG. 288(A) shows a state in which the power switch 85a2 using a toggle switch is in the OFF state, and FIG. 288(B) shows a state in which the power switch 85a2 is in the ON state. FIG. 289(A) shows a state in which the power switch 85a3 using a rotary switch is in the OFF state, and FIG. 289(B) shows a state in which the power switch 85a3 is in the ON state. In this way, the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to the rocker switch described above, and various types of switches can be used. As in FIG. 287, detailed structures of the contact parts of the toggle switch itself and the contact parts of the rotary switch itself are omitted.

The power switch state detection sensor 85b is not limited to the electrical contact sensor described above, and various other sensors can be used. For example, various switches such as an optical sensor (photo switch) or a magnetic sensor can be used.

In the examples shown in Figures 287, 288, and 289, the power switch state detection sensor 85b is configured to detect the ON state of the power switch 85a (configuration that turns ON when the power switch 85a is ON and outputs a High level signal), but as another example, it may be configured to detect the OFF state of the power switch 85a (configuration that turns ON when the power switch 85a is OFF and outputs a High level signal). Furthermore, the power switch state detection sensor 85b may be provided at both a position that turns ON when the power switch 85a is ON and a position that turns ON when the power switch 85a is OFF. With this configuration, the detection accuracy of the state of the power switch 85a can be improved. In addition, in this configuration, if a contradiction occurs between the signals from the two power switch state detection sensors 85b, an error may be notified.

Let's return to the control of the main MPU 62.

When the drive voltage falls below a predetermined value, the main MPU 62 determines whether the power switch 85a is ON or OFF based on a signal from the power switch state detection sensor 85b. If it determines that the power switch 85a is ON, it sets the main abnormal power interruption flag stored in the main RAM 64 to ON and executes the main power interruption process described above. The main abnormal power interruption flag is a flag for determining, at the next power-on, whether the power switch 85a was ON or OFF at the time of the previous power interruption. Specifically, the main abnormal power interruption flag is ON when the power is turned on if the power switch 85a was ON at the time of the previous power interruption, and is OFF if the power switch 85a was OFF at the time of the previous power interruption.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 85 is provided with a capacitor 87 as a backup power source, and after the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched to the capacitor 87. Therefore, even after the drive voltage becomes less than the predetermined value, the power necessary to complete the main-side power-off process is secured. Further, the state of the main side abnormal power cut flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is also held until the next startup. In addition, as a modified example, a capacitor for securing the power necessary to complete the main-side power-off processing (main-side power-off processing capacitor) and a capacitor for maintaining (backing up) the state of the main-side RAM 64 are provided. (main side RAM backup capacitor) may be provided separately. In this configuration, the main side power interruption processing capacitor may be provided in the power supply device 85, for example, and may be configured to supply power to the entire main control device 60. Furthermore, the main-side RAM backup capacitor may be connected only to the main-side RAM 64 and supply backup power only to the RAM 64, for example.

Then, at the next startup when power supply is started, the main MPU 62 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment refers to the main abnormal power interruption flag to determine whether the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was OFF or ON. Then, if it determines that the main abnormal power interruption flag is not ON, that is, if it determines that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was OFF, it sends a normal power interruption command to the sound and light emission control device 90. The normal power interruption command is a command for notifying the sound and light emission control device 90 that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was OFF.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the main side abnormal power outage flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was in the ON state, the abnormal power outage command is sent to the voice emission control. to the device 90. The abnormal power outage command is a command for notifying the audio light emission control device 90 that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage.

When the audio/light emitting control device 90 receives a normal power cut command, it turns OFF the audio/light side abnormal power cut flag stored in the audio/light side RAM 94, and when it receives an abnormal power cut command, it turns ON the audio/light side abnormal power cut flag.

In this way, the main side abnormal power outage flag and the audio/light side abnormal power outage flag indicate that a power outage occurs when the administrator or the like moves the power switch 85a from the ON state to the OFF state, and then the administrator, etc. When the pachinko machine 10 is started by displacing the power switch 85a from the OFF state to the ON state, it is turned OFF.On the other hand, when the power switch 85a remains in the ON state, the administrator etc. turns on the island power switch. A power outage occurs due to a power outage or a power outage occurring, and then an administrator, etc. moves the island power switch from an OFF state to an ON state, or the power outage is restored, causing the pachinko machine 10 to is turned on when started.

After the pachinko machine 10 is started, the sound and light emission control device 90 executes various processes based on the state of the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag.

First, we will explain the processing involved in RTC effects.

In this embodiment, the sound and light emission control device 90 executes a process to set the RTC performance to an unexecutable state when the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag is OFF, and executes a process to set the RTC performance to an executable state when the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag is ON. That is, when a power interruption occurs due to the power switch 85a changing from the ON state to the OFF state, and the pachinko machine 10 is started by the power switch 85a changing from the OFF state to the ON state, the process to set the RTC performance to an unexecutable state is executed, and when a power interruption occurs due to the island power switch changing from the ON state to the OFF state or a power outage while the power switch 85a is in the ON state, and then the pachinko machine 10 is started by the island power switch changing from the OFF state to the ON state or the power outage being restored, the process to set the RTC performance to an executable state is executed. The RTC performance is a performance that is executed based on the current date and time (current year, date, time, day of the week, etc.) or the elapsed time from a predetermined date and time. Before going into a detailed explanation of this embodiment, we will explain a gaming hall in which multiple pachinko machines 10 are installed, and then we will explain the RTC presentation.

Generally, in an amusement hall where multiple pachinko machines 10 are installed, power starts being supplied to all of the pachinko machines 10 at the same time. Specifically, multiple pachinko machines 10 are installed in what is called an island facility with their respective power switches 85a turned ON, and when the island power switch of the island facility is turned ON, power starts being supplied to all of the pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility at the same time.

In this embodiment, when the supply of external power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the pachinko machine 10 reads current date and time information from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97, and executes a process of storing the read current date and time information as startup date and time information in the startup date and time information storage area 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94 (hereinafter also referred to as the "startup date and time information storage process"). Then, based on the startup date and time information including the date and time when the startup date and time information storage process was executed and the current date and time information clocked by the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97, the startup elapsed time, which is the time elapsed since the startup date and time information storage process was executed, is calculated, and the execution of the RTC performance is started based on the calculated startup elapsed time. The effects of adopting this configuration will be explained below.

Here, we will explain a case where, unlike the present embodiment, the RTC performance is started based on the current date and time information clocked in the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97, not on the elapsed time since the start date and time information storage process was executed (for example, the RTC performance is started when the time included in the current date and time information becomes 11:00:00). In this configuration, if there is a discrepancy in the current date and time information clocked by the clock register 97b1 of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island equipment (for example, if at a certain moment the time included in the current date and time information of pachinko machine 10A is 11:00:00, and the time included in the current date and time information of pachinko machine 10B is 10:59:52), the timing at which the RTC performance starts will differ for each pachinko machine 10, which will cause a problem that players who were expecting the RTC performance to start simultaneously (at the same time) in each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island equipment will feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility is configured to change the clock register of the RTC 97 based on the start of external power supply to the pachinko machine 10. The current date and time information is read from 97b1, and a startup date and time information storage process is executed to store the read current date and time information in the startup date and time information storage area 94b as startup date and time information. Therefore, for example, when the administrator of a game hall turns on the island power switch, power supply is started all at once (simultaneously) to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island equipment, and Each installed pachinko machine 10 executes startup date and time information storage processing all at once (simultaneously).

According to the present embodiment, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island equipment has startup date and time information including the date and time when the startup date and time information storage process was executed, and a clock in the time register 97b1 of the RTC 97. Based on the current date and time information, the boot elapsed time since the boot date and time information storage process was executed is calculated. As described above, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility executes the startup date and time information storage process all at once (at the same time), so the startup date and time information storage process calculated in each pachinko machine 10 is executed. The elapsed time since activation is the same (or substantially the same) even if there is a difference in the time included in the current date and time information measured in the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97 of each pachinko machine 10.

According to the present embodiment, each pachinko machine 10 installed on the island equipment starts RTC performance based on the calculated startup elapsed time, so all the pachinko machines 10 installed on the island equipment start the RTC performance at the same time. It becomes possible to (simultaneously) start RTC performance.

However, in a pachinko machine 10 having such a configuration, when the island power switch is turned ON to simultaneously (simultaneously) start supplying power to the multiple pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility, and then the power switch 85a of one pachinko machine 10 is individually switched from ON to OFF to cut off the power supply for the purpose of changing the setting information, etc., and then the power switch 85a is switched from OFF to ON again to start the setting change mode, the start date and time information storage process is executed when the second power supply is started, so there is a discrepancy with the elapsed start time of the other pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility, and the timing of the start of the RTC performance of the one pachinko machine 10 differs from that of the other pachinko machines 10. In particular, since it takes about one minute to change the setting information, the one pachinko machine 10 whose setting information has been changed will start the RTC performance about one minute later than the other pachinko machines 10. Generally, the duration of an RTC performance is about five minutes, so the RTC performance of the one pachinko machine 10 whose setting information has been changed will overlap and interfere with the RTC performance of the other pachinko machine 10, causing discomfort to players.

In this embodiment, when the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is shifted from the ON state to the OFF state to cut off the power supply, and then the power switch 85a is shifted from the OFF state to the ON state to start up the pachinko machine, that is, when the abnormal power interruption flag is OFF at the time of start up, the RTC performance is set to a state in which it cannot be executed. As a result, for example, in one pachinko machine 10 started up in the setting change mode, the RTC performance is not executed, so it is possible to prevent the RTC performance of that one pachinko machine 10 from overlapping and interfering with the RTC performance of the other pachinko machine 10 in a shifted state, and to prevent discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, if the power supply is cut off by switching the island power switch from ON to OFF while the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is still ON, and the island power switch is then switched from OFF to ON and the machine is started up, i.e., if the abnormal power interruption flag is ON at the time of startup, the machine is set to a state in which the RTC performance can be executed. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the RTC performance at the same (or approximately the same) timing as other pachinko machines 10 installed in the island equipment.

Next, we will explain the processing related to the stationary suggestion effect.

In the present embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 90 executes a process of setting the deferred suggestion performance to a state where it is impossible to execute when the sound and light side abnormal power outage flag is OFF, and on the other hand, when the sound and light side abnormal power outage If the flag is ON, processing is executed to set the deferral suggestion effect to an executable state. That is, if a power outage occurs due to the power switch 85a being displaced from the ON state to the OFF state, and then the pachinko machine 10 is started due to the power switch 85a being displaced from the OFF state to the ON state, the stationary suggestion effect is generated. On the other hand, if the power switch 85a is in the ON state and the power switch is shifted from the ON state to the OFF state or a power outage occurs, a power outage occurs, and then When the pachinko machine 10 is started due to the island power switch being shifted from the OFF state to the ON state or the power outage being restored, processing is executed to set the stationary suggestion performance to an executable state. Hereinafter, prior to a specific explanation of the present embodiment, the deferred suggestion effect will be explained.

The fixed-state suggestion effect is an effect that can be executed when the setting information has not been changed at the time of startup (when the power is turned on), and is an effect that suggests that the setting information has not been changed at the time of the current startup (that the setting information has been fixed). In this embodiment, as the fixed-state suggestion effect, an effect in which the effect operation button 24 moves slightly forward (towards the player) and then returns to its original position is adopted. However, various types of effects can be adopted as the fixed-state suggestion effect, and for example, an effect in which a specific character (for example, a specific female character) is displayed in a predetermined display mode on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 for about a few seconds, or an effect that directly suggests that the setting information has been fixed or may have been fixed by using a character string or voice such as "The setting has been fixed!" or "The setting may have been fixed!" can be adopted. In addition, in this embodiment, the timing of the start of the first game round (variation of the special pattern) after power is turned on is adopted as the timing for executing the fixed-state suggestion effect. However, various timings can be used to execute the stationary suggestion effect, such as the start of a predetermined number of play cycles (e.g., the 30th spin) after the power is turned on, or the execution of the first specific effect (e.g., a specific super reach effect) after the power is turned on.

According to such a configuration, the player can check whether the setting information has been deferred at the current startup of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the setting information is It is possible to predict whether the changes have been made or not. More specifically, for example, if there is a pachinko machine 10 with a high frequency of jackpot winnings in a certain game hall, the player may want to set the setting information of the pachinko machine 10 to a value with a high probability of jackpot winning (for example, setting 6). ). Then, when the player plays a game on the Pachinko machine 10 in the game hall on the next day and the Deferred Suggestion effect is executed, the player will be able to play the game with the high setting of the previous day. It can be predicted that this is the case. Therefore, according to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the setting information of the pachinko machine 10 has been left unchanged from the previous day.

However, if the configuration of this embodiment described above is not adopted and the setting information is not changed at startup (when the power is turned on), adopting a configuration that can execute stationary suggestion effects regardless of the state of the sound/light side abnormal power interruption flag will result in the problems described below.

For example, suppose that in a certain gaming hall, there is a specific pachinko machine 10 (hereafter referred to as the specific pachinko machine 10) that is operating at a setting of 6, and a certain player wins a large number of balls on that specific pachinko machine 10. In that case, that player and other players who see that large number of balls being won will recognize that the specific pachinko machine 10 is a machine with a high setting.

Then, after the game hall closes, the malicious manager of the game hall cuts off the power supply to the multiple pachinko machines 10, including the specific pachinko machine 10, installed on the island equipment by switching the island power switch from ON to OFF. Then, before the start of business on the next business day, the manager starts the power supply to the multiple pachinko machines 10 installed on the island equipment by switching the island power switch from OFF to ON. After that, the manager switches the power switch 85a of the specific pachinko machine 10 from ON to OFF to temporarily cut off the power supply to the specific pachinko machine 10, and then starts the specific pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode by switching the power switch 85a from OFF to ON while performing an operation to start the setting change mode for the specific pachinko machine 10, and changes the setting information from 6 to 1 in the setting change mode. Then, the power supply to the specific pachinko machine 10 is cut off again by again transitioning the power switch 85a of the specific pachinko machine 10 from the ON state to the OFF state. After that, when the administrator again changes the power switch 85a of the specific pachinko machine 10 from the OFF state to the ON state and starts up the specific pachinko machine 10 normally (the setting information remains at 1), the pachinko machine 10 becomes capable of executing the fixed play suggestion performance.

Then, when the game hall starts operating, a player who had won a large amount of balls the previous day (or the previous business day) or another player who was watching the large amount of balls played at the specified pachinko machine If the player plays a game in step 10 and a deferment suggestion effect is executed, the player assumes that the specific pachinko machine 10 is left in the same high setting as the previous day (or the previous business day). This may lead to the mistaken belief that the

In other words, depending on how the gaming parlor manager operates the system, the pachinko machine 10 may be in a state where the fixed-play suggestion effect can be executed even though the setting information has actually been changed from that of the previous day (or previous business day), which could result in players being deceived.

As described above, in a gaming hall where the power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is started and stopped all at once by the island power switch of the island equipment, the pachinko machines 10 operate the individual power switches 85a. If the power supply is cut off or started due to the following, there is a high possibility that the setting information has been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day).

Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, if the sound/light side abnormal power interruption flag is OFF at startup, i.e., if the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is shifted from the ON state to the OFF state to cut off the power supply, and then the power switch 85a is shifted from the OFF state to the ON state to start up, a process is executed to set the fixed play suggestion performance to a state in which it cannot be executed. With this configuration, even if the pachinko machine 10 is operated like the above-mentioned game hall, the fixed play suggestion performance is not executed in that particular pachinko machine 10, so it is possible to prevent players from being deceived.

《7-5》Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the processing executed by the main control device 60 will be explained, and then the processing executed by the audio emission control device 90 will be explained.

Next, an example of a process executed by the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60 of this embodiment will be specifically described.

In this embodiment, the main MPU 62 executes main processing and timer interrupt processing. The main processing is executed after the power is turned on.

Figure 290 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in the seventh embodiment when the power is turned on.

In step Sr0101, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and wait processing is executed for, for example, about one second to wait for the sub-side control devices (audio/light-emission control device 90, display control device 100, dispensing control device 70, etc.) to become operable. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0102, where internal function register setting processing is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0103.

In step Sr0103, it is determined whether the main side abnormal power interruption flag is ON. As described above, the main side abnormal power interruption flag is a flag for determining, at the time of the next power-on, whether the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was ON or OFF. Specifically, the main side abnormal power interruption flag is ON if the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was ON, and is OFF if the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was OFF.

In step Sr0103, if it is determined that the main side abnormal power outage flag is not ON (step Sr0103: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0104, and a normal power outage command is sent to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr0106, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0103 that the main side abnormal power cut flag is ON (step Sr0103: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0105, where an abnormal power cut command is sent to the voice and light-emitting control device 90. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0106. Note that the normal power cut command and abnormal power cut command are also called power cut type commands, as they are commands for notifying the voice and light-emitting control device 90 of the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power cut (type of power cut).

In step Sr0106, it is determined whether the power recovery flag is ON.

Now, the power recovery flag will be explained. In this embodiment, when the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF or a power outage occurs, various information (information indicating the game status, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is saved to a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. Then, when the saving of this information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, and a RAM judgment value (e.g., a checksum value) is calculated by performing a predetermined calculation based on a predetermined group of information stored in the main RAM 64, and the calculated RAM judgment value is stored in the main RAM 64. In this way, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying whether or not information for returning to the state at the time of the previous power outage is stored in the main RAM 64 when the power is turned on. After the supply of power from the commercial power source is cut off, the above-mentioned saving process and RAM judgment value calculation process can be performed by power supply from a backup power source such as a capacitor.

If it is determined in step Sr0106 that the power recovery flag is ON (step Sr0106: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0107, where a RAM judgment value is calculated by performing a predetermined calculation based on a predetermined group of information stored in the main RAM 64. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM judgment value. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0108, where it is determined whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) is normal or not, that is, whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) matches the RAM judgment value (checksum value) stored in the main RAM 64. If it is determined in step Sr0108 that the RAM judgment value is normal (step Sr0108: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0109.

In step Sr0109, the setting information for the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read, and it is determined whether the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has six levels from "1" to "6", so if the setting information is a numerical value within the range from "1" to "6", it is determined that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range. On the other hand, if "0" or "7" is stored as the setting information, or if information other than a numerical value is stored due to noise or the like, it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range. In step Sr0109, if it is determined that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step Sr0109: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0110.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the above-mentioned step Sr0106 that the power recovery flag is not ON (step Sr0106: NO), if it is determined in the above-mentioned step Sr0108 that the RAM judgment value is not normal (step Sr0108: NO), or if it is determined in the above-mentioned step Sr0109 that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step Sr0109: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0118 and the RAM abnormality flag is set to ON. In other words, the RAM abnormality flag is a flag that is set to ON when the power recovery flag is OFF, when the RAM judgment value is not normal, or when the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, and is a flag that indicates that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal.

Below, the flow of processing executed when the RAM abnormality flag is not turned on will be explained, and then the flow of processing executed when the RAM abnormality flag is turned on will be explained.

In step Sr0110, it is determined whether the setting change in progress flag is ON. The setting change in progress flag is a flag that is set ON when the setting change process (setting change mode) described below is started, and is set OFF when the setting change process (setting change mode) is ended. Here, a situation in which the setting change in progress flag is ON in step Sr0110 means that the setting change process (setting change mode) described below was executed when the pachinko machine 10 was last powered on, and the setting change in progress flag remains ON because the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 was turned OFF or a power outage occurred while the setting change process (setting change mode) was being executed.

If it is determined in step Sr0110 that the setting changing flag is ON (step Sr0110: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0121, and a setting changing process (setting changing mode) is executed. In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display section 45z is executed, and a process of accepting a change of the setting information of the lottery setting is executed. That is, the setting change mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0110 that the setting changing flag is not ON (step Sr0110: NO), the process advances to step Sr0111.

In step Sr0111, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 66a is ON. If it is determined in step Sr0111 that the RAM clear switch 66a is not ON (step Sr0111: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0112 and checks whether the setting key, frame release switch, and door release switch are all ON. Determine. Note that "the setting key is ON" means that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 66b (keyhole) and positioned on the ON side. Further, the frame release switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door release switch is a switch that is turned on when the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13. This is a switch that is sometimes turned on.

If it is determined in step Sr0112 that at least one of the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch is not ON (step Sr0112: NO), proceed to step Sr0113.

In step Sr0113, it is determined whether the setting confirmation flag is ON. The setting confirmation flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of a setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), which will be described later, and turned OFF at the end of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode). Here, the situation where the setting confirmation flag is ON in step Sr0113 means that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), which will be described later, was executed when the pachinko machine 10 was last powered on, and the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) was executed. This is a situation where the setting confirmation flag remains ON due to the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 being turned off or a power outage occurring during the execution of the setting confirmation mode).

If it is determined in step Sr0113 that the setting confirmation flag is not ON (step Sr0113: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0114, where a normal startup command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. The normal startup command is a command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 (main control device 60) has started up in a normal state in which it has not been determined that there is a RAM abnormality and none of the setting change process, setting confirmation process, or RAM clear process described below is executed. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the normal startup command, it executes a process to notify that the pachinko machine 10 has started up in a normal state. Specifically, in this embodiment, it outputs a voice such as "Starting normally" from the speaker 46. After executing step Sr0114, the process proceeds to step Sr0116 described below.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0112 that the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch are all ON (step Sr0112: YES), and if it is determined in step Sr0113 that the setting confirmation flag is ON (step Sr0113: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0115. That is, if the RAM clear switch 66a is OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch are all ON, or if the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) was executed when the pachinko machine 10 was last powered on and the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) was executed while the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) was being executed because the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 was turned OFF or a power outage occurred, the process proceeds to step Sr0115.

In step Sr0115, a setting confirmation process is executed. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process is executed to display the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display unit 45z. In other words, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which an administrator or the like can confirm the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) will be described later. After executing step Sr0115, the process proceeds to step Sr0116.

In step Sr0116, power restoration processing is executed to restore the state to the state when the power was turned off last time. Specifically, in the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main side RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main side CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main side RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main side CPU 62x. , the state of the register of the main CPU 62x is restored to the state before the power was cut off. After executing step Sr0116, the process proceeds to step Sr0117, where the power recovery flag in the main side RAM 64 is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sr0126, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0111 that the RAM clear switch 66a is ON (step Sr0111: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0120, where it is determined whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON. If it is determined in step Sr0120 that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step Sr0120: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0121, where the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0126, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0120 that at least one of the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch is not ON (step Sr0120: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0122.

In step Sr0122, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag described above is ON. If it is determined in step Sr0122 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step Sr0122: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0123 and executes the RAM clear process. The RAM clear process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64, except for the setting information of the lottery setting. In other words, when the RAM clear process is executed, various flag information and various control information indicating the game state are erased, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not erased, and the setting information is maintained as it is. After executing step Sr0123, the process proceeds to step Sr0124 and transmits a RAM clear command, which is a command indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed, to the sound and light emission control device 90. As described later, when the sound and light emission control device 90 receives the RAM clear command, it starts one of the above-mentioned RAM clear notification processes A, B1, and B2. After executing step Sr0124, the process proceeds to step Sr0126 described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0122 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step Sr0122: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0125, and a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, is emitted by voice. It is transmitted to the control device 90. As will be described later, upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the audio emission control device 90 starts RAM abnormality notification processing. After executing step Sr0125, the process advances to step Sr0126. However, in the flow of this explanation, since the RAM abnormality flag is not turned on, the process does not proceed to step Sr0125 described above.

In step Sr0126, a lighting/blinking process is executed in which all the light emitting units (segment light emitting unit and DP light emitting unit) constituting the information display unit 45z are lit and blinked. In the lighting/blinking process, all the light emitting parts constituting the information display section 45z are turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds), and then synchronously flashed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds). After executing step Sr0126, the process advances to step Sr0127.

In step Sr0127, interrupt permission setting is executed to permit generation of timer interrupt processing. Thereafter, an infinite loop is repeated to wait, and timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is executed periodically (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

Next, we will explain the process that is executed when the RAM abnormality flag is set to ON in step Sr0118.

As described above, if it is determined in step Sr0106 that the power recovery flag is not ON (step Sr0106: NO), if it is determined in step Sr0108 that the RAM judgment value is not normal (step Sr0108: NO), or if it is determined in step Sr0109 that the setting information is not within the predetermined range (step Sr0109: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0118, where the RAM abnormality flag is set ON. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0119.

In step Sr0119, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 66a is ON. If it is determined in step Sr0119 that the RAM clear switch 66a is ON (step Sr0119: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0120, where it is determined whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON. If it is determined in step Sr0120 that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step Sr0120: YES), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned step Sr0121, where the above-mentioned setting change process (setting change mode) is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0125. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0119 that the RAM clear switch 66a is not ON (step Sr0119: NO), and if it is determined in step Sr0120 that at least one of the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch is not ON (step Sr0120: NO), proceed to step Sr0122.

In step Sr0122, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag described above is ON. If it is determined in step Sr0122 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step Sr0122: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0123, where the RAM clear process described above is executed. After executing step Sr0123, the process proceeds to step Sr0124, where a RAM clear command, which is a command indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. After executing step Sr0124, the process proceeds to step Sr0125. However, in the flow of this explanation, since the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the process does not proceed to step Sr0123 described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0122 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step Sr0122: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0125, and a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main side RAM 64 is abnormal, is emitted by voice. It is transmitted to the control device 90. After executing step Sr0125, the process advances to step Sr0126.

In step Sr0126, the lighting and blinking process described above is executed. After executing step Sr0126, the process proceeds to step Sr0127, where an interrupt permission setting is executed to allow timer interrupt processing to occur. After that, the process waits by repeating an infinite loop process, and the timer interrupt processing described below is executed periodically (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

As explained above, in this embodiment, the operation for executing the setting change process (setting change mode) is to press the RAM clear switch 66a (ON state), and press the setting key ( This is an operation of turning on the power switch 85a with all of the keyhole), frame release switch, and door release switch turned on. In addition, the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is performed when the RAM clear switch 66a is not pressed (OFF state), and the setting key (keyhole), frame release switch, and door are pressed. This is an operation of turning on the power switch 85a with all open switches turned on. In addition, the operation for executing the RAM clear process is to press the RAM clear switch 66a (ON state), and turn off either the setting key (keyhole), frame release switch, or door release switch. This is an operation to turn on the power switch 85a in the state where the power switch 85a is turned on.

An example of the flow of processing realized by executing the above-described main processing will be summarized below.

- When power supply is started, it is determined whether the main side abnormal power outage flag is ON (step Sr0103), and if it is determined that the main side abnormal power outage flag is OFF (step Sr0103: NO), a normal power outage command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 (step Sr0104), and on the other hand, if it is determined that the main side abnormal power outage flag is ON (step Sr0103: YES), an abnormal power outage command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 (step Sr0104). A disconnection command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 (step Sr0105). After that, the processing flow will be one of the ones shown below.

- After sending either the normal power-off command or the abnormal power-off command, it is determined whether the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps Sr0106, Sr0108, Sr0109). If an operation has been performed to execute the setting change process (setting change mode), the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed (step Sr0121) regardless of whether the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are met and regardless of the state of the setting checking flag.

- After transmitting either the normal power outage command or the abnormal power outage command, it is determined whether the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied (step Sr0106, step Sr0108, step Sr0109), and the RAM abnormality flag is set to ON. When it is determined that the conditions for turning ON are not satisfied, and when it is determined that the setting changing flag is ON (step Sr0110: YES), the setting change processing (setting change mode) is executed. The settings change process (settings change mode) is executed regardless of whether or not an operation, an operation to execute the settings confirmation process (settings confirmation mode), and an operation to execute the RAM clear process are performed. (Step Sr0121).

- After transmitting either the normal power outage command or the abnormal power outage command, it is determined whether the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied (step Sr0106, step Sr0108, step Sr0109), and the RAM abnormality flag is set to ON. When it is determined that the conditions for turning ON are not satisfied, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not ON (step Sr0110: NO), and an operation to execute RAM clear processing has been performed. (Step Sr0111: YES, Step Sr0120: NO, Step Sr0122: NO), regardless of the state of the setting confirmation flag, execute RAM clear processing (Step Sr0123) and send a RAM clear command (Step Sr0124). .

- After sending either the normal power cut command or the abnormal power cut command, it is determined whether the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps Sr0106, Sr0108, Sr0109). If it is determined that the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are not met, it is determined that the setting change flag is not ON (step Sr0110: NO). If an operation has been performed to execute the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) (step Sr0111: NO, step Sr0112: YES), the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed (step Sr0115).

- After transmitting either the normal power outage command or the abnormal power outage command, it is determined whether the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied (step Sr0106, step Sr0108, step Sr0109), and the RAM abnormality flag is set to ON. When it is determined that the conditions for turning ON are not satisfied, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not ON (step Sr0110: NO), and the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is performed. Even if it has not been carried out, if the setting confirmation flag is ON (step Sr0113: YES), the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed (step Sr0115).

- After transmitting either the normal power outage command or the abnormal power outage command, it is determined whether the conditions for turning on the RAM abnormality flag are satisfied (step Sr0106, step Sr0108, step Sr0109), and the RAM abnormality flag is set to ON. If it is determined that the conditions for turning ON are satisfied and the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON (step Sr0118), even if an operation for executing RAM clear processing has been performed, A RAM abnormality command is sent without executing RAM clear processing (step Sr0125).

- After sending either the normal power cut command or the abnormal power cut command, it is determined whether the conditions for setting the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps Sr0106, Sr0108, Sr0109). If it is determined that the conditions for setting the RAM abnormality flag ON are met and the RAM abnormality flag is set ON (step Sr0118), even if an operation has been performed to execute the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is not executed and a RAM abnormality command is sent (step Sr0125).

Next, we will explain the details of the setting change process shown in step Sr0121 of Figure 290.

Figure 291 is a flowchart showing the setting change process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in the seventh embodiment.

In step Sr0201, a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has started, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90.

Note that, after transmitting the setting change mode start command to the audio emission control device 90, the configuration may be such that information indicating that the setting change mode has been started is sent to the hall computer of the game hall via an external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting change mode has started may be configured to display information about the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode on the management screen. After executing step Sr0201, the process advances to step Sr0202.

In step Sr0202, the setting changing flag in the main RAM 64 is turned on. As described above, the settings changing flag is a flag that indicates that the settings change process (settings change mode) has started, and a flag that indicates that the settings change process (settings change mode) has not yet ended. It is. After executing step Sr0202, the process advances to step Sr0203.

In step Sr0203, the initial setting process at the start of the setting change is executed. In the initial setting process at the start of the setting change, the initial settings required to start the setting change process are executed. In this embodiment, in the initial setting process at the start of the setting change, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON, and if it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the RAM abnormality flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sr0203, the process proceeds to step Sr0204.

In step Sr0204, setting information for lottery settings stored in the main side RAM 64 is read and saved as update setting information. Specifically, in this embodiment, setting information for lottery settings stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is read, and the read setting information is stored in other areas other than the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64. The information is stored (copied) in the update setting information storage area. After executing step Sr0204, the process advances to step Sr0205.

In step Sr0205, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is read, and control for displaying the read update setting information on the information display section 45z is started. Specifically, the three 7-segment displays on the left of the information display section 45z start displaying the character string "set." indicating that the setting change mode is being executed, and the 7-segment display on the right end starts displaying the character string "set." Then, the update setting information is started to be lit and the DP light emitting section of the rightmost 7-segment display starts to be displayed by blinking. After executing step Sr0205, the process advances to step Sr0206.

In step Sr0206, it is determined whether the update setting information is a value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has six levels from "1" to "6", so it is determined whether the update setting information is a value within the range from "1" to "6". If it is determined in step Sr0206 that the update setting information is a value within the predetermined range (step Sr0206: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0208. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0206 that the update setting information is not a value within the predetermined range (step Sr0206: NO), for example, if "0" or "7" is stored as the update setting information, or if information other than a number is stored due to noise or the like, the process proceeds to step Sr0207, where the update setting information is changed to the initial value. In this embodiment, "1" is stored as the initial value in the update setting information. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0208.

In step Sr0208, it is determined whether the setting key (setting key insertion section 66b) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in this embodiment, during the period when the setting key (setting key insertion part 66b) is on the ON side, the signal is High level; During the period when the section 66b) is on the OFF side, a signal indicating a low level is monitored, and when a falling edge of the signal falling from a high level to a low level is detected, the setting key (setting key) is monitored. It is determined that the key insertion section 66b) has been turned to the OFF side. In step Sr0208, if it is determined that the setting key (setting key insertion part 66b) has not shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step Sr0208: NO), the process advances to step Sr0209, and the setting change switch 66c Determine whether or not the button has been pressed. If it is determined in step Sr0209 that the setting change switch 66c has been pressed (step Sr0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0210, where the update setting information is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical information stored as update setting information. However, if the setting change switch 66c is pressed in a situation where the numerical information stored as update setting information is "6", the numerical information is updated to "1". Thereafter, the process returns to step Sr0206 described above, and it is determined whether the updated update setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0209 that the setting change switch 66c is not pressed (step Sr0209: NO), the process returns to step Sr0206 described above without executing the process in step Sr0210, and the setting information for update is changed. It is determined whether or not the value is within a predetermined range.

In step Sr0208 described above, if it is determined that the setting key (setting key insertion section 66b) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step Sr0208: YES), the process advances to step Sr0211.

In step Sr0211, it is determined whether the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is the same as the setting information stored in the setting information storage area. If it is determined in step Sr0211 that the update setting information is not the same as the setting information (step Sr0211: NO), that is, if the setting information has been changed by the administrator etc., the process advances to step Sr0212 and the setting has been changed. Turn on the flag. The settings changed flag is a flag for determining whether or not the settings information has been changed when transmitting a settings change mode end command, which will be described later. After executing step Sr0212, the process advances to step Sr0213. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0211 that the update setting information is the same as the setting information (step Sr0211: YES), that is, if the setting information has not been changed by the administrator etc., step Sr0212 is executed. The process proceeds to step Sr0213 without any problem.

In step Sr0213, the update setting information stored in the main side RAM 64 is read and saved as setting information. Specifically, in this embodiment, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is read, and the read update setting information is stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64. Memorize (copy). After step Sr0213 is executed, the process proceeds to step Sr0214, where the rightmost 7-segment display starts lighting display of the setting information, and the display mode of the DP light emitting section of the rightmost 7-segment display is switched from blinking to lighting. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr0215 and wait processing is executed. In the wait process, the process waits for 2 seconds without proceeding to the next process. As a result, the character string "set." is displayed on the left three 7-segment displays of the information display section 45z, and the confirmed setting information is displayed on the right-most 7-segment display, and the corresponding The DP light emitting section of the rightmost 7-segment display remains lit for 2 seconds. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sr0216, and the control for displaying the setting information on the information display section 45z is ended. Specifically, the four 7-segment displays constituting the information display section 45z are turned off. After that, the process advances to step Sr0217.

In step Sr0217, it is determined whether the above-mentioned setting change completed flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sr0217 that the settings changed flag is not ON (step Sr0217: NO), that is, if the settings information has not been changed by the administrator etc., the process advances to step Sr0218 and the settings information is not changed. A setting change mode end command A, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, is sent to the audio emission control device 90 without any delay. After that, the process advances to step Sr0220. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0217 that the settings changed flag is ON (step Sr0217: YES), that is, if the settings information has been changed by the administrator etc., the process proceeds to step Sr0219, and the settings information is changed. A setting change mode end command B, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After that, the process advances to step Sr0220.

In addition, after sending the setting change mode end command A or B to the audio and light emission control device 90, information indicating that the setting change mode has ended may be sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended may be configured to display information indicating that the setting change mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen.

In step Sr0220, a RAM clear process is executed. In the RAM clear process, information other than the setting information for the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is erased. In other words, when this RAM clear process is executed, the setting change in progress flag and setting change completed flag described above are also erased (turned OFF).

After executing step Sr0220, this setting change process ends. In addition, after executing the setting change process, the setting information of the changed lottery settings is sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal, and the hall computer that receives the information displays the relevant pachinko machine on the management screen. It is also possible to display the setting information of the lottery setting after the change of 10.

Next, we will explain the details of the setting confirmation process shown in step Sr0115 of Figure 290.

Figure 292 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in the seventh embodiment.

In step Sr0301, a setting check mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting check mode has started, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the setting check mode start command, it starts the above-mentioned setting check mode execution notification process.

In addition, after the setting check mode start command is sent to the audio and light control device 90, information indicating that the setting check mode has started may be sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting check mode has started may be configured to display information about the pachinko machine 10 that is in the setting check mode on the management screen. After executing step Sr0301, proceed to step Sr0302.

In step Sr0302, the setting confirmation flag in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. As described above, the setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has started, and is also a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has not yet ended. After executing step Sr0302, proceed to step Sr0303.

In step Sr0303, control is started to display setting information of the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 on the information display section 45z. Specifically, as described above, the three 7-segment displays on the left side of the information display section 45z start displaying the character string "sec." indicating that the setting confirmation mode is being executed, and the character string "sec." The 7-segment display starts lighting display of the setting information, and the DP light emitting section of the rightmost 7-segment display starts lighting display. After executing step Sr0303, the process advances to step Sr0304.

In step Sr0304, it is determined whether the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in this embodiment, a signal indicating a high level is monitored during the period when the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) is on the ON side, and a signal indicating a low level is monitored during the period when the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) is on the OFF side. When a falling edge of the signal falling from a high level to a low level is detected, it is determined that the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. In step Sr0304, if it is determined that the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) has not shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step Sr0304: NO), step Sr0304 is executed again. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0304 that the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step Sr0304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0305. In other words, an infinite loop is repeated until the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) shifts from the ON side to the OFF side, and the process does not proceed to step Sr0305, but when the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) shifts from the ON side to the OFF side, the process proceeds to step Sr0305.

In step Sr0305, control for displaying the lottery setting information on the information display unit 45z is terminated. Specifically, the four seven-segment displays constituting the information display unit 45z are switched off. As a result, the state in which the character string "sec." is lit on the three left seven-segment displays of the information display unit 45z, and the state in which the setting information is lit on the right-most seven-segment display and the DP light-emitting part of the right-most seven-segment display is lit, continue from the start of the setting confirmation mode until the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) is switched to the OFF side. After executing step Sr0305, proceed to step Sr0306.

In step Sr0306, the setting changing flag in the main RAM 64 is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr0307.

In step Sr0307, a setting check mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting check mode has ended, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. As described below, when the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the setting check mode end command, it ends the notification process during the setting check mode, and then executes the notification process after the end of the setting check mode described above for 30 seconds.

After executing step Sr0307, this setting confirmation process is terminated. Note that after the setting confirmation mode end command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been ended may be sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been ended may be configured to display information indicating that the setting confirmation mode of the pachinko machine 10 has been ended on the management screen.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON and the pachinko machine 10 starts up, one of the five commands described above, the normal start command, the RAM abnormal command, the RAM clear command, the setting change mode start command, and the setting check mode start command, is sent from the main control device 60 to the sound and light emission control device 90. The sound and light emission control device 90, which receives one of these five commands, can determine in what manner the main control device 60 started up (what type of start-up process was executed) based on the type of the received command. In other words, the five commands described above, the normal start command, the RAM abnormal command, the RAM clear command, the setting change mode start command, and the setting check mode start command, are commands that indicate the type of start-up process executed by the main control device 60, and therefore these five commands are collectively referred to as "start-up type commands."

Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained. The timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, every 4 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

Figure 293 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the master MPU 62 (master CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr0401, various random number update processes are executed. In the various random number update processes, the current numerical information is read from each counter in the master RAM 64 (win random number counter C1, big win type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric role release counter C4, etc.), a process is executed to add 1 to the read numerical information, and then a process is executed to overwrite the read-out counter with the added numerical information. Note that if the read-out numerical information is the maximum value of the counter, a process is executed to overwrite the read-out counter with 0. After executing step Sr0401, proceed to step Sr0402.

In step Sr0402, power monitoring processing is executed. In the power supply monitoring process, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is monitored, and if it is determined that the drive voltage has fallen below a predetermined value (for example, 10 volts), the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is When it is determined that the switch 85a has been turned off or a power outage has occurred, the various information stored in the registers of the main CPU 62x (information indicating the gaming status, control information, etc.) is saved to a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. let When the saving of these information to the main side RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned on and a predetermined calculation is executed based on a predetermined information group stored in the main side RAM 64. A RAM judgment value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM judgment value is stored in the main side RAM 64. Thereafter, without proceeding to step Sr0403, which will be described later, the infinite loop process is repeated until the supplied drive voltage decreases and the process becomes inoperable. Note that even if the drive voltage supplied to the main controller 60 drops below a predetermined value, the power supply device 85 of the present embodiment is used as the drive voltage in the control system such as the main controller 60. It is configured to output a regulated voltage of 5 volts. As the time during which this stabilizing voltage is output, sufficient time is ensured to execute the process up to storing the above-mentioned RAM judgment value in the main side RAM 64. Furthermore, as will be described later, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the drive voltage has fallen below a predetermined value, it is determined whether the power switch 85a is in the OFF state, and the state of the power switch 85a is not in the OFF state. If it is determined that this is the case, the above-mentioned main side abnormal power outage flag is turned ON.

On the other hand, in the power supply monitoring process of step Sr0402, if it is determined that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is not lower than the predetermined value, the process directly proceeds to step Sr0403.

In step Sr0403, it is determined whether at least one of the RAM abnormality flag or the game stop flag is ON. As described above, the RAM abnormality flag is a flag that is turned ON when it is determined that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal in the main processing executed when the power is turned on. The game stop flag is a flag that is turned ON in order to stop the progress of the game when shaking or magnetism is detected in the fraud detection process. In step Sr0403, if it is determined that both the RAM abnormality flag and the game stop flag are not ON (step Sr0403: NO), the process advances to step Sr0404. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0403 that at least one of the RAM abnormality flag or the game stop flag is ON (step Sr0403: YES), this timer interrupt processing is ended without executing the processing after step Sr0404. do. That is, if at least one of the RAM abnormality flag or the game stop flag is ON, the processing for enabling the game to proceed after step Sr0404 will not be executed, and the game will enter the game progress mode in which the game can proceed. is configured not to migrate. Hereinafter, the processing after step Sr0404, which is the processing for enabling the game to proceed, will be explained.

In step Sr0404, port output processing is executed. In the port output processing, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to cause the various drive units 36c and 34b to output corresponding to the output information. For example, if information is set to switch the big winning opening 36a to the open state, output of a drive signal to the variable winning a prize drive unit 36c is started, and if information to switch the big winning opening 36a to the closed state is set, The output of the drive signal is stopped. In addition, when the information to switch the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory drive section 34b is started, and the information to switch the electric accessory 34a to the closed state is set. If set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr0405.

In step Sr0405, a read process is executed. In the read process, signals other than the ball-entering signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0406.

In step Sr0406, the signals received from each of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are read, and ball entry detection processing is executed to perform processing corresponding to the read information. After executing step Sr0406, the process advances to step Sr0407.

In step Sr0407, a timer update process is executed to collectively update the numerical information of certain timer counters provided in the main RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0408.

In step Sr0408, a ball entry process for the start port is executed in response to the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. In the ball entry process for the start port, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are obtained based on the determination that the game ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and the obtained counter values are stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM 64. After executing step Sr0408, the process proceeds to step Sr0409.

In step Sr0409, ball entry processing for the through gate is executed as the game ball enters (passes through) the through gate 35. In the ball entry process for the through gate, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is acquired based on the fact that it is determined that the game ball has entered (passed) the through gate 35, and the acquired counter value is stored in the RAM 64. It is stored in the power reserve area 64d. After executing step Sr0409, the process advances to step Sr0410.

In step Sr0410, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. In the game round control process, a winning lottery is performed, and display control of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b is performed. After executing step Sr0410, the process proceeds to step Sr0411.

In step Sr0411, a gaming state transition process for shifting the gaming state is executed. In the gaming state transition process, processing for shifting the gaming state to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, etc. is executed. After executing step Sr0411, the process advances to step Sr0412.

In step Sr0412, an electric role support process is executed to control the electric role 34a. In the electric role support process, a determination is made as to whether or not the electric role 34a is to be opened (electric role opening lottery), and if it is determined that the electric role 34a is to be opened, the drive of the electric role 34a is controlled. After executing step Sr0412, the process proceeds to step Sr0413.

In step Sr0413, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball firing control process, a process for firing a game ball into the gaming area PA when the operation handle 25 is operated by the player is executed. After executing step Sr0413, the process advances to step Sr0414.

In step Sr0414, door monitoring processing is executed. In the door monitoring process, it is monitored whether the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in an open state. After executing step Sr0414, the process advances to step Sr0415.

In step Sr0415, fraud detection processing is executed. In the fraud detection process, shaking and magnetism are monitored, and when shaking or magnetism is detected, an alarm sound and voices such as ``We have detected shaking!'' and ``We have detected magnetism!'' are output from the speaker 46. At the same time, the various lamps 47 are made to blink at maximum brightness. In addition, in the fraud detection process, when shaking or magnetism is detected, the above-mentioned game stop flag is turned on. As a result, after the game stop flag is turned ON, execution of the processes from step Sr0404 to step Sr0417 is avoided. After executing step Sr0415, the process advances to step Sr0416.

In step Sr0416, a command output process is executed to output (send) the commands set as the transmission targets in the current timer interrupt process to each control device on the sub side. For example, if commands related to effects such as a variation command, a type command, or a hold command are set, these are sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. After executing step Sr0416, proceed to step Sr0417.

In step Sr0417, a game history process is executed to calculate and display game history information. The game history process is a process for calculating game history information such as the ratio of game devices and payout rate, and displaying the calculated game history information on the information display unit 45z. After executing step Sr0417, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

Next, we will explain the details of the power supply monitoring process shown in step Sr0402 of Figure 293.

Figure 294 is a flowchart showing the power supply monitoring process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr0501, it is determined whether the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is less than a predetermined value (e.g., 10 volts). If it is determined in step Sr0501 that the drive voltage is not less than the predetermined value (step Sr0501: NO), this power supply monitoring process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0501 that the drive voltage is less than the predetermined value (step Sr0501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0502, where it is determined whether the power switch 85a is in the OFF state.

If it is determined in step Sr0502 that the power switch 85a is in the OFF state (step Sr0502: YES), the process advances to step S0503, and the main side abnormal power cut flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sr0505, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0502 that the power switch 85a is not in the OFF state (step Sr0502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0504 and the main side abnormal power cut flag is turned on. After that, the process advances to step Sr0505.

In step Sr0505, a power outage generation command is sent to the audio emission control device 90. The power outage generation command is a command for notifying the audio light emission control device 90 that the drive voltage has become less than a predetermined value. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr0506.

In step Sr0506, various information (such as information indicating the game status and control information) stored in the registers of the main CPU 62x is saved to a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0507, where the information stored in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x is saved to a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0508, where the power recovery flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0509, where a RAM judgment value (e.g., a checksum value) is calculated by performing a predetermined calculation based on a predetermined group of information stored in the main RAM 64, and the calculated RAM judgment value is stored in the main RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0510, where RAM access is prohibited, and an infinite loop process is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and the device becomes inoperable.

The process from step Sr0505 to step Sr0510, which is executed when it is determined that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is less than the predetermined value, corresponds to the main power cutoff process described above.

[Starting ball entry process]
Next, the ball-scoring process for the starting hole will be described. The ball-scoring process for the starting hole is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for the timer interrupt process (FIG. 293: Sr0408).

FIG. 295 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the starting port executed by the main side MPU 62 (main side CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr0601, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. In step Sr0601, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sr0601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0602, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls. Set command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr0603.

In step Sr0603, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr0604.

In step Sr0604, the starting pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first starting pending number RaN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the first holding area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first starting pending number RaN indicates the pending number based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr0609.

If it is determined in step Sr0601 that the game ball has not entered the first starting hole 33 (Sr0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0605, where it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second starting hole 34 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting hole 34.

In step Sr0605, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sr0605: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0606, where the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. Set command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr0607. On the other hand, in step Sr0605, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (Sr0605: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

In step Sr0607, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0608.

In step Sr0608, the starting pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second starting pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the second holding area Rb, is read, and the second starting pending number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second starting pending number RbN indicates the pending number based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 34. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr0609.

In step Sr0609, it is determined whether the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sr0604 or step Sr0608 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step Sr0609, if the start pending number N is not less than the upper limit (Sr0609: NO), that is, if the start pending number N is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the ball entry process for this start port is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sr0609, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit (Sr0609: YES), proceed to step Sr0610, add 1 to the start pending number N in the corresponding pending area, and then proceed to step Sr0611, add 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN. Then proceed to step Sr0612.

In step Sr0612, each value of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is set to the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, the number of reservations obtained by adding 1 in step Sr0610. Store in the corresponding storage area. Specifically, when the first starting reservation number RaN is set as the processing target, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are set to the vacant number of the first reservation area Ra. It is stored in the first storage area among the storage areas, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start pending number RaN to which 1 was added in step Sr0610. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is set as a processing target, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are set in the empty storage area of the second pending area Rb. It is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start pending number RbN to which 1 was added in step Sr0610. After executing step Sr0612, the process advances to step Sr0613.

In step Sr0613, it is determined whether the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, since the setting information that can be set in the pachinko machine 10 has six levels from "1" to "6," it is determined whether the setting information is any of the numerical values "1," "2," "3," "4," "5," or "6." If it is determined in step Sr0613 that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step Sr0613: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0614.

In step Sr0614, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (pending information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. This is a process in which a determination is made as to the presence or absence of the pending information before it becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing step Sr0614, the process advances to step Sr0615.

In step Sr0615, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the destination determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as the pending command.

The hold command is a command to have the sub-side control device confirm the occurrence of a game ball entering the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34 and the result of the determination made by the advance determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the ball entry, before the hold information becomes the subject of a winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process described above (Figure 293: step Sr0416).

When the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a ball entering the first starting hole 33, it transmits a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. The display control device 100, which has received the command, changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. On the other hand, when the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a ball entering the second starting hole 34, it transmits a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. The display control device 100, which has received the command, changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls.

After executing step Sr0615, the main MPU 62 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0613 that the setting information is not within the predetermined range, for example, if it is determined that a value that cannot be set as setting information, such as "7" or "B", is stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 due to the influence of noise or the like (step Sr0613: NO), the advance determination process of step Sr0614 described above is not executed, and the process proceeds to step Sr0616, where an abnormal hold command is set. The abnormal hold command is a command that indicates that the setting information was not within the predetermined range at the time when the game ball entered the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34. The abnormal hold command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in the command output process described above (Figure 293: step Sr0416). After executing step Sr0616, the ball entry process for this start hole is terminated.

[First Determination Process]
Next, the first-goal determination process will be described. The first-goal determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for the starting-goal-goal process (FIG. 295: Sr0614).

FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. As described above, the preliminary determination process is based on the pending information, and determines whether the winning lottery is correct or not, determining the type of jackpot, determining whether or not a reach has occurred, etc., based on the pending information. This is a process that is executed before becoming a lottery target.

In step Sr0701, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the storage area is read out when the game ball enters the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 295). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sr0702, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entering before the current ball entering is read from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether there is a probability-variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entering. By determining this, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined.

In step Sr0702, if it is determined that the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is the low probability mode (Sr0702: YES), the process advances to step Sr0703 and corresponds to the setting information. Refer to the validity table for low probability mode. As described above, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has six types of low probability modes corresponding to each of the six lottery settings from "lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6". A win/fail table is provided, and the main MPU 62 refers to the low probability mode win/fail table corresponding to the setting information indicating lottery settings. Specifically, for example, if the value of the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is "1", the winning/failure table for low probability mode corresponding to lottery setting 1 is referred to. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sr0705, and as a result of referring to the low probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether or not the information of the value of the win random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot. Note that an example of the success/failure table for the six types of low probability modes has already been described in aspect 57, so the description will be omitted here.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0702 that the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to this ball entry is executed as a game round is not the low probability mode (Sr0702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0704, where the winning/losing table for the high probability mode is referenced. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0705, where it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot as a result of referring to the winning/losing table for the high probability mode. Note that in this embodiment, a single winning/losing table for the high probability mode is referenced regardless of the lottery setting, but it is also possible to prepare a number of winning/losing tables for the high probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting, as with the winning/losing table for the low probability mode, and reference the winning/losing table for the high probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting.

In step Sr0705, if it is determined that the value of the winning random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot (Sr0705: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0706, where the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the memory area due to the ball entering the start hole this time is read. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0707, where the allocation table stored in the allocation table memory area 63b is referenced. Specifically, if the jackpot type counter C2 that is the subject of this allocation was obtained based on the ball entering the first start hole 33, the allocation table for the first start hole is referenced, and if it was obtained based on the ball entering the second start hole 34, the allocation table for the second start hole is referenced. After executing step Sr0707, the process proceeds to step Sr0708.

In step Sr0708, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to a variable probability jackpot. In step Sr0708, if it is determined that it corresponds to a variable probability jackpot (Sr0708: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0709, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, in step Sr0708, if it is determined that the probability variable jackpot is not supported (Sr0708: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0710, and normal jackpot information is stored in the previous judgment processing result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends.

In step Sr0705, if it is determined that the value of the hit random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to a jackpot (Sr0705: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0711, and the value is stored in the memory area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. Read the stored value of the reach random number counter C3. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sr0712, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sr0713, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

If it is determined in step Sr0713 that a reach is occurring (Sr0713: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0714, where the reach occurrence information is stored in the first-stage determination process result storage area 64f. The first-stage determination process then ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0713 that a reach is not occurring (Sr0713: NO), the first-stage determination process ends.

[Through gate entry processing]
Next, the ball entry process for the through gate will be described. The ball entry process for the through gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for the timer interrupt process (FIG. 293: Sr0409).

Figure 297 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the through gate executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr0801, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35. If it is determined in step Sr0801 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sr0801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0802, where it is determined whether or not the number of reserved role objects SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). The number of reserved role objects SN is a value indicating the number of balls that have entered the through gate 35 that are reserved for the purpose of performing the electric role object opening lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved role objects SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0801 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sr0801: NO), the ball entry process for the through is terminated.

In step Sr0802, if it is determined that the number SN of accessory items on hold is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) (Sr0802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0803, and 1 is added to the number SN of accessory items on hold. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr0804.

In step Sr0804, the value of the electric role release counter C4 updated in step Sr0401 (Fig. 293) is stored in the first free memory area in the electric role reserve area 64c of RAM 64. After that, the ball entry process for the through gate is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0802 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is not less than the upper limit (Sr0802: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the ball entry process for the through reels is terminated without storing the value of the electric reels opening counter C4.

[Game Time Control Processing]
Next, the game play control process will be described. The game play control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 293: step Sr0410).

Figure 298 is a flowchart showing the game round control process executed by the master MPU 62 (master CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr0901, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. As described below, the open/close execution mode flag is turned ON when the pattern change ends in the game round in which a jackpot has been won and the game moves to the open/close execution mode, and is turned OFF when the open/close execution mode ends.

If it is determined in step Sr0901 that the opening and closing execution mode flag is ON (Sr0901: YES), it is determined that the opening and closing execution mode is in progress, and this game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes in step Sr0902 and thereafter. In other words, if it is in the opening and closing execution mode, a game round will not be started regardless of whether a game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0901 that the opening and closing execution mode is not in progress (Sr0901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0902.

In step Sr0902, it is determined whether the main display unit 45 is displaying a change. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b is displaying a change. This determination is made by determining whether the change display in progress flag in the various flags storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The change display in progress flag is turned ON when a change display is to be started for either the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b, and is turned OFF when the change display is to end.

If it is determined in step Sr0902 that the main display unit 45 is not displaying a variable (Sr0902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0903 to step Sr0905 for starting a game round. In step Sr0903, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is "0". If the total reserved number CRN is "0", this means that the start reserved number is "0" for both the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. Therefore, if it is determined in step Sr0903 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" (Sr0903: YES), this game round control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0903 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (Sr0903: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0904.

In step Sr0904, a reserved information shift process is executed to set the data stored in the first reserved area Ra or the second reserved area Rb to the state after the fluctuation started, and the process proceeds to step Sr0905. The reserved information shift process will be described in detail later.

In step Sr0905, a change start process is executed to start the change display in the main display unit 45 and the change display in the pattern display device 41. The change start process will be described in detail later. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0906.

In step Sr0906, the value of the play count counter PNC is decremented by 1. The play count counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of plays executed in the high frequency support mode. After executing step Sr0906, this play count control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0902 that the main display unit 45 is displaying a variable image (Sr0902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0907.

In step Sr0907, it is determined whether the variable time of the current game round has elapsed. As mentioned above, the fluctuation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to fluctuate until all the symbol rows stop, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sr0907, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64d) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variation time information is set in a variation time setting process (FIG. 302) described later. The value of this set variable time information is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

In step Sr0907, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sr0907: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0908, and the fluctuation display processing is executed. The variable display process is a process for changing the display mode on the result display section for the current game round. After executing step Sr0908, the present game round control process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sr0907 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (Sr0907: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0909, where the fluctuation end process is executed. In the fluctuation end process, the stopped symbols determined in the win determination process (FIG. 301) described below are displayed as stopped symbols on the main display unit 45 as the result of the current game round. After executing step Sr0909, the process proceeds to step Sr0910.

In step Sr0910, it is determined whether any jackpot flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The jackpot flag is a flag that is turned ON when a jackpot is won in the hit determination process (FIG. 301) described later. In step Sr0910, if it is determined that any jackpot flag is ON (Sr0910: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0911 and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the main game round control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0910 that none of the jackpot flags is ON (Sr0910: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0912.

In step Sr0912, it is determined whether the total number of reservations CRN is "0". In step Sr0912, if it is determined that the total pending number CRN is "0" (Sr0912: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0913 and a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is used to make the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, recognize that no pending information is stored in the pending information storage area 64b at the time when the symbol variation (gaming round) ends. This is a command that includes information about. The customer waiting command set in step Sr0913 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). On the other hand, in step Sr0912, if it is determined that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (Sr0912: NO), this game round control process is ended.

[Pending information shift processing]
Next, pending information shift processing will be explained. The pending information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 298: Sr0904) of the game time control process.

FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing pending information shift processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1001, it is determined whether the holding area that is the processing target for executing the holding information shift process is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, the reservation information stored earliest among the reservation information stored in chronological order in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 282) (the reservation stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra) information) is the earliest stored reservation information (stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb) among the reservation information chronologically stored in the second reservation area Rb (FIG. 282). If it is stored in the reservation area before the reservation information (reservation information), it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, among the reservation information stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 282), the earliest stored reservation information is stored in the second reservation area Rb (FIG. 282) in chronological order. If the earliest stored reservation information among the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sr1001, the reservation information can be processed in the order in which it is stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

If it is determined in step Sr1001 that the reserved area to be processed is the first reserved area Ra (step Sr1001: YES), the reserved information shift process for the first reserved area is executed in steps Sr1002 to Sr1007. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1001 that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (step Sr1001: NO), the reserved information shift process for the second reserved area is executed in steps Sr1008 to Sr1013.

In step Sr1002, the first start reserved number RaN in the first reserved area Ra is subtracted by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sr1003, where the total reserved number CRN is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1004. In step Sr1004, the data stored in the first area of the first reserved area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1005.

In step Sr1005, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the first reserved area Ra. This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas in order toward the lower areas. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, the fourth area to the third area, and so on. After executing step Sr1005, proceed to step Sr1006.

In step Sr1006, if the second pattern display section flag in the various flags storage area 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second pattern display section flag is information for identifying whether the current variable display is to start from the first pattern display section 37a or the second pattern display section 37b. Then, proceed to step Sr1007.

In step Sr1007, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, it corresponds to the first starting port 33. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, the pending information shift process ends.

The shift command set in step Sr1007 is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process described above (Fig. 293: step Sr0416). Based on the received shift command, the audio and light emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first pending display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the reduction in the number of pending items. The display control device 100, which receives the command, changes the display in the first pending display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the reduction in the number of pending items.

In step Sr1001, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step Sr1001: NO), The process advances to step Sr1008.

In step Sr1008, the second start pending number RbN in the second pending area Rb is decremented by 1. Then, proceed to step Sr1009. In step Sr1009, the total pending number CRN is decremented by 1, and proceed to step Sr1010, where the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, proceed to step Sr1011.

In step Sr1011, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the second reserved area Rb. This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas sequentially to the lower areas. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, the fourth area to the third area, and so on. After executing step Sr1011, proceed to step Sr1012.

In step Sr1012, if the second symbol display section flag in the various flag storage area 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr1013.

In step Sr1013, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, it corresponds to the second starting port 34. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, this pending information shift process ends.

The shift command set in step Sr1013 is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process described above (Fig. 293: step Sr0416). Based on the received shift command, the audio and light emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the reduction in the number of reserved items. Having received this command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the reduction in the number of reserved items.

[Variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 298: Sr0905) of the game time control process.

FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing a variation start process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1101, it is determined whether the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is a numerical value within a predetermined range. If it is determined that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range (step Sr1101: YES), the process advances to step Sr1102.

In step Sr1102, a hit determination process is executed. In the hit determination process, it is determined whether or not a big hit has been won based on the value of the hit random number counter C1 that has been shifted to the execution area AE in the pending information shift process. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sr1102, proceed to step Sr1103.

In step Sr1103, a process for setting the variable time is executed. In the process for setting the variable time, a variable time is set, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, based on whether or not a jackpot has been hit or whether or not a reach has occurred. The details of the process for setting the variable time will be described later. After executing step Sr1103, the process proceeds to step Sr1104.

In step Sr1104, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sr1104, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is not ON (Sr1104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1105 and a first variation command is set. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to pending information acquired based on winnings in the first start opening 33, and whether or not a reach has occurred. information and information on the fluctuation time set in step Sr1103 are included. On the other hand, in step Sr1104, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sr1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1106, and a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to pending information acquired based on winnings in the second start opening 34, and whether or not a reach has occurred. information and information on the fluctuation time set in step Sr1103 are included. After executing step Sr1105 or step Sr1106, the process advances to step Sr1107.

In step Sr1107, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and the result of the distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot, such as 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or information on a losing result.

The variation command and type command set in steps Sr1105 to Sr1107 are sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in the command output process described above (Fig. 293: step Sr0416). The sound and light emission control device 90 determines the content of the presentation for that game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the presentation is executed. After executing step Sr1107, proceed to step Sr1108.

In step Sr1108, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b starts displaying a variable symbol. Specifically, when the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is not ON, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first symbol display section 37a, and variable display is started. When the second symbol display section flag is ON, the symbol display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second symbol display section 37b, and variable display is started. After executing step Sr1108, this variation start process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1101 that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is not within the predetermined range, the process proceeds to step Sr1109, where a game stop command is sent to the payout control device 70 and the sound and light emission control device 90, which are the sub-side control devices. The game stop command is a command for making the payout control device 70 and the sound and light emission control device 90, which are the sub-side control devices, recognize that the game progress is to be stopped. After executing step Sr1109, the process proceeds to step Sr1110, where the game stop flag is turned ON. As a result, when the next timer interrupt process (Figure 293) is executed, the process group for progressing the game (the process group of steps Sr0404 to Sr0416 in Figure 293) and the game history process (step Sr0417 in Figure 293) are avoided, and the game progress is stopped. After executing step Sr1110, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Collision detection process]
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 300: Sr1102).

Figure 301 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process executed by the master MPU 62 (master CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1201, it is determined whether the hit/lose selection mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether the hit/lose selection mode is the high probability mode or not, and in this embodiment, it is turned ON when the open/close execution mode related to the winning of a special jackpot ends, and is then turned OFF when a jackpot is won and the open/close execution mode begins. In step Sr1201, if it is determined to be the high probability mode (Sr1201: YES), proceed to step Sr1202.

In step Sr1202, a win/loss determination is made by referring to the win/loss table for the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the win random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/loss table for the high probability mode. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1204. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1201 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Sr1201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1203.

In step Sr1203, a validity determination is made with reference to the low probability mode validity table corresponding to the setting information. Specifically, for example, if the value of the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main side RAM 64 is "1", the low probability mode win/fail table corresponding to lottery setting 1 is referred to. Make a judgment on validity. In the win/fail determination, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the low probability mode win/fail table corresponding to the setting information. do. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr1204.

In step Sr1204, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in step Sr1202 or step Sr1203 is a jackpot win. In step Sr1204, if the result of the judgment is a jackpot win (Sr1204: YES), in steps Sr1205 to Sr1212, processing for setting the game result in the case of a jackpot win and setting a stop result Execute the process.

In step Sr1205, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sr1205 that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Sr1205: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1206, where an allocation determination is made by referring to the allocation table for the first starting hole (see FIG. 284(a)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of a 16R special jackpot, the numerical range of an 8R special jackpot, the numerical range of a 16R normal jackpot, or the numerical range of an 8R normal jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1205 that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sr1205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1207, and the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 284(b)) Make a distribution decision by referring to the . Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is in the numerical range of 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, or the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. Determine whether it is included in After executing the process of step Sr1206 or step Sr1207. The process advances to step Sr1208.

In step Sr1208, it is determined whether the type of jackpot distributed in step Sr1206 or step Sr1207 is a variable probability jackpot. In step Sr1208, if it is determined that the game result is a variable jackpot (Sr1208: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1209.

In step Sr1209, a stop result setting process for a probability variable jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for a variable probability jackpot means that in the current game round in which a probability variable jackpot will be won, either stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for probability-variable jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sr1206 or step Sr1207 is obtained. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sr1209, the process advances to step Sr1210.

In step Sr1210, a flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sr1206 or step Sr1207 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variation flag is turned ON, and if it is an 8R probability variation jackpot, the 8R probability variation flag is turned ON. After that, the hit determination process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1208 that the type of jackpot distributed in step Sr1206 or step Sr1207 is not a probability variable jackpot (Sr1208: NO), that is, if the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, step Proceed to Sr1211.

In step Sr1211, a stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is a process for setting which stop result is displayed in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b at the end of the variable display in the current game round in which a normal jackpot is won. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for a normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot allocated in step Sr1206 or step Sr1207 is obtained, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step Sr1211, proceed to step Sr1212.

In step Sr1212, a flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot assigned in step Sr1206 or step Sr1207 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R normal jackpot, the 16R normal flag is turned ON, and if it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal flag is turned ON. After that, the main jackpot determination process ends.

In step Sr1204, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sr1202 or step Sr1203 is not a jackpot (Sr1204: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1213 and executes a stop result setting process in case of a loss. The stop result setting process for a miss is to end the variable display with either the stop result displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the current game round where the result is a miss. This is the process to set the Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for failure in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sr1213, the hit determination process ends.

[Variable time setting process]
Next, the process of setting the variable time will be explained. The fluctuation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 300: Sr1103).

FIG. 302 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1301, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr1302.

In step Sr1302, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery for the current game round is a winning lottery. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag in RAM 64 is ON, and if either flag is ON (Sr1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1303.

In step Sr1303, the variable time table for jackpot stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the game round in which a winning lottery is won is constant. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr1304, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Sr1302 that the winning lottery for the current game round is not a winning lottery (Sr1302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1305 to determine whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. Since this process (Sr1305) is executed if the winning lottery for the current game round is not a winning lottery in step Sr1302, in step Sr1305, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur among the game rounds in which the winning lottery has not been won. Specifically, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach will occur (Sr1305: YES) and the process proceeds to step Sr1306. Note that when determining whether or not a reach will occur using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of ROM 63 is referenced.

In step Sr1306, the variable time table for reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time for generating a reach is constant. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr1304, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Sr1305 that no reach will occur in the current game round (Sr1305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1307, where the non-reach-occurrence fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d is referenced to obtain the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1304, where the obtained fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas of RAM 64. Then, the process of setting the fluctuation time is terminated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time information stored in the non-reach variable time table is set so that the greater the total reserved number CRN, the shorter the variable time. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration may be independent of the total reserved number CRN, and the variable time may be set so that the smaller the total reserved number CRN, the shorter the variable time. Also, when the second start reserved number RbN is "0", the greater the number of the first start reserved number RaN, the shorter the variable time may be, and when the second start reserved number RbN is "1" or greater, the greater the number of the second start reserved number RbN, the shorter the variable time may be. Also, when the second start-up pending number RbN is "0", the larger the number of first start-up pending numbers RaN, the longer the fluctuation time becomes, and when the second start-up pending number RbN is "1" or more, the larger the number of second start-up pending numbers RbN, the longer the fluctuation time becomes, or it may be set to be constant regardless of each pending number RaN, RbN.

The non-reach variable time table may be set so that a shorter variable time is selected in a situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode than in a situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode, when comparing the same number of pending information items. However, this is not limited to this, and the selected variable time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time when a reach occurs, and the fluctuation time that is likely to be selected and the fluctuation time that is difficult to be selected may be different when winning a jackpot and when winning a reach. good. Further, a variable time table for a variable probability jackpot, a variable time table for a normal jackpot, a variable time table for a missed reach, and a variable time table for a complete miss may each be set individually.

[Game state transition process]
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 293: Sr0411).

FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing the gaming state transition process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1401, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the start of the ending period and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sr1401 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sr1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1402, and it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening/closing processing period, and turned OFF at the end of the opening/closing processing period.

If it is determined in step Sr1402 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sr1402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1403, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period. The opening period is a period for performing the opening performance in the opening/closing execution mode.

In step Sr1403, if it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (Sr1403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1404, and the timing at which the fluctuating display of symbols in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b ends Determine whether or not. In step Sr1404, if it is determined that the timing is not the end of the variable display (Sr1404: NO), the main gaming state transition process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sr1404 that the variable display has ended (Sr1404: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1405, where it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for the current game round corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode flag in RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined that the open/close execution mode flag is not ON (Sr1405: NO), this game state transition process is terminated.

In step Sr1405, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (Sr1405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1406, and the high probability mode flag and the high frequency Among the support mode flags, turn off the flags that are set to ON. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr1407. Note that in step Sr1406, if both the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag are OFF, the process directly advances to step Sr1407.

In step Sr1407, opening time setting processing is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. In this embodiment, "1500" (ie, 6 seconds) is set in the third timer counter area T3. Note that the third timer counter area T3 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After executing step Sr1407, the process advances to step Sr1408.

In step Sr1408, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 293: Step Sr0416). Based on receiving the opening command, the audio emission control device 90 sets the opening effect and the right-hit notification effect to be executed, and starts controlling various devices so that these effects are sequentially executed. After executing step Sr1408, the process advances to step Sr1409 and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sr1403, if it is determined that the opening period flag is ON (Sr1403: YES), the process advances to step Sr1410.

In step Sr1410, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sr1410 that the opening period has ended (Sr1410: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1411, where the opening period flag is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1412.

In step Sr1412, a process for starting a round display is executed to notify the type of the current open/close execution mode. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is identified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the identified stop result data. The confirmed content of the number of rounds is then output to the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round information related to the above output is displayed in the round display section 39. After executing step Sr1412, the process proceeds to step Sr1413.

In step Sr1413, the number of rounds for the current opening/closing execution mode is set. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R sure win flag, 8R sure win flag, 16R normal flag, 8R normal flag) stored in RAM 64 are checked, and the number of rounds corresponding to the flag is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64f of RAM 64. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. After executing step 13913, proceed to step Sr1414.

In step Sr1414, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned on. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sr1415, where an opening start command is set. The set opening start command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 293: Step Sr0416). This opening start command includes information on the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. Based on the received opening start command, the audio emission control device 90 sets to execute a round effect with content corresponding to the number of rounds, and controls various devices so that the round effect with the set content is executed. Start. After executing step Sr1415, the main gaming state transition process is ended.

In step Sr1402, if it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sr1402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1416, and the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. Specifically, when the grand prize opening 36a is closed, the variable prize driving section 36c is brought into the driving state on the condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more, thereby winning the grand prize. The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the grand prize opening 36a is open, on the condition that the opening limit time has elapsed since the opening of the grand prize opening 36a, or the opening limit number of game balls has entered, The driving state of the variable winning drive unit 36c is stopped, and the big winning opening 36a is closed. Details of the opening/closing process of the grand prize opening will be described later. After executing step Sr1416, the process advances to step Sr1417.

In step Sr1417, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (Sr1417: NO), the main game state transition process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (Sr1417: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1418 and the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sr1418, the process advances to step Sr1419.

In step Sr1419, processing to end the round display is executed. In this processing, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step Sr1419, the process proceeds to step Sr1420.

In step Sr1420, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. In this embodiment, "1500" (ie, 6 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. Note that the fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After executing step Sr1420, the process advances to step Sr1421.

In step Sr1421, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 293: Step Sr0416). Based on receiving the ending command, the audio emission control device 90 sets the ending effect to be executed, and starts controlling various devices so that the ending effect is executed. After executing step Sr1421, the process advances to step Sr1422.

In step Sr1422, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, this game state transition process ends.

In step Sr1401, if it is determined that the ending period flag is ON (Sr1401: YES), the process advances to step Sr1423.

In step Sr1423, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sr1420), it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". In step Sr1423, if it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sr1423: NO), the main game state transition process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1423 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sr1423: YES), the process advances to step Sr1424.

In step Sr1424, the ending period flag is set to OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1425, where the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game round after the current ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sr1425, the process proceeds to step Sr1426, where the open/close execution mode flag is set to OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1427.

In step Sr1427, it is determined whether the total number of reservations CRN is "0". If it is determined in step Sr1427 that the total number of reservations CRN is "0" (Sr1427: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1428 and a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command includes information for making the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, recognize that no pending information is stored in the pending information storage area 64b at the time when the opening/closing execution mode ends. It is a command. The customer waiting command set in step Sr1428 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the above-described command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). On the other hand, in step Sr1427, if it is determined that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (Sr1427: NO), the main gaming state transition process is ended.

[Big prize opening and closing process]
Next, the special prize opening opening/closing process will be described. The special prize opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 302: Sr1416).

FIG. 304 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process executed by the main side MPU 62 (main side CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1501, it is determined whether or not the big prize opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable prize winning driving section 36c. In step Sr1501, if it is determined that the big prize opening 36a is not open (Sr1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1502, and it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step Sr1502, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (Sr1502: YES), the main prize opening opening/closing process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1502 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (Sr1502: NO), the process advances to step Sr1503.

In step Sr1503, it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the big prize opening 36a. In step Sr1503, if it is determined that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (Sr1503: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is directly ended. On the other hand, in step Sr1503, if it is determined that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (Sr1503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1504, where the variable winning drive unit is used to open the big winning opening 36a. 36c is in a driving state. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr1505.

In step Sr1505, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, all of the set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, so "7500" (that is, 30 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Furthermore, in order to count the number of winnings of game balls into the big winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer update process (step Sr0407) of the timer interrupt process is executed, that is, every 4 msec. After executing step Sr1505, the process advances to step Sr1506.

In step Sr1506, an opening command is set. After that, this large prize opening opening process is terminated. The opening command is a command containing information for the sub-side control devices, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 and the display control device 100, to recognize that the opening of the large prize opening 36a has started, and is transmitted to the audio and light-emitting control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416) described above. Based on the received opening command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 determines that the opening of the large prize opening 36a for one round has started, and updates the performance content in the various lamps 47 and speakers 46 to content corresponding to the start of the opening of the large prize opening 36a. In addition, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 transmits the above opening command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 determines that the opening of the large prize opening 36a for one round has started, and updates the performance content in the pattern display device 41 to content corresponding to the start of the opening of the large prize opening 36a.

In step Sr1501, if it is determined that the big prize opening 36a is open (step Sr1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1507, and it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" or not. do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the big prize opening 36a. If it is determined in step Sr1507 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (Sr1507: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1508.

In step Sr1508, it is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36 whether or not a game ball has entered the big winning hole 36a. In step Sr1508, if it is determined that no ball has entered (Sr1508: NO), the main prize opening opening/closing process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1508 that a ball has entered (Sr1508: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1509, and the value of the winning counter area PC is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr1510.

In step Sr1510, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". In step Sr1510, if it is determined that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (Sr1510: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is directly ended.

If it is determined in step Sr1507 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (Sr1507: YES), or if it is determined that the value of the prize winning counter area PC is "0" in step Sr1510 (Sr1510: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1511 and executes the big winning opening closing process. Specifically, in order to close the big winning a prize opening 36a, the variable winning a prize driving section 36c is brought into a non-driving state. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr1512.

In step Sr1512, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sr1513, and it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step Sr1513, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (Sr1513: YES), the main prize opening opening/closing process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1513 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (Sr1513: NO), the process advances to step Sr1514, and "500" (that is, 2 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Set. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the big prize opening 36a. After executing step Sr1514, the process advances to step Sr1515 and a closing command is set. After that, the big winning opening opening/closing process ends.

This set close command is a command containing information for the sub-controllers, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 and the display control device 100, to recognize that the opening of the large prize opening 36a has been completed, and is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416) described above. Based on the received close command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 determines that the opening of the large prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and updates the presentation content in the various lamps 47 and speakers 46 to content corresponding to the completion of the opening of the large prize opening 36a. In addition, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 sends the above-mentioned close command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. Based on the received close command, the display control device 100 determines that the opening of the large prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and updates the presentation content in the pattern display device 41 to content corresponding to the completion of the opening of the large prize opening 36a.

[Transition process at the end of the ending period]
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 303: Sr1425).

Figure 305 is a flowchart showing the transition process at the end of the ending period executed by the master MPU 62 (master CPU 62x) in the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1601, it is determined whether the flag corresponding to the guaranteed jackpot as the jackpot type flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether the 16R guaranteed jackpot flag or the 8R guaranteed jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sr1601, if it is determined that the 16R variable probability flag or the 8R variable probability flag in the RAM 64 is ON (Sr1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1602, and flag deletion processing is executed. Specifically, if the 16R definite variable flag, 8R definite variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and if they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After executing step Sr1602, the process advances to step Sr1603.

In step Sr1603, the high probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step Sr1604, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after the open/close execution mode ends, the game transitions to a gaming state in which the win/lose selection mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Note that these high probability mode and high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot win occurs. Then the process proceeds to step Sr1605.

In step Sr1605, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the winning lottery mode is a high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. do. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr1610, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1601 that the 16R normal flag or 8R normal flag in the RAM 64 is ON (Sr1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1606 and executes flag erasure processing. Specifically, if the 16R definite variable flag, 8R definite variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and if they are not ON, the state is maintained. . Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr1607.

In step Sr1607, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step Sr1608, where the number of plays counter PNC provided in the various counter area 64d of RAM 64 is set to 100. The value set in the number of plays counter PNC is a value indicating the number of plays when the high frequency support mode is executed with a limited number of plays. The process then proceeds to step Sr1609.

In step Sr1609, a low probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the win/lose lottery mode is a low probability mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, proceed to step Sr1610.

In step Sr1610, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is sent as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Set. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

[Electricity support processing]
Next, the electric support process will be described. The electric support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 293: Sr0412).

Figure 306 is a flowchart showing the electric support process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1701, it is determined whether or not support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support in progress flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support in progress flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric device 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened and is turned OFF when the electric device 34a is returned to the closed state. In step Sr1701, if it is determined that the support in progress flag is not ON (Sr1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1702.

In step Sr1702, it is determined whether the support win flag in the various flag storage area 64e of RAM 64 is ON. The support win flag is a flag that is turned ON when an open state win is obtained in the electric role opening lottery to determine whether or not the electric role 34a is opened, and is turned OFF when the support in progress flag is ON. In step Sr1702, if it is determined that the support win flag is not ON (Sr1702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1703.

In step Sr1703, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer update process (step Sr0407) of the timer interrupt process is executed, that is, every 4 msec.

In step Sr1703, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sr1703: NO), the present electronic role support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sr1703: YES), the process advances to step Sr1704.

In step Sr1704, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuating display of symbols in the common symbol unit 38. In step Sr1704, if it is determined that it is the timing to end the variable display (Sr1704: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1705, and after setting the out-of-line display, the main electric role support process is ended. By setting the missing display, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the regular pattern unit 38 is ended with the missing display being stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1704 that it is not the timing to end the variable display (Sr1704: NO), the process advances to step Sr1706.

In step Sr1706, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0". In step Sr1706, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is "0" (Sr1706: NO), the main electronic role support process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sr1706, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0" (Sr1706: YES), the process advances to step Sr1707.

In step Sr1707, it is determined whether the game is in the open/close execution mode, and then the process proceeds to step Sr1708 to determine whether the game is in the high-frequency support mode. If the game is not in the open/close execution mode in step Sr1707 (Sr1707: NO) and the game is in the high-frequency support mode in step Sr1708 (Sr1708: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1709 to hold a lottery for opening the electric role. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role reserve area 64c is shifted, and if the value of the electric role opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is between 0 and 461, the electric role opening lottery is won. In addition, at the same time as the electric role opening lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "375" (i.e., 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1710.

In step Sr1710, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric role opening lottery in step Sr1709 is a support win. If it is determined in step Sr1710 that the result of the electric role opening lottery is a support win (Sr1710: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1711, where the support win flag is turned ON and the second round counter area RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is set to "3". The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric role 34a has been opened. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1712. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1710 that the result of the electric role opening lottery is not a support win (Sr1710: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1712 without executing the process of step Sr1711.

In step Sr1712, it is determined whether the winning/losing selection mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step Sr1712 that the winning/losing selection mode is the low probability mode (Sr1712: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1713. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1712 that the winning/losing selection mode is not the low probability mode (Sr1712: NO), the main power role support process is terminated.

In step Sr1713, it is determined whether the play count counter area is "0". When the low probability mode is in high frequency support mode, the play count counter is decremented by 1 each time a play is completed. In step Sr1713, if it is determined that the play count counter area is not "0" (Sr1713: NO), the main electric role support processing ends. On the other hand, in step Sr1713, if it is determined that the play count counter area is "0" (Sr1713: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1714, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sr1715.

In step Sr1715, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, the electric support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support mode command set in step Sr1715 is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process described above (Figure 293: step Sr0416). Based on receiving the low-frequency support mode command, the audio and light emission control device 90 determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and executes the corresponding process.

If it is determined in step Sr1707 that it is the opening/closing execution mode (Sr1707: YES), or if it is determined that it is not the high-frequency support mode in step Sr1718 (Sr1708: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1716, and the electric accessory opening lottery I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 or 1, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Furthermore, "7375" (ie, 29.5 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr1717.

In step Sr1717, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sr1716 is a support win. In step Sr1717, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sr1717: NO), the main electric role support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1717 that the support has been won (Sr1717: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1718, where the support win flag is turned on, and after setting "1" in the second round counter area RC2, , ends this electronic support process.

If it is determined in step Sr1702 that the support winning flag is ON (Sr1702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1719, where it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal picture unit 38. If it is determined in step Sr1719 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sr1719: NO), the image fluctuation display in the normal picture unit 38 is in progress, so the main electric role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1719 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sr1719: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1720.

In step Sr1720, a winning display is set. This ends the display of the changing patterns in the normal unit 38 with the winning display stopped. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1721, where the support in progress flag is turned ON and the support winning flag is turned OFF. Then, the main electric role support process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sr1701 that the support flag is ON (Sr1701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1722, where an electric role opening/closing control process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 34a. After that, the electric role support process is terminated.

[Electric opening/closing control processing]
Next, the power opening/closing control process will be explained. The power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine for power support processing (FIG. 306: Sr1722).

FIG. 307 is a flowchart showing the electric power opening/closing control process executed by the main side MPU 62 (main side CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1801, it is determined whether the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive section 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Sr1801: YES), the process advances to step Sr1802.

In step Sr1802, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. In step Sr1802, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sr1802: NO), this electric power opening/closing control process is directly ended. That is, if the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

If it is determined in step Sr1802 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sr1802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1803, where a closing process is performed to control the electric role 34a to a closed state, and the second timer counter area T2 is set to "250" (i.e., 0.5 sec). In other words, if the second timer counter area T2, which serves as a means for measuring the open duration of the electric role 34a, is "0", the electric role 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is now used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration of the electric role 34a, and "250" is set to the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sr1803, the process proceeds to step Sr1804.

In step Sr1804, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is subtracted by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sr1805, where it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step Sr1805 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sr1805: NO), the main electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1805 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sr1805: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1806, where the support in progress flag is turned OFF. Then, the main electric role opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step Sr1801, if it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sr1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1807, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. In step Sr1807, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sr1807: NO), the main power opening/closing control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sr1807: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1808, and an opening process is executed to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state. . Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr1809.

In step Sr1809, it is determined whether or not the device is in the opening/closing execution mode. If it is determined that the device is not in the opening/closing execution mode (Sr1809: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1810, where it is determined whether or not the device is in the high frequency support mode.

If it is determined in step Sr1810 that the high-frequency support mode is in effect (Sr1810: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1811, where "400" (ie, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in step Sr1809 (Sr1809: YES), or if it is determined that it is not the high frequency support mode in step Sr1810 (Sr1810: NO), the process advances to step Sr1812, and the second Set "50" (ie, 0.2 sec) in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

<<7-6>> Various processes executed in the audio/light emission control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio and light emission control device will be described.

<Various processes executed in the audio emission control device>
First, the main processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be explained.

Figure 308 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the audio/optical side MPU 92 (audio/optical side CPU 92x) in the seventh embodiment. In step Sr4101, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initial setting processing associated with power-on and a determination of whether the audio/optical side RAM 94 is functioning normally are executed. After executing step Sr4101, the process proceeds to step Sr4102.

In step Sr4102, startup date and time information storage processing is executed. The startup date and time information storage process is a process that reads startup date and time information from the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 and stores it in the startup date and time information storage area 94b of the main side RAM 64. Details of the startup date and time information storage process will be described later. After executing step Sr4102, the process advances to step Sr4103.

In step Sr4103, a power interruption type determination process is executed. The power interruption type determination process is a process for determining the type of the previous power interruption of the main control unit 60 based on the power interruption type command received from the main MPU 62 of the main control unit 60. As described above, the type of power interruption means the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption. The power interruption type determination process will be described in detail later. After executing step Sr4103, proceed to step Sr4104.

In step Sr4104, the start-up type determination process is executed. The start-up type determination process is a process for determining the start-up type of the main control unit 60 based on the start-up type command received from the main MPU 62 of the main control unit 60. Details of the start-up type determination process will be described later. After executing step Sr4104, the process proceeds to step Sr4105.

In step Sr4105, the sound/light side abnormal power interruption flag response process is executed. The sound/light side abnormal power interruption flag response process is a process for setting the above-mentioned RTC effects and fixed suggestion effects to either an executable state or an executable state. The sound/light side abnormal power interruption flag response process will be described in detail later. After executing step Sr4105, proceed to step Sr4106.

In step Sr4106, timer interrupt permission is set. This permits execution of timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. Then it goes into an infinite loop.

Next, we will explain the details of the startup date and time information storage process shown in step Sr4102 of Figure 308.

FIG. 309 is a flowchart showing startup date and time information storage processing executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92 (audio-optical side CPU 92x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr4201, the current date and time information is read from the time register 97b1 of the RTC 97, and the read current date and time information is written (stored) in the startup date and time information storage area 94b of the audio-optical RAM 94. Thereafter, the main startup date and time information storage process ends.

Next, we will explain the details of the power interruption type determination process shown in step Sr4103 of Figure 308.

Figure 310 is a flowchart showing the power interruption type determination process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 (sound/light side CPU 92x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr4301, it is determined whether or not a power interruption type command has been received from the main side MPU 62. Specifically, in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not any of the two commands, the normal power interruption command and the abnormal power interruption command, described above, has been received from the main side MPU 62. In step Sr4301, if it is determined that any of the two commands described above has been received (step Sr4301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4302. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the two commands described above has been received (step Sr4301: NO) in step Sr4301, the process returns to step Sr4301 again. In other words, the process waits until it is determined that any of the two commands described above has been received, and if it is determined that any of the two commands described above has been received, the process proceeds to step Sr4302.

In step Sr4302, it is determined whether the command received as the power interruption type command from the main MPU 62 is an abnormal power interruption command. In step Sr4302, if it is determined that the command received as the power interruption type command from the main side MPU 62 is an abnormal power interruption command (step Sr4302: YES), the process advances to step Sr4303, where the command is stored in the sound-light side RAM 94. Turn on the sound-light side abnormal power outage flag. After that, the main power outage type determination process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4302 that the command received as the power interruption type command from the main side MPU 62 is not an abnormal power interruption command (step Sr4302: YES), that is, the command received as the power interruption type command from the main side MPU 62 If is a normal power interruption command, the process proceeds to step Sr4304, and the audio/optical side abnormal power interruption flag stored in the audio/optical side RAM 94 is turned OFF. After that, the main power outage type determination process ends.

In this way, in this embodiment, since the power interruption type determination process is executed, the sound emission control device 90 can also grasp the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption.

Next, we will explain the details of the startup type determination process shown in step Sr4104 of Figure 308.

Figure 311 is a flowchart showing the start type determination process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 (sound/light side CPU 92x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr4401, it is determined whether or not a start type command has been received from the main side MPU 62. Specifically, in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not any of the five commands described above, the normal start command, the RAM abnormal command, the RAM clear command, the setting change mode start command, and the setting check mode start command, has been received from the main side MPU 62. In step Sr4402, if it is determined that any of the five commands described above has been received (step Sr4401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4402. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the five commands described above has been received (step Sr4401: NO) in step Sr4401, the process returns to step Sr4401 again. In other words, the process waits until it is determined that any of the five commands described above has been received, and if it is determined that any of the five commands described above has been received, the process proceeds to step Sr4402.

In step Sr4402, it is determined whether the command received as the startup type command from the main MPU 62 is a normal startup command. In step Sr4402, if it is determined that the command received as the startup type command from the main MPU 62 is a normal startup command (step Sr4402: YES), the process advances to step Sr4403.

In step Sr4403, the startup type determination value stored in the sound/light side RAM 94 is set to "01". The startup type determination value is numerical information that allows the sound/light emitting control device 90 to grasp the current startup type of the main control device 60. In this embodiment, when the startup type determination value is set to "01", this means that the current startup type of the main control device 60 was normal startup. After executing step Sr4403, this startup type determination process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4402 that the command received as the startup type command from the master MPU 62 is not a normal startup command (step Sr4402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr4404, where it is determined whether the command received as the startup type command from the master MPU 62 is a RAM abnormality command. If it is determined in step Sr4404 that the command received as the startup type command from the master MPU 62 is a RAM abnormality command (step Sr4404: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4405.

In step Sr4405, the startup type determination value is set to "02". In this embodiment, the state in which "02" is set in the startup type determination value means that the current startup type of the main controller 60 is RAM abnormality. After executing step Sr4405, the main activation type determination process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4404 that the command received as the activation type command from the master MPU 62 is not a RAM abnormality command (step Sr4404: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr4406, where it is determined whether the command received as the activation type command from the master MPU 62 is a RAM clear command. If it is determined in step Sr4406 that the command received as the activation type command from the master MPU 62 is a RAM clear command (step Sr4406: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4407.

In step Sr4407, the activation type determination value is set to "03". In the present embodiment, the state in which the activation type determination value is set to "03" means that the current activation type of the main controller 60 is RAM clear. After executing step Sr4407, the main activation type determination process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4406 that the command received as the boot type command from the main MPU 62 is not a RAM clear command (step Sr4406: NO), the process advances to step Sr4408, and the command received as the boot type command from the main MPU 62 is determined to be a RAM clear command. It is determined whether the command entered is a setting change mode start command. In step Sr4408, if it is determined that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is a setting change mode start command (step Sr4408: YES), the process advances to step Sr4409.

In step Sr4409, the activation type determination value is set to "04". In this embodiment, when the activation type determination value is set to "04", this means that the current activation type of the main control unit 60 was the setting change mode. After step Sr4409 is executed, this activation type determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4408 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is not a setting change mode start command (step Sr4408: NO), in other words, if the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is a setting confirmation mode start command, proceed to step Sr4410.

In step Sr4410, the startup type determination value is set to "05". In this embodiment, when the startup type determination value is set to "05", this means that the current startup type of the main control unit 60 was the setting confirmation mode. After executing step Sr4410, this startup type determination process ends.

Next, we will explain the details of the audio/visual side abnormality power interruption flag response process shown in step Sr4105 of Figure 308.

Figure 312 is a flowchart showing the sound/light side abnormality power interruption flag response process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 (sound/light side CPU 92x) in the seventh embodiment.

In step Sr4501, it is determined whether the sound/light side abnormal power cut flag is ON. In step Sr4501, if it is determined that the sound and light side abnormal power outage flag is not ON (step Sr4501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr4502, and the RTC effect execution permission flag stored in the sound and light side RAM94 is turned OFF. do. The RTC performance execution permission flag is a flag for the sound and light side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the RTC performance can be executed, and when the RTC performance execution permission flag is ON, the RTC performance execution condition (time ) is established, it means that the RTC performance can be executed. On the other hand, when the RTC performance execution permission flag is OFF, the RTC performance can be performed regardless of whether the RTC performance execution conditions (time, etc.) are satisfied. means an impossible state. After executing step Sr4502, the process advances to step Sr4503.

In step Sr4503, the fixed suggestion performance execution permission flag stored in the sound/light side RAM 94 is turned OFF. The fixed suggestion performance execution permission flag is a flag that allows the sound/light side MPU 92 to determine whether or not a fixed suggestion performance can be executed. The fixed suggestion performance execution permission flag being ON means that a fixed suggestion performance can be executed if the execution conditions for the fixed suggestion performance (normal startup, etc.) are met, while the fixed suggestion performance execution permission flag being OFF means that a fixed suggestion performance cannot be executed regardless of whether the execution conditions for the fixed suggestion performance (normal startup, etc.) are met. After executing step Sr4503, the sound/light side abnormal power failure flag response process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sr4501, if it is determined that the sound and light side abnormal power outage flag is ON (step Sr4501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4504, and the RTC effect execution permission flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr4505, and the deferred suggestion effect execution permission flag is turned on. Thereafter, the actual optical side abnormal power outage flag handling process ends.

Next, we will explain the timer interrupt process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92.

Figure 313 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 (sound/light side CPU 92x) in the seventh embodiment. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (2 msec in this embodiment). The process of each step executed in the timer interrupt process is described below.

In step Sr6101, a command storage process is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing a received command in the audio/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62. The audio/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer that enables the storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are stored sequentially in the ring buffer and are read out sequentially in the order in which they were stored. After executing step Sr6101, proceed to step Sr6102.

In step Sr6102, the sound/light side power cut process is executed. The sound/light side power cut process is a process that executes operations such as saving registers in use when a power cut command is received from the main side MPU 62. The sound/light side power cut process will be described in detail later. After executing step Sr6102, proceed to step Sr6103.

In step Sr6103, RTC effect processing is executed. The RTC production process is performed by performing RTC for a predetermined period of time (5 minutes in this embodiment) every predetermined time (every hour in this embodiment) after the pachinko machine 10 starts up (after power supply starts). This is a process for executing a performance. Details of the RTC effect processing will be described later. After executing step Sr6103, the process advances to step Sr6104.

In step Sr6104, processing for a fixed suggestion presentation is executed. The processing for a fixed suggestion presentation is processing for executing a fixed suggestion presentation, which is a presentation that suggests that the setting information has been fixed. Details of the processing for a fixed suggestion presentation will be described later. After executing step Sr6104, proceed to step Sr6105.

In step Sr6105, processing for game round presentation is executed. In the processing for game round presentation, processing is performed for presentation to be executed during the game round from when the pattern change starts to when it stops. After executing step Sr6105, proceed to step Sr6106.

In step Sr6106, opening/closing execution mode production processing is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode performance processing, processing related to the performance during the opening period, the performance during the opening/closing processing period, and the performance during the ending period is performed. After executing step Sr6106, the process advances to step Sr6107.

In step Sr6107, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in each of the above-mentioned production processes. After executing step Sr6107, the process advances to step Sr6108.

In step Sr6108, an audio output control process is executed to control the audio output of the speaker 46. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is executed based on the audio data read in the above-mentioned BGM process and each performance process. After executing step Sr6108, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

Next, details of the acousto-optical side power cutoff process shown in step Sr6102 in FIG. 313 will be described.

Figure 314 is a flowchart showing the sound/light side power cut processing executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 (sound/light side CPU 92x) in the seventh embodiment.

In step Sr6201, it is determined whether a power outage generation command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step Sr6201, if it is determined that the power outage generation command has not been received from the main side MPU 62 (step Sr6201: NO), the main optical side power outage process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr6201 that a power outage generation command has been received from the main MPU 62 (step Sr6201: YES), the process advances to step Sr6202.

In step Sr6202, various information (such as information indicating the game status and control information) stored in the register of the sound/light side CPU 92x is saved to a predetermined area of the sound/light side RAM 94. Then, proceeding to step Sr6203, the information stored in the stack pointer of the sound/light side CPU 92x is saved to a predetermined area of the sound/light side RAM 94. Then, proceeding to step Sr6204, the power recovery flag is turned ON. Then, proceeding to step Sr6205, a RAM judgment value (e.g., a checksum value) is calculated by performing a predetermined calculation based on a predetermined information group stored in the sound/light side RAM 94, and the calculated RAM judgment value is stored in the sound/light side RAM 94. Then, proceeding to step Sr6205, RAM access is prohibited, and an infinite loop process is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and the device becomes inoperable.

Next, we will explain the details of the RTC performance processing shown in step Sr6103 of Figure 313.

Figure 315 is a flowchart showing the RTC performance process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 (sound/light side CPU 92x) in the seventh embodiment.

In step Sr6301, it is determined whether the RTC performance execution permission flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6301 that the RTC performance execution permission flag is ON (step Sr6301: YES), the processing of steps Sr6302 to Sr6313 described below is executed. The processing of steps Sr6302 to Sr6313 is for determining whether it is the timing to execute an RTC performance, and for executing the RTC performance if it is determined that it is the timing to execute an RTC performance. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6301 that the RTC performance execution permission flag is not ON (step Sr6301: NO), the processing of steps Sr6302 to Sr6313 is not executed, and the RTC performance processing ends.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when the RTC performance execution permission flag is ON, i.e., when the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was ON, the RTC performance is executed at a predetermined timing, but on the other hand, when the RTC performance execution permission flag is OFF, i.e., when the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was OFF, the RTC performance is not executed. The processing of steps Sr6302 to Sr6313 is explained below.

In step Sr6202, it is determined whether the RTC performance execution flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The RTC performance execution flag is a flag for determining whether or not an RTC performance is being executed, which will be described later, and is turned ON when the RTC performance starts and turned OFF when the RTC performance ends. In step Sr6202, if it is determined that the RTC effect execution flag is not ON (step Sr6202: NO), that is, if the RTC effect is not in execution, the process advances to step Sr6203.

In step Sr6203, current date and time information is read from the time register 97b1 of the RTC97. After that, the process advances to step Sr6204, and the elapsed time from the startup date and time to the current date and time is determined based on the read current date and time information and the startup date and time information stored in the startup date and time information storage area 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94. Calculate the elapsed startup time. Specifically, for example, the current date and time information read from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97 indicates "December 15, 2017, 11:53:45", and the startup date and time information stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 indicates "December 15, 2017, 08:42:35", the elapsed startup time is "3 hours, 11 minutes, 10 seconds". In addition, if the calculated elapsed startup time exceeds 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds, the elapsed startup time will be calculated from 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds until the elapsed startup time becomes 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds or less. Subtract the value corresponding to seconds. For example, if the calculated startup elapsed time is "51 hours 35 minutes 24 seconds," subtract the value corresponding to 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds twice to obtain a new startup elapsed time of "3 hours 35 minutes." 24 seconds.” The reason for adopting such processing will be described later. After executing step Sr6204, the process advances to step Sr6205.

In step Sr6205, the RTC performance execution determination table stored in the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to, and in step Sr6206, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the RTC performance. In the RTC performance execution determination table, the activation elapsed time and the type of RTC performance are stored in association with each other.

Figure 316 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the RTC performance execution judgment table. As described above, the RTC performance execution judgment table stores the elapsed time from startup in association with the type of RTC performance. Specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 316, a different type of RTC performance is set for each hour of the elapsed time from startup. For example, "RTC performance A" is set corresponding to the elapsed time from startup of "1 hour 00 minutes 00 seconds", and "RTC performance B" is set corresponding to the elapsed time from startup of "2 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds". As described above, in this embodiment, when the elapsed time from startup exceeds a value of 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds, the value corresponding to 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds is subtracted from the elapsed time from the elapsed time from startup until the elapsed time from startup becomes a value of 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds or less. Therefore, since it is not necessary to make the RTC performance execution judgment table correspond to the part where the elapsed time from startup exceeds 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds, the storage capacity of the sound and light side ROM 93 required to store the RTC performance execution judgment table can be reduced.

The explanation returns to FIG. 315. In step Sr6206, it is determined whether it is the timing to start the RTC effect. Specifically, if the activation elapsed time calculated in step Sr6204 matches the activation elapsed time set in the RTC effect execution determination table, it is determined that it is the start timing of the RTC effect, and if they match. If not, it is determined that it is not the start timing of the RTC performance. For example, if the activation elapsed time calculated in step Sr6204 is "1 hour 00 minutes 00 seconds", it is determined that it is the start timing of RTC effect A.

In step Sr6206, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the RTC effect (step Sr6206: NO), this RTC effect processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr6206 that it is the timing to start the RTC effect (step Sr6206: YES), the process advances to step Sr6207.

In step Sr6207, the RTC performance corresponding to the elapsed time from startup set in the RTC performance execution judgment table is set to start. For example, if the elapsed time from startup is "1 hour 00 minutes 00 seconds", control of the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 is started so that the performance mode corresponding to RTC performance A is achieved, and a command is sent to the display control device 100 to start displaying a video corresponding to RTC performance A. In this embodiment, RTC performance A is a performance in which character A appears and sings song A for five minutes. Other RTC performances set in the RTC performance execution judgment table are performances in which other characters appear and sing other songs for five minutes. In other words, the characters and songs that appear differ for each type of RTC performance. Then, proceed to step Sr6208.

In step Sr6208, the RTC performance execution flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr6209, where the timer counter Tr for the RTC performance is set to "150000". The timer counter Tr for the RTC performance is a counter for managing the remaining time of the RTC performance, and as described below, is decremented by 1 each time this timer interrupt process is executed. In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, so the "150000" set in the timer counter Tr for the RTC performance corresponds to 5 minutes. After that, this RTC performance process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sr6202 above that the RTC performance execution flag is ON (step Sr6202: YES), that is, if the process proceeds to this step Sr6202 in the timer interrupt process after the RTC performance execution flag is set ON in step Sr6208 above, the process proceeds to step Sr6210.

In step Sr6210, 1 is subtracted from the value set in the RTC performance timer counter Tr. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr6211, and it is determined whether the value of the RTC performance timer counter Tr is 0 or not. In step Sr6211, if it is determined that the value of the RTC performance timer counter Tr is not 0 (step Sr6211: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not yet the end timing of the RTC performance, this RTC performance processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, in step Sr6211, if it is determined that the value of the RTC production timer counter Tr is 0 (step Sr6211: YES), that is, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the RTC production, the process proceeds to step Sr6212, Set to end the RTC performance being executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sr6213, where the RTC performance execution flag is turned OFF, and the present RTC performance processing is ended.

Next, details of the deferral suggestion production process shown in step Sr6104 of FIG. 313 will be explained.

Figure 317 is a flowchart showing the stationary suggestion performance process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 (sound/light side CPU 92x) in the seventh embodiment.

In step Sr6401, it is determined whether the fixed suggestion performance execution permission flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sr6401 that the fixed suggestion performance execution permission flag is ON (step Sr6401: YES), the processing of steps Sr6402 to Sr6406 described below is executed. The processing of steps Sr6402 to Sr6406 is for determining whether it is the timing to execute a fixed suggestion performance, and for executing the fixed suggestion performance if it is determined that it is the timing to execute a fixed suggestion performance. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6401 that the fixed suggestion performance execution permission flag is not ON (step Sr6401: NO), the processing of steps Sr6402 to Sr6406 is not executed, and this RTC performance processing ends.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when the stationary suggestion performance execution permission flag is ON, i.e., when the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was ON, the stationary suggestion performance can be executed at a predetermined timing, but on the other hand, when the stationary suggestion performance execution permission flag is OFF, i.e., when the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was OFF, the stationary suggestion performance will not be executed. The processing of steps Sr6402 to Sr6406 will be explained below.

In step Sr6402, it is determined whether the startup type determination value is "01", i.e., whether the current startup type was "normal startup". If it is determined in step Sr6402 that the startup type determination value is "01" (step Sr6402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr6403, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6402 that the startup type determination value is not "01" (step Sr6402: NO), the stationary suggestion performance process is terminated.

In step Sr6403, it is determined whether the fixed suggestion effect execution flag stored in the sound/light side RAM 94 is ON. The fixed suggestion effect execution flag is a flag for determining whether the fixed suggestion effect has already been executed after the current startup. In this embodiment, the fixed suggestion effect execution flag is provided because a configuration is adopted in which the fixed suggestion effect is executed only in the first play session after normal startup. Furthermore, the fixed suggestion effect execution flag is not maintained in the ON state even if the power supply is cut off while the flag is ON, and is always OFF at the next startup.

In step Sr6403, if it is determined that the deferral suggestion effect execution completion flag is not ON (step Sr6403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr6404, which will be described later. On the other hand, in step Sr6403, if it is determined that the deferred suggestion effect execution completed flag is ON (step Sr6403: YES), this deferred suggestion effect processing is ended.

In step Sr6404, it is determined whether a variation command has been received from the main controller 60. The variation command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 when starting a game cycle (variation of special symbols) in the game cycle control process (step Sr0410) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 293) executed by the main control device 60. This is the command to be executed. That is, in step Sr6404, it is determined whether a game round (variation of special symbols) has started. In step Sr6404, if it is determined that the fluctuation command has been received (step Sr6404: YES), the process advances to step Sr6405, which will be described later. On the other hand, in step Sr6404, if it is determined that the variation command has not been received (step Sr6404: NO), the present deferral suggestion production processing is ended.

In step Sr6405, the fixed suggestion presentation start process is executed. The fixed suggestion presentation start process is a process for starting the fixed suggestion presentation described above. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr6406, the fixed suggestion presentation execution completion flag described above is set to ON, and the fixed suggestion presentation start process is terminated.

As described above, this embodiment can provide the following advantages:

According to the present embodiment, since the RTC effect is executed based on the elapsed time since the pachinko machine 10 was started (startup elapsed time), in a gaming hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed in an island facility, If the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are started all at once (at the same time) by turning on the island power switch of the island equipment, the activation elapsed time for each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island equipment is the same. becomes. Therefore, it is possible to start the RTC effects all at once (simultaneously).

However, if the island power switch is turned on to start up multiple pachinko machines 10 installed on the island facility all at once (simultaneously), and then the power switch 85a of one pachinko machine 10 is individually shifted from the ON position to the OFF position to cut off the power supply, for example for the purpose of changing the setting information, and then the power switch 85a is shifted from the OFF position to the ON position again to start up the pachinko machine, the elapsed start time of the one pachinko machine 10 will differ from the elapsed start time of the other pachinko machines 10 installed on the island facility, and the timing of the start of the RTC performance of the one pachinko machine 10 will differ from that of the other pachinko machines 10. In particular, since it takes about one minute to change the setting information, the one pachinko machine 10 whose setting information has been changed will start the RTC performance about one minute later than the other pachinko machines 10. Generally, the duration of an RTC performance is about five minutes, so the RTC performance of the one pachinko machine 10 whose setting information has been changed will overlap and interfere with the RTC performance of the other pachinko machine 10, causing discomfort to players.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was in the OFF state, processing is executed to turn off the RTC performance execution permission flag, so that the power switch 85a is in the ON position. If the power switch 85a is then moved from the OFF position to the ON position and started, the pachinko machine 10 is set to a state in which RTC performance cannot be performed. will be done. As a result, the RTC performance is not executed in the first pachinko machine 10 that is activated by operating the power switch 85a, so the RTC performance in the first pachinko machine 10 is changed to the RTC performance in the other pachinko machine 10. It is possible to prevent interference caused by repeated execution in a shifted state, and it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable.

On the other hand, if the power supply to a pachinko machine 10 is cut off by switching the island power switch from ON to OFF while the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 remains in the ON position, and the pachinko machine 10 is then started up by switching the island power switch from OFF to ON, the pachinko machine 10 is set to a state in which it can execute an RTC effect (the RTC effect execution permission flag is set to ON), and therefore it is possible to execute an RTC effect at the same (or approximately the same) timing as other pachinko machines 10 installed in the island equipment.

In addition, in a game hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed on an island facility, and the island power switch of the island facility starts and stops power supply to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 all at once. If the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off or started by operating the individual power switch 85a, there is a high possibility that the setting information has been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day). .

According to this embodiment, if it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was OFF, a process is executed to turn OFF the fixed play suggestion effect execution permission flag. Therefore, if the previous power outage was caused by operating the power switch 85a, the fixed play suggestion effect will not be executed in the pachinko machine 10 after the next startup. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player mistakenly believes that the setting information of the pachinko machine 10 has not been changed and that the pachinko machine 10 is left fixed because the fixed play suggestion effect is executed in the pachinko machine 10, even though the setting information has actually been changed since the previous day (or the previous business day).

<<7-7>> Modification of the seventh embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be embodied in various forms without departing from the spirit of the present invention, for example, the following modifications are also possible. Note that in the modifications described below, the same configurations, processes, and effects as those of the above embodiment will not be described.

《7-7-1》Variation 1:
In the seventh embodiment described above, the configuration includes a movable element for effect that can move within a predetermined range, and the sound and light emission control device 90 controls the sound and light emission control device 90 when the sound and light side abnormal power outage flag is ON, that is, at the time of the previous power outage. A configuration may be adopted in which the movable element for performance is moved from the origin position to the maximum position when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the ON state. This will be explained in detail below.

318 and 319 are explanatory diagrams illustrating the performance movable member 99 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the first modification of the seventh embodiment. The movable performance element 99 of this modification is configured to be movable from the origin position shown in FIG. 318 to the maximum position shown in FIG. It moves from the position to the maximum position, and returns from the maximum position to the origin position upon completion of the performance. Although not shown in the drawings, this modification includes a drive motor for moving the movable element 99 for effect, an origin position detection sensor capable of detecting that the movable element 99 for effect is at the origin position, and a movable element for effect A maximum position detection sensor capable of detecting that the movable part 99 is at the maximum position is provided, and when the movable part 99 for performance is moved from the origin position to the maximum position, the movable part 99 for performance is provided with a maximum position detection sensor. On the other hand, when returning the performance movable object 99 from the maximum position to the origin position, the drive motor is driven until the performance movable object 99 is detected by the origin position detection sensor. let

In this modification, when the sound and light emission control device 90 determines that the sound and light side abnormal power outage flag is ON in the sound and light side abnormal power outage flag handling process at the time of startup, that is, when it is determined that the sound and light side abnormal power outage flag is ON, When it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the ON state, the performance movable object 99 is moved from the origin position to the maximum position. According to such a configuration, the manager of the game hall or the like can visually check whether the movable part 99 for performance is at the origin position or not, and thereby confirm that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage is OFF. It is possible to easily confirm whether it is determined that the device is in the ON state or the ON state.

Then, if the manager or the like notices that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was determined to be ON, the manager or the like can carry out work corresponding to the fact that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was determined to be ON in the pachinko machine 10.

Specifically, for example, in an amusement hall that does not use an island power switch in the island equipment to start and stop the power supply to multiple pachinko machines 10 all at once, if the power switch 85a remained in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage, there is a possibility that a cheater or other dishonest person has performed fraudulent operations or tampered with the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in such an amusement hall, the manager of the amusement hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the pachinko machine 10 and inspect it.

In addition, a stepping motor may be used as a drive motor for moving the performance movable object 99. Specifically, for example, when moving the performance movable object 99 from the origin position to the maximum position, a rotation direction (for example, a forward direction) for moving from the origin position to the maximum position is specified, a predetermined number of steps (for example, 20) is set in a counter, and the stepping motor is driven. When the number of steps set in the counter becomes 0, it is determined whether the performance movable object 99 has been detected by the maximum position detection sensor. If the performance movable object 99 is detected by the maximum position detection sensor, the driving of the stepping motor is terminated. On the other hand, if the performance movable object 99 is not detected by the maximum position detection sensor, the counter is set by one each time until it is detected, and the performance movable object 99 is further moved in the direction of the maximum position. In addition, if the number of added steps exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5), an error may be notified.

On the other hand, when moving the movable element 99 for performance from the maximum position to the origin position, specify the rotation direction (for example, reverse direction) for moving from the maximum position to the origin position, and take a predetermined number of steps (for example, 20). A stepping motor is driven by setting it in a counter, and when the number of steps set in the counter becomes 0, it is determined whether or not the movable object 99 for performance is detected by the origin position detection sensor. When the movable object 99 for performance is detected by the origin position detection sensor, the driving of the stepping motor is ended. On the other hand, if the movable object 99 for performance is not detected by the origin position detection sensor, the movable object 99 for performance is further moved in the direction of the origin position by setting the counter one by one until it is detected. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which an error is notified when the number of added steps exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5).

The configuration described above using a stepping motor as the drive motor may be applied to each of the modified examples described below.

<<7-7-2>> Variation 2:
In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, the sound and light emission control device 90 may be configured to execute a predetermined notification process (e.g., a process of sounding an alarm at maximum volume, etc.) when the sound and light side abnormal power failure flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was ON. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall aware that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was determined to be ON. As a result, the manager can perform work corresponding to the fact that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was determined to be ON in the pachinko machine 10.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that starts and stops power supply to multiple pachinko machines 10 at the same time using an island power switch on an island facility, the power supply is turned off at the time of the previous power outage. If the switch 85a remains in the ON state, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been fraudulently operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as a trickster. Therefore, in such a game hall, the game hall manager or the like can temporarily suspend the operation of the pachinko machine 10 and inspect the pachinko machine 10.

<<7-7-3>> Variation 3:
In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to have an external output terminal capable of outputting information to an external device such as a hall computer, and the main control device 60 may be configured to output predetermined information indicating that an abnormality may have occurred from the external output terminal when the main side abnormal power interruption flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was ON. With this configuration, it is possible to make the manager of the gaming hall or the like aware that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was determined to be ON. As a result, the manager or the like can perform work corresponding to the fact that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was determined to be ON in the pachinko machine 10.

Specifically, for example, in an amusement hall that does not use an island power switch in the island equipment to start and stop the power supply to multiple pachinko machines 10 all at once, if the power switch 85a remained in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage, there is a possibility that a cheater or other dishonest person has performed fraudulent operations or modifications on the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in such an amusement hall, the manager of the amusement hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the pachinko machine 10 and inspect it.

《7-7-4》Variation 4:
In the seventh embodiment and each of the above modifications, when the main side abnormal power outage flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was in the ON state, the power The configuration may include a drive mechanism that forcibly displaces the switch 85a to the OFF state. According to this configuration, if it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage, the power switch 85a is shifted to the OFF state, and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted. It will be dripping. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the pachinko machine 10 in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality in which the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was determined to be in the ON state. .

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that starts and stops power supply to multiple pachinko machines 10 at the same time using an island power switch on an island facility, the power supply is turned off at the time of the previous power outage. If the switch 85a remains in the ON state, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been fraudulently operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as a trickster. According to this modification, if the power switch 85a was in an abnormal ON state at the time of the previous power outage, the power switch 85a is forcibly shifted to the OFF state at the next startup, and the corresponding The power supply to the pachinko machine 10 will be forcibly cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played on the pachinko machine 10 in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality.

<<7-7-5>> Variation 5:
In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, the sound and light emission control device 90 may be configured to display on the pattern display device 41 a start-up demo image that is displayed when the pachinko machine 10 is started up when the sound and light side abnormal power interruption flag is OFF, that is, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was OFF. With this configuration, the manager of the game hall, etc., can check whether the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was determined to be OFF or ON by checking whether the start-up demo image is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

Then, if the manager or the like notices that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was determined to be ON, the manager or the like can carry out work corresponding to the fact that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was determined to be ON in the pachinko machine 10.

Specifically, for example, in an amusement hall that does not use an island power switch in the island equipment to start and stop the power supply to multiple pachinko machines 10 all at once, if the power switch 85a remained in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage, there is a possibility that a cheater or other dishonest person has performed fraudulent operations or modifications on the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in such an amusement hall, the manager of the amusement hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the pachinko machine 10 and inspect it.

<<7-7-6>> Variation 6:
In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, the main control device 60 may be configured to enable the game ball launching mechanism 81 to launch game balls when the main side abnormal power interruption flag is OFF, that is, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was OFF. Specifically, for example, a permission flag that permits the launch of game balls is provided, and the game ball launching mechanism 81 is configured to allow the game balls to be launched only when the permission flag is ON. Then, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was OFF, the permission flag is set to ON, and when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was ON, the permission flag is set to OFF.

According to such a configuration, the player can play a game on the pachinko machine 10 if it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power outage. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was in the ON state, the process that enables the game ball to be fired in the pachinko machine 10 is not executed, so the player If it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the ON state when the power is cut off, no games can be played on the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the pachinko machine 10 in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality in which the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was determined to be in the ON state. .

Specifically, for example, in amusement halls that do not use an island power switch in an island facility to simultaneously start and stop the supply of power to multiple pachinko machines 10, if the power switch 85a was left ON at the time of the previous power outage, it is possible that a cheater or other dishonest person has performed fraudulent operations or modifications on the pachinko machine 10. As described above, according to this modified example, if it is determined that the power switch 85a was ON at the time of the previous power outage, the process that enables the launch of game balls is not executed in the pachinko machine 10, so that it is possible to prevent play on the pachinko machine 10 from being performed in a possibly abnormal state in which the power switch 85a was determined to be ON at the time of the previous power outage.

Furthermore, in this modified example, even if the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was ON, if a play permission switch provided on the main control device 60 that houses the main control board 61 is pressed within a predetermined period of time (e.g., within 5 minutes) from the start of the current power supply, the permission flag that permits the release of the game balls described above may be configured to be turned ON. In this configuration, if the manager of the game hall or the like determines that there is a legitimate reason why the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was ON and that there is no problem with playing on the pachinko machine 10, he or she may simply press the play permission switch on the pachinko machine 10. The above-described configuration prevents play on the pachinko machine 10 from continuing in a possibly abnormal state, where the power switch 85a was determined to be in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage, and allows players to play on the specific pachinko machine 10 if the manager of the game hall or other person recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated and presses the play permission switch.

《7-7-7》Variation 7:
In the seventh embodiment and each modification, the main controller 60 determines that the main side abnormal power outage flag is OFF, that is, the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage is the OFF state. The configuration may be such that the game ball can be detected by the ball entry detection sensor when the game ball is detected. Specifically, for example, a permission flag for permitting detection of a game ball is provided, and the configuration is such that the ball entry detection sensor can detect the game ball only when the permission flag is ON. Then, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was determined to be the OFF state, the permission flag is turned ON, and the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage is determined to be the ON state. If so, the permission flag is turned OFF.

According to such a configuration, the player can play a game on the pachinko machine 10 if it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power outage. On the other hand, if it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage, the process that enables the ball entry detection sensor to detect the game ball in the pachinko machine 10 is not executed, so the game If it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was in the ON state, the player cannot play a game on the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the pachinko machine 10 in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality in which the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was determined to be in the ON state. .

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that starts and stops power supply to multiple pachinko machines 10 at the same time using an island power switch on an island facility, the power supply is turned off at the time of the previous power outage. If the switch 85a remains in the ON state, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been fraudulently operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as a trickster. As described above, according to this modification, if it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage, the ball entry detection sensor in the pachinko machine 10 detects the game ball. Since the enabling process is not executed, the game is played on the pachinko machine 10 in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality in that the state of the power switch 85a was determined to be in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage. This can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this modified example, even if the main side abnormal power interruption flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was ON, if a play permission switch provided on the main control device 60 that houses the main control board 61 is pressed within a predetermined period (e.g., within 5 minutes) from the start of the current power supply, the permission flag that permits the detection of the game balls described above may be configured to be turned ON. In this configuration, if the manager of the game hall or the like determines that there is a legitimate reason why the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was ON and that there is no problem with playing on the pachinko machine 10, he or she may simply press the play permission switch on the pachinko machine 10. The above-described configuration prevents play on the pachinko machine 10 from continuing in a possibly abnormal state, where the power switch 85a was determined to be in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage, and allows players to play on the specific pachinko machine 10 if the manager of the game hall or other person recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated and presses the play permission switch.

《7-7-8》Variation 8:
In the seventh embodiment and each modification, the main controller 60 determines that the main side abnormal power outage flag is OFF, that is, the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage is the OFF state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that allows acquisition of counter values such as a hit random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, etc. Specifically, for example, a permission flag is provided to permit the acquisition of these counter values, and the configuration is such that the counter values can be acquired only when the permission flag is ON. Then, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was determined to be the OFF state, the permission flag is turned ON, and the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage is determined to be the ON state. If so, the permission flag is turned OFF.

With this configuration, if it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was OFF, the player is able to play on the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was ON, the process that allows the counter value to be acquired is not executed in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, if it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was ON, the player cannot play on the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being played in a possibly abnormal state in which the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was determined to be ON.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that starts and stops power supply to multiple pachinko machines 10 at the same time using an island power switch on an island facility, the power supply is turned off at the time of the previous power outage. If the switch 85a remains in the ON state, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been fraudulently operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as a trickster. As described above, according to this modification, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power cut was in the ON state, processing is performed to enable acquisition of the counter value in the pachinko machine 10. Since the power switch 85a is not executed, the game is prevented from being played in the pachinko machine 10 in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality in which the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power cut was determined to be in the ON state. Can be done.

Furthermore, in this modified example, even if the main side abnormal power interruption flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was ON, if a play permission switch provided on the main control device 60 that houses the main control board 61 is pressed within a predetermined period of time (e.g., within 5 minutes) from the start of the current power supply, the permission flag that permits acquisition of the above-mentioned counter value may be configured to be turned ON. In this configuration, if the manager of the game hall or the like determines that there is a legitimate reason why the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was ON and that there is no problem with playing on the pachinko machine 10, he or she may simply press the play permission switch on the pachinko machine 10. The above-described configuration prevents play on the pachinko machine 10 from continuing in a possibly abnormal state, where the power switch 85a was determined to be in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage, and allows players to play on the specific pachinko machine 10 if the manager of the game hall or other person recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated and presses the play permission switch.

<<7-7-9>> Variation 9:
In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, the main control device 60 may be configured to enable the variable display of the special symbol in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b when the main side abnormal power failure flag is OFF, that is, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was OFF. Specifically, for example, a permission flag that permits the variable display of the special symbol is provided, and the variable display of the special symbol is possible only when the permission flag is ON. Then, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was OFF, the permission flag is turned ON, and when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was ON, the permission flag is turned OFF.

According to such a configuration, the player can play a game on the pachinko machine 10 if it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power outage. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was in the ON state, the process that enables the variable display of special symbols in the pachinko machine 10 is not executed, so the player If it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the ON state when the power is cut off, no games can be played on the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the pachinko machine 10 in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality in which the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was determined to be in the ON state. .

Specifically, for example, in amusement halls that do not use an island power switch in an island facility to simultaneously start and stop the supply of power to multiple pachinko machines 10, the fact that the power switch 85a was left ON at the time of the previous power outage may indicate that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally operated or tampered with by a dishonest person such as a cheater. As described above, according to this modified example, if it is determined that the power switch 85a was ON at the time of the previous power outage, the process that enables the variable display of special symbols is not executed in the pachinko machine 10, so that it is possible to prevent play on the pachinko machine 10 from being played in a possibly abnormal state in which the power switch 85a was determined to be ON at the time of the previous power outage.

Furthermore, in this modified example, even if the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was ON, if a play permission switch provided on the main control device 60 that houses the main control board 61 is pressed within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 minutes) from the start of the current power supply, the permission flag that permits the variable display of the special symbols described above may be configured to be turned ON. In this configuration, if the manager of the game hall or the like determines that there is a legitimate reason why the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was ON and that there is no problem with playing on the pachinko machine 10, he or she may simply press the play permission switch on the pachinko machine 10. The above-described configuration prevents play on the pachinko machine 10 from continuing in a possibly abnormal state, where the power switch 85a was determined to be in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage, and allows players to play on the specific pachinko machine 10 if the manager of the game hall or other person recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated and presses the play permission switch.

《7-7-10》Variation 10:
In the seventh embodiment and each modification, the main controller 60 determines that the main side abnormal power outage flag is OFF, that is, the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage is the OFF state. The configuration may be such that a winning lottery can be executed when the lottery is won. Specifically, for example, a permission flag is provided to permit execution of a winning lottery, and the winning lottery can be executed only when the permission flag is ON. Then, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was determined to be the OFF state, the permission flag is turned ON, and the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage is determined to be the ON state. If so, the permission flag is turned OFF.

With this configuration, if it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was OFF, the player is able to play on the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was ON, the process that enables the execution of a winning lottery is not executed on the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, if it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was ON, the player cannot play on the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being played in a possibly abnormal state in which the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was determined to be ON.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall that starts and stops power supply to multiple pachinko machines 10 at the same time using an island power switch on an island facility, the power supply is turned off at the time of the previous power outage. If the switch 85a remains in the ON state, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been fraudulently operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as a trickster. As described above, according to this modification, if it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage, a process is performed to enable the execution of a winning lottery in the pachinko machine 10. Since the power switch 85a is not executed, the game is prevented from being played in the pachinko machine 10 in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality in which the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power cut was determined to be in the ON state. Can be done.

Furthermore, in this modified example, even if the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was ON, if a play permission switch provided on the main control device 60 that houses the main control board 61 is pressed within a predetermined period of time (for example, within 5 minutes) from the start of the current power supply, the permission flag that permits the execution of the winning lottery described above may be configured to be turned ON. In this configuration, if the manager of the game hall or the like determines that there is a legitimate reason why the power switch 85a was ON at the time of the previous power failure and that there is no problem with playing on the pachinko machine 10, he or she may simply press the play permission switch on the pachinko machine 10. The above-described configuration prevents play on the pachinko machine 10 from continuing in a possibly abnormal state, where the power switch 85a was determined to be in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage, and allows players to play on the specific pachinko machine 10 if the manager of the game hall or other person recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated and presses the play permission switch.

<<7-7-11>> Variation 11:
In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, the main control device 60 may be configured to enable the opening and closing execution mode when the main side abnormal power interruption flag is OFF, i.e., when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was OFF. Specifically, for example, a permission flag that permits the opening and closing execution mode to be executed is provided, and the opening and closing execution mode can be executed only when the permission flag is ON. Then, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was OFF, the permission flag is set to ON, and when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was ON, the permission flag is set to OFF.

According to such a configuration, the player can play a game on the pachinko machine 10 if it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power outage. On the other hand, if it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage, the process that enables the opening/closing execution mode to be executed in the pachinko machine 10 is not executed. If it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the ON state when the power is cut off, no games can be played on the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the pachinko machine 10 in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality in which the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was determined to be in the ON state. .

Specifically, for example, in amusement halls that do not simultaneously start and stop the supply of power to multiple pachinko machines 10 using an island power switch of an island facility, if the power switch 85a was left ON at the time of the previous power outage, it is possible that a dishonest person such as a cheater has performed fraudulent operations or modifications on the pachinko machine 10. As described above, according to this modified example, if it is determined that the power switch 85a was ON at the time of the previous power outage, the process that enables the opening and closing execution mode to be executed in the pachinko machine 10 is not executed, so it is possible to prevent play on the pachinko machine 10 from being performed in a possibly abnormal state in which the power switch 85a was determined to be ON at the time of the previous power outage.

Furthermore, in this modification, even if the main side abnormal power outage flag is ON, that is, even if it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was in the ON state, the current power If the game permission switch provided on the main control device 60 housing the main control board 61 is pressed within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 minutes) from the start of supply of the A configuration may also be adopted in which a permission flag for permission is turned ON. In this configuration, the game hall manager etc. has a legitimate reason why the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage, and there is no problem even if the game is played on the pachinko machine 10. If it is determined that there is no player, the game permission switch on the pachinko machine 10 may be pressed. According to the configuration described above, a game may be played on the pachinko machine 10 in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality in which the state of the power switch 85a was determined to be in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage. If the manager of the game hall recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated and presses the play permission switch, the player is not allowed to play at the specific pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible to do this.

《7-7-12》Variation 12:
In the seventh embodiment and each modification described above, the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage is changed to the next state based on the state of the main side abnormal power outage flag stored in the main side RAM 64 of the main controller 60. However, instead of this configuration, the movable element 99 for effect described in the above-mentioned modification 1 is provided, and based on the position of the movable element 99 for effect, the previous The configuration may be such that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of power interruption can be determined at the next startup. This will be explained in detail below.

In this modified example, when the drive voltage falls below a predetermined value, the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 determines whether the state of the power switch 85a is ON or OFF based on a signal from the power switch state detection sensor 85b, and if it determines that the power switch 85a is ON, it sends an abnormal power interruption occurrence command to the audio and light emission control device 90 and executes the main power interruption process described above. On the other hand, if it determines that the power switch 85a is OFF, it sends a normal power interruption occurrence command to the audio and light emission control device 90 and executes the main power interruption process described above.

When the sound/light side MPU 92 of the sound/light control device 90 receives an abnormal power interruption command, it moves the performance movable object 99 from the origin position to the maximum position and then executes the sound/light side power interruption process described above. On the other hand, when it receives a normal power interruption command, it puts the performance movable object 99 on standby at the origin position or returns it to the origin position and then executes the sound/light side power interruption process described above. In other words, if the power supply is cut off while the power switch 85a is in the ON state, the performance movable object 99 moves to the maximum position, and if the power supply is cut off while the power switch 85a is in the OFF state, the performance movable object 99 remains in the origin position.

Thereafter, the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 determines whether or not the movable part 99 for production is detected by the origin position detection sensor at the next startup after the power supply has started, and the sound and light side MPU 92 determines whether or not the movable part 99 for production is detected by the origin position detection sensor. It is determined whether the power switch 85a was in the OFF state or the ON state when the power was cut off. When it is determined that the movable object 99 for performance has been detected by the origin position detection sensor, that is, when it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power outage, the abnormality on the sound and light side is detected. Turn off the shutdown flag. On the other hand, if it is determined that the movable part 99 for performance has not been detected by the origin position detection sensor, that is, if it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage, an abnormality on the sound and light side is detected. Turn on the power outage flag.

Otherwise, the processing performed by the main control device 60 and the audio/light emission control device 90 is the same as that in the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples described above.

Next, we will explain an example of the processing executed by the main side MPU 62 and the audio-light side MPU 92 in this modified example.

The processes executed by the main side MPU 62 and the audio/light side MPU 92 of this modification are different from those of the seventh embodiment described above, such as main processing (Fig. 290), power supply monitoring processing (Fig. 294), and power interruption type determination processing (Fig. 310) and the sound-light side power cutoff process (FIG. 314), the other processes are the same as in the seventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the main processing and power monitoring processing executed by the main side MPU 62 of this modification, the power interruption type determination processing and the audio and optical side power interruption processing executed by the audio and optical side MPU 92 of this modification will be described.

FIG. 320 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 of Modification 12 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the main processing shown in FIG. 290 is that the processing from step Sr0103 to step Sr0105 in FIG. 290 is omitted, and the processing of other steps is the same as the main processing shown in FIG. 290. be. That is, in this modification, the main side abnormal power interruption flag is not provided, and the power interruption type command (normal power interruption command or abnormal power interruption command) corresponding to the state of the main side abnormal power interruption flag is not provided. The process of transmitting data to the light emission control device 90 is not executed.

Next, the power supply monitoring process executed by the main MPU 62 of this modification will be described.

Figure 321 is a flowchart showing the power supply monitoring process executed by the main MPU 62 of the 12th modified example of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the power supply monitoring process shown in Figure 294 is that if it is determined in step Sr0502 of Figure 321 that the power switch 85a is OFF, a normal power interruption occurrence command is sent to the voice and light emission control device 90 in step Sr0503a, whereas if it is determined that the power switch 85a is ON, an abnormal power interruption occurrence command is sent to the voice and light emission control device 90 in step S0504a. The processing of the other steps is the same as the power supply monitoring process shown in Figure 294.

Next, a description will be given of a power interruption type determination process executed by the audio/light side MPU 92 of this modification.

FIG. 322 is a flowchart showing a power interruption type determination process executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92 of modification 12 of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr4301a, it is determined whether the movable element 99 for performance is located on the origin position sensor side. Specifically, it is determined whether the signal from the origin position sensor is at Hi level or not, and if the signal from the origin position sensor is at Hi level, the movable part 99 for presentation is located on the origin position sensor side. It is determined that the In step Sr4301a, if it is determined that the movable part 99 for performance is located on the origin position sensor side (step Sr4301a: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4302a, and the abnormal power cutoff flag on the sound and light side is turned OFF. After that, the main power outage type determination process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sr4301a, if it is determined that the movable part 99 for production is not located on the origin position sensor side (step Sr4301a: NO), the process advances to step Sr4303a, and the sound and light side abnormal power cut flag is turned ON. . After that, the main power outage type determination process ends.

Next, a description will be given of the audio-optical side power cutoff process executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92 of this modification.

FIG. 323 is a flowchart showing the audio-optical side power cutoff process executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92 of modification 12 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the sound-light side power interruption process shown in FIG. 314 is that when it is determined in step Sr6201 in FIG. 323 that a power interruption occurrence command has been received, the received power interruption occurrence command is a normal power interruption occurrence command. (Step Sr6201a1), and if it is determined that the command is a normal power outage generation command, the moving part 99 for effect is moved to the origin position sensor side (Step Sr6201a2); If it is determined that there is, the movable part 99 for effect is moved to the maximum position sensor side (step Sr6201a3), and the processing of other steps is the same as the sound and light side power cutoff processing shown in FIG. 314. be.

As described above, this modified example can achieve the same effects as the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, and can also achieve the following effects.

According to this modification, when the power switch 85a is determined to be in the ON position when the supply of power from the outside is cut off, the movable part 99 for performance is moved to the maximum position, so that the power from the outside is If the power switch 85a is in the OFF position when the power supply is cut off, the movable part 99 for performance remains at the origin position, whereas when the power supply from the outside is cut off, the power switch 85a is in the ON position. In this case, the movable element 99 for performance moves to a position other than the origin position. That is, the position of the power switch 85a in the pachinko machine 10 when the supply of power from the outside is cut off is indicated by the position of the movable element 99 for performance. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can visually check whether the movable performance object 99 is at the original position or not, and switch the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 when the external power supply is cut off. The position of 85a can be easily confirmed.

According to this modification, if it is determined that the movable element 99 for effect is at the origin position when the supply of power from the outside is started, the RTC effect execution permission flag and the stationary suggestion effect execution permission flag are flagged. OFF, and if it is determined that it is not the origin position, it executes the process of turning on the RTC performance execution permission flag and the deferred suggestion performance execution permission flag, so the contents of the process to be executed can be controlled from the outside. The power switch 85a can be switched depending on the position of the power switch 85a when the power supply is cut off. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed depending on the position of the power switch 85a.

In addition, according to this modified example, the transmission of the main side abnormal power cut flag and power cut type command (normal power cut command, abnormal power cut command) can be omitted, thereby reducing the processing load on the main control device 60.

Note that each of the configurations of the above-mentioned modified examples 1 to 11 may be applied to this modified example. Even in this case, the effects described in modified examples 1 to 11 can be achieved.

<<7-7-13>> Variation 13:
In the seventh embodiment, the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage can be determined at the next startup based on the state of the main abnormal power outage flag stored in the main RAM 64 of the main control device 60. In the 12th modification, the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage can be determined at the next startup based on the position of the performance movable object 99 controlled by the sound and light emission control device 90. Therefore, in this modification, the configuration of the seventh embodiment and the configuration of the 12th modification may be combined, and a determination may be made as to whether there is a difference between the results of the determinations, and if there is a difference, a notification may be given. An example of the processing executed by the main MPU 62 and the sound and light MPU 92 of this modification will be described below.

The processing performed by the main side MPU 62 and the audio-visual side MPU 92 in this modified example differs from that in the seventh embodiment above only in the content of the power supply monitoring processing (Fig. 294), power interruption type determination processing (Fig. 310), and audio-visual side power interruption processing (Fig. 314), and the other processing is the same as in the seventh embodiment above. Below, the power supply monitoring processing performed by the main side MPU 62 in this modified example and the power interruption type determination processing and audio-visual side power interruption processing performed by the audio-visual side MPU 92 in this modified example are described.

Figure 324 is a flowchart showing the power supply monitoring process executed by the main MPU 62 of the modified example 13 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the power supply monitoring process shown in Figure 294 is that in step Sr0503 of Figure 324, after the main side abnormal power interruption flag is turned OFF, the process proceeds to step Sr0503b, a normal power interruption occurrence command is sent to the voice and light emission control device 90, and then the process proceeds to step Sr0506, and in step Sr0504 of Figure 324, after the main side abnormal power interruption flag is turned ON, the process proceeds to step Sr0504b, an abnormal power interruption occurrence command is sent to the voice and light emission control device 90, and then the process proceeds to step Sr0506. The processing of the other steps is the same as the power supply monitoring process shown in Figure 294.

Next, we will explain the power failure type determination process executed by the audio-visual side MPU 92 in this modified example.

FIG. 325 is a flowchart showing a power interruption type determination process executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92 of modification 13 of the seventh embodiment. In this modification, the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage recognized by the main controller 60 (the state of the main side abnormal power outage flag, the type of the power outage type command) and the sound emission control device 90 side are The state of the power switch 85a (the position of the movable element 99 for performance) at the time of the recognized previous power outage is compared, and if they do not match, an abnormality notification is executed. This will be explained in detail below.

In step Sr4301, it is determined whether a power interruption type command has been received from the main MPU 62. Specifically, in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not one of the two commands, the normal power outage command and the abnormal power outage command described above, has been received from the main MPU 62. In step Sr4301, if it is determined that one of the two commands described above has been received (step Sr4301: YES), the process advances to step Sr4302. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4301 that neither of the two commands described above has been received (step Sr4301: NO), the process returns to step Sr4301 again. That is, the process waits until it is determined that one of the two commands mentioned above has been received, and when it is determined that one of the two commands mentioned above has been received, the process proceeds to step Sr4302. move on.

In step Sr4302, it is determined whether the command received as the power cutoff type command from the main MPU 62 is an abnormal power cutoff command. In step Sr4302, if it is determined that the command received as the power cutoff type command from the main MPU 62 is an abnormal power cutoff command (step Sr4302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4303, where the sound/light side abnormal power cutoff flag stored in the sound/light side RAM 94 is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr4303b1.

In step Sr4303b1, it is determined whether the movable object 99 for performance is located on the origin position sensor side. In step Sr4303b1, if it is determined that the movable object 99 for performance is not located on the origin position sensor side (step Sr4303b1: NO), that is, if the state (ON state) of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage recognized by the main control device 60 side and the state (ON state) of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage recognized by the audio and light emission control device 90 side match, the power outage type determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4303b1 that the movable part 99 for performance is located on the origin position sensor side (step Sr4303b1: YES), that is, the power source at the time of the previous power outage recognized by the main controller 60 side If the state of the switch 85a (ON state) does not match the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage (OFF state) recognized by the audio emission control device 90 side, the process advances to step Sr4303b2; Execute abnormality notification processing. In this modification, the abnormality notification process is a process in which a voice such as "An abnormality has occurred. Please check." is repeatedly output from the speaker 46 at maximum volume. After that, the infinite loop process is repeated.

In step Sr4302, if it is determined that the command received as the power interruption type command from the main side MPU 62 is not an abnormal power interruption command (step Sr4302: YES), that is, the command received as the power interruption type command from the main side MPU 62 is normal. If it is a power interruption command, the process advances to step Sr4304, and the audio-optical side abnormal power interruption flag stored in the audio-optic side RAM 94 is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sr4304b1.

In step Sr4304b1, it is determined whether the movable element 99 for performance is located on the origin position sensor side. In step Sr4304b1, if it is determined that the movable part 99 for production is located on the origin position sensor side (step Sr4303b1: YES), that is, the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage recognized by the main controller 60 side If the state (OFF state) of the power switch 85a matches the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage (OFF state) recognized by the audio emission control device 90 side, the main power outage type determination process is performed. end.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4304b1 that the movable part 99 for performance is not located on the origin position sensor side (step Sr4303b1: NO), that is, the power supply at the time of the previous power outage recognized by the main controller 60 side If the state of the switch 85a (OFF state) does not match the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage (ON state) recognized by the audio emission control device 90 side, the process advances to step Sr4304b2; Execute abnormality notification processing. In this modification, the abnormality notification process is a process in which a voice such as "An abnormality has occurred. Please check." is repeatedly output from the speaker 46 at maximum volume. After that, the infinite loop process is repeated.

Next, we will explain the audio-visual side power cutoff process executed by the audio-visual side MPU 92 in this modified example.

Figure 326 is a flowchart showing the sonic/optical side power cut-off process executed by the sonic/optical side MPU 92 in variant 13 of the seventh embodiment. The sonic/optical side power cut-off process shown in Figure 326 is the same as the sonic/optical side power cut-off process in variant 12 shown in Figure 323, so a detailed description will be omitted.

As described above, this modified example can achieve the same effects as the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, and can also achieve the following effects.

According to this modified example, if the power switch 85a is in the OFF position when the external power supply is cut off, the performance movable object 99 remains in the origin position, whereas if the power switch 85a is in the ON position when the external power supply is cut off, the performance movable object 99 moves to the maximum position. Therefore, the manager of the game hall, etc., can easily check the position of the power switch 85a in the pachinko machine 10 when the external power supply is cut off by visually checking whether the performance movable object 99 is in the origin position.

Further, according to this modification, when the supply of power from the outside is started, the main side abnormal power outage flag (and the sound and light side abnormal power outage flag) is OFF, and the movable part 99 for performance If it is determined that is the origin position, a process is executed to turn off the RTC performance execution permission flag and the deferred suggestion performance execution permission flag, and on the other hand, the main side abnormal power outage flag (and the sound and light side abnormal power outage flag) is determined to be ON, and when it is determined that the movable object 99 for performance is not at the origin position, processing is executed to turn on the RTC performance execution permission flag and the deferred suggestion performance execution permission flag. Therefore, the content of the process to be executed can be switched depending on the position of the power switch 85a when the external power supply is cut off. According to this modification, the position of the power switch 85a when the external power supply is cut off is determined by a dual system of the main control device 60 and the sound emission control device 90. The reliability of results can be improved.

Also, according to this modified example, when the main side abnormal power interruption flag (and the sound/light side abnormal power interruption flag) is OFF and the second judgment means judges that the performance movable object 99 is not at the origin position, an abnormality notification process (step Sr4304b2 in FIG. 325) is executed. Furthermore, when the main side abnormal power interruption flag (and the sound/light side abnormal power interruption flag) is ON and it is judged that the performance movable object 99 is at the origin position, an abnormality notification process (step Sr4303b2 in FIG. 325) is executed. Therefore, the manager of the gaming hall, etc. can notice that an abnormal state has occurred in which the judgment results of the main control device 60 and the sound/light emitting control device 90 in the pachinko machine 10 are contradictory. Specifically, for example, it is difficult for a fraudulent person such as a cheater to prepare a fraudulent board that stores information that matches the state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the previous power outage, so if part of the main control device 60 is replaced with the fraudulent board, inconsistencies are likely to occur in the judgment results of the main control device 60 and the sound and light emission control device 90. According to this modified example, if the inconsistency is detected, an abnormality notification process is executed, so that the manager of the gaming hall or the like can realize that the pachinko machine 10 may have been operated fraudulently or modified. The manager or the like can then temporarily suspend operation of the pachinko machine 10 and inspect the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

Note that each of the configurations of the above-mentioned modified examples 1 to 11 may be applied to this modified example. Even in this case, the effects described in modified examples 1 to 11 can be achieved.

《7-7-14》Variation 14:
In the above modification 12 and the above modification 13, when the power switch 85a is in the ON state at the time of power outage (for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are turned off at the same time by the island power switch) The movable object 99 for performance is moved to the maximum position, the position of the movable object 99 for performance is determined at the next startup, and after the determination, the movable object 99 for performance is moved from the maximum position to the origin position. It may be configured such that it is possible to test whether the movable member 99 operates normally.

Specifically, for example, if the power switch 85a is in the ON state at the time of power outage (for example, if a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are turned off at the same time by an island power switch), the power outage processing is performed. , specify the rotation direction of the stepping motor (for example, forward rotation direction) to move the movable part 99 for performance from the origin position to the maximum position, set a predetermined number of steps (for example, 20) on the counter, and start the stepping motor. When the number of steps set in the counter becomes 0, it is determined whether or not the movable object 99 for performance has been detected by the maximum position detection sensor. When the maximum position detection sensor detects the movable object 99 for performance, the driving of the stepping motor is ended. On the other hand, if the maximum position detection sensor does not detect the performance movable object 99, the counter is set one by one and the performance movable object 99 is further moved in the direction of the maximum position until it is detected. When the number of added steps exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5), a movable object malfunction flag is turned on.

Then, at the next startup, the state of the movable object malfunction flag is determined, and if it is determined that the movable object malfunction flag is ON, it is determined that the movable object 99 for performance does not operate normally (i.e., there is an abnormality). Execute the moving object malfunction notification process to notify the following. On the other hand, if it is determined that the movable object malfunction flag is not ON, the position of the performance movable object 99 is determined. If it is determined that the movable part 99 for performance is at the maximum position, the rotational direction (for example, reverse direction) of the stepping motor for moving from the maximum position to the origin position is specified, and a predetermined number of steps (for example, 20 ) is set in the counter to drive the stepping motor, and when the number of steps set in the counter reaches 0, it is determined whether or not the movable object 99 for performance has been detected by the origin position detection sensor. When the movable object 99 for performance is detected by the origin position detection sensor, the driving of the stepping motor is ended. On the other hand, if the movable object 99 for performance is not detected by the origin position detection sensor, the movable object 99 for performance is further moved in the direction of the origin position by setting the counter one by one until it is detected. When the number of added steps exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5), the above-described movable object malfunction notification process is executed.

According to the modified example described above, in an amusement hall where the power supply to multiple pachinko machines 10 is started and stopped simultaneously using the island power switch of the island equipment, it is possible to simultaneously check whether the movable objects 99 used for performance of each pachinko machine 10 installed on the island equipment are operating normally.

<<7-7-15>> Variation 15:
Among the above-mentioned modified examples, in the configuration including the movable object 99 for performance, if the state of the power switch 85a at the time of power interruption is the ON state, the movable object 99 for performance is moved to the maximum position, and if the state of the power switch 85a at the time of power interruption is the OFF state, the movable object 99 for performance is moved to the origin position (remains at the origin position). However, the manner in which the movable object 99 for performance moves is not limited to this configuration, and for example, if the state of the power switch 85a at the time of power interruption is the ON state, the movable object 99 for performance may be moved to the origin position (remains at the origin position), and if the state of the power switch 85a at the time of power interruption is the OFF state, the movable object 99 for performance may be moved to the maximum position.

<<7-7-16>> Variation 16:
In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, the case where the power switch 85a is OFF when the power is cut off (for example, when each pachinko machine 10 is individually cut off by each power switch 85a) is expressed as "normal", and the case where the power switch 85a is ON when the power is cut off (for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are cut off at the same time by an island power switch) is expressed as "abnormal", but this expression is for convenience, and for example, the case where the power switch 85a is OFF when the power is cut off may be expressed as "abnormal", and the case where the power switch 85a is ON when the power is cut off may be expressed as "normal". Furthermore, expressions other than "normal" and "abnormal" may be used, and for example, the case where the power switch 85a is OFF when the power is cut off may be expressed as "first state", and the case where the power switch 85a is ON when the power is cut off may be expressed as "second state".

<<8>> Eighth embodiment:
《8-1》Structure of gaming machine:
FIG. 327 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") as the eighth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, this outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back side of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window 18 is formed in the approximate center of the front door frame 14. Resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided around the window 18. The electric parts are composed of light-emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role in enhancing the presentation effect by lighting or blinking during each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, etc. In addition, a glass unit 19 consisting of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the open window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board through the glass unit 19 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as loaned balls loaned from a loaning machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and launches the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front of the game board. The lower tray 21 is disposed below the upper tray 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. The bottom surface of the lower tray 21 is formed with an outlet 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged to the outside from the lower tray 21.

A performance operation button 24 is provided at the front of the periphery of the upper tray 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation unit that allows the player to perform input operations for the game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

On the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, simply referred to as the "right side"), an operating handle 25 for the player to operate is provided. When the player operates (rotates) the operating handle 25, game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting the operation of the game ball launching mechanism, a wait button 25b that stops the launch of game balls by the game ball launching mechanism when pressed by the player, and a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a turns on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in response to the amount of rotation, and game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "left side"). When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing strength to the front of the game board, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired to the front of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and also flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can perform what is called a "right-handed hit." In the following explanation, the case where the game ball is fired by operating the operation handle 25, and the game ball flows to the left side of the game board when viewed from the front and also flows down the left side of the game board will be referred to as the case where the player It is sometimes expressed as ``hit''. Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball firing button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, but it is also possible to arrange the game ball firing button 26 at another position. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged inside (periphery) of the operating handle 25 similarly to the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball firing button 26 with only his right hand.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. Control equipment for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 328 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 is equipped with a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board whose function is to mainly control the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured so that traces of opening and closing are left behind. For example, sealing stickers are affixed to the parts that can be opened and closed, and the word "opened" appears when the board box is opened.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio/light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The audio/light emission control device 90 controls light-emitting means such as speakers and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands sent from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands sent from the audio/light emission control device 90. The pattern display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays patterns and images for performances.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The firing control device 80 controls the game so that when an instruction to fire a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 that is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a slope that is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and gently sloped so that the game balls flow downstream. A tank rail 55 having a tank rail 55, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, receiving game balls from the case rail 56 and paying out a predetermined number of game balls according to instructions from a payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the power necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . The ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88 switches between a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

Figure 329 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to define a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. Game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism are guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flow down the game area PA. In the game area PA, multiple nails 42 are planted approximately perpendicular to the game board 30, and various gimmicks such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 includes a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33 on the center side (hereinafter simply referred to as the first starting opening 33), a second starting opening 34, and a first starting opening 44 on the right side (hereinafter simply referred to as the first starting opening 33). A through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided. The second starting port 34 and the first right starting port 44 are provided inside the starting port unit 200.

The game board 30 is also provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The variable display unit 40 is provided in approximately the center of the game board 30, and the main display section 45 is provided near the upper right when viewed from the front of the game board 30. A decorative frame member DF with a decorative surface is attached to the game board 30 so as to surround the variable display unit 40.

In the space between the upper right side of the decorative frame member DF, the outer rail portion 31b, and the main display portion 45, the first right-hand rail R1 and the second right-hand rail R2 are provided. The right-hand outer rail R3 is provided on the right side of the lower portion of the second right-hand rail R2. The first right-hand rail R1 and the second right-hand rail R2 form the first right-hand path P1. The second right-hand rail R2, the outer rail portion 31b, the main display portion 45, and the right-hand outer rail R3 form the second right-hand path P2. The first right-hand path P1 and the second right-hand path P2 are both formed in an approximately arc shape, and the first right-hand path P1 and the second right-hand path P2 are positioned side by side. The first right-hand path P1 is located inside the second right-hand path P2.

Both the opening end P1a on one side of the first passage P1 when hitting right-handed and the opening end P2a on one side of the second passage P2 when hitting right-handed are both located near the top of the gaming area PA, allowing the game ball to enter. ing. The opening end P1b on the other side of the first passage P1 when playing right-handed and the opening end P2b on the other side of the second passage P2 when playing right-handed are both located near the right side of the gaming area PA, According to this, the game ball can be sent toward the starting port unit 200, and according to the second path P2 when hitting right, the game ball can be sent toward the variable winning device 36.

As explained above, by turning the operating handle 25 (Fig. 327) to its maximum amount or by operating the game ball launch button 26 (Fig. 327), the game ball can be launched toward the right side of the game area PA in a so-called "right hit" operation, and in these cases, the game ball can be guided to the second passage P2 when hitting to the right. In contrast, by adjusting the amount of turning the operating handle 25 (Fig. 327) from its maximum amount to a smaller amount, the game ball can be guided to the first passage P1 when hitting to the right. Hereinafter, the second passage P2 when hitting to the right is referred to as the "strong right hit passage P2", and the first passage P1 when hitting to the right is referred to as the "weak right hit passage P1". The operation of guiding the game ball to the strong right hit passage P2, i.e., maximizing the rotation amount of the operating handle 25 (Figure 327) or operating the game ball launch button 26 (Figure 327), is called the "strong right hit operation" or simply "strong right hit", and the operation of guiding the game ball to the weak right hit passage P1 is called the "weak right hit operation" or simply "weak right hit".

The general winning opening 32 is a ball entry opening member that forms an entry opening through which a game ball can enter, and multiple general winning openings are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (Fig. 328).

The central first starting hole 33 is a ball entry hole member that forms a ball entry hole through which a game ball can enter. The central first starting hole 33 is provided at the center below the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the central first starting hole 33, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting hole 34 is a ball entry hole member that forms a ball entry hole through which a game ball can enter, and is provided inside the starting hole unit 200. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The game board 32 has multiple openings that penetrate in the front-to-rear direction. Game balls that enter the general winning hole 32, the central first starting hole 33, and the second starting hole 34 are guided to the individual openings formed in the game board 32 and sent to the back side of the game board 30.

The right-side first starting hole 44 is provided on the right side of the game board 30, and is provided inside the starting hole unit 200. The right-side first starting hole 44 is configured as a through hole through which a game ball can pass. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the right-side first starting hole 44, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed. In addition, an electric device 34a is provided in the right-side first starting hole 44.

The through gate 35 is provided below the opening end P1b of the weak right-handed ball passage P1 and above the ball entrance of the starting port unit 200 (the ball entrance 210a of the main passage 210, which will be described later), and penetrates in the vertical direction. It has a through hole. The game ball flowing down from the opening end P1b of the weak right-handed ball passage P1 passes through the through gate 35, and then enters the ball entrance 210a. In this embodiment, the game ball that passes through the through gate enters the ball entrance 210a with a probability of 100%. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to perform a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the passage as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery). If the electric role release is won as a result of the internal lottery, the electric role accessory 34a shifts to the electric role release state in which the electric role is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged upstream of the first starting port 44 on the right side with respect to the downward direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down inside the starting port unit 200 after passing through. The ball can then enter the first starting port 44 on the right side. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 is provided below the opening end P1b of the strong right-hand hit passage P2. The variable winning device 36 is provided with a large winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 36a. When a big win is won as a result of an internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60 and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state and a closed state in which the game ball can enter as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by a ball entering the center first starting opening 33, the right first starting opening 44, or the second starting opening 34, and is entered when a big win is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60. That is, if a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 on the center side, the opening and closing execution mode is switched to in which the ball can enter the large winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36. Similarly, if a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting hole 44 on the right side, and if a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, the opening and closing execution mode is switched to in which the ball can enter the large winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71. Next, the configuration of the starting hole unit 200 will be described in detail.

FIG. 330 is an explanatory diagram showing the starting port unit 200. This figure is a view of the game board 30 seen from the front. The starting port unit 200 includes a main line passage section 210, a first branch passage section 220 that branches from the middle of the main line passage section 210 and extends downward, and a second branch passage section that branches from the middle of the first branch passage section 220 and extends downward. 230 , a second starting port 34 , a first right starting port 44 , a starting port in-unit out port 251 , and a fall port 252 . In this embodiment, the main path section 210, the first branch path section 220, and the second branch path section 230 are formed of a transparent resin material, and the player can understand the flow of game balls inside the starting port unit 200. It is possible to observe

The main line passage section 210 has a ball entrance 210a at the upper end and a ball ejection port 210b at the lower end, and is a passage through which game balls can flow from the ball entrance 210a to the ball ejection port 210b. A second starting port 34 is provided below the ball ejection port 210b. An opening 210c through which game balls can enter is formed in the middle of the main line passage section 210, and the upper opening end of the first branch passage section 220 is connected to the opening 210c. The right side first starting port 44 is formed by the upper opening end of this first branch passage section 220. A detection sensor 67d for the right side first starting port is provided immediately below the right side first starting port 44. The detection sensor 67d for the right side first starting port detects the entry of game balls into the right side first starting port 44.

The electric device 34a is provided at the opening 210c of the main passage 210. The electric device 34a can be in an open state (shown by a broken line in the figure) in which the opening 210c is opened, or in a closed state (shown by a solid line in the figure) in which the opening 210c is closed, by moving a substantially rectangular plate material in the front-back direction in the figure. When the electric device 34a is in the open state, it allows the game ball to enter the first branch passage 220, i.e., the game ball to enter the right-side first starting hole 44, and when it is in the closed state, it prohibits the game ball from entering the first branch passage 220, i.e., the game ball to enter the right-side first starting hole 44. The game ball that enters the right-side first starting hole 44 proceeds downward through the first branch passage 220. On the other hand, the game ball that is prohibited from entering the right-side first starting hole 44 proceeds through the main passage 210 toward the ball opening 210b.

At the point where the first branch passage 220 branches into the second branch passage 230, a game ball distribution device 240 is provided. The game ball distribution device 240 includes a reciprocating rotating shaft 241 and a distribution piece 242 fixed to the reciprocating rotating shaft 241. The reciprocating rotating shaft 241a rotates (swings) reciprocally, so that the distribution piece 242 can move back and forth between a first position Q1 shown by a solid line in the figure and a second position Q2 shown by a dashed line in the figure. Specifically, the reciprocating rotating shaft 241 is connected to a game ball distribution drive unit 241a (see FIG. 337), and the reciprocating rotating shaft 241a is rotated reciprocally by the game ball distribution drive unit 241a, so that the distribution piece 240b moves back and forth between the first position Q1 and the second position Q2.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 60 (Fig. 337) executes drive control of the game ball distribution drive unit 241a so that the distribution piece 242 repeatedly holds the state in the first position Q1 for 2.0 seconds, and then holds the state in the second position Q2 for 0.1 seconds. As a result, the distribution piece 242 displaces to the second position Q2 for 0.1 seconds every 2.1 seconds, and remains in the first position Q1 for the remaining 2 seconds.

Figure 331 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls when the distribution piece 240b is in the first position Q1. When the distribution piece 242 is in the first position Q1, it can prohibit the game ball PB from entering the second branch passage portion 230 and send the game ball PB toward the downward end portion 220a of the first branch passage portion 220.

FIG. 332 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls when the distribution piece portion 240b is in the second position Q2. When the distribution piece part 242 is in the second position Q2, it allows the game ball PB to enter the second branch passage part 230 and moves it toward the lower end 230a of the second branch passage part 230. You can send game balls by

As shown in FIG. 330, a starting port unit outlet 251 is provided below the lower end 220a of the first branch passage 220, and the lower end 230a of the second branch passage 230 A fall opening 252 is provided below.

The start port unit outlet 251 is an inlet through which game balls can enter, and is provided inside the start port unit 200. Game balls that enter the start port unit outlet 251 are guided to an opening formed in the game board 32 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction, and are sent to the rear side of the game board 30.

The drop opening 252 is an entrance through which a game ball can enter, and is provided inside the starting opening unit 200. When a game ball enters the drop opening 252, the lottery mode for the winning lottery described below is changed from a high probability mode to a low probability mode. The game ball that enters the drop opening 252 is guided to an opening formed in the game board 32 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction, and is sent to the back side of the game board 30.

According to the starting hole unit 200 configured as described above, the distribution piece 242 is displaced to the second position Q2 for 0.1 seconds every 2.1 seconds, so that a game ball that enters the right-side first starting hole 44 will enter the drop hole 252 with a probability of 0.1 seconds for this 2.1 seconds (= 1/21). Note that the probability that a game ball that enters the right-side first starting hole 44 will enter the drop hole 252 does not have to be limited to a probability of 1/21, and may be changed to another value of probability.

According to the start port unit 200 configured as described above, the game ball that enters the ball entrance 210a flows along one of the following first to third routes.
(i) First route RT1: As shown by the solid line in Fig. 333, this is a route in which the game ball PB enters the first start hole 44 on the right side and then enters the out hole 251 in the start hole unit. In other words, this is a route through which the ball can enter the first start hole 44 on the right side.
(ii) Second route RT2: As shown by the solid line in Fig. 334, this is a route in which the game ball PB enters the right-side first starting hole 44 and then enters the fall hole 252. In other words, this is a route in which the ball can enter the right-side first starting hole 44 and can also enter the fall hole 252.
(iii) Third route RT3: As shown by the solid line in Fig. 335, this is a route through which the game ball PB enters the second starting hole 34. In other words, this is a route through which the game ball PB can enter the second starting hole 34.

Which of the first to third routes RT1 to RT3 will be determined depends on whether the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the game ball reaches the position in front of the electric accessory 34a, and whether the game ball is in the open state or not. It is determined by whether the distribution piece part 242 is in the first position Q1 or the second position Q2 when the position in front of the distribution piece part 242 of the game ball distribution device 240 is reached. Specifically, the game ball PB flows along the first route RT1 (FIG. 333) because the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the game ball reaches the position in front of the electric accessory 34a. In addition, when the game ball reaches a position in front of the distribution piece part 242 of the game ball distribution device 240, the distribution piece part 242 is in the first position Q1. The reason why the game ball PB flows along the second route RT2 (FIG. 334) is that when the game ball reaches the position in front of the electric accessory 34a, the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, and the game ball is in the open state. This is a case where the distribution piece part 242 is at the second position Q2 when the game ball distribution device 240 reaches the position in front of the distribution piece part 242. The game ball PB flows along the third route RT3 (FIG. 335) when the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state when the game ball reaches a position in front of the electric accessory 34a.

As shown in FIG. 329, an out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entry ports are ejected from the gaming area PA through the out port 43. Ru.

The game balls that enter the general winning hole 32, the first central starting hole 33, the second starting hole 34, the outlet hole 251 in the starting hole unit, the fall hole 252, the variable winning device 36, and the outlet hole 43 are configured to eventually merge into a discharge passage provided on the back of the game board 30, and the discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor that detects the game balls. By detecting the game balls with the discharge passage detection sensor, it is possible to know the number of game balls that have been launched onto the game board 30.

The main display section 45 includes a special figure unit 37, a regular figure unit 38, and a round display section 39.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern refers to a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 33, 44 (the first starting hole on the center side 33, the first starting hole on the right side 44). When a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 33, 44 is performed, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a variable first pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a stationary first pattern corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display section 37b is a display section for displaying a second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display section 37b is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. , causes the second symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. When the lottery ends, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop display the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

Here, the time period from when the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b starts to be displayed in a variable manner until it is stopped and displayed. Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a until the time when the first symbol is stopped and displayed is also called the first variation time, and The time period from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to the time it is stopped and displayed is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first reservation display section 37c and a second reservation display section 37d, which are made of LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. The first reservation display section 37c displays the number of reservations at the first starting ports 33, 44 (the first starting port 33 on the center side, the first starting port 44 on the right side) depending on the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, the game balls that have entered the first starting ports 33, 44 are held up to a maximum of four in total for the two first starting ports 33, 44. The second reservation display section 37d displays the number of reservations at the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are held.

The general map unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When a lottery to open an electric reel is held triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the general map unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to light up, flash, or display in a predetermined manner. When the lottery to open an electric reel is completed, the general map unit 38 displays in a predetermined manner corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light-emitting display unit in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of rounds of play that will occur in the open/close execution mode, or a display corresponding thereto. A round of play is a game in which the open/close door 36b remains open until one of the following conditions is met: either a predetermined upper limit duration has elapsed, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have entered the variable winning device 36. The number of rounds of play varies depending on the type of jackpot that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of rounds of play when the open/close execution mode is started, and ends when the open/close execution mode ends and a new game round begins.

Note that the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display section 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the drawing process and the drawing results.

The variable display unit 40 is disposed approximately in the center of the play area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a pattern display device 41. The pattern display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the pattern display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The pattern display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display section 37a performs a variable display or a stop display based on winning to the center side first starting port 33 or the right side first starting port 44, the symbol display device 41 displays a variable pattern of symbols in accordance with the variable display or stop display. Or display a stop sign. In addition, when the second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or a stop display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays a variable symbol or a stop display accordingly. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the display effect triggered by the ball entering the center first starting port 33, the right first starting port 44, or the second starting port 34, but is activated when a jackpot is won. It also performs display effects during opening/closing execution mode. The details of the symbol display device 41 will be explained below.

Figure 336 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns and display surface 41a variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. Figure 336 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. The first decorative pattern is an image displayed on the pattern display device 41, and is a pattern corresponding to the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display section 37a. The second decorative pattern is an image displayed on the pattern display device 41, and is a pattern corresponding to the second pattern displayed on the second pattern display section 37b.

As shown in FIG. 336(a), the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns representing the numbers 1 to 8 as the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern. Note that the variably displayed patterns may be patterns in which the numbers 1 to 8 are affixed with pictures of characters or the like.

FIG. 336(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As illustrated, a main display area MA and a sub display area SA are displayed on the display surface 41a. In the main display area MA, an image of the first decorative pattern may be displayed, and an image of the second decorative pattern may be displayed. Similarly, in the sub display area SA, similarly to the main display area MA, there are cases in which an image of the first decorative pattern is displayed, and cases in which an image of the second decorative pattern is displayed. When the image of the first decorative pattern is displayed in the main display area MA, the image of the second decorative pattern is displayed in the sub display area SA, and the image of the second decorative pattern is displayed in the main display area MA. , an image of the first decorative pattern is displayed in the sub-display area SA. Which of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the main display area MA and the sub display area SA is determined depending on the state of the game.

Three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, symbols numbered 1 to 8 are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order as the first decorative symbol or second decorative symbol shown in FIG. 336(a), and each symbol row is A fluctuating display that scrolls periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to top is performed. As shown in FIG. 336(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the active line L1.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, 44 (the first starting hole 33 on the center side, the first starting hole 44 on the right side) or the second starting hole 34, a variable display starts in which the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Then, the scrolling symbols switch from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displays a predetermined symbol in a stopped state. When the variable display of the symbols ends and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a jackpot win, a predetermined combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L1. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the effective line L1. Note that the form of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in the main display area MA is not limited to the above-mentioned form. For example, various modes of display of the first and second decorative symbols can be adopted, such as the number of symbol rows in the main display area MA, the number of active lines, the direction of the changing display of symbols in the symbol rows, and the number of symbols in each symbol row.

Three symbol rows Z4, Z5, and Z6 on the left, middle, and right are displayed in the sub display area SA. In each symbol row Z4 to Z6, symbols numbered 1 to 8 are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order as the first decorative symbol or second decorative symbol shown in FIG. 336(a), and each symbol row is A fluctuating display that scrolls periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to top is performed. As shown in FIG. 336(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the active line L2.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting ports 33, 44 (the first starting port 33 on the center side, the first starting port 44 on the right side), the symbols in each symbol row Z4 to Z6 are periodically displayed in a predetermined manner. A variable display that scrolls in the direction starts. Then, each of the scrolling symbols switches from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z4, symbol row Z6, and symbol row Z5, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z4 to Z6. . When the fluctuating display of symbols ends and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the active line L2. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the active line L2. In addition, the aspect of the 1st decorative pattern and the 2nd decorative pattern in the sub display area SA is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect. For example, there are various ways of displaying the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols, such as the number of symbol rows in the sub-display area SA, the number of active lines, the direction of fluctuating display of symbols in the symbol rows, and the number of symbols in each symbol row. It is possible to adopt this aspect.

Here, a "play round" refers to the period from when the changing display of the first pattern display section 37a or the second pattern display section 37b starts, when the changing display ends and becomes a stationary display, and until the stationary display ends, and is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the results of the winning lottery for the special information obtained based on the ball entering either the first starting hole 33, 44 (the central first starting hole 33, the right side first starting hole 44) or the second starting hole 34.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 336(b), a first reservation display area Ds1 and a second reservation display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first reservation display area Ds1, the number of reservations based on balls entering the first starting ports 33, 44 (center first starting port 33, right first starting port 44) is displayed. In the second reservation display area Ds2, the number of reservations based on the number of balls entering the second starting port 34 is displayed. As described above, in this embodiment, the number of reserved game balls that have won in the first starting ports 33, 44 (the first starting port 33 on the center side, the first starting port 44 on the right side) and the second starting port 34 is , up to four each.

Also, as shown in FIG. 336(b), the display surface 41a is provided with a first synchronous display unit Sync1 that performs a blinking display and a lighting display in synchronization with the variable display and the stop display of the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display unit 37a of the special pattern unit 37, and a second synchronous display unit Sync2 that performs a blinking display and a lighting display in synchronization with the variable display and the stop display of the second pattern displayed on the second pattern display unit 37b of the special pattern unit 37. Specifically, when the first pattern display unit 37a is performing a variable display, the first synchronous display unit Sync1 performs a blinking display, and when the first pattern display unit 37a is performing a stop display, the first synchronous display unit Sync1 performs a lighting display. Also, when the second pattern display unit 37b is performing a variable display, the second synchronous display unit Sync2 performs a blinking display, and when the second pattern display unit 37b is performing a stop display, the second synchronous display unit Sync2 performs a lighting display.

In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the sub display area SA, the first synchronized display section Sync1, and the second synchronized display section Sync2, but the display surface 41a A configuration may be adopted in which some or all of these displays are not displayed.

《8-2》Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

FIG. 337 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that includes elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a ROM 63 that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. It is equipped with a RAM 64 which is a memory for storing information. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may be provided with some of the functions that the MPU 62 has. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 are connected to an input port of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power necessary for the main control device 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies it to each device. Supply electricity. Furthermore, the power supply device 85 is equipped with a capacitor (not shown), and continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period when a power outage occurs or when the power switch 88 (Fig. 328) is turned off. do.

Furthermore, various detection sensors 67a to 67g are connected to the input ports of the main control board 61. Specifically, various ball entry holes such as the general winning hole 32, the first starting hole 33 on the center side, the second starting hole 34, the first starting hole 44 on the right side, the falling hole 252, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. It is connected to multiple detection sensors installed in the. Based on signals from various detection sensors 67a to 67g, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and whether or not a game ball has entered a through gate. 35 is passed. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting ports 33, 44 (the first starting port 33 on the center side, the first starting port 44 on the right side) and the second starting port 34. , based on the ball entering the through gate 35, an electric accessory opening lottery is executed.

In this embodiment, the start port unit outlet 251 provided in the start port unit 200 is also equipped with a detection sensor (not shown). The detection sensor is also connected to the input port of the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 can determine whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered the start port unit outlet 251 based on a signal from the detection sensor. By configuring the device to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the start port unit outlet 251, it is possible to detect a blockage of game balls in the first branch passage section 220 connecting the opening 210c and the start port unit outlet 251. Specifically, when a game ball is detected entering the first right-side starting port 44 based on a signal from the detection sensor 67d for the first right-side starting port, if the game ball is not subsequently detected by either the detection sensor for the second starting port or the detection sensor for the out-port 251 within the starting port unit, it can be determined that the game ball has become stuck in the first branch passage section 220.

The output port of the main control board 61 is connected to a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, an electric device drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric device 34a of the right-side first starting port 44, a game ball distribution drive unit 241a that moves the distribution piece 240b of the game ball distribution device 240 back and forth between the first position Q1 and the second position Q2, and the main display unit 45. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of the various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed. Also, if the electric role opening is selected as a result of the electric role opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric role drive unit 34b so that the electric role 34a is opened. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the main display unit 45. Also, when the type of jackpot is determined in the opening and closing execution mode and the number of rounds to be played in the opening and closing execution mode is determined, the MPU 62 executes display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45.

Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a ball entering the general prize opening 32 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted to the first starting opening 33, 44. If entering the ball is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is sent from the main control device 60, and if entering the second starting port 34 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is sent. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The payout control device 70 is connected to a launch control device 80. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of a game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is met. In addition, an operating handle 25 and a game ball launch button 26 are connected to the launch control device 80.

The audio emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be explained later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the audio and light emission control device 90 controls the operation of various lamps 47, which are light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, the operation of the speaker 46, and controls the display control device 100. In addition, the performance operation button 24 is connected to the audio and light emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by the player at a specified timing, the audio and light emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, etc. to perform a game performance that reflects the operation.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound and light emission control device 90. Specifically, based on various commands received from the sound and light emission control device 90, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination that will ultimately be stopped and displayed, as well as grasping whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach performance, and the content of the advance notice performance executed in each game round. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game round, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

Figure 338 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for the winning lottery, etc. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, the display settings of the main display unit 45, and the setting of the pattern display of the pattern display device 41. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to allocate the jackpot type such as a guaranteed jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. The reach random number counter C3 is used for the reach judgment of whether or not a reach will occur when the pattern sequence displayed on the pattern display device 41 is changed to an off-target state.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. In addition, the change type counter CS is used to determine the change time in the first and second pattern display sections 37a and 37b of the main display section 45, and in the pattern display device 41. Furthermore, the electric role opening counter C4 is used for the electric role opening lottery to determine whether or not the electric role 34a in the right-side first starting hole 44 is opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the center side first starting port 33 or the right side first starting port 44, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of ball entry. are stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b. Moreover, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of ball entry is changed to the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b. are stored in chronological order.

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be explained. As described above, the winning random number counter C1 is used in the winning lottery. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one in sequence within the range of 0 to 1199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value. Furthermore, when the winning random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is calculated based on the number of times when a game ball enters the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side and the first starting port on the right side 44). When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering. It is stored in Rb.

The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the judgment process execution area 64c, and is compared with the winning/failure table stored in the winning/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and the value of the jackpot is determined. It is determined whether or not. In addition, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area 64cp of the judgment processing execution area, and is compared with the winning/failure table stored in the winning/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. Then, it is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, 44 (the first starting hole 33 on the central side and the first starting hole 44 on the right side), the following process is executed in parallel: when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, 44 (the first starting hole 33 on the central side and the first starting hole 44 on the right side), the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the judgment process execution area 64c, and it is compared with the winning/losing table stored in the winning/losing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot will be awarded; and when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the judgment process execution area 64c, and it is compared with the winning/losing table stored in the winning/losing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot will be awarded. In the following, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, which is capable of executing in parallel the process of determining whether or not a jackpot will be generated when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, 44 and the process of determining whether or not a jackpot will be generated when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, and of executing the variable display of the first pattern display section 37a and the variable display of the second pattern display section 37b in parallel (simultaneously), is also referred to as a simultaneous variable machine.

In addition, in the following explanation, a game (also called a game round) that is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33, 44 will be expressed as a game round for the first starting hole, and will be referred to as a game round for the first starting hole. A game (also referred to as a game round) that is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the game ball 34 is sometimes referred to as a game round for the second starting opening.

Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, 44, the jackpot type counter C2 is updated to the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering the first starting port 33, 44. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the judgment process execution area 64c, and if the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, it determines the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the judgment process execution area 64c. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped on the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referenced.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described in detail. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reserve area Ra of the reserve information storage area 64b when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, 44, and is stored in the second reserve area Rb of the reserve information storage area 64b when the game ball enters the second starting hole 34. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reserve area Ra is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c, and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a reach occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reserve area Rb is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c, and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a reach occurs. However, if the winning lottery results in a big win and the mode transitions to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The term "reach" refers to a display state in which some combinations of symbols that may result in a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot are displayed as stopped in some of the multiple symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and in this state, the remaining symbol rows are displayed as varying symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 336(b), a symbol is first displayed as stopped in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is displayed as stopped in the symbol row Z3, forming a reach line, and when the reach line is formed, the symbol is displayed as varying symbols in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is displayed as stopped in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, the reach line is formed, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a reach effect. This includes a method in which a combination of symbols in which a reach line is formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, a decision is made as to whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

Next, the details of the change type counter CS will be explained. The change type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the change time in the first pattern display section 37a and the second pattern display section 37b, and the change time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41. The change type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The change type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is repeatedly updated during the remaining time in the normal processing. The buffer value of the change type counter CS is acquired when the change display in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b starts, and when the change pattern is determined when the pattern display device 41 starts changing the pattern. When determining the change time in the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b, the change time table stored in the change time table memory area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be explained. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 in the electric role execution area 64e A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory opening lottery) is held to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, in the electric role playing area 64e, the win/fail table (the win/fail table for the electric role-playing object lottery) stored in the object lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role-playing object opening counter C4 are determined. The information is compared, and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired values of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric role opening counter C4 corresponds to special information in the present invention. In addition, at least one of the values of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is also referred to as reserved information.

Next, the validity table will be explained. The win/fail table is table data for comparing with the winning random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the winning random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode as the lottery modes for winning lots, and when drawing a winning lottery in the low probability mode, the win/fail table for the low probability mode is referred to, and the winning lottery mode is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode. When drawing a winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. High probability mode (also referred to as high probability gaming state) is a gaming state that is started by winning a variable jackpot, and is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is relatively higher than in low probability mode. To tell. Further, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 uses the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b as a trigger when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, 44. A validity table for comparison, and a validity table for comparison with the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. are stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a win/fail table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), a winning/failure table for the first starting port (for high probability mode), and a winning/failure table for the second starting port (for low probability mode). Four validity tables are stored in the validity table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, including a validity table for the second starting port (for the high probability mode) and a validity table for the second starting port (for the high probability mode).

Figure 339 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the first starting port. Figure 339(a) shows the hit/miss table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), and Figure 339(b) shows the hit/miss table for the first starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 339(a), four values from 0 to 3 are set in the win/fail table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode) as the value of the winning random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot. There is. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the four values 0 to 3 (4 to 1199) are outliers.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 339(b), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set in the win/fail table for the first starting opening (for high probability mode) as the value of the winning random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot. has been done. In addition, 40 values from 20 to 59 are set as the value of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a special small win, and 1140 values from 60 to 1199 are set as the value of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a normal small win. There is.

Here, a "small win" is a win/lose result that triggers a transition to an opening/closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode described below, and furthermore, the number of rounds of play that occur in the opening/closing execution mode is limited to one. In this embodiment, there are two types of small wins: a normal small win and a special small win (premium small win). The special small win is a small win that can trigger a transition of the support mode from a high-frequency support mode to a low-frequency support mode. Note that the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 once during a small win is 0.1 sec.

A "miss" is a win/fail result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and also does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode or the support mode. In this embodiment, there is no setting of a value that is a "miss" in the success/failure table for the first starting port (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. 339(b).

In this embodiment, the set of values of the winning random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the winning/losing table for the first starting port (for low probability mode) is included in the set of values of the winning random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the winning/losing table for the first starting port (for high probability mode). However, as long as the winning lottery result shows a higher probability of a jackpot in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

FIG. 340 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table for the second starting port. FIG. 340(a) shows the pass/fail table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 340(b) shows the pass/fail table for the second starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 340(a), the hit/miss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode) has four values, 0 to 3, set as the value of the hit random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the four values from 0 to 3 (4 to 1199) is a miss. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 340(b), the hit/miss table for the second starting port (for high probability mode) has 20 values, 0 to 19, set as the value of the hit random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 (20 to 1199) is a miss. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the hit lottery than the low probability mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the winning/losing table for the second starting port (for low probability mode) is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the winning/losing table for the second starting port (for high probability mode). However, as long as the winning lottery result shows a higher probability of a jackpot in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

Next, the types of jackpots will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes.
(1) The manner of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode. (2) A lottery mode for a winning lottery after the opening and closing execution mode ends. (3) A support mode for the electric device 34a of the right first starting hole 44 after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the occurrence of a ball entering the variable winning prize device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed multiple times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is not performed until 30 seconds have elapsed or the door 36b is closed. It can be set to continue until the number of balls entered reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 seconds have elapsed or the ball enters the opening/closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is shorter than the firing cycle of game balls. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no game balls enter the game ball. However, even in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the game ball may enter the game ball.

The number of openings and closings of the opening/closing door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are based on the number of entries to the variable prize winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the frequency of occurrence of balls is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b can be opened in any manner. Specifically, if the number of openings and closings in the high-frequency winning mode is higher than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be larger. good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, a configuration may be adopted in which the ball does not substantially enter the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

As the lottery mode for the winning lottery after the above (2) opening/closing execution mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 can be set to a high probability mode in which the winning lottery is performed using a high probability winning/losing table as the winning/losing table, and a low probability mode in which the winning lottery is performed using a low probability winning/losing table as the winning/losing table. As explained using Figures 339 and 340, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher when the winning lottery is performed using a high probability winning/losing table than when the winning lottery is performed using a low probability winning/losing table.

In the pachinko machine 10, as an aspect of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the right side first starting port 44 after the completion of the above-mentioned (3) opening/closing execution mode, the game ball is launched into the gaming area PA in a similar manner. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency at which the electric accessory 34a of the right side first starting port 44 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in a continuous situation. mode and can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role opening lottery in the electric role-playing object opening lottery using the electric role-playing object opening counter C4. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role-playing role in the electric role-playing lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time period for opening the electric accessory 34a once when an electric role opening win may be set is longer than that in the low-frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in this embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric role 34a is opened when the electric role opening is won may be set to be greater than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the opening time of the electric role 34a is set to be longer. Also, in the case where the electric role opening is won in the high-frequency support mode and the electric role 34a is opened multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state may be set to be shorter than the opening time of one. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured between one electric role opening lottery and the next electric role opening lottery may be set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a ball will enter the right first starting port 44 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in fulfilling the special information acquisition condition.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

Figure 341 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. Figure 341 (a) shows the distribution table for the first starting port, and Figure 341 (b) shows the distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referenced when a winning lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering the first starting port 33, and the distribution table for the second starting port is referenced when a winning lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering the second starting port 34.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. There are 16R sure-change jackpot, 8R sure-change jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot.

In the 16R definite variable jackpot and the 8R definite variable jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode, and the winning lottery mode (hereinafter simply referred to as "lottery mode") after the opening/closing execution mode ends. ) is the high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, which is a jackpot. The difference between the 16R fixed jackpot and the 8R fixed jackpot is that the number of openings of the door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is different, and the 16R fixed jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R fixed jackpot is 8 (8 rounds).

In the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a low probability mode, and the support after the opening/closing execution mode is completed. It is a jackpot that the mode becomes high frequency support mode. The number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the 8R normal jackpot is 8 times (8 rounds).

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 54" correspond to a 16R probability variable jackpot, and "55 to 69" correspond to an 8R probability variable jackpot. "70-99" corresponds to 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, three types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the form of jackpots is diversified. When comparing these three types of jackpots, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable jackpot, followed by the 8R variable jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By setting multiple types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player in this way, monotony of the game is suppressed and it is possible to increase attention to the game. Note that the types of jackpots do not need to be limited to the above three types of jackpots, and two or four types of jackpots can be used. For example, a configuration may be used in which four types of jackpots are set: a 16R variable jackpot, an 8R variable jackpot, a 16R normal jackpot, and an 8R normal jackpot.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. There are 16R sure-change jackpot, 8R sure-change jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" correspond to a 16R probability variable jackpot, and "65 to 69" correspond to an 8R probability variable jackpot. "70-99" corresponds to 8R normal jackpot.
It usually corresponds to a jackpot.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the allocation of the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won is different between when the jackpot is won based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 and when the jackpot is won based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage to the player.

If the winning lottery results in a loss, the game will not switch to the open/close execution mode, and the lottery mode and support mode will not change. If the jackpot type allocation results in a 16-round or 8-round jackpot, the lottery mode after the open/close execution mode ends will be the high probability mode, as explained above, but this high probability mode will continue until the next winning lottery results in a jackpot, or until a game ball enters the drop hole 252 provided in the starting hole unit 200.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and determines the type of the jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referenced.

Next, we will explain the table for reach determination (hereinafter referred to as the reach determination hit/miss table). The reach determination hit/miss table is table data for comparing with the value of the reach random number counter C3 when determining whether or not a reach has occurred based on the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Figure 342 is an explanatory diagram showing a hit/miss table for reach determination. As shown in Figure 342, in the hit/miss table for reach determination, 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as hit values for reach, among the values of the reach random number counter C3 from 0 to 399. Among the values from 0 to 399, values other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 (20 to 399) are set as misses, that is, values that do not win reach. In other words, in a situation where a jackpot is not won in the hit lottery, the probability of winning reach is 1/20.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment operates according to the total number of reserved game balls that is the sum of the number of reserved game balls that entered the first starting port 33 and the number of reserved game balls that entered the second starting port 34. Five reach determination tables with different probabilities of winning the reach are provided. The success/failure table shown in FIG. 342 is for when the total number of pending items is 4 or more, and the five success/failure tables for reach judgment including the hit/fail table show that the smaller the total number of pending items, the higher the probability of winning the reach. It's getting expensive. For example, if the total number of pending items is 3, the probability of reaching winning is approximately 1/11, if the total number of pending items is 2, the probability of reaching winning is approximately 1/10, and if the total number of pending items is 1, the probability of winning is approximately 1/11. The probability of winning a reach is approximately 1/9, and when the total number of pending items is 0, the probability of winning a reach is approximately 1/6. Note that the number of reach judgment propriety tables does not need to be limited to five, and may be two, three, four, six or more. In short, there are a plurality of success/failure tables for reach determination, and any structure may be used as long as the smaller the total number of pending tables, the higher the probability of winning the reach.

FIG. 343 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory lottery) used when executing the electric accessory lottery.

FIG. 343(a) shows a winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery used in the low-frequency support mode (for the low-frequency support mode). As shown in FIG. 343(a), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 as the value of electric accessory opening counter C4 that will be the winning electric accessory. Value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the low-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the low-frequency support mode, the electric role model 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 343(b) shows a winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery used in the high-frequency support mode (for the high-frequency support mode). As shown in FIG. 343(b), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) has 462 values from 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is the winning electric accessory. Value is set. Four values from 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the high-frequency support mode, the electric role model 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 0.5 seconds.

In this way, the winning/losing table for the electric device opening lottery is set so that the high frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the first right-side starting hole 44 than the low frequency support mode.

《8-3》Electrical configuration of audio light emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 344 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 337) are omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on a sound light emission control board 91 provided in the sound light emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is an element that includes a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, etc. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, a reach allocation table storage area 93c, etc. The details of these will be described later.

RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in ROM 93 is executed. For example, a portion of the area of RAM 94 is provided with a various flag storage area 94a, various counter areas 94b, a lottery counter area 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into a single chip for MPU 92, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 60 and the performance operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. The speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, as well as the display control device 100.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 is equipped with an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes the various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90 or performs predetermined calculations based on the various commands received, and controls the VDP 105 (specifically, generates internal commands for the VDP 105).

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for the background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 mediates the reading and writing of data by adjusting the timing of the MPU 102, video RAM 107, etc., and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols and pictures displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns and display pictures, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The various displayed pictures include pictures of petals P1 to P4, which will be described later. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

《8-4》Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained.

8-4-1. Switching between lottery mode and support mode:
In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a normal jackpot, the lottery mode transitions to a low probability mode and the support mode transitions to a high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Also, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a variable jackpot, the lottery mode transitions to a high probability mode and the support mode transitions to a high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

After transitioning to the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues as a support mode until the number of plays since the high-frequency support mode was started reaches a predetermined guaranteed number of plays. The "guaranteed number of plays" is the number of plays guaranteed to continue in the high-frequency support mode, for example 50 plays. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, after transitioning to the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is guaranteed up to the guaranteed number of plays of 50 plays. When the number of plays since the high-frequency support mode was started reaches the guaranteed number of plays, the support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode. Particularly in this embodiment, even if the high probability mode is still ongoing at the time when the number of plays that have reached the guaranteed number of plays ends, the support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode.

When the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the probability that the result of the electric role opening lottery executed upon passing through the through gate 35 will be an electric role opening winning is extremely high at 231/233, so the electric role 34a is essentially in an electric role opening state. Therefore, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game so that the game ball enters the right first start port 44 equipped with the electric role 34a by performing a weak right hit and letting the game ball flow down the weak right hit passage P1. The game ball that enters the right first start port 44 is sorted by the sorting piece 242 of the game ball sorting device 240 into a route toward the out port 251 in the start port unit and a route toward the fall port 252. Therefore, the game ball that enters the right first start port 44 has a possibility of entering the fall port 252, although the probability is low at 1/21 as explained above.

The trigger for switching to the high-frequency support mode is a certain variable jackpot, and if the number of games played after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games (for example, the 30th game), the falling hole 252 When a game ball enters the game ball, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. Then, from the next game round after the timing when the game ball enters the falling slot 252, a winning lottery is executed in the low probability mode. Regarding the support mode, a game ball enters the falling slot 252 in a game before the number of games played after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games (for example, the 30th game) Even if the probability mode ends and shifts to the low probability mode, the high frequency support mode will continue until the number of games played since the start of the high frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games (i.e. 50 times). Ru.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot with variable probability is won through a winning lottery, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode If you win a jackpot (regardless of whether it is a regular jackpot or a guaranteed jackpot) in a winning lottery in a playing round (for example, the 30th playing round) before the number of games played after the start of the game reaches the guaranteed number of games, The lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at the timing when the 30th game round in which the jackpot was won ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts. Regarding the support mode, the game shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the previous game (for example, the 30th game) ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts before reaching the guaranteed number of games. . That is, at the timing when the game round in which the jackpot was won ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts, both the lottery mode and the support mode are reset to the lower side.

《8-4-2》Game flow:
In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, at least four types of states can be taken as the game states to which the game changes as the game progresses, depending on the combination of the lottery mode and the support mode. Specifically, i) a low probability low support state where the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode, and ii) a low probability support state where the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode. iii) a high probability and low support state where the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode, and iv) a low probability mode where the lottery mode is a low probability support mode. and a low-probability-high support state where the support mode is a high-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, an opening/closing execution mode in which a game ball can enter the big prize opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 can be taken as the gaming state. The game progresses while transitioning between these gaming states.

Figure 345 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of play in a pachinko machine 10. When play begins, the game initially enters a low probability low support state (state H1). In other words, the lottery mode is a low probability mode, and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

Figure 346 is an explanatory diagram showing various aspects in each of the low probability low support state, low probability high support state, high probability high support state, and high probability low support state. Here, the aspects include whether or not the game ball can enter the first central starting hole 33, the first right starting hole 44, the fall hole 252, and the second starting hole 34, the change time of the first pattern, the change time of the second pattern, etc.

As shown in FIG. 346, in the low-probability low-support state, it is possible for the game ball to enter the first starting hole 33 on the central side. For this reason, in the low-probability low-support state, the player is made to hit the ball from the left, causing the game ball to flow down to the left side of the game area PA and enter the first starting hole 33 on the central side. When the game ball enters the first starting hole 33 on the central side, a game round for the first starting hole is executed and a winning lottery is held. At this time, the first decorative pattern, which is a presentation image corresponding to the game round for the first starting hole, is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a (see FIG. 336 (b)) of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the second decorative image, which is a presentation image corresponding to the game round for the second starting hole, is displayed in the sub-display area SA. In other words, since the target into which the player will enter the game ball is the first starting hole 33 on the central side, the first decorative pattern is displayed in the main display area MA.

Consider ball entry ports other than the first starting port 33 on the center side. In the low-accuracy, low-support state, the ball cannot enter the first starting port 44 on the right side and the falling port 252 provided in the starting port unit 200, but the ball can enter the second starting port 34. . In the low-probability, low-support state, the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, so there is an extremely high probability of 232/233 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery that is triggered by passing through the through gate 35 will be a loss. Therefore, the electric accessory 34a is substantially always closed, and the game ball flows along the third route RT3 (FIG. 335) described above, so that the ball can enter the second starting port 34. . For this reason, some players aim for the game ball to enter the second starting port 34 by hitting the game ball weakly to the right in a low-accuracy, low-support state and letting the game ball flow along the third route RT3. is possible. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a simultaneous variation machine, the variation time (hereinafter also referred to as special 2 variation time) of the second symbol display section 37b is set to an extremely long time, for example, 10 minutes. This structure suppresses repeated execution of a winning lottery in a short period of time triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. As a result, in this embodiment, it is possible to make the player give up performing a weak right-handed hitting operation in the low-accuracy, low-support state, and make him concentrate on left-handed hitting.

In addition, although the special 2 fluctuation time in the low-probability low support state was set to an extremely long time of 10 minutes, the fluctuation time of the first symbol display section 37a in the low-probability low support state (hereinafter also referred to as special 1 fluctuation time) is set to a normal length of time. The "normal length of time" here refers to the normal length of time determined by the value of the fluctuation type counter CS described later, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of reach, etc., and for example, from 2 seconds to It is 3 minutes.

Return to FIG. 345. If the winning lottery in the first starting hole game round executed in the low-probability low-support state (state H1) is a loss, the low-probability low-support state (state H1) continues, and the player throws the game ball into the central first starting hole 33 to execute the first starting hole game round.

If you win a jackpot in the winning lottery in the first starting opening game run in a low probability low support state, and the type of jackpot you won is a normal jackpot, the game will be played after the first starting opening gaming round ends. The opening/closing execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the user. That is, a transition is made from the low-reliability low support state (state H1) to the opening/closing execution mode (state H2). Prior to the round game that occurs in the opening/closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion performance that urges the player to hit hard to the right. The player executes a hard right hit after the game round for the first starting opening according to the suggested performance, causes the game ball to flow down to the hard right hit path P2, enters the game ball into the big winning opening 36a, and wins the prize. Get the ball.

When the opening and closing execution mode (state H2) ends, the game transitions to a low probability high support state (state H3). In other words, the lottery mode is a low probability mode, and the support mode is a high frequency support mode (limited to a guaranteed number of plays of 50).

As shown in FIG. 346, in the low probability high support state, it is possible to insert a game ball into the first starting hole 33 on the center side, the first starting hole 44 on the right side, and the fall hole 252, but it is impossible to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 34. In the low probability high support state, since the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the result of the electric role opening lottery executed in response to passing through the through gate 35 has a very high probability of 231/233, so that the electric role opening lottery is won, and the electric role 34a is essentially in an electric role opening state. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the support mode in the high frequency support mode, the distance from the through gate 35 to the electric role 34a, the opening time of the electric role 34a once, the number of times the electric role 34a is opened, the pattern change time in the normal picture unit 38, etc. are adjusted so that the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 passes through the electric role opening electric role 34a with a 100% probability. Therefore, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the game ball that passes through the through gate 35 and enters the ball entrance 210a flows along the first route RT1 (Fig. 333) or the second route RT2 (Fig. 334) described above, so that the game ball can enter the right first start entrance 44 and the outgoing port 251 in the start entrance unit, or the right first start entrance 44 and the fall port 252, and it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second start entrance 34. Even if the game ball enters the fall port 252, in the low probability high support state, the lottery mode is a low probability mode, so the player does not have to worry about transitioning to the low probability mode (so-called fall). Therefore, in the low probability high support state (state H3), the player can make a weak right hit and the game ball can flow down the weak right hit passage P1, so that the game ball can enter the right first start entrance 44 with a high probability.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 44 on the right side, a game round for the first starting port is executed and a winning lottery is performed. At this time, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a (see FIG. 336(b)) of the liquid crystal display device 41, a first decorative pattern, which is an effect image corresponding to the game round for the first starting opening, is displayed, and a sub-display A second decorative image, which is an effect image corresponding to the game round for the second starting opening, is displayed in the area SA. That is, since the target into which the player enters the game ball is the right side first starting port 44, the first decorative pattern is displayed in the main display area MA.

The special 1 change time and special 2 change time in the low probability high support state are set to the normal length of time (for example, 2 seconds to 3 minutes).

Return to FIG. 345. If the winning lottery for the first starting hole game played in the low probability high support state (state H3) is a miss, the low probability high support state (state H3) continues, and the player puts the game ball into the right-side first starting hole 44 to play the first starting hole game. When the number of games played since the high frequency support mode was started reaches the guaranteed number of games of 50, the state transitions to the low probability low support state (state H1).

If you win a jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round for the first starting opening executed in the low probability high support state (state H3), and the type of the won jackpot is a normal jackpot, the game round for the first starting opening After the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player. That is, a transition is made from the low-reliability, high-support state (state H3) to the opening/closing execution mode (state H2). Prior to the round game that occurs in the opening/closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion performance that urges the player to hit hard to the right. The player executes a hard right hit after the game round for the first starting opening according to the suggested performance, causes the game ball to flow down to the hard right hit path P2, enters the game ball into the big winning opening 36a, and wins the prize. Get the ball.

When a jackpot is won in the winning lottery during the first start port play round executed in the low probability high support state (state H3) and the type of jackpot won is a probability variable jackpot, the open/close execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player after the first start port play round ends. Here, the state transitions from the low probability high support state (state H3) to the open/close execution mode (state H4).

In the low-probability low-support state (state H1), the player aims to get the game ball to land in the first starting hole 33 on the center side, but there is no high probability of this happening. In contrast, in the low-probability high-support state (state H3), the player can hit the ball weakly to the right to get the game ball to land in the first starting hole 44 on the right side with a high probability. For this reason, the low-probability high-support state (state H3) is more advantageous for the player than the low-probability low-support state (state H1), since there are more opportunities for the first starting hole to be played and for the winning lottery to be held.

In the low-probability, low-support state (state H1), if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game round for the first starting opening, and the type of the won jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot, the gaming round for the first starting opening ends. The opening/closing execution mode is later executed as a benefit given to the player. That is, a transition is made from the low-reliability low support state (state H1) to the opening/closing execution mode (state H4).

Prior to the round game that occurs in the opening/closing execution mode (state H4), the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion performance that urges the player to hit hard to the right. The opening/closing execution mode (state H4) is the same process as the opening/closing execution mode (state H2). Although they are in the same opening/closing execution mode, they are distinguished into state H2 and state H4 because their branch destinations are different. When the opening/closing execution mode (state H4) ends, the state shifts to a high-accuracy/high-support state (state H5). That is, the lottery mode is a high probability mode, and the support mode is a high frequency support mode (limited to 50 guaranteed games).

As shown in FIG. 346, in the high probability high support state, it is possible to insert a game ball into the first starting hole 33 on the center side, the first starting hole 44 on the right side, and the fall hole 252, but it is impossible to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 34. The possibility of these balls entering is the same as the possibility of balls entering in the low probability high support state. However, in the low probability high support state, the lottery mode is already in the low probability mode, so the player does not have to worry about transitioning to the low probability mode (so-called fall), whereas in the high probability high support state, when a game ball enters the fall hole 252, the lottery mode transitions from the high probability mode to the low probability mode (so-called fall). In the high probability high support state, the support mode is the high frequency support mode, so the probability that the result of the electric role opening lottery executed in response to passing through the through gate 35 will be an electric role opening winning is extremely high at 231/233, so the electric role 34a is essentially in the electric role opening state. For this reason, as explained above, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, a game ball that passes through the through gate 35 and enters the ball entry port 210a flows along the first route RT1 (Figure 333) or the second route RT2 (Figure 334), making it possible for the game ball to enter the first right-side starting port 44 and the out-port 251 in the starting port unit, or the first right-side starting port 44 and the fall-off port 252, and making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 34.

In the high-accuracy, high-support state, the player makes a weak right-handed hit, causes the game ball to flow down into the weak right-handed hit path P1, and causes the game ball to enter the first starting port 44 on the right side. When a game ball enters the first starting port 44 on the right side, a game round for the first starting port is executed and a winning lottery is performed. At this time, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a (see FIG. 336(b)) of the liquid crystal display device 41, a first decorative pattern, which is an effect image corresponding to the game round for the first starting opening, is displayed, and a sub-display A second decorative image, which is an effect image corresponding to the game round for the second starting opening, is displayed in the area SA. That is, since the target into which the player enters the game ball is the right side first starting port 44, the first decorative pattern is displayed in the main display area MA.

Return to FIG. 345. If the winning lottery in the game round for the first starting port executed in the high-probability, high-support state (state H5) is a loss, the high-probability, high-support state (state H5) is repeated, and the right first starting port 44 is A game ball is entered and a game round for the first starting port is executed.

When a jackpot is won in a winning lottery during a first starting hole play round executed in the high probability high support state (state H5), and the type of jackpot won is a normal jackpot, the open/close execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player after the first starting hole play round ends. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 transitions from the low probability high support state (state H5) to the open/close execution mode (state H2). Prior to the round play that occurs in the open/close execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion performance that encourages the player to make a strong right hit.

If a jackpot is won in the winning lottery during the first start port play round executed in the high probability high support state (state H5) and the type of jackpot won is a probability variable jackpot, the open/close execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player after the first start port play round ends. Here, the state transitions from the high probability high support state (state H5) to the open/close execution mode (state H4).

When a game ball enters the falling hole 252 in the high-accuracy, high-support state (state H5), the state shifts to a low-accuracy, high-support state (state H3). That is, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and the support mode continues as the high frequency support mode. Furthermore, when transitioning to the low-probability, high-support state (state H3), the guaranteed number of games counter PNC, which indicates the number of consecutively executed games in the high-frequency support mode, is retained as before the transition. . Therefore, the number of consecutive games played in the high frequency support mode is not reset due to the transition to the low probability high support state (state H3).

The special 1 change time in the high probability high support state (state H5) is set to the normal length, and the special 2 change time in the high probability high support state (state H5) is set to, for example, 10 minutes. The reason why the special 2 change time in the high probability high support state (state H5) is set to an extremely long time of 10 minutes is as follows.

In the high-accuracy, high-support state, it is impossible to enter game balls into the second starting port 34, but pending information (up to 4 balls) is stored in the second holding area Rb of the pending information storage area 64b. In the remaining, high-probability, high-support state, a winning lottery may be executed based on the remaining pending information. In this case, a winning lottery will be executed with reference to the win/fail table (for high probability mode) for the second starting opening shown in FIG. 340(b), resulting in an excessively advantageous situation for the player. In order to solve this problem, in this embodiment, in a high-accuracy, high-support state, it is impossible to enter a game ball into the second starting port 34, but the second variation time is, for example, 10 minutes. By setting this to an extremely long time, the configuration suppresses the reservation information remaining in the second reservation area Rb from being repeatedly consumed in a short period of time.

In the high probability high support state (state H5), when the number of plays since the high frequency support mode was started reaches 50, which is the guaranteed number of plays, the state transitions to the high probability low support state (state H6). Also, if a special small win is won in the winning lottery for the first starting hole play executed in the high probability high support state (state H5), the state transitions to the high probability low support state (state H6). In the high probability low support state, the lottery mode is the high probability mode, and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the player can recognize that he or she has won a special small win in the winning lottery for the first starting hole play executed in the high probability high support state from the performance content corresponding to the performance pattern for the special small win displayed on the pattern display device 41.

As shown in FIG. 346, in the high accuracy and low support state, it is possible to enter the game ball into the center side first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, and the right side first starting port 44. It is impossible to enter the game ball into the falling hole 252. Since the support mode is low frequency support mode in the high certainty low support state, the probability that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery that is executed after passing through the through gate 35 will be a loss is extremely high at 232/233. Therefore, the electric accessory 34a is substantially always in a closed state, and the game ball flows along the third route RT3 (FIG. 335) described above, so that the ball can enter the second starting port 34, It becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the right side first starting port 44 and the falling port 252.

In the high probability low support state (state H6), the player can make a weak right hit and cause the game ball to flow down the weak right hit passage P1, thereby causing the game ball to enter the second starting hole 34. When the game ball enters the second starting hole 34, a game round for the second starting hole is executed and a winning lottery is held. At this time, the main display area MA of the display surface 41a (see FIG. 336 (b)) of the liquid crystal display device 41 displays the second decorative pattern, which is a presentation image corresponding to the game round for the second starting hole, and the sub-display area SA displays the first decorative image, which is a presentation image corresponding to the game round for the first starting hole. In other words, since the target into which the player is to cause the game ball to enter is the second starting hole 34, the second decorative pattern is displayed in the main display area MA.

If you win a jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round for the second starting opening executed in the high probability low support state (state H6), and the type of the won jackpot is a normal jackpot, the game round for the second starting opening After the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player. That is, the state shifts from the high-accuracy/low-support state (state H6) to the opening/closing execution mode (state H2).

If a jackpot is won in the lottery during the second start port play round executed in the high probability low support state (state H6) and the type of jackpot won is a probability variable jackpot, the open/close execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player after the second start port play round ends. In other words, the state transitions from the high probability low support state (state H6) to the open/close execution mode (state H4).

In the above-mentioned high-accuracy, low-support state (state H6), it is impossible or difficult for a game ball hit by a weak right-handed hit to enter the falling hole 252 as explained earlier, so the ball is hit at 100%. The ball will enter the second starting port 34 with a close probability (hereinafter, this probability will also be referred to as 100% for convenience). Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-accuracy/low-support state (state H6), the game continues 100% until a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game round for the second starting opening 34. It is possible to enter a game ball and draw a winning lottery. In other words, the high certainty and low support state (state H6) is a so-called invincible zone where there is no fall. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the state shifts from the high-accuracy, high-support state to the high-accuracy, low-support state (invincible zone), it is possible to reliably win the jackpot again, so-called consecutive winnings, and the game It is possible to give the user a sense of expectation that they will continue to watch the game. Therefore, with the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the guaranteed number of plays ends in a high-probability high support state, the state changes to a high-probability low support state. In this case, there is a risk that the special 2 fluctuation time, which is set to an extremely long time (long) of 10 minutes, will continue during the high-probability high support state. In a high-probability low support state (invincible zone), when the special 2 fluctuation, which is set to a long time, continues, it becomes impossible to repeatedly draw winning prizes in the invincible zone in a short period of time in response to a game ball entering the second starting hole 34, causing a disadvantage to the player. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the lottery results of the winning lottery on the winning/losing table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port are limited to big wins and small wins (special small wins, normal small wins) (no misses), and when the big win or small win fluctuation triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port (first starting port on the center side 33, first starting port on the right side 44) stops, the fluctuation of Special 2 set to long can be stopped regardless of the result of the winning lottery related to that Special 2. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the malfunction in which the fluctuation of Special 2 set to long continues in a high probability high support state in the invincible zone, and it is possible to suppress disadvantages to the player.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since the support mode is the high frequency support mode in the high probability high support state, the electric role 34a is substantially in the electric role open state, and the game ball that passed through the through gate 35 moves from the main line passage section 210 to the first branch passage section 220 in the start port unit 200 (Fig. 330). Therefore, the game ball that passed through the through gate 35 will always enter the right first start port 44. However, the game ball that entered the right first start port 44 will then enter the fall port 252 with a probability of 0.1 seconds for 2.1 seconds (= 1/21). The trigger for transitioning to the high frequency support mode is a sure-win, and if a game ball enters the fall port 252 in a play before the number of plays since the high frequency support mode was started reaches the guaranteed number of plays, the lottery mode transitions from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. In other words, if the game ball enters the first right-side starting hole 44, the lottery mode will switch from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, with a probability of 1/21, and the player may suffer a disadvantage.

On the other hand, if the number of games played since the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games without a game ball entering the falling hole 252, the support mode changes from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. Shifts to support mode, and the gaming state changes from a high-accuracy, high-support state to a high-accuracy, low-support state (invincible zone). When the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is substantially always closed, and as a result, the game ball flows along the third route RT3 (FIG. 335) and enters the second starting port 34 for playing the game. The ball enters the ball. In this case, unlike the case where the game ball flows toward the first starting port 44 on the right side, the game ball will not enter the falling port 252 and the lottery mode will not be shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. Therefore, the game rounds that are triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 can be played continuously without the possibility of a disadvantageous situation for the player. The high-probability-low-support state continues until the next jackpot is won, and the next jackpot is virtually guaranteed.

As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the high probability high support state, the player can be given a sense of urgency that the lottery mode will not transition from the high probability mode to the low probability mode (will not fall) when the game ball enters the fall opening 252 during the period from when the high frequency support mode is started until the number of plays reaches the guaranteed number of plays, and a sense of expectation that the number of plays will reach the guaranteed number of plays before falling. If the number of plays reaches the guaranteed number of plays without falling, the player can be given a sense of relief that he or she can transition to a high probability low support state (invincible zone) where the number of plays executed in response to the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 34 can be played consecutively without the risk of falling, and a sense of expectation that the player will win a jackpot in the near future in the high probability low support state by playing consecutive plays executed in response to the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 34. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can increase the player's interest in the game by giving them feelings of expectation, tension, and relief.

Conventional pachinko machines include loop type pachinko machines and ST type pachinko machines. A loop-type pachinko machine is a machine that remains in the high probability mode until the next jackpot is won in the winning lottery. The ST type pachinko machine is a model in which the number of games played in the high probability mode is limited. In the loop type pachinko machine, in a state of high probability mode, it is possible to give a player a sense of urgency as if he or she might win a jackpot in a winning lottery and the type of jackpot won will be a normal jackpot. On the other hand, in the ST type pachinko machine, in the high probability mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as if he or she might not win the jackpot within the limited number of times. In contrast, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to impart a sense of urgency as well as a sense of expectation that the number of games played reaches the guaranteed number of games before falling. In addition, if the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games without falling, the player is given the opportunity to play the game without the risk of falling, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. The sense of relief of being able to shift to a high-precision low support state (invincible zone) where you can continuously play the game rounds that are played continuously, and the sense of relief that you can move to the high-precision low support state (invincible zone) where you can continuously play the game rounds that are executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation of winning a jackpot soon in a state of high certainty and low support. Such a sense of relief and anticipation is an effect unique to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, and can improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, even if a special small jackpot is won in the winning lottery in a high probability high support state, the support mode transitions from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, and the game state transitions from the high probability high support state to the high probability low support state (invincible zone). This makes it possible to give the player a sense of expectation that they will win the special small jackpot in the winning lottery, which in turn makes the game even more enjoyable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as explained earlier, in the high-accuracy, high-support state H5, the player performs a weak right-handed hit, causes the game ball to flow down to the weak right-handed hit path P1, and starts the right side first start. Usually, the game is played by letting the game ball enter the mouth 44. On the other hand, in the high-accuracy, high-support state H5, as explained earlier, it is also possible to enter the game ball into the center first starting port 33, so depending on the player, In the high-accuracy, high-support state H5, the game may be played by hitting the ball to the left and causing the game ball to enter the first starting port 33 on the center side. In this case, the game ball will not enter the falling hole 252 and the game state will not be shifted to the low-accuracy, high-support state midway through, so the first start on the center side will only be played 50 times, which is the guaranteed number of games. If the game ball can enter the mouth 33, the game state can be reliably shifted to the high accuracy low support state which is the invincible zone. However, entering the game ball into the first starting port 33 on the center side as many as 50 times imposes a large burden on the player in terms of time and amount of game balls expended. In the high support state H5, the method of playing the game in which the game ball is hit to the left and enters the game ball into the center-side first starting port 33 has no advantage for the player and is not realistic. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by setting the guaranteed number of games to be 50, which is a relatively large number, the game ball can be inserted into the central first starting port 33 in the high-accuracy, high-support state H5. The structure is such that it is difficult to play the game by letting the ball enter the ball.

Note that, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has a configuration in which it is difficult to play the game by entering the game ball into the center first starting port 33 in the high-accuracy, high-support state H5. However, this method of playing games is not completely excluded. If the above-mentioned difficulties can be tolerated, it is also possible to play the game by hitting the ball to the left in the high-accuracy, high-support state H5 and letting the game ball enter the first starting port 33 on the center side. For example, if a player cannot mentally tolerate the game ball entering the falling slot 252 and the lottery mode changing from high probability mode to low probability mode, the above method of playing may be selected. I might. From the game machine designer's perspective, by setting the guaranteed number of games to a relatively small number, such as 5 or 10, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first starting port 33 on the center side in the high-accuracy, high-support state H5. By setting the guaranteed number of games to a large number, such as 50 or 100, it is possible to allow the game to be played to a certain extent, and by setting the guaranteed number of games to a large number, such as 50 or 100, the game can be played to the center side first starting port 33 in the high-precision, high-support state H5. It is possible to strictly prohibit playing a game in which the ball enters the ball. In other words, it is possible to adjust whether to allow or prohibit a game such as a game ball entering the central first starting port 33 in the high-accuracy, high-support state H5 based on the guaranteed number of games. Become.

《8-5》Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of a specific process executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the processing executed in the main control device 60 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

To progress each game round, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes are explained below. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 also executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by the input of a power outage signal, but a description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Ss0101, reading processing for various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (ball entrance detection information) is saved. After that, the process advances to step Ss0102.

In step Ss0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Ss0103.

In step Ss0103, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step Ss0104. Note that the value of the variation type counter CS is updated in normal processing (FIG. 349), which will be described later.

In step Ss0104, a ball entry process for the start port is executed in association with the entry of the game ball into the first start port (first central start port 33, first right start port 44) and the second start port 34. Details of the ball entry process for the start port in step Ss0104 will be described later. Then, proceed to step Ss0105.

In step Ss0105, ball entry processing for the fall opening is executed in response to the entry of the game ball into the fall opening 252. Details of the ball entry processing for the fall opening in step Ss0105 will be described later. After executing step Ss0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Ball entry processing for starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be explained. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 347: Ss0104).

Figure 348 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the starting hole. In step Ss0201, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting hole (first starting hole 33 on the center side, first starting hole 44 on the right side) (starting entry) is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor (detection sensor 67d for the right first starting hole, etc.) corresponding to the first starting hole (first starting hole 33 on the center side, first starting hole 44 on the right side). In step Ss0201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting hole (first starting hole 33 on the center side, first starting hole 44 on the right side) (Ss0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0202, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0203.

In step Ss0203, an external signal is sent to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port (center side first starting port 33, right side first starting port 44). Perform setting processing. Thereafter, the process advances to step Ss0204.

In step Ss0204, the starting pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first starting pending number RaN), which is a value stored in the pending number storage area of the first holding area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first starting pending number RaN indicates the number of balls being held based on balls entering the first starting ports (center first starting port 33, right first starting port 44). After that, the process advances to step Ss0209.

In step Ss0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port (center side first starting port 33, right side first starting port 44) (Ss0201: NO), proceed to step Ss0205, Whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

If it is determined in step Ss0205 that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 34 (Ss0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0206, where a prize ball command is set to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (Ss0205: NO), the ball entry process for this starting hole is terminated.

In step Ss0207, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. After that, the process advances to step Ss0208.

In step Ss0208, the start pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the second pending area Rb, is read out, and the second start pending number RbN is set as the target for processing described below. The second start pending number RbN indicates the number of balls pending based on balls entering the second start port 34. Then, proceed to step Ss0209.

In step Ss0209, it is determined whether the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Ss0204 or step Ss0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Ss0209, if the starting pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (Ss0209: NO), the entry process for the main starting hole is ended.

On the other hand, in step Ss0209, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit (Ss0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0210, where 1 is added to the start pending number N of the corresponding holding area, and then the process proceeds to step Ss0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reservation number storage area (hereinafter referred to as total reservation number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. Thereafter, the process advances to step Ss0212.

In step Ss0212, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Ss0103 (Fig. 347) are stored in the first free memory area of the corresponding reserve area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the reserved number to which 1 was added in step Ss0210. Specifically, when the first start reserved number RaN is set as the processing target, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Ss0103 (Fig. 347) are stored in the first free memory area of the first reserve area Ra, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first start reserved number RaN to which 1 was added in step Ss0210. Also, if the second start pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Ss0103 (FIG. 347) are stored in the first free memory area of the second pending area Rb, that is, the memory area corresponding to the second start pending number RbN to which 1 was added in step Ss0210. After executing step Ss0212, proceed to step Ss0213.

In step Ss0213, a first determination process is executed. The first determination process is a process that executes a determination of the result of the winning lottery (lottery result), the type of the jackpot, whether or not a reach has occurred, etc. based on the information (reserved information) of each value of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 before the reserved information becomes the subject of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. After executing step Ss0213, proceed to step Ss0214.

In step Ss0214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the determination result (first determination information) of the first determination process executed based on the information (suspension information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is set as the pending command. do.

The hold command is a command to make the sub-side control device recognize that a ball has entered the first starting hole (first starting hole 33 on the center side, first starting hole 44 on the right side) or the second starting hole 34, and the judgment result (first judgment information) by the first judgment process based on the hold information acquired based on the ball entry, before the hold information becomes the subject of a winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal processing described below (Figure 350: step Ss0402).

In addition, when the audio/light emitting control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a ball entering the first starting port (first starting port 33 on the center side, first starting port 44 on the right side), it transmits a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. The display control device 100 that receives the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. On the other hand, when the audio/light emitting control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a ball entering the second starting port 34, it transmits a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. The display control device 100 that receives the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls.

After executing step Ss0214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<Ball entry procedure for fall entrance>
Next, the ball entry process for the fall entrance will be described. The ball entry process for the fall entrance is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for the timer interrupt process (FIG. 347: Ss0105).

Figure 349 is a flowchart showing ball entry processing for the fall opening. In step Ss0301, whether or not the game ball has entered the fall opening 252 is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the fall opening 252. In step Ss0301, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the fall opening 252 (Ss0301: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0302.

In step Ss0302, the high probability mode flag is turned off. The high probability mode flag is a flag used by the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. , is normally turned off at the end of the opening/closing execution mode associated with winning the jackpot, and is also turned off at step Ss0302. After that, the process advances to step Ss0303.

In step Ss0303, a low probability mode command is set. The low probability mode command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode. After that, the process advances to step Ss0304.

In step Ss0304, a fall command is set. The fall command is a command for notifying the audio and light emission control device 90 that a game ball has entered the fall opening 252 and the win/lose lottery mode has transitioned from a high probability mode to a low probability mode. After step Ss0304 is executed, the ball entry process for this fall opening is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss0301 that the game ball has not entered the fall opening 252 (Ss0301: NO), the ball entry process for this fall opening is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be explained. The normal process is a process that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 350 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Ss0401, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, etc. are executed. Thereafter, the process advances to step Ss0402.

In step Ss0402, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt process or the previously executed normal process is sent to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 70. In addition, if commands related to performance such as a variation command, type command, or hold command are set, they are sent to the sound and light emission control device 90. After executing step Ss0402, proceed to step Ss0403.

In step Ss0403, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0404.

In step Ss0404, the winning ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Ss0405. In step Ss0405, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. The game round control process includes a winning lottery, setting the variable display of the patterns by the liquid crystal display device 41, and display control of the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step Ss0405, the process proceeds to step Ss0406.

In step Ss0406, a gaming state transition process for shifting the gaming state is executed. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the gaming state transition process will be described later. After that, the process advances to step Ss0407.

In step Ss0407, an electric support process is executed to control the drive of the electric device 44a provided in the first right-side starting port 44. In the electric support process, a determination is made as to whether or not to open the electric device 44a. The details of the electric support process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0408.

In step Ss0408, a game ball distribution control process for driving and controlling the game ball distribution device 240 provided in the starting port unit 200 is executed. Details of the game ball distribution control process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step Ss0409.

In step Ss0409, it is determined whether a predetermined period of time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (in the second and subsequent rounds, the start of the command output processing in step Ss0402). That is, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived.

In step Ss0409, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Ss0409: NO), in step Ss0410 and step Ss0411, until the execution timing of the next normal process. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Ss0410, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Ss0411, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

On the other hand, in step Ss0409, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Ss0409: YES), the process returns to step Ss0402 and each process from step Ss0402 to step Ss0408 is performed. Execute.

Note that since the execution time of each process from step Ss0402 to step Ss0408 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process will be explained. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 350: Ss0405).

FIG. 351 is a flowchart showing the game time control process. In step Ss0501, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As will be described later, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the symbols in the game round in which the jackpot is won is finished and the opening/closing execution mode is transferred, and is turned OFF at the timing when the opening/closing execution mode is finished. By determining whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is being executed in step Ss0501, step Ss0503 (and step Ss0506) is not executed while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game round from starting during the period in which the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. Details will be explained below.

If it is determined in step Ss0501 that the opening and closing execution mode flag is ON (Ss0501: YES), it is determined that the opening and closing execution mode is in progress, and this game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes in steps Ss0502 and onward. In other words, if it is in the opening and closing execution mode, a game round will not be started regardless of whether a game ball has entered the first starting hole (the central first starting hole 33 and the right side first starting hole 44) or the second starting hole 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0501 that the opening and closing execution mode is not in progress (Ss0501: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0502.

In step Ss0502, it is determined whether the first fluctuating flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The first fluctuating flag is a flag that is turned ON when the first starting hole game round is started, and is turned OFF when the fluctuating display in the first symbol display section 37a stops and becomes a stop display. In step Ss0502, if it is determined that the first fluctuation flag is not ON (Ss0502: NO), the process advances to step Ss0503.

In step Ss0503, a fluctuation start process for the first starting port is executed. The fluctuation start process for the first starting opening is a process for starting a game round for the first starting opening. Details of the fluctuation start process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss0503, the process advances to step Ss0505.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0502 that the first fluctuation flag is ON (Ss0502: YES), the process advances to step Ss0504.

In step Ss0504, a first fluctuation stop process is executed. The first fluctuation stop process is a process for stopping the fluctuation of symbols in the game round for the first start opening that has been started. Details of the first fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Ss0504, the process advances to step Ss0505.

In step Ss0505, it is determined whether the second fluctuating flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The second fluctuating flag is a flag that is turned ON when a game round for the second start opening is started, and is turned OFF when the fluctuating display in the second symbol display section 37b stops and becomes a stop display. . If it is determined in step Ss0505 that the second fluctuating flag is not ON (Ss0505: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0506.

In step Ss0506, a fluctuation start process for the second starting port is executed. The fluctuation start process for the second starting opening is a process for starting a game round for the second starting opening. Details of the fluctuation start process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss0506, this game round control process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0505 that the second fluctuation flag is ON (Ss0505: YES), the process advances to step Ss0507.

In step Ss0507, the second fluctuation stop process is executed. The second fluctuation stop process is a process for stopping the fluctuation of the symbols in the game round for the second starting port that has started. The details of the second fluctuation stop process will be described later. After executing step Ss0507, this game round control process is terminated.

<Fluctuation start process for first starting port>
Next, the fluctuation start process for the first start port will be described. The fluctuation start process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 351: Ss0503).

FIG. 352 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process for the first starting port. In step Ss0601, it is determined whether the first start pending number RaN=0. In step Ss0601, if it is determined that the first start pending number RaN is not 0 (Ss0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0602. On the other hand, in step Ss0601, if it is determined that the first start pending number RaN=0 (Ss0601: YES), the fluctuation start process for the first start port is ended.

In step Ss0602, a first starting port pending information shift process is executed. In the first starting gate reservation information shift process, the reservation information stored in the first reservation area Ra is shifted. Details of the first starting port pending information shift process will be described later. After executing step Ss0602, the process advances to step Ss0603.

In step Ss0603, determination processing for the first starting port is executed. In the determination process for the first starting opening, a winning lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, based on the values of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, the presence or absence of a jackpot or small win (normal small win, special small win) is determined. A correctness judgment is performed, a sorting judgment is made to sort out the type of jackpot, and a reach judgment is made to judge whether or not a reach occurs. Details of the determination process for the first starting port will be described later. Hereinafter, when both a normal small win and a special small win are included, it will also be simply referred to as a "small win." After executing step Ss0603, the process advances to step Ss0604.

In step Ss0604, a process for setting the variable time for the first start port is executed. In the process for setting the variable time for the first start port, a variable time is set, which is the time from when the pattern starts to change until when it stops. The process for setting the variable time for the first start port will be described in detail later. After executing step Ss0604, the process proceeds to step Ss0605.

In step Ss0605, a first variation command is set. The first variation command is related to special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (first starting port 33 on the center side, first starting port 44 on the right side) in the current game round. In addition to containing information indicating that it is a certain event, it also includes information on the presence or absence of a reach occurrence and information on the fluctuation time set in step Ss0604. After executing step Ss0605, the process advances to step Ss0606.

In step Ss0606, a first type command is set. The first type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and information on the type of jackpot. Specifically, the first type command includes information on a 16R definite variable jackpot, information on an 8R probable variable jackpot, information on an 8R normal jackpot, information on a small win (normal small win, special small win), or information on a loss. It can be done.

The first variation command and the first type command set in step Ss0605 and step Ss0606 are sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 of the normal processing (Fig. 350). The sound and light emission control device 90 determines the content of the presentation for that game round based on the received variation command and first type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the presentation is executed. After executing step Ss0606, proceed to step Ss0607.

In step Ss0607, the variable display in the first symbol display section 37a is started, and then the process proceeds to step Ss0608, where the first variable flag is turned ON. The first variable flag is a flag that is turned ON when a game round for the first starting hole is started, and is turned OFF when the variable display in the first symbol display section 37a becomes a stopped display. After executing step Ss0608, the process proceeds to step Ss0609.

In step Ss0609, the value of the number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1. A value is set in the game number counter PNC when the high frequency support mode is started, and the counter value is decremented by 1 every time a game is played. After executing step Ss0609, the variation start process for the first starting port ends.

<First start port reserved information shift processing>
Next, the reserved information shift process for the first start port will be described. The reserved information shift process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process for the first start port (FIG. 352: Ss0602).

FIG. 353 is a flowchart showing the first starting port reservation information shift process. In step Ss0701, the first start hold number RaN of the first hold area Ra is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Ss0702.

In step Ss0702, the data (reservation information) stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. Thereafter, the process advances to step Ss0703.

In step Ss0703, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Ss0703, the main pending information shift process for the first starting port is ended.

<Determination process for first starting port>
Next, the determination process for the first start port will be described. The determination process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process for the first start port (FIG. 352: Ss0603).

FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the determination process for the first starting port. In step Ss0801, it is determined whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag used by the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. , is turned off at the start of the opening/closing execution mode related to winning the next jackpot. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the falling hole 252 provided in the starting hole unit 200, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. In step Ss0801, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (Ss0801: YES), the process advances to step Ss0802.

In step Ss0802, a win/loss determination is made by referring to the win/loss table for the first starting port (for high probability mode). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the win random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c matches the value set as a jackpot in the win/loss table for the first starting port (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. 339(b). Then, proceed to step Ss0804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0801 that the mode is not high probability mode (Ss0801: NO), proceed to step Ss0803.

In step Ss0803, a win/loss determination is made by referring to the win/loss table for the first starting port (for low probability mode). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the win random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c matches the value set as a jackpot in the win/loss table for the first starting port (for low probability mode) shown in FIG. 339(a). Then, proceed to step Ss0804.

In step Ss0804, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination in step Ss0802 or step Ss0803 is a jackpot. If it is determined in step Ss0804 that the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot (Ss0804: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0805.

In step Ss0805, the first winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. The first winning flag indicates that the lottery result of a winning lottery executed when a game ball enters the first starting port (center side first starting port 33 or right side first starting port 44) is a "jackpot" or "jackpot". It is turned ON when there is a "special small hit" or "normal small hit", and it is turned OFF when the first symbol fluctuation display stops due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole and becomes a stop display. This is the flag to be used. After executing step Ss0805, the process advances to step Ss0806.

In step Ss0806, a distribution determination is made with reference to the distribution table for the first starting port (see FIG. 341(a)). Specifically, it is determined which jackpot type numerical range the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is included in. After executing step Ss0806, the process advances to step Ss0807.

In step Ss0807, it is determined whether the result of the distribution determination in step Ss0806 (jackpot type) is a variable jackpot. In step Ss0807, if it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is a variable jackpot (Ss0807: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0808.

In step Ss0808, the probability variable jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Ss0806 is turned ON. After executing step Ss0808, the process advances to step Ss0809.

In step Ss0809, a stop symbol setting process for a variable jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for a probability variable jackpot, it is set which stop result is to be displayed in the first symbol display section 37a to end the variable display (stop display) in the current game round which will be a probability variable jackpot. Execute the processing for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for probability-variable jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Ss0806 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Ss0809, the determination process for the first starting port ends.

If it is determined in step Ss0807 that the assigned jackpot type is not a guaranteed jackpot (Ss0807: NO), i.e., if the assigned jackpot type is a normal jackpot, proceed to step Ss0810.

In step Ss0810, the normal jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Ss0806 is turned ON. After executing step Ss0810, the process advances to step Ss0811.

In step Ss0811, a process for setting a stop pattern for a normal jackpot is executed. In the process for setting a stop pattern for a normal jackpot, a process is executed to set which stop result is displayed in the first pattern display section 37a at which the variable display will end (stop display) in the current game round resulting in a normal jackpot. Specifically, by referencing the stop result table for a normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type assigned in step Ss0806 is obtained, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step Ss0811, the determination process for this first start port is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss0804 that the result of the hit/miss determination in step Ss0802 or step Ss0803 is not a big hit (Ss0804: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0812, where it is determined whether or not the result of the hit/miss determination in step Ss0802 or step Ss0803 is a normal small hit. If it is determined in step Ss0812 that the result of the hit/miss determination is a normal small hit (Ss0812: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0813, where the normal small hit flag in the various flags storage area 64g of RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Ss0813, the process proceeds to step Ss0814.

In step Ss0814, a stop symbol setting process for normal small winning is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the normal small win, it is determined which stop result is to be displayed on the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display (stop display) in this game round, which is the normal small win. Execute the process for setting. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal small win stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the normal small win is acquired, and the address information is It is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Ss0814, the process advances to step Ss0819.

In step Ss0812, if it is determined that the result of the judgment in step Ss0802 or step Ss0803 is not a normal small hit (Ss0812: NO), the process advances to step Ss0815, and the result of the judgment in step Ss0802 or step Ss0803 is a special small hit. Determine whether or not. In step Ss0815, when it is determined that the result of the judgment is a special small win (Ss0815: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0816, and the special small win flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0817, and a special small winning command is set. The special small win command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that a special small win has been won in the winning lottery. After executing step Ss0817, the process advances to step Ss0818.

In step Ss0818, a special small hit stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the special small win, it is determined which stop result is to be displayed on the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display (stop display) in the current game round that will be the special small win. Execute the process for setting. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the special small win stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the special small win is acquired, and the address information is It is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Ss0818, the process advances to step Ss0819.

In step Ss0819, the first winning flag in the various flags storage area 64g of RAM 64 is turned ON. The first winning flag is a flag that is turned ON when the result of the winning lottery executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole (the central first starting hole 33 or the right side first starting hole 44) is a "big win", "special small win", or "normal small win", and is turned OFF when the variable display of the first pattern caused by the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole stops and becomes a stationary display. After executing step Ss0819, this first starting hole determination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss0815 that the result of the win/loss determination is not a special small win (Ss0815: NO), proceed to step Ss820.

In step Ss820, a reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is referred to to determine whether or not a reach determination occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c matches the value set as the occurrence of a reach in the referred reach determination table. The process of step Ss0820 is executed when the result of the judgment (winning lottery) in step Ss0804 is neither a big hit nor a small win (normal small win, special small win). That is, in step Ss0820, it is determined whether or not it is a game round in which a reach occurs among the game times in which the result of the win/fail determination is neither a jackpot nor a small win (normal small win, special small win). After executing step Ss0820, the process advances to step Ss0821.

In step Ss0821, it is determined whether the result of the reach determination in step Ss0820 is a reach occurrence. In step Ss0821, if it is determined that a reach has occurred (Ss0821: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0822, and the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Ss0822, the process advances to step Ss0823. In step Ss0821, if it is determined that a reach has not occurred (Ss0821: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Ss0823.

In step Ss0823, a stop symbol setting process for losing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for a loss, in the current game round that results in a loss, a process is performed to set which stop result is to be displayed on the first symbol display section 37a to end the variable display (stop display). Execute processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for losing in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is obtained. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Ss0823, the determination process for the first starting port ends.

<Variable time setting process for the first starting port>
Next, the process of setting the variable time for the first starting port will be described. The process of setting the variation time for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process for the first starting port (FIG. 352: Ss0604).

FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable time for the first starting port. In step Ss0901, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process advances to step Ss0902.

In step Ss0902, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss0902 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Ss0902: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0903.

In step Ss0903, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss0903 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss0903: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0904.

In step Ss0904, a low-accuracy, low-support state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is executed. The low probability low support state time varying time information acquisition process for the first starting opening is executed when the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, and the game round for the first starting opening is executed. In this case, this is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game round for the first starting opening. Specifically, when the first starting opening game time is executed in the low certainty low support state (state H1) in FIG. 345, the fluctuation time information of the first starting opening gaming time is acquired. It is processing. Details of the low-accuracy, low-support state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss0904, the process advances to step Ss0909.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0903 that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss0903: YES), the process advances to step Ss0905.

In step Ss0905, a low-accuracy/high-support state time variation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is executed. The low-probability high support state time-varying time information acquisition process for the first starting opening is executed when the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, and the game round for the first starting opening is executed. In this case, this is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game round for the first starting opening. Specifically, when the first starting opening game round is executed in the low certainty high support state (state H3) in FIG. 345, the fluctuation time information of the first starting opening gaming round is acquired. It is processing. Details of the low-accuracy/high-support state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss0905, the process advances to step Ss0909.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0902 that the high probability mode flag is ON (Ss0902: YES), proceed to step Ss0906.

In step Ss0906, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss0906 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss0906: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0907.

In step Ss0907, variable time information acquisition processing for the first starting port in a high probability high support state is executed. The variable time information acquisition processing for the first starting port in a high probability high support state is a processing for acquiring variable time information for a game round for the first starting port when the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode and the game round for the first starting port is executed. Specifically, when a game round for the first starting port is executed in the high probability high support state (state H5) in FIG. 345, the variable time information for the game round for the first starting port is acquired. Details of the variable time information acquisition processing for the first starting port in a high probability high support state are described later. After executing step Ss0907, proceed to step Ss0909.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0906 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss0906: NO), the process advances to step Ss0908.

In step Ss0908, a process for acquiring variable time information during a high probability low support state for the first starting port is executed. The process for acquiring variable time information during a high probability low support state for the first starting port is a process for acquiring variable time information for a game round for the first starting port when the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode and the game round for the first starting port is executed. Specifically, this process is a process for acquiring variable time information for a game round for the first starting port when the game round for the first starting port is executed during the high probability low support state (state H6) in FIG. 345. The details of the process for acquiring variable time information during a high probability low support state for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss0908, proceed to step Ss0909.

In step Ss0909, the variable time information acquired in each of the processes in steps Ss0904, Ss0905, Ss0907, and Ss0908 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process for this first starting port is terminated.

<Processing for acquiring variable time information during low probability low support state for the first starting port>
Next, the process of acquiring variable time information during the low probability low support state for the first starting port will be described. The process of acquiring variable time information during the low probability low support state for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 355: Ss0904) of the process of setting the variable time for the first starting port.

FIG. 356 is a flowchart illustrating a process for acquiring low-accuracy, low-support state time fluctuation time information for the first starting port. In step Ss1001, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination regarding the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (Ss1001: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1002.

In step Ss1002, a variable time table for a jackpot is identified from the group of variable time tables in a low probability low support state stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS is obtained by referring to the identified variable time table for a jackpot. The group of variable time tables in a low probability low support state includes (i) a variable time table for a jackpot used when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a low probability low support state, (ii) a variable time table for a reach occurrence used when a jackpot is not won in a winning lottery in a low probability low support state and a reach occurs, and (iii) a variable time table for a reach non-occurrence used when a jackpot is not won in a winning lottery and a reach does not occur in a low probability low support state. In step Ss1002, first, (i) is identified from (i) to (iii). (i) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a normal performance for a jackpot. Next, by referring to the specified fluctuation time table for the jackpot, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Ss0901 (Fig. 355) is obtained. After executing step Ss1002, the process of obtaining fluctuation time information during the low probability low support state for the first starting port is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1001 that the result of the win/loss determination for the current game round is not a jackpot (step Ss1001: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1003.

In step Ss1003, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. In step Ss1003, if it is determined that a reach occurs in the current game round (step Ss1003: YES), the process advances to step Ss1004.

In step Ss1004, a variable time table for reaching is identified from the group of variable time tables during low probability low support state stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired by referring to the identified variable time table for reaching state. Specifically, first, from (i) to (iii), (ii) a variable time table for reaching state to be used when a reaching state occurs without winning a jackpot in the winning lottery is identified. (ii) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a normal performance for reaching state. Next, variable time information corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CS acquired in step Ss0901 (Fig. 355) is acquired by referring to the identified variable time table for reaching state. After executing step Ss1004, the process of acquiring variable time information during low probability low support state for the first starting port is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss1003 that no reach will occur in the current game round (step Ss1003: NO), proceed to step Ss1005.

In step Ss1005, a variable time table for non-reach occurrence is identified from the group of variable time tables in the low probability low support state stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired by referring to the identified variable time table for non-reach occurrence. Specifically, first, from (i) to (iii), (iii) a variable time table for non-reach occurrence used when a jackpot is not won in the winning lottery in the low probability low support state and a reach does not occur is identified. (iii) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a normal performance for non-reach occurrence. Next, the variable time information corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CS acquired in step Ss0901 (Fig. 355) is acquired by referring to the identified variable time table for non-reach occurrence. After executing step Ss1005, the process of acquiring variable time information in the low probability low support state for the first starting port is terminated.

<Processing for acquiring variable time information during low probability high support state for the first starting port>
Next, the low probability high support state variable time information acquisition process for the first starting port will be described. The low probability high support state variable time information acquisition process for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 355: Ss0905) of the variable time setting process for the first starting port.

Figure 357 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring variable time information during a low probability high support state for the first starting port. In step Ss1101, it is determined whether the result of the win/loss determination for the current game round is a jackpot or not. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (Ss1101: YES), it proceeds to step Ss1102.

In step Ss1102, a variable time table for a jackpot is specified from the group of variable time tables in a low probability high support state stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS is obtained by referring to the specified variable time table for a jackpot. The group of variable time tables in a low probability high support state includes (iv) a variable time table for a jackpot used when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a low probability high support state, (v) a variable time table for a reach occurrence used when a jackpot is not won in a winning lottery in a low probability high support state and a reach occurs, and (iv) a variable time table for a reach non-occurrence used when a jackpot is not won in a winning lottery and a reach does not occur in a low probability high support state. In step Ss1102, first, (iv) is specified from (iv) and (v). Next, the variable time information corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CS obtained in step Ss0901 (Fig. 355) is obtained by referring to the specified variable time table for a jackpot. After executing step Ss1102, the process of acquiring variable time information during the low probability high support state for the first starting port is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1101 that the result of the win/loss determination for the current game round is not a jackpot (step Ss1101: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1103.

In step Ss1103, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. If it is determined in step Ss1103 that a reach will occur in the current game round (step Ss1103: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1104.

In step Ss1104, a variable time table for reaching is identified from the group of variable time tables during low probability high support state stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of ROM 63, and variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is obtained by referring to the identified variable time table for reaching state. Specifically, first, from (iv) and (v), a variable time table for reaching state to be used when a reaching state occurs without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is identified. Next, variable time information corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CS obtained in step Ss0901 (Fig. 355) is obtained by referring to the identified variable time table for reaching state. After executing step Ss1104, the process of obtaining variable time information during low probability high support state for the first starting port is terminated.

In step Ss1103, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (step Ss1103: NO), the process advances to step Ss1105.

In step Ss1105, a variable time table for non-reach occurrence is identified from the group of variable time tables in the low probability high support state stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired by referring to the identified variable time table for non-reach occurrence. Specifically, first, from (iv) to (iv), a variable time table for non-reach occurrence is identified, which is used when a jackpot is not won in the winning lottery and a reach does not occur in the low probability high support state. Next, the variable time information corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CS acquired in step Ss0901 (Fig. 355) is acquired by referring to the identified variable time table for non-reach occurrence. After executing step Ss1105, the process of acquiring variable time information in the low probability high support state for the first starting port is terminated.

<Highly accurate and high support state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port>
Next, a highly accurate and high support state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port will be described. The highly accurate and high support state time variation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 355: Ss0907) of the variable time setting process for the first starting port.

Figure 358 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring variable time information during the high probability high support state for the first starting port. In step Ss1201, it is determined whether the result of the win/loss judgment for the current game round is a jackpot or not. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (Ss1201: YES), it proceeds to step Ss1202.

In step Ss1202, a jackpot variable time table is specified from the group of high probability high support state variable time tables stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is obtained by referring to the specified variable time table for the jackpot. The group of high probability high support state variable time tables includes (vii) a jackpot variable time table used when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a high probability high support state, (viii) a special small win variable time table used when a special small win is won in a winning lottery in a high probability high support state, and (ix) a normal small win variable time table used when a normal small win is won in a winning lottery in a high probability high support state. In step Ss1202, first, (vii) is specified from (vii) to (ix). Next, the variable time information corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CS obtained in step Ss0901 (Fig. 355) is obtained by referring to the specified variable time table for the jackpot. After executing step Ss1202, the process of acquiring variable time information during the high probability high support state for the first starting port is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1201 that the result of the win/loss determination for the current game round is not a jackpot (step Ss1201: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1203.

In step Ss1203, it is determined whether the result of the win/loss determination for the current game round is a special small win. Specifically, it is determined whether the special small win flag is ON, and if it is determined that the special small win flag is ON (Ss1203: YES), it proceeds to step Ss1204.

In step Ss1204, a variable time table for a special small win is specified from a group of high-precision, high support state time variable time tables stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and a variable time table for the specified special small win is determined. By referring to the table, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. Specifically, first, from (vii) to (ix), identify (viii) the special small win variable time table that is used when a special small win is won in the winning lottery in a high probability and high support state. . Next, by referring to the specified special small win variation time table, variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS obtained in step Ss0901 (FIG. 355) is obtained. After executing step Ss1204, the highly accurate and highly supported state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is ended.

If it is determined in step Ss1203 that the result of the win/loss determination for the current game round is not a special small win (Ss1203: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1205.

In step Ss1205, a variation time table for a normal small win is specified from a group of variation time tables in a highly accurate and high support state stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and a variation time table for a normal small win is specified. By referring to the table, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. Specifically, first, from among (vii) to (ix), identify (ix) the normal small win variable time table that is used when a small win is won in the winning lottery in a high probability and high support state. . Next, by referring to the specified fluctuation time table for normal small winnings, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step Ss0901 (FIG. 355) is acquired. After executing step Ss1205, the highly accurate and highly supported state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is ended.

<Highly accurate and low support state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port>
Next, a process for acquiring high-accuracy/low-support state fluctuation time information for the first starting port will be described. The high-accuracy/low-support state time variation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 355: Ss0907) of the variable time setting process for the first starting port.

Figure 359 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring variable time information during high probability low support state for the first starting port. In step Ss1301, it is determined whether the result of the win/loss judgment for the current game round is a jackpot or not. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (Ss1301: YES), it proceeds to step Ss1302.

In step Ss1302, a variable time table for a jackpot is specified from a group of variable time tables for high certainty and low support states stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for a jackpot is referred to. By doing so, fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. The high-probability, low-support state time variation time table group includes (x) a jackpot variation time table used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a high-probability, low-support state, (xi) a high-probability, low-support state, and a winning A variable time table for small winnings is provided which is used when a small winning (regular small winning, special small winning) is won in a lottery. In step Ss1302, first, (x) is specified from (x) and (xi). Next, by referring to the specified fluctuation time table for jackpot, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step Ss0901 (FIG. 355) is obtained. After executing step Ss1302, the high-accuracy/low-support state time variation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is ended.

On the other hand, in step Ss1301, if it is determined that the result of the win/fail determination regarding the current game round is not a jackpot (that is, if it is determined to be a small win) (step Ss1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1303.

In step Ss1303, a variable time table for a small win is specified from the group of variable time tables for high accuracy and low support states stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for a small win is By referring to this, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. Specifically, first, from among (x) and (xi), (xi) is a small win used when winning a small win (normal small win, special small win) in a winning lottery in a high probability low support state. Identify the variable time table. Next, by referring to the specified fluctuation time table for small winnings, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step Ss0901 (FIG. 355) is obtained. After executing step Ss1303, the high-accuracy/low-support state time variation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is ended.

<First fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the first fluctuation stop processing will be explained. The first fluctuation stop process is executed by the main side MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 351: Ss504) of the game time control process.

FIG. 360 is a flowchart showing the first fluctuation stop processing. In step Ss1401, it is determined whether the second winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The second winning flag is turned ON when the lottery result of a winning lottery executed with the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 as a trigger is a "jackpot", and the second winning flag is turned ON when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. The variable display of the second symbol due to the ball's entry stops and is turned off when the display becomes a stopped display. In step Ss1401, if it is determined that the second winning flag is not ON (Ss1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1402.

In step Ss1402, it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the first pattern display section 37a has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the fluctuation time for the first pattern set in the process for setting the fluctuation time for the first start port (FIG. 355) has elapsed. If it is determined in step Ss1402 that the fluctuation time of the first pattern display section 37a has ended (Ss1402: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1403. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1402 that the fluctuation time of the first pattern display section 37a has not ended (Ss1402: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1411.

In step Ss1403, the variation of the first pattern display section 37a is stopped. In other words, the first pattern of the first pattern display section 37a is shifted from a state of varying display to a stopped display. The combination of patterns to be stopped (stop patterns) is set in step Ss0809, step Ss0811, step Ss0814, step Ss0818, or step Ss0823 of the judgment process for the first starting port (FIG. 354). After executing step Ss1403, proceed to step Ss1404.

In step Ss1404, the first fluctuating flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. As described above, the first fluctuating flag is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port (center side first starting port 33, right side first starting port 44), and the first fluctuating flag changes to the first variable flag in the first symbol display section 37a. This flag is turned ON when the first symbol starts to fluctuate, and is turned OFF when the first symbol stops fluctuating. After executing step Ss1404, the process advances to step Ss1405.

In step Ss1405, it is determined whether the second in-fluctuating flag in the various flags storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As described above, the second in-fluctuating flag is a flag that is turned ON when the second symbol in the second symbol display section 37b starts to fluctuate in response to the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 34, and is turned OFF when the second symbol stops fluctuating. In step Ss1405, if it is determined that the second in-fluctuating flag is not ON (Ss1405: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1406.

In step Ss1406, the first winning flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the first fluctuation stop process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1405 that the second fluctuation flag is ON (Ss1405: YES), the process advances to step Ss1411.

In step Ss1401, if it is determined that the second winning flag is ON (Ss1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1407.

In step Ss1407, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the second symbol display section 37b has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the variable time for the second symbol set in the variable time setting process for the second starting opening (FIG. 364) described later has elapsed. In step Ss1407, if it is determined that the variation time of the second symbol display section 37b has not ended (Ss1407: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1402. On the other hand, in step Ss1407, if it is determined that the variation time of the second symbol display section 37b has ended (Ss1407: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1408.

In step Ss1408, the second winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step Ss1408, the process advances to step Ss1409.

In step Ss1409, the variation of the first symbol display section 37a is stopped. That is, the first symbol of the first symbol display section 37a is switched from a state of being displayed in a varying manner to a stopped display. In this embodiment, the symbol to be displayed in a stopped state (stop symbol) is a stop symbol for a loss. Furthermore, in step Ss1409, various flags such as the sure-variant jackpot flag and the normal jackpot flag related to the first start port play are switched to OFF, and even if a jackpot or small jackpot (special small jackpot, normal small jackpot) is won in the winning lottery related to the first start port play, the winning is invalidated. After executing step Ss1409, proceed to step Ss1410.

In step Ss1410, the first fluctuating flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Ss1411.

In step Ss1411, it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Ss1411 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss1411: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1412, where it is determined whether the number of games that will continue to be played in the high frequency support mode has not yet reached the guaranteed number of games (e.g., 50 games) (=within the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC is greater than 0. Since the guaranteed number of games counter PNC indicates the remaining number of guaranteed games, it is possible to determine whether the number of games that will continue to be played in the high frequency support mode has not yet reached the guaranteed number of games by determining whether PNC>0.

If it is determined in step Ss1412 that the value of the guaranteed play count counter PNC is not greater than 0 (step Ss1412: NO), i.e., if it is determined that the number of plays is not within the guaranteed number of plays, the process proceeds to step Ss1413, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step Ss1413, the process proceeds to step Ss1414.

In step Ss1414, a low frequency support mode command is set. The low frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the audio light emission control device 90 that the support mode is the low frequency support mode. The low frequency support mode command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). After executing step Ss1414, the process advances to step Ss1415.

In step Ss1415, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Ss1415 that the high probability mode flag is ON (Ss1411: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1416, where an invincible zone command is set. The invincible zone command is a command for notifying the sound and light emission control device 90 that a high probability high support state has been transitioned to a high probability low support state (invincible zone). The invincible zone command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 in the normal processing (Figure 350). After executing step Ss1414, this first fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

In step Ss1415, if it is determined that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Ss1415: NO), the first fluctuation stop process is ended. If it is determined in step Ss1411 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss1411: NO), the first fluctuation stop process is ended. Further, in step Ss1412, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 (step Ss1412: YES), the first fluctuation stop process is ended.

<Variation start processing for second starting port>
Next, the fluctuation start process for the second starting port will be explained. The fluctuation start process for the second starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 351: Ss0506) of the game time control process.

FIG. 361 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process for the second starting port. In step Ss1501, it is determined whether the second start pending number RbN=0. If it is determined in step Ss1501 that the second start pending number RbN is not 0 (Ss1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1502. On the other hand, in step Ss1501, if it is determined that the second start pending number RbN=0 (Ss1501: YES), the fluctuation start process for the second start port is ended.

In step Ss1502, second starting port pending information shift processing is executed. In the second starting gate hold information shift process, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is shifted. Details of the second starting port pending information shift process will be described later. After executing step Ss1502, the process advances to step Ss1503.

In step Ss1503, determination processing for the second starting port is executed. In the determination process for the second starting opening, a winning lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, based on the values of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c, a judgment is made to determine whether there is a big hit or a small hit, and the jackpot type is distributed. Performs distribution judgment and reach judgment to determine whether reach has occurred. Details of the determination process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss1503, the process advances to step Ss1504.

In step Ss1504, a process for setting a variable time for the second starting port is executed. In the process of setting the fluctuation time for the second starting opening, a fluctuation time is set which is the time from when the symbol starts to fluctuate until it stops. Details of the process for setting the variable time for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss1504, the process advances to step Ss1505.

In step Ss1505, a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and the reach It includes information on the presence or absence of occurrence and information on the fluctuation time set in step Ss1504. After executing step Ss1505, the process advances to step Ss1506.

In step Ss1506, a second type command is set. The second type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and information on the type of jackpot. Specifically, the second type command includes information on a 16R probability variable jackpot, information on an 8R probability variation jackpot, information on an 8R normal jackpot, or information on a loss.

The variation command and second type command set in step Ss1505 and step Ss1506 are sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 of the normal processing (Fig. 350). The sound and light emission control device 90 determines the content of the presentation for that game round based on the received variation command and second type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the presentation is executed. After executing step Ss1506, proceed to step Ss1507.

In step Ss1507, the variable display in the second symbol display section 37b is started, and then the process proceeds to step Ss1508, where the second variable flag is turned ON. The second variable flag is a flag that is turned ON when a game round for the second start port is started, and is turned OFF when the variable display in the second symbol display section 37b becomes a stopped display. After executing step Ss1508, the process proceeds to step Ss1509.

In step Ss1509, the value of the number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1. A value is set in the game number counter PNC when the high frequency support mode is started, and the counter value is decremented by 1 every time a game is played. After executing step Ss1509, the variation start process for the second starting port ends.

<Holding information shift processing for second starting gate>
Next, the second starting port pending information shift process will be described. The second starting port pending information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 361: Ss1502) of the second starting port variation start process.

Figure 362 is a flowchart showing the process of shifting reserved information for the second start port. In step Ss1601, the second start reserved number RbN in the second reserved area Rb is decremented by 1. Then, proceed to step Ss1602.

In step Ss1602, the data (reserved information) stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the judgment process execution area 64c. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss1603.

In step Ss1603, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the second reserved area Rb. This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas sequentially to the lower areas. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, the fourth area to the third area, and so on. After executing step Ss1603, this process of shifting reserved information for the second start port is terminated.

<Determination process for second starting port>
Next, the determination process for the second start port will be described. The determination process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process for the second start port (FIG. 361: Ss1503).

FIG. 363 is a flowchart showing the determination process for the second starting port. In step Ss1701, it is determined whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag used by the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. , is normally turned off at the end of the opening/closing execution mode associated with winning the jackpot. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the falling hole 252 provided in the starting hole unit 200, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. In step Ss1701, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (Ss1701: YES), the process advances to step Ss1702.

In step Ss1702, the validity determination is made with reference to the validity table (for high probability mode) for the second starting port. Specifically, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the second starting opening success/failure table (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. 340(b). Determine whether the value matches the current value. After that, the process advances to step Ss1704. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1701 that the mode is not high probability mode (Ss1701: NO), the process advances to step Ss1703.

In step Ss1703, a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table (for low probability mode) for the second starting port. Specifically, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the second starting opening (for low probability mode) shown in FIG. 340(a). Determine whether the value matches the current value. After that, the process advances to step Ss1704.

In step Ss1704, it is determined whether the result of the determination in step Ss1702 or step Ss1703 is a jackpot. In step Ss1704, if it is determined that the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Ss1704: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1705.

In step Ss1705, the second winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. The second winning flag is turned ON when the lottery result of a winning lottery executed with the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 as a trigger is a "jackpot", and when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the second winning flag is turned ON. This is a flag that is turned OFF when the variable display of the second symbol due to the ball entering stops and becomes a stopped display. After executing step Ss1705, the process advances to step Ss1706.

In step Ss1706, a distribution determination is made with reference to the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 341(b)). Specifically, it is determined which jackpot type numerical range the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is included in. After executing step Ss1706, the process advances to step Ss1707.

In step Ss1707, it is determined whether the result of the allocation determination in step Ss1706 (jackpot type) is a guaranteed jackpot. If it is determined in step Ss1707 that the allocated jackpot type is a guaranteed jackpot (Ss1707: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1708.

In step Ss1708, the guaranteed jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type assigned in step Ss1706 is turned ON. After executing step Ss1708, the process proceeds to step Ss1709.

In step Ss1709, a stop symbol setting process for a variable jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for a probability variable jackpot, it is set which stop result is to be displayed in the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display (stop display) in the current game round that will be a probability variable jackpot. Execute the processing for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for probability-variable jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Ss1706 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Ss1709, the determination process for the second starting port ends.

In step Ss1707, if it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is not a probability variable jackpot (Ss1707: NO), that is, if the distributed jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step Ss1710.

In step Ss1710, the normal jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Ss1706 is turned ON. After executing step Ss1710, the process advances to step Ss1711.

In step Ss1711, a stop pattern setting process for a normal jackpot is executed. In the stop pattern setting process for a normal jackpot, a process is executed to set which stop result is displayed in the second pattern display section 37b at which the variable display will end (stop display) in the current game round that results in a normal jackpot. Specifically, by referencing the stop result table for a normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type assigned in step Ss1706 is obtained, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step Ss1711, the determination process for this second start port is terminated.

In step Ss1704, if it is determined that the result of the judgment in step Ss1702 or step Ss1703 is not a jackpot (Ss1704: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1712.

In step Ss1712, a reach determination is made as to whether or not a reach will occur, by referring to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c in ROM 63. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination process execution area 64c matches the value set as the reach occurrence in the referenced reach determination table. The process of this step Ss1712 is executed when the result of the hit/miss determination (win lottery) in the above step Ss1704 is not a jackpot. In other words, in step Ss1712, it is determined whether or not the game round in which the hit/miss determination result is not a jackpot is a game round in which a reach will occur. After executing step Ss1712, the process proceeds to step Ss1713.

In step Ss1713, it is determined whether the result of the reach determination in step Ss1712 is a reach occurrence. In step Ss1713, if it is determined that a reach has occurred (Ss1713: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1714, and the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Ss1714, the process advances to step Ss1715. In step Ss1713, if it is determined that a reach has not occurred (Ss1713: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1715 without executing step Ss1714.

In step Ss1715, a stop symbol setting process for losing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for a loss, in the current game round that results in a loss, a process is performed to set which stop result is to be displayed on the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display (stop display). Execute processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for losing in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is obtained. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Ss1715, the determination process for the second starting port ends.

<Setting process of variable time for second starting port>
Next, the process of setting the variable time for the second start port will be described. The process of setting the variable time for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process for the second start port (FIG. 361: Ss1504).

Figure 364 is a flowchart showing the process of setting the variable time for the second starting port. In step Ss1801, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss1802.

In step Ss1802, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss1802 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Ss1802: NO), the process advances to step Ss1803.

In step Ss1803, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss1803 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss1803: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1804.

In step Ss1804, variable time information acquisition processing for the second starting port during low probability low support state is executed. The variable time information acquisition processing for the second starting port during low probability low support state is a processing for acquiring variable time information for a game round for the second starting port when the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode and the game round for the second starting port is executed. Specifically, when the game round for the second starting port is executed during the low probability low support state (state H1) in FIG. 345, the variable time information acquisition processing for the second starting port during low probability low support state will be described later in detail. After executing step Ss1804, proceed to step Ss1809.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1803 that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss1803: YES), the process advances to step Ss1805.

In step Ss1805, a low-accuracy/high-support state time variation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is executed. The low-probability high support state time-varying time information acquisition process for the second starting opening is executed when the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, and the game round for the second starting opening is executed. In this case, this is a process of acquiring the variable time information of the game round for the second starting opening. Specifically, when the second starting opening game round is executed in the low certainty high support state (state H3) in FIG. 345, the fluctuation time information of the second starting opening gaming round is acquired. It is processing. Details of the low-accuracy/high-support state time variation time information acquisition process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss1805, the process advances to step Ss1809.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1802 that the high probability mode flag is ON (Ss1802: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1806.

In step Ss1806, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss1806 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss1806: YES), the process advances to step Ss1807.

In step Ss1807, a highly accurate and highly supported state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is executed. The process of acquiring high-precision, high-support state time-varying time information for the second starting opening is executed when the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, and the game round for the second starting opening is executed. In this case, this is a process of acquiring the variable time information of the game round for the second starting opening. Specifically, when a game round for the second starting opening is executed in the high-accuracy/high support state (state H5) in FIG. 345, the fluctuation time information of the gaming round for the second starting opening is acquired. It is processing. Details of the highly accurate and highly supported state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss1807, the process advances to step Ss1809.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1806 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss1806: NO), the process advances to step Ss1808.

In step Ss1808, variable time information acquisition processing for the second starting port in a high probability low support state is executed. The variable time information acquisition processing for the second starting port in a high probability low support state is a processing for acquiring variable time information for a game round for the second starting port when the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode and the game round for the second starting port is executed. Specifically, when the game round for the second starting port is executed in the high probability low support state (state H6) in FIG. 345, the variable time information for the game round for the second starting port is acquired. Details of the variable time information acquisition processing for the second starting port in a high probability low support state will be described later. After executing step Ss1808, proceed to step Ss1809.

In step Ss1809, the variable time information acquired in each of the processes in steps Ss1804, Ss1805, Ss1807, and Ss1808 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process for this second start port is terminated.

<Processing for acquiring variable time information during low probability low support state for the second starting port>
Next, the process of acquiring variable time information during the low probability low support state for the second starting port will be described. The process of acquiring variable time information during the low probability low support state for the second starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 364: Ss1804) of the process of setting the variable time for the second starting port.

Figure 365 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring variable time information during a low-probability, low-support state for the second starting port. In step Ss1901, long variable time information is acquired. Specifically, an extremely long variable time of 10 minutes (long variable time) is acquired as variable time information. After executing step Ss1901, the process of acquiring variable time information during a low-probability, low-support state for the second starting port is terminated.

<Low-accuracy/high-support state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port>
Next, a low-accuracy/high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port will be described. The process for acquiring the low-accuracy/high-support state time variation time information for the second starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 364: Ss1805) of the variable time setting process for the second starting port.

Figure 366 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring variable time information during a low probability high support state for the second starting port. In step Ss2001, it is determined whether the result of the win/loss judgment for the current game round is a jackpot or not. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (Ss2001: YES), it proceeds to step Ss2002.

In step Ss2002, a variable time table for a jackpot is specified from a group of variable time tables for low probability and high support states stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for a jackpot is referred to. By doing so, fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. The variable time table group when in a low probability and high support state includes (I) a variable time table for jackpot that is used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a low probability and high support state; (II) a variable time table for winning a jackpot in a low probability and high support state; A variable time table for reach generation that is used when a reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a lottery, (III) A variable time table for reach occurrence that is used when a reach does not occur without a jackpot in a winning lottery in a low probability and high support state. A variable time table for occurrence is provided. In step Ss2002, first, (I) is identified from among (I) to (III). Next, by referring to the specified fluctuation time table for jackpot, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step Ss1801 (FIG. 364) is obtained. After executing step Ss2002, the process for acquiring the low-accuracy-high support state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss2001 that the result of the win/loss determination for the current game round is not a jackpot (step Ss2001: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2003.

In step Ss2003, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. If it is determined in step Ss2003 that a reach will occur in the current game round (step Ss2003: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2004.

In step Ss2004, a variable time table for reach occurrence is specified from the group of variable time tables for low probability/high support state stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for reach occurrence is By referring to this, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. Specifically, first, from among (I) to (III), (II) a variable time table for reach occurrence that is used when a reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a low probability and high support state. Identify. Next, by referring to the specified fluctuation time table for reach occurrence, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step Ss1801 (FIG. 364) is acquired. After executing step Ss2004, the process for acquiring low-accuracy-high support state time fluctuation time information for the second starting port is completed.

In step Ss2003, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (step Ss2003: NO), the process advances to step Ss2005.

In step Ss2005, a variable time table for non-reach occurrence is identified from the group of variable time tables during low probability high support state stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of ROM 63, and variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is obtained by referring to the identified variable time table for non-reach occurrence. Specifically, first, from (I) to (III), a variable time table for non-reach occurrence is identified, which is used when a jackpot is not won in the winning lottery and a reach does not occur in a low probability high support state. Next, variable time information corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CS obtained in step Ss1801 (Fig. 364) is obtained by referring to the identified variable time table for non-reach occurrence. After executing step Ss2005, the process of obtaining variable time information during low probability high support state for the second starting port is terminated.

<Highly accurate and high support state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port>
Next, a highly accurate and high support state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port will be described. The highly accurate and high support state time variation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 364: Ss1807) of the variable time setting process for the second starting port.

Figure 367 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring variable time information during a high probability high support state for the second starting port. In step Ss2101, long variable time information is acquired. Specifically, an extremely long variable time of 10 minutes is acquired as variable time information. After executing step Ss2101, the process of acquiring variable time information during a high probability high support state for the second starting port is terminated.

<Processing for acquiring variable time information during high probability low support state for the second starting port>
Next, the high probability low support state variable time information acquisition process for the second starting port will be described. The high probability low support state variable time information acquisition process for the second starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 364: Ss1807) of the variable time setting process for the second starting port.

Figure 368 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring variable time information during high probability low support state for the second starting port. In step Ss2201, it is determined whether the result of the win/loss judgment for the current game round is a jackpot or not. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (Ss2201: YES), it proceeds to step Ss2202.

In step Ss2202, a variable time table for a jackpot is specified from a group of variable time tables for high certainty and low support states stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for a jackpot is referred to. By doing so, fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. The high-probability, low-support state time variation time table group includes (IV) a jackpot variation time table used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a high-probability, low-support state, and (V) a high-probability, low-support state, a hit. A variable time table for reach generation that is used when a reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a lottery, (VI) A variable time table for reach occurrence that is used when a reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a high probability and low support state. A variable time table for occurrence is provided. In step Ss2202, first, (IV) is specified from among (IV) to (VI). Next, by referring to the specified fluctuation time table for jackpot, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step Ss1801 (FIG. 364) is obtained. After executing step Ss2202, the high-accuracy/low-support state time variation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss2201 that the result of the win/loss determination for the current game round is not a jackpot (step Ss2201: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2203.

In step Ss2203, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. In step Ss2203, if it is determined that reach occurs in the current game round (step Ss2203: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2204.

In step Ss2204, a variable time table for reach occurrence is specified from the group of variable time tables for high certainty and low support states stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for reach occurrence is By referring to this, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, (V) is specified from among (IV) to (VI). Next, by referring to the specified fluctuation time table for reach occurrence, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step Ss1801 (FIG. 364) is acquired. After executing step Ss2204, the high-accuracy/low-support state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is ended.

If it is determined in step Ss2203 that no reach will occur in the current game round (step Ss2203: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2205.

In step Ss2205, a variable time table for non-reach occurrence is identified from the group of variable time tables during high probability low support state stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of ROM 63, and variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired by referring to the identified variable time table for non-reach occurrence. Specifically, first, (VI) is identified from (IV) to (VI). Next, variable time information corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CS acquired in step Ss1801 (Fig. 364) is acquired by referring to the identified variable time table for non-reach occurrence. After executing step Ss2205, the process of acquiring variable time information during high probability low support state for the second starting port is terminated.

<Second fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the second fluctuation stop processing will be described. The second fluctuation stop processing is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control processing (FIG. 351: Ss507).

Figure 369 is a flowchart showing the second variation stop processing. In step Ss2301, it is determined whether the first winning flag in the various flags storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The first winning flag is turned ON when the result of the winning lottery executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the first start hole (the central first start hole 33, the right side first start hole 44) is a "big win", "special small win", or "normal small win", and is turned OFF when the variation display of the first pattern caused by the entry of the game ball into the first start hole stops and becomes a stationary display. In step Ss2301, if it is determined that the first winning flag is not ON (Ss2301: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2302.

In step Ss2302, it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the second pattern display section 37a has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the fluctuation time for the second pattern set in the process for setting the fluctuation time for the second start port (Fig. 364) has elapsed. If it is determined in step Ss2302 that the fluctuation time of the second pattern display section 37a has ended (Ss2302: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2303. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss2302 that the fluctuation time of the second pattern display section 37a has not ended (Ss2302: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2311.

In step Ss2303, the fluctuation of the second symbol display section 37a is stopped. That is, the second symbol on the second symbol display section 37a changes from being displayed in a variable manner to a stationary display. The combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed (stop symbols) is set in step Ss1709, step Ss1711, or step Ss1715 of the second starting opening determination process (FIG. 363). After executing step Ss2303, the process advances to step Ss2304.

In step Ss2304, the second changing flag in the various flags storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. As described above, the second changing flag is a flag that is turned ON when the second pattern in the second pattern display section 37a starts changing in response to the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 34, and is turned OFF when the second pattern stops changing. After executing step Ss2304, the process proceeds to step Ss2305.

In step Ss2305, it is determined whether the first fluctuating flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As described above, the first fluctuating flag is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port (center side first starting port 33, right side first starting port 44), and the first fluctuating flag changes to This flag is turned ON when the first symbol starts to fluctuate, and is turned OFF when the first symbol stops fluctuating. If it is determined in step Ss2305 that the first fluctuation flag is not ON (Ss2305: NO), the process advances to step Ss2306.

In step Ss2306, the second winning flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the second fluctuation stop processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss2305 that the first fluctuation flag is ON (Ss2305: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2311.

If it is determined in step Ss2301 that the first winning flag is ON (Ss2301: YES), proceed to step Ss2307.

In step Ss2307, it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the first pattern display section 37b has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the fluctuation time for the first pattern set in the process for setting the fluctuation time for the first start port (FIG. 355) has elapsed. If it is determined in step Ss2307 that the fluctuation time of the first pattern display section 37b has not ended (Ss2307: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2302. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss2307 that the fluctuation time of the first pattern display section 37b has ended (Ss2307: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2308.

In step Ss2308, the first winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step Ss2308, the process advances to step Ss2309.

In step Ss2309, the variation of the second symbol display section 37a is stopped. In other words, the second symbol of the second symbol display section 37a is switched from a varying display state to a stopped display. In this embodiment, the symbol to be stopped (stopping symbol) is a stop symbol for a loss. Furthermore, in step Ss2309, various flags such as the guaranteed jackpot flag and the normal jackpot flag related to the second start port play round are switched to OFF, and even if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery related to the second start port play round, the winning is invalidated. After executing step Ss2309, proceed to step Ss2310.

In step Ss2310, the second fluctuating flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Ss2311.

In step Ss2311, it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Ss2311 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss2311: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2312, where it is determined whether the number of games that will continue to be played in the high frequency support mode has not yet reached the guaranteed number of games (e.g., 50 games) (=within the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC is greater than 0. Since the guaranteed number of games counter PNC indicates the remaining number of guaranteed games, it is possible to determine whether the number of games that will continue to be played in the high frequency support mode has not yet reached the guaranteed number of games by determining whether PNC>0.

In step Ss2312, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Ss2312: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not within the guaranteed number of games, the process proceeds to step Ss2313, and the high-frequency support Turn off the mode flag. After executing step Ss2313, the process advances to step Ss2314.

In step Ss2314, a low-frequency support mode command is set. The low-frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the audio and light emission control device 90 that the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be the low-frequency support mode. The low-frequency support mode command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 in the normal processing (FIG. 350). Thereafter, this second fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss2311 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss2311: NO), the second fluctuation stop process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in step Ss2312 that the value of the guaranteed play count counter PNC is greater than 0 (step Ss2312: YES), the second fluctuation stop process is terminated.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be explained. The gaming state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 350: Ss0406) of the normal process.

FIG. 370 is a flowchart showing the gaming state transition process. In step Ss2401, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode (at the start of the ending period), and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step Ss2401 that the ending period flag is not ON (Ss2401: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2402, where it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the game state is to be transitioned to the opening/closing processing period, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing processing period is to be ended.

In step Ss2402, if it is determined that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Ss2402: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2403, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Ss2403 that the opening period flag is not ON (Ss2403: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2404, where it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game round that triggered the start of the opening/closing execution mode ends, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In step Ss2404, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Ss2404: YES), the process advances to step Ss2405. On the other hand, in step Ss2404, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Ss2404: NO), the gaming state transition process is directly ended.

In step Ss2405, it is determined whether or not it is a normal small win. Specifically, by determining whether the normal small win flag is ON, it is determined whether the trigger for starting the opening/closing execution mode is the winning of the normal small win. In step Ss2405, if it is determined that it is not a normal small hit (Ss2405: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2406.

In step Ss2406, it is determined whether or not a special small win has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the trigger for starting the opening and closing execution mode is a special small win by determining whether or not the special small win flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss2406 that the special small win has not occurred (Ss2406: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2407.

In step Ss2407, the high probability mode flag is turned off. In step Ss2405 and step Ss2406, it is determined that the game result (result of the winning lottery) of the current game round is not a small win (normal small win, special small win), so the winning lottery result of the current game round is a big hit. The high probability mode flag is turned OFF in order to change the lottery mode currently being executed in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning a jackpot to a low probability mode. After executing step Ss2407, the process advances to step Ss2408.

In step Ss2408, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. In step Ss2408, since it is determined that the game result (the result of the winning lottery) for the current game round is not a small win (normal small win, special small win), the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. In order to change the support mode during the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed in response to a jackpot win, to the low frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step Ss2408, proceed to step Ss2409.

In step Ss2409, a jackpot opening/closing execution mode command is set. The jackpot opening/closing execution mode command is a command for notifying the sound and light emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode will be started in response to a jackpot win. The jackpot opening/closing execution mode command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 350: step Ss0402). After executing step Ss2409, proceed to step Ss2413.

If it is determined in step Ss2405 that this is a normal small win (Ss2405: YES), proceed to step Ss2413.

In step Ss2406, if it is determined that it is a special small win (Ss2406: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2410.

In step Ss2410, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Ss2411, and a low frequency support mode command is set. The low frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the audio light emission control device 90 that the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low frequency support mode. The low frequency support mode command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). After executing step Ss2411, the process advances to step Ss2412.

In step Ss2412, an invincible zone command is set. The invincible zone command is a command for notifying the sound and light emission control device 90 that a high probability high support state has been transitioned to a high probability low support state (invincible zone). The invincible zone command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 in the normal processing (FIG. 350). After executing step Ss2412, proceed to step Ss2413.

In step Ss2413, an opening/closing execution mode start command is set. The opening/closing execution mode start command is a command for notifying the sound and light emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode will be started in response to a big win or a small win. In other words, the opening/closing execution mode start command is set when the opening/closing execution mode is started regardless of whether a big win or a small win has been won. The opening/closing execution mode start command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 350: step Ss0402). After executing step Ss2413, proceed to step Ss2414.

In step Ss2414, an opening/closing scenario setting process is executed. The opening/closing scenario setting process is a process for setting an opening/closing scenario in which the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 36b in a round of play is set. The opening/closing scenario setting process will be described later. After executing step Ss2414, the process proceeds to step Ss2415.

In step Ss2415, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the opening period in the special game state (hereinafter also referred to as the opening time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. The opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step Ss2415, the process proceeds to step Ss2416.

In step Ss2416, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 in the normal processing (Fig. 350). This opening command includes information on the set opening time, information on the type of big win, and information on the big win or small win that triggered the current opening and closing execution mode to be executed. Based on the received opening command, the audio and light emission control device 90 determines the content of the presentation corresponding to the opening time and opening and closing execution mode, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step Ss2416, the process proceeds to step Ss2417, where the opening period flag is set to ON. After that, the game state transition process ends.

In step Ss2403, if it is determined that the opening period flag is ON (Ss2403: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2418, and processing when the opening period flag is ON is executed. Details of the process when the opening period flag is ON will be described later. After executing step Ss2418, the main gaming state transition process is ended.

In step Ss2402, if it is determined that the opening/closing processing period flag is ON (Ss2402: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2419, and processing when the opening/closing processing period flag is ON is executed. Details of the processing when the opening/closing processing period flag is ON will be described later. After executing step Ss2419, the main game state transition process is ended.

If it is determined in step Ss2401 that the ending period flag is ON (Ss2401: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2420, where the process when the ending period flag is ON is executed. The details of the process when the ending period flag is ON will be described later. After executing step Ss2420, this game state transition process is terminated.

<Opening/closing scenario setting process>
Next, the opening/closing scenario setting process will be described. The opening/closing scenario setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 370: Ss2414).

FIG. 371 is a flowchart showing opening/closing scenario setting processing. In step Ss2501, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON. In step Ss2501, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (Ss2501: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2502.

In step Ss2502, a jackpot opening/closing scenario is set according to the type of jackpot. The opening/closing scenario is a program in which an opening pattern of the opening/closing door 36b in a round game is set. After executing step Ss2502, the main opening/closing scenario setting process ends.

In step Ss2501, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is not ON (Ss2501: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2503.

In step Ss2503, a small win opening/closing scenario is set. In addition, in this embodiment, an opening/closing pattern in which the opening/closing door 36b opens and closes once in the round game is set in the opening/closing scenario for small winnings. After executing step Ss2503, the main opening/closing scenario setting process ends.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be explained. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 370: Ss2415) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 372 is a flowchart showing opening time setting processing. In step Ss2601, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot win. Specifically, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON or not.

If it is determined in step Ss2601 that the trigger for this opening/closing execution mode is a big win (Ss2601: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2602.

In step Ss2602, 3000 (approximately 6.0 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. Thereafter, the opening time setting process ends.

On the other hand, in step Ss2601, if it is determined that the trigger for the current opening/closing execution mode is not a jackpot win, that is, if it is determined that the trigger for the current opening/closing execution mode is a small win (Ss2601: NO), step Proceed to Ss2603.

In step Ss2603, 0 (0 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. Thereafter, the opening time setting process ends.

<Processing when opening period flag is ON>
Next, processing when the opening period flag is ON will be explained. The opening period flag ON process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 370: Ss2418).

Figure 373 is a flowchart showing the processing when the opening period flag is ON. In step Ss2701, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 set in the opening time setting processing is "0". If it is determined in step Ss2701 that the opening period has ended (Ss2701: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2702, where the opening period flag is set to OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Ss2703.

In step Ss2703, a round display start process is executed to notify the type of the current opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the jackpot type is displayed on the round display section 39. After executing step Ss2703, the process advances to step Ss2704.

In step Ss2704, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the opening period flag ON process ends.

In step Ss2701, if it is determined that the opening period has not ended (Ss2701: NO), the process when the opening period flag is ON ends.

<Processing when opening/closing processing period flag is ON>
Next, the process when the opening/closing process period flag is ON will be explained. The process when the opening/closing process period flag is ON is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 370: Ss2419) of the gaming state transition process.

Figure 374 is a flowchart showing the processing when the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. In step Ss2801, the large prize opening/closing processing is executed. The large prize opening/closing processing is described later. After executing step Ss2801, the process proceeds to step Ss2802.

In step Ss2802, it is determined whether or not the big winning hole opening/closing process has ended, and if it is determined that the big winning hole opening/closing process has ended (Ss2802: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2803. On the other hand, in step Ss2802, if it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not ended (Ss2802: NO), the main opening/closing process period flag ON process is ended.

In step Ss2803, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step Ss2804.

In step Ss2804, round display end processing is executed. In this process, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step Ss2404, the process advances to step Ss2805.

In step Ss2805, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the ending period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as the ending time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 as the ending time. After executing step Ss2805, the process proceeds to step Ss2806.

In step Ss2806, an ending command is set. The set ending command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). The audio emission control device 90 starts a production corresponding to the ending period based on receiving the ending command. After executing step Ss2806, the process advances to step Ss2807.

In step Ss2807, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, this process ends when the opening/closing process period flag is ON.

<Big prize opening and closing process>
Next, the special prize opening opening/closing process will be described. The special prize opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Ss2801 in FIG. 374) for the process when the opening/closing process period flag is ON.

FIG. 375 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step Ss2901, it is determined whether the opening/closing door 36b is open. If it is determined in step Ss2901 that the door 36b is not open (Ss2901: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2902.

In step Ss2902, it is determined whether the opening condition for opening door 36b has been met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open opening door 36b. If it is determined in step Ss2902 that the opening condition for opening door 36b has been met (Ss2902: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2903.

In step Ss2903, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. After that, the process advances to step Ss2904.

In step Ss2904, a door open command is set. The door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the door 36b has been opened. The door open command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 350: Ss0402) of the normal process. After step Ss2904 is executed, the main prize opening and closing process is terminated.

In step Ss2902, if it is determined that the opening condition for the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Ss2902: NO), the main prize opening/closing process is directly ended.

In step Ss2901, if it is determined that the door 36b is open (Ss2901: YES), the process advances to step Ss2905.

In step Ss2905, it is determined whether the closing condition for the opening and closing door 36b has been met. The closing condition for the opening and closing door 36b is met when the continuous open time for the opening and closing door 36b set in the opening and closing scenario has elapsed or when it is detected that a preset number of game balls have entered the big prize opening 36a. In step Ss2905, if it is determined that the closing condition for the opening and closing door 36b has been met (Ss2905: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2906.

In step Ss2906, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. Thereafter, the process advances to step Ss2907.

In step Ss2907, a door closing command is set. The opening/closing door close command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b is closed. The opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 350: Ss0402) of the normal process. After executing step Ss2907, the main prize opening opening/closing process ends.

If it is determined in step Ss2905 that the closing conditions for the opening and closing door 36b are not met (Ss2905: NO), the large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated.

<Processing when ending period flag is ON>
Next, the ending period flag ON process will be described. The ending period flag ON process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 370: Ss2420).

Figure 376 is a flowchart showing the processing when the ending period flag is ON. In step Ss3001, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time in the ending time setting process (Ss2805) is "0". If it is determined in step Ss2805 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Ss3001: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3002.

In step Ss3002, the ending period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Ss3003, and transition processing at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game after the current ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Ss3003, the process advances to step Ss3004 and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Ss3005, and an opening/closing execution mode end command is set. The opening/closing execution mode end command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode has ended. The opening/closing execution mode end command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). Thereafter, the process when the ending period flag is ON ends.

On the other hand, in step Ss3001, if it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Ss3001: NO), the process when the ending period flag is ON is directly terminated.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be explained. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 376: Ss3003) of the process when the ending period flag is ON.

FIG. 377 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Ss3101, it is determined whether the current transition to the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot. Specifically, if any of the jackpot type flags stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the current opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot.

In step Ss3101, if it is determined that the trigger for switching to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot (Ss3101: YES), the process advances to step Ss3102, and the trigger for switching to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a probability-variable jackpot. Determine whether or not. Specifically, when the variable probability jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the current opening/closing execution mode is a variable probability jackpot.

In step Ss3102, if it is determined that the trigger for the current transition to the opening/closing execution mode is a variable jackpot (Ss3102: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3103. On the other hand, in step Ss3102, if it is determined that the trigger for the current transition to the opening/closing execution mode is not a probability variable jackpot (Ss3102: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3112.

In step Ss3103, the corresponding probability variable jackpot flag is turned OFF. Specifically, a process is executed to turn off the ON flag among the 10R probability variable jackpot flag and the 2R probability variation flag. After executing step Ss3103, the process advances to step Ss3104.

In step Ss3104, the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is turned on. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. After executing step Ss3104, the process advances to step Ss3105.

In step Ss3105, the high probability mode command is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. The high probability mode command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the win/lose lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high probability mode. After executing step Ss3105, proceed to step Ss3106.

In step Ss3106, the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Ss3107, and 50 is set as a counter value in the number of games counter PNC. After executing step Ss3107, the process advances to step Ss3108.

In step Ss3108, a high frequency support mode command is set. The high frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

If it is determined in step Ss3102 that the trigger for the transition to the current open/close execution mode is not a guaranteed jackpot (Ss3102: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3109, where the corresponding regular jackpot flag is turned OFF. After executing step Ss3109, the process proceeds to step Ss3110.

In step Ss3110, the low probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. The low probability mode command is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the winning lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode. After executing step Ss3110, the process advances to step Ss3111.

In step Ss3111, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss3112, where the game play count counter PNC is set to a counter value of 50. After executing step Ss3112, the process proceeds to step Ss3113.

In step Ss3113, a high frequency support mode command is set. The high frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

If it is determined in step Ss3101 that the trigger for the current transition to the opening and closing execution mode is not a big win (Ss3101: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3114. In step Ss3114, it is determined whether the trigger for the current transition to the opening and closing execution mode is a normal small win. Specifically, if the normal small win stored in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the trigger for the current transition to the opening and closing execution mode is a normal small win.

If it is determined in step Ss3114 that the trigger for the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode is a normal small win (Ss3114: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3115, where the normal small win flag is turned OFF. After executing step Ss3115, the transition process at the end of this ending period is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3114 that the trigger for the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode is not a normal small win (Ss3114: NO), that is, that the trigger for the transition to the current opening and closing execution mode is a special small win, the process proceeds to step Ss3116, where the special small win flag is turned OFF. After executing step Ss3116, the transition process at the end of this ending period is terminated.

<Processing for electric support>
Next, the processing for electric support will be explained. The electric support support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 350: Ss0407).

Figure 378 is a flowchart showing the electric support process. In step Ss3201, it is determined whether or not support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support in progress flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support in progress flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric device 44a of the first right-side starting port 44 is opened, and is turned OFF when the electric device 44a is returned to the closed state. In step Ss3201, if it is determined that the support in progress flag is not ON (Ss3201: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3202.

In step Ss3202, it is determined whether the support win flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support win flag is a flag that is turned ON when an open state is won in the electric role opening lottery to determine whether the electric role 44a is opened or not, and is turned OFF when the support in progress flag is ON. In step Ss3202, if it is determined that the support win flag is not ON (Ss3202: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3203.

In step Ss3203, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, at 2 msec intervals.

In step Ss3203, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Ss3203: NO), this electronic role support process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Ss3203: YES), the process advances to step Ss3204.

In step Ss3204, it is determined whether it is time to end the display of the changing patterns in the normal map unit 38. If it is determined in step Ss3204 that it is time to end the display of the changing patterns (Ss3204: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3205, where a miss display is set, and the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. By setting the miss display, the display of the changing patterns in the normal map unit 38 is terminated with the miss display stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3204 that it is not time to end the display of the changing patterns (Ss3204: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3206.

In step Ss3206, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved reels SN is greater than "0". If it is determined in step Ss3206 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is "0" (Ss3206: NO), the main electric reel support processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3206 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is greater than "0" (Ss3206: YES), the processing proceeds to step Ss3207.

In step Ss3207, it is determined whether the game is in the open/close execution mode, and then the process proceeds to step Ss3208 to determine whether the game is in the high-frequency support mode. If the game is not in the open/close execution mode in step Ss3207 (Ss3207: NO) and is in the high-frequency support mode in step Ss3208 (Ss3208: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3209 to hold a lottery for opening the electric role. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role reserve area 64d is shifted, and if the value of the electric role opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role opening lottery is won. In addition, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "5" (i.e., 0.01 sec) at the same time as the electric role opening lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss3210.

In step Ss3210, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric role opening lottery in step Ss3209 is a support win. In step Ss3210, if it is determined that the result of the electric role opening lottery is a support win (Ss3210: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3211, where the support win flag is turned ON and the second round counter area RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of RAM 64 is set to "1". The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric role 44a has been opened. After that, the electric role support process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3210 that the result of the electric role opening lottery is not a support win (Ss3210: NO), the electric role support processing is terminated without executing the processing of step Ss3211.

If it is determined in step Ss3207 that the mode is the open/close execution mode (Ss3207: YES), or if it is determined in step Ss3208 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (Ss3208: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3212, where a lottery is held to open the electric role device. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role reserve area 64d is shifted, and if the value of the electric role device opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is between 0 and 190, the electric role device opening lottery is won. In addition, simultaneously with the electric role device opening lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (i.e. 29.5 sec). Then, the process proceeds to step Ss3213.

In step Ss3213, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric role release lottery in step Ss3212 is a support win. If it is determined in step Ss3213 that there is no support win (Ss3213: NO), the main electric role support processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3213 that there is a support win (Ss3213: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3214, where the support win flag is turned ON and the second round counter area RC2 is set to "1", after which the main electric role support processing ends.

In step Ss3202, if it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (Ss3202: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3215, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general figure unit 38. In step Ss3215, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Ss3215: NO), since the symbol in the general drawing unit 38 is being displayed in a variable manner, the main electric role support processing is performed as it is. end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3215 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Ss3215: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3216.

In step Ss3216, a winning display is set. This ends the display of the changing patterns in the normal unit 38 with the winning display stopped. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss3217, where the support in progress flag is turned ON and the support winning flag is turned OFF. Then, the main role support process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss3201 that the support flag is ON (Ss3201: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3218, where an electric role opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 44a. After that, the electric role support process is terminated.

<Electric opening/closing process>
Next, the power opening/closing process will be explained. The electric role opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine for electric role support processing (FIG. 378: Ss3218).

Figure 379 is a flowchart showing the electric role opening and closing process. In step Ss3301, it is determined whether the electric role 44a is open or not. Whether the electric role 44a is open or not is determined by whether the electric role drive unit 44b is in a driven state or not. If it is determined that the electric role 44a is open (Ss3301: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3302.

In step Ss3302, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of opening of the electric accessory 44a. In step Ss3302, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Ss3302: NO), the main electric role opening/closing process is directly ended. That is, if the opening duration time of the electric accessory 44a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing process ends.

If it is determined in step Ss3302 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Ss3302: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3303, where a closing process is performed to control the electric role 44a to a closed state, and the second timer counter area T2 is set to "5" (i.e., 0.01 sec). In other words, if the second timer counter area T2, which serves as a means for measuring the open duration of the electric role 44a, is "0", the electric role 44a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is now used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration of the electric role 44a, and "250" is set to the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Ss3303, the process proceeds to step Ss3304.

In step Ss3304, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step Ss3305, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". In step Ss3305, if it is determined that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Ss3305: NO), the main electric hand opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3305 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Ss3305: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3306 and the support flag is turned OFF. After that, the main power opening/closing process is ended.

If it is determined in step Ss3301 that the electric role 44a is not open (Ss3301: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3307, where it is determined whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the electric role 44a being closed. If it is determined in step Ss3307 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Ss3307: NO), the electric role opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3307 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Ss3307: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3308, where an opening process is performed to control the electric role 44a to an open state. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss3309.

In step Ss3309, it is determined whether the device is in the opening and closing execution mode, and if it is determined that the device is not in the opening and closing execution mode (Ss3309: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3310, where it is determined whether the device is in the high frequency support mode.

If it is determined in step Ss3310 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (Ss3310: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3311, where the second timer counter area T2 is set to "250" (i.e., 0.5 sec). After that, the main electric component opening/closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3309 that the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (Ss3309: YES), or if it is determined in step Ss3310 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (Ss3310: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3312, where the second timer counter area T2 is set to "100" (i.e., 0.2 sec). After that, the main electric component opening/closing process is terminated.

<Game ball distribution control process>
Next, the game ball distribution control process will be described. The game ball distribution control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 350: Ss0408).

Figure 380 is a flowchart showing the game ball distribution control process. In step Ss3401, it is determined whether the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". The fifth timer counter area T5 is used as a parameter for switching the distribution piece 242 of the game ball distribution device 240 between the first position Q1 and the second position Q2. By determining whether the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 is "0", it is possible to determine whether it is time to switch the distribution piece 242 from the first position Q1 to the second position Q2. The count value set in the fifth timer counter area T5 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, at 2 msec intervals.

In step Ss3401, if it is determined that the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 is "0" (Ss3401: YES), the process advances to step Ss3402.

In step Ss3402, the game ball distribution drive section 241a (FIG. 337) is drive-controlled to switch the distribution piece section 242 from the first position Q1 to the second position Q2. After that, the game ball distribution control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3401 that the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 is not "0" (Ss3401: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3403.

In step Ss3403, it is determined whether the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "-50". A value of "50" corresponds to approximately 0.1 sec.

In step Ss3403, if it is determined that the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 is "-50" (Ss3403: YES), the process advances to step Ss3404.

In step Ss3404, the game ball distribution drive section 241a (FIG. 337) is drive-controlled to switch the distribution piece section 242 from the second position Q2 to the first position Q1. As a result, the distribution piece section 242 is in the second position Q2 for only about 0.1 seconds, from when the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 becomes "0" until it becomes "-50". The state will be maintained. After executing step Ss3403, the process advances to step Ss3405.

In step Ss3405, 1000 (approximately 2.0 sec) is set in the fifth timer counter area T5. By setting approximately 2.0 seconds as an initial value in the fifth timer counter area T5, the distribution piece section 242 will maintain the state at the first position Q1 for only approximately 2.0 seconds. After executing step Ss3405, this game ball distribution control process ends.

If it is determined in step Ss3403 that the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 is not "-50" (Ss3403: NO), the game ball distribution control process is terminated.

《8-6》Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. First, the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Various processes executed in the audio and light emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 will be described.

Figure 381 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is executed repeatedly at a relatively short period (e.g., 2 msec). The process of each step executed in the timer interrupt process is explained below.

In step Ss3501, a command storage process is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing a received command in the audio/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62. The audio/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer that enables the storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are stored sequentially in the ring buffer and are read sequentially in the order in which they were stored. After executing step Ss3501, the process proceeds to step Ss3502.

In step Ss3502, pending command handling processing is executed. In the pending command corresponding processing, processing corresponding to the pending command among the commands stored in step Ss3501 is performed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step Ss3502, the process advances to step Ss3503.

In step Ss3503, a game round performance setting process is executed. In the game round performance setting process, the performance to be executed in the game round from when the pattern change starts to when it stops is set. The game round performance setting process will be described in detail later. After executing step Ss3503, the process proceeds to step Ss3504.

In step Ss3504, opening/closing execution mode production processing is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode performance processing, processing related to the performance during the opening period, the performance during the grand prize opening/closing processing period, and the performance during the ending period is performed. After executing step Ss3504, the process advances to step Ss3505.

In step Ss3505, background effect processing is executed. In the background effect processing, processing is performed to display a background moving image determined according to a command indicating a gaming state received from the main side MPU 62 on the symbol display device 41. For example, perform processing to display a background video indicating that high-frequency support mode is continuing, a background video indicating that high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that high-probability mode is continuing. . After executing step Ss3505, the process advances to step Ss3506.

In step Ss3506, a falling effect process is executed. In the falling effect processing, a process is performed in which a effect image (video) determined according to the falling command received from the main side MPU 62 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Specifically, when the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode (that is, in a high certainty high support state), it is determined whether a fall command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined that it has been received, processing is performed to display on the symbol display device 41 an effect image that can indicate that the player is in a disadvantageous state. By viewing the effect image displayed on the symbol display device 41 that may indicate that the player is in a disadvantageous state, the player recognizes that the lottery mode has shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. be able to. In this embodiment, since the first branch passage section 220 and the second branch passage section 230 provided in the starting port unit 200 are formed of a transparent resin material, the second route RT2 in the starting port unit 200 (FIG. 334 ), the player can recognize that the lottery mode has shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, but according to the process of step Ss3506, the lottery mode is not displayed on the symbol display device 41. Since this can also be recognized by the effect images displayed, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. After executing step Ss3506, the process advances to step Ss3507.

In step Ss3507, an invincible zone entry effect process is executed. In the invincible zone entry effect process, a process is performed to display an effect image (video) determined according to the invincible zone command received from the main MPU 62 on the pattern display device 41. By viewing the effect image displayed on the symbol display device 41 and determined according to the invincibility zone command, the player recognizes that the state has shifted from the high-accuracy, high-support state to the high-accuracy, low-support state (invincibility zone). Can be done. In this embodiment, since the main passage section 210, the first branch passage section 220, and the second branch passage section 230 provided in the starting port unit 200 are formed of a transparent resin material, the Although the player can recognize that the game ball has moved from the high-accuracy, high-support state to the high-accuracy, low-support state (invincibility zone) by the flow of the game ball along the 3-route RT3 (FIG. 335), the process in step Ss3507 According to the above, since it can also be recognized by the effect image displayed on the symbol display device 41, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. After executing step Ss3507, the process advances to step Ss3508.

In step Ss3508, other processing is executed. The other processing is, for example, processing for displaying a demo image (video) on the pattern display device 41 when the player is not playing. After executing step Ss3508, the process proceeds to step Ss3509.

In step Ss3509, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in each of the above-mentioned production processes. After executing step Ss3509, the process advances to step Ss3510.

In step Ss3510, an audio output control process is executed to control the audio output of the speaker 46. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is executed based on the audio data read in the above-mentioned BGM process and each performance process. After executing step Ss3510, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Pending command processing>
Next, the hold command response process will be described. The hold command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 381: Ss3502).

FIG. 382 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. In step Ss3601, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Ss3601 that a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3601: YES), the process advances to step Ss3602.

In step Ss3602, the currently received hold command is read, and hold information is read from the hold command. The hold information includes information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, the type of jackpot, whether or not a reach has occurred, and the variable time. The read hold information is then stored in a register in the sound/light side MPU 92. The hold information is updated and stored with information on the number of reserved items in the first start port 33 (maximum of four items) and information on the number of reserved items in the second start port 34 (maximum of four items). After executing step Ss3602, proceed to step Ss3603.

In step Ss3603, an update process is performed when a ball is scored. In the update process when a ball is scored, a process is performed to enable the sound/light side MPU 92 to identify the number of pending information pieces acquired based on a ball scoring into the first starting hole 33, the number of pending information pieces acquired based on a ball scoring into the second starting hole 34, and the total number of these pending information pieces. Details of the update process when a ball is scored in step Ss3603 will be described later. In the following, the number of pending information pieces acquired based on a ball scoring into the first starting hole 33 will be referred to as the "first pending number", the number of pending information pieces acquired based on a ball scoring into the second starting hole 34 will be referred to as the "second pending number", and the total number of the first pending number and the second pending number will be referred to as the "total pending number". After executing step Ss3603, proceed to step Ss3604.

In step Ss3604, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, a command for changing the display (such as the display of how many hold display icons are lined up) in the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 in correspondence with the first hold number and the second hold number identified in step Ss3603 is sent to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that receives the command changes the display in the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in correspondence with the first hold number and the second hold number. Specifically, the display control device 100 that receives the command specifies the display position of the hold display icon in the first start port hold area Ds1, and displays the number of icons corresponding to the first hold number at the display position. In addition, the display control device 100 specifies the display position of the hold display icon in the second start port hold area Ds2, and displays the number of icons corresponding to the second hold number at the display position. After executing step Ss3604, the pending command response process ends.

<Update process when entering the ball>
Next, update processing when a ball enters the ball will be explained. The update process when the ball enters the ball is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 382: Ss3603) of the pending command corresponding process.

Figure 383 is a flowchart showing the update process when a ball is scored. In step Ss3701, it is determined whether the pending command to be read this time was sent based on a ball being scored into the first starting hole 33. If it is determined in step Ss3701 that the pending command to be read this time was sent based on a ball being scored into the first starting hole 33 (Ss3701: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3702, where the update process of the first pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 is executed. The first pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pending information acquired based on a ball being scored into the first starting hole 33 in the sound and light side MPU 92. In the update process of the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the information of the number of pending information included in the pending command to be read this time. After executing step Ss3702, the process proceeds to step Ss3704.

In step Ss3701, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Ss3701: NO), that is, the pending command is If it is determined that the transmission was based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process advances to step Ss3703 and updates the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. Execute. The second reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 in the sound-light side MPU 92. In the process of updating the second pending quantity counter area, the information in the second pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the command that is currently read. After executing step Ss3703, the process advances to step Ss3704.

The reason why steps Ss3702 and Ss3703 are processed as described above will be explained. In this embodiment, while the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, but backup power is not supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound and light emission control device 90. For this reason, when the power supply is cut off in a situation where the reserved information related to the ball entering the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the reserved information is stored and held in the main control device 60, but the sound and light emission control device 90 understands that there is zero reserved information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area is counted up each time the sound and light emission control device 90 receives a reserved command, an inconvenience may occur in which the number of reserved information actually stored in the main control device 60 does not match the number of reserved information understood by the sound and light emission control device 90. In response to this, in the present embodiment described above, the main control unit 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of held items, and the audio/light emission control unit 90 adopts a configuration in which the information on the number of held items included in the command is set in the first held item number counter area or the second held item number counter area each time the hold command is received, thereby preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In step Ss3704, a process for updating the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the audio-optical side RAM 94 is executed. The total number of pending balls counter area indicates the sum of the number of pending information obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the sound/light side MPU 92. In this update process, the information in the total number of pending items counter area is changed to the sum of the information on the number of items on hold measured in the first number of pending items counter area and the information on the number of items on hold measured in the second number of pending items counter area. Update to. After executing step Sp3704, the update processing at the time of actual ball entry is ended.

<Game rendition setting process>
Next, the game run performance setting process will be explained. The game performance setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 381: Ss3503).

Figure 384 is a flowchart showing the game round presentation setting process. In step Ss3801, it is determined whether or not a high probability mode command has been received from the main MPU 62.

If it is determined in step Ss3801 that a high probability mode command has been received from the main side MPU 62 (Ss3801: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3802, and the sound-light side high probability mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94 is turned ON.

In step Ss3801, if it is determined that the high probability mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3801: NO), the process advances to step Ss3803, where it is determined whether or not the low probability mode command has been received from the main MPU 62. judge.

In step Ss3803, if it is determined that a low probability mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3803: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3804, and the sound and light data stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound and light side RAM94 are Turn off the side height probability mode flag.

If it is determined in step Ss3803 that a low probability mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3803: NO), the process proceeds directly to step Ss3805. Also, after executing step Ss3802 or after executing step Ss3804, the process proceeds to step Ss3805.

In step Ss3805, it is determined whether a high frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU 62.

If it is determined in step Ss3805 that a high-frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3805: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3806, where the audio-visual side high-frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the audio-visual side RAM 94 is turned ON.

In step Ss3805, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3805: NO), the process advances to step Ss3807, and whether or not the low-frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 is determined. Determine whether

In step Ss3807, if it is determined that the low frequency support mode command has been received from the main side MPU 62 (Ss3807: YES), the process advances to step Ss3808, and the sound Turn off the optical side high frequency support mode flag.

If it is determined in step Ss3807 that a low-frequency support mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3807: NO), the process proceeds directly to step Ss3809. Also, after executing step Ss3806 or after executing step Ss3808, the process proceeds to step Ss3809.

In step Ss3809, a display mode switching process is executed. The display mode switching process is a process for switching the area displaying the first decorative pattern corresponding to the first start hole game round and the second decorative pattern corresponding to the second start hole game round. Specifically, a process for switching between a case where the first decorative pattern is displayed in the main display area MA and the second decorative pattern is displayed in the sub-display area SA, and a case where the second decorative pattern is displayed in the main display area MA and the first decorative pattern is displayed in the sub-display area SA is executed. Details of the display mode switching process will be described later. After executing step Ss3809, proceed to step Ss3810.

In step Ss3810, processing for the presentation of the special 1 game round is executed. The processing for the presentation of the special 1 game round is processing for setting and executing the presentation corresponding to the game round for the first starting port. Details of the processing for the presentation of the special 1 game round will be described later. After executing step Ss3810, proceed to step Ss3811.

In step Ss3811, special 2 game round performance processing is executed. The special 2 game round performance processing is a process for setting and executing the performance corresponding to the second starting opening game round. Details of the processing for special 2 game rendition will be described later. After executing step Ss3811, the main game performance setting process is ended.

<Display mode switching process>
Next, the display mode switching process will be explained. The display mode switching process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 384: Ss3809) of the game run performance setting process.

FIG. 385 is a flowchart showing display mode switching processing. In step Ss3901, it is determined whether the sound-light side high probability mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 94a is ON.

In step Ss3901, if it is determined that the sound-light side high probability mode flag is ON (Ss3901: YES), the process advances to step Ss3902, and the sound-light side high frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 94a is Determine whether it is ON.

If it is determined in step Ss3902 that the audio/visual high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss3902: NO), proceed to step Ss3903.

In step Ss3903, a special 2 main display command is sent to the display control device 100. The display control device 100, which has received the special 2 main display command, controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the second decorative pattern corresponding to the second starting hole game round in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, and display the first decorative pattern corresponding to the first starting hole game round in the sub-display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41. That is, in a high probability low support state (invincible zone) in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode, the second decorative pattern is displayed in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the first decorative pattern is displayed in the sub-display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41.

In step Ss3901, if it is determined that the sound-light side high probability mode flag is not ON (Ss3901: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3904. Further, in step Ss3902, if it is determined that the audio and optical side high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss3902: YES), the process advances to step Ss3904.

In step Ss3904, a special 1 main display command is sent to the display control device 100. The display control device 100, which has received the special 1 main display command, controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the first decorative pattern corresponding to the game round for the first starting opening in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41. At the same time, a second decorative pattern corresponding to the game round for the second starting opening is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41. That is, a low probability low support state where the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode, a low probability high support state where the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode, In each of the high probability and high support states where the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode, the first decorative pattern is displayed in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the liquid crystal display A second decorative pattern is displayed in the sub-display area SA of the device 41.

After executing step Ss3903 or after executing step Ss3904, the display mode switching process ends.

<Special 1 game play performance setting process>
Next, a description will be given of the special 1 game round presentation setting process. The special 1 game round presentation setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game round presentation setting process (FIG. 384: Ss3810).

FIG. 386 is a flowchart showing the special 1 game round performance setting process. In step Ss4001, it is determined whether a first variation command and a first type command have been received from the main MPU 62. In step Ss4001, if it is determined that at least one of the first variation command and the first type command has not been received (Ss4001: NO), the special first game performance setting process is ended. On the other hand, in step Ss4001, if it is determined that the first variation command and the first type command have been received (Ss4001: YES), the process advances to step Ss4002.

In step Ss4002, the first fluctuation command received this time is read, and from the command, information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a special small win, the presence or absence of a reach, and the fluctuation time is read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the audio-optical side MPU 92. After that, the process advances to step Ss4003.

In step Ss4003, a first presentation pattern setting process is executed to set the presentation pattern to be executed in a game round when a big win, a small win, a reach, etc. is reached. Details of the first presentation pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Ss4003, the process proceeds to step Ss4004.

In step Ss4004, a setting process for the stop symbols is executed. In the setting process for the stop symbols, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game is a 16R jackpot, an 8R jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, information corresponding to the stopping result in which the same combination of symbols is established on the active line L of the symbol display device 41 is set as the information for the current stop symbols. Specifically, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game is a 16R jackpot or an 8R jackpot, a combination of the same odd symbols may be selected as the combination of the same symbols, and a combination of the same even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd symbols and the combination of the same even symbols, but instead, the former may be configured to have a higher selection rate than the latter, or the latter may be configured to have a higher selection rate than the former. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R jackpot. Furthermore, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is an 8R regular jackpot, a combination of the same even-numbered symbols will be selected as the combination of the same symbols.

If the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a losing result, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the contents of the variation command. If it is determined that a reach has occurred, information corresponding to a stop result in which the same combination of symbols is not formed on the active line L and a reach pattern combination is formed on the active line L is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that a reach has not occurred, information corresponding to a stop result in which the same combination of symbols is not formed on the active line L and a reach pattern combination is not formed on the active line L is set as the information of the current stop pattern. After executing step Ss4004, proceed to step Ss4005.

In step Ss4005, a process is executed to set the variable display pattern for the current first start port game round (hereinafter referred to as the first variable display pattern). In this process, information on the variable time for the current first start port game round is identified from the content of the currently received first variable command, and a first variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of the variable time information and the information on the stop pattern set in step Ss4004 is selected. When selecting the first variable display pattern, the first variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b (Fig. 344) of the sound/light side ROM 93 is referenced. Then, proceed to step Ss4006.

In step Ss4006, information on the first performance pattern, stop symbol, and first variable display pattern set in the current first starting opening game round is set in the performance command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Ss4007, and the production command is sent to the display-side MPU 102. The display side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the performance content corresponding to the received performance command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Ss4007, the process advances to step Ss4008.

In step Ss4008, a process for updating the pending information is executed. In the process for updating the pending information, the information in the first pending number counter area of the audio/video side RAM 94 is updated so that the first pending number stored in the first pending number counter area is decremented by one. After executing step Ss4008, the process proceeds to step Ss4009.

In step Ss4009, a hold display control process is executed. The hold display control process is the same as the hold display control process executed in step Ss3604 of the hold command response process (FIG. 382). Specifically, a command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first start port hold area Ds1 (display of how many hold display icons are lined up) to correspond to the first hold number identified in step Ss4008. The display control device 100, which has received the command, changes the display in the first start port hold area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the first hold number. After executing step Ss4009, the special 1 play round presentation setting process is terminated.

<First production pattern setting process>
Next, the first effect pattern setting process will be explained. The first performance pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 386: Ss4003) of the special 1 game round performance setting process.

Figure 387 is a flowchart showing the first effect pattern setting process. In step Ss4101, it is determined whether the sound/light side high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss4101 that the sound/light side high probability mode flag is not ON (Ss4101: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4102.

In step Ss4102, it is determined whether the acousto-optical side high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss4102 that the acousto-optical side high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss4102: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4103.

In step Ss4103, a process for setting a presentation pattern for the first starting port in a low-probability, low-support state is executed. The process for setting a presentation pattern for the first starting port in a low-probability, low-support state is a process for setting a presentation pattern for a game round for the first starting port when the lottery mode is a low-probability mode and the support mode is a low-frequency support mode and the game round for the first starting port is executed. Specifically, this process sets a presentation pattern for a game round for the first starting port when the game round for the first starting port is executed in the low-probability, low-support state (state H1) in FIG. 345. Details of the process for setting a presentation pattern for the first starting port in a low-probability, low-support state are described later. After executing step Ss4103, the first presentation pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4102 that the audio-optical high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss4102: YES), the process advances to step Ss4104.

In step Ss4104, a process for setting a presentation pattern for the first starting port in a low probability high support state is executed. The process for setting a presentation pattern for the first starting port in a low probability high support state is a process for setting a presentation pattern for a game round for the first starting port when the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode and the game round for the first starting port is executed. Specifically, this process sets a presentation pattern for a game round for the first starting port when the game round for the first starting port is executed in the low probability high support state (state H3) in FIG. 345. The details of the process for setting a presentation pattern for the first starting port in a low probability high support state are described later. After executing step Ss4104, this first presentation pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4101 that the audio-visual side high probability mode flag is ON (Ss4101: YES), proceed to step Ss4105.

In step Ss4105, it is determined whether the audio-optical side high-frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss4105 that the audio and optical side high frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss4105: YES), the process advances to step Ss4106.

In step Ss4106, a process for setting a presentation pattern for the first starting port in a high probability high support state is executed. The process for setting a presentation pattern for the first starting port in a high probability high support state is a process for setting a presentation pattern for a game round for the first starting port when the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode and the game round for the first starting port is executed. Specifically, this process sets a presentation pattern for a game round for the first starting port when the game round for the first starting port is executed in the high probability high support state (state H5) in FIG. 345. The details of the process for setting a presentation pattern for the first starting port in a high probability high support state are described later. After executing step Ss4106, this first presentation pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4105 that the audio/visual side high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss4105: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4107.

In step Ss4107, a high-accuracy/low-support state performance pattern setting process for the first starting opening is executed. The production pattern setting process for the first starting opening in a high probability and low support state is performed when the game round for the first starting opening is executed when the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. This is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the first starting opening. Specifically, when the game round for the first starting opening is executed in the high-accuracy/low support state (state H6) in FIG. 345, the process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the first starting opening. It is. Details of the high-accuracy/low-support state effect pattern setting process for the first starting opening will be described later. After executing step Ss4107, the first effect pattern setting process ends.

<Production pattern setting process in low support state for the first starting port>
Next, the low-precision, low-support state performance pattern setting process for the first starting opening will be explained. The performance pattern setting process in the low-accuracy/low-support state for the first starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 387: Ss4103) of the first performance pattern setting process.

Figure 388 is a flowchart showing the process for setting the effect pattern in the low probability low support state for the first starting port. In step Ss4201, a process for obtaining a random number for the effect pattern is executed. In the process for obtaining a random number for the effect pattern, a random number for the effect pattern is obtained from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound/light side RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss4202.

In step Ss4202, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination (winning lottery) for the current play is a jackpot win or not. Specifically, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot win or not from the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 by step Ss4002 of the special play round performance setting process (Fig. 386). In step Ss4202, if it is determined that the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot win (Ss4202: YES), proceed to step Ss4203.

In step Ss4203, a performance pattern table for a jackpot is specified from the performance pattern table group for low probability and low frequency states stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. The performance pattern table group for low probability and low frequency states includes (a) a performance pattern table for jackpot that is used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a low probability and low frequency state; (b) a performance pattern table for winning a jackpot in a low probability and low frequency state; (c) Reach generation production pattern table used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a lottery, (c) Reach non-reach generation table used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a low probability and low frequency state. A production pattern table for generation is provided. In step Ss4203, (a) is specified from among (a) to (c). (A) is, for example, a performance pattern table for performing a normal performance for a jackpot. After executing step Ss4203, the process advances to step Ss4204.

In step Ss4204, the presentation pattern table identified in step Ss4203 is referenced to obtain a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable time obtained in step Ss1002 (FIG. 356) and the value of the random number for the current presentation pattern obtained in step Ss4201. In the following step Ss4205, the presentation pattern obtained in step Ss4204 is set as the presentation pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Ss4205, the process of setting the presentation pattern for the first starting port in the low probability low support state is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Ss4202, if it is determined that the result of the judgment in the current game round is not a jackpot (Ss4202: NO), the process advances to step Ss4206, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs based on the information regarding the presence or absence of a reach that is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by Ss4002 of the special 1 game round effect setting process (FIG. 386). In step Ss4206, if it is determined that the result of the judgment in the current game round is that a reach has occurred (Ss4206: YES), the process advances to step Ss4207.

In step Ss4207, a performance pattern table for reaching generation is specified from the performance pattern table group for low-probability, low-support states stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (a) low-probability, low-support state, a reach generation production pattern table is specified, which is used when a reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery. (A) is, for example, a performance pattern table for performing a normal performance for reach. After executing step Ss4207, proceed to step Ss4204 described earlier, refer to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4207, and compare the fluctuation time obtained in step Ss1002 (FIG. 356) and the variation time obtained in step Ss1004 (FIG. 356). A production pattern corresponding to the variable time and the value of the random number for the current production pattern is obtained.

In step Ss4206, if it is determined that the result of the validity determination in the current game round is not a reach occurrence (Ss4206: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4208.

In step Ss4208, a performance pattern table for no-reach occurrence is specified from the performance pattern table group for low-probability, low-support states stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (c) low probability low support state, a reach non-occurrence production pattern table is specified, which is used when a reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in the winning lottery. (C) is a performance pattern table for performing a normal performance for losing, for example. After executing step Ss4208, proceed to step Ss4204 described earlier, refer to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4208, and use the variable time obtained in step Ss1005 (FIG. 356) and the value of the random number for the current effect pattern. Get the corresponding performance pattern.

<Low probability high support state performance pattern setting process for the first starting port>
Next, the low probability high support state performance pattern setting process for the first starting port will be described. The low probability high support state performance pattern setting process for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the first performance pattern setting process (FIG. 387: Ss4104).

FIG. 389 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a performance pattern in a low-accuracy/high-support state for the first starting opening. In step Ss4301, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the performance pattern random number acquisition process, a performance pattern random number is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound and light side RAM 94. After that, the process advances to step Ss4302.

In step Ss4302, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination (winning lottery) for the current game round is a jackpot win or not. Specifically, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot win or not from the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 by step Ss4002 of the special 1 game round performance setting process (Fig. 386). In step Ss4302, if it is determined that the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot win (Ss4302: YES), proceed to step Ss4303.

In step Ss4303, a performance pattern table for a jackpot is specified from a group of performance pattern tables for low probability and high support stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. The performance pattern table group for low-probability high support includes (d) a performance pattern table for jackpot that is used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery with low-probability high support, and (e) a jackpot performance pattern table used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery with low-probability high support. A production pattern table for reach generation that is used when a reach occurs without winning, (f) A production pattern for non-reach generation that is used when a reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery with low probability and high support. A table is provided. In step Ss4303, (d) is specified from (d) to (f). (D) is, for example, a performance pattern table for performing a normal performance for a jackpot. After executing step Ss4303, the process advances to step Ss4304.

In step Ss4304, the performance pattern table specified in step Ss4303 is referred to, and a performance pattern corresponding to the variation time obtained in step Ss1102 (FIG. 357) and the value of the random number for the current performance pattern obtained in step Ss4301 is determined. get. Subsequently, in step Ss4305, the effect pattern acquired in step Ss4304 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Ss4305, the process for setting the performance pattern in the low-accuracy/high-support state for the first starting opening is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4302 that the result of the hit/miss determination in the current game round is not a jackpot win (Ss4302: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4306, where it is determined whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur from the information on the presence or absence of a reach that was stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 by Ss4002 of the special 1 game round performance setting process (Fig. 386). If it is determined in step Ss4306 that the result of the hit/miss determination in the current game round is a reach (Ss4306: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4307.

In step Ss4307, a presentation pattern table for reaching is identified from the group of presentation pattern tables for low probability high support stored in the presentation pattern table storage area 93a (Fig. 344) of ROM 93. Specifically, a presentation pattern table for reaching that is used when a reaching occurs without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the above-mentioned (E) low probability high support is identified. (E) is, for example, a presentation pattern table for performing a normal presentation for reaching. After executing step Ss4307, the process proceeds to step Ss4304 described above, and the presentation pattern table identified in step Ss4307 is referenced to obtain a presentation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time obtained in step Ss1104 (Fig. 357) and the value of the random number for the current presentation pattern.

If it is determined in step Ss4306 that the result of the win/loss determination for the current game round is not a reach occurrence (Ss4306: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4308.

In step Ss4308, a performance pattern table for non-reach occurrence is specified from the performance pattern table group for low probability high support stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (f) low probability high support state, a reach non-occurrence performance pattern table is specified, which is used when a big hit is not won in the winning lottery and a reach does not occur. (F) is, for example, a performance pattern table for performing a normal performance for losing. After executing step Ss4308, proceed to step Ss4304 described earlier, refer to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4308, and use the variable time obtained in step Ss1105 (FIG. 357) and the value of the random number for the current effect pattern. Get the corresponding performance pattern.

<High-probability high-support state performance pattern setting process for the first starting port>
Next, the high probability high support state performance pattern setting process for the first starting port will be described. The high probability high support state performance pattern setting process for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the first performance pattern setting process (FIG. 387: Ss4106).

Figure 390 is a flowchart showing the process for setting the presentation pattern for the first starting gate in a high probability high support state. In step Ss4401, a random number acquisition process for the presentation pattern is executed. In the random number acquisition process for the presentation pattern, a random number for the presentation pattern is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound/light side RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss4402.

In step Ss4402, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination (winning lottery) for the current game round is a jackpot win or not. Specifically, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot win or not from the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 by step Ss4002 of the special 1 game round performance setting process (Fig. 386). In step Ss4402, if it is determined that the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot win (Ss4402: YES), proceed to step Ss4403.

In step Ss4403, a presentation pattern table for a jackpot is specified from the group of presentation pattern tables for high probability high support stored in the presentation pattern table storage area 93a (Fig. 344) of the ROM 93. The group of presentation pattern tables for high probability high support includes (G) a presentation pattern table for a jackpot used when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery with high probability high support, (H) a presentation pattern table for a special small win used when a special small win is won in a winning lottery with high probability high support, and (I) a presentation pattern table for a normal small win used when a normal small win is won in a winning lottery with high probability high support. In step Ss4403, (G) is specified from (G) to (I). (G) is, for example, a presentation pattern table for performing a normal presentation for a jackpot. After executing step Ss4403, proceed to step Ss4404.

In step Ss4404, the performance pattern table specified in step Ss4403 is referred to, and a performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time obtained in step Ss1202 (FIG. 358) and the value of the random number for the current performance pattern obtained in step Ss4401 is determined. get. Subsequently, in step Ss4405, the effect pattern acquired in step Ss4404 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Ss4405, the high-accuracy, high-support state performance pattern setting process for the first starting opening is ended.

On the other hand, in step Ss4402, if it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is not a jackpot (Ss4402: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4406.

In step Ss4406, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in the current game round is a special small win win. Specifically, based on the information on the presence or absence of a special small hit stored in the register of the sound and optical side MPU 92 in step Ss4002 of the special 1 game round performance setting process (FIG. 386), the result of the judgment is that the special small hit has been won. Determine whether it exists or not. In step Ss4406, if it is determined that the result of the judgment is a special small winning (Ss4406: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4407.

In step Ss4407, a small win presentation pattern table is identified from the group of high probability high support presentation pattern tables stored in the presentation pattern table storage area 93a (Fig. 344) of ROM 93. Specifically, a special small win presentation pattern table used when a special small win is won in the winning lottery in the high probability high support described above (H) is identified. After executing step Ss4407, the process proceeds to step Ss4404 described above, and the presentation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time acquired in step Ss1204 (Fig. 358) and the value of the current presentation pattern random number is acquired by referring to the presentation pattern table identified in step Ss4407.

In step Ss4406, if it is determined that the result of the validity determination in the current game round is not a special small win (Ss4406: NO), the process advances to step Ss4408.
In step Ss4408, the performance pattern table for normal small winning is specified from the performance pattern table group for high accuracy and high support stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (g) high-accuracy-high-support, a normal small win performance pattern table used when a normal small win is won in the winning lottery is specified. After executing step Ss4408, proceed to step Ss4404 described earlier, refer to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4408, and use the variable time obtained in step Ss1203 (FIG. 358) and the value of the random number for the current effect pattern. Get the corresponding performance pattern.

<First starting port high probability low support state performance pattern setting process>
Next, the high probability low support state performance pattern setting process for the first starting port will be described. The high probability low support state performance pattern setting process for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the first performance pattern setting process (FIG. 387: Ss4107).

Figure 391 is a flowchart showing the process for setting the presentation pattern in the high probability low support state for the first starting port. In step Ss4501, a random number acquisition process for the presentation pattern is executed. In the random number acquisition process for the presentation pattern, a random number for the presentation pattern is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound/light side RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss4502.

In step Ss4502, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in the current game round is a jackpot win. Specifically, from the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Ss4002 of the special 1 game performance setting process (FIG. 386), the result of the judgment is whether or not the jackpot has been won. Determine. In step Ss4502, if it is determined that the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Ss4502: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4503.

In step Ss4503, a presentation pattern table for a jackpot is identified from the group of presentation pattern tables for high probability low support stored in the presentation pattern table storage area 93a (Fig. 344) of ROM 93. The group of presentation pattern tables for high probability low support includes (K) a presentation pattern table for a jackpot used when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery with high probability low support, and (S) a presentation pattern table for a small win used when a small win (special small win, normal small win) is won in a winning lottery with high probability low support. In step Ss4503, (K) is identified from (K) and (S). (K) is, for example, a presentation pattern table for performing a normal presentation for a jackpot. After executing step Ss4503, proceed to step Ss4504.

In step Ss4504, the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4503 is referred to, and the effect pattern corresponding to the variation time obtained in step Ss1302 (FIG. 359) and the value of the random number for the current effect pattern obtained in step Ss4501. get. Subsequently, in step Ss4505, the effect pattern acquired in step Ss4504 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Ss4505, the high-accuracy/low-support state performance pattern setting process for the first starting opening is ended.

On the other hand, in step Ss4502, if it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is not a jackpot (Ss4502: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4506.

In step Ss4506, a performance pattern table for small winning is specified from the performance pattern table group for high accuracy and low support stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, with the above-mentioned (sa) high-accuracy/low support, a small win performance pattern table used when a small win (special small win, normal small win) is won in the winning lottery is specified. After executing step Ss4506, proceed to step Ss4504 described earlier, refer to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4506, and use the variable time obtained in step Ss1303 (FIG. 359) and the value of the random number for the current effect pattern. Get the corresponding performance pattern.

<Special 2 game play performance setting process>
Next, a description will be given of a game round presentation setting process for special 2. The game round presentation setting process for special 2 is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game round presentation setting process (FIG. 384: Ss3811).

FIG. 392 is a flowchart showing the special 2 game performance setting process. In step Ss4601, it is determined whether the second variation command and the second type command have been received from the main MPU 62. In step Ss4601, if it is determined that at least one of the second variation command and the second type command has not been received (Ss4601: NO), the game run performance setting process for this special 2 is ended. On the other hand, in step Ss4601, if it is determined that the second variation command and the second type command have been received (Ss4601: YES), the process advances to step Ss4602.

In step Ss4602, the second fluctuation command received this time is read out, and information about the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time is read from the command. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the audio-optical side MPU 92. After that, the process advances to step Ss4603.

In step Ss4603, a second presentation pattern setting process is executed to set the presentation pattern to be executed during a game round when a jackpot occurs, when a reach occurs, etc. Details of the second presentation pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Ss4603, the process proceeds to step Ss4604.

In step Ss4604, a setting process for the stop symbols is executed. In the setting process for the stop symbols, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game is a 16R jackpot, an 8R jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, information corresponding to the stopping result in which the same combination of symbols is established on the effective line L of the symbol display device 41 is set as the information for the current stop symbols. Specifically, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game is a 16R jackpot or an 8R jackpot, a combination of the same odd symbols may be selected as the combination of the same symbols, and a combination of the same even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd symbols and the combination of the same even symbols, but instead, the former may be configured to have a higher selection rate than the latter, or the latter may be configured to have a higher selection rate than the former. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R jackpot. Furthermore, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is an 8R regular jackpot, a combination of the same even-numbered symbols will be selected as the combination of the same symbols.

If the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a losing result, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the content of the variation command. If it is determined that a reach has occurred, information corresponding to a stop result in which the same combination of symbols is not formed on the active line L and a reach pattern combination is formed on the active line L is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that a reach has not occurred, information corresponding to a stop result in which the same combination of symbols is not formed on the active line L and a reach pattern combination is not formed on the active line L is set as the information of the current stop pattern. After executing step Ss4604, proceed to step Ss4605.

In step Ss4605, a process for setting a variable display pattern (hereinafter referred to as a second variable display pattern) for the current game round for the second starting opening is executed. In this process, the information on the variation time of the current second starting opening game is specified from the content of the second variation command received this time, and the information on the variation time and the information set in step Ss4604 above are specified. A second variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of information on stopped symbols is selected. Note that when selecting the second variable display pattern, the second variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b (FIG. 344) of the audio-optical side ROM 93 is referred to. Thereafter, the process advances to step Ss4606.

In step Ss4606, the information on the second presentation pattern, the stop symbol, and the second variable display pattern set for the current game round for the second start port is set in the presentation command. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss4607, and the presentation command is sent to the display side MPU 102. The display side MPU 102 executes a process to display the presentation content corresponding to the received presentation command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Ss4607, the process proceeds to step Ss4608.

In step Ss4608, a pending information update process is executed. In the pending information update process, the information in the second pending number counter area of the audio/video side RAM 94 is updated so that the second pending number stored in the second pending number counter area is decremented by one. After executing step Ss4608, the process proceeds to step Ss4609.

In step Ss4609, a hold display control process is executed. The hold display control process is the same as the hold display control process executed in step Ss3604 of the hold command response process (FIG. 382). Specifically, a command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second start port hold area Ds2 (display of how many hold display icons are lined up) to correspond to the second hold number identified in step Ss4608. The display control device 100, which has received the command, changes the display in the second start port hold area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the second hold number. After executing step Ss4609, the special 2 play round presentation setting process is terminated.

<Second production pattern setting process>
Next, the second effect pattern setting process will be explained. The second performance pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 392: Ss4603) of the special 2 game round performance setting process.

Figure 393 is a flowchart showing the second effect pattern setting process. In step Ss4701, it is determined whether the sound/light side high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss4701 that the sound/light side high probability mode flag is not ON (Ss4701: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4702.

In step Ss4702, it is determined whether the acousto-optical side high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss4702 that the acousto-optical side high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss4702: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4703.

In step Ss4703, a process for setting a presentation pattern for the second starting port in a low-probability low-support state is executed. The process for setting a presentation pattern for the second starting port in a low-probability low-support state is a process for setting a presentation pattern for a game round for the second starting port when the lottery mode is a low-probability mode and the support mode is a low-frequency support mode and the game round for the second starting port is executed. Specifically, this process sets a presentation pattern for a game round for the second starting port when the game round for the second starting port is executed in the low-probability low-support state (state H1) in FIG. 345. Details of the process for setting a presentation pattern for the second starting port in a low-probability low-support state are described later. After executing step Ss4703, the second presentation pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4702 that the audio-optical side high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss4702: YES), the process advances to step Ss4704.

In step Ss4704, a low-accuracy/high-support state performance pattern setting process for the second starting opening is executed. The production pattern setting process for the second starting opening in a low probability and high support state is performed when the game round for the second starting opening is executed when the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. This is a process of setting the performance pattern of the game round for the second starting opening. Specifically, when the game round for the second starting opening is executed in the low certainty high support state (state H3) in FIG. 345, the process of setting the performance pattern of the game round for the second starting opening. It is. Details of the low-accuracy/high-support state production pattern setting process for the second starting opening will be described later. After executing step Ss4704, the second effect pattern setting process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4701 that the sound-light side high probability mode flag is ON (Ss4701: YES), the process advances to step Ss4705.

In step Ss4705, it is determined whether the audio-optical side high-frequency support mode flag is ON. In step Ss4705, if it is determined that the audio and optical side high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss4705: YES), the process advances to step Ss4706.

In step Ss4706, a process for setting a presentation pattern for the second starting port in a high probability high support state is executed. The process for setting a presentation pattern for the second starting port in a high probability high support state is a process for setting a presentation pattern for a game round for the second starting port when the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode and the game round for the second starting port is executed. Specifically, this process sets a presentation pattern for a game round for the second starting port when the game round for the second starting port is executed in the high probability high support state (state H5) in FIG. 345. The details of the process for setting a presentation pattern for the second starting port in a high probability high support state are described later. After executing step Ss4706, the second presentation pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4705 that the audio/visual side high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss4705: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4707.

In step Ss4707, a process for setting a presentation pattern for the second starting port in a high probability low support state is executed. The process for setting a presentation pattern for the second starting port in a high probability low support state is a process for setting a presentation pattern for a game round for the second starting port when the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode and the game round for the second starting port is executed. Specifically, this process sets a presentation pattern for a game round for the second starting port when the game round for the second starting port is executed in the high probability low support state (state H6) in FIG. 345. Details of the process for setting a presentation pattern for the second starting port in a high probability low support state are described later. After executing step Ss4707, the second presentation pattern setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process in low-accuracy, low-support state for the second starting port>
Next, a low-accuracy, low-support state performance pattern setting process for the second starting opening will be described. The performance pattern setting process for the second starting opening in the low-precision, low-support state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 393: Ss4703) of the second performance pattern setting process.

FIG. 394 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a performance pattern in a low-probability, low-support state for the second starting opening. In step Ss4801, a performance pattern for long variation is specified from the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. After executing step Ss4801, the process advances to step Ss4802.

In step Ss4802, the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4802 is referred to to obtain the effect pattern corresponding to the long fluctuation time obtained in step Ss1901 (FIG. 365). Subsequently, in step Ss4803, the effect pattern acquired in step Ss4802 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Ss4803, the process for setting a performance pattern for the second starting opening in a low-accuracy, low-support state is ended.

<Production pattern setting process in low-accuracy/high-support state for the second starting port>
Next, a low-accuracy/high-support state production pattern setting process for the second starting opening will be described. The performance pattern setting process in the low-accuracy/high-support state for the second starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 393: Ss4704) of the second performance pattern setting process.

Figure 395 is a flowchart showing the process for setting the presentation pattern for the second starting gate in a low probability high support state. In step Ss4901, a random number acquisition process for the presentation pattern is executed. In the random number acquisition process for the presentation pattern, a random number for the presentation pattern is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound/light side RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss4902.

In step Ss4902, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in the current game round is a jackpot win. Specifically, based on the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 in step Ss4602 of the special 2 game performance setting process (FIG. 392), the result of the judgment is whether or not the jackpot has been won. Determine. In step Ss4902, if it is determined that the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Ss4902: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4903.

In step Ss4903, a performance pattern table for a jackpot is specified from a group of performance pattern tables for low probability and high support stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. The production pattern table group for low-probability high support includes (sa) a production pattern table for jackpot that is used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery with low-probability high support; A production pattern table for reach generation that is used when a reach occurs without winning, and a production pattern for non-reach generation that is used when a reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery with low probability and high support. A table is provided. In step Ss4903, (SA) is specified from (SA) to (SU). (Sa) is, for example, a performance pattern table for performing a normal performance for a jackpot. After executing step Ss4903, the process advances to step Ss4904.

In step Ss4904, the performance pattern table specified in step Ss4903 is referred to, and a performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time obtained in step Ss2002 (FIG. 366) and the value of the random number for the current performance pattern obtained in step Ss4901 is determined. get. Subsequently, in step Ss4905, the effect pattern acquired in step Ss4904 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Ss4905, the process for setting a performance pattern in a low-accuracy/high-support state for the second starting opening is ended.

On the other hand, in step Ss4902, if it is determined that the result of the judgment in the current game round is not a jackpot (Ss4902: NO), the process advances to step Ss4906, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs based on the information regarding the presence or absence of a reach that is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by Ss4602 of the special 2 game round effect setting process (FIG. 392). In step Ss4906, if it is determined that the result of the validity determination in the current game round is that a reach has occurred (Ss4906: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4907.

In step Ss4907, a performance pattern table for reaching generation is specified from the performance pattern table group for low probability high support stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (b) low-probability-high support, a reach generation production pattern table is specified, which is used when a reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery. (B) is, for example, a performance pattern table for performing a normal performance for reach. After executing step Ss4907, proceed to step Ss4904 described earlier, refer to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4907, and use the variable time obtained in step Ss2004 (FIG. 366) and the value of the random number for the current effect pattern. Get the corresponding performance pattern.

If it is determined in step Ss4906 that the result of the win/loss determination in this game round is not a reach occurrence (Ss4906: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4908.

In step Ss4908, a non-reach presentation pattern table is identified from the group of low probability high support presentation pattern tables stored in the presentation pattern table storage area 93a (Fig. 344) of ROM 93. Specifically, a non-reach presentation pattern table is identified that is used when a jackpot is not won in the winning lottery and a reach does not occur in the above-mentioned (S) low probability high support state. (S) is, for example, a presentation pattern table for performing a normal presentation for a miss. After executing step Ss4908, the process proceeds to step Ss4904 described above, and the presentation pattern table identified in step Ss4908 is referenced to obtain a presentation pattern that corresponds to the fluctuation time obtained in step Ss2005 (Fig. 366) and the value of the current presentation pattern random number.

<High-accuracy, high-support state performance pattern setting process for the second starting port>
Next, a high-accuracy, high-support state performance pattern setting process for the second starting opening will be explained. The production pattern setting process for the second starting opening in the high-accuracy/high-support state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 393: Ss4706) of the second production pattern setting process.

Figure 396 is a flowchart showing the process of setting the presentation pattern for the high probability high support state for the second starting port. In step Ss5001, a presentation pattern for long fluctuation is identified from the presentation pattern table storage area 93a (Figure 344) of the ROM 93. After executing step Ss5001, the process proceeds to step Ss5002.

In step Ss5002, the presentation pattern table identified in step Ss5002 is referenced to obtain a presentation pattern corresponding to the long fluctuation time obtained in step Ss2101 (Fig. 367). In the following step Ss5003, the presentation pattern obtained in step Ss5002 is set as the presentation pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Ss5003, the presentation pattern setting process for the high probability high support state for the second starting port is terminated.

<High-accuracy low support state performance pattern setting process for the second starting port>
Next, a high-accuracy/low-support state production pattern setting process for the second starting opening will be explained. The high-accuracy/low-support state performance pattern setting process for the second starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 393: Ss4704) of the second performance pattern setting process.

FIG. 397 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process in the high-accuracy/low-support state for the second starting opening. In step Ss5101, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the performance pattern random number acquisition process, a performance pattern random number is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound and light side RAM 94. After that, the process advances to step Ss5102.

In step Ss5102, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination (winning lottery) for the current game round is a jackpot win or not. Specifically, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot win or not from the information on the presence or absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 by step Ss4602 of the special 2 game round presentation setting process (Fig. 392). In step Ss5102, if it is determined that the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot win (Ss5102: YES), proceed to step Ss5103.

In step Ss5103, a performance pattern table for a jackpot is specified from the performance pattern table group for high accuracy and low support stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. The performance pattern table group for high-accuracy and low support includes (Se) a performance pattern table for jackpot that is used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery with high-accuracy and low support; Performance pattern table for reach generation that is used when reach occurs without winning, (T) Performance pattern for non-reach generation that is used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in the winning lottery with high accuracy and low support A table is provided. In step Ss5103, (C) is specified from (C) to (T). (C) is, for example, a performance pattern table for performing a normal performance for a jackpot. After executing step Ss5103, the process advances to step Ss5104.

In step Ss5104, the presentation pattern table identified in step Ss5103 is referenced to obtain a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable time obtained in step Ss2202 (Fig. 368) and the value of the random number for the current presentation pattern obtained in step Ss5101. In the following step Ss5105, the presentation pattern obtained in step Ss5104 is set as the presentation pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Ss5105, the presentation pattern setting process for the high probability low support state for the second starting port is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Ss5102, if it is determined that the result of the judgment in the current game round is not a jackpot (Ss5102: NO), the process advances to step Ss5106, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs based on the information regarding the presence or absence of a reach that is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by Ss4602 of the special 2 game round effect setting process (FIG. 392). In step Ss5106, if it is determined that the result of the validity determination in the current game round is that a reach has occurred (Ss5106: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss5107.

In step Ss5107, a performance pattern table for reaching generation is specified from the performance pattern table group for high accuracy and low support stored in the performance pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned high-accuracy-low support, a reach generation performance pattern table that is used when a reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is specified. (S) is, for example, a performance pattern table for performing a normal performance for reach. After executing step Ss5107, proceed to step Ss5104 described earlier, refer to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss5107, and use the variable time obtained in step Ss2204 (FIG. 368) and the value of the random number for the current effect pattern. Get the corresponding performance pattern.

In step Ss5106, if it is determined that the result of the validity determination in the current game round is not a reach occurrence (Ss5106: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss5108.

In step Ss5108, a non-reach presentation pattern table is identified from the group of high probability low support presentation pattern tables stored in the presentation pattern table storage area 93a (Fig. 344) of ROM 93. Specifically, a non-reach presentation pattern table is identified, which is used when a jackpot is not won in the winning lottery and a reach does not occur in the above-mentioned (Ta) high probability low support state. (Ta) is, for example, a presentation pattern table for performing a normal presentation for a miss. After executing step Ss5108, the process proceeds to step Ss5104 described above, and the presentation pattern table identified in step Ss2108 is referenced to obtain a presentation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time obtained in step Ss2205 (Fig. 368) and the value of the random number for the current presentation pattern.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main process that is executed when a command is received from the audio emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed.

After powering on, the MPU 102 executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal. Note that if a command is received and a V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, the contents of the command received from the audio and light emission control device 90 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 398 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Ss5201, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and the memories in the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 are cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written into the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. After that, the process advances to step Ss5202.

In step Ss5202, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio emission control device 90.

FIG. 399 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Ss5301, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 400 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt processing is executed when a V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and an image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 is identified, and an instruction is issued to the VDP 105 to draw and display the image.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed, and is also transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive instructions to draw the next image before the image drawing or display processing has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or display It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which image information is stored. The details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Ss5401, command response processing is executed. In the command response processing, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (E19) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a performance command has been stored, control of the drawing and display of the image is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

If a performance operation command has been stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed, and if it is determined that it is the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed, control of the drawing and display of the image is started so that the performance mode corresponding to the pressing of the performance operation button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed, the contents of the next command are analyzed without executing any processing.

In addition, in the command response process (Ss5401), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processes corresponding to all the analyzed commands are executed. The reason for this is explained below. The command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the performance is set by the sound and light emission control device 90 and the performance is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the performance are stored in the command storage area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the form of the performance, such as the preview performance or the stop pattern set by the sound and light emission control device 90, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that form is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

In step Ss5402, a display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the contents of one frame of image to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 are determined based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which has been set by the command response process (Ss5401) or the like. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss5403.

In step Ss5403, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the contents of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, as specified by the display setting processing (Ss5402), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, rotation angle, etc., are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the processing proceeds to step Ss5404.

In step Ss5404, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing processing, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each character, which were determined by the task processing (Ss5403), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on this information, and transmits the image data to the pattern display device 41 together with a drive signal so that the image drawn based on the information received in the previous V interrupt processing is displayed on the pattern display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Ss5405, where other processing is executed, and the V interrupt processing is terminated. Above, an example of specific control for executing various processing including the big win presentation in the pachinko machine 10 has been described.

《8-7》Action/Effect:
As explained above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the support mode is the high frequency support mode in the high accuracy and high support state, the electric accessory 34a is substantially in the electric role open state, and the through The game balls that have passed through the gate 35 flow from the main path section 210 to the first branch path section 220 in the starting port unit 200 (FIG. 330). Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 will definitely enter the right first starting port 44. However, the game ball that enters the right side first starting port 44 then enters the falling port 252 with a probability of 0.1 seconds to 2.1 seconds (=1/21). If the trigger for switching to the high-frequency support mode is a certain-variable jackpot, and a game ball enters the falling slot 252 in a game before the number of games played after the high-frequency support mode starts reaches the guaranteed number of games, , the lottery mode shifts from high probability mode to low probability mode. In other words, when a game ball enters the right side first starting port 44, there is a possibility that the lottery mode will shift from the high probability mode to the low probability mode and the player will be disadvantaged, although the probability is 1/21. be.

On the other hand, if the number of times of play since the high-frequency support mode was started reaches the guaranteed number of times of play without the game ball entering the fall opening 252, the support mode transitions from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, and the game state transitions from the high-probability high support state to the high-probability low support state (invincible zone). When the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the electric device 34a is substantially always closed, and as a result, the game ball flows along the third route RT3 (Fig. 335) and enters the second start opening 34. In this case, unlike the case where the game ball flows to the right first start opening 44 side, the game ball does not enter the fall opening 252 and the lottery mode does not transition from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, so that the game can be continuously performed with the game ball entering the second start opening 34 without the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state for the player. The high probability low support state continues until the next jackpot is won, which essentially guarantees the next jackpot.

As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-accuracy, high-support state, the player is provided with the following information: There is a sense of urgency that the game ball enters the falling hole 252 and the lottery mode does not shift from the high probability mode to the low probability mode (I want it not to fall), and the number of games played reaches the guaranteed number of games before it falls. It is also possible to give a feeling of expectation that the customer wants to receive the same. If the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games without falling, the player is given the opportunity to play the game without the risk of falling, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. The sense of relief of being able to shift to a high-precision low support state (invincible zone) where you can continuously play the game rounds that are played continuously, and the sense of relief that you can move to the high-precision low support state (invincible zone) where you can continuously play the game rounds that are executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation of winning a jackpot soon in a state of high certainty and low support. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if a special small win is won in the winning lottery in the high-accuracy, high-support state, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, The game state is configured to shift from a high-accuracy, high-support state to a high-accuracy, low-support state (invincible zone). For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of winning a special small win in the winning lottery, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the low-accuracy, low-support state, the ball cannot enter the right side first starting port 44 and the falling port 252 provided in the starting port unit 200, but the ball cannot enter the right side first starting port 44 and the falling port 252 provided in the starting port unit 200, It is possible to enter the ball into 34. In the low-probability, low-support state, the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, so there is an extremely high probability of 232/233 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery that is triggered by passing through the through gate 35 will be a loss. Therefore, the electric accessory 34a is substantially always closed, and the game ball flows along the third route RT3 (FIG. 335), allowing the ball to enter the second starting port 34. For this reason, some players aim for the game ball to enter the second starting port 34 by hitting the game ball weakly to the right in a low-accuracy, low-support state and letting the game ball flow along the third route RT3. is possible. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a simultaneous variation machine, the variation time (hereinafter also referred to as special 2 variation time) of the second symbol display section 37b is set to an extremely long time, for example, 10 minutes. This structure suppresses repeated execution of a winning lottery in a short period of time triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to make the player give up on performing a weak right-handed operation in the low-accuracy, low-support state, and make him concentrate on left-handed hitting.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the starting port unit 200 is a structure (hardware-based In addition, the main passage section 210, the first branch passage section 220, and the second branch passage section 230 are formed of a transparent resin material. According to this configuration, the player can observe the flow of game balls in the starting port unit 200, and by observing whether the game ball enters the falling port 252 or not, the player can determine whether the game ball enters the falling port 252 or not. He can determine whether the ball will enter the ball or not. When a game ball enters the falling hole 252, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, which puts the player at a disadvantage. For this reason, it is possible to give a sense of urgency to the player who observes the flow of game balls in the starting port unit 200 as to whether the game balls will enter the falling port 252 and cause a disadvantageous situation. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the game state has shifted to an invincible zone where the game ball does not enter the falling port 252. For this reason, it is possible to give the player who observes the flow of game balls in the starting opening unit 200 a sense of expectation that the game will shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as an invincible zone. In this way, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give players a greater sense of anticipation and urgency, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<<8-8>> Modification of the eighth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be embodied in various forms without departing from the spirit of the present invention, for example, the following modifications are also possible. Note that in the modifications described below, the same configurations, processes, and effects as those of the above embodiment will not be described.

<<8-8-1>> Variation 1:
In the eighth embodiment, the starting port unit 200 has the main line passage section 210, the first branch passage section 220, the second branch passage section 230, the second starting port 34, the right side first starting port 44, the out port 251 in the starting port unit, and the fall port 252. In the high probability high support state, while there is a possibility that the game ball enters the fall port 252 and the lottery mode of the winning lottery falls from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, if the game ball does not enter the fall port 252 during the period until the number of times the game is executed in the high probability high support state H5 reaches the guaranteed number of times of play, the game state can be shifted to a high probability low support state in which there is no possibility of falling. In the high probability low support state, a winning lottery can be held when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, and in addition, as described above, there is no possibility of falling, and the next big win is virtually guaranteed. On the other hand, as a modified example, the above-mentioned playability may be realized by adopting a configuration different from the above-mentioned starting hole unit 200. In short, in the high-probability high support state, there is a possibility that the lottery mode of the winning lottery falls from a high probability mode to a low probability mode when a game ball enters the fall hole 252 and the lottery mode of the winning lottery falls from a high probability mode to a low probability mode, while in the period until the number of times the game is executed in the high-probability high support state H5 reaches the guaranteed number of times of play, if a state in which the game ball does not enter the fall hole 252 continues, any configuration can be adopted as long as it is possible to transition the game state to a high-probability low support state in which there is no possibility of falling.

《8-8-2》Variation 2:
In the eighth embodiment, since the main passage section 210, the first branch passage section 220, and the second branch passage section 230 provided in the starting port unit 200 are formed of a transparent resin material, the starting port unit 200 The player can observe the flow of game balls inside. On the other hand, as a modified example, the main passage section 210, the first branch passage section 220, and the second branch passage section 230 are formed of non-transparent members, and the flow of the game balls inside the starting port unit 200 is controlled. It may also be configured so that it cannot be observed by a person. According to this configuration, the player cannot know that a game ball will enter the falling hole 252 or that a game ball will enter the second starting port 34 only from the flow of the game ball. According to the configuration of the eighth embodiment, the player can detect that he or she has fallen (that the lottery mode has shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode) or that the player has moved to the invincible zone, depending on the effect image displayed on the symbol display device 41. You can know what you did.

<<8-8-3>> Variation 3:
In the eighth embodiment, the first branch passage 220 and the second branch passage 230 provided in the starting port unit 200 are formed of a transparent resin material, so that the player can know that the game ball has entered the fall port 252 from the flow of the game ball. In contrast, as a modified example, the first branch passage 220 and the second branch passage 230 may be formed of a non-transparent material, so that the game ball cannot enter the fall port 252 or the out port 251 in the starting port unit. In addition, the sound and light emission control device 90 does not perform a process of displaying a performance image (video) determined according to the game ball entering the fall port 252 on the pattern display device 41, and further, the configuration is such that the performance does not notify the player whether the number of games since the high frequency support mode was started has reached the guaranteed number of games. According to this configuration, in the high probability high support state, a sense of urgency can be given to the player as to whether the game ball has fallen for a long period of time until the number of games since the high frequency support mode was started has reached the guaranteed number of games. In addition, when the number of plays after the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of plays, the player can be given a sense of expectation that the game will move to the high probability low support state (invincible zone) without falling. In this way, according to this modified example, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation and tension, and to further improve the interest of the game.

《8-8-4》Variation 4:
In the eighth embodiment, in the high-certain high-support state, if the result of the validity determination in the current game round is a special small hit win, the support mode is shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, It was configured to transition to a high-accuracy, low-support state (invincible zone). In addition, in the eighth embodiment, when the support mode is shifted from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode in the high accuracy high support state, the high accuracy high support state changes from the high accuracy low support state (invincibility zone). The structure is such that an effect image indicating that the transition has been made is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, as a modification example, the main passage section 210, the first branch passage section 220, and the second branch passage section 230 are formed of non-transparent members, as in the first modification of the eighth embodiment. Then, when the support mode is shifted from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode in a high-accuracy, high-support state, an effect indicating that the support mode has shifted from a high-accuracy, high-support state to a high-accuracy, low-support state (invincibility zone) The timing of displaying the image may be delayed until the number of games played after the high-frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games played. According to this configuration, the number of games played after the high-frequency support mode starts becomes the guaranteed number of games when the result of the judgment is that the special small win has been won and the transition to the high-probability low support state (invincible zone) has occurred. Since it is not possible to recognize the game until it has been reached, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of anticipation and urgency, thereby further increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this modified example 4, the configuration of modified example 3 may be added. That is, in modified example 4, the sound emission control device 90 does not perform processing to display on the pattern display device 41 an effect image (video) determined according to the entry of the game ball into the fall opening 252, and further, until the number of plays since the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of plays, the game state may not be notified by the effect whether it has shifted from the high probability high support state to the low probability high support state or the high probability low support state (invincible zone). According to this configuration, until the number of plays since the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of plays, a sense of tension can be given to the player, such as whether it has fallen for a long period of time or whether it has shifted to the high probability low support state (invincible zone). In addition, when the number of plays since the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of plays, the player can be given a sense of expectation that it will shift to the high probability low support state (invincible zone) without falling. In this way, this variation can create a greater sense of expectation and tension for the player, further increasing the enjoyment of the game.

<<8-8-5>> Variation 5:
In the eighth embodiment and its modified example, when a game ball enters the drop opening 252, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is changed from a high probability mode to a low probability mode. In contrast, as a modified example, a lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the drop opening 252 may be configured to determine whether or not a winning lottery will be won with a probability of, for example, 1/2, and if a winning lottery is won, the lottery mode of the winning lottery may be changed from a high probability mode to a low probability mode. With this configuration, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of tension as to whether or not the lottery mode will be changed from a high probability mode to a low probability mode, putting the player at a disadvantage.

<<8-8-6>> Variation 6:
In the eighth embodiment and its modified example, the game ball that entered the right-side first starting hole 44 is made to enter the drop hole 252 with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/21), and when the game ball enters the drop hole 252, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is switched from a high probability mode to a low probability mode, so that when the game ball enters the right-side first starting hole 44, the lottery mode can be switched from the high probability mode to the low probability mode with a predetermined probability. In contrast, as a modified example, a lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the right-side first starting hole 44 may determine whether or not a drop win occurs with a probability of, for example, 1/21, and when a drop win occurs, the lottery mode of the winning lottery may be switched from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. In other words, a configuration may be realized in which the lottery mode can be switched from the high probability mode to the low probability mode with a predetermined probability when the game ball enters the right-side first starting hole 44. According to this modification, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether the lottery mode will shift from a high probability mode to a low probability mode, putting the player in a disadvantageous state. Furthermore, according to this modification, it is possible to omit the start port unit outlet 251, the fall port 252, the passage leading to the start port unit outlet 251, the passage leading to the fall port 252, etc., and therefore it is also possible to simplify the configuration.

<<8-8-7>> Variation 7:
In the eighth embodiment and its modified example, in the high probability high support state, the condition for transitioning the support mode from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode is two-fold: when the number of games played since the high frequency support mode was started reaches the guaranteed number of games, and when a special small win is won in the winning lottery in the current game. In contrast, as a modified example, the condition for the transition may be either one of the following: when the number of games played since the high frequency support mode was started reaches the guaranteed number of games, and when a special small win is won in the winning lottery in the current game. Furthermore, the condition for the transition may be three or more conditions, which is the above two cases plus other cases.

《8-8-8》Variation 8:
In the eighth embodiment and its modified example, as shown in FIG. 346, the special 2 fluctuation time is set to the normal length in the low-accuracy-high support state. On the other hand, as a modified example, in the low-accuracy/high-support state, the special 2 fluctuation time may be set to a very long time, for example, 10 minutes. In the low probability/high support state, it is impossible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 34, but pending information (up to 4 balls) is stored in the second holding area Rb of the pending information storage area 64b. In the remaining, low-probability, high-support state, a winning lottery may be executed based on the remaining pending information. This would result in a situation that is excessively advantageous for the player, but in this modified example, it is impossible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 34 in the low-accuracy, high-support state. By setting the second fluctuation time to a very long time, such as 10 minutes, it is possible to suppress the reservation information remaining in the second reservation area Rb from being repeatedly consumed in a short period of time.

《8-8-9》Variation 9:
In the eighth embodiment and its modified examples, the game ball sorting device 240 that distributes game balls between the flow path leading to the falling port 252 and the flow path leading to the out port 251 in the starting port unit is moved in a reciprocating manner. A configuration is adopted in which the game balls are sorted by the dividing portion 242. According to this configuration, the destination of the game ball is determined by the timing at which the game ball enters the movable range of the distribution piece portion 242. On the other hand, as a modified example, the game balls may be distributed by a dish-shaped accessory (so-called croon) provided with a plurality of holes into which the game balls can be inserted. According to this configuration, the destination to which the game ball is distributed is determined by the kinetic energy (velocity) of the game ball moving on the croon. This modification can also give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency. Furthermore, the game ball distribution device 240 is not limited to the configuration including the distribution piece portion 242 or the configuration provided with a dish-shaped accessory, and may be configured using structures of various shapes (hardware configurations). It can also be replaced with a device that distributes game balls.

<<8-8-10>> Variation 10:
In the eighth embodiment and its modified example, the allocation table for the second starting port (see FIG. 341(b)) is set with a mixture of a probability variable jackpot and a normal jackpot as the jackpot type based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. In contrast, as a modified example, the allocation table for the second starting port may be configured so that only a probability variable jackpot is set, and no normal jackpot is set. This configuration is realized by a V probability variable machine. A V probability variable machine is a type of machine in which the lottery mode becomes a high probability mode when a game ball enters a specific area (V zone) during a round game that occurs in the open/close execution mode. By using a V probability variable machine, it is possible to change the probability of a probability variable jackpot when a game ball enters the first starting port and when a game ball enters the second starting port. In this modified example, by using a V probability variable machine, a configuration is realized in which only a probability variable jackpot is set in the allocation table for the second starting port.

The flow of the game in this modified example is different from the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment shown in FIG. becomes. Therefore, the high probability low support state H6 continues until the next probability variable jackpot is won, and the next probability variable jackpot is virtually guaranteed. In the high probability low support state H6 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the next jackpot is guaranteed, but it is not guaranteed that the result of the distribution determination (jackpot type) will be a variable probability jackpot. On the other hand, in this modified example, the next probability-variable jackpot is guaranteed in the high-accuracy, low-support state H6, so when moving from the high-accuracy, high-support state H5 to the high-accuracy, low-support state H6, the A sense of relief can be given to the player.

<<8-8-11>> Variation 11:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the inner frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, the pachinko machine is provided with a cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened, but a configuration in which the cylinder lock is omitted and a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened may be separately provided. In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, a configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame relative to the outer frame is provided on the left side as viewed from the front, but a configuration in which this rotation shaft is provided on the right side as viewed from the front may be adopted. In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, a configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame relative to the inner frame is provided on the left side as viewed from the front, but a configuration in which this rotation shaft is provided on the right side as viewed from the front may be adopted. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the game board of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or may be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, when a game ball passes through the ball entrance 210a of the start port unit 200 as a predetermined area through which the game ball can pass, one piece of result information is obtained from a signal from a detection sensor for the right first start port 44, a signal from a detection sensor for the second start port 34, a signal from a detection sensor for the fall port 252, and a signal from a detection sensor for the out port 251 in the start port unit, as multiple types of result information. In contrast to this, as a modification, when a game ball passes through the right first start port 44 as a predetermined area through which the game ball can pass, one piece of result information may be obtained from a value of the hit random number counter C1 and a value of the jackpot type counter C2 as multiple types of result information. In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, the pachinko machine is configured to have an upper tray and a lower tray, but the lower tray may be omitted and only the upper tray may be provided. In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, the operation handle is provided on the right side as viewed from the front, but the operation handle may be provided on the left side as viewed from the front. In addition, the operation handle may be provided on both the right side and the left side as viewed from the front. In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, the operation handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operation handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operation handle), but the touch sensor may be omitted. In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the launching means capable of launching the game ball, and for example, a configuration in which the game ball is launched using the elastic force of a spring or the like, or a configuration in which the game ball is launched using the wind pressure when compressed gas is ejected, may be adopted. In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, when the operating handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are shot per minute, but the configuration may be such that less than 100 game balls (for example, 60 balls) are shot per minute, or more than 100 game balls (for example, 200 balls) are shot per minute. Also, the configuration may be such that the game balls are shot one by one by flipping the lever. In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, the first distribution means is constituted by the electric device 34a, and the second distribution means is constituted by the game ball distribution device 240. However, as a modified example, the first distribution means and the second distribution means can be constituted by a control unit and table data stored in the storage unit. As the table data, for example, a win/lose table and a distribution table can be adopted. Specifically, the means for performing a winning lottery using the win/lose table may be the first distribution means, and the means for performing a distribution judgment using the distribution table may be the second distribution means. In this case, the first result obtained by the first distribution means may correspond to a miss in the winning lottery, the second result obtained by the first distribution means may correspond to a jackpot in the winning lottery, the third result obtained by the second distribution means may correspond to a guaranteed jackpot as a result of the distribution judgment, and the fourth result may correspond to a normal jackpot as a result of the distribution judgment. In this modified example, as in the above embodiment and each modified example, the specific game state from which the game state is transferred by the game state transfer means corresponds to a high probability high support state, and the predetermined game state to which the game state is transferred corresponds to a low probability high support state. This modified example can also give the player a sense of expectation and tension, and improve the interest of the game. Note that the predetermined area in this modified example may be the main line passage portion 210 leading to the second start port 34 instead of the right first start port 44. In addition, in the above embodiment and each modified example, a configuration having a speaker as a means capable of outputting sound is adopted, but a configuration having an earphone jack in addition to or instead of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones that the player brings with him/her to the earphone jack, the player can fully enjoy the sound of the pachinko machine that he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sound of the surrounding pachinko machines. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the special symbols that start to change display based on the game ball entering each of the starting holes, and for example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start to change display based on the game ball passing through each of the gates, and for example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying various decorative symbols, and for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, an LED display device, a drum rotation type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the decorative symbols are not limited to numbers, and various characters, figures, symbols, pictures, and combinations thereof may be adopted. For example, the decorative symbols may be alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the number of pattern rows through which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In addition, when a configuration in which there is one pattern row of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative symbol (for example, "7") stops may be adopted. In addition, when a configuration in which there are two or four or more rows of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line may be adopted. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, various configurations can be adopted for the special electric device, for example, a configuration in which a rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below a plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward around the rotating shaft to open the large prize opening, or a configuration in which the large prize opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, various configurations can be adopted for the normal electric device, for example, a so-called tulip-type normal electric device in which a pair of movable valves can be opened left and right, a configuration in which a rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below a plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward around the rotating shaft to open the starting opening, or a configuration in which the starting opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, the number of prize balls set at each ball entry port (starting port, general prize entry port, large prize entry port, etc.) is an example, and by appropriately changing the number of prize balls set at each ball entry port, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications.

《8-8-12》Variation 12:
In the eighth embodiment and its modified example, the starting port provided in the opening 210c of the starting port unit 200 is configured as the first starting port (first starting port 44 on the right side). On the other hand, as a modification, the starting port provided in the opening 210c of the starting port unit 200 may be configured as the second starting port.

Figure 401 is an explanatory diagram showing the start port unit 200X in this modified example. The start port unit 200X in this modified example has an upper second start port (a second start port replacing the right first start port 44 in the eighth embodiment) 934 and a lower second start port (the same start port as the second start port 34 in the eighth embodiment) 34 as start ports. The configuration of the start port unit 200X other than this configuration and the hardware configuration other than the start port are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. In Figure 401, the same parts as those in the eighth embodiment are given the same symbols as those in the eighth embodiment. In this modified example, a special small win is further provided in the lottery result of the winning lottery of the winning lottery table for the second start port (for high probability mode) instead of the configuration in which a special small win is provided in the lottery result of the winning lottery of the winning lottery table for the first start port (for high probability mode). This modified version also makes it possible to transition from a high probability high support state to a high probability low support state, which is an invincible zone, and, like the eighth embodiment, can give players a sense of expectation and tension, improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, the following effect is also achieved. In the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the allocation mode of the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won is different between the case where the jackpot is won based on a ball entering the first start port 33 and the case where the jackpot is won based on a ball entering the second start port 34, and the case where the jackpot is won based on a ball entering the second start port 34 is more advantageous for the player than the case where the jackpot is won based on a ball entering the first start port 33. Therefore, according to this modified example, since the right side first start port 44 is replaced with the upper second start port 934, the merit of passing the game ball through the start port unit 200X is higher than that of the eighth embodiment. Therefore, according to this modification, since the player can recognize that it is more advantageous to perform a weak right hit and have the game ball enter the upper second starting hole 934 than to perform a left hit and have the game ball enter the center first starting hole 33 in the high probability high support state H5, a secondary effect is achieved that the weak right hit in the high probability high support state H5 can be more recommended to the player. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the case where the jackpot is won based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34 is originally more advantageous for the player than the case where the jackpot is won based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33, but the degree to which the advantage is increased may be made greater. Specifically, the number of rounds of play as a result of allocation of the allocation table for the first starting hole may be reduced to, for example, 2R. In short, any configuration can be used as long as the advantage to the player when winning a jackpot based on the game ball entering the first starting hole can be made lower than the advantage to the player when winning a jackpot based on the game ball entering the second starting hole.

In addition, in this modified example in which the starting port provided in the opening 210c of the starting port unit 200X is the upper second starting port 934, the variation time (also called the special 1 variation time) of the first symbol display section 37b in the high probability high support state H5 may be set to an extremely long time, for example, 10 minutes, to suppress the repeated execution of the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 34 in the high probability high support state H5 in a short period of time. As a result, in this modified example, the player is made to give up the left hit operation in the high probability high support state H5 and can concentrate on weak right hit. Note that, as a modified example of this modified example, in addition to the high probability high support state H5, the special 1 variation time may be set to an extremely long time, for example, 10 minutes, for the low probability high support state H3 and the high probability low support state H6. That is, the special 1 variable time in various game states H3, H5, and H6 other than the low probability low support state H1, which is expected to make the player hit left, may be set to an extremely long time, for example, 10 minutes. As a result, the player can be made to give up performing left-hitting operations in game states H3, H5, and H6 other than the low probability low support state H1, and concentrate on weak right-hitting.

Furthermore, in this modified example in which the start port provided in the opening 210c of the start port unit 200X is the upper second start port 934, the allocation result of the allocation table for the second start port may be configured to be only a guaranteed jackpot (not including a normal jackpot). This configuration is realized by the V-guaranteed machine described above. According to this configuration, firstly, in the high probability high support state H5, if a jackpot is won, the high probability high support state H5 can be continued without fail, so that in the high probability high support state H5, the player can be given the expectation that he or she will win a jackpot in the winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the upper second start port 934. Also, in the high probability high support state, even if a jackpot is not won, the player can be given the expectation that the number of plays will reach the guaranteed number of plays before falling. And in the high probability low support state H6, which is entered when the number of plays reaches the guaranteed number of plays without falling off, the player can feel even more secure in the invincible zone where there are usually no jackpots (there will always be a guaranteed jackpot), and the enjoyment of the game can be further increased.

<<8-8-13>> Variation 13:
The following method is also available as a method for making the player realize that it is more advantageous to perform a weak right hit and make the game ball enter the right-side first starting hole 44 than to perform a left hit and make the game ball enter the center-side first starting hole 33 in the high-probability high support state H5. Specifically, by setting the fluctuation time of the first symbol display section 37b based on the game ball entering the center-side first starting hole 33 in the high-probability high support state H5 (also called the center-side special 1 fluctuation time) to an extremely long time, for example, 10 minutes, in the high-probability high support state H5, it is possible to suppress the winning lottery triggered by the game ball entering the center-side first starting hole 33 from being repeatedly executed in a short period of time. As a result, in this modified example, the player is made to give up performing a left hit operation in the high-probability high support state H5 and concentrate on a weak right hit. As a modification of this modification, the central side special 1 fluctuation time may be set to an extremely long time, for example, 10 minutes, for the low probability high support state H3 and the high probability low support state H6 in addition to the high probability high support state H5. That is, the special 1 fluctuation time in various game states H3, H5, and H6 other than the low probability low support state H1, which is assumed to cause the player to hit left, may be set to an extremely long time, for example, 10 minutes. As a result, the player is forced to give up performing left hitting operations in the game states H3, H5, and H6 other than the low probability low support state H1, and to concentrate on weak right hitting.

《8-8-14》Variation 14:
In the eighth embodiment and its modification, the guaranteed number of games in the high-frequency support mode is 50, but as a modification, the number of guaranteed games may be set to one. The flow of the game in this modification is different from the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment shown in FIG. 345 in the destination when falling in the high-precision, high-support state H5. If the guaranteed number of games is 1 and you fall in the first game, the lottery mode will change from high probability mode to low probability mode at the time of the fall, and the support mode will change to high when the fluctuation of the game stops. Since the frequent support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the transition destination when falling in the high certainty high support state H5 is the low certainty low support state H1. That is, if the user falls in the high-reliability, high-support state H5, the high-reliability, high-support state H5 shifts to the low-reliability, low-support state H1. Note that when the guaranteed number of games is one, if the player does not fall during the first game, the system changes from the high-accuracy, high-support state H5 to the high-accuracy, low support state H5, as in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. Transition to support state H6. Also in this modification, similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief. Note that the guaranteed number of games does not need to be limited to 1 or 50, and may be any other number of times.

《8-8-15》Variation 15:
In the eighth embodiment and its modifications, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices such as the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100. A configuration including two control devices, such as a device and a sub-control device, may also be used. The sub-control device may be configured to execute various processes executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the eighth embodiment. Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment and its modifications, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 are not limited to the classification described in the eighth embodiment; 60, 90, and 100 as long as they can execute the various processes in the eighth embodiment.

<<9>> Ninth embodiment:
9-1 Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 402 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter, also referred to as a "pachinko machine") according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 relative to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 relative to the inner frame 13. On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound and light emission control device, and a display control device, are disposed. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window 18 is formed in the approximate center of the front door frame 14. Resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided around the window 18. The electric parts are composed of light-emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role in enhancing the presentation effect by lighting or blinking during each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, etc. In addition, a glass unit 19 consisting of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the open window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board through the glass unit 19 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as loaned balls loaned from a loaning machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and launches the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front of the game board. The lower tray 21 is disposed below the upper tray 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. The bottom surface of the lower tray 21 is formed with an outlet 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged to the outside from the lower tray 21.

A performance operation button 24 is provided at the front of the periphery of the upper tray 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation unit that allows the player to perform input operations for the game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

An operating handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "right side"). When the player operates the operating handle 25 (rotating operation), a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the firing of game balls by the game ball firing mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operating handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. Then, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "left side"). When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing strength to the front of the game board, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired to the front of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and also flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can perform what is called a "right-handed hit." Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. Control equipment for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

Figure 403 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the rear surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 is equipped with a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board whose function is to mainly control the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured so that traces of opening and closing are left behind. For example, sealing stickers are affixed to the parts that can be opened and closed, and the word "opened" appears when the board box is opened.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio/light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The audio/light emission control device 90 controls light-emitting means such as speakers and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands sent from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands sent from the audio/light emission control device 90. The pattern display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays patterns and images for performances.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to launch game balls is input from the main control device 60, the launch control device 80 controls the game ball launch mechanism to launch game balls with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there are several devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a tank rail 55 connected below the tank 54 and having a gently sloping slope so that the game balls flow downstream, a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and a payout device 71 that receives a supply of game balls from the case rail 56 and pays out a predetermined number of game balls according to an instruction from the payout control device 70.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the power necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. The power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By turning the power switch 88 ON/OFF, the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 404 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

A plurality of openings passing through the game board 30 in the front and back direction are formed. Each opening is provided with a general winning hole 32, a first starting hole 33, a second starting hole 34, a through gate 35, a variable winning device 36, and a V winning hole 48. Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. Specifically, the variable display unit 40 is provided approximately at the center of the game board 30, and the main display section 45 is provided near the upper right of the game board 30 when viewed from the front.

The general winning openings 32 are openings through which game balls can enter, and multiple openings are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning openings 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (Figure 403).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entry port into which game balls can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the gaming area PA. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting hole 34 is an entrance through which a game ball can enter, and is provided at the upper right side of the game area PA. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed. In addition, the second starting hole 34 is provided with an electric device 34a.

The through gate 35 includes a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to perform a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the passage as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery). As a result of the internal lottery, if an electric role release is won, the electric role accessory 34a shifts to an electric role release state in which it becomes an open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged upstream of the second starting port 34 with respect to the downstream direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after passing through and enters the second starting port 34. It is possible for the ball to enter the starting port 34. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 is provided on the lower right side of the game area PA. The variable winning device 36 is equipped with a large winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening and closing door 36b that opens and closes the large winning opening 36a. The large winning opening 36a is an entrance through which a game ball can enter, and is formed in a rectangular shape in this embodiment. The opening and closing door 36b is a rectangular lid body that is one size larger than the large winning opening 36a, and is usually in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). When a big win is won as a result of the winning lottery, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to an opening and closing execution mode. The opening and closing execution mode is a mode in which the opening and closing process of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and transitions back to the closed state after a predetermined condition is met. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

The V winning opening 48 is an entrance through which a game ball can enter, and is an entrance that is a condition for activating the high probability mode. In this embodiment, the V winning opening 48 is provided inside the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36. The V winning opening 48 is provided with a V winning opening shutter 48a that opens and closes the V winning opening 48. After winning a big jackpot by lottery, the V winning opening shutter 48a changes from a closed state to an open state at a predetermined timing in the opening and closing execution mode that is executed in response to the winning of the big jackpot, and returns to a closed state after a certain time has passed. During the period when the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is in an open state and the V winning opening shutter 48a is in an open state, the game ball can enter the V winning opening 48. When a game ball enters the V winning opening 48, the lottery mode transitions to the high probability mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends. The predetermined timing for switching from the closed state to the open state will be described later.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, after playing a predetermined number of times (hereinafter also referred to as ST number) in the high probability mode gaming state, the lottery mode then shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. The number of ST times is 50 in this embodiment. Note that the number of STs does not need to be limited to 50 times, and may be other numbers such as 60 times, 40 times, 30 times, 20 times, etc. In this embodiment, the number of times ST is limited to a number greater than the number of continuations of time saving (for example, 10 times), which will be described later, and may be any number of times as long as it is greater than the number of continuations of time saving.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entry ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

The game balls that entered the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the V winning opening 48, and the out opening 43 are placed on the back of the gaming board 30. It is configured to finally merge with a provided discharge passage, and the discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor that detects game balls. By detecting the game balls with the discharge path detection sensor, it is possible to know the number of game balls fired onto the game board 30.

The main display section 45 includes a special figure unit 37, a regular figure unit 38, and a round display section 39.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each configured with a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display section 37a is a display section for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed variably or statically based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display section 37a is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. , causes the first symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. When the lottery ends, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop display the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display section 37b is a display section for displaying a second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display section 37b is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. , causes the second symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. When the lottery ends, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop display the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

Here, the time period from when the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b starts to be displayed in a variable manner until it is stopped and displayed. Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a until the time when the first symbol is stopped and displayed is also called the first variation time, and The time period from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to the time it is stopped and displayed is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special symbol unit 37 further includes a first reserved display section 37c consisting of an LED lamp at a position adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the first starting hole 33 are reserved. The first reserved display section 37c displays the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 33 by the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, game balls that enter the second starting hole 34 are not reserved. Therefore, the condition for the second symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is established based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34 during a period when neither the first symbol nor the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner, but is not established based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34 during a period when the first symbol or the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The general figure unit 38 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery is held triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the common figure unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display mode. When the electric accessory opening lottery ends, the common map unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light-emitting display unit in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of rounds that will occur in the open/close execution mode, or a display corresponding thereto. A round is a game in which the open/close door 36b remains open until one of the following conditions is met: either a predetermined upper limit duration has elapsed, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have entered the variable winning device 36. The number of rounds varies depending on the type of jackpot that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of rounds when the open/close execution mode is started, and ends when the open/close execution mode ends and a new game round begins.

Note that the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display section 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the drawing process and the drawing results.

The variable display unit 40 is disposed approximately in the center of the play area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a pattern display device 41. The pattern display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the pattern display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The pattern display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first pattern display unit 37a displays a varying or stopped pattern based on a ball entering the first starting hole 33, the pattern display unit 41 displays a varying or stopped pattern accordingly. Also, when the second pattern display unit 37b displays a varying or stopped pattern based on a ball entering the second starting hole 34, the pattern display unit 41 displays a varying or stopped pattern accordingly. The pattern display unit 41 is not limited to display effects triggered by a ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, but also performs display effects during the opening and closing execution mode to which the mode shifts when a jackpot is won. Details of the pattern display unit 41 are explained below.

FIG. 405 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 405(a) is an explanatory diagram showing decorative patterns that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. 405(a), symbols representing numbers 1 to 8 are displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41 as decorative symbols. In addition, as the decorative pattern that is displayed in a variable manner, a pattern in which a pattern such as a character is attached to each pattern representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be used.

Figure 405(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in the figure, three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, left, center, and right, are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the numbers 1 to 8 shown in Figure 405(a) are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed in which each pattern row scrolls from top to bottom or bottom to top with periodicity. As shown in Figure 405(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one pattern for each pattern row is displayed in a stopped state on the active line L1.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 periodically scroll in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each of the scrolling symbols switches from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the fluctuating display of symbols ends and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the active line L1. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the active line L1. Note that the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned mode, but may include the number of symbol rows, the number of active lines, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row, and the direction of the fluctuating display of the symbols in each symbol row. Various modes can be adopted for displaying the decorative patterns in a variable manner, such as the number of patterns.

Here, a "play round" refers to the period from when the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b starts to change, the change display ends, the display stops, and the display stops, and is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the result of a winning lottery for special information acquired based on a ball entering either the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the result of a winning lottery for one piece of special information for each play round. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a ball entering either the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, it causes the segment display to change and then stops displaying the segment display so that the display corresponds to the result of the special information acquired for each play round in either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a ball entering either the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, it causes the symbol display device 41 to variably display a predetermined symbol sequence for each play round, and then causes the symbol sequence to be frozen so that it corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. The time required for one play round is also called the unit play time. The unit play time is composed of the fluctuation time, which is the time from when the fluctuation display begins to when the predetermined lottery result is frozen and displayed, and the freeze time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is frozen and displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 405(b), a first reservation display area Ds1 is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first reservation display area Ds1, the number of reservations based on winnings in the first start opening 33 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, the number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 can be held at a maximum of four.

Also, as shown in FIG. 405(b), the display surface 41a is provided with a first synchronous display unit Sync1 that performs a blinking display and a lighting display in synchronization with the variable display and the stop display of the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display unit 37a of the special pattern unit 37, and a second synchronous display unit Sync2 that performs a blinking display and a lighting display in synchronization with the variable display and the stop display of the second pattern displayed on the second pattern display unit 37b of the special pattern unit 37. Specifically, when the first pattern display unit 37a is performing a variable display, the first synchronous display unit Sync1 performs a blinking display, and when the first pattern display unit 37a is performing a stop display, the first synchronous display unit Sync1 performs a lighting display. Also, when the second pattern display unit 37b is performing a variable display, the second synchronous display unit Sync2 performs a blinking display, and when the second pattern display unit 37b is performing a stop display, the second synchronous display unit Sync2 performs a lighting display.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the first pending display area Ds1, the first synchronization display section Sync1, and the second synchronization display section Sync2, but the display surface 41a may be configured not to display some or all of these displays.

<<9-2>> Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, a description will be given of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

Figure 406 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes an audio and light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 is equipped with a main control board 61 that is responsible for the main control of the game. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62 that is composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 is equipped with a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 is also equipped with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit that functions as a random number generator. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by other elements. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). The input port of the main control board 61 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 and the power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply unit 85. The main control board 61 receives a stable 24V DC power supply from the power supply unit 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply unit 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the dispensing control device 70, etc., and supplies power to each device. The power supply unit 85 also has a capacitor (not shown), and continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period of time when a power failure occurs or when the power switch 88 (Figure 403) is turned off.

The input port of the main control board 61 is connected to various detection sensors 67a-67f provided at various ball entry ports and through gates, such as the general entry port 32, the first start port 33, the second start port 34, the through gate 35, the variable entry device 36, and the V entry port 48. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered an entry port or whether a game ball has passed through a through gate based on signals from these detection sensors 67a-67f. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, and executes a lottery to open an electric device based on the entry of game balls into the through gate 35.

The output port of the main control board 61 is connected to the variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, the electric device drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric device 34a of the second starting port 34, the V winning port shutter drive unit 48b that opens and closes the V winning port shutter 48a, and the main display unit 45. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 controls the drive of the various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable prize winning drive unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed. Further, if the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In addition, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in a lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, the V winning port 48 is opened at a predetermined timing during the round game. - Execute drive control of the V winning opening shutter drive unit 48b so that the V winning opening shutter 48a to be closed is opened and closed. Furthermore, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 performs round display on the main display section 45. Display control of section 39 is executed.

The output port of the main control board 61 is connected to the payout control device 70 and the sound and light emission control device 90. For example, the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command to the payout control device 70 based on the winning judgment result. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a ball is identified as entering the general winning hole 32, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, when a ball is identified as entering the first starting hole 33, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, when a ball is identified as entering the second starting hole 34, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 1 game ball is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when a ball is identified as entering the large winning hole 36a, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The payout control device 70 is connected to the launch control device 80. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is met. The launch control device 80 is also connected to the operation handle 25 and the game ball launch button 26. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. As described above, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched to the front of the game board with the same launch strength as when the operating handle 25 is rotated to the maximum, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player.

The audio and light emission control device 90 receives various commands sent from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 sends various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the sound and light emission control device 90 controls the operation of various lamps 47, which are light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the speaker 46, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 100. In addition, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the sound and light emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by the player at a specified timing, the sound and light emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47, speaker 46, display control device 100, etc. to perform a game performance that reflects the operation.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the fluctuation time of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. , the presence or absence of a reach, the contents of the reach effect, the contents of the preview effect executed in each game round, etc. are grasped. In addition, in this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 407 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, setting the display on the main display section 45, setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. In addition, the change type counter CS is used to determine the change time in the first and second pattern display sections 37a and 37b of the main display section 45, and in the pattern display device 41. Furthermore, the electric role opening counter C4 is used for the electric role opening lottery to determine whether or not the electric role 34a of the second starting hole 34 is opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. A first reservation area Ra is provided in the reservation information storage area 64b. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF at the timing of ball entry is stored as pending information. The data are stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of the area 64b. Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF at the timing of ball entry are stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. be done.

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be explained. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 1199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering the first starting port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c every time the game round being executed ends, and the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c, and the winning random number counter C1 stored in the winning/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 is It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot. Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is compared with the winning/failure table stored in the winning/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. Then, it is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the type of jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 39, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the determination process execution area 64c at the timing of the ball entering. The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c every time the game round being executed ends.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter C2. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. . In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, when the opening/closing execution mode to which the game ball enters the jackpot is executed, or when the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. During the period from when the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b starts the variable display to when the variable display ends, the game ball enters the second starting port 34. Also, the configuration is such that the values of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3 (described later), and fall random number counter CF (described later) are not stored in the determination process execution area 64c (does not have a hold function). composition).

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described in detail. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the time when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, and is stored in the judgment process execution area 64c at the time when the game ball enters the second starting hole 34. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the judgment process execution area 64c each time the current game round ends.

The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the judgment process execution area 64c is compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a reach has occurred. However, if the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot and the mode transitions to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some combinations of symbols that have the possibility of forming a combination of symbols that correspond to a jackpot are stopped for some of the multiple symbol arrays displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and in that state, symbols are displayed variably in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined active line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 405(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach state. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, the reach line is formed, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a reach effect. This includes a method in which a combination of symbols in which a reach line is formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, a decision is made as to whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

Next, details of the falling random number counter CF will be explained. The fall random number counter CF is used in a game state where the lottery mode is a high probability mode, when executing a fall lottery to determine whether or not to end the high probability mode. When winning the falling lottery, the lottery mode in the game round is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

The falling random number counter CF is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 299, and return to 0 after reaching a maximum. The falling random number counter CF is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the time when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, and is stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c at the time when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34. The value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c each time the current game round ends.

The value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the determination process execution area 64c is compared with the success/failure table (the success/failure table for fall lottery: FIG. 411) stored in the fall lottery table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and A decision is made as to whether or not to end the mode.

Next, the details of the change type counter CS will be explained. The change type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the change time in the first pattern display section 37a and the second pattern display section 37b, and the change time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41. The change type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and at the time the symbol display device 41 starts variation of the symbol. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, a fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be explained. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 in the electric role execution area 64e A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory opening lottery) is held to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, in the electric role playing area 64e, the win/fail table (the win/fail table for the electric role-playing object lottery) stored in the object lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role-playing object opening counter C4 are determined. The information is compared, and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state.

In addition, at least one of the obtained values of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the electric role release counter C4, and the fall random number counter CF corresponds to the special information in this invention.

Next, the validity table will be explained. The win/fail table is table data for comparing with the winning random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the winning random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode as the lottery modes for winning lots, and when drawing a winning lottery in the low probability mode, the win/fail table for the low probability mode is referred to, and the winning lottery mode is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode. When drawing a winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and then the determination processing execution area 64c. A win/fail table for comparing with the winning random number counter C1 transferred to , and a winning random number counter C1 for comparing with the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. The validity table and the validity table are stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a win/fail table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), a winning/failure table for the first starting port (for high probability mode), and a winning/failure table for the second starting port (for low probability mode). Four validity tables are stored in the validity table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, including a validity table for the second starting port (for the high probability mode) and a validity table for the second starting port (for the high probability mode).

FIG. 408 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table for the first starting port. FIG. 408(a) shows the validity table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 408(b) shows the validity table for the first starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 408(a), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set in the win/fail table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode) as the value of the winning random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot. There is. Among the values from 0 to 3979, values other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 (20 to 3979) are outliers. In this case, the number of value groups of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot is 20/3980 (=1/199) of the total number.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 408(b), the hit/lose table for the first starting port (for high probability mode) has 199 values from 0 to 198 set as the hit random number counter C1 values that result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 3979, any value other than the 199 values from 0 to 198 (199 to 3979) is a miss. In this case, the number of value groups of the hit random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot is 199/3980 (= 1/20) of the total number. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning the jackpot in the hit lottery compared to the low probability mode.

Figure 409 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the second starting port. Figure 409(a) shows the hit/miss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), and Figure 409(b) shows the hit/miss table for the second starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 409(a), the hit/miss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode) has 20 values from 0 to 19 set as the hit random number counter C1 values that result in a jackpot. And, in the hit/miss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), values other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 (20 to 3979) out of the values from 0 to 3979 are set as the hit random number counter C1 values that result in time reduction. In this case, the number of value groups of the hit random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot is 20/3980 (= 1/199) of the total number.

"Time-saving grant" is a propriety result that is a trigger for transitioning to the support mode to be described later, but is not a trigger for transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode in which opening/closing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is executed. If the support mode is in the low-frequency support mode when the time saving award is won, the support mode will shift from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode.

Note that there is no setting for failure in the success/failure table for the second starting port (for low probability mode) in this embodiment. That is, in the pass/fail table for the second starting port (for low probability mode) in this embodiment, time saving is set as the pass/fail result instead of miss.

As shown in FIG. 409(b), 199 values from 0 to 198 are set in the win/fail table for the second starting opening (for high probability mode) as the value of the winning random number counter C1 that is a jackpot. There is. Among the values from 0 to 3979, values other than the 199 values from 0 to 198 (199 to 3979) are outliers. In this case, the number of value groups of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot is 199/3980 (=1/20) of the total number. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

A "miss" result does not trigger a transition to opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger a transition to lottery mode or support mode.

In this embodiment, the value group of the hit random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the low probability mode is the value group of the hit random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the high probability mode. include. However, as long as the probability of a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

Although not adopted in the win/lose table in this embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

A "small win" is a result of winning or losing that triggers a transition to an opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode described below, and furthermore, the number of rounds that occur in the opening/closing execution mode is limited to one.

Next, the jackpot type will be explained. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspects of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends (3) Control of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening/closing execution mode ends support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as the above-mentioned (1) opening and closing execution mode of the variable winning device 36, a high frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency of winning in the variable winning device 36 is relatively high and low between the start and end of the opening and closing execution mode. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed multiple times (for example, 16 times) between the start and end of the opening and closing execution mode, and each opening can be set to continue until 30 seconds have passed or until the number of balls that enter the opening and closing door 36b reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed twice between the start and end of the opening and closing execution mode, and each opening can be set to continue until 0.2 seconds have passed or until the number of balls that enter the opening and closing door 36b reaches 6.

When the player operates the operating handle 25, the game ball launching mechanism 81 is controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening and closing door 36b is 0.2 seconds. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening and closing door 36b is shorter than the game ball launch cycle. Therefore, in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, no winning of game balls actually occurs. However, it may be set so that winning of game balls can occur even in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode.

The number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed, the time limit for opening each time, and the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed are arbitrary, as long as the frequency of winning in the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. Specifically, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed, the time limit for opening each time is longer, or the number of times the opening limit for opening each time is larger than in the low-frequency winning mode. To clearly distinguish between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that winning in the variable winning device 36 does not actually occur.

As the lottery mode for the winning lottery after the above (2) opening/closing execution mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 can be set to a high probability mode in which the winning lottery is performed using a high probability winning/losing table as the winning/losing table, and a low probability mode in which the winning lottery is performed using a low probability winning/losing table as the winning/losing table. As explained using FIG. 408, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher when the winning lottery is performed using a high probability winning/losing table than when the winning lottery is performed using a low probability winning/losing table.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, the game balls continue to be launched into the game area PA in the same manner. When compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role opening lottery in the electric role-playing object opening lottery using the electric role-playing object opening counter C4. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role-playing role in the electric role-playing lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time period for opening the electric accessory 34a once when an electric role opening win may be set is longer than that in the low-frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when an electric role release win is set is set to be greater than in the low-frequency support mode. Good too. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the electric accessory 34a is opened for a long time. In addition, in the case where the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a is opened, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is , may be set shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from when one electric accessory lottery is held until the next electric accessory lottery is held is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. It's okay.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of the ball landing in the second starting hole 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in the establishment of the conditions for obtaining special information.

In this embodiment, if the winning lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to allocate the jackpot type. The allocation of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as an allocation table in the allocation table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

Figure 410 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. Figure 410(a) shows the distribution table for the first starting port, and Figure 410(b) shows the distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referenced when a winning lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering the first starting port 33, and the distribution table for the second starting port is referenced when a winning lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering the second starting port 34.

As shown in FIG. 410(a), in the distribution table for the first starting port, 8R certain variable jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are set as jackpot types based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. has been done.

In the 8R definite variable jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. . Further, the 8R probability-variable jackpot is a jackpot that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the V winning hole 48 in the first round of the round game. Specifically, the opening/closing door 36b is opened in the first round of the round game so that the opening period of the opening/closing door 36b in the first round of the round game includes the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is in the open state. This is a jackpot with a fixed opening period. The opening period of the opening/closing door 36b in the first round of the round game includes the period in which the V prize opening shutter 48a is in the open state (not a part but the entire period is included), so that the first round of the round game It becomes easy for the game ball to enter the V winning hole 48 which is opened at the eye. As explained earlier, it was explained that the V winning a prize opening shutter 48a is opened and closed at a predetermined timing during a round game, but specifically, the V winning a prize opening shutter 48a is opened and closed for a predetermined time from the start of the opening/closing execution mode. After the elapse of , it becomes open for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and then it becomes closed. The 8R probability-variable jackpot is determined so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened in the first round of the round game during the open state period.

When a game ball enters the open V winning hole 48, the lottery mode for the winning lottery after the open/close execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode. As described above, it is easy for a game ball to enter the V winning hole 48 in the first round of a round game, but despite this, if a game ball does not enter the V winning hole 48, the lottery mode for the winning lottery after the open/close execution mode ends does not switch to the high probability mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the number of executions of the game rounds executed in the high probability mode is limited to 50 times (ST number), and the number of executions of the game rounds executed in the high probability mode is 50 times. When the winning lottery mode is reached, the lottery mode for the winning lottery shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. In addition, in the game run executed in the high probability mode, if a game ball is won in a variable probability jackpot and the game ball enters the V winning hole 48 that was opened with the said probability variable jackpot as an opportunity, the winnings executed up to that time will be The number of games in the probability mode is reset, and after the round game is executed with the probability variable jackpot as a trigger, the count of 50 games is executed anew from the game in the high probability mode to be executed thereafter. Therefore, if the player wins a jackpot in the high probability mode, the game may be played 50 times or more in the high probability mode.

In the 8R normal jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened and closed is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. . In addition, for the 8R normal jackpot, the opening period of the opening/closing door 36b in the first round of the round game and the period in which the V prize opening shutter 48a is in the open state do not overlap, so that the opening/closing door 36b in the first round of the round game is It is a jackpot with a fixed opening period. Since the opening period of the opening/closing door 36b and the opening period of the opening/closing door 36b do not overlap, the probability that the game ball enters the V winning hole 48 is extremely low. Therefore, the 8R normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends is substantially a low probability mode.

In this way, in the probability variable jackpot, compared to the normal jackpot, the game ball is more likely to enter the V winning hole 48 in the first round of the round game, so the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode has a high probability. There is a high probability that it will become a mode. On the other hand, in a normal jackpot, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the V winning hole 48 compared to a variable jackpot, so the probability that the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode is very low. In addition, in this specification, the distribution result with a higher probability that the game ball enters the V winning hole 48 easily and the lottery mode of the winning lottery becomes the high probability mode is conveniently referred to as a "probable jackpot". In other words, if you win a jackpot in a winning lottery, the type of jackpot you won is a fixed-variable jackpot, and the game ball does not enter the V winning hole 48 that was opened due to the jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Although the lottery mode of the winning lottery does not shift to the high probability mode, as mentioned above, for the sake of convenience, it is called "probability variable jackpot".

In the distribution table for the first starting gate, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is set to "0-39", with "0-19" corresponding to an 8R special jackpot and "20-39" corresponding to an 8R normal jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 410(b), in the distribution table for the second starting port, 16R probability variable jackpot is set as the jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34.

In the 16R guaranteed variable jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened is 16 times (16 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. . Further, the 16R probability-variable jackpot is a jackpot that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the V winning hole 48 in the first round of the round game. Specifically, the 16R probability-variable jackpot is achieved during the first round of the round game so that the period during which the opening/closing door 36b is open in the first round of the round game includes the period in which the V prize opening shutter 48a is in the open state. This is a jackpot that determines the opening period of the opening/closing door 36b. The opening period of the opening/closing door 36b in the first round of the round game includes a period in which the V winning hole shutter 48a is in the open state, so that the game to the V winning hole 48 opened in the first round of the round game is included. Entering the ball becomes easier. As explained earlier, it was explained that the V winning a prize opening shutter 48a is opened and closed at a predetermined timing during a round game, but specifically, the V winning a prize opening shutter 48a is opened and closed for a predetermined time from the start of the opening/closing execution mode. After the elapse of , it becomes open for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and then it becomes closed. The 16R probability-variable jackpot is determined so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened in the first round of the round game during the open state period. That is, the 16R probability variable jackpot is different from the 8R probability variable jackpot only in the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode, and the aspect of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode. is the same in that it is a high-frequency winning mode, and that it is easier to enter the game ball into the V winning hole 48 in the first round of the round game.

In the distribution table for the second starting port, the jackpot type counter C2 is set to have a value of "0 to 39" that corresponds to a 16R guaranteed jackpot. In other words, all of the jackpot type counter C2 values "0 to 39" are set to correspond to a 16R guaranteed jackpot.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot is as follows: This is different from the case where a jackpot is achieved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

In this embodiment, as described above, three types of jackpots are set: 8R regular jackpot, 8R normal jackpot, and 16R probability variable jackpot, but it is not necessary to limit to three types, and includes, for example, 16R normal jackpot. There may be four types, two types, or five or more types. Further, the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is not limited to 8R and 16R, and may be other numbers such as 4R and 5R, for example.

As explained above, when the number of times a game is played in high probability mode reaches the ST number (50 times), the lottery mode for the winning lottery shifts from high probability mode to low probability mode. However, in this embodiment, even if the game is played before the ST number is reached, if a player wins the fall lottery described below, the lottery mode for the winning lottery shifts from high probability mode to low probability mode.

Figure 411 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the fall lottery winning/losing table used when executing the fall lottery. As shown in Figure 411, the fall lottery winning/losing table has 100 values from 0 to 99 out of the values from 0 to 299 set as the values of the fall random number counter CF that will be a winning in the fall lottery. And the fall lottery winning/losing table has 200 values from 100 to 299 out of the values from 0 to 299 set as the values of the fall random number counter CF that will be a losing in the fall lottery. That is, in a game in the high probability mode, the probability of falling, in which the fall lottery is won and the high probability mode ends and the mode becomes low probability, is 1/3. In a game in the high probability mode, if the fall lottery is lost, the high probability mode continues. In this embodiment, the fall lottery is not executed in a game in the low probability mode.

FIG. 412 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory release lottery) used when executing the electric accessory lottery.

FIG. 412(a) shows a winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery used in the low-frequency support mode (for the low-frequency support mode). As shown in FIG. 412(a), the electric accessory opening lottery win/fail table (for low-frequency support mode) has two values, 0 and 1, as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that will result in an electric role opening win. Value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the low frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the low-frequency support mode, the electric role accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 412(b) shows a win/fail table for electric accessory opening lottery used in the high-frequency support mode (for the high-frequency support mode). As shown in FIG. 412(b), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) has 462 values from 0 to 461 as the value of electric accessory opening counter C4 that will be the winning electric accessory. Value is set. Four values from 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the high-frequency support mode, the electric role model 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting port 34 is set to be higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode by the electric accessory opening lottery table. .

<<9-3>> Electrical configuration of the audio/light-emission control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 413 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 (Figure 406) are omitted. The audio and light emission control board 91 provided in the audio and light emission control device 90 is equipped with an MPU 92. The MPU 92 is an element that incorporates a CPU, ROM 93, RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in ROM 93 is executed. For example, a portion of the area of RAM 94 is provided with a various flag storage area 94a, various counter areas 94b, a lottery counter area 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into a single chip for MPU 92, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 60 and the performance operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. The speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, as well as the display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 mediates the reading and writing of data by adjusting the timing of the MPU 102, video RAM 107, etc., and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

<<9-4>> Overview of Processing by Gaming Machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

《9-4-1》Transition between lottery mode and support mode:
First, a case where the level of the lottery mode and the support mode changes will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the won jackpot is a normal jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode, and the support mode moves to infrequent support mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of the won jackpot is a guaranteed-variable jackpot, and a game ball enters the V winning hole 48 that is opened with the jackpot as an opportunity, the opening/closing After the execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to high frequency support mode. In addition, in this embodiment, if a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of jackpot won is a variable jackpot, and the game ball does not enter the V winning hole 48 that was opened with the jackpot as an opportunity, A lottery mode never shifts to a high probability mode, and a support mode never shifts to a high frequency support mode.

After the jackpot is won by the lottery and the support mode transitions to the high-frequency support mode based on the fact that the type of the jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot, the high-frequency support mode continues as the support mode until the number of times the game has been played since the high-frequency support mode was started reaches a predetermined number (hereinafter also referred to as the number of times the time-saving continues). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the number of times the time-saving continues is, for example, 10 times. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, after the transition to the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues until the number of times the time-saving continues, which is 10 times. After the number of times the game has been played since the high-frequency support mode was started reaches the number of times the time-saving continues, which is 10 times, the support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode. Note that the number of times the time-saving continues does not have to be limited to the above-mentioned 10 times, and may be another number.

On the other hand, a winning lottery is executed with reference to the win/fail table (for low probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. When the game shifts to the frequent support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues as the support mode until the next jackpot is won.

When the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, there is an extremely high probability of 231/233 that the result of the electric role opening lottery, which is executed after passing through the through gate 35, will be an electric role opening lottery. The accessory 34a is frequently in an open state. Therefore, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the player plays the game by hitting the ball to the right and causing the game ball to enter the second starting port 34 provided with the electric accessory 34a.

After the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the high probability mode continues as the lottery mode until the number of times the game is executed after the start of the high probability mode reaches a predetermined number (ST number). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the number of STs is, for example, 50 times. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, after the high probability mode is started and the ST number of games is played 50 times, the lottery mode is then shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

In addition, if a player wins a drop lottery in a game before the number of times a game has been played since the high probability mode was started reaches the ST number, the lottery mode will also switch from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. In more detail, if a player wins a drop lottery in a game before the number of times a game has been played reaches the ST number, the lottery mode will switch from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at the start of that game, and the winning lottery for that game will be executed in the low probability mode. For this reason, in the winning lottery for that game, a winning lottery is executed with reference to the winning/losing table (for low probability mode) for the second start port shown in FIG. 409(a), and if a player wins a time-saving lottery in that winning lottery, the high frequency support mode will continue as the support mode until the next big win is won.

If a jackpot is won during a game played in the high probability mode and a game ball enters the V winning slot 48 that was opened as a result of the jackpot, the number of game times played in the high probability mode up to that point is reset, and after a round of play that is played as a result of the jackpot, the count of 50 game times is restarted from the game times in the high probability mode that are played after that. Therefore, if a jackpot is won during the high probability mode, there are cases in which the game times in the high probability mode are played continuously for more than 50 times.

《9-4-2》 Game flow:
In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, at least four types of states can be taken as game states that transition during the game, depending on the combination of the high and low of the lottery mode and the support mode. Specifically, the following can be taken: i) a low-probability low-support state in which the lottery mode is a low-probability mode and the support mode is a low-frequency support mode; ii) a low-probability high-support state in which the lottery mode is a low-probability mode and the support mode is a high-frequency support mode; iii) a high-probability high-support state in which the lottery mode is a high-probability mode and the support mode is a high-frequency support mode; and iv) a high-probability low-support state in which the lottery mode is a high-probability mode and the support mode is a low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, an open/close execution mode in which a game ball can enter the large winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36 can be taken as a game state. The game progresses while transitioning between these game states.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a high probability mode flag that specifies the lottery mode and a high frequency support mode that specifies the support mode are stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64. When the high probability mode flag is OFF, the lottery mode is specified as the low probability mode, and when the high probability mode flag is ON, the lottery mode is specified as the high probability mode. The support mode is specified as the low-frequency support mode when the high-frequency support mode flag is OFF, and the support mode is specified as the high-frequency support mode when the high-frequency support mode flag is ON. Therefore, each of the above-mentioned low probability low support state, low probability high support state, high probability low support state, and high probability high support state is specified by the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag. Become. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the flow of the game progresses while switching between the four states described above by switching at least one of the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag.

In this embodiment, the selection mode is specified by one flag (i.e., the high probability mode flag), but instead of this, the selection mode may be specified by two flags (i.e., the high probability mode flag and the low probability mode flag). In this modified example, when either the high probability mode flag or the low probability mode flag is turned ON, the other is automatically turned OFF. In addition, in this embodiment, the support mode is specified by one flag (i.e., the high frequency support mode flag), but instead of this, the support mode may be specified by two flags (i.e., the high frequency support mode flag and the low frequency support mode flag). In this modified example, when either the high frequency support mode flag or the low frequency support mode flag is turned ON, the other is automatically turned OFF. According to both modified examples, as in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the flow of the game progresses as the flag is switched and the above-mentioned four states are switched.

Figure 414 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of play in the pachinko machine 10. When play begins, the game is initially in a low-probability low-support state (state H1). That is, the lottery mode is a low-probability mode, and the support mode is a low-frequency support mode. In the low-probability low-support state (state H1), the player hits from the left, causing the game ball to flow down the left side of the play area PA and enter the first start hole 33. When the game ball enters the first start hole 33, a winning lottery is held for the special information acquired based on the game ball entering the first start hole 33, and a game round is played to notify the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery.

If the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round executed in the low probability low support state (state H1) is a loss, the low probability low support state (state H1) is continued, and the player enters the first starting port 33. A game ball is entered and a game round is executed.

If a jackpot is won in a lottery during a game played in the low-probability, low-support state, and the type of jackpot won is a normal jackpot, the open/close execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player after the game ends. In other words, the game transitions from the low-probability, low-support state (state H1) to the open/close execution mode (state H2).

Prior to the round game that occurs in the opening/closing execution mode (state H2), the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion performance that urges the player to play right. The player executes a right-handed hit according to the suggested performance, causes the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA, and enters the game ball into the grand prize opening 36a to obtain a prize ball. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode (state H2) executed when the type of the won jackpot is a normal jackpot, as explained earlier, the game ball rarely enters the V winning hole 48.

When the opening/closing execution mode (state H2) ends, a transition is made to the low certainty low support state (state H1). That is, the lottery mode becomes a low probability mode, and the support mode becomes a low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, in the low probability low support state (state H1), if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery during a play round and the type of jackpot won is a probability variable jackpot, the open/close execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player after the end of the play round. In other words, the state transitions from the low probability low support state (state H1) to the open/close execution mode (state H3).

Prior to the round game that occurs in the opening/closing execution mode (state H3), the pachinko machine 10 provides a suggestion performance that urges the player to hit the ball to the right, and inserts a game ball into the V winning hole 48 in the first round of the round game. A suggestive performance that encourages the ball to be played is executed. The player executes a right-handed hit according to these suggested effects, causes the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA, enters the game ball into the grand prize opening 36a to obtain a prize ball, and completes one round of the round game. A game ball is made to enter a V winning hole 48 in a large winning hole 36a. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode (state H3) that is executed when the type of the won jackpot is a variable jackpot, as explained earlier, the game ball enters the V winning hole 48 in the first round of the round game. It's easy to ball.

When a game ball enters the V winning port 48 during the first round of round play in the open/close execution mode (state H3) and the open/close execution mode (state H3) ends, the game transitions to a high probability high support state (state H4). In other words, the lottery mode becomes a high probability mode (limited to 50 ST times), and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode (limited to 10 time reduction continuations).

In the high probability high support state (state H4), the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect that encourages the player to hit to the right. In the high probability high support state (state H4), the player hits to the right in accordance with the suggestion effect, causing the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA and enter the second starting hole 34. Since the support mode is the high frequency support mode in the high probability high support state, the electric role opening lottery executed upon passing through the through gate 35 has a very high probability of 231/233, resulting in an electric role opening winning, and therefore the electric role opening state 34a of the second starting hole 34 is frequently in the electric role opening state. For this reason, in the high probability high support state, the game ball easily enters the second starting hole 34. When the game ball enters the second starting hole 34, a winning lottery is held for the special information acquired based on the game ball's entry into the second starting hole 34, and a game round is executed to notify the player of the winning lottery result. That is, in the high probability high support state (state H4), the electric device 34a of the second starting hole 34 is in the electric open state with high frequency, and more game balls enter the second starting hole 34 than usual (low support state), so the player can participate in the winning lottery without losing balls.

If the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round executed in the high-probability, high-support state (state H4) is a jackpot, the type of the won jackpot is limited to a probability-variable jackpot (the second start in FIG. 410(b) (refer to the allocation table for opening), the high-accuracy, high-support state H4 is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode H3. If the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round executed in the high probability and high support state (state H4) is a loss, the high probability and high support state (state H4) continues, and the player enters the second starting port 34. A game ball is entered and a game round is executed.

When a game is played in the high probability high support state (state H4), the lottery mode is a high probability mode, so the fall lottery described above is executed.

As explained above, the game state in which the support mode is the high-frequency support mode continues for up to 10 game times, which is the number of times the time-saving mode continues. However, if the drop lottery is won in a game time before reaching 10 (within 10 times), the lottery mode for that game time is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. In other words, the game transitions from the high probability high support state (state H4) to the low probability high support state (state H5). Note that when transitioning to the low probability high support state (state H5), the time-saving game count counter PNC, which indicates the number of game times that will continue to be executed in the high frequency support mode, is maintained as it was before the transition. Therefore, the transition to the low probability high support state (state H5) does not reset the number of game times that will continue to be executed in the high frequency support mode.

In the low probability high support state (state H5), the winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34 uses the winning/losing table (for low probability mode) for the second starting hole shown in FIG. 409(a). Therefore, the lottery result of the winning lottery for the game round in which the above-mentioned fall lottery is won is either a jackpot win or a time-saving grant win. If the time-saving grant is won in the winning lottery, the high frequency support mode will continue as the support mode until the next jackpot is won. In other words, if the time-saving grant is won in the winning lottery, the high frequency support mode will continue until the next jackpot is won, and the next jackpot is virtually guaranteed. Furthermore, since the type of jackpot based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34 is limited to a 16R high probability jackpot as shown in FIG. 410(b), in the low probability high support state (state H5), it is guaranteed that the high probability jackpot will be won and the state will transition again to the high probability high support state (state H4).

In the low-probability high support state (state H5), the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect that encourages the player to hit to the right. In the low-probability high support state (state H5), the player hits to the right in accordance with the suggestion effect, causing the game ball to flow down to the right side of the play area PA and enter the second starting hole 34. Since the support mode is the high-frequency support mode in the low-probability high support state, the electric role opening lottery that is executed upon passing through the through gate 35 has an extremely high probability of 231/233, resulting in an electric role opening winning, and therefore the electric role opening device 34a of the second starting hole 34 enters the electric role opening state with high frequency. For this reason, in the low-probability high support state, the game ball easily enters the second starting hole 34. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, a winning lottery is held for the special information acquired based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 34, and a game round is played to notify the player of the lottery result. That is, in the low probability high support state (state H5), the electric device 34a of the second starting hole 34 is in the electric open state with high frequency, and more game balls enter the second starting hole 34 than usual (low support state), so that the player can participate in the winning lottery without losing balls.

If a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game round executed in a low probability/high support state (state H5), the type of the won jackpot will be a probability-variable jackpot, which will be opened and closed as a benefit given to the player after the end of the game round. mode is executed. That is, a transition is made from the low-reliability, high-support state (state H5) to the opening/closing execution mode (state H3).

In summary, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the low-probability, high-support state (state H5), the high-frequency support mode continues as the support mode until the next jackpot is won in the winning lottery. In a state where the number of balls held by the player is difficult to decrease, the winning lottery can be repeated at high frequency by entering game balls into the second starting hole 34 until the next jackpot is won. Note that this state in which the high-frequency support mode continues as the support mode until the next jackpot is won is hereinafter referred to as a "high support continuation state until the next time" (=high support continuation state until the next time). As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the player wins the fall lottery within 10 games and shifts from the high-probability, high-support state (state H4) to the low-probability, high-support state (state H5), , it is possible to reliably win the jackpot again, so-called consecutive winnings, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of winning consecutively.

In the high-probability, high-support state (state H4), if the number of games executed in the high-frequency support mode reaches 10 times, which is the number of short-time continuations, without winning the falling lottery, the support mode will change to the high-frequency support mode. mode to infrequent support mode. That is, the state shifts from the high-certainty high support state (state H4) to the high-certainty low support state (state H6). Furthermore, when transitioning to the high probability low support state (state H6), the ST game count counter SNC, which indicates the number of consecutive games played in the high probability mode, is retained as before the transition. . Therefore, the number of consecutive games played in the high probability mode is not reset due to the transition to the high probability low support state (state H6).

In the high-accuracy/low-support state (state H6), the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion performance that urges the player to play left-handed. Since the support mode is low-frequency support mode in the high-certainty/low-support state, there is a 1/1 chance that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery that is triggered by passing through the through gate 35 will be an electric accessory opening winning. 233, which is extremely low, and the probability that the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 will be in the electric role open state is extremely low. Therefore, in the high-accuracy/low-support state (state H6), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 34, so the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player that the game ball enters the second starting port 34. Aiming for a left-handed hit instead of a right-handed hit. In the high-accuracy, low-support state (state H6), the player causes the game ball to flow down to the left side of the gaming area PA and enters the first starting port 33 by executing a left-handed hit according to the suggested performance. let When a game ball enters the first starting port 33, a winning lottery is drawn based on the special information acquired based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and the lottery results of the winning lottery are presented to the player. A game round for notification is executed. In this game round, since the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the falling lottery described above is executed. In addition, in the high accuracy low support state (state H6), if the ball continues to be hit to the right, the game ball will not enter the second starting port 34 and the game ball will be wasted.

If a player wins the drop lottery during a game played in the high-probability low-support state (state H6), the lottery mode transitions from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. In other words, the state transitions from the high-probability low-support state (state H6) to the low-probability low-support state (state H1).

In the high probability low support state (state H6), if you win a jackpot in the winning lottery in a game round and the type of jackpot you won is a normal jackpot, it will be opened and closed as a benefit given to the player after the end of the game round. Execution mode is executed. That is, the state shifts from the high-accuracy/low-support state (state H6) to the opening/closing execution mode (state H2).

In the high probability low support state (state H6), if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery during a play round and the type of jackpot won is a probability variable jackpot, the open/close execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player after the end of the play round. In other words, the state transitions from the high probability low support state (state H6) to the open/close execution mode (state H3).

In the high probability low support state (state H6), the number of executions of the game round executed in the high probability mode is ST number (high When the count reaches 40 times after transitioning to the low-probability support state H6, the lottery mode is transitioned from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. That is, the state shifts from the high-certainty low support state (state H6) to the low-certainty low support state (state H1).

A comparison of the advantages for the player of the above-mentioned four states H1, H4, H5, and H6 specified by the lottery mode and the support mode is as follows. Among the four states H1, H4, H5, and H6, the low probability low support state H1 is the least advantageous. Among the high-probability high support state H4, the low-probability high support state H5, and the high-probability low support state H6, the high-probability low support state H6 is the least advantageous. This is because the high-probability, low-support state H6 shifts to the low-probability, low-support state (state H1) when a winning lottery is won or when the number of times the game is played reaches the ST number of times. Comparing the high-probability high support state H4 and the low-probability high support state H5, the low-probability high support state H5 is more advantageous than the high-probability high support state H4. High-probability, high-support state H4 is highly advantageous because the lottery mode is a high-probability mode, but when the number of game executions reaches 10, which is the number of time-saving continuations, the support mode changes to low-frequency support mode. Because of the transition, the advantage is lower compared to the high probability high support state H4 where the next probability variable jackpot is guaranteed.

Based on the above-mentioned changes in the gaming state, the player plays the game as follows. First, in the low-probability, low-support state H1, the player hits the ball to the left and causes the game ball to enter the first starting port 33. At this time, the player expects to win a jackpot in the winning lottery that is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33, and also knows that the type of jackpot is a guaranteed-variable jackpot. expect.

When a jackpot is won in the low probability low support state H1 and the type of jackpot is a normal jackpot, the player repeats rounds of play in the open/close execution mode H2 to which the player transitioned from the low probability low support state H1, while being disappointed that it is a normal jackpot and not a special jackpot. After all rounds of play are completed, the state returns to the low probability low support state H1.

In the low-probability, low-support state H1, if a jackpot is won and the type of the jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot, the player, while rejoicing at having won the probability-variable jackpot, moves from the low-probability, low-support state H1 to the opening/closing state. In execution mode H3, round games are repeatedly played. After all the round games are completed, the state shifts to a high-certain high-support state H4.

In the high probability high support state H4, the player hits the right hand and causes the game ball to enter the second starting hole 34. In the high probability high support state H4, since the support mode is the high frequency support mode, as explained above, the electric device 34a of the second starting hole 34 is in the electric open state with high frequency, and the game ball can be easily entered into the second starting hole 34. At this time, the player hopes to win a jackpot in the winning lottery that is executed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 34. If the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round executed in the high probability high support state H4 is a jackpot, the type of jackpot won is limited to a guaranteed jackpot, so the player is even more hopeful of winning a jackpot.

In the high-probability, high-support state H4, the player expects to win a jackpot as explained earlier, but in addition, the number of games played after transitioning to the high-probability, high-support state H4 is the number of time-saving continuations. It is hoped that the player will win the falling lottery in the game rounds before reaching the number of times (within 10 times). If you win the falling lottery in a game in which the number of games played within 10 times after moving to the high probability and high support state H4, the state will shift from the high probability and high support state H4 to the low probability and high support state H5, but first As explained above, in the low-probability, high-support state H5, the next probability-variable jackpot is virtually guaranteed. In the game round, the player expects to win the falling lottery.

On the other hand, in the high-guaranteed, high-support state H4, if the number of games after shifting to the high-accuracy, high-support state H4 reaches 10 without winning the falling lottery, then the high-certainty, high-support state H4 changes to the high-certainty, low The game moves to the support state H6, but the high-probability low support state H6 does not guarantee the next jackpot. Therefore, in the high-probability, high-support state H4, the player does not win the winning lottery or the fall lottery, and the number of games after moving to the high-probability, high-support state H4 does not reach 10. This creates a sense of urgency along with the aforementioned sense of anticipation.

In the low-accuracy, high-support state H5, the player hits the ball to the right and causes the game ball to enter the second starting port 34. In the low probability high support state H5, if a winning lottery is executed and the support mode shifts to high frequency support mode based on winning the time saving grant in the winning lottery, the high support will continue until the next time as explained earlier. state. Therefore, in the low-probability, high-support state H5, the player can feel secure that the high-frequency support mode will not end as a support mode until he wins a jackpot in the winning lottery and is assigned to a variable-probability jackpot.

In the high probability high support state H4, if you do not win in either the winning lottery or the falling lottery and the number of games after moving to the high probability high support state H4 reaches 10, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, and as a result, shifts from the high-certainty high support state H4 to the high-certainty low support state H6.

In the high-accuracy/low-support state H6, the player hits the ball to the left and causes the game ball to enter the first starting port 33. In the high-probability, low-support state H6, the player acknowledges that he did not win the jackpot in the high-probability, high-support state H4 before transitioning to the high-probability, low-support state H6, and that he played 10 times in the high-probability, high-support state H4. Although I was disappointed that I didn't win the fall lottery in the previous game,
i) winning the fall lottery;
ii) Winning a jackpot in a winning lottery;
iii) The number of games played after transitioning to the high-probability, low-support state H6 reaches 40 (50 when counted after transitioning to the high-probability, high-support state H4);
The game will be played repeatedly until one of the following is satisfied. When the above-mentioned i) or iii) is satisfied, the high-probability low support state H6 shifts to the low-probability low support state H1. When the above condition ii) is satisfied, a transition is made to the opening/closing execution mode H2 or H3 corresponding to the distribution result based on the distribution determination.

In addition, in the high probability/low support state H6, since the lottery mode is a high probability mode, the player can still have a sense of expectation that he or she will win a jackpot. You can have the expectation that you will hit the jackpot and return to the high-probability, high-support state H4. In addition, the player will have a sense of urgency as if he or she will win the lottery, along with the above-mentioned sense of anticipation.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment having the flow of the game as described above, when a player wins a jackpot in the winning lottery in the low-probability, low-support state H1, and is assigned to a probability-variable jackpot, the state shifts to the high-probability, high-support state H4. Below, we will consider the probability of winning the jackpot again next time (hereinafter referred to as the "continuation rate").

In the high probability high support state H4, if the number of games played after the transition to the high probability high support state H4 is within the number of times the time-saving continuation count (10 times), the state transitions from the high probability high support state H4 to the low probability high support state H5, in which the next probability-changing jackpot is guaranteed. For this reason, in order to calculate the continuation rate in the high probability high support state H4, in addition to the case where a jackpot is won in the winning lottery (allocation is 100% probability-changing jackpot), it is necessary to consider the case where the high probability high support state H4 transitions to the low probability high support state H5. Therefore, in one game, the probability of not winning the falling lottery and not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is calculated, and the probability of missing both the winning lottery and the falling lottery in all of the time-saving continuation counts (10 times) is calculated from this probability, and the value obtained by subtracting this probability of missing from 1 is the continuation rate. Specifically, the continuation rate can be calculated according to the following formula (1).

Continuation rate = 1-{(1-1/3) x (1-1/20)}^10 ... (1)

In formula (1), "1-1/3" is the probability of not winning the falling lottery in one game round. “1-1/20” is the probability of not winning a jackpot in the winning lottery (distribution is 100% probability variable jackpot) in one game round in the high probability mode. “10” is the number of times the time saving is continued. "^" is an operator representing exponentiation. When formula (1) is calculated, the continuation rate is approximately 99.0%. In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has a continuous playing system that is completely different from conventional pachinko machines, and can realize a model with extremely high specifications in terms of continuous playing performance.

The pachinko machine 10 with the above consecutive win performance has the following effects compared to conventional pachinko machines. Conventionally, there are two types of pachinko machines, loop type and ST type, which have different methods for continuing the jackpot. In a loop type pachinko machine, since it is confirmed that the next jackpot will be won in a high probability high support state, the continuation rate is determined based on the allocation probability of the jackpot when the jackpot is won. This means that in a loop type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability that when the symbols are lined up, the lined up symbols will be a variable symbol (for example, a "7" symbol). Therefore, in a high probability high support state, the player just watches the game rounds being consumed and hopes that when the symbols are lined up, the lined up symbols will be a variable symbol. In contrast, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the high probability high support state H4, the player can be made to expect that he or she will win the drop lottery or the winning lottery in a game in which the number of play times since the high frequency support mode is started is within 10 times. As a result, compared to conventional loop-type pachinko machines, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can give the player a sense of urgency that the number of play times since the transition to the high probability high support state H4 will reach 10 without winning not only the winning lottery but also the drop lottery.

In the ST type pachinko machine, the continuation rate in the high probability high support state can be obtained by calculating the probability of missing all ST times from the probability of not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery per play and subtracting the probability of missing from 1. For this reason, in the ST type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability of matching the symbols (probability of winning the jackpot) and the number of ST times. Therefore, in the ST type pachinko machine, as the number of play times executed in the high probability high support state progresses, a sense of tension can be given to the player that the number of play times will reach the ST number without winning the jackpot. In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the high probability high support state H4, a sense of tension can be given to the player that the number of play times after transitioning to the high probability high support state H4 will reach the time-saving continuation number (10 times) without winning the jackpot (matching the symbols) and the fall lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can provide a player with a greater sense of tension compared to conventional ST-type pachinko machines, since the drop win is added to the jackpot win.

The following configuration can also be considered as a pachinko machine having other game features. In a specific advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, if the player wins a small win in a winning lottery (a small win has a high probability of winning) before the number of games after entering the advantageous state reaches a predetermined number. A conceivable configuration is to continue the opening/closing execution mode (round game) when a game ball enters the V winning hole. According to this configuration, the number of game rounds executed before transitioning from an advantageous state to the opening/closing execution mode is completed in a short period of time, so the opening/closing execution mode is repeated at short intervals, resulting in an excessively increased gambling experience. There was a problem to solve. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the route from the high-precision high-support state H4 to the opening/closing execution mode H3, the lottery mode is a low lottery mode in which it is guaranteed that you will eventually win the jackpot. Since it is possible to go through the low-probability, high-support state H5 in which the winning lottery can be repeatedly performed in the probability mode, it is possible to take enough time to shift from the high-probability, high-support state H4 to the opening/closing execution mode H3. For this reason, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the gambling experience from becoming excessively high due to repeating the opening/closing execution mode at short intervals. Furthermore, by taking a sufficient amount of time, a secondary effect can be achieved in that it becomes possible to perform various effects. These effects cannot be achieved even with the configuration of a pachinko machine having other game features.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has superior effects compared to various types of conventional pachinko machines.

《9-5》Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the processing executed in the main control device 60 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

To progress each game round, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes are explained below. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 also executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by the input of a power outage signal, but a description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 415 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step St0101, a reading process is performed for the various detection sensors 67a to 67f. That is, the status of the various detection sensors 67a to 67f connected to the main control unit 60 is read, the status of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is saved. Then, the process proceeds to step St0102.

In step St0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process advances to step St0103.

In step St0103, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the fall random number counter CF, and the electric role opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the fall random number counter CF, and the electric role opening counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches its maximum value, each is cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 and CF are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step St0104. Note that the value of the variation type counter CS is updated in the normal processing (FIG. 419) described below.

In step St0104, a ball entry process for the starting hole is executed in association with the ball entering the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34. Details of the ball entry process for the starting hole in step St0104 will be described later. After executing step St0104, proceed to step St0105.

In step St0105, the through ball entry process is executed when the ball enters the through gate 35. Details of the through ball entry process in step St0105 will be described later. After executing step St0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Ball entry process for starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be explained. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 415: St0104).

FIG. 416 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the starting port. In step St0201, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. In step St0201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (St0201: YES), the process proceeds to step St0202, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. Thereafter, the process advances to step St0203.

In step St0203, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33. Thereafter, the process advances to step St0204.

In step St0204, the start pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start pending number RaN), which is the value stored in the pending number memory area of the first pending area Ra, is read out, and it is determined whether the first start pending number RaN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step St0204, if the first start pending number RaN is not less than the upper limit value (St0204: NO), the ball entry process for this start port is terminated.

On the other hand, in step St0204, if the first start pending number RaN is less than the upper limit (St0204: YES), the process proceeds to step St0205, where 1 is added to the first start pending number RaN. Thereafter, the process advances to step St0206.

In step St0206, each value of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF updated in step St0103 (FIG. 415) is transferred to the first of the free storage areas of the corresponding holding area. It is stored in a storage area, that is, a storage area corresponding to the first start pending number RaN to which 1 was added in step St0205. After executing step St0206, the process advances to step St0207.

In step St0207, a first determination process is executed. The first determination process is a process that executes a determination of the result of the winning lottery (lottery result), the type of the winning lottery, whether or not a reach has occurred, the result of the falling lottery, etc. based on the information (reserved information) of each value of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF, before the reserved information becomes the subject of the winning lottery (determination process) by the main control device 60. Details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step St0207, proceed to step St0208.

In step St0208, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the judgment result of the destination judgment process executed based on the information (hold information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF is first held. Set as a command.

The first hold command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize the occurrence of a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 and the judgment result (first judgment information) by the first judgment process based on the hold information acquired based on the ball entry, before the hold information becomes the subject of a winning lottery by the main control device 60. The first hold command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (Fig. 419: step St0503) described later.

When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the first hold command transmitted based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 33, it transmits a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. The display control device 100, which has received the command, changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. After executing step St0208, the ball entry process for this starting hole is terminated.

If it is determined in step St0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting hole 33 (St0201: NO), the process proceeds to step St0209, where it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second starting hole 34 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting hole 34.

If it is determined in step St0209 that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 34 (St0209: YES), the process proceeds to step St0210, where a prize ball command is set to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. Then, the process proceeds to step St0211. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2t0209 that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (St0209: NO), the ball entry process for this starting hole is terminated.

In step St0211, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal indicating that a game ball has entered the second starting port 34 to the management control device on the game hall side. Thereafter, the process advances to step St0212.

In step St0212, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is a flag that is turned ON when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process. If it is determined in step St0212 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (step St0212: NO), the process proceeds to step St0213. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0212 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (step St0212: YES), the ball entry process for the main starting port is ended.

In step St0213, it is determined whether the special symbol unit 37 is displaying a change. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is displaying a change. This determination is made by determining whether the special symbol displaying a change flag in the special symbol displaying a change flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special symbol displaying a change flag is turned ON when a change display is to be started for either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, and is turned OFF when the change display is to end.

In step St0213, if it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is not in variable display (St0213: NO), the process proceeds to step St0214. On the other hand, in step St0213, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation display flag is ON (step St0213: YES), the ball entry process for the main starting opening is ended.

In step St0214, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF updated in step St0103 (FIG. 415) are stored in the judgment process execution area 64c. After executing step St0214, proceed to step St0215.

In step St0215, the second starting port entry flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The second starting port entry flag is turned ON when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, and is turned OFF when the second symbol starts to fluctuate with the ball entering the second starting port 34 as a trigger. be made into After executing step St0215, the ball entry process for the main starting port is ended.

<First Determination Process>
Next, the first-goal determination process will be described. The first-goal determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for the ball-entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 416: St0207).

Figure 417 is a flowchart showing the first determination process. As described above, the first determination process is a process that executes, based on the reserved information, determination of the winning or losing of the winning lottery, determination of the type of big win, determination of whether or not a reach has occurred, and determination of the winning or losing of the falling lottery, etc., before the reserved information becomes the subject of the winning lottery by the main control device 60.

In step St0301, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the memory area due to the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entry process for the starting hole (Figure 416) is obtained. Then, proceed to step St0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to this ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the result of the judgment of the prior judgment process executed due to the ball entry before this ball entry is read from the corresponding memory area, and the presence or absence of a guaranteed jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to this ball entry and the presence or absence of a win in the drop lottery are determined to determine the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to this ball entry is executed as a game round.

In step St0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round (St0302: YES), the process advances to step St0303 and the winning lottery table is stored. Refer to the success/failure table (for low probability mode) for the first starting port stored in the area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step St0308, and as a result of referring to the win/fail table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode), it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot. .

On the other hand, in step St0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current entry is executed as a game round (St0302: NO), the process advances to step St0304, and the winning lottery based on the current entry is executed as a game round. The value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the storage area by the ball is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step St0305, and it is determined whether or not the player has won the fall lottery by referring to the fall determination table stored in the fall lottery table storage area 63d.

In step St0305, if it is determined that the fall lottery has been won (St0305: YES), the process proceeds to step St0306, where the fall winning information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h, and the process proceeds to step St0303. In step St0303, as described above, the first start/failure table (for low probability mode) stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step St0308, and as a result of referring to the win/fail table (for low probability mode) for the first starting opening, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step St0305, if it is determined that the lottery has not been won (St0305: NO), the process proceeds to step St0307, and the win/fail table for the first starting opening (for high probability mode) is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step St0308, and as a result of referring to the win/fail table for the first starting opening (for high probability mode), it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step St0308, if it is determined that the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot (St0308: YES), the process proceeds to step St0309, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step St0310, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, if the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, refer to the first starting port distribution table. , if the ball is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the second starting port distribution table is referred to. After executing step St0310, the process advances to step St0311.

In step St0311, by referring to the allocation table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 currently grasped corresponds to a guaranteed jackpot. If it is determined in step St0311 that it corresponds to a guaranteed jackpot (St0311: YES), the process proceeds to step St0312, where the guaranteed jackpot information is stored in the first determination process result storage area 64h. The first determination process is then terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0311 that it does not correspond to a guaranteed jackpot (St0311: NO), the process proceeds to step St0313, where normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination process result storage area 64h. The first determination process is then terminated.

In step St0308, if it is determined that the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to a jackpot (St0308: NO), the process proceeds to step St0314, and the value is stored in the memory area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. The stored value of the reach random number counter C3 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step St0315, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step St0316, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 that has been grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

If it is determined in step St0316 that a reach is occurring (St0316: YES), the process proceeds to step St0317, where the reach occurrence information is stored in the first-stage determination process result storage area 64h. The first-stage determination process is then terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0316 that a reach is not occurring (St0316: NO), the first-stage determination process is terminated.

<Processing a through ball>
Next, the through ball scoring process will be described. The through ball scoring process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 415: St0105).

Figure 418 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for through play. In step St0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35. If it is determined in step St0401 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (St0401: YES), the process proceeds to step St0402, where it is determined whether or not the number of reserved role objects SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). The number of reserved role objects SN is a value indicating the number of balls that have entered the through gate 35 that are reserved for the purpose of performing the electric role object release lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved role objects SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (St0401: NO), this ball entry process for through play is terminated.

In step St0402, if it is determined that the number SN of accessory items on hold is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (St0402: YES), the process proceeds to step St0403, where 1 is added to the number SN of accessory items on hold. Thereafter, the process advances to step St0404.

In step St0404, the value of the electric role release counter C4 updated in step St0103 (FIG. 415) is stored in the first free memory area in the electric role reserve area 64d of RAM 64. After that, the ball entry process for the through is terminated.

On the other hand, in step St0402, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is not less than the upper limit (St0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the ball entry process for through is terminated without storing the value of the electric reel opening counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be explained. The normal process is a process that is started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter also referred to as "power on"). In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step St0501, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, etc. are executed. Thereafter, the process advances to step St0502.

In step St0502, a startup command is set. The startup command is a command for instructing each control device on the sub side to start a demo video when the power is turned on. Then, proceed to step St0503.

In step St0503, output data such as the start-up command set in step St0502, the command set in the timer interrupt process, or the previously executed normal process, etc., is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, if commands related to effects such as a startup command, a variation command, a type command, and a first hold command are set, they are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step St0503, the process advances to step St0504.

In step St0504, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step St0505.

In step St0505, the winning ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step St0506. In step St0506, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. The game round control process includes a winning lottery, setting the variable display of the patterns by the pattern display device 41, and display control of the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step St0506, the process proceeds to step St0507.

In step St0507, a game state transition process is executed to transition the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state transitions to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step St0508.

In step St0508, an electric support process is executed to control the drive of the electric role 34a provided in the second starting port 34. In the electric support process, a determination is made as to whether or not to open the electric role 34a. The details of the electric support process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step St0509.

In step St0509, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step St0503). In other words, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived. If it is determined in step St0509 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (St0509: NO), in steps St0510 and St0511, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal processing. Specifically, in step St0510, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. In addition, in step St0511, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0509 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of this normal processing (St0509: YES), the process returns to step St0503 and executes each process from step St0503 to step St0508.

Note that since the execution time of each process from step St0503 to step St0508 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process will be explained. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 419: St0506).

FIG. 420 is a flowchart showing the game time control process. In step St0601, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is a flag that is turned ON when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

If it is determined in step St0601 that the opening and closing execution mode is in progress (St0601: YES), the game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes in step St0602 and onward. In other words, if the opening and closing execution mode is in progress, a game round will not be started regardless of whether a ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0601 that the opening and closing execution mode is not in progress (St0601: NO), the process proceeds to step St0602.

In step St0602, it is determined whether the special symbol unit 37 is displaying a change. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is displaying a change. This determination is made by determining whether the special symbol displaying a change flag in the special symbol displaying a change flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special symbol displaying a change flag is turned ON when a change display is to be started for either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, and is turned OFF when the change display is to end.

If it is determined in step St0602 that the special chart unit 37 is not displaying a change (St0602: NO), proceed to step St0603.

In step St0603, a fluctuation start process is executed to start the fluctuation display in the special symbol unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41. Note that details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step St0603, the main game round control process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0602 that the special chart unit 37 is displaying a variable image (St0602: YES), the process proceeds to step St0604.

In step St0604, a change end process is executed to end the change display in the special chart unit 37 and the change display in the pattern display device 41. The change end process will be described in detail later. After executing step St0604, this game play control process is terminated.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 420: St0603) of the game time control process.

Figure 421 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step St0701, it is determined whether the second start port ball entry flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON. The second start port ball entry flag is turned ON when a game ball enters the second start port 34, and is turned OFF when the second pattern begins to fluctuate in response to the ball entering the second start port 34. In step St0701, if it is determined that the second start port ball entry flag is not ON (St0701: NO), the process proceeds to step St0702.

In step St0702, it is determined whether the first start-up pending number RaN exceeds "0". If the first start-up pending number RaN is "0" or less, this means that the start-up pending number for the first start port 33 is "0". Therefore, if it is determined in step St0702 that the first start-up pending number RaN is "0" or less (St0702: NO), this fluctuation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0702 that the first start-up pending number RaN exceeds "0" (St0702: YES), the process proceeds to step St0703.

In step St0703, a pending information shift process is executed to set the pending information stored in the first pending area Ra to the state after the change started, and the process proceeds to step St0706. Details of the pending information shift process will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0701 that the second starting hole ball entry flag is ON (St0701: YES), the process proceeds to step St0704, where the second pattern display section flag stored in the various flags storage area 64g is turned ON. The second pattern display section flag is information for identifying whether the current variable display is to start from the second pattern display section 37b or the first pattern display section 37a. Then, the process proceeds to step St0705.

In step St0705, the second starting port entrance ball flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step St0705, the process advances to step St0706.

In step St0706, a fall determination process including a process when winning a fall lottery is performed. Details of the fall determination process will be described later. Next, the process advances to step St0707.

In step St0707, a win determination process is performed, which includes processing when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery. The details of the win determination process will be described later. After executing step St0707, the process proceeds to step St0708.

In step St0708, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is the time required for the current game round on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, based on the gaming state, the presence or absence of jackpot and time saving, and the presence or absence of reach occurrence. This is a process for setting the variable time. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step St0708, the process advances to step St0709.

In step St0709, a command for variation is set. The command for variation includes whether the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 or based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. In addition to containing information indicating whether reach has occurred, it also includes information on the fluctuation time set in step St0708. After executing step St0709, the process advances to step St0710.

In step St0710, a type command is set. The type command includes information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, whether or not a time-saving bonus has been awarded, and the result of the allocation determination. In other words, the type command includes information on whether or not a jackpot has been won in the winning lottery, information on whether or not a time-saving bonus has been awarded in the winning lottery, and information on the type of jackpot, such as information on an 8R special jackpot, information on an 8R normal jackpot, information on a 16R special jackpot, or information on a miss result.

The variation command and type command set in step St0709 and step St0710 are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step St0503 in the normal process (FIG. 419). The audio emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step St0710, the process advances to step St0711.

In step St0711, the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round out of the first pattern display section 37a and the second pattern display section 37b is caused to start displaying a changing pattern. Specifically, if the second pattern display section flag in RAM 64 is not ON, the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first pattern display section 37a and a changing display is started, and if the second pattern display section flag is ON, the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second pattern display section 37b and a changing display is started. After executing step St0711, the process proceeds to step St0712.

In step St0712, the special chart change display flag stored in the special chart change display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After step St0712 is executed, this change start process is terminated.

<Holding information shift processing>
Next, the reserved information shift process will be described. The reserved information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 421: St0703).

FIG. 422 is a flowchart showing pending information shift processing. In step St0801, 1 is subtracted from the first starting pending number RaN for the first holding area Ra, which is the processing target for executing the pending information shift process. Thereafter, the process advances to step St0802.

In step St0802, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c. Thereafter, the process advances to step St0803.

In step St0803, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the first reserved area Ra. This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas sequentially to the lower areas. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, the fourth area to the third area, and so on. After executing step St0803, proceed to step St0804.

In step St0804, if the second symbol display section flag in the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if it is not ON, the state is maintained. Then, proceed to step St0805.

In step St0805, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, it corresponds to the first starting port 33. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, this pending information shift process ends.

<Fall judgment processing>
Next, the fall determination process will be explained. The fall determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 421: St0706).

Figure 423 is a flowchart showing the fall determination process. In step St0901, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. In step St0901, if it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode (St0901: YES), the process proceeds to step St0902.

In step St0902, the success/failure determination of the fall lottery is executed with reference to the success/failure table for the fall lottery. Specifically, the value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the determination process execution area 64c is the value set as a winning in the fall lottery success/failure table (see FIG. 411) of the fall lottery table storage area 63d. Determine whether they match. In the following step St0903, if the result of the judgment in step St0902 is that the lottery has been won (St0903: YES), the process advances to step St0904.

In step St0904, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step St0905, where a fall command is set. The fall command is a command for notifying the audio and light emission control device 90 that the fall lottery has been won and the win/lose lottery mode has transitioned from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. After step St0905 is executed, this fall determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0901 that the mode is not high probability mode (St0901: NO), or if the result of the win/loss determination in step St0903 is that the player has not won the fall lottery (St0903: NO), the fall determination process is immediately terminated.

<Hit determination processing>
Next, the hit determination process will be explained. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 421: St0707).

Figure 424 is a flowchart showing the winning determination process. In step St1001, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in RAM 64 is ON or not. If it is determined in step St1001 that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (St1001: NO), the process proceeds to step St1002, where it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode or not. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flags storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON or not.

If it is determined in step St1002 that the mode is high probability mode (St1002: YES), the process proceeds to step St1003, where a win/loss determination is made by referring to the win/loss table for the first starting port (for high probability mode). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the win random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/loss table for the first starting port (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. 408(b). Then, the process proceeds to step St1008.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1002 that the mode is not high probability mode (St1002: NO), the process proceeds to step St1004, and a decision is made with reference to the pass/fail table for the first starting port (for low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot winning in the winning/failure table (for low probability mode) for the first starting opening shown in FIG. 408(a). Determine whether the value matches the current value. Thereafter, the process advances to step St1008.

If it is determined in step St1001 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (St1001: YES), the process proceeds to step St1005, where it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step St1005, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (St1005: YES), the process proceeds to step St1006, and a decision is made with reference to the pass/fail table for the second starting port (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c indicates that the jackpot is won in the winning/failure table for the second starting opening (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. 409(b). Determine whether it matches the value set as . Thereafter, the process advances to step St1006.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1005 that the mode is not high probability mode (St1005: NO), the process proceeds to step St1007, and a decision is made with reference to the pass/fail table for the second starting port (for low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot winning in the winning/failure table (for low probability mode) for the second starting opening shown in FIG. 409(a). Determine whether the value matches the current value. Thereafter, the process advances to step St1008.

In step St1008, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination (winning lottery) in step St1003, step St1004, step St1006, or step St1007 is a jackpot win. In step St1008, if the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot win (St1008: YES), the process proceeds to step St1009.

In step St1009, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step St1009 that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (St1009: NO), the process proceeds to step St1010, where an allocation determination is made by referring to the allocation table for the first starting hole (FIG. 410(a)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is included in the numerical range of an 8R special jackpot or the numerical range of an 8R normal jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1009 that the second symbol display section flag is ON (St1009: YES), the process proceeds to step St1011, where an allocation determination is made by referring to the allocation table for the second starting port (Fig. 410(b)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is within the numerical range of a 16R special jackpot. In the allocation table for the second starting port of this embodiment, the allocation result is only one type of 16R special jackpot, so the result of the above determination is always a 16R special jackpot. After executing the process of step St1010 or step St1011, the process proceeds to step St1012.

In step St1012, a flag (jackpot flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step St1010 or step St1011 is turned on. Specifically, if it is an 8R definite strange jackpot, turn on the 8R definite strange jackpot flag, if it is an 8R normal jackpot, turn on the 8R normal jackpot flag, and if it is a 16R certain strange jackpot, turn on the 16R certain strange jackpot flag. Turn it on. After executing step St1012, the process advances to step St1013.

In step St1013, a process for setting a stop result for a jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game round in which the jackpot will be won, it is set which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display. This is the process to do so. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step St1010 or step St1011 is acquired. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step St1013, the hit determination process ends.

In step St1008, if the result of the winning lottery in step St1003, step St1004, step St1006, or step St1007 is not a jackpot (St1008: NO), the process advances to step St1014.

In step St1014, it is determined whether the result of the win/lose determination (winning lottery) in step St1007 is a win for the time-saving grant (won the time-saving grant). In step St1014, if the result of the win/lose determination is a win for the time-saving grant (St1014: YES), the process proceeds to step St1015.

In step St1015, the time-saving grant flag is turned ON. Specifically, the time-saving grant flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The time-saving grant flag is a flag that indicates that the time-saving grant has been won. After executing step St1015, the process proceeds to step St1016.

In step St1016, a process for setting a stop result for time saving is executed. Specifically, this is a process for setting which stop result should be displayed in the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display in the current game round in which the player has won the time saving award. . Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for time saving in the stop result table storage area 63f, the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the stop result table storage area 63f is determined. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step St1016, the hit determination process ends.

In step St1014, if the result of the determination in step St1007 is that the time saving award has not been won (St1014: NO), the process proceeds to step St1017.

In step St1017, the reach determination table is referenced to determine whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination process execution area 64c matches the value set as the occurrence of a reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Then, the process proceeds to step St1018.

In step St1018, if the result of the reach determination in step St1017 is that a reach occurs in the game round (St1018: YES), the process proceeds to step St1019, and the reach occurrence flag is turned on. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step St1019, the process advances to step St1020.

On the other hand, in step St1018, if the result of the reach determination in step St1017 is that a reach does not occur in the game round (St1018: NO), the process proceeds to step St1020 without executing step St1019.

In step St1020, a process for setting a stop result for failure is executed. Specifically, in the current game round where the result is a miss, the variable display is set to end with which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. It is processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for losing in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is obtained. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step St1016, the hit determination process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be explained. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 421: St0708).

FIG. 425 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step St1101, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Thereafter, the process advances to step St1102.

In step St1102, a process for identifying a variable time table is executed. The variable time table is data in a table format in which the data elements are information on the variable time (variation time information), which is the time from when the pattern starts to change until it stops, and the value of the variable type counter CS. Various types of variable time tables according to the game state, the presence or absence of a jackpot and time reduction, and the presence or absence of a reach are stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. In step S1102, one variable time table is identified from these variable time tables. Specifically, based on the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag, it is determined whether the current game state is in a low probability low support state, a high probability high support state, a low probability high support state, or a high probability low support state, and based on the result of the determination, the result of the hit/miss determination for determining the presence or absence of a jackpot or time reduction for the current game round, and the result of the reach determination for determining the presence or absence of a reach, one variable time table is identified from the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. After executing step St1102, proceed to step St1103.

In step St1103, the fluctuation time table identified in step St1102 is referenced to obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step St1101. After executing step St1103, the process proceeds to step St1104.

In step St1104, the variable time information acquired in step St1103 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

<Fluctuation end processing>
Next, the fluctuation end processing will be explained. The variation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 420: St0604) of the game time control process.

FIG. 426 is a flowchart showing the variation end processing. In step St1201, it is determined whether the variable time of the current game round has elapsed. As mentioned above, the fluctuation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to fluctuate until all the symbol rows stop, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step St1201, it is determined whether the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (FIG. 425) described above. The value of this set variable time information is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

In step St1201, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (St1201: NO), this fluctuation end process is ended.

In step St1201, if it is determined that the variable time has elapsed (St1201: YES), the process proceeds to step St1202, and the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b corresponding to the current game round are selected. A process is performed to end the variation of the symbols in the symbol display section. Subsequently, in step St1203, the special figure variation displaying flag stored in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step St1203, the process advances to step St1204.

In step St1204, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, and 16R probability variable jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step St1204, if it is determined that none of the above flags is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a jackpot (St1204: NO), the process proceeds to step St1205.

In step St1205, a time-saving award process is executed when the winning lottery result for the current game round is a time-saving award. Note that the details of the time saving granting process will be described later. After executing step St1205, the process advances to step St1206.

In step St1206, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step St1206, if it is determined that the high probability mode flag is ON (St1206: YES), the process proceeds to step St1207, and the value of the ST game number counter SNC is subtracted by 1. The ST game count counter SNC is a counter for counting how many times the game continues to be played in the high probability mode until it reaches the ST count. After executing step St1207, the process advances to step St1208.

In step St1208, it is determined whether the number of games continuously executed in the high probability mode has reached the ST number (e.g., 50 times). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the ST game number counter SNC is 0. Since the ST game number counter SNC indicates the remaining number of ST games, it is possible to determine whether the number of games continuously executed in the high probability mode has reached the ST number by determining whether SNC = 0.

If it is determined in step St1208 that the value of the ST game counter SNC is 0 (St1208: YES), that is, if it is determined that the number of games continuously executed in the high probability mode has reached the ST number, the process proceeds to step St1209, where the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step St1210.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1208 that the value of the ST play counter SNC is not 0 (St1208: NO), that is, if it is determined that the number of play times continuously executed in the high probability mode has not yet reached the ST number (=within the ST number), the process proceeds to step St1210 without executing step St1209.

In addition, even if it is determined in step St1206 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (St1206: NO), the process proceeds to step St1210.

In step St1210, it is determined whether the high support continuation state flag until the next time stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high support continuation state flag until the next time is a flag that indicates whether the high frequency support mode is continued as a support mode until the next jackpot is won (high support continuation state until the next time), and is a flag that indicates whether or not the high support support mode continues until the next jackpot is won (high support continuation state until the next time). It is turned ON when it is determined that the time saving grant flag is ON in the granting process, and is turned OFF at the start of the opening/closing execution mode (at the start of the opening period).

In step St1210, if it is determined that the high support continuation state flag is ON until the next time (St1210: YES), this fluctuation termination process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1210 that the high support continuation state flag until the next time is not ON (St1210: NO), the process proceeds to step St1211.

In step St1211, it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step St1211 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (St1211: YES), proceed to step St1212.

In step St1212, the value of the time-saving game counter PNC is subtracted by 1. The time-saving game count counter PNC is a counter for counting how many times the game continues to be executed in the high-frequency support mode until it reaches the time-saving continuation number. Thereafter, the process advances to step St1213.

In step St1213, it is determined whether the number of times the game is continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode has reached the time-saving continuation count (e.g., 10 times). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving game counter PNC is equal to or less than 0. Since the time-saving game counter PNC indicates the remaining number of times the time-saving continuation count is reached, it is possible to determine whether the number of times the game is continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode has reached the time-saving continuation count by determining whether PNC = 0.

In step St1213, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving game counter PNC is 0 (St1213: YES), that is, the number of games that are continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode has reached the time-saving continuation number. If it is determined that this is the case, the process advances to step St1214, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After executing step St1214, this variation end processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1213 that the value of the time-saving play counter PNC is not 0 (St1213: NO), that is, if it is determined that the number of play times continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode has not yet reached the time-saving continuation count (=within the time-saving continuation count), this variation end process is immediately terminated without executing step St1214.

In addition, even if it is determined in step St1211 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (St1211: NO), this fluctuation termination process is immediately terminated.

In step St1204, it is determined that any one of the 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, and 16R probability variation jackpot flag is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is determined to be a jackpot win. If so (St1204: YES), the process proceeds to step St1215, and the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step St1215, this variable time end process is ended.

<Processing for time-saving>
Next, the time-saving granting process will be described. The time-saving granting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variation end process (FIG. 426: St1205).

Figure 427 is a flowchart showing the time-saving granting process. In step St1301, it is determined whether the time-saving granting flag is ON.

If it is determined in step St1301 that the time-saving grant flag is ON (St1301: YES), the process proceeds to step St1302, where the high-frequency support mode flag is set to ON. As a result, when the time-saving grant flag is ON, i.e., when the time-saving grant is won in the winning lottery, the support mode transitions to the high-frequency support mode. After executing step St1302, the process proceeds to step St1303.

In step St1303, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. After executing step St1303, proceed to step St1304.

In step St1304, the high support continuation state flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step St1305, where a high support continuation state command until next time, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the high support continuation state until the next time is being maintained, is set as a command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. After executing step St1305, the process proceeds to step St1306.

In step St1306, the time saving flag is turned off. After executing step St1306, the time saving granting process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1301 that the time-saving grant flag is not ON (St1301: NO), the time-saving grant process is immediately terminated.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 419: St0507).

Figure 428 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step St1401, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON or not. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the large prize opening opening and closing processing period in the opening and closing execution mode (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is the period for executing the ending performance in the opening and closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step St1401 that the ending period flag is not ON (St1401: NO), the process proceeds to step St1402, where it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the opening period ends during the opening/closing execution mode and the large prize opening opening/closing processing period, during which the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is executed, begins, and is turned OFF when the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b ends.

If it is determined in step St1402 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (St1402: NO), the process proceeds to step St1403, where it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is set to ON at the start of the opening period and set to OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step St1403 that the opening period flag is not ON (St1403: NO), the process proceeds to step St1404, where it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON or not. If it is determined in step St1404 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (St1404: YES), the process proceeds to step St1405. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1404 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (St1404: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

In step St1405, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step St1405, the process proceeds to step St1406, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step St1406, the process proceeds to step St1407, where the high support continuation state flag until the next time is turned OFF. After executing step St1407, the process proceeds to step St1408.

In step St1408, an opening/closing scenario setting process for setting an opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening/closing scenario defines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game, and in this embodiment, conditions for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from the closed state to the open state (hereinafter also referred to as "opening conditions"), This is a program in which conditions (hereinafter also referred to as "closing conditions") for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from an open state to a closed state are recorded. The opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63i of the ROM 63.

The release conditions are, for example, as follows:
- The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing to start each round of play in the opening and closing execution mode.
When one of the above items is met, the opening and closing door 36b transitions from a closed state to an open state.

The closing conditions are, for example, as follows:
- The time elapsed since the start of each round of play exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration (e.g., 15 seconds).
The number of game balls entering the big prize opening 36a after the start of each round of play exceeds a predetermined upper limit.
When either one of the above two conditions is met, the opening and closing door 36b transitions from an open state to a closed state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the V winning hole shutter 48a is controlled to be in an open state for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the opening/closing execution mode by the shutter opening/closing process described later, and then to be in a closed state. In other words, the opening/closing scenario that determines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b described above is set differently depending on whether the type of the jackpot is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot. When the type of the jackpot is a probability variable jackpot, that is, when the 8R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, the above-mentioned opening condition is set so that the period during which the V winning hole shutter 48a is in an open state is included (not a part of it, but the entirety of it) during the opening period of the opening/closing door 36b in the first round of the round play. This makes it easier for the game ball to enter the V winning hole 48 opened in the first round of the round play when a jackpot is won by the winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a probability variable jackpot.

In addition, instead of a configuration in which the period during which the opening door 36b is open during the first round of a round game includes a period during which the V winning port shutter 48a is open, a configuration in which the period during which the opening door 36b is open during a round number other than 1 during a round game may be included. After executing step St1408, proceed to step St1409.

In step St1409, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as the opening time). In this embodiment, the same fixed opening time is set for each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (i.e., 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3, which determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in the various counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step St1409, the process proceeds to step St1410.

In step St1410, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in step St0503 in normal processing (Fig. 419). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. Based on the received opening command, the sound and light emission control device 90 determines the content of the presentation corresponding to the opening time and the large prize opening/closing processing period, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step St1410, the process proceeds to step St1411, where the opening period flag is set to ON. After executing step St1411, this game state transition process ends.

In step St1403, if it is determined that the opening period flag is ON (St1403: YES), the process advances to step St1412.

In step St1412, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step St1412 that the opening period has ended (St1412: YES), the process proceeds to step St1413, where the opening period flag is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step St1414.

In step St1413, a process for starting a round display for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is identified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the identified stop result data. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round information related to the above output is displayed in the round display section 39. After executing step St1414, the process proceeds to step St1415.

In step St1415, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. In the following step St1415, an opening/closing processing start command is set. The opening/closing processing start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing processing period has started. The opening/closing processing start command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 419: step St0503). After executing step St1415, this game state transition process is terminated.

In step St1402, if it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (St1402: YES), the process proceeds to step St1416, and the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. The grand prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step St1416, the process advances to step St1417.

In step St1417, the shutter opening and closing process is executed. The shutter opening and closing process will be described later. After executing step St1417, the process proceeds to step St1418.

In step St1418, it is determined whether the large prize opening/closing process has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the large prize opening/closing process has ended based on whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b has been opened is "0". If it is determined in step St1418 that the large prize opening/closing process has ended (St1418: YES), the process proceeds to step St1419. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1418 that the large prize opening/closing process has not ended (St1418: NO), the game state transition process ends as is.

In step St1419, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step St1420.

In step St1420, a process for ending the round display is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step St1420, the process proceeds to step St1421.

In step St1421, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, the same fixed length of ending time is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. Note that the fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step St1421, the process advances to step St1422.

In step St1422, an ending command is set. This set ending command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step St0503 in the normal process (FIG. 419). The audio light emission control device 90 ends the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on receiving the ending command. After executing step St1422, the process advances to step St1423.

In step St1423, the ending period flag is turned on. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step St1401, if it is determined that the ending period flag is ON (St1401: YES), the process advances to step St1424.

In step St1424, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (St1421), it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time in step St1421 is "0". In step St1424, if it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (St1424: YES), the process proceeds to step St1425.

In step St1425, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step St1426, and a transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game after the current ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step St1426, the process advances to step St1427.

In step St1427, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step St1426, the main gaming state transition process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1424 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which is set as the ending time, is not "0" (St1424: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Big prize opening and closing process>
Next, the special prize opening opening/closing process will be described. The special prize opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 428: St1416).

FIG. 429 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step St1501, it is determined whether the opening/closing door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable prize winning driving section 36c. If it is determined in step St1501 that the door 36b is not open (St1501: NO), the process proceeds to step St1502.

In step St1502, it is determined whether the opening condition for the opening door 36b is met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open the opening/closing door 36b. In step St1502, if it is determined that the opening condition for the opening/closing door 36b is met (St1502: YES), the process proceeds to step St1503.

In step St1503, the opening and closing door 36b is opened. Then, proceed to step St1504.

In step St1504, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The opening/closing door opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 419: Step St0503) of the normal process. Based on the received opening/closing door opening command, the audio emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has started, and also controls the contents of the presentation on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 to indicate the big winning opening. The content is updated to correspond to the fact that opening of the mouth 36a has started. Further, the audio light emission control device 90 transmits the opening/closing door opening command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received opening/closing door opening command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the big winning hole 36a for one round has started, and also changes the performance content on the symbol display device 41 to the big winning hole 36a. The content is updated to correspond to the start of release. After executing step St1504, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

In step St1502, if it is determined that the opening condition for the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (St1502: NO), the big prize opening opening/closing process is ended without executing step St1503 and step St1504.

If it is determined in step St1501 that the door 36b is open (St1501: YES), the process advances to step St1505.

In step St1505, it is determined whether the closing conditions for the opening and closing door 36b are met. Specifically, the opening and closing scenario set by the opening and closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to close the opening and closing door 36b. In step St1505, if it is determined that the closing conditions for the opening and closing door 36b are met (St1505: YES), the process proceeds to step St1506.

In step St1506, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. Thereafter, the process advances to step St1507.

In step St1507, a door closing command is set. The opening/closing door close command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b is closed. The opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 419: Step St0503) of the normal processing. Based on the received opening/closing door closing command, the audio light emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the grand prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and also controls the content of the performance on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 to the grand prize opening 36a. The contents are updated to correspond to the completion of opening of 36a. Further, the audio light emission control device 90 transmits the opening/closing door closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received opening/closing door closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the grand prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and changes the performance content on the symbol display device 41 to the opening of the grand prize opening 36a. The content will be updated to correspond to the completion of the process. After executing step St1507, the big prize opening opening/closing process is ended.

If it is determined in step St1505 that the closing condition for the opening/closing door 36b is not met (St1505: NO), the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps St1506 and St1507.

<Shutter opening/closing process>
Next, the shutter opening/closing process will be explained. The shutter opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 428: St1417) of the gaming state transition process.

Figure 430 is a flowchart showing the shutter opening and closing process. In step St1601, it is determined whether the V prize opening shutter 48a is open or not. Specifically, whether the V prize opening shutter 48a is open or not is determined based on the operating state of the V prize opening shutter drive unit 48b (Figure 406).

If it is determined in step St1601 that the V winning port shutter 48a is not open (St1601: NO), proceed to step St1602.

In step St1602, it is determined whether the opening conditions for the V prize opening shutter 48a are met. In this embodiment, as described above, the V prize opening shutter 48a is operated so that it opens for a certain period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the opening/closing execution mode, and then closes. To achieve this operation, in step St1602, it is determined whether the opening conditions for the V prize opening shutter 48a are met by counting with a timer counter whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the opening/closing execution mode and the timing for opening has been reached.

If it is determined in step St1602 that the condition for opening the V winning opening shutter 48a is met (St1602: YES), the process proceeds to step St1603, where the V winning opening shutter 48a is opened. After executing step St1603, the process proceeds to step St1606, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1602 that the condition for opening the V winning port shutter 48a is not met (St1602: NO), the process proceeds to step St1606 without executing step St1603.

In step St1601, when it is determined that the V winning a prize opening shutter 48a is open (St1601: YES), the process proceeds to step St1604.

In step St1604, it is determined whether the closing condition of the V winning a prize opening shutter 48a is satisfied. Specifically, by counting with a timer counter whether the above-mentioned certain period of time (10 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the V winning a prize opening shutter 48a opens and reaching the closing timing, the closing condition of the V winning a prize opening shutter 48a is determined. Determine whether it is true.

In step St1604, when it is determined that the closing condition of the V winning a prize opening shutter 48a is satisfied (St1604: YES), the process proceeds to step St1605, and the V winning a prize opening shutter 48a is closed. After executing step St1605, the process advances to step St1606.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1604 that the closing condition for the V winning port shutter 48a is not met (St1604: NO), the process proceeds to step St1606 without executing step St1605.

In step St1606, a V winning prize determination process is executed. The V winning prize determination process will be described later. After executing step St1606, this shutter opening/closing process ends.

<V prize determination process>
Next, the V prize determination process will be described. The V prize determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the shutter opening/closing process (FIG. 430: St1606).

FIG. 431 is a flowchart showing the V winning prize determination process. In step St1701, it is determined whether or not entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 48 has been detected. This determination is made from the detection signal of the detection sensor 67f that detects the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 48. In step St1701, when it is detected that the game ball enters the V winning hole 48 (St1701: YES), the process proceeds to step St1702.

In step St1702, the V winning flag is turned on. The V winning flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 48, and sets the lottery mode in the game round to be executed after the end of the round game to either a high probability mode or a low probability mode. It is used to determine whether The V winning flag is turned ON when the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 48 is detected, and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. After executing step St1702, the process advances to step St1703.

In step St1703, a V winning command is set. The V winning command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 419: Step St0503) of the normal process. The audio light emitting device that has received the V winning command executes settings for executing the V winning effect. The V winning presentation is a presentation for notifying the player that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 48. After executing step St1703, the main V prize winning determination process is ended.

On the other hand, in step St1701, if the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 48 is not detected (St1701: NO), the V winning determination process is terminated without executing steps St1702 and St1703.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be explained. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 428: St1426).

FIG. 432 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step St1801, it is determined whether the V winning flag is ON.

In step St1801, if it is determined that the V winning flag is ON (St1801: YES), the process proceeds to step St1802, and flag deletion processing is executed. Specifically, the flags that are ON among the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag are turned OFF, and the flags that are not ON are maintained in that state. Also, turn off the V winning flag. After executing step St1802, the process advances to step St1803.

In step St1803, the high probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step St1804, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state transitions to one in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. After executing step St1804, the process proceeds to step St1805.

In step St1805, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. . After executing step St1805, the process advances to step St1806.

In step St1806, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. After executing step St1806, proceed to step St1807.

In step St1807, the ST play count counter SNC provided in the various counter area 64f of RAM 64 is set to 50. The value set in the ST play count counter SNC is a value indicating the number of plays to be limited when the high probability mode is executed with the number of plays limited. After executing step St1807, proceed to step St1808.

In step St1808, the time-saving play count counter PNC provided in the various counter area 64f of RAM 64 is set to 10. The value set in the time-saving play count counter PNC is a value indicating the number of plays to be limited when the high frequency support mode is executed with the number of plays limited. After step St1808 is executed, the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1801 that the V winning flag is not ON (St1801: NO), the process proceeds to step St1809, where a flag erasing process is executed. Specifically, the 16R special jackpot flag, the 8R special jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag that are ON are turned OFF, and the flags that are not ON are maintained in that state. After executing step St1809, the process proceeds to step St1810.

In step St1810, a low probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the low probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. . After executing step St1810, the process advances to step St1811.

In step St1811, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is sent as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Set. After executing step St1811, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric support>
Next, the processing for electric support will be explained. The electric support support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 419: St0508).

Figure 433 is a flowchart showing the electric support process. In step St1901, it is determined whether or not support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support in progress flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support in progress flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric device 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened, and is turned OFF when the electric device 34a is returned to the closed state. In step St1901, if it is determined that the support in progress flag is not ON (St1901: NO), the process proceeds to step St1902.

In step St1902, it is determined whether the support win flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support win flag is a flag that is turned ON when an open state is won in the electric role opening lottery to determine whether the electric role 34a is opened or not, and is turned OFF when the support in progress flag is ON. In step St1902, if it is determined that the support win flag is not ON (St1902: NO), the process proceeds to step St1903.

In step St1903, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In step St1903, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (St1903: NO), the main power support processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (St1903: YES), the process proceeds to step St1904.

In step St1904, it is determined whether it is time to end the display of the changing patterns in the normal map unit 38. If it is determined in step St1904 that it is time to end the display of the changing patterns (St1904: YES), the process proceeds to step St1905, where a miss display is set, and the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. By setting the miss display, the display of the changing patterns in the normal map unit 38 is terminated with the miss display stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1904 that it is not time to end the display of the changing patterns (St1904: NO), the process proceeds to step St1906.

In step St1906, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0". In step St1906, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is "0" (St1906: NO), the process for supporting the electronic accessory is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1906 that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0" (St1906: YES), the process advances to step St1907.

In step St1907, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode, and then the process proceeds to step St1908 to determine whether or not the game is in the high-frequency support mode. If the game is not in the open/close execution mode in step St1907 (St1907: NO) and is in the high-frequency support mode in step St1908 (St1908: YES), the process proceeds to step St1909 to hold a lottery for opening the electric role. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role reserve area 64d is shifted, and if the value of the electric role opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric role opening lottery is won. In addition, at the same time as the electric role opening lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (i.e., 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Then, the process proceeds to step St1910.

In step St1910, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step St1909 is a support win. In step St1910, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is a support win (St1910: YES), the process proceeds to step St1911, where the support win flag is turned ON and the support win flag is set in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the electric support support process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1910 that the result of the electric role opening lottery is not a support win (St1910: NO), the electric role support processing is terminated without executing the processing of step St1911.

If it is determined in step St1907 that it is the opening/closing execution mode (St1907: YES), or if it is determined that it is not the high frequency support mode in step St1908 (St1908: NO), the process proceeds to step St1912, and the electric accessory opening lottery I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Furthermore, "14750" (ie, 29.5 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. Thereafter, the process advances to step St1913.

In step St1913, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step St1912 is a support win. In step St1913, if it is determined that the support has not been won (St1913: NO), the main electric role support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1913 that support has been won (St1913: YES), the process proceeds to step St1914, where the support win flag is turned on, and after setting "1" in the second round counter area RC2, , ends this electronic support process.

In step St1902, if it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (St1902: YES), the process proceeds to step St1915, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. In step St1915, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (St1915: NO), since the symbol in the general figure unit 38 is being displayed in a variable manner, the main electric role support processing is performed as it is. end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1915 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (St1915: YES), the process proceeds to step St1916.

In step St1916, a winning display is set. This ends the display of the changing patterns in the normal unit 38 with the winning display stopped. Then, the process proceeds to step St1917, where the support in progress flag is turned ON and the support winning flag is turned OFF. Then, the main electric role support process is terminated.

In step St1901, if it is determined that the support flag is ON (St1901: YES), the process proceeds to step St1918, and an electric utility opening/closing control process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

<Electric opening/closing control processing>
Next, the power opening/closing control process will be explained. The power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the power support process (FIG. 433: St1918).

FIG. 434 is a flowchart showing the power opening/closing control process. In step St2001, it is determined whether the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive section 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is opened (St2001: YES), the process advances to step St2002.

In step St2002, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the opening of the electric role 34a. In step St2002, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (St2002: NO), the main electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the duration of the opening of the electric role 34a has not ended, the main electric role opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step St2002, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (St2002: YES), the process proceeds to step St2003, where a closing process is performed to control the electric role 34a to a closed state, and the second timer counter area T2 is set to "250" (i.e., 0.5 sec). In other words, if the second timer counter area T2, which serves as a means for measuring the open duration of the electric role 34a, is "0", the electric role 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is now used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration of the electric role 34a, and the second timer counter area T2 is set to "250". After executing step St2003, the process proceeds to step St2004.

In step St2004, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step St2005, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". In step St2005, if it is determined that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (St2005: NO), the present electric role opening/closing control process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St2005 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (St2005: YES), the process proceeds to step St2006 and the supporting flag is turned OFF. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

In step St2001, if it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (St2001: NO), the process proceeds to step St2007, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the electric accessory 34a. In step St2007, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (St2007: NO), the main power opening/closing control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St2007 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (St2007: YES), the process proceeds to step St2008, and an opening process is executed to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state. . Thereafter, the process advances to step St2009.

In step St2009, it is determined whether or not it is in the opening/closing execution mode. If it is determined that it is not in the opening/closing execution mode (St2009: NO), the process proceeds to step St2010, and it is determined whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. do.

If it is determined in step St2010 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (St2010: YES), the process proceeds to step St2011, where the second timer counter area T2 is set to "800" (i.e., 1.6 seconds). After that, the main electric switch opening/closing control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in step St2009 (St2009: YES), or if it is determined that it is not the high-frequency support mode in step St2010 (St2010: NO), the process proceeds to step 201712, and the second Set "100" (ie, 0.2 sec) in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

<<9-6>> Various processes executed in the audio/light-emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the audio and light emitting control device and the display control device to execute the advance notice performance and the result announcement performance will be described. First, the process executed in the audio and light emitting control device 90 will be described, and then the process executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the audio and light emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 435 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the audio-optical side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step St2101, a command storage process is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing a received command in the audio/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62. The audio/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer to enable the storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are stored sequentially in the ring buffer and are read out sequentially in the order in which they were stored. After executing step St2101, the process proceeds to step St2102.

In step St2102, pending command handling processing is executed. In the pending command corresponding processing, processing corresponding to the first pending command among the commands stored in step St2101 is performed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step St2102, the process advances to step St2103.

In step St2103, a game round performance setting process is executed. In the game round performance setting process, the performance to be executed in the game round from when the pattern change starts to when it stops is set. The game round performance setting process will be described in detail later. After executing step St2103, the process proceeds to step St2104.

In step St2104, opening/closing execution mode production processing is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode performance processing, processing related to the performance during the opening period, the performance during the grand prize opening/closing processing period, and the performance during the ending period is performed. After executing step St2104, the process advances to step St2105.

In step St2105, background effect processing is executed. In the background effect processing, processing is performed to display a background moving image determined according to a command indicating a gaming state received from the main side MPU 62 on the symbol display device 41. For example, perform processing to display a background video indicating that high-frequency support mode is continuing, a background video indicating that high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that high-probability mode is continuing. . After executing step St2105, the process advances to step St2106.

In step St2106, a process for a V winning performance is executed. In the process for a V winning performance, a process for displaying a performance image (video) determined according to the V winning command received from the main MPU 62 on the pattern display device 41 is executed. Specifically, during the execution of the large prize opening opening and closing process in the opening and closing execution mode, it is determined whether or not a V winning command has been received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that the command has been received, a process for displaying a performance image on the pattern display device 41 to notify the player that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 48 is executed. By visually recognizing the performance image displayed on the pattern display device 41 indicating that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 48, the player can recognize that he has won a jackpot by lottery and that the type of the jackpot won is a guaranteed jackpot. After executing step St2106, proceed to step St2107.

In step St2107, a process for a fall effect is executed. In the process for a fall effect, a process is performed in which a performance image (video) determined according to a fall command received from the main MPU 62 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. Specifically, when the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode (i.e., in a high probability high support state), a process is performed in which it is determined whether or not a fall command has been received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that a fall command has been received, a process is performed in which a performance image that may indicate that a state advantageous to the player has been displayed on the pattern display device 41. By visually recognizing the performance image displayed on the pattern display device 41 that may indicate that a state advantageous to the player has been obtained, the player can recognize that the lottery mode has shifted from a high probability mode to a low probability mode, and as a result, has shifted to a low probability high support state H5. On the other hand, when the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode (i.e., in the high probability low support state), it is determined whether or not a fall command has been received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that a fall command has been received, a process is performed to display on the pattern display device 41 an effect image that may indicate that the player is in an unfavorable state. By visually recognizing the effect image displayed on the pattern display device 41 that may indicate that the player is in an unfavorable state, the player can recognize that the lottery mode has shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and as a result, has shifted to the low probability low support state H1. After executing step St2107, proceed to step St2108.

In step St2108, processing for the high support continuation until next time presentation is executed. In the high support continuation until next time presentation processing, a process is performed to display on the pattern display device 41 a presentation image (video) determined according to the high support continuation until next time state command received from the main MPU 62. By visually recognizing the presentation image determined according to the high support continuation until next time state command displayed on the pattern display device 41, the player can recognize that a transition has been made to a state in which the high frequency support mode will continue as the support mode until the next jackpot is won (high support continuation until next time state). After executing step St2108, proceed to step St2109.

In step St2109, other processing is executed. The other processing is, for example, processing for displaying a demo image (video) on the pattern display device 41 when the player is not playing. After executing step St2109, the process proceeds to step St2110.

In step St2110, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in each of the above-mentioned production processes. After executing step St2110, the process advances to step St2111.

In step St2111, an audio output control process is executed to control the audio output of the speaker 46. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is executed based on the audio data read in the above-mentioned BGM process and each performance process. After executing step St2111, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Pending command handling process>
Next, pending command handling processing will be explained. The pending command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 435: St2102).

Figure 436 is a flowchart showing the pending command response process. In step St2201, it is determined whether or not the first pending command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step St2201, if it is determined that the first pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (St2201: YES), the process proceeds to step St2202.

In step St2202, an update process is executed for the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The first reserved number counter area is a counter area for the sound/light side MPU 92 to identify the number of reserved information acquired based on balls entering the first starting hole 33. In the update process for the first reserved number counter area, the information in the first reserved number counter area is updated to the information on the reserved number included in the first reserved command that is the target of this readout. After executing step St2202, proceed to step St2203.

In step St2203, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the display mode (color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit) of the first hold display unit 37c is controlled based on the number of hold information pieces acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 identified in step St2202. After executing step St2203, this hold command response process is terminated.

The reason why steps St2202 and St2203 are processed as described above will be explained. In this embodiment, while the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, but backup power is not supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound and light emission control device 90. For this reason, when the power supply is cut off in a situation where the reserved information related to the ball entering the first starting hole 33 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the reserved information is stored and held in the main control device 60, but the sound and light emission control device 90 understands that there is zero reserved information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first reserved number counter area is counted up each time the sound and light emission control device 90 receives the first reserved command, an inconvenience may occur in which the number of reserved information actually stored in the main control device 60 does not match the number of reserved information understood by the sound and light emission control device 90. In response to this, in this embodiment, the main control unit 60 transmits the first hold command including information on the number of held items, and the audio/light control unit 90 is configured to set the information on the number of held items included in the command in the first hold number counter area each time it receives a hold command, thereby preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

If it is determined in step St2201 that the first hold command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (St2201: NO), this hold command response process is terminated without executing steps St2202 and St2203.

<Game play performance setting process>
Next, the game round performance setting process will be described. The game round performance setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 435: St2103).

Figure 437 is a flowchart showing the game round presentation setting process. In step St2301, it is determined whether or not a change command and a type command have been received. If it is determined in step St2301 that a change command and a type command have not been received (St2301: NO), this game round presentation setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St2301 that a change command and a type command have been received (St2301: YES), the process proceeds to step St2302.

In step St2302, the currently received variation command and type command are read, and from these commands, the presence or absence of a jackpot, the presence or absence of a time-saving grant, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a reach, and information on the variation time are respectively ascertained. The ascertained information is then stored in a register of the sound/light side MPU 92. After that, the process proceeds to step St2303.

In step St2303, a presentation pattern setting process is executed. The presentation pattern setting process is a process for determining and setting the presentation pattern to be executed in the current game round (the contents and execution timing of the preview presentation and reach presentation) based on the presentation pattern table. The presentation pattern setting process will be described in detail later. After executing step St2303, the process proceeds to step St2304.

In step St2304, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, or 8R normal jackpot, the same symbol is placed on the active line L1 (see FIG. 405). The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, if the result of the winning lottery for this game is a 16R probability-variable jackpot or an 8R probability-variable jackpot, the same combination of odd symbols can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same A combination of even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the same combination of odd symbols and the same combination of even symbols, but instead, the former is selected more than the latter. A configuration may be adopted in which the selection rate is higher, or a configuration in which the latter has a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability-variable jackpot. Further, if the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is an 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of even symbols is selected as the combination of the same symbols.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the current game round is a miss, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the content of the variation command. If it is determined that a reach has occurred, the information corresponding to a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not formed on the active line L1 and a reach symbol combination is formed on the active line L1 is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that a reach has not occurred, the information corresponding to a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not formed on the active line L1 and a reach symbol combination is not formed on the active line L1 is set as the information of the current stop pattern.

If the winning lottery result for the current game round is a time-saving symbol, information corresponding to the stopping result in which a predetermined symbol combination is formed on the active line L1 (see FIG. 405) is set as the information for the current stopping symbol. An example of the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the time-saving symbol is [3, 4, 1] (see FIG. 405). After executing step St2304, proceed to step St2305.

In step St2305, a process is executed to set the variable display pattern for the current game round. In this process, information on the variable time for the current game round is identified from the content of the currently received variable command, and a variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of the variable time information and the information on the stop symbols set in step St2304 is selected. When selecting a variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound/light side ROM 93 is referenced. Then, the process proceeds to step St2306.

In step St2306, information on the performance pattern set in step St2303, the stop symbol set in step St2304, and the variable display pattern set in step St2305 in the current game round is set in the performance command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step St2307, and the relevant production command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the performance content corresponding to the received performance command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step St2307, the process advances to step St2308.

In step St2308, update processing at the start of variation is executed. The update process at the start of variation is a process for updating the pending display in the first pending display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. Details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later. After executing step St2308, the main game performance setting process is ended.

<Performance pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 437: St2303).

FIG. 438 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process. In step St2401, the random number RN for the performance pattern is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound and light side RAM 94. Thereafter, the process advances to step St2402.

In step St2402, a process for identifying a presentation pattern table is executed. The presentation pattern table is three-dimensional tabular data whose data elements are the presentation pattern executed in a game round, the variable time, and the presentation pattern random number RN. Various types of presentation pattern tables according to the presence or absence of a jackpot, the presence or absence of time-saving, and the presence or absence of a reach are stored in the presentation pattern table storage area 93a of the ROM 93. In step St2402, one presentation pattern table is identified from these presentation pattern tables. Specifically, one presentation pattern table is identified from the presentation pattern table storage area 93a of the ROM 93 based on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the presence or absence of time-saving, the type of jackpot, and the presence or absence of a reach, which are grasped in step St2302 of the game round presentation setting process (FIG. 437). After executing step St2402, proceed to step St2403.

In step St2403, the presentation pattern table identified in St2402 is referenced to obtain a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable time determined in step St2302 of the game round presentation setting process (FIG. 437) and the value of the random number RN for the current presentation pattern obtained in step St2401. After executing step St2403, proceed to step St2404.

In step St2404, the presentation pattern obtained in step St2403 is set as the presentation pattern to be executed in the current game round. After step St2404 is executed, this presentation pattern setting process is terminated.

<Update process when fluctuation starts>
Next, the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game play performance setting process (FIG. 437: St2308).

FIG. 439 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step St2501, it is determined whether the fluctuation command received this time is related to the reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. In step St2501, if it is determined that the fluctuation command received this time is related to the reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (St2501: YES), the process proceeds to step St2502, The information in the first pending quantity counter area is updated so that the number stored in the first pending quantity counter area of the sound/light side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the update process at the start of the fluctuation is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St2501 that the currently received fluctuation command does not relate to the pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 (St2501: NO), the update process at the start of this fluctuation is terminated without executing step St2502.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly include a main process that is repeatedly executed from when the power is turned on until the power is turned off, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound and light emission control device 90, and a V interrupt process that is executed when a V interrupt signal sent from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power is turned on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the contents of the command received from the audio emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 440 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step St2601, the initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized, and the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings required for initialization are performed. Then, the process proceeds to step St2602.

In step St2602, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio emission control device 90.

Figure 441 is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step St2701, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage processing, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage processing are read out by the command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described later, and processing corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 442 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after specifying an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, drawing and drawing of that image on the VDP 105 are performed. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed, and is also transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive instructions to draw the next image before the image drawing or display processing has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or display It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which image information is stored. The details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step St2801, command response processing is executed. In the command response processing, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (Fig. 441) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a performance command is stored, control of the drawing and display of the image is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

If a performance operation command has been stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed, and if it is determined that it is the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed, control of the drawing and display of the image is started so that the performance mode corresponding to the pressing of the performance operation button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed, the contents of the next command are analyzed without executing any processing.

In addition, in the command response process (St2801), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processes corresponding to all the analyzed commands are executed. The reason for this is explained below. The command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the performance is set by the sound and light emission control device 90 and the performance starts, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the performance are stored in the command storage area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the form of the performance, such as the preview performance or the stop pattern set by the sound and light emission control device 90, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that form is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

In step St2802, a display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the contents of one frame of image to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 are specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which has been set by the command response process (St2801) or the like. Then, the process proceeds to step St2803.

In step St2803, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the contents of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, as specified by the display setting processing (St2802), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, rotation angle, etc., are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step St2804.

In step St2804, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing processing, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each character, which were determined by the task processing (St2803), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on this information, and transmits the image data to the pattern display device 41 together with a drive signal so that the image drawn based on the information received in the previous V interrupt processing is displayed on the pattern display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step St2805, where other processing is executed, and the V interrupt processing is terminated. Above, an example of specific control for executing various processing including the big win presentation in the pachinko machine 10 has been described.

<<9-7>> Action and effect:
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high probability high support state H4, if the number of times the game is played after the high frequency support mode is started reaches the number of times the time-saving continuation is reached (within 10 times), the lottery mode in the game in which the fall lottery was won is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and as a result, the high probability high support state H4 is shifted to the low probability high support state H5. Then, in the low probability high support state H5, if the time-saving grant is won in the winning lottery, the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big win is won. In the high frequency support mode, the electric role 34a of the second start hole 34 is in the electric role open state with high frequency, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start hole 34, and in a state in which the player's balls are not easily reduced, the winning lottery that is executed in response to the game ball entering the second start hole 34 can be executed with high frequency. Therefore, if the low probability high support state H5 can be entered, the next big win is virtually guaranteed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the high probability high support state H4, the player can not only expect to win the big win in the winning lottery, but also expect to win the falling lottery in a game that is played within 10 times since the high frequency support mode was started.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the low-probability, high-support state H5, the player is given a high frequency lottery mode as a lottery mode in which the number of balls in possession is difficult to decrease until the player wins a jackpot in the next winning lottery. This will give you peace of mind that the support mode will never end.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the high-probability high support state H4, if neither the winning lottery nor the falling lottery is won and the number of play times since the transition to the high-probability high support state H4 reaches 10, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, and as a result, the high-probability high support state H4 is switched to the high-probability low support state H6. The high-probability low support state H6 is less advantageous to the player than the low-probability high support state H5 because the support mode is the low-frequency support mode and because the allocation of the jackpot type in the event of a jackpot is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33. When the support mode is the high frequency support mode, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second start hole 34, and the player's balls are less likely to decrease, whereas when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, it becomes harder for the game ball to enter the second start hole 34, and the player's balls continue to decrease, so the high probability low support state H6 is less advantageous to the player than the low probability high support state H5. Furthermore, the distribution mode of the jackpot type in the event of a jackpot is less advantageous to the player when the jackpot is based on the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 than when the jackpot is based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 34, so the high probability low support state H6 in which the game ball is entered into the first start hole 33 is less advantageous to the player than the low probability high support state H5 in which the game ball is entered into the second start hole 34. Therefore, in the high probability high support state H4, the player will not win the winning lottery, let alone the falling lottery, and the number of times the game has been played since the transition to the high probability high support state H4 will reach the number of times the time-saving continues (10 times), causing the player to feel a sense of urgency that the high probability high support state H4 will transition to the high probability low support state H6.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can increase the player's interest in the game by giving the player feelings of expectation, security, and tension.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the high-probability high support state H4, if a drop lottery is won before the number of play times since the high frequency support mode was started reaches the time-saving continuation number (within 10 times), the state transitions from the high-probability high support state H4 to the low-probability high support state H5. As explained above, the low-probability high support state H5 virtually guarantees the next jackpot. For this reason, when transitioning to the high-probability high support state H4, the probability of winning the next jackpot (continuation rate) is a value calculated by the following formula (1) (= formula (1) shown above).

Continuation rate = 1-{(1-1/3) x (1-1/20)}^10 ... (1)

In formula (1), "1-1/3" is the probability of not winning the falling lottery in one game round. "1-1/20" is the probability of not winning a jackpot in the winning lottery (distribution is 100% probability variable jackpot) in one game round in the high probability mode. “10” is the number of times the time saving is continued. "^" is an operator representing exponentiation. When formula (1) is calculated, the continuation rate is approximately 99.0%. In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has a continuous playing system that is completely different from conventional pachinko machines, and can realize an extremely high-spec machine in terms of continuous playing performance.

According to the pachinko machine 10 having the above-mentioned consecutive game performance, the following effects are also achieved compared to conventional pachinko machines. Conventionally, there are two types of pachinko machines that have different methods for making jackpots continue: a loop type and an ST type. In a loop-type pachinko machine, it is certain that the next jackpot will be won in the high probability and high support state, so the continuation rate is determined based on the probability of being allocated to the probability variable jackpot when the jackpot is won. This means that in a loop-type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability that when the symbols are aligned, the aligned symbols will be variable symbols (for example, the "7" symbol). For this reason, in the high-accuracy, high-support state, the player simply watches as the game rounds are completed and hopes that when the symbols line up, the aligned symbols will be variable probability symbols. . On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as explained earlier, in the high-accuracy, high-support state H4, the number of times the game has been executed is 10 or less after the high-frequency support mode is started. In this game, it is possible to make the player expect to win the falling lottery or the winning lottery. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, compared to the conventional loop-type pachinko machine, the player is not allowed to win a winning lottery or a falling lottery, and is in a high-probability, high-support state H4. It is possible to give a sense of urgency as if the number of games played after the transition to 10 will reach 10.

In the ST type pachinko machine, the continuation rate in the high probability high support state can be obtained by calculating the probability of missing all ST times from the probability of not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery per play and subtracting the probability of missing from 1. For this reason, in the ST type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability of matching the symbols (probability of winning the jackpot) and the number of ST times. Therefore, in the ST type pachinko machine, as the number of play times executed in the high probability high support state progresses, a sense of tension can be given to the player that the number of play times will reach the ST number without winning the jackpot. In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the high probability high support state H4, a sense of tension can be given to the player that the number of play times after transitioning to the high probability high support state H4 will reach the time-saving continuation number (10 times) without winning the jackpot (matching the symbols) and the fall lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can provide a player with a greater sense of tension compared to conventional ST-type pachinko machines, since the drop win is added to the jackpot win.

As a pachinko machine having other game characteristics, the following configuration is also conceivable. In a specific advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, if a small jackpot is won in a winning lottery (a small jackpot is won with a high probability) before the number of games played after the transition to the advantageous state reaches a predetermined number, a game ball enters the V winning port, and the game continues to the opening and closing execution mode (round game). According to this configuration, the number of games played before the transition from the advantageous state to the opening and closing execution mode is consumed in a short time, so the opening and closing execution mode is repeated at short intervals, and there is a problem that the gambling nature is excessively increased. In contrast, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the route from the high probability high support state H4 to the opening and closing execution mode H3, it is possible to go through the low probability high support state H5, which is a lottery mode in which a winning lottery can be repeatedly performed in a low probability mode, which is a lottery mode in which it is guaranteed that the jackpot will finally be won, so it is possible to take a sufficient amount of time to transition from the high probability high support state H4 to the opening and closing execution mode H3. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can prevent the open/close execution mode from being repeated at short intervals, which can lead to an excessive increase in gambling. In addition, by taking a sufficient amount of time, it is possible to achieve the secondary effect of making it possible to perform various effects. These effects can never be achieved by the configuration of pachinko machines with the other game characteristics described above.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has excellent effects compared to various types of conventional pachinko machines.

Although not described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as one of the transitions of the game state, there is a case where the game state transitions from the high probability high support state H4 (see FIG. 414) via the open/close execution mode H2 to the low probability low support state H1. Specifically, immediately after the transition from the low probability low support state H1 to the high probability high support state H4 via the open/close execution mode H3, the value of the winning random number counter C1 (hereinafter referred to as the special 1 reservation) remains in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b (FIG. 407). In this case, even if a game ball enters the second start hole 34, the ball entry is not valid until all the winning lotteries based on the special 1 reservation are executed (because there is no function to reserve the game ball entry into the second start hole 34). For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the high probability high support state H4, a winning lottery based on the special 1 reservation is executed, and the ball may be allocated to a normal jackpot. If a normal jackpot is allocated, the game will transition from the high probability high support state H4 to the low probability low support state H1 via the opening and closing execution mode H2.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, immediately after the transition from the low probability low support state H1 to the high probability high support state H4 via the open/close execution mode H3, if the special 1 reservation remains, the player will feel a sense of urgency that he or she will win the jackpot in the winning lottery based on the special 1 reservation and be allocated to a normal jackpot. In addition, in order to avoid wasting game balls due to the entry of game balls into the second starting hole 34 being invalid in the high probability high support state H4, the player may check the number of reserved balls displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1 (Figure 405), and if there are reserved balls, press the wait button 25b provided on the operating handle 25 to stop the game ball launching mechanism from launching the game balls. Furthermore, the player may perform the following operations.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a pattern is displayed on the pattern display device 41 to notify the result of the winning lottery, but if the player judges from the low probability low support state H1 that the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is extremely high, he or she may press the wait button 25b provided on the operating handle 25 to stop the launch of the game balls by the game ball launching mechanism. By this operation (hereinafter referred to as the stop shot operation), if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the allocation result by the allocation judgment is a high probability jackpot, the number of special 1 reserved balls remaining in the first reserved area Ra of the reserved information storage area 64b (Fig. 407) can be reduced after going through the open/close execution mode H3 to the high probability high support state H4. As a result, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of a situation in which, in the high probability high support state H4, the special 1 reserve is consumed and a normal jackpot is won, causing a transition to the low probability low support state H1 via the open/close execution mode H2, and it is possible to make the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 34 effective at an early stage.

On the other hand, a player who wants to increase the number of times the pattern changes (i.e., the number of times the winning lottery is held) as much as possible may continue playing in the low-probability low-support state H1 without performing a stop-hit operation, even if it is determined from the performance that the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is extremely high in the low-probability low-support state H1. In other words, the player can increase the number of times the pattern changes by continuing playing without performing a stop-hit operation, while accepting the risk of transitioning to the low-probability low-support state H1 via the open/close execution mode H2 in the high-probability high-support state H4. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has a game characteristic in which, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the low-probability low-support state H1 and the allocation result is a guaranteed jackpot, the player can choose to perform a stop-hit operation to avoid the above-mentioned risk, or continue playing while accepting the risk and increase the number of times the pattern changes, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned high-probability-high-support state H4, during the period in which the winning lottery based on special 1 reservation is being executed, the symbol display device 41 may be configured to perform a performance including special performance content. The special presentation content may include, for example, a battle presentation and a result announcement presentation.

A battle performance (combat performance) is, for example, a performance in which a player's character faces off against an enemy character, and before the player is informed whether the result will be advantageous or unfavorable to the player. This is a production of In this embodiment, the battle performance during the above period is such that if you win a jackpot in the winning lottery and the distribution result according to the distribution judgment is a probability-variable jackpot, or if you win the falling lottery, you win the jackpot in the winning lottery and the This is a performance that suggests that either the distribution result based on the minute judgment is a normal jackpot, or the case where it is neither of these (the case where you have not won either the falling lottery or the winning lottery). . After executing the battle performance, a result announcement performance is executed to notify whether the result will be advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. Specifically, as a result announcement performance, if the player wins the falling lottery, the player will move to the low probability high support state H5 as explained earlier, which is highly advantageous for the player. Execute a victory performance in which the side character wins. Further, even when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the distribution result based on the distribution judgment becomes a probability-variable jackpot, a victory performance in which the player's character wins is executed. If you win a jackpot in the winning lottery and the distribution result according to the distribution judgment is a normal jackpot, the player's character loses because it moves to the low probability low support state H1 via the opening/closing execution mode H2. Execute the defeat effect. If the player does not fall and does not win a jackpot in the winning lottery (in the case of a loss), a draw effect is performed in which the player's character and the enemy's character are tied. According to this configuration, in the high certainty and high support state H4, during the period when the winning lottery based on special 1 pending is being executed, a sense of urgency and anticipation can be given to the player by the battle performance. Can be done.

<<9-8>> Modification of the ninth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as in the above embodiment will be omitted.

《9-8-1》Variation 1:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the number of times of ST is greater than the number of times of continuous time saving, such as 10 times and the number of ST's of 50, for example. On the other hand, as a modified example, the number of times of ST and the number of times of continuation of time saving may be the same, such as the number of times of continuation of time saving being 10 times and the number of times of ST being, for example, 10 times. According to this configuration, in the high-probability, high-support state H4, when the number of times the game is executed reaches the number of time-saving continuations (=ST number) without winning the falling lottery, the high-probability, high-support state H4 is changed to the low-probability high support state H4. Immediately shifts to low support state H1. That is, according to this modification, the game state to which the game changes as the game progresses is one in which there is no high-probability, low-support state H6 in the transition diagram shown in FIG. 414. Specifically, in the high-probability high support state H4, if the number of games played after moving to the high-probability high support state H4 reaches 10, the low-probability low support state is changed from the high-probability high support state H4. It will immediately shift to state H1. According to this modification, there is a sense of urgency that the number of game runs after transitioning to the high-probability, high-support state H4 will reach 10 without winning not only the winning lottery but also the falling lottery. , it is possible to force the player to hold the game even more strongly.

<<9-8-2>> Variation 2:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the winning jackpot is a probability jackpot, if a game ball does not enter the V winning hole 48 opened by the jackpot, the lottery mode does not shift to the high probability mode and the support mode does not shift to the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, as a modified example, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the winning jackpot is a probability jackpot, and a game ball does not enter the V winning hole 48 opened by the jackpot, the lottery mode does not shift to the high probability mode, but the support mode may shift to the high frequency support mode.

According to this modification, in the low-probability low-support state H1 (see FIG. 414), if a jackpot is won by a lottery, the type of the jackpot won is a probability jackpot, and the game ball does not enter the V winning hole 48 opened as a result of the jackpot, the state transitions from the low-probability low-support state H1 to the low-probability high-support state H5 via the open/close execution mode H3. In the low-probability high-support state H5, the next jackpot (probability jackpot) is virtually guaranteed, which is highly advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to this modification, if a jackpot is won by a lottery, the type of the jackpot won is a probability jackpot, and a game operation that deliberately does not allow the game ball to enter the V winning hole 48 opened as a result of the jackpot can be effective. According to this modified example, in the high probability high support state H4, if the player wins the fall lottery before the number of times the game has been played since the transition to the high probability high support state H4 reaches 10 times (within 10 times), which is the number of times the time-saving function continues, the game has the characteristic that the player can transition to the low probability high support state H5, which effectively guarantees the next high probability jackpot. However, if the player performs a game operation that does not allow the game ball to enter the V winning hole 48, it becomes possible to transition to the low probability high support state H5 without winning the fall lottery within the above 10 times, which creates a problem that the above game characteristic is impaired. This problem can be solved by the following modified example 3.

《9-8-3》Variation 3:
The pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment has a configuration including one variable winning device 36. On the other hand, as a modified example, it may be configured to include a first variable winning device and a second variable winning device. The first variable winning device has a configuration that includes a big winning opening and an opening/closing door that opens and closes the big winning opening, but does not include a V winning opening. The second variable winning device includes a big winning opening, an opening/closing door that opens and closes the big winning opening, and a V winning opening provided inside the big winning opening. The second variable winning device differs from the variable winning device 36 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment in that it does not include the V winning opening shutter 48a. In this modified example, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery and the type of jackpot won is a normal jackpot, in the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door of the first variable winning device changes from the open state to the closed state based on the jackpot. Repeat the state. On the other hand, if you win a jackpot in a winning lottery and the type of jackpot you won is a variable jackpot, in the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door of the second variable prize winning device changes between the open state and the closed state based on the jackpot. repeat.

According to the above configuration, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the won jackpot is a normal jackpot, the game ball enters the jackpot of the first variable winning device, and the game ball enters the V jackpot. The ball never enters the ball. On the other hand, if a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of jackpot won is a variable jackpot, the game ball enters the jackpot of the second variable winning device, which is equipped with a V jackpot shutter. Since there is no game ball that enters the big prize opening, there is a 100% probability that the game ball will enter the V winning opening. For this reason, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the won jackpot is a variable jackpot, the game ball does not enter the V-winning slot while the game ball enters the jackpot. Therefore, according to this modification, since it is possible to avoid transitioning from the low-accuracy low support state H1 to the low-accuracy high support state H5 via the opening/closing execution mode H3, in the high-accuracy high support state H4, If the player wins the falling lottery before the number of games executed after moving to the high probability high support state H4 reaches the time-saving continuation number of 10 times (within 10 times), the next It is possible to exhibit the original game property of being able to shift to a low-probability, high-support state H5 in which a probability-variable jackpot is guaranteed.

《9-8-4》Variation 4:
Further, as a configuration in which a game operation in which a game ball is not intentionally entered into the V winning hole 48 is impossible, the following configuration can be used instead of Modification 3. A gate through which a game ball can pass is provided in an area where a game ball can enter by right-handed operation, and only when the game ball passes through the gate when executing a round game based on a jackpot winning, the variable winning device 36 The opening/closing door 36b starts the opening/closing operation, and a V winning opening is provided directly below the gate. According to this configuration, in order to start the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, it is necessary to pass the game ball through the gate, and in that case, the game ball always enters the V winning hole. It turns out. Therefore, even with this modification, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of jackpot that was won is a variable jackpot, the game ball enters the jackpot but does not enter the V jackpot. Never. Therefore, according to this modification, since it is possible to avoid transitioning from the low-accuracy low support state H1 to the low-accuracy high support state H5 via the opening/closing execution mode H3, in the high-accuracy high support state H4, If the player wins the falling lottery before the number of games executed after moving to the high probability high support state H4 reaches the time-saving continuation number of 10 times (within 10 times), the next It is possible to exhibit the original game property of being able to shift to the low-probability, high-support state H5 in which a probability-variable jackpot is guaranteed.

<<9-8-5>> Variation 5:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the hit/miss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode: see FIG. 409(b)) is configured to set the hit random number counter C1 value for a jackpot and the hit random number counter C1 value for time-saving, and to have no miss settings. In contrast, as a modified example, the hit/miss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode: see FIG. 409(b)) may be configured to set the hit random number counter C1 value for a jackpot, the hit random number counter C1 value for time-saving, and the hit random number counter C1 value for a miss. According to this modified example, when a jackpot is not won in the winning lottery, there may be cases where a time-saving grant is won, and cases where neither a jackpot nor time-saving grant is won. For this reason, according to this modification, even if the player moves to the low probability high support state H5, which guarantees the next big win (high probability big win), the player's expectations may be betrayed, and the high frequency support mode may end after 10 times, which is the number of times the time-saving continues, without winning the time-saving award in the winning lottery. Therefore, according to this modification, it is possible to betray the player's expectations and give him a sense of disappointment. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, if the player does not win a big win in the winning lottery in the low probability high support state H5, the player will always win the time-saving award, so the player will not feel disappointed as described above and the player's trust can be gained.

《9-8-6》Variation 6:
In the ninth embodiment and its modifications, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode when a prize is won in the lottery using the value of the random number counter CF. On the other hand, as a modified example, a falling slot into which a game ball can enter is prepared on the game board 30, and when a game ball enters the falling slot, the lottery mode for the winning lottery is changed from a high probability mode to a low probability mode. The configuration may be changed to probability mode. In this configuration, a game ball sorting device is installed above the falling hole to distribute game balls between a flow path leading to the falling hole and a flow path leading to a place other than the falling hole (for example, an out hole or a second starting hole). It is also possible to provide a configuration in which it is provided. According to these configurations, since the player can visually confirm whether or not the game ball enters the falling hole, the game after transitioning to the high-accuracy, high-support state H4 in the high-accuracy, high-support state H4. The player can wait with a sense of urgency and anticipation to see whether the game ball will enter the falling hole before the number of executions reaches the number of time-saving continuations.

<<9-8-7>> Variation 7:
In the ninth embodiment and its modified examples, if the time-saving grant is won even once in the winning lottery using the winning/losing table for the second starting port (for low probability mode: see FIG. 409(b)), the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the big win is won in the winning lottery. In particular, in the ninth embodiment, if the big win is not won in the winning lottery using the winning/losing table for the second starting port (for low probability mode: see FIG. 409(b)), the time-saving grant is won, and in the low probability high support state H5, the time-saving grant is repeatedly won in the winning lottery until the big win is won in the winning lottery. That is, in the ninth embodiment and its modified examples, if the time-saving grant is won even once in the winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the big win is won in the winning lottery, but it is configured to win the time-saving grant every time the winning lottery is executed, and with this configuration, in the low probability high support state H5, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the big win is won. In contrast to this, as a modified example, if a jackpot is not won in a winning lottery using a winning/losing table for the second starting port (for low probability mode: see Figure 409 (b)), it is possible that the player will not have won the time-saving grant (the configuration of modified example 5), and if neither a jackpot nor a time-saving grant is won in the winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode may not be continued as the support mode until a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, but rather, if a time-saving grant is won even once in the winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode may be continued as the support mode until a jackpot is won in the winning lottery.

<<9-8-8>> Variation 8:
In the ninth embodiment and its modified example, when the time-saving grant is won in the winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the jackpot is won in the next winning lottery. In contrast to this, as a modified example, the period during which the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode (hereinafter referred to as the high support continuation period) may be changed to the period until the number of times of execution of the game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times). In other words, when the time-saving grant is won in the winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode may be continued as the support mode until the number of times of execution of the game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times). The predetermined number does not need to be limited to 5 times, and may be any number such as 1 time, 2 times, 3 times, 4 times, 6 times, etc. The other configurations in this modified example are the same as those in the ninth embodiment (particularly, the configuration in which the time-saving grant is won when the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery using the winning/losing table for the second starting port (for low probability mode: see FIG. 409(b)).

According to the configuration of this modified example, by the time when the high support duration ends, the time-saving grant is repeatedly won in the winning lottery, and the high support duration is extended in sequence for the period until the number of times the game is played reaches a predetermined number, and this extension is repeated until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. As a result, the high frequency support mode continues as the support mode until the jackpot is won in the next winning lottery. Therefore, according to this modified example, as in the above ninth embodiment, in the low probability high support state H5, the effect is achieved that the gameplay can be realized in which the high frequency support mode is continued as the lottery mode until the jackpot is won in the next winning lottery, using the time-saving grant that continues only a predetermined number of times. In other words, the gameplay can be realized in which the high frequency support mode is continued as the lottery mode until the jackpot is won in the next winning lottery, without using the time-saving grant in which the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery.

As a variation of this variation, if the player does not win the jackpot in the winning lottery using the winning/losing table for the second starting port (for low probability mode: see FIG. 409(b)), the player may not win the time-saving bonus (variation 5), and if the player wins the time-saving bonus in the winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode may continue as the support mode until the number of times the game is played reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times). According to this configuration, the high support duration can be extended only if the player wins the time-saving bonus in the winning lottery during the high support duration, which is the period until the number of times the game is played reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, according to this variation of the variation, the player can expect that even if the player does not win the jackpot in the winning lottery during the high support duration, the player will win the time-saving bonus before the predetermined number of times is reached, and the period during which the high-frequency support mode continues will be extended.

<<9-8-9>> Variation 9:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the inner frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, the pachinko machine is provided with a cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened, but a configuration in which the cylinder lock is omitted and a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened may be separately provided. In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, a configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame relative to the outer frame is provided on the left side as viewed from the front, but a configuration in which this rotation shaft is provided on the right side as viewed from the front may be adopted. In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, a configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame relative to the inner frame is provided on the left side as viewed from the front, but a configuration in which this rotation shaft is provided on the right side as viewed from the front may be adopted. In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, the game board of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or may be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, in the high probability high support state, if a winner is won in the fall lottery before the number of times the game is played after the transition to the high probability high support state reaches the number of times the time-saving continues, the game machine is configured to transition to a low probability high support state in which the next jackpot (high probability jackpot) is guaranteed. In contrast, as a modified example, in a ST type pachinko machine, if a winner is won in the win lottery before the number of times the game is played after the transition to the high probability high support state reaches the ST number in the high probability high support state, the game machine may be configured to transition to an open/close execution mode. In the open/close execution mode, the game machine is guaranteed to transition to a high probability high support state next. In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, the specific condition that may be a trigger for switching the lottery mode between the high probability mode and the low probability mode in the high probability high support state is set to be won in the fall lottery, but instead, it may be set to be won in the winning lottery. In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, the pachinko machine adopts a configuration with an upper tray and a lower tray, but the lower tray may be omitted and a configuration with only the upper tray may be adopted. In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side as viewed from the front, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side as viewed from the front may be adopted. In addition, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side as viewed from the front and the left side as viewed from the front may be adopted. In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, a configuration in which a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operation handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operation handle) is provided on the operation handle is adopted, but a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the launching means capable of launching the game balls. For example, a configuration in which the game balls are launched using the elastic force of a spring or the like, or a configuration in which the game balls are launched using the wind pressure when compressed gas is ejected, etc. may be adopted. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, when the operating handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are launched per minute, but the configuration may be such that less than 100 game balls (e.g., 60 balls) are launched per minute, or the configuration may be such that more than 100 game balls (e.g., 200 balls) are launched per minute. Also, the configuration may be such that the game balls are launched one by one by flicking the lever. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, when the player wins the fall lottery in the high probability high support state, the player is shifted to a low probability high support state, which is more advantageous to the player than the high probability high support state, and when the player wins the fall lottery in the high probability low support state, the player is shifted to a low probability low support state, which is less advantageous to the player than the high probability low support state. On the other hand, as a modified example, in a loop type pachinko machine, when the player wins the jackpot in the winning lottery in the low probability low support state and the player wins the normal jackpot by the allocation judgment, the player is shifted to a low probability high support state, which is more advantageous to the player than the low probability low support state, and when the player wins the jackpot in the winning lottery in the high probability high support state and the player wins the normal jackpot by the allocation judgment, the player is shifted to a low probability high support state (or a low probability low support state), which is less advantageous to the player than the high probability high support state. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration including a speaker is adopted as a means capable of outputting sound, but a configuration including an earphone jack may be adopted in addition to or instead of a speaker. According to this configuration, a player can enjoy the sound of the pachinko machine he is playing to his heart's content by connecting his own earphones or headphones to the earphone jack without being disturbed by the sound of the surrounding pachinko machines. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, various configurations may be adopted as a display means capable of displaying special symbols that start to change based on the game ball entering various starting holes, and for example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, various configurations may be adopted as a display means capable of displaying normal symbols that start to change based on the game ball passing through various gates, and for example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, etc. may be adopted. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, and for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, an LED display device, a drum rotating display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, etc. may be adopted. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the decorative patterns are not limited to numbers, and various characters, figures, symbols, pictures, etc., and combinations thereof may be adopted. For example, the decorative patterns may be alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, etc., and combinations thereof. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the number of pattern rows through which the decorative patterns scroll is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In addition, when a configuration in which there is one decorative pattern row is adopted, for example, a configuration in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops may be adopted. In addition, when a configuration in which there are two or four or more decorative pattern rows is adopted, for example, a configuration in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative pattern stops on a specific line may be adopted. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, various configurations can be adopted for the special electric device, for example, a configuration in which a rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below a plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward around the rotating shaft to open the large prize opening, or a configuration in which the large prize opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, various configurations can be adopted for the normal electric device, for example, a so-called tulip-type normal electric device in which a pair of movable valves can be opened left and right, a configuration in which a rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below a plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward around the rotating shaft to open the starting opening, or a configuration in which the starting opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, the number of prize balls set at each ball entry port (starting port, general prize entry port, large prize entry port, etc.) is an example, and by appropriately changing the number of prize balls set at each ball entry port, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications.

<<9-8-10>> Variation 10:
In the above ninth embodiment and its modified examples, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices, such as the main control device 60, the sound and light emission control device 90, and the display control device 100. However, instead of this, it may be configured to include two control devices, such as the main control device and the sub-control device. The sub-control device may be configured to execute the various processes executed in the sound and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the ninth embodiment. In the above ninth embodiment and its modified examples, the various processes executed in each of the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 do not need to be limited to the division described in the ninth embodiment, and it is sufficient that the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 as a whole can execute the various processes in the ninth embodiment.

《10》Tenth embodiment:
《10-1》Structure of gaming machine:
FIG. 443 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") as a tenth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, this outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back side of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed approximately in the center of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination parts are constituted by light emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means serves to enhance the performance effect by lighting up or blinking each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed into a box shape with an open top surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls ejected from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed into a box shape with an open top surface. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and by operating the lever 23, the player can switch the outlet 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided at the front of the periphery of the upper tray 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation unit that allows the player to perform input operations for the game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

An operating handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "right side"). When the player operates the operating handle 25 (rotating operation), a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the firing of game balls by the game ball firing mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operating handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. Then, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "left side"). When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing strength to the front of the game board, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired to the front of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and also flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can perform what is called a "right-handed hit." Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. Control equipment for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 444 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board that has a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is constructed so that traces of opening and closing remain. For example, a seal is affixed to an openable/closable location, and when the board box is opened, the words "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio/light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The audio/light emission control device 90 controls light-emitting means such as speakers and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands sent from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands sent from the audio/light emission control device 90. The pattern display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays patterns and images for performances.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The firing control device 80 controls the game so that when an instruction to fire a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 that is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a slope that is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and gently sloped so that the game balls flow downstream. A tank rail 55 having a tank rail 55, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, receiving game balls from the case rail 56 and paying out a predetermined number of game balls according to instructions from a payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the power necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. The power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By turning the power switch 88 ON/OFF, the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10.

Next, we will explain the game board. The game board is removably attached to the front of the inner frame 13.

Figure 445 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to define a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. Game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism are guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flow down the game area PA. In the game area PA, multiple nails 42 are planted approximately perpendicular to the game board 30, and various gimmicks such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 has a number of openings formed therethrough in the front-to-rear direction. Each opening has a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable winning device 36, and a V winning opening 48. The game board 30 also has a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. Specifically, the variable display unit 40 is provided in approximately the center of the game board 30, and the main display section 45 is provided near the upper right of the game board 30 when viewed from the front.

The general prize opening 32 is a ball entrance into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, ten game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 444).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entry port into which game balls can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the gaming area PA. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting hole 34 is an entrance through which the game ball can enter, and is provided at the upper right side of the game area PA. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, two game balls are paid out as prize balls and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed. In addition, the second starting hole 34 is provided with an electric device 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole that penetrates vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that triggers a lottery to open the electric role 34a. Specifically, when a game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the passing as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric role opening lottery). If the electric role opening is selected as a result of the internal lottery, the electric role 34a transitions to an electric role opening state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is disposed upstream of the second start port 34 in the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that passes through the through gate 35 can flow down the game area PA after passing through and enter the second start port 34. Note that in this embodiment, even if a game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 is provided on the lower right side of the game area PA. The variable winning device 36 is equipped with a large winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening and closing door 36b that opens and closes the large winning opening 36a. The large winning opening 36a is an entrance through which a game ball can enter, and is formed in a rectangular shape in this embodiment. The opening and closing door 36b is a rectangular lid body that is one size larger than the large winning opening 36a, and is usually in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). When a big win is won as a result of the winning lottery, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to an opening and closing execution mode. The opening and closing execution mode is a mode in which the opening and closing process of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and transitions back to the closed state after a predetermined condition is met. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

The V winning opening 48 is an entrance through which a game ball can enter, and is an entrance that is a condition for activating the high probability mode. In this embodiment, the V winning opening 48 is provided inside the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36. The V winning opening 48 is provided with a V winning opening shutter 48a that opens and closes the V winning opening 48. After winning a big jackpot by lottery, the V winning opening shutter 48a changes from a closed state to an open state at a predetermined timing in the opening and closing execution mode that is executed in response to the winning of the big jackpot, and returns to a closed state after a certain time has passed. During the period when the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is in an open state and the V winning opening shutter 48a is in an open state, the game ball can enter the V winning opening 48. When a game ball enters the V winning opening 48, the lottery mode transitions to the high probability mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends. The predetermined timing for switching from the closed state to the open state will be described later.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 executes a predetermined number of play times (hereinafter referred to as the ST number) in the high probability mode game state, and then the lottery mode transitions from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. The ST number is 10 times in this embodiment. Note that the ST number does not have to be limited to 10 times, and may be other numbers such as 20 times, 9 times, 8 times, 7 times, 6 times, etc. In this embodiment, the ST number is limited to a number greater than the time-saving continuation number described below (for example, 5 times), and may be any number greater than the time-saving continuation number.

An outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the various ball inlets are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

The game balls that entered each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the V winning opening 48, and the out opening 43 are transferred to the gaming board 30. It is configured to be guided to the back side of the game board 30 through the formed individual openings, and to finally join the discharge passage provided on the back side of the game board 30. The discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor that detects game balls. By detecting the game balls with the discharge path detection sensor, it is possible to know the number of game balls fired onto the game board 30.

The main display section 45 has a special chart unit 37, a regular chart unit 38, and a round display section 39.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern refers to a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 33. When a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 is held, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a variable first pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. When the lottery is completed, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a stationary first pattern corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display section 37b is a display section for displaying a second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display section 37b is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. , causes the second symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. When the lottery ends, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop display the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

Here, the time period from when the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b starts to be displayed in a variable manner until it is stopped and displayed. Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a until the time when the first symbol is stopped and displayed is also called the first variation time, and The time period from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to the time it is stopped and displayed is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first reservation display section 37c and a second reservation display section 37d, which are made of LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are held. The first reservation display section 37c displays the number of reservations at the first starting port 33 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. Further, in this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are held. The second reservation display section 37d displays the number of reservations at the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit.

The general map unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When a lottery to open an electric reel is held triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the general map unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to light up, flash, or display in a predetermined manner. When the lottery to open an electric reel is completed, the general map unit 38 displays in a predetermined manner corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light-emitting display unit in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of rounds that will occur in the open/close execution mode, or a display corresponding thereto. A round is a game in which the open/close door 36b remains open until one of the following conditions is met: either a predetermined upper limit duration has elapsed, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have entered the variable winning device 36. The number of rounds varies depending on the type of jackpot that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of rounds when the open/close execution mode is started, and ends when the open/close execution mode ends and a new game round begins.

The special drawing unit 37, the general drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured with segment displays or light-emitting displays using LED lamps, but may be configured with various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery results, such as, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display device.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged approximately at the center of the gaming area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the symbol display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display section 37a displays a variable display or a stop display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs a variable display or a stop display of the symbol in accordance with this. In addition, when the second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or a stop display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays a variable symbol or a stop display accordingly. The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display performance triggered by the entry of a ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that is entered when a jackpot is won. . The details of the symbol display device 41 will be explained below.

Figure 446 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns and display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. Figure 446(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative patterns that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. As shown in Figure 446(a), patterns showing the numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed as decorative patterns on the pattern display device 41. Note that as the decorative patterns that are variably displayed, patterns in which the numbers 1 to 8 are each accompanied by an image of a character or the like may also be used.

FIG. 446(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, symbols numbered 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 446(a) are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and each symbol row is arranged periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to A fluctuating display that scrolls upwards is displayed. As shown in FIG. 446(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the active line L1.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, a variable display starts in which the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with a periodicity. Then, the scrolling symbols switch from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displays a predetermined symbol in a stationary state. When the variable display of the symbols ends and the display is stationary, if the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined combination of symbols is formed on the valid line L1. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the valid line L1. Note that the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned manner, and various modes of the variable display of the decorative symbols can be adopted, such as the number of symbol rows, the number of valid lines, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows, and the number of symbols in each symbol row.

Here, the term "game round" refers to the period from the start of the variable display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b until the end of the variable display and the stop display. This is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the winning lottery result regarding the special information acquired based on the ball entering either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information every game. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a ball entering either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37a and the second In either one of the symbol display sections 37b, after the segment display is displayed in a variable manner, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on a ball entering either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a predetermined information is displayed on the symbol display device 41 for each game. After the symbol row is displayed in a variable manner, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit gaming time consists of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 446(b), a first pending display area Ds1 and a second pending display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. The first pending display area Ds1 displays the number of pending balls based on balls entering the first starting hole 33. The second pending display area Ds2 displays the number of pending balls based on balls entering the second starting hole 34. Note that in this embodiment, as described above, the number of pending game balls that have entered the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34 is a maximum of four each.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 446(b), on the display surface 41a, a blinking display and a lighting display synchronized with the fluctuating display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a of the special symbol unit 37. A first synchronized display section Sync1 performs display, and a second synchronized display performs blinking display and lighting display in synchronization with the fluctuating display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b of the special symbol unit 37. Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display section 37a is displaying a variable display, the first synchronization display section Sync1 displays a blinking display, and when the first symbol display section 37a is displaying a stop display, the first synchronization display section Sync1 displays a blinking display. 1 synchronization display section Sync1 displays lighting. Further, when the second symbol display section 37b is displaying a variable display, the second synchronization display section Sync2 displays a blinking display, and when the second symbol display section 37b is displaying a stop display, the second synchronization display section Sync2 displays a blinking display. The section Sync2 displays a lighting display.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the first hold display area Ds1, the second hold display area Ds2, the first synchronization display section Sync1, and the second synchronization display section Sync2, but the display surface 41a may be configured not to display some or all of these displays.

10-2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, a description will be given of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 447 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 is equipped with a main control board 61 that is responsible for the main control of the game. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62 that is composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 is equipped with a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 is also equipped with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit that functions as a random number generator. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by other elements. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). The input port of the main control board 61 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 and the power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85. The main control board 61 receives a stable 24V DC power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the dispensing control device 70, etc., and supplies power to each device. The power supply device 85 also has a capacitor (not shown), and continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period of time when a power failure occurs or when the power switch 88 (Figure 444) is turned off.

The input port of the main control board 61 is connected to various detection sensors 67a-67f provided at various ball entry ports and through gates, such as the general entry port 32, the first start port 33, the second start port 34, the through gate 35, the variable entry device 36, and the V entry port 48. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered an entry port or whether a game ball has passed through a through gate based on signals from these detection sensors 67a-67f. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, and executes a lottery to open an electric device based on the entry of game balls into the through gate 35.

The output port of the main control board 61 is connected to the variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, the electric device drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric device 34a of the second starting port 34, the V winning port shutter drive unit 48b that opens and closes the V winning port shutter 48a, and the main display unit 45. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 controls the drive of the various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable prize winning drive unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed. Further, if the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In addition, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in a lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, the V winning port 48 is opened at a predetermined timing during the round game. - Execute drive control of the V winning opening shutter drive unit 48b so that the V winning opening shutter 48a to be closed is opened and closed. Furthermore, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 performs round display on the main display section 45. Display control of section 39 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a ball entering the general prize opening 32 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and a ball entering the first starting opening 33 is transmitted. When it is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34 is specified, the payout of two game balls is sent. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60 when a ball entering the big prize opening 36a is specified. Ru. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A firing control device 80 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 . The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met. Further, the operation handle 25 and the game ball firing button 26 are connected to the firing control device 80. As described above, the operating handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotational operation. A game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. As described above, when the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player, the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 is the maximum. Game balls are fired at the front of the game board with the same firing intensity.

The audio and light emission control device 90 receives various commands sent from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 sends various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the audio light emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 consisting of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game performance that reflects the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound and light emission control device 90. Specifically, based on various commands received from the sound and light emission control device 90, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination that will ultimately be stopped and displayed, as well as grasping whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach performance, and the content of the advance notice performance executed in each game round. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game round, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 448 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, setting the display on the main display section 45, setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed. A fall random number counter CF is used for the fall lottery to decide whether to end the high probability mode.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. In addition, the change type counter CS is used to determine the change time in the first pattern display section 37a and the second pattern display section 37b of the main display section 45, and in the pattern display device 41. Furthermore, the electric role opening counter C4 is used for the electric role opening lottery to determine whether or not the electric role 34a of the second starting hole 34 is opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF at the timing of ball entry is stored as pending information. It is stored in the first reservation area Ra of area 64b. The first holding area Ra has four areas corresponding to the maximum number of held game balls that have entered the first starting port 33, namely, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area. area. When a game ball enters the first starting port 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF at the timing of ball entry is set as pending information (hereinafter, special 1 pending). (Also referred to as "A") is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas the ball is stored in is determined by the order in which the ball enters the ball, and the earlier the ball enters, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area) the ball is stored.

Further, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, each value of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF at the timing of ball entry is set to the number 1 in the pending information storage area 64b. 2 storage area Rb in chronological order. The second holding area Rb has four areas corresponding to the maximum number of held game balls that have entered the second starting port 34, that is, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. area. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, each value of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF at the timing of ball entry is set to pending information (hereinafter, special 2 pending). (Also referred to as "A") is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas the ball is stored in is determined by the order in which the ball enters the ball, and the earlier the ball enters, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area) the ball is stored.

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be explained. As described above, the winning random number counter C1 is used in the winning lottery. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 1199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value. Furthermore, when the winning random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering the first starting port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment process execution area 64c, where it is compared with the winning/losing table stored in the winning/losing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not it will result in a jackpot. The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment process execution area 64c, where it is compared with the winning/losing table stored in the winning/losing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not it will result in a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the values of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra are moved to the execution area AE of the judgment process execution area 64c in the order in which they were obtained when the game ball entered the first starting hole 33. Specifically, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the judgment process execution area 64c, and a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the first holding area Ra. The data shift involves shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the higher areas in order. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted, for example, from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, and the fourth area to the third area.

In addition, the values of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb are moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c in the order in which they are acquired by the game balls entering the second starting port 34. . Specifically, processing is executed to move the data stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb to the determination processing execution area 64c, and to shift the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb. do. The data shift is to sequentially shift the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the upper area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area.

And, when the value of the winning random number counter C1 is stored in the second holding area Rb, regardless of whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 is stored in the first holding area Ra, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is the target for moving to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c. As a result, when the values of the winning random number counter C1 are stored in both the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34 is prioritized. That is, in this embodiment, when the values of the winning random number counter C1 are stored in both the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34 is prioritized, and among the values of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb, the data stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c, and the process of shifting the data stored in the memory area of the second holding area Rb is executed. If the value of the winning random number counter C1 is not stored in the second holding area Rb, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the judgment process execution area 64c, and a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the first holding area Ra.

In the above explanation, we have explained the order in which the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment process execution area 64c, but this is not limited to the value of the hit random number counter C1. The values of counters other than the hit random number counter C1 (jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3 and fall random number counter CF) stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb are also moved to the execution area AE of the judgment process execution area 64c in the same order.

Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 39, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering, and when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, the updated value is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter C2. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. . In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering, and when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, the updated value is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a reach occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a reach occurs. However, if the winning lottery results in a big win and the mode transitions to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The term "reach" refers to a display state in which some combinations of symbols that may result in a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot are displayed as stopped in some of the multiple symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and in this state, the remaining symbol rows display a variable pattern. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 446(b), a symbol is first displayed as stopped in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is displayed as stopped in the symbol row Z3, forming a reach line, and when the reach line is formed, the variable pattern display is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach. Then, when a jackpot occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is displayed as stopped in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, the reach line is formed, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a reach effect. This includes a method in which a combination of symbols in which a reach line is formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, a decision is made as to whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

Next, details of the falling random number counter CF will be explained. The fall random number counter CF is used in a game state where the lottery mode is a high probability mode, when executing a fall lottery to determine whether or not to end the high probability mode. When winning the falling lottery, the lottery mode in the game round is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

The falling random number counter CF is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 299, and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum. The falling random number counter CF is periodically updated, and when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering, and when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, the updated value of the falling random number counter CF is stored in the second holding area Rb of RAM 64 at the time of the ball entering. The value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c each time the current game round ends. The value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and then compared with the win/lose table (win/lose table for fall lottery: Figure 452) stored in the fall lottery table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not to end the high probability mode.

Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and at the time the symbol display device 41 starts variation of the symbol. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, a fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be explained. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 in the electric role execution area 64e A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory opening lottery) is held to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, in the electric role playing area 64e, the win/fail table (the win/fail table for the electric role-playing object lottery) stored in the object lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role-playing object opening counter C4 are determined. The information is compared, and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state.

In addition, at least one of the obtained values of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the electric role release counter C4, and the fall random number counter CF corresponds to the special information in this invention.

Next, the winning/losing table will be described. The winning/losing table is table data for checking against the winning random number counter C1 when a winning lottery is performed based on the winning random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has a low probability mode and a high probability mode set as lottery modes for winning lottery, and when a winning lottery is performed in the low probability mode, the winning/losing table for the low probability mode is referenced, and when a winning lottery is performed in the high probability mode, the winning/losing table for the high probability mode is referenced. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 stores, as separate table data, a winning/losing table for checking against the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved area Ra of the reserved information storage area 64b based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33 and then transferred to the judgment processing execution area 64c, and a winning/losing table for checking against the winning random number counter C1 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 stores four win/loss tables in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63: a win/loss table for the first start port (for low probability mode), a win/loss table for the first start port (for high probability mode), a win/loss table for the second start port (for low probability mode), and a win/loss table for the second start port (for high probability mode).

Figure 449 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the first starting port. Figure 449(a) shows the hit/miss table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), and Figure 449(b) shows the hit/miss table for the first starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 449(a), in the win/fail table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as the value of the winning random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot. There is. Among the values from 0 to 3979, values other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 (20 to 3979) are outliers. In this case, the number of value groups of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot is 20/3980 (=1/199) of the total number.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 449(b), 199 values from 0 to 198 are set in the win/fail table (for high probability mode) for the first starting opening as the value of the winning random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot. has been done. Among the values from 0 to 3979, values other than the 199 values from 0 to 198 (199 to 3979) are outliers. In this case, the number of value groups of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot is 199/3980 (=1/20) of the total number. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

Figure 450 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the second starting port. Figure 450(a) shows the hit/miss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), and Figure 450(b) shows the hit/miss table for the second starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 450(a), the hit/miss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode) has 20 values from 0 to 19 set as the hit random number counter C1 values that result in a jackpot. And, in the hit/miss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), values other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 (20 to 3979) out of the values from 0 to 3979 are set as the hit random number counter C1 values that result in time reduction. In this case, the number of value groups of the hit random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot is 20/3980 (= 1/199) of the total number.

"Time-saving award" is a win/loss result that triggers a transition to the support mode described below, but does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening and closing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. If the support mode is in the low-frequency support mode when the time-saving award is won, the support mode will transition from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode. The "time-saving award" won in this embodiment is a type of time-saving award that continues in the high-frequency support mode until the next jackpot is won. In other words, if the support mode is in the low-frequency support mode when the time-saving award is won, the support mode will transition from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode, and that high-frequency support mode will continue until the next jackpot is won.

In this embodiment, the hit/miss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode) does not have a miss setting. In other words, in this embodiment, the hit/miss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode) has the time-saving setting set as a hit/miss result instead of a miss.

As shown in FIG. 450(b), 199 values from 0 to 198 are set in the win/fail table for the second starting port (for high probability mode) as the value of the winning random number counter C1 that is a jackpot. There is. Among the values from 0 to 3979, values other than the 199 values from 0 to 198 (199 to 3979) are outliers. In this case, the number of value groups of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot is 199/3980 (=1/20) of the total number. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

A "miss" is a win/fail result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and also does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode or the support mode.

In this embodiment, the set of values of the winning random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the winning/losing table for the low probability mode is included in the set of values of the winning random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the winning/losing table for the high probability mode. However, as long as the winning lottery result shows a higher probability of a jackpot in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

Although not adopted in the win/fail table in this embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

"Small win" is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is opened/closed, but does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode, which will be described later. , the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode is limited to one.

Next, the types of jackpots will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes.
(1) The manner of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode. (2) A lottery mode for a winning lottery after the opening and closing execution mode ends. (3) A support mode for the electric device 34a of the second starting hole 34 after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

In the pachinko machine 10, as the above-mentioned (1) opening and closing execution mode of the variable winning device 36, a high frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency of winning in the variable winning device 36 is relatively high and low between the start and end of the opening and closing execution mode. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed multiple times (for example, 16 times) between the start and end of the opening and closing execution mode, and each opening can be set to continue until 30 seconds have passed or until the number of balls that enter the opening and closing door 36b reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed twice between the start and end of the opening and closing execution mode, and each opening can be set to continue until 0.2 seconds have passed or until the number of balls that enter the opening and closing door 36b reaches 6.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is shorter than the firing cycle of game balls. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, winning of game balls does not substantially occur. However, it may be set so that winnings of game balls can occur even in the opening/closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode.

In addition, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the number of times the door 36b is opened and closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening. As long as the frequency of occurrence is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the number of openings and closings in the high-frequency winning mode is higher than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be larger. good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, a configuration may be adopted in which winnings to the variable winning device 36 do not substantially occur in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

The pachinko machine 10 has a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability winning/losing table as a winning/losing table, and a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is made using a high-probability winning/losing table as a winning/losing table. A low-probability mode can be set in which a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability win/fail table. As explained using FIG. 449, it is easier to win a jackpot when a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability win/fail table than when a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability win/fail table. There is a high probability that

In the pachinko machine 10, as a support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, the game balls continue to be launched into the game area PA in the same manner. When compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role opening lottery using the electric role opening counter C4. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening lottery is set higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Also, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric role 34a may be set longer when an electric role opening lottery is won than in the low-frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when an electric role release win is set is set to be greater than in the low-frequency support mode. Good too. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the electric accessory 34a is opened for a long time. In addition, in the case where the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a is opened, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is , may be set shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from when one electric accessory lottery is held until the next electric accessory lottery is held is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. It's okay.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of the ball landing in the second starting hole 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in the establishment of the conditions for obtaining special information.

In this embodiment, if the winning lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to allocate the jackpot type. The allocation of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as an allocation table in the allocation table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

Figure 451 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. Figure 451 (a) shows the distribution table for the first start port, and Figure 451 (b) shows the distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to when a winning lottery is drawn based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to when a winning lottery is drawn based on the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34. In each of Figures 451 (a) and 451 (b), the left side of the vertical double line corresponds to the distribution table. The right side of the vertical double line indicates which mode the lottery mode and support mode will transition to after the jackpot when distributed according to the distribution table. In addition, "after the jackpot" here means, in detail, after the end of the opening and closing execution mode that is executed when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery.

As shown in FIG. 451(a), the distribution table for the first starting hole has 8R special jackpot and 8R normal jackpot set as jackpot types based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33.

In the 8R definite variable jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. . Further, the 8R probability-variable jackpot is a jackpot that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the V winning hole 48 in the first round of the round game. Specifically, the opening/closing door 36b is opened in the first round of the round game so that the opening period of the opening/closing door 36b in the first round of the round game includes the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is in the open state. This is a jackpot with a fixed opening period. The opening period of the opening/closing door 36b in the first round of the round game includes the period in which the V prize opening shutter 48a is in the open state (not a part but the entire period is included), so that the first round of the round game It becomes easy for the game ball to enter the V winning hole 48 which is opened at the eye. As explained earlier, it was explained that the V winning a prize opening shutter 48a is opened and closed at a predetermined timing during a round game, but specifically, the V winning a prize opening shutter 48a is opened and closed for a predetermined time from the start of the opening/closing execution mode. After the elapse of , it becomes open for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and then it becomes closed. The 8R probability-variable jackpot is determined so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened in the first round of the round game during the open state period.

When a game ball enters the opened V-winning hole 48, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes a high probability mode. As mentioned above, the game ball can easily enter the V winning hole 48 in the first round of the round game, but if the game ball does not enter the V winning hole 48, The lottery mode for the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends does not shift to the high probability mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the number of times that a game is executed in the high probability mode is limited to 10 times (ST times), and when the number of times that a game is executed in the high probability mode reaches 10 times, the lottery mode for the winning lottery is switched from the high probability mode to the low probability mode after the end of the game. In addition, if a special jackpot is won in a game executed in the high probability mode and a game ball enters the V winning hole 48 opened as a result of the special jackpot, the number of times that have been executed in the high probability mode up to that point is reset, and after a round game that is executed as a result of the special jackpot, the count of 10 times is executed again from the game in the high probability mode that is executed after that. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the high probability mode, the game in the high probability mode may be executed continuously for 10 times or more.

In addition, if a jackpot is won by the winning lottery and the type of jackpot won is an 8R probability-variable jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. The number of times the game is executed in the high-frequency support mode is limited to five times (time-saving continuation number). Here, the case is assumed to be an 8R definite variable jackpot, but the number of rounds is actually irrelevant, and if it corresponds to a definite variable jackpot, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case as well, the number of times the game is executed in the high-frequency support mode is limited to the number of time-saving continuations.

In the 8R normal jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened and closed is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. . In addition, for the 8R normal jackpot, the opening period of the opening/closing door 36b in the first round of the round game and the period in which the V prize opening shutter 48a is in the open state do not overlap, so that the opening/closing door 36b in the first round of the round game is It is a jackpot with a fixed opening period. Since the opening period of the opening/closing door 36b and the opening period of the opening/closing door 36b do not overlap, the probability that the game ball enters the V winning hole 48 is extremely low. Therefore, the 8R normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends is substantially a low probability mode.

In this way, in the probability variable jackpot, compared to the normal jackpot, the game ball is more likely to enter the V winning hole 48 in the first round of the round game, so the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode has a high probability. There is a high probability that it will become a mode. On the other hand, in a normal jackpot, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the V winning hole 48 compared to a variable jackpot, so the probability that the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode is very low. In addition, in this specification, the distribution result with a higher probability that the game ball enters the V winning hole 48 easily and the lottery mode of the winning lottery becomes the high probability mode is conveniently referred to as a "probable jackpot". In other words, if you win a jackpot in a winning lottery, the type of jackpot you won is a fixed-variable jackpot, and the game ball does not enter the V winning hole 48 that was opened due to the jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Although the lottery mode of the winning lottery does not shift to the high probability mode, as mentioned above, for the sake of convenience, it is called "probability variable jackpot".

If the player wins a jackpot through the lottery and the type of jackpot won is an 8R regular jackpot, the support mode will switch to low frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Here, we've taken the case of an 8R regular jackpot, but in reality the number of rounds is irrelevant, and if it's a regular jackpot, the support mode will switch to low frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 19" correspond to the 8R probability variable jackpot, and "20 to 39" correspond to the 8R normal jackpot. is set to.

As shown in FIG. 451(b), in the distribution table for the second starting port, 16R probability variable jackpot is set as the jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34.

In the 16R probability jackpot, the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is opened 16 times (16 rounds), and the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. In addition, the 16R probability jackpot is a jackpot that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the V winning hole 48 in the first round of the round game. Specifically, the 16R probability jackpot is a jackpot that determines the opening period of the opening and closing door 36b in the first round of the round game so that the opening period of the opening and closing door 36b in the first round of the round game includes a period in which the V winning hole shutter 48a is in an open state. By including a period in which the V winning hole shutter 48a is in an open state in the opening period of the opening and closing door 36b in the first round of the round game, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the V winning hole 48 opened in the first round of the round game. As explained above, the V winning hole shutter 48a is opened and closed at a predetermined timing during the round play. Specifically, the V winning hole shutter 48a is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the opening and closing execution mode, and then is closed. During the period in which the opening and closing state is set, the opening and closing door 36b is opened in the first round of the round play in the 16R variable probability jackpot. In other words, the 16R variable probability jackpot is the same as the 8R variable probability jackpot in that the opening and closing control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode, and the game ball is easily entered into the V winning hole 48 in the first round of the round play. In addition, the 16R variable probability jackpot is also the same as the 8R variable probability jackpot in terms of the lottery mode and support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 39" are set to correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot. That is, all of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 from "0 to 39" are set to correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the allocation of the jackpot type when a jackpot is reached is different between a jackpot based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 and a jackpot based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage to the player.

As described above, in this embodiment, three types of jackpots are set: 8R guaranteed jackpot, 8R normal jackpot, and 16R guaranteed jackpot. However, this is not limited to three types, and may be, for example, four types including a 16R normal jackpot, or two types, five types, or more. Furthermore, the number of times that the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening and closing execution mode is not limited to 8R or 16R, and may be, for example, another number of times such as 4R or 5R.

As explained earlier, when the number of executions of a game round executed in the high probability mode reaches the ST number (10 times), the lottery mode for the winning lottery will change from the high probability mode to the low probability mode after the end of the game round. However, in this embodiment, even if the game is played before the ST number is reached, if a winning lottery is won (to be described later), the lottery mode for the winning lottery changes from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. is configured to migrate to

Figure 452 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the fall lottery winning/losing table used when executing the fall lottery. As shown in Figure 452, the fall lottery winning/losing table has 100 values from 0 to 99 out of the values from 0 to 299 set as the values of the fall random number counter CF that will be a winning in the fall lottery. And the fall lottery winning/losing table has 200 values from 100 to 299 out of the values from 0 to 299 set as the values of the fall random number counter CF that will be a losing in the fall lottery. That is, in a game round in the high probability mode, the probability of falling, in which the fall lottery is won and the high probability mode ends and the mode becomes low probability, is 1/3. In a game round in the high probability mode, if the fall lottery is lost, the high probability mode continues. In this embodiment, the fall lottery is not executed in a game round in the low probability mode. The probability of winning in the drop lottery does not have to be limited to the 1/3 mentioned above, but may be other probabilities such as 1/2, 1/4, etc.

Figure 453 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/lose table (win/lose table for the lottery for opening electric reels) used when conducting the lottery for opening electric reels.

Figure 453 (a) shows a winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) used in the low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 453 (a), the winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values, 0 and 1, set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in winning the electric role opening. 464 values, from 2 to 465, are set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in losing. In other words, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the low-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the electric role opening is won during the low-frequency support mode, the electric role opening is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

Figure 453 (b) shows a winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) used in the high-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 453 (b), the winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) has 462 values from 0 to 461 set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in winning the electric role opening. Four values from 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in losing. In other words, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the electric role opening is won during the high-frequency support mode, the electric role opening is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning/losing table for the electric device opening lottery is set so that the high frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second starting hole 34 than the low frequency support mode.

《10-3》Electrical configuration of audio light emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 454 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 447) are omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on a sound light emission control board 91 provided in the sound light emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is an element that includes a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, etc. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, etc. These will be described in detail later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 60 and the performance operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. The speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, as well as the display control device 100.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 is equipped with an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for the background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 mediates the reading and writing of data by adjusting the timing of the MPU 102, video RAM 107, etc., and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be expressed by each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 106 and have each character ROM 106 store image data and the like. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store JPEG image data for background images stored in the program ROM 103.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are also referred to as the audio/light side MPU 92, audio/light side ROM 93, and audio/light side RAM 94, respectively, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as the display side MPU 102.

《10-4》Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained.

《10-4-1》Transition between lottery mode and support mode:
First, a case where the level of the lottery mode and the support mode changes will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the won jackpot is a normal jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode, and the support mode moves to infrequent support mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of the won jackpot is a guaranteed-variable jackpot, and a game ball enters the V winning hole 48 that is opened with the jackpot as an opportunity, the opening/closing After the execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to high frequency support mode. In addition, in this embodiment, if a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of jackpot won is a variable jackpot, and the game ball does not enter the V winning hole 48 that was opened with the jackpot as an opportunity, A lottery mode never shifts to a high probability mode, and a support mode never shifts to a high frequency support mode.

After the support mode transitions to the high-frequency support mode based on the fact that the type of the jackpot won by the winning lottery is a guaranteed jackpot, the high-frequency support mode continues as the support mode until the number of times the game has been played since the high-frequency support mode was started reaches a predetermined number (hereinafter also referred to as the number of times the time-saving continues). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the number of times the time-saving continues is, for example, 5 times. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, after transitioning to the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues until the number of times the time-saving continues, which is 5 times. When the number of times the game has been played since the high-frequency support mode was started reaches the number of times the time-saving continues, which is 5 times, the support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode after the end of that game. Note that the number of times the time-saving continues does not have to be limited to the above 5 times, and may be another number.

On the other hand, a winning lottery is executed with reference to the win/failure table (for low probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. When the game shifts to the frequent support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues as the support mode until the next jackpot is won.

When the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the probability that the result of the electric role opening lottery, which is executed upon passing through the through gate 35, will be a winning electric role opening is extremely high at 231/233, so the electric role opening state of the electric role 34a occurs frequently. For this reason, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the player hits from the right and plays the game so as to cause the game ball to enter the second starting hole 34 equipped with the electric role 34a.

After the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the high probability mode continues as the lottery mode until the number of times the game is executed after the start of the high probability mode reaches a predetermined number (ST number). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the number of STs is, for example, 10 times. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, after the high probability mode is started and the ST number of games is played 10 times, the lottery mode is then shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

In addition, if a player wins a fall lottery in a game before the number of times a game has been played since the high probability mode was started reaches the ST number, the lottery mode will also switch from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. In more detail, if a player wins a fall lottery for a game before the number of times a game has been played reaches the ST number, the lottery mode will switch from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at the start of that game, and the winning lottery for that game will be executed in the low probability mode. For this reason, in the winning lottery for that game, a winning lottery is executed with reference to the winning/losing table (for low probability mode) for the second start port shown in FIG. 450(a), and if a player wins a time-saving lottery in that winning lottery, the high frequency support mode will continue as the support mode until the next big win is won.

In the game run executed in the high probability mode, if a jackpot is won, the type of the jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot, and the game ball enters the V winning hole 48 that was opened due to the jackpot, The number of games in the high probability mode that has been executed up to that point will be reset, and after the round game that is executed with the jackpot as a trigger, the number of games in the high probability mode that will be executed after that will be reset to 10 games. Counting is performed. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the high probability mode, the game in the high probability mode may be played ten or more times in succession.

《10-4-2》Game flow:
In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, at least four types of states can be taken as the game states to which the game changes as the game progresses, depending on the combination of the lottery mode and the support mode. Specifically, i) a low probability low support state where the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode, and ii) a low probability support state where the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode. iii) a low probability high support state which is a high frequency support mode; iii) a high probability high support state where the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode; and iv) a high probability mode where the lottery mode is a high probability mode. and a high-certain low support state in which the support mode is a low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, an opening/closing execution mode in which a game ball can enter the big prize opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 can be taken as the gaming state. The game progresses while transitioning between these gaming states.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a high probability mode flag that specifies the lottery mode and a high frequency support mode that specifies the support mode are stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64. When the high probability mode flag is OFF, the lottery mode is specified as the low probability mode, and when the high probability mode flag is ON, the lottery mode is specified as the high probability mode. When the high frequency support mode flag is OFF, the support mode is specified as the low frequency support mode, and when the high frequency support mode flag is ON, the support mode is specified as the high frequency support mode. Therefore, each of the low probability low support state, low probability high support state, high probability low support state, and high probability high support state described above is specified by the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the flow of the game progresses while switching between the above-mentioned four states by switching at least one of the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag.

In this embodiment, the lottery mode is specified using one flag (i.e., the high probability mode flag), but instead of this, the lottery mode is specified using two flags (i.e., the high probability mode flag and the high probability mode flag). A configuration may also be adopted in which this is performed using a low probability mode flag). In this modification, when either the high probability mode flag or the low probability mode flag is turned on, the other is automatically turned off. In addition, in this embodiment, the support mode is specified using one flag (i.e., high-frequency support mode flag), but instead of this, the support mode is specified using two flags (i.e., high-frequency support mode flag). A configuration may also be adopted in which this is done using a flag and a low-frequency support mode flag). In this modification, when either the high-frequency support mode flag or the low-frequency support mode flag is turned on, the other is automatically turned off. According to both variations, the flow of the game progresses while switching between the four states described above by switching the flag, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment.

FIG. 455 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game in the pachinko machine 10. When a game is started, the player is initially in a low-probability, low-support state (state H1). That is, the lottery mode is a low probability mode, and the support mode is a low frequency support mode. In the low-probability, low-support state (state H1), the player executes a left-handed hit, causes the game ball to flow down to the left side of the game area PA, and causes the game ball to enter the first starting port 33. When a game ball enters the first starting port 33, a winning lottery is drawn based on the special information acquired based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and the lottery results of the winning lottery are presented to the player. A game round for notification is executed. The content described within the broken line rectangle H1a labeled "while playing left-handed" in the figure corresponds to the aspect of the game by playing left-handed so far. The contents described in the broken line rectangle H1b labeled "Special 2 balance pending" in the figure will be described later.

If the winning lottery result in the game played in mode H1a during left-handed play in the low-probability low-support state (state H1) is a loss, the low-probability low-support state (state H1) will continue.

If you win a jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round executed in the left-handed batting mode H1a in the low probability low support state (state H1), and the type of the won jackpot is a normal jackpot, after the game round ends. The opening/closing execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player. That is, a transition is made from the low-reliability low support state (state H1) to the opening/closing execution mode (state H2).

Prior to a round of play that occurs in the open/close execution mode (state H2), the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect that encourages the player to hit to the right. The player hits to the right in accordance with the suggestion effect, causing the game ball to flow down to the right side of the play area PA, causing the game ball to enter the big prize opening 36a, and obtaining a prize ball. Note that in the open/close execution mode (state H2), which is executed when the type of jackpot won is a normal jackpot, as explained above, the game ball rarely enters the V prize opening 48.

When the opening/closing execution mode (state H2) ends, a transition is made to the low certainty low support state (state H1). That is, the low probability mode is continued as the lottery mode, and the low frequency support mode is continued as the support mode. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode (state H2) that has transitioned from the low-reliability, low-support state (state H1), the game ball rarely enters the second starting port 34 because the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode (state H2) ends, the state in the low-probability low-support state (state H1) does not shift to the special 2 remaining pending state H1b in the low-probability low support state (state H1). The game shifts to a mode H1a in which the player is hitting left-handed.

On the other hand, in the low-probability, low-support state (state H1), even if the player wins a jackpot in the winning lottery in a game round and the type of the jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot, the bonus will be given to the player after the end of the game round. The open/close execution mode is executed as follows. That is, a transition is made from the low-reliability low support state (state H1) to the opening/closing execution mode (state H3). In addition, in the low probability low support state (state H1), winning the probability variable jackpot can be in either the mode H1a in which the player is hitting left-handed or the mode H1b in which the special 2 remaining balance is being used up.

Prior to the round game that occurs in the opening/closing execution mode (state H3), the pachinko machine 10 provides a suggestion performance that urges the player to hit the ball to the right, and inserts a game ball into the V winning hole 48 in the first round of the round game. A suggestive performance that encourages the ball to be played is executed. The player executes a right-handed hit according to these suggested effects, causes the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA, enters the game ball into the grand prize opening 36a to obtain a prize ball, and completes one round of the round game. A game ball is made to enter a V winning hole 48 in a large winning hole 36a. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode (state H3) that is executed when the type of the won jackpot is a variable jackpot, as explained earlier, the game ball enters the V winning hole 48 in the first round of the round game. It's easy to ball.

A game ball enters the V winning hole 48 in the first round of the round game in the opening/closing execution mode (state H3), and when the opening/closing execution mode (state H3) ends, the state shifts to the high accuracy and high support state (state H4). . That is, the lottery mode becomes a high probability mode (limited to 10 times, which is the number of STs), and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode (limited to 5 times, which is the number of times that the ST can be continued).

In the high-accuracy, high-support state (state H4), the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion performance that urges the player to play right. In the high-accuracy, high-support state (state H4), the player causes the game ball to flow down to the right side of the gaming area PA and enters the second starting port 34 by executing a right-handed hit according to the suggested performance. let Since the support mode is high-frequency support mode in the high-certainty, high-support state, there is a 231/231/231 chance that the result of the electric role opening lottery that is executed after passing through the through gate 35 will be the electric role opening winning. 233, which is extremely high, the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 becomes in the electric accessory open state with high frequency. Therefore, in the high accuracy and high support state, the game ball easily enters the second starting port 34. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, a winning lottery is drawn based on the special information acquired based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and the lottery results of the winning lottery are presented to the player. A game round for notification is executed. That is, in the high-accuracy, high-support state (state H4), the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is in the electrically-operated open state more frequently, and the game ball is placed in the second starting port 34 more frequently than in the normal (low support state). By inserting a large number of balls, it is possible for the player to receive a winning lottery in a state where it is difficult for the player to run out of balls.

If the winning lottery result in a game played in the high probability high support state (state H4) is a jackpot, the type of winning jackpot is limited to a guaranteed jackpot (see the allocation table for the second starting hole in FIG. 451 (b)), and therefore the high probability high support state H4 is switched to the open/close execution mode H3. If the winning lottery result in a game played in the high probability high support state (state H4) is a miss, the high probability high support state (state H4) continues, and the player puts the game ball into the second starting hole 34 and plays the game. In addition, in the high probability high support state (state H4), the winning lottery based on the special information acquired based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 34 by hitting from the right uses the hit/miss table for the second starting hole shown in FIG. 450 (b) (for high probability mode), so there is no winning of the time-saving grant.

In the game round executed in the high probability and high support state (state H4), since the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the falling lottery described above is executed.

As explained earlier, the gaming state where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode continues until the time saving continuation number of games is 5 times, but before reaching this 5 times (within 5 times: including 5 times) If the player wins the falling lottery in the game round, the lottery mode in the game round is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. That is, the state shifts from the high-certainty high support state (state H4) to the low-certainty high support state (state H5). Furthermore, when transitioning to the low-probability, high-support state (state H5), the time-saving game count counter PNC, which indicates the number of games that are continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode, is retained as before the transition. Ru. Therefore, the number of consecutive games played in the high frequency support mode is not reset due to the transition to the low probability high support state (state H5).

The winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 in the low probability and high support state (state H5) is based on the win/fail table for the second starting port (low probability mode) shown in FIG. 450(a). ) is used. Therefore, the lottery result of the winning lottery related to the game round in which the above-mentioned falling lottery was won will be either a jackpot winning or a time saving grant winning. If you win the time saving award in the winning lottery, the high frequency support mode will continue as the support mode until you win the next jackpot. In other words, if you win the time-saving award in the winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode continues until you win the next jackpot, and the next jackpot is virtually guaranteed. Moreover, the type of jackpot based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is limited to the 16R probability variable jackpot, as shown in FIG. 451(b), so the low probability high support state (state H5 ), it is guaranteed that the player will win the probability variable jackpot and move to the high probability high support state (state H4) again.

In the low probability high support state (state H5), the player hits the right side to cause the game ball to flow down to the right side of the play area PA and enter the second start hole 34. In the low probability high support state, the support mode is the high frequency support mode, so the probability that the result of the electric role opening lottery executed upon passing through the through gate 35 will be an electric role opening winning is extremely high at 231/233, and the electric role opening lottery 34a of the second start hole 34 is in the electric role opening state with high frequency. Therefore, in the low probability high support state, the game ball easily enters the second start hole 34. When the game ball enters the second start hole 34, a winning lottery is held for the special information acquired based on the game ball's entry into the second start hole 34, and a game round is executed to notify the player of the winning lottery result. That is, in the low probability high support state (state H5), the electric device 34a of the second starting hole 34 is in the electric open state with high frequency, and more game balls enter the second starting hole 34 than usual (low support state), so the player can participate in the winning lottery without losing balls.

If a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game round executed in a low probability/high support state (state H5), the type of the won jackpot will be a probability-variable jackpot, which will be opened and closed as a benefit given to the player after the end of the game round. mode is executed. That is, a transition is made from the low-reliability, high-support state (state H5) to the opening/closing execution mode (state H3).

In summary, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the low probability high support state (state H5), the high frequency support mode continues as the support mode until the next big win is won in the winning lottery, so that the player can insert game balls into the second starting hole 34 and repeat the winning lottery at a high frequency until the next big win is won in a state where the balls held by the player are not likely to be reduced. In addition, this state in which the high frequency support mode continues as the support mode until the next big win is won is hereinafter referred to as the "high support continuation state until the next time (= high support continuation state until the next time)". As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the high probability high support state (state H4) is switched to the low probability high support state (state H5) by winning the fall lottery within five play times, it is possible to reliably win the big win again, that is, to have a so-called consecutive win, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of consecutive wins.

In the high-probability high support state (state H4), if the number of times that a game is executed in the high-frequency support mode reaches 5, which is the number of times that the time-saving function continues, without winning the fall lottery, the support mode will transition from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode after the end of that game. That is, the state transitions from the high-probability high support state (state H4) to the high-probability low support state (state H6). Note that when transitioning to the high-probability low support state (state H6), the ST game count counter SNC, which indicates the number of times that a game is executed continuously in the high probability mode, is maintained as it was before the transition. Therefore, the transition to the high-probability low support state (state H6) does not reset the number of times that a game is executed continuously in the high probability mode.

In this embodiment, as explained earlier, the game balls that enter the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 are held up to a maximum of four, and then When the hold information is stored in both of the second hold area Rb, a winning lottery for the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34 is executed preferentially. And so. For this reason, in the high certainty low support state (state H6), immediately after transitioning from the high certainty high support state (state H4) to the high certainty low support state (state H6), the pending information storage area 64b (FIG. 448) If there is pending information remaining in the second holding area Rb, a winning lottery based on the remaining pending information (hereinafter referred to as "special 2 remaining pending") is performed with priority, and the lottery results of the winning lottery are presented to the player. A game round for notification is executed. The contents described in the broken line rectangle H6a labeled "Special 2 balance pending" in the figure correspond to the mode of the game with the special 2 balance pending. In other words, immediately after transitioning from the high-probability, high-support state (state H4) to the high-probability, low-support state (state H6), if there is a special 2 balance pending, the state shifts to state H6a, in which the special 2 balance is being used up. become. Immediately after transitioning from the high-accuracy, high-support state (state H4) to the high-accuracy, low-support state (state H6), if there is no special 2 remaining pending, the game shifts to a left-handed hitting mode H6b, which will be described later.

In the state H6a in which the special 2 remaining balance is being used up in the high-probability low support state (state H6), a winning lottery is drawn based on the special 2 remaining suspension, and a game round is executed to notify the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery. Ru. In addition, in the winning lottery based on special 2 remaining reservation, since the win/fail table for the second starting gate (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. 450(b) is used, there is no possibility of winning the time saving award. In this game round, since the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the falling lottery described above is executed.

The mode H6a during the consumption of the special 2 remaining reserves continues for a number of play times (maximum of 4) corresponding to the number of special 2 remaining reserves, but if the drop lottery is won in a play time before this number is reached, the lottery mode for that play time will change from high probability mode to low probability mode. In other words, in a play time in which the drop lottery is won, the mode transitions from mode H6a during the consumption of the special 2 remaining reserves in the high probability low support state (state H6) to the low probability low support state (state H1). The destination of the transition is mode H1b during the consumption of the special 2 remaining reserves in the low probability low support state (state H1).

In the low-probability low-support state (state H1), the winning lottery based on the special information obtained based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 during left-handed hit uses the winning/losing table for the first starting hole (for low probability mode) shown in FIG. 449(a), so there is no chance of winning the time-saving bonus. In contrast, the winning lottery based on the special 2 remaining reserve in the low-probability low-support state (state H1) uses the winning/losing table for the second starting hole (for low probability mode) shown in FIG. 450(a), so there is a chance of winning the time-saving bonus.

When the result of the winning lottery in the game performed in mode H1b during the consumption of the special 2 remaining reserve in the low probability low support state (state H1) is not a jackpot, that is, when the time-saving grant is won, the support mode transitions from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode. As a result, the state transitions from the low probability low support state (state H1) to the low probability high support state (state H5) described above. The time-saving grant won in mode H1b during the consumption of the special 2 remaining reserve is of the type in which the high frequency support mode continues as the support mode until the next jackpot is won. Note that instead of the type of time-saving grant in which the high frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot is won, the time-saving grant may be of the type in which the high frequency support mode continues until the number of times the game is played reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times). The predetermined number does not have to be limited to 5 times, and may be any number such as 1 time, 2 times, 6 times, or 8 times.

In summary, in the state H6a when the Toku 2 balance is pending in the high probability low support state (state H6), if you win the falling lottery, the Toku 2 balance pending in the low probability low support state (state H1) Shifting to mode H1b, in the game round in which the fall was won, a jackpot or a time-saving award is won, and if the time-saving award is won, the state changes from a low probability low support state (state H1) to a low probability high support state. (State H5). In the low-probability, high-support state (state H5), the high-frequency support mode continues as a support mode until the player wins a jackpot in the next winning lottery, so it is difficult for the player to reduce the amount of balls he has and it is possible to win the jackpot next time. The winning lottery can be repeated at high frequency by entering the game ball into the second starting port 34 until winning. For this reason, if you win the falling lottery in state H6a where the Toku 2 remaining balance is being used up in the high-probability low support state (state H6), the Toku 2 balance being used up in the low-probability low support state (state H1). By moving to the low probability high support state H5 via the mode H1b, the next probability variable jackpot is virtually guaranteed.

Returning to the explanation of the high certainty low support state (state H6). When a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game run executed in H6a, when the special 2 remaining balance is being used up in the high certainty low support state (state H6), the won jackpot is shown in FIG. 451(b). Since the type of is limited to variable probability jackpot, the state is shifted from the high probability low support state (state H6) to the opening/closing execution mode H3. Aspect of the special 2 remaining pending being used up in the high certainty low support state (state H6) If the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round executed in H6a is a loss, as long as the special 2 remaining pending remains, the special 2 remaining pending is being used up. Aspect H6a in which the remaining holding is being used up is continued, a winning lottery is made based on special 2 remaining holding, and a game round is executed to notify the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery.

In mode H6a while the special 2 remaining reserve is being consumed, if the player does not win the drop lottery and does not win the winning lottery and the number of play times corresponding to the number of special 2 remaining reserves has passed, the mode will transition from mode H6a while the special 2 remaining reserve is being consumed to mode H6b during left play.

In the high-probability low support state (state H6), the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect that encourages the player to hit to the left. In the high-probability low support state, the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, so the probability that the result of the electric role opening lottery executed in response to passing through the through gate 35 will be an electric role opening win is extremely low at 1/233, and the probability that the electric role 34a of the second starting hole 34 will be in the electric role opening state is extremely low. For this reason, in the high-probability low support state (state H6), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 34, so the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect that encourages the player to hit to the left, not to the right, aiming at the second starting hole 34. In the aspect H6b during left hitting in the high-probability low support state (state H6), the player hits to the left in accordance with the suggestion effect, causing the game ball to flow down to the left side of the game area PA and enter the game ball into the first starting hole 33. Furthermore, if you continue to hit to the right in the high probability low support state (state H6), the game ball will not enter the second starting hole 34 and the game ball will be wasted.

In mode H6b during left-handed play, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, a winning lottery is held based on special information acquired based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 33, and a game round is played to notify the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery. In this game round, since the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the fall lottery described above is played. Note that the winning lottery based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 33 uses the winning/losing table for the first starting hole shown in FIG. 449(b) (for high probability mode), so there is no chance of winning the time-saving grant.

If the player wins the falling lottery in the game round executed in the left-handed batting mode H6b, the lottery mode is shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. That is, the state shifts from the high-certainty low support state (state H6) to the low-certainty low support state (state H1). Note that the transition destination is a state H1a in which the player is hitting left-handed in the low-probability low support state (state H1).

In mode H6b during left-handed play in high-probability low-support state H6, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery for a play round and the type of jackpot won is a normal jackpot, the open/close execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player after the play round ends. In other words, the state transitions from the high-probability low-support state (state H6) to the open/close execution mode (state H2).

In aspect H6b during left-handed hitting, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in a game round, and the type of the won jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot, the opening/closing execution mode is provided as a benefit to the player after the game round ends. executed. That is, the state shifts from the high-accuracy/low-support state (state H6) to the opening/closing execution mode (state H3).

In aspect H6b during left-handed hitting, the number of executions of the game round executed in the high probability mode without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round and without winning the falling lottery is ST number (10 times: high When the count reaches 5 times after transitioning to the guaranteed low support state H6), the lottery mode is transitioned from the high probability mode to the low probability mode after the end of the game round. That is, the state shifts from the high-certainty low support state (state H6) to the low-certainty low support state (state H1). The destination is the left-handed batting mode H1a in the low-probability, low-support state (state H1).

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the number of STs is set to 10 because in mode H6a during consumption of the remaining special 2 reserve in the high probability low support state H6, it is possible to execute the number of game rounds (4 times) corresponding to the maximum number of reserved game balls that can enter the second starting hole 34, and then add one more as a margin. In other words, the number of STs is set to 10 in total, which is the number of times the time-saving function continues (5 times), plus the number of times (4 times) corresponding to the maximum number of reserved game balls that can enter the second starting hole 34, plus one more as a margin. The reason why a margin is necessary will be explained below.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, consider a case where the number of STs is nine. On top of that, when transitioning from the high-accuracy, high-support state H4 to the high-accuracy, low-support state H6, that is, in the high-accuracy, high-support state H4, the number of games played after transitioning to the high-accuracy, high-support state H4 is the number of time-saving continuations. Let us consider a case in which when the number of times (5 times) is reached, the number of items held in the second starting port 34 is the maximum of 4 items. At the end of the game in which the number of games has reached the number of time-saving continuations, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, and the electric accessory 34a returns from the electric role open state to the closed state. A game ball may enter the ball just before the accessory 34a closes. Then, by the time the entered game ball is detected by the detection sensor in the second starting port 34, the game round regarding the hold information corresponding to the first one of the number of balls held in the second starting port 34 has started. , it is determined that the number of balls held in the second starting port 34 is reduced by one to three, and the special information about the game ball that entered just before the electric accessory 34a closes becomes the object of holding for special 2. There is something to be gained. Then, when 4 game rounds are executed in the high-probability low support state H6 and the number of executions of the game round in the high-probability low support state H6 reaches the ST number, after the end of the game round, the lottery mode is The high-probability mode shifts to the low-probability mode, and the high-probability low support state H6 shifts to the low-probability low support state H1, but immediately after the shift to the low-probability low support state H1, the electric accessory 34a closes. The special information about the game ball that was entered just before remains as a special 2 remaining reservation, and the special 2 remaining reservation that was originally wanted to be used in the high-probability low support state H6 is not used in the special 2 balance reservation in the low-probability low support state H1. The remainder will be used in embodiment H1b during digestion.

In the mode H1b when the special 2 balance is being used up, as explained earlier, even if the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round executed in the mode H1b when the special 2 balance is being used up is not a jackpot, it is possible to save time. Since the player wins, the player moves to a low-probability, high-support state H5 in which the player is guaranteed to win a jackpot next time. In other words, when transitioning from the high-accuracy, high-support state H4 to the high-accuracy, low-support state H6, the special 2 balance corresponding to the game ball that entered just before the electric accessory 34a closes, and the special 2 balance is being used up. This results in a transition to the low certainty high support state H5 via the mode H1b. After reaching the ST count and returning to the low-probability, low-support state H1 from the high-probability, high-support state H4, you can win the time-saving grant with special 2 balance pending and move to the low-probability, high-support state H5, so you can hit the jackpot next time. The fact that you always win is a game feature that the designer did not originally envision.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the number of STs is set to 9, as described above, the game performance is not originally envisioned by the designer, which impairs the soundness of the game. There was a risk. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of STs is 10, so when the transition from the high-accuracy, high-support state H4 to the high-accuracy, low-support state H6 occurs immediately before the electric accessory 34a closes. The special 2 remaining reservation corresponding to the entered game ball will be used in the state H6a where the special 2 remaining reservation is being used up in the high-certain low support state (state H6), and the special 2 remaining reservation remains. , there is no return from the high certainty low support state H6 to the low certainty low support state H1. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after reaching the ST number and returning to the low-probability, low-support state H1 from the high-precision, high-support state H4, the game flow is such that the player wins the time-saving award with the special 2 balance pending. Since it can be erased, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Comparing the advantages for the player of the four states H1, H4, H5, and H6 specified by the lottery mode and support mode, the following can be seen. Of the four states H1, H4, H5, and H6, the low-probability low-support state H1 is the least advantageous. Of the high-probability high-support state H4, the low-probability high-support state H5, and the high-probability low-support state H6, the high-probability low-support state H6 is the least advantageous. This is because the high-probability low-support state H6 transitions to the low-probability low-support state (state H1) when the player wins the fall lottery in the mode H6b during left-handed hitting or when the number of times the game is played reaches the ST number. Comparing the high-probability high-support state H4 and the low-probability high-support state H5, the low-probability high-support state H5 is more advantageous than the high-probability high-support state H4. The high probability high support state H4 is highly advantageous because the lottery mode is a high probability mode, but since the support mode transitions to the low frequency support mode when the number of play times reaches 5, which is the number of times the time-saving function continues, it is less advantageous than the low probability high support state H5, in which the next special jackpot is guaranteed.

Taking into account the above-mentioned changes in the game state, the player plays as follows. First, in the low-probability, low-support state H1, the player hits with the left hand and causes the game ball to enter the first starting hole 33. At this time, the player hopes to win a jackpot in the winning lottery that is executed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 33, and further hopes that the type of jackpot will be a probability jackpot.

When a jackpot is won in the low probability low support state H1 and the type of jackpot is a normal jackpot, the player repeats rounds of play in the open/close execution mode H2 to which the player transitioned from the low probability low support state H1, while being disappointed that it is a normal jackpot and not a special jackpot. After all rounds of play are completed, the state returns to the low probability low support state H1.

When a jackpot is won in the low probability low support state H1 and the type of jackpot is a high probability jackpot, the player rejoices at having won the high probability jackpot and repeats rounds of play in the open/close execution mode H3 to which the player transitions from the low probability low support state H1. After all rounds of play are completed, the state transitions to the high probability high support state H4.

In the high-accuracy, high-support state H4, the player hits the ball to the right and causes the game ball to enter the second starting port 34. In the high-accuracy, high-support state H4, since the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, as explained earlier, the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is frequently in the electric role open state, and the second starting A game ball can be easily entered into the opening 34. At this time, the player expects to win a jackpot in the winning lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. If the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round executed in the high-probability, high-support state H4 is a jackpot, the type of jackpot won is limited to a probability-variable jackpot, so the player cannot expect to win the jackpot. I look forward to more.

In the high-probability, high-support state H4, the player expects to win a jackpot as explained earlier, but furthermore, the number of games played after transitioning to the high-probability, high-support state H4 is the number of consecutive short-time games. It is hoped that the player will win the falling lottery in the game rounds before reaching the number of times (within 5 times). If you win the falling lottery in a game in which the number of games played is less than 5 after moving to the high probability and high support state H4, the state will shift from the high probability and high support state H4 to the low probability and high support state H5, but first As explained above, in the low-probability, high-support state H5, the next probability-variable jackpot is virtually guaranteed. In the game round, the player expects to win the falling lottery.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the open/close execution mode H3 is switched to the high probability high support state H4, the pattern display device 41 executes an effect including an effect content notifying the player that the advantage for the player has increased. In this embodiment, as the effect content notifying the player that the advantage has increased, a specific character image and a character string such as "Entering the chance zone!!" are displayed on the pattern display device 41, and a sound corresponding to the character string is output from the speaker 46. Then, a specific background image (hereinafter referred to as the first specific background image) that means that the chance zone has been entered is displayed. By visually recognizing the first specific background image that means that the chance zone has been entered on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, the player will have even greater expectations of winning the jackpot or the drop lottery described above.

In the low-accuracy, high-support state H5, the player hits the ball to the right and causes the game ball to enter the second starting port 34. In the low probability high support state H5, if a winning lottery is executed and the support mode shifts to high frequency support mode based on winning the time saving grant in the winning lottery, the high support will continue until the next time as explained earlier. state. Therefore, in the low-probability, high-support state H5, the player can feel secure that the high-frequency support mode will not end as a support mode until he wins a jackpot in the winning lottery and is assigned to a variable-probability jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the symbol display device 41 executes a performance including performance content notifying that a state highly advantageous to the player is maintained in the low-probability high support state H5. The production content to notify that a high advantageous state is maintained is to display a specific background image (hereinafter referred to as the second specific background image) that means that the vehicle has entered the safe zone mentioned above. That's true. By viewing the second specific background image indicating that the player has entered the safe zone on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the player has an even greater sense of security that the high-frequency support mode described above will not end. It turns out.

In the high-probability, high-support state H4, if the number of games played after moving to the high-probability, high-support state H4 reaches 5 without winning either the winning lottery or the falling lottery, the 5th game After the end of the game round, the high-guaranteed high support state H4 shifts to the high-guaranteed low support state H6, but even in this high-guaranteed low support state H6, the game round executed in the mode H6a in which the special 2 remaining balance is being used up In this game, the player not only expects to win the winning lottery, but also expects to win the falling lottery. In the state H6a where the special 2 remaining balance is being used up in the high probability low support state (state H6), if you win the falling lottery, the special condition from the high probability low support state (state H6) to the low probability low support state (state H1) Transitioning to the mode H1b in which 2 remaining balances are pending, as explained earlier, in the mode H1b in which 2 remaining reserves are being used in a low probability low support state (state H1), a low probability low support state (state H1) ), by transitioning to the low-probability high-support state H5 via the state H1b in which the special 2 remaining balance is being used up, the next probability-variable jackpot is virtually guaranteed. Even in the game round based on special 2 hold after transitioning to the state (state H6), it is expected that the player will win the falling lottery.

As described above, in order to execute many play times based on the special 2 reserve in the high probability low support state (state H6), it is necessary to accumulate the special 2 reserves so that the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 34 becomes the maximum number of reserved balls when the number of play times after transitioning to the high probability high support state H4 reaches the number of times the time-saving continues (5 times) in the high probability high support state H4. For this reason, in the high probability high support state H4, the player plays by continuously hitting the right side so that the launch of game balls by the game ball launching mechanism does not stop.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the state H6a in which the special 2 remaining pending is being used up in the high certainty low support state H6, the state that is highly advantageous for the player is a limited game corresponding to the number of special 2 remaining pending. The symbol display device 41 executes the performance including the performance content notifying that the performance will continue for the number of times. The content of the above-mentioned production includes, for example, a specific background image (hereinafter referred to as the third specific background image) that means that the final battle zone has entered and a countdown is being made for the number of games remaining in the limited number of games. ). By visually recognizing the third specific background image on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the player has even greater expectations of winning the above-mentioned jackpot or winning the falling lottery.

In the high-probability low support state H6, while checking the existence of the special 2 remaining reserve, the player hits from the left and puts the game ball into the first starting hole 33. When the special 2 remaining reserve is gone and the game round transitions from the mode H6a during the consumption of the special 2 remaining reserve to the mode H6b during left hitting, the player will be disappointed that he did not win the jackpot or the drop lottery between the high-probability high support state H4 before the transition to the high-probability low support state H6 and the mode H6a during the consumption of the special 2 remaining reserve in the high-probability low support state H6. For this reason, before transitioning to the mode H6b during left hitting, that is, in the mode H6a during the consumption of the special 2 remaining reserve, the player will have a sense of urgency that the game round executed based on the special 2 remaining reserve will end without winning either the winning lottery or the drop lottery.

In the aspect H6b during left-handed hitting,
i) winning the elimination draw;
ii) Winning a jackpot in a prize draw;
iii) The number of game plays executed since the transition to the high-probability low support state H6 reaches 5 times (10 times if counted from the transition to the high-probability high support state H4),
The game will be repeated until one of the above conditions is met. When the above conditions i) or iii) are met, the game will move from the high probability low support state H6 to the low probability low support state H1. When the above conditions ii) are met, the game will move to the opening and closing execution mode H2 or H3 corresponding to the distribution result by the distribution judgment.

In addition, in the state H6b of left-handed hitting in the high probability low support state H6, since the lottery mode is a high probability mode, the player can still have a sense of expectation that he will win the jackpot. However, the type of jackpot becomes a probability-variable jackpot, and the user can feel the expectation of returning to the high-probability, high-support state H4. In addition, the player will have a sense of urgency as if he or she will win the lottery, along with the above-mentioned sense of anticipation.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the mode H6b during left hit in the high probability low support state H6, the pattern display device 41 executes an effect including an effect content informing the player that the highly advantageous state for the player is about to completely disappear. The effect content is, for example, displaying a specific background image (hereinafter referred to as the fourth specific background image) that means that the player is entering a pinch zone. By visually recognizing the fourth specific background image, which means that the player is entering a pinch zone, on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, the player will feel even more disappointed as described above, and at the same time, will feel even more hopeful that the player will return to the high probability high support state H4 described above.

In mode H1b during the consumption of the special 2 remaining reserve in the low-probability low-support state H1, which is entered when the player wins the drop-out lottery in mode H6a during the consumption of the special 2 remaining reserve in the high-probability low-support state H6, the player hopes to win a jackpot in the winning lottery that is executed based on the special 2 remaining reserve. Since the type of jackpot won based on the special 2 remaining reserve is limited to a special jackpot with a high probability of winning, the player is even more hopeful of winning a jackpot. However, even if the player does not win a jackpot in mode H1b during the consumption of the special 2 remaining reserve in the low-probability low-support state H1, the player is guaranteed to win the time-saving grant, so the player can transition to the low-probability high-support state H5 and ultimately win a special jackpot again, so the player can have a sense of security without being disappointed about not winning a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in mode H1b during consumption of the special 2 remaining reserve in the low-probability low-support state H1, the pattern display device 41 executes an effect including an effect content that notifies the player that there is no longer a risk of the advantage decreasing for the player and that the player will transition to a state of high advantage. Specifically, as an indication that there is no longer a risk of the advantage decreasing for the player, the effect of the final battle zone executed in mode H6a during consumption of the special 2 remaining reserve in the high-probability low-support state H6 is continued, and in the battle effect as the effect of the final battle zone, an effect including an effect content that indicates that the specific character corresponding to the player side has become dominant and that the specific character will not lose is executed. After that, an effect including one of two kinds of effect contents is executed as an effect content that notifies the player that the advantage will transition to a high state. One of the two types of presentation content is executed when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery and allocated to a certain jackpot in mode H1b during the consumption of the special 2 remaining reserve in the low probability low support state H1, and includes a presentation content in which a specific character wins. The other of the two types of presentation content is executed when a time-saving grant is won in the winning lottery, and includes a presentation content in which a specific character remains dominant in the battle presentation and ends in a draw.

In the low probability high support state H5, which is entered when a time-saving bonus is awarded in mode H1b during the consumption of the remaining special 2 reserve in the low probability low support state H1, the above-mentioned initial draw performance is followed by a repeat of performance in which the specific character remains in the lead and no conclusion is reached. After that, in the low probability high support state H5, if a guaranteed jackpot is won, a performance including a performance in which the specific character wins is executed. By visually viewing a series of performances including these performance contents on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, the player will feel even greater anticipation and security as described above.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, which has the game flow described above, if a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in the low-probability low-support state H1 and the state transitions to the high-probability high-support state H4 due to being assigned a high probability jackpot, we will consider the probability of winning the jackpot again the next time (hereinafter referred to as the "continuation rate").

In the high-probability, high-support state H4, if the number of games after moving to the high-probability, high-support state H4 is within the number of short-time continuations (5 times), if you win the falling lottery, from the high-probability, high-support state H4. , the game moves to a low-probability-high support state H5 in which the next probability-variable jackpot is guaranteed. In addition, in the high-certainty, low-support state H6, which is transitioned from the high-certainty, high-support state H4 after the number of short-time continuations (5 times) has passed, a falling lottery will occur within the number of gaming times corresponding to the number of special 2 remaining pending pieces. If you win, the next probability jackpot will be won from the mode H6a in which the special 2 balance is pending in the high probability low support state H6, through the mode H1b in which the special 2 balance is pending in the low probability low support state H1. Transition to guaranteed low certainty high support state H5. Therefore, in order to calculate the continuation rate in the high-probability, high-support state H4, in addition to the case where a jackpot is won in the winning lottery (distribution is 100% probability variable jackpot), it is necessary to calculate the continuation rate from the high-probability, high-support state H4 to the low-probability, high-support state H5. , and from the high-certainty high support state H4 to the state H1b of special 2 remaining pending consumption in the low-probability low support state H1 via the state H6a of the special 2 remaining pending consumption in the high-certainty low support state H6. It is necessary to consider the case of migration.

First, the probability A of transitioning from the high probability high support state H4 to the high probability low support state H6 is calculated. Specifically, the probability of not winning the fall-out lottery and not winning the jackpot in the win lottery in one game round is calculated, and the probability of missing both the win lottery and the fall-out lottery in all of the time-saving continuations (5 times) is calculated from that probability as the above probability A. Specifically, the probability A is calculated according to the following formula (1).

Probability A = {(1-1/3) x (1-1/20)}^5 ... (1)

In formula (1), "1-1/3" is the probability of not winning the drop-out lottery in one play. "1-1/20" is the probability of not winning the jackpot (100% chance of winning the jackpot) in the winning lottery in one play in high probability mode. "5" is the number of times the time-saving feature continues. "^" is the operator that expresses exponentiation.

Next, the probability B of transitioning from the mode H6a in which the player is holding the special 2 balance to the mode H6b in which the player is hitting left-handed in the high-certainty and high-support state H4 is calculated. Specifically, in one game round, the probability of not winning in the falling lottery and not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is calculated, and from this probability, the probability of not winning in the winning lottery for all the times corresponding to the number of Toku 2 remaining reservations is calculated. The probability of not winning the falling lottery is calculated as the above probability B. Specifically, probability B is calculated according to the following equation (2).

Probability B = {(1-1/3) x (1-1/20)}^4 ... (2)

In formula (2), "1-1/3" is the probability of not winning the falling lottery in one game round. “1-1/20” is the probability of not winning a jackpot in the winning lottery (distribution is 100% probability variable jackpot) in one game round in the high probability mode. "4" is the number of times corresponding to the number of special 2 remaining reservations, and here it is set to the maximum number of times, 4 times. "^" is an operator representing exponentiation.

In this embodiment, as explained above, in the high probability low support state H6, since the mode H6b during left hitting is configured, it is necessary to consider the case where a special jackpot is won in this mode H6b during left hitting. Therefore, the probability of not winning a special jackpot in mode H6b during left hitting in the high probability low support state H6 is calculated as probability C. Specifically, the probability of not winning a drop lottery, not winning a jackpot in the win lottery, and not being assigned to a special jackpot even if a jackpot is won in one play round is calculated as the above probability C. Here, the number of play rounds executed in mode H6b during left hitting is calculated as one. Specifically, the probability C is calculated according to the following formula (3).

Probability C = (1-1/3) x (1-1/20) x (1-1/2) ... (3)

In formula (3), "1-1/3" is the probability of not winning the falling lottery in one game round. “1-1/20” is the probability of not winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in one game round in the high probability mode. “1-1/2” is the probability that the game will not be allocated to a probability variable jackpot in the allocation table for the first starting opening (see FIG. 451(a)).

The continuation rate is calculated by multiplying the above-mentioned probability A by probability B and probability C, and then subtracting the answer from 1. In other words, the continuation rate can be calculated according to the following formula (4).

Continuation rate = 1 - Probability A x Probability B x Probability C
=1-[{(1-1/3)×(1-1/20)}^5]×
[{(1-1/3)×(1-1/20)}＾4]×
{(1-1/3)×(1-1/20)×(1-1/2)} ...(4)

When formula (4) is calculated, the continuation rate is approximately 99.5%. In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has a continuous playing system that is completely different from conventional pachinko machines, and can realize a model with extremely high specifications in terms of continuous playing performance.

The pachinko machine 10 with the above consecutive win performance has the following effects compared to conventional pachinko machines. Conventionally, there are two types of pachinko machines, loop type and ST type, which have different methods for continuing the jackpot. In a loop type pachinko machine, since it is confirmed that the next jackpot will be won in a high probability high support state, the continuation rate is determined based on the allocation probability of the jackpot when the jackpot is won. This means that in a loop type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability that when the symbols are lined up, the lined up symbols will be a variable symbol (for example, a "7" symbol). Therefore, in a high probability high support state, the player just watches the game rounds being consumed and hopes that when the symbols are lined up, the lined up symbols will be a variable symbol. In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as explained above, in the high probability high support state H4, the number of times the game is executed since the high frequency support mode is started is within 5 times, which is the number of times the time-saving continues, and in each of the maximum 4 times (which may be 5 times as mentioned above) that are executed based on the special 2 remaining reserve after the transition to the high probability low support state (state H6), the player can be made to expect to win the drop lottery or the winning lottery. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can give a greater sense of expectation than conventional loop-type pachinko machines.

In the ST type pachinko machine, the continuation rate in the high probability high support state can be calculated by calculating the probability of missing all ST times from the probability of not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery per play round, and subtracting the probability of missing from 1. For this reason, in the ST type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability of the symbols lining up (the probability of winning the jackpot) and the number of ST times. Therefore, in the ST type pachinko machine, as the number of play rounds executed in the high probability high support state progresses, a sense of urgency can be given to the player that the number of play rounds will reach the number of ST times without winning the jackpot. In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, during the period from the high probability high support state (state H4) to the high probability low support state (state H6), a sense of urgency can be given to the player that in addition to winning the jackpot (lining up the symbols), the player will not win the fall lottery either, and the special 2 remaining reserve will be gone. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can provide a player with a greater sense of tension compared to conventional ST-type pachinko machines, since the drop win is added to the jackpot win.

As a pachinko machine having other game characteristics, the following configuration is also conceivable. In a specific advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, if a small jackpot is won in a winning lottery (a small jackpot is won with a high probability) before the number of games played after the transition to the advantageous state reaches a predetermined number, a game ball enters the V winning port, and the game continues to the opening and closing execution mode (round game). According to this configuration, the number of games played before the transition from the advantageous state to the opening and closing execution mode is consumed in a short time, so the opening and closing execution mode is repeated at short intervals, and there is a problem that the gambling nature is excessively increased. In contrast, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the route from the high probability high support state H4 to the opening and closing execution mode H3, it is possible to go through the low probability high support state H5, which is a lottery mode in which a winning lottery can be repeatedly performed in a low probability mode, which is a lottery mode in which it is guaranteed that the jackpot will finally be won, so it is possible to take a sufficient amount of time to transition from the high probability high support state H4 to the opening and closing execution mode H3. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can prevent the open/close execution mode from being repeated at short intervals, which can lead to an excessive increase in gambling. In addition, by taking a sufficient amount of time, it is possible to achieve the secondary effect of making it possible to perform various effects. These effects can never be achieved by the configuration of pachinko machines with the other game characteristics described above.

As described above, compared to various types of conventional pachinko machines, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has excellent effects.

《10-5》Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the processing executed in the main control device 60 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

In order to advance each game round, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes will be explained next. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power outage signal, but a description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 456 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Su0101, a process of reading the various detection sensors 67a to 67f is executed. That is, the state of the various detection sensors 67a to 67f connected to the main control unit 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is saved. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0102.

In step Su0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0103.

In step Su0103, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the fall random number counter CF, and the electric role opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the fall random number counter CF, and the electric role opening counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches its maximum value, each is cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 and CF are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0104. Note that the value of the variation type counter CS is updated in the normal processing (FIG. 460) described later.

In step Su0104, a ball entering process for the starting port is executed as the ball enters the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Details of the ball entry process for the starting port in step Su0104 will be described later. After executing step Su0104, the process advances to step Su0105.

In step Su0105, a through ball entry process is executed when the ball enters the through gate 35. Details of the through ball entry process in step Su0105 will be described later. After executing step Su0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Starting ball entry processing>
Next, the ball-entry process for the starting hole will be described. The ball-entry process for the starting hole is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for the timer interrupt process (FIG. 456: Su0104).

Figure 457 is a flowchart showing ball entry processing for the starting hole. In step Su0201, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (starting ball entry) is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting hole 33. In step Su0201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (Su0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0202, where a prize ball command is set to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0203.

In step Su0203, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a game ball has entered the first starting port 33. Thereafter, the process advances to step Su0204.

In step Su0204, the start pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start pending number RaN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the first pending area Ra, is read out, and the first start pending number RaN is set as the target for processing described below. The first start pending number RaN indicates the number of balls pending based on balls entering the first start port 33. Then, proceed to step Su0209.

In step Su0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (Su0201: NO), the process advances to step Su0205, and it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 or not. is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

In step Su0205, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Su0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0206, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out two game balls. Set command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Su0207. On the other hand, in step Su0205, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (Su0205: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

In step Su0207, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34. Then, proceed to step Su0208.

In step Su0208, the start pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number memory area of the second pending area Rb, is read out, and the second start pending number RbN is set as the target for processing described below. The second start pending number RbN indicates the number of balls pending based on balls entering the second start port 34. Then, proceed to step Su0209.

In step Su0209, it is determined whether or not the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Su0204 or step Su0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Su0209, if the starting pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (Su0209: NO), the entry process for the main starting hole is ended.

On the other hand, in step Su0209, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit (Su0209: YES), proceed to step Su0210, add 1 to the start pending number N in the corresponding pending area, and then proceed to step Su0211, add 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN. Then proceed to step Su0212.

In step Su0212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF updated in step Su0103 (FIG. 456) is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the corresponding reservation area. area, that is, a storage area corresponding to the number of pending items to which 1 was added in step Su0210. Specifically, when the first starting pending number RaN is set as the processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF updated in step Su0103 are Each value is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN to which 1 was added in step Su0210. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is set as the processing target, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF updated in step Su0103 is , is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reservation number RbN to which 1 was added in step Su0210. After executing step Su0212, the process advances to step Su0213.

In step Su0213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (pending information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF (pending information), and determines whether the winning lottery is correct or not (lottery result) and the jackpot. This is a process in which determinations are made as to the type of win, the presence or absence of a reach, the success or failure of a fall lottery, etc., before the pending information becomes a target of the winning lottery (determination process) by the main controller 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing step Su0213, the process advances to step Su0214.

In step Su0214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the judgment result of the destination judgment process executed based on the information (hold information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number counter CF is set as a hold command. Set.

The hold command indicates the occurrence of a ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the ball entering. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to check the pending information before it becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 460: Step Su0503) of normal processing to be described later.

In addition, when the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a ball entering the first starting hole 33, it transmits a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. The display control device 100, which has received the command, changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. On the other hand, when the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a ball entering the second starting hole 34, it transmits a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. The display control device 100, which has received the command, changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls.

After executing step Su0214, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 ends the ball entry process for this starting hole.

<First Determination Process>
Next, the first-goal determination process will be described. The first-goal determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for the starting-goal-goal process (FIG. 457: Su0207).

Figure 458 is a flowchart showing the first determination process. As described above, the first determination process is a process that executes, based on the reserved information, determination of the winning or losing of the winning lottery, determination of the type of big win, determination of whether or not a reach has occurred, and determination of the winning or losing of the falling lottery, etc., before the reserved information becomes the subject of the winning lottery by the main control device 60.

In step Su0301, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 457) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entering before the current ball entering is read from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether there is a probability-variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entering. The lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined by determining whether or not there is a winning lottery in the falling lottery.

In step Su0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round, (Su0302: YES), the process advances to step Su0303, and the winning lottery is stored in the winning/failing table. Refer to the success/failure table (for low probability mode) for the first starting port stored in the area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0308, and as a result of referring to the win/fail table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode), it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot. .

On the other hand, in step Su0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to this ball entry is executed as a game round (Su0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Su0304, where the value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the memory area due to this ball entry is obtained. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0305, where the fall win/loss determination table stored in the fall lottery table memory area 63d is referenced to determine whether or not the fall lottery has been won.

In step Su0305, if it is determined that the fall lottery has been won (Su0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0306, where the fall winning information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h, and the process proceeds to step Su0303. In step Su0303, as described above, the first start/failure table (for low probability mode) stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0308, and as a result of referring to the win/fail table (for low probability mode) for the first starting opening, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step Su0305, if it is determined that the lottery has not been won (Su0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Su0307 and refers to the win/fail table for the first starting opening (for high probability mode). After that, the process proceeds to step Su0308, and as a result of referring to the win/fail table for the first starting opening (for high probability mode), it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step Su0308, if it is determined that the value of the hit random number counter C1 obtained this time corresponds to a jackpot (Su0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0309, where the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the memory area due to the ball entering the start hole this time is obtained. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0310, where the allocation table stored in the allocation table memory area 63b is referenced. Specifically, if the jackpot type counter C2 that is the subject of this allocation was obtained based on a ball entering the first start hole 33, the allocation table for the first start hole is referenced, and if it was obtained based on a ball entering the second start hole 34, the allocation table for the second start hole is referenced. After executing step Su0310, the process proceeds to step Su0311.

In step Su0311, by referring to the allocation table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 currently grasped corresponds to a guaranteed jackpot. If it is determined in step Su0311 that it corresponds to a guaranteed jackpot (Su0311: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0312, where the guaranteed jackpot information is stored in the first determination process result storage area 64h. The first determination process is then terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su0311 that it does not correspond to a guaranteed jackpot (Su0311: NO), the process proceeds to step Su0313, where normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination process result storage area 64h. The first determination process is then terminated.

If it is determined in step Su0308 that the currently grasped value of the hit random number counter C1 does not correspond to a jackpot (Su0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Su0314, where the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the memory area due to the current ball entering the starting hole is grasped. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0315, where the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table memory area 63c is referenced. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0316, where, as a result of referring to the reach judgment table, it is determined whether or not the currently grasped value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

If it is determined in step Su0316 that it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach (Su0316: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0317, and the ready-to-reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su0316 that it does not correspond to the occurrence of a reach (Su0316: NO), the first determination process is immediately terminated.

<Incoming ball processing for through ball>
Next, the entry process for a through ball will be explained. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 456: Su0105).

FIG. 459 is a flowchart showing the through ball entry process. In step Su0401, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step Su0401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Su0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0402, and whether or not the accessory reserve number SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) Determine whether or not. Note that the number of held accessory objects SN is a value indicating the number of balls entering the through gate 35 that are held in order to perform the electric accessory release lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of accessory items on hold is four. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Su0401: NO), the main through ball entering process is ended.

If it is determined in step Su0402 that the number of reserved reels SN is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (Su0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0403, where 1 is added to the number of reserved reels SN. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0404.

In step Su0404, the value of the electric role release counter C4 updated in step Su0103 (Fig. 456) is stored in the first free memory area in the electric role reserve area 64d of RAM 64. After that, the ball entry process for the through is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su0402 that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is not less than the upper limit (Su0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the ball entry process for through is terminated without storing the value of the electric reel opening counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal processing is a processing that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state (hereinafter, also referred to as "power-on"). In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 460 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Su0501, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, etc. are executed. Thereafter, the process advances to step Su0502.

In step Su0502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. Thereafter, the process advances to step Su0503.

In step Su0503, output data such as the start-up command set in step Su0502, the timer interrupt processing, or the command set in the previously executed normal processing is sent to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 70. In addition, if commands related to performance such as a start-up command, a variable command, a type command, or a first hold command are set, they are sent to the sound and light emission control device 90. After executing step Su0503, proceed to step Su0504.

In step Su0504, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0505.

In step Su0505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Su0506. In step Su0506, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display section 37a, second symbol display section 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game time control process will be described later. After executing step Su0506, the process advances to step Su0507.

In step Su0507, a gaming state transition process for shifting the gaming state is executed. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the gaming state transition process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step Su0508.

In step Su0508, an electric support process is executed to control the drive of the electric role 34a provided in the second starting port 34. In the electric support process, a determination is made as to whether or not to open the electric role 34a. The details of the electric support process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0509.

In step Su0509, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step Su0503). That is, it is determined whether the execution timing for the next normal process has arrived. In step Su0509, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Su0509: NO), in step Su0510 and step Su0511, until the next normal process execution timing is reached. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Su0510, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Su0511, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su0509 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (Su0509: YES), the process returns to step Su0503 and each process from step Su0503 to step Su0508 is executed. Execute.

Note that since the execution time of each process from step Su0503 to step Su0508 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process will be explained. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 460: Su0506) of the normal process.

Figure 461 is a flowchart showing the game play control process. In step Su0601, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The open/close execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is to be transitioned to the open/close execution mode in the game state transition process described below, and is turned OFF when the open/close execution mode is to be terminated in the game state transition process. Note that the open/close execution mode may be an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player.

In step Su0601, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (Su0601: YES), this game round control process is ended without executing any of the processes after step Su0602. That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, a game round is not started regardless of whether a ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Su0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Su0602.

In step Su0602, it is determined whether the special symbol unit 37 is displaying a change. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is displaying a change. This determination is made by determining whether the special symbol displaying a change flag in the special symbol displaying a change flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special symbol displaying a change flag is turned ON when a change display is to be started for either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, and is turned OFF when the change display is to end.

If it is determined in step Su0602 that the special chart unit 37 is not displaying a change (Su0602: NO), proceed to step Su0603.

In step Su0603, a change start process is executed to start the change display in the special chart unit 37 and the change display in the pattern display device 41. The change start process will be described in detail later. After executing step Su0603, this game play control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Su0602, when it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display (Su0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0604.

In step Su0604, a change end process is executed to end the change display in the special chart unit 37 and the change display in the pattern display device 41. The change end process will be described in detail later. After executing step Su0604, this game play control process is terminated.

<Change start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 461: Su0603).

Figure 462 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Su0701, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN exceeds "0". If the total reserved number CRN is "0" or less, this means that the start reserved number is "0" for both the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. Therefore, if it is determined in step Su0701 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" or less (Su0701: NO), this fluctuation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su0701 that the total reserved number CRN exceeds "0" (Su0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0702.

In step Su0702, a hold information shift process is executed to set the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation, and the process proceeds to step Su0703. Details of the pending information shift process will be described later.

In step Su0703, a fall determination process is performed, including the process when the fall lottery is won. The fall determination process will be described in detail later. Next, proceed to step Su0704.

In step Su0704, a winning determination process including a process when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is performed. Details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Su0704, the process advances to step Su0705.

In step Su0705, a variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is a process for setting a variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, based on the game state, whether or not a jackpot or time-saving bonus has been awarded, and whether or not a reach has occurred. The variable time setting process will be described in detail later. After executing step Su0705, the process proceeds to step Su0706.

In step Su0706, a variation command is set. The variation command includes information indicating whether the current game round is related to the reserved information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting hole 33 or based on a ball entering the second starting hole 34, as well as information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the variation time set in step Su0705. After executing step Su0706, proceed to step Su0707.

In step Su0707, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the presence or absence of time saving, and the result of distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes information on whether or not you won the jackpot in the winning lottery, information on whether you won the time saving award in the winning lottery, and information on the type of jackpot, including information on 8R probability variable jackpot, 8R normal It includes information on jackpots, 16R probability/variable jackpots, or missing results.

The variation command and type command set in step Su0706 and step Su0707 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Su0503 in the normal process (FIG. 460). The audio emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step Su0707, the process advances to step Su0708.

In step Su0708, the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round out of the first pattern display section 37a and the second pattern display section 37b is caused to start displaying a changing pattern. Specifically, if the second pattern display section flag in RAM 64 is not ON, the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first pattern display section 37a and a changing display is started, and if the second pattern display section flag is ON, the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second pattern display section 37b and a changing display is started. After executing step Su0708, the process proceeds to step Su0709.

In step Su0709, the special chart change display flag stored in the special chart change display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After step Su0709 is executed, this change start process is terminated.

<Pending information shift processing>
Next, pending information shift processing will be explained. The pending information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 462: Su0703).

Figure 463 is a flowchart showing the pending information shift process. In step Su0801, it is determined whether the second start pending number RbN stored in the pending number storage area of the second pending area Rb is greater than 0.

If it is determined in step Su0801 that the second start pending number RbN is not greater than 0 (i.e., it is 0) (step Su0801: NO), the pending information shift process for the first pending area is executed in steps Su0802 to Su0807. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su0801 that the second start pending number RbN is greater than 0 (step Su0801: YES), the pending information shift process for the second pending area is executed in steps Su0808 to Su0813. As a result, if pending information is stored in the second pending area Rb corresponding to the second start port 34, the pending information shift process for the second pending area in steps Su0808 to Su0813 is executed preferentially.

In step Su0802, the first start reserved number RaN in the first reserved area Ra is subtracted by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Su0803, where the total reserved number CRN is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0804. In step Su0804, the data stored in the first area of the first reserved area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0805.

In step Su0805, processing is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the upper area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Su0805, the process advances to step Su0806.

In step Su0806, when the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, that state is maintained. The second symbol display section flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the current variable display is the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. Thereafter, the process advances to step Su0807.

In step Su0807, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, it corresponds to the first starting port 33. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, this pending information shift process ends.

The shift command set in step Su0807 is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in step Su0503 in normal processing (FIG. 460). Based on the received shift command, the audio and light emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first pending display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the reduction in the number of pending items. The display control device 100, which receives the command, changes the display in the first pending display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the reduction in the number of pending items.

If it is determined in step Su0801 that the second start pending number RbN is greater than 0 (step Su0801: YES), proceed to step Su0808.

In step Su0808, the second start reservation number RbN of the second reservation area Rb is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Su0809. In step Su0809, the total pending number CRN is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step Su0810, in which the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process advances to step Su0811.

In step Su0811, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the second reserved area Rb. This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas sequentially to the higher area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, the fourth area to the third area, and so on. After executing step Su0811, proceed to step Su0812.

In step Su0812, if the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Thereafter, the process advances to step Su0813.

In step Su0813, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, it corresponds to the second starting port 34. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, this pending information shift process ends.

The shift command set in step Su0813 is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in step Su0503 in normal processing (FIG. 460). Based on the received shift command, the audio and light emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second pending display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the reduction in the number of pending items. The display control device 100, which has received the command, changes the display in the second pending display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the reduction in the number of pending items.

<Fall Determination Processing>
Next, the fall determination process will be described. The fall determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 462: Su0706).

FIG. 464 is a flowchart showing fall determination processing. In step Su0901, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Su0901, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (Su0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0902.

In step Su0902, the winning/losing table for the falling lottery is referenced to determine whether the winning/losing of the falling lottery has been determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the determination process execution area 64c matches the value set as a winning entry in the falling lottery winning/losing table (see FIG. 452) in the falling lottery table storage area 63d. In the following step Su0903, if the result of the winning/losing determination in step Su0902 is a winning entry in the falling lottery (Su0903: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0904.

In step Su0904, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0905, where a fall command is set. The fall command is a command for notifying the audio and light emission control device 90 that the fall lottery has been won and the win/lose lottery mode has transitioned from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. After step Su0905 is executed, this fall determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su0901 that the mode is not high probability mode (Su0901: NO), or if the result of the judgment in step Su0903 is that the fall lottery has not been won (Su0903: NO), the main fall determination process is immediately performed. finish.

<Hit detection process>
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 462: Su0707).

Figure 465 is a flowchart showing the winning determination process. In step Su1001, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in RAM 64 is ON or not. In step Su1001, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Su1001: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1002, where it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode or not. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flags storage area 64g in RAM 64 is ON or not.

If it is determined in step Su1002 that the mode is high probability mode (Su1002: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1003, where a win/loss determination is made by referring to the win/loss table for the first starting port (for high probability mode). Specifically, the process determines whether the value of the win random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/loss table for the first starting port (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. 449(b). Then, the process proceeds to step Su1008.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1002 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Su1002: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1004, where a win/loss determination is made by referring to the win/loss table for the first starting port (for low probability mode). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the win random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/loss table for the first starting port (for low probability mode) shown in FIG. 449(a). Then, the process proceeds to step Su1008.

If it is determined in step Su1001 that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Su1001: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1005, where it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Su1005 that the mode is high probability mode (Su1005: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1006, where a win/loss determination is made by referring to the win/loss table for the second starting port (for high probability mode). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the win random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/loss table for the second starting port (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. 450(b). Then, the process proceeds to step Su1006.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1005 that the mode is not high probability mode (Su1005: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1007, and a decision is made with reference to the pass/fail table for the second starting port (for low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is set as a jackpot winning in the winning/failure table (for low probability mode) for the second starting opening shown in FIG. 450(a). Determine whether the value matches the current value. Thereafter, the process advances to step Su1008.

In step Su1008, it is determined whether the result of the success/failure determination (winning lottery) in step Su1003, step Su1004, step Su1006, or step Su1007 is a jackpot win. In step Su1008, if the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Su1008: YES), the process advances to step Su1009.

In step Su1009, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Su1009 that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Su1009: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1010, where an allocation determination is made by referring to the allocation table for the first starting hole (Fig. 451 (a)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is included in the numerical range of an 8R special jackpot or the numerical range of an 8R normal jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Su1009, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Su1009: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1011, and the distribution table for the second starting port (FIG. 451(b)) is Refer to it and make a distribution decision. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is included in the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot. In the sorting table for the second starting opening of this embodiment, the sorting result is only one type of 16R probability variable jackpot, so the result of the above determination is always a 16R probability variable jackpot. After executing the process of step Su1010 or step Su1011, the process advances to step Su1012.

In step Su1012, a flag (jackpot flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Su1010 or step Su1011 is turned on. Specifically, if it is an 8R definite strange jackpot, turn on the 8R definite strange jackpot flag, if it is an 8R normal jackpot, turn on the 8R normal jackpot flag, and if it is a 16R certain strange jackpot, turn on the 16R certain strange jackpot flag. Turn it on. After executing step Su1012, the process advances to step Su1013.

In step Su1013, processing for setting a stop result for a jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game round in which the jackpot will be won, it is set which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display. This is the process to do so. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Su1010 or step Su1011 is obtained. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Su1013, the hit determination process ends.

In step Su1008, if the result of the winning lottery in step Su1003, step Su1004, step Su1006, or step Su1007 is not a jackpot win (Su1008: NO), proceed to step Su1014.

In step Su1014, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in step Su1007 is a time-saving grant win (a win in a time-saving grant). In step Su1014, if the result of the determination is that the time saving award has been won (Su1014: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1015.

In step Su1015, the time saving grant flag is turned on. Specifically, the time saving grant flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. The time saving award flag is a flag indicating that the time saving award has been won. After executing step Su1015, the process advances to step Su1016.

In step Su1016, processing for setting a stop result for time saving is executed. Specifically, this is a process for setting which stop result should be displayed in the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display in the current game round in which the player has won the time saving award. . Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for time saving in the stop result table storage area 63f, the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the stop result table storage area 63f is determined. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Su1016, the hit determination process ends.

In step Su1014, if the result of the judgment in step Su1007 is that the time-saving bonus has not been awarded (Su1014: NO), proceed to step Su1017.

In step Su1017, the reach judgment table is referenced to judge whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. Specifically, it is judged whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the judgment process execution area 64c matches the value set as the occurrence of a reach in the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c. Then, the process proceeds to step Su1018.

In step Su1018, if the result of the reach determination in step Su1017 is that a reach will occur in that game round (Su1018: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1019, where the reach occurrence flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Su1019, the process proceeds to step Su1020.

On the other hand, in step Su1018, if the result of the reach determination in step Su1017 is that a reach does not occur in the game round (Su1018: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1020 without executing step Su1019.

In step Su1020, a process for setting a stop result for a loss is executed. Specifically, this process is for setting which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b when the variable display ends in the current game round, which results in a loss. Specifically, by referencing the stop result table for a loss in the stop result table storage area 63f, address information for the stop result data corresponding to the value of the win random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is obtained, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 64. After executing step Su1020, the main win determination process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be explained. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 462: Su0708).

FIG. 466 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step Su1101, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Thereafter, the process advances to step Su1102.

In step Su1102, processing for specifying a variable time table is executed. The fluctuation time table is data in a tabular format whose data elements are information on the fluctuation time (fluctuation time information), which is the time from when the symbol starts fluctuating until it stops, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. The variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 stores various types of variable time tables depending on the gaming state, the presence or absence of jackpot and time saving, and the presence or absence of reach. In step S1102, one variable time table is identified from these variable time tables. Specifically, based on the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag, the current gaming state is determined to be one of a low probability low support state, a high probability high support state, a low probability high support state, and a high probability low support state. , and the determination result, the determination result of the validity determination that determines whether there is a jackpot or time-saving grant, and the determination result of the reach determination that determines the presence or absence of a reach occurrence for this game round. Based on this, one variable time table is specified from the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. After executing step Su1102, the process advances to step Su1103.

In step Su1103, the fluctuation time table identified in step Su1102 is referenced to obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Su1101. After executing step Su1103, proceed to step Su1104.

In step Su1104, the variable time information acquired in step Su1103 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process is terminated.

<Fluctuation end processing>
Next, the fluctuation end processing will be explained. The variation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 461: Su0604) of the game time control process.

Figure 467 is a flowchart showing the variation end process. In step Su1201, it is determined whether the variation time for the current game has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the pattern rows start to vary until all of the pattern rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Su1201, it is determined whether the value of the variation time information stored in the variation time counter area (various counter area 64f) of RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variation time information is set in the variation time setting process (Figure 466) described above. The value of this set variation time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started.

In step Su1201, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Su1201: NO), this fluctuation end process is ended.

If it is determined in step Su1201 that the change time has elapsed (Su1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1202, where a process is performed to end the change of the pattern in the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round, either the first pattern display section 37a or the second pattern display section 37b. In the following step Su1203, the special pattern change display flag stored in the special pattern change display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step Su1203, the process proceeds to step Su1204.

In step Su1204, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot win. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 8R guaranteed jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, and 16R guaranteed jackpot flag in RAM 64 is ON. In step Su1204, if it is determined that none of the above flags are ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a jackpot win (Su1204: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1205.

In step Su1205, a time-saving award process is executed when the winning lottery result for the current game round is a time-saving award. Note that the details of the time saving granting process will be described later. After executing step Su1205, the process advances to step Su1206.

In step Su1206, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Su1206 that the high probability mode flag is ON (Su1206: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1207, where the value of the ST play count counter SNC is decremented by 1. The ST play count counter SNC is a counter for counting how many more play times are required to reach the ST count in the number of play times continuously executed in the high probability mode. After executing step Su1207, the process proceeds to step Su1208.

In step Su1208, it is determined whether the number of games continuously executed in the high probability mode has reached the ST number (e.g., 10 times). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the ST game number counter SNC is 0. Since the ST game number counter SNC indicates the remaining number of ST games, it is possible to determine whether the number of games continuously executed in the high probability mode has reached the ST number by determining whether SNC = 0.

If it is determined in step Su1208 that the value of the ST game counter SNC is 0 (Su1208: YES), that is, if it is determined that the number of games continuously executed in the high probability mode has reached the ST number, the process proceeds to step Su1209, where the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step Su1210.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1208 that the value of the ST game number counter SNC is not 0 (Su1208: NO), that is, before the number of consecutively played games in the high probability mode reaches the ST number ( = within the ST number of times), the process proceeds to step Su1210 without executing step Su1209.

In addition, even if it is determined in step Su1206 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Su1206: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1210.

In step Su1210, it is determined whether the high support continuation state flag until the next time stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high support continuation state flag until the next time is a flag that indicates whether the high frequency support mode is continued as a support mode until the next jackpot is won (high support continuation state until the next time), and is a flag that indicates whether or not the high support support mode continues until the next jackpot is won. It is turned ON when it is determined that the time saving grant flag is ON in the granting process, and is turned OFF at the start of the opening/closing execution mode (at the start of the opening period).

In step Su1210, if it is determined that the high support continuation state flag is ON until the next time (Su1210: YES), this fluctuation termination process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1210 that the high support continuation state flag until the next time is not ON (Su1210: NO), proceed to step Su1211.

In step Su1211, it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Su1211 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Su1211: YES), proceed to step Su1212.

In step Su1212, the value of the time-saving play counter PNC is decremented by 1. The time-saving play counter PNC is a counter for counting how many more play times are required to reach the time-saving continuation count in the high-frequency support mode. Then, proceed to step Su1213.

In step Su1213, it is determined whether the number of times the game is continuously performed in the high-frequency support mode has reached the time-saving continuation count (e.g., 5 times). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving game counter PNC is 0 or less. Since the time-saving game counter PNC indicates the remaining number of times the time-saving continuation count is reached, it is possible to determine whether the number of times the game is continuously performed in the high-frequency support mode has reached the time-saving continuation count by determining whether PNC = 0.

In step Su1213, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving game counter PNC is 0 (Su1213: YES), that is, the number of games that are continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode has reached the time-saving continuation number. If it is determined that this is the case, the process advances to step Su1214 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After executing step Su1214, this variation end processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1213 that the value of the time-saving game counter PNC is not 0 (Su1213: NO), that is, the number of games that are continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode reaches the time-saving continuation number. If it is determined that it is before (=within the number of time saving continuations), the present variation end process is immediately ended without executing step Su1214.

Note that even if it is determined in step Su1211 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Su1211: NO), this fluctuation termination process is immediately terminated.

In step Su1204, if any of the 8R guaranteed jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, or 16R guaranteed jackpot flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for this game round is a jackpot win (Su1204: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1215, where the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Su1215, this variable time end process is terminated.

<Processing for time saving>
Next, the time saving granting process will be explained. The time saving process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 467: Su1205) of the variation end process.

FIG. 468 is a flowchart showing the time saving granting process. In step Su1301, it is determined whether the time saving grant flag is ON.

In step Su1301, if it is determined that the time saving flag is ON (Su1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1302 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, when the time-saving grant flag is ON, that is, when the time-saving grant is won in the winning lottery, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. After executing step Su1302, the process advances to step Su1303.

In step Su1303, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is sent to the audio emission control device 90 as a command to be transmitted. Set. After executing step Su1303, the process advances to step Su1304.

In step Su1304, the high support continuation state flag is set to ON until the next time, and then the process proceeds to step Su1305, where the until next time command is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the high support continuation state is in the state until the next time. The high support continuation state command is set as a command to be sent to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step Su1305, the process advances to step Su1306.

In step Su1306, the time-saving grant flag is turned OFF. After executing step Su1306, the time-saving grant process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1301 that the time saving grant flag is not ON (Su1301: NO), the time saving granting process is immediately ended.

<Game Status Transition Processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 460: Su0507).

Figure 469 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step Su1401, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON or not. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the large prize opening opening and closing processing period in the opening and closing execution mode (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is the period for executing the ending performance in the opening and closing execution mode.

In step Su1401, if it is determined that the ending period flag is not ON (Su1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1402, and it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the big winning opening opening/closing processing period starts, which is a period during which the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. , it is turned off at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b ends.

If it is determined in step Su1402 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Su1402: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1403, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Su1403 that the opening period flag is not ON (Su1403: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1404, where it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Su1404 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Su1404: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1405. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1404 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (Su1404: NO), the game state transition process ends.

In step Su1405, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After executing step Su1405, the process advances to step Su1406 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step Su1406, the process proceeds to step Su1407, where the high support continuation state flag is turned OFF until the next time. After executing step Su1407, the process advances to step Su1408.

In step Su1408, an opening/closing scenario setting process is executed to set an opening/closing scenario. The opening/closing scenario determines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b in a round of play, and in this embodiment, it is a program that records the conditions for transitioning the opening/closing door 36b from a closed state to an open state (hereinafter also referred to as "opening conditions") and the conditions for transitioning the opening/closing door 36b from an open state to a closed state (hereinafter also referred to as "closing conditions"). The opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63i of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing to start each round game in the opening/closing execution mode.
When the above-mentioned one item is satisfied, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

For example, the closing conditions are as follows.
- The elapsed time after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
- The number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening 36a after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit number.
When either one of the above two items is satisfied, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the V winning hole shutter 48a is controlled to be in an open state for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the opening/closing execution mode, and then to be in a closed state by the shutter opening/closing process described later. In other words, the opening/closing scenario that determines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b described above is set differently depending on whether the type of the jackpot is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot. When the type of the jackpot is a probability variable jackpot, that is, when the 8R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, the above-mentioned opening condition is set so that the period during which the V winning hole shutter 48a is in an open state is included (not a part of it, but the entirety of it) during the opening period of the opening/closing door 36b in the first round of the round play. This makes it easier for the game ball to enter the V winning hole 48 opened in the first round of the round play when a jackpot is won by the winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a probability variable jackpot.

In addition, instead of the configuration in which the opening period of the opening/closing door 36b in the first round of the round game includes a period in which the V winning a prize opening shutter 48a is in the open state, the opening/closing door 36b may be opened/closed in a number of rounds other than 1 of the round game. The opening period of the door 36b may include a period in which the V prize opening shutter 48a is in the open state. After executing step Su1408, the process advances to step Su1409.

In step Su1409, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as the opening time). In this embodiment, the same fixed opening time is set for each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (i.e., 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3, which determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in the various counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Su1409, proceed to step Su1410.

In step Su1410, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in step Su0503 in the normal processing (Fig. 460). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. Based on the received opening command, the sound and light emission control device 90 determines the content of the presentation corresponding to the opening time and the large prize opening/closing processing period, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step Su1410, the process proceeds to step Su1411, and the opening period flag is set to ON. After executing step Su1411, this game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step Su1403 that the opening period flag is ON (Su1403: YES), proceed to step Su1412.

In step Su1412, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Su1412 that the opening period has ended (Su1412: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1413, where the opening period flag is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step Su1414.

In step Su1413, a round display start process is executed to notify the type of the current opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays information on the round related to the above output. After executing step Su1414, the process advances to step Su1415.

In step Su1415, the opening/closing process period flag is turned ON. In the following step Su1415, an opening/closing process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of normal processing (FIG. 460: step Su0503). After executing step Su1415, this game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Su1402 that the open/close processing period flag is ON (Su1402: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1416, where the special prize opening open/close processing is executed. The special prize opening open/close processing will be described later. After executing step Su1416, the process proceeds to step Su1417.

In step Su1417, the shutter opening and closing process is executed. The shutter opening and closing process will be described later. After executing step Su1417, the process proceeds to step Su1418.

In step Su1418, it is determined whether the large prize opening/closing process has been completed. Specifically, it is determined whether the large prize opening/closing process has been completed based on whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b has been opened is "0". If it is determined in step Su1418 that the large prize opening/closing process has been completed (Su1418: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1419. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1418 that the large prize opening/closing process has not been completed (Su1418: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

In step Su1419, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step Su1420.

In step Su1420, a process for ending the round display is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step Su1420, the process proceeds to step Su1421.

In step Su1421, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, the same fixed length of ending time is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. Note that the fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Su1421, the process advances to step Su1422.

In step Su1422, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in step Su0503 in normal processing (FIG. 460). In the audio and light emission control device 90, based on receiving the ending command, the performance corresponding to the opening and closing execution mode is ended. After executing step Su1422, proceed to step Su1423.

In step Su1423, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, this game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step Su1401 that the ending period flag is ON (Su1401: YES), proceed to step Su1424.

In step Su1424, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Su1421), it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time in step Su1421 is "0". In step Su1424, if it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Su1424: YES), the process advances to step Su1425.

In step Su1425, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step Su1426, where the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game round after the current ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Su1426, the process proceeds to step Su1427.

In step Su1427, the open/close execution mode flag is turned OFF. After step Su1426 is executed, this game state transition process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1424 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which is set as the ending time, is not "0" (Su1424: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Big prize opening opening/closing process>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be explained. The big prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 469: Su1416) of the gaming state transition process.

Figure 470 is a flowchart showing the large prize opening/closing process. In step Su1501, it is determined whether the opening/closing door 36b is open or not. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the variable prize drive unit 36c. In step Su1501, if it is determined that the opening/closing door 36b is not open (Su1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1502.

In step Su1502, it is determined whether the conditions for opening the opening/closing door 36b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Su1502 that the conditions for opening the door 36b are satisfied (Su1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1503.

In step Su1503, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. Thereafter, the process advances to step Su1504.

In step Su1504, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The opening/closing door opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 460: Step Su0503) of the normal processing. Based on the received opening/closing door opening command, the audio emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has started, and also controls the contents of the presentation on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 to indicate the big winning opening. The content is updated to correspond to the fact that opening of the mouth 36a has started. Further, the audio light emission control device 90 transmits the opening/closing door opening command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received opening/closing door opening command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the big winning hole 36a for one round has started, and also changes the performance content on the symbol display device 41 to the big winning hole 36a. The content is updated to correspond to the start of release. After executing step Su1504, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

If it is determined in step Su1502 that the opening condition for the opening/closing door 36b is not met (Su1502: NO), the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps Su1503 and Su1504.

If it is determined in step Su1501 that the opening and closing door 36b is open (Su1501: YES), proceed to step Su1505.

In step Su1505, it is determined whether the closing conditions for the opening and closing door 36b are met. Specifically, the opening and closing scenario set by the opening and closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to close the opening and closing door 36b. In step Su1505, if it is determined that the closing conditions for the opening and closing door 36b are met (Su1505: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1506.

In step Su1506, the opening and closing door 36b is closed. Then, proceed to step Su1507.

In step Su1507, the open/close door close command is set. The open/close door close command is a command for the sub-side control device to recognize that the open/close door 36b has been closed. The open/close door close command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 460: step Su0503). Based on the received open/close door close command, the sound and light emission control device 90 determines that the opening of the large prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and updates the performance content in the various lamps 47 and speakers 46 to content corresponding to the completion of the opening of the large prize opening 36a. In addition, the sound and light emission control device 90 sends the open/close door close command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. Based on the received open/close door close command, the display control device 100 determines that the opening of the large prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and updates the performance content in the pattern display device 41 to content corresponding to the completion of the opening of the large prize opening 36a. After executing step Su1507, the large prize opening open/close process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Su1505 that the closing conditions for the opening and closing door 36b are not met (Su1505: NO), the large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated without executing steps Su1506 and Su1507.

<Shutter opening/closing process>
Next, the shutter opening/closing process will be explained. The shutter opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 469: Su1417) of the gaming state transition process.

Figure 471 is a flowchart showing the shutter opening and closing process. In step Su1601, it is determined whether the V prize opening shutter 48a is open or not. Specifically, whether the V prize opening shutter 48a is open or not is determined based on the operating state of the V prize opening shutter drive unit 48b (Figure 447).

In step Su1601, when it is determined that the V winning a prize opening shutter 48a is not open (Su1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1602.

In step Su1602, it is determined whether the conditions for opening the V winning a prize opening shutter 48a are satisfied. In this embodiment, as explained above, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the opening/closing execution mode, the V prize opening shutter 48a is in an open state for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and then is in a closed state. make it work like this. In order to realize this operation, in step Su1602, a timer counter counts whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the opening/closing execution mode and the opening timing has been reached, thereby establishing the opening condition for the V winning opening shutter 48a. Determine whether or not.

In step Su1602, if it is determined that the condition for opening the V winning opening shutter 48a is satisfied (Su1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1603 and the V winning opening shutter 48a is opened. After executing step Su1603, the process advances to step Su1606, which will be described later.

On the other hand, in step Su1602, if it is determined that the opening condition of the V winning a prize opening shutter 48a is not satisfied (Su1602: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1606 without executing step Su1603.

If it is determined in step Su1601 that the V winning port shutter 48a is open (Su1601: YES), proceed to step Su1604.

In step Su1604, it is determined whether the closing condition of the V winning a prize opening shutter 48a is satisfied. Specifically, by counting with a timer counter whether the above-mentioned certain period of time (10 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the V winning a prize opening shutter 48a opens and reaching the closing timing, the closing condition of the V winning a prize opening shutter 48a is determined. Determine whether it is true.

If it is determined in step Su1604 that the closing condition for the V winning opening shutter 48a is met (Su1604: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1605, where the V winning opening shutter 48a is closed. After executing step Su1605, the process proceeds to step Su1606.

On the other hand, in step Su1604, if it is determined that the closing condition of the V winning a prize opening shutter 48a is not satisfied (Su1604: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1606 without executing step Su1605.

In step Su1606, a V winning prize determination process is executed. The V winning prize determination process will be described later. After executing step Su1606, this shutter opening/closing process ends.

<V prize-winning judgment process>
Next, the V winning prize determination process will be explained. The V winning prize determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the shutter opening/closing process (FIG. 471: Su1606).

FIG. 472 is a flowchart showing the V winning prize determination process. In step Su1701, it is determined whether or not entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 48 has been detected. This determination is made from the detection signal of the detection sensor 67f that detects the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 48. In step Su1701, when it is detected that the game ball enters the V winning hole 48 (Su1701: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1702.

In step Su1702, the V winning flag is turned on. The V winning flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 48, and sets the lottery mode in the game round to be executed after the end of the round game to either a high probability mode or a low probability mode. It is used to determine whether The V winning flag is turned ON when the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 48 is detected, and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. After executing step Su1702, the process advances to step Su1703.

In step Su1703, a V winning command is set. The V winning command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 460: Step Su0503) of the normal process. The audio light emitting device that has received the V winning command executes settings for executing the V winning effect. The V winning presentation is a presentation for notifying the player that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 48. After executing step Su1703, the main V prize winning determination process ends.

On the other hand, if in step Su1701, entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 48 is not detected (Su1701: NO), the V winning determination process is terminated without executing steps Su1702 and Su1703.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 469: Su1426).

FIG. 473 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Su1801, it is determined whether the V winning flag is ON.

In step Su1801, if it is determined that the V winning flag is ON (Su1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1802 and flag deletion processing is executed. Specifically, the flags that are ON among the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag are turned OFF, and the flags that are not ON are maintained in that state. Also, turn off the V winning flag. After executing step Su1802, the process advances to step Su1803.

In step Su1803, the high probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step Su1804, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the game state transitions to one in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. After executing step Su1804, the process proceeds to step Su1805.

In step Su1805, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. . After executing step Su1805, the process advances to step Su1806.

In step Su1806, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. After executing step Su1806, proceed to step Su1807.

In step Su1807, the ST play count counter SNC provided in the various counter area 64f of RAM 64 is set to 10. The value set in the ST play count counter SNC is a value indicating the number of plays to be limited when the high probability mode is executed with the number of plays limited. After executing step Su1807, proceed to step Su1808.

In step Su1808, the time-saving play count counter PNC provided in the various counter area 64f of RAM 64 is set to 5. The value set in the time-saving play count counter PNC is a value indicating the number of plays to be limited when the high frequency support mode is executed with the number of plays limited. After step Su1808 is executed, the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1801 that the V winning flag is not ON (Su1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1809 and executes flag erasure processing. Specifically, the 16R special jackpot flag, 8R special jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag that are ON are turned OFF, and flags that are not ON are maintained in that state. After executing step Su1809, the process proceeds to step Su1810.

In step Su1810, a low probability mode command, which is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the low probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. . After executing step Su1810, the process advances to step Su1811.

In step Su1811, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as the command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. After executing step Su1811, the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated.

<Electricity support processing>
Next, the electric support process will be described. The electric support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 460: Su0508).

Figure 474 is a flowchart showing the electric support process. In step Su1901, it is determined whether or not support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support in progress flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support in progress flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric role 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened, and is turned OFF when the electric role 34a is returned to the closed state. In step Su1901, if it is determined that the support in progress flag is not ON (Su1901: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1902.

In step Su1902, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned ON when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. If it is determined in step Su1902 that the support winning flag is not ON (Su1902: NO), the process advances to step Su1903.

In step Su1903, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In step Su1903, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Su1903: NO), the main electronic role support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Su1903: YES), the process advances to step Su1904.

In step Su1904, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuating display of symbols in the common symbol unit 38. In step Su1904, if it is determined that it is the timing to end the variable display (Su1904: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1905, and after setting the out-of-line display, the main electric role support process is ended. By setting the missing display, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the regular pattern unit 38 is ended with the missing display being stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1904 that it is not the timing to end the variable display (Su1904: NO), the process advances to step Su1906.

In step Su1906, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0". In step Su1906, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is "0" (Su1906: NO), the process for electronic accessory support is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1906 that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0" (Su1906: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1907.

In step Su1907, it is determined whether the game is in the open/close execution mode, and then the process proceeds to step Su1908 to determine whether the game is in the high-frequency support mode. If the game is not in the open/close execution mode in step Su1907 (Su1907: NO) and is in the high-frequency support mode in step Su1908 (Su1908: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1909 to hold a lottery for opening the electric role. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role reserve area 64d is shifted, and if the value of the electric role opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric role opening lottery is won. In addition, at the same time as the electric role opening lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (i.e., 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Then, the process proceeds to step Su1910.

In step Su1910, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Su1909 is a support win. In step Su1910, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is a support win (Su1910: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1911, where the support win flag is turned ON and the support win flag is set in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the electric support support process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1910 that the result of the electric role opening lottery is not a support win (Su1910: NO), the electric role support processing ends without executing the processing of step Su1911.

If it is determined in step Su1907 that the mode is the open/close execution mode (Su1907: YES), or if it is determined in step Su1908 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (Su1908: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1912, where a lottery is held to open the electric role. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role reserve area 64d is shifted, and if the value of the electric role opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is between 0 and 190, the electric role opening lottery is won. In addition, simultaneously with the electric role opening lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (i.e. 29.5 sec). Then, the process proceeds to step Su1913.

In step Su1913, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Su1912 is a support win. In step Su1913, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Su1913: NO), the present electronic role support processing is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1913 that support has been won (Su1913: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1914, where the support win flag is turned on, and after setting "1" in the second round counter area RC2, , ends this electronic support process.

If it is determined in step Su1902 that the support winning flag is ON (Su1902: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1915, where it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal picture unit 38. If it is determined in step Su1915 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Su1915: NO), the image fluctuation display in the normal picture unit 38 is in progress, so the main electric role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1915 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Su1915: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1916.

In step Su1916, a winning display is set. As a result, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the normal pattern unit 38 is ended with the win display being stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Su1917, where the supporting flag is turned on and the support winning flag is turned off. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

In step Su1901, if it is determined that the supporting flag is ON (Su1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1918, and an electric utility opening/closing control process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

<Electricity switching control processing>
Next, the electric utility switching control process will be described. The electric utility switching control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the electric utility support process (FIG. 474: Su1918).

FIG. 475 is a flowchart showing the power opening/closing control process. In step Su2001, it is determined whether the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive section 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Su2001: YES), the process advances to step Su2002.

In step Su2002, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. In step Su2002, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Su2002: NO), the main power switch opening/closing control process is ended. That is, if the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

If it is determined in step Su2002 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Su2002: YES), the process proceeds to step Su2003, where a closing process is performed to control the electric role 34a to a closed state, and the second timer counter area T2 is set to "250" (i.e., 0.5 sec). In other words, if the second timer counter area T2, which serves as a means for measuring the open duration of the electric role 34a, is "0", the electric role 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is now used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration of the electric role 34a, and "250" is set to the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Su2003, the process proceeds to step Su2004.

In step Su2004, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step Su2005, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". In step Su2005, if it is determined that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Su2005: NO), the present electric role opening/closing control process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su2005 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Su2005: YES), the process proceeds to step Su2006 and the support flag is turned OFF. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

If it is determined in step Su2001 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Su2001: NO), the process proceeds to step Su2007, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the electric accessory 34a. In step Su2007, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Su2007: NO), the main power opening/closing control process is ended. On the other hand, in step Su2007, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Su2007: YES), the process proceeds to step Su2008 and executes an opening process to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state. . Thereafter, the process advances to step Su2009.

In step Su2009, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Su2009: NO), the process proceeds to step Su2010, in which it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step Su2010 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (Su2010: YES), the process proceeds to step Su2011, where the second timer counter area T2 is set to "800" (i.e., 1.6 sec). After that, the main electric device opening/closing control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in step Su2009 (Su2009: YES), or if it is determined that the high frequency support mode is not in step Su2010 (Su2010: NO), the process proceeds to step Su2012, and the second Set "100" (ie, 0.2 sec) in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

<<10-6>> Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed by the sound emission control device and the display control device in order to execute the preview performance and the result announcement performance will be described. First, the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Various processes executed in the audio emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 476 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the audio-optical side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Su2101, a command storage process is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing a received command in the audio-light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62. The audio-light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer to enable the storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are stored sequentially in the ring buffer and are read sequentially in the order in which they were stored. After executing step Su2101, proceed to step Su2102.

In step Su2102, pending command handling processing is executed. In the pending command corresponding processing, processing corresponding to the first pending command among the commands stored in step Su2101 is performed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step Su2102, the process advances to step Su2103.

In step Su2103, a game round performance setting process is executed. In the game round performance setting process, the performance to be executed in the game round from when the pattern change starts to when it stops is set. The game round performance setting process will be described in detail later. After executing step Su2103, the process proceeds to step Su2104.

In step Su2104, processing for the opening and closing execution mode presentation is executed. In the opening and closing execution mode presentation processing, processing related to the presentation during the opening period, the presentation during the large prize opening and closing processing period, and the presentation during the ending period is executed. After executing step Su2104, proceed to step Su2105.

In step Su2105, background effect processing is executed. In the background effect processing, processing is performed to display a background moving image determined in accordance with a command indicating a gaming state received from the main side MPU 62 on the symbol display device 41. For example, perform processing to display a background video indicating that high-frequency support mode is continuing, a background video indicating that high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that high-probability mode is continuing. . After executing step Su2105, the process advances to step Su2106.

In step Su2106, a process for V winning presentation is executed. In the process for V winning presentation, a process for displaying a presentation image (video) determined according to the V winning command received from the main MPU 62 on the pattern display device 41 is executed. Specifically, during the execution of the large prize opening opening/closing process in the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined whether or not a V winning command has been received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that the command has been received, a process for displaying a presentation image on the pattern display device 41 to inform the player that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 48 is executed. By visually recognizing the presentation image displayed on the pattern display device 41 indicating that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 48, the player can recognize that he has won a jackpot by lottery and that the type of the jackpot won is a guaranteed jackpot. After executing step Su2106, the process proceeds to step Su2107.

In step Su2107, a process for a fall effect is executed. In the process for a fall effect, a process for displaying an effect image (video) determined according to the fall command received from the main MPU 62 on the pattern display device 41 is performed. Specifically, when the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode (i.e., in the high probability high support state), a process for determining whether or not a fall command has been received from the main MPU 62 is performed, and if it is determined that a fall command has been received, a process for displaying an effect image that may indicate that a state advantageous to the player has been achieved on the pattern display device 41 is performed. By visually recognizing the effect image displayed on the pattern display device 41 that may indicate that a state advantageous to the player has been achieved, the player can recognize that the lottery mode has shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and as a result, the mode has shifted to the low probability high support state H5 in which the next big win is practically guaranteed.

On the other hand, when the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode (i.e., in the high probability low support state) and there is a special 2 remaining reserve, it is determined whether or not a fall command has been received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that a fall command has been received, a process is performed to display on the pattern display device 41 an effect image that may indicate that the player is in an advantageous state. By visually recognizing the effect image displayed on the pattern display device 41 that may indicate that the player is in an advantageous state, the player can recognize that the lottery mode has shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and as a result, the mode has shifted via the special 2 remaining reserve consumption in progress H1b in the low probability low support state H1, to the low probability high support state H5 in which the next big win is essentially guaranteed.

When the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode (i.e., in a high probability low support state), and there is no special 2 remaining reserve, it is determined whether or not a fall command has been received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that a fall command has been received, a process is performed to display on the pattern display device 41 an effect image that may indicate that the player is in an unfavorable state. By visually recognizing the effect image displayed on the pattern display device 41 that may indicate that the player is in an unfavorable state, the player can recognize that the lottery mode has shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and as a result, has shifted to the low probability low support state H1. After executing step Su2107, proceed to step Su2108.

In step Su2108, a high support continuation production process is executed until the next time. In the high support continuation performance until next time processing, processing is performed to display a performance image (video) determined according to the high support continuation status command until the next time received from the main side MPU 62 on the symbol display device 41. By viewing the effect image displayed on the symbol display device 41 and determined according to the high support continuation state until next time command, the player can enter a state in which the high frequency support mode continues as the support mode until the next jackpot is won. It is possible to recognize that the state has transitioned to a high support continuation state until the next time. After executing step Su2108, the process advances to step Su2109.

In step Su2109, other processing is executed. The other processing is, for example, processing for displaying a demo image (video) on the pattern display device 41 when the player is not playing. After executing step Su2109, the process proceeds to step Su2110.

In step Su2110, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission of the various lamps 47 is controlled based on the light emission data read out in each of the above-described production processes. After executing step Su2110, the process advances to step Su2111.

In step Su2111, an audio output control process is executed to control the audio output of the speaker 46. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is executed based on the audio data read in the above-mentioned BGM process and each performance process. After executing step Su2111, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Pending command handling process>
Next, the pending command handling process will be explained. The pending command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 476: Su2102).

Figure 477 is a flowchart showing the hold command response process. In step Su2201, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step Su2201, if it is determined that a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Su2201: YES), the process proceeds to step Su2202.

In step Su2202, it is determined whether the pending command to be read this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. In step Su2202, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time was transmitted based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33 (Su2202: YES), the process advances to step Su2203, and the Update processing of the first pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the optical side RAM 94 is executed. The first reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 in the audio-optical side MPU 92. In the process of updating the first pending quantity counter area, the information in the first pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the pending command that is currently read. After executing step Su2203, the process advances to step Su2205.

In step Su2202, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Su2202: NO), that is, the pending command is If it is determined that the transmission was based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process proceeds to step Su2204, and updates the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. Execute. The second reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 in the sound-light side MPU 92. In the process of updating the second pending quantity counter area, the information in the second pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the command that is currently read. After executing step Su2204, the process advances to step Su2205.

The reason why steps Su2203 and Su2204 are processed as described above will be explained. In this embodiment, while the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, but backup power is not supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound and light emission control device 90. For this reason, when the power supply is cut off in a situation where the reserved information related to the ball entering the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the reserved information is stored and held in the main control device 60, but the sound and light emission control device 90 understands that there is zero reserved information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area is counted up each time the sound and light emission control device 90 receives a reserved command, an inconvenience may occur in which the number of reserved information actually stored in the main control device 60 does not match the number of reserved information understood by the sound and light emission control device 90. In response to this, in the present embodiment described above, the main control unit 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of held items, and the audio/light emission control unit 90 adopts a configuration in which the information on the number of held items included in the command is set in the first held item number counter area or the second held item number counter area each time the hold command is received, thereby preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In step Su2205, an update process is executed for the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The total reserved number counter area is a counter area for identifying in the sound/light side MPU 92 the sum of the number of reserved information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 and the number of reserved information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34. In this update process, the information in the total reserved number counter area is updated to the sum of the information on the number of reserved items measured in the first reserved number counter area and the information on the number of reserved items measured in the second reserved number counter area. After executing step Su2205, proceed to step Su2206.

If it is determined in step Su2201 that a hold command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Su2201: NO), the process proceeds to step Su2206 without executing steps Su2202 to Su2205.

In step Su2206, the pending display control process is executed. Specifically, the display mode (color and combination of LED lamps to be lit) of the first pending display unit 37c is controlled based on the number of pending information pieces obtained based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 identified in step Su2203, and the display mode (color and combination of LED lamps to be lit) of the second pending display unit 37d is controlled based on the number of pending information pieces obtained based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34 identified in step Su2204. After executing step Su2206, this pending command response process is terminated.

<Game play performance setting process>
Next, the game play effect setting process will be described. The game play effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 476: Su2103).

FIG. 478 is a flowchart showing the game round performance setting process. In step Su2301, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command have been received. In step Su2301, if it is determined that the variation command and the type command have not been received (Su2301: NO), the present game performance setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su2301 that the variation command and the type command have been received (Su2301: YES), the process advances to step Su2302.

In step Su2302, the currently received variation command and type command are read, and from these commands, the presence or absence of a jackpot, the presence or absence of a time-saving grant, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a reach, and information on the variation time are respectively ascertained. The ascertained information is then stored in a register in the sound/light side MPU 92. After that, the process proceeds to step Su2303.

In step Su2303, a production pattern setting process is executed. The effect pattern setting process is a process of determining and setting the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round (contents and execution timing of the preview effect, the ready-to-reach effect) based on the effect pattern table. Details of the production pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Su2303, the process advances to step Su2304.

In step Su2304, a setting process for the stop symbols is executed. In the setting process for the stop symbols, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game is a 16R variable probability jackpot, an 8R variable probability jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, information corresponding to the stopping result in which the same combination of symbols is established on the active line L1 (see FIG. 446) is set as the information for the current stop symbols. Specifically, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game is a 16R variable probability jackpot or an 8R variable probability jackpot, a combination of the same odd symbols may be selected as the combination of the same symbols, and a combination of the same even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd symbols and the combination of the same even symbols, but instead, the former may be configured to have a higher selection rate than the latter, or the latter may be configured to have a higher selection rate than the former. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R variable probability jackpot. Furthermore, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is an 8R regular jackpot, a combination of the same even-numbered symbols will be selected as the combination of the same symbols.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the current game round is a miss, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the content of the variation command. If it is determined that a reach has occurred, the information corresponding to a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not formed on the active line L1 and a reach symbol combination is formed on the active line L1 is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that a reach has not occurred, the information corresponding to a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not formed on the active line L1 and a reach symbol combination is not formed on the active line L1 is set as the information of the current stop symbol.

If the winning lottery result for the current game round is a time-saving symbol, information corresponding to the stopping result in which a predetermined symbol combination is formed on the active line L1 (see FIG. 446) is set as the information for the current stopping symbol. For example, the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the time-saving symbol is [3, 4, 1] (see FIG. 446). After executing step Su2304, proceed to step Su2305.

In step Su2305, a process is executed to set the variable display pattern for the current game round. In this process, information on the variable time for the current game round is identified from the content of the currently received variable command, and a variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of the variable time information and the information on the stopping symbols set in step Su2304 is selected. When selecting a variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound/light side ROM 93 is referenced. Then, the process proceeds to step Su2306.

In step Su2306, the information on the presentation pattern set in step Su2303, the stopping symbol set in step Su2304, and the variable display pattern set in step Su2305 for the current game round is set in the presentation command. Then, the process proceeds to step Su2307, and the presentation command is sent to the display side MPU 102. The display side MPU 102 executes a process to display the presentation content corresponding to the received presentation command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Su2307, the process proceeds to step Su2308.

In step Su2308, update processing at the start of fluctuation is executed. The update processing at the start of fluctuation is processing for updating the pending display in the first pending display area Ds1 or the second pending display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. Details of the update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described later. After executing step Su2308, this game round performance setting processing is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be explained. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 478: Su2303) of the game round effect setting process.

FIG. 479 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process. In step Su2401, the random number RN for the production pattern is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound and light side RAM 94. Thereafter, the process advances to step Su2402.

In step Su2402, processing for specifying the effect pattern table is executed. The performance pattern table is three-dimensional tabular data whose data elements are a performance pattern to be executed in a game round, a variation time, and a random number RN for the performance pattern. The performance pattern table storage area 93a of the ROM 93 stores various types of performance pattern tables corresponding to the presence or absence of a jackpot, the presence or absence of time saving, and the presence or absence of a reach. In step Su2402, one effect pattern table is specified from these effect pattern tables. Specifically, based on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the presence or absence of a time saving grant, the type of jackpot, and the presence or absence of a reach occurrence, which are grasped in step Su2302 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 478), the performance pattern table storage area of the ROM 93 is stored. One of the performance pattern tables 93a is specified. After executing step Su2402, the process advances to step Su2403.

In step Su2403, the performance pattern table specified in Su2402 is referred to, and the fluctuation time grasped in step Su2302 of the game round performance setting process (FIG. 478) and the value of the random number RN for the current performance pattern obtained in step Su2401. To obtain a performance pattern corresponding to After executing step Su2403, the process advances to step Su2404.

In step Su2404, the effect pattern acquired in step Su2403 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Su2404, the main effect pattern setting process is ended.

<Update process when fluctuation starts>
Next, the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game play performance setting process (FIG. 478: Su2308).

FIG. 480 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step Su2501, it is determined whether the fluctuation command received this time is related to the reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. In step Su2501, if it is determined that the fluctuation command received this time is related to the reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Su2501: YES), the process proceeds to step Su2502, The information in the first pending quantity counter area is updated so that the number stored in the first pending quantity counter area of the sound/light side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Su2504.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su2501 that the fluctuation command received this time is not related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Su2501: NO), the process proceeds to step Su2503. Then, the information in the second pending quantity counter area is updated so that the number stored in the second pending quantity counter area of the sound/light side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Su2504.

In step Su2504, the information in the total number of pending items counter area is updated so that the total number of pending items stored in the total number of pending items counter area of the audio-optical side RAM 94 is subtracted by one. Thereafter, the update process at the start of the fluctuation is ended.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main process that is executed when a command is received from the audio emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed.

After powering on, the MPU 102 executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal. Note that if a command is received and a V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, the contents of the command received from the audio and light emission control device 90 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 481 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Su2601, the initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized, and the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings required for initialization are performed. Then, the process proceeds to step Su2602.

In step Su2602, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio emission control device 90.

FIG. 482 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Su2701, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 483 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt processing is executed when a V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and an image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 is identified, and an instruction is issued to the VDP 105 to draw and display the image.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed, and is also transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive instructions to draw the next image before the image drawing or display processing has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or display It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which image information is stored. The details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Su2801, command response processing is executed. In the command response processing, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 482) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a performance command is stored, control of the drawing and display of the image is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

If a performance operation command has been stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed, and if it is determined that it is the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed, control of the drawing and display of the image is started so that the performance mode corresponding to the pressing of the performance operation button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the period during which the performance operation button 24 can be pressed, the contents of the next command are analyzed without executing any processing.

In addition, in the command response process (Su2801), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processes corresponding to all the analyzed commands are executed. The reason for this is explained below. The command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the performance is set by the sound and light emission control device 90 and the performance is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the performance are stored in the command storage area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the form of the performance, such as the preview performance or the stop pattern set by the sound and light emission control device 90, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that form is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

In step Su2802, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which is set by the command corresponding process (Su2801) etc. . Thereafter, the process advances to step Su2803.

In step Su2803, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which is specified by the display setting process (Su2802), the type of character (sprite, display object) that makes up the image is determined. At the same time, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification, rotation angle, etc., are determined. Thereafter, the process advances to step Su2804.

In step Su2804, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing processing, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each character, which were determined by the task processing (Su2803), are sent to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on this information, and transmits the image data to the pattern display device 41 together with a drive signal so that the image drawn based on the information received in the previous V interrupt processing is displayed on the pattern display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Su2805, where other processing is executed, and the V interrupt processing is terminated. Above, an example of specific control for executing various processing including the big win presentation in the pachinko machine 10 has been described.

《10-7》Action/Effect:
As explained above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-accuracy, high-support state H4, the number of executions of the game after the high-frequency support mode is started reaches the number of time-saving continuations (5 times). (within 10 days), the lottery mode in the game round in which the player won the fall lottery is changed from high probability mode to low probability mode, and as a result, the high probability high support state H4 changes to the low probability high support state H5. will be migrated. Then, in the low-probability, high-support state H5, the lottery result of the winning lottery is either a jackpot win or a time-saving grant win. If you win the time-saving grant in the winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode continues as the support mode until you win the next jackpot. In the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is frequently in the open state, making it easier for game balls to enter the second starting port 34, and making it difficult for the player to reduce the amount of balls he has. Thus, the winning lottery, which is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, can be executed with high frequency. Therefore, if it is possible to shift to the low-probability high-support state H5, the next jackpot is virtually guaranteed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability, high-support state H4, not only can the player expect to win a jackpot in the winning lottery, but also the game after the high-frequency support mode is started. A player can be made to expect to win a falling lottery in a game round in which the number of times the round is executed is 5 or less.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the low probability high support state H5, the player can feel secure that the high frequency support mode will not end as a lottery mode until the player wins the jackpot in the next winning lottery, while the player's balls are not likely to decrease.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of times the game is executed after transitioning to the high probability high support state H4 without winning either the winning lottery or the falling lottery in the high probability high support state H4. has reached five times, the support mode is shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, and as a result, the high-certainty high support state H4 is shifted to the high-certainty low support state H6. In the high probability low support state H6, immediately after transitioning from the high probability high support state H4 to the high probability low support state H6, if pending information remains in the second reservation area Rb of the pending information storage area 64b, this A winning lottery is performed with priority based on the remaining pending information (special 2 remaining pending). That is, immediately after transitioning from the high certainty high support state H4 to the high certainty low support state H6, if there is a special 2 remaining pending, the state is shifted to the state H6a in which the special 2 remaining pending is being used up. Then, in the mode H6a in which the special 2 remaining balance is being used up, if you win the falling lottery, you will be transferred to the mode H1b in which the special 2 remaining balance is being used up in the low probability low support state H1, and in the game round in which you won the fall, A jackpot or a time-saving award is won, and when the time-saving award is won, a transition is made from a low-probability, low-support state H1 to a low-probability, high-support state H5 in which winning the next jackpot is substantially guaranteed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the aspect H6a during which the Toku 2 remaining reservation is being used up, not only can the player expect to win a jackpot in the winning lottery, but also the Toku 2 remaining reservation can be made. In the intervening game rounds, players can be made to expect to win the falling lottery.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the fall lottery is won in the mode H6a during the consumption of the special 2 remaining reserve in the high-probability low support state H6, the state will transition to the high-probability high support state H4 via the mode H1b during the consumption of the special 2 remaining reserve in the low-probability low support state H1, the low-probability high support state H5, and the opening and closing execution mode H3. In other words, if the fall lottery is won in the mode H6a during the consumption of the special 2 remaining reserve in the high-probability low support state H6, there is a high probability (100% probability in this embodiment) of transitioning again to the high-probability high support state H4. On the other hand, if the fall lottery is won in the mode H6b during left hitting in the high-probability low support state H6, the state will transition to the mode H1a during left hitting in the low-probability low support state H1, so the probability of transitioning again to the high-probability high support state H4 is lower than the high probability (100% probability in this embodiment). In other words, if the drop lottery is won in mode H6b during left hit in the high-probability low support state H6, the state will transition back to the high-probability high support state with a lower probability than the high probability. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the player can be made to hope that the drop lottery will be won before mode H6a during the consumption of the remaining special 2 reserve in the high-probability low support state H6 ends. Furthermore, according to this embodiment, if the drop lottery is won in mode H6a during the consumption of the remaining special 2 reserve in the high-probability low support state H6, the state will transition back to the high-probability high support state H4 with a 100% probability (as it is guaranteed that the state will transition back to the high-probability high support state H4), so the player can have a greater sense of expectation.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the player wins the fall lottery before all the winning lotteries for the special 2 remaining reserves acquired in the high-probability high support state H4 are completed, the game machine is transitioned to a low-probability high support state H5, which is guaranteed to transition back to the high-probability high support state H4, and if the number of game plays after the transition to the high-probability high support state H4 reaches a predetermined number (ST number) without winning the fall lottery, the game machine is transitioned to a low-probability low support state H1, in which the probability of transitioning back to the high-probability high support state H4 is lower than that of the low-probability high support state H5. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the player can expect to win the fall lottery and transition to the low-probability high support state H5 by the time the winning lotteries for all the special 2 reserve information stored in the high-probability high support state H4 are completed. That is, according to this embodiment, in the high probability high support state H4, the player can be made to expect to win a jackpot by the high probability mode in which the probability of winning a jackpot is high, and further, can be made to expect to win the fall lottery and transition to the low probability high support state H5 by the time the winning lottery for all the special 2 reserved information stored in the high probability high support state H4 is completed. Conventionally, the player was only made to expect to win a jackpot by the time the winning lottery for all the special 2 reserved information stored in the high probability high support state H4 is completed, but according to this embodiment, the player can also be made to expect to win the fall lottery and transition to the low probability high support state H5 by the time the winning lottery for all the special 2 reserved information stored in the high probability high support state H4 is completed. Furthermore, by adopting a configuration in which the low-probability high support state H5 continues until a jackpot is won and the opening/closing execution mode H3 is initiated, and a transition to the high-probability high support state H4 is guaranteed after the opening/closing execution mode H3 ends, the player can be given the peace of mind that even if he or she does not win a jackpot before the winning lottery for all of the special 2 reserved information stored in the high-probability high support state H4 is completed, if he or she wins the fall lottery before the winning lottery for all of the special 2 reserved information stored in the high-probability high support state H4 is completed, the opening/closing execution mode H3 is guaranteed and a transition to the high-probability high support state H4 is guaranteed again. According to this embodiment, if the number of times that a game is played after transitioning to the high-probability high support state H4 reaches a predetermined number (ST number) without winning the drop-out lottery, the state transitions to the low-probability low support state H1, in which the probability of transitioning back to the high-probability high support state H4 is lower than that of the low-probability high support state H5. This gives the player a sense of urgency that the number of times that a game is played after transitioning to the high-probability high support state H4 will reach a predetermined number without winning a jackpot in the high-probability high support state H4, and without winning the drop-out lottery before the winning lottery for all the special 2 reserved information stored in the high-probability high support state H4 is completed.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the high probability high support state H4, if the game rounds of the time-saving continuation number are executed without winning the fall lottery, the state is shifted to the high probability low support state H6, and if the fall lottery is won during the winning lottery for special 1 in the mode H6b during left hitting in the high probability low support state H6, the state is shifted to the low probability low support state H1, which is less advantageous for the player than the high probability low support state H6. In other words, according to this embodiment, even if the same fall lottery is won, the function is different between the case where the fall lottery is won in the high probability high support state H4 and the case where the fall lottery is won in the mode H6b during left hitting in the high probability low support state H6. Specifically, if the player wins the fall lottery in the high probability high support state H4, the game state transitions to one in which the player has a higher advantage (a transition from the high probability high support state H4 to the high probability low support state H6), whereas if the player wins the fall lottery during the winning lottery for special 1 in the mode H6b during left hitting in the high probability low support state H6, the game state transitions to one in which the player has a lower advantage (a transition from the high probability low support state H6 to the low probability low support state H1). In other words, according to this embodiment, winning the fall lottery is an opportunity to transition to a game state in which the player has a higher advantage, and also an opportunity to transition to a game state in which the player has a lower advantage, so that the freedom of design of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved and the diversification of gameplay can be facilitated.

According to this embodiment, if the player wins the fall lottery in the high probability high support state H4, the game state is changed so that the player has a higher advantage, so the player can be made to expect that he will win the fall lottery in the high probability high support state H4. On the other hand, if the player wins the fall lottery during the winning lottery for special 1 in the mode H6b during left hitting in the high probability low support state H6, the game state is changed so that the player has a lower advantage, so the player can be made to think that he does not want to win the fall lottery in the mode H6b during left hitting in the high probability low support state H6. In other words, the player can be made to expect that he will win the fall lottery in the high probability high support state H4, and then, after the transition to the mode H6b during left hitting in the high probability low support state H6, the player can be made to think that he does not want to win the fall lottery. In this way, as the game state changes, the player can have opposing emotions in response to winning the drop lottery, adding variety to the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the player wins the falling lottery, the lottery mode changes and the game state shifts. Changing the lottery mode and shifting the gaming state has a large effect on the advantage for the player. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make the player have a strong interest in whether or not he or she will win the falling lottery, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can increase the player's interest in the game by giving them feelings of expectation, security, and tension.

In addition, "in the state H6a in which special 2 remaining reservations are being used up in the high certainty low support state H6, if the falling lottery is won" is obtained in the high certainty high support state H4, and is stored in the second reservation area of the reservation information storage area 64b. This can be expressed as a case in which a winning lottery is won before the winning determination for each of the special 2 remaining reservations stored in Rb is completed in the high probability low support state H6. Therefore, until the hit determination for each of the special 2 remaining reservations acquired in the high probability high support state H4 and stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b is completed in the high probability low support state H6. If you win the falling lottery, you will be transferred to the special 2 remaining pending state H1b in the low-probability low support state H1, and you will win a jackpot or time-saving award in the game round in which you won the falling. When winning the time saving grant, the low probability low support state H1 is shifted to the low probability high support state H5 in which the next jackpot win is substantially guaranteed.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high probability high support state H4, the number of games played after shifting to the high probability high support state H4 is within the number of time saving continuations (5 times) and wins the falling lottery. In this case, the state moves from the high probability high support state H4 to the low probability high support state H5 in which the next variable probability jackpot is guaranteed. In addition, in the high-certainty, low-support state H6, which has transitioned from the high-certainty, high-support state H4 after the number of short-time continuations (5 times) has passed, a falling lottery will occur within the number of gaming times corresponding to the number of special 2 remaining pending pieces. If you win, the next guaranteed strange jackpot will be won from the mode H6a in which the special 2 balance is being held in the high probability low support state H6, through the mode H1b in which the special 2 balance is being held in the low probability low support state H1. Transition to guaranteed low certainty high support state H5. For this reason, when moving to the high probability high support state H4, the probability (continuation rate) of winning the jackpot next time is the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery (distribution is 100% probability variable jackpot). When transitioning from the state H4 to the low-probability high support state H5, and from the high-probability high support state H4 to the high-probability low support state H6, the special condition in the low-probability low support state H1 is It is necessary to calculate this by taking into consideration the case of transitioning to the mode H1b in which 2 remaining items are pending and being consumed. Specifically, as explained above, it is a value calculated by the following equation (4) (=formula (4) shown earlier).

Continuation rate = 1 - [{(1 - 1/3) x (1 - 1/20)}^5] x
[{(1-1/3) x (1-1/20)}^4] x
{(1-1/3) x (1-1/20) x (1-1/2)} ... (4)

When formula (4) is calculated, the continuation rate is approximately 99.5%. In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has a continuous playing system that is completely different from conventional pachinko machines, and can realize an extremely high-spec machine in terms of continuous playing performance.

According to the pachinko machine 10 having the above-mentioned consecutive game performance, the following effects are also achieved compared to conventional pachinko machines. Conventionally, there are two types of pachinko machines that have different methods for making jackpots continue: a loop type and an ST type. In a loop-type pachinko machine, it is certain that the next jackpot will be won in the high probability and high support state, so the continuation rate is determined based on the probability of being allocated to the probability variable jackpot when the jackpot is won. This means that in a loop-type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability that when the symbols are aligned, the aligned symbols will be variable symbols (for example, the "7" symbol). For this reason, in the high-accuracy, high-support state, the player simply watches as the game rounds are completed and hopes that when the symbols line up, the aligned symbols will be variable probability symbols. . On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as explained earlier, in the high-accuracy, high-support state H4, the number of times the game is executed after the high-frequency support mode is started is the number of time-saving continuations. Each game within 5 times and up to 4 times (as mentioned above, it may be 5 times) executed based on the special 2 remaining pending after transitioning to the high certainty low support state (state H6) In each game round, the player can be made to expect to win the falling lottery or the winning lottery. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to give a greater sense of anticipation compared to the conventional loop-type pachinko machine.

For ST-type pachinko machines, the continuation rate in a high-probability, high-support state is determined by calculating the probability of not winning a jackpot in the winning lottery per game, calculating the probability of winning in all ST numbers, and subtracting the probability of winning from 1. It can be found by Therefore, in the ST type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability of matching the symbols (probability of winning the jackpot) and the number of STs. Therefore, in ST type pachinko machines, as the number of games played in the high-accuracy, high-support state progresses, the sense of urgency that the number of games played will reach the ST number without winning a jackpot is created. It can be granted to a person. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the period from the high-accuracy, high-support state (state H4) to the high-accuracy, low-support state (state H6), in addition to winning a jackpot (the symbols are aligned), there is also a fall. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as if he or she will not win the lottery and run out of special 2 remaining reservations. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, compared to the conventional ST type pachinko machine, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of urgency by adding the fall win to the jackpot win. can.

As a pachinko machine having other game characteristics, the following configuration is also conceivable. In a specific advantageous state advantageous to the player, if a small jackpot is won in a winning lottery (a small jackpot is won with a high probability) before the number of games played after the transition to the advantageous state reaches a predetermined number, a game ball enters the V winning hole, and the game continues to the opening and closing execution mode (round game). According to this configuration, the number of games played before the transition from the advantageous state to the opening and closing execution mode is consumed in a short time, so the opening and closing execution mode is repeated at short intervals, and there is a problem that the gambling nature is excessively increased. In contrast, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the route from the high probability high support state H4 to the opening and closing execution mode H3, it is possible to go through the low probability high support state H5, which is a lottery mode in which a winning lottery can be repeatedly performed in a low probability mode, which is guaranteed to finally win a jackpot, so that it is possible to take a sufficient amount of time to transition from the high probability high support state H4 to the opening and closing execution mode H3. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can prevent the open/close execution mode from being repeated at short intervals, which can lead to an excessive increase in gambling. In addition, by taking a sufficient amount of time, it is possible to achieve the secondary effect of making it possible to perform various effects. These effects can never be achieved by the configuration of pachinko machines with the other game characteristics described above.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has excellent effects compared to various types of conventional pachinko machines.

<<10-8>> Modification of the tenth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as in the above embodiment will be omitted.

<<10-8-1>> Variation 1:
In this modified example 1, when the number of consecutive wins of the special jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the number of times of special jackpot continuation) reaches an upper limit (limit), even if the special jackpot is won, the lottery mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode based on the special jackpot becomes the low probability mode. This will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 484 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game in the pachinko machine of modification 1. As shown in FIG. 484, the pachinko machine of modification 1 is equipped with a variable probability limit function in the opening/closing execution mode H3 that is executed when a jackpot is won in the low probability low support state (state H1) and the probability variable jackpot is assigned. It is being

In the opening and closing execution mode H3, the following process is executed as a special chance limit function. First, in the state H1a during left hitting in the low probability low support state H1, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the allocation result according to the allocation judgment is a special chance jackpot (so-called, winning a special chance jackpot on the first win), and the mode transitions to the opening and closing execution mode H3, the special chance continuation count counter is set to 1. After that, each time a jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the allocation result according to the allocation judgment is a special chance jackpot, and the mode transitions to the opening and closing execution mode H3, the value of the special chance continuation count counter is incremented by 1. Then, it is determined whether the value of the continuous probability change counter has reached a predetermined continuous probability change limit number (for example, 3 times), and if it is determined that the value of the continuous probability change counter has not reached the continuous probability change limit number, after the end of the opening and closing execution mode H3, the lottery mode is shifted to the high probability mode, and the support mode is shifted to the high frequency support mode, as in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the 10th embodiment, thereby shifting from the opening and closing execution mode H3 to the high probability high support state H4. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the continuous probability change counter has reached the continuous probability change limit number, after the end of the opening and closing execution mode H3, the lottery mode is shifted to the low probability mode, and the support mode is shifted to the high frequency support mode, thereby shifting from the opening and closing execution mode H3 to the low probability high support state H5.

The operation in the low probability high support state H5 is the same as that in the tenth embodiment. That is, in the low probability high support state H5, the player continues to hit to the right, causing the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA and enter the second start port 34. Since the lottery result of the winning lottery triggered by the game ball entering the second start port 34 in the low probability high support state H5 is limited to either a jackpot win or a time-saving grant win, even if the winning lottery does not win a jackpot, the time-saving grant win is won, and the high frequency support mode continues as the support mode until the next jackpot is won. In other words, if the time-saving grant win is won in the winning lottery, the high frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot is won, and the next jackpot is virtually guaranteed. Furthermore, since the type of jackpot based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 34 is limited to a 16R high probability jackpot, if a high probability jackpot is won in the low probability high support state H5, it is guaranteed that the state will transition back to the high probability high support state H4.

The value of the probability variation continuation counter is cleared to 0 each time the lottery mode in the gaming state shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. Specifically, if the number of continuous variations reaches the upper limit, if you fall in a fall lottery, if you win a jackpot in a winning lottery and the result of the distribution judgment is a regular jackpot, or if you When the number of times the game is executed in the probability mode reaches the ST number, the value of the probability variation continuation number counter is cleared to zero. The other configurations of the pachinko machine of this modification 1 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

According to the pachinko machine of Modified Example 1 configured as described above, in the mode H1a during left-handed hitting in the low-probability low-support state H1, after winning a probability-variable jackpot with the first hit, the machine returns to the low-probability low-support state again. Aspect of left-handed batting in H1 Before returning to H1a, the number of times that a jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the distribution result is a probability-variable jackpot in the high-probability high support state H4 or the high-probability low support state H6 is variable. When the limit number of times reaches 3, the opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the jackpot win ends, and then a transition is made to a low certainty high support state H5. As mentioned above, in the low-probability, high-support state H5, it is guaranteed that the player will win a probability-variable jackpot and move to the high-probability, high-support state H4 again. After winning the probability variable jackpot in , in the high probability high support state H4 or high probability low support state H6, winning the jackpot in the winning lottery and the result of the distribution judgment becoming a probability variation jackpot three times in a row. In this case, the player wins the probability-variable jackpot again and shifts to the high-probability, high-support state H4. In other words, if the player wins the jackpot three times, the player will be given the privilege of winning another jackpot. In other words, if the probability variable jackpot continues three times, the fourth probability variable jackpot is guaranteed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the first modification, it is possible to give great pleasure to the player by giving the above-mentioned one more benefit. Furthermore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the probability-variable jackpot will continue three times. In particular, since it is very important to have a continuous jackpot for three consecutive games, players are given even greater expectations for the third jackpot after the second jackpot. be able to.

In the pachinko machine of this variant 1, the limited number of times for the special chance is set to three, but it may be set to another number such as two, four, or five.

<<10-8-2>> Variation 2:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the allocation result by the allocation judgment is a normal win, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In contrast, as a modified example, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery in a game state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the allocation result by the allocation judgment is a normal win, the support mode may become the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. This will be described in detail below.

Figure 485 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table for the first start port provided in the pachinko machine of modified example 2. Figure 485 (a) shows the distribution table for the first start port (for low probability mode), and Figure 485 (b) shows the distribution table for the first start port (for high probability mode). The distribution table for the first start port provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment does not distinguish between the low probability mode and the high probability mode, but in contrast, the distribution table for the first start port provided in the pachinko machine of modified example 2 distinguishes between the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

The distribution table for the first starting port (for low probability mode) provided in the Pachinko machine of Modification 2 is the same as the distribution table for the first starting port provided in the Pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment.

The distribution table for the first starting port (for high probability mode) provided in the Pachinko machine of Modification 2 has a higher probability of winning than the allocation table for the first starting port provided in the Pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. The difference is that when a jackpot is won by a lottery and the type of jackpot won is an 8R normal jackpot, the support mode shifts to a high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and other aspects are the same. Note that the high-frequency support mode referred to here is a type in which the high-frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot is won.

The pachinko machine of the second modified example also differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment in the number of STs. The pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment has a ST count of 10, whereas the pachinko machine of the second modified example has a ST count of 13.

Figure 486 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game in the pachinko machine of the modified example 2. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, the number of times of ST is 13 times, so the number of times of the game performed in the mode H6b during left hitting in the high probability low support state H6 is more than that in the case of the tenth embodiment. Specifically, when four times of the game corresponding to the maximum number of game balls that enter the second starting hole 34 are played in the mode H6a during the consumption of the special 2 remaining reserve in the high probability low support state H6, the number of times of the game performed in the mode H6b during left hitting in the high probability low support state H6 is four times. In other words, the number of times obtained by subtracting the number of times of time reduction continuation, which is 5 times, and the four times performed in the mode H6a during the consumption of the special 2 remaining reserve from the number of times of ST, which is 13 times, i.e., four times, is the number of times of the game performed in the mode H6b during left hitting. On the other hand, if no play is performed in mode H6a during the consumption of the remaining reserved special 2, the number of play times performed in mode H6b during left-hand play will be 8 times, which is the number of ST times (13 times) minus the number of time-saving continuations (5 times).

In the mode H6b during left-handed play that is executed 4 to 8 times, if a jackpot is won by the winning lottery and the distribution result by the distribution judgment is a normal jackpot, it is awarded to the player after the end of the game round. As a bonus, the opening/closing execution mode will be executed. That is, the state shifts from the high-accuracy/low-support state H6 to the opening/closing execution mode H7. After the opening/closing execution mode H7 ends, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and the support mode shifts from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode. As a result, the opening/closing execution mode H7 shifts to the low certainty high support state H5. At this time, the high frequency support mode will continue until the next jackpot is won.

The operation in the low-probability-high support state H5 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. That is, in the low-accuracy, high-support state H5, the player causes the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA and enter the second starting port 34 by continuously performing right-handed hitting. The lottery result of the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 in the low-probability, high-support state H5 is limited to either the jackpot winning or the time-saving grant winning, so the jackpot in the winning lottery. Even if you don't win, you can win the time saving grant, so the high-frequency support mode will continue as a support mode until you win the next jackpot. In other words, if you win the time-saving award in the winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode continues until you win the next jackpot, and the next jackpot is virtually guaranteed. Moreover, the type of jackpot based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is limited to the 16R probability variable jackpot, so in the low probability high support state H5, the probability variation jackpot is won and the high probability high support is Transition to state H4 again is guaranteed.

The other configurations of the pachinko machine of the second modification are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

According to the pachinko machine of variant 2 configured as described above, i) in the high-probability high support state H4, neither the winning lottery nor the falling lottery is won, and the number of plays after the transition to the high-probability high support state H4 reaches 5, thereby missing the transition from the high-probability high support state H4 to the low-probability high support state H5, in which the next jackpot is guaranteed to be won, and ii) in mode H6a during the consumption of the remaining reserve of special 2 in the high-probability low support state H6, neither the winning lottery nor the falling lottery is won, and the special Even if the player misses the transition from the high-probability low support state H6 to the low-probability high support state H5 via the mode H1b during the consumption of the special 2 remaining reserve in the low-probability low support state H1 due to the loss of the 2 remaining reserves, the player can win a jackpot by lottery in the mode H6b during left hitting in the high-probability low support state H6, and the allocation result by the allocation judgment becomes a normal jackpot, so that the player can transition from the high-probability low support state H6 to the low-probability high support state H5 via the opening and closing execution mode H7. Therefore, even if the player misses the chances of i) and ii) above and is disappointed, the player is given another chance to transition to the low-probability high support state H5, which is guaranteed to win the next jackpot, by winning a normal jackpot in the mode H6b during left hitting in the high-probability low support state H6. Therefore, the player has both a sense of expectation and tension about winning a normal jackpot in the mode H6b during left hitting in the high-probability low support state H6. As a result, the pachinko machine of variant 2 can increase the excitement of playing the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of this modification 2, when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the high-frequency support mode that is usually given when a jackpot is won is of a type that continues until the next jackpot is won. However, instead of this, the high-frequency support mode may be of a type that continues for only one game. Even if the high-frequency support mode is configured to continue only once, after the opening/closing execution mode H7 ends, it moves to the low-probability high support state H5, and then, by winning the time saving grant in the low-probability high support state H5, This is because the high-frequency support mode will continue until the next jackpot is won. That is, when the lottery mode is a high probability mode, the high frequency support mode that is usually given when a big hit is won may be once or any number of times.

10-8-3 Variation 3:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the above tenth embodiment, there is no miss setting in the hit/miss table (for low probability mode) for the second starting hole, and if the jackpot is not won, the time-saving grant is always won. In contrast, as a modified example, the hit/miss table (for low probability mode) for the second starting hole may have the settings of the jackpot win, the time-saving grant win, and the miss, and if the jackpot is not won, the time-saving grant win and the miss may be assigned. This will be described in detail below.

Figure 487 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table (for low probability mode) for the second start port in the modified example 3. As shown in Figure 487, in the hit/miss table (for low probability mode) for the second start port, 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as the value of the hit random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, 1980 values from 20 to 1999 are set as the value of the hit random number counter C1 that results in a time-saving bonus, and 1980 values from 2000 to 3979 are set as the value of the hit random number counter C1 that results in a miss (an event in which neither a jackpot nor a time-saving bonus is won). In this case, the number of value groups of the hit random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot is 20/3980 (= 1/199) of the total number, the number of value groups of the hit random number counter C1 that results in a time-saving bonus is 1980/3980 (= 99/199) of the total number, and the number of value groups of the hit random number counter C1 that results in a miss is 1980/3980 (= 99/199) of the total number. As a result, according to the hit/miss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), 1/2 of the number of value groups of the hit random number counter C1 that do not result in a jackpot are awarded time-saving bonuses, and 1/2 of the number of value groups of the hit random number counter C1 that do not result in a jackpot are misses.

The "time-saving grant" won in this modified example is a type of time-saving grant in which the high-frequency support mode continues for a predetermined number of play times (e.g., five play times), which also differs from the tenth embodiment. That is, in the tenth embodiment, when a time-saving grant is won in a winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode continues as the support mode until the next time a jackpot is won in a winning lottery, whereas in this modified example, when a time-saving grant is won in a winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode continues as the support mode for a predetermined number of play times (e.g., five play times).

Figure 488 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of play in a pachinko machine of modified example 3. The flow of play in a pachinko machine of modified example 3 is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 of the 10th embodiment (see Figure 455) in that the operation in low probability high support state H5 and the operation of mode H1b during consumption of the special 2 remaining reserve in low probability low support state H1 are different, but the other operations are the same.

In the pachinko machine of the third modification, in the low-probability, high-support state H5, if a jackpot is not won in the winning lottery, the game is divided into a time-saving grant win and a loser with a probability of 1/2. If the time saving award is won, the high frequency support mode as the support mode is continued for only 5 gaming times. If you do not win either a jackpot or a time-saving award in the winning lottery during the 5 game rounds in which the high-frequency support mode continues, (in the case of a loss), after the end of the 5 game rounds, The support mode shifts from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode. In other words, during the 5 games in which the high-frequency support mode is continued, if neither a jackpot nor a time-saving award is won in the winning lottery, the transition from the low-probability high support state H5 to the low-probability low support state H1 to move to. The transition destination in the low-probability, low-support state H1 is the state H1a in which the special 2 remaining is being held, when there is no remaining special 2, and the state H1b in which the remaining special 2 is being used. .

In the low-probability, high-support state H5, if you win the time-saving award again in the winning lottery before the end of the 5 games in which the high-frequency support mode is continued, the period of the high-frequency support mode will be extended 5 times. The number of playing times will be extended. Therefore, in the low probability high support state H5, if you can repeat winning the time saving award in the winning lottery again by the end of the 5th game in which the high frequency support mode is continued, the high frequency support The mode period can be extended sequentially until the next jackpot is won.

Similarly, in the state H1b during the consumption of the remaining reserved special number 2 in the low probability low support state H1, if the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery, there is a 1/2 probability of either winning the time-saving bonus or losing. If the time-saving bonus is won, the support mode transitions from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode, and as a result, the state transitions from the low probability low support state H1 to the low probability high support state H5 described above.

The rest of the configuration of the pachinko machine of this modified example 3 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned 10th embodiment, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

According to the pachinko machine of the third modification configured as described above, in the high-precision, high-support state H4, if the player wins the falling lottery in the game round before the number of executions of the game round reaches the number of time-saving continuations, The high probability support state H4 shifts to the low probability high support state H5, but in this low probability high support state H5, by the time the high frequency support mode is continued for 5 games, the winning lottery will be held again. If you can repeatedly win the time-saving grant, you can gradually extend the period in which the high-frequency support mode continues until you win the jackpot next time. Therefore, in the low-probability, high-support state H5, even if the player does not win a jackpot in the winning lottery, the player can save time in the winning lottery by the end of the 5 game rounds in which the high-frequency support mode continues. It is possible to repeatedly make the user expect to win the award. On the other hand, by the end of the 5th game in which the high-frequency support mode continues, players are repeatedly given a sense of urgency that they will not win either the jackpot or the time-saving bonus in the winning lottery. can be granted.

Furthermore, in the aspect H1b in which the special 2 remaining balance is being used up in the low probability low support state H1, even if the player does not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, it is possible to make the player expect to win the time saving award. In this way, according to the pachinko machine of the third modification, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and security.

《10-8-4》Variation 4:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the number of STs (10 times) is equal to the number of time saving continuations (5 times) and the number of times (4 times) corresponding to the maximum number of reserved game balls entering the second starting port 34. ) and one extra time (10 times). On the other hand, the number of STs may be set to exceed the above total. For example, the number of STs may be set to 11 times, 12 times, . . . , 15 times, . . . , 20 times, etc. Similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, this modification corresponds to a game ball that enters just before the electric accessory 34a closes when transitioning from the high-accuracy, high-support state H4 to the high-accuracy, low-support state H6. The special 2 remaining reservation can be used without fail in the mode H6a when the special 2 remaining reservation is being used up in the high-certainty low support state (state H6), and the special 2 remaining reservation remains in the high-certainty low support state H6. There is no possibility of returning to the low-probability low-support state H1. Therefore, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, in the pachinko machine of this modification, after reaching the ST number from the high-accuracy, high-support state H4 and returning to the low-accuracy, low-support state H1, The soundness of the game can be improved because it is possible to eliminate the flow of the game in which the winning of the time-saving award is held on hold.

<<10-8-5>> Variation 5:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the winning jackpot is a probability jackpot, if a game ball does not enter the V winning slot 48 opened by the jackpot, the lottery mode does not shift to the high probability mode and the support mode does not shift to the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, as a modified example, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the winning jackpot is a probability jackpot, and a game ball does not enter the V winning slot 48 opened by the jackpot, the lottery mode does not shift to the high probability mode, but the support mode may shift to the high frequency support mode.

According to this modified example, in the low-probability low-support state H1 (see FIG. 455), if a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of the jackpot won is a probability jackpot, and the game ball does not enter the V winning hole 48 opened as a result of the jackpot, the state transitions from the low-probability low-support state H1 to the low-probability high-support state H5 via the open/close execution mode H3. In the low-probability high-support state H5, the next jackpot (probability jackpot) is virtually guaranteed, which is highly advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to this modified example, if a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of the jackpot won is a probability jackpot, and a game operation that deliberately does not allow the game ball to enter the V winning hole 48 opened as a result of the jackpot can be effective. According to this modified example, in the high probability high support state H4, if the player wins the fall lottery before the number of play times after transitioning to the high probability high support state H4 reaches the time-saving continuation number of 5 (within 5 times), the game has a game feature in which the player can transition to the low probability high support state H5, which effectively guarantees the next high probability jackpot. However, if the game operation is performed in such a way that the game ball is not intentionally placed in the V winning hole 48, it becomes possible to transition to the low probability high support state H5 without winning the fall lottery within the above 5 times, resulting in a problem that the above game feature is impaired. This problem can be solved by the following modified example 6.

10-8-6 Variation 6:
The pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is configured to include one variable winning device 36. In contrast, as a modified example, the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device may be configured to include a first variable winning device and a second variable winning device. The first variable winning device includes a large winning port and an opening/closing door for opening and closing the large winning port, and does not include a V winning port. The second variable winning device includes a large winning port, an opening/closing door for opening and closing the large winning port, and a V winning port provided inside the large winning port. The second variable winning device differs from the variable winning device 36 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment in that it does not include a V winning port shutter 48a. In this modified example, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a normal jackpot, the opening/closing door of the first variable winning device is repeatedly opened and closed in the opening/closing execution mode in response to the jackpot. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won by the winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a variable jackpot, the opening and closing door of the second variable winning device is triggered by the jackpot and repeats an open state and a closed state in the opening and closing execution mode.

According to the above configuration, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the won jackpot is a normal jackpot, the game ball enters the jackpot of the first variable winning device, and the game ball enters the V jackpot. The ball never enters the ball. On the other hand, if a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of jackpot won is a variable jackpot, the game ball enters the jackpot of the second variable winning device, which is equipped with a V jackpot shutter. Since there is no game ball that enters the big prize opening, there is a 100% probability that the game ball will enter the V winning opening. For this reason, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the won jackpot is a variable jackpot, the game ball does not enter the V-winning slot while the game ball enters the jackpot. Therefore, according to this modification, since it is possible to avoid transitioning from the low-accuracy low support state H1 to the low-accuracy high support state H5 via the opening/closing execution mode H3, in the high-accuracy high support state H4, If the player wins the falling lottery before the number of game runs reaches the time-saving continuation number of five times after transitioning to the high-probability, high-support state H4 (within 5 times), the next It is possible to exhibit the original game property of being able to shift to a low-probability, high-support state H5 in which a probability-variable jackpot is guaranteed.

10-8-7 Variation 7:
In addition, the following configuration can be used instead of the sixth modification to make it impossible to perform a game operation that does not allow the game ball to enter the V winning hole 48. A gate through which the game ball can pass is provided within the area where the game ball can enter by a right-hit operation, and the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 starts opening and closing only when the game ball passes through the gate when a round game based on a big win is played, and the V winning hole is provided directly below the gate. According to this configuration, in order to start the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, the game ball needs to pass through the gate, and in that case, the game ball will always enter the V winning hole. Therefore, even with this modification, when a big win is won by a winning lottery and the type of the big win is a certainty big win, the game ball will not enter the big winning hole but not the V winning hole. Therefore, according to this modified example, it is possible to avoid transitioning from the low-probability low-support state H1 to the low-probability high-support state H5 via the opening/closing execution mode H3, so that in the high-probability high-support state H4, if the player wins the fall lottery before the number of game plays executed since transitioning to the high-probability high-support state H4 reaches five, which is the number of times the time-saving function continues (within five times), the player can effectively transition to the low-probability high-support state H5, where the next high-probability jackpot is guaranteed, thereby enabling the original game play to be exhibited.

《10-8-8》Variation 8:
In the tenth embodiment and its modifications, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode when a winner is won in the lottery using the value of the random number counter CF. On the other hand, as a modified example, a falling slot into which a game ball can enter is prepared on the game board 30, and when a game ball enters the falling slot, the lottery mode for the winning lottery is changed from a high probability mode to a low probability mode. A configuration may also be adopted in which the mode is changed to probability mode. In this configuration, a game ball sorting device is installed above the falling hole to distribute game balls between a flow path leading to the falling hole and a flow path leading to a place other than the falling hole (for example, an out hole or a second starting hole). It is also possible to provide a configuration in which it is provided. According to these configurations, the player can visually check whether the game ball enters the falling hole or not, so that the game after transitioning to the high-accuracy, high-support state H4 in the high-accuracy, high-support state H4. The player can wait with a sense of urgency and anticipation to see whether the game ball will enter the falling hole before the number of executions reaches the number of time-saving continuations.

《10-8-9》Variation 9:
In the tenth embodiment, its first modification, and its second modification, when a time saving award is won in a winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next time a jackpot is won in the winning lottery. And so. On the other hand, as a modified example, the period during which the high-frequency support mode continues as the support mode (hereinafter referred to as the high-support continuation period) is set until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times). You can also replace it with That is, when a time saving grant is won in a winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode may be continued as the support mode until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number (for example, five times). The predetermined number of times does not need to be limited to five times, and may be any number of times, such as once, twice, three times, four times, six times, etc. The other configurations in this modification are the same as those in the tenth embodiment (especially in the winning lottery using the win/fail table for the second starting port (for low probability mode: see FIG. 450(b)). If the player does not win the jackpot, he/she will win the time saving award).

According to the configuration of this modified example, by the time when the high support duration ends, the time-saving grant is repeatedly won in the winning lottery, and the high support duration is extended sequentially for the period until the number of times the game is played reaches a predetermined number, and this extension is repeated until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. As a result, the high frequency support mode continues as the support mode until the jackpot is won in the next winning lottery. Therefore, according to this modified example, as in the above tenth embodiment, in the low probability high support state H5, the effect is achieved that the gameplay can be realized in which the high frequency support mode is continued as the lottery mode until the jackpot is won in the next winning lottery, using the time-saving grant that continues only a predetermined number of times. In other words, the gameplay can be realized in which the high frequency support mode is continued as the lottery mode until the jackpot is won in the next winning lottery, without using the time-saving grant that continues the high frequency support mode as the support mode until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery.

《10-8-10》Variation 10:
In the above embodiment, the special information is acquired in a high probability high support state as a specific gaming state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, and is special information that is acquired when a game ball enters the second starting port 34. As an advantageous gaming state in which it is guaranteed that if a specific condition such as winning a falling lottery is met before the winning lottery ends based on the special information based on the special information, the system will re-transition to the high probability high support state as a specific gaming state. On the other hand, the number of executions of the game after the transition to the high probability and high support state as a specific gaming state is a predetermined number of times (ST number) without winning the falling lottery. is configured to shift to a low-probability, low-support state as a predetermined gaming state in which the probability of re-entering a specific gaming state is lower than that of an advantageous gaming state, but the type of lottery mode and support mode in each gaming state is an example, and various combinations can be adopted as the types of lottery mode and support mode in each gaming state.

Specifically, for example, as the specific game state, a high probability high support state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a high probability low support state which is a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode, a low probability high support state which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a low probability low support state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, etc. may be adopted. Also, for example, as the advantageous game state, a high probability high support state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a high probability low support state which is a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode, a low probability high support state which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a low probability low support state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, etc. may be adopted. Also, for example, as the predetermined game state, a high probability high support state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a high probability low support state which is a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode, a low probability high support state which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a low probability low support state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, etc. may be adopted. Even with this configuration, it is possible to increase the interest of the game, just like in the above embodiment.

《10-8-11》Variation 11:
In the above embodiment, when a specific condition such as winning a fall lottery is satisfied in a high probability and high support state as the first specific gaming state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, the support mode is set to a predetermined value. A first predetermined gaming state that is maintained in the high-frequency support mode for a period of time, for example, until the next jackpot is won in a winning lottery, and is more advantageous for the player than the high-precision, high-support state. On the other hand, when the second predetermined condition is satisfied such that the game is executed for the number of time-saving continuations without winning the falling lottery in the high probability and high support state, The configuration is such that the transition is made to a high-accuracy/low-support state as a second specific gaming state, and in the high-accuracy/low-support state, a winning lottery is held regarding special information acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. When a specific condition is met, such as winning a falling lottery, the game is configured to shift to a low-probability, low-support state, which is a second predetermined gaming state, which is less advantageous for the player than the high-probability, low-support state. However, the types of lottery mode and support mode in each gaming state are merely examples, and various combinations can be adopted as the types of lottery mode and support mode in each gaming state.

Specifically, for example, as the first specific game state, there is a high probability high support state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a high probability low support state which is a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode, and a low support state which is a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode. A low probability high support state which is a probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a low probability low support state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, etc. may be adopted. For example, as the first predetermined gaming state, a high probability high support state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a high probability low support state which is a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode, and a low probability mode A low probability high support state which is a high frequency support mode, a low probability low support state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, etc. may be adopted. For example, as the second specific game state, a high probability high support state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a high probability low support state which is a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode, and a low probability mode A low probability high support state which is a high frequency support mode, a low probability low support state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, etc. may be adopted. For example, as the second predetermined gaming state, a high probability high support state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a high probability low support state which is a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode, and a low probability mode A low probability high support state which is a high frequency support mode, a low probability low support state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, etc. may be adopted. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game as in the above embodiment.

10-8-12 Variation 12:
The configuration of this modified example described below may be applied to the above embodiment and each of the modified examples. Below, an example in which the configuration of this modified example is applied to the above embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, when the open/close execution mode H3 is shifted to the high probability high support state H4, an effect is executed to notify the player that the game state has been shifted to one that is more advantageous to the player. In this modified example, as an effect to notify the player that the game state has been shifted to one that is more advantageous to the player, an image of a specific character (in this modified example, an image of the female character A) and a character string such as "Entering the chance zone!!" are displayed on the pattern display device 41, and a sound corresponding to the character string is output from the speaker 46 (a chance zone entry effect). Then, a specific background image (hereinafter referred to as a first specific background image) that indicates that the chance zone has been entered is displayed on the pattern display device 41. By recognizing the chance zone entry effect and the first specific background image, the player recognizes that the chance zone has been entered, and hopes to win a jackpot or a drop lottery.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, if the player wins the fall lottery in a game before (within 5 games) the number of games played since the transition to the high probability high support state H4 reaches 5, which is the number of times the time-saving continues, an effect is executed at the end of the game that suggests that an advantageous event has occurred for the player. In this modified example, as the effect, an image of a specific character (an image of a monkfish character in this modified example) and a character string such as "Entering the safe zone of peace of mind!!" are displayed on the pattern display device 41, and a sound corresponding to the character string is output from the speaker 46 (safe zone entry effect). Then, a specific background image (hereinafter referred to as the second specific background image) that means that the player has entered the safe zone is displayed on the pattern display device 41. By recognizing the safe zone entry effect and the second specific background image, the player can clearly recognize that an advantageous event such as entering the safe zone has occurred. Then, the pachinko machine 10 transitions from the high probability high support state H4 to the low probability high support state H5 as a result of the drop-out winning. In this modified example, if the player also wins a jackpot (high probability jackpot) in the game in which the drop-out lottery was won, the above-mentioned safe zone entry performance is not executed, and instead a performance is executed to notify the player that they have won the high probability jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, when the number of times of play after the transition to the high probability high support state H4 reaches the number of times of time-saving continuation (5 times) without winning the jackpot or the fall lottery in the high probability high support state H4, and the state transitions to the mode H6a in which the special 2 remaining reserve is being consumed in the high probability low support state H6, an effect is executed that suggests that the state in which the player has a high advantage will continue for only a limited number of times of play corresponding to the number of special 2 remaining reserves. In this modification, as the effect, an image of a specific character (in this modification, an image of the female character B) and a character string such as "Entering the final chance zone!!" are displayed on the pattern display device 41, and a sound corresponding to the character string is output from the speaker 46 (final chance zone entry effect). Then, a specific background image (hereinafter referred to as the third specific background image) that means that the final chance zone has been entered is displayed on the pattern display device 41, and numerical information (special 2 remaining reserve countdown information) indicating the remaining number of times of play (the number of special 2 remaining reserves) of the limited number of times is displayed on the pattern display device 41. By recognizing the final chance zone entry performance, the third specific background image, and the special 2 remaining reserve countdown information, the player will feel a desire to win the jackpot or the drop lottery before the value of the special 2 remaining reserve countdown information reaches zero.

Then, if you win the falling lottery in the state H6a where the special 2 remaining balance is being used up in the high probability low support state H6, and if you win the probability variable jackpot in the winning lottery regardless of the success or failure of the falling lottery, in the middle of the relevant game round In the game, an effect suggesting that an event advantageous to the player has occurred is executed. In this modified example, as the effect, an image of a specific character (in this modified example, an image of a whale character) and a character string such as "It's a surefire jackpot or entry into the safe zone is confirmed!!" are displayed on the symbol display device. 41 and outputs a sound corresponding to the character string from the speaker 46 (advantageous event occurrence alternative presentation). A player who recognizes the advantageous event occurrence alternative effect can clearly recognize that an advantageous event has occurred, such as winning a probability-variable jackpot or entering a safe zone.

If you have won the falling lottery in the relevant game round, the falling winning will trigger the special 2 remaining balance in the low-probability low support state H1 to change from the state H6a in which the special 2 balance is being held in the high-probability low support state H6 to the special 2 balance in the low-probability low support state H1. The game will move to mode H1b in which the game is on hold. On the other hand, if the player has not won the falling lottery in the relevant game round but has won the probability-variable jackpot, the game state does not change. Then, if the result of the winning lottery in the relevant game round is a guaranteed variable jackpot (only a guaranteed variable jackpot since special 2 is pending), then, just before the end of the relevant game round, a performance will be performed to announce that the winning lottery has been won in the fixed variable jackpot. However, on the other hand, if the result of the winning lottery is a time-saving award winning (that is, if you win the falling lottery and move to the state H1a where the special 2 remaining balance is being used up in the low probability low support state H1, but in the winning lottery If the player does not win the probability-changing jackpot but wins the time-saving award), the above-mentioned safe zone entry performance is executed just before the end of the game round. This allows the player to confirm which advantageous event occurred in the current game round.

As explained above, in this modified example, the background image displayed in the high probability high support state H4 (the first specific background image corresponding to the chance zone) is different from the background image displayed during the period after the transition from the high probability high support state H4 to the high probability low support state H6 until the end of the special 2 remaining hold (the third specific background image corresponding to the final chance zone). This allows the player to clearly distinguish and recognize the two states, and to pay attention to changes in the game state.

In addition, in this modified example, if the fall lottery is won in the high probability high support state H4, an effect is executed (peace of mind mode entry effect) that suggests that an advantageous event has occurred. In a normal pachinko machine, winning the fall lottery is not desirable for the player. However, unlike a normal pachinko machine, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, winning the fall lottery in the above situation is desirable for the player. Therefore, in this modified example, if the fall lottery is won in the high probability high support state H4, an effect is executed (peace of mind mode entry effect) that suggests that an advantageous event has occurred, making it possible for the player to clearly recognize that an advantageous event has occurred.

In addition, in this modification, after the number of executions of the game after transitioning to the high-accuracy, high-support state H4 reaches the number of time-saving continuations (5 times), the transition to the high-accuracy, low-support state H6 is performed, and then the special 2 remaining If a falling lottery is won before a game round due to suspension ends in a high-probability/low-support state H6, a performance suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred (advantageous event occurrence alternative performance) is executed. Here, in a normal pachinko machine, it is not desirable for the player to win the falling lottery. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, unlike a normal pachinko machine, it is preferable for the player to win the fall lottery in the above situation. Therefore, in this modified example, after moving to the high probability low support state H6, if the winning lottery is won before the game round due to special 2 balance suspension ends in the high probability low support state H6, an advantageous event will occur. By executing a performance that suggests that an advantageous event has occurred (an advantageous event occurrence alternative performance), it becomes possible to make the player clearly recognize that an advantageous event has occurred.

10-8-13 Variation 13:
The configuration of the present modified example described below may be applied to the above embodiment and each of the modified examples. In the following description, the pattern displayed on the first pattern display section 37a of the special pattern unit 37 is also referred to as the "first special pattern", the pattern displayed on the second pattern display section 37b is also referred to as the "second special pattern", and the pattern displayed on the normal pattern unit 38 is also referred to as the "normal pattern". In addition, the "first special pattern" and the "second special pattern" are also collectively referred to as the "special pattern".

In addition, the "winning lottery" in the above embodiment and each modification is also referred to as a "special figure lottery", and the special symbol lottery executed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33 is referred to as a "first special lottery". The special figure lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is also referred to as the "second special figure lottery." Moreover, the "electric accessory opening lottery" in the above embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications is also referred to as the "general figure lottery", and the "electric accessory 34a" is also referred to as the "normal electric accessory 34a".

For ease of explanation, the "change of the first special symbol" is also referred to as the "first special symbol change", the "change of the second special symbol" is also referred to as the "second special symbol change", and the "change of the normal symbol" is also referred to as the "normal symbol change". Furthermore, the "first special symbol change" and the "second special symbol change" are collectively referred to as the "special symbol change". Furthermore, the number of ST (special time) times in the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples is also referred to as the "high probability continuation upper limit number of times", and the "time-saving continuation number of times" is also referred to as the "high support continuation upper limit number of times".

In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the maximum number of high-accuracy continuations (ST times) is the maximum number of high support continuations (the number of time-saving continuations, 5 times in the above embodiments) plus the maximum number of special 2 reservations (in the above embodiments). The number of times (10 times in the above embodiment) is obtained by adding 4 times) and adding 1 time (or 2 times or more) as an allowance. The reason for this is that if a configuration is adopted in which the above-mentioned allowance of 1 time is not added to the high-accuracy continuous upper limit number of times (ST number), the special figure fluctuation that reaches the high support continuous upper limit number of times (5 times) is adopted. If the game ball enters the second starting port 34 after the start of the next (sixth) special figure change and the number of reserved special 2 becomes 4, the fourth special 2 The reservation will exist as a special 2 remaining reservation until after it moves to the low probability low support state H1, and the second special drawing lottery based on the fourth special 2 reservation will be the special 2 remaining reservation in the low probability low support state H1. This is executed in mode H1b while the remaining hold is being used up, and it is certain that either the guaranteed variable jackpot or the time saving award will be won, and as a result, the game performance that was envisioned at the time of designing the pachinko machine 10 will be destroyed. It is from.

Therefore, in the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, as described above, by adding one time as a margin to the high-accuracy continuation maximum number of times (ST count), the high-support continuation maximum number of times (5 times) is reached. Even if the game ball enters the second starting port 34 after the start of the next (sixth) special figure change after the special figure change that occurred and the number of reserved special 2 pieces becomes 4, The second special drawing lottery based on the fourth special 2 reservation (the 10th special drawing drawing after moving to the high probability high support state H4) is executed in the high probability low support state H6 (that is, in the high probability mode This is to ensure that the program is executed before the program completes.

In response to this, as a modified example, the high probability continuation upper limit number of times may be set to a value (9 times in this modified example) obtained by adding the maximum number of special 2 reserved items (4 in this modified example) to the high support continuation upper limit number of times (5 times in this modified example), without adding one time as a margin, and a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball enters the second starting hole 34 after the start of the next (sixth) special chart variation after the high support continuation upper limit number of times (5 times) is reached, thereby preventing the number of special 2 reserved items from becoming four. The configuration of this modified example will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 489 is a timing chart showing an example of control when transitioning from the high-accuracy, high-support state H4 to the high-accuracy, low-support state H6 in this modification. In this modification, the upper limit number of times that high support can be continued is set to 5 times, and the upper limit number of times that high support can be continued (ST number of times) is set to 9 times.

In this modified example, when the number of times the special pattern change is executed after the transition to the high probability high support state H4 reaches the high support continuation upper limit number of times (5 times), the state transitions from the high probability high support state H4 to the high probability low support state H6 (transitions from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode), but the timing when the high frequency support mode flag actually turns from ON to OFF is set at the start of the special pattern change that reaches the high support continuation upper limit number of times (5 times). As shown in FIG. 489, after the change of the special pattern ends (after it stops), a special pattern determination time Tcs of 0.5 seconds is provided. The special pattern determination time Tcs is the time (stop display time) during which the special pattern is displayed in a state corresponding to the result of the special pattern lottery, and after this special pattern determination time Tcs has elapsed, the next change (play round) of the special pattern can be started. In addition, like the special pattern, a normal pattern determination time Tcn is also provided after the change of the normal pattern ends. Below, the control in this modified example is explained using the example shown in FIG. 489.

As shown in FIG. 489, if the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the fourth special pattern change (the second special pattern change in the example shown in FIG. 489) after the transition to the high probability high support state H4, a regular pattern lottery is executed and the regular pattern change starts (time t1). When the regular pattern change time has elapsed, the regular pattern change ends (time t2), and the regular pattern stops in a manner corresponding to the result of the regular pattern lottery. Since the regular pattern lottery is executed during the high frequency support mode, the regular pattern will almost certainly be won (with a probability of 231 out of 233). Then, as shown in FIG. 489, if the regular pattern lottery results in a regular pattern win, the regular electric device 34a opens when the regular pattern determination time Tcn has elapsed (time t3).

In this modified example, the normal map fluctuation time in the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the normal map determination time Tcn, the normal map winning probability which is the probability of winning a normal map in the normal map lottery, the normal power opening count which is the number of times the normal electric role 34a opens when a normal map is won, and the normal power opening time which is the opening time when the normal electric role is opened are each set as follows.

[In low frequency support mode]
・Normal drawing change time: 10.0 seconds ・Normal drawing confirmation time Tcn: 0.1 seconds ・Normal drawing winning probability: 1/233
・Number of times normal power is released: 1 time ・Normal power release time: 0.1 seconds [in high frequency support mode]
・Normal drawing change time: 0.2 seconds ・Normal drawing confirmation time Tcn: 0.1 seconds ・Normal drawing winning probability: 231/233
- Number of times normal power is released: 1 time - Normal power release time: 1.4 seconds In addition, in this modified example, if the normal map lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode and a normal map wins, the normal electric device 34a will open once for 1.4 seconds even if the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF after the normal map lottery is executed (for example, while the normal map is changing).

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 489, in the example shown in FIG. 489, the fourth special chart change ends while the normal electric role 34a is open (time t4), the special chart determination time Tcs has elapsed, and the fifth special chart change starts (time t5), and the number of reserved special 2s changes from four to three. As described above, in this modified example, the high support continuation limit is set to five times, and the timing at which the high frequency support mode flag changes from ON to OFF is set to the start of the special chart change that has reached the high support continuation limit, so the high frequency support mode flag turns OFF at the start of the fifth special chart change (time t5).

In the example shown in FIG. 489, the normal electric device 34a remains open even after the fifth special chart change has begun, so the game ball can enter the second start hole 34. As shown in FIG. 489, when the game ball enters the second start hole 34 (time t6), the number of special 2 reserved balls increases by one, from three to four. After that, the normal power release time has elapsed, and the normal electric device 34a enters a closed state (time t7).

After time t5 when the high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF, the probability of winning a general figure is as low as 1/233, so the normal electric accessory 34a is released based on the general figure lottery executed after time t5. This is almost never the case, and even if the normal electric accessory 34a opens, the normal electric opening time is as short as 0.1 seconds, so it is virtually impossible for the game ball to enter the second starting port 34. do not have.

In addition, if the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the general pattern lottery is executed just before the start of the fifth special pattern fluctuation (that is, immediately before the high-frequency support mode flag turns from ON to OFF), Even if the normal electric accessory 34a is opened based on the drawing lottery, the time required from the start of ordinary pattern fluctuation to the closing of the ordinary electric accessory 34a in the high-frequency support mode is 1.7 seconds. Yes, and in this modification, the variation time of at least the 5th special figure variation is not set to less than 1.7 seconds, so the normal electric accessory 34a does not change until after the 6th special figure variation starts. It won't stay open. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where the game ball enters the second starting port 34 after the sixth special symbol variation starts and the number of reserved special 2 balls becomes four.

In this way, in this modified example, even if one extra time is not added to the high probability continuation upper limit number (ST number) as in the above embodiment, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting hole 34 after the start of the next (sixth) special chart change after the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times), causing the number of special 2 reserved balls to become four, and therefore it is possible to prevent the existence of special 2 reserved balls remaining after transitioning to low probability low support state H1. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an unexpected second special chart change in low probability low support state H1, and to avoid the breakdown of the gameplay expected of the pachinko machine 10.

《10-8-14》Variation 14:
In the above modification 13, the timing at which the high frequency support mode flag turns from ON to OFF is set at the start of the special symbol fluctuation when the high support continuous upper limit number of times has been reached. The timing at which the frequency support mode flag turns from ON to OFF may be configured to be set at the end of the special symbol fluctuation when the high support continuation upper limit number of times is reached. Hereinafter, the configuration of the present modification 14 will be explained, focusing on the differences from the above modification 13.

FIG. 490 is a timing chart showing an example of control when transitioning from the high-accuracy, high-support state H4 to the high-accuracy, low-support state H6 in this modification. In this modification, the upper limit number of high support continuations is set to 5 times, and the upper limit number of high certainty continuations is set to 9 times, as in Modification 13 described above.

As mentioned above, in this modified example, the timing at which the high frequency support mode flag changes from ON to OFF is set to the end of the special chart fluctuation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit (5 times).

Furthermore, in this modified example, the length of the special pattern determination time TcsLast after the end of the special pattern variation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number of times is set to a length different from the normal special pattern determination time Tcs (0.5 seconds in this modified example). Specifically, the length of the special pattern determination time TcsLast is set to a length greater than or equal to the time required from the start of the normal pattern variation to the closing of the normal electric role in the high frequency support mode. In this modified example, the length of the special pattern determination time TcsLast is set to 1.8 seconds, which is greater than or equal to 1.7 seconds (= 0.2 seconds (normal pattern variation time) + 0.1 seconds (normal pattern determination time Tcn) + 1.4 seconds (normal electric release time)). The reason for this will be explained using the example shown in FIG. 490. Note that the time t1 to time t7 in FIG. 490 is the same as FIG. 489 except that the high frequency support mode flag does not change from ON to OFF at time t5, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 490, in this modified example, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF at the end of the special chart fluctuation (time t9) when the high support continuation upper limit number of times (5 times) is reached. Here, FIG. 490 describes the case where the game ball passes through the through gate 35 just before the end of the special chart fluctuation when the high support continuation upper limit number of times (5 times) is reached.

As shown in FIG. 490, if the game ball passes through the through gate 35 immediately before the end of the special symbol variation that has reached the upper limit number of continuous high support (5 times) (time t8), The general drawing lottery is executed, and the general drawing fluctuation is started. When the regular symbol variation time has elapsed, the regular symbol variation ends (time t10), and the regular symbol stops in a manner corresponding to the result of the regular symbol lottery. Since the general drawing lottery is executed during the high-frequency support mode, it is almost certain (with a probability of 231/233) that the player will win the general drawing. Then, as shown in FIG. 490, as a result of the ordinary drawing lottery, if the ordinary drawing is won, the ordinary electric accessory 34a is opened when the ordinary drawing confirmation time Tcn has elapsed (time t11).

However, as shown in FIG. 490, even if a game ball enters the second starting hole 34 before the special pattern determination time TcsLast ends (time t12), the number of reserved special 2 balls remains at four until the special pattern determination time TcsLast ends and the next second special pattern change begins, so the number of reserved special 2 balls does not increase based on the ball entering the hole.

In this modified example, the length of the special pattern determination time TcsLast after the end of the special pattern variation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number of times (5 times) is set to a length (1.8 seconds in this modified example) longer than the time required from the start of the normal pattern variation in the high frequency support mode to the closing of the normal electric role (1.7 seconds in this modified example), so that the normal electric role 34a closes (time t13) before the timing when the special pattern determination time TcsLast ends (time t14). In other words, the open state of the normal electric role 34a does not continue until the timing (time t14) when the next (sixth) special pattern variation after the special pattern variation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number of times (5 times) begins. In this way, according to this modified example, it is possible to prevent the normal electric device 34a from continuing to be opened until the start of the next (sixth) special pattern change after the high support continuation upper limit number of times (5 times) is reached, so it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting hole 34 when the next (sixth) special pattern change after the high support continuation upper limit number of times (5 times) is reached and the number of special 2 reserved balls drops from 4 to 3, causing the number of special 2 reserved balls to drop to 4.

Although not shown, if the game ball passes through the through gate 35 after the special chart fluctuation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) has ended (for example, during the special chart determination time TcsLast), the high frequency support mode is already OFF, so the normal chart lottery based on the passage is executed in the low frequency support mode. Since the probability of winning a normal chart in the low frequency support mode is low at 1 in 233, the normal electric role 34a is almost never opened based on the normal chart lottery, and even if the normal electric role 34a is opened, the normal power opening time is extremely short at 0.1 seconds, so the game ball does not actually enter the second starting hole 34.

As explained above, according to this modified example, even if one extra time is not added to the high probability continuation upper limit number (ST number) as in the above embodiment, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting hole 34 after the start of the next (sixth) special chart change after the high support continuation upper limit number (five times), causing the number of special 2 reserved balls to become four, thereby preventing the existence of special 2 reserved balls after transitioning to low probability low support state H1. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an unexpected second special chart change in low probability low support state H1, and to avoid the breakdown of the gameplay expected of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in the above modification 13, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF when the special pattern fluctuation starts to change after reaching the upper limit number of times that high support can be continued (5 times), so when the upper limit number of times that high support can be continued (5 times) is reached. There was a problem that it was difficult to release the normal electric accessories 34a and accumulate 4 special 2 reservations during the execution of special figure fluctuation, but in this modification, the upper limit number of times high support can be continued (5 times) Since the high-frequency support mode flag is ON even during the execution of the special figure variation that has reached the maximum number of times that the high support can be continued (5 times), the normal electric accessory 34a can be easily activated. It becomes possible to open the game ball and enter the second starting port 34 to store four special 2 reservations.

In this modified example, only the length of the special symbol determination time TcsLast after the end of the special symbol variation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number of times (5 times) is set to a predetermined length that is longer than the time required from the start of the normal symbol variation to the closing of the normal electric role in high frequency support mode. However, as another modified example, not only the length of the special symbol determination time TcsLast but also the length of the normal special symbol determination time Tcs may be set to a predetermined length that is longer than the time required from the start of the normal symbol variation to the closing of the normal electric role in high frequency support mode. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort that the length of the special symbol determination time TcsLast after the end of the special symbol variation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number of times (5 times) is different from the length of the normal special symbol determination time Tcs.

10-8-15 Variation 15:
In the above-mentioned modified example 13 and modified example 14, a configuration was adopted to avoid the occurrence of an event in which the game ball enters the second starting hole 34 after the start of the next (sixth) special pattern change after the high support continuation upper limit number of times (5 times) has been reached, and the number of special 2 reserved balls becomes four, as an unexpected event that gives the player an excessive advantage. However, as modified example 15, a configuration may be adopted in which the occurrence of an event that gives the player an excessive advantage is permitted, and the player is encouraged to aim for the occurrence of the event as a chance for the player. Below, the configuration of this modified example 15 will be explained, focusing on the differences from the above-mentioned modified example 13.

Figure 491 is a timing chart showing an example of control when transitioning from high probability high support state H4 to high probability low support state H6 in this modified example. In this modified example, similar to modified examples 13 and 14 described above, the high support continuation upper limit number of times is set to 5, and the high probability continuation upper limit number of times is set to 9.

In this modification, the timing at which the high frequency support mode flag turns from ON to OFF is when the special pattern confirmation time Tcs has elapsed after the end of the special pattern fluctuation that has reached the maximum number of high support continuations (5 times) ( (at the end of the game round). The reason for this will be explained using the example shown in FIG. 491. Note that the period from time t1 to time t7 in FIG. 491 is the same as in FIG. 489 except that the high-frequency support mode flag does not turn from ON to OFF at time t5, and therefore detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 491, in this modification, the high frequency support mode flag is flagged when the special symbol confirmation time Tcs has elapsed (time t12) after the end of the variation of the special symbol variation that has reached the upper limit number of continuous high support (5 times). becomes OFF. Here, in FIG. 491, a case will be described in which the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the special pattern confirmation time Tcs after the end of the special pattern fluctuation that has reached the upper limit number of continuous high supports (5 times).

In this modification, a through-passing promotion performance, which is a performance that urges the player to pass the game ball through the through gate 35, is executed during the fluctuation of the special symbol fluctuation that has reached the upper limit number of high support continuations (5 times). . In this modified example, as a performance to promote passing through, an image of a specific character (in this modified example, an image of a female character) and the message "Let the game ball pass through right before the end of the change and release the electric chew until after the start of the next change" Let me do it!'' is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and a sound corresponding to the character string is output from the speaker 46. The player who recognizes the performance adjusts the firing timing and firing strength of the game ball so that the game ball passes through the through gate 35 just before the end of the special symbol fluctuation that has reached the upper limit of the number of times that the high support can be continued (5 times). You will play games while doing so.

As shown in FIG. 491, if the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the special pattern confirmation time Tcs after the end of the special pattern fluctuation that has reached the upper limit number of high support continuations (5 times) (time t9) , A general map lottery is executed using the passage as a trigger, and a general map fluctuation is started. When the regular symbol variation time has elapsed, the regular symbol variation ends (time t10), and the regular symbol stops in a manner corresponding to the result of the regular symbol lottery. Since the general drawing lottery is executed during the high-frequency support mode, it is almost certain (with a probability of 231/233) that the player will win the general drawing. Then, as shown in FIG. 491, as a result of the ordinary drawing lottery, if the ordinary drawing is won, the ordinary electric accessory 34a is opened when the ordinary drawing determination time Tcn has elapsed (time t11).

In this modified example, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the special chart change that has reached the high support continuation upper limit (5 times) or during the special chart determination time Tcs after the special chart change ends, and the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and wins a normal chart in the normal chart lottery triggered by the passing through, and it is determined that the opening of the normal electric role 34a that is opened based on the winning will continue until after the start of the next special chart change, an advantageous state start effect is executed, which is an effect that suggests that a state advantageous to the player will begin. In this modified example, as the advantageous state start effect, an image of a specific character (an image of a female character in this modified example) and a character string such as "Super electric chute chance has arrived!!!" are displayed on the pattern display device 41, and a sound corresponding to the character string is output from the speaker 46. A player who recognizes this effect will recognize that a state advantageous to the player will begin.

After that, when the 0.5 second special symbol confirmation time Tcs has elapsed (time t12), the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF, the 6th special symbol fluctuation is started, and the number of reserved special symbols 2 changes from 4 to 3. become. In the example shown in FIG. 491, since the normal electric accessory 34a continues to be open even after the sixth special symbol fluctuation starts, the game ball can enter the second starting port 34. During the execution of the sixth special symbol change, it is possible to accumulate the number of special 2 reservations up to the maximum number of reservations, which is 4.

In this modification, after the start of the next (sixth) special symbol fluctuation after the special symbol fluctuation that has reached the upper limit number of continuous high support (5 times), that is, in the high accuracy low support state H6, the normal electric accessory When 34a is in the open state, a special 2nd ball entry promotion performance which is a performance to urge the player to enter the game ball into the second starting port 34 is executed. In this variation, the image of a specific character (in this variation, an image of a female character) and a text string such as "Aim for the open electric chew and accumulate 4 reservations!" are used as a promotion for entering the ball. An effect is executed in which the character string is displayed on the display device 41 and a sound corresponding to the character string is outputted from the speaker 46. The player who recognizes the effect enters the game ball into the second starting hole 34 and continuously hits the ball to the right so that the number of special 2 reserved balls becomes four.

Then, as shown in FIG. 491, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34 (time t13), the special 2 reserved number becomes four. As mentioned above, the second special drawing drawing based on the fourth special 2 reservation will be executed in the low probability low support state H1, so the result will be either a jackpot win or a time saving grant. becomes.

Therefore, in this modification, after the start of the next (sixth) special symbol fluctuation after the special symbol fluctuation that has reached the upper limit number of times that high support can be continued (5 times), that is, after the transition to the high certainty low support state H6, When a game ball enters the second starting port 34 and the number of special 2 reserved balls reaches the maximum number of reserved balls, which is 4, it is determined that an advantageous situation will come to the player. Execute the performance. In this modified example, as an advantage confirmation effect, an image of a specific character (in this modified example, an image of a male character) and a character string such as "Congratulations! Something good will happen soon!" are displayed on the pattern display device 41, and An effect is executed to cause the speaker 46 to output a sound corresponding to the character string. The player who recognizes the performance recognizes that it is certain that an advantageous situation will come to the player.

After that, when the normal power release time has elapsed (time t14), the normal electric device 34a closes.

In this way, in this modified example, the high frequency support mode flag is ON until the special chart determination time Tcs has elapsed (time t12) after the special chart variation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number of times (5 times) has ended, so if the game ball is passed through the through gate 35 just before the special chart determination time Tcs has elapsed, it is possible to continue the open state of the normal electric device 34a until the start of the next (sixth) special chart variation after the special chart variation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number of times (5 times). As a result, it is possible to generate an event that is advantageous to the player, in which the game ball enters the second starting hole 34 after the start of the sixth special chart variation, causing the number of special 2 reserved balls to become four.

The closer the timing at which the game ball passes through the through gate 35 (i.e., the start of the normal pattern change) is to the timing at which the special pattern determination time Tcs has elapsed, the longer the period during which the normal electric device 34a is open in the high probability low support state H6, making it easier to accumulate up to four special 2 reserved balls.

As described above, according to this modification, the game ball is sent to the through gate before (preferably immediately before) the special symbol confirmation time Tcs after the end of the variation of the special symbol fluctuation that has reached the upper limit of high support continuation number of times (5 times) has elapsed. By allowing the game ball to pass through, the open state of the normal electric accessory 34a is continued until after the next (sixth) special symbol fluctuation starts, and after the next special symbol fluctuation starts, the game ball is passed through the second starting port. It becomes possible to create a new game property in which the player can obtain an advantageous state by letting the ball enter 34 and making the number of reserved special 2 balls 4.

In addition, in this modification, since the pass-through promotion effect is executed, it is possible to make the player aware of how to play the game in accordance with the new game nature of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in this modified example, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the opening of the normal electric device 34a continues until the start of the next (sixth) special pattern change after the special pattern change that has reached the high support continuation limit number (five times), the advantageous state start presentation is executed, so that the player can recognize that the passing of the game ball through the through gate 35 has started a state that is advantageous to the player, different from that of a normal pachinko machine.

In addition, in this modification, when the normal electric accessory 34a transitions to the open state in the high-accuracy/low support state H6, a special 2-ball entry promotion performance is executed, so that the player is informed of the new pachinko machine 10. It is possible to make the player aware of how to play the game according to the nature of the game.

In addition, in this modified example, if a game ball enters the second starting hole 34 after transitioning to the high probability low support state H6 and the number of reserved special 2 balls reaches the maximum number of reserved balls, which is four, a favorable effect is executed, so that the player can recognize that there is something special about the number of reserved special 2 balls reaching the maximum number of reserved balls, which is four, after transitioning to the high probability low support state H6.

10-8-16 Variation 16:
In the above-mentioned modified example 15, a configuration may be adopted that does not have a function (hereinafter also referred to as a normal map reservation function) to reserve a normal map lottery based on the passage of a game ball when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in a situation where a new normal map lottery cannot be executed (for example, during the execution of a normal map change or during the opening of the normal electric device 34a, etc.). If a configuration with a normal map reservation function is adopted as in the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modified examples, the reserved normal map lottery may be automatically executed at a timing not intended by the player, so it may be difficult to adjust the opening timing of the normal electric device 34a.

On the other hand, in this modification, a configuration is adopted that does not have the normal pattern holding function in a specific gaming state (for example, high-accuracy, high-support state H4). According to such a configuration, in the high-accuracy, high-support state H4, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the regular lottery is not suspended, so the reserved regular lottery is not held at a timing unintended by the player. It is possible to prevent automatic execution. Therefore, by adjusting the timing at which the player passes the game ball through the through gate 35, it becomes possible to adjust the opening timing of the normal electric accessory 34a. As a result, by passing the game ball through the through gate before (preferably just before) the special symbol confirmation time Tcs after the end of the special symbol variation that has reached the upper limit of continuous high support (5 times), the next The normal electric accessory 34a is kept open until after the (sixth) special pattern fluctuation starts, and after the next special pattern fluctuation starts, the game ball is entered into the second starting port 34 and the special It becomes possible to further highlight the above-mentioned new game feature of increasing the number of 2 pending items to 4 and obtaining an advantageous state for the player.

As a further modification, a configuration that does not have a normal map reservation function (always) regardless of the game state may be adopted. With such a configuration, regardless of the game state, the reserved normal map lottery will not be automatically executed at a timing not intended by the player, so the player can adjust the timing of the opening of the normal electric device 34a by adjusting the timing at which the game ball passes through the through gate 35. As a result, by passing the game ball through the through gate before (preferably immediately before) the special map determination time Tcs after the end of the special map fluctuation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) has elapsed, the normal electric device 34a is kept open until the start of the next (sixth) special map fluctuation, and after the start of the next special map fluctuation, the game ball is placed in the second starting hole 34, making the number of special 2 reservations four, thereby obtaining an advantageous state for the player. This makes it possible to further highlight the new gameplay described above.

《10-8-17》Variation 17:
In the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the high-frequency support mode flag is turned from ON to OFF when the number of executions of the special symbol fluctuation after transitioning to the high-precision high-support state H4 reaches the upper limit number of high support continuations (5 times). The timing may be different depending on the type of jackpot symbol that triggered the transition to the high-probability-high-support state H4.

For example, when the state shifts to the high-precision high support state H4 due to winning the jackpot symbol A (probability variable jackpot A) in the special lottery, the high-frequency support mode flag changes from ON to OFF as shown in Modification 13 above. The timing is set at the start of the special pattern fluctuation when the upper limit number of high support continuations is reached, and when the state shifts to high-precision high support state H4 due to winning the jackpot symbol B (probable variable jackpot B) in the special drawing lottery. As shown in the above modification 14, the timing at which the high-frequency support mode flag turns from ON to OFF is set at the end of the special pattern fluctuation when the high support continuous upper limit number of times is reached, and the jackpot symbol C ( In the case where the transition to the high-probability high-support state H4 occurs due to winning the probability-variable jackpot C), the timing at which the high-frequency support mode flag changes from ON to OFF reaches the maximum number of continuations of the high-frequency support, as shown in modification 15 above. It is set when the special figure confirmation time elapses after the end of the variation of the reached special figure variation. According to such a configuration, the high-frequency support mode flag changes from ON to OFF when the number of executions of the special symbol fluctuation after transitioning to the high-precision high-support state H4 reaches the upper limit number of continuous high support. It is possible to create a sense of anticipation and tension as to which timing will be set (will it be set to a timing advantageous to the player as in the above modification 15?).

《10-8-18》Variation 18:
In the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, a configuration may be provided in which a high-probability transition winning hole is provided, which is a ball entry hole that shifts the lottery mode to a high probability mode when a game ball enters the ball. The configuration of this modification will be specifically described below.

Figure 492 is a front view of the game board 30 in this modified example. The difference from the game board 30 in the embodiment shown in Figure 445 is that a high probability transition winning port 34e is provided in the right area of the game area PA. A movable piece 34f is provided at the ball entry port of the high probability transition winning port 34e. The movable piece 34f can transition from a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the high probability transition winning port 34e to an open state in which the game ball can enter the high probability transition winning port 34e, and is in a closed state in game states other than the low probability high support state H5, and in the low probability high support state H5, the closed state and the open state are alternately repeated at predetermined time intervals (every 1.0 second in this modified example). Then, in the low probability high support state H5 in which the high frequency support mode continues until the next big win, if a game ball enters the high probability transition winning hole 34e, the lottery mode transitions from the low probability mode to the high probability mode, and the game state becomes one in which both the high frequency support mode and the high probability mode continue until the next big win is won.

As explained above, according to this modification, when a fall lottery is won in the high probability high support state H4, the lottery mode shifts to the low probability high support state H5 which is the low probability mode, but the low probability If a game ball can be entered into the high probability transition winning hole 34e in the high support state H5, the determination mode will shift to the second determination mode again. Here, if you win the time saving award in the low probability high support state H5 and can enter the game ball into the high probability transfer winning slot 34e, both the high frequency support mode and the high probability mode will win the next jackpot. The game state continues until the end of the game. This gaming state is very advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to this modification, the player is provided with a new game feature in which a game ball enters the high probability transition winning hole 34e in the low probability high support state H5 and the shift to a more advantageous gaming state. Can be done.

《10-8-19》Variation 19:
In the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, and may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel) or cast iron. , cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, or other metals. In the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the inner frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, etc. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, or other metals. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame against the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function that locks the front door frame against the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, in addition to adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a front door frame are provided. A configuration may also be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened is provided separately. In addition, in the above embodiment and each modification example, the background image for the high support state with high accuracy is displayed as a background image in the high support state with high accuracy, and the background image for the low support state with low accuracy is displayed as the background image in the low support state with low accuracy. A configuration may be adopted in which a background image is displayed. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the rotation axis for rotating the inner frame relative to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front, but this rotation axis is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. You may adopt the structure provided. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the rotation axis for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front, but this rotation axis is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. You may adopt the configuration provided in . Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the game board included in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, etc. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the pachinko machine has a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but a configuration may be adopted in which the lower tray is omitted and only the upper tray is provided. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided in the left side in front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, even if a configuration is adopted in which when a jackpot is won in a high probability and high support state, a production that suggests that an advantageous event has occurred (jackpot announcement production) is performed. good. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may also be adopted. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations can be adopted as the firing means capable of firing the game ball. For example, a configuration that uses elastic force such as a spring to fire the game ball Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the game balls are launched using wind pressure when compressed gas is spouted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, when the operating handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, approximately 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 game balls (for example, 60 shots) are fired per minute, or the configuration may be such that more than 100 game balls (for example, 200 balls) are fired per minute. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping a lever. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, in the low-probability low-support state that is transitioned to when the number of executions of the game after the transition to the high-probability high support state has reached a predetermined number of times, the special 2 remaining balance is being used up. In this mode, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery, the system is configured such that when a jackpot is won in a lottery with a high probability (for example, 100% probability), the state is transferred to a high probability high support state again with a high probability (for example, 100% probability), and on the other hand, a low probability low It may also be configured such that when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the left-handed mode in the support state, the probability is allocated to a variable probability jackpot with a lower probability than the above-mentioned high probability, and the transition to the high probability high support state is again made with the lower probability. . Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification example, a configuration is adopted in which a speaker is provided as a means capable of outputting audio, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones that the player brought to the earphone jack, the player can listen to the sound of the Pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding Pachinko machines. You can enjoy it in minutes. In addition, if you win a jackpot after the transition to the low probability low support state and before the special 2 pending winning lottery ends in the low probability low support state, an effect suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred (jackpot announcement It is also possible to adopt a configuration that executes a performance (direction). Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations may be adopted as the display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, etc. may be used. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be used. Further, in a situation where it is possible to pass the game ball to the V winning area, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect is performed to urge the player to pass the game ball to the V winning area. Then, in a situation where the game ball can pass through the V winning area, when the game ball passes through the V winning area, the configuration executes an effect that suggests that a state advantageous to the player is started. May be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, an LED display device, etc. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, etc. may be employed. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the special information stored (withheld) in the high probability high support state which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, In the opening/closing execution mode that guarantees that the system will re-enter the high-accuracy, high-support state if a specific condition is met, such as winning a guaranteed-variable jackpot before the winning lottery ends for special information based on the entry of game balls. The lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is determined to be a high-probability mode, and on the other hand, the number of executions of the game after the transition to the high-probability, high-support state reaches a predetermined number without winning a probability-variable jackpot. When the number of times (ST number) is reached, it may be configured to shift to a low probability low support state in which the probability of shifting to the high probability high support state again is lower than the opening/closing execution mode based on the probability variable jackpot. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, pictures, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be used as decorative patterns. In addition, when a jackpot is won in the high probability high support state, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF to enter the jackpot gaming state, and a V guaranteed winning prize opening is provided in which a game ball can be entered in the jackpot gaming state, When a game ball enters the V guaranteed prize opening, a configuration may be adopted in which the entry of the ball is used as an opportunity to shift the lottery mode to the high probability mode after the end of the jackpot game state. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, but may be two or less, or four or more, for example. If a configuration in which there is one pattern row of decorative patterns is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. Further, when a configuration in which there are two or four or more rows of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, in a low probability low support state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, when a specific condition such as winning a normal jackpot is satisfied, the support mode is set to a predetermined value. A gaming state in which the high-frequency support mode is maintained for a period of time, for example, until the number of games played reaches a predetermined number of times or until the next jackpot is won in a winning lottery, compared to a low-probability low-support state. The player is configured to shift to a low probability high support state which is highly advantageous for the player, and in the low probability low support state, when a second predetermined condition such as winning a variable probability jackpot without winning a normal jackpot is satisfied, It is configured to shift to a high-accuracy, high-support state, and in the high-accuracy, high-support state, a jackpot is usually won when a winning lottery is drawn for special information acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. When a specific condition such as this is satisfied, a configuration may be adopted in which the game is shifted to a low probability high support state or a low probability low support state which is less advantageous for the player compared to the high probability high support state. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. For example, a rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the A configuration in which the grand prize opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation axis, and a configuration in which the grand prize opening can be opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can be slid in the front and back direction of the game board. may be adopted. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each modification example, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, such as a so-called tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory with a pair of movable valves that can be opened left and right, A rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the starting port can be opened by rotating the plate-like member forward about the rotating shaft, front and rear of the game board. It is also possible to employ a configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-like member that is slidable in the direction. Furthermore, in the low-probability, low-support state, when the normal electric accessory transitions to the open state, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect is performed to prompt the player to enter the game ball into the second starting port. . In addition, what is meant by the above-mentioned "low-probability low-support state in which the probability of transitioning again to the high-probability high-support state is lower than the opening/closing execution mode based on variable jackpot" is the transition from the low-probability low support state to the high-probability high support state. The probability of transitioning to (probability of being allocated to a probability variable jackpot when winning a winning lottery in a low probability/low support state, probability variation ratio, for example, probability variation entry rate 50%, etc.) is certain after the end (following the normal flow of the game). If you shoot the game ball with a 100% probability (for example, if you hit right-handed), it is guaranteed that it will transition to a high-probability, high-support state. The above-mentioned probability does not mean the high or low probability of winning in a winning lottery. In addition, when the number of special 2 pending items becomes 4 in the low probability low support state, 4 pending icon images corresponding to the special 2 pending number becoming 4 will be displayed on the symbol display device (liquid crystal display device). You may also adopt a configuration in which the information is displayed in . In addition, in the above embodiment and each modification, the number of prize balls set for each ball entry hole (starting hole, general winning hole, big winning hole, etc.) is an example, and the number of prize balls set for each ball entering hole is By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications.

《10-8-20》Variation 20:
In the tenth embodiment and its modifications, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices such as the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100. A configuration including two control devices, such as a device and a sub-control device, may also be used. The sub-control device may be configured to execute various processes executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the tenth embodiment. Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment and its modifications, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 need not be limited to the classification described in the tenth embodiment; 60, 90, and 100 as long as they can execute the various processes in the tenth embodiment.

Eleventh embodiment:
11-1 Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 493 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter, also referred to as a "pachinko machine") according to an eleventh embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 relative to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 relative to the inner frame 13. On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound and light emission control device, and a display control device, are disposed. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window 18 is formed in the approximate center of the front door frame 14. Resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided around the window 18. The electric parts are composed of light-emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role in enhancing the presentation effect by lighting or blinking during each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, etc. In addition, a glass unit 19 consisting of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the open window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board through the glass unit 19 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed into a box shape with an open top surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls ejected from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed into a box shape with an open top surface. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and by operating the lever 23, the player can switch the outlet 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20. The production operation button 24 is an operation section through which a player performs an input operation for a game production performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

An operating handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "right side"). When the player operates the operating handle 25 (rotating operation), a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the firing of game balls by the game ball firing mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operating handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. Then, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "left side"). When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing strength to the front of the game board, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired to the front of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and also flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can perform what is called a "right-handed hit." Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. Control equipment for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 494 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board that has a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is configured so that traces of opening and closing remain. For example, a seal is affixed to an openable/closable location, and when the board box is opened, the words "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio/light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The audio/light emission control device 90 controls light-emitting means such as speakers and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands sent from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands sent from the audio/light emission control device 90. The pattern display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays patterns and images for performances.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The firing control device 80 controls the game so that when an instruction to fire a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 that is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a slope that is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and gently sloped so that the game balls flow downstream. A tank rail 55 having a tank rail 55, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, receiving game balls from the case rail 56 and paying out a predetermined number of game balls according to instructions from a payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the power necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. The power supply device 85 is connected to the power switch 88. By turning the power switch 88 ON/OFF, the pachinko machine 10 is switched between a supply state, which is a specified gaming state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and a non-supply state in which no power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

Figure 495 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to define a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. Game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism are guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flow down the game area PA. In the game area PA, multiple nails 42 are planted approximately perpendicular to the game board 30, and various gimmicks such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 has a number of openings formed therethrough in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, through gates 35a, 35b, and a variable winning device 36. Game balls that enter the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are guided to the individual openings formed in the game board 30. The game board 30 also has a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 has a special chart unit 37, a general chart unit 38, and a round display section 39.

As shown in the figure, the general winning hole 32 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, ten game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 494).

The first starting hole 33 is a ball entry hole member that forms a ball entry hole through which a game ball can enter. The first starting hole 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided below the game board 30. The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 34. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port 34. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery to be described later is executed.

Each of the two through gates 35a and 35b includes a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction. Each of the through gates 35a and 35b is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to perform a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b, the main control device 60 uses the passage as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery). As a result of the internal lottery, if an electric role release is won, the electric role accessory 34a shifts to an electric role release state in which it becomes an open state in a predetermined manner. One of the two through gates 35a, 35b is provided on the left side of the symbol display device 41, and the other through gate 35b is provided on the right side of the symbol display device 41. Each through gate 35a, 35b is located upstream of the second starting port 34 with respect to the downstream direction of the game ball, so the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through. 2. The ball can enter the starting port 34. In addition, in this embodiment, even if game balls pass through the through gates 35a and 35b, the payout of prize balls is not executed.

The variable prize winning device 36 is provided on the lower right side of the gaming area PA. The variable winning device 36 includes a big winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the big winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big prize opening 36a. When a jackpot is won as a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60 and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state. The opening/closing execution mode is entered when a jackpot is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by a ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and the opening/closing door 36b is in an open state. This is a mode that repeats the closed state and closed state. That is, when a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33, the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the jackpot 36a. Similarly, if a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the big winning port 36a. . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the general winning port 32, first starting port 33, second starting port 34, or variable winning device 36 are out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the opening 43.

The game balls that enter each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, and the out opening 43 are separated into individual balls formed on the gaming board 30. It is configured to be guided to the back side of the game board 30 through the opening and to finally merge with a discharge passage provided on the back side of the game board 30. The discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor that detects game balls. By detecting the game balls with the discharge path detection sensor, it is possible to know the number of game balls fired onto the game board 30.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern refers to a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 33. When a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 is held, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a variable first pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. When the lottery is completed, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a stationary first pattern corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display section 37b is a display section for displaying a second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display section 37b is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. , causes the second symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. When the lottery ends, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop display the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The period from when the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b starts to be displayed until it is stopped is also referred to as the variation time. call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a until the time when the first symbol is stopped and displayed is also called the first variation time, and The time period from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to the time it is stopped and displayed is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special symbol unit 37 further includes a first reserved display section 37c and a second reserved display section 37d, which are made of LED lamps, adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting hole 33 are reserved. The first reserved display section 37c displays the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps that are turned on. For example, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 during a jackpot game, the display mode of the first reserved display section 37c changes. The first reserved display section 37c also functions as a predetermined suggestion information display means. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting hole 34 are reserved. The second reserved display section 37d displays the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps that are turned on.

The general map unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When a lottery to open an electric reel is held triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the general map unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to light up, flash, or display in a predetermined manner. When the lottery to open an electric reel is completed, the general map unit 38 displays in a predetermined manner corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode, or displays corresponding thereto. A round game is a game that is opened and closed until either the predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b remains open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display section 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends and a new game round is started.

The special chart unit 37, the general chart unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured with segment displays or light-emitting displays using LED lamps, but may be configured with various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery results, such as, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display device.

The variable display unit 40 is disposed approximately in the center of the play area PA. The variable display unit 40 is equipped with a pattern display device 41. The pattern display device 41 is equipped with a liquid crystal display. The display content of the pattern display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The pattern display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. The display surface of the main display section 45 described above is located on the front side (the side facing the player) relative to the display surface of the pattern display device 41.

When the first pattern display unit 37a displays a variable or predetermined display based on a ball entering the first starting hole 33, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined display of the pattern accordingly. Also, when the second pattern display unit 37b displays a variable or predetermined display based on a ball entering the second starting hole 34, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined display of the pattern accordingly. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to display effects triggered by a ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, but also performs display effects during the opening and closing execution mode to which the mode is shifted when a jackpot is won. Details of the pattern display device 41 are explained below.

Figure 496 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns and display surface 41a variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. Figure 496(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. As shown in Figure 496(a), patterns showing the numbers 1 to 9 are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. The patterns showing the numbers 1 to 9 are classified into three types by color. The patterns showing the numbers 1 to 3 are green, the patterns showing the numbers 4 to 6 are red, and the patterns showing the numbers 7 to 9 are gold. Note that the patterns variably displayed may be patterns in which the patterns showing the numbers 1 to 9 are accompanied by pictures of characters or the like.

Figure 496 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in the figure, three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, left, center, and right, are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the numbers 1 to 9 shown in Figure 496 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and a variable display is performed in which each pattern row scrolls from top to bottom or bottom to top with periodicity. As shown in Figure 496 (b), after the variable display by scrolling, one pattern is displayed in a stopped state on the pay line L1 for each pattern row. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, a variable display is started in which the patterns of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Then, the scrolling symbols are switched from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, each of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displays a predetermined symbol in a static display state. When the variable display of the symbols ends and the display is static, if the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined combination of symbols is formed on the valid line L1. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the valid line L1. Note that the manner of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned manner, and various modes of the variable display of the symbols can be adopted, such as the number of symbol rows, the number of valid lines, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows, and the number of symbols in each symbol row.

Here, the term "game round" refers to the period from the start of the variable display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b until the end of the variable display and the stop display. A unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery regarding the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. be. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information every game. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when special information is acquired based on the entry of a game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, after the segment display is displayed in a variable manner, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the pachinko machine 10 displays the symbol display device for each game. At step 41, after a predetermined symbol row is displayed in a variable manner, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit gaming time consists of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 496(b), the first start port reservation area Ds1, the reserved digestion area Dm, and the second start port reservation area Ds2 are displayed below the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. The reserved digestion area Dm is displayed in the center of the left-right direction of the display surface 41a, the first start port reservation area Ds1 is displayed to the left of the reserved digestion area Dm, and the second start port reservation area Ds2 is displayed to the right of the reserved digestion area Dm. The first start port reservation area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the first start port 33. The second start port reservation area Ds2 displays the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the second start port 34. In this embodiment, as described above, the number of reserved game balls that have entered the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is up to four each. The operation of the first start port holding area Ds1, the second start port holding area Ds2, and the holding digestion area Dm will be described in detail later.

《11-2》Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

Figure 497 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes an audio and light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a ROM 63 that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. It is equipped with a RAM 64 which is a memory for storing data. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that a part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 are connected to an input port of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power necessary for the main control device 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies it to each device. Supply electricity. Furthermore, the power supply device 85 is equipped with a capacitor (not shown), and continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period when a power outage occurs or when the power switch 88 (Fig. 494) is turned off. do.

Furthermore, various detection sensors 67a to 67e are connected to the input ports of the main control board 61. Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided in various ball entry holes such as the general winning hole 32, the first starting hole 33, the second starting hole 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. . Based on signals from various detection sensors 67a to 67e, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and whether or not a game ball has entered a through gate. 35 is passed. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, and also executes an electric accessory release lottery based on the entering of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 includes a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , and the main display section 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed. Also, if the electric role opening is selected as a result of the electric role opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric role drive unit 34b so that the electric role 34a is opened. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the main display unit 45. Also, when the type of jackpot is determined in the opening and closing execution mode and the number of rounds to be played in the opening and closing execution mode is determined, the MPU 62 executes display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a ball entering the general prize opening 32 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and a ball entering the first starting opening 33 is transmitted. If it is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is sent from the main control device 60, and if the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34 is specified, the payout of one game ball is sent. A prize ball command corresponding to this is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The payout control device 70 is connected to a launch control device 80. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of a game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is met. In addition, an operating handle 25 and a game ball launch button 26 are connected to the launch control device 80.

The audio emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be explained later.

In addition, the audio light emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 consisting of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game performance that reflects the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the fluctuation time of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. , the presence or absence of a reach, the contents of the reach effect, the contents of the preview effect executed in each game round, etc. are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

Figure 498 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for the winning lottery, etc. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, the display settings of the main display unit 45, and the setting of the pattern display of the pattern display device 41. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to allocate the jackpot type such as a guaranteed jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. The reach random number counter C3 is used for the reach judgment of whether or not a reach will occur when the pattern sequence displayed on the pattern display device 41 is changed out of the normal range.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Further, an electric accessory release counter C4 is used for an electric accessory opening lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to its counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a specified area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of ball entry is stored as pending information. The data are stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of the area 64b. The first holding area Ra has four areas corresponding to the maximum number of held game balls that have entered the first starting port 33, that is, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area. area. When a game ball enters the first starting port 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of ball entry is set as pending information (hereinafter, special 1 pending). (Also referred to as "A") is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas the ball is stored in is determined by the order in which the ball enters, and the earlier the ball enters, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area) the ball is stored.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the time of the ball entry are stored in chronological order in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b. The second holding area Rb has four areas corresponding to the maximum number of game balls that have entered the second starting hole 34, namely, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the time of the ball entry are stored as holding information (hereinafter also referred to as special 2 holding) in one of the first to fourth areas. The first to fourth areas in which the balls are stored are determined by the order of entry, and the earlier the balls enter, the higher the area in which they are stored (the first area is the highest area).

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be explained. As described above, the winning random number counter C1 is used in the winning lottery. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one in sequence within the range of 0 to 1199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value. Furthermore, when the winning random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering the first starting port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the winning/failure table stored in the winning/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is determined to be a jackpot. It is determined whether or not. Further, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is stored in the determination processing execution area in the order in which the game balls are acquired by entering the first starting port 33. Move to execution area AE of 64c. Specifically, processing is executed to move the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra to the determination processing execution area 64c, and to shift the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra. do. The data shift is to sequentially shift the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the upper area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area.

The values of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb are moved to the execution area AE of the judgment process execution area 64c in the order obtained by the game balls entering the second starting hole 34. Specifically, the data stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb is moved to the judgment process execution area 64c, and a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the second holding area Rb. The data shift involves shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the higher areas in order. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, and the fourth area to the third area, and so on.

When the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second reservation area Rb, the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second reservation area Rb regardless of whether the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the first reservation area Ra. The stored value of the winning random number counter C1 is to be moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c. As a result, when the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in both the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb, the winning value stored in the second holding area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34 is stored. Priority is given to the value of random number counter C1. That is, in this embodiment, when the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in both the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb, the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second holding area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34. Priority is given to the value of the winning random number counter C1 that is stored in the second holding area Rb, and among the values of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb, the data stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb is determined. The data is moved to the processing execution area 64c, and a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. If the value of the winning random number counter C1 is not stored in the second reservation area Rb, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra, the value of the winning random number counter C1 is not stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra. The stored data is moved to the determination process execution area 64c, and the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed.

In addition, in the above explanation, the order in which the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c is explained. However, it is not limited to the value of the winning random number counter C1, and counters other than the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb (jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation Each value of the type counter CS) is also moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c in the same order.

Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the first reserved area Ra of the reserved information storage area 64b at the time when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, and is stored in the second reserved area Rb of the reserved information storage area 64b at the time when the game ball enters the second starting hole 34.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter C2. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. . In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reserve area Ra of the reserve information storage area 64b when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, and is stored in the second reserve area Rb of the reserve information storage area 64b when the game ball enters the second starting hole 34. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reserve area Ra is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c, and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a reach occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reserve area Rb is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c, and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a reach occurs. However, if the winning lottery results in a big win and the mode transitions to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some combinations of symbols that have the possibility of forming a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot are stopped for some of the multiple symbol arrays displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and in that state, symbols are displayed variably in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined active line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 496(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

The reach also includes a reach effect in which, when a reach line is formed, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a varying manner while a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background screen, and a reach effect is performed by reducing or hiding the symbol combination on which the reach line is formed and then displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, the decision of whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character may be made using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter.

Reach is classified into three types, normal reach, super reach, and special reach, depending on the content of the reach effect. A reach effect is executed in which the expectation of winning a jackpot is higher in super reach than in normal reach, and a reach effect is executed in which the expectation of winning a jackpot is higher in special reach than in super reach.

Next, the details of the change type counter CS will be explained. The change type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the change time in the first pattern display section 37a and the second pattern display section 37b, and the change time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41. The change type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value.

The change type counter CS is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, and is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b when the game ball enters the second starting hole 34. The value of the change type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra is used when determining the change pattern at the start of the change display in the first pattern display unit 37a and when the pattern display device 41 starts changing the pattern after moving to the judgment processing execution area 64c. The value of the change type counter CS stored in the second holding area Rb is used when determining the change pattern at the start of the change display in the second pattern display unit 37b and when the pattern display device 41 starts changing the pattern after moving to the judgment processing execution area 64c. When determining the change time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, a change time table stored in the change time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the content of the reach performance (i.e., the type of reach) can be specified according to the type of change pattern.

Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be explained. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 in the electric role execution area 64e A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory opening lottery) is held to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, in the electric role playing area 64e, the win/fail table (the win/fail table for the electric role-playing object lottery) stored in the object lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role-playing object opening counter C4 are determined. The information is compared, and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired values of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS, and the electric role opening counter C4 corresponds to special information in the present invention. In addition, at least one of the values of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is also referred to as reserved information.

Next, the hit/miss table will be explained. The hit/miss table is table data for checking against the hit random number counter C1 when a hit lottery is held based on the hit random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has a low probability mode and a high probability mode set as lottery modes for the hit lottery, and when a hit lottery is held in the low probability mode, the hit/miss table for the low probability mode is referenced, and when a hit lottery is held in the high probability mode, the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced. The high probability mode (also called the high probability game state) is a game state that is started by winning a special jackpot, and refers to a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a hit lottery is relatively higher than in the low probability mode.

FIG. 499 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table. FIG. 499(a) shows a pass/fail table for low probability mode (for low probability mode), and FIG. 499(b) shows a pass/fail table for high probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 499(a), five values from 0 to 4 are set in the win/fail table for the low probability mode as the value of the winning random number counter C1 that is a jackpot. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 499(b), in the high probability mode win/fail table, 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the values of the winning random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 (16 to 1199) are outliers. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the set of values of the winning random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the winning/losing table for the low probability mode is included in the set of values of the winning random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the winning/losing table for the high probability mode. However, as long as the winning lottery result shows a higher probability of a jackpot in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

Although not adopted in the win/lose table in this embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

A "small win" is a result that triggers a transition to the opening and closing execution mode in which the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger a transition to either the lottery mode or the support mode. In contrast, a "miss" is a result that does not trigger a transition to the opening and closing execution mode, and further does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode or the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be explained. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspects of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends (3) Control of the electric accessories 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening/closing execution mode ends support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (1) opening and closing execution mode, a high frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is relatively high and low. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed multiple times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and each opening can be set to continue until 30 seconds have passed or until the number of balls entering the opening and closing door 36b reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and each opening can be set to continue until 0.2 seconds have passed or until the number of balls entering the opening and closing door 36b reaches 6.

When the player operates the operating handle 25, the game ball launching mechanism 81 is controlled to launch one game ball into the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 seconds. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is shorter than the game ball launch cycle. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode for the low-frequency winning mode, no game balls actually enter the game area. However, the game balls may be set to enter the game area PA even in the opening/closing execution mode for the low-frequency winning mode.

The number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened, the time limit for opening each time, and the number of balls that can be opened each time are arbitrary, as long as the frequency of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. Specifically, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed more frequently, the time limit for opening each time is longer, or the number of balls that can be opened each time is greater than in the low-frequency winning mode. To clearly distinguish between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that balls do not actually enter the variable winning device 36.

As the lottery mode for the winning lottery after the above (2) opening/closing execution mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 can be set to a high probability mode in which the winning lottery is performed using a high probability winning/losing table as the winning/losing table, and a low probability mode in which the winning lottery is performed using a low probability winning/losing table as the winning/losing table. As explained using FIG. 499, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher when the winning lottery is performed using a high probability winning/losing table than when the winning lottery is performed using a low probability winning/losing table.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the above-mentioned (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, the game balls continue to be launched into the game area PA in the same manner. When compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role opening lottery in the electric role-playing object opening lottery using the electric role-playing object opening counter C4. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role-playing role in the electric role-playing object opening lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time for one opening of the electric accessory 34a may be set longer than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role is won.

Although not adopted in this embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric role 34a is opened when the electric role opening is won may be set to be greater than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the opening time of the electric role 34a is set to be longer. Also, in the case where the electric role opening is won in the high-frequency support mode and the electric role 34a is opened multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state may be set to be shorter than the opening time of one. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured between one electric role opening lottery and the next electric role opening lottery may be set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of the ball landing in the second starting hole 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in the establishment of the conditions for obtaining special information.

In this embodiment, if the winning lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to allocate the jackpot type. The allocation of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as an allocation table in the allocation table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 500 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 500(a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 500(b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The sorting table for the first starting hole is referred to in the winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting hole 33, and the sorting table for the second starting hole is referred to when drawing a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting hole 33. It is referred to when drawing a winning lottery based on the number of game balls that enter the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting hole in FIG. 500(a), the distribution table for the first starting hole has the following jackpot types set based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33: 16R sure-win jackpot, 8R sure-win jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot.

The 16R and 8R probability variable jackpots are jackpots in which the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is a high-frequency winning mode, the lottery mode for the winning lottery after the opening and closing execution mode ends (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "lottery mode") is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot is the number of times the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening and closing execution mode: 16 times (16 rounds) for the 16R probability variable jackpot and 8 times (8 rounds) for the 8R probability variable jackpot.

In the 16R normal jackpot and 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is It is a jackpot that the support mode after the end becomes the high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot is that the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is different, and the 16R normal jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R normal jackpot is 8 (8 rounds).

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39" correspond to a 16R probability variable jackpot, and "40 to 64" correspond to an 8R probability variable jackpot. "65-89" corresponds to the 16R regular jackpot, and "90-99" corresponds to the 8R regular jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the form of jackpots is diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the 16R special jackpot is the most advantageous to the player, followed by the 8R special jackpot, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. In this way, by setting multiple types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage to the player, monotony in the game is prevented and it is possible to increase attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 16R guaranteed variable jackpot and 8R regular jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "65 to 99" correspond to the 8R normal jackpot. It corresponds to

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the allocation of the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won is different between when the jackpot is won based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 and when the jackpot is won based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage to the player.

If the winning lottery results in a loss, the game will not switch to the open/close execution mode, and the lottery mode and support mode will not change. If the jackpot type is a 16-variable jackpot or an 8R variable jackpot, as explained above, the lottery mode after the open/close execution mode ends will be the high probability mode, but this high probability mode state will continue until the next time the jackpot is won in the winning lottery.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and determines the type of the jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referenced.

FIG. 501 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory release lottery) used when executing the electric accessory lottery.

Figure 501 (a) shows a winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) used in the low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 501 (a), in the winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode), two values, 0 and 1, are set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in winning the short electric role opening, two values, 2 and 3, are set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in winning the long electric role opening, and 462 values, from 4 to 465, are set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in losing. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role short opening is won with a probability of 1/233, and the electric role long opening is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the electric role short opening is won in the low-frequency support mode, the electric role 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 0.6 seconds. When the long electric role opening is won during low frequency support mode, the electric role 34a opens once, and the opening time is 5.0 seconds.

Figure 501 (b) shows a winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 501 (b), the winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for high frequency support mode) has 462 values from 0 to 461 set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will win the electric role opening. Four values from 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will lose. In other words, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the electric role opening is won during the high frequency support mode, the electric role 34a opens once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery is set so that the probability of the game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode. In addition, the winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) is set so that when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric role 34a can be one of two types, long and short. The winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) is set so that when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric role 34a is longer than the short electric role opening and shorter than the long electric role opening, which is a medium electric role opening. Note that the opening times when the short electric role opening, the medium electric role opening, and the long electric role opening are selected do not have to be limited to the above examples and may be other times.

<<11-3>> Electrical configuration of the audio/light-emission control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 502 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 497) are omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on a sound light emission control board 91 provided in the sound light emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is an element that includes a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, etc. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, etc. The details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 60 and the performance operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. The speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, as well as the display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is implemented as an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols and pictures displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns and display pictures, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The various displayed pictures include pictures of petals P1 to P4, which will be described later. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

11-4. Overview of Processing by Gaming Machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

《11-4-1》Pending display:
In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as described above, below the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, there are displayed a first start port reservation area Ds1 indicating the number of reserved balls based on game balls entering the first start port 33, a second start port reservation area Ds2 indicating the number of reserved balls based on game balls entering the second start port 34, and a reservation consumption area Dm located between the first start port reservation area Ds1 and the second start port reservation area Ds2.

FIG. 503 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a change in the first starting port holding area Ds1 and the holding extinguishing area Dm. In the first starting port holding area Ds1, up to four holding display icons corresponding to each holding (each of up to four holdings) based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 are lined up in the left and right direction. Is displayed. In this embodiment, the hold display icon is circular, and in the example shown in FIG. A first hold display icon H1 and a second hold display icon H2 respectively corresponding to the hold 2 (also referred to as hold 2) are shown. In the first starting opening holding area Ds1, the first holding display icon H1 is displayed at the rightmost position, and the second holding display icon H2 is displayed at the second position from the right to the left. That is, in the first starting port holding area Ds1, each time a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the holding display icons are displayed so as to increase by one from the right side to the left side.

The reserved consumption area Dm is shaped like a container that is open at the top, and in the example shown in FIG. 503(a), a reserved display icon H0 is placed inside the reserved consumption area Dm. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a winning lottery is held when a ball enters the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, and a variable display is displayed to notify the result of the winning lottery. When this variable display starts, the reserved display icon is placed inside the reserved consumption area Dm. This variable display is based on the reservation (reserved information) corresponding to the reserved display icon H0 placed inside the reserved consumption area Dm. By observing that the reserved display icon H0 is placed inside the reserved consumption area Dm, the player can know that the reservation corresponding to the reserved display icon H0 is being consumed.

In the state shown in FIG. 503(a), when the variable display ends and is stopped, the hold display icon H0 arranged inside the hold digestion area Dm disappears. Next, as shown in FIG. 503(b), the first hold display icon H1 located at the rightmost position in the first start port hold area Ds1 moves inside the hold digestion area Dm. At this time, the second hold display icon H2 located second from the right in the first start port hold area Ds1 moves (shifts) to the rightmost position. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 503(b), there are no hold display icons located third and fourth from the right to the left, but if they existed, the hold display icon located third would move (shift) to the second position, and the hold display icon located fourth would move (shift) to the third position.

As a result of the movement shown in FIG. 503(b), the state shown in FIG. 503(c) is obtained. That is, the first hold display icon H1 is arranged inside the hold extinguishing area Dm, and the second hold display icon H2 is displayed at the rightmost position of the first starting port hold area Ds1. At this time, a variable display is performed to notify the result of the winning lottery based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the first hold display icon H1.

As described above, each time the variable display and stop display corresponding to one play round are executed, each pending display icon displayed in the first start port pending area Ds1 shifts from left to right, and finally moves from the rightmost position into the pending consumption area Dm. Then, the variable display and stop display are executed to notify the result of the winning lottery based on the pending information corresponding to that pending display icon. In this way, the pending information corresponding to each pending display icon displayed in the first start port pending area Ds1 is subject to the winning lottery in order from right to left (i.e., in the order in which it was held).

Figure 504 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the change in the second start port reservation area Ds2 and the reservation digestion area Dm. In the second start port reservation area Ds2, up to four reservation display icons H corresponding to each reservation (up to four reservations) based on the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34 are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The manner in which the second start port reservation area Ds2 changes is roughly the same as the manner in which the first start port reservation area Ds1 shown in Figure 503 changes, and the direction of movement is reversed compared to the first start port reservation area Ds1. In other words, each time a game ball enters the second start port 34, the reservation display icons H are displayed to increase by one from the left to the right. Each time a game is played, the reserved display icons H move one by one from right to left in the second start port reserved area Ds2, and finally move into the reserved consumption area Dm, where a variable display and a stationary display are executed (consumed) to notify the result of the winning lottery based on the reserved (reserved information) corresponding to the reserved display icon H. In this way, the reserved information corresponding to each reserved display icon displayed in the second start port reserved area Ds2 becomes the subject of the winning lottery in order from left to right (i.e., in the order in which it was reserved).

Note that when the hold display icon H exists in the second starting gate holding area Ds2, it is displayed in the second starting port holding area Ds2 in priority to the holding display icon that exists in the first starting port holding area Ds1. The special 2 hold corresponding to the existing hold display icon H is expired.

The hold display icon displayed in the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 was a circle as described above, but instead of this, it may be another polygonal shape such as a triangle, a rectangle, or a pentagon. Furthermore, the hold display icon is not limited to a graphic image, but may be an image of a character, etc. The hold digestion area Dm was a trapezoid as described above, but instead of this, it may be an image of another shape such as a triangle, a rectangle, or a circle. Furthermore, the hold digestion area Dm is not limited to a graphic image, but may be an image of a character, etc. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the hold display icon moved from the first start port hold area Ds1 or the second start port hold area Ds2 to the hold digestion area Dm was configured to be placed inside the hold digestion area Dm, but instead of this, it may be displayed in such a way that it enters the hold digestion area Dm and disappears.

《11-4-2》Omen preview performance:
In recent years, pachinko machines have been designed to increase players' expectations for the hold information corresponding to each hold display icon (that is, the hold information stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64). The value of the random number counter C1 is confirmed before it becomes a target of a winning lottery, and based on the confirmed result, a so-called pre-reading effect, which gives players a sense of anticipation, is performed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as one of the pre-read effects, when there is pending information corresponding to each pending display icon that has a high possibility of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery, the pachinko machine 10 performs a pre-reading effect when When displaying the stoppage of fluctuation regarding suspension information stored before suspension information that is likely to occur, a premonitory preview performance that is a special performance is executed. The foreshadowing performance will be described in detail below.

In normal times when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, the player executes a left-handed hit, causes the game ball to flow down to the left side of the game area PA, and the game ball enters the first starting port 33. Let the ball enter. When a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the special information acquired based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b as special 1 holding. They are stored in order, but here we will consider a case where the maximum number (upper limit number) of 4 special 1 reservations has been accumulated.

FIG. 505 is an explanatory diagram showing a case where a jackpot is included in special 1 pending during normal times. As shown in the figure, it is assumed that four special 1 reservations from special 1 reservation 1 to special 1 reservation 4 are stored during normal times. The main control device 60 executes a previous determination process every time a game ball enters the first starting port 33, and determines whether the winning lottery is correct or not based on the reservation information of special 1 reservation stored by the current ball entry. , determination of the type of jackpot, determination of the occurrence of reach, determination of the type of fluctuation pattern, etc. are performed before the pending information becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Note that the type of variation pattern is determined by determining the variation time based on the value of the variation type counter CS included in the hold information, and based on the variation time. Thereafter, the main control device 60 sets the determination result of the first determination process as a hold command, and transmits the hold command to the audio emission control device 90. The audio emission control device 90 receives the hold command, and specifies, from the hold command, the success or failure result of the winning lottery, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a reach, and the contents of the reach effect (type of reach). The content of the reach effect can be identified from the type of fluctuation pattern. In the illustrated example, it is assumed that the lottery result of the winning lottery is a jackpot in the special 1 reservation 4 stored last among the four special 1 reservations, and it is determined that a super reach will occur. The audio emission control device 90 executes the pending continuous performance process using the receiving from the main control device 60 of the pending command regarding the Special 1 pending 4, which is determined to be a jackpot win, as a trigger. According to the pending continuous performance processing, the precursor preview performance is executed when each special 1 reservation stored at a timing before special 1 reservation 4 is exhausted. Specifically, one or a plurality of (in this case, three times) precursor preview performance is executed across each game round corresponding to special 1 reservation 1 to special 1 reservation 3.

FIGS. 506 to 508 and FIG. 510 show a series of performances from when special 1 reservation 1 is exhausted until when special 1 reservation 4 is exhausted. FIG. 506 is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display and an omen notice performance (first time) regarding Special 1 Pending 1. As shown in FIG. 506(a), in the audio emission control device 90, a variable display is first performed to notify the lottery result of the winning lottery for Special 1 Pending 1. Specifically, a display icon H1 corresponding to special 1 reservation 1 is arranged inside the reservation extinguishing area Dm, and the result of the winning lottery based on the reservation (reservation information) corresponding to this display icon H1 is announced. The fluctuation is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a.

In the audio emission control device 90, after the variable display for the special 1 reservation 1, as shown in FIG. 506(b), a stop display for the special 1 reservation 1 is executed. This stop display constitutes a part of the foreshadowing performance. Here, the combination of symbols corresponding to the chance is displayed in a stopped state. That is, regarding a plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to a chance roll is displayed in a state stopped on the active line L1. In this embodiment, for example, [3.4.1] is set as a chance. Note that [3, 4, 1] is just an example, and other combinations may be used as chances.

In the sound emission control device 90, after the above-mentioned stop display, an effect in which bubbles BL appear is executed as shown in FIG. 506(c). The performance in which the bubble BL appears constitutes a part of the omen preview performance. As an effect of the appearance of the bubbles BL, the bubbles BL are displayed in a wide range including the main display area MA of the display surface 41a, and a sound indicating the bubble sound is emitted from the speaker 46.

To summarize, when the lottery result of the winning lottery for special 1 reservation 4 is a jackpot win, when the variation for special 1 reservation 1 stops, a combination of symbols corresponding to the chance is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. is stopped and displayed, and during the stop display, an effect is performed in which bubbles BL appear with a bubble sound. A performance in which a combination of symbols corresponding to this chance is displayed in a stopped state and a bubble BL appears along with a bubble sound during the stopped display corresponds to the foreshadowing performance (first time).

When the player confirms that a chance number appears in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a after the variable display of special 1 pending 1, and that a bubble BL appears overlapping the combination of symbols of the chance number. It is expected that there may be reservation information that will lead to a jackpot in a winning lottery among the Special 1 reservations corresponding to each reservation display icon.

Figure 507 is an explanatory diagram showing the variable display and premonition preview performance (second time) for special 1 reserve 2. After the performance shown in Figure 506 is executed, as shown in Figure 507 (a), the audio and light emission control device 90 executes a variable display to notify the result of the winning lottery for special 1 reserve 2. Specifically, a display icon H2 corresponding to special 1 reserve 2 is placed inside the reserve consumption area Dm, and a variable to notify the result of the winning lottery based on the reserve (reserve information) corresponding to this display icon H2 is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a.

In the audio emission control device 90, after the variable display for the special 1 pending 2, a stop display for the special 1 pending 2 is executed as shown in FIG. 507(b). This stop display constitutes a part of the foreshadowing performance. Here, the combination of symbols corresponding to the chance is displayed in a stopped state. That is, regarding a plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to a chance roll is displayed in a state stopped on the active line L1. The chance number is [3, 4, 1] as in the case of the omen preview performance (first time).

In the audio and light emission control device 90, after the above-mentioned stop display, an effect in which a bubble BL appears is executed as shown in FIG. 507 (c). This effect in which a bubble BL appears constitutes part of the premonition notice effect. The effect in which a bubble BL appears is an effect in which a bubble BL is displayed together with a bubble sound, as in the case of the premonition notice effect (first time).

In summary, when the lottery result of the winning lottery for special 1 reservation 4 is a jackpot win, when the variation for special 1 reservation 2 stops, a combination of symbols corresponding to the chance is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. is stopped and displayed, and during the stop display, an effect is performed in which bubbles BL appear with a bubble sound. The combination of symbols corresponding to this chance is displayed in a stopped state, and the effect in which bubbles BL appear with a bubble sound during the stopped display corresponds to the foreshadowing effect (second time). In other words, according to this example, following the execution of the foreshadowing performance (first time) when the fluctuations for special 1 reservation 1 are stopped, the precursory notice performance (second time) is also performed when the fluctuations for special 1 reservation 2 are stopped. is executed.

When the player confirms that following the execution of the premonition preview performance (first time) when the fluctuation of Special 1 Reserve 1 stops, and after the fluctuation display of Special 1 Reserve 2, a chance symbol appears in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a, and a bubble BL appears overlapping with the combination of symbols of the chance symbol, the player will be even more hopeful that there is an increased possibility that the reserve information for a jackpot in the winning lottery is included among the Special 1 reserves corresponding to each reserve display icon.

Figure 508 is an explanatory diagram showing the variable display and premonition preview performance (third time) for special 1 reserve 3. After the performance shown in Figure 507 is executed, as shown in Figure 508 (a), the audio and light emission control device 90 executes a variable display to notify the result of the winning lottery for special 1 reserve 3. Specifically, a display icon H3 corresponding to special 1 reserve 3 is placed inside the reserve consumption area Dm, and a variable to notify the result of the winning lottery based on the reserve (reserve information) corresponding to this display icon H3 is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a.

In the sound and light emission control device 90, after the variable display for the above-mentioned special 1 reserved 3, a stop display for special 1 reserved 3 is executed as shown in FIG. 508 (b). This stop display constitutes part of the premonition notice performance. Here, a combination of patterns corresponding to the chance eye is displayed stopped. That is, for the multiple pattern rows displayed on the display screen of the pattern display device 41, a combination of patterns corresponding to the chance eye is displayed in a stopped state on the pay line L1. The chance eye is [3, 4, 1], the same as in the premonition notice performance (first time).

In the sound emission control device 90, after the above-mentioned stop display, an effect in which bubbles BL appear is executed as shown in FIG. 508(c). The performance in which the bubble BL appears constitutes a part of the omen preview performance. The performance in which the bubble BL appears is a performance in which the bubble BL is displayed along with the bubble sound, as in the case of the foreshadowing performance (first time).

To summarize, when the lottery result of the winning lottery for special 1 reservation 4 is a jackpot win, when the variation for special 1 reservation 3 stops, a combination of symbols corresponding to the chance is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. is stopped and displayed, and during the stop display, an effect is performed in which bubbles BL appear with a bubble sound. The combination of symbols corresponding to this chance is displayed in a stopped state, and the effect in which bubbles BL appear with a bubble sound during the stopped display corresponds to the foreshadowing effect (third time). That is, according to this example, the foreshadowing performance (first time) is executed when the fluctuation stops for special 1 reservation 1, and the precursor notice performance (second time) is performed when the fluctuation stops for special 1 reservation 2. Following this, the foreshadowing performance (third time) is also performed when the fluctuation of special 1 pending 3 is stopped. When the foreshadowing performances occur consecutively, the expectation level of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery increases. Note that the expectation level refers to the high probability of winning a jackpot.

FIG. 509 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the number of appearances of a precursor preview performance and the scheduled execution performance. As shown in the figure, in the first and second times the precursor notice performance appears, a reach performance that is greater than the normal reach performance is set as the performance to be executed (i.e., scheduled execution performance) based on the pending information in the special 1 pending performance. When the foreshadowing performance appears for the third time, a reach performance of super reach or higher is set as the performance (scheduled performance) to be executed according to the hold information in special 1 hold. On the other hand, when the number of occurrences of the foreshadowing performance reaches the fourth time, a jackpot winning confirmation from the special reach is set as a performance (scheduled performance) to be executed according to the pending information in the special 1 pending.

When the player confirms that following the execution of the premonition notice performance (second time) when the fluctuation of special 1 reserve 2 stops, a chance symbol appears in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a after the fluctuation display of special 1 reserve 3, and a bubble BL appears overlapping with the combination of the chance symbol patterns, the player will further hope that there is reserve information that will win the jackpot in the winning lottery among the special 1 reserves corresponding to each reserve display icon. In particular, since the premonition notice performance has occurred three times in a row, it is confirmed that a reach performance of Super Reach or higher (i.e. Super Reach or Special Reach) will be executed, and the player will further hope that the possibility of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery has increased.

Figure 510 is an explanatory diagram showing the variable display, reach effect, and stop display for special 1 reserve 4. After the effect shown in Figure 508 is executed, as shown in Figure 510 (a), the voice and light emission control device 90 executes a variable display to notify the result of the winning lottery for special 1 reserve 4. Specifically, a display icon H4 corresponding to special 1 reserve 4 is placed inside the reserve consumption area Dm, and a variable to notify the result of the winning lottery based on the reserve (reserve information) corresponding to this display icon H4 is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a.

In the audio and light emitting control device 90, after the above-mentioned variable display for special 1 reserved 4, as shown in FIG. 510(b), the pattern row Z1 and the pattern row Z3 are displayed still, and the variable display of the pattern in the pattern row Z2 is performed, thereby executing the reach effect. The reach effect here is an effect that indicates that it is a super reach.

In the audio and light emitting control device 90, after the above-mentioned reach performance, as shown in FIG. 510(c), a combination of symbols that notifies that the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win is displayed frozen. In other words, for the multiple symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols that corresponds to a big win is displayed frozen on the pay line L1.

Figure 511 is a time chart showing a series of effects for the above-mentioned Special 1 Reserve 1 to Special 1 Reserve 4 on a time axis. As shown in the figure, in play round U1 for Special 1 Reserve 1, first, a variable display A11 is executed. The variable display A11 is shown in Figure 506 (a). Next, a stop display A12 that causes a chance eye to appear is executed. The stop display A12 is shown in Figure 506 (b). Next, a bubble appearance effect A13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect A13 is shown in Figure 506 (c). With the end of the bubble appearance effect A13, play round U1 for Special 1 Reserve 1 ends. The stop display A12 and the bubble appearance effect A13 constitute a premonition preview effect (first time).

In the game round U2 for special 1 reservation 2, which follows the game time U1 for special 1 reservation 1, the variable display B11 is first executed. The fluctuation display B11 is shown in FIG. 507(a). Subsequently, a stop display B12 in which a chance number appears is executed. The stop display B12 is shown in FIG. 507(b). Subsequently, bubble appearance effect B13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect B13 is shown in FIG. 507(c). At the end of the bubble appearance performance B13, the game round U2 regarding special 1 pending 2 ends. The stop display B12 and the bubble appearance effect B13 constitute a foreshadowing effect (second time).

In the play round U3 for special 1 reserve 3 following play round U2 for special 1 reserve 2, first, a change display C11 is executed. The change display C11 is as shown in FIG. 508(a). Next, a stop display C12 is executed to make a chance eye appear. The stop display C12 is as shown in FIG. 508(b). Next, a bubble appearance effect C13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect C13 is as shown in FIG. 508(c). With the end of the bubble appearance effect C13, the play round U3 for special 1 reserve 3 ends. The stop display C12 and the bubble appearance effect C13 constitute a premonition preview effect (third time).

In the game time U4 for special 1 reservation 4, which follows the game time U3 for special 1 reservation 3, a variable display D11 is first executed. The fluctuation display D11 is shown in FIG. 510(a). Subsequently, a super reach effect D12 is executed. The super reach effect D12 is shown in FIG. 510(b). Subsequently, a stop display D13 corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed. The stop display D13 is shown in FIG. 510(c). At the end of the stop display D13, the game round U4 for special 1 pending 4 ends.

506 to 508, FIG. 510, and FIG. 511, as mentioned above, the special 1 hold that was the trigger is the special 1 hold 4, and the special 1 hold 4 This is a case where the lottery result of the winning lottery is a jackpot. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in addition to the execution mode of the foreshadowing performance described above, it is also possible to determine which of special 1 hold 1 to special 1 hold 4 was the trigger and the special 1 hold that was the trigger. The structure is such that the precursor preview performance is executed in various ways depending on the content of the reach performance to be executed and the presence or absence of a jackpot win. Specifically, if the special 1 hold that was the trigger is special 1 hold 4, and the lottery result of the winning lottery for special 1 hold 4 is a loss, but a super reach occurs, the special 1 hold 1 to special hold 4 The configuration is such that the foreshadowing performance can be executed in each of the game rounds U1 to U3 for 1 hold 3. If the special 1 hold that was the trigger is special 1 hold 4, and the lottery result of the winning lottery for special 1 hold 4 is a loss, but a normal reach occurs, game round U2 and special 1 hold for special 1 hold 2 The configuration is such that the foreshadowing performance can be executed in both the game rounds U3 for the reservation 3 or only in the game rounds U3 for the special 1 reservation 3. In addition, if the special 1 hold that was the trigger is special 1 hold 3, and the lottery result of the winning lottery for special 1 hold 3 is a loss but a normal reach occurs, the game time U1 for special 1 hold 1 The configuration is such that the foreshadowing performance can be executed in both game rounds U2 for special 1 reservation 2 or only in game times U2 for special 1 reservation 2. In addition, if the special 1 hold that was the trigger is special 1 hold 2, and the lottery result of the winning lottery for special 1 hold 2 is a loss but a normal reach occurs, in the game round U1 for special 1 hold 1, The structure is such that an omen preview performance can be executed. In addition, if the special 1 reservation that was the trigger is special 1 reservation 3, and the lottery result of the winning lottery for special 1 reservation 3 is a jackpot win, the game time U1 for special 1 reservation 1 and special 1 reservation 2 The structure is such that the foreshadowing performance can be executed in both of the game rounds U2 for , or only in the game rounds U2 for special 1 pending 2. In short, if there is a special 1 hold that has hold information that executes (is scheduled to be executed) a performance that has a high expectation of winning a jackpot, such as a reach effect, among the stored special 1 holds, the special 1 hold is It is only necessary to make the foreshadowing effect appear in a plurality of consecutive game rounds or one game round that is connected to the special 1 hold that was the trigger among the game times regarding the special 1 hold that was stored earlier. , the number of appearances can be any number as long as it does not violate the relationship between the number of appearances of the precursor preview performance and the scheduled execution performance described using FIG. 509.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the execution mode of the premonition notice performance is determined by the special 1 hold continuous performance setting process executed in the sound and light emission control device 90. Specifically, according to the special 1 hold continuous performance setting process, a hold command sent from the main control device 60 is received every time a game ball enters the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, and when it is determined from the hold command that the special 1 hold has hold information that executes (scheduled to be executed) a reach performance with a high expectation of winning a jackpot, such as a reach performance, the content of the reach performance and the number of special 1 hold information existing before the special 1 hold are compared with the table showing the relationship between the number of occurrences of the premonition notice performance and the performance scheduled to be executed, as shown in FIG. 509, to determine which of the special 1 hold information existing before the special 1 hold to execute the premonition notice performance. For example, in a case where the triggered special 1 reserve is special 1 reserve 4, and the lottery result of the winning lottery for special 1 reserve 4 is a miss but a normal reach occurs, if two options are available, a premonition notice performance is executed in play time U2 for special 1 reserve 2 and play time U3 for special 1 reserve 3, or a premonition notice performance is executed in play time U3 for special 1 reserve 3, a lottery is used to determine which of the two options is to be adopted, or whether neither is to be adopted.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, when a plurality of omen notice performances are to appear, the plurality of omen notice performances are continuous with respect to the special 1 hold that was the trigger, and the plurality of omen notice performances are continuous. However, as a modification to this, when a plurality of omen notice performances are executed, the omen notice performances do not necessarily have to be consecutive, and there may be a game round without any omen notice performances in the middle.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 511, the performance of the game rounds U1 to U4 for the special 1 reserve 1 to special 1 reserve 4 continues without interruption only when there is no special 2 reserve stored based on the game ball entering the second start port 34. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the special 2 reserve is changed in priority to the special 1 reserve, so if the electric role opening lottery is won during the change of the special 1 reserve (in the above example, from the start of the change of the special 1 reserve 1 to just before the change of the special 1 reserve 4 starts), the change of the special 2 reserve acquired by the ball entry is executed in priority to the change of the special 1 reserve, and the continuous reservation performance of the game rounds U1 to U4 is interrupted.

As a process when the effects of game rounds U1 to U4 are interrupted, after the fluctuations regarding the special 2 hold are completed, the pending continuous effect for the unexecuted (hereinafter also referred to as "remaining") special 1 hold is canceled. However, with this configuration, a problem arises in that the player feels uncomfortable due to the interruption of the continuous performance on hold, which detracts from the interest of the game. In order to solve this problem, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment executes a continuous hold performance having the following configuration.

Figure 512 is an explanatory diagram showing the basic concept of the reserved continuous performance adopted in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. In Figure 512, the same processing content as in Figure 511 is given the same reference numeral. Here, it is assumed that in the middle of the game round U2 of the special 1 reserved 2 (time t1), the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b, and the electric role 34a is opened, and the game ball enters the second start hole 34. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, after the game round U2 of the special 1 reserved 2 is finished (time t2), one or more game rounds VZ for the special 2 reserved stored based on the game ball entering the second start hole 34 are executed by the special 2 reserved performance processing. Specifically, according to the special 2 reserve presentation process executed by the audio and light emission control device 90, when a reserve command for the special 2 reserve is received from the main control device 60, after the play round U2 for the special 1 reserve 2 ends (time t2), one or more play rounds VZ for the special 2 reserve that are stored based on the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 34 are executed.

Subsequently, after the game round for the special 2 hold is completed (time t3), the remaining specials that have not been played due to the game round U2 of the special 1 hold 2 being executed with priority due to the hold continuous performance process. Execute a game round for one hold. In other words, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34 and special 2 reservations are accumulated during the game round U2 of special 1 reservation 2, the game round VZ for the special 2 reservation is used for the remaining special reservations. It is configured so that the game rounds U3 and U4 for 1 hold are executed with priority, and after the game round VZ for special 2 hold is finished, the remaining game rounds U3 and U4 for special 1 hold are executed. However, the effect displayed in the game round VZ for special 2 hold has a feature that is different from the conventional one.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the following (i) to (iii) effects are provided as predetermined effects included in the effects of the game round VZ for the special 2 reservation.
(i) Chance eye effect for continuation of special 1 consecutive effects (ii) Same color pattern effect for continuation of special 1 consecutive effects (iii) Special 2 exclusive effect

Which of the above (i) to (iii) to be used as the predetermined effect was determined based on the following findings by the inventor.

If the lottery result of the electric accessory opening lottery that triggered the execution of the special 2 reservation change is an electric accessory short release, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a is extremely short at 0.6 seconds. The number of game balls entering the second starting port 34 is one, and at most two. Therefore, the game time VZ for special 2 hold is one game time or two game times. In this case, even when the game round VZ for special 2 hold is being executed, the player clearly remembers the game round for special 1 hold that was executed immediately before (game round U2 in the example of FIG. 512). There will be. Therefore, the inventor would like to maintain the continuity of the performance by using as much as possible the foreshadowing performance (the appearance of the chance eye + the appearance of bubbles) that was executed in the last special 1 pending game round. I thought. The appearance of the chance eye of the foreshadowing performance executed in the game round of special 1 pending that was executed immediately before this corresponds to the chance eye performance for continuing the special 1 continuous performance of (i).

《11-4-3》 Special 1 consecutive performance continuation chance performance:
The special 1 consecutive effect continuation chance effect will be described below. Here, it will be described as case 1.

Figure 513 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing the state of the special 1 reservation in case 1. As shown in the figure, in case 1, special 1 reservation 1 and special 1 reservation 2 are stored during normal times. The main control device 60 executes a first judgment process every time a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, and performs judgments such as a win lottery win judgment, a jackpot type judgment, a reach occurrence judgment, and a variation pattern type judgment based on the reservation information of the special 1 reservation stored by this ball entry before the reservation information becomes the subject of a win lottery by the main control device 60. After that, the main control device 60 sets the judgment result of the first judgment process as a reservation command and transmits the reservation command to the sound and light emission control device 90. The sound and light emission control device 90 receives the reservation command and identifies the win lottery win result, the jackpot type, the reach occurrence, and the reach performance content (reach type) from the reservation command. The reach performance content can be identified from the variation pattern type. In the illustrated example, it is assumed that the winning lottery result for special 1 reserve 2 is a miss, and it is determined that a normal reach will occur. The sound and light emission control device 90 executes the reserve continuous performance process as a trigger when it receives a reserve command from the main control device 60 for special 1 reserve 2, which is determined to be the occurrence of a normal reach.

FIG. 514 shows the effect for the special 1 hold executed by the hold continuous effect process (hereinafter referred to as the special 1 hold continuous effect process) and the effect for the special 2 hold executed by the special 2 hold effect process in case 1. It is a time chart explaining the performance. As shown in the figure, first, the game round U11 for special 1 reservation 1 is executed by special 1 reservation continuous performance processing. The game round U11 for special 1 reservation 1 is the same as the game time U1 for special 1 reservation 1 explained with reference to FIG. In the game round U11 for special 1 reservation 1, first, the variable display A11 is executed. The fluctuation display A11 is shown in FIG. 506(a). Subsequently, a stop display A12 in which a chance number appears is executed. The stop display A12 is shown in FIG. 506(b). Subsequently, bubble appearance effect A13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect A13 is shown in FIG. 506(c). At the end of the bubble appearance performance A13, the game round U11 for special 1 pending 1 ends. The stop display A12 and the bubble appearance effect A13 constitute an omen preview effect (first time).

In the middle of game round U11 for special 1 reserve 1 (time t11), a game ball passes through through gates 35a and 35b, and an electric short release is won in the electric device release lottery, the electric device 34a opens for only 0.6 seconds, and one game ball enters second start hole 34. In this case, after game round U11 for special 1 reserve 1 ends (time t12), game round V11 for special 2 reserve 1, which was stored based on the game ball entering second start hole 34, begins to be executed. Game round V11 for special 2 reserve 1 is executed by special 2 reserve performance processing by sound and light emission control device 90. According to the special 2 reserve effect processing, when starting the game round V11 for the special 2 reserve 1, a first judgment is made as to which is the result of the electric role opening lottery that triggered the change of the special 2 reserve, and if the first judgment determines that the lottery result of the electric role opening lottery is an electric role short opening, a second judgment is made, which will be described later. Then, if the judgment result of the second judgment is positive, the chance eye effect for the continuation of the special 1 consecutive performance (i) above is displayed in the game round V11 for the special 2 reserve 1. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the chance eye effect for the continuation of the special 1 consecutive performance is the same as the performance (image) of the chance eye appearance of the premonition notice effect executed in the game round (in the case of case 1, game round U11) for the special 1 reserve executed immediately before.

That is, in the game round V11 for the special 2 reservation 1 that is executed subsequent to the game time U11 for the special 1 reservation 1, the variable display α11 for the special 2 reservation 1 is executed first. Subsequently, a stop display A12 in which a chance number appears is executed. The stop display A12 is the same as the stop display A12 executed in the game round U11, and is given the same reference numeral. The stop display A12 is shown in FIG. 506(b). That is, the image shown in FIG. 506(b) corresponds to the chance effect for continuing the special 1 continuous effect. Subsequently, bubble appearance effect A13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect A13 is the same as the stop display executed in the game round U11, and is given the same reference numeral. The bubble appearance effect A13 is shown in FIG. 506(c). At the same time as the bubble appearance effect A13 ends, the game round V11 for special 2 reservation 1 ends. When viewed from the player, it is recognized that the foreshadowing performance (second time) has appeared due to the special 1 continuous performance continuation chance performance that appeared by the stop display A12 and the bubble appearance performance A13.

Subsequently, after the game round V11 for special 2 reservation 1 ends (time t13), the game round U12 for special 1 reservation 2 is started by the special 1 reservation continuous performance process. In the game round U12, first, the variable display E11 is executed. Subsequently, normal reach effect E12 is executed. Subsequently, a stop display E13 corresponding to the winning lottery result being a loss is executed. At the end of the stop display E13, the game round U12 for Special 1 Pending 2 ends. The contents of the game round U12 for Special 1 Reservation 2 are the same as those in the case where the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34 during the game round U11 for Special 1 Reservation 1. .

To summarize, in case 1 where the winning lottery result for special 1 hold 2 is a loss and a normal reach occurs, first, game round U11 for special 1 hold 1 is executed, and in the game round U11, the chance eye and the bubble A premonitory performance (first time) for the appearance of BL is executed. If a game ball enters the second starting port 34 in the middle of the game round U1 for special 1 reservation 1, the game round V11 for special 2 reservation 1 acquired by the ball entering continues the game round U11. In the game round V11, an omen preview performance (second time) in which a chance eye and a bubble BL appear, which is a special chance eye performance for continuation of the first consecutive performance, is executed. Then, following the game round V11 for the special 2 hold 1, the game round U12 for the special 1 hold 2 is executed, and in the game round U12, a normal reach effect and a stop display corresponding to the loss are performed. In other words, the flow of the performance up to Special 1 Hold 2, which was triggered by this continuous hold performance after the two consecutive foreshadowing performances and finally out of the normal reach, is as shown in Figure 509, which is the flow of the performance for the foreshadowing performance. It does not violate (consistent with) the relationship between the number of appearances and the scheduled performance.

As mentioned above, the flow of the performance up to Special 1 Suspension 2, which was the trigger, due to the continuous suspension performance does not violate the relationship between the number of occurrences of the precursor notice performance and the scheduled execution performance, because Special 1 Suspension 1 Even if the number of foreshadowing performances increases by one by adding game round V11 regarding Special 2 Hold 1 in the middle of game round U1 regarding Special 2 Hold 1, only in cases where the above relationship is not violated, This is because the foreshadowing performance is configured to appear in game round V11. Specifically, when the performance for the special 2 hold stored in the middle of the game round of the special 1 hold is made into a performance that includes a chance performance for continuing the special 1 continuous performance, the performance for the special 1 hold that became the trigger. A second determination is made as to whether or not the series of suspended continuous performances until the performance matches the relationship between the number of occurrences of the premonitory performances and the scheduled performance shown in FIG. 509, and the second determination is affirmative. This is because the foreshadowing performance is configured to appear in game round V11 for the special 2 reservation 1 only when the game is held. The second determination is the hold information that the special 1 hold has, specifically, which one of the special 1 hold 1 to special 1 hold 4 was the trigger, and the execution schedule production for the special 1 hold that was the trigger. It can be determined by For example, as in this case 1, the performance scheduled to be executed for the special 1 hold (special 1 hold 4) that was the trigger is normal reach, and it is executed before the special 1 hold (special 1 hold 4) that is the trigger. If the foreshadowing performance is executed once in the game round, the performance of the game round based on the special 2 hold that was accumulated in the middle of the game round of special 1 hold is changed to the chance performance for the continuation of the special 1 continuous performance. Even if the effect is included, the result of the second determination is affirmative because it does not violate (consistent with) the relationship between the number of appearances of the premonitory effect and the scheduled execution effect shown in FIG. 509. On the other hand, the performance scheduled to be executed for the special 1 hold (special 1 hold 4) that became the trigger is normal reach, and the foreshadowing preview performance is executed in the game round before the special 1 hold (special 1 hold 4) that became the trigger. has been executed twice, and if the performance for the special 2 hold that was accumulated during the game round of the special 1 hold is a performance that includes the chance performance for continuing the special 1 continuous performance, the special 1 that was the trigger During the hold period, the foreshadowing performance will be executed three times before the normal reach performance, which will violate the relationship between the number of appearance of the foreshadowing performance and the scheduled execution performance shown in FIG. 509, and the second The determination result of the determination is negative.

As explained above, in case 1, the omen notice performance occurs twice, and the final result is a performance in which the normal reach ends. This does not violate the relationship with the scheduled performance and does not give any sense of discomfort to the player. Therefore, with the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest.

Note that in Case 1, one game ball enters the second starting port 34 when the electric hand short release is won, but two game balls enter the second starting port 34. Even in the case of playing a ball, it may be configured to display a chance effect for continuing the special 1 continuous effect in each game round for special 2 pending 1 and special 2 pending 2. Also in this case, by making an affirmative determination in the second determination based on the reservation information that the special 1 reservation has, it becomes possible to display the chance performance for continuing the special 1 continuous performance.

《11-4-4》 Special 1 consecutive performance continuation pattern same color performance:
The above (ii) special 1 consecutive effect continuation same color pattern effect will be explained below. Here, it will be explained as case 2.

FIG. 515 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing how special 1 is reserved in case 2. As shown in the figure, in case 2, it is assumed that four special 1 reservations from special 1 reservation 1 to special 1 reservation 4 are stored in normal times. The main control device 60 executes a previous determination process every time a game ball enters the first starting port 33, and determines whether the winning lottery is correct or not based on the reservation information of special 1 reservation stored by the current ball entry. , determination of the type of jackpot, determination of the occurrence of reach, determination of the type of fluctuation pattern, etc. are performed before the pending information becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Thereafter, the main control device 60 sets the determination result of the first determination process as a hold command, and transmits the hold command to the audio emission control device 90. The audio emission control device 90 receives the hold command, and specifies, from the hold command, the success or failure result of the winning lottery, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a reach, and the contents of the reach effect (type of reach). The content of the reach effect can be identified from the type of fluctuation pattern. In the illustrated example, it is assumed that in special 1 hold 4, the winning lottery result is a loss and it is determined that a super reach will occur. The audio emission control device 90 executes the special 1 pending continuous performance process using the reception of the hold command from the main control device 60 for the special 1 pending 4 for which it is determined that this super reach occurs.

Figure 516 is a time chart explaining the effects for the special 1 reserve executed by the special 1 reserve continuous effect processing and the effects for the special 2 reserve executed by the special 2 reserve effect processing in case 2. As shown in the figure, first, the game round U21 for the special 1 reserve 1 is executed by the special 1 reserve continuous effect processing. The game round U21 for the special 1 reserve 1 is the same as the game round U1 for the special 1 reserve 1 described in Figure 511. In the game round U21 for the special 1 reserve 1, first, the variable display A11 is executed. The variable display A11 is shown in Figure 506 (a). Next, the stop display A12 that causes the chance eye to appear is executed. The stop display A12 is shown in Figure 506 (b). Next, the bubble appearance effect A13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect A13 is shown in Figure 506 (c). With the end of the bubble appearance effect A13, the game round U21 for the special 1 reserve 1 ends. The stop display A12 and the bubble appearance effect A13 constitute the premonition warning effect (first time).

By the special 1 reservation continuous performance processing, the play time U22 for special 1 reservation 2 is executed following the play time U21 for special 1 reservation 1. The play time U22 for special 1 reservation 2 is the same as the play time U2 for special 1 reservation 2 described in FIG. 511. In the play time U22 for special 1 reservation 2, first, the variable display B11 is executed. The variable display B11 is shown in FIG. 507 (a). Next, the stop display B12 that makes the chance eye appear is executed. The stop display B12 is shown in FIG. 507 (b). Next, the bubble appearance performance B13 is executed. The bubble appearance performance B13 is shown in FIG. 507 (c). With the end of the bubble appearance performance B13, the play time U22 for special 1 reservation 2 ends. The stop display B12 and the bubble appearance performance B13 constitute the premonition notice performance (second time). In the middle of the game round U22 for the special 1 reserve 2 (time t21), the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b, and the electric role short opening is won in the electric role opening lottery, the electric role 34a opens for only 0.6 seconds, and one game ball enters the second start hole 34. In this case, after the end of the game round U22 for the special 1 reserve 2 (time t22), the game round V21 for the special 2 reserve 1, which was stored based on the game ball entering the second start hole 34, is started to be executed. The execution of the game round V21 for the special 2 reserve 1 is executed by the special 2 reserve performance processing by the sound and light emission control device 90.

According to the special 2 reserve performance processing, when starting the game round V21 for the special 2 reserve 1, a first judgment is made as to which is the result of the electric role opening lottery that triggered the execution of the change of the special 2 reserve, and if the first judgment determines that the lottery result of the electric role opening lottery is the short electric role opening, the second judgment described above is made. Then, if the judgment result of the second judgment is negative, the same color pattern performance for the continuation of the special 1 consecutive performance of (ii) above is displayed in the game round V21 for the special 2 reserve 1. In other words, if the result of the lottery for opening the electric role that triggered the change in the special 2 reserve was a short electric role opening, and the performance for the special 2 reserve that was saved during the play time of the special 1 reserve is a performance that includes a chance eye performance for continuing the special 1 consecutive performance, if the series of consecutive reserved performances up to the performance for the triggered special 1 reserve (in case 2, special 1 reserve 4) violates the relationship between the number of occurrences of the premonition notice performance and the performance scheduled to be executed as shown in FIG. 509, a same-color pattern performance for continuing the special 1 consecutive performance will be displayed in play time V21 for special 2 reserve 1.

Specifically, in the game round V21 for the special 2 reserve 1, which is executed following the game round U22 for the special 1 reserve 2, the variable display β11 for the special 2 reserve 1 is executed first. Then, the stop display β12 of the same pattern is executed. The same pattern refers to a state in which the three patterns formed in the state where they are stopped on the effective line L1 on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 are different numbers, but the colors of the three patterns are the same. Specifically, since the patterns representing the numbers 1, 2, and 3 are green, the combination of the patterns representing the numbers 1, 2, and 3 is the same pattern color. Also, since the patterns representing the numbers 4, 5, and 6 are red, the combination of the patterns representing the numbers 4, 5, and 6 can also be the same pattern color. Since the patterns representing the numbers 7, 8, and 9 are gold, the combination of the patterns representing the numbers 7, 8, and 9 can also be the same pattern color. And the colors of the same pattern and the planned performance are associated in advance.

Figure 517 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the same color pattern and the planned performance. As shown in the figure, a reach performance of normal reach or higher is set as the planned performance for green, a reach performance of super reach or higher is set as the planned performance for red, and a guaranteed big win from a special reach is set as the planned performance for gold. Images with the same color pattern in this configuration correspond to the same color pattern performance for continuing the special 1 consecutive performance.

As shown in FIG. 516, according to the special 2 hold effect process, when executing the stop display β12, the game time for the special 1 hold that was executed immediately before (in case 2, the game time for the special 1 hold 2) Specify how many times the omen notice performance executed in U21) has appeared, and change the color of the symbol that is the same color as the execution schedule performance that is associated with the specified number of appearances to the omen notice performance. By referring to the table (Fig. 509) showing the relationship between the number of appearances of the symbol and the performance scheduled to be performed, and the table (Fig. 517) showing the relationship between the color of the same color of the symbol and the performance scheduled to be performed, the specified same color of the symbol With the color of , the special 1 continuous performance continuation symbol same color performance is displayed. Specifically, since this is the second premonition notice performance in the game round for the special 1 hold that was executed immediately before (in case 2, the game round U21 for the special 1 hold 2), the table shown in FIG. From this, it is determined that the performance scheduled to be executed by the premonitory notice performance in the game round regarding the special 1 hold that was executed immediately before is normal reach, and from the table shown in FIG. The color of is specified to be green corresponding to normal reach. With this green color, the special 1 continuous performance continuation symbol same color performance is displayed. As a result, the expectation level when the symbol same color performance for continuation of special 1 continuous performance is displayed is the same as the expectation level when the foreshadowing performance appears in game round U22 for special 1 pending 2 that was executed immediately before. becomes.

Figure 518 is an explanatory diagram showing a series of effects executed in game round V21 for special 2 reserve 1. Reserve display icon H11 located in reserve consumption area Dm corresponds to special 2 reserve 1. Figure 518 (a) is an effect displayed on display surface 41a during variable display β11, and Figure 518 (b) is an effect displayed on display surface 41a during stop display β12. As shown in Figure 518 (b), during stop display β12, a same-color green pattern effect for continuing special 1 consecutive effects is executed. Specifically, the three patterns formed when stopped on the valid line L1 are a combination of a pattern showing the number 1, a pattern showing the number 2, and a pattern showing the number 3, for example, "312."

Returning to FIG. 516, with the end of the stop display β12, play time V21 for special 2 reserve 1 ends.

After the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1 ends (time t23), the game round U23 for the special 1 hold 3 is executed by the special 1 hold continuous performance process. The game time U23 for special 1 reservation 3 is the same as the game time U3 for special 1 reservation 3 explained with reference to FIG. In the game round U23 for special 1 pending 3, first, the variable display C11 is executed. The fluctuation display C11 is shown in FIG. 508(a). Subsequently, a stop display C12 is executed in which a chance number appears. The stop display C12 is shown in FIG. 508(b). Subsequently, a bubble appearance effect C13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect C13 is shown in FIG. 508(c). At the same time as the bubble appearance effect C13 ends, the game round U23 regarding special 1 pending 3 ends. The stop display C12 and the bubble appearance effect C13 constitute a foreshadowing effect (third time).

After the end of the game round U23 for special 1 reserve 3 (time t24), the game round U24 for special 1 reserve 4 is executed by the special 1 reserve continuous performance process. The game round U24 for special 1 reserve 4 is the same as the game round U4 for special 1 reserve 4 described in FIG. 511. In the game round U24 for special 1 reserve 4, first, the variable display F11 is executed. Then, the super reach performance F12 is executed. Then, the stop display F13 corresponding to the result of the winning lottery being a loss is executed. With the end of the stop display F13, the game round U24 for special 1 reserve 4 ends. The content of the game round U24 for special 1 reserve 4 is the same as the content when the game ball does not enter the second start hole 34 during the game round U22 for special 1 reserve 2.

In summary, in case 2 where the winning lottery result for special 1 reserve 4 is a miss and a super reach occurs, first, the game round U21 for special 1 reserve 1 is executed, and in that game round U21, a premonition notice performance (first time) in which a chance eye and bubble BL appear is executed. Next, the game round U22 for special 1 reserve 2 is executed, and in that game round U22, a premonition notice performance (second time) in which a chance eye and bubble BL appear is executed. If a game ball enters the second start hole 34 during the game round U22 for special 1 reserve 2, the game round V21 for special 2 reserve 1 obtained by the ball entering is executed following the game round U21, and in that game round V21, a stop display β12, which is a same-color pattern performance for continuing the special 1 continuous performance, is executed. The color of the same pattern in the same color pattern effect for continuing the special 1 consecutive effects is green, and the scheduled effect (see FIG. 517) associated with this green color is configured to match the scheduled effect (see FIG. 509) associated with the number of occurrences of the premonition notice effect including the chance eye executed before the play time V21 for the special 2 reserve 1. After the play time V21 for the special 2 reserve 1 ends, the play time U23 for the special 1 reserve 3 is executed, and in the play time U23, a premonition notice effect (third time) in which the chance eye and bubble BL appear is executed. Next, the play time U24 for the special 1 reserve 4 is executed, and in the play time U24, a super reach effect and a stop display corresponding to a miss are displayed.

As explained above, in case 2, the premonition notice performance including the chance eye is performed twice, then the performance of the same color green pattern is performed, then the premonition notice performance including the chance eye is performed once (total of three times), and finally the performance of the super reach is performed with a miss. When the player sees the series of performances, he/she recognizes that the performance to be performed is a normal reach or higher because the premonition notice performance including the chance eye has appeared twice, and confirms again that the performance to be performed is a normal reach or higher because the color of the same color pattern has turned green, and then recognizes that the performance to be performed is a super reach or higher because the premonition notice performance including the chance eye has appeared three times, and finally knows that the super reach is a miss. As a result, the player does not feel any discomfort and the reliability of the premonition performance is improved. Next, Comparative Example 1 will be explained, and the advantages of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment over Comparative Example 1 will be explained.

Figure 519 is a time chart showing Comparative Example 1. Comparative Example 1 differs from Case 2 (see Figure 516) in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment in the following respects. In Case 2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the game round V21 for Special 2 Reserve 1, which is executed based on the game ball entering the second start hole 34 during the execution of the game round U22 for Special 1 Reserve 2, a same-color pattern effect for the continuation of the Special 1 consecutive effects is executed. In contrast, in Comparative Example 1, in the game round V21X for Special 2 Reserve 1, which is executed based on the game ball entering the second start hole 34 during the execution of the game round U22 for Special 1 Reserve 2, a chance eye effect for the continuation of the Special 1 consecutive effects is executed.

That is, in the game round V21X for special 2 reserve 1, which is executed following the game round U22 for special 1 reserve 2, the variable display γ11 for special 2 reserve 1 is executed first. Then, the stop display B12 that makes the chance eye appear is executed. The stop display B12 is the same as the stop display B12 executed in the game round U22, and is given the same reference number. The stop display B12 corresponds to the chance eye effect for continuing the special 1 consecutive performance. Then, the bubble appearance effect B13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect B13 is the same as the effect executed in the game round U22, and is given the same reference number. From the player's perspective, the chance eye effect for continuing the special 1 consecutive performance that appeared due to the stop display B12 and the bubble appearance effect B13 are recognized as the appearance of the premonition notice effect (third time). After that, it is recognized that the premonition notice performance (fourth time) has appeared in the game U23 for the special 1 reserve 3 executed after the end of the game V21X for the special 2 reserve 1. The game U24 for the special 1 reserve 4 executed after the end of the game V21X for the special 2 reserve 1 is the same as the game U24 in the case 2 (see FIG. 516). According to this comparative example 1, when starting the game V21X for the special 2 reserve 1, it is only necessary to execute the first judgment of which is the lottery result of the electric role opening lottery that triggered the execution of the change of the special 2 reserve (the second judgment is not necessary), and if the judgment result of the first judgment is the short electric role opening, in the game V21X for the special 2 reserve 1, it is only necessary to execute the chance eye performance for the continuation of the special 1 continuous performance uniformly, which makes the control easier.

However, in Comparative Example 1, after the foreshadowing performance including the chance appearance appears four times in a row, the performance that misses with a super reach is executed. This series of performances violates the relationship between the number of appearances of the premonitory performances and the scheduled performance shown in FIG. 509, and will give a sense of discomfort to the player who remembers this relationship. More specifically, an experienced player who recognized that a foreshadowing performance including a chance had appeared four times in a row would say, ``In this pachinko machine 10, a foreshadowing performance including a chance has appeared four times in a row. In this case, you will definitely win the jackpot after the special reach effect is executed, so in this game round U24, you will definitely win the jackpot after the special reach effect is executed.'' I will be looking forward to the results of game round U24. However, in Comparative Example 1, although the foreshadowing performance including the chance eye appeared four times in a row, the super reach performance was executed instead of the special reach performance in game round U24, and furthermore, the lottery result was a loss. turn into. Therefore, the player's expectations are disappointed, and he/she ends up feeling that ``I cannot trust the performance of this Pachinko machine 10.'' As a result, according to Comparative Example 1, the reliability of the preview performance is reduced.

On the other hand, as explained above, with the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the player does not feel any discomfort from the series of effects, which increases the reliability of the preview effects.

In addition, in case 2, when winning the electric role short release, one game ball enters the second starting port 34, but two game balls enter the second starting port 34. Even in this case, it may be configured to display the symbol same color effect for continuing special 1 continuous effect in each game round for special 2 pending 1 and special 2 pending 2. Note that the symbol same color performance for special 1 continuous performance continuation in the game round for special 2 reservation 2 is the same as the symbol same color performance for special 1 continuous performance continuation in the game round for special 2 reservation 1. In this case as well, if the second determination result is negative, it becomes possible to display the same-color performance for special 1 consecutive performance continuation. In addition, in this modification, a configuration may be adopted in which a symbol same color effect for continuing special 1 continuous effect is displayed in either one of the game times for special 2 reservation 1 and special 2 reservation 2.

In addition, according to case 2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the same-color pattern effect for continuing the special 1 consecutive performance is displayed in the game round V21 for the special 2 reserve 1, but as a modified example, the chance eye effect for continuing the special 1 consecutive performance may be displayed in the game round V21 for the special 2 reserve 1, and the chance eye effect for continuing the special 1 consecutive performance that was scheduled to be executed in the game round U23 for the special 1 reserve executed after the end of the game round V21 for the special 2 reserve 1 may be switched to the same-color pattern effect for continuing the special 1 consecutive performance. In this case, the color of the same-color pattern effect for continuing the special 1 consecutive performance is a color corresponding to the number of appearances of the chance eye effect executed before the start of the game round U23 for the special 1 reserve. Specifically, since the number of appearances of the chance eye effect is 3, the color of the same-color pattern is red. According to this modified example, as with the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the short electric role opening is won in the electric role opening lottery during normal times and a play round for the special 2 reserve is executed, the player can check again the likelihood of winning a jackpot such as a reach effect due to the consecutive hold effects in the play round for the special 1 reserve that is executed consecutively after the play round for the special 2 reserve is finished, and furthermore, since the player does not feel any discomfort from the series of effects, the reliability of the preview effects can be increased.

As a further modification of the above modification, a symbol same color effect for continuing special 1 consecutive performance is displayed in the game round V21 for special 2 reservation 1, and special 1 is executed after the end of game round V21 for special 2 reservation 1. It may also be configured to display a symbol same color performance for special 1 continuous performance continuation in the game round U23 regarding the hold. In this case, the color of the symbol same color performance for special 1 continuous performance continuation is the omen notice performance including the chance eye that appeared in the game round for special 1 hold that was executed before the start of game round V21 for special 2 hold 1. The color corresponds to the number of occurrences. Since the performance scheduled to be executed does not change depending on the number of appearances of the special 1 continuous performance continuation symbol same color performance, it is permissible to display the special 1 continuous performance continuation symbol same color performance multiple times in succession.

Both the above (i) special 1 continuous performance continuation chance eye performance and the above (ii) special 1 continuous performance continuation symbol same color performance can be said to be performances for continuing the special 1 pending continuous performance. Considering that one of the conditions for executing the special 1 consecutive production continuation chance production or the special 1 continuous production continuation symbol same color production is that the judgment result of the first judgment is electric role short release, the special 1 continuous production continuation. Because the period in which the same-color effect for special chance or the continuation of special 1 consecutive performance is executed for a short period of time (the number of reserved pieces for special 2 is small), the chance effect for continuation of special 1 continuous performance and the continuation of special 1 continuous performance are The symbol same color performance can be said to be a performance to continue the special 1 hold continuous performance.

《11-4-5》Special 2 special performance:
The above special 2 special performance (iii) will be explained next. Here, case 3 will be explained.

Figure 520 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing the state of the special 1 reservation in case 3. As shown in the figure, in case 3, four special 1 reservations from special 1 reservation 1 to special 1 reservation 4 are stored during normal times. The main control device 60 executes a first judgment process every time a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, and performs judgments such as a win lottery win judgment, a jackpot type judgment, a reach occurrence judgment, and a variation pattern type judgment based on the reservation information of the special 1 reservation stored by this ball entry before the reservation information becomes the subject of a win lottery by the main control device 60. After that, the main control device 60 sets the judgment result of the first judgment process as a reservation command and transmits the reservation command to the sound and light emission control device 90. The sound and light emission control device 90 receives the reservation command and identifies the win lottery win result, the jackpot type, the reach occurrence, and the reach performance content (reach type) from the reservation command. The reach performance content can be identified from the variation pattern type. In the illustrated example, the result of the lottery for special 1 reserve 4 is a miss, and it is determined that a super reach will occur. The sound and light emission control device 90 executes the special 1 reserve continuous performance process in response to the reception of a reserve command from the main control device 60 for special 1 reserve 4, which is determined to be the occurrence of a super reach.

FIG. 521 is a time chart illustrating the performance for the special 1 hold performed by the special 1 hold continuous performance process and the performance for the special 2 hold performed by the special 2 hold effect process in case 3. As shown in the figure, first, a game round U31 regarding special 1 pending 1 is executed by special 1 pending continuous performance processing. The game round U31 for special 1 reservation 1 is the same as the game time U1 for special 1 reservation 1 explained with reference to FIG. In the game round U31 for special 1 reservation 1, first, the variable display A11 is executed. The fluctuation display A11 is shown in FIG. 506(a). Subsequently, a stop display A12 in which a chance number appears is executed. The stop display A12 is shown in FIG. 506(b). Subsequently, bubble appearance effect A13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect A13 is shown in FIG. 506(c). At the end of the bubble appearance performance A13, the game round U31 for special 1 pending 1 ends. The stop display A12 and the bubble appearance effect A13 constitute an omen preview effect (first time).

By the special 1 reservation continuous performance process, the play round U31 for special 1 reservation 1 is followed by the play round U32 for special 1 reservation 2. The play round U32 for special 1 reservation 2 is the same as the play round U2 for special 1 reservation 2 described in FIG. 511. In the play round U32 for special 1 reservation 2, first, the variable display B11 is executed. The variable display B11 is shown in FIG. 507(a). Next, the stop display B12 that causes the chance eye to appear is executed. The stop display B12 is shown in FIG. 507(b). Next, the bubble appearance performance B13 is executed. The bubble appearance performance B13 is shown in FIG. 507(c). With the end of the bubble appearance performance B13, the play round U32 for special 1 reservation 3 ends. The stop display B12 and the bubble appearance performance B13 constitute the premonition notice performance (second time).

During the game round U32 for this special 1 reservation 2 (time t31), if the electric role long opening is won in the electric role opening lottery performed by the game ball passing through the through gates 35a and 35b, the electric role 34a opens for a long time (5 seconds). During the long time opening, assume that five or more game balls enter the second starting hole 34. As explained above, since the maximum number (upper limit) of the special 2 reservation is four, a maximum of five special 2 reservations can be stored during the five-second opening of the electric role 34a. The reason why it is not four is that there is a possibility that the fifth special 2 reservation can be stored while the first game ball that entered begins to fluctuate. As a result, as a game round based on the special 2 reservation, a game round of more than the predetermined upper limit number of special 2 reservations (here, five, but it may be six, seven, etc.) can be executed. According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, while the electric device 34a is open for a long period of time (5 seconds), a special effect is executed to encourage the player to place as many game balls as possible into the second starting hole 34. In this embodiment, this effect is called a charge effect.

Figure 522 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the charge effect. Here, the timing when the long electric role opening is won in the electric role opening lottery is when the variable display B11 in game round U32 is being executed. As shown in the figure, the charge effect is displayed superimposed on this variable display B11. In this embodiment, the charge effect is performed by a female character WM appearing and shouting "I'm charging". The charge effect is executed until the electric role 34a is closed.

Note that this charge production is just an example, and instead of the female character WM, other characters such as male characters, animal characters, etc. may appear, or a specific background, stage, etc. may be used instead of the character. It may also be configured such that scenes and the like are displayed.

Return to FIG. 521. It is assumed that five game balls enter the second starting port 34 while the electric accessory 34a is open for a long time. The special 2 reservations corresponding to the five game balls will be hereinafter referred to as special 2 reservations 1, special 2 reservations 2, special 2 reservations 3, special 2 reservations 4, and special 2 reservations 4+. After the game round U32 for special 1 reservation 2 ends (time t32), game times V31 to V35 for special 2 reservation 1 to special 2 reservation 4+ are sequentially executed. In the game round V31 for special 2 hold 1, a variable display δ11 is performed, and then a stop display δ12 is performed. Similarly, in other game times V32 to V35 (only game time V35 is shown), the variable display δ11 is performed, and then the stop display δ12 is performed. The game times V31 to V35 are executed by special 2 hold effect processing by the sound emission control device 90.

According to the special 2 hold effect processing, when starting the execution of game round V31 for special 2 hold 1, it is determined which is the lottery result of the electric accessory release lottery that triggered the execution of the special 2 hold change. The above-mentioned first determination is made, and if the first determination determines that the lottery result of the electric accessory opening lottery is the electric accessory opening lottery, each game for Toku 2 reservation 1 to Toku 2 reservation 4+ From game time V31 to game time V35, the above special 2 special performance (iii) is executed.

Figure 523 is an explanatory diagram showing a series of effects executed in a game round V31 for special 2 reserve 1. In a game round V31 for special 2 reserve 1, as shown in Figure 523 (a), a variable display δ11 for special 2 reserve 1 is executed first. Specifically, a display icon H21 corresponding to special 2 reserve 1 is arranged inside the reserved consumption area Dm, and a variable for notifying the result of a winning lottery based on the reserved (reserved information) corresponding to this display icon H21 is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a. A display area SA for special 2 exclusive effects is provided between the main display area MA and the second start opening reserved area Ds2. An image of a special 2 exclusive effect is displayed in this display area SA for special 2 exclusive effects. The display area SA for special 2 exclusive effects is located in a position that does not interfere with the visibility of the pattern displayed in the main display area MA.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, all or part of the image of the premonition preview effect executed in the immediately preceding game round for special 1 reservation (in case 3, game round U32 for special 1 reservation 2) is captured (saved), and a reduced image of the captured image (still image) obtained is displayed in the special 2 exclusive effect display area SA as a special 2 exclusive effect. Specifically, a reduced image of the captured image in which a chance eye (a sequence of [3, 4, 1]) has occurred and bubbles have appeared is displayed in the special 2 exclusive effect display area SA.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the image SH of a shell is displayed in the variable display δ11 for the special 2 reservation 1. The game times V31 to V35 for the special 2 reservation are executed as a result of winning the electric role long opening in which the electric role 34a is opened for a long time (5 seconds) in the electric role opening lottery, and being able to easily accumulate 4 or 5 special 2 reservations even though the support mode is the low frequency support mode. This is highly unexpected and is a delight for the player. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in each game time V31 to V35, if the electric role long opening is won in the electric role opening lottery executed in the support mode is the low frequency support mode, a special performance dedicated to the case is performed, and the special performance is configured to increase the interest of the player. The display of the image SH of the shell corresponds to this special performance. In the variable display δ11 for the special 2 reservation 1, the image SH of the shell is in a state where two shells are closed. The shell image SH is provided between the main display area MA and the first start hole holding area Ds1.

After the variable display δ11, a stop display δ12 for special 2 reservation 1 is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 523(b), the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning lottery result for Special 2 Reserved 1 (in the illustrated example, 137, which is a loss) is displayed as the main display on the display surface 41a. Displayed in area MA. Also at the time of this stop display δ12, a display area SA for special 2 special effect is provided between the main display area MA and the second starting gate holding area Ds2, and this special 2 special effect display area SA , the same special 2 special effect image as in the case of variable display δ11 is displayed.

In the stop display δ12 for Special 2 Reserve 1, the shell image SH continues to be displayed from the variable display δ11. In the stop display δ12, the shell image SH shows two shells slightly open. Each time the stop display is executed in play times V31 to V35 for Special 2 Reserve, the two shells open a little wider.

In other game times V32 to V35 (only game time V35 is shown), the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 are similarly performed, but each variable display δ11 and each stop display δ12 are similarly exclusive to special 2. A performance display area SA is provided, and in the special 2 special performance display area SA, the same special 2 special performance image as shown in FIG. 523 is displayed, as well as an image SH of a shellfish. If you win a jackpot in a winning lottery based on special 2 suspension, when the game round corresponding to the jackpot win is stopped, the shell image SH will be displayed with two shells fully opened and two shells. For example, a pearl appears from between. This creates the impression that a jackpot has been won.

Note that the shell image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for Special 2 Reservation 1 is just an example, and may be applied to other images such as people, other creatures, specific backgrounds, stages, scenes, etc. You can change it.

After the game round for all special 2 reservations (in case 3, special 2 reservation 1 to special 2 reservation 4+) is completed (time t33), the remaining special 1 reservations (in case 3, special 1 reservation 3 and The game round for Special 1 Pending 4) is restarted. The game time U33 for special 1 reservation 3 is the same as the game time U3 for special 1 reservation 3 explained with reference to FIG. In the game round U33 for special 1 pending 3, first, the variable display C11 is executed. The fluctuation display C11 is shown in FIG. 508(a). Subsequently, a stop display C12 is executed in which a chance number appears. The stop display C12 is shown in FIG. 508(b). Subsequently, a bubble appearance effect C13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect C13 is shown in FIG. 508(c). At the end of the bubble appearance performance C13, the game round U33 regarding special 1 pending 3 ends. The stop display C12 and the bubble appearance effect C13 constitute a foreshadowing effect (third time) including a chance eye.

As a modified example, a screen displaying the above-mentioned captured image in the size in which it was captured (full screen size) may be inserted between the last play round V35 for the special 2 reservation and the play round for the special 1 reservation that is executed consecutively after the end of that play round V35. In this case, the reduced captured image in the display area SA for the special 2 exclusive performance displayed in the last play round V35 is zoomed up and transitioned to the above-mentioned captured image of full screen size, thereby making it possible to perform a visually smooth transition from the play round for the special 2 reservation to the play round for the special 1 reservation that performs the continuous reservation performance.

In the game round U34 for special 1 reserve 4, which is executed following the game round U33 for special 1 reserve 3, the variable display G11 is executed first. Then, the super reach performance G12 is executed. Then, the stop display G13 corresponding to the result of the winning lottery is executed, which is a miss. With the end of the stop display G13, the game round U34 for special 1 reserve 4 ends. The contents of the game round U33 for special 1 reserve 3 and the content of the game round U34 for special 1 reserve 4 are the same as when the game ball did not enter the second start hole 34 during the game round U32 for special 1 reserve 2. Note that the contents do not necessarily have to be the same, and the performance pattern in each game round U33 and U34 for special 1 reserve 3 and special 1 reserve 4 may be reset at the execution timing of the game rounds U33 and U34, so that the content of the game round changes.

In the case of case 3, let us consider a configuration in which the special 2 special performance is not executed in each game round V31 to V35 regarding the special 2 reservation. Assuming this configuration as Comparative Example 2, Comparative Example 2 had the following problems.

There are a maximum of 5 games to be played based on special 2 hold, and the time spent on the 5 games is usually a long time (for example, several minutes). In particular, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment performs a special effect using the shellfish image SH, and the playing time is longer. For this reason, in Comparative Example 2, when the continuous performance of special 1 pending is interrupted due to the execution of the game round of special 2 pending, the foreshadowing is announced in the game round of special 1 pending that has been executed up to that time. Some players may have completely forgotten that the effect had appeared.

On the other hand, according to case 3 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in each game round V31 to V35 regarding the special 2 hold, the special 1 hold executed immediately before switching to the special 2 hold game time is Captured images of all or part of the foreshadowing effect that appeared in the game episode continue to be displayed as special 2-only effects, causing players to forget that the foreshadowing effect had appeared. can be suppressed and reminded that the continuous performance of special 1 suspension is continuing.

According to case 3 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the capture image is displayed in all of the game rounds V31 to V35 regarding the special 2 hold. The capture image may be displayed only in the last game round (game round V35 in case 3) among the game rounds V31 to V35 regarding the hold. Furthermore, without displaying the captured image in each game round V31 to V35 regarding special 2 hold, the game round for special 1 hold that is executed continuously after the end of each game round V31 to V35 for special 2 hold. (In case 3, the captured image may be displayed in game round U33). According to these modified examples, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the electric accessory release lottery in the normal time when the special 1 hold continuous holding effect is being executed, the electric role player opening lottery is won and the special 2 is held. If a game round for special 2 hold is executed more times than the upper limit number of holds, a game round for special 1 hold that is executed consecutively after the end of the game round for special 2 hold; It can be reminded that the continuous performance of the suspension is continuing.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a reduced image of a captured image capturing all or part of the premonition notice effect is displayed as a special 2-only effect that reminds the player that a continuous hold effect was performed in the special 1 hold that was executed immediately before switching to the special 2 hold game round. However, instead of this, the captured image may be displayed at its original size without being reduced. Alternatively, a contour image of a main part of the captured image (for example, an image showing the contour of a bubble) may be displayed at its original size or reduced. Alternatively, the density of the captured image may be reduced and the captured image may be displayed at its original size or reduced. Furthermore, instead of the captured image, information suggesting the situation in the game round for the special 1 hold that was executed immediately before switching to the special 2 hold game round (for example, information expressed in text or information expressed in icons) may be displayed. With these modified examples, the player can be reminded that a continuous hold effect was performed in the game round based on the special 1 hold that was executed immediately before switching to the special 2 hold game round, just like the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment.

In addition, as a special effect for the above-mentioned Special 2, a configuration may be adopted in which an image that captures all or part of the premonition preview effect is changed in at least a portion thereof and displayed at the same size or in a reduced size. For example, since the image becomes less noticeable when displayed in a reduced size, the captured image may be modified to increase the amount of bubbles.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the shellfish image SH is provided between the main display area MA and the first starting opening holding area Ds1. On the other hand, as a modification, the image SH of the shellfish may be made larger than that shown in FIG. 523 and overlapped with the pattern displayed in the main display area MA. Further, the image of the enlarged shellfish may be configured to overlap with the display area SA for Special 2 special effect where the captured image is displayed.

《11-5》Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the processing executed in the main control device 60 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

In order to advance each game round, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes will be explained next. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power outage signal, but a description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
524 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sv0101, a reading process is performed for the various detection sensors 67a to 67e. That is, the status of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main control unit 60 is read, the status of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is saved. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0102.

In step Sv0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0103.

In step Sv0103, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the electric role opening counter C4, and the variation type counter CS are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the electric role opening counter C4, and the variation type counter CS, and when each of these counter values reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated values of each of the counters C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0104. Note that the value of the variation type counter CS is updated in the normal processing (FIG. 528) described later.

In step Sv0104, a ball entering process for the starting port is executed when the ball enters the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Details of the entry process for the starting port in step Sv0104 will be described later. After executing step Sv0104, the process advances to step Sv0105.

In step Sv0105, the through ball entry process is executed when the ball enters the through gate 35. Details of the through ball entry process in step Sv0105 will be described later. After executing step Sv0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Ball entry processing for starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be explained. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 524: Sv0104).

Figure 525 is a flowchart showing ball entry processing for the starting hole. In step Sv0201, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (starting ball entry) is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting hole 33. In step Sv0201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (Sv0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0202, where a prize ball command is set to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0203.

In step Sv0203, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sv0204.

In step Sv0204, the starting pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as first starting pending number RaN), which is a value stored in the pending number storage area of the first holding area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first starting reservation number RaN indicates the number of balls being reserved based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. After that, the process advances to step Sv0209.

If it is determined in step Sv0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting hole 33 (Sv0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0205, where it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second starting hole 34 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting hole 34.

In step Sv0205, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sv0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0206, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set command. After that, the process advances to step Sv0207. On the other hand, in step Sv0205, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (Sv0205: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

In step Sv0207, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0208.

In step Sv0208, the start pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number memory area of the second pending area Rb, is read out, and the second start pending number RbN is set as the target for processing described below. The second start pending number RbN indicates the number of balls pending based on balls entering the second start port 34. Then, proceed to step Sv0209.

In step Sv0209, it is determined whether the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sv0204 or step Sv0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Sv0209, if the starting pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sv0209: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sv0209, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit (Sv0209: YES), proceed to step Sv0210, add 1 to the start pending number N in the corresponding pending area, and then proceed to step Sv0211, add 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN. Then proceed to step Sv0212.

In step Sv0212, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in step Sv0103 (Fig. 524) are stored in the first free memory area of the corresponding reserve area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the reserved number to which 1 was added in step Sv0210. Specifically, when the first start reserved number RaN is set as the processing target, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sv0103 are stored in the first free memory area of the first reserve area Ra, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first start reserved number RaN to which 1 was added in step Sv0210. Furthermore, if the second start pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sv0103 are stored in the first free memory area of the second pending area Rb, that is, the memory area corresponding to the second start pending number RbN to which 1 was added in step Sv0210. After executing step Sv0212, proceed to step Sv0213.

In step Sv0213, a first determination process is executed. The first determination process is a process that executes a determination of the result of the winning lottery (lottery result), the type of jackpot, whether or not a reach has occurred, etc. based on the information (reserved information) of each value of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 before the reserved information becomes the subject of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step Sv0213, proceed to step Sv0214.

In step Sv0214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the destination determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as the pending command.

The hold command is a command to have the sub-side control device confirm the occurrence of a ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, and the judgment result (first judgment information) by the first judgment process based on the hold information acquired based on the ball entering, before the hold information becomes the subject of a winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal processing described below (Figure 528: step Sv0503).

In addition, when the audio/light emitting control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a ball entering the first starting hole 33, it transmits a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first starting hole hold area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. The display control device 100 that receives the command changes the display in the first starting hole hold area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. On the other hand, when the audio/light emitting control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a ball entering the second starting hole 34, it transmits a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second starting hole hold area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls. The display control device 100 that receives the command changes the display in the second starting hole hold area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reserved balls.

After executing step Sv0214, the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 ends the ball entry process for this starting hole.

<First judgment process>
Next, the destination determination process will be explained. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 525: Sv0213) of the ball entry process for the starting port.

Figure 526 is a flowchart showing the first determination process. As described above, the first determination process is a process that performs, based on the reserved information, determinations such as whether the winning lottery will be won or lost, the type of jackpot, and whether a reach will occur, before the reserved information becomes the subject of the winning lottery by the main control device 60.

In step Sv0301, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the memory area due to the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entry process for the starting hole (Figure 525) is obtained. Then, proceed to step Sv0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to this ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the result of the judgment of the prior judgment process executed due to the ball entry before this ball entry is read from the corresponding memory area, and the presence or absence of a guaranteed jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to this ball entry and the presence or absence of a win in the drop lottery are determined to determine the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to this ball entry is executed as a game round.

In step Sv0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round (Sv0302: YES), the process advances to step Sv0303, and the winning lottery table is stored. The low probability mode validity table (FIG. 499(a)) stored in the area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sv0305, and as a result of referring to the low probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether the information on the value of the hit random number counter C1 that has been grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Sv0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery for this ball entry is executed as a game round (Sv0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0304, where the winning/losing table for the high probability mode (Figure 499 (b)) stored in the winning/losing table memory area 63a is referenced. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0305, where, as a result of referring to the winning/losing table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step Sv0305, if it is determined that the value of the hit random number counter C1 obtained this time corresponds to a jackpot (Sv0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0306, where the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the memory area due to the ball entering the start hole this time is obtained. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0307, where the allocation table stored in the allocation table memory area 63b is referenced. Specifically, if the jackpot type counter C2 that is the subject of this allocation was obtained based on a ball entering the first start hole 33, the allocation table for the first start hole is referenced, and if it was obtained based on a ball entering the second start hole 34, the allocation table for the second start hole is referenced. After executing step Sv0307, the process proceeds to step Sv0308.

In step Sv0308, the allocation table is referenced to determine whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 currently determined corresponds to a guaranteed jackpot. If it is determined in step Sv0308 that it corresponds to a guaranteed jackpot (Sv0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0309, where the guaranteed jackpot information is stored in the first determination process result storage area 64h. The first determination process is then terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv0308 that it does not correspond to a guaranteed jackpot (Sv0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0310, where normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination process result storage area 64h. The process then proceeds to step Sv0315.

If it is determined in step Sv0305 that the currently grasped value of the hit random number counter C1 does not correspond to a jackpot (Sv0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0311, where the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the memory area due to the current ball entering the starting hole is grasped. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0312, where the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table memory area 63c is referenced. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0313, where, as a result of referring to the reach judgment table, it is determined whether or not the currently grasped value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

If it is determined in step Sv0313 that a reach is possible (Sv0313: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0314, where the reach occurrence information is stored in the advance determination process result storage area 64h. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0315. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv0313 that a reach is not possible (Sv0313: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0315.

In step Sv0315, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the memory area due to the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entry process for the starting hole (Figure 525) is obtained. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0316, and the fluctuation time table for the jackpot stored in the fluctuation time table memory area 63d of the ROM 63 is referenced to obtain the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. After executing step Sv0316, the process proceeds to step Sv0317.

In step Sv0317, the fluctuation pattern is identified from the fluctuation time information acquired in step Sv0316, and the type of the identified fluctuation pattern is stored in the first determination process result storage area 64h. After executing step Sv0317, the first determination process is terminated.

<Processing a through ball>
Next, the through ball scoring process will be described. The through ball scoring process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 524: Sv0105).

FIG. 527 is a flowchart showing the through ball entry process. In step Sv0401, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step Sv0401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sv0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0402, and whether or not the accessory reserve number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) Determine whether or not. Note that the number of held accessory objects SN is a value indicating the number of balls entering the through gate 35 that are held in order to perform the electric accessory release lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of accessory items on hold is four. On the other hand, in step Sv0401, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sv0401: NO), the main through ball entering process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sv0402 that the number of reserved reels SN is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (Sv0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0403, where the number of reserved reels SN is incremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0404.

In step Sv0404, the value of the electric role release counter C4 updated in step Sv0103 (Fig. 524) is stored in the first free memory area in the electric role reserve area 64d of RAM 64. After that, the ball entry process for the through is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sv0402, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is not less than the upper limit (Sv0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved reels SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the ball entry process for through is terminated without storing the value of the electric reel opening counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal processing is a processing that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state (hereinafter, also referred to as "power-on"). In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 528 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sv0501, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, etc. are executed. After that, the process advances to step Sv0502.

In step Sv0502, a startup command is set. The startup command is a command for instructing each control device on the sub side to start a demo video when the power is turned on. Then, proceed to step Sv0503.

In step Sv0503, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sv0502, the command set in the timer interrupt process, or the previously executed normal process, etc., is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, if commands related to production such as a startup command, a variation command, a type command, a hold command, etc. are set, they are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step Sv0503, the process advances to step Sv0504.

In step Sv0504, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Sv0505.

In step Sv0505, the prize ball count signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sv0506. In step Sv0506, a game round control process for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display section 37a, second symbol display section 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game time control process will be described later. After executing step Sv0506, the process advances to step Sv0507.

In step Sv0507, a game state transition process is executed to transition the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state transitions to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0508.

In step Sv0508, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric accessory support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is to be in an open state. Details of the electric support support process will be described later. After that, the process advances to step Sv0509.

In step Sv0509, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of this normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sv0503). In other words, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived. If it is determined in step Sv0509 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of this normal processing (Sv0509: NO), in steps Sv0510 and Sv0511, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal processing. Specifically, in step Sv0510, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. In addition, in step Sv0511, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv0509 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of this normal process (Sv0509: YES), the process returns to step Sv0503 and executes each process from step Sv0503 to step Sv0508.

Note that since the execution time of each process from step Sv0503 to step Sv0508 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game Play Control Processing>
Next, the game play control process will be described. The game play control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 528: Sv0506).

Figure 529 is a flowchart showing the game play control process. In step Sv0601, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON. The open/close execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is to be transitioned to the open/close execution mode in the game state transition process described below, and is turned OFF when the open/close execution mode is to be terminated in the game state transition process.

If it is determined in step Sv0601 that the opening and closing execution mode is in progress (Sv0601: YES), the game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes in step Sv0602 and onwards. In other words, if the opening and closing execution mode is in progress, a game round will not be started regardless of whether a ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv0601 that the opening and closing execution mode is not in progress (Sv0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0602.

In step Sv0602, it is determined whether the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether either one of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the special figure variation display flag in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The flag during special symbol fluctuation display is turned ON when a fluctuation display is started for either the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, and is turned OFF when the fluctuation display ends.

If it is determined in step Sv0602 that the special chart unit 37 is not displaying a change (Sv0602: NO), proceed to step Sv0603.

In step Sv0603, a fluctuation start process is executed to start the fluctuation display in the special symbol unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41. Note that details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Sv0603, this game round control process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sv0602, when it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display (Sv0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0604.

In step Sv0604, a fluctuation end process is executed to end the fluctuation display in the special symbol unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41. Note that details of the fluctuation end processing will be described later. After executing step Sv0604, this game round control process is ended.

<Change start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 529: Sv0603).

FIG. 530 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Sv0701, it is determined whether the total number of reservations CRN exceeds "0". The case where the total number of reservations CRN is "0" or less means that the number of startup reservations for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". Therefore, in step Sv0701, if it is determined that the total pending number CRN is less than or equal to "0" (Sv0701: NO), this fluctuation start process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv0701 that the total pending number CRN exceeds "0" (Sv0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0702.

In step Sv0702, a reserved information shift process is executed to set the reserved information stored in the first reserved area Ra or the second reserved area Rb to the state after the change started, and the process proceeds to step Sv0703. The details of the reserved information shift process will be described later.

In step Sv0703, a winning determination process including a process when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is performed. Details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sv0703, the process advances to step Sv0704.

In step Sv0704, a variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is a process for setting a variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a jackpot or the occurrence of a reach. The variable time setting process will be described in detail later. After executing step Sv0704, the process proceeds to step Sv0705.

In step Sv0705, a variation command is set. The variation command includes whether the current game round is related to pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, or whether it is related to the pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. It includes information indicating whether the information is related to hold information, information as to whether reach has occurred, and information on the variable time set in step Sv0706. After executing step Sv0705, the process advances to step Sv0706.

In step Sv0706, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and the result of the allocation determination. In other words, the type command includes, as information on the type of jackpot, information on a 16R special jackpot, information on an 8R special jackpot, information on a 16R regular jackpot, information on an 8R regular jackpot, or information on the result of a losing lottery.

The variation command and type command set in steps Sv0705 and Sv0706 are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sv0503 in the normal process (FIG. 528). The audio emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step Sv0706, the process advances to step Sv0707.

In step Sv0707, the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round out of the first pattern display section 37a and the second pattern display section 37b is caused to start displaying a changing pattern. Specifically, if the second pattern display section flag in RAM 64 is not ON, the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first pattern display section 37a and a changing display is started, and if the second pattern display section flag is ON, the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second pattern display section 37b and a changing display is started. After executing step Sv0707, the process proceeds to step Sv0708.

In step Sv0708, the special chart change display flag stored in the special chart change display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After step Sv0708 is executed, this change start process is terminated.

<Pending information shift processing>
Next, pending information shift processing will be explained. The pending information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 530: Sv0702).

FIG. 531 is a flowchart showing pending information shift processing. In step Sv0801, it is determined whether the holding area that is the processing target for executing the holding information shift process is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, the reservation information stored earliest among the reservation information stored in chronological order in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 498) (the reservation stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra) information) is the earliest stored reservation information (stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb) among the reservation information chronologically stored in the second reservation area Rb (FIG. 498). If it is stored in the reservation area before the reservation information (reservation information), it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the earliest among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb is the first among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb in chronological order. If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sv0801, the reservation information can be processed in the order in which it is stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

In step Sv0801, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is the first holding area Ra (step Sv0801: YES), holding information shift processing for the first holding area in steps Sv0802 to Sv0807 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sv0801, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step Sv0801: NO ), executes the hold information shift process for the second hold area in steps Sv0808 to Sv0813.

In step Sv0802, after the first starting reservation number RaN of the first reservation area Ra is subtracted by 1, the process proceeds to step Sv0803, where the total reservation number CRN is subtracted by 1. After that, the process advances to step Sv0804. In step Sv0804, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sv0805.

In step Sv0805, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the first reserved area Ra. This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas sequentially to the lower areas. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, the fourth area to the third area, and so on. After executing step Sv0805, proceed to step Sv0806.

In step Sv0806, if the second pattern display section flag in the various flags storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second pattern display section flag is information for identifying whether the current variable display will start from the first pattern display section 37a or the second pattern display section 37b. Then, proceed to step Sv0807.

In step Sv0807, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, it corresponds to the first starting port 33. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, this pending information shift process ends. Note that the shift command set in step Sv0807 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sv0503 in the normal process (FIG. 528).

In step Sv0801, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (Sv0801: NO), step Proceed to Sv0808.

In step Sv0808, the second start pending number RbN in the second pending area Rb is decremented by 1. Then, proceed to step Sv0809. In step Sv0809, the total pending number CRN is decremented by 1, and proceed to step Sv0810, where the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, proceed to step Sv0811.

In step Sv0811, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the second reserved area Rb. This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas sequentially to the lower areas. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, the fourth area to the third area, and so on. After executing step Sv0811, proceed to step Sv0812.

In step Sv0812, if the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. After that, the process advances to step Sv0813.

In step Sv0813, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, it corresponds to the second starting port 34. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, this pending information shift process ends.

The shift command set in step Sv0813 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sv0503 in normal processing (FIG. 528). Based on the received shift command, the audio light emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device for changing the display in the second starting opening holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holding pieces. Send to 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second starting opening holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holding symbols.

<Hit determination processing>
Next, the hit determination process will be explained. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 530: Sv0703).

Figure 532 is a flowchart showing the winning determination process. In step Sv0901, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flags storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sv0901 that the mode is high probability mode (Sv0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0902, where a win/loss determination is made by referring to the win/loss table for high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the win random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the win/loss table for high probability mode shown in FIG. 499(b). Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0904.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv0901 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Sv0901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0903, and a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the low probability mode win/fail table shown in FIG. 499(a). Determine whether Thereafter, the process advances to step Sv0904.

In step Sv0904, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in step Sv0902 or step Sv0903 is a jackpot win. In step Sv0904, if the result of the judgment is a jackpot (Sv0904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0905.

In step Sv0905, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sv0905, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Sv0905: NO), proceed to step Sv0906 and refer to the distribution table for the first starting opening (see FIG. 500(a)). to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is within the numerical range of 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, or the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. Determine whether it is included in

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv0905 that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sv0905: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0907, and the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 500(b)) Make a distribution decision by referring to the . Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of 16R probability variable jackpot or the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. After executing the process of step Sv0906 or step Sv0907, the process advances to step Sv0908.

In step Sv0908, the flag (jackpot flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot assigned in step Sv0906 or step Sv0907 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R special jackpot, the 16R special jackpot flag is turned ON, if it is an 8R special jackpot, the 8R special jackpot flag is turned ON, if it is a 16R regular jackpot, the 16R regular jackpot flag is turned ON, and if it is an 8R regular jackpot, the 8R regular jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step Sv0908, proceed to step Sv0909.

In step Sv0909, processing for setting a stop result for a jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game round in which the jackpot will be won, it is set which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display. This is the process to do so. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63f (FIG. 497), the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sv0906 or step Sv0907 is determined. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sv0909, the hit determination process ends.

In step Sv0904, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sv0902 or step Sv0903 is not a jackpot win (Sv0904: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0910, where the reach determination table is referenced to determine whether or not a reach will occur in that game round. Specifically, the process determines whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the occurrence of a reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (Figure 497). Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0911.

In step Sv0911, if the result of the reach judgment in step Sv0910 is that a reach occurs in the relevant game round (Sv0911: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0912 and the reach occurrence flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sv0912, the process advances to step Sv0913.

On the other hand, in step Sv0911, if the result of the reach determination in step Sv0910 is that a reach will not occur in that game round (Sv0911: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0913 without executing step Sv0912.

In step Sv0913, a process for setting a stop result for failure is executed. Specifically, in the current game round where the result is a miss, the variable display is set to end with which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. It is processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for losing in the stop result table storage area 63f, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. , and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sv0913, the hit determination process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be explained. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 530: Sv0704).

FIG. 533 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step Sv1001, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process advances to step Sv1002.

In step Sv1002, processing for specifying a variable time table is executed. The fluctuation time table is tabular data whose data elements are information on fluctuation time (fluctuation time information), which is the time from when a symbol starts to fluctuate until it stops, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. The variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 stores various types of variable time tables depending on the gaming state, the presence or absence of jackpot and time saving, and the presence or absence of reach. In step S1102, one variable time table is identified from these variable time tables. Specifically, based on the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag, the current gaming state is determined to be one of the low probability low support state, high probability high support state, low probability high support state, and high probability low support state. , and the determination result, the determination result of the validity determination to determine the presence or absence of a jackpot or time-saving grant for this game round, and the determination result of the reach determination to determine the presence or absence of a reach occurrence. Based on this, one variable time table is specified from the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. After executing step Sv1002, the process advances to step Sv1003.

In step Sv1003, the fluctuation time table identified in step Sv1002 is referenced to obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sv1001. After executing step Sv1003, the process proceeds to step Sv1004.

In step Sv1004, the variable time information acquired in step Sv1003 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process is terminated.

<Fluctuation end processing>
Next, the variation end processing will be explained. The variation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 529: Sv0604) of the game time control process.

Figure 534 is a flowchart showing the variation end process. In step Sv1101, it is determined whether the variation time for the current game has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the pattern rows start to vary until all of the pattern rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sv1101, it is determined whether the value of the variation time information stored in the variation time counter area (various counter area 64f) of RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variation time information is set in the variation time setting process (Figure 533) described above. The value of this set variation time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started.

If it is determined in step Sv1101 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sv1101: NO), this fluctuation termination process is terminated.

In step Sv1101, if it is determined that the variable time has elapsed (Sv1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1102, and the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b corresponding to the current game round are selected. Processing is performed to end the variation of the symbols in the symbol display section. Subsequently, in step Sv1103, the special figure variation displaying flag stored in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step Sv1103, the process advances to step Sv1104.

In step Sv1104, it is determined whether the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot win. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R special jackpot flag, 8R special jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in RAM 64 is ON. In step Sv1104, if it is determined that none of the above flags are ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a jackpot win (Sv1104: NO), it proceeds to step Sv1105.

In step Sv1105, it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sv1105 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Sv1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1106, and it is determined whether the value of the number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not. If it is determined in step Sv1106 that the value of the number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 (Sv1106: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1107, and the value of the number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1. After executing step Sv1107, the process advances to step Sv1108. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1106 that the value of the number of games counter PNC is 0 or less (Sv1106: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1108 without executing step Sv1107.

In step Sv1108, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sv1108, if it is determined that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Sv1108: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1109, and it is determined whether the value of the number of games counter PNC exceeds 0 or not.

If it is determined in step Sv1109 that the value of the number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sv1109: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1110 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After executing step Sv1110, this variation time end process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sv1108 that the high probability mode flag is ON (Sv1108: YES), or if it is determined in step Sv1109 that the value of the play count counter PNC is greater than 0 (step Sv1109: YES), this variable time ending process is terminated without executing step Sv1110. Also, if it is determined in step Sv1105 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sv1105: NO), this variable time ending process is terminated without executing steps Sv106 to Sv1110.

On the other hand, in step Sv1104, if any of the 16R special jackpot flag, 8R special jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, or 8R normal jackpot flag is ON, i.e., if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for this game round is a jackpot win (Sv1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1111, where the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sv1111, this variable time end process is terminated.

<Game Status Transition Processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 528: Sv0507).

Figure 535 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step Sv1201, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON or not. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the large prize opening opening and closing processing period in the opening and closing execution mode (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is the period for executing the ending performance in the opening and closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sv1201 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sv1201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1202, where it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the opening period ends during the opening/closing execution mode and the large prize opening opening/closing processing period, during which the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is executed, begins, and is turned OFF when the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b ends.

If it is determined in step Sv1202 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sv1202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1203, where it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is set to ON at the start of the opening period and set to OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sv1203 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sv1203: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1204, where it is determined whether the opening and closing execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sv1204 that the opening and closing execution mode flag is ON (Sv1204: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1205. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1204 that the opening and closing execution mode flag is OFF (Sv1204: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

In step Sv1205, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. Then, proceed to step Sv1206. In step Sv1206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Then, proceed to step Sv1207.

In step Sv1207, an opening/closing scenario setting process is executed to set an opening/closing scenario. The opening/closing scenario determines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b during a round of play, and in this embodiment, it is a program that records the conditions for transitioning the opening/closing door 36b from a closed state to an open state (hereinafter also referred to as "opening conditions") and the conditions for transitioning the opening/closing door 36b from an open state to a closed state (hereinafter also referred to as "closing conditions"). The opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63h of the ROM 63.

The release conditions are, for example, as follows:
- The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing to start each round of play in the opening and closing execution mode.
When one of the above items is met, the opening and closing door 36b transitions from a closed state to an open state.

The closing conditions are, for example, as follows:
- The time elapsed since the start of each round of play exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration (e.g., 15 seconds).
The number of game balls entering the big prize opening 36a after the start of each round of play exceeds a predetermined upper limit.
When either one of the above two conditions is met, the opening and closing door 36b transitions from an open state to a closed state.

After executing step Sv1207, proceed to step Sv1208 described above.

In step Sv1208, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as the opening time). In this embodiment, the same fixed opening time is set for each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (i.e., 6 seconds) is set in the third timer counter area T3, which determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in the various counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sv1208, proceed to step Sv1209.

In step Sv1209, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in step Sv0503 in normal processing (Fig. 528). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current opening and closing execution mode. Based on the received opening command, the audio and light emission control device 90 determines the content of the presentation corresponding to the opening time and the large prize opening and closing processing period, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step Sv1209, the process proceeds to step Sv1210, where the opening period flag is set to ON. After that, this game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step Sv1203 that the opening period flag is ON (Sv1203: YES), proceed to step Sv1211.

In step Sv1211, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sv1211 that the opening period has ended (Sv1211: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1212, where the opening period flag is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv1213.

In step Sv1213, a round display start process is executed to notify the type of the current opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays information on the round related to the above output. After executing step Sv1213, the process advances to step Sv1214.

In step Sv1214, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. In the following step Sv1215, an opening/closing processing start command is set. The opening/closing processing start command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the opening/closing processing period has started. The opening/closing processing start command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of normal processing (Figure 528: step Sv0503). After executing step Sv1215, this game state transition process is terminated.

In step Sv1202, if it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sv1202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1216, and the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. The grand prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sv1216, the process advances to step Sv1217.

In step Sv1217, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has been completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended based on whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b has been opened is "0". do. In step Sv1217, if it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended (Sv1217: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1218. On the other hand, in step Sv1217, if it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not been completed (Sv1217: NO), the main game state transition process is ended as it is.

In step Sv1218, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step Sv1219.

In step Sv1219, processing to end the round display is executed. In this processing, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step Sv1219, the process proceeds to step Sv1220.

In step Sv1220, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the ending period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as the ending time). In this embodiment, the same fixed ending time is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (i.e., 6 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4, which determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in the various counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sv1220, proceed to step Sv1221.

In step Sv1221, an ending command is set. This set ending command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step Sv0503 in the normal process (FIG. 528). The audio light emission control device 90 ends the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on receiving the ending command. After executing step Sv1221, the process advances to step Sv1222.

In step Sv1222, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step Sv1201, if it is determined that the ending period flag is ON (Sv1201: YES), the process advances to step Sv1223.

In step Sv1223, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sv1220), it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step Sv1220 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sv1223: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1224.

In step Sv1224, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sv1225, and a transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game after the current ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sv1225, the process proceeds to step Sv1226 and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sv1226, the process advances to step Sv1227.

In step Sv1227, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is "0". If the total reserved number CRN is "0", this means that the start reserved number is "0" for both the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. In step Sv1227, if it is determined that the total reserved number CRN is "0" (Sv1227: YES), proceed to step Sv1228.

In step Sv1228, a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is a command that includes information for making the audio and light emitting control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, recognize that no pending information is stored in the pending information storage area 64b at the time when the pattern change (play round) has ended. This set customer waiting command is sent to the audio and light emitting control device 90 in step Sv1228 in the normal processing (Figure 528). After step Sv1228 is executed, this play round control processing ends.

On the other hand, in step Sv1227, if it is determined that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (Sv1227: NO), the main game round control process is directly ended. Further, in step Sv1223, if it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sv1223: NO), the main gaming state transition process is ended.

<Big prize opening and closing process>
Next, the special prize opening/closing process will be described. The special prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 535: Sv1216).

FIG. 536 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step Sv1301, it is determined whether the opening/closing door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable prize winning driving section 36c. If it is determined in step Sv1301 that the door 36b is not open (Sv1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1302.

In step Sv1302, it is determined whether the conditions for opening the opening/closing door 36b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open the opening/closing door 36b. In step Sv1302, if it is determined that the condition for opening the door 36b is satisfied (Sv1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1303.

In step Sv1303, the door 36b is opened. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sv1304.

In step Sv1304, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The opening/closing door opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 528: Step Sv0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sv1304, the big winning opening opening/closing process ends.

In step Sv1302, if it is determined that the opening condition for the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sv1302: NO), the big prize opening opening/closing process is ended without executing steps Sv1303 and Sv1304.

If it is determined in step Sv1301 that the door 36b is open (Sv1301: YES), the process advances to step Sv1305.

In step Sv1305, it is determined whether the closing conditions for the opening and closing door 36b are met. Specifically, the opening and closing scenario set by the opening and closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to close the opening and closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sv1305 that the closing conditions for the opening and closing door 36b are met (Sv1305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1306.

In step Sv1306, the opening and closing door 36b is closed. Then, proceed to step Sv1307.

In step Sv1307, a door closing command is set. The opening/closing door close command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b is closed. The opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 528: Step Sv0503) of the normal processing. After executing step Sv1307, the big winning opening opening/closing process ends.

In step Sv1305, if it is determined that the closing condition for the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sv1305: NO), the big prize opening opening/closing process is ended without executing step Sv1306 and step Sv1307.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 535: Sv1225).

Figure 537 is a flowchart showing the transition process at the end of the ending period. In step Sv1401, it is determined whether the flag corresponding to the guaranteed jackpot in the jackpot flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether the 16R guaranteed jackpot flag or the 8R guaranteed jackpot flag in RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sv1401 that the 16R variable probability jackpot flag or the 8R variable probability jackpot flag in RAM 64 is ON (Sv1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1402, where the 16R variable probability jackpot flag and the 8R variable probability jackpot flag in RAM 64 that are ON are turned OFF. After executing step Sv1402, the process proceeds to step Sv1403.

In step Sv1403, the high probability mode flag is turned on, and then the process proceeds to step Sv1404, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode is ended, a transition is made to a gaming state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sv1405.

In step Sv1405, the number of times of play counter PNC provided in the various counter area 64f of RAM 64 is set to 100. The value set in the number of times of play counter PNC is a value indicating the number of times of play when the high frequency support mode is executed with a limited number of times of play. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv1406.

In step Sv1406, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv1411.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1401 that the 16R special jackpot flag and the 8R special jackpot flag in RAM 64 are not ON (Sv1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1407, where the 8R regular jackpot flag in RAM 64 is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv1408.

In step Sv1408, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step Sv1409, where the number of plays counter PNC provided in the various counter area 64f of RAM 64 is set to 100. Then the process proceeds to step Sv1410.

In step Sv1410, a low probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the lottery mode is a low probability mode, is set as a command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv1411.

In step Sv1411, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is sent as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Set. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric support>
Next, the processing for electric support will be explained. The electric support support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 528: Sv0508).

Figure 538 is a flowchart showing the electric support process. In step Sv1501, it is determined whether or not support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support in progress flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support in progress flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric device 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened, and is turned OFF when the electric device 34a is returned to the closed state. In step Sv1501, if it is determined that the support in progress flag is not ON (Sv1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1502.

In step Sv1502, it is determined whether the support win flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support win flag is a flag that is turned ON when an open state win is obtained in the electric role opening lottery to determine whether the electric role 34a is opened or not, and is turned OFF when the support in progress flag is ON. In step Sv1502, if it is determined that the support win flag is not ON (Sv1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1503.

In step Sv1503, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, at a 2 msec cycle.

In step Sv1503, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sv1503: NO), this electronic role support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sv1503: YES), the process advances to step Sv1504.

In step Sv1504, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuating display of symbols in the common symbol unit 38. In step Sv1504, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sv1504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1505, and after setting the out-of-line display, the main electric role support process is ended. By setting the missing display, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the regular pattern unit 38 is ended with the missing display being stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1504 that it is not the timing to end the variable display (Sv1504: NO), the process advances to step Sv1506.

In step Sv1506, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0". In step Sv1506, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is "0" (Sv1506: NO), this electronic role support processing is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1506 that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0" (Sv1506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1507.

In step Sv1507, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Sv1508, in which it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in progress. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode in step Sv1507 (Sv1507: NO), and if it is in the high-frequency support mode in step Sv1508 (Sv1508: YES), the process advances to step Sv1509, and an electric accessories opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Further, at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, "750" (ie, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. After that, the process advances to step Sv1510.

In step Sv1510, it is determined whether the result of the electric role opening lottery in step Sv1509 is a support win. In step Sv1510, if it is determined that the result of the electric role opening lottery is a support win (Sv1510: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1511, where the support win flag is turned ON and the second round counter area RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of RAM 64 is set to "3". The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric role 34a has been opened. Then, the electric role support processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sv1510, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not a support win (Sv1510: NO), the electric role support process is ended without executing the process of step Sv1511.

If it is determined in step Sv1507 that the mode is the open/close execution mode (Sv1507: YES), or if it is determined in step Sv1508 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (Sv1508: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1512, where a lottery is held to open the electric role device. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role reserve area 64c is shifted, and if the value of the electric role device opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is between 0 and 190, the electric role device opening lottery is won. In addition, at the same time as the electric role device opening lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (i.e. 29.5 sec). Then, the process proceeds to step Sv1513.

In step Sv1513, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sv1512 is a support win. In step Sv1513, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sv1513: NO), the main electric role support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1513 that support has been won (Sv1513: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1514, where the support win flag is turned ON, and after setting "1" in the second round counter area RC2, , ends this electronic support process.

If it is determined in step Sv1502 that the support winning flag is ON (Sv1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1515, where it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal picture unit 38. If it is determined in step Sv1515 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sv1515: NO), the image fluctuation display in the normal picture unit 38 is in progress, so the main electric role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1515 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sv1515: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1516.

In step Sv1516, a winning display is set. As a result, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the normal pattern unit 38 is ended with the win display being stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sv1517, where the supporting flag is turned on and the support winning flag is turned off. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

In step Sv1501, if it is determined that the support flag is ON (Sv1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1518, and an electric role opening/closing control process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. Thereafter, the main electronic role support process ends.

<Electricity switching control processing>
Next, the electric utility switching control process will be described. The electric utility switching control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the electric utility support process (FIG. 538: Sv1518).

FIG. 539 is a flowchart showing the power opening/closing control process. In step Sv1601, it is determined whether the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive section 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Sv1601: YES), the process advances to step Sv1602.

In step Sv1602, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. In step Sv1602, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sv1602: NO), the main power switch opening/closing control process is directly ended. That is, if the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

In step Sv1602, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sv1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1603, where a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 34a to a closed state, "250" (ie, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is turned on. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sv1603, the process advances to step Sv1604.

In step Sv1604, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is subtracted by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sv1605, where it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step Sv1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sv1605: NO), the main electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sv1605: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1606, where the support in progress flag is turned OFF. Then, the main electric role opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step Sv1601, if it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sv1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1607, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. In step Sv1607, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sv1607: NO), the main power opening/closing control process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sv1607, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sv1607: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1608, and an opening process is executed to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state. . After that, the process advances to step Sv1609.

In step Sv1609, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sv1609: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1610, where it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step Sv1610 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (Sv1610: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1611, where the second timer counter area T2 is set to "800" (i.e., 1.6 seconds). After that, the main electric switch opening/closing control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1609 that the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (Sv1609: YES), or if it is determined in step Sv1610 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (Sv1610: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1612, where the second timer counter area T2 is set to "100" (i.e., 0.2 sec). After that, the main electric equipment opening/closing control process is terminated.

《11-6》Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed by the sound emission control device and the display control device in order to execute the preview performance and the result announcement performance will be described. First, the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Various processes executed in the audio emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92 will be described.

Figure 540 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed in the sound/light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is executed repeatedly at a relatively short period (e.g., 2 msec). The process of each step executed in the timer interrupt process is explained below.

In step Sv1701, a command storage process is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing a received command in the audio/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The audio/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer to enable the storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are stored sequentially in the ring buffer and are read out sequentially in the order in which they were stored. After executing step Sv1701, proceed to step Sv1702.

In step Sv1702, pending command handling processing is executed. In the pending command corresponding processing, processing corresponding to the first pending command among the commands stored in step Sv1701 is performed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step Sv1702, the process advances to step Sv1703.

In step Sv1703, a game round performance setting process is executed. In the game round performance setting process, the performance to be executed in the game round from when the pattern change starts to when it stops is set. The game round performance setting process will be described in detail later. After executing step Sv1703, the process proceeds to step Sv1704.

In step Sv1704, opening/closing execution mode production processing is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode performance processing, processing related to the performance during the opening period, the performance during the grand prize opening/closing processing period, and the performance during the ending period is performed. After executing step Sv1704, the process advances to step Sv1705.

In step Sv1705, background effect processing is executed. In the background effect processing, a process is performed to display on the pattern display device 41 a background video determined according to a command indicating the game status received from the main MPU 62. For example, a process is performed to display a background video indicating that the high frequency support mode is continuing, a background video indicating that the high frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high probability mode is continuing. After executing step Sv1705, the process proceeds to step Sv1706.

In step Sv1706, other processing is executed. Other processing includes processing for displaying a demonstration image (moving image) on the symbol display device 41 when the player is not playing a game. After executing step Sv1706, the process advances to step Sv1707.

In step Sv1707, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in each of the above-mentioned production processes. After executing step Sv1707, the process advances to step Sv1708.

In step Sv1708, an audio output control process is executed to control the audio output of the speaker 46. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is executed based on the audio data read in the above-mentioned BGM process and each performance process. After executing step Sv1708, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Pending command processing>
Next, the hold command response process will be described. The hold command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 540: Sv1702).

FIG. 541 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. In step Sv1801, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sv1801 that a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sv1801: YES), the process advances to step Sv1802.

In step Sv1802, it is determined whether the pending command to be read this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. In step Sv1802, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sv1802: YES), the process advances to step Sv1803, and the Update processing of the first pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the optical side RAM 94 is executed. The first reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 in the audio-optical side MPU 92. In the process of updating the first pending quantity counter area, the information in the first pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the pending command that is currently read. After executing step Sv1803, the process advances to step Sv1804.

In step Sv1804, special 1 pending continuous effect setting processing is executed. The special 1 pending continuous effect setting process is described in detail in the section "Summary of processing by gaming machine", and determines the execution mode of the precursor notice effect. Specifically, according to the special 1 hold continuous performance setting process, a hold command sent from the main controller 60 is received every time a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. , If it is determined from the said hold command that it is a Special 1 hold that has hold information that executes (is scheduled to be executed) a reach effect that has a high expectation of winning a jackpot, such as a reach effect, the content of the reach effect, By matching the number of special 1 reservation information that exists before the special 1 reservation with the table showing the relationship between the number of appearance of the precursor notice performance and the scheduled execution performance shown in FIG. It is determined which of the previously existing special 1 pending information is to be used to execute the foreshadowing performance. For example, if the special 1 hold that was the trigger is special 1 hold 4, and the lottery result of the winning lottery for special 1 hold 4 is a loss, but a normal reach occurs, the game cycle for special 1 hold 2 Two ways can be adopted: a case in which the foreshadowing effect is executed in the game round U3 for U2 and the special 1 hold 3, and a case in which the foreshadowing effect is executed in the game round U3 for the special 1 hold 3. For example, it is determined by lottery which of the two options to adopt or which option to adopt. After executing step Sv1804, the process advances to step Sv1806.

In step Sv1802, if it is determined that the held command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sv1802: NO), that is, the held command is If it is determined that the transmission has been made based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process advances to step Sv1805 and updates the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94. Execute. The second reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 in the sound-light side MPU 92. In the process of updating the second pending quantity counter area, the information in the second pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the command that is currently read. After executing step Sv1805, the process advances to step Sv1806.

The reason why steps Sv1803 and Sv1805 are processed as described above will be explained. In this embodiment, while the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, but backup power is not supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound and light emission control device 90. For this reason, when the power supply is cut off in a situation where the reserved information related to the ball entering the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the reserved information is stored and held in the main control device 60, but the sound and light emission control device 90 understands that there is zero reserved information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area is counted up each time the sound and light emission control device 90 receives a reserved command, an inconvenience may occur in which the number of reserved information actually stored in the main control device 60 does not match the number of reserved information understood by the sound and light emission control device 90. In response to this, in the present embodiment described above, the main control unit 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of held items, and the audio/light emission control unit 90 adopts a configuration in which the information on the number of held items included in the command is set in the first held item number counter area or the second held item number counter area each time the hold command is received, thereby preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In step Sv1806, an update process is executed for the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The total reserved number counter area is a counter area for the sound/light side MPU 92 to identify the sum of the number of reserved information acquired based on balls entering the first starting hole 33 and the number of reserved information acquired based on balls entering the second starting hole 34. In this update process, the information in the total reserved number counter area is updated to the sum of the information on the number of reserved items measured in the first reserved number counter area and the information on the number of reserved items measured in the second reserved number counter area. After executing step Sv1805, proceed to step Sv1807.

If it is determined in step Sv1801 that no pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sv1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1807 without executing steps Sv1802 to Sv1806.

In step Sv1807, the hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the display mode (color and combination of LED lamps to be lit) of the first hold display unit 37c is controlled based on the number of hold information pieces obtained based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 identified in step Sv1803, and the display mode (color and combination of LED lamps to be lit) of the second hold display unit 37d is controlled based on the number of hold information pieces obtained based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34 identified in step Sv1805. After executing step Sv1807, this hold command response process is terminated.

<Game rendition setting process>
Next, the game run performance setting process will be explained. The game performance setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 540: Sv1703).

Figure 542 is a flowchart showing the game round presentation setting process. In step Sv1901, it is determined whether or not a change command and a type command have been received. If it is determined in step Sv1901 that a change command and a type command have not been received (Sv1901: NO), this game round presentation setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1901 that a change command and a type command have been received (Sv1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1902.

In step Sv1902, the command for variation and the type command received this time are read out, and from these commands, the presence or absence of a jackpot, the presence or absence of time saving, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a reach occurrence, and information on the variation time are grasped. Then, the obtained information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. After that, the process advances to step Sv1903.

In step Sv1903, a presentation pattern setting process is executed. The presentation pattern setting process is a process for determining and setting the presentation pattern to be executed in the current game round (the contents and execution timing of the preview presentation and reach presentation) based on the presentation pattern table. The presentation pattern setting process will be described in detail later. After executing step Sv1903, the process proceeds to step Sv1904.

In step Sv1904, a setting process for the stop symbols is executed. In the setting process for the stop symbols, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game is a 16R jackpot, an 8R jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, information corresponding to the stopping result in which the same combination of symbols is established on the active line L1 (see FIG. 496) is set as the information for the current stop symbols. Specifically, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game is a 16R jackpot or an 8R jackpot, a combination of the same odd symbols may be selected as the combination of the same symbols, and a combination of the same even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd symbols and the combination of the same even symbols, but instead, the former may be configured to have a higher selection rate than the latter, or the latter may be configured to have a higher selection rate than the former. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R jackpot. Furthermore, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is an 8R regular jackpot, a combination of the same even-numbered symbols will be selected as the combination of the same symbols.

If the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game round is a losing result, it is determined from the contents of the variation command whether or not a reach has occurred. If it is determined that it corresponds to a reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which a combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L1, and corresponds to a stop result in which a combination of reach symbols is established on the active line L1. The information is determined as the current stop result information. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L1, and the stop result is that the combination of the reach symbols is not established on the active line L1. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stopped symbol.

In step Sv1905, processing for setting a fluctuation pattern for the current game round is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game round is specified from the contents of the fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the stop symbols set in step Sv1904 are combined. Select the corresponding fluctuation pattern. In addition, when selecting a variation pattern, the variation pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the audio/light side ROM 93 is referred to. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sv1906.

In step Sv1906, the special 1 reserved continuous presentation process is executed. The special 1 reserved continuous presentation process is described in detail in the "Outline of Processing by the Gaming Machine" section, and as explained above, it determines the execution mode of the premonition notice presentation, and executes processing to set the presentation in which a chance eye appears, the presentation in which bubbles appear, the charge presentation, etc. After executing step Sv1906, it proceeds to step Sv1907. In step Sv1907, the special 2 reserved presentation process is executed. The special 2 reserved presentation process is described in detail in the "Outline of Processing by the Gaming Machine" section, and as explained above, it performs the first and second judgments, and executes processing to set the presentation in which a pattern of the same color appears, the presentation in which a shell image SH appears, etc. After executing step Sv1907, it proceeds to step Sv1908.

In step Sv1908, information on the performance pattern set in step Sv1903, the stop symbol set in step Sv1904, the fluctuation pattern set in step Sv1905, and the various performances obtained in step Sv1906 and step Sv1907 in the current game round is processed. Set the information to the production command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sv1909, and the production command is sent to the display side MPU 102. The display side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the performance content corresponding to the received performance command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sv1909, the process advances to step Sv1910.

In step Sv1910, update processing at the start of fluctuation is executed. The update process at the start of variation is a process for updating the pending display in the first pending display area Ds1 or the second pending display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. Details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later. After executing step Sv1910, the present game performance setting process is ended.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be explained. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 542: Sv1903) of the game round effect setting process.

FIG. 543 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process. In step Sv2001, the random number RN for the production pattern is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound and light side RAM 94. After that, the process advances to step Sv2002.

In step Sv2002, processing for specifying a production pattern table is executed. The effect pattern table is three-dimensional tabular data whose data elements are a pattern of effects to be executed in a game round, a variation time, and a random number RN for effect patterns. The performance pattern table storage area 93a of the ROM 93 stores various types of performance pattern tables corresponding to the presence or absence of a jackpot, the presence or absence of time saving, and the presence or absence of a reach. In step Sv2002, one effect pattern table is specified from these effect pattern tables. Specifically, based on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the presence or absence of time saving, the type of jackpot, and the presence or absence of a reach, which are grasped in step Sv1902 of the game performance setting process (FIG. 542), the performance pattern table storage area of the ROM 93 is stored. One of the performance pattern tables 93a is specified. After executing step Sv2002, the process advances to step Sv2003.

In step Sv2003, the performance pattern table specified in Sv2002 is referred to, and the fluctuation time grasped in step Sv1902 of the game round performance setting process (FIG. 542) and the value of the random number RN for the current performance pattern obtained in step Sv2001 are determined. To obtain a performance pattern corresponding to After executing step Sv2003, the process advances to step Sv2004.

In step Sv2004, the effect pattern acquired in step Sv2003 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Sv2004, this effect pattern setting process is ended.

<Update process when fluctuation starts>
Next, the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game play performance setting process (FIG. 542: Sv1910).

Figure 544 is a flowchart showing the update process at the start of fluctuation. In step Sv2101, it is determined whether the currently received fluctuation command relates to pending information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting hole 33. In step Sv2101, if it is determined that the currently received fluctuation command relates to pending information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting hole 33 (Sv2101: YES), it proceeds to step Sv2102 and updates the information in the first pending number counter area of the sound/light side RAM 94 so that the number stored in the first pending number counter area is decremented by one. Then it proceeds to step Sv2104.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv2101 that the currently received variation command does not relate to the reserved information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 (Sv2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv2103, where the information in the second reserved number counter area of the sound/light side RAM 94 is updated so that the number stored in the second reserved number counter area is decremented by one. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv2104.

In step Sv2104, the information in the total reserved number counter area of the sound/light side RAM 94 is updated so that the total reserved number stored in the total reserved number counter area is decremented by 1. After that, the update process at the start of the fluctuation is terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main process that is executed when a command is received from the audio emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power is turned on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the contents of the command received from the audio emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be explained.

Figure 545 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main processing is executed when the power is turned on, and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing is described below.

In step Sv2201, the initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized, and the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings required for initialization are performed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv2202.

In step Sv2202, the interrupt permission setting is executed. Once the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main processing executes an infinite loop process thereafter until the power is cut off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, a description will be given of the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the sound and light emission control device 90.

FIG. 546 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sv2301, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, a V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 547 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt processing is executed when a V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and an image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 is identified, and an instruction is issued to the VDP 105 to draw and display the image.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image when the drawing process or display process of the image is not completed, so that it is possible to prevent the start of drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area where the image information being displayed is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt process are described below.

In step Sv2401, command response processing is executed. In the command response processing, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (Fig. 546) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a performance command is stored, control of the drawing and display of the image is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

If a production operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the production operation is executed. Image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

Note that in the command correspondence processing (Sv2401), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, and therefore there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the production is set by the audio emission control device 90 and the production is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the production are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the performance mode such as a preview performance or a stop symbol set by the sound emission control device 90, and display a performance image according to the mode. Drawing of images can be controlled so that the device 41 displays them.

In step Sv2402, a display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the contents of one frame of image to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 are specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which has been set by the command response process (Sv2401) or the like. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv2403.

In step Sv2403, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the contents of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, as specified by the display setting processing (Sv2402), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, rotation angle, etc., are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step Sv2404.

In step Sv2404, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing processing, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each character, which were determined by the task processing (Sv2403), are sent to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on this information, and transmits the image data to the pattern display device 41 together with a drive signal so that the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt processing is displayed on the pattern display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sv2405, where other processing is executed, and the V interrupt processing is terminated. Above, an example of specific control for executing various processing including the big win presentation in the pachinko machine 10 has been described.

<<11-7>>Action and Effects:
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the normal time when the support mode is the low frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the chance eye effect image is displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of play times for the special 1 reservation as a notice effect for the special 1 reservation. In this normal time, the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric role opening lottery is executed, and when the electric role short opening is won, the electric role 34a is opened for a short time. As a result, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 34, a specific number of play times for the special 2 reservation that is less than the upper limit number (4) of the special 2 reservation is executed, and the chance eye effect image is displayed in the play times. Furthermore, the chance eye effect image is displayed in the play times for the special 1 reservation that are executed consecutively after the end of the play times in which the specific number of chance eye effect images are executed. For this reason, in the normal state, when there is reserved information in the special 1 reservation that is scheduled to perform a performance with a high expectation of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, a chance eye performance image is displayed to inform the player that there is a possibility that the reserved information with a high expectation of winning the jackpot is present in the special 1 reservation. Also, as described above, when a specific number of times of play for the special 2 reservation that is less than the upper limit number (4) of the special 2 reservation is executed during the notice performance, the chance eye performance image is displayed in the play time as well, so that the special 2 reservation can be consumed without interrupting the flow of the notice performance and without discomfort.

On the other hand, if a special 2 reserve exists and a configuration is made in which a chance eye effect image is always displayed in the special 2 reserve, the chance eye effect image will be unnecessarily repeated, violating the relationship between the number of times the preview effect appears and the effects scheduled to be executed, and there is a risk of the reliability of the preview effect decreasing. In contrast, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the result of the second judgment is negative in a play round for the special 1 reserve, the chance eye effect image is switched to an effect image of the same color as the pattern, so that it is possible to prevent the chance eye effect image from appearing excessively when the result of the second judgment is negative. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the reliability of the preview effect and increase the interest of the game.

Specifically, in case 1 (see Fig. 513 and Fig. 514) where the winning lottery result for special 1 reserve 2 is a miss and a normal reach occurs, first, the game round U11 for special 1 reserve 1 is executed, and in that game round U11, a premonition notice performance (first time) in which a chance eye and a bubble BL appear is executed. In the middle of game round U11, if the electric short opening is won in the electric role opening lottery and a game ball enters the second starting hole 34 in the middle of game round U11 for special 1 reserve 1, game round V11 for special 2 reserve 1 obtained by the ball entering is executed following game round U11, and in that game round V11, a performance in which a chance eye performance for continuing special 1 consecutive performance and a bubble BL appear is executed. These performances are the second premonition notice performances. In case 1, if a game turn for the special 2 reserve is executed in the middle of the premonition preview performance, the chance eye performance image is displayed even during the game turn for the special 2 reserve, so that the flow of the preview performance is not interrupted and the special 2 reserve can be consumed without any discomfort.

In case 2 (see Fig. 515 and Fig. 516) where the winning lottery result for special 1 reserve 4 is a miss and a super reach occurs, first, the game round U21 for special 1 reserve 1 is executed, and in the game round U21, a premonition notice performance (first time) in which a chance eye and a bubble BL appear is executed. Next, the game round U22 for special 1 reserve 2 is executed, and in the game round U22, a premonition notice performance (second time) in which a chance eye and a bubble BL appear is executed. If a game ball enters the second start hole 34 during the game round U22 for special 1 reserve 2, the game round V21 for special 2 reserve 1 obtained by the ball entering is executed following the game round U21, and in the game round V21, a stop display β12, which is a same-color pattern performance for continuing the special 1 continuous performance, is executed. The color of the same pattern in the same color pattern effect for continuing the special 1 consecutive effects is green, and the scheduled effect (see FIG. 517) associated with this green color is configured to match the scheduled effect (see FIG. 509) associated with the number of occurrences of the premonition notice effect including the chance eye executed before the play time V21 for the special 2 reserve 1. After the play time V21 for the special 2 reserve 1 ends, the play time U23 for the special 1 reserve 3 is executed, and in the play time U23, a premonition notice effect (third time) in which the chance eye and bubble BL appear is executed. Next, the play time U24 for the special 1 reserve 4 is executed, and in the play time U24, a super reach effect and a stop display corresponding to a miss are displayed.

In case 2, two premonition prediction effects including a chance eye are displayed, followed by a green effect of the same color, followed by one premonition prediction effect including a chance eye (a total of three), and finally a super reach that results in a miss. When the player sees this series of effects, he or she recognizes that the planned effect is a normal reach or higher because two premonition prediction effects including a chance eye have appeared, and confirms again that the planned effect is a normal reach or higher because the color of the same color of the pattern has turned green, and then recognizes that the planned effect is a super reach or higher because the third premonition prediction effect including a chance eye has appeared, and finally learns that the super reach has resulted in a miss. As a result, the player does not feel any discomfort, and his or her confidence in the prediction effects is increased.

On the other hand, in Comparative Example 1 shown in FIG. 519, after the foreshadowing performance including the chance appearance appears four times in a row, the performance that misses with a super reach is executed. This series of performances violates the relationship between the number of appearances of the premonitory performances and the scheduled performance shown in FIG. 509, and will give a sense of discomfort to the player who remembers this relationship. More specifically, an experienced player who recognized that a foreshadowing performance including a chance had appeared four times in a row would say, ``In this pachinko machine 10, a foreshadowing performance including a chance has appeared four times in a row. In this case, you will definitely win the jackpot after the special reach effect is executed, so in this game round U24, you will definitely win the jackpot after the special reach effect is executed.'' I will be looking forward to the results of game round U24. However, in Comparative Example 1, although the foreshadowing performance including the chance eye appeared four times in a row, the super reach performance was executed instead of the special reach performance in game round U24, and furthermore, the lottery result was a loss. turn into. Therefore, the player's expectations are disappointed, and he/she ends up feeling that ``I cannot trust the performance of this Pachinko machine 10.'' As a result, according to Comparative Example 1, the reliability of the preview performance is reduced.

On the other hand, as explained above, with the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the player does not feel any discomfort from the series of effects, which increases the reliability of the preview effects.

According to case 2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the same color performance with the same symbol for special 1 continuous performance continuation is displayed in the game round V21 for special 2 pending 1, but as a modification to this, special In game round V21 for 2 hold 1, neither the chance eye performance for special 1 continuous performance continuation nor the same color performance for special 1 continuous performance are displayed, and after the end of game round V21 for special 2 hold 1. It may also be configured to display a symbol same color performance for continuing special 1 continuous performance in the game round U23 for special 1 reservation 3 to be executed. According to this modification, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory short release is won in the electric accessory opening lottery in normal times and the game round regarding special 2 reservation is executed, the corresponding In the game round of special 1 hold that is executed consecutively after the end of the game round of special 2 hold, you can reconfirm the expectation level of jackpot winning such as reach effect due to continuous hold effect, and also Since the player does not feel any discomfort with the performance, the reliability of the preview performance can be increased.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in a predetermined number of play times for the special 1 reservation, a bubble effect image included in the premonition notice effect is displayed. For this reason, when there is reserved information in the special 1 reservation that is scheduled to perform a performance with a high expectation of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, a bubble effect image report can be used to notify the player that there is a possibility that the reserved information with a high expectation of winning a jackpot is present in the special 1 reservation. In addition, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the normal state in which the support mode is the low frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the low probability mode, a specific game state can occur in which a specific number of play times for the special 2 reservation that is equal to or greater than the upper limit number (4 pieces) of the special 2 reservation can be executed. Then, the image SH of the shell is displayed during the occurrence of the specific game state. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute a play time for the special 2 reservation, and by displaying the image SH of the shell in this long play time for the special 2 reservation, the interest of the player can be improved. On the other hand, since the play times for the special 2 reservation are long, when the play times for the special 2 reservation are finished, there is a risk that some players will completely forget that the advance notice performance appeared in the predetermined number of play times for the special 1 reservation that was executed before the play times for the special 2 reservation started. Furthermore, by displaying the shell image SH in the play times for the special 2 reservation, it becomes even easier to forget that the advance notice performance appeared in the predetermined number of play times for the special 1 reservation. In contrast, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a specific game image is displayed and a play time for the special 2 reservation is executed, the capture image including the bubble performance image that appeared in the predetermined number of play times for the special 1 reservation is continuously displayed, so that the player is prevented from forgetting that the advance notice performance appeared and can be reminded that the advance notice performance for the special 1 reservation is continuing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Specifically, in the normal state, four special 1 reserves from special 1 reserve 1 to special 1 reserve 4 are stored, and in case 3 (see Fig. 520 and Fig. 521) in which the winning lottery result in special 1 reserve 4 is a miss and a super reach occurs, if the electric role long opening is won in the electric role opening lottery performed by the game ball passing through the through gates 35a and 35b in the middle of the game round U32 for special 1 reserve 2 (time t31), the electric role 34a is opened for a long time (5 seconds). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, all or part of the image of the premonition notice performance executed in the game round U32 for special 1 reserve 2 executed immediately before the game rounds V31 to V35 for special 2 reserve is captured (saved), and a reduced image of the captured image (still image) is displayed as a special 2 exclusive performance in the special 2 exclusive performance display area SA. Additionally, during play times V31-V35 for the special 2 reservation, an image of a shell SH is displayed, and as play times V31-V35 for the special 2 reservation progress, the two shells open up little by little.

Now, let us consider a configuration in case 3 where the special 2 exclusive performance is not executed in each play time V31 to V35 for the special 2 reservation. If this configuration is taken as comparative example 2, the following problem occurs in this comparative example 2. There are a maximum of five play times executed based on the special 2 reservation, and the time spent on the five play times is usually long (for example, several minutes). In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a special performance using the image SH of a shell is executed, and the play time is longer. For this reason, in comparative example 2, when the continuous reserved performance of the special 1 reservation is interrupted due to the execution of a play time for the special 2 reservation, some players may completely forget that a premonition notice performance had appeared in the play time of the special 1 reservation that had been executed up to that point.

In contrast, according to case 3 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in each play round V31 to V35 for the special 2 reserve, a captured image of all or part of the premonition notice effect that appeared in the play round for the special 1 reserve executed immediately before switching to the play round for the special 2 reserve continues to be displayed as a special 2-only effect, preventing the player from forgetting that the premonition notice effect had appeared and reminding the player that the continuous hold effect for the special 1 reserve is continuing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

According to case 3 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the captured image is displayed in all of the play times V31 to V35 for the special 2 reservation, but as a modified example, the captured image may be displayed only in the last play time (play time V35 in case 3) among the play times V31 to V35 for the special 2 reservation. Furthermore, the captured image may not be displayed in each play time V31 to V35 for the special 2 reservation, but may be displayed in the play time for the special 1 reservation (play time U33 in case 3) that is executed consecutively after the end of each play time V31 to V35 for the special 2 reservation. According to these modified examples, as with the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the electric role long opening is won in the electric role opening lottery during normal times when the special 1 reservation continuous reserved performance is being executed, and the number of times that the special 2 reservation play is executed is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of the special 2 reservation, the special 1 reservation play that is executed consecutively after the special 2 reservation play ends can remind the player that the special 1 reservation continuous reserved performance is continuing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<<11-8>> Modification of the eleventh embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as in the above embodiment will be omitted.

《11-8-1》Variation 1:
As a modification of the eleventh embodiment, the display on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 may be configured to have a plurality of layer structures. Specifically, i) a background layer for displaying the background, and ii) a main display area MA arranged above (front side) of the background layer and for displaying a combination of symbols, and a first starting gate holding area. A pattern layer for displaying a storage area Ds1, a storage extinguishing area Dm, and a second starting port storage area Ds2 (see FIG. 493); It may be performed using a layer structure having at least an upper layer for displaying a special 2 special effect, a charge effect (female character WM), a shellfish image SH, etc. According to this configuration, since drawing can be controlled independently for each layer, control can be simplified.

11-8-2 Variation 2:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modified example, when displaying the same-color pattern effect for the continuation of the special 1 consecutive performance, the number of occurrences of the premonition notice effect executed in the game for the special 1 reservation executed immediately before the game for the special 2 reservation is specified, and the same-color pattern effect for the continuation of the special 1 consecutive performance is displayed with a color of the same pattern that is associated with an expectation level equal to the expectation level of winning a jackpot such as a reach effect that is associated with the specified number of occurrences (hereinafter simply referred to as the expectation level of the premonition notice effect). In contrast, as a modified example, when displaying the same-color pattern effect for the continuation of the special 1 consecutive performance, even if a color of the same pattern (hereinafter referred to as the color of high expectation) that is associated with an expectation level higher than the expectation level of the premonition notice effect executed in the game for the special 1 reservation executed immediately before the game for the special 2 reservation is displayed, the same-color pattern effect for the continuation of the special 1 consecutive performance may be displayed with the color of the high expectation level as long as the execution schedule corresponding to the color of the same pattern does not exceed the execution schedule in the special 1 reservation that has been triggered. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 512, since the premonition notice performance in the game of the special 1 reservation executed immediately before the game of the special 2 reservation is the second time, the expectation is normal reach, so it may be configured to display a special 1 continuous performance continuation pattern of the same color, which is red, corresponding to a super reach, which is higher than the normal reach. That is, it may be configured to display a combination of patterns showing the numbers 4, 5, and 6, which are red patterns. According to this configuration, since the execution schedule performance in the special 1 reservation 4 that was triggered is a super reach, even if the same color red pattern appears in the game V21 of the special 2 reservation 1, the player will not feel strange, and even if the third premonition notice performance appears in the game U23 of the special 1 reservation 3, the player will not feel strange.

《11-8-3》Variation 3:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modifications, if the performance scheduled to be executed for the special 1 hold that was the trigger has a sufficiently high expectation of winning a jackpot, for example, a special reach, the special 1 continuous performance continuation symbol It is also possible to prepare a special reach-only picture (for example, a specific stage), which is different from the same-color presentation, and to display this picture in the game round for the special 2 hold. Furthermore, as another modification, a configuration is adopted in which no advance notice performance is performed (in other words, no performance is performed) in the game round for special 2 reservation, and the performance is continued after the end of the game round for special 2 reservation. It may be configured to cancel the execution of the special 1 pending continuous performance in the game round regarding the special 1 pending that is being executed.

《11-8-4》Variation 4:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modifications, bubbles are displayed as part of the omen preview performance, but instead of bubbles, other patterns such as flower petals, confetti, jellyfish, and butterflies may be displayed. good. Furthermore, instead of a floating pattern, a non-moving pattern, a specific background, a stage, a scene, etc. may be displayed. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the above embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the chance is displayed in a stopped state, and the bubble BL appears during the stopped display, which is considered to be an omen notice performance. The combination may be used as a premonitory preview performance, such as a performance in which bubbles BL only appear while the symbols are stopped and displayed, without creating a chance. Even in this configuration, the bubble BL can be replaced with another picture, a specific background, stage, or scene, as described above.

《11-8-5》Variation 5:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modified examples, the chance eye appears as a premonitory performance in which the scheduled performance is determined by the number of times it appears. On the other hand, as a modified example, the combination of symbols may be configured so that a specific character (a symbol in the shape of a real or imaginary person, animal, etc.) appears instead of a chance. The scheduled performance will be determined by the number of times a particular character appears. Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment and its modified examples, the same color pattern appears as a preview effect in which the planned execution effect is determined regardless of the number of appearances. On the other hand, as a modified example, the combination of symbols may not be a combination of symbols of the same color, but may be configured to perform an effect in which a specific background zone appears. The scheduled performance will be determined by the color (or tone) of a specific background zone. Alternatively, a specific character may appear as a preview performance whose scheduled performance is determined regardless of the number of appearances.

11-8-6 Variation 6:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modified example, it is possible to display an effect image in which the scheduled effect is determined by the number of appearances in each of the game times for the special 1 reservation that is performed a predetermined number of times during normal times, the game times for the special 2 reservation that is preferentially performed during the game times for the special 1 reservation, and the game times for the special 1 reservation that is performed consecutively after the end of the game times for the special 2 reservation, but the effect image in which the scheduled effect is determined by the number of appearances does not necessarily have to be the same image, and may be replaced with an image of the same type that does not completely match. For example, a character image that can be specified by the same attribute, such as a seafood character image, a female character image, or a specific companion character image, may be used as a specific character image in which the scheduled effect is determined by the number of appearances.

《11-8-7》Variation 7:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modified examples, the specific performance image of the chance is displayed by the hold continuous performance process during normal times when the support mode is the low frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the low probability mode. On the other hand, as a modified example, a specific effect image may appear at any time during normal times, the support mode is a low frequency support mode, the lottery mode is a low probability mode, and a specific A specific effect image may be displayed only when a condition is met (hereinafter referred to as a specific normal time). As the above-mentioned specific conditions, the following i) to v) etc. can be adopted.
i) After a specific performance: After a specific reach performance, etc. is executed, etc.
ii) After a specific gaming state: After winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, after a high-precision, high-support state where the support mode is high-frequency support mode and the lottery mode is high-probability mode ends, or after the support mode is high-frequency support mode After the high support state that is support mode ends, etc.
iii) After a specific time: After a specific time has passed from a specific timing.
iv) After a specific number of games: After a specific number of games have passed from a specific timing.
v) After winning a specific lottery: After the lottery result of a specific lottery becomes a winner.
According to this modification, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the series of performances based on the continuous pending performances does not give any sense of discomfort to the player, so that the reliability of the preview performances is increased. be able to.

11-8-8 Variation 8:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modified example, when starting the game round V11 for the special 2 reserve 1, a first judgment is made as to which of the results of the electric role opening lottery that triggered the change of the special 2 reserve is, but this first judgment may be made based on the number of special 2 reserves, rather than based on the result of the electric role opening lottery. Specifically, when the number of special 2 reserves is two or less, the lottery result of the electric role opening lottery is deemed to be short electric role opening, and a chance eye performance for the continuation of the special 1 consecutive performance or a same color performance for the continuation of the special 1 consecutive performance is displayed in the game round for the special 2 reserve, and when the number of special 2 reserves is more than two, the lottery result of the electric role opening lottery is deemed to be long electric role opening, and a special 2 exclusive performance is displayed in the game round for the special 2 reserve. With this configuration, it is possible to easily perform a performance according to the number of times the game round for the special 2 reserve is executed.

《11-8-9》Variation 9:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modified examples, when starting the game round for special 2 hold that has been accumulated in the middle of the game round for special 1 hold by the special 2 hold effect processing, the game time for special 1 hold is When the performance of the game round regarding the special 2 hold stored in the middle is a performance including a chance performance for continuing the special 1 continuous performance, a series of continuous hold performances up to the performance regarding the special 1 hold that became the trigger. The second determination was made as to whether the flow matched the relationship between the number of appearances of the precursor preview performance and the scheduled execution performance (see FIG. 509). On the other hand, as a modified example, the above-mentioned second determination is carried out not only when starting a game round for special 2 reservation that has been accumulated in the middle of a game round for special 1 reservation, but also when starting the game for special 2 reservation. It may be configured to be performed at the start of each game round from the game round to the game round for the special 1 hold that triggered the preview performance. This configuration is such that in case 2 (see FIGS. 515 and 516) described earlier, a chance effect for continuing special 1 consecutive performance is displayed in game round V21 for special 2 pending 1, and The chance effect for continuing special 1 continuous performance, which was scheduled to be executed in game round U23 for special 1 pending 3 executed after the end of game round V21, is switched to the same color performance for special 1 continuous performance and displayed. The present invention can also be applied to modified examples.

《11-8-10》Variation 10:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modifications, when starting a game round for Toku 2 reservation that was accumulated in the middle of a game round for Toku 1 reservation, the Toku 2 reserve accumulated during the game round for Toku 1 reservation is When the performance of the game round regarding the hold is a performance that includes a special 1 continuous performance continuation chance performance, the series of continuous hold performances up to the performance regarding the special 1 hold that became the trigger will be the same as the foreshadowing performance. A second judgment is made to determine whether or not the relationship between the number of appearances and the performance scheduled to be performed (see Figure 509) is consistent, and if the judgment result of the second judgment is negative, the special 1 continuous performance scheduled to be performed is continued. The special chance effect was switched to the same color as the symbol for continuation of special 1 continuous effect. On the other hand, as a modified example, in the game round for special 2 reservation stored in the middle of the game round for special 1 reservation, the chance performance for continuing special 1 continuous performance is originally displayed, and the special 2 When starting the execution of a game round regarding suspension, if a special 1 consecutive performance continuation chance performance is displayed in the relevant game round, the number of times the precursor notice performance appears until the performance of the relevant game round ends is set as the trigger. A new second judgment (hereinafter referred to as a new second judgment) is made to determine whether or not it matches the number of appearances of the precursor notice performance corresponding to the scheduled execution performance for the special 1 suspension that has become a new second judgment. When the judgment result is negative, the chance performance for continuing special 1 continuous performance scheduled to be executed in the game round for special 2 reservation may be switched to the same color performance with the same symbol for special 1 continuous performance and displayed. In this case, in each game round of the special 1 hold that is executed consecutively after the end of the game round for the special 2 hold, the chance effect is originally displayed, and each game round of the special 1 hold is displayed. When starting the execution, if a chance effect is displayed in the relevant game round, the number of times the precursor notice effect appears until the end of the relevant game time corresponds to the execution scheduled performance for the special 1 hold that became the trigger. A new second judgment is made to determine whether or not it matches the number of appearances of the foreshadowing effect, and if the judgment result of the new second judgment is negative, the chance effect that is scheduled to be executed in the game round for special 1 pending. The configuration is such that the display is switched to the same color display. Hereinafter, a detailed explanation will be given with specific examples.

FIG. 548 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing how special 1 is reserved in modification 10. As shown in the figure, it is assumed that four special 1 reservations from special 1 reservation 1 to special 1 reservation 4 are stored, and in special 1 reservation 4, the winning lottery result is a loss and it is determined that a super reach will occur. . The audio emission control device 90 executes the special 1 pending continuous performance process using the reception of the hold command from the main control device 60 for the special 1 pending 4 for which it is determined that this super reach occurs.

FIG. 549 is a time chart illustrating the performance for special 1 hold executed by the special 1 hold continuous performance process and the performance for special 2 hold performed by the special 2 hold effect process in modification 10. . As shown in the figure, first, a game round U41 for special 1 reservation 1 is executed by special 1 reservation continuous performance processing. The game round U41 for special 1 reservation 1 is the same as the game time U21 for special 1 reservation 1 explained with reference to FIG. In the game round U41 for special 1 reservation 1, first, the variable display A11 is executed. Subsequently, a stop display A12 in which a chance number appears is executed. Subsequently, bubble appearance effect A13 is executed. At the end of the bubble appearance effect A13, the game round U41 for special 1 pending 1 ends. The stop display A12 and the bubble appearance effect A13 constitute an omen preview effect (first time).

In the middle of game round U41 for special 1 reserve 1 (time t41), a game ball passes through through gates 35a and 35b, and an electric short release is selected in the electric device release lottery, the electric device 34a opens for only 0.6 seconds, and one game ball enters second start hole 34. In this case, after game round U41 for special 1 reserve 1 ends (time t42), game round V41 for special 2 reserve 1, which was stored based on the game ball entering second start hole 34, begins to be executed. Game round V41 for special 2 reserve 1 is executed by special 2 reserve performance processing by sound and light emission control device 90.

According to the special 2 reserve effect processing, when starting the game round V41 for the special 2 reserve 1, a first judgment is made as to which is the result of the electric role opening lottery that triggered the execution of the change of the special 2 reserve, and if the first judgment determines that the lottery result of the electric role opening lottery is the short electric role opening, the new second judgment described above is made. Then, if the judgment result of the new second judgment is positive, a chance eye effect for continuing the special 1 consecutive performance is displayed in the game round V41 for the special 2 reserve 1. That is, if the result of the lottery for opening the electric role that triggered the change of the special 2 reserve was a short electric role opening, and the performance for the special 2 reserve that was accumulated during the play of the special 1 reserve is a performance including a chance eye performance for continuing the special 1 consecutive performance, the new second judgment is whether or not the number of occurrences of the premonition notice performance until the performance of the play ends (here, the second time) is consistent with the number of occurrences of the premonition notice performance corresponding to the performance scheduled to be executed for the triggered special 1 reserve (here, a miss from the super reach). Here, since the judgment result of the new second judgment is positive, the chance eye performance for continuing the special 1 consecutive performance scheduled to be executed is displayed.

After the end of game round V41 for special 2 reserve 1 (time t43), game round U42 for special 1 reserve 2 is executed by the special 1 reserve continuous performance process. When game round U42 begins to be executed, a new second judgment is made. Even if a chance eye performance is executed in game round U42, it is the third premonition notice performance, and the number of occurrences of this third time is consistent with the number of occurrences of the premonition notice performance corresponding to the performance scheduled to be executed for the triggered special 1 reserve (in this case, a miss from the super reach), so the judgment result of the new second judgment here is also positive. For this reason, a chance eye performance is displayed in game round U42 for special 1 reserve 2.

After the end of the game round U42 for the special 1 reservation 2 (time t44), the game round U43 for the special 1 reservation 3 is executed. In addition, when the game round U43 starts to be executed, a new second judgment is performed. If the chance eye effect is executed in the game round U43, it will be the fourth premonition notice effect, and the number of occurrences, which is the fourth, violates the number of occurrences of the premonition notice effect corresponding to the scheduled execution effect (here, the miss from the super reach) for the triggered special 1 reservation. When the number of occurrences of the premonition notice effect becomes the fourth, a jackpot win from the special reach is confirmed as the scheduled execution effect, and it violates the miss from the super reach, which is the scheduled execution effect for the triggered special 1 reservation. Therefore, the judgment result of the new second judgment is negative, and the chance eye effect scheduled to be executed in the game round U43 for the special 1 reservation 3 is switched to the same color pattern effect and displayed. In this case, the color of the same color pattern effect is the color corresponding to the number of occurrences of the chance eye effect executed before the start of the game round U43 for the special 1 reservation 3. Specifically, the chance eye effect appears three times, so the color of the same symbol is red.

After the game round U43 for the special 1 hold 3 ends (time t45), the game round U44 for the special 1 hold 4 is executed. The game time U44 for special 1 reservation 4 is the same as the game time U24 for special 1 reservation 4 explained with reference to FIG.

According to this modification 10, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role short release is won in the electric role opening lottery in normal times and the game round regarding special 2 reservation is executed, In the game round of special 1 hold that is executed consecutively after the end of the game round of special 2 hold, you can reconfirm the expectation level of jackpot winning such as reach effect due to continuous hold effect, and also, Since the player does not feel any discomfort with the series of presentations, it is possible to increase the reliability of the preview presentation.

<<11-8-11>> Variation 11:
In the modified example 10 of the eleventh embodiment, when the scheduled chance eye performance is switched to the same color pattern performance and displayed, the same color pattern corresponding to the scheduled performance corresponding to the number of chance eye appearances is displayed. In contrast, as a modified example, when the scheduled chance eye performance is switched to the same color pattern performance and displayed, the same color pattern of a color with a higher expectation of winning a jackpot compared to the scheduled performance corresponding to the number of chance eye appearances may be displayed. A specific example will be described in detail below.

FIG. 550 is a time chart illustrating the performance for the special 1 hold executed by the special 1 hold continuous performance process and the performance for the special 2 hold performed by the special 2 hold effect process in modification 11. . In modification example 11, four special 1 reservations from special 1 reservation 1 to special 1 reservation 4 are stored, and in special 1 reservation 4, it is determined that the winning lottery result is a jackpot win and a special reach occurs. do.

In this modified example 11, in the middle of the game round U41 for the special 1 reservation 1 (time t51), the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b, and the electric role short opening is won in the electric role opening lottery, the electric role 34a opens for only 0.6 seconds, and one game ball enters the second start port 34. In this case, after the game round U41 for the special 1 reservation 1 ends (time t52), the game round V41 for the special 2 reservation 1 stored based on the game ball entering the second start port 34 is executed. In addition, when starting to execute the game round V41, a first judgment is made as to which is the lottery result of the electric role opening lottery that triggered the execution of the special 2 reservation, and if the first judgment determines that the lottery result of the electric role opening lottery is the electric role short opening, a third judgment is made. In the third judgment, the scheduled performance corresponding to the number of appearances of the chance eye performance executed before the start of the game round V41 is compared with the scheduled performance for the special 1 reservation that was triggered (hereinafter referred to as the second scheduled performance). If the third judgment determines that the expectation of the first scheduled performance is equal to or lower than the expectation of the second scheduled performance, the performance to be executed is determined by lottery (hereinafter referred to as performance lottery) between the first scheduled performance and the second scheduled performance. That is, the performance to be executed is determined by lottery from among the chance eye performance, the same color pattern performance with the same expectation as the expectation when the already executed chance eye performance is displayed, and the same color pattern performance with the higher expectation than the expectation when the already executed chance eye performance is displayed. Here, it is assumed that the game round V41 for the special 2 reservation 1, which is the same as in the modified example 10, is executed as a result of the performance lottery.

Next, after the end of game round V41 for special 2 reserve 1 (time t53), game round U42 for special 1 reserve 2 is executed. When game round U42 starts to be executed, the above-mentioned third judgment is executed, and if this third judgment determines that the expected degree of the first scheduled execution of the performance is equal to or lower than the expected degree of the second scheduled execution of the performance, the above-mentioned performance lottery is performed. As a result of the performance lottery, game round U42 for special 1 reserve 2 is executed, the same as in variant example 10.

Next, after the end of the game round U42 for the special 1 reservation 2 (time t54), the game round U43 for the special 1 reservation 3 is executed. When the game round U43 starts, the third judgment is executed, and if the third judgment determines that the expectation of the first scheduled execution effect is equal to or lower than the expectation of the second scheduled execution effect, the above-mentioned effect lottery is executed. As a result of the effect lottery, the scheduled chance eye effect in the game round U43 for the special 1 reservation 3 is switched to and displayed as a same-color pattern effect with a higher expectation than the expectation of the chance eye effect being executed. Specifically, since the chance eye effect appears three times, a gold-colored same-color pattern effect with a higher expectation than the red-colored effect corresponding to three times is displayed. Since the scheduled execution effect for the triggered special 1 reservation is a guaranteed jackpot from the special reach, the preview effect will not fail even if the color of the same-color pattern effect is gold.

After the end of play round U43 for special 1 reserve 3 (time t55), play round U44 for special 1 reserve 4 is executed. In play round U44 for special 1 reserve 4, first, variable display I11 is executed. Then, special reach performance I12 is executed. Then, stop display I13 is executed, which corresponds to the result of the winning lottery being a jackpot. With the end of stop display I13, play round U44 for special 1 reserve 4 ends.

According to this variant 11, just like the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a player wins the short electric role opening in the electric role opening lottery during normal play and a round of play for the special 2 reserve is played, the player can check again the likelihood of winning a jackpot, such as a reach effect due to the consecutive reserve effects, in the round of play for the special 1 reserve that is played consecutively after the round of play for the special 2 reserve is finished, and furthermore, since the player does not feel any discomfort from the series of effects, the reliability of the preview effects can be increased.

《11-8-12》Variation 12:
In the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, and may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel) or cast iron. , cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, or other metals. In the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the inner frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, etc. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, or other metals. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame against the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function that locks the front door frame against the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, in addition to adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a front door frame are provided. A configuration may also be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened is provided separately. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, during the normal time in the predetermined gaming state, an image of a chance included in the omen notice performance is displayed as a specific performance image consecutively for a predetermined number of game times regarding special 1 pending. It was configured to display. On the other hand, as a modified example, the specific effect image may be a specific character that can be counted as the number of appearances of the premonitory effect, or may be a background image that is displayed during normal times. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the rotation axis for rotating the inner frame relative to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front, but this rotation axis is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. You may adopt the structure provided. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the rotation axis for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front, but this rotation axis is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. You may adopt the configuration provided in . Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the game board included in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, etc. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the pachinko machine has a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but a configuration may be adopted in which the lower tray is omitted and only the upper tray is provided. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the electric accessory 34a is in the open state and the game ball enters the second starting port 34, and the specific number of times that is less than the upper limit number of special 2 reservations is determined. In the game round for special 2 hold, the above-mentioned specific effect image was displayed. On the other hand, as a modified example, the special 2 reservation (hereinafter referred to as the remaining special 2 reservation) stored in the high support state is executed after the support mode shifts from the high support state where the support mode is the high frequency support mode to the normal state. The specific effect image may be displayed in the game round for the game (call). In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the specific effect image is displayed in the game round for special 1 hold that is executed consecutively after the end of the game round for special 2 hold for the specific number of times. Ta. On the other hand, as a modified example, the specific effect image may be displayed in the game round for special 1 reservation that is executed continuously after the game round for remaining special 2 reservation ends. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided in the left side in front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may also be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations can be adopted as the firing means capable of firing the game ball. For example, a configuration that fires the game ball using elastic force such as a spring can be used. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the game balls are launched using wind pressure when compressed gas is spouted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, when the operating handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, approximately 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 game balls (for example, 60 shots) are fired per minute, or the configuration may be such that more than 100 game balls (for example, 200 balls) are fired per minute. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping a lever. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, when the specific condition that the judgment result of the second judgment described above is negative in the game round regarding special 1 reservation is satisfied, the predetermined effect image is Special 1 The specific effect image is switched to the same color effect with the same pattern for continuous effect. On the other hand, as a modified example, when it is established that the reach effect as a specific condition is executed in the special 1 hold that is executed continuously after the game round of the remaining special 2 hold is completed, the specific effect It can also be used as a configuration in which an image is switched to a background image during reach performance as a predetermined effect image, or a configuration in which background image A as a specific effect image is switched to background image B as a predetermined effect image when a condition for switching the background image is satisfied. good. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification example, a configuration is adopted in which a speaker is provided as a means capable of outputting audio, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones that the player brought to the earphone jack, the player can listen to the sound of the Pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding Pachinko machines. You can enjoy it in minutes. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations may be adopted as the display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, etc. may be used. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be used. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, an LED display device, etc. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, etc. may be employed. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, a specific game state that can generate a specific game state in which a specific number of game times for special 2 reservations that are equal to or greater than the upper limit number of special 2 reservations that can be stored in the normal state can be executed. As the game state generating means, the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is configured to be able to generate a long open state in which the special 2 reservations that are more than the upper limit number of special 2 reservations can be stored. On the other hand, as a modification, the specific gaming state generating means may be set to a state in which the game ball enters the second starting port 34 easily and is played, for example, a high-accuracy, high-support state (so-called rush state). ) may be used. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, pictures, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be used as decorative patterns. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, but may be two or less, or four or more, for example. If a configuration in which there is one pattern row of decorative patterns is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. Further, when a configuration in which there are two or four or more rows of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. For example, a rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the A configuration in which the grand prize opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation axis, and a configuration in which the grand prize opening can be opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can be slid in the front and back direction of the game board. may be adopted. Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the specific game image corresponding to the specific game, which is displayed during the occurrence of the above-described specific gaming state, is an image of a shellfish. On the other hand, as a modification, the specific game image may be a background image displayed in a rush state. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, when displaying a shell image as a specific game image and executing a game round regarding special 2 hold, the omen preview performance including bubbles is captured and obtained. The configuration is such that an image obtained by reducing the captured image is continuously displayed as predetermined suggestion information. On the other hand, as a modification, the display mode of the first hold display part of the main display part may be continuously displayed in the rush state. Furthermore, as a modification of the modification, the first hold on the main display section displayed in the game round for the special 1 hold that was executed immediately before the start of the game round for the special 2 hold that displays a background image in a rush state. A configuration may be adopted in which the display mode of the display unit continues to be displayed in the same state. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each modification example, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, such as a so-called tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory with a pair of movable valves that can be opened left and right, A rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the starting port can be opened by rotating the plate-like member forward about the rotating shaft, front and rear of the game board. It is also possible to employ a configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-like member that is slidable in the direction. In addition, in the above embodiment and each modification, the number of prize balls set for each ball entry hole (starting hole, general winning hole, big winning hole, etc.) is an example, and the number of prize balls set for each ball entering hole is By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications.

《11-8-13》Variation 13:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modifications, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices such as the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100. A configuration including two control devices, such as a device and a sub-control device, may also be used. The sub-control device may be configured to execute various processes executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the eleventh embodiment. Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment and its modifications, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 are not limited to the classification described in the eleventh embodiment; 60, 90, and 100 as long as they can execute the various processes in the eleventh embodiment.

<<12>> Twelfth embodiment:
12-1 Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 551 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter, also referred to as a "pachinko machine") according to a twelfth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 relative to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 relative to the inner frame 13. On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound and light emission control device, and a display control device, are disposed. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed approximately in the center of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination parts are constituted by light emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means serves to enhance the performance effect by lighting up or blinking at each game round played by the pachinko machine 10, when winning a jackpot, when a reach is generated, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed into a box shape with an open top surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls ejected from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed into a box shape with an open top surface. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and by operating the lever 23, the player can switch the outlet 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation section through which a player performs an input operation for a game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

An operating handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "right side"). When the player operates the operating handle 25 (rotating operation), a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the firing of game balls by the game ball firing mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operating handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. Then, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "left side"). When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing strength to the front of the game board, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired to the front of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and also flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can perform what is called a "right-handed hit." Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. Control equipment for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 552 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board that has a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is constructed so that traces of opening and closing remain. For example, a seal is affixed to an openable/closable location, and when the board box is opened, the words "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio/light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The audio/light emission control device 90 controls light-emitting means such as speakers and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands sent from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands sent from the audio/light emission control device 90. The pattern display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays patterns and images for performances.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to launch game balls is input from the main control device 60, the launch control device 80 controls the game ball launch mechanism to launch game balls with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there are several devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a tank rail 55 connected below the tank 54 and having a gently sloping slope so that the game balls flow downstream, a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and a payout device 71 that receives game balls from the case rail 56 and pays out a predetermined number of game balls according to an instruction from the payout control device 70.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the power necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . The ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88 switches between a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10.

Next, we will explain the game board. The game board is removably attached to the front of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 553 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 has a number of openings formed therethrough in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. Game balls that enter the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are guided to the individual openings formed in the game board 30. The game board 30 also has a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 has a special chart unit 37, a general chart unit 38, and a round display section 39.

As shown in the figure, the general winning hole 32 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, ten game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 552).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery to be described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 34. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port 34. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The through gate 35 includes a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to perform a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the passage as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery). As a result of the internal lottery, if an electric role release is won, the electric role accessory 34a shifts to an electric role release state in which it becomes an open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged upstream of the second starting port 34 with respect to the downstream direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after passing through and enters the second starting port 34. It is possible for the ball to enter the starting port 34. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 includes a big winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the big winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big prize opening 36a. When a jackpot is won as a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60 and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state. The opening/closing execution mode is entered when a jackpot is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by a ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and the opening/closing door 36b is in an open state. This is a mode that repeats the closed state and closed state. That is, if a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33, the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the jackpot 36a. Similarly, if a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the big winning port 36a. . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the general winning hole 32, the first starting hole 33, the second starting hole 34, or the variable winning device 36 are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

The game balls that enter each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, and the out opening 43 are separated into individual balls formed on the gaming board 30. It is configured to be guided to the back side of the game board 30 through the opening and to finally merge with a discharge passage provided on the back side of the game board 30. The discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor that detects game balls. By detecting the game balls with the discharge path detection sensor, it is possible to know the number of game balls fired onto the game board 30.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each configured with a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display section 37a is a display section for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed variably or statically based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display section 37a is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. , causes the first symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. When the lottery ends, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop display the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second pattern display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern refers to a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 34. When a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is performed, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a variable second pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a stationary second pattern corresponding to the lottery result.

The time from when the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display section 37a or the second pattern displayed on the second pattern display section 37b starts to when it stops is also called the fluctuation time. Specifically, the time from when the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display section 37a starts to when it stops is also called the first fluctuation time, and the time from when the second pattern displayed on the second pattern display section 37b starts to when it stops is also called the second fluctuation time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first reservation display section 37c and a second reservation display section 37d, which are made of LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are held. The first reservation display section 37c displays the number of reservations at the first starting port 33 by the color or combination of LED lamps to be lit. Further, in this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are held. The second reservation display section 37d displays the number of reservations at the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit.

The general map unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When a lottery to open an electric reel is held triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the general map unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to light up, flash, or display in a predetermined manner. When the lottery to open an electric reel is completed, the general map unit 38 displays in a predetermined manner corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light-emitting display unit in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of rounds of play that will occur in the open/close execution mode, or a display corresponding thereto. A round of play is a game in which the open/close door 36b remains open until either one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined upper limit duration has elapsed, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have entered the variable winning device 36. The number of rounds of play varies depending on the type of jackpot that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of rounds of play when the open/close execution mode is started, and ends when the open/close execution mode ends and a new game round begins.

Note that the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display section 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the drawing process and the drawing results.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged approximately at the center of the gaming area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the symbol display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display section 37a displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs a variable display or a predetermined display of symbols in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. Further, when the second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. conduct. The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display performance triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that is entered when a jackpot is won. . The details of the symbol display device 41 will be explained below.

Figure 554 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns and display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. Figure 554(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. As shown in the figure, patterns showing the numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. Note that as the patterns that are variably displayed, patterns in which each of the numbers 1 to 8 is accompanied by an image of a character or the like may be used.

FIG. 554(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As illustrated, a main display area MA and a sub-area SA located below the main display area MA are displayed on the display surface 41a. Three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols numbered 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A fluctuating display that scrolls upwards is displayed. As shown in FIG. 554(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed in each symbol row in a state where it is stopped on the active line L. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 periodically scroll in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each of the scrolling symbols switches from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the fluctuating display of symbols ends and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols will be placed on the active line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the active line L. The manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned manner, but may vary depending on the number of symbol rows, the number of active lines, the direction of the fluctuating display of symbols in the symbol rows, and the symbols in each symbol row. Various modes can be adopted for displaying the symbols such as numbers.

Here, a "play round" refers to one unit of counting a variable play, which is one play round operation from the start of the variable display of the patterns displayed on the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b (and the variable display of various patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41), until the variable display ends and the stopped display ends, and is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery results of a winning lottery for special information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery results of one winning lottery for one piece of special information for each play round (for each play round operation, for each variable play). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when special information is acquired based on the entry of a game ball into either the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, the segment display is variably displayed in either the first pattern display section 37a or the second pattern display section 37b for each game, and then the segment display is stopped so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when special information is acquired based on the entry of a game ball into either the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, the pattern display device 41 variably displays a predetermined pattern row for each game, and then the pattern row is stopped so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. The time required for one game is also called the unit game time. The unit game time is composed of the variable time, which is the time from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the predetermined lottery result, and the stop time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is stopped.

In the sub area SA located below the main display area MA, holding related information related to holding based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 (hereinafter also referred to as first holding related information), or Hold-related information (hereinafter also referred to as second hold-related information) related to hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is displayed. Specifically, in a gaming state (so-called normal state) in which it is substantially impossible for the game ball to enter the second starting port 34, the first reservation related information is displayed in the sub-area SA. On the other hand, in a gaming state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 34 (during high-frequency support mode, which will be described later), the second reservation related information is displayed in the sub-area SA. The normal state is a state in which the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode. The specific display contents of the first suspension related information and the second suspension related information will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 553, a pair of nails (so-called life nails, navel nails) 42 (42a, 42b) are provided above the first starting port 33. The probability of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 changes depending on the distance between the pair of nails 42a, 42b.

《12-2》Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

Figure 555 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes an audio and light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 is equipped with a main control board 61 which is responsible for the main control of the game. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62 which is composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 is equipped with a CPU (not shown) which executes various control programs, a ROM 63 which records various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 is also equipped with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit which functions as a random number generator. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by other elements. Details of the various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). The input port of the main control board 61 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 and the power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85. The main control board 61 receives a stable 24V DC power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the dispensing control device 70, etc., and supplies power to each device. The power supply device 85 also has a capacitor (not shown), and when a power failure occurs or when the power switch 88 (Figure 552) is turned off, it continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period of time.

Furthermore, various detection sensors 67a to 67e are connected to the input ports of the main control board 61. Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided in various ball entry holes such as the general winning hole 32, the first starting hole 33, the second starting hole 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. . Based on signals from various detection sensors 67a to 67e, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and whether or not a game ball has entered a through gate. 35 is passed. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, and also executes an electric accessory release lottery based on the entering of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 includes a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , and the main display section 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable prize winning drive unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric accessory is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be played in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a ball entering the general prize opening 32 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and a ball entering the first starting opening 33 is transmitted. If it is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is sent from the main control device 60, and if the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34 is specified, the payout of one game ball is sent. A prize ball command corresponding to this is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The payout control device 70 is connected to the launch control device 80. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. In addition, the launch control device 80 is connected to an operating handle 25 and a game ball launch button 26.

The audio emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be explained later.

In addition, the audio light emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 consisting of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game performance that reflects the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the fluctuation time of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. , the presence or absence of a reach, the contents of the reach effect, the contents of the preview effect executed in each game round, etc. are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 556 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, setting the display on the main display section 45, setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting out jackpot types such as probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results. A reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Further, an electric accessory release counter C4 is used for an electric accessory opening lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to its counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a specified area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 includes a reserved information storage area 64b and a judgment processing execution area 64c. The reserved information storage area 64b includes a first reserved area Ra and a second reserved area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the time of the ball entry are stored in chronological order in the first reserved area Ra of the reserved information storage area 64b. The first reserved area Ra includes four areas corresponding to the maximum number of reserved game balls that have entered the first starting hole 33, namely, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the time of the ball entering are stored in one of the first to fourth areas as reserved information (hereinafter also referred to as special 1 reserved). Which of the first to fourth areas the information is stored in is determined by the order in which the ball entered, and the earlier the ball entered, the higher the area it is stored in (the first area is the highest area).

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the time of the ball entry are stored in chronological order in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b. The second holding area Rb has four areas corresponding to the maximum number of game balls that have entered the second starting hole 34, namely, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the time of the ball entry are stored as holding information (hereinafter also referred to as special 2 holding) in one of the first to fourth areas. The first to fourth areas in which the balls are stored are determined by the order of entry, and the earlier the balls enter, the higher the area in which they are stored (the first area is the highest area).

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be explained. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. For example, the winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 1199, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering the first starting port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the winning/failure table stored in the winning/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is determined to be a jackpot. It is determined whether or not. Further, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the values of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra are moved to the execution area AE of the judgment process execution area 64c in the order in which they were obtained when the game ball entered the first starting hole 33. Specifically, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the judgment process execution area 64c, and a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the first holding area Ra. The data shift involves shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas in order to the higher areas. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted, for example, from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, and the fourth area to the third area.

The values of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb are moved to the execution area AE of the judgment process execution area 64c in the order obtained by the game balls entering the second starting hole 34. Specifically, the data stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb is moved to the judgment process execution area 64c, and a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the second holding area Rb. The data shift involves shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the higher areas in order. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, and the fourth area to the third area, and so on.

When the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second reservation area Rb, the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second reservation area Rb regardless of whether the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the first reservation area Ra. The stored value of the winning random number counter C1 is to be moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c. As a result, when the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in both the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb, the winning value stored in the second holding area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34 is stored. Priority is given to the value of random number counter C1. That is, in this embodiment, when the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in both the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb, the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second holding area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34. Priority is given to the value of the winning random number counter C1 that is stored in the second holding area Rb, and among the values of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb, the data stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb is determined. The data is moved to the processing execution area 64c, and a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. If the value of the winning random number counter C1 is not stored in the second reservation area Rb, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra, the value of the winning random number counter C1 is not stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra. The stored data is moved to the determination process execution area 64c, and the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed.

In addition, in the above explanation, the order in which the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c is explained. However, it is not limited to the value of the winning random number counter C1, and counters other than the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb (jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation Each value of the type counter CS) is also moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c in the same order.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the type of jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the first reserved area Ra of the reserved information storage area 64b at the time when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, and is stored in the second reserved area Rb of the reserved information storage area 64b at the time when the game ball enters the second starting hole 34.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter C2. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. . In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described in detail. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reserve area Ra of the reserve information storage area 64b when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, and is stored in the second reserve area Rb of the reserve information storage area 64b when the game ball enters the second starting hole 34. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reserve area Ra is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c, and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a reach occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reserve area Rb is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c, and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a reach occurs. However, if the winning lottery results in a big win and the mode transitions to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, there are some combinations of symbols that may result in a combination of symbols that corresponds to a jackpot. It refers to a display state in which the symbols are stopped and displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed variably in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined active line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 554(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach state. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

The reach also includes a reach effect in which, when a reach line is formed, the remaining pattern rows are displayed in a varying manner while a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background screen, and a reach effect is performed by reducing or hiding the combination of patterns on which the reach line is formed and then displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, the decision of whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character may be made using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter.

Reach is classified into three types, normal reach, super reach, and special reach, depending on the content of the reach effect. A reach effect with a higher expectation (reliability) of winning a jackpot is executed in super reach than in normal reach, and a reach effect with a higher expectation of winning a jackpot is executed in special reach than in super reach.

Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The change type counter CS is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, and is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b when the game ball enters the second starting hole 34. The value of the change type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra is used when determining the change pattern at the start of the change display in the first pattern display unit 37a and when the pattern display device 41 starts changing the pattern after moving to the judgment processing execution area 64c. The value of the change type counter CS stored in the second holding area Rb is used when determining the change pattern at the start of the change display in the second pattern display unit 37b and when the pattern display device 41 starts changing the pattern after moving to the judgment processing execution area 64c. When determining the change time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, a change time table stored in the change time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the content of the reach performance (i.e., the type of reach) can be specified according to the type of change pattern.

Next, the details of the electric role opening counter C4 will be described. The electric role opening counter C4 is configured to be incremented by one in the range of, for example, 0 to 465, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric role opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric role opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d is moved to the electric role execution area 64e, and then a lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric role opening lottery) is held in the electric role execution area 64e to determine whether or not to control the electric role 34a to the open state using the value of the electric role opening counter C4. Specifically, in the electric role execution area 64e, the winning/losing table (winning/losing table for electric role opening lottery) stored in the role lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is collated with the value of the electric role opening counter C4 to determine whether or not to control the electric role 34a to the open state.

Note that at least one of the acquired values of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS, and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 is a special value in the present invention. Corresponds to information. Also, at least one of the value of the hit random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb. This is also called pending information.

Next, the hit/miss table will be explained. The hit/miss table is table data for checking against the hit random number counter C1 when a hit lottery is held based on the hit random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has a low probability mode and a high probability mode set as lottery modes for the hit lottery, and when a hit lottery is held in the low probability mode, the hit/miss table for the low probability mode is referenced, and when a hit lottery is held in the high probability mode, the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced. The high probability mode (also called the high probability game state) is a game state that is started by winning a special jackpot, and refers to a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a hit lottery is relatively higher than in the low probability mode.

Figure 557 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/lose table. Figure 557(a) shows the win/lose table for low probability mode (for low probability mode), and Figure 557(b) shows the win/lose table for high probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 557(a), in the win/loss table for the low probability mode, five values from 0 to 4 are set as the value of the win random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) is a miss. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 557(b), in the win/loss table for the high probability mode, 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the value of the win random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 (16 to 1199) is a miss. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the win lottery than the low probability mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value group of the hit random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the low probability mode is the value group of the hit random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the high probability mode. included in the group. However, as long as the probability of a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

Although not adopted in the win/lose table in this embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

A "small win" is a result that triggers a transition to the opening and closing execution mode in which the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger a transition to either the lottery mode or the support mode. In contrast, a "miss" is a result that does not trigger a transition to the opening and closing execution mode, and further does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode or the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be explained. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspects of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends (3) Control of the electric accessories 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening/closing execution mode ends support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the occurrence of a ball entering the variable winning prize device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed multiple times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is not performed until 30 seconds have elapsed or the door 36b is closed. It can be set to continue until the number of balls entered reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 seconds have elapsed or the ball enters the opening/closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the player operates the operating handle 25, the game ball launching mechanism 81 is controlled to launch one game ball into the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 seconds. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is shorter than the game ball launch cycle. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode for the low-frequency winning mode, no game balls actually enter the game area. However, the game balls may be set to enter the game area PA even in the opening/closing execution mode for the low-frequency winning mode.

The number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened, the time limit for opening for one opening, and the number of balls that can be opened for one opening are arbitrary, so long as the frequency of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. Specifically, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed more frequently, the time limit for opening for one opening is longer, or the number of balls that can be opened for one opening is greater than in the low-frequency winning mode. To clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that balls do not actually enter the variable winning device 36.

As the lottery mode for the winning lottery after the above (2) opening/closing execution mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 can be set to a high probability mode in which the winning lottery is performed using a high probability winning/losing table as the winning/losing table, and a low probability mode in which the winning lottery is performed using a low probability winning/losing table as the winning/losing table. As explained using FIG. 557, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher when the winning lottery is performed using a high probability winning/losing table than when the winning lottery is performed using a low probability winning/losing table.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the above-mentioned (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, the game balls continue to be launched into the game area PA in the same manner. When compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role opening lottery using the electric role opening counter C4. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening lottery is set higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Also, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric role 34a may be set longer when an electric role opening lottery is won than in the low-frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when an electric role release win is set is set to be greater than in the low-frequency support mode. Good too. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the electric accessory 34a is opened for a long time. In addition, in the case where the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a is opened, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is , may be set shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from when one electric accessory lottery is held until the next electric accessory lottery is held is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. It's okay.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a ball will enter the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in fulfilling the special information acquisition condition.

In this embodiment, if the winning lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to allocate the jackpot type. The allocation of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as an allocation table in the allocation table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

Figure 558 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. Figure 558 (a) shows the distribution table for the first starting port, and Figure 558 (b) shows the distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referenced when a winning lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering the first starting port 33, and the distribution table for the second starting port is referenced when a winning lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering the second starting port 34.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. There are 16R regular jackpot, 8R regular jackpot, 16R regular jackpot, and 8R regular jackpot.

The 16R and 8R probability variable jackpots are jackpots in which the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is a high-frequency winning mode, the lottery mode for the winning lottery after the opening and closing execution mode ends (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "lottery mode") is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot is the number of times the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening and closing execution mode: 16 times (16 rounds) for the 16R probability variable jackpot and 8 times (8 rounds) for the 8R probability variable jackpot.

The 16R normal jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are jackpots in which the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is a high-frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a low-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot is the number of times the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening and closing execution mode: 16 times (16 rounds) for the 16R normal jackpot and 8 times (8 rounds) for the 8R normal jackpot.

In the distribution table for the first starting port, of the jackpot type counter C2 values of "0-99", "0-39" corresponds to a 16R special jackpot, "40-64" corresponds to an 8R special jackpot, "65-89" corresponds to a 16R regular jackpot, and "90-99" corresponds to an 8R regular jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the aspects of jackpots are diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R probability variable jackpot, followed by the 8R probability variable jackpot, the next highest, the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots that have different degrees of advantage for the player in this way, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 16R guaranteed variable jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "65 to 99" correspond to the 8R normal jackpot. It corresponds to

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won, the type of jackpot is distributed based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the second jackpot. This is different from the case where a jackpot is won based on the ball entering the starting hole 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

If the winning lottery results in a loss, the game will not switch to the open/close execution mode, and the lottery mode and support mode will not change. If the jackpot type allocation results in a 16-variable jackpot or an 8R variable jackpot, as explained above, the lottery mode after the open/close execution mode ends will be the high probability mode, but this high probability mode state will continue until the next time the jackpot is won in the winning lottery.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and determines the type of the jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referenced.

Figure 559 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/lose table (win/lose table for the lottery for opening electric reels) used when conducting the lottery for opening electric reels.

Figure 559 (a) shows a winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) used in the low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 559 (a), the winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values, 0 and 1, set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in a winning electric role opening. 464 values, from 2 to 465, are set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in a losing electric role opening. In other words, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the electric role opening is won in the low-frequency support mode, the electric role opening is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

Figure 559 (b) shows a winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) used in the high-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 559 (b), the winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) has 462 values from 0 to 461 set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in winning the electric role opening. Four values from 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in losing. In other words, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the electric role opening is won during the high-frequency support mode, the electric role opening is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting port 34 is set to be higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode by the electric accessory opening lottery table. .

《12-3》Electrical configuration of audio light emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

Figure 560 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 (Figure 555) have been omitted. The audio and light emission control board 91 provided in the audio and light emission control device 90 is equipped with an MPU 92. The MPU 92 is an element that incorporates a CPU, ROM 93, RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, etc. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, etc. These will be described in detail later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control device 60 and the production operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, as well as a display control device 100.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 is equipped with an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for the background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 mediates the reading and writing of data by adjusting the timing of the MPU 102, video RAM 107, etc., and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols and pictures displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns and display pictures, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 to be stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are also referred to as the audio/light side MPU 92, audio/light side ROM 93, and audio/light side RAM 94, respectively, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as the display side MPU 102.

12-4. Overview of Processing by Gaming Machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

《12-4-1》Pending display:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, in the sub-area SA located below the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the game ball is placed on hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. The related first holding related information or the second holding related information related to the holding based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is displayed. Specifically, in a gaming state (so-called normal state) in which it is substantially impossible for the game ball to enter the second starting port 34, the first reservation related information is displayed in the sub-area SA. On the other hand, in a gaming state (during high-frequency support mode) in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 34, the second reservation related information is displayed in the sub-area SA.

Figure 561 is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a with the first pending relationship information displayed in the sub-area SA. In the normal state, the sub-area SA displays the not yet executed pending display area Dh, the pending change in progress display area Dy, and the already executed pending display area Dz as the first pending relationship information. The pending change in progress display area Dy is displayed in the center in the left-right direction of the display surface 41a, the not yet executed pending display area Dh is displayed to the right of the pending change in progress display area Dy, and the already executed pending display area Dz is displayed to the left of the pending change in progress display area Dy.

The unexecuted pending display area Dh is composed of unit areas Dh1 to Dh4, the number of which corresponds to the maximum number of game balls that have entered the first starting hole 33 and are reserved (i.e., four). The unit areas Dh1 to Dh4 are displayed side by side in the left-right direction of the display surface 41a. Hereinafter, the unit area Dh1 located on the far left (the side closest to the variable execution pending display area Dy) will be referred to as the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, the unit area Dh2 located second from the far left to the right will be referred to as the second unexecuted pending display area Dh2, the unit area Dh3 located third from the far left to the right will be referred to as the third unexecuted pending display area Dh3, and the unit area Dh4 located rightmost will be referred to as the fourth unexecuted pending display area Dh4.

Each of the first to fourth unexecuted hold display areas Dh1 to Dh4 has a rectangular icon, and an unexecuted hold display icon H corresponding to a hold based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 can be displayed above the icon. The unexecuted hold display icon is hold display information corresponding to a hold based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 and that has not yet been transferred to the execution of a winning lottery. In this embodiment, the unexecuted hold display icon H is circular. Each time a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, the unexecuted hold display icon H is displayed so that it increases by one from the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 to the fourth unexecuted hold display area Dh4. The number of unexecuted hold display icons H indicates the number of holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 33.

The pending display area Dy during the change execution has a trapezoid icon whose upper base is longer than the lower base, and a pending display icon Y during the change execution corresponding to a hold based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 33 can be displayed at the top of the trapezoid icon. The pending display icon Y during the change execution is a hold based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 33, and is hold display information corresponding to a hold during the execution of a winning lottery. In this embodiment, the pending display icon Y during the change execution is a hexagon. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a winning lottery is held in response to the entry of a ball into the first start hole 33, and a change display is performed to notify the result of the winning lottery, and at the timing when this change display starts, the pending display icon Y during the change execution is displayed in the pending display area Dy during the change execution. This change display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the pending display icon Y during the change execution displayed in the pending display area Dy during the change execution. By observing that the pending change display icon Y is displayed in the pending change display area Dy, the player can know that the hold corresponding to the pending change display icon Y has been consumed.

The executed pending display area Dz is an area in which pending display information corresponding to a game round can be displayed after the execution of a variable game in the game round has ended, that is, after the game round operation has been executed. In this embodiment, the executed pending display area Dz is composed of four unit areas Dz1 to Dz4. The unit areas Dz1 to Dz4 are displayed side by side in the left-right direction of the display surface 41a. Hereinafter, the unit area Dz1 located on the rightmost side (the side closest to the variable execution pending display area Dy) will be referred to as the first executed pending display area Dz1, the unit area Dz2 located second from the rightmost side to the leftmost side will be referred to as the second executed pending display area Dz2, the unit area Dz3 located third from the rightmost side to the leftmost side will be referred to as the third executed pending display area Dz3, and the unit area Dz4 located leftmost will be referred to as the fourth executed pending display area Dz4.

Each of the first to fourth already played pending display areas Dz1 to Dz4 includes a rectangular icon, and inside the rectangular icon, an already executed display area corresponding to the pending game ball that enters the first starting port 33 is displayed. An execution pending display icon Z can be displayed. According to the first to fourth executed pending display areas Dz1 to Dz4, executed pending display icons Z corresponding to pendings for which variable display and stop display have been completed are shown. The number of holds corresponding to the executed hold display icon Z displayed in the first executed hold display area Dz1 is one more than the hold corresponding to the variable execution hold display icon Y displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy. This is a previously executed hold (hold information), and the hold (hold information) is executed one by one as it goes from the first executed hold display area Dz1 to the fourth executed hold display area Dz4. An executed/pending display icon Z is displayed for the item.

FIG. 562 is an explanatory diagram showing how the unplayed pending display area Dh, the variable executed pending display area Dy, and the executed pending display area Dz change as the game progresses. FIG. 562(a) shows the state in which the fluctuation is being displayed, FIG. 562(b) shows the state after the fluctuation has stopped, and FIG. 562(c) shows the state in which the next fluctuation is being displayed. It changes in the order of FIG. 562(a), FIG. 562(b), and FIG. 562(c).

In the example shown in FIG. 562(a), the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 in the unexecuted hold display area Dh displays the first unexecuted hold display icon H corresponding to the first hold, and the second unexecuted hold display area Dh2 displays the second unexecuted hold display icon H corresponding to the second hold. The variable hold display area Dy displays the variable hold display icon Y. The already executed hold display area Dz displays four already executed hold display icons Z. As described above, the already executed hold display area Dz is an area that can display hold display information corresponding to the game round after the execution of the variable play in the game round has ended, that is, after the game round operation has been executed. The variable display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the variable hold display icon Y displayed in the variable hold display area Dy.

When the fluctuation is stopped and displayed from the state where the fluctuation is being displayed as shown in FIG. The variable execution pending display icon Y displayed in the execution pending display area Dy moves (shifts) to the first executed pending display area Dz1 of the executed pending display area Dz. In other words, the variation execution pending display icon Y is displayed in the variation execution pending display area Dy until the variation stops, and at the timing when the next variation display starts, the first executed pending display icon Y in the already executed pending display area Dz is displayed. Move (shift) to display area Dz1. At this time, the executed pending display icon Z displayed in the first executed pending display area Dz1 moves (shifts) to the second executed pending display area Dz2, and is displayed in the second executed pending display area Dz2. The executed pending display icon Z is moved (shifted) to the third executed pending display area Dz3, and the executed pending display icon Z displayed in the third executed pending display area Dz3 is moved to the fourth executed pending display icon Z. It moves (shifts) to area Dz4, and the executed pending display icon Z displayed in the fourth executed pending display area Dz4 disappears. In addition, the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 moves (shifts) to the variable execution pending display area Dy, and the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the second unexecuted pending display area Dh2. The execution pending display icon H moves (shifts) to the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1. In the example shown in FIG. 562(b), the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the third unexecuted pending display area Dh3 and the fourth unexecuted pending display area Dh4 does not exist, but if it does exist, , the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the third unexecuted pending display area Dh3 moves (shifts) to the second unexecuted pending display area Dh2, and the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the fourth unexecuted pending display area Dh4 The hold display icon H moves (shifts) to the third unexecuted hold display area Dh3.

As a result of the movement shown in FIG. 562(b), the state shown in FIG. 562(c) is obtained. That is, only one not-executed pending display icon H is displayed in the not-executed pending display area Dh. In the variable execution pending display area Dy, the not-executed pending display icon H displayed in the first not-executed pending display area Dh1 in the state shown in FIG. 562(a) and FIG. 562(b) is displayed as a variable execution pending display icon Y. In the first executed pending display area Dz1 in the executed pending display area Dz, the variable execution pending display icon Y displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy in the state shown in FIG. 562(a) and FIG. 562(b) is displayed as an executed pending display icon Z. In the second to fourth executed pending display areas Dz2 to Dz4 in the executed pending display area Dz, the executed pending display icon Z displayed in the first to third executed pending display areas Dz1 to Dz3 in the state shown in FIG. 562(a) and FIG. 562(b) is displayed. As mentioned above, the already executed hold display area Dz is an area in which hold display information corresponding to a play round can be displayed after the execution of a variable play in the play round has ended, i.e., after the play round operation has been executed.

As described above, each time the variable display and stop display corresponding to one game round are executed, each unplayed pending display icon H displayed in the unplayed pending display area Dh moves from the right side to the left side. Then, it moves from the leftmost first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 to the variable execution pending display area Dy. Then, a variable display and a stop display are executed to notify the result of the winning lottery based on the pending information corresponding to the variable pending pending display icon Y displayed in the variable pending pending display area Dy. Thereafter, the variation execution pending display icon Y displayed in the variation execution pending display area Dy moves to the already executed pending display area Dz. In the executed pending display area Dz, the executed pending display icon Z moves from the right side to the left side, and disappears after passing the fourth executed pending display area Dz4.

Note that the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh has a circular shape as described above, but instead of this, it may have another polygonal shape such as a triangle, square, or pentagon. You can also use it as Furthermore, the variation execution pending display icon Y displayed in the variation execution pending display area Dy and the executed pending display icon Z displayed in the already executed pending display area Dz were hexagonal as described above. However, instead of this, other polygonal shapes such as a triangle, quadrangle, pentagon, and octagon, or a circle may be used. Although the unexecuted pending display icon H, the variable execution pending display icon Y, and the executed pending display icon Z have different shapes, they may have the same shape. Furthermore, the unexecuted pending display icon H, the variable execution pending display icon Y, and the executed pending display icon Z are not limited to graphic images, but may be images of characters or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, the variation execution pending display icon Y and the executed execution pending display icon Z having the same shape are displayed in the variation execution pending display area Dy and the executed execution pending display area Dz. Alternatively, the variable execution pending display icon Y displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy and the already executed pending display icon Z displayed in the already executed pending display area Dz may have different shapes.

Figure 563 is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a on which the second hold relationship information is displayed in the sub-area SA. During the high frequency support mode, the sub-area SA displays the not yet executed hold display area Eh and the variable hold display area Ey as the second hold relationship information. The not yet executed hold display area Eh and the variable hold display area Ey are displayed side by side in the left-right direction of the display surface 41a, and the not yet executed hold display area Eh is displayed to the right of the variable hold display area Ey. In other words, compared to the first hold relationship information displayed in Figure 561, the second hold relationship information does not have a configuration equivalent to the executed hold display area Dz. However, the executed hold display area Dz may be displayed on the display surface 41a as the second hold relationship information.

The unplayed pending display area Eh is constituted by unit areas Eh1 to Eh4, the number of which corresponds to the maximum number of reserved game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 (that is, four). The unit areas Eh1 to Eh4 are displayed side by side in the left-right direction of the display surface 41a. Hereinafter, the unit area Eh1 located on the leftmost side (closest to the variable execution pending display area Ey) will be referred to as the first unexecuted pending display area Eh1, and the unit area Eh2 located second from the leftmost side to the right side will be referred to as the first unexecuted pending display area Eh1. It is called the second unexecuted pending display area Eh2, the unit area Eh3 located third from the leftmost side to the right side is called the third unexecuted pending display area Eh3, and the unit area Eh4 located on the rightmost side is called the fourth unexecuted pending display area Eh2. This is called an execution pending display area Eh4.

Each of the first to fourth unexecuted hold display areas Eh1 to Eh4 has a rectangular icon, and an unexecuted hold display icon HX corresponding to a hold based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 can be displayed above the icon. The unexecuted hold display icon is a hold display icon corresponding to a hold based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 34, which has not yet been transferred to the execution of a winning lottery. In this embodiment, the unexecuted hold display icon HX is circular. Each time a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, the unexecuted hold display icon HX is displayed so that it increases by one from the first unexecuted hold display area Eh1 to the fourth unexecuted hold display area Eh4. The number of unexecuted hold display icons HX indicates the number of holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 34.

The holding display area Ey during fluctuation execution is equipped with a trapezoidal icon whose upper base is longer than the lower base, and above the trapezoidal icon is displayed the fluctuation corresponding to the holding based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. An execution pending display icon YX can be displayed. The holding display icon YX during fluctuation is a holding display icon that corresponds to the holding that is based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 and the holding during the execution of the winning lottery. In this embodiment, the variation execution pending display icon YX is a hexagon. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a winning lottery is held triggered by a ball entering the second starting port 34, and a variable display is performed to notify the result of the winning lottery. At this timing, the variation execution pending display icon YX is displayed in the variation execution pending display area Ey. This variable display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the change in progress hold display icon YX displayed in the change in progress hold display area Ey. By observing that the variation execution pending display icon YX is displayed in the variation execution pending display area Ey, the player knows that the hold corresponding to the variation execution pending display icon YX has been exhausted. be able to.

《12-4-2》 Hold change notice performance:
In order to increase the player's expectation for the reserved information corresponding to each reserved display icon (i.e., the reserved information stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64), the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment checks the value of the winning random number counter C1 included in each reserved information before it becomes the target of a winning lottery, and performs a performance that gives the player a sense of expectation based on the checked result, that is, a so-called pre-reading performance. As one of the pre-reading performances, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment executes a reserved change notice performance (hereinafter also simply referred to as "reserved change notice") that suggests the expectation (reliability) of winning a jackpot for the reserved information corresponding to the reserved display icon whose display color has changed by changing the display color of each reserved display icon from a default color (e.g., white) to another color. In this embodiment, the configuration is such that a reserved change notice is executed based on reserved information based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33 (hereinafter also referred to as special 1 reserved information), and a reserved change notice is not executed based on reserved information based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34 (hereinafter also referred to as special 2 reserved information). In addition, as a modified example, both the hold change notice based on the special hold information 1 and the hold change notice based on the special hold information 2 may be executed. In this embodiment, the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh is changed by the hold change notice.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the display colors of the unexecuted hold display icon H and the variable hold display icon Y located in the variable hold display area Dy are the default colors white, blue, green, and red, which correspond in this order to four stages of expectancy (reliability) of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, from low to high. In other words, the expected reliability of winning the jackpot that corresponds to the display color white is the lowest, blue is higher than white, green is higher than blue, and red is the highest. In other words, according to the hold change notice, if the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H or the variable hold display icon Y located in the variable hold display area Dy (hereinafter, the unexecuted hold display icon H and the variable hold display icon Y are collectively referred to as the hold display icons H and Y) remains the default color white, the expectation of winning the jackpot is low, and if the display color changes to blue, the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than when it is white, if the display color changes to green, the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than when it is blue, and if the display color changes to red, the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than when it is green. The number of times that one hold display icon H or Y changes is not limited to once, but can be multiple times. The timing of the change can also be any timing between the time when the game ball enters the first start hole 33 and the end of the variable display (for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display started). When the reserved change notice causes the reserved display icons H and Y to change to a color that indicates a high expectation of winning a jackpot, the player's anticipation of winning a jackpot is heightened, and the player's interest in the game is enhanced.

Specifically, the hold change notice is executed as follows. The main control device 60 executes a first determination process each time a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, and makes determinations such as a win or loss determination for the special 1 hold stored by the current ball entry, a determination of the type of big win, a determination of whether a reach has occurred, and a determination of the type of fluctuation pattern before the hold information becomes the subject of a win lottery by the main control device 60. The type of fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation time calculated based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS included in the hold information. The main control device 60 then sets the determination result of the first determination process as a hold command, and transmits the hold command to the audio and light emission control device 90.

The audio emission control device 90 receives the hold command, and specifies, from the hold command, the success or failure result of the winning lottery, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a reach-to-win effect, and the content of the reach-to-reach effect. The content of the reach effect can be identified from the type of fluctuation pattern. Thereafter, the audio emission control device 90 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the pending change notice based on the determined success/failure result of the winning lottery and the acquired pending change notice random number. The lottery is conducted based on a pending change notice execution lottery table (not shown) in which the success/failure result of the winning lottery and the pending change notice random number are associated with whether or not to execute the pending change notice. That is, whether or not to execute the reservation change notice is determined based on the result of the winning lottery and the acquired reservation change notice random number with reference to the reservation change notice execution lottery table. In addition to the results of the winning lottery, the content of the ready-to-win performance may be used to determine whether or not the reservation change notice is to be executed. At this time, in normal reach, which is classified according to the content of the reach effect, the execution probability of the pending change notice is set low, and in super reach, which is classified according to the content of the reach effect, the execution probability of the pending change notice is set to medium, and the execution probability of the pending change notice is set to medium, It is preferable to set the execution probability of the pending change notice to be high in the special reach classified by the content of. By setting in this way, the higher the expectation of jackpot winning is, the more likely it is that the reservation change notice will be executed.

When it is decided to execute the reservation change notice based on the above-mentioned lottery, the audio emission control device 90 displays a display color change pattern of the unexecuted reservation display icon H for the special 1 reservation accumulated by the current ball entry. (hereinafter referred to as a pending change pattern) is determined by lottery. This hold change pattern lottery is performed in a hold change pattern lottery table in which hold change pattern random numbers (described later) are associated with a plurality of hold change patterns prepared in advance for each type of reach classified according to the content of the reach effect. It is done on the basis of The reservation change pattern lottery table is prepared in advance for each reference condition specified by the success or failure result of the winning lottery and the number of special 1 reservations accumulated by the current ball entry. Based on the validity result of , and the number of special 1 suspensions mentioned above, the reservation change pattern lottery table to be referred to is specified, and the specified reservation change pattern lottery table is referred to, and the type of reach specified from the reservation command and the obtained A pending change pattern corresponding to the pending change pattern random number is determined.

Figure 564 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a reserve change pattern selection table for reference conditions such as the number of reserved balls accumulated by the current ball entry being 2, and the result of the winning lottery being a big win. As shown in the figure, according to the reserve change pattern selection table, multiple reserve change patterns (hereinafter also referred to as reserve change scenarios) are prepared in advance for each type of reach, and a reserve change pattern random number is associated with each reserve change pattern. The reserve change scenario determines the change pattern of the display color of the reserve display icons H and Y corresponding to the special reserve, and indicates how the display color of the reserve display icons H and Y is changed within the range from when they are displayed in the unexecuted reserve display area Dh to when they are displayed in the variable execution reserve display area Dy. For example, when the reach type is "normal reach" and the reserved change pattern random number is "10 to 19", the reserved change scenario is set to white as the display color of the second unexecuted reserved display icon H corresponding to the second reserved (special 1 reserved 2), blue as the display color of the first unexecuted reserved display icon H corresponding to the first reserved (special 1 reserved 1), and blue as the display color of the variable reserved display icon Y corresponding to the reserved in which the variable display is being executed (special 1 reserved 0). When the reach type is "super reach" and the reserved change pattern random number is "10 to 19", the reserved change scenario is set to blue as the display color of the second unexecuted reserved display icon H corresponding to the second reserved (special 1 reserved 2), green as the display color of the first unexecuted reserved display icon H corresponding to the first reserved (special 1 reserved 1), and green as the display color of the variable reserved display icon Y corresponding to the reserved in which the variable display is being executed (special 1 reserved 0). When the type of reach is a "special reach" and the hold change pattern random number is "10 to 19," the hold change scenario is set such that green is the display color of the second unexecuted hold display icon H corresponding to the second hold (Special 1 hold 2), red is the display color of the first unexecuted hold display icon H corresponding to the first hold (Special 1 hold 1), and red is the display color of the hold in progress change display icon Y corresponding to the hold in progress change display (Special 1 hold 0).

The above display color setting is determined so that the final display color set in each reserve change scenario, i.e., the display color of special reserve 0, conforms to the relationship between the display colors of reserve display icons H and Y described above and the high and low likelihood of winning a jackpot. Note that the final display colors set in all reserve change scenarios do not necessarily have to conform to this relationship, as long as they conform to this relationship overall. For example, there is no prohibition on the existence of a reserve change scenario in which the color is green in the case of a normal reach, where the likelihood of winning a jackpot is relatively low.

A pending change pattern lottery table having such a configuration is provided for each reference condition. That is, in addition to the pending change pattern lottery table shown in FIG. 564, the following pending change pattern lottery table for reference conditions is prepared.
・For reference conditions where the number of special 1 reservations is 2 and the result of the winning lottery is a loss ・For the reference condition where the number of special 1 reservations is 1 and the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot win ・The number of special 1 reservations is 1, the special 1 pending number for the reference condition where the winning lottery result is a loss is 3, and the special 1 pending number for the reference condition where the winning lottery result is a jackpot win is 3, For reference conditions where the winning lottery result is a loss - Special 1 pending number is 4, and for reference conditions where the winning lottery result is a jackpot win - Special 1 pending number is 4, winning lottery result For reference conditions where is out of the range

When all of these reserve change pattern selection tables by reference condition are collected and the probability of winning the jackpot for each display color of the reserve display icons H and Y is calculated, white is the lowest, blue is higher than white, green is higher than blue, and red is the highest. In other words, the contents of the reserve change scenario are set so that the probability of winning the jackpot for each reserve change pattern selection table by reference condition when all of them are collected is the lowest for white, blue is higher than white, green is higher than blue, and red is the highest. As a result, the player will find that when the display color of the reserve display icons H and Y is white, the expectation of winning the jackpot is low, when the display color changes to blue, the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than when it is white, when the display color changes to green, the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than when it is blue, and when the display color changes to red, the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than when it is green.

FIG. 565 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a change in display color due to a pending change notice. FIG. 565(a) shows that the special 1 hold (hold information) corresponding to the change in progress pending display icon Y displayed in the change in progress hold display area Dy is being displayed, and FIG. 565(b) shows the next game. FIG. 565(c) shows a state in which the next game time is being displayed in a variable manner. It changes in the order of FIG. 565(a), FIG. 565(b), and FIG. 565(c).

During the variable display shown in FIG. 565(a), when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the number of reservations for special 1 reservation accumulated by the entry is 2, and the winning lottery is A case where the winning result is a jackpot win will be explained. In this case, if a lottery is won to determine whether or not to execute the reservation change notice, the reservation change pattern lottery table shown in FIG. 564 is referred to. Here, if it is specified that it is a super reach from the hold command and the obtained hold change pattern random number is 10, the lottery result of the hold change pattern is the second stage of the super reach (in the figure, the number marked with *) This is the pending change scenario described in paragraph 1). According to this hold change scenario, since the display color of the second unplayed hold display icon H corresponding to special 1 hold 2 is blue, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, When the unexecuted pending display icon H is displayed in the second unexecuted pending display area Dh2, the display color is blue. In addition, "blue", "green", and "white" in the figure are written for convenience to indicate the display colors, and "blue" is actually used for the unexecuted pending display icon H and the executed pending display icon Z. ”, “green”, “white”, etc. are not displayed.

Subsequently, during the variable display of the next game time shown in FIG. 565(b), the unplayed pending display icon H displayed in the second unplayed pending display area Dh2 in FIG. 565(a) changes to the first unplayed pending display icon H. The state is shifted to the unexecuted pending display area Dh1, but at the timing of the shift (that is, the timing at which the variable display starts), the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H is obtained by lottery of pending change patterns. The color changes to green according to the recorded contents of the special 1 reservation 1 column of the above-mentioned reservation change scenario (see column marked * in the figure). In this way, by changing the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh from blue to green, it is possible to determine whether the jackpot has been won for the pending information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display icon H. It becomes possible to suggest to the player that the level of expectation (reliability) is considerably higher among the four levels described above.

Subsequently, during the variable display of the next game round shown in FIG. 565(c), the unplayed pending display icon H displayed in the first unplayed pending display area Dh1 in FIG. 565(b) changes. The variable execution pending display icon Y is shifted to the executed pending display area Dz, but at the timing of the shift (that is, the timing at which the variable display starts), the display color of the executed pending display icon Z is as follows. It remains green in accordance with the recorded contents of the Special 1 Reservation 0 column of the above-mentioned reservation change scenario (see column marked * in the figure) obtained by lottery of reservation change patterns.

The example shown in FIG. 565 is just one example, and the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh and the display color of the variable hold display icon Y displayed in the variable hold display area Dy change in various ways depending on the number of special 1 holds accumulated by the entry of game balls into the first starting hole 33, the result of the winning lottery, the type of reach, and the obtained hold change pattern random number. In this way, it is possible to suggest to the player the likelihood (reliability) of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery based on the hold information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display icon H or the variable hold display icon Y.

The reserved change scenarios recorded in the reserved change pattern lottery table illustrated in FIG. 564 are limited to those that change the display color in a direction that changes the expectation of winning the jackpot from low to high, such as changing from white to blue, green, or red, changing from blue to green or red, or changing from green to red. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the display color is changed in a direction that changes the expectation of winning the jackpot from low to high as a reserved change notice, but the display color is not changed in a direction that changes the possibility of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery from high to low. Specifically, the display color is not changed from red to green, blue, or white, from green to blue or white, or from blue to white.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the display color of the unplayed pending display icon H changes at the timing when the unplayed pending display icon H shifts (i.e., the timing at which the variable display starts). However, instead of this, a configuration may be adopted in which the display color changes during variable display. The timing of changing the display color during this fluctuating display may be, for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuating display started, or when changing the color of flowers, confetti, fireballs, etc. It may be triggered by the time when a tangible object or an intangible object such as a light beam, a laser beam, or a radio wave reaches the pending pending display icon H.

《12-4-3》Executed pending notice performance:
The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes an already-executed pending notice performance (hereinafter also simply referred to as an "already executed pending notice") in addition to the above-described pending change notice as a pre-read performance. The executed pending notice is a preview effect using the executed pending display icon Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz (see FIG. 561) for special 1 pending. As described above, the executed pending display area Dz is an area that can display pending display information corresponding to the gaming session after the execution of the variable game in the gaming session is finished, that is, after the execution of the gaming session operation. be. In the present embodiment, when all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz are displayed in the same color due to the executed pending notice, the displayed icons are displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy. The present invention adopts a structure that indicates to the player that the result of the winning lottery concerning the fluctuation based on the suspension information corresponding to the fluctuation execution suspension display icon Y is confirmed to be a jackpot. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the already executed suspension notice based on the suspension information (Special 2 suspension information) based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is not executed, but instead of this, , a configuration may be adopted in which both the executed pending notice based on special 1 pending information and the executed pending notice based on special 2 pending information are executed.

Figure 566 is an explanatory diagram explaining the data configuration of the special 1 hold performance memory area. The sound and light side RAM 94 equipped in the sound and light emission control device 90 is provided with a hold performance memory area 94d (see Figure 560), and the hold performance memory area 94d is provided with a special 1 hold performance memory area. The special 1 hold performance memory area is a memory area that stores the current display color and the winning or losing result of the winning lottery for the unexecuted hold display area H, the changing hold display icon Y, or the already executed hold display icon Z (hold display icons H, Y, Z) displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh (see Figure 561), the changing hold display area Dy, and the already executed hold display area Dz for special 1 hold. As shown in the figure, the current display color and the winning or losing result of the winning lottery by the advance judgment process are associated with each area that displays the hold display icons H, Y, and Z. Specifically, the current display color is associated with the winning or losing result of the winning lottery by the advance judgment process for each of the first to fourth unexecuted hold display areas Dh1 to Dh4 provided in the unexecuted hold display area Dh, the variable execution hold display area Dy, and the first to fourth executed hold display areas Dz1 to Dz4 provided in the executed hold display area Dz. The memory contents of the display color of the special 1 hold performance memory area illustrated in FIG. 566 specify the display color of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z during the variable display shown in FIG. 565(a).

As explained above, the hold display icons H, Y, and Z displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh, the variable hold display area Dy, and the executed hold display area Dz shift from right to left each time a game is played, so the display color and the winning lottery result stored in the special 1 hold performance memory area also shift to the adjacent area to the left each time a game is played. By referencing the special 1 hold performance memory area, the audio and light emission control device 90 can identify the current display color of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z displayed in each area Dh1 to Dh4, Dy, and Dz1 to Dz4, and the winning lottery result determined by the advance determination process.

The audio and light emitting control device 90 executes the already executed hold notification by referring to the memory contents of the special 1 hold effect memory area of the above configuration. Specifically, the already executed hold notification is executed as follows. Each time the audio and light emitting control device 90 receives a hold command sent from the main control device 60, it executes the process for the hold change notification described above (hereinafter referred to as the hold change notification process), but following the hold change notification process, it executes the process for the already executed hold notification (hereinafter referred to as the already executed hold notification process). The audio and light emitting control device 90 further executes the same color removal process when missed as a process for the hold effect.

FIG. 567 is a flowchart showing an overview of the execution pending notice process. FIG. 568 is a flowchart showing the same color removal process when removed.

The process for notifying a previously executed hold command shown in FIG. 567 will now be described. This process for notifying a previously executed hold command is executed by the audio and light control device 90, and is executed each time a hold command sent from the main control device 60 is received.

When the process is executed, the audio emission control device 90 first displays information regarding the special 1 hold that was added due to the game ball entering the first starting port 33, which triggered the execution of the already executed hold notice process. A winning lottery is displayed between the unexecuted pending display icon H for the Special 1 pending acquired before the unexecuted pending display icon H and the variable pending pending display icon Y displayed in the variable pending pending display area Dy. It is determined whether or not there is any pending information whose success or failure result corresponds to a jackpot win (step S1). This determination is made by referring to the special 1 reserved effect storage area. For example, if the contents of the special 1 hold effect storage area are as shown in FIG. The unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold that has been placed corresponds to what is displayed in the second unexecuted hold display area Dh2 (the part marked with * in the figure), and is displayed before the unexecuted hold display icon H. The unexecuted pending display icon H for the acquired Special 1 pending corresponds to the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1. The unexecuted pending display icon H indicates that the result of the winning lottery is a loss. In addition, the change execution pending display icon Y displayed in the variation execution pending display area Dy also indicates that the result of the winning lottery is a loss. In this case, the determination result in step S1 is negative.

In step S1, an affirmative determination is made, that is, from the unexecuted pending display icon H for the special 1 pending added due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, which triggered the execution of the executed pending notice process. The result of the winning lottery is displayed in the unexecuted pending display icon H for the special 1 pending previously acquired and the variable pending pending display icon Y displayed in the variable pending pending display area Dy. If it is determined that there is something corresponding to a certain suspension information, the already executed suspension notice process is ended. According to this executed pending notice process, the color change due to the pending change notice may be stopped in step S9, which will be described later. For this reason, for example, there may be a case where a jackpot is won in a winning lottery even though the display color of the pending pending display icon H is white. However, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a case, in this embodiment, In the unexecuted pending display icon H for special 1 pending and the variable pending pending display icon Y displayed in the variable pending pending display area Dy, there is pending information indicating that the winning lottery result is a jackpot win. The configuration is such that if there is a corresponding one, the executed pending notice process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, in step S1, if a negative judgment is made, that is, if it is judged that there is no hold information corresponding to the hold information in which the winning lottery result is a jackpot win among the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold acquired before the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold that was added by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33 that triggered the execution of the already executed hold notification process, and the variable hold display icon Y displayed in the variable hold display area Dy, proceed to step S2.

In step S2, it is determined whether the winning lottery result identified from the hold command by the prior determination process in the previously executed hold change notice (the winning lottery result for the special 1 hold that was added by the ball entering the first start port 33 that triggered the execution of the previously executed hold notice process) is a jackpot (step S2). If it is determined in step S2 that the winning lottery result is a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S3, where it is determined whether the type of reach identified by the reach effect identified from the hold command by the hold change notice process is a special reach. This determination is made to determine whether the reach effect has a high expectation of winning a jackpot, and in this embodiment, it is determined whether it is a special reach.

In step S3, if it is determined that the type of reach is not a special reach, the process proceeds to step S4 and a variable n is set to 4. After executing step S4, the process proceeds to step S5.

In step S5, trace back n (= 4) The individual hold display icons H, Y, and Z are defined as a determination target hold display icon row, and each hold display icon H, Y, and Z included in the determination target hold display icon row are set in the same display color (i.e. the same color). This determination is made by referring to the special 1 pending performance storage area illustrated in FIG. 566. For example, in the special 1 hold performance storage area shown in FIG. The unexecuted pending display icon H corresponds to what is displayed in the second unexecuted pending display area Dh2 (the part marked * in the figure). Here, if the type of reach specified by the content of the reach effect specified from the hold command is special reach, and the variable n is 4, then the hold display icons for n hold display icons going back from the unexecuted hold display icon H H, Y, Z, that is, the judgment target pending display icon row RW includes the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, and the variable execution pending display icon H displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy. This includes the pending display icon Y, the executed pending display icon Z displayed in the first executed pending display area Dz1, and the executed pending display icon Z displayed in the second executed pending display area Dz2. In step S5, it is determined whether the hold display icons H, Y, and Z included in the judgment target hold display icon row RW have the same color. For example, in the special 1 pending performance storage area shown in FIG. 566, the pending display icons H, Y, and Z included in the determination target pending display icon row RW are green, which is the same color. In addition, in determining whether the colors are the same here, the default color white is considered to be not the same color. That is, if each of the pending display icons H, Y, and Z included in the judgment target pending display icon row RW is white, the determination result in step S5 is negative. If blue, green, and red are the same color, the determination result in step S5 is affirmative.

In step S5, it is determined that the hold display icons H, Y, and Z included in the judgment target hold display icon row RW have the same color (hereinafter also simply referred to as "the judgment target hold display icon row RW has the same color"). If so, the process advances to step S6.

In step S6, a female character effect setting process is executed to set an effect in which a female character appears. Specifically, according to the female character performance setting process, at the timing when the entire determination target pending display icon row RW shifts to the executed pending display area Dz, any position within the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 For example, the effect is set so that a female character appears around the execution pending display area Dz. For example, as shown in FIG. 569(d), a female character WM appears. When the judgment target pending display icon row RW is of the same color and the entire judgment target pending display icon row RW is shifted to the executed pending display area Dz, four executed pending display icons Z are displayed in the executed pending display area Dz. are lined up in the same color, by making the female character WM appear on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 at the timing when the entire determination target pending display icon row RW shifts to the executed pending display area Dz. , clearly suggests to the player that the winning lottery result related to the variation based on the pending information corresponding to the executed pending display icon Z displayed in the pending variation execution display area Dy is a confirmed jackpot win. be able to. As described above, the executed pending display area Dz is an area that can display pending display information corresponding to the gaming session after the execution of the variable game in the gaming session is finished, that is, after the execution of the gaming session operation. be.

Note that as a modification of this embodiment, the female character may be replaced with another character such as a male character or an animal character. Furthermore, instead of a female character, a structure in which floating objects such as flower petals and fireballs dance, or a structure in which light or rays are emitted may be used. Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the process of step S6 for performing an effect in which a female character appears is omitted. Even in the case of this modification, the player can confirm that the result of the winning lottery is a confirmed jackpot by confirming that the executed pending display icons Z in the executed pending display area Dz are all the same color. You can know. After executing step S6, the process advances to step S7.

In step S7, the pending display icons H and Y, excluding the executed pending display icon Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz, of the pending display icon row RW to be determined, undergo color conversion using a pending change notice effect. Perform processing to stop. The pending display icons H and Y that stop the color conversion are the first starting gates that triggered the execution of the already executed pending notice process, which was the subject of determination in step S1 as to whether or not there was a jackpot win. The unexecuted pending display icon H for the special 1 pending that was acquired before the unexecuted pending display icon H for the special 1 pending that was added by the entry of the game ball into 33, and the variable execution pending display area Dy. It matches the displayed variation execution pending display icon Y. The reason for stopping the color conversion is to prevent the determination target pending display icon row RW, which is in the same color state, from losing the same color due to a change in display color due to the pending change notice effect. After executing step S7, the already executed pending notice process is ended. The executed/pending notice realized by the processing of steps S1 to S7 described above will be described in detail below. Here, case 1 will be explained.

Case 1:
Fig. 569 is an explanatory diagram showing how the reserved display areas Dh, Dy, and Dz change in case 1. Fig. 569(a) shows the display during the change, Fig. 569(b) shows the display after the change has stopped, Fig. 569(c) shows the display during the change of the next game, and Fig. 569(d) shows the display during the change of the next game. The change is in the order of Fig. 569(a), Fig. 569(b), Fig. 569(c), and Fig. 569(d).

In the example shown in FIG. 569(a), the unexecuted hold display icon H is displayed in green in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1, the variable hold display icon Y is displayed in green in the variable hold display area Dy, the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in green in the first already executed hold display area Dz1, and the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in green in the second already executed hold display area Dz2. The variable display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the variable hold display icon Y displayed in the variable hold display area Dy. If a game ball enters the first start hole 33 during this variable display, the unexecuted hold display icon H (blue) corresponding to the hold (hold information) based on this ball entry is additionally displayed in the second unexecuted hold display area Dh2. As a result, the memory contents of the special 1 hold performance memory area become the state shown in FIG. 566.

In case 1, the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold that was added due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, which triggered the execution of the executed hold notice process, was acquired before the unexecuted hold display icon H. The unexecuted pending display icon H for special 1 pending and the variable pending pending display icon Y displayed in the variable pending pending display area Dy correspond to pending information whose winning lottery result is a jackpot win. (This point is the same in Cases 2 to 7 described later), and the second unplayed pending display area Dh2, which is additionally displayed due to the game ball entering the first starting port 33, It is assumed that the pending information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display icon H indicates that the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot and that the type of reach is super reach. Under these circumstances, when the executed pending notice process is executed, a negative determination is made in step S1 of FIG. 567, an affirmative determination is made in step S2, a negative determination is made in step S3, and the variable n is set to 4 in step S4. is set, and in step S5, it is determined whether or not the determination target pending display icon rows RW have the same color. As can be seen from FIG. 566, the judgment target pending display icon row RW includes the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, the variable execution pending display area Dy, the first executed pending display area Dz1, and the second executed pending display area The pending display icons H, Y, and Z displayed on Dz2 correspond to this and are all green. Therefore, in step S5, it is determined that the determination target pending display icon row RW has the same color, and in step S6, a female character effect setting process is executed. According to the female character performance setting process, as explained earlier, at the timing when the entire judgment target pending display icon row RW shifts to the executed pending display area Dz, The presentation is set so that the female character appears around the hold display area Dz.

The state where the fluctuations are being displayed in FIG. 569(a) will change to the state after the fluctuations have stopped in FIG. 569(b), and then as shown in FIG. 569(c), the pending display icons H, Y, and Z will shift to the left while the fluctuations for the next game are being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 569(d), during the changing display of the next next play, each of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z shifts further to the left. The timing at which this changing display starts is when the entire row of hold display icons RW to be judged shifts to the executed hold display area Dz, and since the row of hold display icons RW to be judged is the same color as explained above, at the timing of this shift, as shown in FIG. 569(d), the four hold display icons Z in the executed hold display area Dz are all the same color, and an effect is executed in which a female character appears around the executed hold display area Dz.

By visually recognizing the appearance of the female character WM, the player can clearly know that the four completed execution pending display icons Z displayed in the completed execution pending display area Dz are aligned in the same color. As a result, the player recognizes that the winning lottery result regarding the fluctuation based on the suspension information corresponding to the fluctuation execution suspension display icon Y displayed in the fluctuation execution suspension display area Dy is a confirmed jackpot win. be able to.

As detailed above, in case 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 and the unplayed hold display icon H for special 1 hold is added to the unplayed hold display area Dh, The judgment target pending display icon row RW, which is the four pending display icons H, Y, and Z starting from the unexecuted pending display icon H, is originally arranged in the same color. Therefore, if the pending information corresponding to the added unexecuted pending display icon H indicates that the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the judgment target pending display icon row RW that is in the same color will be displayed in the same color. By shifting to the executed pending display area Dz, the four executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz can be arranged in the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the four executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz are aligned in the same color, they are displayed in the variable executed pending display area Dy. It is possible to realize a preview performance that shows that the winning lottery result related to the fluctuation based on the suspension information corresponding to the suspension display icon Y while the fluctuation is being executed indicates that the jackpot is confirmed. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by executing the production in which the female character appears, the four executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz are aligned in the same color. can be clearly shown to the player.

Furthermore, in case 1, as shown in FIG. 569(a), a game ball enters the first starting port 33, and an unplayed hold display icon H for special 1 hold is added to the unplayed hold display area Dh. In this case, the player visually confirms that the four pending display icons H, Y, and Z (determination target pending display icon row RW) starting from the unexecuted pending display icon H are aligned in the same color. be able to. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, during the variable display shown in FIG. By aligning the four execution pending display icons Z displayed in the execution pending display area Dz with the same color, the player can expect that the jackpot will eventually be confirmed.

Return to the explanation of FIG. 567. If it is determined in step S5 that the pending display icon row RW to be judged is not the same color, proceed to step S8.

In step S8, it is determined whether the n-1 hold display icons H, Y, and Z in the hold display icon column RW to be determined are the same display color. As explained above, the hold display icon column RW to be determined refers to the four hold display icons going back from the unexecuted hold display icon H that was added by the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33 this time. In step S8, it is determined whether the n-1 (=3) hold display icons H, Y, and Z in the hold display icon column RW to be determined are the same display color and only the remaining hold display icon is a different color.

If it is determined in step S8 that n-1 of the pending display icon row RW to be judged are the same color, proceed to step S9.

In step S9, an assist setting process is executed to change the display color of each hold display icon H, Y, Z displayed in the hold display icon column RW to the same color. At the time when step S9 is executed, n-1 (=3) hold display icons in the hold display icon column RW to the same color, and the remaining hold display icon is a color different from the same color. The n-1 hold display icons are hereinafter referred to as same-color hold display icons, and the remaining hold display icon is hereinafter referred to as different-color hold display icon. The assist setting process is a process that sets the display color of the different-color hold display icon to be changed to the same color as the display color of the same-color hold display icon at a specified timing.

The above-mentioned predetermined timing for color conversion may be any timing within the period from the timing when the executed hold notification process is started to the middle of a game round (after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing when the game round is started) when all of the judgement target hold display icon row RW are lined up in the executed hold display area Dz. Therefore, according to the assist setting process, a lottery is performed to determine at what timing the color conversion of the different color hold display icon will be performed from the not executed hold display area Dh through the variable execution hold display area Dy to the executed hold display area Dz, and the color conversion is performed at the determined timing. Various aspects of the assist setting process that switches the above-mentioned predetermined timing will be described in detail later. After execution of step S9, proceed to step S6 described above.

On the other hand, in step S8, if it is determined that n-1 of the determination target pending display icon row RW do not have the same color, the already executed pending notification process is terminated. Further, in step S2, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot, the already executed pending notice process is ended. Various aspects of the assist setting process will be explained as cases 2 to 6 below.

・Case 2:
FIG. 570 is an explanatory diagram showing how each pending display area Dh, Dy, and Dz changes in case 2. 570(a) shows the fluctuation display in progress, FIG. 570(b) shows the state after the fluctuation has stopped, FIG. 570(c) shows the fluctuation display in progress for the next game, and FIG. 570(d) shows the fluctuation display in progress. Indicates that the number of game times is being displayed. It changes in the order of FIG. 570(a), FIG. 570(b), FIG. 570(c), and FIG. 570(d).

In the example shown in FIG. 570(a), the unexecuted hold display icon H is displayed in white in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1, the variable hold display icon Y is displayed in green in the variable hold display area Dy, the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in green in the first already executed hold display area Dz1, and the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in green in the second already executed hold display area Dz2. The variable display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the variable hold display icon Y displayed in the variable hold display area Dy. If a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 during this variable display, the unexecuted hold display icon H (blue) corresponding to the hold (hold information) based on this ball entry is additionally displayed in the second unexecuted hold display area Dh2.

Here, the hold information corresponding to the unplayed hold display icon H in the second unplayed hold display area Dh2, which is additionally displayed due to the game ball entering the first starting port 33 this time, indicates the success or failure result of the winning lottery. It is assumed that this is a jackpot win and that the type of reach is super reach. Under these circumstances, if the executed pending notice process is executed, a negative determination is made in step S1 of FIG. 567, an affirmative determination is made in step S2, a negative determination is made in step S3, and the variable n is set to 4 in step S4. is set, and in step S5, it is determined whether or not the determination target pending display icon rows RW have the same color. The judgment target pending display icon row RW includes pending displays displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, the variable execution pending display area Dy, the first executed pending display area Dz1, and the second executed pending display area Dz2. The icons H, Y, and Z correspond to this, and one of the four pending display icons H, Y, and Z is white, and the remaining three are green. Therefore, when a negative determination is made in step S5 and an affirmative determination is made in step S8, the process proceeds to step S9, where the assist setting process is executed.

In this case 2, as shown in FIG. 570(b), the assist setting process converts the color of the rightmost pending display icon in the judgment target pending display icon column RW from white to green when the fluctuation of the current game round stops and the display of the fluctuation of the next game round starts, and as shown in FIG. 570(c), while the fluctuation of the next game round is being displayed, the fluctuation pending display icon Y in the fluctuation pending display area Dy turns green, and the judgment target pending display icon column RW becomes the same color.

Following the state of FIG. 570(c), as shown in FIG. 570(d), during the variable display of the next game round, each pending display icon H, Y, Z is further shifted to the left neighbor. becomes. As a result, the rows of determination target pending display icons RW, which have become the same color due to the assist setting process, are lined up in the executed pending display area Dz. Further, as shown in FIG. 570(d), during the variable display of the next game round, the female character WM having the content set by the female character performance setting process is displayed. That is, at the timing of transition to the state shown in FIG. 570(d) (the timing at which each pending display icon shifts), the four executed pending display icons Z are aligned in the same color in the executed pending display area Dz, and the An effect in which a female character appears around the hold display area Dz is executed.

By visually checking the appearance of the female character WM, the player can clearly see that the four already-executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already-executed hold display area Dz are all the same color. As a result, the player can recognize that the result of the winning lottery for the change based on the hold information corresponding to the change hold display icon Y displayed in the change hold display area Dy is a confirmed big win.

As described above in detail, in case 2, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 and an unexecuted hold display icon H for special 1 hold is added to the unexecuted hold display area Dh, if the unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh among the judgment target hold display icon row RW, which is the four hold display icons H, Y, and Z going back from the unexecuted hold display icon H, is a different color hold icon, at the timing when the unexecuted hold display icon H moves to the variable execution hold display area Dy, the unexecuted hold display icon H is converted to the same color as the same color hold icon. As a result, the judgment target hold display icon row RW is made to be the same color, and by shifting the judgment target hold display icon row RW to the executed hold display area Dz with its display color unchanged, the four executed hold display icons Z displayed in the executed hold display area Dz can be made to be the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are all the same color, a preview effect can be realized in which the result of the winning lottery for the change based on the hold information corresponding to the change hold display icon Y displayed in the change hold display area Dy is a confirmed big win. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, in case 2, as in case 1, by executing a production in which a female character appears, the four executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz are aligned in the same color. This can be clearly shown to the player.

Furthermore, in case 2, the different color pending icon in the determination target pending display icon row RW changes to the same color as the same color pending icon at the timing of shifting from the unexecuted pending display area Dh to the variable execution pending display area Dy. , the player can visually confirm that the determination target pending display icon rows RW are aligned in the same color. For this reason, the judgment target pending display icon row RW is shifted to the executed pending display area Dz with the same display color, and the four executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz are changed to the same color. By aligning the numbers, it is possible to make the player look forward to winning the jackpot eventually.

Case 3:
Fig. 571 is an explanatory diagram showing how the reserved display areas Dh, Dy, and Dz change in Case 3. Fig. 571(a) shows the display during the change, Fig. 571(b) shows the display after the change has stopped, Fig. 571(c) shows the display during the change of the next game, and Fig. 571(d) shows the display during the change of the next game. The change is in the order of Fig. 571(a), Fig. 571(b), Fig. 571(c), and Fig. 571(d).

In the example shown in FIG. 571(a), the unexecuted pending display icon H is displayed in green in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, and the variable executed pending display icon Y is displayed in the variable executed pending display area Dy. is displayed in white, the executed pending display icon Z is displayed in green in the first executed pending display area Dz1, and the executed pending display icon Z is displayed in green in the second executed pending display area Dz2. It is displayed in the display color. The fluctuation display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the change-in-progress hold display icon Y displayed in the change-in-progress hold display area Dy. During this variable display, if a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the unplayed hold display icon H (blue) corresponding to the hold (hold information) based on this ball entry will be displayed as the second unplayed hold display. It is additionally displayed in area Dh2. The pending information corresponding to the additionally displayed unexecuted pending display icon H indicates that the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot win. The judgment target pending display icon row RW includes pending displays displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, the variable execution pending display area Dy, the first executed pending display area Dz1, and the second executed pending display area Dz2. The icons H, Y, and Z correspond to this.

In this case 3, the second pending display icon from the right in the judgment target pending display icon row RW, that is, the variable execution displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy during the variable display in FIG. 571(a) The medium hold display icon Y corresponds to a different color hold display icon. As shown in FIG. 571(b), the assist setting process determines the timing at which the fluctuation of the current game round stops and the next game round starts, that is, the two from the right of the judgment target pending display icon row RW. At the timing when the eye pending display icon moves from the variable execution pending display area Dy to the first executed pending display area Dz1, a color conversion is performed to convert the pending display icon from white to green, as shown in FIG. 571(c). As shown, during the variable display of the next game round, the executed pending display icon Z in the first executed pending display area Dz1 becomes green, and the determination target pending display icon row RW is aligned in the same color. .

Following the state of FIG. 571(c), as shown in FIG. 571(d), during the variable display of the next game round, each pending display icon H, Y, Z is further shifted to the left neighbor. becomes. As a result, the determination target pending display icon rows RW, which have the same color due to the assist setting process, are lined up in the executed pending display area Dz. Further, as shown in FIG. 571(d), during the variable display of the next game round, the female character WM having the content set by the female character performance setting process is displayed. That is, at the timing of transition to the state shown in FIG. 571(d) (the timing at which each pending display icon shifts), the four executed pending display icons Z are aligned in the same color in the executed pending display area Dz, and the An effect in which a female character appears around the hold display area Dz is executed.

By visually recognizing the appearance of the female character WM, the player can clearly know that the four completed execution pending display icons Z displayed in the completed execution pending display area Dz are aligned in the same color. As a result, the player recognizes that the winning lottery result regarding the fluctuation based on the suspension information corresponding to the fluctuation execution suspension display icon Y displayed in the fluctuation execution suspension display area Dy is a confirmed jackpot win. be able to.

As described above in detail, in case 3, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 and an unexecuted hold display icon H for special 1 hold is added to the unexecuted hold display area Dh, if the variable hold display icon Y displayed in the variable hold display area Dy of the judgment target hold display icon row RW, which is the four hold display icons H, Y, and Z going back from the unexecuted hold display icon H, is a different color hold icon, at the timing when the variable hold display icon Y moves from the variable hold display area Dy to the executed hold display area Dz, the variable hold display icon Y is converted to the same color as the same color hold icon. As a result, the judgment target hold display icon row RW is made the same color, and by shifting the judgment target hold display icon row RW to the executed hold display area Dz with its display color unchanged, the four executed hold display icons Z displayed in the executed hold display area Dz can be made the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are all the same color, a preview effect can be realized in which the result of the winning lottery for the change based on the hold information corresponding to the change hold display icon Y displayed in the change hold display area Dy is a confirmed big win. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, in case 3, as in case 1, a performance in which a female character appears is executed, clearly indicating to the player that the four executed hold display icons Z displayed in the executed hold display area Dz are all the same color.

Furthermore, in case 3, the player can visually confirm that the different colored reserve icons in the judgment target reserve display icon row RW change to the same color as the same color reserve icons when they shift from the variable execution reserve display area Dy to the executed reserve display area Dz, and the judgment target reserve display icon row RW becomes the same color. For this reason, the entire judgment target reserve display icon row RW shifts to the executed reserve display area Dz in its original display color, and the four executed reserve display icons Z displayed in the executed reserve display area Dz become the same color, giving the player hope that a jackpot will eventually be confirmed.

Case 4:
Fig. 572 is an explanatory diagram showing how the reserved display areas Dh, Dy, and Dz change in Case 4. Fig. 572(a) shows the display during the change, Fig. 572(b) shows the display after the change has stopped, Fig. 572(c) shows the display during the change of the next game, and Fig. 572(d) shows the display during the change of the next game. The change is in the order of Fig. 572(a), Fig. 572(b), Fig. 572(c), and Fig. 572(d).

In the example shown in FIG. 572(a), the unexecuted pending display icon H is displayed in green in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, and the variable executed pending display icon Y is displayed in the variable executed pending display area Dy. is displayed in green, the executed pending display icon Z is displayed in green in the first executed pending display area Dz1, and the executed pending display icon Z is displayed in blue in the second executed pending display area Dz2. It is displayed in the display color. The fluctuation display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the change-in-progress hold display icon Y displayed in the change-in-progress hold display area Dy. During this variable display, if a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the unplayed hold display icon H (blue) corresponding to the hold (hold information) based on this ball entry will be displayed as the second unplayed hold display. It is additionally displayed in area Dh2. The pending information corresponding to the additionally displayed unexecuted pending display icon H indicates that the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot win. The judgment target pending display icon row RW includes pending displays displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, the variable execution pending display area Dy, the first executed pending display area Dz1, and the second executed pending display area Dz2. Icons H, Y, and Z correspond to this.

In this case 4, the leftmost pending display icon in the judgment target pending display icon row RW, that is, the executed pending display displayed in the second executed pending display area Dz2 during the variable display in FIG. 572(a) Icon Z corresponds to a different color pending display icon. As shown in FIG. 572(d), the assist setting process changes the determination target pending display icon row RW at the timing during the variable display of the game round, which is a predetermined time after the start of the next game round. Color conversion is performed to convert the leftmost pending display icon, that is, the executed pending display icon displayed in the fourth executed pending display area Dz4 from blue to green. As a result, during the variable display of the next game round, the executed pending display icon Z displayed in the fourth executed pending display area Dz4 becomes green, and the determination target pending display icon row RW is aligned in the same color. It turns out. Then, as shown in FIG. 572(d), the female character WM is displayed around the executed pending display area Dz.

By visually recognizing the appearance of the female character WM, the player can clearly know that the four completed execution pending display icons Z displayed in the completed execution pending display area Dz are aligned in the same color. As a result, the player recognizes that the winning lottery result for the variation based on the suspension information corresponding to the variation execution pending display icon Y displayed in the variation execution pending display area Dy is a confirmed jackpot win. be able to.

As described above in detail, in case 4, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 and an unexecuted hold display icon H for special 1 hold is added to the unexecuted hold display area Dh, if one of the hold display icons H (or Z) in the judgment target hold display icon row RW, which is the four hold display icons H, Y, and Z going back from the unexecuted hold display icon H, is a different color hold display icon, during the variable display of the game round (next-next game round) that started to be executed at the time when the entire judgment target hold display icon row RW shifts to the executed hold display area Dz, the different color hold display icon is converted to the same color as the same color hold display icon. In this way, the four executed hold display icons Z displayed in the executed hold display area Dz can be aligned to the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are all the same color, a preview effect can be realized in which the result of the winning lottery for the change based on the hold information corresponding to the change hold display icon Y displayed in the change hold display area Dy is a confirmed big win. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, in case 4, as in case 1, by executing a production in which a female character appears, the four executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz are aligned in the same color. This can be clearly shown to the player.

Furthermore, in case 4, at the start of the variable display of the next game round, the four executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz are not aligned in the same color. However, since the colors suddenly become all the same during the fluctuating display, it is possible to give the player great surprise and joy.

Case 5:
Fig. 573 is an explanatory diagram showing how the reserved display areas Dh, Dy, and Dz change in Case 5. Fig. 573(a) shows the display during the change, Fig. 573(b) shows the display after the change has stopped, Fig. 573(c) shows the display during the change of the next game, and Fig. 573(d) shows the display during the change of the next game. The change is in the order of Fig. 573(a), Fig. 573(b), Fig. 573(c), and Fig. 573(d).

In the example shown in FIG. 573(a), the unexecuted pending display icon H is displayed in white in the second unexecuted pending display area Dh2, and the unexecuted pending display icon H is displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1. is displayed in green, the variable execution pending display icon Y is displayed in green in the variable execution pending display area Dy, and the executed pending display icon Z is displayed in green in the first executed pending display area Dz1. It is displayed in the display color. The fluctuation display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the change-in-progress hold display icon Y displayed in the change-in-progress hold display area Dy. During this variable display, if a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the unplayed hold display icon H (blue) corresponding to the hold (hold information) based on this ball entry will be displayed as the third unplayed hold display. It is additionally displayed in area Dh3. The pending information corresponding to the additionally displayed unexecuted pending display icon H indicates that the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot win. The judgment target pending display icon row RW includes pending displays displayed in the second unexecuted pending display area Dh2, the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, the variable execution pending display area Dy, and the first executed pending display area Dz1. Icons H, Y, and Z correspond to this.

In this case 5, the rightmost hold display icon in the judgment target hold display icon column RW, i.e., the unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the second unexecuted hold display area Dh2 during the change display in FIG. 573(a), corresponds to a different color hold display icon. By the assist setting process, as shown in FIG. 573(b), at the timing when the change of the current game round stops and the next game round starts, a color change is performed to convert the rightmost hold display icon in the judgment target hold display icon column RW from white to green, and as shown in FIG. 573(c), during the change display of the next game round, the unexecuted hold display icon H in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 turns green, and the judgment target hold display icon column RW becomes the same color.

Following the state of FIG. 573(c), as shown in FIG. 573(d), during the change display of the next next next game round, each of the reserved display icons H, Y, and Z shifts further to the left. As a result, the row of reserved display icons RW to be judged, which have been changed to the same color by the assist setting process, is lined up in the executed reserved display area Dz. Also, as shown in FIG. 573(d), during the change display of the next next next game round, a female character WM with the content set by the female character performance setting process is displayed. That is, at the timing of transition to the state of FIG. 573(d) (the timing when the entire row of reserved display icons RW to be judged shifts to the executed reserved display area Dz), the four executed reserved display icons Z are aligned to the same color in the executed reserved display area Dz, and a performance in which a female character appears around the executed reserved display area Dz is executed.

By visually recognizing the appearance of the female character WM, the player can clearly know that the four completed execution pending display icons Z displayed in the completed execution pending display area Dz are aligned in the same color. As a result, the player recognizes that the winning lottery result regarding the fluctuation based on the suspension information corresponding to the fluctuation execution suspension display icon Y displayed in the fluctuation execution suspension display area Dy is a confirmed jackpot win. be able to.

As described above in detail, in case 5, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 and an unexecuted hold display icon H for special 1 hold is added to the unexecuted hold display area Dh, if the unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh among the judgment target hold display icon row RW, which is the four hold display icons H, Y, and Z going back from the unexecuted hold display icon H, is a different color hold icon, the unexecuted hold display icon H is converted to the same color as the same color hold icon at the timing when the unexecuted hold display icon H shifts to the left in the unexecuted hold display area Dh. As a result, the judgment target hold display icon row RW is made to be the same color, and by shifting the judgment target hold display icon row RW to the executed hold display area Dz with its display color as it is, the four executed hold display icons Z displayed in the executed hold display area Dz can be made to be the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are all the same color, a preview effect can be realized in which the result of the winning lottery for the change based on the hold information corresponding to the change hold display icon Y displayed in the change hold display area Dy is a confirmed big win. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, in case 5, as in case 1, a performance in which a female character appears is executed, clearly indicating to the player that the four executed hold display icons Z displayed in the executed hold display area Dz are all the same color.

Furthermore, in case 5, the different colored reserve icon in the judgment target reserve display icon row RW changes to the same color as the same color reserve icon when it shifts to the left in the unexecuted reserve display area Dh, and the player can visually confirm that the judgment target reserve display icon row RW becomes the same color. For this reason, the entire judgment target reserve display icon row RW shifts to the executed reserve display area Dz in its original display color, and the four executed reserve display icons Z displayed in the executed reserve display area Dz become the same color, giving the player hope that a jackpot will eventually be confirmed.

・Case 6:
FIG. 574 is an explanatory diagram showing how each pending display area Dh, Dy, and Dz changes in case 6. 574(a) shows the fluctuation display in progress, FIG. 574(b) shows the state after the fluctuation has stopped, FIG. 574(c) shows the fluctuation display in progress for the next game, and FIG. 574(d) shows the fluctuation display in progress. Indicates that the number of game times is being displayed. It changes in the order of FIG. 574(a), FIG. 574(b), FIG. 574(c), and FIG. 574(d).

In the example shown in FIG. 574(a), the unexecuted hold display icon H is displayed in green in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1, the variable execution hold display icon Y is displayed in green in the variable execution hold display area Dy, the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in green in the first already executed hold display area Dz1, the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in blue in the second already executed hold display area Dz2, and the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in green in the third already executed hold display area Dz3. The variable display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the variable execution hold display icon Y displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy. During this variable display, if a game ball enters the first start hole 33, the unexecuted hold display icon H (blue) corresponding to the hold (hold information) based on this ball entry is additionally displayed in the second unexecuted hold display area Dh2. The hold information corresponding to this additionally displayed unexecuted hold display icon H indicates that the winning lottery result is a jackpot win. The pending display icon row RW to be judged corresponds to the pending display icons H, Y, and Z displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, the variable pending display area Dy, the first executed pending display area Dz1, and the second executed pending display area Dz2.

In this case 6, as in case 4, the leftmost hold display icon in the hold display icon column RW to be judged, i.e., the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the second already executed hold display area Dz2 during the changing display of Figure 574 (a), corresponds to the different color hold display icon. The assist setting process changes the display color of this different color reserved display icon from blue to green, but in this case 6, since the executed reserved display icon Z to the left of the different color reserved display icon is the same green color as the reserved display icon of the same color, as shown in FIG. 574(c), when the display of the next game round stops and the next game round starts, the different color reserved display icon displayed in the third executed reserved display area Dz3 is erased, and the reserved display icons H, Y, and Z located to the right of the second executed reserved display area Dz2 shift to the left, and as shown in FIG. 574(d), during the display of the next game round, the executed reserved display icon Z in the third executed reserved display area Dz3 turns green, and the judgment target reserved display icon row RW is aligned to the same color. Then, as shown in FIG. 574(c), the female character WM is displayed around the executed reserved display area Dz.

By visually checking the appearance of the female character WM, the player can clearly see that the four already-executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already-executed hold display area Dz are all the same color. As a result, the player can recognize that the result of the winning lottery for the change based on the hold information corresponding to the change hold display icon Y displayed in the change hold display area Dy is a confirmed jackpot win.

As detailed above, in case 6, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 and the unplayed hold display icon H for special 1 hold is added to the unplayed hold display area Dh, The leftmost pending display icon of the judgment target pending display icon row RW, which is the four pending display icons H, Y, and Z going back from the unexecuted pending display icon H, is a different color pending display icon, and the different color When the executed pending display icon Z to the left of the pending display icon has the same display color as the same color pending display icon, by extinguishing the different color pending display icon, the judgment target pending display icon row RW is changed to the same color. Arrange. In this way, the four executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz can be arranged in the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the four executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz are aligned in the same color, they are displayed in the variable executed pending display area Dy. It is possible to realize a preview performance that shows that the winning lottery result related to the fluctuation based on the suspension information corresponding to the suspension display icon Y while the fluctuation is being executed indicates that the jackpot is confirmed. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in case 6, as in case 1, a performance in which a female character appears is executed, clearly indicating to the player that the four executed hold display icons Z displayed in the executed hold display area Dz are all the same color.

Return to the explanation of FIG. 567. If it is determined in step S3 that the type of reach is a special reach, the process proceeds to step S10, where the variable n is set to 3. That is, in the case of a special reach, which has a high expectation of winning a jackpot, the variable n is set to 3. After step S10 is executed, the process proceeds to step S11, where it is determined whether the pending display icon row RW to be judged is the same color or not. The process of step S11 is almost the same as the process of step S5 described above, and the only difference is that the pending display icon row RW to be judged in step S5 is the four pending display icons H, Y, and Z corresponding to the variable n at the time of execution of step S5, whereas the pending display icon row RW to be judged in step S11 is the three pending display icons H, Y, and Z corresponding to the variable n at the time of execution of step S11.

In step S11, if it is determined that the reserved display icon row RW to be judged is the same color, the process proceeds to step S12, where a specific symbol display setting process is executed. The specific symbol display setting process is a process for setting a specific symbol row (for example, [3, 4, 1]) to be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 when a specific game round is stopped. The above-mentioned specific game round is the game round corresponding to the reserved display icon H, Y to the left of the unexecuted reserved display icon H for the special 1 reserved that was added by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33 that triggered the execution of the executed reserved notice process. In the case of case 7 described later, the game round corresponding to the variable pending display icon Y displayed in the variable pending display area Dy corresponds to the specific game round. After executing step S12, the process proceeds to step S13.

In step S13, a process for reducing the size of the already executed pending display area is executed. The process for reducing the size of the already executed pending display area is executed so that the leftmost unit area (fourth unexecuted pending display area Dh4) of the already executed pending display area Dz disappears after the specific symbol sequence (e.g., [3, 4, 1]) is displayed. As a result of this process, the already executed pending display area Dz is reduced in size from four unit areas Dh1 to Dh4 to three unit areas Dh1 to Dh3. The processes of steps S12 and S13 will be described in detail later with specific examples. After executing step S13, the process proceeds to step S6 described above.

If it is determined in step S11 that the pending display icon row RW to be judged is not the same color, the process for the already executed pending notification is terminated. The already executed pending notification realized by the processes of steps S1 to S3, S10 to S13, S6, and S7 described above will be described in detail below. Here, it will be described as case 7.

Case 7:
Fig. 575 is an explanatory diagram showing how the reserved display areas Dh, Dy, and Dz change in Case 7. Fig. 575(a) shows the display during the change, Fig. 575(b) shows the display after the change has stopped, and Fig. 575(c) shows the display during the change for the next game. The change is in the order of Fig. 575(a), Fig. 575(b), and Fig. 575(c).

In the example shown in FIG. 575(a), the variable execution pending display icon Y is displayed in green in the variable execution pending display area Dy, and the executed pending display icon Z is displayed in the first executed pending display area Dz1. is displayed in green, the executed pending display icon Z is displayed in green in the second executed pending display area Dz2, and the executed pending display icon Z is displayed in white in the third executed pending display area Dz3. It is displayed in the display color. The fluctuation display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the change-in-progress hold display icon Y displayed in the change-in-progress hold display area Dy. During this variable display, if a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the unplayed hold display icon H (blue) corresponding to the hold (hold information) based on this ball entry will be displayed as the first unplayed hold display. It is additionally displayed in area Dh1.

Here, the pending information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display icon H in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, which is additionally displayed by the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33 this time, indicates that the result of the winning lottery is a big win and the type of reach is a special reach. Under such circumstances, when the executed pending notice process is executed, a negative judgment is made in step S1 of FIG. 567, a positive judgment is made in step S2, a positive judgment is made in step S3, the variable n is set to 3 in step S10, and a judgment is made in step S11 as to whether the judgment subject pending display icon row RW is the same color or not. The judgment subject pending display icon row RW corresponds to three pending display icons Y and Z, that is, the pending display icons Y and Z displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy, the first executed pending display area Dz1, and the second executed pending display area Dz2, and the three pending display icons Y and Z are green and the same color. Therefore, if a positive judgment is made in step S11, the process proceeds to step S12, where a specific symbol display setting process is executed. After step S12 is executed, the process proceeds to step S13, where a process for reducing the executed pending display area is executed.

After the variable display shown in FIG. 575(a), at the timing when the variable display stops, a specific pattern sequence [3, 4, 1] is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 by the setting by the specific pattern display setting process. Also, at the timing when the variable display stops, as shown in FIG. 575(b), the fourth unexecuted hold display area Dh4 located at the leftmost position of the already executed hold display area Dz disappears by the setting by the already executed hold display area reduction setting process. In addition, a configuration may be made in which a performance in which a moving object reaches the disappearing fourth unexecuted hold display area Dh4 is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the timing when this fourth unexecuted hold display area Dh4 disappears. The moving object corresponds to a tangible object such as a petal, confetti, or a fireball, or an intangible object such as a ray of light, a laser beam, or a radio wave. By having the moving object reach it, the player can be made to focus on the disappearance of the fourth unexecuted hold display area Dh4.

When the fluctuation is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 575(b), each pending display icon H, Y, and Z is shifted to the left side at the timing when the fluctuation display of the next game round is started. As a result, as shown in FIG. 575(c), three executed pending display icons of the same color are displayed in the executed pending display area Dz which is constituted by the first to third executed pending display areas Dz1 to Dz3. A determination target pending display icon row RW consisting of Z is located. Further, as shown in FIG. 575(c), during the variable display of the next game round, the female character WM having the content set by the female character performance setting process is displayed. That is, at the timing of transition to the state shown in FIG. 575(c) (timing at which each pending display icon shifts), in the executed pending display area Dz configured by the first to third executed pending display areas Dz1 to Dz3. The three execution pending display icons Z are arranged in the same color, and an effect is performed in which a female character appears around the execution pending display area Dz.

By visually checking the appearance of the female character WM, the player can clearly see that all (three in this case 7) already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz, which is made up of the three already executed hold display areas Dz1 to Dz3, are the same color. As a result, the player can recognize that the result of the winning lottery for the change based on the hold information corresponding to the change hold display icon Y displayed in the change hold display area Dy is a confirmed jackpot win.

As detailed above, in case 7, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 and the unplayed hold display icon H for special 1 hold is added to the unplayed hold display area Dh, The judgment target pending display icon row RW, which is the three pending display icons Y and Z starting from the unexecuted pending display icon H, is originally arranged in the same color. Therefore, the pending information corresponding to the added pending pending display icon H indicates that the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, and the type of reach is special reach, which has high expectations for winning a jackpot. In some cases, [3, 4, 1] is displayed as a specific symbol row on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the determination target pending display icon row RW, which is all in the same color, is displayed in the same display color. By shifting to the execution pending display area Dz, the three executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz can be arranged in the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when all (three in this case 7) executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz are aligned in the same color, it is determined that the variable execution is in progress. It is possible to realize a preview performance in which the success or failure result of the winning lottery related to the fluctuation based on the suspension information corresponding to the suspension display icon Y during the execution of the fluctuation displayed in the suspension display area Dy is a confirmed jackpot win. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by executing the production in which the female character appears, all (three in this case 7) completed execution pending display displayed in the execution pending display area Dz It is possible to clearly show the player that the icons Z have the same color.

Furthermore, in case 7, when [3, 4, 1] is displayed as a specific symbol string on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, as shown in FIG. 575(b), the execution pending display area Since Dz is reduced to a size made up of three unit areas Dh1 to Dh3, it is expected that the condition that the executed pending display icons Z in the executed pending display area Dz will all be the same color will be relaxed. It is possible to impart a feeling to the player. In case 7, all (three in this case 7) executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz constituted by the first to third executed pending display areas Dz1 to Dz3. will be the same color.

As mentioned above, in case 7, there are only three executed pending display icons Z arranged in the same color in the executed pending display area Dz, and compared to other cases, there are only three executed pending display icons Z in the executed pending display area Dz. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the condition that the pending display icons Z are arranged in the same color is relaxed and that it is easy to win a jackpot.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the number of unit areas constituting the already executed hold display area Dz is reduced to two by the already executed hold display area reduction setting process, and when two already executed hold display icons Z are lined up in the same color in the already executed hold display area Dz, a configuration is realized in which the result of the winning lottery related to the variation based on the reservation information corresponding to the variable hold display icon Y displayed in the variable hold display area Dy may suggest to the player that the winning lottery is a confirmed jackpot. Also, the number of unit areas constituting the already executed hold display area Dz is reduced to one by the already executed hold display area reduction setting process, and when one already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz becomes a specific display color (for example, red in this embodiment), a configuration is realized in which the result of the winning lottery related to the variation based on the reservation information corresponding to the variable hold display icon Y displayed in the variable hold display area Dy may suggest to the player that the winning lottery is a confirmed jackpot. In the executed hold display area reduction setting process, in this embodiment, whether the number of unit areas constituting the executed hold display area Dz will be 3, 2, or 1 is determined by lottery using a specific random number, for example. In this manner, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that the maximum number of executed hold display icons Z that can be displayed in the executed hold display area Dz can be changed from 1 to 4. This configuration makes it possible to give the player a sense of anticipation as to whether the condition that all of the executed hold display icons Z in the executed hold display area Dz be the same color will be relaxed.

12-4-4 Processing for removing the same color when it comes off:
The process for removing the same color when the ball is not in a winning position will be described below with reference to Fig. 568. This process for removing the same color when the ball is not in a winning position is executed by the sound and light emission control device 90, and is executed every time the pending display icon is shifted from the first pending display area Dh1 to the pending display area Dy.

When the process starts, first, it is determined whether the pending information for the pending display icon Y that is to be displayed in the pending display area Dy is a result of a lottery draw that is a miss (step S21). If it is determined in step S21 that the pending information is a result of a lottery draw that is a miss, the process proceeds to step S22.

In step S22, it is determined whether the already executed hold display icons Z to be displayed in the first to fourth already executed hold display areas Dz1 to Dz4 are the same color. This determination is made by referring to the special 1 hold performance memory area shown in FIG. 566. If it is determined in step S22 that the already executed hold display icons Z are the same color, the process proceeds to step S23, and the same color removal process is executed. The same color removal process is a process of changing the display color of one of the four already executed hold display icons Z to be displayed in the first to fourth already executed hold display areas Dz1 to Dz4 to a color different from that of the other already executed hold display icons Z. For example, if all the already executed hold display icons Z to be displayed in the first to fourth already executed hold display areas Dz1 to Dz4 are green, the display color of one of the four already executed hold display icons Z is changed from green to red. As a result of executing the same color removal process, the already executed hold display icons Z to be displayed in the first to fourth already executed hold display areas Dz1 to Dz4 are no longer the same color. After step S23 is executed, the process for removing the same color when the item is not in the same position is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S21, if it is determined that the pending variation execution icon Y to be displayed in the variation execution pending display area Dy is determined that the result of the winning lottery is not a loss, the same color as the variation execution pending display icon Y is displayed in the variation execution pending display area Dy. Finish the removal process. Further, in step S22, if it is determined that the executed pending display icons Z to be displayed in the first to fourth executed pending display areas Dz1 to Dz4 are not of the same color, the process for removing the same color when removed is terminated. do.

According to this process for removing the same color when winning, the pending information regarding the variation execution pending display icon Y, which will be displayed in the variation execution pending display area Dy, is that the winning lottery result is a loss. In this case, it is possible to avoid that the four executed pending display icons Z to be displayed in the first to fourth executed pending display areas Dz1 to Dz4 have the same color. On the other hand, according to the already executed pending notice process described above, the pending information about the variable executing pending display icon Y that will be displayed in the variable executing pending display area Dy is the result of the winning lottery. In the case of a winning item, the four executed pending display icons Z that will be displayed in the first to fourth executed pending display areas Dz1 to Dz4 may be of the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the four executed pending display icons Z displayed in the first to fourth executed pending display areas Dz1 to Dz4 have the same color, It can be guaranteed that the winning lottery result regarding the variation based on the pending information regarding the pending variation execution display icon Y displayed in the display area Dy is a confirmed jackpot win.

12-4-5 Initialization process of the executed hold display area The audio and light emitting control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment executes an initialization process of the executed hold display area Dz to erase the executed hold display icon Z displayed in the executed hold display area Dz after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the touch sensor 25a provided on the operation handle 25a is in the off state and a hold command is received from the main control device 60. When a player is replaced, there is a certain period of time during which no play is performed after the previous player finishes playing and before the new player starts playing. The above-mentioned predetermined period is determined in consideration of this period of no play, and is set to, for example, 5 minutes. With this configuration, when a player is replaced, it is possible to prevent the executed hold display icon Z stored by the previous player's play from remaining. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a player is replaced, the game can be started in a state where there is no executed hold display icon Z displayed in the executed hold display area Dz, and there is no irritation caused by the executed hold display icon Z remaining in the executed hold display area Dz. Note that, as the executed hold display area initialization process, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment may be configured to erase the executed hold display icon Z displayed in the executed hold display area Dz in accordance with the timing when the standby screen (e.g., demo screen) starts to be displayed after the standby screen is started to be displayed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can realize a new and unprecedented presentation that suggests to the player that he or she has won a jackpot by utilizing a predetermined number of already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz that correspond to the play round after the play round operation is executed.

Here, let us consider as a reference example a pachinko machine that has the above-mentioned function of the hold change notice performance, but does not have the above-mentioned function of the hold already executed notice performance. In this reference example pachinko machine, the hold change notice is made using the unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh, but the unexecuted hold display icon H shifts to the hold in progress change display area Dy, the change is executed, and after the winning lottery result related to the change is a loss, the hold in progress change display icon Y loses its meaning and becomes nothing. For example, even if the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H and the hold in progress change display icon Y becomes red, which has the highest expectation of winning a jackpot, due to the hold change notice, if the winning lottery result due to the change related to the hold information corresponding to the hold display icon H and Y is a loss, then nothing will have happened.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the interest of the game is improved by giving meaning to the executed/pending display icon Z whose variable display has ended.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, for example, during the next fluctuation display of case 1 shown in FIG. The four pending display icons Z and Y are the same color, and if the change ends and each pending display icon Z, Y, H shifts to the left, the executed pending display in the executed pending display area Dz The situation is such that all the icons Z have the same color. Under this situation, when the variation execution pending display icon Y shifts to the already executed pending display area Dz, the variation execution pending display icon Y is displayed in a red color. It is more advantageous for the player when the color is displayed in green (the case of FIG. 569(c)), where the expectation level of winning a jackpot is low.

The reason why it is highly advantageous for the player is that during the fluctuating display shown in FIG. This is because the result is a guaranteed jackpot. For this reason, even if the pending information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display icon H and the variable execution pending display icon Y is green, which has a lower expectation of winning a jackpot than red, the executed pending display icon H in the executed pending display area Dz Under conditions where the possibility that all display icons Z are the same color increases, the unexecuted pending display icon H and the variable execution pending display icon Y do not change to red, but remain green, and are placed in the executed pending display area Dz. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the player should make the transition. In addition, the green display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H and the variable execution pending display icon Y indicates that the pending information set for the green display color is different from the stage of expectation of winning a jackpot. It is possible to give it a special meaning such as confirmation of winning. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when all of the already executed pending display icons Z in the already executed pending display area Dz are the same color, the result of the winning lottery is a confirmed jackpot win. This gives the player an even greater sense of anticipation. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can further increase the excitement of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as shown in case 4, the display color of the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz may change. Therefore, even if the display colors of all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz do not match the same display color, the player may have a sense of expectation that the display color of the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz may change and the variable execution hold display icon Y displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy may move to the already executed hold display area Dz, causing all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz to match the same display color. And when the display color of the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz actually changes and the variable execution hold display icon Y moves to the already executed hold display area Dz, causing all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz to match the same display color, the player can be given great joy.

More specifically, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, one hold display icon (different color hold display icon) H, Y, Z in the judgment target hold display icon row RW is displayed by the assist setting process. By converting the colors, the display colors of the pending display icons H, Y, and Z in the judgment target pending display icon row RW were all configured to be the same color. For this reason, even if it is not possible to make all the executed pending display icons Z in the executed pending display area Dz have the same color by simply shifting the pending display icons H, Y, and Z, a different color pending display is possible. By converting the display color of the icons, all the executed pending display icons Z in the executed pending display area Dz can be made to have the same color. Generally, it takes a long time to play the game to make all the executed pending display icons Z in the executed pending display area Dz have the same color just by shifting the pending display icons H, Y, and Z. Through the setting process, it is possible to create a state in which all the completed execution pending display icons Z in the completed execution pending display area Dz are aligned in the same color even when the game is played for a relatively short period of time. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to perform the execution pending notice effect at a frequency suitable for practical use.

For example, by changing the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, all the executed pending display icons Z in the executed pending display area Dz will be aligned in the same color. Therefore, it is possible to give a great deal of joy to the player who had expected that all the execution pending display icons Z in the execution pending display area Dz would be all the same color.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the unexecuted hold display icon H is circular, and the executed hold display icon Z is hexagonal, and the two shapes are different. This makes it easy to distinguish between the unexecuted hold display icon H and the executed hold display icon Z, and makes it easy to tell that the unexecuted hold display icon H has shifted from the unexecuted hold display area Dh through the variable execution hold display area Dy to the executed hold display area Dz. This improves visibility.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the executed pending notice performance is executed in a gaming state (so-called normal state) in which it is substantially impossible for the game ball to enter the second starting port 34, and the game The configuration is such that it is not executed in a gaming state (during high-frequency support mode) in which it is easy for the ball to enter the second starting port 34. In the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role is opened and the electric role is won, the opening time for one time of the electric role is set to be long, and this is a state that is originally highly advantageous for the player, and the execution is pending. There is little need to execute a preview performance. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, since the fluctuation time is short, it is difficult to execute the already-executed pending preview effect in the unexecuted pending display area Dh and the variable ongoing pending display area Dy. For this reason, in this embodiment, it is possible to simplify control by not executing the executed pending notice effect during the high-frequency support mode, and in the normal state, execute the executed pending notice effect. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as one aspect of changing the display mode of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z by the hold change notice effect, the display color of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z is changed. Therefore, it is obvious at a glance whether all the pending display icons Z in the executed pending display area Dz have the same color. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the reserved information for the variable reserved display icon Y to be displayed in the variable reserved display area Dy is information that the winning lottery result is a losing lottery, the display color of the unexecuted reserved display icon H is changed by the same color removal process when the winning lottery result is a losing lottery result, so that the four already executed reserved display icons Z to be displayed in the first to fourth already executed reserved display areas Dz1 to Dz4 are prevented from becoming the same color. For this reason, the player expected that the display colors of the already executed reserved display icons Z in the already executed reserved display area Dz would all be the same color, and that the winning lottery result would be a winning lottery result, but the display colors of the already executed reserved display icons Z do not become the same color, and as a result, the winning lottery result is not a winning lottery result, and the player is disappointed and disappointed. In this way, the already executed reserved notice performance can give a sense of expectation that the winning lottery result will be a winning lottery result, while giving a sense of disappointment. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can provide the player with the ups and downs of opposing emotions such as anticipation and disappointment, further increasing the player's interest in the game.

For example, in a situation where all of the executed hold display icons Z in the executed hold display area Dz would end up being the same color if the hold display icons continued to shift, changing the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 may cause all of the executed hold display icons Z in the executed hold display area Dz to no longer be the same color. This can cause great disappointment to players who were hoping that all of the executed hold display icons Z in the executed hold display area Dz would be the same color.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the plurality of unplayed hold display icons H displayed in the first to fourth unplayed hold display areas Dh1 to Dh1 are generated by the assist setting process included in the executed hold notification process. In the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 closest to the variable execution pending display area Dy, the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H is set to the same color as the display color of the same color pending display icon (hereinafter referred to as , called the same color). In this case, the display mode of the unexecuted pending display icon H changes to the same color immediately before the unexecuted pending display icon H moves from the unexecuted pending display area Dh to the variable execution pending display area Dy. Therefore, it is possible to give a great sense of surprise to the player.

《12-5》Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. Processing executed in main control device 60 will be described first, and then processing executed in audio emission control device 90 and display control device 100 will be explained.

In order to advance each game round, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes will be explained next. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power outage signal, but a description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
576 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step Sw0101, a reading process is performed for the various detection sensors 67a to 67e. That is, the status of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main control unit 60 is read, the status of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is saved. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0102.

In step Sw0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Sw0103.

In step Sw0103, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the electric role opening counter C4, and the variation type counter CS are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the electric role opening counter C4, and the variation type counter CS, and when each of these counter values reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated values of each of the counters C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0104. Note that the value of the variation type counter CS is updated in the normal processing (FIG. 580) described later.

In step Sw0104, a ball entry process for the starting hole is executed in association with the ball entering the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34. Details of the ball entry process for the starting hole in step Sw0104 will be described later. After executing step Sw0104, proceed to step Sw0105.

In step Sw0105, a through ball entry process is executed when the ball enters the through gate 35. Details of the through ball entry processing in step Sw0105 will be described later. After executing step Sw0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Ball entry processing for starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be explained. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 576: Sw0104).

Figure 577 is a flowchart showing ball entry processing for the starting hole. In step Sw0201, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (starting ball entry) is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting hole 33. In step Sw0201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (Sw0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0202, where a prize ball command is set to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0203.

In step Sw0203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 33. Then, proceed to step Sw0204.

In step Sw0204, the starting pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as first starting pending number RaN), which is a value stored in the pending number storage area of the first holding area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first starting reservation number RaN indicates the number of balls being reserved based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. After that, the process advances to step Sw0209.

If it is determined in step Sw0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting hole 33 (Sw0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0205, where it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second starting hole 34 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting hole 34.

If it is determined in step Sw0205 that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 34 (Sw0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0206, where a prize ball command is set to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (Sw0205: NO), the ball entry process for this starting hole is terminated.

In step Sw0207, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 34. Then, proceed to step Sw0208.

In step Sw0208, the starting pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second starting pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the second holding area Rb, is read, and the second starting pending number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second starting hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on balls entering the second starting port 34. After that, the process advances to step Sw0209.

In step Sw0209, it is determined whether the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sw0204 or step Sw0208 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step Sw0209, if the start pending number N is not less than the upper limit (Sw0209: NO), the ball entry process for this start port is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sw0209, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit (Sw0209: YES), proceed to step Sw0210, add 1 to the start pending number N in the corresponding pending area, and then proceed to step Sw0211, add 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN. Then proceed to step Sw0212.

In step Sw0212, each value of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS updated in step Sw0103 (FIG. 576) is transferred to the first of the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area. It is stored in a storage area, that is, a storage area corresponding to the number of pending items added by 1 in step Sw0210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, each value of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sw0103 is It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN to which 1 was added in step Sw0210. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is set as the processing target, each value of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sw0103 is set as the second pending number RbN. It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start pending number RbN to which 1 was added in step Sw0210. After executing step Sw0212, the process advances to step Sw0213.

In step Sw0213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (pending information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. This is a process in which a determination is made as to whether or not an event has occurred before the pending information becomes a target of a winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing step Sw0213, the process advances to step Sw0214.

In step Sw0214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the destination determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as the pending command.

The hold command is a command to have the sub-side control device confirm the occurrence of a ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, and the judgment result (first judgment information) by the first judgment process based on the hold information acquired based on the ball entering, before the hold information becomes the subject of a winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal processing described below (Fig. 580: step Sw0503).

In addition, when the audio emission control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the audio emission control device 90 holds the display in the first starting port holding area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change in accordance with the increase in the number of objects. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first starting opening holding area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holding symbols. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the audio emission control device 90 holds the display in the second starting port holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change in accordance with the increase in the number of objects. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second starting opening holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holding symbols.

After executing step Sw0214, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<First judgment process>
Next, the destination determination process will be explained. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ball entry process for the starting port (FIG. 577: Sw0213).

FIG. 578 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, in the preliminary determination process, based on the pending information, the main controller 60 determines whether or not the winning lottery is correct, determines the type of jackpot, determines whether reach occurs, etc. This is a process that is executed before the target.

In step Sw0301, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 577) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entering before the current ball entering is read from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether there is a probability-variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entering. The lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined by determining whether or not there is a winning lottery in the falling lottery.

In step Sw0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery based on the current ball entry is executed as a game round, (Sw0302: YES), the process advances to step Sw0303, and the winning lottery table is stored. The low probability mode validity table (FIG. 557(a)) stored in the area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sw0305, and as a result of referring to the low probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the hit random number counter C1 that has been grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Sw0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to this ball entry is executed as a game round (Sw0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0304, where the winning/losing table for the high probability mode (Fig. 557 (b)) stored in the winning/losing table storage area 63a is referenced. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0305, where, as a result of referring to the winning/losing table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step Sw0305, if it is determined that the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot (Sw0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0306 and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sw0307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, if the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, refer to the first starting port distribution table. , when the ball is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to. After executing step Sw0307, the process advances to step Sw0308.

In step Sw0308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to a variable probability jackpot. In step Sw0308, if it is determined that it corresponds to a variable probability jackpot (Sw0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0309, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, in step Sw0308, if it is determined that the probability variable jackpot is not supported (Sw0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0310, and normal jackpot information is stored in the previous judgment processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sw0315.

If it is determined in step Sw0305 that the currently grasped value of the hit random number counter C1 does not correspond to a jackpot (Sw0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0311, where the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the memory area due to the current ball entering the starting hole is grasped. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0312, where the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table memory area 63c is referenced. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0313, where, as a result of referring to the reach judgment table, it is determined whether or not the currently grasped value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

In step Sw0313, if it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach (Sw0313: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0314, and the ready-to-reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sw0315. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw0313 that the reach occurrence is not supported (Sw0313: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0315.

In step Sw0315, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting port in the ball entering process for the starting port (FIG. 577) is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sw0316, and the variable time table for jackpot stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CS. After executing step Sw0316, the process advances to step Sw0317.

In step Sw0317, a fluctuation pattern is identified from the fluctuation time information acquired in step Sw0316, and the type of the identified fluctuation pattern is stored in the first determination process result storage area 64h. After executing step Sw0317, the first determination process is terminated.

<Incoming ball processing for through ball>
Next, the entry process for a through ball will be explained. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 576: Sw0105).

FIG. 579 is a flowchart showing the through ball entry process. In step Sw0401, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step Sw0401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sw0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0402, and whether or not the accessory reserve number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) Determine whether or not. Note that the number of held accessory objects SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that are held in order to perform the electric accessory release lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of accessory objects on hold is four. On the other hand, in step Sw0401, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sw0401: NO), the main through ball entering process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sw0402 that the number of reserved reels SN is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (Sw0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0403, where 1 is added to the number of reserved reels SN. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0404.

In step Sw0404, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step Sw0103 (FIG. 576) is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the electric accessory holding area 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the through ball entry process is completed.

On the other hand, in step Sw0402, if it is determined that the value of the number of accessory items reserved SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sw0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of accessory items reserved SN is greater than or equal to the upper limit value, The through ball entry process is completed without storing the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be explained. The normal process is a process that is started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter also referred to as "power on"). In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 580 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sw0501, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, etc. are executed. After that, the process advances to step Sw0502.

In step Sw0502, a startup command is set. The startup command is a command for instructing each control device on the sub side to start a demo video when the power is turned on. Then, proceed to step Sw0503.

In step Sw0503, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sw0502, the command set in the timer interrupt processing, or the previously executed normal processing, etc., is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, if commands related to production such as a startup command, a variation command, a type command, a hold command, etc. are set, they are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step Sw0503, the process advances to step Sw0504.

In step Sw0504, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step Sw0505.

In step Sw0505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sw0506. In step Sw0506, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display section 37a, second symbol display section 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game time control process will be described later. After executing step Sw0506, the process advances to step Sw0507.

In step Sw0507, a gaming state transition process for shifting the gaming state is executed. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the gaming state transition process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sw0508.

In step Sw0508, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric accessory support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is to be in an open state. Details of the electric support support process will be described later. After that, the process advances to step Sw0509.

In step Sw0509, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of this normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sw0503). In other words, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived. If it is determined in step Sw0509 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of this normal processing (Sw0509: NO), in steps Sw0510 and Sw0511, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal processing. Specifically, in step Sw0510, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 64. In addition, in step Sw0511, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw0509 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of this normal processing (Sw0509: YES), the process returns to step Sw0503 and executes each process from step Sw0503 to step Sw0508.

Note that since the execution time of each process from step Sw0503 to step Sw0508 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game Play Control Processing>
Next, the game play control process will be described. The game play control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 580: Sw0506).

Figure 581 is a flowchart showing the game play control process. In step Sw0601, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON. The open/close execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is to be transitioned to the open/close execution mode in the game state transition process described below, and is turned OFF when the open/close execution mode is to be terminated in the game state transition process.

In step Sw0601, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (Sw0601: YES), this game round control process is ended without executing any of the processes after step Sw0602. That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, a game round is not started regardless of whether a ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sw0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0602.

In step Sw0602, it is determined whether the special symbol unit 37 is displaying a change. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is displaying a change. This determination is made by determining whether the special symbol displaying a change flag in the special symbol displaying a change flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special symbol displaying a change flag is turned ON when a change display is to be started for either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, and is turned OFF when the change display is to end.

If it is determined in step Sw0602 that the special chart unit 37 is not displaying a change (Sw0602: NO), proceed to step Sw0603.

In step Sw0603, a fluctuation start process is executed to start the fluctuation display in the special symbol unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41. Note that details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Sw0603, this game round control process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw0602 that the special chart unit 37 is displaying a change (Sw0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0604.

In step Sw0604, a change end process is executed to end the change display in the special chart unit 37 and the change display in the pattern display device 41. The change end process will be described in detail later. After executing step Sw0604, this game play control process is terminated.

<Change start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 581: Sw0603).

FIG. 582 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Sw0701, it is determined whether the total number of reservations CRN exceeds "0". The case where the total reservation number CRN is "0" or less means that the number of startup reservations for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". Therefore, in step Sw0701, if it is determined that the total pending number CRN is less than or equal to "0" (Sw0701: NO), this fluctuation start process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw0701 that the total pending number CRN exceeds "0" (Sw0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0702.

In step Sw0702, a reserved information shift process is executed to set the reserved information stored in the first reserved area Ra or the second reserved area Rb to the state after the change started, and the process proceeds to step Sw0703. The details of the reserved information shift process will be described later.

In step Sw0703, a winning determination process including a process when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is performed. Details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sw0703, the process advances to step Sw0704.

In step Sw0704, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round, in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the occurrence of a reach, etc. This is the process. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sw0704, the process advances to step Sw0705.

In step Sw0705, a variation command is set. The variation command includes information indicating whether the current game round is related to the reserved information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the reserved information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, as well as information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the variation time set in step Sw0706. After executing step Sw0705, proceed to step Sw0706.

In step Sw0706, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and the result of the allocation determination. In other words, the type command includes, as information on the type of jackpot, information on a 16R special jackpot, information on an 8R special jackpot, information on a 16R regular jackpot, information on an 8R regular jackpot, or information on the result of a losing lottery.

The variation command and type command set in step Sw0705 and step Sw0706 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sw0503 in the normal process (FIG. 580). The audio emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step Sw0706, the process advances to step Sw0707.

In step Sw0707, the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round out of the first pattern display section 37a and the second pattern display section 37b is caused to start displaying a changing pattern. Specifically, if the second pattern display section flag in RAM 64 is not ON, the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first pattern display section 37a and a changing display is started, and if the second pattern display section flag is ON, the pattern display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the second pattern display section 37b and a changing display is started. After executing step Sw0707, the process proceeds to step Sw0708.

In step Sw0708, the special figure variation display flag stored in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sw0708, this fluctuation start process ends.

<Pending information shift processing>
Next, pending information shift processing will be explained. The pending information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 582: Sw0702).

Figure 583 is a flowchart showing the pending information shift process. In step Sw0801, it is determined whether the pending area to be processed for executing the pending information shift process is the first pending area Ra. Specifically, if the earliest pending information (the pending information stored in the first area of the first pending area Ra) among the pending information stored in the first pending area Ra (Figure 556) in a chronological order is stored in the pending area earlier than the earliest pending information (the pending information stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb) among the pending information stored in a chronological order in the second pending area Rb (Figure 556), it is determined that the pending area to be processed is the first pending area Ra. On the other hand, if the earliest pending information among the pending information stored in the second pending area Rb in a chronological order is stored in the pending area earlier than the earliest pending information among the pending information stored in the first pending area Ra in a chronological order, it is determined that the pending area to be processed is the second pending area Rb. In other words, by executing the processing of step Sw0801, the pending information can be processed in the order in which it was stored in the first pending area Ra or the second pending area Rb.

If it is determined in step Sw0801 that the holding area to be processed is the first holding area Ra (step Sw0801: YES), holding information shift processing for the first holding area in steps Sw0802 to Sw0807 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sw0801, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step Sw0801: NO ), the reservation information shift process for the second reservation area in steps Sw0808 to Sw0813 is executed.

In step Sw0802, after the first starting reservation number RaN of the first reservation area Ra is subtracted by 1, the process proceeds to step Sw0803, and the total reservation number CRN is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sw0804. In step Sw0804, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sw0805.

In step Sw0805, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the first reserved area Ra. This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas sequentially to the lower areas. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, the fourth area to the third area, and so on. After executing step Sw0805, proceed to step Sw0806.

In step Sw0806, when the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second symbol display section flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the current variable display is the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sw0807.

In step Sw0807, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for the audio/light emission control device 90, which is the sub-control device, to recognize that a shift of data in the reserved area has been performed. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, which includes information that the reserved area that is the subject of the current data shift corresponds to the first reserved area Ra, i.e., corresponds to the first starting port 33, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the audio/light emission control device 90. After that, this reserved information shift process is terminated. The shift command set in step Sw0807 is sent to the audio/light emission control device 90 in step Sw0503 in the normal process (FIG. 580).

In step Sw0801, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb (Sw0801: NO), step Proceed to Sw0808.

In step Sw0808, the second start pending number RbN in the second pending area Rb is decremented by 1. Then, proceed to step Sw0809. In step Sw0809, the total pending number CRN is decremented by 1, and proceed to step Sw0810, where the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, proceed to step Sw0811.

In step Sw0811, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step Sw0811, the process advances to step Sw0812.

In step Sw0812, if the second symbol display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sw0813.

In step Sw0813, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, it corresponds to the second starting port 34. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, this pending information shift process ends.

The shift command set in step Sw0813 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sw0503 in normal processing (FIG. 580). Based on the received shift command, the audio light emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device for changing the display in the second starting opening holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holding pieces. Send to 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second starting opening holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holding symbols.

<Hit detection process>
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 582: Sw0703).

Figure 584 is a flowchart showing the winning determination process. In step Sw0901, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flags storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sw0901, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (Sw0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0902, and a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the high probability mode win/fail table shown in FIG. 557(b). Determine whether After that, the process advances to step Sw0904.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw0901 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Sw0901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0903, and a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the low probability mode win/fail table shown in FIG. 557(a). Determine whether After that, the process advances to step Sw0904.

In step Sw0904, it is determined whether the result of the win/loss determination (win lottery) in step Sw0902 or step Sw0903 is a jackpot win. In step Sw0904, if the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot win (Sw0904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0905.

In step Sw0905, it is determined whether the second symbol display section flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sw0905, if it is determined that the second symbol display section flag is not ON (Sw0905: NO), proceed to step Sw0906 and refer to the distribution table for the first starting opening (see FIG. 558(a)). to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is within the numerical range of 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, or the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. Determine whether it is included in

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw0905 that the second symbol display section flag is ON (Sw0905: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0907, and the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 558(b)) Make a distribution decision by referring to the . Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of 16R probability variable jackpot or the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. After executing the process of step Sw0906 or step Sw0907, the process advances to step Sw0908.

In step Sw0908, a flag (jackpot flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sw0906 or step Sw0907 is turned on. Specifically, if it is a 16R definite strange jackpot, turn on the 16R definite strange jackpot flag, if it is an 8R certain strange jackpot, turn on the 8R certain strange jackpot flag, and if it is a 16R normal jackpot, turn on the 16R normal jackpot flag. If it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step Sw0908, the process advances to step Sw0909.

In step Sw0909, processing for setting a stop result for a jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game round in which the jackpot will be won, it is set which stop result will be displayed in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display. This is the process to do so. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63f (FIG. 555), the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sw0906 or step Sw0907 is determined. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sw0909, the hit determination process ends.

In step Sw0904, if the winning lottery result in step Sw0902 or step Sw0903 is not a jackpot (Sw0904: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0910, where the reach determination table is referred to and reach occurs in the game round. Determine whether or not. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as a reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 555). Determine whether the value matches the current value. After that, the process advances to step Sw0911.

In step Sw0911, if the result of the reach determination in step Sw0910 is that a reach will occur in that game round (Sw0911: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0912, where the reach occurrence flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flags storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sw0912, the process proceeds to step Sw0913.

On the other hand, in step Sw0911, if the result of the reach determination in step Sw0910 is that a reach will not occur in that game round (Sw0911: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0913 without executing step Sw0912.

In step Sw0913, a process for setting a stop result for failure is executed. Specifically, in the current game round where the result is a miss, the variable display is set to end with which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. It is processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for losing in the stop result table storage area 63f, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. , and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sw0913, the hit determination process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 582: Sw0704).

FIG. 585 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step Sw1001, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process advances to step Sw1002.

In step Sw1002, a process for identifying a variable time table is executed. The variable time table is data in a table format in which the data elements are information on the variable time (variation time information), which is the time from when the pattern starts to change until it stops, and the value of the variable type counter CS. Various types of variable time tables according to the game state, the presence or absence of a jackpot and time reduction, and the presence or absence of a reach are stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. In step Sw1002, one variable time table is identified from these variable time tables. Specifically, based on the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag, it is determined whether the current game state is in a low probability low support state, a high probability high support state, a low probability high support state, or a high probability low support state, and based on the result of the determination, the result of the hit/miss determination for determining the presence or absence of a jackpot or time reduction for the current game round, and the result of the reach determination for determining the presence or absence of a reach, one variable time table is identified from the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. After executing step Sw1002, proceed to step Sw1003.

In step Sw1003, the fluctuation time table identified in step Sw1002 is referenced to obtain fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sw1001. After executing step Sw1003, the process proceeds to step Sw1004.

In step Sw1004, the variable time information acquired in step Sw1003 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process is terminated.

<Variable end processing>
Next, the variation end process will be described. The variation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 581: Sw0604).

FIG. 586 is a flowchart showing the variation end processing. In step Sw1101, it is determined whether the variable time of the current game round has elapsed. As mentioned above, the fluctuation time is the time from when the symbol rows start fluctuating until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sw1101, it is determined whether the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (FIG. 585) described above. The value of this set variable time information is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

In step Sw1101, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sw1101: NO), this fluctuation end processing is ended.

In step Sw1101, if it is determined that the variable time has elapsed (Sw1101: YES), the process advances to step Sw1102, and the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b corresponding to the current game round are selected. A process is performed to end the variation of the symbols in the symbol display section. Subsequently, in step Sw1103, the special figure variation displaying flag stored in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step Sw1103, the process advances to step Sw1104.

In step Sw1104, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the current game round is a jackpot win or not. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R special jackpot flag, 8R special jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag in RAM 64 is ON. In step Sw1104, if none of the above flags are ON, that is, if it is determined that the result of the lottery for the current game round is not a jackpot win (Sw1104: NO), it proceeds to step Sw1105.

In step Sw1105, it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sw1105 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Sw1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1106, where it is determined whether the value of the play count counter PNC exceeds 0. If it is determined in step Sw1106 that the value of the play count counter PNC exceeds 0 (Sw1106: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1107, where the value of the play count counter PNC is decremented by 1. After executing step Sw1107, the process proceeds to step Sw1108. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1106 that the value of the play count counter PNC is 0 or less (Sw1106: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1108 without executing step Sw1107.

In step Sw1108, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sw1108 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Sw1108: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1109, where it is determined whether the value of the play count counter PNC exceeds 0.

If it is determined in step Sw1109 that the value of the number of games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sw1109: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1110 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After executing step Sw1110, this variation time end process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sw1108 that the high probability mode flag is ON (Sw1108: YES), or if it is determined in step Sw1109 that the value of the play count counter PNC is greater than 0 (Sw1109: YES), this variable time ending process is terminated without executing step Sw1110. Also, if it is determined in step Sw1105 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sw1105: NO), this variable time ending process is terminated without executing steps Sw106 to Sw1110.

On the other hand, in step Sw1104, any one of the 16R certain variable jackpot flag, 8R certain variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery for this game round. If it is determined that the jackpot has been won (Sw1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1111, and the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sw1111, this variation time end process is ended.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 580: Sw0507) of the normal process.

Figure 587 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step Sw1201, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON or not. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the large prize opening opening and closing processing period in the opening and closing execution mode (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is the period for executing the ending performance in the opening and closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sw1201 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sw1201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1202 to determine whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the opening period ends during the opening/closing execution mode and the large prize opening opening/closing processing period, during which the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is executed, begins, and is turned OFF when the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b ends.

In step Sw1202, if it is determined that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sw1202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1203, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sw1203 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sw1203: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1204, and it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. In step Sw1204, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sw1204: YES), the process advances to step Sw1205. On the other hand, in step Sw1204, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (Sw1204: NO), the main gaming state transition process is ended.

In step Sw1205, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. Then, proceed to step Sw1206. In step Sw1206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Then, proceed to step Sw1207.

In step Sw1207, an opening/closing scenario setting process is executed to set an opening/closing scenario. The opening/closing scenario determines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b during a round of play, and in this embodiment, it is a program that records the conditions for transitioning the opening/closing door 36b from a closed state to an open state (hereinafter also referred to as "opening conditions") and the conditions for transitioning the opening/closing door 36b from an open state to a closed state (hereinafter also referred to as "closing conditions"). The opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63h of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing to start each round game in the opening/closing execution mode.
When the above-mentioned one item is satisfied, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

The closing conditions are, for example, as follows:
- The time elapsed since the start of each round of play exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration (e.g., 15 seconds).
The number of game balls entering the big prize opening 36a after the start of each round of play exceeds a predetermined upper limit.
When either one of the above two conditions is met, the opening and closing door 36b transitions from an open state to a closed state.

After executing step Sw1207, the process proceeds to step Sw1208 described above.

In step Sw1208, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as the opening time). In this embodiment, the same fixed opening time is set for each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (i.e., 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3, which determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in the various counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sw1208, proceed to step Sw1209.

In step Sw1209, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in step Sw0503 in the normal processing (Fig. 580). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. Based on the received opening command, the audio and light emission control device 90 determines the content of the presentation corresponding to the opening time and the large prize opening/closing processing period, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step Sw1209, the process proceeds to step Sw1210, where the opening period flag is set to ON. After that, this game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step Sw1203 that the opening period flag is ON (Sw1203: YES), proceed to step Sw1211.

In step Sw1211, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sw1211 that the opening period has ended (Sw1211: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1212, where the opening period flag is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw1213.

In step Sw1213, a round display start process is executed to notify the type of the current opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays information on the round related to the above output. After executing step Sw1213, the process advances to step Sw1214.

In step Sw1214, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. In the following step Sw1215, an opening/closing process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 580: Step Sw0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sw1215, the main gaming state transition process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sw1202 that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sw1202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1216, where the special prize opening/closing process is executed. The special prize opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sw1216, the process proceeds to step Sw1217.

In step Sw1217, it is determined whether the large prize opening/closing process has been completed. Specifically, it is determined whether the large prize opening/closing process has been completed based on whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b has been opened is "0". If it is determined in step Sw1217 that the large prize opening/closing process has been completed (Sw1217: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1218. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1217 that the large prize opening/closing process has not been completed (Sw1217: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

In step Sw1218, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step Sw1219.

In step Sw1219, processing to end the round display is executed. In this processing, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display unit 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step Sw1219, the process proceeds to step Sw1220.

In step Sw1220, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, the same fixed length of ending time is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. Note that the fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sw1220, the process advances to step Sw1221.

In step Sw1221, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90 in step Sw0503 in normal processing (FIG. 580). In the audio and light emission control device 90, based on receiving the ending command, the performance corresponding to the opening and closing execution mode is ended. After executing step Sw1221, proceed to step Sw1222.

In step Sw1222, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, this game state transition process ends.

If it is determined in step Sw1201 that the ending period flag is ON (Sw1201: YES), proceed to step Sw1223.

In step Sw1223, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time in the ending time setting process (Sw1220) is "0". If it is determined in step Sw1220 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sw1223: YES), proceed to step Sw1224.

In step Sw1224, the ending period flag is set to OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw1225, where the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game round after the current ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sw1225, the process proceeds to step Sw1226, where the open/close execution mode flag is set to OFF. After executing step Sw1226, the process proceeds to step Sw1227.

In step Sw1227, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is "0". If the total reserved number CRN is "0", this means that the start reserved number is "0" for both the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. In step Sw1227, if it is determined that the total reserved number CRN is "0" (Sw1227: YES), proceed to step Sw1228.

In step Sw1228, a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is used to make the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, recognize that no pending information is stored in the pending information storage area 64b at the time when the symbol variation (gaming round) ends. This is a command that contains information about This set customer waiting command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sw1228 in the normal process (FIG. 580). After executing step Sw1228, the main game round control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1227 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (Sw1227: NO), the game turn control process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in step Sw1223 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4, which is set as the ending time, is not "0" (Sw1223: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Big prize opening opening/closing process>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be explained. The grand prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 587: Sw1216) of the gaming state transition process.

Figure 588 is a flowchart showing the large prize opening/closing process. In step Sw1301, it is determined whether the opening/closing door 36b is open or not. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the variable prize drive unit 36c. In step Sw1301, if it is determined that the opening/closing door 36b is not open (Sw1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1302.

In step Sw1302, it is determined whether the opening condition for opening door 36b has been met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open opening door 36b. In step Sw1302, if it is determined that the opening condition for opening door 36b has been met (Sw1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1303.

In step Sw1303, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sw1304.

In step Sw1304, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The opening/closing door opening command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 580: Step Sw0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sw1304, the big winning opening opening/closing process ends.

If it is determined in step Sw1302 that the opening condition for the opening/closing door 36b is not met (Sw1302: NO), the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps Sw1303 and Sw1304.

If it is determined in step Sw1301 that the door 36b is open (Sw1301: YES), the process advances to step Sw1305.

In step Sw1305, it is determined whether the conditions for closing the opening/closing door 36b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to close the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sw1305 that the conditions for closing the opening/closing door 36b are satisfied (Sw1305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1306.

In step Sw1306, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sw1307.

In step Sw1307, a door closing command is set. The opening/closing door close command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b is closed. The opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 580: Step Sw0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sw1307, the big winning opening opening/closing process ends.

In step Sw1305, if it is determined that the closing condition for the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sw1305: NO), the big prize opening opening/closing process is ended without executing step Sw1306 and step Sw1307.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 587: Sw1225).

FIG. 589 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sw1401, it is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to a variable probability jackpot among the jackpot flags is turned on. That is, it is determined whether the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sw1401, if it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON (Sw1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1402, and the 16R probability variation jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON. Turn off the flag that is ON. After executing step Sw1402, the process advances to step Sw1403.

In step Sw1403, the high probability mode flag is turned on, and then the process proceeds to step Sw1404, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sw1405.

In step Sw1405, a game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is set to 100. The value set in the number of games counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games played when the high frequency support mode is executed with a limited number of games played. After that, the process advances to step Sw1406.

In step Sw1406, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. . After that, the process advances to step Sw1411.

On the other hand, in step Sw1401, if it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag and the 8R probability variable jackpot flag in the RAM 64 are not ON (Sw1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1407, and the 8R normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sw1408.

In step Sw1408, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Sw1409, in which a game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is set to 100. After that, the process advances to step Sw1410.

In step Sw1410, a low probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the lottery mode is a low probability mode, is set as a command to be sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. Then, proceed to step Sw1411.

In step Sw1411, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is sent as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Set. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electricity support treatment>
Next, the electric support process will be described. The electric support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 580: Sw0508).

Figure 590 is a flowchart showing the electric support process. In step Sw1501, it is determined whether or not support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support in progress flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support in progress flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric device 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened, and is turned OFF when the electric device 34a is returned to the closed state. In step Sw1501, if it is determined that the support in progress flag is not ON (Sw1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1502.

In step Sw1502, it is determined whether the support win flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support win flag is a flag that is turned ON when an open state is won in the electric role opening lottery to determine whether the electric role 34a is opened or not, and is turned OFF when the support in progress flag is ON. In step Sw1502, if it is determined that the support win flag is not ON (Sw1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1503.

In step Sw1503, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general-purpose unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, at a 2 msec cycle.

If it is determined in step Sw1503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sw1503: NO), the main power support process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sw1503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1504.

In step Sw1504, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuating display of symbols in the common symbol unit 38. In step Sw1504, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sw1504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1505, and after setting the out-of-line display, the main electric role support process is ended. By setting the missing display, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the regular pattern unit 38 is ended with the missing display being stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sw1504: NO), the process advances to step Sw1506.

In step Sw1506, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0". In step Sw1506, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is "0" (Sw1506: NO), this electronic role support process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1506 that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0" (Sw1506: YES), the process advances to step Sw1507.

In step Sw1507, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Sw1508, in which it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in progress. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode in step Sw1507 (Sw1507: NO), and if it is the high frequency support mode in step Sw1508 (Sw1508: YES), the process advances to step Sw1509, where an electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Further, at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, "750" (ie, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. After that, the process advances to step Sw1510.

In step Sw1510, it is determined whether the result of the electric role opening lottery in step Sw1509 is a support win. In step Sw1510, if it is determined that the result of the electric role opening lottery is a support win (Sw1510: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1511, where the support win flag is turned ON and the second round counter area RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of RAM 64 is set to "3". The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric role 34a has been opened. Then, the electric role support processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1510 that the result of the electric role opening lottery is not a support win (Sw1510: NO), the electric role support processing ends without executing the processing of step Sw1511.

If it is determined in step Sw1507 that the mode is the open/close execution mode (Sw1507: YES), or if it is determined in step Sw1508 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (Sw1508: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1512, where a lottery is held to open the electric role device. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role reserve area 64c is shifted, and if the value of the electric role device opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is between 0 and 190, the electric role device opening lottery is won. In addition, at the same time as the electric role device opening lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (i.e. 29.5 sec). Then, the process proceeds to step Sw1513.

In step Sw1513, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sw1512 is a support win. In step Sw1513, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sw1513: NO), the electronic role support process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1513 that the support has been won (Sw1513: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1514, where the support win flag is turned ON, and after setting "1" in the second round counter area RC2, , ends this electronic support process.

In step Sw1502, if it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (Sw1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1515, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. In step Sw1515, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sw1515: NO), since the symbol in the general figure unit 38 is being displayed in a variable manner, the main electric role support processing is performed as it is. end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1515 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sw1515: YES), the process advances to step Sw1516.

In step Sw1516, a winning display is set. This ends the display of the changing patterns in the normal unit 38 with the winning display stopped. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw1517, where the support in progress flag is turned ON and the support winning flag is turned OFF. Then, the main electric role support process is terminated.

In step Sw1501, if it is determined that the supporting flag is ON (Sw1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1518, and an electric utility opening/closing control process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

<Electricity switching control processing>
Next, the electric utility switching control process will be described. The electric utility switching control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the electric utility support process (FIG. 590: Sw1518).

Figure 591 is a flowchart showing the electric role opening and closing control process. In step Sw1601, it is determined whether the electric role 34a is open or not. Whether the electric role 34a is open or not is determined by whether the electric role drive unit 34b is in a driven state or not. If it is determined that the electric role 34a is open (Sw1601: YES), proceed to step Sw1602.

In step Sw1602, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. In step Sw1602, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sw1602: NO), the main power switch opening/closing control process is directly ended. That is, if the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

In step Sw1602, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sw1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1603, where a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 34a to a closed state, "250" (ie, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is turned on. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sw1603, the process advances to step Sw1604.

In step Sw1604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step Sw1605, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". In step Sw1605, if it is determined that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sw1605: NO), the present electric role opening/closing control process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sw1605: YES), the process advances to step Sw1606 and the support flag is turned OFF. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

If it is determined in step Sw1601 that the electric role 34a is not open (Sw1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1607, where it is determined whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of the electric role 34a being closed. If it is determined in step Sw1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sw1607: NO), the electric role opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sw1607: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1608, where an opening process is performed to control the electric role 34a to an open state. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw1609.

In step Sw1609, it is determined whether the device is in the open/close execution mode, and if it is determined that the device is not in the open/close execution mode (Sw1609: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1610, where it is determined whether the device is in the high frequency support mode.

If it is determined in step Sw1610 that the high-frequency support mode is in effect (Sw1610: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1611, where "800" (ie, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1609 that the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (Sw1609: YES), or if it is determined in step Sw1610 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (Sw1610: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1612, where the second timer counter area T2 is set to "100" (i.e., 0.2 sec). After that, the main electric equipment opening/closing control process is terminated.

<<12-6>> Various processes executed in the audio/light-emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the audio and light emitting control device and the display control device to execute the advance notice performance and the result announcement performance will be described. First, the process executed in the audio and light emitting control device 90 will be described, and then the process executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the audio and light emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 will be described.

Figure 592 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed in the sound/light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is executed repeatedly at a relatively short period (e.g., 2 msec). The process of each step executed in the timer interrupt process is explained below.

In step Sw1701, a command storage process is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing a received command in the audio/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The audio/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer that enables the storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are stored sequentially in the ring buffer and are read out sequentially in the order in which they were stored. After executing step Sw1701, proceed to step Sw1702.

In step Sw1702, pending command response processing is executed. In the pending command response processing, processing corresponding to the first pending command among the commands stored in step Sw1701 is executed. Details of the pending command response processing will be described later. After executing step Sw1702, proceed to step Sw1703.

In step Sw1703, a game round performance setting process is executed. In the game round performance setting process, the performance to be executed in the game round from when the pattern change starts to when it stops is set. The game round performance setting process will be described in detail later. After executing step Sw1703, the process proceeds to step Sw1704.

In step Sw1704, processing for the opening and closing execution mode presentation is executed. In the opening and closing execution mode presentation processing, processing related to the presentation during the opening period, the presentation during the large prize opening and closing processing period, and the presentation during the ending period is executed. After executing step Sw1704, proceed to step Sw1705.

In step Sw1705, background effect processing is executed. In the background effect processing, a background video determined according to a command indicating the game status received from the main MPU 62 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. For example, a background video indicating that the high frequency support mode is continuing, a background video indicating that the high frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high probability mode is continuing are displayed. After executing step Sw1705, the process proceeds to step Sw1706.

In step Sw1706, other processing is executed. Other processing includes processing for displaying a demonstration image (moving image) on the symbol display device 41 when the player is not playing a game. After executing step Sw1706, the process advances to step Sw1707.

In step Sw1707, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in each of the above-mentioned production processes. After executing step Sw1707, the process advances to step Sw1708.

In step Sw1708, an audio output control process is executed to control the audio output of the speaker 46. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is executed based on the audio data read in the above-mentioned BGM process and each performance process. After executing step Sw1708, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Pending command processing>
Next, the hold command response process will be described. The hold command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 592: Sw1702).

Figure 593 is a flowchart showing the hold command response process. In step Sw1801, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step Sw1801, if it is determined that a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sw1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1802.

In step Sw1802, it is determined whether the pending command to be read this time was sent based on a ball entering the first starting hole 33. If it is determined in step Sw1802 that the pending command to be read this time was sent based on a ball entering the first starting hole 33 (Sw1802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1803, where the process executes an update process for the first pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. The first pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pending information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting hole 33 in the sound/light side MPU 92. In the update process for the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the information on the number of pending items included in the pending command to be read this time. After executing step Sw1803, the process proceeds to step Sw1804.

In step Sw1804, pending change notice processing is executed. The pending change notice processing is detailed in the "Pending change notice performance" column included in the "Summary of processing by gaming machines" column, and the display color of each pending display icon H, Y, Z is set to the default color. By changing the color from 1 to another color, a reservation change notice is executed that suggests the expectation level (reliability) of a jackpot for the reservation information corresponding to the reservation display icons H, Y, and Z whose display colors have changed. After executing step Sw1804, the process advances to step Sw1805.

In step Sw1805, an execution pending notice process is executed. The execution/pending notice process is detailed in the "Execution/Pending Notice Performance" column included in the "Summary of Processing by Gaming Machines" column, and all the execution/pending notice processing displayed in the completion/pending display area Dz When the display colors of the already executed pending display icons Z are the same color, the result of the winning lottery concerning the variation based on the pending information corresponding to the pending variation in execution display icon Y displayed in the pending variation in execution display area Dy. To execute an execution/pending notice indicating to a player that a jackpot is confirmed. Specifically, the executed pending notice process performs the process shown in FIG. 567. After executing step Sw1805, the process advances to step Sw1807.

In step Sw1802, if it is determined that the held command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sw1802: NO), that is, the held command is If it is determined that the transmission was based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process proceeds to step Sw1806, and updates the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. Execute. The second reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 in the sound-light side MPU 92. In the process of updating the second pending quantity counter area, the information in the second pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the command that is currently read. After executing step Sw1806, the process advances to step Sw1807.

The reason why the processes of step Sw1803 and step Sw1806 are performed as described above will be explained. In this embodiment, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, if the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information related to the ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 stores the hold information. is stored and held, whereas the audio emission control device 90 recognizes that the number of pending information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending quantity counter area or the second pending quantity counter area is incremented each time a pending command is received in the audio emission control device 90, the main control device 60 actually stores the pending quantity. An inconvenience may occur that the number of pending information that has been displayed does not match the number of pending information that the audio emission control device 90 is aware of. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment described above, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of items on hold, and the audio emission control device 90 converts the command into a hold command every time it receives a hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the number of held items included is set in the first held item counter area or the second held item counter area, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

In step Sw1807, a process of updating the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is executed. The total number of pending balls counter area indicates the sum of the number of pending information obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the sound/light side MPU 92. In this update process, the information in the total number of pending items counter area is changed to the sum of the information on the number of items on hold measured in the first number of pending items counter area and the information on the number of items on hold measured in the second number of pending items counter area. Update to. After executing step Sw1807, the process advances to step Sw1808.

If it is determined in step Sw1801 that no pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sw1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1808 without executing steps Sw1802 to Sw1807.

In step Sw1808, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the display mode of the first reservation display section 37c (the color of the LED lamp to be lit) is The display mode of the second reservation display section 37d (the LED to be lit control the color and combination of lamps). After executing step Sw1807, this pending command handling process ends.

<Game rendition setting process>
Next, the game run performance setting process will be explained. The game performance setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 592: Sw1703).

FIG. 594 is a flowchart showing the game round performance setting process. In step Sw1901, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command have been received. In step Sw1901, if it is determined that the variation command and the type command have not been received (Sw1901: NO), the present game performance setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1901 that a variation command and a type command have been received (Sw1901: YES), the process advances to step Sw1902.

In step Sw1902, the command for variation and the type command received this time are read, and from these commands, the presence or absence of a jackpot, the presence or absence of time saving, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a reach occurrence, and information on the variation time are grasped. Then, the obtained information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sw1903.

In step Sw1903, a production pattern setting process is executed. The performance pattern setting process includes the pattern of the performance to be executed in the current game round (the content and execution timing of the preview performance, the reach performance, the timing of change of the variable execution pending display icon Y in the variable execution pending display area Dy, etc.) This is the process of determining and setting based on the performance pattern table. The pending display area Dy during variation execution is an area that can display pending display information corresponding to the variation that started the variable game, that is, the game round after the execution of the game round operation. Further, the variation execution pending display icon Y is a pending display icon corresponding to the variation that started the variable game, that is, the game round after the game round operation has been executed. Details of the production pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sw1903, the process advances to step Sw1904.

In step Sw1904, a setting process for the stop symbols is executed. In the setting process for the stop symbols, if the winning lottery result for the current game is a 16R jackpot, an 8R jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, information corresponding to the stopping result in which the same combination of symbols is established on the active line L1 (see FIG. 554) is set as the information for the current stop symbols. Specifically, if the winning lottery result for the current game is a 16R jackpot or an 8R jackpot, a combination of the same odd symbols may be selected as the same combination of symbols, and a combination of the same even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd symbols and the combination of the same even symbols, but instead, the former may be configured to have a higher selection rate than the latter, or the latter may be configured to have a higher selection rate than the former. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R jackpot. In addition, if the result of the winning lottery for this game round is an 8R regular jackpot, a combination of the same even number symbols will be selected as the combination of the same symbols.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the current game round is a miss, the content of the variable command is used to determine whether or not a reach has occurred. If it is determined that a reach has occurred, the information corresponding to the stop result in which no identical symbol combination is formed on the active line L1 and in which a reach symbol combination is formed on the active line L1 is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that a reach has not occurred, the information corresponding to the stop result in which no identical symbol combination is formed on the active line L1 and in which a reach symbol combination is not formed on the active line L1 is set as the information of the current stop symbol.

In step Sw1905, processing for setting a fluctuation pattern for the current game round is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game round is specified from the content of the fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the stop symbols set in step Sw1904 are combined. Select the corresponding fluctuation pattern. In addition, when selecting a variation pattern, the variation pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the audio/light side ROM 93 is referred to. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sw1906.

In step Sw1906, the process for removing the same color when a loss occurs is executed. The process for removing the same color when a loss occurs is described in detail in the "Process for removing the same color when a loss occurs" column included in the "Outline of processing by the gaming machine" column, and is a process for preventing the four executed pending display icons Z displayed in the first to fourth executed pending display areas Dh1 to Dh4 from becoming the same color when the pending information for the variable pending display icon Y displayed in the variable pending display area Dy is a result of a winning or losing lottery that is a losing result. Specifically, the process for removing the same color when a loss occurs performs the process shown in FIG. 568. After executing step Sw1906, proceed to step Sw1907.

In step Sw1907, the production pattern set in step Sw1903 in the current game round, the stop symbol set in step Sw1904, the information on the fluctuation pattern set in step Sw1905, and the information on the hold display obtained in step Sw1906 are produced. Set to command. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sw1908, and the relevant production command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the performance content corresponding to the received performance command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sw1908, the process advances to step Sw1909.

In step Sw1909, update processing at the start of fluctuation is executed. The update processing at the start of fluctuation is processing for updating the pending display in the first pending display area Ds1 or the second pending display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. Details of the update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described later. After executing step Sw1909, this game round performance setting processing is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the production pattern setting process will be explained. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 594: Sw1903) of the game round effect setting process.

FIG. 595 is a flowchart showing the production pattern setting process. In step Sw2001, the random number RN for the production pattern is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound and light side RAM 94. After that, the process advances to step Sw2002.

In step Sw2002, a process for identifying a presentation pattern table is executed. The presentation pattern table is three-dimensional tabular data whose data elements are the presentation pattern executed in a game round, the variable time, and the presentation pattern random number RN. Various types of presentation pattern tables according to the presence or absence of a jackpot, the presence or absence of time-saving, and the presence or absence of a reach are stored in the presentation pattern table storage area 93a of the ROM 93. In step Sw2002, one presentation pattern table is identified from these presentation pattern tables. Specifically, one presentation pattern table is identified from the presentation pattern table storage area 93a of the ROM 93 based on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the presence or absence of time-saving, the type of jackpot, and the presence or absence of a reach, which are grasped in step Sw1902 of the game round presentation setting process (FIG. 594). After executing step Sw2002, proceed to step Sw2003.

In step Sw2003, the presentation pattern table identified in Sw2002 is referenced to obtain a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable time determined in step Sw1902 of the game round presentation setting process (FIG. 594) and the value of the random number RN for the current presentation pattern obtained in step Sw2001. After executing step Sw2003, proceed to step Sw2004.

In step Sw2004, the effect pattern acquired in step Sw2003 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Sw2004, the main performance pattern setting process is ended.

<Update processing at the start of fluctuation>
Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of variation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 594: Sw1909) of the game run performance setting process.

Figure 596 is a flowchart showing the update process at the start of fluctuation. In step Sw2101, it is determined whether the currently received fluctuation command relates to the pending information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting hole 33. In step Sw2101, if it is determined that the currently received fluctuation command relates to the pending information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting hole 33 (Sw2101: YES), it proceeds to step Sw2102 and updates the information in the first pending number counter area of the sound/light side RAM 94 so that the number stored in the first pending number counter area is decremented by one. Then, it proceeds to step Sw2103.

In step Sw2103, a process is executed to shift the data (display color and success/failure result of the winning lottery) stored in the special 1 reserved effect storage area (see FIG. 566) stored in the sound/light side RAM 94. This shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the storage area to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the fourth executed pending display area Dz4 is cleared, and the data is cleared from the third executed pending display area Dz3 to the fourth executed pending display area Dz4, and from the second executed pending display area Dz2 to the third executed pending display area Dz2. Execution pending display area Dz3, first executed pending display area Dz1 → second executed pending display area Dz2, fluctuating execution pending display area Dy → first executed pending display area Dz1, first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 → Fluctuation execution pending display area Dy, second unexecuted pending display area Dh2 → first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, third unexecuted pending display area Dh3 → second unexecuted pending display area Dh2, fourth unexecuted pending display The data in each area is shifted from area Dh4 to third unexecuted pending display area Dh3. After executing step Sw2103, the process advances to step Sw2105.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw2101 that the currently received variation command does not relate to the reserved information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 (Sw2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw2104, where the information in the second reserved number counter area of the sound/light side RAM 94 is updated so that the number stored in the second reserved number counter area is decremented by one. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw2105.

In step Sw2105, the information in the total number of pending items counter area is updated so that the total number of pending items stored in the total number of pending items counter area of the audio-optical side RAM 94 is subtracted by one. Thereafter, the update process at the start of the fluctuation is ended.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main process that is executed when a command is received from the audio emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power is turned on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the contents of the command received from the audio emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

Figure 597 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main processing is executed when the power is turned on, and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing is described below.

In step Sw2201, the initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized, and the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings required for initialization are performed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw2202.

In step Sw2202, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, a description will be given of the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio and light emission control device 90.

FIG. 598 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sw2301, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 599 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after specifying an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, drawing and drawing of the image on the VDP 105 are performed. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image when the drawing process or display process of the image is not completed, so that it is possible to prevent the start of drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area where the image information being displayed is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt process are described below.

In step Sw2401, command response processing is executed. In the command response processing, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (Fig. 598) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a performance command is stored, control of the drawing and display of the image is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

If a production operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the production operation is executed. Image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In addition, in the command response process (Sw2401), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processes corresponding to all the analyzed commands are executed. The reason for this is explained below. The command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the performance is set by the sound and light emission control device 90 and the performance is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the performance are stored in the command storage area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the form of the performance, such as the preview performance or the stop pattern set by the sound and light emission control device 90, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that form is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

In step Sw2402, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Sw2401) etc. . After that, the process advances to step Sw2403.

In step Sw2403, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the contents of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, as specified by the display setting processing (Sw2402), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, rotation angle, etc., are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step Sw2404.

In step Sw2404, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, determined by the task process (Sw2403), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the image drawing process based on this information, and also sends the image along with the drive signal in order to display the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process on the pattern display device 41. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sw2405, and after other processing is executed, the V interrupt processing is ended. An example of specific control for executing various processes including jackpot effects in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

<12-7> Actions and Effects:
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present invention, a predetermined number of already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz corresponding to the play round after the play round operation is executed can be used to realize a new and unprecedented presentation, such as suggesting to the player that he or she has definitely won a jackpot.

Here, let us consider as a reference example a pachinko machine that has the above-mentioned function of the hold change notice performance, but does not have the above-mentioned function of the hold already executed notice performance. In this reference example pachinko machine, the hold change notice is made using the unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh, but the unexecuted hold display icon H shifts to the hold in progress change display area Dy, the change is executed, and after the winning lottery result related to the change is a loss, the hold in progress change display icon Y loses its meaning and becomes nothing. For example, even if the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H and the hold in progress change display icon Y becomes red, which has the highest expectation of winning a jackpot, due to the hold change notice, if the winning lottery result due to the change related to the hold information corresponding to the hold display icon H and Y is a loss, then nothing will have happened.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment aims to increase the interest of the game by giving meaning to the executed pending display icon Z whose variable display has ended.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, for example, during the next change display of case 1 shown in FIG. 569(c), the four pending display icons Z, Y from the third executed pending display area Dz3 to the pending change display area Dy are all the same color, and if the change ends as it is and the pending display icons Z, Y, and H shift to the left, all of the pending change display icons Z in the pending change display area Dz will be the same color. In this situation, when the pending change display icon Y shifts to the pending change display area Dz, it is more advantageous for the player to have the pending change display icon Y displayed in green, which has a lower expectation of winning the jackpot than red (as in FIG. 569(c)), which is a color that is less likely to win the jackpot than red, than to have the pending change display icon Y displayed in red.

The reason why it is highly advantageous for the player is that during the fluctuating display shown in FIG. This is because the result is a guaranteed jackpot. For this reason, even if the pending information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display icon H and the variable execution pending display icon Y is green, which has a lower expectation of winning a jackpot than red, the executed pending display icon H in the executed pending display area Dz Under conditions where the possibility that all display icons Z are the same color increases, the unexecuted pending display icon H and the variable execution pending display icon Y do not change to red, but remain green, and are placed in the executed pending display area Dz. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the player should make the transition. In addition, the green display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H and the variable execution pending display icon Y indicates that the pending information set for the green display color is different from the stage of expectation of winning a jackpot. It is possible to give it a special meaning such as confirmation of winning. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when all the execution pending display icons Z in the execution pending display area Dz are all the same color, the winning lottery result is determined to be a jackpot win. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as shown in case 4, for example, the display color of the executed pending display icon Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz may change. Therefore, for the player, for example, there is a situation in which the display colors of all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz will not be the same display color. Also, perhaps the display color of the executed pending display icon Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz changes, and the variable executed pending display icon Y displayed in the variable executed pending display area Dy changes. By moving to the pending display area Dz, it is possible to create an expectation that all executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz will be aligned in the same display color. can. Then, the display color of the executed pending display icon Z that is actually displayed in the executed pending display area Dz changes, and the variable execution pending display icon Y moves to the executed pending display area Dz. When all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the pending display area Dz have the same display color, it is possible to give great joy to the player.

More specifically, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, one hold display icon (different color hold display icon) H, Y, Z in the judgment target hold display icon row RW is displayed by the assist setting process. By converting the colors, the display colors of the pending display icons H, Y, and Z in the judgment target pending display icon row RW were all configured to be the same color. For this reason, even if it is not possible to make all the executed pending display icons Z in the executed pending display area Dz have the same color by simply shifting the pending display icons H, Y, and Z, a different color pending display is possible. By converting the display color of the icons, all the executed pending display icons Z in the executed pending display area Dz can be made to have the same color. Generally, it takes a long time to play the game to make all the executed pending display icons Z in the executed pending display area Dz have the same color just by shifting the pending display icons H, Y, and Z. Through the setting process, it is possible to create a state in which all of the completed execution pending display icons Z in the completed execution pending display area Dz are aligned in the same color even when playing a game for a relatively short period of time. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to perform the execution pending notice effect at a frequency suitable for practical use.

For example, by changing the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, all the executed pending display icons Z in the executed pending display area Dz will be aligned in the same color. Therefore, it is possible to give a great deal of joy to the player who had expected that all the execution pending display icons Z in the execution pending display area Dz would be all the same color.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the unplayed pending display icon H is circular, the completed played pending display icon Z is hexagonal, and the shapes of the two are different. For this reason, it is easy to distinguish between the unexecuted pending display icon H and the executed pending display icon Z, and the unexecuted pending display icon H passes from the unexecuted pending display area Dh to the variable execution pending display area Dy, and It becomes easy to determine that the screen has been shifted to the hold display area Dz. Therefore, visibility is improved.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the executed pending notice performance is executed in a gaming state (so-called normal state) in which it is virtually impossible for the game ball to enter the second starting port 34, and the game The configuration is such that it is not executed in a gaming state (during high-frequency support mode) in which it is easy for the ball to enter the second starting port 34. In the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role is opened and the electric role is won, the opening time for one time of the electric role is set to be long, and this is a state that is originally highly advantageous for the player, and the execution is pending. There is little need to execute a preview performance. Moreover, in the high-frequency support mode, since the fluctuation time is short, it is difficult to execute the already-executed pending preview effect in the unexecuted pending display area Dh and the variable ongoing pending display area Dy. For this reason, in the present embodiment, it is possible to simplify control by not executing the executed pending notice effect during the high-frequency support mode, and in the normal state, execute the executed pending notice effect. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as one way of changing the display mode of the reserve display icons H, Y, Z due to the reserve change notice performance, the display color of the reserve display icons H, Y, Z is changed, so it is immediately obvious whether or not all of the reserve display icons Z in the executed reserve display area Dz have become the same color. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to further increase the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the pending information regarding the variable execution pending display icon Y that will be displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy is information indicating that the winning lottery result is a loss. In this case, for example, by changing the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H using the process for removing the same color at the time of discontinuation, the four already executed pending display areas Dz1 to Dz4 are displayed in the first to fourth executed pending display areas Dz1 to Dz4. This prevents the execution pending display icons Z from being the same color. For this reason, the player expected that the display color of the executed pending display icon Z in the executed pending display area Dz would all be the same color, and that the result of the winning lottery would be a confirmed jackpot. However, the displayed colors of the executed pending display icons Z do not become the same color, and as a result, the jackpot is not confirmed and the player is disappointed and disappointed. In this way, the performance pending notice effect can give a sense of expectation that the result of the winning lottery will be a confirmed jackpot, while also giving a sense of disappointment. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a feeling of conflicting emotions such as a feeling of anticipation and a feeling of disappointment, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

For example, in a situation where if the pending display icons continue to shift, all the executed pending display icons Z in the executed pending display area Dz are likely to have the same color, the unexecuted pending display icons Z in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 By changing the display color of the execution pending display icon H, the executed pending display icons Z in the executed pending display area Dz may not all have the same color. Therefore, it is possible to give a great feeling of disappointment to the player who had expected all the executed pending display icons Z in the executed pending display area Dz to be all the same color.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the assist setting process included in the executed hold notification process may change the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1, which is closest to the variable hold display area Dy, to the same color as the display color of the hold display icon of the same color (hereinafter referred to as the same color) among the multiple unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the first to fourth unexecuted hold display areas Dh1 to Dh1. In this case, the display mode of the unexecuted hold display icon H will switch to the same color just before the unexecuted hold display icon H moves from the unexecuted hold display area Dh to the variable hold display area Dy, giving the player a great sense of surprise.

<<12-8>> Modification of the 12th embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as in the above embodiment will be omitted.

12-8-1 Variation 1:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modified example, when all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are the same color as the already executed hold notice, the result of the winning lottery is suggested to the player that the winning lottery result is a confirmed jackpot. In contrast, as a modified example, when all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are arranged to satisfy a specific rule, even if they are not all the same color, the winning lottery result may be suggested to the player that the winning lottery result is a confirmed jackpot. The specific rule may be, for example, when all colors (white, blue, green, red) are arranged, when the display colors are arranged in the order of the low expectation of winning the jackpot from the first already executed hold display area Dz1 to the fourth already executed hold display area Dz4 (white, blue, green, red), when the display colors are arranged in the order of the high expectation of winning the jackpot from the high expectation of winning the jackpot from the first already executed hold display area Dz1 to the fourth already executed hold display area Dz4 (red, green, blue, white), etc. According to these modified examples, similarly to the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation of winning the jackpot, thereby making the game more enjoyable.

《12-8-2》Variation 2:
In the above-described twelfth embodiment and its modifications, it is assumed that the advantage for the player increases when all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz are all aligned in the same color. , the winning lottery result is configured to indicate to the player that the jackpot is confirmed. This increase in advantage for players includes a configuration in which the winning lottery result is a guaranteed jackpot win, but a configuration that increases expectations for the fluctuating display, a configuration that increases actual profits, and a configuration that increases the profitability. It may also be configured to notify high-level matters. Structures that increase expectations for fluctuating displays include those in which the type of reach develops into a type with high expectations for winning a jackpot, those in which the preview presentation is replaced by a presentation with high expectations for winning a jackpot, and the time between presentation and result announcement. Various methods can be adopted, such as one in which a timer that specifies the timer is activated. Various types of actual benefits can be adopted, such as a configuration in which the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times, a configuration in which the player wins a time-saving award, a configuration in which he wins a small win in a jackpot lottery. "Time saving grant" is a result of success or failure that is a trigger for transitioning to the support mode, but does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which opening/closing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is executed. Various items can be adopted as highly useful notification items, such as settings of the pachinko machine (settings that determine the probability of winning a jackpot), a base value indicating the ball payout rate during normal times, etc. With these configurations, as in the twelfth embodiment and its modifications, it is possible to improve the sense of anticipation and increase the interest in the game.

《12-8-3》Variation 3:
In the above-mentioned twelfth embodiment and its modified examples, when all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz are aligned in the same color as the executed pending notice, the result of the winning lottery is determined. The system is configured to suggest to the player that the jackpot is guaranteed to be won. This configuration provides the same advantage to the player regardless of whether the displayed colors are blue, green, or red. On the other hand, as a modification, a display color may be configured such that the higher the difficulty level of displaying the same color, the higher the advantage for the player. Specifically, it is more advantageous for the player if the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz are all green than if they are all blue. . Furthermore, it is more advantageous for the player if the completed execution pending display icons Z displayed in the completed execution pending display area Dz are all red than if they are all green. According to this modification, it is possible to increase or decrease the advantage given to the player, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

12-8-4 Variation 4:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modified example, when all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are the same color, there are a case where the already executed hold display area Dz is composed of four unit areas Dh1 to Dh4, and a case where the already executed hold display area Dz is composed of three unit areas Dh1 to Dh3, and in either case, the advantage to the player is the same. On the other hand, as a modified example, when all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are the same color, the more unit areas that compose the already executed hold display area Dz, the higher the advantage to the player. Specifically, the more advantageous the player is when the already executed hold display area Dz is composed of four unit areas Dh1 to Dh4 than when the already executed hold display area Dz is composed of three unit areas Dh1 to Dh3. According to this modified example, the advantage given to the player can be increased or decreased, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

《12-8-5》Variation 5:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modifications, in the assist setting process (S9 in FIG. 567) in the already-executed pending notice process, the pending display icons H, Y, and Z are displayed at various timings illustrated in cases 2 to 7. The display color is changed, but the timing at which this display color is changed in each game round is the timing at which the variable display starts. On the other hand, as a modified example, in the assist setting process, the display colors of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z may be changed at a timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display. According to this modification, since the display colors of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z change during the variable display of game times, even after the start of the variable display, the judgment target hold display icon row RW This makes the player look forward to seeing whether the display colors of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z match, and the game can be made even more interesting.

In this modified example 5, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 may be configured to display an effect in which a moving object reaches the reserved display icons H, Y, and Z at the timing when the display color changes. The moving object may be a tangible object such as a petal, confetti, or a fireball, or an intangible object such as a ray, a laser beam, or a radio wave. In addition, in this modified example 5, a configuration may be configured to display an effect in which the shape of the reserved display icons H, Y, and Z is changed from the default circular or hexagonal shape to another shape (for example, a shape imitating a character or a coat of arms) at the timing when the display color changes or before that timing. With these configurations, the player is made to pay attention to the change in the display color of the reserved display icons H, Y, and Z by the moving object reaching the reserved display icons H, Y, and Z or the shape of the reserved display icons H, Y, and Z changing to a special shape, and the player is made to look forward to the reserved display icons H, Y, and Z displayed in the judgment target reserved display icon row RW all becoming the same color.

In this variant 5, i.e., in the assist setting process, in which the display color of the pending display icons H, Y, and Z is changed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display was started, the display color of the pending display icons H, Y, and Z can be configured to be consistent in the judgment target pending display icon row RW by changing the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1. With this configuration, the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H changes to the same color just before transitioning from the unexecuted pending display area Dh to the variable execution pending display area Dy, which can give great joy to the player.

12-8-6 Variation 6:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modified example, the assist setting process in the executed hold notice process is configured to change the display color of one hold display icon H, Y, Z in the judgement target hold display icon column RW so that all the display colors of the hold display icons H, Y, Z in the judgement target hold display icon column RW are the same color. In contrast, as a modified example, the display colors of two or more hold display icons H, Y, Z in the judgement target hold display icon column RW may be changed so that all the display colors of the hold display icons H, Y, Z in the judgement target hold display icon column RW are the same color. With this configuration, even if the judgement target hold display icon column RW contains only different color hold display icons, the player can expect that all the hold display icons H, Y, Z in the judgement target hold display icon column RW will be the same color.

12-8-7 Variation 7:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modified example, in the assist setting process in the executed hold notice process, a different color hold display icon is specified from the judgment target hold display icon row RW, and the display color of the specified different color hold display icon is changed. In contrast to this, as a modified example, a different color hold display icon may be specified according to the operation of the performance operation button 24 by the player, and the display color of the different color hold display icon may be changed after the different color hold display icon is specified by the performance operation button 24. Furthermore, a mini-game performance may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and the display color of the different color hold display icon may be changed after the different color hold display icon is specified according to the operation of the performance operation button 24 by the player for the mini-game performance. According to these modified examples, a special operation by the player is required, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

12-8-8 Variation 8:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modified example, the display color of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z is changed as the hold change notice and the executed hold notice, but not limited thereto. The shape of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z may be changed as the hold change notice and the executed hold notice. The size of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z may be changed as the hold change notice and the executed hold notice. The type of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z may be changed as the hold change notice and the executed hold notice. The image added to the hold display icons H, Y, and Z may be changed as the hold change notice and the executed hold notice. In addition, a combination of a color change, a shape change, a size change, a type change, and an added image change may be performed. In this way, any kind of effect may be performed as the hold change notice and the executed hold notice as long as the display mode is changed.

12-8-9 Variation 9:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modified example, the pending change display icon Y that has shifted from the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 to the pending change display area Dy is displayed in the pending change display area Dy from when the change starts until the change stops. In contrast, as a modified example, the pending change display icon Y that has shifted from the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 to the pending change display area Dy is displayed in the pending change display area Dy from when the change display starts until a predetermined period (a period before the change stops, for example, several seconds) has elapsed, and may disappear after the predetermined period has elapsed. In principle, the disappeared pending change display icon Y is shifted to the already executed pending display area Dz side and redisplayed at the timing when the change display ends and the stop display period ends, but it may be configured not to be redisplayed and not shifted to the already executed pending display area Dz side.

Here, consider a case where each of the already executed pending display icons Z displayed in the first to third already executed pending display areas Dz1 to Dz3 is green, the variable pending display icon Y displayed in the variable pending display area Dy is blue, and the not executed pending display icon H displayed in the first not executed pending display area Dh1 is green. In this case, if the variable pending display icon Y displayed in the variable pending display area Dy disappears a predetermined period after the variable display starts, and the variable pending display icon Y does not shift to the already executed pending display area Dz side, at the timing when the next game change starts, the not executed pending display icon H (green) displayed in the first not executed pending display area Dh1 shifts to the variable pending display area Dy, so that the four already executed pending display icons Z from the third already executed pending display area Dz3 to the variable pending display area Dy are aligned in the same color. For this reason, according to this configuration, the four already executed pending display icons Z are suddenly aligned in the same color, which can give the player a sudden sense of surprise. This can increase the enjoyment of the game.

As another variation, in the twelfth embodiment, in the configuration in which the pending change display icon Y that has shifted from the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 to the pending change display area Dy is displayed in the pending change display area Dy from when the change starts until when the change stops, the pending change display icon Y may disappear after the change ends and not shift to the already executed pending display area Dz.

《12-8-10》Variation 10:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modified examples, when the display colors of the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz are all the same color, the displayed icons are displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy. A preview performance is realized in which the winning lottery result regarding the variation based on the pending display icon Y corresponding to the pending variation execution display icon Y is determined to be a jackpot. On the other hand, as a modified example, all the executed pending display icons Z and variable executed pending display icons Y displayed within the range including the executed pending display area Dz and the variable executed pending display area Dy (i.e. 5 pieces) When all of the same color matches, the jackpot is confirmed as the result of the winning lottery based on the pending information corresponding to the pending variation pending display icon Y displayed in the pending variation pending display area Dy. It may also be configured to realize a preview performance. This configuration will be explained using case 8 as an example.

・Case 8:
FIG. 600 is an explanatory diagram showing how each pending display area Dh, Dy, and Dz changes in case 8. FIG. 600(a) shows the variable display in progress, FIG. 600(b) shows the state after the variation has stopped, and FIG. 600(c) shows the variable display in progress for the next game round. It changes in the order of FIG. 600(a), FIG. 600(b), and FIG. 600(c).

In the example shown in FIG. 600(a), the five hold display icons H, Y, and Z from the third executed hold display area Dz3 to the first not executed hold display area Dh1 are all the same color, and if the change ends and the hold display icons Z, Y, and H shift to the left, all five hold display icons Z and Y displayed within the range including the executed hold display area Dz and the change execution hold display area Dy will be the same color. In this situation, when the not executed hold display icon H in the first not executed hold display area Dh1 shifts to the change execution hold display area Dy, it is more advantageous for the player to have the not executed hold display icon H displayed in green (as in FIG. 600(b)), which has a lower expectation of winning a jackpot than red, than to have it displayed in red.

The reason why the advantage for the player is high is that during the fluctuation display of the next game time shown in FIG. This is because the displayed pending display icons Z and Y are all the same color, and the result of the winning lottery is determined to be a jackpot. For this reason, in this modification as well, even if the pending information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display icon H and the variable executed pending display icon Y is green, which has a lower expectation of winning a jackpot than red, the already executed pending display area Under conditions where there is a high possibility that the pending display icons Z and Y within the range including Dz and the variable execution pending display area Dy are all the same color, the unexecuted pending display icon H and the variable executing pending display icon Y It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the color will remain green without changing to red and move to the variable execution pending display area Dy or the already executed pending display area Dz. In addition, the green display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H and the variable execution pending display icon Y indicates that the pending information set for green is different from the level of expectation of winning a jackpot, or that the jackpot winning is confirmed. It can have a special meaning. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

《12-8-11》Variation 11:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modifications, the number of unit areas constituting the completed execution pending display area Dz is switched to any number between 4 and 1. In contrast, as a modification, The number of unit areas constituting the executed pending display area Dz may be configured to be switched to any number from 4 to 0, including 0.

12-8-12 Variation 12:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modified example, the number of unit areas constituting the executed hold display area Dz can be changed by lottery, but as a modified example, the number of unit areas constituting the executed hold display area Dz may be fixed to a certain number. For example, the number of unit areas constituting the executed hold display area Dz may be fixed to any one of 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4. In this configuration, unlike the pachinko machine 10 of the above embodiment, the condition that all the executed hold display icons Z in the executed hold display area Dz are aligned to the same color is not relaxed, and the difficulty of the condition is always constant. Therefore, according to this modified example, the difficulty of the condition that all the executed hold display icons Z in the executed hold display area Dz are aligned to the same color is not changed, and unnecessary expectations or disappointment are not given to the player.

12-8-13 Variation 13:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modified example, the already executed hold notice is configured to perform a notice that the result of the winning lottery will be a jackpot winning confirmation. In contrast to this, as a modified example, the already executed hold notice may be configured to perform a notice that the result of the winning lottery is highly likely to be a jackpot winning (i.e., the expectation of winning the jackpot winning is high). The degree of expectation is higher than the expectation associated with the red color with the highest expectation in the hold change notice performance. In other words, when the display colors of the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are all the same color due to the already executed hold notice, the expectation of the result of the winning lottery related to the change based on the hold information corresponding to the change execution hold display icon Y displayed in the change execution hold display area Dy to be a jackpot winning may be configured to perform a notice that is higher than the expectation associated with the red color with the highest expectation in the hold change notice performance. With this configuration, similar to the twelfth embodiment described above, under certain conditions, it is possible to provide a player with a greater advantage when a specific pending display icon is displayed in green, which has a lower expected probability of winning a jackpot than when it is displayed in red, thereby making the game more enjoyable.

12-8-14 Variation 14:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modified example, in the assist setting process in the executed hold notice process, a different color hold display icon is specified from the judgement target hold display icon row RW, and the display color of the specified different color hold display icon is changed to the same color as the display color of the same color hold display icon. In contrast, as a modified example, a pattern row of a specific color may be stopped and displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and after the pattern row of the specific color is displayed, the display color of the specified different color hold display icon may be changed to the specific color (the color of the stopped pattern row). In this modified example, the pattern display device 41 displays patterns showing the numbers 1 to 9 in a variable manner, and the patterns showing the numbers 1 to 9 are classified into three types by color, and the patterns showing the numbers 1 to 3 are blue, the patterns showing the numbers 4 to 6 are green, and the patterns showing the numbers 7 to 9 are red. According to this configuration, when a player wins the lottery using a specific random number, the same color as the display color of the same color reserved display icon is set as a specific color, and a pattern row that is a combination of patterns showing numbers corresponding to this specific color is stopped and displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and after this pattern row is displayed, the display color of the specified different color reserved display icon is changed to the specific color (the color of the stopped pattern row). According to this configuration, the colors of the reserved display icons H, Y, and Z change according to the color of the stopped pattern row, and the judgment target reserved display icon row RW all change to the same color, which further improves the interest of the game.

《12-8-15》Variation 15:
In the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, when all the execution pending display icons Z displayed in the four execution pending display areas Dz are aligned in the same display color, the jackpot is confirmed or the jackpot is won. However, as a modified example, all executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz have the same display color, and the When all the unplayed pending display icons H displayed in the display area Dh have the same display color, the variable game corresponding to the variable executed pending display icon Y displayed in the variable executed pending display area Dy. It may be configured such that the expectation level of winning the jackpot is high in the variable game, a predetermined premium performance indicating that the expectation level of winning the jackpot is extremely high in the variable game, and a predetermined premium image is displayed. The specific configuration of this modified example will be described below.

In this modified example, when the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33, it acquires special information such as the value of the winning random number counter, and executes a first determination process based on the acquired special information. Then, the first determination process determines whether or not a jackpot has been won, the type of jackpot, etc., and transmits the result of the first determination process to the audio and light emission control device 90 as a hold command. Based on the result of the first determination process included in the hold command, the audio and light emission control device 90 determines whether or not to execute the same color control process described later, the display color and change pattern of the hold display icon, and the type of performance in the game round corresponding to the hold display icon. The same color control process is a process that controls the display color of each hold display icon in a situation where the hold display icon that is the subject of the first determination process is present in the variable hold display area Dy, so that all of the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are the same display color, and all of the not executed hold display icons H displayed in the not executed hold display area Dh are the same display color.

An example of how the hold display icon changes when the same color control process is executed will be described below.

・Case A
601, 602, and 603 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of how the pending display icon changes as case A. In state A1 shown in FIG. 601, the executed pending display icon Z is displayed in white in the fourth executed pending display area Dz4, and the executed pending display icon Z is displayed in white in the third executed pending display area Dz3. The executed pending display icon Z is displayed in blue in the second executed pending display area Dz2, and the executed pending display icon Z is displayed in blue in the first executed pending display area Dz1. The variation execution pending display icon Y is displayed in blue in the variation execution pending display area Dy, and the game round corresponding to the variation execution pending display icon Y is being executed. be. As described above, the executed pending display area Dz is an area that can display pending display information corresponding to the gaming session after the execution of the variable game in the gaming session is finished, that is, after the execution of the gaming session operation. be.

In this state A1, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, the pachinko machine 10 detects the entry of the game ball and acquires special information based on the entry. Then, a first determination process is performed on the acquired special information, and based on the result of the first determination process, it is determined whether or not to execute the same-color control process described above. In the example shown in this case A, as a result of the first determination process, the result of the winning lottery is a big win, and it is determined to execute the same-color control process described above, and as the same-color control process, it is determined that the display color of the reserved display icon corresponding to the entry is green, the display colors of the four reserved display icons before the reserved display icon are aligned to blue, which is the display color of the current highest level among the four reserved display icons, the display colors of the reserved display icons after the reserved display icon are aligned to white, a predetermined premium reach performance is executed in the game corresponding to the reserved display icon, and a predetermined premium image is displayed in the premium reach performance. As a result, the unexecuted reserved display icon H with a green display color is displayed in the first unexecuted reserved display area Dh1, and the state becomes A2.

In state A2, when the game ball enters the first start hole 33 and the pachinko machine 10 detects the game ball entering the first start hole 33, the same color control process described above causes the unexecuted pending display icon H to be displayed in white in the second unexecuted pending display area Dh2. This results in state A3.

In state A3, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 and the pachinko machine 10 detects the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the third unexecuted pending display is displayed by the same color control process described above. An unexecuted pending display icon H with a white display color is displayed in area Dh3. As a result, the state becomes A4.

In state A4, the three hold display icons before the green-colored unexecuted hold display icon H in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 are all blue in color, and the two hold display icons after the green-colored unexecuted hold display icon H in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 are all white in color, so the player may have hope that all of the executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four executed hold display areas Dz will all have the same display color, and all of the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh will all have the same display color.

Then, the pachinko machine 10 changes the already executed pending display icon Z, which is displayed in the third already executed pending display area Dz3 from white to blue by the same color control process described above. As a result, the state becomes A5.

In state A5, the display colors of the four hold display icons before the green display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 are all blue, and the display colors of all (two) hold display icons after the green display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 are all white. Therefore, a player who knows that there is a high expectation of winning a jackpot when all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are all the same display color in this pachinko machine 10, and all the not executed hold display icons H displayed in the not executed hold display area Dh are all the same display color, will have a great sense of expectation that if the currently executed game round ends and the display colors of the hold display icons are shifted one by one to the left without changing, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz will be the same display color, and all the not executed hold display icons H displayed in the not executed hold display area Dh will be the same display color. In addition, the player dislikes the condition that all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh are no longer the same display color, and feels that if a new game ball enters the first starting hole 33, an unexecuted hold display icon H should be added in white, and that the display color of the hold display icon should not change any more, even if it is a change to a display color with a higher expectation level. As described above, the executed hold display area Dz is an area that can display hold display information corresponding to the game round after the execution of the variable game in the game round has ended, that is, after the game round operation has been executed.

Thereafter, when the game run being executed in state A5 ends without winning a jackpot, each pending display icon is shifted to the left one by one, resulting in state A6 shown in FIG. 602.

In state A6 shown in FIG. 602, all of the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are displayed in blue, and all of the not yet executed hold display icons H displayed in the not yet executed hold display area Dh are displayed in white, and the game round corresponding to the green variable hold display icon Y that has shifted to the variable hold display area Dy is being executed.

In this modification, as shown in state A6, the pachinko machine 10 has all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz in the same display color, and When all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the pending display area Dh have the same display color, all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz are the same. A condition fulfillment suggestion effect is executed to suggest that the conditions are satisfied such that the display colors are aligned in the same display color and all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh are aligned in the same display color. In this modified example, a female character image WM is displayed as an effect suggesting that the condition is met, and a character string such as "Executed and pending are all in the same color, and unexecuted and pending are also in the same color! Chance!!" Then, it executes an effect that outputs a sound corresponding to the character string. By recognizing the performance suggesting that the condition is satisfied, the player can make all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz have the same display color, and the unexecuted pending display. It can be recognized that there is a special meaning in that all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the area Dh have the same display color.

Thereafter, as shown in state A7, the pachinko machine 10 executes a predetermined premium reach effect that suggests that there is an extremely high possibility of winning a jackpot in the currently executed game round, and performs a predetermined premium reach effect in the premium reach effect. View premium images. In this modification, a whale character image KL is displayed as a premium image. By executing the premium reach effect and displaying the premium image, the player expects that there is an extremely high possibility of winning the jackpot in the relevant game round.

After that, as shown in state A8 of FIG. 603, the pachinko machine 10 stops the changing symbols at "777" corresponding to a jackpot win, and displays a jackpot win image announcing that a jackpot win has been won. In this modified example, a close-up image WM2 of a female character is displayed as the jackpot win image, and a character string such as "Jackpot!! Congratulations!!" is displayed, and a sound corresponding to the character string is output. After that, the pachinko machine 10 starts an opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot win.

Case B
604, 605, and 606 are explanatory diagrams for explaining an example of the change of the reserved display icon as case B. In state B1 shown in FIG. 604, the already executed reserved display icon Z is displayed in red display color in the fourth already executed reserved display area Dz4, the already executed reserved display icon Z is displayed in white display color in the third already executed reserved display area Dz3, the already executed reserved display icon Z is displayed in white display color in the second already executed reserved display area Dz2, the already executed reserved display icon Z is displayed in white display color in the first already executed reserved display area Dz1, and the variable execution reserved display icon Y is displayed in white display color in the variable execution reserved display area Dy, and the game round corresponding to the variable execution reserved display icon Y is being executed.

In this state B1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the pachinko machine 10 detects the entry of the game ball and acquires special information based on the entry. Then, a first determination process is performed on the acquired special information, and based on the result of the first determination process, it is determined whether or not to perform the same color control process described above. In the example shown in this case B, as a result of the earlier determination process, it is determined that the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot win, and it is decided to execute the same color control process described above. The display color of the display icon is determined to be green, and the display color of the four hold display icons before the relevant hold display icon is set to the display color of the currently highest level among the four hold display icons. Align the display color to a certain white color (however, in this state B1, all the colors are already white), align the display color of the pending display icons after the concerned pending display icon to blue, and set the display color to a certain color in the game round corresponding to the concerned pending display icon. It is assumed that it is determined to execute a premium reach performance and display a predetermined premium image in the premium reach performance. As a result, an unexecuted pending display icon H with a green display color is displayed in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1, resulting in state B2.

In state B2, when the game ball enters the first start hole 33 and the pachinko machine 10 detects the game ball entering the first start hole 33, the same color control process described above causes the unexecuted pending display icon H to be displayed in blue in the second unexecuted pending display area Dh2. This results in state B3.

In state B3, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33 and the pachinko machine 10 detects the game ball entering the first starting hole 33, the above-mentioned same color control process displays the unexecuted pending display icon H in white in the third unexecuted pending display area Dh3, on the assumption that the display color will later change to blue. This results in state B4.

In state B4, the four pending display icons before the green unexecuted pending display icon H in the first unexecuted pending display area Dh1 are all white in color, so the player may have hope that all of the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz will all have the same color, and all of the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh will all have the same color.

Then, the pachinko machine 10 changes the white display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the third unexecuted pending display area Dh3 to blue display color by the same color control process described above. As a result, the state becomes B5.

In state B5, the display colors of the four hold display icons before the green display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 are all white, and the display colors of all (two) hold display icons after the green display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 are all blue. Therefore, a player who knows that there is a high expectation of winning a jackpot when all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are all the same display color in this pachinko machine 10, and all the not executed hold display icons H displayed in the not executed hold display area Dh are all the same display color, will have a great sense of expectation that if the currently executed game round ends and the display colors of the hold display icons are shifted one by one to the left without changing, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz will be the same display color, and all the not executed hold display icons H displayed in the not executed hold display area Dh will be the same display color. Furthermore, players dislike the condition that all unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh are no longer the same display color, and will have feelings such as wanting an unexecuted hold display icon H to be added in a blue display color if a new game ball enters the first starting hole 33, or not wanting the display color of the hold display icons to change any further, even if it is to a color with a higher expectation level.

After that, when the game that was being played in state B5 ends without winning the jackpot, each pending display icon shifts one by one to the left, and the state becomes B6 as shown in FIG. 605.

In state B6 shown in FIG. 605, all of the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are displayed in white, and all of the not yet executed hold display icons H displayed in the not yet executed hold display area Dh are displayed in blue, and the game round corresponding to the green variable hold display icon Y that has shifted to the variable hold display area Dy is being executed.

In this modification, as shown in state B6, the pachinko machine 10 has all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz in the same display color, and When all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the pending display area Dh have the same display color, the above-described condition fulfillment suggestion effect is executed. In this modified example, a female character image WM is displayed as an effect suggesting that the condition is met, and a character string such as "Executed and pending are all in the same color, and unexecuted and pending are also in the same color! Chance!!" Then, it executes an effect that outputs a sound corresponding to the character string. By recognizing the performance suggesting that the condition is satisfied, the player can make all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz have the same display color, and the unexecuted pending display. It can be recognized that there is a special meaning in that all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the area Dh have the same display color.

Thereafter, as shown in state B7, the pachinko machine 10 executes a predetermined premium reach effect that suggests that there is an extremely high possibility of winning a jackpot in the currently executed game round, and performs a predetermined premium reach effect in the premium reach effect. View premium images. In this modification, a whale character image KL is displayed as a premium image. By executing the premium reach effect and displaying the premium image, the player expects that there is an extremely high possibility of winning the jackpot in the relevant game round.

After that, as shown in state B8 of FIG. 606, the pachinko machine 10 stops the changing symbols at "777" corresponding to a jackpot win, and displays a jackpot win image announcing that a jackpot win has been won. In this modified example, a close-up image WM2 of a female character is displayed as the jackpot win image, and a character string such as "Jackpot!! Congratulations!!" is displayed, and a sound corresponding to the character string is output. After that, the pachinko machine 10 starts an opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot win.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present invention can realize unprecedented new effects, such as suggesting to the player the likelihood of winning a jackpot, by utilizing a predetermined number of already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz corresponding to the play round after the play round operation is executed.

Specifically, according to this modified example, as shown in case A, when all of the executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four executed hold display areas Dz are displayed in blue and all of the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh are displayed in white, a predetermined premium reach performance is executed as a game operation and a predetermined premium image is displayed, so that the player can have a new sense of expectation not seen in the past, that is, wanting all of the executed hold display icons Z displayed in the executed hold display area Dz to be displayed in blue and all of the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh to be displayed in white.

In particular, in conventional pachinko machines, even if the reserved display icon corresponding to a play of a play operation is displayed in a color that indicates a high probability of winning a jackpot after the play operation is performed, if the reserved display icon does not win a jackpot and the play operation ends, the display color becomes meaningless.

However, according to this modified example, the hold display icon corresponding to the play round after the play round operation is executed is displayed as an executed hold display icon Z, and when all of the executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four executed hold display areas Dz are displayed in blue and all of the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh are displayed in white, a predetermined premium reach performance is executed as the play round operation and a predetermined premium image is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the executed hold display icon Z corresponding to the play round in which the play round operation has ended without winning a jackpot, and to attract the player's interest. As a result, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Case A, the player wins the jackpot after successive blue pending display icons have all failed despite being displayed in a row, which gives the player great joy.

Furthermore, according to this modification, as shown in case A, the display color of the completed execution pending display icon Z in the executed pending display area Dz may be changed, so the player may be asked, for example, to So, even in a situation where all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz are not aligned in the same display color, perhaps the executed pending display icons Z are The display color of the displayed executed pending display icons Z may change and all executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz may be aligned in the same display color. It can create a sense of expectation. Then, the display color of the executed pending display icon Z actually displayed in the executed pending display area Dz changes, and all executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz are displayed. When the display icons H are displayed in the same color, it is possible to give great joy to the player, and all the unplayed pending display icons H displayed in the unplayed pending display area Dh are also displayed in the same color. This will give you an even greater sense of hope that they will be all together.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, as shown in case B, when all of the executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four executed hold display areas Dz are displayed in white and all of the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh are displayed in blue, a specified premium reach performance is executed and a specified premium image is displayed, and then a jackpot winning image corresponding to the occurrence of the open/close execution mode as a result of that play is displayed. This gives the player a new sense of expectation not seen in the past, that is, that all of the executed hold display icons Z displayed in the executed hold display area Dz will be displayed in white and all of the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh will be displayed in blue.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Case B, the white reserved display icons, which have the lowest expectation of winning the jackpot, appear consecutively, resulting in all misses, before the jackpot is won, which gives the player great joy and also gives the player hope that even in a situation where the white reserved display icons, which have the lowest expectation of winning the jackpot, appear consecutively, there may be cases where the possibility of winning the jackpot is increasing.

Furthermore, according to the present modification, as shown in case B, the display color of the unplayed pending display icon H in the unplayed pending display area Dh may be changed, so that the player can, for example, So, even in a situation where all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh do not have the same display color, they may still be displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh. There is an expectation that the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H will change and all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh will be aligned in the same display color. can be held. Then, the display color of the unexecuted pending display icon H actually displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh changes, and all unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh are the same. If the display colors match, it will give great joy to the player, and all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz will also be aligned in the same display color. It can give you a greater sense of expectation.

Furthermore, according to this modification, as shown in Case A and Case B, the executed pending display icon Z in the executed pending display area Dz is displayed in a hexagonal shape, and the unexecuted pending display icon Z in the unexecuted pending display area Dh is displayed as a hexagon. The display icon H is displayed in a circular shape. That is, the executed pending display icon Z in the executed pending display area Dz is displayed in a different shape from the unexecuted pending display icon H in the unexecuted pending display area Dh. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the recognition that the executed pending display icon Z is different from the unexecuted pending display icon H. As a result, in a situation where the played pending display icon Z is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is an unplayed pending icon H in which no game has been played yet. .

Furthermore, in this modified example, the number of already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz is configured to remain constant (four). Therefore, the difficulty level at which all of the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are the same display color is constant. This makes it possible to avoid the difficulty level changing and giving the player unnecessary hope or disappointment.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, when all of the executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four executed hold display areas Dz are the same display color and all of the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh are the same display color, a condition fulfillment suggestion effect is executed, which is an effect suggesting that all of the executed hold display icons Z are the same color and that all of the unexecuted hold display icons H are the same color. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the condition that all of the executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four executed hold display areas Dz are the same color and that all of the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh are the same color has been fulfilled, and also makes the player recognize that the fulfillment of this condition has a special meaning.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, the blue display color is one level higher than the white display color among multiple levels. In other words, the blue display color is the second lowest level. Generally, a player does not feel high expectations when a hold display icon is displayed in the lowest white display color or the second lowest blue display color.

However, in this modification, as shown in Case A and Case B, the number of pending display icons displayed in white or blue increases, and all of the pending display icons displayed in the executed pending display area Dz When the executed pending display icons Z are all displayed in blue, and all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh are displayed in white (case A). All executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz are displayed in white, and all unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh are blue. (case B), a predetermined premium reach effect is executed as a game round operation and a predetermined premium image is displayed.

Therefore, according to this modification, even in a situation where the pending display icon is displayed in white or blue, which generally does not give players great expectations, the player Perhaps the number of pending display icons with white or blue display color will continue to increase, and as a result, all executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz will be displayed in blue or white. This creates a sense of expectation that all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh will be displayed in white or blue. As a result, according to this modification, it is possible to give special significance to the pending display icons, which are displayed in white or blue, for which players generally do not have high expectations. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

《12-8-16》Variation 16:
In the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the sound emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 does not hold any special information on hold at the time when the game round ends, and holds the special information on hold after the game round ends. If a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) passes without receiving a command (without a new game ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34), turn on the deletion flag, The configuration may be such that the executed pending display icon Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz is erased based on the fact that the deletion flag is turned ON.

When such a configuration is adopted, if a player who has been playing on the pachinko machine 10 stops playing, and a predetermined time (e.g., three minutes) has elapsed since the end of the last round of play, and the next player starts playing on the pachinko machine 10, the executed pending display icons Z accumulated by the previous player's play are erased at the time the next player starts playing. Therefore, the next player does not feel annoyed by the fact that the executed pending display icons Z accumulated by the previous player's play remain in the executed pending display area Dz.

In this way, according to this modified example, it is possible to provide the next player with a situation in which he or she can start playing without any already executed pending display icons Z from the previous player's play being present in the already executed pending display area Dz.

12-8-17 Variation 17:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, when all of the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are all the same display color and all of the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh are all the same display color, the expected probability of winning the jackpot (the possibility of the open/close execution mode occurring) may be configured to differ depending on the same display color of the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz.

Specifically, for example, when all of the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are the same display color, and all of the not yet executed hold display icons H displayed in the not yet executed hold display area Dh are the same display color, the higher the expectation level associated with the same display color of the already executed hold display icons Z may be configured to be higher.

Specifically, for example, all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz have the same display color, and all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh Among the cases in which the unexecuted pending display icons H have the same display color, if the display color of the executed pending display icons Z is high in red (for example, when all the executed pending display icons Z have the same display color, The highest expectation is when all unexecuted pending display icons H are white, and when the executed pending display icons Z are green (for example, when all executed pending display icons Z are green) If the display color is the same, and the unexecuted pending display icons H are all white), the expectation level is the next highest, and if the executed pending display icon Z is blue (for example, if the executed pending display icon If the icons Z are all blue and the unexecuted pending display icons H are all white), the expectation level is the next highest, and if the executed pending display icon Z is white ( For example, a configuration in which all the executed pending display icons Z are displayed in white and all the unexecuted pending display icons H are displayed in white may have the lowest expectation level.

According to this modified example, the likelihood of winning the jackpot varies depending on the display color of the executed hold display icon Z displayed in the executed hold display area Dz. This makes it possible to attract the player's attention not only on whether the executed hold display icon Z displayed in the executed hold display area Dz and the not executed hold display icon H displayed in the not executed hold display area Dh are all the same display color, but also on what color the executed hold display icon Z will be, thereby further increasing the enjoyment of the game.

12-8-18 Variation 18:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, when all of the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are all the same display color and all of the not yet executed hold display icons H displayed in the not yet executed hold display area Dh are all the same display color, the expected probability of winning the jackpot may be configured to differ depending on the combination of the color of the already executed hold display icons Z that are all the same display color and the color of the not yet executed hold display icons H that are all the same display color.

Specifically, for example, when all of the already-executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already-executed hold display areas Dz are the same display color, and all of the not-executed hold display icons H displayed in the not-executed hold display area Dh are the same display color, the highest expectation is when the display color of the already-executed hold display icon Z is higher than the display color of the not-executed hold display icon H (for example, when all of the already-executed hold display icons Z are blue and all of the not-executed hold display icons H are white), the next highest expectation is when the display color of the already-executed hold display icon Z and the not-executed hold display icon H are the same (for example, when all of the already-executed hold display icons Z and the not-executed hold display icons H are blue), and the lowest expectation is when the display color of the already-executed hold display icon Z is lower than the display color of the not-executed hold display icon H (for example, when all of the already-executed hold display icons Z are white and all of the not-executed hold display icons H are blue).

According to this modification, whether the executed pending display icon Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz and the unexecuted pending display icon H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh are arranged in the same display color. It is possible to attract the player's interest not only in the display colors of the executed pending display icon Z and the unexecuted pending display icon H, respectively, which further improves the interest of the game. can be achieved.

《12-8-19》Variation 19:
In the above embodiment and each modification, all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz have the same display color, and are displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh. Even if all the unexecuted pending display icons H have the same display color, a predetermined premium reach effect may not be executed. Then, a configuration may be adopted in which the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot is higher when the predetermined premium reach effect is executed than when the predetermined premium reach effect is not executed. According to this configuration, all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the four executed pending display areas Dz are arranged in the same display color, and all the executed pending display icons Z displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh are When the execution pending display icons H have the same display color, it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the premium reach effect will be executed.

12-8-20 Variation 20:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, when all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are aligned with the same display color and all the not yet executed hold display icons H displayed in the not yet executed hold display area Dh are aligned with the same display color, various images selected by lottery may be displayed. As various images, for example, an image suggesting the set value of the lottery of the pachinko machine 10, an image showing the set value itself, an image suggesting the base value of the pachinko machine 10, an image showing the base value itself, various images that can be displayed in a specific reach performance, various images that can be displayed in a specific notice performance, etc. can be adopted. According to this configuration, when all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are aligned with the same display color and all the not yet executed hold display icons H displayed in the not yet executed hold display area Dh are aligned with the same display color, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether an image will be displayed or not, and if so, what kind of image will be displayed.

《12-8-21》Variation 21:
In the above-mentioned embodiment and each modification, the above-mentioned same color control process (all executed pending display icons Z displayed in the executed pending display area Dz are made the same color, and are displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh) Even if the control process for making all unexecuted pending display icons H the same color is not executed, all the pending changes displayed in the executed pending display area Dz may be When the executed pending display icon Z becomes the same color and all the unexecuted pending display icons H displayed in the unexecuted pending display area Dh become the same color, a predetermined premium reach effect is executed and a predetermined It may also be configured to display premium images.

In addition, in a situation where the above-mentioned same color control process is not being executed, if all of the executed hold display icons Z displayed in the executed hold display area Dz happen to have the same color and all of the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh happen to have the same color due to a normal hold change notice, various images selected by lottery may be displayed. As the various images, for example, an image suggesting the lottery setting value of the pachinko machine 10, an image showing the setting value itself, an image suggesting the base value of the pachinko machine 10, an image showing the base value itself, various images that can be displayed in a specific reach performance, various images that can be displayed in a specific notice performance, etc. can be used. According to this configuration, if by chance all of the executed hold display icons Z displayed in the executed hold display area Dz become the same color and all of the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh become the same color, for example, even if the time (variable time) for playing a game to execute a specified premium reach performance cannot be secured, a specified image can be displayed, so that the player can feel a desire for all of the executed hold display icons Z displayed in the executed hold display area Dz to be the same color and all of the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh to be the same color, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

《12-8-22》Variation 22:
In the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, and may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel) or cast iron. , cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, or other metals. In the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the inner frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, etc. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, or other metals. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame against the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function that locks the front door frame against the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, in addition to adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a front door frame are provided. A configuration may also be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened is provided separately. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the rotation axis for rotating the inner frame relative to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front, but this rotation axis is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. You may adopt the structure provided. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the rotation axis for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front, but this rotation axis is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. You may adopt the configuration provided in . Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the game board included in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, etc. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the pachinko machine has a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but a configuration may be adopted in which the lower tray is omitted and only the upper tray is provided. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided in the left side in front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may also be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations can be adopted as the firing means capable of firing the game ball. For example, a configuration that fires the game ball using elastic force such as a spring can be used. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the game balls are launched using wind pressure when compressed gas is spouted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, when the operating handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, approximately 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 game balls (for example, 60 shots) are fired per minute, or the configuration may be such that more than 100 game balls (for example, 200 balls) are fired per minute. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping a lever. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification example, a configuration is adopted in which a speaker is provided as a means capable of outputting audio, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones that the player brought to the earphone jack, the player can listen to the sound of the Pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding Pachinko machines. You can enjoy it in minutes. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations may be adopted as the display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, etc. may be used. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be used. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, an LED display device, etc. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, etc. may be employed. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, pictures, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be used as decorative patterns. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, but may be two or less, or four or more, for example. If a configuration in which there is one pattern row of decorative patterns is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. Further, when a configuration in which there are two or four or more rows of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. For example, a rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the A configuration in which the grand prize opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation axis, and a configuration in which the grand prize opening can be opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can be slid in the front and back direction of the game board. may be adopted. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each modification example, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, such as a so-called tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory with a pair of movable valves that can be opened left and right, A rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the starting port can be opened by rotating the plate-like member forward about the rotating shaft, front and rear of the game board. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-like member that is slidable in the direction. In addition, in the above embodiment and each modification, the number of prize balls set for each ball entry hole (starting hole, general winning hole, big winning hole, etc.) is an example, and the number of prize balls set for each ball entering hole is By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications. In the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, and may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel) or cast iron. , cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, or other metals. In the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the inner frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, etc. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, or other metals. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame against the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function that locks the front door frame against the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, in addition to adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a front door frame are provided. A configuration may also be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened is provided separately. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the rotation axis for rotating the inner frame relative to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front, but this rotation axis is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. You may adopt the structure provided. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the rotation axis for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front, but this rotation axis is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. You may adopt the configuration provided in . Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the game board included in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, etc. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the pachinko machine has a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but a configuration may be adopted in which the lower tray is omitted and only the upper tray is provided. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided in the left side in front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may also be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations can be adopted as the firing means capable of firing the game ball. For example, a configuration that fires the game ball using elastic force such as a spring can be used. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the game balls are launched using wind pressure when compressed gas is spouted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, when the operating handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, approximately 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 game balls (for example, 60 shots) are fired per minute, or the configuration may be such that more than 100 game balls (for example, 200 balls) are fired per minute. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping a lever. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification example, a configuration is adopted in which a speaker is provided as a means capable of outputting audio, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones that the player brought to the earphone jack, the player can listen to the sound of the Pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding Pachinko machines. You can enjoy it in minutes. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations may be adopted as the display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, etc. may be used. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be used. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, in a configuration in which the number of unit areas constituting the executed pending area is fixed to 0, the specific color displayed in the first unexecuted pending area (for example, If the unexecuted pending icon (green) moves to the variation execution pending area with its specific color and becomes the variation execution pending icon, the change based on the pending information corresponding to the variation execution pending icon changes. It is also possible to adopt a structure in which the success or failure result of such a winning lottery determines the winning of the jackpot (or a structure in which the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than the red color). In other words, it is more advantageous for the player if the hold display icon that moves to the fluctuation execution hold area is displayed in green than if the hold display icon is displayed in red. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the value is high. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, an LED display device, etc. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, etc. may be employed. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, pictures, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be used as decorative patterns. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, but may be two or less, or four or more, for example. If a configuration in which there is one pattern row of decorative patterns is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. Further, when a configuration in which there are two or four or more rows of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. For example, a rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the A configuration in which the grand prize opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation axis, and a configuration in which the grand prize opening can be opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can be slid in the front and back direction of the game board. may be adopted. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each modification example, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, for example, a so-called tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory with a pair of movable valves that can be opened left and right, A rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the starting port can be opened by rotating the plate-like member forward about the rotating shaft, front and rear of the game board. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-like member that is slidable in the direction. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the number of prize balls set for each ball entry hole (starting hole, general winning hole, big winning hole, etc.) is an example, and the number of prize balls set for each ball entering hole is By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, a structure may be adopted in which the variable execution pending area is included in the already executed pending area and various effects are executed. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, and may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel). Alternatively, it may be made of metal such as cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the inner frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, etc. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, or other metals. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame against the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function that locks the front door frame against the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, in addition to adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a front door frame are provided. A configuration may also be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened is provided separately. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the rotation axis for rotating the inner frame relative to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front, but this rotation axis is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. You may adopt the structure provided. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the rotation axis for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front, but this rotation axis is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. You may adopt the configuration provided in . Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the game board included in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, etc. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the pachinko machine has a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but a configuration may be adopted in which the lower tray is omitted and only the upper tray is provided. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided in the left side in front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may also be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations can be adopted as the firing means capable of firing the game ball. For example, a configuration that fires the game ball using elastic force such as a spring can be used. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the game balls are launched using wind pressure when compressed gas is spouted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, when the operating handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, approximately 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 game balls (for example, 60 shots) are fired per minute, or the configuration may be such that more than 100 game balls (for example, 200 balls) are fired per minute. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping a lever. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification example, a configuration is adopted in which a speaker is provided as a means capable of outputting audio, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones that the player brought to the earphone jack, the player can listen to the sound of the Pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding Pachinko machines. You can enjoy it in minutes. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations may be adopted as the display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, etc. may be used. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be used. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, an LED display device, etc. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, etc. may be employed. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, pictures, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be used as decorative patterns. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, but may be two or less, or four or more, for example. If a configuration in which there is one pattern row of decorative patterns is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. Further, when a configuration in which there are two or four or more rows of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. For example, a rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the A configuration in which the grand prize opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation axis, and a configuration in which the grand prize opening can be opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can be slid in the front and back direction of the game board. may be adopted. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each modification example, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, such as a so-called tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory with a pair of movable valves that can be opened left and right, A rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the starting port can be opened by rotating the plate-like member forward about the rotating shaft, front and rear of the game board. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-like member that is slidable in the direction. In addition, in the above embodiment and each modification, the number of prize balls set for each ball entry hole (starting hole, general winning hole, big winning hole, etc.) is an example, and the number of prize balls set for each ball entering hole is By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, and may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel). Alternatively, it may be made of metal such as cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the inner frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, etc. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, or other metals. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame against the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function that locks the front door frame against the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, in addition to adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a front door frame are provided. A configuration may also be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened is provided separately. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the rotation axis for rotating the inner frame relative to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front, but this rotation axis is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. You may adopt the structure provided. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the rotation axis for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front, but this rotation axis is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. You may adopt the configuration provided in . Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the game board included in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, etc. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the pachinko machine has a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but a configuration may be adopted in which the lower tray is omitted and only the upper tray is provided. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided in the left side in front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may also be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations can be adopted as the firing means capable of firing the game ball. For example, a configuration that fires the game ball using elastic force such as a spring can be used. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the game balls are launched using wind pressure when compressed gas is spouted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, when the operating handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, approximately 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 game balls (for example, 60 shots) are fired per minute, or the configuration may be such that more than 100 game balls (for example, 200 balls) are fired per minute. good. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the number of execution pending areas is not limited to four, but may be fixed, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4, for example. Alternatively, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping a lever. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification example, a configuration is adopted in which a speaker is provided as a means capable of outputting audio, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones that the player brought to the earphone jack, the player can listen to the sound of the Pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding Pachinko machines. You can enjoy it in minutes. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations may be adopted as the display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, etc. may be used. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be used. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, an LED display device, etc. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, etc. may be employed. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, pictures, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be used as decorative patterns. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, but may be two or less, or four or more, for example. If a configuration in which there is one pattern row of decorative patterns is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. Further, when a configuration in which there are two or four or more rows of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. For example, a rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the A configuration in which the grand prize opening can be opened by rotating the plate member forward about the rotation axis, and a configuration in which the grand prize opening can be opened and closed by a plate member that is slidable in the front and back direction of the game board. may be adopted. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each modification example, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, for example, a so-called tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory with a pair of movable valves that can be opened left and right, A rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the starting port can be opened by rotating the plate-like member forward about the rotating shaft, front and rear of the game board. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-like member that is slidable in the direction. In addition, in the above embodiment and each modification, the number of prize balls set for each ball entry hole (starting hole, general winning hole, big winning hole, etc.) is an example, and the number of prize balls set for each ball entering hole is By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each modification example, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, such as a so-called tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory with a pair of movable valves that can be opened left and right, A rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the starting port can be opened by rotating the plate-like member forward about the rotating shaft, front and rear of the game board. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-like member that is slidable in the direction. In addition, in the above embodiment and each modification, the number of prize balls set for each ball entry hole (starting hole, general winning hole, big winning hole, etc.) is an example, and the number of prize balls set for each ball entering hole is By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the configuration is such that the executed pending area is not provided, and by chance all (one) change pending pending icon displayed in the pending variable executing area is, for example, blue. For example, when all unplayed pending icons displayed in the unplayed pending area have a white display color, a predetermined image may be displayed as a gaming operation. In the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, and may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel) or cast iron. , cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, or other metals. In the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the inner frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, etc. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, or other metals. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame against the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function that locks the front door frame against the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, in addition to adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a front door frame are provided. A configuration may also be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened is provided separately. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the rotation axis for rotating the inner frame relative to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front, but this rotation axis is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. You may adopt the structure provided. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the rotation axis for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front, but this rotation axis is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. You may adopt the configuration provided in . Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the game board included in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, etc. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the pachinko machine has a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but a configuration may be adopted in which the lower tray is omitted and only the upper tray is provided. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided in the left side in front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may also be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations can be adopted as the firing means capable of firing the game ball. For example, a configuration that fires the game ball using elastic force such as a spring can be used. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the game balls are launched using wind pressure when compressed gas is spouted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, when the operating handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, approximately 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 game balls (for example, 60 shots) are fired per minute, or the configuration may be such that more than 100 game balls (for example, 200 balls) are fired per minute. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping a lever. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification example, a configuration is adopted in which a speaker is provided as a means capable of outputting audio, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones that the player brought to the earphone jack, the player can listen to the sound of the Pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding Pachinko machines. You can enjoy it in minutes. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations may be adopted as the display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, etc. may be used. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be used. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, an LED display device, etc. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, etc. may be employed. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, pictures, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be used as decorative patterns. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, but may be two or less, or four or more, for example. If a configuration in which there is one pattern row of decorative patterns is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. Further, when a configuration in which there are two or four or more rows of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. For example, a rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the A configuration in which the grand prize opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation axis, and a configuration in which the grand prize opening can be opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can be slid in the front and back direction of the game board. may be adopted. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each modification example, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, such as a so-called tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory with a pair of movable valves that can be opened left and right, A rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the starting port can be opened by rotating the plate-like member forward about the rotating shaft, front and rear of the game board. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-like member that is slidable in the direction. In addition, in the above embodiment and each modification, the number of prize balls set for each ball entry hole (starting hole, general winning hole, big winning hole, etc.) is an example, and the number of prize balls set for each ball entering hole is By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, and may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel). Alternatively, it may be made of metal such as cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In the above-mentioned embodiment, each of the above-mentioned modifications, and the above-mentioned configuration B, by chance, all (one) variation execution pending icons displayed in the variation execution pending area are, for example, white, and unexecuted pending icons are displayed in the variation execution pending area. It may be configured such that an image corresponding to a jackpot win can be displayed when all unexecuted pending icons displayed in the area are displayed in blue, for example. In the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the inner frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, etc. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, or other metals. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame against the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function that locks the front door frame against the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, in addition to adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a front door frame are provided. A configuration may also be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened is provided separately. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the rotation axis for rotating the inner frame relative to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front, but this rotation axis is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. You may adopt the structure provided. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the rotation axis for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front, but this rotation axis is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. You may adopt the configuration provided in . Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the game board included in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, etc. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the pachinko machine has a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but a configuration may be adopted in which the lower tray is omitted and only the upper tray is provided. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided in the left side in front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may also be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations can be adopted as the firing means capable of firing the game ball. For example, a configuration that fires the game ball using elastic force such as a spring can be used. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the game balls are launched using wind pressure when compressed gas is spouted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, when the operating handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, approximately 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 game balls (for example, 60 shots) are fired per minute, or the configuration may be such that more than 100 game balls (for example, 200 balls) are fired per minute. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping a lever. Further, in the above embodiment, each of the above modifications, and the above configuration B, the display color and shape of the fluctuation execution pending icon and the unexecuted pending icon may be changed, and the fluctuation execution pending icon is the unexecuted pending icon. It may be configured to be displayed in a different manner. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification example, a configuration is adopted in which a speaker is provided as a means capable of outputting audio, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones that the player brought to the earphone jack, the player can listen to the sound of the Pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding Pachinko machines. You can enjoy it in minutes. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations may be adopted as the display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, etc. may be used. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be used. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, an LED display device, etc. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, etc. may be employed. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, pictures, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be used as decorative patterns. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, but may be two or less, or four or more, for example. If a configuration in which there is one pattern row of decorative patterns is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. Further, when a configuration in which there are two or four or more rows of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. For example, a rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the A configuration in which the grand prize opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation axis, and a configuration in which the grand prize opening can be opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can be slid in the front and back direction of the game board. may be adopted. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each modification example, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, such as a so-called tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory with a pair of movable valves that can be opened left and right, A rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the starting port can be opened by rotating the plate-like member forward about the rotating shaft, front and rear of the game board. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-like member that is slidable in the direction. In addition, in the above embodiment and each modification, the number of prize balls set for each ball entry hole (starting hole, general winning hole, big winning hole, etc.) is an example, and the number of prize balls set for each ball entering hole is By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each modification example, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, such as a so-called tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory with a pair of movable valves that can be opened left and right, A rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the starting port can be opened by rotating the plate-like member forward about the rotating shaft, front and rear of the game board. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-like member that is slidable in the direction. Furthermore, in the above embodiment, each of the above modifications, and the above configuration B, the number of pending fluctuation execution icons may be set to a constant number, and the pending fluctuation execution icon may be deleted based on the start of a predetermined performance. (It disappears from the display screen) may be configured. In addition, in the above embodiment and each modification, the number of prize balls set for each ball entry hole (starting hole, general winning hole, big winning hole, etc.) is an example, and the number of prize balls set for each ball entering hole is By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, and may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel). Alternatively, it may be made of metal such as cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the inner frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, etc. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, or other metals. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame against the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function that locks the front door frame against the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, in addition to adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a front door frame are provided. A configuration may also be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened is provided separately. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the rotation axis for rotating the inner frame relative to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front, but this rotation axis is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. You may adopt the structure provided. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the rotation axis for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front, but this rotation axis is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. You may adopt the configuration provided in . Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the game board included in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, etc. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the pachinko machine has a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but a configuration may be adopted in which the lower tray is omitted and only the upper tray is provided. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided in the left side in front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may also be adopted. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations can be adopted as the firing means capable of firing the game ball. For example, a configuration that uses elastic force such as a spring to fire the game ball Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the game balls are launched using wind pressure when compressed gas is spouted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, when the operating handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, approximately 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 game balls (for example, 60 shots) are fired per minute, or the configuration may be such that more than 100 game balls (for example, 200 balls) are fired per minute. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping a lever. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification example, a configuration is adopted in which a speaker is provided as a means capable of outputting audio, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones that the player brought to the earphone jack, the player can listen to the sound of the Pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding Pachinko machines. You can enjoy it in minutes. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations may be adopted as the display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, etc. may be used. Furthermore, in the above embodiment, each of the above modifications, and the above configuration B, by chance, all (one) variation execution pending icons displayed in the variation execution pending area are, for example, blue in display color, and the When all the unexecuted pending icons displayed in the execution pending area have a white display color, for example, a suggestion performance corresponding to the fact that the variable execution pending icon has a blue display color may be executed. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be used. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, an LED display device, etc. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, etc. may be employed. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, pictures, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be used as decorative patterns. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, but may be two or less, or four or more, for example. If a configuration in which there is one pattern row of decorative patterns is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. Further, when a configuration in which there are two or four or more rows of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. For example, a rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the A configuration in which the grand prize opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation axis, and a configuration in which the grand prize opening can be opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can be slid in the front and back direction of the game board. may be adopted. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each modification example, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, such as a so-called tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory with a pair of movable valves that can be opened left and right, A rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the starting port can be opened by rotating the plate-like member forward about the rotating shaft, front and rear of the game board. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-like member that is slidable in the direction. In addition, in the above embodiment and each modification, the number of prize balls set for each ball entry hole (starting hole, general winning hole, big winning hole, etc.) is an example, and the number of prize balls set for each ball entering hole is By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each modification example, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, such as a so-called tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory with a pair of movable valves that can be opened left and right, A rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the starting port can be opened by rotating the plate-like member forward about the rotating shaft, front and rear of the game board. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-like member that is slidable in the direction. In addition, in the above embodiment and each modification, the number of prize balls set for each ball entry hole (starting hole, general winning hole, big winning hole, etc.) is an example, and the number of prize balls set for each ball entering hole is By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, and may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel). Alternatively, it may be made of metal such as cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the inner frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, etc. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, or other metals. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, each of the above-mentioned modifications, and the above-described configuration B, the expectation level of winning a jackpot may be configured to differ depending on the display mode (color and shape) of the pending variation execution icon. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame against the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function that locks the front door frame against the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, in addition to adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a front door frame are provided. A configuration may also be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened is provided separately. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the rotation axis for rotating the inner frame relative to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front, but this rotation axis is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. You may adopt the structure provided. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the rotation axis for rotating the front door frame relative to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front, but this rotation axis is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. You may adopt the configuration provided in . In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, or It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, etc. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the pachinko machine has a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but a configuration may be adopted in which the lower tray is omitted and only the upper tray is provided. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided in the left side in front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may also be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations can be adopted as the firing means capable of firing the game ball. For example, a configuration that fires the game ball using elastic force such as a spring can be used. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the game balls are launched using wind pressure when compressed gas is spouted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, when the operating handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, approximately 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 game balls (for example, 60 shots) are fired per minute, or the configuration may be such that more than 100 game balls (for example, 200 balls) are fired per minute. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping a lever. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification example, a configuration is adopted in which a speaker is provided as a means capable of outputting audio, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones that the player brought to the earphone jack, the player can listen to the sound of the Pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding Pachinko machines. You can enjoy it in minutes. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations may be adopted as the display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, etc. may be used. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be used. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, an LED display device, etc. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, etc. may be employed. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, pictures, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be used as decorative patterns. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, but may be two or less, or four or more, for example. If a configuration in which there is one pattern row of decorative patterns is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. Further, when a configuration in which there are two or four or more rows of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. For example, a rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the A configuration in which the grand prize opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation axis, and a configuration in which the grand prize opening can be opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can be slid in the front and back direction of the game board. may be adopted. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each modification example, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, such as a so-called tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory with a pair of movable valves that can be opened left and right, A rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the starting port can be opened by rotating the plate-like member forward about the rotating shaft, front and rear of the game board. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-like member that is slidable in the direction. In addition, in the above embodiment and each modification, the number of prize balls set for each ball entry hole (starting hole, general winning hole, big winning hole, etc.) is an example, and the number of prize balls set for each ball entering hole is By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, and may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel). Alternatively, it may be made of metal such as cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the inner frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, etc. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame of the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, or other metals. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame against the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function that locks the front door frame against the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, in addition to adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a front door frame are provided. A configuration may also be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened is provided separately. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the rotation axis for rotating the inner frame relative to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front, but this rotation axis is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. You may adopt the structure provided. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the rotation axis for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front, but this rotation axis is provided on the right side when viewed from the front. You may adopt the configuration provided in . Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the game board included in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, etc. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the pachinko machine has a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but a configuration may be adopted in which the lower tray is omitted and only the upper tray is provided. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided in the left side in front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may also be adopted. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations can be adopted as the firing means capable of firing the game ball. For example, a configuration that uses elastic force such as a spring to fire the game ball Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the game balls are launched using wind pressure when compressed gas is spouted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, when the operating handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, approximately 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 game balls (for example, 60 shots) are fired per minute, or the configuration may be such that more than 100 game balls (for example, 200 balls) are fired per minute. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping a lever. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification example, a configuration is adopted in which a speaker is provided as a means capable of outputting audio, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones that the player brought to the earphone jack, the player can listen to the sound of the Pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding Pachinko machines. You can enjoy it in minutes. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations may be adopted as the display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, etc. may be used. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above variations, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be used. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, an LED display device, etc. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, etc. may be employed. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, pictures, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be used as decorative patterns. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, but may be two or less, or four or more, for example. If a configuration in which there is one pattern row of decorative patterns is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. Further, when a configuration in which there are two or four or more rows of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. For example, a rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the A configuration in which the grand prize opening can be opened by rotating the plate member forward about the rotation axis, and a configuration in which the grand prize opening can be opened and closed by a plate member that is slidable in the front and back direction of the game board. may be adopted. Furthermore, in the above embodiment and each modification example, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, such as a so-called tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory with a pair of movable valves that can be opened left and right, A rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the starting port can be opened by rotating the plate-like member forward about the rotating shaft, front and rear of the game board. It is also possible to employ a configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-like member that is slidable in the direction. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the number of prize balls set for each ball entry hole (starting hole, general winning hole, big winning hole, etc.) is an example, and the number of prize balls set for each ball entering hole is By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications.

12-8-23 Variation 23:
In the above embodiment and its modified examples, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices, namely, the main control device 60, the sound and light emission control device 90, and the display control device 100. Alternatively, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to include two control devices, namely, the main control device and the sub-control device. The sub-control device may be configured to execute the various processes executed in the sound and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the above embodiment. In the above embodiment and its modified examples, the various processes executed in each of the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 do not need to be limited to the division described in the above embodiment, and it is sufficient that the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 as a whole can execute the various processes in the above embodiment.

<Y> Application to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine that releases a game ball a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as pachinko machines that generate jackpots when rights are generated, pachinko machines that are equipped with other accessories, arranged ball machines, and mahjong balls.

The present invention can also be applied to non-pinball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple types of symbols circumferentially attached, and which start the rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and which, after the reels stop when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed, award the player with a special privilege, such as a medal payout, if a specific symbol or combination of specific symbols appears on a winning line visible through a display window.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, has a storage section and an intake device, and the reels start to rotate when a start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the intake device.

In addition, some of the functions realized by software in the above embodiments may be realized by hardware, or some of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

<Z> Regarding the feature groups extracted from each of the above embodiments:
The feature groups (features of the invention group) extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects and the like as necessary. Note that, in the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to each of the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics IA group>
The feature IA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature lA1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon fulfillment of acquisition conditions;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 29 executed by it),
a state storage means (various flag storage areas) that stores state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game round execution means is
means for shifting the stored state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition; There is a first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is the start of the game round, and a first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is at the end of the game round. and a second transition mode (late drop mode), and the first transition mode is executable when the first condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode). , state information transition means (step Sl1104 in the hit determination process in FIG. 34, Sx1110~Sx1116)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature lA1, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the state information stored in the state storage means is transitioned from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state, and the timing of this transition is switched between a first transition mode in which the timing is the start of a game round, and a second transition mode in which the timing is the end of a game round. Therefore, according to feature lA1, in a game round when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, a game is played in two ways: a game based on information specifying the first state after the state information is transitioned, and a game based on information specifying a state other than the first state before the state information is transitioned. Therefore, feature lA1 has the effect of widening the range of game modes in a game round and increasing the interest of the game.

[Feature lA2]
The gaming machine according to feature 1A1,
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. a state transition means for transitioning;
The control means for controlling the state transition means, in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means, includes a first control mode and an input mode that is different from the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the ball means;
Equipped with
The control means includes:
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information that specifies a state other than the first state (high frequency support mode), the second control mode is made executable, and the state storage means A gaming machine characterized in that the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in the means specifies the first state (low-frequency support mode).

According to feature lA2, the control mode that transitions the state of the auxiliary means is switched according to the state information stored in the state storage means. Therefore, according to feature lA2, the player can infer the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the auxiliary means. This can further increase the interest in the game.

[Feature lA3]
The gaming machine according to feature 1A2,
The determining means is
The determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, a determination mode determining means (FIG. 33 (fall determination processing),
At the start of the game round in which it is determined by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the first determination mode, the state information is changed from information specifying a state other than the first state to the first state. (steps Sl1004, Sx1005, Sx1007 in the fall determination process in FIG. 33);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature lA3, in both cases of a game round corresponding to special information satisfying a predetermined condition, in which the first condition is established and the game round is executed in the first transition mode, and in which the judgment mode determination means has determined that the judgment is executed in the first judgment mode, at the start of the game round, the state information is shifted from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state, and the state of the auxiliary means is shifted to the first control mode in conjunction with the change in the state information. Therefore, when a player observes that the state of the auxiliary means has become the first control mode at the start of a game round, it is unclear whether the current game round is a game round corresponding to special information satisfying a predetermined condition, in which the first condition is established and the game round is executed in the first transition mode, or in which the judgment mode determination means has determined that the judgment is executed in the first judgment mode, but it can be inferred that it has been narrowed down to one of the two game rounds. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game rounds it is from the change in the state of the auxiliary means linked to the change in the state information. Therefore, feature lA3 can create a sense of expectation and tension in the player, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

[Feature lA4]
A gaming machine according to feature 1A2 or 1A3,
The determination means is
As a judgment mode (lottery mode) for making the judgment, a first judgment mode (low probability mode) and a second judgment mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first judgment mode,
The game execution means includes:
A judgment mode determination means (a fall judgment process in FIG. 33 ) that determines, at the start of the game round, whether the judgment by the judgment means in the game round is to be executed in the first judgment mode or the second judgment mode;
In the game in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the judgment mode decision means has decided to execute the judgment in the second judgment mode, a means for maintaining the state information as information specifying a state other than the first state (NO decision in step S11003 in the fall judgment process of FIG. 33, NO decision in step S1104 in the hit judgment process of FIG. 34);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature lA4, a game session corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition is executed in the second transition mode when the second condition is satisfied, and a game session that corresponds to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition. In either case, the status information is is maintained as information specifying a state other than the first state. Therefore, if the player observes that the state of the auxiliary means continues in the second control mode in a game round, the player can determine whether the current game round is a game corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition. A gaming session that is executed in the second transition mode when the second condition is satisfied, and a gaming session that is executed in the second transition mode when the second condition is satisfied, and a gaming session that is determined in the second determination mode by the determination mode determining means when the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Although it is unclear which of the game rounds it was decided to carry out, it can be assumed that the selection was narrowed down to one of both game rounds. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game rounds it is based on the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, according to feature 1A4, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

[Feature 1A5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features 1A1 to 1A4,
The state information transfer means includes:
a means for transferring the status information when the status information is transferred from information specifying the first status to information specifying a status other than the first status and the number of times the game has been executed reaches the specified number, and when the special information satisfies the specified condition.

According to feature 1A5, a game is played after the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after the state information is shifted from information specifying the first state to information specifying a state other than the first state. In the case where the special information satisfies predetermined conditions, the range of game modes can be expanded.

<Characteristic group IB>
The feature IB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature lB1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
A determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 29 executed by the MPU 62) that executes one game round when a game round is defined as a time from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
A performance execution means for executing a performance in the game round;
In a gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means includes:
a result notification means for executing a result notification display for notifying whether the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, which is a first condition (winning a jackpot in a winning lottery) and which corresponds to a first result in which the first condition is met, a second result in which a second condition (determined to result in a losing reach) less advantageous to the player than the first condition is met, or a third result in which a third condition (winning a falling lottery) less advantageous to the player than the second condition is met;
a predetermined performance execution means for executing a predetermined performance before the result announcement performance, the predetermined performance being one of a first suggestion performance (life or death battle performance) suggesting that the result falls into either the first result or the third result, and a second suggestion performance (superiority battle performance) suggesting that the result falls into either the first result or the second result;
A gaming machine equipped with:

According to feature lB1, a result notification effect is executed to notify which of the following results is obtained in a game: a first result in which a first condition, such as the special information satisfying a predetermined condition, is satisfied; a second result in which a second condition, which is less advantageous to the player than the first condition, is satisfied; and a third result in which a third condition, which is less advantageous to the player than the second condition, is satisfied. However, a predetermined effect is executed before the result notification effect. As the predetermined effect, either a first suggestion effect that suggests that the result falls into either the first result or the third result, or a second suggestion effect that suggests that the result falls into either the first result or the second result is executed. Conventionally, when a suggestion effect for three results is executed, it is common to suggest that the result falls into either the first result, the second result, or the third result, but in this case, the suggestion effect is limited to one type. In contrast, according to feature lB1, it is possible to execute two types of suggestive effects: a first suggestive effect that suggests either the first or third result, and a second suggestive effect that suggests either the first or second result. Therefore, according to feature lB1, it is possible to expand the range of types of predetermined effects that are executed before the result announcement effect in a game round, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

[Feature 1B2]
The gaming machine according to feature 1B1,
comprising state storage means (various flag storage areas) for storing state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode);
The game round execution means is
means for shifting the stored state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition; There is a first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is the start of the game round, and a first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is at the end of the game round. and a second transition mode (late drop mode), and the first transition mode is executable when the first condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode). , state information transition means (step Sl1104 in the hit determination process in FIG. 34, Sx1110 to Sx1116),
The predetermined performance execution means is
and means for executing the first suggestion performance in a game round in which the transition is made in the first transition mode, and executing the second suggestion performance in a game game in which the transition is made in the second transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature IB2, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the state information stored in the state storage means is information that specifies the first state from information that specifies a state other than the first state. However, the timing of this transition is switched between a first transition mode at the start of a game round and a second transition mode at the end of a game round. A first suggestion effect is executed in a game session in which a transition is made in the mode, and a second suggestion effect is executed in a game session in which a transition is made in the second transfer mode. Therefore, according to feature 1B2, in a game round when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the first suggestion effect based on the information specifying the first state after the state information has been transferred and the state information The suggestion effect is performed in two ways: a second suggestion effect based on information specifying a state other than the first state before transition. Therefore, according to feature 1B2, it is possible to widen the range of performance modes in a game round when the special information satisfies predetermined conditions, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. .

[Feature lB3]
A gaming machine according to feature 1B2,
A ball entry means capable of entering the game ball;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the ball entry means;
A state transition means for transitioning the state of the assistance means between a state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a state that makes it possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode and a second control mode in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
Equipped with
The control means
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the status information stored in the status memory means is information specifying a status other than the first status (high frequency support mode), the second control mode is executable, and, when the status information stored in the status memory means is information specifying the first status (low frequency support mode), the first control mode is executable.

According to feature IB3, the control mode for changing the state of the auxiliary means is switched in accordance with the state information stored in the state storage means. Therefore, according to feature 1B3, the player can estimate the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lB4]
A gaming machine according to feature 1B3,
The determination means is
As a judgment mode (lottery mode) for making the judgment, a first judgment mode (low probability mode) and a second judgment mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first judgment mode,
The game execution means includes:
A judgment mode determination means (a fall judgment process in FIG. 33 ) that determines, at the start of the game round, whether the judgment by the judgment means in the game round is to be executed in the first judgment mode or the second judgment mode;
At the start of the game in which the judgment mode decision means has decided to execute the judgment in the first judgment mode, a means for shifting the state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state (low frequency support mode) (steps S11004, Sx1005, and Sx1007 in the fall judgment process of FIG. 33);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature lB4, in both cases of a game round corresponding to special information satisfying a predetermined condition, in which the first condition is established and executed in the first transition mode, and a game round in which the judgment mode determination means has determined that the judgment is to be executed in the first judgment mode, at the start of the game round, the status information is shifted from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state, and the status of the auxiliary means is shifted to the first control mode in conjunction with the change in the status information. Therefore, when a player observes that the status of the auxiliary means has become the first control mode at the start of a game round, it is unclear whether the current game round is a game round corresponding to special information satisfying a predetermined condition, in which the first condition is established and executed in the first transition mode, or a game round in which the judgment mode determination means has determined that the judgment is to be executed in the first judgment mode, but it can be inferred that it has been narrowed down to one of the two game rounds. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game rounds it is from the change in the status of the auxiliary means linked to the change in the status information. Therefore, feature lB4 can create a sense of expectation and tension for the player, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

[Feature lB5]
A gaming machine according to feature lB3 or feature lB4,
The determination means is
As a judgment mode (lottery mode) for making the judgment, a first judgment mode (low probability mode) and a second judgment mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first judgment mode,
The game execution means includes:
A judgment mode determination means (a fall judgment process in FIG. 33 ) that determines, at the start of the game round, whether the judgment by the judgment means in the game round is to be executed in the first judgment mode or the second judgment mode;
In the game in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the judgment mode decision means has decided to execute the judgment in the second judgment mode, a means for maintaining the state information as information specifying a state other than the first state (NO decision in step S11003 in the fall judgment process of FIG. 33, NO decision in step S1104 in the hit judgment process of FIG. 34);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature lB5, in both cases of a game round corresponding to special information satisfying a predetermined condition, in which the second condition is established and the game round is executed in the second transition mode, and in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the judgment mode determination means has determined that the judgment is executed in the second judgment mode (a game round at the time of a miss), the state information is maintained as information specifying a state other than the first state in that game round. Therefore, when a player observes that the state of the auxiliary means continues in the second control mode in a game round, it is unclear whether the current game round is a game round corresponding to special information satisfying a predetermined condition, in which the second condition is established and the game round is executed in the second transition mode, or a game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the judgment mode determination means has determined that the judgment is executed in the second judgment mode, but it can be inferred that it has been narrowed down to one of the two game rounds. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game rounds it is from the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, feature lB5 can create a sense of expectation and tension for the player, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

[Feature 1B6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features lB1 to lB5,
The state information transfer means includes:
a means for transferring the status information when the status information is transferred from information specifying the first status to information specifying a status other than the first status and the number of times the game has been executed reaches the specified number, and when the special information satisfies the specified condition.

According to feature lB6, in a game in which the number of game plays executed after the state information has been shifted from information specifying a first state to information specifying a state other than the first state has reached a predetermined number, and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the range of presentation modes can be expanded.

<Features Group 1C>
The group of features 1C is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature lC1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 29 executed by it),
Predetermined action execution means (electric accessory 34a, electric accessory drive unit 34b) capable of executing a predetermined action that can change the degree of advantage for the player;
performance execution means for performing a performance in the game round;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game round execution means is
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the operation mode of the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation execution means is changed from a second operation mode to a mode that is more advantageous for the player than the second operation mode. A first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is the start of the game round, as a means for transitioning to a first operation mode with a lower degree, and the timing of transitioning the operation mode is different. and a second transition mode (later drop mode) in which the timing is the end of the game round, and an operation mode transition means (steps Sl1104 and Sx1110 to Sx1116 in the hit determination process in FIG. 34),
The performance execution means is
In the game round in which the transition is performed in the first transition mode, the first performance (life-or-death battle performance) is executed, and in the game round in which the transition is performed in the second transition mode, the first performance is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a second performance (superiority battle performance) that suggests that the game is highly advantageous to a player.

According to feature 1C1, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the operation mode of the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation execution means is changed from the second operation mode to the second operation mode. There is a first transition mode in which the timing of the transition is at the start of the game round, and a second transition mode in which the timing of the transition is at the end of the game round. You can switch between. Then, in a game round in which the transition is made in the first transition mode, that is, in a game round in which the game moves quickly to the first action with a lower degree of advantage, the first effect on the side with a lower degree of advantage to the player is executed. , in the game round in which the transition is made in the second transition mode, that is, in the game round in which the game moves later to the first action with a lower degree of advantage, the second effect on the side with a higher degree of advantage to the player is executed. . Therefore, according to feature LC1, in a game round when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, an advantage for the player is obtained in accordance with the degree of advantage that the player obtains by the predetermined action by the predetermined action execution means. It is possible to switch between a first performance and a second performance that have different degrees. Therefore, according to the feature 1C1, it is possible to widen the range of performances in a game round when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature 1C2]
A gaming machine according to feature 1C1,
The predetermined operation execution means includes:
An assisting means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the ball entry means into which the game ball can enter;
A state transition means for transitioning the state of the assistance means between a state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a state that makes it possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry means;
Equipped with
The game execution means includes:
A gaming machine comprising: a control means for controlling the state transition means, the control modes being different in the manner in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means, the control means having at least a first control mode and a second control mode in which it is easier for a gaming ball to enter the ball entry means than in the first control mode, the control means realizing the first operating mode by executing the first control mode, and the control means realizing the second operating mode by executing the second control mode.

According to feature lC2, by switching the control mode for transitioning the state of the assist means from the second control mode to the first control mode, the operation mode for the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation execution means can be transitioned from the second operation mode to the first operation mode, which is less advantageous to the player than the second operation mode. Therefore, feature lC2 provides excellent controllability.

[Feature 1C3]
The gaming machine according to feature IC2,
The determining means is
The determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, a determination mode determining means (FIG. 33 (fall determination processing),
At the start of the game round in which it is determined by the determination mode determination means to execute the determination in the first determination mode, the operation mode of the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation execution means is set to the second determination mode. means for transitioning from the operation mode to the first operation mode (steps Sl1004, Sx1005, Sx1007 in the fall determination process in FIG. 33);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature 1C3, in both cases of a game round corresponding to special information satisfying a predetermined condition, in which the first condition is established and the game round is executed in the first transition mode, and in which the judgment mode determination means has determined that the judgment is executed in the first judgment mode, at the start of the game round, the operation mode of the predetermined operation execution means is shifted from the second operation mode to the first operation mode, which is less advantageous to the player than the second operation mode. Therefore, when the player observes that the operation mode of the predetermined operation execution means has become the first operation mode at the start of the game round, it is unclear whether the current game round is a game round corresponding to special information satisfying a predetermined condition, in which the first condition is established and the game round is executed in the first transition mode, or in which the judgment mode determination means has determined that the judgment is executed in the first judgment mode, but it can be inferred that it has been narrowed down to one of the two game rounds. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game rounds it is from the change in the operation mode of the predetermined operation execution means. Therefore, feature lC3 can create a sense of expectation and tension in the player, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

[Feature 1C4]
The gaming machine according to feature 1C2 or feature 1C3,
The determining means is
The determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, a determination mode determining means (FIG. 33 (fall determination processing),
In the game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination mode determining means decides to execute the determination in the second determination mode, the predetermined action execution means executes the determination. means for maintaining the operation mode of a predetermined operation in the second operation mode (NO determination in step Sl1003 in the fall determination process in FIG. 33, NO determination in step Sl1104 in the hit determination process in FIG. 34);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature lC4, in both cases of a game round corresponding to special information satisfying a predetermined condition, in which the second condition is established and executed in the second transition mode, and a game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the judgment mode determination means has determined to execute the judgment in the second judgment mode (a game round in which a loss occurs), the operation mode of the predetermined operation execution means is maintained in the second operation mode in that game round. Therefore, when a player observes that the operation mode of the predetermined operation execution means continues to be the second operation mode in a game round, it is unclear whether the current game round is a game round corresponding to special information satisfying a predetermined condition, in which the second condition is established and executed in the second transition mode, or a game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the judgment mode determination means has determined to execute the judgment in the second judgment mode, but it can be inferred that it has been narrowed down to one of the two game rounds. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game rounds it is from the operation mode of the predetermined operation execution means. Therefore, feature 1C4 can create a sense of expectation and tension for the player, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

<Feature ID group>
The group of features ID is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature lD1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 29 executed by it),
a state storage means (various flag storage areas) that stores state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode);
performance execution means for performing a performance in the game round;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The determining means is
The determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, determination mode determining means (FIG. 33 (fall determination processing),
The determination mode determining means determines to perform the determination in the second determination mode (not winning the falling lottery), and the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery). The first state is determined from information specifying a state other than the first state from the stored state information at the start of a game round related to the specific case. A game round start state information transition means (steps Sl1104, Sx1110 to Sx1116 in the hit determination process in FIG. 34) that performs a process of transitioning to information that
At the end of the game round related to the specific case, the game round ends in which processing is performed to transfer the stored state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state. time state information transfer means (step Sl1606 in the game state transfer process in FIG. 39);
When the first condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode), the processing by the state information transfer means at the start of the game round can be executed, and when the second condition is satisfied (the mode selection transition switching means that enables the processing by the state information transition means at the end of the game round to be executed when the lottery result is in a late fall mode;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
In the game round related to the specific case, the determination mode determining means has determined to execute the determination in the first determination mode (winning the fall lottery), and the special information is based on the predetermined condition. A first suggestion presentation means for performing a suggestion presentation (life-or-death battle presentation) that suggests that the condition has been satisfied (a jackpot win in a winning lottery);
In the game round related to the specific case, the determination mode determining means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. and that the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions, and a second suggestion performance means for performing a suggestion performance (superiority battle performance) that suggests that either of the following applies;
When the first condition is met, the first suggestion production means is enabled to execute the suggestion production, and when the second condition is met, the second suggestion production means is enabled to perform the suggestion production. Suggestive performance switching means (steps Sl2603 to Sx2608 in the performance pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games in FIG. 49);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature lD1, when the judgment mode determination means determines that the judgment is to be performed in the second judgment mode and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition (=specific case), at the start of a game round, the state information is shifted from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state, and a suggestive effect is executed that indicates that either the judgment mode determination means has determined that the judgment is to be performed in the first judgment mode or the special information has become one that satisfies the predetermined condition. The decision by the judgment mode determination means to perform the judgment in the first judgment mode means that the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is low, so the degree of advantage for the player is low. On the other hand, the special information satisfying the predetermined condition means that the degree of advantage for the player is high. Therefore, according to feature lD1, when the timing of shifting the state information to information specifying the first state is at the start of the player, a suggestive effect is executed that indicates that either the degree of advantage for the player is low or the degree of advantage for the player is high. If we assume that the transition of state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state is detrimental to the player, then according to feature ID1, the player will be at a disadvantage when a game round begins, and before informing the player of this, a suggestive performance can be performed that suggests that the player is either at a low level of advantage or at a high level of advantage. Therefore, according to feature ID1, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and tension, which can result in increased interest in the game.

According to feature lD1, when the judgment mode determination means determines to execute the judgment in the second judgment mode and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition (=specific case), at the end of the game round, the status information is shifted from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state, and a suggestive effect is executed that suggests that the judgment mode determination means determines to execute the judgment in the second judgment mode and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, or that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. When the judgment mode determination means determines to execute the judgment in the second judgment mode and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, it can be said that the state is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the degree of advantage for the player is increased. Therefore, according to feature lD1, when the timing of shifting the status information to information specifying the first state is the end of the game, a suggestive effect is executed that suggests that the state is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player, or that the degree of advantage for the player is high. If we assume that the transition of state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state is detrimental to the player, then according to feature 1D1, the player will not be disadvantaged until the end of the game round, and therefore it is possible to perform a suggestive presentation that suggests that the game round is either neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player, or highly advantageous to the player. Therefore, feature 1D1 can give the player a sense of expectation, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to feature lD1, in a game round in which the judgment mode determination means determines to execute the judgment in the second judgment mode and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition (= a specific case), a suggestion presentation is performed in two ways: a suggestion presentation by the first suggestion presentation means and a suggestion presentation by the second suggestion presentation means. Therefore, according to feature lD1, it is possible to widen the range of presentation modes in a game round in a specific case, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

[Feature 1D2]
The gaming machine according to feature ID1,
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. a state transition means for transitioning;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode and a control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means in a different manner. A control means having at least a second control mode in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the ball means;
Equipped with
The control means includes:
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information specifying a state other than the first state (high frequency support mode), the second control mode is enabled to be executed, and the state storage means A gaming machine characterized in that the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in the means specifies the first state (low-frequency support mode).

According to feature ID2, the control mode that transitions the state of the auxiliary means is switched according to the state information stored in the state storage means. Therefore, according to feature ID2, the player can infer the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the auxiliary means. This can further increase the interest of the game.

[Feature ID3]
A gaming machine according to feature 1D1 or 1D2,
Each of the game start time state information transfer means and the game end time state information transfer means is
a game round after the number of times the game round has been executed after the state information has been shifted from information specifying the first state to information specifying a state other than the first state has reached the predetermined number, and the gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a means for shifting the state information in the specific case.

According to feature LD3, a game is played after the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after the state information is shifted from information specifying the first state to information specifying a state other than the first state. In the case where the special information satisfies predetermined conditions, the range of gaming modes can be expanded.

<Features IE group>
The feature group IE is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature 1E1]
A ball entry means capable of entering the game ball;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information in response to a game ball entering the ball entry means;
a means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the means having, as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 29 executed by the MPU 62) that executes one game round when a game round is defined as a time from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the ball entry means;
A state transition means for transitioning the state of the assistance means between a state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a state that makes it possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode and a second control mode in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
A performance execution means for executing a performance in the game round;
In a gaming machine comprising:
a determination mode/control mode transition means for transitioning the determination mode from the first determination mode to the second determination mode and transitioning the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied;
A judgment mode determination means (a fall judgment process in FIG. 33 ) that determines, at the start of the game round, whether the judgment by the judgment means in the game round is to be executed in the first judgment mode or the second judgment mode;
A judgment mode transition means (step S11004 in the fall judgment process of FIG. 33) for transitioning the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode at the start of the game in which the judgment mode determination means has determined that the judgment is to be performed in the first judgment mode;
A predetermined number of times pre-processing means for continuing the second control mode as the control mode from the time when the judgment mode is shifted from the first judgment mode to the second judgment mode by the judgment mode/control mode shifting means until the number of execution times of the game from the starting point reaches a predetermined number;
a predetermined number of post-processing means for, when the determination mode is the second determination mode after the number of executions of the game from the starting point has reached the predetermined number, continuing the second control mode as the control mode, and, when the determination mode has shifted from the second control mode to the first determination mode, shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
a first presentation means for performing a presentation of a predetermined content (life and death battle presentation) on a game round for which it has been determined by the judgment mode determination means that the judgment should be performed in the first judgment mode (a game round for which a drop lottery has been won) or on a game round for which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (a game round for which a jackpot has been won), when the second control mode continues as the control mode after the number of times the game round has been executed from the starting point has reached the predetermined number;
a second presentation means for presenting a presentation (a battle of superiority presentation) different from the predetermined content in a game round (a losing game round) in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and in which it has been decided by the judgment mode decision means to execute the judgment in the second judgment mode, or in a game round (a game round in which a jackpot has been won) in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature lE1, the control mode changes to the second control mode after the number of executions of the game from the starting point reaches a predetermined number of times, starting from the time when the judgment mode is shifted to the second judgment mode. If the game continues, the game game where the determination mode determining means decides to perform the determination in the first determination mode, or the game game where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, is displayed with the predetermined content. The performance is executed. On the other hand, a game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination mode determining means decides to execute the determination in the second determination mode, or a game in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. In a certain game round, an effect with content different from the predetermined content is performed. Therefore, in the game round after the number of executions of the game round from the starting point reaches a predetermined number, the performance can be performed in two ways: a performance with predetermined content and a performance with content different from the predetermined content. This has the effect of widening the range of performance modes and increasing the interest of the game.

[Feature 1E2]
The gaming machine according to feature lE1,
a means for shifting the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode at the start of a game round when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (when a jackpot is won) in a case where the control mode is maintained in the second control mode after the number of times the game round has been executed from the starting point reaches the predetermined number of times;
The first production means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that, as the presentation of the specified content, a suggestion presentation (life and death battle presentation) is executed which suggests that either the judgment mode determination means has decided to execute the judgment in the first judgment mode (winning the fall lottery) or the special information has met the specified condition (winning the jackpot in the winning lottery).

According to feature lE2, when the control mode is maintained in the second control mode after the number of game rounds from the starting point reaches a predetermined number, at the start of a game round in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition and at the start of a game round in which the judgment mode determination means has decided to execute the judgment in the first judgment mode, the judgment mode is transitioned from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode, and a suggestion effect is executed that suggests that, in that game round, either the judgment mode determination means has decided to execute the judgment in the first judgment mode or the special information has become something that satisfies the predetermined condition. The decision by the judgment mode determination means to execute the judgment in the first judgment mode means that the probability that the special information will satisfy the predetermined condition is low, and therefore the degree of advantage for the player is reduced. On the other hand, the degree of advantage for the player is increased when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Therefore, according to feature lE2, a suggestive effect is executed that suggests that the player has either a low degree of advantage or a high degree of advantage, which can give the player a sense of expectation and tension, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Feature 1E3]
A gaming machine according to feature lE1 or feature lE2,
The second production means is
A gaming machine characterized in that, as an effect of content different from the specified content, the judgment mode determination means decides to execute the judgment in the second judgment mode, and a suggestion effect (superiority battle effect) is executed which suggests that either the special information does not satisfy the specified condition (miss) or the special information satisfies the specified condition.

According to feature lE3, the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the judgment mode determining means decides to execute the judgment in the second judgment mode, or the special information does not meet the predetermined condition. In a game round that satisfies the above, it is possible to perform a suggestive performance that suggests that the game is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player, or that the degree of advantage to the player is high. Therefore, according to feature 1E3, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic IF group>
The feature IF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature IF1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 29 executed by it),
a state storage means (various flag storage areas) that stores state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode);
performance execution means for performing a performance in the game round;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The determining means is
The determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, determination mode determining means (FIG. 33 (fall determination processing),
The determination mode determining means determines to perform the determination in the second determination mode (not winning the falling lottery), and the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery). The first state is determined from information specifying a state other than the first state from the stored state information at the end of the game round related to the specific case. a game round end state information transition means (step Sl1606 in the game state transition process in FIG. 39) that performs a process of transitioning to information that
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
In the game round related to the specific case, the determination mode determining means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. and that the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions, and a first suggestion effect means for performing a suggestion effect (superiority battle effect) suggesting that either of the following applies. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature IF1, at the end of a game round when the determination mode determining means decides to execute the determination in the second determination mode and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition (=specific case), The state information is transferred from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state, and the judgment mode determining means determines to perform the judgment in the second judgment mode, and Suggestive effects are performed that suggest that either the special information no longer satisfies the predetermined condition or the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. The fact that the determination mode determining means decides to perform the determination in the second determination mode and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition can be said to be a situation that is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, it will be more advantageous to the player. Therefore, according to feature IF1, when the timing of transitioning the state information to the information specifying the first state is when the player finishes, it is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous for the player, and A suggestive effect that suggests that the degree of advantage is high and that one of the following applies will be executed. If it is assumed that the transition of state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state is disadvantageous to the player, then according to feature IF1, , since the player is not disadvantaged until the end of the game round, it is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous for the player in that game round, nor is it highly advantageous for the player. It is possible to perform a suggestive performance that suggests that the above applies. Therefore, according to the feature IF1, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature IF2]
A gaming machine according to feature 1F1,
The game execution means includes:
A game start state information transition means (steps S1104, Sx1110 to Sx1116 in the winning determination process of FIG. 34) for transitioning the stored state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state at the start of a game round related to the specific case;
a transition switching means for enabling a process by the game round start state information transition means to be executed when a first condition is established (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first-to-drop mode) and for enabling a process by the game round end state information transition means to be executed when a second condition is established (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the last-to-drop mode);
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
a second suggestion presentation means for executing a suggestion presentation (life and death battle presentation) suggesting that in the game round related to the specific case, the judgment mode decision means has decided to execute the judgment in the first judgment mode (winning the fall lottery) or the special information has come to satisfy the predetermined condition (winning the jackpot in the winning lottery);
A suggestion effect switching means (steps S12603 to Sx2608 in the presentation pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of plays in FIG. 49) for enabling the suggestion effect by the second suggestion effect means to be executed when the first condition is satisfied, and enabling the suggestion effect by the first suggestion effect means to be executed when the second condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature IF2, at the start of a game round when the determination mode determining means decides to execute the determination in the second determination mode and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition (=specific case), The state information is transferred from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state, and the judgment mode determining means determines to execute the judgment in the first judgment mode. Suggestive effects are performed that suggest that either of the following applies: and that the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions. The fact that the determination mode determining means decides to execute the determination in the first determination mode means that the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is lower, and therefore the degree of advantage for the player is lowered. It ends up. On the other hand, if the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, it will be more advantageous to the player. Therefore, according to feature LD1, when the timing of transitioning the state information to the information specifying the first state is when the player starts, the degree of advantage for the player is low, and the degree of advantage for the player is low. A suggestive effect that suggests that the degree is high and that one of the following applies will be executed. If it is assumed that the transition of state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state is disadvantageous to the player, then according to feature IF2, , the player will be at a disadvantage at the start of the game round, and before notifying the player of this fact, the player must be informed that the degree of advantage to the player is low and the degree of advantage to the player is high. It is possible to perform a suggestive performance that suggests that one of the above applies. Therefore, according to feature IF2, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature IF3]
The gaming machine according to feature IF1 or feature IF2,
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. a state transition means for transitioning;
The control means for controlling the state transition means, in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means, includes a first control mode and an input mode that is different from the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the ball means;
Equipped with
The control means includes:
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information that specifies a state other than the first state (high frequency support mode), the second control mode is made executable, and the state storage means A gaming machine characterized in that the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in the means specifies the first state (low-frequency support mode).

According to feature IF3, the control mode for changing the state of the auxiliary means is switched in accordance with the state information stored in the state storage means. Therefore, according to feature IF3, the player can estimate the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature IF4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features IF1 to IF3,
Each of the game round start state information transfer means and the game round end state information transfer means,
A game round after the number of executions of the game round reaches the predetermined number of times after the state information is shifted from information specifying the first state to information specifying a state other than the first state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for transferring the state information in the specific case.

According to feature IF4, a game can be played after the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after the state information is shifted from information specifying the first state to information specifying a state other than the first state. In the case where the special information satisfies predetermined conditions, the range of gaming modes can be expanded.

<Feature Group lG>
The group of features lG is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 2 of the first embodiment.

[Feature lG1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
A determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 29 executed by the MPU 62) that executes one game round when a game round is defined as a time from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
A state storage means (various flag storage area) for storing state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of identifying a plurality of states including at least a first state (low frequency support mode);
In a gaming machine comprising:
The game execution means includes:
A first state information transition means transitions the stored state information from information specifying the first state to information specifying a state other than the first state when a first condition (a winning lottery results in a winning probability jackpot and the end of an opening/closing execution mode) is met;
a second state information transition means for determining the game round when a second condition (a jackpot is won in a winning lottery) is established after the transition by the first state information transition means as a specific game round, and transitioning the stored state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state during the specific game round;
Equipped with
The second state information transfer means
a first transition mode (first-fall mode) in which the timing for transferring the status information is the start of the specific game round, and a second transition mode (last-fall mode) in which the timing is the end of the specific game round, as transition modes having different timings for transferring the status information, and a transition mode determination means for determining whether the first transition mode or the second transition mode will be used to transfer the status information based on the number of game rounds that have been executed since the transition by the first status information transition means until the specific game round.

According to feature lG1, when the first condition is satisfied, the state information stored in the state storage means is transitioned from information specifying the first state to information specifying a state other than the first state, and after the transition, in a specific game round when the second condition is satisfied, the state information is transitioned from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state, and the timing of this transition is switched between a first transition mode in which the transition is at the start of the game round, and a second transition mode in which the transition is at the end of the game round. Therefore, according to feature lG1, in a specific game round, a game is played in two ways: a game based on information specifying the first state after the transition of the state information, and a game based on information specifying a state other than the first state before the transition of the state information. Therefore, according to feature lG1, the range of game modes in a game round can be expanded, and the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, according to feature lG1, the transition mode adopted in a particular game round, either the first transition mode or the second transition mode, is determined based on the number of game rounds played since the state information transitioned from information specifying the first state to information specifying a state other than the first state. This allows for a game with a rich storyline, for example, a performance with a rich storyline, and further increases the interest of the game.

[Feature lG2]
A gaming machine according to feature lG1,
A ball entry means capable of entering the game ball;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the ball entry means;
A state transition means for transitioning the state of the assistance means between a state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a state that makes it possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode and a second control mode in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
Equipped with
The control means
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the status information stored in the status memory means is information specifying a status other than the first status (high frequency support mode), the second control mode is executable, and, when the status information stored in the status memory means is information specifying the first status (low frequency support mode), the first control mode is executable.

According to feature IG2, the control mode for changing the state of the auxiliary means is switched in accordance with the state information stored in the state storage means. Therefore, according to feature IG2, the player can estimate the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lG3]
A gaming machine according to feature lG2,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the second condition is that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to feature lG3, the game round when the special information meets the specified conditions is treated as a specific game round, and the state information is transferred. Therefore, in the game round when the special information meets the specified conditions, the range of game modes can be expanded, and the interest in the game can be increased.

[Characteristic G4]
The gaming machine according to feature lG3,
The determining means is
The determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, a determination mode determining means (FIG. 33 (fall determination processing),
At the start of the game round in which it is determined by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the first determination mode, the state information is changed from information specifying a state other than the first state to the first state. (steps Sl1004, Sx1005, Sx1007 in the fall determination process in FIG. 33);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature lG4, in both cases of a game round corresponding to special information satisfying a predetermined condition and in which the state information is changed by the first transition mode (=specific game round) and a game round in which the judgment mode determination means has determined that the judgment is to be performed in the first judgment mode, at the start of the game round, the state information is changed from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state, and the state of the auxiliary means is changed to the first control mode in conjunction with the change in the state information. Therefore, when a player observes that the state of the auxiliary means has become the first control mode at the start of a game round, it is unclear whether the current game round is a specific game round corresponding to special information satisfying a predetermined condition and in which the state information is changed by the first transition mode, or a game round in which the judgment mode determination means has determined that the judgment is to be performed in the first judgment mode, but it can be inferred that it has been narrowed down to one of the two game rounds. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game rounds it is from the change in the state of the auxiliary means linked to the change in the state information. Therefore, feature lG4 can create a sense of expectation and tension for the player, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

[Features lG5]
The gaming machine according to feature IG3 or feature IG4,
The determining means is
The determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, a determination mode determining means (FIG. 33 (fall determination processing),
In the game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination mode determining means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, the state information is means for maintaining information specifying a state other than the state (NO determination in step Sl1003 in the fall determination process in FIG. 33, NO determination in step Sl1104 in the hit determination process in FIG. 34);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature lG5, in both cases of a game round (=specific game round) corresponding to special information satisfying a predetermined condition and in which the state information is transferred by the second transition mode (=specific game round) and a game round (game round at the time of a miss) in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the judgment mode determination means has determined that the judgment is to be performed in the second judgment mode, the state information is maintained as information that specifies a state other than the first state in that game round. Therefore, when a player observes that the state of the auxiliary means continues in the second control mode in a game round, it is unclear whether the current game round is a game round corresponding to special information satisfying a predetermined condition and in which the state information is transferred by the second transition mode, or a game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the judgment mode determination means has determined that the judgment is to be performed in the second judgment mode, but it can be inferred that it has been narrowed down to one of the two game rounds. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game rounds it is from the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, feature lG5 can create a sense of expectation and tension for the player, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic IH group>
The feature IH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature lH1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
determining means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 29 executed by it),
a state storage means (various flag storage areas) that stores state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode);
performance execution means for performing a performance in the game round;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game round execution means is
means for shifting the stored state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition; There is a first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is the start of the game round, and a first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is at the end of the game round. and a second transition mode (late drop mode), and the first transition mode is executable when the first condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode). , state information transition means (step Sl1104 in the hit determination process in FIG. 34, Sx1110 to Sx1116),
The performance execution means is
In the game round in which the transition is made in the first transition mode, a performance with predetermined content (life-or-death battle performance) is executed, and in the game game in which the transition is performed in the second transition mode, the predetermined content is A gaming machine characterized by having means for executing performances with different contents (superiority battle performances).

According to feature lH1, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the state information stored in the state storage means is transitioned from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state, and the timing of this transition is switched between a first transition mode at the start of a game round and a second transition mode at the end of a game round, and in a game round where the transition is made in the first transition mode, a presentation with a predetermined content is executed, and in a game round where the transition is made in the second transition mode, a presentation with a content different from the predetermined content is executed. Therefore, according to feature lH1, in a game round when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the game is played in two ways: a presentation with a predetermined content and a presentation with a content different from the predetermined content. Therefore, feature lH1 has the effect of widening the range of game modes in a game round and increasing the interest of the game.

<Features mA group>
The group of features mA is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of its modifications.

[Feature mA1]
A first ball entry means (a normal start gate 35) through which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means;
A first determination means (a function of performing a general drawing) for performing a first determination as to whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special ball start hole 34a) into which the game ball can enter;
A first state transition means (normal electric device 34b) that can transition between a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a ball entry possible state (open state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A first transition mode execution means for executing a first transition mode (normal power opening and closing execution mode) that transitions the first state transition means between the ball-scoring impossible state and the ball-scoring possible state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition;
A second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special ball start hole 34a);
A second judgment means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second judgment, which is a judgment of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
a third ball entry means (first big winning hole 57a) into which the game ball can enter;
A second state transition means (first special electric device 57b) that can transition between a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means and a ball entry possible state (open state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means;
A second transition mode execution means for executing a second transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special chart small win) that transitions the second state transition means between the ball-scoring impossible state and the ball-scoring possible state when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition;
A fourth ball entry means (V entry port 57av) into which the game ball that entered the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (a second large winning hole 58a) into which the game ball can enter;
A third state transition means (second special electric device 58b) that can transition between a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means and a ball entry possible state (open state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means;
A third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) for transitioning the third state transition means between the ball-entry prohibited state and the ball-entry permitted state when a game ball enters the fourth ball-entry means;
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
The gaming machine is provided with a means for setting the time required from start to finish of the second transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special small winning chart) and the time required from start to finish of the third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning chart) to a time longer than the combined time (combined time: 128.0 seconds).

According to feature mA1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means and the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition to execute the first transition mode, if the game ball continues to be launched in a predetermined launch manner, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the first transition mode to execute the second transition mode, and the game ball enters the third ball entry means during the execution of the second transition mode, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means to execute the third transition mode.

And according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means includes means for setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the combined time of the time required from the start to the end of the second transition mode and the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. Therefore, even after the second transition mode ends and then the third transition mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and while the first transition mode continues, the first state transition means may transition to a ball entry permitted state, making it possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second transition mode will be executed again, and then the third transition mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed multiple times, the player can have an opportunity to win a large amount of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have strong expectations for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mA2]
The gaming machine according to feature mA1,
The first transition mode execution means causes the first state transition means to transition from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry enabled state after the third transition mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means.

According to feature mA2, the first transition mode execution means includes a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry prohibited state to a ball entry permitted state after the third transition mode ends during execution of the first transition mode, so that the game ball can enter the second ball entry means after the third transition mode ends. If the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the third transition mode ends, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. In other words, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed multiple times, the player has the opportunity to win a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, the player can have a strong sense of expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature mA3]
A gaming machine according to feature mA1 or feature mA2,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for avoiding acquisition of the second specified information or avoiding execution of the second judgment when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means (special ball start port 34a) during execution of the second transition mode or the third transition mode.

According to feature mA3, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, acquisition of the second predetermined information is avoided or Since a means for avoiding execution of the second determination is provided, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, the second The transition mode will not be executed and the third transition mode will not be executed either, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel nervous and want the second transition mode and the third transition mode to be completed by the time the game ball can enter the second ball entry means.

In addition, if, unlike this feature, a configuration is adopted in which the acquisition of the second specified information and the execution of the second judgment are not avoided even if a game ball enters the second ball entry means while the second transition mode or the third transition mode is being executed, if multiple game balls enter the second ball entry means during one transition of the first state transition means to a ball entry possible state, multiple pieces of second specified information will be reserved, and the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed multiple times regardless of the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode.

In contrast, according to this feature, even if multiple game balls enter the second ball entry means during one transition to the ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which the second transition mode and the third transition mode are each executed once for one transition to the ball entry possible state of the first state transition means.

[Features mA4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mA1 to feature mA3,
The third transition mode execution means includes:
As the third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot), the time required from start to end is predetermined regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of executing a predetermined length third transition mode (fixed length special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) having a predetermined length.

According to feature mA4, the third transition mode execution means includes means for executing a third transition mode of a predetermined length, in which the time required from start to end is a predetermined length regardless of the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after launch, so that when the predetermined length third transition mode is executed, the length of the third transition mode does not exceed the predetermined length. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the third transition mode has not yet ended even at the timing when the first state transition means transitions to a ball entry possible state because the length of the third transition mode has become longer than the predetermined length. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, in which the third transition mode has not ended even at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, and the second transition mode is not executed despite the game ball entering the second ball entry means, and the third transition mode is not executed either.

[Feature mA5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mA1 to mA4,
The first transition mode execution means
A gaming machine comprising a means for setting the length of an interval period (normal power interval period), which is the period from when the first state transition means transitions from the ball-scoring possible state to the ball-scoring impossible state in the first transition mode (normal power opening and closing execution mode) to when the ball-scoring impossible state transitions back to the ball-scoring possible state, to a time longer than the time required from when the third transition mode (special power opening and closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) begins to when it ends.

According to feature mA5, the first transition mode execution means transitions from the ball entry possible state to the ball entry impossible state in the first transition mode, and then from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry possible state. A means is provided that can set the length of the interval period, which is the period until the transition, to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be explained.

First, we will explain a comparative example configuration that, unlike this feature, sets the length of the interval period of the first transition mode to a time (e.g., 0.7T) that is shorter than the time (e.g., T) required from the start to the end of the third transition mode.

First, in the configuration of a comparative example, a case will be described in which a game ball enters the second ball entry means in the first ball entry possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. In this case, the second transition mode will be started, and then the third transition mode will be started. Thereafter, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and the third transition mode is still continuing in the second ball entry possible state of the first state transition means. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the second transition mode and the third transition mode will not be newly started. After that, the second interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the third ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, the third transition mode has already ended, so the game ball is in the second entry state. When the ball enters the ball means, the second transition mode is newly started, and then the third transition mode is started. That is, in this case, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are such that the game ball enters the second ball entry means in the first and third ball entry possible states of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. The game starts when the ball enters the ball, but even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means in the second ball entry possible state, the game will not start.

Next, in the configuration of the comparative example, a case will be described in which the game ball does not enter the second ball entry means in the first ball entry possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. In this case, the second transition mode is not started, and the third transition mode is not started either. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and since the third transition mode is not executed in the second ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second transition mode will be started, and then the third transition mode will be started. After that, the second interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the third ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, the third transition mode is still continuing. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second transition mode and the third transition mode will not be started anew. After that, the third interval period in the first transition mode ends, and since the third transition mode has already ended in the fourth ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second transition mode will be newly started, and then the third transition mode will be started. In other words, in this case, the second transition mode and the third transition mode will be started when the game ball enters the second ball entry means in the second and fourth ball entry possible states of the first state transition means in the first transition mode, but will not be started even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means in the third ball entry possible state.

As such, unlike this feature, if the configuration of the comparative example is adopted in which the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a time shorter than the length of the third transition mode, the timing of the start of the second transition mode and the third transition mode while the first transition mode is being executed is not fixed, which causes the flow of the game to become complicated and makes it difficult to control the game.

Next, we will explain the case where the configuration of this characteristic is adopted, in which the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a time (e.g., 1.3T) longer than the time (e.g., T) required from the start to the end of the third transition mode.

First, in the configuration of this characteristic, we will explain the case where a game ball enters the second ball entry means in the first ball entry possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. In this case, the second transition mode is started, and then the third transition mode is started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and since the third transition mode has already ended in the second ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second transition mode is newly started, and then the third transition mode is started.

Next, in the configuration of this feature, a case will be described in which the game ball does not enter the second ball entry means in the first entry possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. In this case, the second transition mode is not started, and neither is the third transition mode. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, the third transition mode is not executed, so the game ball is in the second entry state. Upon entering the means, the second transition mode will be initiated, and then the third transition mode will be initiated.

In this way, according to this feature, the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode, so that at the timing when the first state transition means becomes a ball-scoring state in the first transition mode, the third transition mode is not being executed or has already ended, regardless of how many times the first state transition means has become a ball-scoring state. Therefore, when the first state transition means becomes a ball-scoring state in the first transition mode, even if a game ball enters the second ball-scoring means, the second transition mode and the third transition mode do not start. In other words, according to this feature, the timing of the start of the second transition mode and the third transition mode during the execution of the first transition mode can be fixed, and the flow of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated, and by setting the number of times the first state transition means becomes a ball-scoring state during the execution of the first transition mode, it is possible to set an upper limit on the number of times the second transition mode and the third transition mode can be executed during the execution of the first transition mode.

[Feature mA6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mA1 to mA5,
The first transition mode execution means
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for setting the length of a waiting period (normal power ending period), which is the period from when the first state transition means last transitions from the ball-scoring state to the ball-scoring non-state in the first transition mode (normal power opening and closing execution mode) to when the first judgment by the first judgment means can be executed, to a time longer than the time required from when the third transition mode (special power opening and closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) starts to when it ends.

According to feature mA6, the first transition mode execution means executes the first state transition by the first determination means after the first state transition means last transitions from the ball entry possible state to the ball entry impossible state in the first transition mode. A means is provided that can set the length of the waiting period, which is the period until the determination becomes executable, to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. The reason for adopting this configuration will be explained.

First, a case will be described in which, unlike this feature, a configuration is adopted in which the length of the standby period is set to a shorter time than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. In this configuration, for example, when the first determination is performed after the end of the waiting period and it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode is performed and the first There is a possibility that the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed. However, in this configuration, if the third transition mode is executed immediately after the start of the standby period, the third transition mode continues even after the standby period ends, and the game ball moves to the second transition mode. The third transition mode may continue even at the timing when the ball enters the ball entering means. In this case, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second transition mode is not executed, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player.

In response to this, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means includes means for setting the length of the waiting period, which is the period from when the first state transition means last transitions from a ball-scoring state to a ball-scoring non-scoring state in the first transition mode until the first determination means can make a first determination, to a period longer than the time required from when the third transition mode is started to when it is ended, thereby making it possible to prevent a situation in which the third transition mode continues even after the waiting period has ended and to prevent a situation that is disadvantageous to the player.

[Feature mA7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mA1 to mA6,
The first transition mode execution means
The length of a waiting period (normal power ending period), which is the period from when the first state transition means last transitions from the ball scoring possible state to the ball scoring impossible state in the first transition mode (normal power opening and closing execution mode) to when the next judgment by the first judgment means can be made,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first state transition means is provided with a means for setting the interval period (normal power interval period), which is the period from when the first state transition means transitions from the ball-scoring possible state to the ball-scoring impossible state to when the first state transition means transitions from the ball-scoring impossible state to the ball-scoring possible state, to a length (140.0 seconds) greater than or equal to the length (135.0 seconds) of the interval period.

According to feature mA7, the first transition mode execution means executes the next determination by the first determination means after the first state transition means last transitions from the ball entry allowed state to the ball entry prohibited state in the first transition mode. The length of the waiting period, which is the period until it becomes executable, is set such that the first state transition means transitions from the ball entry possible state to the ball entry impossible state, and then transitions from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry possible state. Since the device is equipped with means that can set the length to be longer than the length of the interval period, which is the period up to It becomes possible to realize the same. As a result, for example, it is possible to realize a new game in which the second transition mode and the third transition mode can be executed during both the interval period and the standby period in the first transition mode.

<Characteristic mB group>
The feature mB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mB1]
A first ball entry area (normal starting gate 35) into which the game ball can enter;
A first lottery execution means for executing a first lottery (a general lottery) based on the game ball entering the first ball entry area;
A first variation means for varying and stopping the first identification information (normal symbols) based on the execution of the first lottery;
A second ball entry area (special ball start opening 34a) into which the game ball can enter;
A first transition means (normal electric device 34b) that can transition from a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry area to a ball entry permitted state (open state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry area;
A first transition mode execution means for executing a first transition mode (normal power opening and closing execution mode) for transitioning the first transition means from the ball-scoring impossible state to the ball-scoring possible state when the result of the first lottery is a first predetermined lottery result (normal winning);
A second lottery execution means for executing a second lottery (special drawing lottery) based on the game ball entering the second ball entry area (special drawing start hole 34a);
A second varying means for varying and stopping the display of second identification information (special symbols) based on the execution of the second lottery;
A third ball entry area (V entry port 57av) into which the game ball can enter;
A second transition means (first special electric device 57b) that can transition from a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry area to a ball entry permitted state (open state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry area;
A second transition mode execution means for executing a second transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special small winning) for transitioning the second transition means from the ball-scoring impossible state to the ball-scoring possible state when the result of the second lottery is a second predetermined lottery result (a special small winning);
A determination means for determining whether or not to award a specific benefit (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning) based on the game ball entering the third winning area;
A means for terminating the provision of the specific benefit when a predetermined termination condition is met after the provision of the specific benefit is started;
A gaming machine comprising:
When one cycle from the transition of the first transition means to the pre-entry ball possible state (time t3 in FIG. 68) to the end of the provision of the specific benefit (time t10 in FIG. 68) is defined as one special game,
The first transition mode execution means
a means for at least executing a transition operation of the first transition means a plurality of times for one of the first predetermined lottery results based on a result of the first lottery;
A control means for controlling the first transition means to transition to the ball entry possible state at a first timing, so that the first special game round is executed based on the first transition means transitioning to the ball entry possible state at a second timing after the one special game round is ended;
A limiting means for limiting the start of the variable display of the first identification information;
Equipped with
The limiting means includes a means for generating a predetermined limit period during a period from the first timing to the end of the one special game which occurs after the second timing,
The predetermined end condition of the specific benefit is established by a first state (round game) advantageous to the player being executed multiple times,
The first state is variable between a first time, which is the shortest execution time, and a second time, which is the longest execution time, depending on a game state;
The first transition mode execution means is capable of transitioning the first transition means to the ball winning possible state after the end of one special game even if all of the first states of the multiple times of the specific profit of the one special game executed after the first timing are executed within the second time.

According to feature mB1, when a game ball enters the first ball entry area, the first lottery is executed, the result of the first lottery becomes the first predetermined lottery result, and the first transition mode is executed. , if the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry area during execution of the first transition mode, the second lottery is executed, and the second lottery is executed. The result of the lottery becomes a second predetermined lottery result, and the second transition mode is executed. Then, during execution of the second transition mode, the game ball enters the third ball entry area, and it is determined that a specific profit will be awarded.

According to this feature, the first transition mode execution means includes means for at least executing the transition operation of the first transition means multiple times for one first predetermined lottery result based on the result of the first lottery, and means for controlling the first transition means so that one special game round is executed based on the first transition means transitioning to a ball-scoring state at a first timing, and the first transition means transitions to the ball-scoring state at a second timing after the one special game round has ended. Therefore, it is possible to execute one special game round multiple times for one first predetermined lottery result in the first lottery.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means includes a limiting means for limiting the start of the variable display of the first identification information, and the limiting means includes a means for generating a predetermined limiting period from the first timing to the end of one special game round that occurs after the second timing. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the variable display of the first identification information from starting before the end of one special game round, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the first lottery is executed even though one special game round has not ended. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, for example, in which the second transition mode is not executed even if the game ball enters the second ball entry area because one special game round that has already been executed has not ended, even if the result of the first lottery is the first predetermined lottery result that is advantageous to the player.

Further, according to the present feature, the predetermined end condition of the specific profit is established by executing the first state advantageous to the player multiple times, and the first state is the first state that has the shortest execution time depending on the gaming state. and the longest second time, and the first transition mode execution means is configured such that the first state of a plurality of specific profits in one special game run executed after the first timing is all changed to a second time. Even if it is executed in time, the first transition means can be made to transition to the ball entry possible state after the end of the one special game round. Therefore, even if the first state of a plurality of specific profits in one special game round are all executed in the second time, the game ball enters the second ball entry area after the end of the one special game round. It becomes possible to make the ball hit, and it becomes possible to execute one special game round again. As a result, it becomes possible to reliably execute the special game round a plurality of times, regardless of the length of the first state of the plurality of specific profits.

[Feature mB2]
A gaming machine according to feature mB1,
A gaming machine comprising a number display means for displaying information regarding the number of times the first state has occurred (the number of times remaining in a round of play).

Feature mB2 includes a count display means for displaying information about the number of times the first state has occurred, which can arouse the player's interest and curiosity in the number of times the first state has occurred, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature mB3]
A gaming machine according to feature mB1 or feature mB2,
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a specific image display means for displaying a specific image (ending image) at the end of the awarding of the specific benefit (during the special electric ending period of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot).

According to feature mB3, a specific image display means is provided that displays a specific image when the awarding of the specific benefit ends, so that the player can be made aware that the awarding of the specific benefit has ended, and the player can be given a sense of fulfillment for having received the specific benefit and an enthusiasm to continue playing thereafter.

[Feature mB4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mB1 to mB3,
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a profit information display means for displaying information regarding the profit acquired by the player through the granting of the specific profit at the end of the granting of the specific profit (during the special electric ending period of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot).

According to feature mB4, when the awarding of the specific benefit is completed, a benefit information display means is provided that displays information regarding the benefit acquired by the player through the awarding of the specific benefit. This allows the player to understand the benefit acquired by the awarding of the specific benefit, and also gives the player a sense of fulfillment for having acquired the specific benefit and an enthusiasm to continue playing thereafter.

[Feature mB5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mB1 to mB4,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the determination means includes a means for determining the award of one of a plurality of types of the specific benefit (special power opening/closing execution mode A or B based on a V-winning jackpot).

According to feature mB5, the determination means includes a means for determining whether or not a specific benefit will be awarded from among multiple types of specific benefits, so that the player can be made interested and concerned not only about whether or not a specific benefit will be awarded, but also about what type of specific benefit will be awarded if a specific benefit is awarded.

[Features mB6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mB1 to feature mB5,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a predetermined information changing means for performing variable display and stop display of predetermined identification information (decorative symbols) in the first state (round game).

Feature mB6 includes a predetermined information varying means for varying and stopping the display of the predetermined identification information in the first state, which gives the player a sense of surprise that the variable display of the predetermined identification information has begun in the first state, and creates great anticipation as to what the display mode (stop mode) will be when the predetermined identification information is stopped.

<Characteristic mC group>
The feature mC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mC1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a general lottery) that executes a first determination, which is a determination of whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entry possible state (open state);
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the third state transition means is transitioned between the ball entry impossible state and the ball entry enabled state (V winning jackpot). a third transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game ball enters the first ball entry means (general figure starting gate 35) and the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the game ball enters the first transition mode (general electric opening/closing execution). mode) is executed, and if the game ball continues to be fired in a predetermined firing mode,
During execution of the first transition mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) and the second transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on special figure small winning) is executed. is,
During execution of the second transition mode, a game ball enters the third ball entry means (first big prize opening 57a), and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means. The ball enters the ball entering means (V winning opening 57av) and the third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot) is executed,
Even after the third transition mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the ball entry possible state and changes the game ball. A game machine characterized in that the ball may be allowed to enter the second ball entry means.

According to feature mC1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means and the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition to execute the first transition mode, if the game ball continues to be launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the first transition mode to execute the second transition mode, the game ball enters the third ball entry means during the execution of the second transition mode, the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means to execute the third transition mode, and even after the third transition mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and while the first transition mode continues, the first state transition means transitions to a ball entry possible state, making it possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second transition mode will be executed again, and then the third transition mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed once, the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed multiple times, the player can have an opportunity to win a large amount of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have strong expectations for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mC2]
The gaming machine according to feature mC1,
When a game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for avoiding acquisition or avoiding execution of the second determination.

According to feature mC2, if the game ball enters the second entry means while the second transition mode or the third transition mode is being executed, a means is provided for avoiding the acquisition of the second predetermined information or avoiding the execution of the second judgment. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second entry means while the second transition mode or the third transition mode is being executed, the second transition mode is not executed thereafter, and the third transition mode is not executed either, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, the player can feel a sense of tension, wanting the second transition mode and the third transition mode to end before the timing arrives when the game ball can enter the second entry means.

In addition, if, unlike this feature, a configuration is adopted in which the acquisition of the second specified information and the execution of the second judgment are not avoided even if a game ball enters the second ball entry means while the second transition mode or the third transition mode is being executed, if multiple game balls enter the second ball entry means during one transition of the first state transition means to a ball entry possible state, multiple pieces of second specified information will be reserved, and the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed multiple times regardless of the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode.

In contrast, according to this feature, even if multiple game balls enter the second ball entry means during one transition to the ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which the second transition mode and the third transition mode are each executed once for one transition to the ball entry possible state of the first state transition means.

[Feature mC3]
The gaming machine according to feature mC1 or feature mC2,
The third transition mode execution means includes:
As the third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot), the time required from start to end is predetermined regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of executing a predetermined length third transition mode (fixed length special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) having a predetermined length.

According to feature mC3, the third transition mode execution means predetermines the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode, regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. Since the device includes means capable of executing the predetermined length third transition mode having a predetermined length, when the predetermined length third transition mode is executed, the length of the third transition mode becomes the predetermined length. It cannot be longer than the length of. Therefore, for example, even at the timing when the first state transition means transitions to the ball entering state due to the length of the third transition mode becoming longer than a predetermined length, the third transition mode has not yet ended. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where there is no such thing. As a result, the third transition mode is not completed even at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, and the second transition mode occurs even though the game ball enters the second ball entry means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player in which the mode is not executed and the third transition mode is also not executed.

<Characteristic mD group>
The group of features mD is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of its modifications.

[Feature mD1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a general lottery) that executes a first determination, which is a determination of whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entry possible state (open state);
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the third state transition means is transitioned between the ball entry not allowed state and the ball entry enabled state (V winning jackpot). a third transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
A gaming machine comprising:
In a situation where game balls are continuously being fired in a predetermined firing mode,
After the first transition mode is started,
With the start of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions from the ball entry disabled state to the ball entry enabled state;
The game ball enters the first ball entry means (regular figure starting gate 35) as the first state transition means transitions from the ball entry disabled state to the ball entry enabled state;
When the first predetermined information acquired when the game ball enters the first ball entry means (common game starting gate 35) satisfies the first condition, the game ball enters the first transition mode (common ticket opening/closing). execution mode) is executed,
During execution of the first transition mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) and the second transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on special figure small winning) is executed. is,
A game ball enters the third ball entry means (first big prize opening 57a) during execution of the second transition mode,
The game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) and the third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot) is executed. is,
When the time required for the third transition mode to end is defined as the specific required time (time from time t2 to time t10 in FIG. 68),
The first transition mode execution means includes:
A gaming machine comprising means for setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode) to be longer than the specific required time.

According to feature mD1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the third transition mode is executed. Ru.

According to this feature, the first transition mode execution means includes means that can set the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the specific required time, so that the first transition mode Even after the end of the first transition mode, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the ball entry possible state and the game ball is transferred to the second ball entry means. It may be possible to enter the ball.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed multiple times, the player has the opportunity to win a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, the player can have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

[Feature mD2]
The gaming machine according to feature mD1,
The first transition mode execution means causes the first state transition means to transition from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry enabled state after the third transition mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means.

According to feature mD2, the first transition mode execution means transitions the first state transition means from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry allowed state while the first transition mode is being executed and after the third transition mode ends. Since the game ball is provided with the means, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means after the third transition mode ends. If the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the third transition mode ends, the second transition mode will be executed again, and then the third transition mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed multiple times, the player can have an opportunity to win a large amount of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mD3]
The gaming machine according to feature mD1 or feature mD2,
When a game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for avoiding acquisition or avoiding execution of the second determination.

According to feature mD3, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, acquisition of the second predetermined information is avoided or Since a means for avoiding execution of the second determination is provided, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, the second The transition mode will not be executed and the third transition mode will not be executed either, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel nervous and want the second transition mode and the third transition mode to be completed by the time the game ball can enter the second ball entry means.

In addition, if, unlike this feature, a configuration is adopted in which the acquisition of the second specified information and the execution of the second judgment are not avoided even if a game ball enters the second ball entry means while the second transition mode or the third transition mode is being executed, if multiple game balls enter the second ball entry means during one transition of the first state transition means to a ball entry possible state, multiple pieces of second specified information will be reserved, and the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed multiple times regardless of the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode.

On the other hand, according to the present feature, even if a plurality of game balls enter the second ball entering means in one transition to the entry possible state of the first state transition means, the first state transition means enters the second ball entering means. It is possible to realize a gameplay in which the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed one time each for one transition of the one state transition means to the ball entry possible state.

[Feature mD4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mD1 to mD3,
The third transition mode execution means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is provided with a means capable of executing a predetermined-length third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode of a fixed length based on a V winning jackpot) in which the time required from start to end of the third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode of a fixed length based on a V winning jackpot) is a predetermined length regardless of the launch mode of the gaming ball and the behavior of the gaming ball after it is launched.

According to feature mD4, the third transition mode execution means includes means for executing a third transition mode of a predetermined length, in which the time required from start to end is a predetermined length regardless of the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after launch. Therefore, when the third transition mode of a predetermined length is executed, the length of the third transition mode does not exceed the predetermined length. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the third transition mode has not yet ended even at the timing when the first state transition means transitions to a ball entry possible state because the length of the third transition mode has become longer than the predetermined length. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, in which the third transition mode has not ended even at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, and the second transition mode is not executed despite the game ball entering the second ball entry means, and the third transition mode is not executed either.

<Features Group E>
The group of features mE is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of its modifications.

[Feature mE1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a common map lottery) that determines whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
When a predetermined benefit granting condition including that the game ball enters the second ball entry means is met, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed in which a privilege is granted to the player. a means for executing a privilege granting mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means includes:
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege awarding mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to the feature mE1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, the predetermined benefit granting condition is satisfied, and the game ball enters the benefit granting mode. is executed.

And according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means includes a means for setting the time required from start to end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the time required from start to end of the bonus-granting mode, so that the first transition mode continues even after the bonus-granting mode ends, and while the first transition mode continues, the first state transition means may transition to a ball-entry enabling state, making it possible for the game ball to enter the second ball-entry means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the bonus awarding mode will be executed again. In other words, when the first transition mode is executed, the bonus awarding mode may be executed multiple times. This makes it possible to create a strong sense of anticipation in the player for the first transition mode to start, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Feature mE2]
A gaming machine according to feature mE1,
The first transition mode execution means comprises a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball-scoring disabled state to the ball-scoring enabled state after the bonus-granting mode is ended during execution of the first transition mode.

According to feature mE1, the first transition mode execution means includes a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry prohibited state to a ball entry permitted state after the bonus-granting mode ends while the first transition mode is being executed, so that the game ball can enter the second ball entry means after the bonus-granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus-granting mode ends, the bonus-granting mode will be executed again. In other words, when the first transition mode is executed, the bonus-granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, the player can have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

[Features mE3]
The gaming machine according to feature mE1 or feature mE2,
The benefit granting mode execution means includes:
If a game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) during execution of the privilege awarding mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means as a trigger. A gaming machine comprising means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode.

According to feature mE3, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the privilege grant mode, the privilege provision mode execution means executes the procedure for causing the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. Since the game ball is provided with a means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by a ball, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means while the privilege granting mode is being executed, the privilege granting mode will not be executed thereafter. This results in a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel nervous and want the bonus award mode to end before the timing when the game ball can enter the second ball entry means arrives.

[Features mE4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mE1 to feature mE3,
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means (closed state), and a state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means, and a ball entry state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entering possible state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
Equipped with
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the privilege granting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state as the benefit award mode. A gaming machine comprising: a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) that transitions between the two states.

According to feature mE4, when a game ball enters the first ball entry means and the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition to execute the first transition mode, if the game ball continues to be launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the first transition mode to execute the second transition mode, and the game ball enters the third ball entry means during the execution of the second transition mode, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the third transition mode as the bonus-granting mode is executed. In other words, according to this feature, it is possible to execute the third transition mode as the bonus-granting mode in response to the game ball entering the second ball entry means that has become available for entry during the execution of the first transition mode.

<Features mF group>
The group of features mF is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of its modifications.

[Feature mF1]
A first ball entry means (a normal start gate 35) through which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means;
A first determination means (a function of executing a general drawing) for determining whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special ball start hole 34a) into which the game ball can enter;
A first state transition means (normal electric device 34b) that can transition between a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a ball entry allowed state (open state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A first transition mode execution means for executing a first transition mode (normal power opening and closing execution mode) that transitions the first state transition means between the ball-scoring impossible state and the ball-scoring possible state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition;
A bonus-granting mode execution means for executing a bonus-granting mode (a special-telephone opening/closing execution mode based on a winning ball) for granting a bonus to a player when a predetermined bonus-granting condition including the game ball entering the second ball-entry means is satisfied;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means includes a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball-scoring disabled state to the ball-scoring enabled state after the bonus-granting mode is ended during execution of the first transition mode.

According to feature mF1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, the predetermined benefit granting condition is satisfied, and the game ball enters the benefit granting mode. is executed.

According to this feature, the first transition mode execution means transitions the first state transition means from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry allowed state during execution of the first transition mode and after the privilege granting mode ends. Since the game ball is provided with a means for causing the ball to enter the second ball, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means after the privilege giving mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus granting mode ends, the bonus granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to feature mF1, the first transition mode execution means includes a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry prohibited state to a ball entry permitted state after the bonus-granting mode ends while the first transition mode is being executed, so that the game ball can enter the second ball entry means after the bonus-granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus-granting mode ends, the bonus-granting mode will be executed again. In other words, when the first transition mode is executed, the bonus-granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to create a strong sense of anticipation in the player about the start of the first transition mode, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Feature mF2]
The gaming machine according to feature mF1,
The benefit granting mode execution means includes:
If a game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) during execution of the privilege awarding mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means as a trigger. A gaming machine comprising means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode.

According to the feature mF2, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the privilege grant mode, the privilege grant mode execution means executes the procedure for causing the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. Since the game ball is provided with a means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by a ball, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means while the privilege granting mode is being executed, the privilege granting mode will not be executed thereafter. This results in a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel nervous and want the bonus award mode to end before the timing when the game ball can enter the second ball entry means arrives.

[Feature mF3]
The gaming machine according to feature mF1 or feature mF2,
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entry possible state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
Equipped with
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the privilege granting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state as the award award mode. A gaming machine comprising: a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) that transitions between the two states.

According to feature mF3, when a game ball enters the first ball entry means and the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition to execute the first transition mode, if the game ball continues to be launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the first transition mode to execute the second transition mode, and the game ball enters the third ball entry means during the execution of the second transition mode, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the third transition mode as the bonus-granting mode is executed. In other words, according to this feature, it is possible to execute the third transition mode as the bonus-granting mode in response to the game ball entering the second ball entry means that has become available for entry during the execution of the first transition mode.

<Characteristic mG group>
The feature mG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mG1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a common map lottery) that determines whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which, when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
Privilege awarding mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V-winning) is a mode in which a privilege is awarded to the player when a predetermined privilege awarding condition including that the game ball enters the second ball entry means is satisfied. );
A gaming machine comprising:
The benefit granting mode execution means includes:
If a game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) during execution of the privilege awarding mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means as a trigger. A gaming machine comprising means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode.

According to feature mG1, when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means and the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, if the gaming ball continues to be launched in a predetermined launching manner, the gaming ball enters the second ball entry means while the first transition mode is being executed, a predetermined bonus awarding condition is met, and the bonus awarding mode is executed.

According to this feature, the bonus-granting mode execution means includes a means for avoiding execution of the bonus-granting mode triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entry means when the bonus-granting mode is being executed, so that even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means while the bonus-granting mode is being executed, the bonus-granting mode will not be executed thereafter, which is disadvantageous to the player. This makes it possible to create a sense of tension in the player, hoping that the bonus-granting mode will end before the time arrives when the game ball can enter the second ball entry means.

[Feature mG2]
A gaming machine according to feature mG1,
The first transition mode execution means
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine comprising a means for setting the special privilege granting mode (special telephone opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning) to a time longer than the time required from start to end.

According to feature mG2, the first transition mode execution means includes a means for setting the time required from start to end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the time required from start to end of the bonus-granting mode, so that the first transition mode continues even after the bonus-granting mode ends, and while the first transition mode continues, the first state transition means may transition to a ball-entry possible state, making it possible for the game ball to enter the second ball-entry means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the bonus awarding mode will be executed again. In other words, when the first transition mode is executed, the bonus awarding mode may be executed multiple times. This makes it possible to create a strong sense of anticipation in the player for the first transition mode to start, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Feature mG3]
A gaming machine according to feature mG1 or feature mG2,
The first transition mode execution means includes a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball-scoring disabled state to the ball-scoring enabled state after the bonus-granting mode is ended during execution of the first transition mode.

According to feature mG3, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry not allowed state to a ball entry allowed state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. , it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus granting mode ends, the bonus granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have strong expectations for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mG4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mG1 to feature mG3,
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entry possible state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
Equipped with
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the privilege granting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state as the award award mode. A gaming machine comprising: a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) that transitions between the two states.

According to feature mG4, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is being continuously ejected in a predetermined ejection mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means. 3 transition modes are executed. That is, according to the present feature, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means that becomes available for entry during execution of the first transition mode, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is activated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Characteristic mH group>
The group of features mH is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of its modifications.

[Feature mH1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a common map lottery) that determines whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which, when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
When a predetermined benefit granting condition including that the game ball enters the second ball entry means is satisfied, a benefit granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed in which a privilege is granted to the player. a means for executing a privilege granting mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The benefit granting mode execution means includes:
As the privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot), the length from the start to the end is a predetermined length regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of executing a predetermined length privilege awarding mode (fixed length special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) having a length of .

According to feature mH1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means while the first transition mode is being executed, the predetermined benefit granting condition is satisfied, and the game ball enters the benefit granting mode. is executed.

According to this feature, the privilege granting mode execution means has a length from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode that is predetermined regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. Since the device is equipped with means capable of executing a predetermined length privilege granting mode in which the predetermined length is set, when the predetermined length privilege granting mode is executed, the length of the privilege granting mode is longer than the predetermined length. It doesn't get too long either. Therefore, for example, in a gaming machine where the length of the benefit granting mode is longer than a predetermined length, which would put the player in a disadvantageous situation, it is possible to suppress the disadvantageous situation for the player. be able to.

Specifically, for example, in a gaming machine where a game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the bonus grant mode, the bonus grant mode is not executed afterwards, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. The privilege granting mode becomes longer than a predetermined length, and even when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode has not yet ended, and the privilege granting mode is not executed thereafter. It is possible to prevent such disadvantageous situations for players.

[Feature mH2]
A gaming machine according to feature mH1,
The benefit granting mode execution means includes:
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means (special ball start hole 34a) during execution of the bonus awarding mode, a means is provided for avoiding execution of the bonus awarding mode triggered by the gaming ball entering the second ball entry means.

According to feature mH2, the bonus-granting mode execution means includes a means for avoiding execution of the bonus-granting mode triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entry means when the game ball enters the second ball entry means while the bonus-granting mode is being executed, so that even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means while the bonus-granting mode is being executed, the bonus-granting mode will not be executed thereafter, which is disadvantageous to the player.

However, according to this feature, the privilege granting mode execution means has a predetermined length as the privilege granting mode from the start to the end regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. Since the device is equipped with means capable of executing a predetermined length privilege granting mode in which the predetermined length is set, when the predetermined length privilege granting mode is executed, the length of the privilege granting mode is longer than the predetermined length. It doesn't get too long either. Therefore, in a situation where the length of the privilege granting mode has become longer than a predetermined length and the first state transition means has transitioned to the ready state, the privilege granting mode has not yet ended. The occurrence can be suppressed. As a result, even though the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the benefit granting mode triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entry means is not executed, which is disadvantageous for the player. It is possible to prevent such situations from occurring.

[Feature mH3]
The gaming machine according to feature mH1 or feature mH2,
The first transition mode execution means includes:
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege awarding mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to feature mH3, the first transition mode execution means includes a means for setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the bonus-granting mode, so that the first transition mode continues even after the bonus-granting mode ends, and while the first transition mode continues, the first state transition means may transition to a ball-entry enabling state, making it possible for the game ball to enter the second ball-entry means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the bonus awarding mode will be executed again. In other words, when the first transition mode is executed, the bonus awarding mode may be executed multiple times. This makes it possible to create a strong sense of anticipation in the player for the first transition mode to start, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Features mH4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mH1 to feature mH3,
The first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode, after the benefit granting mode ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mH4, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry not allowed state to a ball entry allowed state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus granting mode ends, the bonus granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mH5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mH1 to feature mH4,
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means (closed state), and a state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means (closed state), and a state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entering possible state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
Equipped with
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the privilege granting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state as the benefit award mode. A gaming machine comprising: a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) that transitions between the two states.

According to feature mH5, when a game ball enters the first ball entry means and the first predetermined information acquired satisfies the first condition to execute the first transition mode, if the game ball continues to be launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the first transition mode to execute the second transition mode, and the game ball enters the third ball entry means during the execution of the second transition mode, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the third transition mode as the bonus-granting mode is executed. In other words, according to this feature, it is possible to execute the third transition mode as the bonus-granting mode in response to the game ball entering the second ball entry means that has become available for entry during the execution of the first transition mode.

<Feature group I>
The group of features mI is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of its modifications.

[Feature mI1]
A first ball entry means (a normal start gate 35) through which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means;
A first determination means (a function of executing a general drawing) for determining whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special ball start hole 34a) into which the game ball can enter;
A first state transition means (normal electric device 34b) that can transition between a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a ball entry possible state (open state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A first transition mode execution means for executing a first transition mode (normal power opening and closing execution mode) that transitions the first state transition means between the ball-scoring impossible state and the ball-scoring possible state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition;
A bonus-granting mode execution means for executing a bonus-granting mode (a special-telephone opening/closing execution mode based on a winning ball) for granting a bonus to a player when a predetermined bonus-granting condition including the game ball entering the second ball-entry means is satisfied;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means
A gaming machine comprising a means for setting the length of an interval period (normal power interval period), which is the period from when the first state transition means transitions from the ball-scoring state to the ball-scoring non-state in the first transition mode (normal power opening and closing execution mode) to when the ball-scoring non-state transitions to the ball-scoring state, to a time longer than the time required from when the special power granting mode (special power opening and closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) begins to when it ends.

According to feature mI1, when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means and the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, if the gaming ball continues to be launched in a predetermined launching manner, the gaming ball enters the second ball entry means while the first transition mode is being executed, a predetermined bonus awarding condition is met, and the bonus awarding mode is executed.

According to this feature, the first transition mode execution means is configured to allow ball entry from the ball entry prohibited state after the first state transition means transitions from the ball entry possible state to the ball entry impossible state in the first transition mode. The device is provided with means capable of setting the length of an interval period, which is a period until the state changes, to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege grant mode. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be explained.

First, we will explain a comparative example configuration that, unlike this feature, sets the length of the interval period of the first transition mode to a time (e.g., 0.7T) that is shorter than the time (e.g., T) required from the start to the end of the bonus granting mode.

First, in the configuration of the comparative example, a case will be described in which a game ball enters the second ball entry means in the first ball entry possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. In this case, the bonus granting mode will be started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and the bonus granting mode is still continuing in the second ball entry possible state of the first state transition means. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the second ball entry means, a new bonus granting mode will not be started. After that, the second interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the third ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, the bonus granting mode has already ended, so if a game ball enters the second ball entry means, a new bonus granting mode will be started. In other words, in this case, the bonus awarding mode will be initiated when the game ball enters the second ball entry means in the first and third ball entry possible states of the first state transition means in the first transition mode, but will not be initiated even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means in the second ball entry possible state.

Next, in the configuration of a comparative example, a case will be described in which the game ball does not enter the second ball entering means in the first ball entering possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. In this case, the benefit grant mode is not started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, since the privilege granting mode is not executed, the game ball is transferred to the second ball entry means. If you enter the game, the bonus grant mode will start. Thereafter, the second interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the third ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, the privilege granting mode is still continuing. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, a new privilege granting mode will not be started. After that, the third interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the fourth ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, the bonus granting mode has already ended, so the game ball is transferred to the second entry ball. If you enter the means, a new benefit granting mode will start. That is, in this case, the privilege granting mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entry means in the second and fourth entry possible states of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. However, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means in the third ball entry possible state, the game will not start.

As such, unlike this feature, if the configuration of the comparative example is adopted in which the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a time shorter than the length of the bonus-granting mode, the timing of the start of the bonus-granting mode during execution of the first transition mode will not be fixed, which will lead to problems such as the flow of the game becoming complicated and making it difficult to control the game.

Next, we will explain the case where the configuration of this characteristic is adopted, in which the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a time (e.g., 1.3T) longer than the time (e.g., T) required from the start to the end of the bonus granting mode.

First, in the configuration of this feature, a case where a game ball enters the second ball entering means in the first ball entering possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode will be described. In this case, the privilege granting mode will be started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, since the privilege giving mode has already ended, the game ball is in the second entry state. If you enter the means, a new benefit granting mode will start.

Next, in the configuration of this feature, a case will be described in which the game ball does not enter the second ball entry means in the first entry possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. In this case, the privilege granting mode is not started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, since the privilege granting mode is not being executed, the game ball is transferred to the second ball entry means. If you enter the game, the bonus grant mode will start.

In this way, according to this feature, the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the bonus-granting mode, so that at the timing when the first state transition means becomes a ball-scoring state in the first transition mode, the bonus-granting mode is not being executed or has already ended, regardless of how many times the first state transition means has become a ball-scoring state. Therefore, when the first state transition means becomes a ball-scoring state in the first transition mode, the bonus-granting mode does not not start even if a game ball enters the second ball-scoring means. In other words, according to this feature, the timing of the start of the bonus-granting mode during the execution of the first transition mode can be fixed, and the flow of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated, and by setting the number of times the first state transition means becomes a ball-scoring state during the execution of the first transition mode, it is possible to set an upper limit on the number of times the bonus-granting mode can be executed during the execution of the first transition mode.

[Feature mI2]
A gaming machine according to feature mI1,
The first transition mode execution means
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine comprising a means for setting the special privilege granting mode (special telephone opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning) to a time longer than the time required from start to end.

According to feature mI2, the first transition mode execution means includes means that can set the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a longer time than the time required from the start to the end of the benefit granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege giving mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the state where the ball can be entered, and the game ball changes to the second state. In some cases, the ball may be able to enter the ball using the following ball entry method.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the bonus awarding mode will be executed again. In other words, when the first transition mode is executed, the bonus awarding mode may be executed multiple times. This makes it possible to create a strong sense of anticipation in the player for the first transition mode to start, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Feature mI3]
A gaming machine according to feature mI1 or feature mI2,
The first transition mode execution means includes a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball-scoring disabled state to the ball-scoring enabled state after the bonus-granting mode is ended during execution of the first transition mode.

According to feature mI3, the first transition mode execution means includes a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry prohibited state to a ball entry permitted state after the bonus-granting mode ends while the first transition mode is being executed, so that the game ball can enter the second ball entry means after the bonus-granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus-granting mode ends, the bonus-granting mode is executed again. In other words, when the first transition mode is executed, the bonus-granting mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, the player can have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature mI4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mI1 to mI3,
A second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special ball start hole 34a);
A second judgment means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second judgment, which is a judgment of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
a third ball entry means (first big winning hole 57a) into which the game ball can enter;
A second state transition means (first special electric device 57b) that can transition between a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means and a ball entry possible state (open state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means;
A second transition mode execution means for executing a second transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special chart small win) that transitions the second state transition means between the ball-scoring impossible state and the ball-scoring possible state when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition;
A fourth ball entry means (V entry port 57av) into which the game ball that entered the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (a second large winning hole 58a) into which the game ball can enter;
A third state transition means (second special electric device 58b) that can transition between a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means and a ball entry possible state (open state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means;
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the bonus-granting mode execution means includes a third transition mode execution means which, when a gaming ball enters the fourth ball entry means, executes, as the bonus-granting mode, a third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-entry jackpot) which transitions the third state transition means between the ball entry prohibited state and the ball entry permitted state.

According to feature mI4, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means. 3 transition modes are executed. That is, according to the present feature, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means that becomes available for entry during execution of the first transition mode, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is activated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Characteristic mJ group>
The group of features mJ is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of its modifications.

[Feature mJ1]
A first ball entry means (a normal start gate 35) through which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means;
A first determination means (a function of executing a general drawing) for determining whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special ball start hole 34a) into which the game ball can enter;
A first state transition means (normal electric device 34b) that can transition between a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a ball entry possible state (open state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A first transition mode execution means for executing a first transition mode (normal power opening and closing execution mode) that transitions the first state transition means between the ball-scoring impossible state and the ball-scoring possible state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition;
A bonus-granting mode execution means for executing a bonus-granting mode (a special-telephone opening/closing execution mode based on a winning ball) for granting a bonus to a player when a predetermined bonus-granting condition including the game ball entering the second ball-entry means is satisfied;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for setting the length of a waiting period (normal power ending period), which is the period from when the first state transition means last transitions from the ball-scoring state to the ball-scoring non-scoring state in the first transition mode (normal power opening and closing execution mode) to when the first judgment means can execute the first judgment, to a time longer than the time required from when the special power granting mode (special power opening and closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) starts to when it ends.

According to feature mJ1, when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means and the acquired first predetermined information satisfies a first condition and the first transition mode is executed, if the gaming ball continues to be launched in a predetermined launching manner, the gaming ball enters the second ball entry means while the first transition mode is being executed, a predetermined bonus awarding condition is met, and the bonus awarding mode is executed.

According to the present feature, the first transition mode execution means is configured to perform the first state transition by the first determination means after the first state transition means last transitions from the ball entry possible state to the ball entry impossible state in the first transition mode. The apparatus is provided with a means capable of setting the length of a waiting period, which is a period until determination No. 1 can be executed, to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege grant mode. The reason for adopting this configuration will be explained.

First, we will explain a case where a configuration is adopted in which the length of the waiting period is set to a time shorter than the time required from the start to the end of the bonus-granting mode, which is different from this feature. In this configuration, for example, if the first judgment is executed after the end of the waiting period and it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode is executed, and during the execution of the first transition mode, the game ball may enter the second ball entry means, and the bonus-granting mode may be executed. However, in this configuration, if the bonus-granting mode is executed immediately after the start of the waiting period, the bonus-granting mode may continue even after the waiting period ends, and the bonus-granting mode may continue even at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. In this case, there is a problem that the bonus-granting mode is not executed even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, which puts the player in a disadvantageous situation.

In response to this, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means includes means for setting the length of the waiting period, which is the period from when the first state transition means last transitions from a ball-scoring state to a ball-scoring non-scoring state in the first transition mode until the first determination means can make a first determination, to a time longer than the time required from when the bonus-granting mode is started to when it is ended, thereby making it possible to prevent a situation in which the bonus-granting mode continues even after the waiting period has ended and to prevent a situation that is disadvantageous to the player.

[Feature mJ2]
A gaming machine according to feature mJ1,
The first transition mode execution means
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine comprising a means for setting the special privilege granting mode (special telephone opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning) to a time longer than the time required from start to end.

According to feature mJ2, the first transition mode execution means includes a means for setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the bonus-granting mode, so that the first transition mode continues even after the bonus-granting mode ends, and while the first transition mode continues, the first state transition means may transition to a ball-entry possible state, making it possible for the game ball to enter the second ball-entry means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the benefit grant mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mJ3]
The gaming machine according to feature mJ1 or feature mJ2,
The first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode, after the benefit granting mode ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mJ3, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry prohibited state to a ball entry possible state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. , it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus granting mode ends, the bonus granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mJ4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mJ1 to mJ3,
A second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special ball start hole 34a);
A second judgment means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second judgment, which is a judgment of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
a third ball entry means (first big winning hole 57a) into which the game ball can enter;
A second state transition means (first special electric device 57b) that can transition between a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means and a ball entry possible state (open state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means;
A second transition mode execution means for executing a second transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special chart small win) that transitions the second state transition means between the ball-scoring impossible state and the ball-scoring possible state when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition;
A fourth ball entry means (V entry port 57av) into which the game ball that entered the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (a second large winning hole 58a) into which the game ball can enter;
A third state transition means (second special electric device 58b) that can transition between a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means and a ball entry possible state (open state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means;
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the bonus-granting mode execution means includes a third transition mode execution means which, when a gaming ball enters the fourth ball entry means, executes, as the bonus-granting mode, a third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-entry jackpot) which transitions the third state transition means between the ball entry prohibited state and the ball entry permitted state.

According to feature mJ4, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means. 3 transition modes are executed. That is, according to the present feature, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means that becomes available for entry during execution of the first transition mode, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is activated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Feature mK group>
The group of features mK is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of the modifications.

[Feature mK1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a common map lottery) that determines whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
When a predetermined benefit granting condition including that the game ball enters the second ball entry means is met, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed in which a privilege is granted to the player. a means for executing a privilege granting mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means includes:
In the first transition mode (normal power opening/closing execution mode), the first state transition means finally transitions from the ball entry possible state to the ball entry impossible state, and then the first judgment means executes the next determination. The length of the waiting period (Fuden Ending Period), which is the period until it becomes possible, is
An interval period (normal power interval period) is a period from when the first state transition means transitions from the ball entry enabled state to the ball entry disabled state and from when the ball entry disabled state transitions to the ball entry enabled state. ) (135.0 seconds) or more (140.0 seconds).

According to feature mK1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means while the first transition mode is being executed, the predetermined benefit granting condition is satisfied, and the game ball enters the benefit granting mode. is executed.

According to this feature, the first transition mode execution means includes means for setting the length of the waiting period, which is the period from when the first state transition means last transitions from a ball-scoring state to a ball-not-scoring state in the first transition mode until the next determination by the first determination means can be made, to a length equal to or longer than the interval period, which is the period from when the first state transition means transitions from a ball-scoring state to a ball-not-scoring state to when the ball-not-scoring state transitions from a ball-scoring state to a ball-scoring state. Therefore, it is possible to realize the same series of gameplay flows realized in the interval period of the first transition mode in the waiting period of the first transition mode. As a result, it is possible to realize a new game in which, for example, a bonus-granting mode can be executed in both the interval period and the waiting period in the first transition mode.

[Feature mK2]
A gaming machine according to feature mK1,
The first transition mode execution means
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine comprising a means for setting the special privilege granting mode (special telephone opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning) to a time longer than the time required from start to end.

According to feature mK2, the first transition mode execution means includes means that can set the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a longer time than the time required from the start to the end of the benefit granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege giving mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the state where the ball can be entered, and the game ball changes to the second state. In some cases, the ball may be able to enter the ball using the following ball entry method.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the bonus awarding mode will be executed again. In other words, when the first transition mode is executed, the bonus awarding mode may be executed multiple times. This makes it possible to create a strong sense of anticipation in the player for the first transition mode to start, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Features mK3]
The gaming machine according to feature mK1 or feature mK2,
The first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode, after the benefit granting mode ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mK3, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry not allowed state to a ball entry allowed state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. , it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus granting mode ends, the bonus granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mK4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mK1 to mK3,
A second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special ball start hole 34a);
A second judgment means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second judgment, which is a judgment of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
a third ball entry means (first big winning hole 57a) into which the game ball can enter;
A second state transition means (first special electric device 57b) that can transition between a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means and a ball entry possible state (open state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means;
A second transition mode execution means for executing a second transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special chart small win) that transitions the second state transition means between the ball-scoring impossible state and the ball-scoring possible state when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition;
A fourth ball entry means (V entry port 57av) into which the game ball that entered the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (a second large winning hole 58a) into which the game ball can enter;
A third state transition means (second special electric device 58b) that can transition between a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means and a ball entry possible state (open state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means;
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the bonus-granting mode execution means includes a third transition mode execution means which, when a gaming ball enters the fourth ball entry means, executes, as the bonus-granting mode, a third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-entry jackpot) which transitions the third state transition means between the ball entry prohibited state and the ball entry permitted state.

According to feature mK4, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means. 3 transition modes are executed. That is, according to the present feature, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means that becomes available for entry during execution of the first transition mode, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is activated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Feature mL group>
The group of features mL is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of its modifications.

[Feature mL1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a common map lottery) that determines whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which, when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
When a predetermined benefit granting condition including that the game ball enters the second ball entry means is satisfied, a benefit granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed in which a privilege is granted to the player. a means for executing a privilege granting mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
Based on the transition mode (number of openings) of the first state transition means in the first transition mode to transition from the ball entry disabled state to the ball entry enabled state, the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode) is set. A gaming machine characterized in that an upper limit number of times (upper limit number of consecutive games) that the privilege awarding mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special electric opening/closing scenario for a V winning jackpot) can be executed during execution is determined.

According to feature mL1, when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means and the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, if the gaming ball continues to be launched in a predetermined launching manner, the gaming ball enters the second ball entry means while the first transition mode is being executed, a predetermined bonus granting condition is met, and the bonus granting mode is executed.

And according to this feature, the upper limit number of times the bonus-granting mode can be executed while the first transition mode is being executed is determined based on the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode, which transitions from a ball-scoring-prohibited state to a ball-scoring-allowed state, so the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode becomes a very important factor for the player. Therefore, when the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, the player can be made interested in the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

[Features mL2]
The gaming machine described in feature mL1,
The first transition mode execution means includes:
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege awarding mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to feature mL2, the first transition mode execution means includes a means for setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the bonus-granting mode, so that the first transition mode continues even after the bonus-granting mode ends, and while the first transition mode continues, the first state transition means may transition to a ball-entry possible state, making it possible for the game ball to enter the second ball-entry means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the benefit grant mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mL3]
The gaming machine according to feature mL1 or feature mL2,
The first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode, after the benefit granting mode ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mL3, the first transition mode execution means includes a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry prohibited state to a ball entry permitted state after the bonus-granting mode ends while the first transition mode is being executed, so that the game ball can enter the second ball entry means after the bonus-granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus-granting mode ends, the bonus-granting mode is executed again. In other words, when the first transition mode is executed, the bonus-granting mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, the player can have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

[Features mL4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mL1 to feature mL3,
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entry possible state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
Equipped with
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the privilege granting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state as the award award mode. A gaming machine comprising: a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) that transitions between the two states.

According to feature mL4, when a game ball enters the first ball entry means and the first predetermined information acquired satisfies the first condition to execute the first transition mode, if the game ball continues to be launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the first transition mode to execute the second transition mode, and the game ball enters the third ball entry means during the execution of the second transition mode, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the third transition mode as the bonus-granting mode is executed. In other words, according to this feature, it is possible to execute the third transition mode as the bonus-granting mode in response to the game ball entering the second ball entry means that has become available for entry during the execution of the first transition mode.

<Characteristic mm group>
The feature mm group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mM1]
A first ball entry means (a normal start gate 35) through which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means;
A first determination means (a function of executing a general drawing) for determining whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special ball start hole 34a) into which the game ball can enter;
A first state transition means (normal electric device 34b) that can transition between a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a ball entry possible state (open state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A first transition mode execution means for executing a first transition mode (normal power opening and closing execution mode) that transitions the first state transition means between the ball-scoring impossible state and the ball-scoring possible state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition;
A bonus-granting mode execution means for executing a bonus-granting mode (a special-telephone opening/closing execution mode based on a winning ball) for granting a bonus to a player when a predetermined bonus-granting condition including the game ball entering the second ball-entry means is satisfied;
A gaming machine comprising:
The benefit granting mode execution means includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for executing the bonus granting mode during an interval period (normal power interval period) which is the period from when the first state transition means transitions from the ball-scoring possible state to the ball-scoring impossible state to when the first state transition means transitions from the ball-scoring impossible state to the ball-scoring possible state during the period when the first transition mode is being executed.

According to feature mm1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means while the first transition mode is being executed, the predetermined benefit granting condition is satisfied, and the game ball enters the benefit granting mode. is executed.

And according to this feature, the bonus-granting mode execution means includes means for executing the bonus-granting mode during the interval period during which the first transition mode is being executed, which is the period from when the first state transition means transitions from a ball-scoring state to a ball-not-scoring state to when the ball-scoring state transitions from the ball-scoring state to the ball-scoring state. Therefore, the number of interval periods included in the first transition mode is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, when the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, the player can be made interested and concerned about how many interval periods are included in the first transition mode, which can increase the excitement of the game.

[Feature mm2]
The gaming machine according to feature mm1,
The first transition mode execution means includes:
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege awarding mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to feature mM2, the first transition mode execution means includes a means for setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the bonus-granting mode, so that the first transition mode continues even after the bonus-granting mode ends, and while the first transition mode continues, the first state transition means may transition to a ball-entry possible state, making it possible for the game ball to enter the second ball-entry means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the bonus awarding mode will be executed again. In other words, when the first transition mode is executed, the bonus awarding mode may be executed multiple times. This makes it possible to create a strong sense of anticipation in the player for the first transition mode to start, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Feature mM3]
A gaming machine according to feature mM1 or feature mM2,
The first transition mode execution means includes a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball-scoring disabled state to the ball-scoring enabled state after the bonus-granting mode is ended during execution of the first transition mode.

According to feature mM3, the first transition mode execution means includes a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry prohibited state to a ball entry permitted state after the bonus-granting mode ends while the first transition mode is being executed, so that the game ball can enter the second ball entry means after the bonus-granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus-granting mode ends, the bonus-granting mode will be executed again. In other words, when the first transition mode is executed, the bonus-granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to create a strong sense of anticipation in the player about the start of the first transition mode, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Feature mM4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mM1 to mM3,
A second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special ball start hole 34a);
A second judgment means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second judgment, which is a judgment of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
a third ball entry means (first big winning hole 57a) into which the game ball can enter;
A second state transition means (first special electric device 57b) that can transition between a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means and a ball entry possible state (open state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means;
A second transition mode execution means for executing a second transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special chart small win) that transitions the second state transition means between the ball-scoring impossible state and the ball-scoring possible state when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition;
A fourth ball entry means (V entry port 57av) into which the game ball that entered the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (a second large winning hole 58a) into which the game ball can enter;
A third state transition means (second special electric device 58b) that can transition between a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means and a ball entry possible state (open state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means;
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the bonus-granting mode execution means includes a third transition mode execution means which, when a gaming ball enters the fourth ball entry means, executes, as the bonus-granting mode, a third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-entry jackpot) which transitions the third state transition means between the ball entry prohibited state and the ball entry permitted state.

According to feature mm4, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means. 3 transition modes are executed. That is, according to the present feature, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means that becomes available for entry during execution of the first transition mode, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is activated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Characteristic mN group>
The feature mN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mN1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a common map lottery) that determines whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
When a predetermined benefit granting condition including that the game ball enters the second ball entry means is met, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed in which a privilege is granted to the player. a means for executing a privilege granting mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The privilege granting mode execution means executes the privilege granting mode (special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) a plurality of times from the start of the first transition mode (general electric switch opening/closing execution mode) to the end thereof. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a means capable of doing so.

According to feature mN1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means while the first transition mode is being executed, the predetermined benefit granting condition is satisfied, and the game ball enters the benefit granting mode. is executed.

According to this feature, the privilege granting mode execution means includes means capable of executing the privilege granting mode a plurality of times between the start and end of the first transition mode, so that the first transition mode is Whether or not the game starts is a very important factor for players. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is started, and the first transition mode is started. In this case, it is possible to make the player interested in how many times the privilege awarding mode will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mN2]
A gaming machine according to feature mN1,
The first transition mode execution means
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine comprising a means for setting the special privilege granting mode (special telephone opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning) to a time longer than the time required from start to end.

According to feature mN2, the first transition mode execution means includes a means for setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the bonus-granting mode, so that the first transition mode continues even after the bonus-granting mode ends, and while the first transition mode continues, the first state transition means may transition to a ball-entry possible state, making it possible for the game ball to enter the second ball-entry means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the bonus awarding mode will be executed again. In other words, when the first transition mode is executed, the bonus awarding mode may be executed multiple times. This makes it possible to create a strong sense of anticipation in the player for the first transition mode to start, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Feature mN3]
The gaming machine according to feature mN1 or feature 2,
The first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode, after the benefit granting mode ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mN3, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry not allowed state to a ball entry allowed state during execution of the first transition mode, after the privilege granting mode ends. , it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus granting mode ends, the bonus granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mN4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mN1 to feature mN3,
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means (closed state), and a state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means (closed state), and a state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entry possible state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
Equipped with
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the privilege granting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state as the benefit award mode. A gaming machine comprising: a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) that transitions between the two states.

According to feature mN4, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means. 3 transition modes are executed. That is, according to the present feature, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means that becomes available for entry during execution of the first transition mode, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is activated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Characteristic mO group>
The feature mO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mO1]
A first ball entry means (a normal start gate 35) through which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means;
A first determination means (a function of executing a general drawing) for determining whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special ball start hole 34a) into which the game ball can enter;
A first state transition means (normal electric device 34b) that can transition between a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a ball entry possible state (open state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A first transition mode execution means for executing a first transition mode (normal power opening and closing execution mode) that transitions the first state transition means between the ball-scoring impossible state and the ball-scoring possible state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition;
A bonus-granting mode execution means for executing a bonus-granting mode (a special-telephone opening/closing execution mode based on a winning ball) for granting a bonus to a player when a predetermined bonus-granting condition including the game ball entering the second ball-entry means is satisfied;
A performance execution means for executing a performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine is characterized in that the effect execution means includes a means for executing an effect (figure) that suggests a transition mode (number of openings) for transitioning from a previous ball-entry-prohibited state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode to the ball-entry-possible state.

According to feature mO1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means while the first transition mode is being executed, the predetermined benefit granting condition is satisfied, and the game ball enters the benefit granting mode. is executed.

And according to this feature, the device is provided with a means for executing a presentation suggesting the transition state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode, which transitions from a state where a ball cannot be scored to a state where a ball can be scored. Therefore, when the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, the player can be made interested in or concerned about the transition state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode, thereby making the game more entertaining.

[Features mO2]
A gaming machine according to feature mO1,
A gaming machine characterized in that a maximum number of times (maximum number of consecutive wins) that can be executed in the bonus granting mode (special power opening and closing execution mode based on a special power opening and closing scenario for a V-winning jackpot) during execution of the first transition mode (normal power opening and closing execution mode) is determined based on the transition mode (number of openings) of the first state transition means in the first transition mode, which transitions from a pre-ball-entry-prohibited state to the ball-entry-prohibited state.

According to the feature mO2, based on the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode to transition from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry allowed state, the privilege granting mode is executed during the execution of the first transition mode. Since the possible upper limit number of times is determined, the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode becomes a very important factor for the player. Therefore, when the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, the player may be interested in the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. It is possible to make the game more interesting and to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mO3]
The gaming machine according to feature mO1 or feature mO2,
The first transition mode execution means includes:
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of setting a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege awarding mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to feature mO3, the first transition mode execution means includes a means for setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the bonus-granting mode, so that the first transition mode continues even after the bonus-granting mode ends, and while the first transition mode continues, the first state transition means may transition to a ball-entry possible state, making it possible for the game ball to enter the second ball-entry means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the benefit grant mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mO4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mO1 to feature mO3,
The first transition mode executing means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode, after the privilege granting mode ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mO4, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry not allowed state to a ball entry allowed state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. , it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus granting mode ends, the bonus granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mO5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mO1 to mO4,
A second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special ball start hole 34a);
A second judgment means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second judgment, which is a judgment of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
a third ball entry means (first big winning hole 57a) into which the game ball can enter;
A second state transition means (first special electric device 57b) that can transition between a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means and a ball entry possible state (open state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means;
A second transition mode execution means for executing a second transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special chart small win) that transitions the second state transition means between the ball-scoring impossible state and the ball-scoring possible state when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition;
A fourth ball entry means (V entry port 57av) into which the game ball that entered the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (a second large winning hole 58a) into which the game ball can enter;
A third state transition means (second special electric device 58b) that can transition between a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means and a ball entry possible state (open state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means;
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the bonus-granting mode execution means includes a third transition mode execution means which, when a gaming ball enters the fourth ball entry means, executes, as the bonus-granting mode, a third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-entry jackpot) which transitions the third state transition means between the ball entry prohibited state and the ball entry permitted state.

According to feature mO5, when a game ball enters the first ball entry means and the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition to execute the first transition mode, if the game ball continues to be launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the first transition mode to execute the second transition mode, and the game ball enters the third ball entry means during the execution of the second transition mode, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the third transition mode as the bonus-granting mode is executed. In other words, according to this feature, it is possible to execute the third transition mode as the bonus-granting mode in response to the game ball entering the second ball entry means that has become available for entry during the execution of the first transition mode.

<Characteristic mP group>
The feature mP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature mP1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a common map lottery) that determines whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which, when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
When a predetermined benefit granting condition including that the game ball enters the second ball entry means is satisfied, a benefit granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is executed in which a privilege is granted to the player. a means for executing a privilege granting mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The benefit granting mode execution means includes:
As the benefit granting mode, there is an indefinite benefit granting mode that may not end by the predetermined timing (timing when the normal electric accessory 34b opens) in the first transition mode (in the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot in the modified example). A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a means capable of executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode (based on special electric opening/closing execution mode).

According to feature mP1, when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means and the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, if the gaming ball continues to be launched in a predetermined launching manner, the gaming ball enters the second ball entry means while the first transition mode is being executed, a predetermined bonus awarding condition is met, and the bonus awarding mode is executed.

According to this feature, the privilege granting mode execution means includes means capable of executing, as the privilege granting mode, an indefinite privilege granting mode that may not end by a predetermined timing in the first transition mode.

For example, if the configuration of this feature is applied to a gaming machine that would be at a disadvantage to the player if the benefit granting mode did not end by a predetermined timing in the first transition mode, the player would be in a disadvantageous situation. , it is possible to make the user feel impatient and want the indefinite benefit granting mode to end by a predetermined timing.

In particular, in the case of a configuration in which whether or not the indefinite benefit granting mode ends by a predetermined timing depends on the firing manner of the game ball and the behavior of the fired game ball, the player is informed of the firing manner of the game ball and the behavior of the fired game ball. It is possible to arouse interest and interest in the behavior of the game ball.

[Feature mP2]
A gaming machine according to feature mP1,
The benefit granting mode execution means includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the bonus awarding mode has not ended by the specified timing in the first transition mode, a means is provided for avoiding execution of the bonus awarding mode triggered by the gaming ball entering the second ball entry means (special ball start hole 34a), even if the gaming ball enters the second ball entry means.

According to feature mP2, if the indefinite benefit granting mode has not ended by the predetermined timing in the first transition mode, the privilege giving mode execution means executes the procedure when the game ball enters the second ball entering means. Even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the game ball is provided with a means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means, so that the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the privilege granting mode. Even if the player enters the game, the bonus granting mode will not be executed after that, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel impatient and want the indefinite benefit granting mode to end by a predetermined timing.

[Feature mP3]
A gaming machine according to feature mP1 or feature mP2,
The first transition mode execution means
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine comprising a means for setting the special privilege granting mode (special telephone opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning) to a time longer than the time required from start to end.

According to feature mP3, the first transition mode execution means includes a means for setting the time required from start to end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the time required from start to end of the bonus-granting mode, so that the first transition mode continues even after the bonus-granting mode ends, and while the first transition mode continues, the first state transition means may transition to a ball-entry enabling state, making it possible for the game ball to enter the second ball-entry means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the benefit grant mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mP4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mP1 to feature mP3,
The first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode, after the benefit granting mode ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mP4, the first transition mode execution means includes means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry prohibited state to a ball entry permitted state after the bonus-granting mode ends while the first transition mode is being executed, so that the game ball can enter the second ball entry means after the bonus-granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus-granting mode ends, the bonus-granting mode will be executed again. In other words, when the first transition mode is executed, the bonus-granting mode will be executed multiple times. This makes it possible to create a strong sense of anticipation in the player about the start of the first transition mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Feature mP5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mP1 to feature mP4,
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means (closed state), and a state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entering possible state (open state);
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
Equipped with
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the privilege granting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state as the benefit award mode. A gaming machine comprising: a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) that transitions between the two states.

According to feature mP5, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means. 3 transition modes are executed. That is, according to the present feature, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means that becomes available for entry during execution of the first transition mode, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is activated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Feature mQ group>
The group of features mQ is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of its modifications.

[Feature mQ1]
A first ball entry means (a normal start gate 35) through which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquiring means for acquiring first predetermined information based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means;
A first determination means (a function of executing a general drawing) for determining whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entry means (special ball start hole 34a) into which the game ball can enter;
A first state transition means (normal electric device 34b) that can transition between a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a ball entry possible state (open state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A first transition mode execution means for executing a first transition mode (normal power opening and closing execution mode) that transitions the first state transition means between the ball-scoring impossible state and the ball-scoring possible state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition;
A bonus-granting mode execution means for executing a bonus-granting mode (a special-telephone opening/closing execution mode based on a winning ball) for granting a bonus to a player when a predetermined bonus-granting condition including the game ball entering the second ball-entry means is satisfied;
A special ball entry means (second special electric device 58b) that allows a game ball to enter the game ball while the special ball entry mode is being executed;
A performance execution means for executing a performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine is characterized in that the effect execution means is equipped with a means for executing an effect (ball entry promotion effect shown in Figure 93 (A)) that encourages a predetermined number of game balls to enter the bonus awarding ball entry means by a predetermined timing (the timing when the normal electric device 34b is next opened) during execution of the bonus awarding mode.

According to feature mQ1, when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means and the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, if the gaming ball continues to be launched in a predetermined launching manner, the gaming ball enters the second ball entry means while the first transition mode is being executed, a predetermined bonus awarding condition is met, and the bonus awarding mode is executed.

And according to this feature, the effect execution means includes means capable of executing an effect that prompts the player to enter a predetermined number of game balls into the bonus-granting ball entry means by a predetermined timing while the bonus-granting mode is being executed.

When this characteristic configuration is applied to a gaming machine in which the player is put at a disadvantage if the bonus-granting mode is not ended by a predetermined timing in the first transition mode, it is possible to allow the player to understand the new gameplay in which the bonus-granting mode can be ended by a predetermined timing by having a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the bonus-granting ball entry means by the predetermined timing, and it is also possible to increase the player's motivation to have a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the bonus-granting ball entry means by the predetermined timing.

[Feature mQ2]
A gaming machine according to feature mQ1,
The effect execution means is provided with a means for executing a specific effect (a disappearance effect shown in FIG. 93(C)) if the bonus granting mode has not ended by the specified timing.

According to feature mQ2, the effect executing means includes means capable of executing a specific effect when the privilege awarding mode is not completed by a predetermined timing, so that the effect is not granted to the player by the predetermined timing. It is possible to make the player recognize that the mode has not ended, and it is also possible to make the player recognize that the subsequent flow of the game will change due to the fact that the privilege granting mode has not ended.

[Feature mQ3]
A gaming machine according to feature mQ1 or feature mQ2,
The benefit granting mode execution means includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the bonus awarding mode has not ended by the specified timing, a means is provided for avoiding execution of the bonus awarding mode triggered by the gaming ball entering the second ball entry means (special ball start hole 34a), even if the gaming ball enters the second ball entry means.

According to feature mQ3, the bonus-granting mode execution means includes a means for avoiding execution of the bonus-granting mode triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the second ball entry means if the bonus-granting mode has not ended by the specified timing, even if the gaming ball enters the second ball entry means. Therefore, even if the gaming ball enters the second ball entry means while the bonus-granting mode is being executed, the bonus-granting mode will not be executed thereafter, which is disadvantageous to the player. This can cause the player to feel impatient and want the bonus-granting mode to end by the specified timing.

[Feature mQ4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mQ1 to mQ3,
The first transition mode execution means
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
A gaming machine comprising a means for setting the special privilege granting mode (special telephone opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning) to a time longer than the time required from start to end.

According to feature mQ4, the first transition mode execution means includes means that can set the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a longer time than the time required from the start to the end of the benefit granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege giving mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the state where the ball can be entered, and the game ball changes to the second state. In some cases, the ball may be able to enter the ball using the following ball entry method.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the benefit grant mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mQ5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mQ1 to feature mQ4,
The first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode, after the benefit granting mode ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature mQ5, the first transition mode execution means includes a means for transitioning the first state transition means from a ball entry prohibited state to a ball entry permitted state after the bonus-granting mode ends while the first transition mode is being executed, so that the game ball can enter the second ball entry means after the bonus-granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the bonus-granting mode ends, the bonus-granting mode will be executed again. In other words, when the first transition mode is executed, the bonus-granting mode will be executed multiple times. Therefore, the player can have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature mQ6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features mQ1 to feature mQ5,
a second predetermined information acquisition means that obtains second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means (special figure starting port 34a);
a second determination means (a function of executing a special drawing lottery) that executes a second determination, which is a determination of whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
a second transition mode in which, when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state; a second transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a special figure small hit;
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the privilege-granting ball entry means, and a state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the privilege-granting ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enabled state (open state);
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the bonus ball entry means;
Equipped with
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the privilege granting mode execution means changes the third state transition means between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state as the award award mode. A gaming machine comprising: a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-winning jackpot) that transitions between the two states.

According to feature mQ6, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means. 3 transition modes are executed. That is, according to the present feature, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means that becomes available for entry during execution of the first transition mode, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is activated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Characteristic mR group>
The group of features mR is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of its modifications.

[Feature mR1]
A first ball entry means (normal game starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter;
a first predetermined information acquisition means that obtains first predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
a first determination means (a function of executing a general lottery) that executes a first determination, which is a determination of whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
a second ball entry means (special electric starting port) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. a first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can enter (open state);
a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transitions between the ball entry disabled state and the ball entry enabled state when it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition; a first transition mode execution means for executing a general power switching execution mode);
A third ball entry means (first grand prize opening 57a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. a second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a state where the ball can be entered (open state);
A second transition mode in which the second state transition means is transitioned between the ball entry impossible state and the ball entry enabled state when a game ball enters the second ball entry means (special electric starting port); (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric starting port);
a fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) into which the game ball entered into the third ball entry means can enter;
A fifth ball entry means (second grand prize opening 58a) into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry prohibited state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means; and a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means. a third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball entry possible state (open state);
When a game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the third state transition means is transitioned between the ball entry impossible state and the ball entry enabled state (V winning jackpot). a third transition mode execution means for executing a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the
a payout means (payout device 71) that pays out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means includes:
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode),
The time required from the start to the end of the second transition mode (the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric starting gate) and the start of the third transition mode (the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for setting a time longer than the sum of the time required from start to end.

According to feature mR1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode During execution, the game ball enters the third ball entry means, the game ball that entered the third ball entry means enters the fourth ball entry means, and the third transition mode is executed. Ru.

According to this feature, the first transition mode execution means converts the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode into the time required from the start to end of the second transition mode and the start of the third transition mode. Since the device is equipped with a means that can set the time to be longer than the sum of the time required from continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means may transition to the ball entering state and the game ball may be able to enter the second ball entering means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed multiple times, the player has the opportunity to win a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, the player can have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

[Feature mR2]
The gaming machine according to feature mR1,
The first transition mode execution means causes the first state transition means to transition from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry enabled state after the third transition mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means.

According to feature mR2, the first transition mode execution means transitions the first state transition means from the ball entry not allowed state to the ball entry allowed state while the first transition mode is being executed and after the third transition mode ends. Since the game ball is provided with the means, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means after the third transition mode ends. If the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the third transition mode ends, the second transition mode will be executed again, and then the third transition mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed multiple times, the player can have an opportunity to win a large amount of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of anticipation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mR3]
A gaming machine according to feature mR1 or feature mR2,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for avoiding acquisition of the second specified information or avoiding execution of the second judgment when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means (special ball start port 34a) during execution of the second transition mode or the third transition mode.

According to feature mR3, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, the acquisition of the second predetermined information is avoided or Since a means for avoiding execution of the second determination is provided, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, the second ball entry means is subsequently The transition mode will not be executed and the third transition mode will not be executed either, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel nervous and want the second transition mode and the third transition mode to be completed by the time the game ball can enter the second ball entry means.

In addition, if, unlike this feature, a configuration is adopted in which the acquisition of the second specified information and the execution of the second judgment are not avoided even if a game ball enters the second ball entry means while the second transition mode or the third transition mode is being executed, if multiple game balls enter the second ball entry means during one transition of the first state transition means to a ball entry possible state, multiple pieces of second specified information will be reserved, and the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed multiple times regardless of the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode.

On the other hand, according to the present feature, even if a plurality of game balls enter the second ball entering means during one transition of the first state transition means to the ball entry possible state, the first state transition means It is possible to realize a gameplay in which the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed one time each for one transition of the one state transition means to the ball entry possible state.

[Feature mR4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features mR1 to mR3,
The third transition mode execution means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is provided with a means capable of executing a predetermined-length third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode of a fixed length based on a V winning jackpot) in which the time required from start to end of the third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode of a fixed length based on a V winning jackpot) is a predetermined length regardless of the manner in which the gaming ball is launched and the behavior of the gaming ball after it is launched.

According to feature mR4, the third transition mode execution means predetermines the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode, regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. Since the device includes means capable of executing the predetermined length third transition mode having a predetermined length, when the predetermined length third transition mode is executed, the length of the third transition mode becomes the predetermined length. It cannot be longer than the length of. Therefore, for example, even at the timing when the first state transition means transitions to the entering ball entry state because the length of the third transition mode has become longer than a predetermined length, the third transition mode has not yet ended. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where there is no such thing. As a result, the third transition mode is not completed even at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, and the second transition mode occurs even though the game ball enters the second ball entry means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player in which the mode is not executed and the third transition mode is also not executed.

<Features nA Group>
The group of features nA is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nA1]
A launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the game balls launched by the launching means circulate;
A circulation state detection means (a detection sensor 205 in the third embodiment) for detecting a circulation state of game balls in the game area;
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
a game round execution means for executing a game round when a game round is defined as a period from when a game operation for notifying a result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started to when the game operation is ended;
A performance execution means for executing a performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means includes:
A means for executing a specific presentation (specific suggestion presentation) in a specific lottery result game round which is a game round in which the result of the lottery is notified that the result of the lottery is a specific lottery result (small win c in the third embodiment);
A means for not executing the specific performance (specific suggestion) in the specific lottery result game round when the distribution state of the game balls before the specific lottery result game round is a specific distribution state (a distribution state in which a stop shot is being performed);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature nA1, a specific effect is executed in a specific lottery result game round that notifies the player that the lottery result is a specific lottery result, so that a player who recognizes that a specific effect has been executed can be given a sense of anticipation for the lottery result. Furthermore, if the distribution state of game balls before the specific lottery result game round is executed is a specific distribution state, a specific effect is not executed in the specific lottery result game round, so that if a player desires the execution of a specific effect, the player can be prevented from performing an operation to launch game balls to create a specific distribution state. As a result, for example, if a player's operation to launch game balls to create a specific distribution state results in granting a player a special benefit that is not intended for the gaming machine, the granting of the special benefit to the player that is not intended can be prevented.

[Feature nA2]
The gaming machine according to feature nA1,
The two specific lottery result game times (game times with small win c) are a first specific lottery result game time and a second specific lottery result executed after the first specific lottery result game time. If you define game times,
The performance execution means is
A first distribution mode (distribution frequency) that is the distribution mode during the period in which the first specific lottery result game session is being executed, and a game session that is executed before the second specific lottery result game session. and the second specific lottery result game based on the second distribution mode (distribution frequency) which is the distribution mode during the period in which game rounds other than the first specific lottery result game run are being executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining whether or not to execute the specific performance (specific suggestion performance) in a game.

According to feature nA2, the distribution mode during the period in which the first specific lottery result game round is being executed, and the first specific lottery result in the game round that is executed before the second specific lottery result game round. Since it is determined whether or not to execute a specific performance in the second specific lottery result game round based on the distribution mode during the period in which game rounds other than the result game round are being executed, the first specific lottery result The mode of the game ball firing operation by the player who recognized the specific performance performed in the game round, and the second specific lottery result The first specific lottery result in the game round that is performed before the game round It is possible to detect whether the game ball firing operation is switched between the specific lottery result game round and the other game rounds by comparing the manner of the game ball firing operation by the player in game rounds other than the game round. . Therefore, for example, it is possible to accurately determine whether a player is intentionally trying to obtain a benefit that the gaming machine has not planned, and whether or not to execute a specific performance based on the determination result. can be determined.

[Feature nA3]
The gaming machine according to feature nA1 or feature nA2,
The performance execution means is
a first circulating game ball number (circulation frequency) that is the number of gaming balls circulating at a specific position in the gaming area per unit time during a period in which the first specific lottery result game round is being executed;
In a period in which a game round other than the first specific lottery result game round is being executed before the second specific lottery result game round, the number of the game areas per unit time is a second circulating game ball number (circulation frequency), which is the number of game balls circulating in a specific position;
A gaming machine comprising means for determining whether or not to execute the specific performance (specific suggestion performance) in the second specific lottery result game round based on the above.

According to feature nA3, based on the first number of distributed games and the second number of distributed games regarding the number of game balls circulating at a specific position in the gaming area per unit time, the specified lottery result is determined in the second specific lottery result game round. Since it is determined whether or not to execute the performance, the mode of the firing operation by the player can be detected with high accuracy regarding the distribution of game balls to a specific position in the game area.

[Feature nA4]
The gaming machine according to feature nA3,
The performance execution means is
It is characterized by comprising means for not executing the specific effect in the second specific lottery result game round when the second distributed game ball number is less than the first distributed game ball number by a predetermined number or more. A gaming machine.

According to feature nA4, when a player performs a game ball firing operation that causes game balls to circulate through a specific position in the game area during a period in which a game round with a specific lottery result is being played, and prevents game balls from circulating through a specific position in the game area during a period in which a game round other than the specific lottery result game round is being played, it is possible to prevent a specific effect from being played.

<Features Group B>
The group of features nB is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nB1]
A launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the game balls launched by the launching means circulate;
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A circulation state detection means (a detection sensor 205 in the third embodiment) for detecting a circulation state of game balls in the game area;
A performance execution means for executing a performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means includes:
A means for executing a specific effect (specific suggestion effect) when a specific condition related to the special information is satisfied (the result of the winning lottery is a small winning C) and the distribution mode satisfies a specific distribution condition determined in advance (when the stop shot is not performed);
and a means for not executing the specific presentation (specific suggestion presentation) when the specific condition regarding the special information is satisfied (the result of the winning lottery is a small winning C) and the distribution mode does not satisfy the specific distribution condition (when a stop shot is being performed).

According to feature nB1, if the distribution state does not satisfy a specific distribution condition that has been determined in advance, the specific effect is not executed even if the specific condition is satisfied, so that a player who desires the execution of the specific effect can be prompted to perform a launch operation of game balls that satisfies the specific distribution condition.

[Feature nB2]
The gaming machine according to feature nB1,
The performance execution means is
Based on the distribution mode in the first period (the distribution frequency of the game rounds that won the small win c) and the distribution mode in the second period (the distribution frequency of the game rounds other than the small win c), the specified A gaming machine characterized by comprising a determining means for determining whether or not a distribution condition is satisfied.

According to feature nB2, a determination means is provided for determining whether or not a specific distribution condition is met based on the distribution state in a first period and the distribution state in a second period, so that it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a specific effect based on changes in the player's ball launching operation in at least two periods.

[Feature nB3]
A gaming machine according to feature nB1 or feature nB2,
a lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
a game round execution means for executing a game round when a game round is defined as a period from when a game operation for notifying a result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started to when the game operation is ended;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is provided with a means for executing the specific presentation (specific suggestion presentation) when the result of the lottery is a specific lottery result (small win C) as the specific condition.

According to feature nB3, a specific effect is executed when a specific lottery result is obtained, and by executing the specific effect, it is possible to create a sense of expectation among players who desire a specific lottery result. Furthermore, if the distribution pattern does not satisfy a specific distribution condition that has been determined in advance, the specific effect is not executed even if the lottery result is specific, and therefore it is possible to encourage players who desire the execution of the specific effect to execute the game ball launch operation in a distribution pattern that satisfies the specific distribution condition.

[Feature nB4]
A gaming machine according to feature nB3,
The performance execution means includes:
a means for determining that the specific distribution condition is not satisfied when the distribution mode changes according to the result of the lottery corresponding to the game round.

According to feature nB4, when a player performs a game ball firing operation that changes the distribution mode depending on the lottery result corresponding to the game round, a specific performance is executed even if the lottery result is a specific lottery result. Therefore, players who wish to perform a specific performance can be urged not to perform a game ball firing operation that would change the distribution mode depending on the lottery result.

<Characteristic nC group>
The feature nC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nC1]
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a gaming area where game balls fired by the firing means circulate;
a process execution means for executing a specific process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The specific processing execution means is
The game apparatus further includes means for determining whether or not to execute the specific process (specific suggestion performance in the third embodiment) based on a circulation frequency that is a frequency at which game balls circulate at a specific position in the gaming area. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature nC1, it is determined whether or not to execute a specific process based on the distribution frequency. The distribution frequency is correlated with the game ball firing operation performed by the player. Therefore, it is possible to execute a process that reflects the game ball firing operation by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature nC2]
A gaming machine according to feature nC1,
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
a game round execution means for executing a game round when a game round is defined as a period from when a game operation for notifying a result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started to when the game operation is ended;
Equipped with
The specific process execution means includes:
Execute the specific process in a game,
A gaming machine characterized in that it determines whether or not to execute the specific processing when an unexecuted game round, which is a game round that has not yet been executed, is executed, based on the distribution frequency in the game round in which the specific processing has already been executed.

According to feature nC2, whether or not to execute a specific process is determined when an unexecuted play round is executed, based on the distribution frequency in play rounds in which a specific process has already been executed. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a specific process after that, taking into consideration the player's firing operation as a result of the execution of a specific process, i.e., the player's reaction to the execution of a specific process, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

<Feature nD group>
The feature nD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nD1]
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a gaming area where game balls fired by the firing means circulate;
Distribution mode detection means for detecting a distribution mode of game balls in the gaming area;
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
A game round executing means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and the game operation is finished;
For each game round, the result of the lottery corresponding to the game round and the circulation number, which is the number of game balls circulating at a specific position in the game area during the period in which the game round is being executed, are corresponded. A storage means for storing attached information (game ball count memory area in the third embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature nD1, a storage means is provided for storing information that associates, for each play round, the result of a lottery corresponding to that play round with the circulation number, which is the number of game balls that have circulated through a specific position in the play area during the period in which that play round is being played. The circulation number correlates with the player's operation of firing game balls. Therefore, it is possible to execute processing based on the lottery result or the effects during the play round that reflect the lottery result, and the player's operation of firing game balls (player's reaction) based on those effects. For example, it is possible to feed back the player's reaction to an effect that reflects a specific lottery result and select an effect for the next play round, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Feature nD2]
The gaming machine according to feature nD1,
When the time period from the start of a gaming operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means until the end of the gaming operation is defined as a variable time,
The storage means is
For each game round, the result of the lottery corresponding to the game round, the number of circulation which is the number of game balls circulating in a specific position of the game area during the period in which the game round is being executed, and the number of circulation A gaming machine characterized by comprising means (game ball count memory area in the third embodiment) for storing information associating the fluctuation time in a game round with the fluctuation time.

According to feature nD2, for each game round, the result of the lottery corresponding to the game round, and the circulation number, which is the number of game balls circulating in a specific position in the gaming area during the period in which the game round is being executed. and the fluctuation time in the game round. Therefore, for example, it is possible to calculate the frequency at which game balls circulate in a specific position in the gaming area (circulation frequency) based on the fluctuation time and the number of circulation of the game round, and the lottery for each game round can be calculated. Based on the result and the distribution frequency corresponding to the lottery result, it is possible to determine the processing etc. for the game round to be executed from now on, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature nD3]
A gaming machine according to feature nD1 or feature nD2,
A specific processing execution means for executing a specific processing (specific suggestion performance) is provided,
The specific process execution means comprises means for determining whether or not to execute the specific process based on the information stored in the storage means.

According to feature nD3, for example, a specific performance is executed based on a lottery result or a performance during a game round that reflects the lottery result, and a game ball firing operation by a player (player's reaction). It is possible to decide whether or not to perform the specific performance in the game round to be executed from now on by feedback of the player's reaction to the performance that reflects the specific lottery result. be able to.

<Feature nE group>
The group of features nE is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nE1]
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a gaming area where game balls fired by the firing means circulate;
Distribution mode detection means for detecting a distribution mode of game balls in the gaming area;
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
A game round executing means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and the game operation is finished;
a storage means for storing predetermined information;
Equipped with
The storage means is
When the time period from the start of a gaming operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means until the end of the gaming operation is defined as a variable time,
For each game round, a means (a game ball count memory area in the third embodiment) for storing information in which the result of the lottery corresponding to the game round is associated with the fluctuation time in the game round; A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature nE1, the storage means includes means for storing information that associates, for each game round, the result of the lottery corresponding to that game round with the variable time for that game round, so that the information can be used for various processes, such as determining the presentation for the game round to be executed next.

[Feature nE2]
The gaming machine according to feature nE1,
The storage means is
For each game round, the result of the lottery corresponding to the game round, the fluctuation time in the game round, and whether the game ball circulated at a specific position in the game area during the period in which the game round is being executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means (a game ball count memory area in the third embodiment) for storing information associating a number of circulation numbers with a number of circulation numbers.

According to feature nE2, the storage means includes means for storing, for each game round, information associating the result of the lottery corresponding to that game round with the variable time and number of balls in circulation. Therefore, for example, it is possible to calculate the frequency with which game balls circulate at a specific position in the game area (circulation frequency) based on the variable time and number of balls in that game round, and it is possible to determine the processing to be performed in the game round to be executed based on the lottery result for each game round and the circulation frequency corresponding to the lottery result, thereby improving the entertainment value of the game.

[Feature nE3]
The gaming machine according to feature nE1 or feature nE2,
Equipped with a specific processing execution means for executing specific processing (specific suggestive performance),
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific processing execution means includes means for determining whether or not to execute the specific processing based on the information stored in the storage means.

According to the feature nE3, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a specific performance, for example, based on the result of a lottery corresponding to a game round and the fluctuation time in the game round, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be achieved.

<Characteristic nF group>
The feature nF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nF1]
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a gaming area where game balls fired by the firing means circulate;
Distribution mode detection means for detecting a distribution mode of game balls in the gaming area;
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and the game operation is finished;
performance execution means for executing a specific performance (specific suggestion performance) in the game round;
a storage means for storing predetermined information;
Equipped with
The storage means is
For each game round, the presence or absence of execution of the specific performance in the game round, and the number of circulations that is the number of game balls circulating at a specific position in the game area during the period in which the game round is being executed; A gaming machine comprising means for storing information in which the numbers are associated with each other (the game ball count memory area in the fourth modification of the third embodiment).

According to feature nF1, for each game round, the presence or absence of a specific performance in the game round, and the number of game balls circulating in a specific position in the game area during the period in which the game round is being executed. Since it is provided with a means for storing information that associates the number of distributions with the number of distributions, for example, the information can be used to determine the performance to be performed from now on, taking into consideration the reaction of the player to the execution of a specific performance. The information can be used for various processes such as.

[Feature nF2]
A gaming machine according to feature nF1,
The storage means includes:
When the time from when the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started to when the game operation is ended is set as a variable time,
A gaming machine comprising: a means for storing information (variant 4 of the third embodiment) that correlates, for each game round, whether or not the specific presentation is executed in that game round, a circulation number which is the number of game balls that have circulated through a specific position in the game area during the period in which that game round is being executed, and the variable time in that game round.

According to feature nF2, the storage means stores, for each game round, whether or not a specific performance is executed in the game round, and whether game balls circulate at a specific position in the game area during the period in which the game round is being executed. The game apparatus includes means for storing information that associates the number of circulations, which is the number of games played, with the fluctuation time in the game. Therefore, for example, it is possible to calculate the frequency at which game balls circulate at a specific position in the gaming area (circulation frequency) based on the fluctuation time of the game and the number of circulation, and it is possible to calculate the frequency at which game balls circulate at a specific position in the gaming area (circulation frequency). This information can be used for various processes, such as determining a process that takes into account the game ball firing operation by the player.

[Feature nF3]
A gaming machine according to feature nF1 or feature nF2,
The specific performance execution means includes:
A gaming machine comprising a means (variant 4 of the third embodiment) for determining whether or not to execute the specific presentation in a game round to be executed based on the information stored in the memory means.

According to feature nF3, when determining whether or not to execute a specific performance, it is possible to take into account the reaction of the player when the specific performance was executed previously, and to determine whether or not to execute the specific performance. Control can be performed based on feedback from the player's reactions.

<Characteristic nG group>
The feature nG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nG1]
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a gaming area where game balls fired by the firing means circulate;
Distribution mode detection means (detection sensor 205 in the third embodiment) for detecting the distribution mode of game balls at a specific position in the gaming area;
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
A game round executing means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and the game operation is finished;
a gaming state control means for controlling a gaming state that is a gaming state;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
When the gaming state shifts from the first gaming state (low frequency support mode) to the second gaming state (high frequency support mode), based on the distribution mode of the game ball at the detected specific position, A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining whether or not to execute a specific performance (specific suggestion performance).

According to feature nG1, when transitioning to the second gaming state, it is determined whether or not to execute a specific performance based on the detected distribution mode, so that a player who desires to execute a specific performance is It is possible to make the user aware of the distribution mode of game balls at a specific position, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature nG2]
A gaming machine according to feature nG1,
The performance execution means includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first gaming state (low frequency support mode), a means is provided for not determining whether or not to execute the specific presentation, regardless of the detected circulation state.

According to feature nG2, in the first gaming state, it is not determined whether or not to execute a specific performance regardless of the detected distribution mode, so that the processing in the first gaming state can be simplified. .

[Feature nG3]
A gaming machine according to feature nG1 or feature nG2,
The performance execution means includes:
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a means for determining whether or not to execute the specific presentation in the second gaming state based on the result of the lottery corresponding to an executed game round, which is a game round that has already been executed in the second gaming state (high frequency support mode), and the distribution mode (distribution frequency) during the period during which the executed game round was being executed.

According to feature nG3, whether a specific performance is executed in the second gaming state based on the lottery results of the played gaming rounds already executed in the second gaming state and the distribution mode in the played gaming rounds. Determine whether or not. The distribution mode has a correlation with the player's firing operation of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a specific effect according to the correlation between the lottery results of the executed game rounds and the player's game ball firing operation in the executed game rounds, and the game based on the lottery results. The performance can be decided by considering the psychology of the person. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic nH group>
The feature nH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nH1]
A launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the game balls launched by the launching means circulate;
A circulation state detection means for detecting a circulation state of game balls in the game area;
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
a game round execution means for executing a game round when a game round is defined as a period from when a game operation for notifying a result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started to when the game operation is ended;
A driving means (a movable gadget MY in the first modified example of the third embodiment) that drives the gadget in a manner that is visible to a player;
A gaming machine comprising:
The driving means is
When the distribution mode satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition (when the player has not stopped hitting), the device is driven based on the result of the lottery (small win c),
The gaming machine is characterized in that it will not operate if the specific distribution condition is not met (if the player is stopping shots).

According to feature nH1, the drive means is driven based on the lottery result when the distribution mode satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition, and does not drive when the specific distribution condition is not satisfied. Since the player desires to know the result of the lottery, he operates the game ball to fire the game ball so that the distribution mode satisfies a specific distribution condition in order to drive the driving means based on the result of the lottery. That is, according to feature nH1, it is possible to prompt the player to perform a shooting operation of a game ball such that the distribution mode satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition. Furthermore, since the driving means is driven based on the lottery result, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the lottery result, and it is easy to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the lottery result.

[Feature nH2]
The gaming machine according to feature nH1,
The driving means is
means for driving when the lottery result is a specific lottery result when the distribution mode satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition;
means that does not operate when the lottery result is not a specific lottery result when the distribution mode satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature nH2, when the distribution mode satisfies a specific distribution condition that has been determined in advance, the driving means is activated if the result of the lottery is a specific lottery result, and is not activated if the result of the lottery is not a specific lottery result. Therefore, depending on whether or not the driving means is activated, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the result of the lottery is a specific lottery result.

<Feature nI group>
The feature nI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nI1]
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a gaming area where game balls fired by the firing means circulate;
Distribution mode detection means for detecting a distribution mode of game balls in the gaming area;
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A game round executing means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and the game operation is finished;
processing execution means for executing predetermined processing;
A gaming machine comprising:
The processing execution means includes:
A game that has not yet been executed based on the distribution mode in the executed game session in which the processing execution means executed a specific process (specific suggestion performance) among the executed game sessions that are already executed game sessions. Means is provided for determining whether or not to execute the specific process when an unplayed game session is executed (Variation 4 of the third embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature nI1, it is determined whether or not to execute a specific process using the execution of an unplayed game session as a trigger, based on the distribution mode in the executed game session in which a specific process has been executed. In consideration of the game ball firing operation by the player when executing the specific process, it can be determined whether or not to execute the specific process with the execution of the unplayed game round as a trigger. Therefore, for example, if a player performs or is likely to perform an unexpected and unfair operation on the gaming machine as a result of executing a specific process, it becomes possible to prevent the specific process from being performed. It can be used for various processing.

[Feature nI2]
A gaming machine according to feature nI1,
The process execution means includes a performance execution means for executing a performance,
The production means is
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a means for executing a specific presentation (specific suggestion presentation) as the specific processing.

According to feature nI2, whether or not to execute a specific effect in response to the execution of an unexecuted game round is determined based on the circulation state in an executed game round in which a specific effect was executed, so that it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a specific effect in response to the execution of an unexecuted game round, taking into consideration the player's operation of firing the game ball when a specific effect was executed in an executed game round. Therefore, it can be used for various processes, such as making it possible to prevent a specific process from being executed when, for example, the player performs or is likely to perform an unfair operation that is unexpected by the gaming machine as a result of the execution of a specific effect.

[Feature nI3]
The gaming machine according to feature nI1 or feature nI2,
The gaming machine characterized in that the distribution mode is a distribution frequency that is the number of game balls that circulate at a specific position in the gaming area per unit time.

The circulation frequency, which is the number of game balls circulating at a specific position in the game area, correlates with the firing intensity when the game balls are fired. Therefore, according to feature nI3, when a player performs or is likely to perform an unexpected and unfair operation as a result of executing a specific process to manipulate the firing strength of a game ball, the specific process Allows you to avoid

<Feature nJ group>
The group of features nJ is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nJ1]
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a gaming area where game balls fired by the firing means circulate;
Distribution mode detection means for detecting a distribution mode of game balls in the gaming area;
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and the game operation is finished;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the production in the specific game round is determined based on the distribution mode (distribution frequency) in the game round other than the specific game round (the game round where the small win is c in the third embodiment). .

According to feature nJ1, the presentation for a specific game round is determined based on the distribution pattern in game rounds other than the specific game round. The distribution pattern has a correlation with the player's operation of firing the game ball. Therefore, the content of the presentation can be determined based on the manner in which the player fires the game ball, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Feature nJ2]
The gaming machine according to feature nJ1,
The gaming machine characterized in that the distribution mode is a distribution frequency that is the number of game balls that circulate at a specific position in the gaming area per unit time.

According to feature nJ2, the presentation for a particular game round is determined based on the circulation frequency, which is the number of game balls circulating through a particular position in the game area. The circulation frequency, which is the number of game balls circulating through a particular position in the game area, correlates with the launch strength when the game balls are launched. Therefore, the content of the presentation can be determined based on the launch strength of the game balls, which correlates with the player's launch operation, and the entertainment value of the game can be improved.

[Feature nJ3]
The gaming machine according to feature nJ1 or feature nJ2,
The performance execution means is
means for determining whether or not to execute a specific performance in the specific gaming session based on the distribution frequency in gaming sessions other than the specific gaming session;
means for not performing a specific performance in the specific game session if the distribution frequency in game sessions other than the specific game session is lower than a predetermined distribution frequency;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature nJ3, if the distribution frequency in a play round other than the specific play round is lower than a predetermined distribution frequency, the specific effect is not executed in the specific play round, so that a player who desires the execution of the specific effect can be encouraged to perform the launch operation of the game balls so as to maintain a predetermined or higher distribution frequency in play rounds other than the specific play round.

<Feature nK group>
The group of features nK is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nK1]
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a gaming area where game balls fired by the firing means circulate;
Distribution mode detection means for detecting a distribution mode of game balls in the gaming area;
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
Priority lottery result acquisition means (first determination process in modification 5 of the third embodiment) that acquires the result of the lottery before the lottery execution means executes the lottery;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and the game operation is finished;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means is
When the result of the lottery acquired by the advance lottery result acquisition means is a specific lottery result, the number of game balls in a predetermined period before the advance lottery result acquisition means acquires the specific lottery result. A gaming machine characterized by comprising performance determining means (modification 5 in the third embodiment) that determines a performance to be performed before the specific lottery result game round is performed based on a distribution mode.

According to feature nK1, when the result of the lottery acquired by the previous lottery result acquisition means is a specific lottery result, based on the distribution mode of game balls in a predetermined period, that is, the firing operation of game balls by the player. Since the performance to be performed is determined before the specific lottery result game round is executed, it is recommended to guess whether or not it is a specific lottery result before the specific lottery result game round is executed. It is possible to make a desired player aware of the game ball firing operation.

[Feature nK2]
A gaming machine according to feature nK1,
The performance determination means includes:
A means for determining an effect to be executed before the specific lottery result game round is executed based on the number of game balls circulating at a specific position during the predetermined period (Modification 5 of the third embodiment) is provided.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature nK2, a player who wishes to guess whether or not a specific lottery result is obtained before the specific lottery result game round is executed can be made aware of the number of game balls circulating at a specific position during a specified period of time as a game ball launch operation.

[Feature nK3]
The gaming machine according to feature nK1 or feature nK2,
The production determining means (Variation 5 in the third embodiment)
The result of the lottery obtained by the preliminary lottery result acquisition means is the specific lottery result, and the distribution mode of the gaming balls during the predetermined period satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition. In this case, means for executing the specific performance before the specific lottery result game round is executed;
In the case where the result of the lottery acquired by the advance lottery result acquisition means is the specific lottery result, and the distribution mode of the game balls during the predetermined period does not satisfy the specific distribution condition, means for not executing the specific performance before the specific lottery result game round is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature nK3, a player who wishes to guess whether or not a specific lottery result is obtained before the specific lottery result game round is played can be made to wish for a specific effect to be played before the specific lottery result game round is played. As a result, the player can be prompted to launch game balls so that the distribution state of game balls during a specified period satisfies specific distribution conditions.

<Feature nL group>
The group of features nL is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nL1]
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a gaming area where game balls fired by the firing means circulate;
Distribution mode detection means for detecting a distribution mode of game balls in the gaming area;
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
Priority lottery result acquisition means (first determination process in modification 6 of the third embodiment) for acquiring the result of the lottery before the lottery execution means executes the lottery;
A game round executing means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and the game operation is finished;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means is
If the result of the lottery acquired by the advance lottery result acquisition means is a specific lottery result, the result of the lottery is determined to be the specific lottery result after the advance lottery result acquisition means acquires the specific lottery result. Based on the distribution mode of the game balls in a predetermined period before the execution of the specific lottery result game session, which is the game session that informs that the result is a game session, before the specific lottery result game session is implemented. (Variation 6 of the third embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature nL1, when the result of the lottery acquired by the advance lottery result acquisition means is a specific lottery result, the presentation to be executed before the specific lottery result game round is played is determined based on the distribution state of game balls during a specified period, i.e., the game ball firing operation by the player, so that a player who wishes to guess whether or not the lottery result is a specific lottery result before the specific lottery result game round is played can be made aware of the game ball firing operation.

[Feature nL2]
The gaming machine according to feature nL1,
The performance determining means is
Means is provided for determining an effect to be executed before the specific lottery result game round is implemented based on the number of game balls circulating in a specific position during the predetermined period (Variation 6 in the third embodiment) )
A gaming machine characterized by:

Feature nL2 allows a player who wishes to guess whether a specific lottery result is obtained before the specific lottery result game round is played to be aware of the number of game balls circulating at a specific position during a specified period of time as a game ball launch operation.

[Feature nL3]
A gaming machine according to feature nL1 or feature nL2,
The performance determination means (variation 6 in the third embodiment)
a means for executing the specific presentation before the specific lottery result game is played when the result of the lottery acquired by the advance lottery result acquisition means is the specific lottery result and the distribution state of the game balls in the specified period satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition;
When the result of the lottery acquired by the advance lottery result acquisition means is the specific lottery result, and the distribution state of the game balls during the predetermined period does not satisfy the specific distribution condition, a means for not executing the specific performance before the specific lottery result game is executed;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature nL3, a specific lottery result game round is executed for a player who desires to guess whether or not it is a specific lottery result before the specific lottery result game round is executed. It is possible to make it desirable for a specific effect to be executed before the actual performance. As a result, it is possible to prompt the player to perform a game ball firing operation such that the distribution mode of the game balls in a predetermined period satisfies a specific distribution condition.

<Characteristic nM group>
The feature nM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nM1]
A launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the game balls launched by the launching means circulate;
A circulation state detection means for detecting a circulation state of game balls in the game area;
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
A prior lottery result acquisition means (a prior determination process in the seventh modified example of the third embodiment) for acquiring a result of the lottery before the lottery execution means executes the lottery;
a game round execution means for executing a game round when a game round is defined as a period from when a game operation for notifying a result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started to when the game operation is ended;
A performance execution means for executing a performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means includes:
When the result of the lottery acquired by the advance lottery result acquisition means is a specific lottery result, a presentation decision means is provided for deciding a presentation to be executed in a specific lottery result game round, which is a game round in which the result of the lottery acquired by the advance lottery result acquisition means is notified that the result of the lottery is the specific lottery result, based on the distribution state of the game balls during a predetermined period before the specific lottery result game round is executed (variant example 7 of the third embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature nM1, when the result of the lottery acquired by the advance lottery result acquisition means is a specific lottery result, the presentation to be executed in the specific lottery result game round is determined based on the distribution state of game balls during a specified period, i.e., the player's operation of firing game balls, so that a player who wishes to guess whether the result is a specific lottery result based on the presentation executed in the specific lottery result game round can be made aware of the operation of firing game balls. In addition, the presentation to be executed in the specific lottery result game round can be determined taking into account the psychological state, etc. that can be inferred from the player's operation of firing game balls during a specified period.

[Feature nM2]
A gaming machine according to feature nM1,
The performance determination means includes:
A means for determining an effect to be executed in the specific lottery result game round based on the number of game balls circulating at a specific position during the predetermined period is provided (variation 7 of the third embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature nM2, for a player who wishes to guess whether or not it is a specific lottery result based on the effect executed in the specific lottery result game round, the game player can perform a game ball firing operation at a predetermined period of time. It is possible to make the user aware of the number of game balls circulating in a specific position.

[Feature nM3]
A gaming machine according to feature nM1 or feature nM2,
The performance determination means (variant example 7 of the third embodiment)
a means for executing a specific presentation in a game round based on the specific lottery result when the result of the lottery acquired by the advance lottery result acquisition means is the specific lottery result and the distribution state of the game balls in the specified period satisfies a specific distribution condition that has been determined in advance;
When the result of the lottery acquired by the advance lottery result acquisition means is the specific lottery result, and the distribution state of the game balls during the predetermined period does not satisfy the specific distribution condition, a means for not executing the specific performance in the specific lottery result game round;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature nM3, a player who wishes to guess whether or not a specific lottery result is obtained based on the effects executed in the specific lottery result game round can be made to wish for the specific effects to be executed in the specific lottery result game round. As a result, the player can be prompted to launch game balls so that the distribution state of game balls in a specified period of time satisfies specific distribution conditions.

<Characteristic nN group>
The feature nN groups are extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nN1]
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a gaming area where game balls fired by the firing means circulate;
a specific ball entry hole provided in the gaming area and into which a game ball can enter (second grand prize opening 212a in the third embodiment);
Between a first state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the specified ball entrance and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the specified ball entrance. A state transition means (second opening/closing door 212b in the third embodiment) whose state changes with
a first guide channel (channel 215 in the third embodiment) that guides the game ball that enters the specific ball entry port;
a second guide channel (channel 217 in the third embodiment) that guides the game ball that enters the specific ball entry port;
Sorting means (first distribution valve 218, second distribution valve 219) that distributes game balls that have entered the specific ball entrance into the first guide channel or the second guide channel;
a first ball entrance (first V prize opening V1) into which a game ball that has entered the specific ball entrance can enter;
a second ball entrance (second V prize opening V2) into which only game balls that have entered the specific ball entrance can enter;
Equipped with
The game balls sorted into the first guide channel by the sorting means are more likely to enter the first ball entrance than the game balls sorted into the second guide channel by the sorting means. Highly sexual,
The game balls sorted into the second guide channel by the sorting means are more likely to enter the second ball entrance than the game balls sorted into the first guide channel by the sorting means. Highly sexual,
It is more advantageous for the player for the game ball to enter the first ball entrance than for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance,
The first time, which is the time from the time when the game ball enters the specific ball entrance to the time when it reaches the first ball entrance, is the time when the game ball enters the specific ball entrance. A gaming machine characterized in that the game machine is configured to be longer than a second time, which is a time from a point in time to a point in time when the ball reaches the second ball entrance.

According to feature nN1, it is more advantageous for the player for the game ball to enter the first ball entrance than for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance; The first time, which is the time from the time the ball enters the ball opening to the time the ball reaches the first ball entrance, is longer than the time from the time the game ball enters the specific ball entrance to the second ball entrance. This is longer than the second time, which is the time it takes for the game ball to reach the point in time, so when the game ball is sorted into the first guide channel by the sorting means, the game ball enters the first ball entrance. It is possible to continuously give a player a sense of expectation for playing the ball for a long period of time. On the other hand, when the game balls are sorted into the second guide channel by the sorting means, there is a negative sense of urgency (sense of crisis) about the game balls entering the second ball entrance. , can be granted to the player for a short period of time. As a result, a gaming machine is realized that provides players with a well-balanced sense of expectation in a comprehensive manner, such as giving a sense of expectation to the player for a long time and giving a sense of crisis to the player for a short time. be able to.

[Feature nN2]
The gaming machine according to feature nN1,
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and the game operation is finished;
Equipped with
The state transition means is
When the result of the lottery is the first lottery result (small win c in the third embodiment), after the game round in which the result of the lottery is announced, the state is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time. means for transitioning to the state;
When the result of the lottery is a second lottery result (a small win other than the small win c in the third embodiment), the second state is maintained for a predetermined period after the end of the game round in which the result of the lottery is announced. means for transitioning from to the first state;
Equipped with
The sorting means is
If the result of the lottery is the first lottery result, after the game round for which the result of the lottery is announced ends, the game balls that enter through the specific ball entrance and reach the distribution means are means for distributing to the first guide channel;
If the result of the lottery is the second lottery result, after the end of the game round in which the result of the lottery is announced, the game balls that entered from the specific ball entrance and reached the distribution means are means for distributing to a second guide channel;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature nN2, since the guide channel through which the game balls that enter from the specific ball entrance are distributed differs depending on the lottery result, it is possible to draw the players' attention even more to the lottery result. Furthermore, in addition to the lottery results, it is possible to draw the attention of the players to the way in which the game balls are distributed by the distribution means, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Feature nN3]
The gaming machine according to feature nN2,
In a game round in which the result of the lottery is the first lottery result or the second lottery result, the game ball fired by the firing means before the result of the lottery is announced is the first lottery result. It is possible to reach the specific ball entrance during a period in which the state transition means is transitioning to the first state triggered by the lottery result or the second lottery result,
In a game round in which the result of the lottery is the first lottery result or the second lottery result, the game ball fired by the firing means after the lottery result is announced is the first lottery result. Alternatively, it is configured such that it is impossible for the state transition means to reach the specific ball entrance during the period in which the state transition means is transitioning to the first state triggered by the second lottery result (third lottery result). (including the delay mechanism 202 in the embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature nN3, when the player recognizes from the notification of the lottery result that the result of the lottery is the first lottery result, the game ball is launched to enter a specific ball entry port, and when the player recognizes from the notification of the lottery result that the result of the lottery is the second lottery result, the game ball is not launched to enter the specific ball entry port, thereby preventing the player from intentionally switching the mode of launching the game ball for each lottery result.

<Characteristics Group A>
The group of features oA is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature oA1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Specific identification information display means for displaying specific identification information (a pending display icon, a pattern row) corresponding to the stored special information;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means is
a first moving body display means for displaying a moving first moving body (first type petal P1 or second type petal P2);
Means for displaying a second moving object (third type petal P3) constituted by substantially the same picture as the first moving object, the period during which it moves toward the specific identification information (target pending arrival trajectory); A second moving object display means (MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 and the first start-up shown in FIG. 187 executed thereby) displays the second moving object so as to have at least 3rd type petal effect setting process for mouth holding and 3rd type petal effect setting process for second starting mouth holding shown in FIG. 193);
When the second mobile body reaches the specific identification information, the display mode changing means (the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 and the display mode shown in FIG. 1 starting gate hold display change setting process and the 2nd starting gate hold display change setting process of FIG. 196),
A gaming machine equipped with.

According to feature oA1, when a second moving object configured with substantially the same picture as the first moving object reaches specific identification information, the display mode of the specific identification information is changed. In conventional pachinko machines that do not have such a configuration, the display mode of specific identification information changes at a predetermined timing, so the player cannot predict the timing at which the display mode will change. Therefore, there was a problem in that players lacked a sense of anticipation and urgency. On the other hand, according to feature oA1, even if the first moving object is displayed and the first moving object reaches the specific identification information, the specific identification information is not affected. When the second moving object, which is configured with substantially the same picture as the first moving object, reaches the specific identification information, an effect is performed to change the display mode of the specific identification information. Therefore, according to feature oA1, displaying the first moving object and the second moving object creates a sense of anticipation and urgency in the player, wondering if the display mode of the specific identification information will change. can be granted. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of disappointment, such as when the moving object has reached the specific identification information, but the display form of the specific identification information has not changed, which further increases the sense of anticipation and urgency for the player. can do. Therefore, with feature oA1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature oA2]
A gaming machine according to feature oA1,
The display mode changing means is
A switching occurrence determination means (step So3305 in the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195 and step So3405 in the second start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 196) for determining whether or not a switching of the specific identification information has occurred during a predetermined period starting from the time when the second moving body reaches the hold identification information;
a means for changing the display mode of the specific identification information after the predetermined period when it is determined by the switching occurrence determination means that switching of the specific identification information will not occur within the predetermined period, and for not changing the display mode of the specific identification information when it is determined that switching of the specific identification information will occur within the predetermined period (steps So3310 and So3311 in the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195, and steps So3410 and So3411 in the second start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 196);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature oA2, even if the second moving object reaches the specific identification information, if the specific identification information is switched during a predetermined period starting from the time of arrival, the display mode of the specific identification information is However, if the specific identification information does not change during the predetermined period, an effect that changes the display mode of the specific identification information is executed. Therefore, according to feature oA2, even if the second moving object reaches the specific identification information, the player is given a sense of anticipation and tension, wondering if the display mode of the specific identification information will change. be able to. Furthermore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of disappointment, such as when the second moving object has reached the specific identification information, but the display form of the specific identification information has not changed, thereby creating a sense of anticipation and tension in the player. Even more can be given.

[Feature oA3]
The gaming machine according to feature oA1 or feature oA2,
The specific identification information is reservation identification information for identifying a reservation corresponding to the stored special information,
Regarding the pending identification information,
The display mode of the pending identification information is to suggest the possibility that the special information corresponding to the pending identification information satisfies the predetermined condition, and to indicate a plurality of stages from high to low depending on the level of the possibility. a display level comprising;
an upper limit value as an upper limit to which the display level can be changed when changing the display mode of the pending identification information;
is set,
The display mode changing means includes:
When the second moving object reaches the hold identification information, it is determined whether the display level set for the hold identification information is less than the upper limit value, and the display level is lower than the upper limit value. Means for changing the display level to a higher side when the display level is lower than the upper limit value, and not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (first starting gate hold display change setting process in FIG. 195) Steps So3307 to So3311 in , and steps So3407 to So3411 in the second starting port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature oA3, even if the second moving object reaches the hold identification information, if the display level set for the hold identification information is equal to or higher than the upper limit, the display level as the display mode of the hold identification information is changed. does not change, but if the display level set for the hold identification information is less than the upper limit value, an effect that changes the display level is executed. For this reason, according to feature oA3, even if the second mobile object reaches the hold identification information, the player is given a sense of anticipation and tension, wondering if the display mode of the hold identification information will change. be able to. Furthermore, it is possible to give the player a sense of disappointment, such as when the second mobile object has reached the hold identification information but the display form of the hold identification information has not changed, creating a sense of anticipation and urgency in the player. Even more can be given.

<Characteristics Group B>
The group of features oB is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature oB1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Specific identification information display means for displaying specific identification information (a pending display icon, a symbol string) corresponding to the stored special information;
If one game round is defined as the start of the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game operation, the game round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 165 executed by it),
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means is
A moving object display means (MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 and the MPU 92 of FIG. 3rd type petal effect setting process for holding the 1st starting opening and 3rd type petal effect setting process for holding the 2nd starting opening shown in FIG. 193);
Display mode changing means (MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 and the first starting port in FIG. 195 executed by it) that changes the display mode of the specific identification information when the mobile body reaches the pending identification information Hold display change setting process and second starting port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196);
Equipped with
The display mode changing means includes:
Means for changing the display mode of the specific identification information after the predetermined period if the end of the game round does not occur during a predetermined period starting from when the mobile object reaches the specific identification information. (Steps So3305, So3310, and Step So3311 in the first starting gate hold display change setting process in FIG. 195, and Steps So3405, Step So3410, and Step So3411 in the second starting gate hold display change setting process in FIG. 196)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature oB1, when the moving object reaches the specific identification information, it is possible to change the display mode of the specific identification information. In particular, if the end of the game round does not occur within a predetermined period starting from the time of the arrival, the display mode of the specific identification information is changed after the predetermined period. Therefore, according to feature oB1, even if the moving object reaches the specific identification information, the display mode of the specific identification information may or may not change. Therefore, according to feature oB1, even if the moving object reaches the specific identification information, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and tension, such as wondering whether the display mode of the specific identification information will change. Furthermore, since it is possible to give a sense of disappointment that the moving object reaches the specific identification information but the display mode of the specific identification information does not change, it is possible to give the player an even greater sense of expectation and tension. Therefore, feature oB1 can improve the interest of the game.

[Feature oB2]
A gaming machine according to feature oB1,
The specific identification information is hold identification information for identifying the hold corresponding to the stored special information,
The moving object display means includes:
A gaming machine comprising a means for displaying the moving object moving toward a predetermined display position for displaying the reserved identification information regardless of whether the reserved identification information is present at the display position or not.

In conventional pachinko machines, the display mode of the hold identification information changes when a variable display starts, when the hold identification information shifts, or when special information is obtained (when a game ball enters the starting slot). It is common to perform a performance that suggests (pending change suggesting performance) and then perform a performance that changes the display mode of the hold identification information. For this reason, unless the pending change suggestion presentation is executed, a presentation that changes the display mode of the pending identification information will not appear. There was no focus on the game, and players lacked a sense of anticipation and urgency. On the other hand, according to feature oB2, a moving object that can serve as a reservation change suggestion effect is displayed regardless of whether or not reservation identification information exists at the display position, so the display mode of reservation identification information It is possible to increase the opportunity to make the player feel a sense of expectation that a performance that changes the appearance will appear. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an even greater sense of anticipation and urgency.

[Features oB3]
The gaming machine described in feature oB2,
The information storage means includes:
Means for storing the special information up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
The hold display means includes:
Pending identification information corresponding to each of the stored special information is displayed at the same number of display positions as the specified number, and each time the game round is completed, the reservation identification information corresponding to each of the stored special information is displayed. means for subjecting the special information stored first to a determination by the determination means, excluding the pending identification information corresponding to the special information from the display position arrangement, and shifting each of the remaining pending identification information. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature oB3, the player can accurately know how much special information has been acquired by observing the displayed arrangement of pending identification information. In addition, if the holding identification information does not shift during a predetermined period starting from when the mobile object reaches the holding identification information, the display form of the holding identification information changes. It becomes possible to display accurately.

[Features oB4]
The gaming machine according to feature oB2 or feature oB3,
For each of the hold identification information,
The display mode of the pending identification information is to suggest the possibility that the special information corresponding to the pending identification information satisfies the predetermined condition, and to indicate a plurality of stages from high to low depending on the level of the possibility. a display level comprising;
an upper limit value as an upper limit to which the display level can be changed when changing the display mode of the pending identification information;
is set,
The display mode changing means includes:
When the mobile object reaches the hold identification information, it is determined whether the display level set for the hold identification information is lower than the upper limit value, and if the display level is lower than the upper limit value, , means for changing the display level to a higher side and not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step So3307 in the first starting gate hold display change setting process in FIG. 195) ~So3311, and steps So07 to So3411 in the second starting port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature oB4, even if a moving object reaches the reserved identification information, if the display level set for the reserved identification information is equal to or higher than the upper limit, the display level as the display mode of the reserved identification information does not change, whereas if the display level set for the reserved identification information is lower than the upper limit, an effect of changing the display level is executed. Therefore, according to feature oB4, even if a moving object reaches the reserved identification information and the game round does not end within the specified period, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and tension that the display mode of the reserved identification information will change. Furthermore, it is possible to give the player a sense of disappointment that the display mode of the reserved identification information did not change even though the game round did not end after the specified period of time has elapsed after the moving object reaches the reserved identification information, so that it is possible to give the player an even greater sense of expectation and tension.

<Feature oC group>
The feature oC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature oC1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a hold display means for displaying hold identification information (hold display icon) corresponding to the stored special information at a predetermined display position;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means is
A moving object display means (MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 and , the third type petal effect setting process for holding the first starting opening shown in FIG. 187 and the third type flower petal effect setting process for holding the second starting opening shown in FIG. 193, which are executed thereby.
When the mobile body reaches the display position, if the hold identification information is present at the reached display position, display mode changing means (of the audio emission control device 90) changes the display mode of the hold identification information. MPU 92 and the first starting port hold display change setting process in FIG. 195 and the second starting port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196 executed thereby;
Equipped with
For each of the hold identification information,
The display mode of the pending identification information is to suggest the possibility that the special information corresponding to the pending identification information satisfies the predetermined condition, and to indicate a plurality of stages from high to low depending on the level of the possibility. a display level comprising;
an upper limit value as an upper limit to which the display level can be changed when changing the display mode of the pending identification information;
is set,
The display mode changing means includes:
When the mobile object reaches the hold identification information, it is determined whether the display level set for the hold identification information is lower than the upper limit value, and if the display level is lower than the upper limit value, , means for changing the display level to a higher side and not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step So3307 in the first starting gate hold display change setting process in FIG. 195) ~So3311, and steps So3407~So3411 in the second starting port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In conventional pachinko machines, when the variable display starts, when the reserved identification information shifts, or when special information is acquired (when the game ball enters the starting hole), a performance suggesting that the display mode of the reserved identification information will change (reserved change suggestion performance) is executed, and then a performance changing the display mode of the reserved identification information is executed. Therefore, unless the reserved change suggestion performance is executed, a performance changing the display mode of the reserved identification information does not appear, so the player only pays attention to the reserved identification information when the reserved change suggestion performance is executed, and the player lacks a sense of expectation or tension. In contrast, according to feature oC1, the moving object that can play the role of the reserved change suggestion performance is displayed regardless of whether the reserved identification information is present at the display position, so that it is possible to increase the opportunities for the player to have a sense of expectation that a performance changing the display mode of the reserved identification information will appear. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and tension.

In addition, according to feature oC1, when a moving object reaches the reserved identification information, it is possible to change the display mode of the reserved identification information. In particular, when the display level of the display mode of the reserved identification information is below the upper limit, the display level is changed to a higher level, and when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit, the display level is not changed. Therefore, according to feature oC1, even if a moving object reaches the reserved identification information, the display mode of the reserved identification information may or may not change. Therefore, according to feature oC1, even if a moving object reaches the reserved identification information, the player can be given a sense of expectation and tension, such as wondering whether the display mode of the reserved identification information will change. Furthermore, since it is possible to give a sense of disappointment that the display mode of the reserved identification information has not changed even though the moving object has reached the reserved identification information, it is possible to give the player an even greater sense of expectation and tension. As a result, feature oC1 can improve the interest of the game.

[Feature oC2]
The gaming machine according to feature oC1,
The information storage means includes:
Means for storing the special information up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
The hold display means includes:
Pending identification information corresponding to each of the stored special information is displayed in the same number of display positions as the specified number, and each time the game round is completed, the reservation identification information corresponding to each of the stored special information is displayed. means for subjecting the first stored special information to a determination by the determination means, excluding the pending identification information corresponding to the special information from the display position arrangement, and shifting each of the remaining pending identification information. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature oC2, the player can accurately know how much special information he or she has acquired by observing the displayed sequence of pending identification information.

[Feature oC3]
The gaming machine according to feature oC2,
The display mode changing means includes:
Shift occurrence determination means (first start in FIG. 195 Step So3305 in the mouth hold display change setting process, and Step So3405 in the second starting mouth hold display change setting process in FIG.
If the shift occurrence determination means determines that the shift does not occur during the predetermined period, the display level of the suspension identification information is changed after the predetermined period, and it is determined that the shift occurs during the predetermined period. means for not changing the display level of the hold identification information (steps So3310 and So3311 in the first starting gate hold display change setting process in FIG. Step So3410 and Step So3411) in the change setting process,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature oC3, even if the moving object reaches the reserved identification information, if a shift in the reserved identification information occurs within a predetermined period starting from the time of the arrival, the display mode of the reserved identification information does not change, whereas if a shift in the reserved identification information does not occur within the predetermined period, an effect is executed that changes the display mode of the reserved identification information. Therefore, according to feature oC3, even if the moving object reaches the reserved identification information, it is possible to give the player an even greater sense of expectation and tension, such as wondering whether the display mode of the reserved identification information will change.

<Characteristics oD group>
The feature oD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature oD1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
an information storage means for storing the acquired special information up to a predetermined number;
A determination means for determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a hold display means for displaying hold identification information (hold display icon) corresponding to each of the stored special information in a number of display positions equal to the specified number, and for providing the earliest stored special information among the stored special information for judgment by the judgment means each time judgment by the judgment means is completed, removing the hold identification information corresponding to the special information from the arrangement of the display positions, and shifting each of the remaining hold identification information;
A performance execution means for executing a performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means includes:
a moving object display means (the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90, and the third type petal presentation setting process for the first start port reservation of FIG. 187 and the third type petal presentation setting process for the second start port reservation of FIG. 193 executed thereby) for displaying a plurality of moving objects (third type petals P3) moving toward each of the display positions regardless of whether the reservation identification information exists at each of the display positions;
a display mode change means (the MPU 92 of the audio/light emission control device 90, and the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195 and the second start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 196 executed thereby) for changing the display mode of the hold identification information when the hold identification information is present at the display position reached when each of the moving bodies reaches each of the display positions;
A gaming machine comprising:

In conventional pachinko machines, when the variable display starts, when the reserved identification information shifts, or when special information is acquired (when the game ball enters the starting hole), a performance suggesting that the display mode of the reserved identification information will change (reserved change suggestion performance) is executed, and then a performance changing the display mode of the reserved identification information is executed. Therefore, unless the reserved change suggestion performance is executed, a performance changing the display mode of the reserved identification information does not appear, so the player only pays attention to the reserved identification information when the reserved change suggestion performance is executed, and the player lacks a sense of expectation or tension. In contrast, according to feature oD1, each moving object that can play the role of the reserved change suggestion performance is displayed regardless of whether or not reserved identification information exists at each display position, so that it is possible to increase the opportunities for the player to have a sense of expectation that a performance changing the display mode of the reserved identification information will appear. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and tension.

[Feature oD2]
A gaming machine according to feature oD1,
The display mode changing means is
A shift occurrence determination means (step So3305 in the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195 and step So3405 in the second start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 196) for determining whether or not a shift has occurred for the hold identification information during a predetermined period starting from the time when the moving body reaches the hold identification information;
means for changing the display mode of the hold identification information after the predetermined period when it is determined by the shift occurrence determination means that the shift will not occur within the predetermined period, and for not changing the display mode of the hold identification information when it is determined that the shift will occur within the predetermined period (steps So3310 and So3311 in the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195, and steps So3410 and So3411 in the second start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 196);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature oD2, even if the mobile object reaches the hold identification information, if the hold identification information shifts during a predetermined period starting from the time of arrival, the display mode of the hold identification information does not change. On the other hand, if the hold identification information does not shift during the predetermined period, an effect is performed to change the display mode of the hold identification information. Therefore, according to feature oD2, even if the mobile object reaches the hold identification information, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, such as whether the display mode of the hold identification information will change. . Furthermore, it is possible to give players a sense of disappointment, such as when the mobile object reaches the pending identification information but the display form of the pending identification information has not changed, thereby further increasing the sense of anticipation and urgency to the player. can do.

[Feature oD3]
A gaming machine according to feature oD1 or feature oD2,
For each of the reserved identification information,
As the display mode of the reserved identification information, a display level indicating a possibility that the special information corresponding to the reserved identification information satisfies the predetermined condition and having a plurality of stages from high to low corresponding to the high and low of the possibility;
an upper limit value as an upper limit to which the display level can be changed when changing the display mode of the hold identification information;
is set,
The display mode changing means is
A means for determining whether the display level set for the hold identification information falls below the upper limit when the moving object reaches the hold identification information, and for changing the display level to a higher level when the display level falls below the upper limit, and for not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit (steps So3307 to So3311 in the first start port hold display change setting process in FIG. 195, and steps So3407 to So3411 in the second start port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196).
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature oD3, even if the mobile object reaches the hold identification information, if the display level set for the hold identification information is equal to or higher than the upper limit value, the display level as the display mode of the hold identification information does not change. On the other hand, when the display level set for the hold identification information is less than the upper limit value, an effect that changes the display level is executed. For this reason, according to feature oD3, even if the mobile object reaches the hold identification information, the player is further given a sense of anticipation and tension, wondering if the display mode of the hold identification information will change. Can be done.

<Features Group E>
The group of features oE is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature oE1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
specific identification information display means for displaying specific identification information (a pending display icon, a pattern row) corresponding to the stored special information at a predetermined display position;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means is
A moving object display means (MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 and , the third type petal effect setting process for holding the first starting opening shown in FIG. 187 and the third type flower petal effect setting process for holding the second starting opening shown in FIG. 193, which are executed thereby.
When the mobile body reaches the specific identification information, the display mode changing means (the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 and the first starting port in FIG. 195 executed by it) changes the display mode of the specific identification information. Hold display change setting process and second starting port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196);
Equipped with
The moving object display means includes:
Means for specifying a trajectory of the moving object during movement, the means for specifying a trajectory to reach the target (target pending trajectory) that reaches the display position, and a trajectory that is the same as the target trajectory from the starting point to the middle, and from the middle to the display. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a non-target trajectory (non-target-reserved trajectory) that reaches a position deviated from the position; and a moving body trajectory specifying means for specifying either one of the following.

In conventional pachinko machines, when the variable display starts, when the reserved identification information shifts, or when special information is acquired (when the game ball enters the starting hole), a performance suggesting that the display mode of the reserved identification information will change (reserved change suggestion performance) is executed, and then a performance changing the display mode of the reserved identification information is executed. Therefore, unless the reserved change suggestion performance is executed, a performance changing the display mode of the reserved identification information does not appear, so the player only pays attention to the reserved identification information when the reserved change suggestion performance is executed, and the player lacks a sense of expectation or tension. In contrast, according to feature oE1, a moving object that can play the role of a reserved change suggestion performance is displayed regardless of whether or not the reserved identification information exists as specific identification information at the display position, so that it is possible to increase the opportunities for the player to have a sense of expectation that a performance changing the display mode of the specific identification information will appear. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and tension.

In addition, according to feature oE1, when a moving object reaches a specific identification, it is possible to change the display mode of the specific identification, but the trajectory of the moving object when it moves can be either a target trajectory that reaches the display position, or an off-target trajectory that reaches a position away from the display position. Therefore, according to feature oE1, even if a moving object is displayed, the display mode of the specific identification may or may not change. Therefore, according to feature oE1, even if a moving object is displayed, the player can be given a sense of expectation and tension, such as wondering whether the display mode of the specific identification will change. Furthermore, since it is possible to give a sense of disappointment that the display mode of the specific identification does not change even though a moving object is displayed, it is possible to give the player an even greater sense of expectation and tension. As a result, feature oE1 can increase the interest of the game.

[Feature oE2]
The gaming machine described in feature oE1,
The display mode changing means includes:
Switching occurrence determination means (first starting gate hold in FIG. 195 Step So3305 in the display change setting process and Step So3405 in the second starting port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196),
If the switching occurrence determining means determines that switching of the specific identification information does not occur during the predetermined period, the display mode of the specific identification information is changed after the predetermined period, and the display mode of the specific identification information is changed during the predetermined period. means for not changing the display mode of the specific identification information when it is determined that the switching occurs (steps So3310 and So3311 in the first starting gate hold display change setting process in FIG. 195, and step So3311 in FIG. 196). Step So3410 and Step So3411) in the second starting port hold display change setting process;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature oE2, even if the moving object reaches the specific identification information, if the specific identification information is switched within a predetermined period starting from the time of the arrival, the display mode of the specific identification information does not change, whereas if the specific identification information is not switched within the predetermined period, an effect is executed that changes the display mode of the specific identification information. Therefore, according to feature oE2, even if the moving object reaches the specific identification information, it is possible to give the player an even greater sense of expectation and tension, such as wondering whether the display mode of the specific identification information will change.

[Feature oE3]
The gaming machine according to feature oE1 or feature oE2,
The specific identification information is reservation identification information for identifying a reservation corresponding to the stored special information,
For each of the hold identification information,
The display mode of the pending identification information is to suggest the possibility that the special information corresponding to the pending identification information satisfies the predetermined condition, and to indicate a plurality of stages from high to low depending on the level of the possibility. a display level comprising;
an upper limit value as an upper limit to which the display level can be changed when changing the display mode of the pending identification information;
is set,
The display mode changing means includes:
When the mobile object reaches the hold identification information, it is determined whether the display level set for the hold identification information is lower than the upper limit value, and if the display level is lower than the upper limit value, , means for changing the display level to a higher side and not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step So3307 in the first starting gate hold display change setting process in FIG. 195) ~So3311, and steps So3407~So3411 in the second starting port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature oE3, even if the mobile object reaches the hold identification information, if the display level set for the hold identification information is equal to or higher than the upper limit, the display level as the display mode of the hold identification information does not change. On the other hand, when the display level set for the hold identification information is less than the upper limit value, an effect that changes the display level is executed. For this reason, according to feature oE3, even if the moving object reaches the hold identification information, the player is further given a sense of anticipation and tension, wondering if the display mode of the hold identification information will change. Can be done.

<Features of F group>
The group of features oF is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 1 of the fourth embodiment.

[Feature oF1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
An information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
A determination means for determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a hold display means for displaying hold identification information (hold display icon) corresponding to the stored special information at a predetermined display position;
A performance execution means for executing a performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means includes:
a moving object display means (the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90, and the third type petal presentation setting process for the first start port reservation of FIG. 187 and the third type petal presentation setting process for the second start port reservation of FIG. 193 executed thereby) for displaying a moving object (third type petal P3) moving toward the display position regardless of whether the reservation identification information is present at the display position;
The display device has a first mode in which, when the moving object reaches the display position and the hold identification information is present at the reached display position, the moving object passes through or disappears from the display position and the display mode of the hold identification information is not changed, a second mode in which the moving object is continuously displayed at the display position for a predetermined period and the display mode of the hold identification information is not changed, and a third mode in which the moving object is continuously displayed at the display position for a predetermined period and the display mode of the hold identification information is changed, and means for executing any one of the first to third modes (first start port hold display change setting process (Figure 200) and petal display change process (Figure 201) of variant 1);
A gaming machine comprising:

In conventional pachinko machines, when the variable display starts, when the reserved identification information shifts, or when special information is acquired (when the game ball enters the starting hole), a performance suggesting that the display mode of the reserved identification information will change (reserved change suggestion performance) is executed, and then a performance changing the display mode of the reserved identification information is executed. Therefore, unless the reserved change suggestion performance is executed, a performance changing the display mode of the reserved identification information does not appear, so the player only pays attention to the reserved identification information when the reserved change suggestion performance is executed, and the player lacks a sense of expectation or tension. In contrast, according to feature oF1, the moving object that can play the role of the reserved change suggestion performance is displayed regardless of whether the reserved identification information is present at the display position, so that it is possible to increase the opportunities for the player to have a sense of expectation that a performance changing the display mode of the reserved identification information will appear. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and tension.

Further, according to feature oF1, when the moving object reaches the display position, if the holding identification information is present at the display position reached, the moving object passes through the display position or disappears and the holding identification information is displayed in the manner a first mode in which the mobile object remains at the display position for a predetermined period of time and does not change the display mode of the hold identification information; and a second mode in which the mobile object remains at the display position for a predetermined period of time. A third mode in which the display mode of the retention and reservation identification information is changed may be adopted. Therefore, according to the feature oF1, even when a moving object is displayed, there can be three modes, the first to third modes. Therefore, according to the feature oF1, even if a moving object is displayed, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency as to whether the display mode of the pending identification information will change. Furthermore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of disappointment when the moving object reaches the display position, but passes through the display position or disappears, and the display form of the pending identification information does not change. It is possible to further impart a sense of anticipation and urgency. As a result, with the feature oF1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature oF2]
A gaming machine according to feature oF1,
The information storage means includes:
a means for storing the special information up to a predetermined number,
The hold display means includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for displaying reserved identification information corresponding to each of the stored special information in the same number of display positions as the specified number, and each time a judgment by the judgment means is completed, the reserved identification information corresponding to that special information that was stored earliest is subjected to judgment by the judgment means, the reserved identification information corresponding to that special information is removed from the arrangement of the display positions, and each of the remaining reserved identification information is shifted.

According to feature oF2, the player can accurately know how much special information has been acquired by observing the displayed arrangement of pending identification information.

[Feature oF3]
A gaming machine according to feature oF2,
The display mode changing means is
A shift occurrence determination means (step So3305 in the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195 and step So3405 in the second start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 196) for determining whether or not a shift has occurred for the hold identification information during a predetermined period starting from the time when the moving body reaches the hold identification information;
means for changing the display level of the hold identification information after the predetermined period when it is determined by the shift occurrence determination means that the shift will not occur within the predetermined period, and for not changing the display level of the hold identification information when it is determined that the shift will occur within the predetermined period (steps So3310 and So3311 in the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195, and steps So3410 and So3411 in the second start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 196);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature oF3, even if a moving object reaches the reserved identification information, if a shift in the reserved identification information occurs within a predetermined period starting from the time of the arrival, the display mode of the reserved identification information does not change, whereas if a shift in the reserved identification information does not occur within the predetermined period, an effect is executed that changes the display mode of the reserved identification information. Therefore, according to feature oF3, even if a moving object reaches the reserved identification information, it is possible to give the player an even greater sense of expectation and tension, such as wondering whether the display mode of the reserved identification information will change.

[Feature oF4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features oF1 to oF3,
For each of the reserved identification information,
As the display mode of the reserved identification information, a display level indicating a possibility that the special information corresponding to the reserved identification information satisfies the predetermined condition and having a plurality of stages from high to low corresponding to the high and low of the possibility;
an upper limit value as an upper limit to which the display level can be changed when changing the display mode of the hold identification information;
is set,
The display mode changing means is
A means for determining whether the display level set for the hold identification information falls below the upper limit when the moving object reaches the hold identification information, and for changing the display level to a higher level when the display level falls below the upper limit, and for not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit (steps So3307 to So3311 in the first start port hold display change setting process in FIG. 195, and steps So3407 to So3411 in the second start port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196).
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature oF4, even if a moving object reaches the reserved identification information, if the display level set for the reserved identification information is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the display level as the display mode of the reserved identification information does not change, whereas if the display level set for the reserved identification information is below the upper limit, an effect is executed that changes the display level. Therefore, according to feature oF4, even if a moving object reaches the reserved identification information, it is possible to give the player an even greater sense of expectation and tension, such as wondering whether the display mode of the reserved identification information will change.

<Characteristics oG group>
The feature oG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature oG1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a hold display means for displaying hold identification information (hold display icon) corresponding to the stored special information at a predetermined display position;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means is
A moving body display means (MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 and a third type for holding the first starting opening shown in FIG. Seed petal effect setting process and third type petal effect setting process for holding the second starting opening in FIG. 193);
Display mode changing means (MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 and the first starting port in FIG. 195 executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 Hold display change setting process and second starting port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196);
Equipped with
The hold display means includes:
The case where the hold identification information is not displayed at the display position at the timing when the display of the mobile object is started, but the hold identification information is displayed at the display position by the time the mobile object reaches the display position. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

In conventional pachinko machines, the display mode of the hold identification information changes when a variable display starts, when the hold identification information shifts, or when special information is obtained (when a game ball enters the starting slot). It is common to perform a performance that suggests (pending change suggesting performance) and then perform a performance that changes the display mode of the hold identification information. For this reason, unless the pending change suggestion presentation is executed, a presentation that changes the display mode of the pending identification information will not appear. There was no focus on the game, and players lacked a sense of anticipation and urgency. On the other hand, according to feature oG1, a moving object that can serve as a holding change suggestion effect is displayed even if there is no holding identification information at the display position at the timing when the display of the moving object is started. Therefore, it is possible to increase the opportunity to make the player feel hopeful that an effect that changes the display mode of the pending identification information will appear. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency.

In addition, according to feature oG1, there are cases where the reserved identification information is not displayed at the display position when the display of the moving object begins, but is displayed at the display position by the time the moving object reaches the display position, so that the player is given a sense of anticipation for the moving object after the fact when the display of the reserved information identification information begins. Therefore, an even greater sense of anticipation can be given to the player. As a result, feature oG1 can increase the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature oG2]
A gaming machine according to feature oG1,
The information storage means includes:
a means for storing the special information up to a predetermined number,
The hold display means includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for displaying reserved identification information corresponding to each of the stored special information in the same number of display positions as the specified number, and each time a judgment by the judgment means is completed, the reserved identification information corresponding to that special information that was stored earliest is subjected to judgment by the judgment means, the reserved identification information corresponding to that special information is removed from the arrangement of the display positions, and each of the remaining reserved identification information is shifted.

According to feature oG2, the player can accurately know how much special information has been acquired by observing the displayed arrangement of pending identification information.

[Feature oG3]
A gaming machine according to feature oG2,
The display mode changing means is
A shift occurrence determination means (step So3305 in the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195 and step So3405 in the second start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 196) for determining whether or not a shift has occurred for the hold identification information during a predetermined period starting from the time when the moving body reaches the hold identification information;
means for changing the display level of the hold identification information after the predetermined period when it is determined by the shift occurrence determination means that the shift will not occur within the predetermined period, and for not changing the display level of the hold identification information when it is determined that the shift will occur within the predetermined period (steps So3310 and So3311 in the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195, and steps So3410 and So3411 in the second start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 196);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature oG3, even if the mobile object reaches the hold identification information, if the hold identification information shifts during a predetermined period starting from the time of arrival, the display mode of the hold identification information does not change. On the other hand, if the hold identification information does not shift during the predetermined period, an effect is performed to change the display mode of the hold identification information. For this reason, according to feature oG3, even if the mobile object reaches the hold identification information, the player is given a greater sense of anticipation and urgency, wondering if the display mode of the hold identification information will change. be able to.

[Feature oG4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features oG1 to oG3,
For each of the reserved identification information,
As the display mode of the reserved identification information, a display level indicating a possibility that the special information corresponding to the reserved identification information satisfies the predetermined condition and having a plurality of stages from high to low corresponding to the high and low of the possibility;
an upper limit value as an upper limit to which the display level can be changed when changing the display mode of the hold identification information;
is set,
The display mode changing means is
A means for determining whether the display level set for the hold identification information falls below the upper limit when the moving object reaches the hold identification information, and for changing the display level to a higher level when the display level falls below the upper limit, and for not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit (steps So3307 to So3311 in the first start port hold display change setting process in FIG. 195, and steps So3407 to So3411 in the second start port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196).
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature oG4, even if the mobile object reaches the hold identification information, if the display level set for the hold identification information is equal to or higher than the upper limit, the display level as the display mode of the hold identification information does not change. On the other hand, when the display level set for the hold identification information is less than the upper limit value, an effect that changes the display level is executed. For this reason, according to feature oG4, even if the mobile object reaches the hold identification information, the player is further given a sense of anticipation and tension, wondering if the display mode of the hold identification information will change. Can be done.

<Characteristic oH group>
The feature oH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature oH1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
An information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
A determination means for determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A determination result notifying means (the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 and the game performance setting process of FIG. 183 executed by the MPU 92) notifies the result of the determination by the determination means by a game operation such as starting the variable display of the pattern and stopping the variable display of the pattern;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 165 executed by the MPU 62) that executes one game round when the game action that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means is started and then ended,
A gaming machine comprising:
The determination result notifying means includes:
A variation restart means for displaying a first moving object (fourth type petal P4) moving toward a display position, and restarting the variable display of the pattern when the first moving object reaches the stopped and displayed pattern during one game round (the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 and step So2305 of the performance pattern setting process in FIG. 184 executed thereby).
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature oH1, when the first moving object reaches a symbol that has stopped being displayed from a state of changing display, an effect is executed to resume the changing display of the symbol. In conventional pachinko machines that do not have this configuration, the first moving object does not affect the changing display of the symbol, so when the symbol becomes a symbol that does not win the jackpot, the player is simply given a sense of disappointment. In contrast, according to feature oH1, when the first moving object reaches a symbol that has stopped being displayed from a state of changing display, an effect can be executed to resume the changing display of the symbol, so that a player who was once disappointed when the symbol became a symbol that does not win the jackpot can be given a sense of surprise that the changing display has resumed and a sense of expectation for another jackpot. Therefore, feature oH1 can increase the interest of the game.

[Characteristic OH2]
A gaming machine according to feature oH1,
a hold display means for displaying hold identification information (hold display icon) corresponding to the stored special information at a predetermined display position;
A performance execution means for executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
A second moving object display means (the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90, and the third type petal presentation setting process for the first start port hold in FIG. 187 and the third type petal presentation setting process for the second start port hold in FIG. 193 executed thereby) for displaying a second moving object (third type petal P3) that is configured with a picture substantially identical to that of the first moving object and moves toward the hold identification information;
A display mode change means (the MPU 92 of the audio/light emission control device 90 and the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195 and the second start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 196 executed thereby) for changing the display mode of the hold identification information when the second moving body reaches the hold identification information;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature oH2, even if a first moving body acting on the pattern reaches the reserved identification information, it does not act on the reserved identification information, whereas when a second moving body composed of substantially the same image as the first moving body reaches the reserved identification information, an effect is executed that changes the display mode of the reserved identification information. Therefore, according to feature oH2, by displaying the first moving body and the second moving body, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and tension, such as wondering whether the display of the changing patterns will resume or whether the display mode of the reserved identification information will change.

In conventional pachinko machines, the display mode of the hold identification information changes when a variable display starts, when the hold identification information shifts, or when special information is obtained (when a game ball enters the starting slot). It is common to perform a performance that suggests (pending change suggesting performance) and then perform a performance that changes the display mode of the hold identification information. For this reason, unless the pending change suggestion presentation is executed, a presentation that changes the display mode of the pending identification information will not appear. There was no focus on the game, and players lacked a sense of anticipation and urgency. On the other hand, according to feature oH2, a second moving object that can play a role in suggesting a pending change, and a first moving object with almost the same pattern as the second moving object are displayed. , it is possible to increase the opportunity for the player to have a sense of expectation that a performance that changes the display mode of the pending identification information will appear, so it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation and sense of urgency. can. As a result, according to feature oH2, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature oH3]
The gaming machine described in feature oH2,
The display mode changing means includes:
Shift occurrence determination means (see FIG. 195) that determines whether or not the shift occurs with respect to the suspension identification information during a predetermined period starting from the time when the second moving body reaches the suspension identification information. Step So3305 in the first starting gate hold display change setting process, and Step So3405 in the second starting gate hold display change setting process in FIG. 196);
If the shift occurrence determination means determines that the shift does not occur during the predetermined period, the display level of the suspension identification information is changed after the predetermined period, and it is determined that the shift occurs during the predetermined period. means for not changing the display level of the hold identification information (steps So3310 and So3311 in the first starting gate hold display change setting process in FIG. Step So3410 and Step So3411) in the change setting process,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature oH3, even if the mobile object reaches the hold identification information, if the hold identification information shifts during a predetermined period starting from the time of arrival, the display mode of the hold identification information does not change. On the other hand, if the hold identification information does not shift during the predetermined period, an effect is performed to change the display mode of the hold identification information. For this reason, according to feature oH3, even if the mobile object reaches the hold identification information, the player is further given a sense of anticipation and urgency, wondering if the display mode of the hold identification information will change. be able to.

[Feature oH4]
The gaming machine according to feature oH2 or feature oH3,
For each of the hold identification information,
The display mode of the pending identification information is to suggest the possibility that the special information corresponding to the pending identification information satisfies the predetermined condition, and to indicate a plurality of stages from high to low depending on the level of the possibility. a display level comprising;
an upper limit value as an upper limit to which the display level can be changed when changing the display mode of the pending identification information;
is set,
The display mode changing means includes:
When the second moving body reaches the hold identification information, it is determined whether the display level set for the hold identification information is lower than the upper limit value, and the display level is lower than the upper limit value. Means for changing the display level to a higher side when the display level is lower than the upper limit value, and not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (first starting gate hold display change setting process in FIG. 195) Steps So3307 to So3311 in , and steps So3407 to So3411 in the second starting port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature oH4, when a moving object reaches the reserved identification information, it is possible to change the display mode of the reserved identification information. In particular, when the display level of the display mode of the reserved identification information is below the upper limit, the display level is changed to a higher level, and when the display level is equal to or above the upper limit, the display level is not changed. Therefore, according to feature oH4, even if a moving object reaches the reserved identification information, the display mode of the reserved identification information may or may not change. Therefore, according to feature oH4, even if a moving object reaches the reserved identification information, the player can be given a sense of expectation and tension, such as wondering whether the display mode of the reserved identification information will change. Furthermore, it is possible to give a sense of disappointment that the display mode of the reserved identification information does not change even though the moving object has reached the reserved identification information, so that the player can be given an even greater sense of expectation and tension.

<Characteristics oI group>
The feature oI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature oI1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
An information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
A determination means for determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A specific identification information display means for displaying specific identification information (a reserved display icon, a pattern sequence) corresponding to the stored special information;
A performance execution means for executing a performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means includes:
an action display means (the MPU 92 of the audio/light emission control device 90, and the third type petal presentation setting process for the first start port reservation of FIG. 187 and the third type petal presentation setting process for the second start port reservation of FIG. 193 executed thereby) which constantly displays one or more action objects (first to fourth type petals P1 to P4) for a predetermined period of time, and which displays the action objects so that at least one of the action objects has at least a period during which it progresses toward the specific identification information (a period during which it moves along the target reservation arrival trajectory);
A display mode change means (the MPU 92 of the audio/light emission control device 90 and the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195 and the second start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 196 executed thereby) that changes the display mode of the specific identification information when the action body reaches the specific identification information;
A gaming machine equipped with:

According to feature oI1, one or more acting bodies are constantly displayed for a predetermined period of time, and when at least one of the acting bodies reaches a specific identification information, the display mode of the specific identification information is changed. In conventional pachinko machines that do not have such a configuration, the display mode of the specific identification information is changed at a predetermined timing, so the player can predict the timing when the display mode will change, which causes a problem that the player lacks a sense of expectation and tension. In contrast, according to feature oI1, the acting body is constantly displayed for a predetermined period of time, so it is difficult for the player to determine when the acting body will reach the specific identification information. Therefore, feature oI1 can give the player a sense of expectation and tension, such as when the display mode of the specific identification information will change. Therefore, feature oI1 can increase the interest of the game.

[Feature oI2]
The gaming machine according to feature oI1,
The effect body display means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for repeatedly displaying a plurality of the effecting bodies (petals P1 to P4).

According to feature oI2, since a plurality of effectors are displayed repeatedly, the player has a feeling of expectation that the effector will repeatedly reach the specific identification information and the display mode of the specific identification information will change. It can give a sense of urgency.
[Feature oI3]
The gaming machine according to feature oI1,
The effect body display means is
Displaying the effecting body so that the effecting body (butterfly) is always present during the predetermined period in a predetermined display area (display surface 41a) that includes at least the display position of the specific identification information. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for performing the following steps.

According to feature oI3, since the effector is displayed so that it is always present in the display area for a predetermined period of time, the specific identification information is always displayed to the player for a predetermined period of time. It is possible to create a sense of anticipation and urgency, such as wondering if the effector will reach the object and change the display mode of the specific identification information.

[Feature oI4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features oI1 to feature oI3,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific identification information is reservation identification information for identifying a reservation corresponding to the stored special information.

According to feature oI4, it is possible to impart a sense of anticipation and urgency, such as whether the effector will reach the hold identification information and the display mode of the hold identification information will change.

[Feature oI5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features oI1 to oI3,
A determination result notifying means for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means by a game operation such as starting the variable display of the patterns and stopping the variable display of the patterns (the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 and the game round presentation setting process of FIG. 183 executed thereby).
Equipped with
The specific identification information is the pattern.

Feature oI5 creates a sense of expectation and tension as to whether the display mode of the pattern will change when the action object reaches the pattern, for example by restarting the varying display of the pattern.

<Characteristic oJ group>
The feature oJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature oJ1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
An information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
A determination means for determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A specific identification information display means for displaying specific identification information (a reserved display icon, a pattern sequence) corresponding to the stored special information;
A performance execution means for executing a performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means includes:
an action display means (the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90, and the third type petal presentation setting process for the first start port reservation in FIG. 187 and the third type petal presentation setting process for the second start port reservation in FIG. 193 executed thereby) for displaying the action (third type petal P3, fourth type petal P4) moving toward the specific identification information;
When the action body reaches the specific identification information, a presentation mode selection means performs either a first mode in which the display mode of the specific identification information is changed or a second mode in which the specific identification information is not changed (the first start port hold display change setting process (FIG. 200) and the petal display change process (FIG. 201) of the first modified example);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature oJ1, when the acting object reaches a specific identification information, the display mode of the specific identification information may be changed. In conventional pachinko machines that do not have this configuration, the display mode of the specific identification information is always changed at a predetermined timing, so the player can predict when the display mode will change, which creates an issue of lack of anticipation or tension for the player. In contrast, according to feature oJ1, it is difficult for the player to determine when the acting object will reach the specific identification information, so it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, such as wondering when the display mode of the specific identification information will change.

Furthermore, according to feature oJ1, when the acting body reaches a specific identification information, it is possible for the specific identification information to not be changed. Therefore, according to feature oJ1, it is possible to give the player a sense of disappointment even though the acting body has reached the specific identification information, which can give the player an even greater sense of expectation and tension. As a result, feature oJ1 can increase the player's interest in the game.

[Features oJ2]
The gaming machine described in feature oJ1,
The presentation mode selection means includes:
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying a second effecting body as the effecting body, which is constituted by a drawing that is substantially the same as the effecting body and moves toward a position away from the specific identification information.

According to feature oJ2, by displaying the second acting body, when the acting body reaches the specific identification information, a second mode is executed in which the specific identification information is not changed. Therefore, with a simple configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and tension, such as wondering when the display mode of the specific identification information will change.

[Feature oJ3]
A gaming machine according to feature oJ1 or oJ2,
The specific identification information is hold identification information for identifying the hold corresponding to the stored special information,
With respect to the reserved identification information,
As the display mode of the reserved identification information, a display level indicating a possibility that the special information corresponding to the reserved identification information satisfies the predetermined condition and having a plurality of stages from high to low corresponding to the high and low of the possibility;
an upper limit value as an upper limit to which the display level can be changed when changing the display mode of the hold identification information;
is set,
The performance mode selection means includes:
When the action body reaches the hold identification information, it is determined whether the display level set for the hold identification information is below the upper limit value, and if the display level is below the upper limit value, the display level is changed to a higher level, and if the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value, the display level is not changed (steps So3307 to So3311 in the first start port hold display change setting process in FIG. 195, and steps So3407 to So3411 in the second start port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196).
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature oJ3, even if the effector reaches the pending identification information, if the display level set for the pending identification information is equal to or higher than the upper limit, the display level as the display mode of the pending identification information does not change. On the other hand, when the display level set for the hold identification information is less than the upper limit value, an effect that changes the display level is executed. Therefore, according to feature oJ3, when the effector reaches the specific identification information, the second mode is performed in which the specific identification information is not changed. Therefore, with a simple configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency, such as wondering when the display mode of the specific identification information will change.

<Characteristic pA group>
The feature pA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature pA1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
An information storage means for storing a plurality of the acquired special information;
A determination means for sequentially determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A presentation mode setting means for setting one of a plurality of presentation modes including at least a first presentation mode (character stage) and a second presentation mode (non-character stage), each of which has a different presentation style, as the presentation mode;
a game round execution means for executing at least one game round in the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means, when one game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
A gaming machine comprising:
The presentation mode setting means includes:
A presentation mode transition means ("principle" in FIG. 219) for transitioning the set presentation mode to the second presentation mode after a specific condition including at least a determination by the determination means that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition (miss) is established (special reach/miss) in a state where the first presentation mode is set;
a presentation mode continuing means ("exception 1" in FIG. 219) for continuing the first presentation mode without transitioning to the second presentation mode by the presentation mode transition means when, after the end of the game in which the specific condition is established, there is special information that satisfies a first special condition among the special information (reserved information) stored in the information storage means and that has not been judged by the judgment means;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature pA1, when the first presentation mode is set, after a specific condition is met that includes at least the determination means determining that the special information does not satisfy the specified condition, the set presentation mode is transitioned to the second presentation mode. In conventional gaming machines that do not have a presentation mode transition means, even if a specific condition is met that includes at least the determination means determining that the special information does not satisfy the specified condition, the state in which the first presentation mode is set continues, and there is a problem that the sense of tension that the special information does not satisfy the specified condition cannot be imparted to the player by the presentation according to the presentation mode. In contrast, according to feature pA1, by transitioning the presentation mode from the first presentation mode to the second presentation mode, the sense of tension that the special information does not satisfy the specified condition can be imparted to the player by the presentation according to the presentation mode.

Further, according to the feature pA1, after the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, among the special information stored in the information storage means, the first special When there is special information that satisfies the conditions, the first performance mode is continued without shifting to the second performance mode by a performance mode transition means. For this reason, the performance mode that has been set is originally transferred from the first performance mode to the second performance mode by the performance mode transition means, but since the first performance mode is continued (maintained), the game When the player recognizes that the first performance mode will continue, he or she will have a sense of expectation that some change will occur in the gaming state and that an advantageous result will come. Therefore, according to the feature pA1, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature pA2]
The gaming machine according to feature pA1,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a predetermined effect (a screen effect when a special reach occurs) in the game round when the specific condition is satisfied.

According to feature pA2, when a specific condition is met, a specific effect is executed during the game. This allows the player to be notified by the specific effect that a specific condition has been met. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

[Feature pA3]
The gaming machine according to feature pA2,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing the predetermined performance in the gaming round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the first special condition.

According to feature pA3, the predetermined effect is executed in a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies the first special condition. For this reason, after the predetermined effect is executed in the game round when the specific condition is satisfied, the predetermined effect is executed again when the special information satisfying the first special condition is digested. For the player, if a specific condition is met, the player can watch the same performance once again. If the specific condition is met, since the determining means has determined that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the player must take revenge for the fact that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition (special information satisfies a predetermined condition). Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pA4]
The gaming machine according to feature pA3,
As the first production mode, there are a plurality of individual production modes with different production modes (a stage in Warrior A's room, a stage in Warrior B's room, etc.);
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined performances having different performance modes are determined for each of the plurality of individual performance modes.

According to feature pA4, the predetermined presentation executed in a game turn when a specific condition is met, or in a game turn corresponding to the special information that satisfies a first special condition, can be a presentation corresponding to each individual presentation mode as the first presentation mode. Therefore, according to feature pA4, the content of the predetermined presentation can be controlled by switching the individual presentation mode included in the first presentation mode, and a variety of presentations can be provided to the player. Therefore, according to feature pA3, it is possible to further increase the interest of the game.

[Feature pA5]
A gaming machine according to feature pA4,
The predetermined effect is constituted by a video in which a character corresponding to the set effect mode appears,
a determining means for determining that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the character will suffer an unfavorable result in the predetermined presentation.

According to feature pA5, a predetermined effect in which a character appears is executed in a game round when a specific condition is met, and after a disadvantageous result for the character is announced in the predetermined effect, the first special condition is satisfied. When the special information is digested, the predetermined performance in which the character appears is performed again. For this reason, the player becomes more empathetic toward a predetermined performance depending on the character that results in a disadvantageous result. Therefore, according to feature pA5, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pA6]
The gaming machine according to feature pA5,
The production mode setting means includes:
After the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, among the special information stored in the information storage means, there is a 2. When the special information that satisfies the special condition exists, the set production mode is changed to the individual one of the first production modes corresponding to the character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined production. Means for transitioning to production mode (“Exception 2” in Figure 219)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature pA6, after the end of the game round in which the specific condition was satisfied, the second special condition is added to the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been determined by the determination means. If there is special information that satisfies the above, the set production mode is shifted to an individual production mode in the first production mode that corresponds to a character other than the character that appeared in the video that constitutes the predetermined production. . For this reason, originally, the set performance mode is transferred from the first performance mode to the second performance mode by the performance mode transition means, but it is transferred to another individual performance mode within the same first performance mode. Therefore, when the player recognizes the shift to another individual performance mode within the same first performance mode, he or she has a feeling of expectation that an advantageous result will come. Therefore, according to the feature pA6, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

[Feature pA7]
A gaming machine according to feature pA6,
The first special condition is that the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is equal to or greater than a first degree (special reach);
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second special condition is that the degree of possibility of satisfying the specified condition is less than the first degree and is equal to or greater than a second degree lower than the first degree (super reach).

According to feature pA7, when there is special information that satisfies the second special condition among the special information stored in the information storage means and that has not been judged by the judgment means, the set presentation mode is shifted to an individual presentation mode in the first presentation mode corresponding to a character other than the character that appeared in the video constituting the specified presentation. On the other hand, when there is special information that satisfies the first special condition, which has a higher possibility of satisfying the specified condition than the second special condition, the first presentation mode is continued without shifting to the second presentation mode. Therefore, after the end of the game round in which the specific condition is established, the mode of transition of the presentation mode can be changed depending on the special information that has not been judged by the judgment means among the special information stored in the information storage means. Therefore, according to feature pA7, the mode of transition of the presentation mode can make the player have a sense of expectation that a favorable result will come, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic pB group>
The feature pB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature pB1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
information storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of the acquired special information;
determining means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Production mode setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of production modes including at least a first production mode (character-based stage) as the production mode;
In the production mode set by the production mode setting means, if one game round is defined as the time when the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the gaming operation is ended. a game round executing means for executing at least one game round;
In the game round, when the first performance mode is set by the performance mode setting means, executing a predetermined performance that can execute a predetermined performance (battle performance + result notification performance) corresponding to the first performance mode. means and
A gaming machine comprising:
The production mode setting means includes:
While the first performance mode is set, after the result of the predetermined performance satisfies a specific condition (executing a defeat performance), the set performance mode is changed to a mode other than the first performance mode. Production mode transition means for shifting to production mode (“principle” in Figure 219)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature pB1, when the first performance mode is set, after the result of a predetermined performance satisfies a specific condition, the set performance mode shifts to a performance mode other than the first performance mode. be done. In conventional gaming machines that do not have a production mode transition means, the first production mode is set when the result of a predetermined production is a production in which a disadvantageous result for the character is announced as a specific condition, for example. Therefore, in the first performance mode, if a character that matches the character for which an unfavorable result for the character has been announced in the predetermined performance appears, the player will be able to There was a risk that it would feel strange to see a production mode in which a character who has died (for example, died) appears as if nothing had happened. On the other hand, according to feature pB1, after the result of a predetermined performance satisfies a specific condition, the set performance mode is transferred from the first performance mode to a performance mode other than the first performance mode. By doing so, it is possible to avoid characters with disadvantageous results from appearing in the production mode. Therefore, according to feature pB1, the story quality of the performance in which the characters appear is ensured, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance. As a result, according to feature pB1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pB2]
The gaming machine described in feature pB1,
The plurality of production modes are character-based production modes (character-based stages) that have multiple production modes in which corresponding characters are set, and non-character-related production modes (non-character-related stages) in which corresponding characters are not set. ), including
The gaming machine characterized in that the first performance mode is one of the character-based performance modes (character-based stages).

According to feature pB2, a transition is made from a performance mode in a character-based performance mode having a plurality of performance modes in which corresponding characters are set to a performance mode other than the relevant performance mode. For example, by shifting from the character-based performance mode to the non-character-based performance mode, it is possible to easily transition to a performance mode other than the first performance mode.

[Feature pB3]
A gaming machine according to feature pB2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined presentation is composed of a video including at least a scene in which a character corresponding to the presentation mode that has been set appears and an unfavorable result for the character is announced.

According to feature pB3, as the predetermined performance, a video is displayed that includes at least a scene in which a character corresponding to the set performance mode appears and a disadvantageous result for the character is announced. Therefore, the player can also receive a notification suggesting that the game result will be disadvantageous. Therefore, the player is given a sense of expectation and disappointment, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pB4]
A gaming machine according to feature pB3,
The presentation mode transition means includes:
A gaming machine comprising: a means for transitioning the set presentation mode to the non-character presentation mode after the result of the predetermined presentation satisfies a specific condition while the character presentation mode is set.

According to feature pB4, by transitioning from a character-based presentation mode to a non-character-based presentation mode, it is easy to transition to a presentation mode other than the first presentation mode.

[Feature pB5]
The gaming machine described in feature pB3,
The production mode transition means is
In a state where the character-based production mode is set, after the result of the predetermined production satisfies a specific condition, the set production mode is changed to the character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined production. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for shifting to the corresponding performance mode among the character-based performance modes.

According to feature pB5, by shifting the set production mode to the production mode among the character-based production modes that corresponds to the character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined production, It is possible to easily shift to a performance mode other than the first performance mode.

[Feature pB6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features pB1 to feature pB5,
The production mode setting means includes:
After the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, among the special information stored in the information storage means, there is a 1. If the special information that satisfies the special condition exists, the production mode continuation means (Fig. ``Exception 1'' in 219)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature pB6, after the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, the first special condition is added to the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been determined by the determination means. When special information that satisfies exists, the first performance mode is continued without shifting to a performance mode other than the first performance mode by a performance mode transition means. For this reason, originally, the set performance mode would be transferred from the first performance mode to a performance mode other than the first performance mode by the performance mode transition means, but the first performance mode will be continued (maintained). Therefore, when the player recognizes that the first production mode will continue, he or she will have a sense of expectation that some change will occur in the gaming state and that an advantageous result will come. Therefore, according to feature pB6, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic pC group>
The feature pC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature pC1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
An information storage means for storing a plurality of the acquired special information;
A determination means for sequentially determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a presentation mode setting means for setting one of a plurality of presentation modes including at least a first presentation mode (character stage) in which a corresponding character is set and a second presentation mode (non-character stage) in which a corresponding character is not set;
a game round execution means for executing at least one game round in the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means, when one game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
a predetermined performance execution means for executing a predetermined performance (battle performance) in which the character corresponding to the first performance mode appears when the first performance mode is set by the performance mode setting means in the game round;
A gaming machine comprising:
The presentation mode setting means includes:
A presentation mode transition means for transitioning the set presentation mode to the second presentation mode after a specific condition including at least a notification of an unfavorable result for the character in the predetermined presentation is established while the first presentation mode is set ("principle" in FIG. 219).
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature pC1, after a specific condition including at least an announcement of a disadvantageous result for the character in a predetermined performance is established in a state where the first performance mode is set, the performance mode transition means sets the first performance mode. The current performance mode is shifted to the second performance mode. In a conventional gaming machine that does not have a production mode transition means, the first production mode is set even though a specific condition including at least an announcement of a disadvantageous result for the character in a predetermined production is satisfied. Therefore, in the first production mode that continues, if a character that matches the character for which a disadvantageous result for the character has been announced in a predetermined production appears, the player will be given a disadvantageous result. There was a risk that the user would feel something strange about seeing a performance in a production mode in which a character whose outcome has been announced (for example, death) appears as if nothing happened. On the other hand, according to feature pC1, after a specific condition including at least an announcement of a disadvantageous result for a character in a predetermined performance is satisfied, the set performance mode is changed to the corresponding character. By shifting to the second production mode where there is no performance, it is possible to avoid a character with an unfavorable result from appearing in the production mode. Therefore, according to feature pC1, the story quality of the performance in which the characters appear is ensured, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance. As a result, according to feature pC1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pC2]
A gaming machine according to feature pC1,
The presentation mode setting means includes:
A presentation mode continuing means for continuing the first presentation mode without transitioning to the second presentation mode by the presentation mode transition means when, after the end of the game round in which the specific condition is established, the special information (reserved information) stored in the information storage means and not judged by the judgment means includes special information satisfying a first special condition ("Exception 1" in FIG. 219).
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature pC2, after the end of the game round in which the specific condition was satisfied, the first special condition is included in the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been determined by the determination means. When special information that satisfies exists, the first performance mode is continued without shifting to the second performance mode by a performance mode transition means. For this reason, the performance mode transition means would normally transfer the set performance mode from the first performance mode to the second performance mode, but since the first performance mode will be continued (maintained), the game When the player recognizes that the first performance mode will continue, he or she will have a sense of expectation that some change will occur in the gaming state and that an advantageous result will come. Therefore, according to the feature pC2, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

[Feature pC3]
A gaming machine according to feature pC2,
a means for executing the predetermined presentation in the game turn corresponding to the special information that satisfies the first special condition.

According to feature pC3, a predetermined effect is executed in a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies the first special condition. For this reason, after the predetermined effect is executed in the game round when the specific condition is satisfied, the predetermined effect is executed again when the special information satisfying the first special condition is digested. For the player, if a specific condition is met, he or she can watch the same performance once again. If the specific conditions are met, this includes the announcement of an unfavorable result for the character in the predetermined performance, and therefore the player must be informed of the unfavorable result for the character in the predetermined performance. It can also serve as a revenge for including. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pC4]
The gaming machine described in feature PC3,
As the first production mode, there are a plurality of individual production modes with different production modes (a stage in Warrior A's room, a stage in Warrior B's room, etc.);
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined performances having different performance modes are defined for each of the plurality of individual performance modes.

According to feature pC4, the predetermined performance to be executed in a game round when a specific condition is satisfied or in the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the first special condition is individually set as the first performance mode. It is possible to create a performance that corresponds to the performance mode. Therefore, according to feature PC4, the content of the predetermined performance can be controlled by switching the individual performance mode included in the first performance mode, and various performances can be provided to the player. Therefore, according to feature pA3, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pC5]
The gaming machine described in feature PC4,
The production mode setting means includes:
After the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, among the special information stored in the information storage means, there is a 2. When the special information that satisfies the special condition exists, the set production mode is changed to the individual one of the first production modes corresponding to the character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined production. Means for transitioning to production mode (“Exception 2” in Figure 219)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature PC5, after the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, the second special condition is added to the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been determined by the determination means. When special information that satisfies exists, the set performance mode is shifted to an individual performance mode in a first performance mode corresponding to a character other than the character appearing in a predetermined performance. For this reason, originally, the set performance mode is transferred from the first performance mode to the second performance mode by the performance mode transition means, but it is transferred to another individual performance mode within the same first performance mode. Therefore, when the player recognizes the shift to another individual performance mode within the same first performance mode, he or she has a feeling of expectation that an advantageous result will come. Therefore, according to the feature pC5, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

[Feature pC6]
The gaming machine described in feature PC5,
The first special condition is that the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is greater than or equal to the first degree (special reach);
The second special condition is that the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is less than the first degree and is at least a second degree lower than the first degree (super reach). A gaming machine featuring:

According to feature pC6, if there is special information that satisfies the second special condition among the special information stored in the information storage means and which has not been determined by the determination means, the special information is set. The present performance mode is shifted to an individual performance mode in the first performance mode corresponding to a character other than the character appearing in the predetermined performance. On the other hand, when there is a first special condition for which the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is higher than that of the second special condition, the first performance mode is continued without transitioning to the second performance mode. Therefore, after the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, the mode of transition of the performance mode can be changed depending on the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been determined by the determination means. . Therefore, according to feature PC5, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come depending on the manner of transition of the performance mode, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. .

<Characteristic pD group>
The feature pD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature pD1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
An information storage means for storing a plurality of the acquired special information;
A determination means for sequentially determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a presentation mode setting means for setting one of a plurality of presentation modes including at least a first presentation mode (character stage) having a plurality of presentation modes each having a corresponding character set thereto, and a second presentation mode (non-character stage) having no corresponding character set thereto;
a game round execution means for executing at least one game round in the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means, when one game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
a predetermined performance execution means for executing a predetermined performance (battle performance) in which the character corresponding to the first performance mode appears when the first performance mode is set by the performance mode setting means in the game round;
A gaming machine comprising:
The presentation mode setting means includes:
A presentation mode transition means for transitioning the set presentation mode to the presentation mode in the first presentation mode corresponding to the character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined presentation after a specific condition including at least a notification of an unfavorable result for the character in the predetermined presentation is established in a state in which the second presentation mode is set ("principle" in FIG. 220).
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature pD1, the second production mode is set by the production mode transition means after a specific condition including at least an announcement of a disadvantageous result for the character in a predetermined production is established. The current performance mode is shifted to a performance mode among the first performance modes corresponding to a character other than the character appearing in the predetermined performance. If the configuration is such that a transition is made to a production mode in the first production mode that corresponds to a character that has appeared in a predetermined production, the player will be able to select a character for whom an unfavorable result has been announced (for example, a character who has died). There was a risk that I would feel a sense of discomfort as I watched the production mode in which the characters appeared as if nothing had happened. On the other hand, according to feature pD1, the second performance mode is set after a specific condition is satisfied, which includes at least announcing a disadvantageous result for the character in a predetermined performance. By shifting the current production mode to a production mode in the first production mode that corresponds to a character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined production, the character who has been notified of an unfavorable result (for example, died) It is possible to avoid appearing in the production mode. Therefore, according to feature pD1, the story quality of the performance in which the characters appear is ensured, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance. As a result, according to the feature pD1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pD2]
The gaming machine according to feature pD1,
The production mode transition means is
After the end of the game round in which the specific condition is met, among the special information stored in the information storage means, there is a 1. When the special information that satisfies the special condition exists, the set production mode is shifted to the production mode among the first production modes that corresponds to the character that appeared in the predetermined production. Means (“Exception A” in Figure 220)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature pD2, after the end of a game in which a specific condition is satisfied, if there is special information that satisfies the first special condition among the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been judged by the judgment means, the set presentation mode is shifted to a presentation mode in the first presentation mode corresponding to a character that appeared in a specified presentation. Therefore, the presentation mode shifting means would normally shift the set presentation mode from the second presentation mode to a presentation mode in the first presentation mode corresponding to a character other than the character that appeared in the specified presentation, but instead shifts to a presentation mode in the first presentation mode corresponding to a character other than the character that appeared in the specified presentation. The player recognizes the shift, and then when the reserved information is consumed, recognizes the presentation that is expected to produce a favorable result, and can know that the above-mentioned shift can produce a favorable result. This allows the player to have a sense of expectation that a favorable result will come. Furthermore, according to feature pD2, by transitioning to the presentation mode within the first presentation mode corresponding to a character that appeared in a specific presentation, a presentation is performed in which a character that has been notified of an unfavorable outcome (e.g., has died) appears in the presentation of the presentation mode, which further heightens the player's expectations that a favorable outcome may occur. As a result, feature pD2 can further increase the interest of the game.

[Feature pD3]
The gaming machine according to feature pD1 or feature pD2,
The performance execution means is
If the determining means determines that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the character appearing in the predetermined performance has an advantageous result, and the determining means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for causing disadvantageous results for the character appearing in the predetermined performance.

According to feature pD3, the specific condition is equivalent to a condition that at least includes the determination means determining that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. For this reason, according to feature pD3, the setting is performed after a specific condition is established, which includes at least the determination means determining that the special information does not satisfy a predetermined condition while the second production mode is set. The current performance mode is shifted to a performance mode among the first performance modes corresponding to a character other than the character for which the disadvantageous result has been announced. Therefore, according to the feature pD3, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency due to the fact that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, also by the performance according to the performance mode.

[Feature pD4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features pD1 to feature pD3,
The specific condition is that the character has a disadvantageous result in the predetermined performance and the probability of satisfying the predetermined condition is a first degree or higher (special reach/miss).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature pD4, after the end of a game round in which the character has a disadvantageous result in a predetermined performance and a specific condition in which the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is equal to or higher than the first degree is satisfied, the second performance mode is activated. Then, a transition is made to a performance mode among the first performance modes that corresponds to the character that had a disadvantageous result in the predetermined performance. Here, if we consider a gaming machine in which the above production mode is switched whenever a character has a disadvantageous result in a predetermined production, regardless of the degree of possibility that a predetermined condition is met, the above production mode There is a problem in that the transitions occur frequently, which can be bothersome for players. On the other hand, according to feature pD4, the above-mentioned transition of the production mode is performed only when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied, so that the problem of frequent switching of the production mode can be solved. Therefore, according to feature pD4, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic pE group>
The feature pE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature pE1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
information storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of the acquired special information;
determining means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A plurality of stages including at least a first performance mode (character-based stage) having a plurality of performance modes in which corresponding characters are individually set, and a second performance mode (non-character-based stage) in which no corresponding character is set. Production mode setting means that can set any one of the types of production modes as the production mode;
In the production mode set by the production mode setting means, if one game round is defined as the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the gaming operation. a game round execution means for executing at least one game round;
In the game round, a first special performance in which the character corresponding to the first performance mode appears, the means for executing a performance for suggesting the result of the determination by the determination means, and a first special performance by the determination means. Any one of a plurality of types of effects can be performed, including at least a second special effect in which an unfavorable result is not announced even if the result of the determination does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the special information is the predetermined condition. If the determining means determines that the condition is not satisfied, a performance execution means that results in a disadvantageous result for the character in the first special performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The production mode setting means includes:
In a state where the first performance mode is set, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition (missing), and the first special performance is executed by the performance execution means. performance mode transition means for shifting the set performance mode to the second performance mode after the end of the game round in which the first special performance was executed (“principle” in FIG. 219); ,
In a state where the first performance mode is set, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition (missing), and the second special performance is executed by the performance execution means. performance mode continuation means for continuing the set first performance mode after the end of the game round in which the second performance was executed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature pE1, when the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy a predetermined condition while the first performance mode is set, the performance executed by the performance execution means is the first special performance. Depending on which of the second special performances is selected, the set performance mode is divided into whether it is shifted to the second performance mode or continues as the first performance mode. In conventional gaming machines, even if the character that appears in the first special performance and the character that appears in the performance mode are the same character, they are controlled individually, and the characters that appear in the first special performance and the character that appears in the performance mode are individually controlled. A character for whom an unfavorable outcome has been announced (for example, death) could appear in the performance mode of the next game as if nothing had happened. For this reason, in conventional gaming machines, players are forced to watch a production mode in which a character who has been notified of an unfavorable result (for example, dies) appears as if nothing happened, which may make the player feel uncomfortable. was there. On the other hand, according to feature pE1, when the first performance mode is set, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the first special performance is executed by the performance execution means. When executed, after the end of the game round in which the first special effect was executed, the set effect mode is shifted to the second effect mode, and a disadvantageous result is announced (for example, It is possible to avoid characters (who have died) from appearing in the production mode. On the other hand, since an unfavorable result is not announced in the second special performance, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy a predetermined condition while the first performance mode is set, In addition, when the second special performance is executed by the performance execution means, even if the set first performance mode is continued after the end of the game round in which the second special performance was executed, the player I don't feel any discomfort like the one mentioned above. Therefore, according to the feature pE1, the story quality of the performance in which the characters appear is ensured, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance. Therefore, according to the feature pE1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pE2]
The gaming machine according to feature pE1,
The performance execution means is
When suggesting the result of the determination by the determination means, if the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is at least a first degree (special reach), execute the first special effect and means for executing the second special effect when the degree of possibility of satisfying the condition is less than the first degree and is at least a second degree lower than the first degree (super reach). A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature pE2, a first special effect is executed when the degree of possibility of satisfying the specified condition is equal to or greater than a first degree, and a second special effect is executed when the degree of possibility of satisfying the specified condition is less than the first degree and equal to or greater than a second degree that is lower than the first degree. As a result, when the degree of advantage for the player is higher, the first special effect can give the player a sense of expectation and tension. Therefore, feature pE2 can further increase the player's interest in the game.

[Feature pE3]
The gaming machine described in feature pE2,
The production mode transition means is
Among the special information stored in the information storage means, when the special information that satisfies the first special condition exists among the special information (pending information) that has not been determined by the determination means, Performance mode continuation means for continuing the first performance mode without shifting to the second performance mode by the performance mode transition means (“Exception 1” in FIG. 219)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature pE3, when there is special information that satisfies the first special condition among the special information stored in the information storage means and which has not been determined by the determination means, the production mode is shifted. The first performance mode is continued without shifting to the second performance mode by means. For this reason, the performance mode transition means would normally transfer the set performance mode from the first performance mode to the second performance mode, but since the first performance mode will be continued (maintained), the game When the player recognizes that the first performance mode will continue, he or she will have a sense of expectation that some change will occur in the gaming state and that an advantageous result will come. Therefore, according to the feature pE3, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

[Feature pE4]
A gaming machine according to feature pE3,
a means for executing the first special performance in the game turn corresponding to the special information that satisfies the first special condition.

According to feature pE4, a predetermined effect is executed in a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies the first special condition. For this reason, after the first special performance is executed in the game round when the specific condition is satisfied, the first special performance is executed again when the special information satisfying the first special condition is digested. For the player, if a specific condition is met, he or she can watch the same performance once again. If the specific condition is satisfied, the player will be notified of an unfavorable result for the character in the predetermined performance, since this includes the announcement of an unfavorable result for the character in the first special performance. It can also serve as revenge for including things. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pE5]
A gaming machine according to feature pE4,
The presentation mode transition means includes:
A means for shifting the currently set presentation mode to the presentation mode in the first presentation mode corresponding to the character other than the character that appeared in the first special presentation when the special information (reserved information) that has not been judged by the judging means among the special information stored in the information storage means and that satisfies a second special condition ("Exception 2" in FIG. 219)
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second special condition is that the degree of possibility of satisfying the specified condition is less than the third degree and is equal to or greater than a fourth degree lower than the third degree (super reach).

According to feature pE5, after the end of a game in which a specific condition is satisfied, if there is special information that satisfies the second special condition among the special information stored in the information storage means and that has not been judged by the judging means, the set presentation mode is shifted to a presentation mode in the first presentation mode corresponding to a character other than the character that appeared in the first special presentation. Therefore, while the presentation mode shifting means would normally shift the set presentation mode from the first presentation mode to the second presentation mode, the presentation mode shifting means shifts the set presentation mode to another presentation mode in the same first presentation mode, so that when the player recognizes the shift to another presentation mode in the same first presentation mode, he or she will have an expectation that a favorable result will come. Therefore, according to feature pE5, it is possible to make the player have an expectation that a favorable result will come, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. The fourth degree may be the same as the second degree in feature pE2, or it may not be the same.

<Feature pF group>
The group of features pF is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature pF1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
An information storage means for storing a plurality of the acquired special information;
A determination means for sequentially determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a presentation mode setting means for setting one of a plurality of presentation modes including at least a first presentation mode (character stage) having a plurality of presentation modes each having a corresponding character set thereto, and a second presentation mode (non-character stage) having no corresponding character set thereto;
a game round execution means for executing at least one game round in the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means, when one game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
a means for executing an effect for suggesting the result of the judgment by the judgment means in the game round, the effect being capable of executing one of a plurality of types of effects including at least a first special effect in which the character corresponding to the first presentation mode appears, and a second special effect in which no unfavorable result is announced even if the result of the judgment by the judgment means does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and an effect execution means for causing an unfavorable result to the character in the first special effect when the judgment means judges that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
The presentation mode setting means includes:
a first presentation mode transition means for transitioning the set presentation mode to the presentation mode in the first presentation mode corresponding to the character other than the character that had a disadvantageous result in the first special presentation after the end of the game round in which the first special presentation was executed when the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition (miss) and the presentation execution means executes the first special presentation in a state in which the second presentation mode is set ("principle" in FIG. 220);
a second presentation mode transition means for transitioning the set presentation mode to the presentation mode in the first presentation mode corresponding to the character appearing in the second special presentation after the end of the game in which the second special presentation is executed, when the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition (miss) and the presentation execution means executes the second special presentation while the second presentation mode is set;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature pF1, when the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy a predetermined condition while the second performance mode is set, the performance executed by the performance execution means is the first special performance. Depending on which one of the second special effects it is, the set production mode will shift to a production mode in the first production mode that corresponds to a character other than the character who faced off in the first special production. It is determined whether to shift to a production mode among the first production modes that corresponds to the character that appeared in the second special production. In conventional gaming machines, even if the same character is used, the character that appears in the first special performance and the character that appears in the performance mode are controlled separately. If the configuration is such that a transition is made to the production mode in the first production mode that corresponds to the character that appeared in the production, a character who is notified of an unfavorable result (for example, dies) in a predetermined production will be transferred to the next production mode. It was possible for him to appear in the production mode of the game episode as if nothing had happened. For this reason, in conventional gaming machines, players are forced to watch a production mode in which a character who has been notified of an unfavorable result (for example, dies) appears as if nothing had happened, which may make the player feel uncomfortable. was there.

In contrast, according to feature pF1, when the second presentation mode is set, if the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the presentation execution means executes the first special presentation, the presentation mode that is set after the end of the game in which the first special presentation is executed is shifted to the presentation mode within the first presentation mode corresponding to a character other than the character that had an unfavorable result in the first special presentation, thereby making it possible to avoid the character that has been notified of an unfavorable result (for example, a dead character) from appearing in the presentation mode. On the other hand, since the character does not have an unfavorable result in the second special presentation, the player will not feel the above-mentioned strangeness even if the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the presentation execution means executes the second special presentation after the end of the game in which the second special presentation is executed is shifted to the presentation mode within the first presentation mode corresponding to the character that appeared in the second special presentation. Therefore, according to feature pF1, the story nature of the presentation in which the character appears is guaranteed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling strange about the presentation. Therefore, feature pF1 can increase the interest in the game.

[Feature pF2]
The gaming machine according to feature pF1,
The performance execution means is
When suggesting the result of the determination by the determination means, if the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is a first degree or higher (special reach), execute the first special effect. , when the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is less than the first degree and greater than or equal to a second degree lower than the first degree (super reach), execute the second special effect. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for:

According to feature pF2, a first special effect is executed when the degree of possibility of satisfying the specified condition is equal to or greater than a first degree, and a second special effect is executed when the degree of possibility of satisfying the specified condition is less than the first degree and equal to or greater than a second degree that is lower than the first degree. As a result, when the player has a higher degree of advantage, the confrontation between the characters can give the player a sense of expectation and tension. Therefore, feature pF2 can further increase the player's interest in the game.

[Feature pF3]
The gaming machine according to feature pF2,
The first production mode transition means includes:
After the end of the game round in which the specific condition is met, among the special information stored in the information storage means, there is a 1, when the special information that satisfies the special condition exists, the set production mode is shifted to the production mode among the first production modes that corresponds to the character that appeared in the first special production; means (“Exception A” in FIG. 220)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature pF3, after the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, the first special condition is set among the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been determined by the determination means. When there is special information that satisfies the requirement, the set performance mode is shifted to a performance mode among the first performance modes corresponding to the character appearing in the first special performance. For this reason, the originally set production mode is shifted from the second production mode to the production mode in the first production mode that corresponds to a character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined production. Since the player will be transferred to a production mode in the first production mode that corresponds to a character other than the character that appeared in the production, if the player recognizes the transition, he or she will notice that some change has occurred in the gaming state. This creates a sense of expectation that a favorable outcome will come. Therefore, according to the feature pF3, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

[Feature pF4]
A gaming machine according to feature pF3,
The first special condition is that the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is equal to or higher than the third degree (special reach);
The first transition limiting means is
A gaming machine comprising a means for restricting the transition by the presentation mode transition means by transitioning the set presentation mode to a presentation mode within the first presentation mode that corresponds to the character that will result in an unfavorable outcome in the first special presentation.

According to feature pF4, when there is special information that has a third degree or more of possibility of satisfying a predetermined condition among the special information stored in the information storage means and that has not been judged by the judging means (hereinafter also referred to as reserved information), the set presentation mode is shifted to a presentation mode in the first presentation mode corresponding to a character that will have an unfavorable result in the first special presentation. According to feature pF4, the player recognizes the shift, and then recognizes the presentation that is expected to have an advantageous result when the reserved information is consumed, and can know that the above-mentioned shift can be expected to have an advantageous result. Therefore, according to feature pF4, it is possible to reliably make the player have a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to further increase the interest in the game. The third degree may be the same as the first degree in feature pF2, or it may not be the same.

<Feature pG group>
The group of features pG is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature pG1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
information storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of the acquired special information;
determining means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Judgment result notification means (MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 and the 244 (game rendition setting process to be executed),
If one gaming round is defined as the time from the start of the gaming operation that notifies the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, a gaming round execution means (main MPU 62 on the control board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 226 executed by it),
A gaming machine comprising:
Means for setting a performance mode for a performance serving as a background of the variable display from among a plurality of types of performance modes, wherein the special performance mode stored in the information storage means is set after the end of a specific game round. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: production mode setting means for setting the production mode based on the special information that has not been determined by the determination means among the information.

According to feature pG1, the presentation mode setting means sets the presentation mode for the presentation that forms the background of the variable display from among a plurality of presentation modes, and more specifically, the presentation mode is set based on special information stored in the information storage means that has not been judged by the judgment means. The special information stored in the information storage means that has not been judged by the judgment means (hereinafter also referred to as reserved information) can be used to measure the player's future degree of advantage. For this reason, feature pG1 can make the player feel a sense of expectation and tension about the future degree of advantage through the presentation that forms the background of the variable display. Therefore, feature pG1 can increase the interest in the game.

[Feature pG2]
A gaming machine according to feature pG1,
The plurality of types of presentation modes include a character-based presentation mode (character-based stage) having a plurality of presentation modes to which corresponding characters are set, and a non-character-based presentation mode (non-character-based stage) to which no corresponding characters are set,
a game machine comprising: a performance execution means for executing a predetermined performance (battle performance) in which a character corresponding to the set performance mode appears during the game round, and for causing the character to have a disadvantageous result in the predetermined performance when a determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

According to feature pG2, the presentation mode for the presentation that forms the background of the variable display can be set from among a plurality of presentation modes that include at least a character-based presentation mode that corresponds to a character, and a non-character-based presentation mode that does not correspond to a character. In addition, the result of the judgment by the judgment means can be notified to the player by a predetermined presentation. Therefore, according to feature pG2, a sense of expectation and tension can be given to the player by a presentation that follows the presentation mode or a presentation in which characters face off. Therefore, according to feature pG2, it is possible to further increase the interest of the game.

[Feature pG3]
A gaming machine according to feature pG2,
The presentation mode setting means includes:
a presentation mode transition means ("principle" in FIG. 219) for transitioning the set presentation mode to the non-character presentation mode after a specific condition is established (special reach/miss) including at least the determination by the determination means that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition while the character presentation mode is set;
a presentation mode continuing means ("exception 1" in FIG. 219) for continuing the character presentation mode without transitioning to the non-character presentation mode by the presentation mode transition means when, after the end of the game in which the specific condition is established, there is special information that satisfies a first special condition among the special information (reserved information) stored in the information storage means and that has not been judged by the judgment means;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature pG3, when a character-based presentation mode is set, after a specific condition is met that includes at least the determination means determining that the special information does not satisfy the specified condition, the presentation mode transition means transitions the set presentation mode to a non-character-based presentation mode. In conventional gaming machines that do not have a presentation mode transition means, even if a specific condition is met that includes at least the determination means determining that the special information does not satisfy the specified condition, the state in which the character-based presentation mode is set continues, and there is a problem in that the player cannot be given a sense of tension that the special information did not satisfy the specified condition by the presentation according to the presentation mode. In contrast, according to feature pG3, by transitioning the presentation mode from the character-based presentation mode to the non-character-based presentation mode, the player can be given a sense of tension that the special information did not satisfy the specified condition by the presentation according to the presentation mode.

Further, according to feature pG3, after the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, among the special information stored in the information storage means, the first special When there is special information that satisfies the conditions, the non-character performance mode is continued without shifting to the non-character performance mode by a performance mode transition means. For this reason, although the performance mode transition means would normally shift the set performance mode from a character-based performance mode to a non-character-based performance mode, the character-based performance mode will continue. If the player recognizes that the character-based performance mode will continue, he or she will have a sense of expectation that some change will occur in the game state and that an advantageous result will come. Therefore, according to feature pG3, it is possible to make the player feel hopeful that an advantageous result will come. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pG4]
The gaming machine described in feature pG3,
The production mode setting means includes:
After the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, among the special information stored in the information storage means, there is a 2. When the special information that satisfies the special condition exists, the set production mode is changed to the production mode in the character-based production mode that corresponds to the character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined production. means for transitioning to the mode (“Exception 2” in FIG. 219),
Equipped with
The first special condition is that the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is greater than or equal to the first degree (special reach),
The second special condition is that the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is less than the first degree and is at least a second degree lower than the first degree (super reach). A gaming machine featuring:

According to feature pG4, after the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, the second special condition is added to the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been determined by the determination means. When there is special information that satisfies the requirement, the production mode transition means is configured to shift the set production mode to a production mode among the character-based production modes that corresponds to a character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined production. The transition to non-character production mode is restricted. For this reason, the production mode transition means would normally transfer the set production mode from a character production mode to a non-character production mode, but instead it is transferred to another production mode within the same character production mode. Therefore, when the player recognizes the transition to another performance mode within the same character-based performance mode, he/she has a feeling of expectation that an advantageous result will come. Therefore, according to feature pG4, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

[Feature pG5]
A gaming machine according to feature pG2,
The presentation mode setting means includes:
a presentation mode transition means ("principle" in FIG. 220) for transitioning the set presentation mode to a presentation mode in the character presentation mode corresponding to a character other than the character that appeared in the specified presentation after a specific condition including at least a determination by the determination means that the special information does not satisfy the specified condition (miss) is established (special reach/miss) while the non-character presentation mode is set;
a means for shifting the currently set presentation mode to the presentation mode in the first presentation mode corresponding to the character appearing in the first special presentation when, after the end of the game in which the specific condition is established, the special information (reserved information) stored in the information storage means and not yet determined by the determination means contains special information satisfying a second special condition ("Exception A" in FIG. 220);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature pG5, when a non-character type production mode is set, the set production is performed after a specific condition is satisfied, which includes at least the judgment means determining that the special information does not satisfy a predetermined condition. The mode is shifted to a performance mode among the character-based performance modes that corresponds to characters other than the characters that appeared in the predetermined performance. If the configuration is such that a transition is made to a production mode in a character-based production mode that corresponds to a character that has appeared in a predetermined production, the player will be able to select a character for whom an unfavorable outcome has been announced (for example, a character who has died). There was a risk that I would feel a sense of discomfort as I watched the production mode in which the characters appeared as if nothing had happened. On the other hand, according to feature pG5, after the specific condition including at least the determination means determining that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition is satisfied in a state where the non-character type production mode is set, When the set production mode is shifted to a production mode among the character production modes that corresponds to a character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined production, an unfavorable result is announced (for example, if the character dies, ) It is possible to avoid characters appearing in the production mode. Therefore, according to feature pG5, the story quality of the performance in which the characters appear is ensured, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance.

According to feature pG5, after the end of a game in which a specific condition is satisfied, if there is special information that satisfies the second special condition among the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been judged by the judgment means, the set presentation mode is shifted to a presentation mode in the character presentation mode corresponding to the character that appeared in the specified presentation. The player recognizes the shift and then recognizes the presentation that is expected to produce a favorable result when the reserved information is consumed, and can know that the above-mentioned shift can be expected to produce a favorable result. Therefore, the player can be sure to have a sense of expectation that a favorable result will come. Furthermore, according to feature pG5, by shifting to the presentation mode in the character presentation mode corresponding to the character that appeared in the specified presentation, a presentation is performed in which a character that has been notified of an unfavorable result (for example, a dead character) appears in the presentation mode, so that the player can have even more expectations that the above-mentioned favorable result will come. As a result, feature pG5 can further increase the interest in the game.

<Characteristic pH group>
The characteristic pH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature pH1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
An information storage means for storing a plurality of the acquired special information;
A determination means for sequentially determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 226 executed by the MPU 62) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a time from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
A presentation mode setting means for setting one of a plurality of presentation modes including at least a plurality of individual presentation modes corresponding to each of a plurality of characters;
A performance execution means for executing a predetermined performance (battle performance) in which any one of the plurality of characters appears in the game round;
A gaming machine comprising:
The presentation mode setting means includes:
a means for, when an unfavorable result for the character is announced in the predetermined presentation, shifting the presentation mode set in the game next to the game in which the predetermined presentation was executed to the presentation mode corresponding to a character other than the character for which an unfavorable result was announced.

According to feature pH1, when a disadvantageous result for the character is announced in a predetermined performance, in the game round following the game round in which the predetermined performance was executed, a character other than the character with the disadvantageous result is A corresponding production mode is set. In conventional gaming machines that do not have such a configuration, even though an unfavorable result for the character is announced in a predetermined performance, the character will be unfavorable in the game round following the game round in which the relevant confrontation/result announcement performance was executed. Since a production mode may be set for a character other than the character whose result was announced, the player may be able to see the character whose unfavorable result was announced (for example, died) appear as if nothing had happened. There was a risk that it would feel strange to watch the production in the production mode. On the other hand, according to feature pH1, if a disadvantageous result for the character is announced in a predetermined performance, in the next game round, a performance corresponding to the character that matches the character for which the disadvantageous result was announced. By not setting a mode, it is possible to avoid a character for whom an unfavorable result has been announced (eg, death) from appearing in the production mode. Therefore, according to the feature pH1, the story quality of the performance in which the characters appear is ensured, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance. As a result, according to the characteristic pH 1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pH2]
A gaming machine according to feature pH1,
The plurality of types of presentation modes include a character-based presentation mode (character-based stage) having a plurality of presentation modes to which corresponding characters are set, and a non-character-based presentation mode (non-character-based stage) to which no corresponding characters are set,
The presentation mode setting means includes:
A presentation mode transition means for transitioning the set presentation mode to the non-character presentation mode after a specific condition including at least a notification of an unfavorable result for the character in the predetermined presentation is established while the character presentation mode is set ("principle" in FIG. 219).
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature pH2, when a character-based presentation mode is set, after a specific condition including at least that an unfavorable result for the character is notified in a predetermined presentation is established, the presentation mode transition means transitions the set presentation mode to a non-character-based presentation mode. In a conventional gaming machine without a presentation mode transition means, even if a specific condition including at least that an unfavorable result for the character is notified in a predetermined presentation is established, the state in which the character-based presentation mode is set continues. Therefore, when a character that matches a character that has had an unfavorable result in a predetermined presentation appears in the continuing character-based presentation mode, the player may feel uncomfortable because he or she will see a presentation mode in which a character that has been notified of an unfavorable result (e.g., a dead character) appears as if nothing had happened. In contrast, according to the feature pH2, after a specific condition including at least that an unfavorable result for the character is notified in a predetermined presentation is established, the set presentation mode transitions to a non-character-based presentation mode, thereby making it possible to avoid a character that has been notified of an unfavorable result (e.g., a dead character) from appearing in the presentation mode. Therefore, feature pH2 ensures that the presentation in which the characters appear has a story-like quality, and prevents the player from feeling that the presentation is unnatural. As a result, feature pH2 can increase the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pH 3]
The gaming machine according to feature pH 1 or feature pH 2,
The plurality of production modes are character-based production modes (character-based stages) that have multiple production modes in which corresponding characters are set, and non-character-related production modes (non-character-related stages) in which corresponding characters are not set. ), including
The production mode setting means includes:
In a state where the non-character-related production mode is set, after a specific condition including at least an announcement of a disadvantageous result for the character in the predetermined production is satisfied, the set production mode is changed to Production mode transition means (“principle” in FIG. 220) for shifting to the production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the character other than the character that has appeared in a predetermined production.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature pH3, when a non-character-based presentation mode is set, after a specific condition including at least that an unfavorable result for a character is notified in a predetermined presentation is established, the presentation mode transition means transitions the set presentation mode to a presentation mode among the character-based presentation modes corresponding to a character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined presentation. If the transition to a presentation mode among the character-based presentation modes corresponding to a character that appeared in the predetermined presentation were to be performed, the player would see a presentation in which a character that was notified of an unfavorable result (e.g., a character that died) appeared as if nothing had happened, which could cause a sense of incongruity. In contrast, according to feature pH3, when a non-character-based presentation mode is set, after a specific condition including at least that an unfavorable result for a character is notified in a predetermined presentation is established, the set presentation mode transitions to a presentation mode among the character-based presentation modes corresponding to a character other than the character that had an unfavorable result in the predetermined presentation, thereby making it possible to avoid the character that was notified of an unfavorable result (e.g., a character that died) appeared in the presentation mode. Therefore, feature pH3 ensures that the characters appear in a story-like manner, and prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the presentation. As a result, feature pH3 can increase the interest of the game.

<Characteristic pI group>
The feature pI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature pI1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
information storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of the acquired special information;
determining means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 226 executed by it),
Production mode setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of production modes including at least a plurality of production modes individually corresponding to each of the plurality of characters;
Means for executing a special effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) indicating the degree of possibility that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition in the game round, the means for executing a special effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) for any one of the plurality of characters. special effect execution means for executing a special effect for the corresponding character;
A gaming machine comprising:
The special performance execution means is
When any one of the plurality of characters corresponds to the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means, means for executing the special performance for the character that matches the corresponding character (sound emission means) (The MPU 92 of the control device 90 and the super reach/miss performance pattern table reference process in FIG. 245 or the special reach/miss performance pattern table reference process in FIG. 248 executed by it)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature pI1, when one of the multiple characters corresponds to the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means, a special presentation for a character that matches the corresponding character is executed by the special presentation execution means. As a result, the character that corresponds to the special presentation executed in a game round matches the character that corresponds to the set presentation mode. In conventional gaming machines that do not have this configuration, there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable because the degree of connection between the special presentation and the set presentation mode is low. In contrast, according to feature pI1, the character that corresponds to the special presentation executed in a game round matches the character that corresponds to the set presentation mode, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the presentation. As a result, feature pI1 can increase the interest in the game.

[Characteristic pI2]
A gaming machine according to feature pI1,
The plurality of presentation modes include a character-based presentation mode (character-based stage) having a plurality of presentation modes to which corresponding characters are set, and a non-character-based presentation mode (non-character-based stage) to which no corresponding characters are set,
The special effect is composed of a video in which a character corresponding to the set effect mode appears,
The presentation mode setting means includes:
A presentation mode transition means for transitioning the set presentation mode to the presentation mode in the character presentation mode corresponding to the character other than the character that appeared in the special presentation after a specific condition including at least a notification of an unfavorable result for the character in the special presentation is established in a state in which the non-character presentation mode is set ("principle" in FIG. 220).
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature pI2, when a non-character-based presentation mode is set, after a specific condition including at least that an unfavorable result for a character is announced in a special presentation is established, the presentation mode transition means transitions the set presentation mode to a presentation mode among the character-based presentation modes corresponding to a character other than the character that appeared in the special presentation. If the configuration were to transition to a presentation mode among the character-based presentation modes corresponding to a character that appeared in the special presentation, the player would see a presentation in which a character that has been announced an unfavorable result (e.g., a character that has died) appears as if nothing had happened, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable. In contrast, according to feature pI2, when a non-character-based presentation mode is set, after a specific condition including at least that an unfavorable result for a character is announced in a special presentation is established, the set presentation mode transitions to a presentation mode among the character-based presentation modes corresponding to a character other than the character that appeared in the special presentation, thereby making it possible to avoid a character that has been announced an unfavorable result (e.g., a character that has died) appearing in the presentation mode. Therefore, feature pI2 ensures a story-like nature to the effects in which characters appear, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effects. Also, because the character corresponding to the effect mode in the transitioned character-based effect mode matches the character corresponding to the special effect executed in the game round, the connection between the effects is stronger. As a result, feature pI2 can further increase the interest of the game.

[Feature pI3]
The gaming machine described in feature pI2,
The production mode transition means is
In a state where the non-character-based performance mode is set, after the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, the determination means makes a determination among the special information stored in the information storage means. If there is special information that satisfies the first special condition among the special information (pending information) that has not been released, the set production mode is changed to the one that corresponds to the character that appeared in the special production. Means for transitioning to the production mode in the character mode (“Exception A” in FIG. 220)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature pI3, after the end of the game round in which the specific condition was satisfied, the first special condition is set among the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been determined by the determination means. If there is special information that satisfies the above, the set performance mode is shifted to a performance mode among the character-based performance modes that corresponds to the character that appeared in the special performance. For this reason, the production mode transition means originally shifts the set production mode from a non-character production mode to a production mode among the character production modes that corresponds to characters other than the characters that appeared in the special production. However, it is shifted to a performance mode among the character-based performance modes, which corresponds to the character that appeared in the special performance. The player can know that the above transition can be expected to have an advantageous result by recognizing the transition and recognizing the performance that is expected to yield an advantageous result when the pending information is subsequently consumed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come. Furthermore, according to feature pI3, by shifting to the production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the character that appeared in the special production, the character for whom an unfavorable result has been announced (for example, died) can be Since the player intentionally appears in the mode's performance, it is possible to make the player feel even more hopeful that the above-mentioned advantageous result will come. As a result, according to feature pI3, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic pJ group>
The group of features pJ is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature pJ1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
An information storage means for storing a plurality of the acquired special information;
A determination means for sequentially determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 226 executed by the MPU 62) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a time from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
a special effect execution means for executing a special effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) indicating the degree of possibility that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition in the game round, the special effect execution means executing a special effect for a character corresponding to one of the plurality of characters;
A gaming machine comprising:
The special effect execution means includes:
Among the plurality of characters, a character (character identified by a warrior character determination value VC) is identified based on the determination result of the determination means related to the previous game round (miss in a winning lottery) and the degree of possibility that the special information indicated by the special effect executed in the previous game round satisfies the predetermined condition (occurrence of a special reach) (MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 and stage transition processing in a non-character stage in FIG. 254 executed thereby), and a means for executing the special effect for the character matching the identified character (MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 and processing referring to a super reach and miss effect pattern table in FIG. 245 or processing referring to a special reach and miss effect pattern table in FIG. 248 executed thereby).
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature pJ1, a character is identified based on the determination result of the determination means related to the previous game round and the degree of possibility that the special information indicated by the special effect executed in the previous game round satisfies a predetermined condition. and a special performance for a character that matches the specified character is executed. For this reason, the character corresponding to the special effect executed in the game round is determined based on the determination result of the determination means related to the previous game round and the degree of possibility that the special information in the previous game round satisfies the predetermined condition. It will be compatible. In conventional gaming machines that do not have such a configuration, the special effects executed in a game round have a low degree of connection with the game results of the previous game round, so there is a risk that players may feel strange. . On the other hand, according to feature pJ1, the character corresponding to the special effect executed in the game round is the same as the character specified based on the game result of the previous game round, so the player This can prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with the performance. As a result, according to the feature pJ1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pJ2]
The gaming machine described in feature pJ1,
A production mode setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of production modes including at least a plurality of production modes individually corresponding to each of the plurality of characters,
The plurality of production modes are character-based production modes (character-based stages) that have multiple production modes in which corresponding characters are set, and non-character-based production modes (non-character-related stages) in which corresponding characters are not set. ), including
The special performance is composed of a video in which a character corresponding to the set performance mode appears,
The production mode setting means includes:
In a state where the non-character production mode is set, after a specific condition including at least an announcement of a disadvantageous result for the character in the special production is satisfied, the set production mode is changed to the special production mode. Production mode transition means for shifting to the production mode among the character-based production modes corresponding to the character other than the character appearing in the production ("principle" in FIG. 220)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature pJ2, when a non-character type production mode is set, after a specific condition including at least an announcement of a disadvantageous result for the character in a special production is established, the production mode transition means sets the non-character production mode. The current performance mode is shifted to a performance mode among character-based performance modes that corresponds to characters other than the characters that appeared in the special performance. If the configuration is such that a transition is made to a production mode among the character-based production modes that corresponds to the character that appeared in the special production, the player will be able to see if the character who has been notified of an unfavorable result (for example, died) There was a risk that I would feel a sense of discomfort as I watched the production mode appear as if nothing had happened. On the other hand, according to feature pJ2, when a non-character-related production mode is set, the setting is performed after a specific condition including at least the announcement of a disadvantageous result for the character in the special production is satisfied. By shifting the current production mode to a production mode within the character production mode that corresponds to characters other than characters that appeared in the special production, the character for whom an unfavorable result has been announced (for example, died) You can avoid appearing in the mode. Therefore, according to feature pJ2, the story quality of the performance in which the characters appear is ensured, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance. In addition, since the character corresponding to the game result of the previous game round and the character corresponding to the special performance executed in the game round match, each performance becomes more closely connected. As a result, according to feature pJ2, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pJ3]
A gaming machine according to feature pJ2,
The presentation mode transition means includes:
A means for shifting the currently set presentation mode to the presentation mode in the character mode corresponding to the character that appeared in the special presentation when, after the end of the game round in which the specific condition is established, there is special information that satisfies a first special condition among the special information (reserved information) that has not been judged by the judgment means among the special information stored in the information storage means ("Exception A" in FIG. 220)
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature pJ3, after the end of a game in which a specific condition is satisfied, if there is special information that satisfies the first special condition among the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been judged by the judgment means, the set presentation mode is shifted to a presentation mode in the character presentation mode corresponding to the character that appeared in the special presentation. Therefore, the presentation mode shifting means would normally shift the set presentation mode from a non-character presentation mode to a presentation mode in the character presentation mode corresponding to a character other than the character that appeared in the special presentation, but instead shifts to a presentation mode in the character presentation mode corresponding to the character that appeared in the special presentation. The player recognizes the shift, and then when the reserved information is consumed, recognizes the presentation that is expected to produce a favorable result, and can know that the above-mentioned shift can produce a favorable result. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation that a favorable result may come. Furthermore, according to feature pJ3, by transitioning to the presentation mode within the character presentation mode corresponding to the character that appeared in the special presentation, a presentation is performed in which a character that has been notified of an unfavorable outcome (e.g., has died) appears in the presentation of the presentation mode, which further heightens the player's anticipation that the favorable outcome will occur. As a result, feature pJ3 can further increase the interest of the game.

<Characteristic pK group>
The feature pK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature pK1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
An information storage means for storing a plurality of the acquired special information;
A determination means for sequentially determining whether the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 226 executed by the MPU 62) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a time from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
a special effect execution means for executing a special effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) indicating the degree of possibility that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition in the game round, the special effect execution means executing a special effect for a character corresponding to one of the plurality of characters;
A gaming machine comprising:
The special effect execution means includes:
A means for identifying the character (character identified by the warrior character judgment value VC) from among the plurality of characters based on the special information (reserved information) that has not been judged by the judgment means among the special information stored in the information storage means (the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 and the stage transition process in the non-character stage of FIG. 254 executed thereby), and for executing the special performance for the character that matches the identified character (the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 and the process of referring to the performance pattern table for when the super reach is missed of FIG. 245 or the process of referring to the performance pattern table for when the special reach is missed of FIG. 248 executed thereby).
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature pK1, a character is identified based on special information (hereinafter referred to as reserved information) that has not been judged by the judgment means among the special information stored in the information storage means, and a special effect for a character that matches the identified character is executed. For this reason, the character corresponding to the special effect executed in a game round corresponds to the judgment result of the judgment means for the previous game round and the degree of possibility that the judgment means in the previous game round will satisfy the predetermined condition. In conventional gaming machines that do not have such a configuration, the special effect executed in a game round has a low degree of connection with the reserved information, so there is a risk that the player will feel strange. In contrast, according to feature pK1, the character corresponding to the special effect executed in a game round matches the character identified based on the reserved information, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling strange about the effect. As a result, feature pK1 can increase the interest in the game.

[Feature pK2]
A gaming machine according to feature pK1,
a presentation mode setting means for setting one of a plurality of presentation modes including at least a plurality of presentation modes corresponding to each of a plurality of characters;
Among the plurality of presentation modes, at least a character-based presentation mode (character-based stage) having a plurality of presentation modes each corresponding to a plurality of characters individually, each having a different presentation style, and a non-character-based presentation mode (non-character-based stage) not corresponding to a character,
The special effect is composed of a video in which a character corresponding to the set effect mode appears,
The presentation mode setting means includes:
A presentation mode transition means for transitioning the set presentation mode to the presentation mode in the character presentation mode corresponding to the character other than the character that appeared in the special presentation after a specific condition including at least a notification of an unfavorable result for the character in the special presentation is established in a state in which the non-character presentation mode is set ("principle" in FIG. 220).
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature pK2, when a non-character-based presentation mode is set, after a specific condition including at least that an unfavorable result for a character is announced in a special presentation is established, the presentation mode transition means transitions the set presentation mode to a presentation mode among the character-based presentation modes corresponding to a character other than the character that appeared in the special presentation. If the transition to a presentation mode among the character-based presentation modes corresponding to a character that appeared in the special presentation were to be performed, the player would see a presentation in which a character that has been announced an unfavorable result (e.g., a character that has died) appears as if nothing had happened, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable. In contrast, according to feature pK2, when a non-character-based presentation mode is set, after a specific condition including at least that an unfavorable result for a character is announced in a special presentation is established, the set presentation mode transitions to a presentation mode among the character-based presentation modes corresponding to a character other than the character that appeared in the special presentation, thereby making it possible to avoid a character that has been announced an unfavorable result (e.g., a character that has died) appearing in the presentation mode. Therefore, feature pK2 ensures a story-like nature to the effects in which characters appear, and prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the effects. Also, because the character corresponding to the reserved information matches the character corresponding to the special effect executed in the game round, the connections between the effects are stronger. As a result, feature pK2 can further increase the interest of the game.

[Feature pK3]
A gaming machine according to feature pK2,
The presentation mode transition means includes:
A means for shifting the currently set presentation mode to the presentation mode in the character presentation mode corresponding to the character that appeared in the special presentation when, after the end of the game round in which the specific condition is established, the special information (reserved information) stored in the information storage means and not yet determined by the determination means contains special information that satisfies a first special condition ("Exception A" in FIG. 220).
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature pK3, after the end of a game in which a specific condition is satisfied, if there is special information that satisfies the first special condition among the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been judged by the judgment means, the set presentation mode is shifted to a presentation mode in the character presentation mode corresponding to the character that appeared in the special presentation. Therefore, the presentation mode shifting means would normally shift the set presentation mode from a non-character presentation mode to a presentation mode in the character presentation mode corresponding to a character other than the character that appeared in the special presentation, but instead shifts to a presentation mode in the character presentation mode corresponding to the character that appeared in the special presentation. The player recognizes the shift, and then when the reserved information is consumed, recognizes the presentation that is expected to produce a favorable result, and can know that the above-mentioned shift can produce a favorable result. This allows the player to have a sense of expectation that a favorable result will come. Furthermore, according to feature pK4, by transitioning to the presentation mode within the character presentation mode corresponding to the character that appeared in the special presentation, a presentation is performed in which a character that has been notified of an unfavorable outcome (e.g., has died) appears in the presentation of the presentation mode, which further heightens the player's anticipation that the favorable outcome will occur. As a result, feature pK3 can further increase the interest of the game.

<Feature pL group>
The group of features pL is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature pL1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
information storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of the acquired special information;
determining means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Production mode setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of production modes including at least a first production mode (character-based stage) as the production mode;
In the production mode set by the production mode setting means, if one game round is defined as the time when the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the gaming operation is ended. a game round execution means for executing at least one game round;
In the game round, when the first performance mode is set by the performance mode setting means, executing a predetermined performance that can execute a predetermined performance (battle performance + result notification performance) corresponding to the first performance mode. means and
A gaming machine comprising:
The production mode setting means includes:
While the first performance mode is set, after the result of the predetermined performance satisfies a specific condition (executing a defeat performance), the set performance mode is changed to a mode other than the first performance mode. A production mode transition means (“principle” in FIG. 219) for transitioning to production mode;
After the end of the game round in which the specific condition is met, among the special information stored in the information storage means, there is a Performance mode continuation means for continuing the first performance mode without transitioning to a performance mode other than the first performance mode by the performance mode transition means (Fig. 219 “Exception 1”) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature pL1, when the first presentation mode is set, after the result of a predetermined presentation satisfies a specific condition, the set presentation mode is shifted to a presentation mode other than the first presentation mode. In a conventional gaming machine without a presentation mode shifting means, if the result of a predetermined presentation is, for example, a presentation in which an unfavorable result for a character is announced as a specific condition, the state in which the first presentation mode is set continues. Therefore, when a character that matches a character that was announced an unfavorable result in the predetermined presentation appears in the first presentation mode, the player may feel a sense of incongruity as he or she sees a presentation mode in which a character that was announced an unfavorable result (for example, a dead character) appears as if nothing had happened. In contrast, according to feature pL1, after the result of a predetermined presentation satisfies a specific condition, the set presentation mode is shifted from the first presentation mode to a presentation mode other than the first presentation mode, thereby preventing a character that has an unfavorable result from appearing in the presentation mode. Therefore, according to feature pL1, the story nature of the presentation in which a character appears is guaranteed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity in the presentation. As a result, feature pL1 can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Further, according to the feature pL1, after the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, among the special information stored in the information storage means, the first special When there is special information that satisfies the conditions, the first performance mode is continued without shifting to a performance mode other than the first performance mode by a performance mode transition means. For this reason, originally, the set performance mode would be transferred from the first performance mode to a performance mode other than the first performance mode by the performance mode transition means, but the first performance mode will be continued (maintained). Therefore, when the player recognizes that the first production mode will continue, he or she will have a sense of expectation that some change will occur in the gaming state and that an advantageous result will come. Therefore, according to the feature pL1, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature pL2]
The gaming machine described in feature pL1,
The plurality of production modes are character-based production modes (character-based stages) that have multiple production modes in which corresponding characters are set, and non-character-related production modes (non-character-related stages) in which corresponding characters are not set. ), including
The gaming machine characterized in that the first performance mode is one of the character-based performance modes (character-based stages).

According to feature pL2, a transition is made from a presentation mode in a character-based presentation mode having multiple presentation modes to which corresponding characters are set, to a presentation mode other than the presentation mode. For example, by transitioning from a character-based presentation mode to a non-character-based presentation mode, a transition to a presentation mode other than the first presentation mode can be easily made.

[Feature pL3]
The gaming machine described in feature pL2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined performance is constituted by a moving image that includes at least a scene in which a character corresponding to the set performance mode appears and a result disadvantageous to the character is announced.

According to feature pL3, as the predetermined presentation, a character corresponding to the set presentation mode appears, and a video is displayed that includes at least a scene in which the character is notified of an unfavorable outcome. This allows the player to receive a hint that the game result will be unfavorable. This creates a sense of expectation and disappointment for the player, further increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Feature pL4]
The gaming machine described in feature pL3,
The production mode transition means is
The present invention is characterized by comprising means for shifting the set performance mode to the non-character performance mode after the result of the predetermined performance satisfies a specific condition while the character-based performance mode is set. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature pL4, by shifting from the character-based performance mode to the non-character-based performance mode, it is possible to easily transition to a performance mode other than the first performance mode.

[Feature pL5]
A gaming machine according to feature pL3,
The presentation mode transition means includes:
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for transitioning the set presentation mode to a presentation mode within the character presentation mode corresponding to a character other than the character that appeared in the specified presentation when the character-based presentation mode is set and the result of the specified presentation satisfies a specific condition.

According to feature pL5, by transitioning the set presentation mode to a presentation mode within the character presentation mode that corresponds to a character other than the character that appeared in the specified presentation, it is possible to easily transition to a presentation mode other than the first presentation mode.

<Feature qA group>
The group of features qA is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qA1]
a main control means that performs a winning lottery (winning lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous to the player;
A performance control means (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) that controls at least the sound performance based on the control signal from the main control means;
performance data storage means for storing first performance data (song A first data A1) and second performance data (song A second data A2);
a performance execution means (sound output LSI 97) that can use the first performance data and the second performance data to execute the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first performance data includes a first part (song A first data_main part A12) and a second part (song A first data_reverberation part A13) that is continuous in the time axis direction with respect to the first part. and, comprising at least
The performance control means is
first instruction means (means for transmitting a music A first data reproduction start command CA1) for instructing the production execution means to execute the first production data;
Within a predetermined period including the timing at which the execution position of the first performance data in the performance execution means reaches the end of the first portion (time t2 in FIG. 263), the second performance is sent to the performance execution means. a second instruction means for instructing the execution of the data (means for transmitting the song A second data reproduction start command CA2);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature qA1, the first instruction means provided in the performance control means instructs the performance execution means to execute the first performance data, and the second instruction means provided in the performance control means instructs the performance execution means to execute the second performance data within a predetermined period including the timing when the execution position of the first performance data in the performance execution means reaches the end of the first part. The performance execution means starts executing the first performance data upon receiving the instruction to execute the first performance data, and starts executing the second performance data upon receiving the instruction to execute the second performance data. However, a delay of a predetermined period (hereinafter, this period is also referred to as a "delay period") may occur between receiving the instruction to execute the second performance data in the performance execution means and starting the execution of the second performance data. According to feature qA1, the first performance data has a second part that is continuous with the first part in the time axis direction, so that during the delay period, the second part of the first performance data is executed and the performance is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the performance is interrupted. Therefore, feature qA1 can improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qA2]
The gaming machine described in feature qA1,
The first part is a part in which the main part of a specific production is recorded,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second portion is a portion in which effects associated with the main portion are recorded.

According to feature qA2, the above-described delay period can be filled with a performance that accompanies the main part of a specific performance, so it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity that the performance is interrupted without spoiling the flow of the specific performance.

[Feature qA3]
A gaming machine according to feature qA2,
The second performance data is the same as the data recorded in the first portion.

According to feature qA3, the main part of a specific production, for example, the melody part of a song, can be repeatedly executed (played).

[Feature qA4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features qA1 to qA3,
The performance execution means includes:
A plurality of execution means for executing the performance are provided,
The first instruction means is
a means for instructing a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means to execute the first performance data;
The second instruction means is
a means for instructing that the second performance data be executed by the specific execution means (audio channel 1).

According to feature qA4, during the delay period, the second part of the first performance data is executed by a specific execution means, and when the delay period has elapsed, the second performance data is switched to the second part of the first performance data and executed by the specific execution means. As a result, the performance can be reliably switched from the first performance data to the second performance data without interruption.

[Feature qA5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features qA1 to qA3,
The performance execution means includes:
A plurality of execution means for executing the performance are provided,
The first instruction means is
a means for instructing a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means to execute the first performance data;
The second instruction means is
a means for instructing that the second performance data be executed by an execution means (audio channel 2) different from the specific execution means.

According to feature qA5, during the delay period described above, the second part of the first performance data is executed by a specific execution means, and when the delay period has elapsed, the second performance data is executed by an execution means different from the specific execution means. When the delay period has elapsed, the unexecuted part of the second part of the first performance data continues to be executed by the specific execution means, so that during the period when this unexecuted part is being executed, the second performance data is also executed by an execution means different from the specific execution means. As a result, immediately after the performance is switched from the first performance data to the second performance data, the performance of the first performance data and the performance of the second performance data are mixed, allowing the performance to be switched smoothly.

<Characteristics qB group>
The feature qB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modification of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qB1]
a main control means that performs a winning lottery (winning lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous to the player;
A performance control means (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) that controls at least the sound performance based on the control signal from the main control means;
performance data storage means for storing performance data (song A second data A2);
a performance execution means (sound output LSI 97) that executes a performance using the performance data;
A gaming machine comprising:
The production data includes a first part (song A second data_main part A21), a second part (song A second data_reverberation part A22) that is continuous in the time axis direction with respect to the first part, comprising at least
The performance control means is
first instruction means (means for transmitting a song A second data reproduction start command CA2) for instructing the performance execution means to execute the performance data;
Within a predetermined period including the timing at which the execution position of the performance data in the performance execution means reaches the end of the second portion (time t3 in FIG. 263), the performance execution means is instructed to execute the performance data. a second instruction means for instructing (means for transmitting a music A second data reproduction start command CA2);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature qB1, a first instruction means provided in the performance control means instructs the performance execution means to execute the performance data (hereinafter also referred to as the first instruction), and within a predetermined period including the timing when the execution position of the performance data in the performance execution means reaches the end of the first part, a second instruction means provided in the performance control means instructs the performance execution means to execute the performance data (hereinafter also referred to as the second instruction). In the performance execution means, upon receiving the first instruction, the performance data (hereinafter also referred to as the first performance data) is started to be executed, and upon receiving the second instruction, the performance data same as the first performance data (hereinafter also referred to as the second performance data) is started to be executed. However, in the performance execution means, a delay of a predetermined period (this period is hereinafter also referred to as the "delay period") may occur between receiving the instruction to execute the second performance data and starting the execution of the second performance data. According to feature qB1, the performance data has a second part that is continuous with the first part in the time axis direction, so that the second part of the performance data is executed during the delay period, and the performance is not interrupted. As a result, the player does not feel any discomfort as the presentation is interrupted. Therefore, feature qB1 can increase the interest of the game.

[Feature qB2]
A gaming machine according to feature qB1,
The first portion is a portion in which a main part of a specific performance is recorded,
The second portion is a portion in which effects associated with the main portion are recorded.

According to feature qB2, the above-mentioned delay period can be filled with a performance that accompanies the main part of a specific performance, so it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity that the performance is interrupted without spoiling the flow of the specific performance.

[Features qB3]
The gaming machine according to feature qB1 or feature qB2,
The performance execution means is
comprising a plurality of execution means for executing the performance,
The first instruction means includes:
comprising means for instructing a specific execution means (audio channel 1) of the plurality of execution means to execute the production data;
The second indicating means includes:
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for instructing the particular execution means (audio channel 1) to execute the performance data.

According to feature qB3, during the aforementioned delay period, the second part of the first performance data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period has elapsed, the second part of the performance data is executed by the specific execution means. The execution is performed by switching to the second part of the first performance data. As a result, the performance can be reliably switched from the first performance data to the second performance data without interruption of the performance.

[Feature qB4]
A gaming machine according to feature qB1 or feature qB2,
The performance execution means includes:
A plurality of execution means for executing the performance are provided,
The first instruction means is
a means for instructing that the performance data be executed by a specific execution means (audio channel 2) among the plurality of execution means;
The second instruction means is
a means for instructing that the second performance data be executed by an execution means (audio channel 1) different from the specific execution means.

According to feature qB4, during the delay period described above, the second part of the first performance data is executed by a specific execution means, and when the delay period has elapsed, the second performance data is executed by an execution means different from the specific execution means. When the delay period has elapsed, the unexecuted part of the second part of the first performance data continues to be executed by the specific execution means, so that during the period when this unexecuted part is being executed, the second performance data is also executed by the specific execution means. As a result, immediately after the performance is switched from the first performance data to the second performance data, the performance of the first performance data and the performance of the second performance data are mixed, allowing the performance to be switched smoothly.

<Feature qC group>
The group of features qC is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qC1]
A main control means for performing a lottery for determining whether or not a special game state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to a player is to be generated (a winning lottery);
A performance control means (MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90) for controlling at least the sound performance based on a control signal from the main control means;
a performance data storage means for storing first performance data (music A first data A1) and second performance data (music A second data A2);
A performance execution means (sound output LSI 97) capable of using the first performance data and the second performance data to execute a performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance control means includes:
a first instruction means (means for transmitting a song A first data playback start command CA1) for instructing the performance execution means to execute the first performance data;
a second instruction means (a means for transmitting a song A second data playback start command CA2) for instructing the performance execution means to execute the second performance data while the performance execution means is executing the first performance data (time t2 in FIG. 263 );
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature qC1, the first instruction means provided in the performance control means instructs the performance execution means to execute the first performance data, and while the first performance data is being executed by the performance execution means, the second instruction means provided in the performance control means instructs the performance execution means to execute the second performance data. The performance execution means starts executing the first performance data upon receiving the instruction to execute the first performance data, and starts executing the second performance data upon receiving the instruction to execute the second performance data. However, a delay of a predetermined period (hereinafter, this period is also referred to as a "delay period") may occur between receiving the instruction to execute the second performance data and starting execution of the second performance data in the performance execution means. According to feature qC1, the instruction to execute the second performance data is given while the first performance data is being executed, so that an unexecuted portion remains in the first performance data, and during the delay period, the unexecuted portion is executed, and the performance is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the performance is interrupted. Therefore, feature qC1 can improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qC2]
The gaming machine described in feature qC1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first performance data and the second performance data each include a portion in which a common performance is recorded.

According to feature qC2, it is possible to repeatedly perform (reproduce) a portion in which a common performance is recorded, for example, a melody portion of a song.

[Feature qC3]
A gaming machine according to feature qC1 or feature qC2,
The performance execution means includes:
A plurality of execution means for executing the performance are provided,
The first instruction means is
a means for instructing that the first performance data be executed by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The second instruction means is
a means for instructing that the second performance data be executed by the specific execution means (audio channel 1).

According to feature qC3, during the aforementioned delay period, the unexecuted portion of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period has elapsed, the specific execution means executes the second effect data. is switched to the first performance data and executed. As a result, the performance can be reliably switched from the first performance data to the second performance data without interruption of the performance.

[Feature qC4]
A gaming machine according to feature qC1 or feature qC2,
The performance execution means includes:
A plurality of execution means for executing the performance are provided,
The first instruction means is
a means for instructing that the first performance data be executed by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The second instruction means is
a means for instructing that the second performance data be executed by an execution means (audio channel 2) different from the specific execution means.

According to feature qC4, during the delay period, the unexecuted portion of the first performance data is executed by a specific execution means, and when the delay period has elapsed, the second performance data is executed by an execution means different from the specific execution means. When the delay period has elapsed, a portion of the first performance data that is continuous with the portion executed during the delay period (hereinafter also referred to as the continuous portion) is continuously executed by the specific execution means, so that during the period in which the continuous portion is being executed, the second performance data is also executed by an execution means different from the specific execution means. As a result, immediately after the performance is switched from the first performance data to the second performance data, the performance of the first performance data and the performance of the second performance data are mixed, allowing the performance to be switched smoothly.

<Characteristics qD group>
The feature qD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qD1]
a main control means that performs a winning lottery (winning lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous to the player;
A performance control means (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) that controls at least the sound performance based on the control signal from the main control means;
performance data storage means for storing performance data (song A second data A2);
a performance execution means (sound output LSI 97) that executes a performance using the performance data;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance control means is
first instruction means (means for transmitting a song A second data reproduction start command CA2) for instructing the performance execution means to execute the performance data;
While the performance data is being executed by the performance execution means (time t3 in FIG. 263), a second instruction means (start playing music A second data) instructs the performance means to execute the performance data. means for transmitting command CA2);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature qD1, a first instruction means provided in the performance control means instructs the performance execution means to execute the performance data (hereinafter also referred to as the first instruction), and while the performance data is being executed by the performance execution means, a second instruction means provided in the performance control means instructs the performance execution means to execute the performance data (hereinafter also referred to as the second instruction). In the performance execution means, upon receiving the first instruction, it starts executing the performance data (hereinafter also referred to as the first performance data), and upon receiving the second instruction, it starts executing the same performance data (hereinafter also referred to as the second performance data) as the performance data executed the first time. However, in the performance execution means, a delay of a predetermined period (this period is hereinafter also referred to as the "delay period") may occur between receiving an instruction to execute the second performance data and starting execution of the second performance data. According to feature qD1, the timing at which the second instruction is given is during the execution of the first performance data, so that an unexecuted portion remains in the first performance data, and during the delay period, the performance of the unexecuted portion is executed, and the performance is not interrupted. As a result, players do not feel any discomfort as the presentation is interrupted. Therefore, feature qD1 can increase the interest of the game.

[Feature qD2]
A gaming machine according to feature qD1,
The performance execution means includes:
A plurality of execution means for executing the performance are provided,
The first instruction means is
a means for instructing that the performance data be executed by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The second instruction means is
a means for instructing that the performance data be executed by the specific execution means (audio channel 1).

According to feature qD2, during the aforementioned delay period, the unexecuted portion of the first production data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period has elapsed, the specific execution means executes the second execution part. The performance data is switched to the first performance data and executed. As a result, the performance can be reliably switched from the first performance data to the second performance data without interruption of the performance.

[Feature qD3]
The gaming machine according to feature qD1,
The performance execution means is
comprising a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first instruction means includes:
comprising means for instructing a specific execution means (audio channel 2) of the plurality of execution means to execute the production data;
The second indicating means includes:
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for instructing execution of the second effect data by an execution means (audio channel 1) different from the specific execution means.

According to feature qD3, during the delay period described above, the unexecuted portion of the first performance data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, a performance different from that of the specific performance means is executed. The means executes the second performance data. When the delay period has elapsed, a part (hereinafter also referred to as a continuous part) that is continuous to the part executed in the delay period in the first performance data is continuously executed in a specific performance means, so that the performance of the continuous part During the period when is being executed, the second performance data is also executed in a performance means different from the specific performance means. As a result, immediately after the performance is switched from the first performance data to the second performance data, the performance of the first performance data and the performance of the second performance data are mixed, and the performance changes. Switching can be done smoothly.

<Feature qE group>
The group of features qE is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qE1]
a main control means that performs a winning lottery (winning lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous to the player;
A performance control means (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) that controls at least the sound performance based on the control signal from the main control means;
performance data storage means for storing first performance data (song A first data A1) and second performance data (song A second data A2);
a performance execution means (sound output LSI 97) that can use the first performance data and the second performance data to execute the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first performance data includes a first part (song A first data_main part A12) and a second part (song A first data_reverberation part A13) that is continuous in the time axis direction with respect to the first part. and, comprising at least
The performance execution means is
first performance data execution means for executing the first performance data;
Execute the second effect data at a predetermined timing within a range from the end of the first part to the end of the second part (time t2+Δt in FIG. 263). a second performance data execution means for
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature qE1, execution of the first performance data is started by the first performance data execution means provided in the performance execution means, and the execution position of the first performance data is changed from the end of the first part to the end of the second part. At a predetermined timing within the range until reaching , execution of the second performance data is started by the second performance data execution means provided in the performance execution means. In the production execution means, when starting the execution of the second production data in response to an instruction from the production control means, there is a , a delay of a predetermined period (hereinafter also referred to as "delay period") may occur. According to feature qE1, the first performance data includes a second part that is continuous in the time axis direction with respect to the first part, and in the performance execution means, the execution position of the first performance data is from after the end of the first part. Since execution of the second effect data is started at a predetermined timing within the range until reaching the end of the second part, the second part of the first effect data is executed during the delay period. Here, as a comparative example, consider a case where the first effect data does not include the second part and the end of the first part matches the end of the first effect data. According to the comparative example, during the delay period, the execution up to the end of the first performance data has already been completed, and the performance is not executed, resulting in no performance. Therefore, according to the configuration of the comparative example, the performance may be interrupted between the end of execution of the first performance data and the start of execution of the second performance data. On the other hand, according to feature qE1, the second part of the first effect data is executed during the delay period, and the effect is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel an unnatural feeling that the performance is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qE1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qE2]
A gaming machine according to feature qE1,
The first portion is a portion in which a main part of a specific performance is recorded,
The second portion is a portion in which effects associated with the main portion are recorded.

According to feature qE2, since the aforementioned delay period can be filled with a performance accompanying the main part of a specific performance, it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity that the performance is interrupted without spoiling the flow of the specific performance.

[Feature qE3]
A gaming machine according to feature qE2,
The second performance data is the same as the data recorded in the first portion.

Feature qE3 allows the main part of a particular performance, such as the melody part of a piece of music, to be repeatedly executed (played back).

[Features qE4]
The gaming machine described in any one of features qE1 to feature qE3,
The performance execution means is
comprising a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first performance data execution means includes:
comprising means for executing the first performance data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means,
The second performance data execution means includes:
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing the second performance data using the specific execution means (audio channel 1).

According to feature qE4, during the aforementioned delay period, the second part of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period has elapsed, the second part of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means. The execution is performed by switching to the second part of the performance data. As a result, switching from the first performance data to the second performance data can be reliably performed without interruption of the performance.

[Feature qE5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features qE1 to qE3,
The performance execution means includes:
A plurality of execution means for executing the performance are provided,
The first performance data execution means includes:
a means for executing the first performance data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The second performance data execution means includes:
a means for executing the second performance data by an execution means (audio channel 2) different from the specific execution means.

According to feature qE5, during the delay period described above, the second part of the first performance data is executed by a specific execution means, and when the delay period has elapsed, the second performance data is executed by an execution means different from the specific execution means. When the delay period has elapsed, the unexecuted part of the second part of the first performance data continues to be executed by the specific execution means, so that during the period when this unexecuted part is being executed, the second performance data is also executed by an execution means different from the specific execution means. As a result, immediately after the performance is switched from the first performance data to the second performance data, the performance of the first performance data and the performance of the second performance data are mixed, allowing the performance to be switched smoothly.

<Characteristics qF group>
The feature qF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qF1]
A main control means for performing a lottery for determining whether or not a special game state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to a player is to be generated (a winning lottery);
A performance control means (MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90) for controlling at least the sound performance based on a control signal from the main control means;
a performance data storage means for storing performance data (music A second data A2);
A performance execution means (sound output LSI 97) for executing a performance using the performance data;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance data includes at least a first portion (music A second data_main portion A21) and a second portion (music A second data_lingering portion A22) that is continuous with the first portion in a time axis direction,
The performance execution means includes:
a first performance data execution means for executing the performance data;
a second performance data execution means for executing the performance data at a predetermined timing within a range from the end of the first portion to the end of the second portion (time t3+Δt in FIG. 263 );
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature qF1, the first performance data execution means provided in the performance execution means starts the execution of the performance data (hereinafter also referred to as the first performance data), and the second performance data execution means provided in the performance execution means starts the execution of the same performance data (hereinafter also referred to as the second performance data) as the performance data executed the first time at a predetermined timing within the range of the execution position of the performance data from after the end of the first part to the end of the second part. When the performance execution means starts the execution of the second performance data in response to an instruction from the performance control means, a delay of a predetermined period (this period is hereinafter also referred to as the "delay period") may occur between the reception of an instruction from the performance control means and the start of the execution of the second performance data. According to feature qF1, the performance data has a second part that is continuous with the first part in the time axis direction, and the performance execution means starts the execution of the second performance data at a predetermined timing within the range of the execution position of the first performance data from after the end of the first part to the end of the second part, so that the second part of the first performance data is executed during the delay period. Here, as a comparative example, consider a case where the effect data does not include a second portion, and the end of the first portion coincides with the end of the effect data. In the comparative example, during the delay period, the effect data has already been executed up to the end, and no effect is executed, resulting in no effect. For this reason, with the comparative example, the effect may be interrupted between the end of execution of the first effect data and the start of execution of the second effect data. In contrast, with feature qF1, the second portion of the first effect data is executed during the delay period, and the effect is not interrupted. For this reason, the player does not feel any discomfort from the effect being interrupted. Therefore, feature qF1 can improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qF2]
A gaming machine according to feature qF1,
The first portion is a portion in which a main part of a specific performance is recorded,
The second portion is a portion in which effects associated with the main portion are recorded.

According to feature qF2, since the aforementioned delay period can be filled with a performance accompanying the main part of a specific performance, it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity that the performance is interrupted without spoiling the flow of the specific performance.

[Feature qF3]
The gaming machine according to feature qF1 or feature qF2,
The performance execution means is
comprising a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first performance data execution means includes:
comprising means for executing the production data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means,
The second performance data execution means includes:
A gaming machine comprising means for executing the performance data using the specific execution means (audio channel 1).

According to feature qF3, during the delay period, the second part of the first performance data is executed by a specific execution means, and when the delay period has elapsed, the second performance data is switched to the second part of the first performance data and executed by the specific execution means. As a result, the performance can be reliably switched from the first performance data to the second performance data without interruption.

[Feature qF4]
A gaming machine according to feature qF1 or feature qF2,
The performance execution means includes:
A plurality of execution means for executing the performance are provided,
The first performance data execution means includes:
a means for executing the performance data by a specific execution means (audio channel 2) among the plurality of execution means;
The second performance data execution means includes:
The gaming machine further comprises a means for executing the performance data by an execution means (audio channel 1) different from the specific execution means.

According to feature qF4, during the aforementioned delay period, the second part of the first performance data is executed by a specific execution means, and when the delay period has elapsed, an execution means different from the specific execution means, The second performance data is executed. When the delay period has elapsed, the unexecuted part of the second part of the first performance data is continuously executed by the specific execution means, so during the period when the unexecuted part is being executed, the specific execution The second performance data will also be executed in an execution means different from the execution means. As a result, immediately after the performance is switched from the first performance data to the second performance data, the performance of the first performance data and the performance of the second performance data are mixed, and the performance changes. Switching can be done smoothly.

<Features qG>
The feature qG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modification of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qG1]
A main control means for performing a lottery for determining whether or not a special game state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to a player is to be generated (a winning lottery);
A performance control means (MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90) for controlling at least the sound performance based on a control signal from the main control means;
a performance data storage means for storing first performance data (music A first data A1) and second performance data (music A second data A2);
A performance execution means (sound output LSI 97) capable of using the first performance data and the second performance data to execute a performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means includes:
a first performance data execution means for executing the first performance data;
a second performance data execution means for executing the second performance data during the execution of the first performance data (time t2+Δt in FIG. 263 );
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature qG1, the first performance data execution means provided in the performance execution means starts the execution of the first performance data, and while the first performance data is being executed, the second performance data execution means provided in the performance execution means starts the execution of the second performance data. In the performance execution means, when the execution of the second performance data is started in response to a command from the performance control means, a delay of a predetermined period (hereinafter, this period is also referred to as a "delay period") may occur between the reception of the command from the performance control means and the start of the execution of the second performance data. For this reason, when considering a configuration in which the execution of the second performance data is started by receiving a command to execute the second performance data from the performance control means after the execution of the first performance data is completed (hereinafter, referred to as the configuration of the comparative example), the configuration of the comparative example has a problem that the execution of the first performance data has already been completed during the delay period, and the performance is not executed, resulting in no performance. In contrast, according to feature qG1, the execution of the second performance data is started in the performance execution means at a timing in the middle of the execution of the first performance data, and the execution of the first performance data continues until the execution of the second performance data is started. Therefore, according to feature qG1, even if the delay period occurs, the first effect data continues to be executed during the delay period, so the effect is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable that the effect is interrupted. Therefore, feature qG1 can increase the interest of the game.

[Features qG2]
The gaming machine described in feature qG1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first performance data and the second performance data each include a portion in which a common performance is recorded.

Feature qG2 allows a part in which a common performance is recorded, such as the melody part of a song, to be repeatedly executed (played back).

[Features qG3]
The gaming machine according to feature qG1 or feature qG2,
The performance execution means is
comprising a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first performance data execution means includes:
comprising means for executing the first performance data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means,
The second performance data execution means includes:
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing the second performance data using the specific execution means (audio channel 1).

According to feature qG3, during the delay period, the first performance data is executed by a specific execution means, and when the delay period has elapsed, the second performance data is executed by the specific execution means. As a result, the performance can be reliably switched from the first performance data to the second performance data without interruption.

[Feature qG4]
A gaming machine according to feature qG1 or feature qG2,
The performance execution means includes:
A plurality of execution means for executing the performance are provided,
The first performance data execution means includes:
a means for executing the first performance data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The second performance data execution means includes:
a means for executing the second performance data by an execution means (audio channel 2) different from the specific execution means.

According to feature qG4, during the aforementioned delay period, the first performance data is executed by a specific execution means, and when the delay period has elapsed, the second performance data is executed by a performance means different from the specific performance means. executed. When the delay period has elapsed, a part (hereinafter also referred to as a continuous part) of the first effect data that is continuous to the part executed in the delay period is continuously executed in a specific effect means, so that the continuous part is not executed. During this period, the second performance data is also executed in a performance unit different from the specific performance unit. As a result, immediately after the performance is switched from the first performance data to the second performance data, the performance of the first performance data and the performance of the second performance data are mixed, making the transition between performances smooth. It can be carried out.

<Characteristics qH group>
The feature qH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qH1]
a main control means that performs a winning lottery (winning lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous to the player;
A performance control means (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) that controls at least the sound performance based on the control signal from the main control means;
performance data storage means for storing performance data (song A second data A2);
a performance execution means (sound output LSI 97) that executes a performance using the performance data;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means is
first performance data execution means for executing the performance data;
a second effect data execution means for executing the effect data during execution of the effect data (time t3+Δt in FIG. 263);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature qH1, the performance execution means starts the execution of performance data (hereinafter also referred to as the first performance data), and while the performance data is being executed, the same performance data as the first performance data (hereinafter also referred to as the second performance data) is started. When the performance execution means starts the execution of the second performance data in response to an instruction from the performance control means, a delay of a predetermined period (this period is hereinafter also referred to as the "delay period") may occur between the reception of the instruction from the performance control means and the start of the execution of the second performance data. For this reason, when considering a configuration (hereinafter referred to as the configuration of the comparative example) in which an instruction to execute the second performance data is received from the performance control means and the execution of the second performance data is started after the execution of the first performance data is completed, the configuration of the comparative example has a problem that the execution of the first performance data has already been completed up to the end during the delay period, and no performance is executed. In contrast, according to feature qH1, the performance execution means starts the execution of the second performance data at a timing during the execution of the first performance data, and the execution of the first performance data continues until the execution of the second performance data is started. Therefore, according to feature qH1, even if the delay period occurs, the first performance data continues to be executed during the delay period, so the performance is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable that the performance is interrupted. Therefore, feature qH1 can increase the interest of the game.

[Feature qH2]
A gaming machine according to feature qH1,
The performance execution means includes:
A plurality of execution means for executing the performance are provided,
The first performance data execution means includes:
a means for executing the performance data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The second performance data execution means includes:
The gaming machine further comprises a means for executing the performance data by the specific execution means (audio channel 1).

According to feature qH2, during the aforementioned delay period, the specific execution means continues to execute the first performance data, and when the delay period elapses, the specific execution means executes the second performance data. is switched to the first performance data and executed. As a result, the performance can be reliably switched from the first performance data to the second performance data without interruption of the performance.

[Feature qH3]
A gaming machine according to feature qH1,
The performance execution means includes:
A plurality of execution means for executing the performance are provided,
The first performance data execution means includes:
a means for executing the performance data by a specific execution means (audio channel 2) among the plurality of execution means;
The second performance data execution means includes:
The gaming machine further comprises a means for executing the performance data by an execution means (audio channel 1) different from the specific execution means.

According to feature qH3, during the delay period, the first performance data is executed by a specific execution means, and when the delay period has elapsed, the second performance data is executed by an execution means different from the specific execution means. When the delay period has elapsed, the unexecuted portion of the first performance data continues to be executed by the specific execution means, so that during the period when the unexecuted portion is being executed, the second performance data is also executed by an execution means different from the specific execution means. As a result, immediately after the performance is switched from the first performance data to the second performance data, the performance of the first performance data and the performance of the second performance data are mixed, allowing the performance to be switched smoothly.

<Characteristics qI group>
The feature qI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qI1]
A main control means for performing a lottery for determining whether or not a special game state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to a player is to be generated (a winning lottery);
A performance control means (MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90) for controlling at least the sound performance based on a control signal from the main control means;
A performance execution means (a sound output LSI 97 and a sound data ROM 98) capable of using the first performance data (music A first data_main part A12) and the second performance data (music A second data_main part A21) to execute a performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance control means includes:
a first instruction means (means for transmitting a song A first data playback start command CA1) for instructing the performance execution means to execute the first performance data;
a second instruction means (means for transmitting a song A second data playback start command CA2) for instructing the performance execution means to execute the second performance data following the first performance data;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
a first performance data execution means for executing the first performance data in response to receiving an instruction to execute the first performance data from the performance control means;
a specific performance data execution means for executing specific performance data (music A first data_lingering part A13) following the first performance data when execution of the first performance data is completed;
a second performance data execution means for executing the second performance data in response to receiving an instruction to execute the second performance data from the performance control means;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature qI1, the first performance data execution means provided in the performance execution means starts the execution of the first performance data when it receives an instruction to execute the first performance data from the performance control means, and the specific performance data execution means provided in the performance execution means starts the execution of the specific performance data following the first performance data when the execution of the first performance data is completed. Then, the second performance data execution means provided in the performance execution means starts the execution of the second performance data when it receives an instruction to execute the second performance data from the performance control means. In the performance execution means, when the execution of the second performance data is started in response to an instruction from the performance control means, a delay of a predetermined period (hereinafter, this period is also referred to as a "delay period") may occur between the reception of an instruction from the performance control means and the start of the execution of the second performance data. According to feature qI1, when the execution of the first performance data is completed, the specific performance data is executed following the first performance data, so that in the case where the second instruction means provided in the performance control means is configured to instruct the execution of the second performance data when the execution of the first performance data is completed, the specific performance data is executed during the delay period. Here, as a comparative example, consider a configuration in which the effect execution means does not execute specific effect data when execution of the first effect data is completed. According to the comparative example, if the second effect data is executed after execution of the first effect data is completed, no effect is executed during the delay period, resulting in no effect. Therefore, according to the configuration of the comparative example, the effect may be interrupted between the end of execution of the first effect data and the start of execution of the second effect data. In contrast, according to feature qI1, the specific effect data is executed during the delay period, and the effect is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the effect is interrupted. Therefore, feature qI1 can improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qI2]
A gaming machine according to feature 11,
The specific effect data is effect data (music A first data_lingering portion A13) representing an effect continuing from an end effect represented by the end portion of the first effect data.

According to feature qI2, the aforementioned delay period can be filled with a performance that follows the end performance represented by the end portion of the first performance data, which further eliminates the awkward feeling of the performance being interrupted without disrupting the flow of the performance.

[Feature qI3]
A gaming machine according to feature qI1 or feature qI2,
The performance execution means includes:
A plurality of execution means for executing the performance are provided,
The first performance data execution means includes:
a means for executing the first performance data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The specific performance data execution means includes:
a means for executing the specific performance data by the specific execution means (audio channel 1);
The second performance data execution means includes:
a means for executing the second performance data by the specific execution means (audio channel 1).

According to feature qI3, the first effect data is executed by a specific execution means, the specific effect data is executed by the specific execution means during the aforementioned delay period, and when the delay period has elapsed, the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means. , the second performance data is executed. As a result, switching from the first performance data to the second performance data can be reliably performed without interruption of the performance.

[Feature qI4]
The gaming machine according to feature qI1 or feature qI2,
The performance execution means is
comprising a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The first performance data execution means includes:
comprising means for executing the first performance data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means,
The specific performance data execution means is
comprising means for executing the specific performance data by the specific execution means (audio channel 1),
The second performance data execution means includes:
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing the second effect data by an execution means (audio channel 2) different from the specific execution means.

According to feature qI4, the first performance data is executed by a specific execution means, the specific performance data is executed by the specific execution means during the delay period described above, and when the delay period has elapsed, the second performance data is executed by an execution means different from the specific execution means. When the delay period has elapsed, the unexecuted portion of the specific performance data continues to be executed by the specific execution means, so that during the period when this unexecuted portion is being executed, the second performance data is also executed by an execution means different from the specific execution means. As a result, immediately after the performance is switched from the first performance data to the second performance data, the performance of the specific performance data and the performance of the second performance data are mixed, allowing the performance to be switched smoothly.

<Characteristics qJ group>
The feature qJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qJ1]
a main control means that performs a winning lottery (winning lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous to the player;
A performance control means (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) that controls at least the sound performance based on the control signal from the main control means;
A performance execution means (sound output LSI 97 + audio data ROM 98) that executes the performance using the performance data (song A second data_main part A21);
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance control means is
a first instruction means (means for transmitting a song A second data reproduction start command CA2) that gives a first instruction to the production execution means to execute the production;
second instruction means (means for transmitting a song A second data reproduction start command CA2) for issuing a second instruction to execute the production when the production executed according to the first instruction ends;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
Effect data execution means for executing the effect data when receiving the first instruction or the second instruction from the effect control means;
specific effect data execution means for executing specific effect data (music A second data_lingering part A22) following the effect data when the execution of the effect data is completed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature qJ1, the first instruction means provided in the effect control means gives the first instruction to execute the effect to the effect execution means, and then the second instruction means provided in the effect control means causes the effect to be executed. A second instruction to execute is given to the effect execution means. The effect executing means starts executing the effect data when receiving the first instruction, and starts executing the specific effect data following the effect data when the execution of the effect data is completed. Then, the effect executing means starts executing the effect data when receiving the second instruction, and starts executing the specific effect data following the effect data when the execution of the effect data is completed. In the production execution means, a delay of a predetermined period (this period is also referred to as a "delay period" hereinafter) occurs between the time when the production execution means receives an instruction to execute the production and the time when execution of production data is started. There is. According to feature qJ1, when the performance data is repeatedly executed, execution of the specific performance data is started following the performance data, so that during the delay period, the specific performance data is executed and the performance is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel an unnatural feeling that the performance is interrupted. Therefore, according to feature qJ1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features qJ2]
The gaming machine described in feature qJ1,
The gaming machine characterized in that the specific performance data is performance data that represents a performance that continues from the end performance represented by the ending part of the performance data.

According to feature qJ2, the aforementioned delay period can be filled with a performance that follows the end performance represented by the end portion of the performance data, which further eliminates the awkward feeling of the performance being interrupted without disrupting the flow of the performance.

[Features qJ3]
The gaming machine according to feature qJ1 or feature qJ2,
The performance execution means is
comprising a plurality of execution means for executing the production,
The performance data execution means includes:
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing the performance data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means.

According to feature qJ3, the repeated performance data is executed by the same specific execution means. As a result, the performance data can be easily executed repeatedly.

[Feature qJ4]
A gaming machine according to feature qJ1 or feature qJ2,
The performance execution means includes:
A plurality of execution means for executing the performance are provided,
The performance data execution means includes:
a means for executing the performance data for an n-th time (n being a positive integer) by a specific execution means (audio channel 2) among the plurality of execution means, and for executing the performance data for an n+1-th time by an execution means (audio channel 1) different from the specific execution means;
The specific performance data execution means includes:
A gaming machine comprising: a means for executing the specific performance data by the specific execution means.

According to feature qJ4, the nth (n is a positive integer) performance data is executed by a specific execution means, the specific performance data is executed by the specific execution means during the delay period described above, and when the delay period has elapsed, the n+1th performance data is executed by an execution means different from the specific execution means. When the delay period has elapsed, the unexecuted portion of the specific performance data continues to be executed by the specific execution means, so that during the period when this unexecuted portion is being executed, the n+1th performance data is also executed by an execution means different from the specific execution means. As a result, immediately after the performance is switched from the nth performance data to the n+1th performance data, the performance of the specific performance data and the performance of the n+1th performance data are mixed, allowing the performance to be switched smoothly.

<Characteristics qK group>
The feature qK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modification of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qK1]
A main control means for performing a lottery for determining whether or not a special game state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to a player is to be generated (a winning lottery);
A performance control means (MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90) for controlling at least the sound performance based on a control signal from the main control means;
a performance data storage means for storing first performance data (music A first data A1) including a specific portion (music A first data_main portion A12) and a related portion (music A first data_intro portion A11) related to the specific portion, and second performance data (music A second data A2) including the specific portion (music A second data_main portion A21);
A performance execution means (sound output LSI 97) capable of using the first performance data and the second performance data to execute a performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance control means includes:
a first instruction means (means for transmitting a song A first data playback start command CA1) for instructing the performance execution means to execute the first performance data;
a second instruction means (means for transmitting a song A second data playback start command CA2) for instructing execution of the second performance data when execution of the first performance data is completed by the performance execution means;
a third instruction means (means for transmitting a song A second data playback start command CA2) for instructing the performance execution means to execute the second performance data when execution of the second performance data is completed by the performance execution means;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature qK1, when the first instruction means provided in the performance control means instructs the performance execution means to execute the first performance data, and the performance execution means ends the execution of the first performance data. Then, the second instruction means provided in the effect control means instructs the effect execution means to execute the second effect data. Furthermore, when the execution of the second performance data is completed in the performance execution means, a third instruction means provided in the performance control means instructs the performance execution means to execute the second performance data. The effect execution means receives an instruction to execute the first effect data, executes the first effect data, and repeatedly receives an instruction to execute the second effect data, thereby repeatedly executing the second effect data. As a result, the first performance data is executed once and the second performance data is executed multiple times. As a result, the specific portion included in both the first performance data and the second performance data can be repeatedly executed three or more times. For example, if the related part of the first performance data is the intro part of a song, and the specific part of the first performance data is the melody part of the song, according to feature qK1, the intro part is played, and then the melody part is played. can be repeatedly played three or more times, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Feature qK2]
A gaming machine according to feature qK1,
the first performance data further includes an additional portion (music A first data_lingering portion A13) located at the very end of the first performance data and being neither the specific portion nor the related portion,
the second performance data further includes an additional portion (music A second data_lingering portion A22) that is continuous with the specific portion of the second performance data in a time axis direction and is not the specific portion,
The second instruction means is
a means for instructing the performance execution means to execute the second performance data within a predetermined period including a timing when an execution position of the first performance data in the performance execution means reaches a start point of the additional portion of the first performance data (time t2 in FIG. 263 );
The third instruction means is
A means for instructing the performance execution means to execute the second performance data within a predetermined period including the timing when the execution position of the second performance data in the performance execution means reaches the end of the additional portion of the second performance data (time t3 in FIG. 263 );
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature qK2, a delay of a predetermined period (hereinafter, this period is also called a "delay period") may occur between the first instruction to execute the second performance data and the first execution of the second performance data is started in the performance execution means. According to feature qK2, the first performance data has an additional portion at the very end, so that the additional portion of the first performance data is executed during the delay period, and the performance is not interrupted. Also, a delay period may occur between the nth (n is multiple) instruction to execute the second performance data and the nth execution of the second performance data is started. According to feature qK2, the second performance data has an additional portion that is continuous in the time axis direction with respect to the specific portion, so that the additional portion of the second performance data is executed during the delay period, and the performance is not interrupted. As a result, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the performance is interrupted. Therefore, feature qK2 can improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qK3]
A gaming machine according to feature qK2,
The specific portion is a portion in which a main part of a specific performance is recorded,
The additional portion of the first performance data is a portion in which a performance associated with a main part of the specific performance is recorded,
The additional portion of the second effect data is a portion in which an effect associated with a main portion of the specific effect is recorded.

According to feature qK3, since the delay period described above can be filled with a performance accompanying the main part of a specific performance, it is possible to eliminate the sense of discomfort caused by interruptions in the performance without spoiling the flow of the specific performance. Further, according to feature qK3, the main part of a specific performance, for example, the melody part of a song, can be repeatedly executed (played).

<Characteristics qL group>
The feature qL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qL1]
A main control means for performing a lottery for determining whether or not a special game state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to a player is to be generated (a winning lottery);
A performance control means (MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90) for controlling at least the sound performance based on a control signal from the main control means;
a performance data storage means for storing first performance data (music A first data A1) and second performance data (music A second data A2);
A performance execution means (sound output LSI 97) that executes a performance based on a control signal from the performance control means and that can use the first performance data and the second performance data to execute the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
the first performance data includes at least a first portion (music A first data_main portion A12) and a second portion (music A first data_lingering portion A13) that is continuous with the first portion in a time axis direction,
The performance execution means includes:
a first performance execution means for executing the first performance data;
When a period (delay period Δt) from the timing when the execution position of the first performance data reaches the end of the first portion to the start of execution of the second performance data by the performance execution means exceeds a predetermined time, a specific state (silent state) is entered in which neither the first performance data nor the second performance data is executed, and when the period is equal to or shorter than the predetermined time, the second performance data can be executed without entering the specific state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature qL1, when the period from the timing when the execution position of the first performance data in the performance execution means reaches the end of the first part to the start of execution of the second performance data in the performance execution means exceeds a predetermined time, a specific state in which both the first performance data and the second performance data are not executed can be entered. On the other hand, when the period is equal to or less than the predetermined time, the second performance data can be executed without entering the specific state. Therefore, when the period is a long period that exceeds a predetermined time, for example, a time length corresponding to the second part, a specific state is entered, and when the period is equal to or less than the predetermined time, the specific state is not entered. This makes it possible to control the appearance of the specific state by adjusting the timing to start execution of the second performance data. For example, when the possibility (expectation) of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is high, the timing to start execution of the second performance data is delayed so that the period exceeds the predetermined time, and when the expectation of winning a jackpot is not high, the timing to start execution of the second performance data is advanced so that the period is equal to or less than the predetermined time, thereby making it possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that he or she may have won a jackpot when a specific state occurs. Therefore, feature qL1 can increase the interest of the game.

[Features qL2]
The gaming machine described in feature qL1,
The performance control means is
first instruction means (means for transmitting a music A first data reproduction start command CA1) for instructing the production execution means to execute the first production data;
Within a predetermined period including the timing at which the execution position of the first performance data in the performance execution means reaches the end of the first portion (time t2 in FIG. 263), the second performance is sent to the performance execution means. a second instruction means for instructing the execution of the data (means for transmitting the song A second data reproduction start command CA2);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature qL2, a first instruction means provided in the performance control means instructs the performance execution means to execute the first performance data, and a second instruction means provided in the performance control means instructs the performance execution means to execute the second performance data within a predetermined period including the timing when the execution position of the first performance data in the performance execution means reaches the end of the first part. In the performance execution means, a delay of a predetermined period (this period is also referred to as a "delay period" below) may occur between receiving an instruction to execute the second performance data and starting execution of the second performance data. According to feature qL2, since the first performance data has a second part that is continuous with the first part in the time axis direction, during the delay period, the second part of the first performance data is executed and the performance is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the performance is interrupted. Therefore, feature qL2 can improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qL3]
A gaming machine according to feature qL2,
The first portion is a portion in which a main part of a specific performance is recorded,
The second portion is a portion in which effects associated with the main portion are recorded.

According to feature qL3, the aforementioned delay period can be filled with a performance that is associated with the main part of a particular performance, eliminating the awkward feeling of a performance being interrupted without impairing the flow of the particular performance.

[Feature qL4]
A gaming machine according to feature qL3,
The second performance data is the same as the data recorded in the first portion.

According to feature qL4, the main part of a specific production, for example, the melody part of a song, can be repeatedly executed (played).

[Feature qL5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features qL2 to qL4,
The performance execution means includes:
A plurality of execution means for executing the performance are provided,
The first instruction means is
a means for instructing that the first performance data be executed by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means;
The second instruction means is
a means for instructing that the second performance data be executed by the specific execution means (audio channel 1).

According to feature qL5, during the delay period, the second part of the first performance data is executed by a specific execution means, and when the delay period has elapsed, the second performance data is switched to the second part of the first performance data and executed by the specific execution means. As a result, the performance can be reliably switched from the first performance data to the second performance data without interruption.

[Feature qL6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features qL2 to qL4,
The performance execution means includes:
A plurality of execution means for executing the performance are provided,
The first instruction means is
a means for instructing a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means to execute the first performance data;
The second instruction means is
a means for instructing that the second performance data be executed by an execution means (audio channel 2) different from the specific execution means.

According to feature qL6, during the delay period described above, the second part of the first performance data is executed by a specific execution means, and when the delay period has elapsed, the second performance data is executed by an execution means different from the specific execution means. When the delay period has elapsed, the unexecuted part of the second part of the first performance data continues to be executed by the specific execution means, so that during the period when this unexecuted part is being executed, the second performance data is also executed by an execution means different from the specific execution means. As a result, immediately after the performance is switched from the first performance data to the second performance data, the performance of the first performance data and the performance of the second performance data are mixed, allowing the performance to be switched smoothly.

<Characteristics qM group>
The feature qM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qM1]
a main control means that performs a winning lottery (winning lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous to the player;
A performance control means (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) that controls at least the sound performance based on the control signal from the main control means;
performance data storage means for storing first performance data (song A first data A1) and second performance data (song A second data A2);
a performance execution means (sound output LSI 97) that can use the first performance data and the second performance data to execute the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The performance execution means is
comprising a first execution means (audio channel 1) and a second execution means (audio channel 2) for executing the production,
The performance control means is
a first instruction means (means for transmitting a music A first data reproduction start command CA1) that instructs the performance execution means to execute the first performance data using the first execution means;
While the first performance data is being executed in the performance execution means (time t2 in FIG. 263), the second performance data is executed using the second execution means for the performance execution means. a second instruction means (means for transmitting a music A second data reproduction start command CA2);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature qM1, the first instruction means provided in the performance control means instructs the performance execution means to execute the first performance data, and while the first performance data is being executed by the performance execution means, the second instruction means provided in the performance control means instructs the performance execution means to execute the second performance data. The performance execution means starts executing the first performance data upon receiving an instruction to execute the first performance data, and starts executing the second performance data upon receiving an instruction to execute the second performance data. However, a delay of a predetermined period (hereinafter, this period is also referred to as a "delay period") may occur between receiving an instruction to execute the second performance data and starting execution of the second performance data in the performance execution means. According to feature qM1, the timing at which the instruction to execute the second performance data is given is during the execution of the first performance data, so that an unexecuted portion remains in the first performance data, and during the delay period, the unexecuted portion is executed, and the performance is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the performance is interrupted. Therefore, feature qM1 can improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to feature qM1, during the aforementioned delay period, the first execution means executes the aforementioned unexecuted portion of the first effect data, and when the delay period elapses, the first execution means differs from the first execution means. The second performance data is executed by the second execution means. When the delay period has elapsed, the first execution means continues to execute a portion (hereinafter also referred to as a continuous portion) of the first performance data that is continuous to the portion executed during the delay period, so that the continuous portion is not executed. During this period, the second performance data is also executed by the second execution means. As a result, immediately after the performance is switched from the first performance data to the second performance data, the performance of the first performance data and the performance of the second performance data are mixed, making the transition between performances smooth. It can be carried out.

[Feature qM2]
The gaming machine described in feature qM1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first performance data and the second performance data each include a portion in which a common performance is recorded.

According to feature qM2, it is possible to repeatedly perform (reproduce) a portion in which a common performance is recorded, for example, a melody portion of a song.

<Characteristics Group A>
The group of features rA is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment and its modifications 1 to 11.

[Feature rA1]
A displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
A state determination means capable of determining a state of the displacement means;
a process execution means for executing a first process (a process of turning off an RTC performance execution permission flag) when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in a first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was in an OFF state) when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and for executing a second process (a process of turning on an RTC performance execution permission flag) when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in a second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was in an ON state);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, the state determination means executes a first process if it determines that the state is a first state, and executes a second process if it determines that the state is a second state, so that the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the state of the displacement means.

[Feature rA2]
The gaming machine according to feature rA1,
A predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance (RTC performance) based on the elapsed time since the gaming machine is started,
The processing execution means executes the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect execution means when the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power cut was the OFF state). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for setting an RTC effect execution permission flag to an impossible state (turning off an RTC performance execution permission flag).

According to this feature, since the predetermined performance execution means is provided that can execute a predetermined performance based on the elapsed time since the gaming machine was started (startup elapsed time), a plurality of gaming machines are installed in the island facility. If a plurality of gaming machines are started all at once (simultaneously) by turning on the island power switch of the island equipment in the gaming hall where the island is located, the startup progress of each gaming machine installed in the island equipment. Since the times are the same, it becomes possible to start the predetermined effects all at once (simultaneously).

However, after turning on the island power switch to start up multiple gaming machines installed on the island equipment all at once (simultaneously), the displacement of one gaming machine may be performed for the purpose of changing setting information, for example. The means (power switch 85a) are individually displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and the displacement means (power switch 85a) is again turned to the first position (OFF position). position) to the second position (ON position), the elapsed start-up time of the first gaming machine may deviate from the elapsed start-up time of other gaming machines installed in the island facility. This causes a problem in that the start timing of the predetermined performance in the one gaming machine is different from that in the other gaming machines. In particular, since it takes about one minute to change the setting information, the one gaming machine whose setting information has been changed will start the specified performance about one minute later than the other gaming machines. become. Generally, the duration of a predetermined effect is about 5 minutes, so the predetermined effect on the one gaming machine whose setting information has been changed may be repeatedly executed with a difference from the predetermined effect on the other gaming machine. A problem arises in that the players interfere with each other, causing discomfort to the players.

In this feature, the process execution means includes a means for setting a state in which the predetermined performance by the predetermined performance execution means is not possible when the state determination means determines that the state is the first state. Therefore, when the shifting means (power switch 85a) is shifted from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and the shifting means (power switch 85a) is then shifted from the first position (OFF position) to the second position (ON position) to start up, the gaming machine is set to a state in which the predetermined performance is not possible to be executed. As a result, the predetermined performance is not executed in the one gaming machine that is started up by operating the shifting means (power switch 85a), so it is possible to prevent the predetermined performance in the one gaming machine from overlapping with the predetermined performance in the other gaming machine and interfering with each other, thereby preventing discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, if the power supply is cut off by the island power switch being shifted from ON to OFF while the displacement means (power switch 85a) of the gaming machine remains in the second position (ON position), and the island power switch is then shifted from OFF to ON to start up the gaming machine, the gaming machine is set to a state in which it can execute a predetermined performance, and therefore it is possible to execute a predetermined performance at the same (or approximately the same) timing as other gaming machines installed on the island equipment.

[Feature rA3]
A gaming machine according to feature rA1 or feature rA2,
a predetermined information changing means for changing predetermined information (setting information) which is information for determining one of a plurality of bonus granting conditions;
A ball entry means capable of entering the game ball;
A special information acquisition means capable of acquiring special information in response to a game ball entering the ball entry means;
a bonus determination means for determining whether the special information satisfies the bonus condition corresponding to the predetermined information;
a bonus awarding means capable of executing a bonus awarding mode (opening/closing execution mode) for awarding a bonus to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the bonus awarding condition;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (fixed suggestion effect) which is an effect suggesting that the predetermined information has not been changed;
Equipped with
The processing execution means is provided with a means for setting the suggested performance execution means to a state in which execution of the suggested performance is impossible (a fixed suggested performance execution permission flag is turned OFF) when the state determination means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage) is present.

In a gaming hall where multiple gaming machines are installed on an island facility and the island power switch of the island facility starts and stops power supply to the multiple gaming machines at the same time, the gaming machines are individually installed. When the power supply is cut off or started by operating the displacement means (power switch 85a), it is highly likely that the predetermined information has been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day).

According to this feature, the processing execution means includes means for setting a state in which it is impossible for the suggestion performance execution means to execute the suggestion performance when the state determination means determines that the first state is the first state. If it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the first state by the means (when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power cut was the OFF state), that is, the occurrence of the previous power cut is caused by the displacement means (power switch 85a). If it is due to the operation 85a), the suggestion effect will not be executed in the gaming machine after the next startup. Therefore, even though the predetermined information has actually been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day), by executing the suggestion effect on the gaming machine, the player may notice that the predetermined information has been changed on the gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the user mistakenly assumes that the information has been left unused.

[Feature rA4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features rA1 to rA3,
A movable means (movable object for performance 99) capable of moving within a predetermined range is provided;
The processing execution means is provided with a means for performing processing to cause the movable means to execute a predetermined operation when the state determination means determines that the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage) is reached.

According to this feature, the processing execution means includes means for performing a process of causing the movable means to perform a predetermined operation when the state determination means determines that the second state is in the second state. To easily confirm whether a displacement means is determined to be in a first state or a second state by visually checking whether or not the movable means has executed a predetermined operation. Can be done.

Then, when the manager or the like notices that the displacement means has been determined to be in the second state, he or she can carry out an operation corresponding to the fact that the displacement means has been determined to be in the second state in the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in an amusement hall that does not use an island power switch for the island equipment to start and stop the power supply to multiple gaming machines all at once, if the displacement means (power switch 85a) remained in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage, there is a possibility that a cheater or other dishonest person has performed fraudulent operations or tampered with the gaming machine. Therefore, in such an amusement hall, the manager of the amusement hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect it.

[Feature rA5]
The gaming machine according to feature rA4,
A gaming machine characterized in that the process of causing the movable means to perform the predetermined operation includes a process of moving the movable means by a predetermined amount in a predetermined direction.

According to this feature, the process of causing the movable means to perform the predetermined operation includes the process of moving the movable means by a predetermined amount in a predetermined direction. Even if it is not possible to visually check the movable means, the displacement means can be brought into the first state by visually checking whether the movable means has moved a predetermined amount after completing a predetermined operation. It is possible to more easily confirm whether it has been determined that the state is in the second state or the second state.

[Feature rA6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features rA1 to rA5,
A notification means capable of executing a notification process is provided,
The processing execution means is provided with a means for causing the notification means to execute a predetermined notification processing when the state determination means determines that the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage) is reached.

According to this feature, the process execution means includes means for causing the notification means to execute a predetermined notification process when the state determination means determines that the second state is present, so that the manager of the gaming machine or the like can be made aware that the displacement means has been determined to be in the second state. As a result, the manager or the like can perform an operation corresponding to the determination that the displacement means is in the second state in the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall where the island power switch of the island equipment starts and stops power supply to multiple game machines all at once, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains in the ON state, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been fraudulently operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as a thief. Therefore, in such a game hall, the game hall manager or the like can temporarily suspend the operation of the game machine and inspect the game machine.

[Feature rA7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features rA1 to feature rA6,
Equipped with an information output means (external output terminal) that can output information to an external device (hall computer),
The processing execution means causes the information output means to output predetermined information when the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power cut). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means.

According to this feature, the process execution means includes a means for causing the information output means to output predetermined information when the state determination means determines that the game machine is in the second state, so that the manager of the game machine or the like can be made aware that the game machine has determined that the game machine is in the second state. As a result, the manager can carry out an operation corresponding to the game machine determining that the game machine is in the second state.

Specifically, for example, in an amusement hall that does not use an island power switch for the island equipment to start and stop the power supply to multiple gaming machines all at once, if the displacement means (power switch 85a) remained in the ON state at the time of the previous power outage, there is a possibility that a cheater or other dishonest person has performed fraudulent operations or tampered with the gaming machine. Therefore, in such an amusement hall, the manager of the amusement hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect it.

[Feature rA8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features rA1 to rA7,
The processing execution means is provided with a means for displacing the displacement means (power switch 85a) to the first position (OFF position) when the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was in the ON state).

According to this feature, the processing execution means includes means for displacing the displacement means to the first position when the state determining means determines that the second state is the second state. If it is determined, the displacement means is displaced to the first position, and the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality in which the displacement means is determined to be in the second state.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall where the island power switch of the island equipment starts and stops power supply to multiple game machines all at once, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains in the ON state, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been fraudulently operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as a thief. According to this feature, if the state of the displacement means (power switch 85a) at the time of the previous power cut was an abnormal ON state, the displacement means (power switch 85a) is forced to turn on at the next startup. The gaming machine is moved to the 1 position (OFF state), and the power supply to the gaming machine is forcibly cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played on the gaming machine in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality.

[Feature rA9]
The gaming machine according to any one of features rA1 to feature rA8,
Equipped with an image display means capable of displaying an image,
The processing execution means displays a predetermined image (startup demonstration image) when the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power cut). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying on the means.

According to this feature, the process execution means includes means for displaying a predetermined image on the image display means when the state determination means determines that the state is the first state, so that the manager of the amusement hall, etc., can check whether the displacement means has determined that the state is the first state or the second state by checking whether the predetermined image is displayed on the image display means.

When the administrator, etc. notices that the displacement means is determined to be in the second state, the administrator, etc. performs work corresponding to the fact that the displacement means is determined to be in the second state in the gaming machine. be able to.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall where the island power switch of the island equipment starts and stops power supply to multiple game machines all at once, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains in the ON state, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been fraudulently operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as a thief. Therefore, in such a game hall, the game hall manager or the like can temporarily suspend the operation of the game machine and inspect the game machine.

[Feature rA10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features rA1 to rA9,
A launching means capable of launching a game ball is provided,
The processing execution means is provided with a means for enabling the launching means to launch the game ball when the state determination means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage) is reached.

According to this feature, the process execution means includes a means for enabling the launching means to launch a gaming ball when the state determination means determines that the machine is in the first state, so that a player can play on the gaming machine when the state determination means determines that the machine is in the first state. On the other hand, when the state determination means determines that the machine is in the second state, the process for enabling the launching of a gaming ball is not executed on the gaming machine, so that a player cannot play on the gaming machine when the state determination means determines that the machine is in the second state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from being played in a possibly abnormal state where the state determination means determines that the machine is in the second state.

Specifically, for example, in an amusement hall that does not simultaneously start and stop the supply of power to multiple gaming machines using an island power switch of an island facility, if the state of the displacement means (power switch 85a) remained ON at the time of the previous power outage, it is possible that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or tampered with by a dishonest person such as a cheater. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in the second state, the process that enables the launch of gaming balls is not executed in the gaming machine, so that it is possible to prevent playing on the gaming machine in a possibly abnormal state determined by the state determination means to be in the second state.

[Feature rA11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features rA1 to rA10,
A ball entry means (such as a first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A detection means (ball entry detection sensor) capable of detecting entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
Equipped with
The processing execution means is provided with a means for enabling the detection means to detect the game ball when the state determination means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage) is reached.

According to this feature, the process execution means includes means for enabling the detection means to detect a gaming ball when the state determination means determines that the machine is in the first state, so that the player can play on the gaming machine when the state determination means determines that the machine is in the first state. On the other hand, when the state determination means determines that the machine is in the second state, the process for enabling the detection means to detect a gaming ball is not executed on the gaming machine, so that the player cannot play on the gaming machine when the state determination means determines that the machine is in the second state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from being played in a possibly abnormal state where the state determination means determines that the machine is in the second state.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall where the island power switch of the island equipment starts and stops power supply to multiple game machines all at once, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains in the ON state, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been fraudulently operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as a thief. As described above, according to the present feature, when the state determining means determines that the second state is present, the processing that enables the detecting means to detect the game ball in the gaming machine is not executed, so that the state determining means It is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality, which is determined by the means to be in the second state.

[Feature rA12]
The gaming machine according to any one of features rA1 to feature rA11,
Equipped with special information acquisition means that can acquire special information,
The processing execution means causes the special information acquisition means to acquire the special information when the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power cut). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for enabling.

According to this feature, the processing execution means includes means that enables the special information acquisition means to acquire special information when the state determination means determines that the first state is the first state. When it is determined by the means that the first state is present, it becomes possible to play a game on the gaming machine. On the other hand, if the state determining means determines that the game machine is in the second state, the processing that enables the special information acquiring means to acquire special information is not executed in the gaming machine. If it is determined that the game machine is in the 2 state, no games can be played on the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality, which is determined to be the second state by the state determining means.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall where the island power switch of the island equipment starts and stops power supply to multiple game machines all at once, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains in the ON state, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been fraudulently operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as a thief. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determining means determines that the second state is present, the processing that enables the special information acquiring means to acquire special information in the gaming machine is not executed. It is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality, which is determined to be the second state by the state determining means.

[Feature rA13]
A gaming machine according to any one of features rA1 to rA12,
A variable display means capable of displaying a variable representation of identification information (special symbols),
The processing execution means is provided with a means for enabling the variable display means to execute a variable display of the identification information when the state determination means determines that the state is the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was OFF).

According to this feature, the process execution means includes a means for enabling the variable display means to display the variation of the identification information when the state determination means determines that the state is the first state, so that the player can play on the gaming machine when the state determination means determines that the state is the first state. On the other hand, when the state determination means determines that the state is the second state, the process for enabling the variable display means to display the variation of the identification information is not executed on the gaming machine, so that the player cannot play on the gaming machine when the state determination means determines that the state is the second state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from being played in a possibly abnormal state where the state determination means determines that the state is the second state.

Specifically, for example, in an amusement hall that does not start and stop the supply of power to multiple gaming machines simultaneously using an island power switch of an island facility, if the state of the displacement means (power switch 85a) remained ON at the time of the previous power outage, it is possible that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or tampered with by a dishonest person such as a cheater. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in the second state, the processing that enables the variable display means to display the variable display of the identification information is not executed in the gaming machine, so that it is possible to prevent play from being performed on the gaming machine in a possibly abnormal state determined by the state determination means to be in the second state.

[Feature rA14]
The gaming machine according to any one of features rA1 to feature rA13,
comprising a benefit granting determination means capable of executing a benefit granting determination that determines whether or not to grant a benefit to a player;
The processing executing means is configured to cause the privilege granting determination by the benefit granting determining means to be performed when the state determining means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power cut). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for enabling execution.

According to this feature, the processing execution means includes means that enables the bonus grant determination means to execute the bonus award determination when the status determination means determines that the first state is the first state. If the determining means determines that the first state is present, it becomes possible to play a game on the gaming machine. On the other hand, if the state determining means determines that the second state is in the second state, the processing that enables the bonus grant determining means to execute the bonus award determination is not executed in the gaming machine, so the player can If it is determined that the second state is present, no games can be played on the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality, which is determined to be the second state by the state determining means.

Specifically, for example, in an amusement hall that does not start and stop the supply of power to multiple gaming machines simultaneously using an island power switch of an island facility, if the state of the displacement means (power switch 85a) remained ON at the time of the previous power outage, it is possible that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or tampered with by a dishonest person such as a cheater. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in the second state, the processing that enables the bonus granting determination means to execute a bonus granting determination is not executed in the gaming machine, so that it is possible to prevent play from being performed on the gaming machine in a possibly abnormal state where the state determination means has determined that the gaming machine is in the second state.

[Feature rA15]
A gaming machine according to any one of features rA1 to rA14,
A bonus awarding means is provided for executing a bonus awarding mode (opening/closing execution mode) for awarding a bonus to a player,
The processing execution means is provided with a means for enabling the bonus granting means to execute the bonus granting mode when the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was in the OFF state).

According to this feature, the process execution means includes a means for enabling the bonus granting means to execute the bonus granting mode when the state determination means determines that the state is the first state, so that the player can play on the gaming machine when the state determination means determines that the state is the first state. On the other hand, when the state determination means determines that the state is the second state, the process for enabling the bonus granting means to execute the bonus granting mode on the gaming machine is not executed, so that the player cannot play on the gaming machine when the state determination means determines that the state is the second state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from being played in a possibly abnormal state where the state determination means determines that the state is the second state.

Specifically, for example, in an amusement hall that does not start and stop the supply of power to multiple gaming machines simultaneously using an island power switch of an island facility, if the state of the displacement means (power switch 85a) remained ON at the time of the previous power outage, it is possible that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or tampered with by a dishonest person such as a cheater. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in the second state, the process that enables the bonus granting means to execute the bonus granting mode is not executed in the gaming machine, so that it is possible to prevent play from being performed on the gaming machine in a possibly abnormal state determined by the state determination means to be in the second state.

<Characteristic rB group>
The feature rB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rB1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) movable between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
a state determining means capable of determining the state of the displacement means;
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the first state (the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power cut), the first process is executed. , processing execution means for executing the second process when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power cut was the ON state);
A predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance (RTC performance);
When the process execution means executes the second process, means for causing the predetermined effect execution means to execute the predetermined effect (RTC effect) based on the elapse of a predetermined period after the start of the supply of power;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determining means determines that it is in the first state, the first process is executed, and if it is determined that it is in the second state, the first process is executed. Since the apparatus includes a process execution means for executing the second process, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed depending on the state of the displacement means.

According to this feature, since the predetermined effect execution means is provided that can execute a predetermined effect based on the passage of a predetermined period after the start of power supply, a game where a plurality of gaming machines are installed in the island facility is provided. In a hall, if multiple gaming machines are started all at once (at the same time) by turning on the island power switch of the island equipment, the elapsed startup time of each gaming machine installed in the island equipment is Since they are the same, it becomes possible to start the predetermined effects all at once (simultaneously).

However, after turning on the island power switch to start up multiple gaming machines installed on the island facility all at once (simultaneously), the displacement of one gaming machine may be performed for the purpose of, for example, changing setting information. The means (power switch 85a) are individually displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and the displacement means (power switch 85a) is again turned to the first position (OFF position). position) to the second position (ON position) and start up, the elapsed start-up time of the first gaming machine may deviate from the elapsed start-up time of other gaming machines installed in the island facility. As a result, a problem arises in that the start timing of a predetermined performance in the one gaming machine is different from that in the other gaming machines. In particular, since it takes about one minute to change the setting information, the one gaming machine whose setting information has been changed will start the specified performance about one minute later than the other gaming machines. become. Generally, the duration of a predetermined effect is about 5 minutes, so the predetermined effect on the one gaming machine whose setting information has been changed may be executed overlappingly with the predetermined effect on the other gaming machine. A problem arises in that the players interfere with each other, causing discomfort to the players.

In this feature, when the process execution means executes the second process, the device is provided with a means for causing the predetermined performance execution means to execute the predetermined performance (RTC performance) based on the passage of a predetermined period of time after the start of the power supply. Therefore, when the power supply is cut off by the island power switch being shifted from ON to OFF while the displacement means (power switch 85a) of the gaming machine is in the second position (ON position), and the island power switch is then shifted from OFF to ON and the gaming machine is started up, the gaming machine is set to a state in which the predetermined performance can be executed, and the predetermined performance is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the power supply, making it possible to execute the predetermined performance at the same (or approximately the same) timing as other gaming machines installed on the island equipment.

On the other hand, the displacement means (power switch 85a) is displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) and the power supply is cut off, and then the displacement means (power switch 85a) is moved to the first position (OFF position). When the gaming machine is started after being displaced from the OFF position (OFF position) to the second position (ON position), the gaming machine is set in a state in which it is unable to execute a predetermined performance. As a result, the predetermined performance is not executed in the one gaming machine started by operating the displacement means (power switch 85a), so the predetermined performance in the one gaming machine is the same as the predetermined performance in the other gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the player from being repeatedly executed in a misaligned manner and causing interference, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Characteristics Group C>
The group of features rC is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rC1]
A displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
A state determination means capable of determining a state of the displacement means;
a process execution means for executing a first process when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in a first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was OFF) when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and for executing a second process when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in a second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was ON);
a predetermined information changing means for changing predetermined information (setting information) which is information for determining one of a plurality of bonus granting conditions;
A ball entry means capable of entering the game ball;
A special information acquisition means capable of acquiring special information in response to a game ball entering the ball entry means;
a bonus determination means for determining whether the special information satisfies the bonus condition corresponding to the predetermined information;
a bonus awarding means capable of executing a bonus awarding mode (opening/closing execution mode) for awarding a bonus to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the bonus awarding condition;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (fixed suggestion effect) which is an effect suggesting that the predetermined information has not been changed;
A gaming machine comprising:
The processing execution means is provided with a means for setting the suggested performance execution means to a state in which execution of the suggested performance is impossible (a fixed suggested performance execution permission flag is turned OFF) when the state determination means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage) is present.

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determining means determines that it is in the first state, the first process is executed, and if it is determined that it is in the second state, the first process is executed. Since the apparatus includes a process execution means for executing the second process, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed depending on the state of the displacement means.

In addition, in game halls where multiple gaming machines are installed on island equipment, and where the island power switch of the island equipment starts and stops power supply to the multiple gaming machines at the same time, the gaming machines If the power supply is cut off or started by operating the individual displacement means (power switch 85a), there is a high possibility that the prescribed information has been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day). .

According to this feature, the process execution means includes a means for setting a state in which execution of a suggested performance by the suggested performance execution means is not possible when the state determination means determines that the first state is present. Therefore, when the state determination means determines that the first state is present (when the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage is determined to be OFF), that is, when the previous power outage occurred due to operation of the displacement means (power switch 85a), the suggested performance will not be executed in the gaming machine after the next start-up. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player mistakenly believes that the specified information of the gaming machine has not been changed and is left unchanged because the suggested performance is executed in the gaming machine, even though the specified information has actually been changed since the previous day (or previous business day).

<Feature rD group>
The group of features rD is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 1 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rD1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) movable between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
a state determining means capable of determining the state of the displacement means;
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the first state (the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power cut), the first process is executed. , processing execution means for executing the second process when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power cut was the ON state);
A movable means (movable part 99 for performance) that can move within a predetermined range;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the power is cut off under the first condition (when the power is cut off with the power switch 85a in the OFF state), the movable means is positioned at a predetermined position (origin position),
When the power is cut off under the second condition (when the power is cut off while the power switch 85a is in the ON state), the movable means is configured to be located at a specific position (maximum position) different from the predetermined position. A gaming machine with special features.

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, the state determination means executes a first process if it determines that the state is a first state, and executes a second process if it determines that the state is a second state, so that the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the state of the displacement means.

And according to this feature, when the power is cut off under the first condition, the movable means is configured to be located at a predetermined position, and when the power is cut off under the second condition, the movable means is configured to be located at a specific position different from the predetermined position. Therefore, the manager of the amusement hall, etc., can easily check whether the displacement means has been determined to be in the first state or the second state by visually checking whether the movable means is in the predetermined position.

Then, when the manager or the like notices that the displacement means has been determined to be in the second state, he or she can carry out an operation corresponding to the fact that the displacement means has been determined to be in the second state in the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall where the island power switch of the island equipment starts and stops power supply to multiple game machines all at once, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains in the ON state, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been fraudulently operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as a thief. Therefore, in such a game hall, the game hall manager or the like can temporarily suspend the operation of the game machine and inspect the game machine.

[Feature rD2]
A gaming machine according to feature rD1,
the predetermined position is an origin position which is one end of the predetermined range,
The specific position is the other end of the predetermined range and is the furthest moved position (maximum position) from the origin position.

According to this feature, the predetermined position is the origin position that is one end of the predetermined range, and the specific position is the other end of the predetermined range and the position that has moved the most from the origin position. A manager or the like can easily confirm at a glance whether the movable means is in a predetermined position or a specific position.

<Features Group E>
The group of features rE is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 2 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rE1]
A displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
A state determination means capable of determining a state of the displacement means;
a process execution means for executing a first process when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in a first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was OFF) when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and for executing a second process when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in a second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was ON);
A notification means capable of executing a notification process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The processing execution means is provided with a means for causing the notification means to execute a predetermined notification processing when the state determination means determines that the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage) is reached.

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, the state determination means executes a first process if it determines that the state is a first state, and executes a second process if it determines that the state is a second state, so that the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the state of the displacement means.

And, according to this feature, the process execution means includes means for causing the notification means to execute a predetermined notification process when the state determination means determines that the second state is in place, so that the manager of the gaming machine or the like can be made aware that the displacement means has been determined to be in the second state. As a result, the manager or the like can carry out work corresponding to the determination that the displacement means is in the second state in the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall where the island power switch of the island equipment starts and stops power supply to multiple game machines all at once, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains in the ON state, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been fraudulently operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as a thief. Therefore, in such a game hall, the game hall manager or the like can temporarily suspend the operation of the game machine and inspect the game machine.

<Features rF group>
The group of features rF is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 3 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rF1]
A displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
A state determination means capable of determining a state of the displacement means;
a process execution means for executing a first process when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in a first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was OFF) when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and for executing a second process when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in a second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was ON);
An information output means (external output terminal) capable of outputting information to an external device (hall computer);
A gaming machine comprising:
The processing execution means is provided with a means for causing the information output means to output predetermined information when the state determination means determines that the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage) is reached.

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, the state determination means executes a first process if it determines that the state is a first state, and executes a second process if it determines that the state is a second state, so that the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the state of the displacement means.

And according to this feature, the process execution means includes means for causing the information output means to output predetermined information when the state determination means determines that the game machine is in the second state, so that the manager of the game machine or the like can be made aware that the game machine has determined that the game machine's displacement means is in the second state. As a result, the manager can carry out an operation corresponding to the game machine's displacement means being determined to be in the second state.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall where the island power switch of the island equipment starts and stops power supply to multiple game machines all at once, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains in the ON state, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been fraudulently operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as a thief. Therefore, in such a game hall, the game hall manager or the like can temporarily suspend the operation of the game machine and inspect the game machine.

<Characteristic rG group>
The feature rG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 4 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rG1]
A displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
A state determination means capable of determining a state of the displacement means;
a process execution means for executing a first process when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in a first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was OFF) when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and for executing a second process when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in a second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was ON);
A gaming machine comprising:
The processing execution means is provided with a means for displacing the displacement means (power switch 85a) to the first position (OFF position) when the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was in the ON state).

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, the state determination means executes a first process if it determines that the state is a first state, and executes a second process if it determines that the state is a second state, so that the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the state of the displacement means.

According to this feature, the processing execution means includes means for displacing the displacement means to the first position when the state determining means determines that the second state is the second state. If it is determined that there is, the displacement means is displaced to the first position, and the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality in which the displacement means is determined to be in the second state.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall where the island power switch of the island equipment starts and stops power supply to multiple game machines all at once, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains in the ON state, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been fraudulently operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as a thief. According to this feature, if the state of the displacement means (power switch 85a) at the time of the previous power cut was an abnormal ON state, the displacement means (power switch 85a) is forced to turn on at the next startup. The gaming machine is moved to the 1 position (OFF state), and the power supply to the gaming machine is forcibly cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played on the gaming machine in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality.

<Characteristics of H group>
The group of features rH is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth modification of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rH1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) movable between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
a state determining means capable of determining the state of the displacement means;
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the first state (the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power cut), the first process is executed. , processing execution means for executing the second process when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power cut was the ON state);
an image display means capable of displaying an image;
A gaming machine comprising:
The processing execution means displays a predetermined image (startup demonstration image) when the state determination means determines that the power switch 85a is in the first state (the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power cut). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying on the means.

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determining means determines that it is in the first state, the first process is executed, and if it is determined that it is in the second state, the first process is executed. Since the apparatus includes a process execution means for executing the second process, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed depending on the state of the displacement means.

According to this feature, the processing execution means includes means for displaying a predetermined image on the image display means when the state determination means determines that the first state is present, so that the game hall manager or the like can By checking whether a predetermined image is displayed on the image display means, it is possible to check whether the displacement means is determined to be in the first state or the second state. .

Then, when the manager or the like notices that the displacement means has been determined to be in the second state, he or she can carry out an operation corresponding to the fact that the displacement means has been determined to be in the second state in the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall where the island power switch of the island equipment starts and stops power supply to multiple game machines all at once, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains in the ON state, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been fraudulently operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as a thief. Therefore, in such a game hall, the game hall manager or the like can temporarily suspend the operation of the game machine and inspect the game machine.

<Feature group I>
The group of features rI is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 6 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rI1]
A displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
A state determination means capable of determining a state of the displacement means;
a process execution means for executing a first process when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in a first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was OFF) when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and for executing a second process when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in a second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was ON);
A launching means capable of launching a game ball;
a means for enabling the launching of the game ball by the launching means based on a predetermined condition being satisfied within a predetermined period of time after the supply of power is started (a game permission switch being pressed by a manager of the game parlor, etc.) when the processing execution means executes the second processing;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, the state determination means executes a first process if it determines that the state is a first state, and executes a second process if it determines that the state is a second state, so that the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the state of the displacement means.

According to this feature, when the processing execution means executes the second processing, the game ball is fired by the ejection means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition during a predetermined period after the start of power supply. Since the player is provided with a means for enabling the firing of If the predetermined condition is satisfied, it becomes possible to play a game on the gaming machine. On the other hand, if the state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the second state, and a predetermined condition is not satisfied within a predetermined period after power supply is started, the gaming machine Since the process that allows the game ball to be fired is not executed, the player cannot play the game at the game machine. Therefore, while preventing games from being played on the gaming machine in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that has been determined to be the second state by the state determining means, the game can be played when the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated. If the manager or the like of the hall recognizes this and the manager or the like satisfies the predetermined condition, the player will be able to play the game at the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in an amusement hall that does not simultaneously start and stop the supply of power to multiple gaming machines using an island power switch of an island facility, if the state of the displacement means (power switch 85a) remained ON at the time of the previous power outage, it is possible that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or tampered with by an unauthorized person such as a cheater. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in the second state, the process that enables the launch of gaming balls is not executed in the gaming machine, so that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from being played in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality, that is, the state determination means determines that the gaming hall is in the second state. Then, when the manager of the amusement hall recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated and the manager establishes a predetermined condition, the player is able to play on the gaming machine.

<Feature rJ group>
The group of features rJ is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 7 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rJ1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) movable between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
a state determining means capable of determining the state of the displacement means;
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the first state (the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power cut), the first process is executed. , processing execution means for executing the second process when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power cut was the ON state);
Ball entry means (first starting port 33, etc.) into which game balls can enter;
a detection means (ball entry detection sensor) capable of detecting entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
When the processing execution means executes the second processing, a predetermined condition must be satisfied during a predetermined period after the power supply is started (a game permission switch is pressed by a game hall manager, etc.). means for enabling the detecting means to detect the game ball based on
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, the state determination means executes a first process if it determines that the state is a first state, and executes a second process if it determines that the state is a second state, so that the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the state of the displacement means.

According to this feature, when the processing execution means executes the second processing, the game ball is detected by the detection means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied during a predetermined period after the power supply is started. Since the player is provided with a means that enables the detection of If the predetermined condition is met, it becomes possible to play a game on the gaming machine. On the other hand, if the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in the second state, and a predetermined condition is not satisfied within a predetermined period after the power supply is started, the gaming machine Since the processing that enables the detection means to detect the game ball is not executed, the player cannot play the game at the gaming machine. Therefore, while preventing games from being played in the gaming machine in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that has been determined to be the second state by the state determining means, the game can be played when the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated. If the manager or the like of the hall recognizes this and the manager or the like satisfies the predetermined condition, the player will be able to play the game at the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall where the island power switch of the island equipment starts and stops power supply to multiple game machines all at once, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains in the ON state, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been fraudulently operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as a thief. As described above, according to the present feature, when the state determining means determines that the second state is present, the processing that enables the detecting means to detect the game ball in the gaming machine is not executed, so that the state determining means It is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality, which is determined by the means to be in the second state. If the administrator of the gaming hall recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated, and the administrator, etc. satisfies the specified conditions, the player will be able to play at the gaming machine. becomes.

<Characteristic rK group>
The feature rK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 8 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rK1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) movable between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
a state determining means capable of determining the state of the displacement means;
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the first state (the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power cut), the first process is executed. , processing execution means for executing the second process when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power cut was the ON state);
a special information acquisition means capable of acquiring special information;
When the processing execution means executes the second processing, a predetermined condition must be satisfied during a predetermined period after the power supply is started (a game permission switch is pressed by a game hall manager, etc.). means for enabling the special information acquisition means to acquire the special information based on
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, the state determination means executes a first process if it determines that the state is a first state, and executes a second process if it determines that the state is a second state, so that the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the state of the displacement means.

According to this feature, when the processing execution means executes the second processing, the special information acquisition means executes the second processing based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied during a predetermined period after the power supply is started. Since the player is provided with a means that enables the acquisition of special information, even if the state determining means determines that the player is in the second state, the player can obtain the special information for a predetermined period after the power supply is started. If the specified predetermined conditions are satisfied, it becomes possible to play a game on the gaming machine. On the other hand, if the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in the second state, and a predetermined condition is not satisfied within a predetermined period after the power supply is started, the gaming machine Since the process that enables the special information acquisition means to acquire special information is not executed, the player cannot play games on the gaming machine. Therefore, while preventing games from being played in the gaming machine in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that has been determined to be the second state by the state determining means, the game can be played when the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated. If the manager or the like of the hall recognizes this and the manager or the like satisfies the predetermined condition, the player will be able to play the game at the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall where the island power switch of the island equipment starts and stops power supply to multiple game machines all at once, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains in the ON state, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been fraudulently operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as a thief. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determining means determines that the second state is present, the processing that enables the special information acquiring means to acquire special information in the gaming machine is not executed. It is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality, which is determined to be the second state by the state determining means. If the administrator of the gaming hall recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated, and the administrator, etc. satisfies the specified conditions, the player will be able to play at the gaming machine. becomes.

<Feature rL group>
The group of features rL is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth modification of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rL1]
A displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
A state determination means capable of determining a state of the displacement means;
a process execution means for executing a first process when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in a first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was OFF) when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and for executing a second process when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in a second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was ON);
A variable display means capable of executing a variable display of identification information (special pattern);
a means for enabling the variable display means to display a variation of the identification information when the process execution means executes the second process, based on a predetermined condition being satisfied within a predetermined period of time after the supply of power is started (a game permission switch being pressed by a manager of the game parlor, etc.);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determining means determines that it is in the first state, the first process is executed, and if it is determined that it is in the second state, the first process is executed. Since the apparatus includes a process execution means for executing the second process, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be performed depending on the state of the displacement means.

According to this feature, when the processing execution means executes the second processing, the fluctuation display means performs the identification based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied during a predetermined period after the power supply is started. Since the player is provided with a means that enables the execution of a fluctuating display of information, even if the state determining means determines that the player is in the second state, the player can If a predetermined condition is satisfied, it becomes possible to play a game on the gaming machine. On the other hand, if the state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the second state, and a predetermined condition is not satisfied within a predetermined period after power supply is started, the gaming machine Since the processing that enables the variable display means to display the identification information in a variable manner is not executed, the player cannot play the game on the gaming machine. Therefore, while preventing games from being played on the gaming machine in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that has been determined to be the second state by the state determining means, the game can be played when the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated. If the manager or the like of the hall recognizes this and the manager or the like satisfies the predetermined condition, the player will be able to play the game at the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in an amusement hall that does not simultaneously start and stop the supply of power to multiple gaming machines using an island power switch of an island facility, if the state of the displacement means (power switch 85a) remained ON at the time of the previous power outage, it is possible that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or tampered with by an unauthorized person such as a cheater. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in the second state, the processing that enables the variable display means to display the variable display of the identification information is not executed in the gaming machine, so that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from being played in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality, that is, the state determination means has determined that the gaming hall is in the second state. Then, when the manager of the amusement hall recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated and the manager establishes a predetermined condition, the player is able to play on the gaming machine.

<Characteristics of M group>
The group of features rM is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 10 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rM1]
A displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
A state determination means capable of determining a state of the displacement means;
a process execution means for executing a first process when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in a first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was OFF) when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and for executing a second process when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in a second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was ON);
A bonus award determination means capable of executing a bonus award determination which is a determination as to whether or not to award a bonus to a player;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the processing execution means executes the second processing, it is provided with a means for enabling the bonus granting determination means to execute the bonus granting determination based on a predetermined condition being satisfied within a predetermined period of time after the supply of power is started (a game permission switch being pressed by an amusement hall manager, etc.).

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the first state, the first process is executed, and if it is determined that the gaming machine is in the second state, the first process is executed. Since the apparatus includes a process execution means for executing the second process, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be performed depending on the state of the displacement means.

According to this feature, when the processing execution means executes the second processing, the means for enabling the execution of the bonus granting determination by the bonus granting determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition within a predetermined period after the start of the power supply is provided, so that even if the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in the second state, if the predetermined condition is established within a predetermined period after the start of the power supply, the player can play on the gaming machine. On the other hand, if the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in the second state and the predetermined condition is not established within a predetermined period after the start of the power supply, the processing for enabling the execution of the bonus granting determination by the bonus granting determination means is not executed on the gaming machine, so the player cannot play on the gaming machine. Therefore, while preventing the gaming machine from being played in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality, that is, the state determination means has determined that the gaming machine is in the second state, if the manager of the gaming hall, etc., recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated and establishes the predetermined condition, the player can play on the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall where the island power switch of the island equipment starts and stops power supply to multiple game machines all at once, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains in the ON state, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been fraudulently operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as a thief. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determining means determines that the second state is present, the processing that enables the bonus grant determining means to execute the bonus grant determination is not executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality, which is determined to be the second state by the state determining means. If the manager, etc. of the gaming hall recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated, and if the manager, etc. satisfies the specified conditions, the player will be able to play games at the gaming machine. becomes.

<Feature rN group>
The group of features rN is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 11 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rN1]
A displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
A state determination means capable of determining a state of the displacement means;
a process execution means for executing a first process when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in a first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was OFF) when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and for executing a second process when the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in a second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was ON);
A bonus awarding means capable of executing a bonus awarding mode (opening/closing execution mode) for awarding a bonus to a player;
a means for enabling the privilege granting means to execute the privilege granting mode based on a predetermined condition being satisfied within a predetermined period of time after the start of the supply of power (a game permission switch being pressed by a manager of the game parlor or the like) when the process execution means executes the second process;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determining means determines that it is in the first state, the first process is executed, and if it is determined that it is in the second state, the first process is executed. Since the apparatus includes a process execution means for executing the second process, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed depending on the state of the displacement means.

According to this feature, when the process execution means executes the second process, the means for enabling the execution of the bonus granting mode by the bonus granting means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition within a predetermined period after the start of the power supply is provided. Therefore, even if the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in the second state, if the predetermined condition is established within a predetermined period after the start of the power supply, the player can play on the gaming machine. On the other hand, if the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in the second state and the predetermined condition is not established within a predetermined period after the start of the power supply, the process for enabling the execution of the bonus granting mode by the bonus granting means is not executed on the gaming machine, so the player cannot play on the gaming machine. Therefore, while preventing the gaming machine from being played in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality, that is, the state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in the second state, if the manager of the gaming hall or the like recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated and establishes the predetermined condition, the player can play on the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall where the island power switch of the island equipment starts and stops power supply to multiple game machines all at once, the displacement means If the power switch 85a remains in the ON state, there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been fraudulently operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as a thief. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the second state is present, the processing that enables the benefit granting means to execute the benefit granting mode in the gaming machine is not executed. It is possible to prevent a game from being played in the gaming machine in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality, which is determined to be the second state by the state determining means. If the administrator of the gaming hall recognizes that the possibility of an abnormality has been eliminated, and the administrator, etc. satisfies the specified conditions, the player will be able to play at the gaming machine. becomes.

<Feature group rO>
The group of features rO is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 12 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rO1]
A displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
A movable means (movable object for performance 99) that can move within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position);
a first determination means for determining a position of the displacement means when the supply of electric power from an external source is cut off;
a means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position;
A second determination means for determining a position of the movable means when power is supplied to the gaming machine;
a process execution means for executing a first process when the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, and for executing a second process when the movable means is not at the predetermined position;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to this feature, the device is provided with a means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the second position, so that when the displacement means is in the first position when the supply of external power is cut off, the movable means remains in the predetermined position, whereas when the displacement means is in the second position when the supply of external power is cut off, the movable means moves to a position other than the predetermined position. In other words, the position of the displacement means in the gaming machine when the supply of external power is cut off is indicated by the position of the movable means. Therefore, the manager of the gaming hall, etc., can easily confirm the position of the displacement means in the gaming machine when the supply of external power is cut off by visually checking whether the movable means is in the predetermined position or not.

According to this feature, when the second determining means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position, the first process is executed, and when it is determined that the movable means is not in the predetermined position, the second process is executed. Since the execution means is provided, the content of the process to be executed can be switched depending on the position of the displacement means when the supply of power from the outside is cut off. As a result, appropriate processing can be performed depending on the position of the displacement means.

[Features rO2]
The gaming machine according to feature rO1,
A predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance (RTC performance) based on the elapsed time since the gaming machine is started,
The processing execution means executes the processing by the predetermined performance execution means when the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position (the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power cut). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for setting a state in which execution of a predetermined performance is impossible (turning off an RTC performance execution permission flag).

According to this feature, since the predetermined performance execution means is provided that can execute a predetermined performance based on the elapsed time since the gaming machine was started (startup elapsed time), a plurality of gaming machines are installed in the island facility. If a plurality of gaming machines are started all at once (at the same time) by turning on the island power switch of the island equipment in the gaming hall where the island is located, the startup progress of each gaming machine installed in the island equipment. Since the times are the same, it becomes possible to start the predetermined effects all at once (simultaneously).

However, after turning on the island power switch to start up multiple gaming machines installed on the island facility all at once (simultaneously), the displacement of one gaming machine may be performed for the purpose of, for example, changing setting information. The means (power switch 85a) are individually displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and the displacement means (power switch 85a) is again turned to the first position (OFF position). position) to the second position (ON position) and start up, the elapsed start-up time of the first gaming machine may deviate from the elapsed start-up time of other gaming machines installed in the island facility. As a result, a problem arises in that the start timing of a predetermined performance in the one gaming machine is different from that in the other gaming machines. In particular, since it takes about one minute to change the setting information, the one gaming machine whose setting information has been changed will start the specified performance about one minute later than the other gaming machines. become. Generally, the duration of a predetermined effect is about 5 minutes, so the predetermined effect on the one gaming machine whose setting information has been changed may be executed overlappingly with the predetermined effect on the other gaming machine. A problem arises in that the players interfere with each other, causing discomfort to the players.

Therefore, in this feature, the processing execution means includes means for setting the predetermined effect execution means to a state in which it is impossible to execute the predetermined effect when the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position. , the displacement means (power switch 85a) is displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) and the power supply is cut off, and then the displacement means (power switch 85a) is shifted from the first position (OFF position) to the first position (OFF position). When the game machine is started after being displaced from the second position (ON position) to the second position (ON position), the gaming machine is set in a state in which it is unable to execute a predetermined performance. As a result, the predetermined performance is not executed in the one gaming machine started by operating the displacement means (power switch 85a), so the predetermined performance in the one gaming machine is the same as the predetermined performance in the other gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the player from being repeatedly executed in a misaligned manner and causing interference, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

On the other hand, while the displacement means (power switch 85a) of the gaming machine remains in the second position (ON position), the island power switch is displaced from ON to OFF, and the power supply is cut off, and then the island power switch is turned OFF. If the gaming machine is activated by being changed from ON to ON, the gaming machine in question is set to a state where it can execute a predetermined effect, so it is the same (or almost the same) as the other gaming machines installed on the island facility. It becomes possible to execute a predetermined performance at the right timing.

[Features rO3]
The gaming machine according to feature rO1 or feature rO2,
Predetermined information changing means capable of changing predetermined information (setting information) that is information that defines one benefit granting condition from among the plurality of benefit granting conditions;
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
special information acquisition means capable of acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
a benefit award determination means capable of executing a benefit award determination that determines whether the special information satisfies the benefit award conditions corresponding to the predetermined information;
a benefit granting means capable of executing a benefit granting mode (opening/closing execution mode) for granting a benefit to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the benefit granting conditions;
Suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a suggestion performance (deferred suggestion performance) that is a performance suggesting that the predetermined information has not been changed;
Equipped with
The processing execution means executes the processing by the suggestion effect execution means when the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position (the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power cut). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for setting a state in which execution of a suggestive performance is impossible (turning off a deferred suggestive performance execution permission flag).

In a gaming hall where multiple gaming machines are installed on an island facility and the island power switch of the island facility starts and stops power supply to the multiple gaming machines at the same time, the gaming machines are When the power supply is cut off or started by operating the individual displacement means (power switch 85a), there is a high possibility that the predetermined information has been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day).

According to this feature, the processing execution means includes means for setting the suggestive effect execution means to a state in which it is impossible to execute the suggestive effect when the movable means is determined to be in the predetermined position by the second determining means. , when the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position (when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was in the OFF state), that is, when the previous power outage occurred. If this is due to the operation of the displacement means (power switch 85a), the suggested performance will not be executed in the gaming machine after the next startup. Therefore, even though the predetermined information has actually been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day), by executing the suggestion effect on the gaming machine, the player may notice that the predetermined information has been changed on the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the user mistakenly assumes that the information has been left unused.

<Characteristic rP group>
The group of features rP is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 12 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rP1]
A displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
A movable means (movable object for performance 99) that can move within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position);
a first determination means for determining a position of the displacement means when the supply of electric power from an external source is cut off;
a means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position;
A second determination means for determining a position of the movable means when power is supplied to the gaming machine;
a process execution means for executing a first process when the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, and for executing a second process when the movable means is not at the predetermined position;
A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect (RTC effect) based on an elapsed time from the start of the gaming machine;
A gaming machine comprising:
The processing execution means is provided with a means for setting a state in which execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect execution means is impossible (turning OFF an RTC effect execution permission flag) when the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage).

According to this feature, the device is provided with a means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the second position, so that when the displacement means is in the first position when the supply of external power is cut off, the movable means remains in the predetermined position, whereas when the displacement means is in the second position when the supply of external power is cut off, the movable means moves to a position other than the predetermined position. In other words, the position of the displacement means in the gaming machine when the supply of external power is cut off is indicated by the position of the movable means. Therefore, the manager of the gaming hall, etc., can easily confirm the position of the displacement means in the gaming machine when the supply of external power is cut off by visually checking whether the movable means is in the predetermined position or not.

And according to this feature, the device is provided with a process execution means that executes a first process when the second determination means determines that the movable means is in a predetermined position, and executes a second process when the movable means is determined not to be in the predetermined position, so that the content of the process to be executed can be switched depending on the position of the displacement means when the supply of external power is cut off. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed depending on the position of the displacement means.

In addition, according to this feature, since the game machine is equipped with a predetermined effect execution means that can execute a predetermined effect based on the elapsed time after starting up (startup elapsed time), a plurality of game machines can be installed in the island facility. If a plurality of gaming machines are started all at once (simultaneously) by turning on the island power switch of the island equipment in a gaming hall where the island equipment is Since the activation elapsed times are the same, it becomes possible to start the predetermined effects all at once (at the same time).

However, if the island power switch is turned on to start up multiple gaming machines installed on the island equipment all at once (simultaneously), and then the displacement means (power switch 85a) of one gaming machine is individually shifted from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply for the purpose of, for example, changing the setting information, and then the displacement means (power switch 85a) is shifted again from the first position (OFF position) to the second position (ON position) to start up the gaming machine, the elapsed time from start-up of the one gaming machine will differ from the elapsed time from start-up of the other gaming machines installed on the island equipment, resulting in a problem that the timing of the start of the specified performance of the one gaming machine will differ from that of the other gaming machines. In particular, since it takes about one minute to change the setting information, the one gaming machine whose setting information has been changed will start the specified performance about one minute later than the other gaming machines. Generally, the duration of a predetermined effect is about five minutes, so the predetermined effect on the one gaming machine whose setting information has been changed may overlap with and interfere with the predetermined effect on the other gaming machine, causing discomfort to players.

Therefore, in this feature, the processing execution means includes means for setting the predetermined effect execution means to a state in which it is impossible to execute the predetermined effect when the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position. , the displacement means (power switch 85a) is displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position), the supply of power is cut off, and then the displacement means (power switch 85a) is moved to the first position (OFF position). When the game machine is started after being displaced from the second position (ON position) to the second position (ON position), the gaming machine is set in a state in which it is unable to execute a predetermined performance. As a result, the predetermined performance is not executed in the one gaming machine started by operating the displacement means (power switch 85a), so the predetermined performance in the one gaming machine is the same as the predetermined performance in the other gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the player from being repeatedly executed in a misaligned manner and causing interference, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

On the other hand, while the displacement means (power switch 85a) of the gaming machine remains in the second position (ON position), the island power switch is displaced from ON to OFF, and the power supply is cut off, and then the island power switch is turned OFF. If the gaming machine is activated by being changed from ON to ON, the gaming machine in question is set to a state where it can execute a predetermined effect, so it is the same (or almost the same) as the other gaming machines installed on the island facility. It becomes possible to execute a predetermined performance at the right timing.

<Feature rQ group>
The feature rQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 12 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rQ1]
A displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
A movable means (movable object for performance 99) that can move within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position);
a first determination means for determining a position of the displacement means when the supply of electric power from an external source is cut off;
a means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position;
A second determination means for determining a position of the movable means when power is supplied to the gaming machine;
a process execution means for executing a first process when the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, and for executing a second process when the movable means is not at the predetermined position;
a predetermined information changing means for changing predetermined information (setting information) which is information for determining one of a plurality of bonus granting conditions;
A ball entry means capable of entering the game ball;
A special information acquisition means capable of acquiring special information in response to a game ball entering the ball entry means;
a bonus determination means for determining whether the special information satisfies the bonus condition corresponding to the predetermined information;
a bonus awarding means capable of executing a bonus awarding mode (opening/closing execution mode) for awarding a bonus to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the bonus awarding condition;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (fixed suggestion effect) which is an effect suggesting that the predetermined information has not been changed;
A gaming machine comprising:
the processing execution means includes means for setting the suggested performance execution means to a state in which execution of the suggested performance is impossible (turning off a fixed suggested performance execution permission flag) when the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage).

According to this feature, since the movable means is provided with means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the second position, the supply of power from the outside is cut off. When the displacing means is in the first position when the displacement means is in the first position, the movable means remains in the predetermined position, whereas when the external power supply is cut off and the displacing means is in the second position, the movable means remains in the predetermined position. Move to a position other than the specified position. That is, the position of the displacing means in the game machine when the supply of power from the outside is cut off is indicated by the position of the movable means. Therefore, by visually checking whether the movable means is in the specified position, the manager of the game hall can easily determine the position of the displacing means in the gaming machine when the external power supply is cut off. You can check.

And according to this feature, the device is provided with a process execution means that executes a first process when the second determination means determines that the movable means is in a predetermined position, and executes a second process when the movable means is determined not to be in the predetermined position, so that the content of the process to be executed can be switched depending on the position of the displacement means when the supply of external power is cut off. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed depending on the position of the displacement means.

In addition, in an amusement hall where multiple gaming machines are installed on an island facility and the power supply to the multiple gaming machines is started and stopped simultaneously by the island power switch of the island facility, if the power supply to each gaming machine is cut off or started by operating an individual switching means (power switch 85a), there is a high possibility that the specified information has been changed since the previous day (or the previous business day).

According to this feature, the processing execution means includes means for setting the suggestive effect execution means to a state in which it is impossible to execute the suggestive effect when the movable means is determined to be in the predetermined position by the second determining means. , when the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position (when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was in the OFF state), that is, when the previous power outage occurred. If this is due to the operation of the displacement means (power switch 85a), the suggested performance will not be executed in the gaming machine after the next startup. Therefore, even though the predetermined information has actually been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day), by executing the suggestion effect on the gaming machine, the player may notice that the predetermined information has been changed on the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the user mistakenly assumes that the information has been left unused.

<Feature rR group>
The group of features rR is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 13 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rR1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) movable between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
A movable means (movable part 99 for performance) that can move within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position);
first determination means for determining the position of the displacement means when the supply of external power is cut off;
means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position;
a second determining means for determining the position of the movable means when power is supplied to the gaming machine;
If the first determining means determines that the displacing means is at the first position, and the second determining means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, performing a first process; If the first determining means determines that the displacing means is at the second position, and the second determining means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position, a second process is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising an execution means.

According to this feature, since the movable means is provided with means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the second position, the supply of power from the outside is cut off. When the displacing means is in the first position when the displacement means is in the first position, the movable means remains in the predetermined position, whereas when the external power supply is cut off and the displacing means is in the second position, the movable means remains in the predetermined position. Move to a position other than the specified position. Therefore, by visually checking whether the movable means is in the specified position, the manager of the game hall can easily determine the position of the displacing means in the gaming machine when the external power supply is cut off. You can check.

According to this feature, if the first determining means determines that the displacing means is in the first position, and the second determining means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position, the first process is executed. and processing execution means for executing a second process when the first judgment means determines that the displacement means is at the second position and the second judgment means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position. Therefore, the content of the process to be executed can be switched depending on the position of the displacement means when the external power supply is cut off. As a result, appropriate processing can be performed depending on the position of the displacement means. According to this feature, the position of the displacement means when the external power supply is cut off is determined by a dual system of the first determination means and the second determination means, so the determination result is reliable. can improve sex.

[Feature rR2]
The gaming machine according to feature rR1,
When the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position, and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position, a predetermined notification process (see FIG. 325, step Sx4304b2).

According to this feature, the device is provided with an alarm means for executing a predetermined alarm process when the first judgment means judges that the displacement means is in the first position and the second judgment means judges that the movable means is not in the predetermined position, so that the manager of the gaming hall or the like can notice that the gaming machine is in an abnormal state where the judgment results of the first judgment means and the second judgment means are inconsistent, for example, that the gaming machine may have been subjected to unauthorized operation or modification by a dishonest person such as a cheater. The manager or the like can then temporarily suspend operation of the gaming machine and inspect it or the like.

[Feature rR3]
The gaming machine according to feature rR1 or feature rR2,
The notification means is configured to perform a predetermined operation when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position, and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a notification process (abnormality notification process of step Sx4303b2 in FIG. 325).

According to this feature, the notification means includes means for executing a predetermined notification process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position, so that the manager of the gaming hall or the like can notice that the gaming machine is in an abnormal state where the determination results of the first determination means and the second determination means are inconsistent, for example, that the gaming machine may have been subjected to unauthorized operation or modification by a dishonest person such as a cheater. The manager or the like can then temporarily suspend operation of the gaming machine and inspect it or the like.

[Feature rR4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features rR1 to feature rR3,
A predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance (RTC performance) based on the elapsed time since the gaming machine is started,
When the first determining means determines that the displacing means is at the first position, and the second determining means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position (previously When the main control device 60 and the sound emission control device 90 determine that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of power outage is the OFF state), the execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect execution means is disabled. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for setting (turning off an RTC performance execution permission flag).

According to this feature, since the predetermined performance execution means is provided that can execute a predetermined performance based on the elapsed time since the gaming machine was started (startup elapsed time), a plurality of gaming machines are installed in the island facility. If a plurality of gaming machines are started all at once (at the same time) by turning on the island power switch of the island equipment in the gaming hall where the island is located, the startup progress of each gaming machine installed in the island equipment. Since the times are the same, it becomes possible to start the predetermined effects all at once (at the same time).

However, after turning on the island power switch to start up multiple gaming machines installed on the island facility all at once (simultaneously), the displacement of one gaming machine may be performed for the purpose of, for example, changing setting information. The means (power switch 85a) are individually displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and the displacement means (power switch 85a) is again turned to the first position (OFF position). position) to the second position (ON position) and start up, the elapsed start-up time of the first gaming machine may deviate from the elapsed start-up time of other gaming machines installed in the island facility. As a result, a problem arises in that the start timing of a predetermined performance in the one gaming machine is different from that in the other gaming machines. In particular, since it takes about one minute to change the setting information, the one gaming machine whose setting information has been changed will start the specified performance about one minute later than the other gaming machines. become. Generally, the duration of a predetermined effect is about 5 minutes, so the predetermined effect on the one gaming machine whose setting information has been changed may be executed overlappingly with the predetermined effect on the other gaming machine. A problem arises in that the players interfere with each other, causing discomfort to the players.

Therefore, in this feature, the processing execution means performs the predetermined performance when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position, and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position. Since it is provided with means for setting a state in which the execution of a predetermined effect by the execution means is impossible, the displacement means (power switch 85a) is displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) and power is supplied. is cut off, and then the displacement means (power switch 85a) is displaced from the first position (OFF position) to the second position (ON position) and activated, the gaming machine becomes unable to execute the prescribed performance. The state will be set. As a result, the predetermined performance is not executed in the one gaming machine started by operating the displacement means (power switch 85a), so the predetermined performance in the one gaming machine is the same as the predetermined performance in the other gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the player from being repeatedly executed in a misaligned manner and causing interference, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

On the other hand, while the displacement means (power switch 85a) of the gaming machine remains in the second position (ON position), the island power switch is displaced from ON to OFF, and the power supply is cut off, and then the island power switch is turned OFF. If the gaming machine is activated by being changed from ON to ON, the gaming machine in question is set to a state where it can execute a predetermined effect, so it is the same (or almost the same) as the other gaming machines installed on the island facility. It becomes possible to execute a predetermined performance at the right timing.

[Feature rR5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features rR1 to rR4,
a predetermined information changing means for changing predetermined information (setting information) which is information for determining one of a plurality of bonus granting conditions;
A ball entry means capable of entering the game ball;
A special information acquisition means capable of acquiring special information in response to a game ball entering the ball entry means;
a bonus determination means for determining whether the special information satisfies the bonus condition corresponding to the predetermined information;
a bonus awarding means capable of executing a bonus awarding mode (opening/closing execution mode) for awarding a bonus to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the bonus awarding condition;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (fixed suggestion effect) which is an effect suggesting that the predetermined information has not been changed;
Equipped with
The processing execution means is provided with a means for setting the suggestion performance execution means to a state in which execution of the suggestion performance is impossible (turning off a fixed suggestion performance execution permission flag) when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the specified position (when the main control unit 60 and the sound and light emission control unit 90 determine that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was in the OFF state).

In a gaming hall where multiple gaming machines are installed on an island facility, and the island power switch of the island facility starts and stops power supply to the multiple gaming machines at the same time, the gaming machines are individually installed. When power supply is cut off or started by operating the displacement means (power switch 85a), there is a high possibility that the predetermined information has been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day).

According to this feature, the processing execution means includes a means for setting a state in which the execution of a suggested performance by the suggested performance execution means is impossible when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position. Therefore, when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position (when the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage is determined to be OFF), that is, when the previous power outage was caused by the operation of the displacement means (power switch 85a), the suggested performance will not be executed in the gaming machine after the next start. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player mistakenly believes that the specified information in the gaming machine is left unchanged because the suggested performance is executed in the gaming machine, even though the specified information has actually been changed since the previous day (or the previous business day).

<Characteristic rS group>
The feature rS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 13 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rS1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) movable between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
A movable means (movable part 99 for performance) that can move within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position);
first determination means for determining the position of the displacement means when the supply of external power is cut off;
means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position;
a second determining means for determining the position of the movable means when power is supplied to the gaming machine;
If the first determining means determines that the displacing means is at the first position, and the second determining means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, performing a first process; If the first determining means determines that the displacing means is at the second position, and the second determining means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position, a second process is executed. execution means and
When the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position, and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position, a predetermined notification process (see FIG. 325 step Sx4304b2);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the machine is provided with a means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the second position, so that when the external power supply is cut off and the displacement means is in the first position, the movable means remains in the predetermined position, whereas when the external power supply is cut off and the displacement means is in the second position, the movable means moves to a position other than the predetermined position. Therefore, the manager of the gaming hall, etc., can easily confirm the position of the displacement means in the gaming machine when the external power supply is cut off by visually checking whether the movable means is in the predetermined position.

According to this feature, if the first determining means determines that the displacing means is in the first position and the second determining means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position, the first process is executed. and processing execution means for executing a second process when the first judgment means determines that the displacement means is at the second position and the second judgment means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position. Therefore, the content of the process to be executed can be switched depending on the position of the displacement means when the external power supply is cut off. As a result, appropriate processing can be performed depending on the position of the displacement means. According to this feature, since the position of the displacement means when the external power supply is cut off is determined by a dual system of the first determination means and the second determination means, the determination result is reliable. can improve sex.

According to this feature, when the first determining means determines that the displacing means is at the first position and the second determining means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position, the predetermined notification process is performed. Since the gaming hall manager etc. is equipped with a notification means for executing the above, it is possible for the manager of the game hall to detect that the gaming machine is in an abnormal state where the judgment results of the first judgment means and the second judgment means contradict each other. It is possible to realize that the game machine may have been fraudulently operated or modified by an unauthorized person. Then, the administrator or the like can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

<Characteristic rT group>
The feature rT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 13 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rT1]
A displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
A movable means (movable object for performance 99) that can move within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position);
a first determination means for determining a position of the displacement means when the supply of electric power from an external source is cut off;
a means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position;
A second determination means for determining a position of the movable means when power is supplied to the gaming machine;
a process execution means for executing a first process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, and for executing a second process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position;
a notification means for executing a predetermined notification process (an abnormality notification process of step Sx4303b2 in FIG. 325) when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to this feature, the machine is provided with a means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the second position, so that if the displacement means is in the first position when the external power supply is cut off, the movable means remains in the predetermined position, whereas if the displacement means is in the second position when the external power supply is cut off, the movable means moves to a position other than the predetermined position. Therefore, the manager of the gaming hall, etc., can easily confirm the position of the displacement means in the gaming machine when the external power supply is cut off by visually checking whether the movable means is in the predetermined position.

According to this feature, the device includes a process execution means that executes a first process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in a predetermined position, and executes a second process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not in the predetermined position. This makes it possible to switch the content of the process to be executed depending on the position of the displacement means when the supply of external power is cut off. As a result, it is possible to execute an appropriate process depending on the position of the displacement means. According to this feature, the position of the displacement means when the supply of external power is cut off is determined by a dual system of the first determination means and the second determination means, thereby improving the reliability of the determination result.

According to this feature, when the first determining means determines that the displacing means is in the second position, and the second determining means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position, the notifying means: Since it is equipped with a means for executing a predetermined notification process, the administrator of the gaming hall can detect that the gaming machine is in an abnormal state where the judgment results of the first judgment means and the second judgment means are contradictory, for example, It is possible to realize that there is a possibility that the game machine has been fraudulently operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as a fraudster. Then, the administrator or the like can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

<Characteristic rU group>
The feature rU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 13 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rU1]
A displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
A movable means (movable object for performance 99) that can move within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position);
a first determination means for determining a position of the displacement means when the supply of electric power from an external source is cut off;
a means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position;
A second determination means for determining a position of the movable means when power is supplied to the gaming machine;
a process execution means for executing a first process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, and for executing a second process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position;
A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect (RTC effect) based on an elapsed time from the start of the gaming machine;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine is characterized in that the processing execution means includes means for setting the execution of the predetermined performance by the predetermined performance execution means to a state in which it is impossible to execute the predetermined performance (turning OFF an RTC performance execution permission flag) when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position (when the main control unit 60 and the sound and light emission control unit 90 determine that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power outage was in the OFF state).

According to this feature, the machine is provided with a means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the second position, so that when the external power supply is cut off and the displacement means is in the first position, the movable means remains in the predetermined position, whereas when the external power supply is cut off and the displacement means is in the second position, the movable means moves to a position other than the predetermined position. Therefore, the manager of the gaming hall, etc., can easily confirm the position of the displacement means in the gaming machine when the external power supply is cut off by visually checking whether the movable means is in the predetermined position.

According to this feature, if the first determining means determines that the displacing means is in the first position, and the second determining means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position, the first process is executed. and processing execution means for executing a second process when the first judgment means determines that the displacement means is at the second position and the second judgment means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position. Therefore, the content of the process to be executed can be switched depending on the position of the displacement means when the external power supply is cut off. As a result, appropriate processing can be performed depending on the position of the displacement means. According to this feature, the position of the displacement means when the external power supply is cut off is determined by a dual system of the first determination means and the second determination means, so the determination result is reliable. can improve sex.

In addition, according to this feature, the gaming machine is provided with a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance based on the time that has elapsed since the gaming machine was started (start-up elapsed time). Therefore, in an amusement hall where multiple gaming machines are installed on an island facility, when the multiple gaming machines are started up all at once (simultaneously) by turning on the island power switch of the island facility, the start-up elapsed time of each gaming machine installed on the island facility will be the same, so it will be possible to start a predetermined performance all at once (simultaneously).

However, if the island power switch is turned on to start up multiple gaming machines installed on the island equipment all at once (simultaneously), and then the shifting means (power switch 85a) of one gaming machine is individually shifted from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply for the purpose of, for example, changing the setting information, and then the shifting means (power switch 85a) is shifted from the first position (OFF position) to the second position (ON position) again to start up the gaming machine, the elapsed time from start-up of the one gaming machine will differ from the elapsed time from start-up of the other gaming machines installed on the island equipment, resulting in a problem that the timing of the start of the specified performance of the one gaming machine will differ from that of the other gaming machines. In particular, since it takes about one minute to change the setting information, the one gaming machine whose setting information has been changed will start the specified performance about one minute later than the other gaming machines. Generally, the duration of a predetermined effect is about five minutes, so the predetermined effect on the one gaming machine whose setting information has been changed may overlap with and interfere with the predetermined effect on the other gaming machine, causing discomfort to players.

In this feature, the process execution means includes a means for setting a state in which the predetermined performance cannot be executed by the predetermined performance execution means when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position. Therefore, when the displacement means (power switch 85a) is displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and then the displacement means (power switch 85a) is displaced from the first position (OFF position) to the second position (ON position) to start up, the gaming machine is set to a state in which the predetermined performance cannot be executed. As a result, the predetermined performance is not executed in the one gaming machine that is started up by operating the displacement means (power switch 85a), so it is possible to prevent the predetermined performance in the one gaming machine from overlapping with the predetermined performance in the other gaming machine and interfering with each other in a shifted state, and to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable.

On the other hand, if the power supply is cut off by the island power switch being shifted from ON to OFF while the displacement means (power switch 85a) of the gaming machine remains in the second position (ON position), and the island power switch is then shifted from OFF to ON to start up the gaming machine, the gaming machine is set to a state in which it can execute a predetermined performance, and therefore it is possible to execute a predetermined performance at the same (or approximately the same) timing as other gaming machines installed on the island equipment.

<Characteristic rV group>
The feature rV group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 13 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rV1]
a displacement means (power switch 85a) movable between a first position (OFF position) and a second position (ON position);
A movable means (movable part 99 for performance) that can move within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position);
first determination means for determining the position of the displacement means when the supply of external power is cut off;
means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is at the second position;
a second determining means for determining the position of the movable means when power is supplied to the gaming machine;
If the first determining means determines that the displacing means is at the first position, and the second determining means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, performing a first process; If the first determining means determines that the displacing means is at the second position, and the second determining means determines that the movable means is not at the predetermined position, a second process is executed. execution means and
Predetermined information changing means capable of changing predetermined information (setting information) that is information that defines one benefit granting condition from among the plurality of benefit granting conditions;
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
special information acquisition means capable of acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
a benefit award determination means capable of executing a benefit award determination that determines whether the special information satisfies the benefit award conditions corresponding to the predetermined information;
a benefit granting means capable of executing a benefit granting mode (opening/closing execution mode) for granting a benefit to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the benefit granting conditions;
Suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a suggestion performance (deferred suggestion performance) that is a performance suggesting that the predetermined information has not been changed;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the first determining means determines that the displacing means is at the first position, and the second determining means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position (previously (when the main controller 60 and the sound emission control device 90 determine that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the power cut is the OFF state), the suggestive effect execution means is disabled from executing the suggestive effect. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for setting (turning off a deferral suggestion performance execution permission flag).

According to this feature, since the movable means is provided with means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the second position, the supply of power from the outside is cut off. When the displacing means is in the first position when the displacement means is in the first position, the movable means remains in the predetermined position, whereas when the external power supply is cut off and the displacing means is in the second position, the movable means remains in the predetermined position. Move to a position other than the specified position. Therefore, by visually checking whether the movable means is in the specified position, the game hall manager etc. can easily determine the position of the displacing means in the gaming machine when the external power supply is cut off. You can check.

According to this feature, the device includes a process execution means that executes a first process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in a first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in a predetermined position, and executes a second process when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in a second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not in a predetermined position. This makes it possible to switch the content of the process to be executed depending on the position of the displacement means when the supply of external power is cut off. As a result, it is possible to execute an appropriate process depending on the position of the displacement means. According to this feature, the position of the displacement means when the supply of external power is cut off is determined by a dual system of the first determination means and the second determination means, thereby improving the reliability of the determination result.

In addition, in game halls where multiple gaming machines are installed on island equipment, and where the island power switch of the island equipment starts and stops power supply to the multiple gaming machines at the same time, the gaming machines If the power supply is cut off or started by operating the individual displacement means (power switch 85a), there is a high possibility that the prescribed information has been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day). .

According to this feature, when the first determining means determines that the displacing means is at the first position, and the second determining means determines that the movable means is at the predetermined position, the processing execution means performs the suggestive performance. Since the device includes a means for setting the execution means to a state in which it is impossible to execute the suggestion effect, the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position, and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in a predetermined position. (If it is determined that the power switch 85a was in the OFF state at the time of the previous power outage), that is, the previous power outage was caused by the operation of the displacement means (power switch 85a). In this case, the suggestion effect will not be executed in the gaming machine after the next startup. Therefore, even though the predetermined information has actually been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day), by executing the suggestion effect on the gaming machine, the player may notice that the predetermined information has been changed on the gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the user mistakenly assumes that the information has been left unused.

<Features Group A>
The group of features sA is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sA1]
A circulation area (game area PA) in which game balls are circulated;
A first passage (main passage portion 210) provided in the circulation area for circulating game balls;
A second passage (first branch passage portion 220) which is provided in the circulation area and is a passage for circulating game balls and branches off from the middle of the first passage;
A first ball entry means (right-side first starting hole 44) provided in the second passage and through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) into which the game ball circulating through the first passage can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information in response to a game ball entering each of a plurality of ball entry means including at least the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the determination means having, as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 351 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
In a gaming machine comprising:
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) is provided at a branch point of the first passage to the second passage and assists the game ball to enter the second passage;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state, which is a state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second passage, and a second state, which is a state that makes it possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second passage;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second passage than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
A judgment mode switching means (a game ball distribution device 240, a falling hole 252, an MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and a game ball distribution control process of FIG. 380 executed by the MPU 62) capable of switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode with a predetermined probability when a game ball enters the first ball entry means in the second passage;
Equipped with
The control means
A means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times the game has been played after the control mode has transitioned from the first control mode to the second control mode has reached a predetermined number (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the first fluctuation stop processing of FIG. 360 executed by the MPU 62).
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature sA1, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball is more likely to enter the second passage than when the control mode is the first control mode, and the game ball enters the first ball entry means with a high probability. However, when the control mode is the second control mode, if the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the judgment mode switching means switches the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode with a predetermined probability, which may be disadvantageous to the player. Then, when the control mode is the second control mode and the number of game plays after the transition to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number, the control mode is switched from the second control mode to the first control mode. When the control mode is the first control mode, the game ball is more likely to circulate downstream of the branch point to the second passage in the first passage, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means with a high probability. In this case, unlike the second passage side, the judgment mode is not switched from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode, so the game rounds that are executed in response to the game ball entering the second ball entry means can be played continuously without the possibility of putting the player in a disadvantageous state.

As a result, according to feature sA1, when the control mode is the second control mode, the player can be given a sense of urgency that the judgment mode will not be switched from the second judgment mode to the unfavorable first judgment mode by the judgment mode switching means (i.e., he or she will not fall) during the period until the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number, and a sense of anticipation that the number of game rounds executed will reach a predetermined number before the judgment mode is switched to the first judgment mode by the judgment mode switching means. Then, when the number of game rounds reaches a predetermined number without the judgment mode being switched to the first judgment mode by the judgment mode switching means, the player can be given a sense of relief that he can transition to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which game rounds triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entry means can be played continuously without the risk of the judgment mode being switched to the first judgment mode and being put in a disadvantageous state, and a sense of expectation that the special information acquired in response to the game ball entering the second ball entry means will soon satisfy the predetermined condition while the control mode is the second control mode by continuously playing game rounds triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. In this way, according to the feature sA1, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as expectation, tension, and relief.

Conventional pachinko machines include loop-type pachinko machines and ST-type pachinko machines. The loop-type pachinko machine is a machine in which the high probability mode continues until the next jackpot is won in the winning lottery. The ST-type pachinko machine is a machine in which the number of times of play in the high probability mode is limited. The loop-type pachinko machine can give the player a sense of urgency that the jackpot will be won in the winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won will be a normal jackpot. On the other hand, the ST-type pachinko machine can give the player a sense of urgency that the jackpot will not be won within the limited number of times. In contrast, according to the feature sA1, as described above, in addition to the sense of urgency, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the number of times of play will reach a predetermined number before the judgment mode is switched to the first judgment mode by the judgment mode switching means. In addition, when the number of game rounds executed reaches a predetermined number without the judgment mode being switched to the first judgment mode by the judgment mode switching means, the player can be given a sense of relief that he or she can transition to a special state (for example, an invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which game rounds executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means can be performed consecutively without the risk of the judgment mode being switched to the first judgment mode and being placed in an unfavorable state, and a sense of expectation that the special information acquired in response to the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means will soon satisfy the predetermined condition while the control mode is in the second control mode by continuously executing game rounds executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means. Such a sense of relief and expectation are effects unique to the feature sA1, and can increase the interest of the game.

[Feature sA2]
The gaming machine according to feature sA1,
The determination mode switching means includes:
a third passage (second branch passage section 230) that is provided in the distribution area and is a passage for distributing game balls, and that branches from the middle of the second passage;
a third ball entry means (falling port 252) into which game balls that have circulated through the third passage can enter;
Determination mode control means capable of switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode upon entry of a game ball into the third ball entry means;
A game ball sorting means (gaming ball sorting means) provided at a branching point of the second passageway to the third passageway and distributing game balls between a downstream part of the second passageway from the branching point and the third passageway; sorting device 240);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature sA2, a part of the judgment mode switching means can be configured by a hardware configuration including the third passage and the game ball distribution means. Therefore, by configuring the game ball distribution means so that the player can see from the outside how the game balls are distributed by the game ball distribution means, a sense of tension can be given to the player that he or she may suffer a disadvantage by switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode. As a result, the interest in the game can be further increased.

[Feature A3]
A gaming machine according to feature sA2,
The game ball distribution means includes:
The gaming machine is characterized in that the probability of diverting the gaming ball to the third passage is lower than the probability of diverting the gaming ball to a downstream portion of the branch point in the second passage.

According to feature sA3, the probability that the determination mode switches from the second determination mode to the first determination mode can be set to be relatively low. For this reason, the probability that the player will suffer a disadvantage can be made relatively low.

[Feature A4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features sA1 to sA3,
A reward granting means for granting a reward is provided,
The reward granting means includes:
A bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus when the special information corresponding to the game round to be played satisfies the predetermined condition (when a jackpot is won);
A special condition establishment bonus granting means for granting a bonus when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition (when a special small win is won);
Equipped with
The control means
a means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the special information corresponding to a game round to be executed satisfies the specific condition while the control mode is the second control mode and the judgment mode is the second judgment mode.

According to feature sA4, when the control mode is the second control mode and the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the control mode is transitioned from the second control mode to the first control mode not only when the number of game times executed after the control mode transitions from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number, but also when the special information corresponding to the game times executed satisfies a specific condition. As described above, when the control mode is the first control mode, game times executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means can be performed consecutively without the possibility of placing the player in a disadvantageous state. Therefore, feature sA4 can give the player an even greater sense of expectation of transitioning to the special state described above, and as a result, the interest in the game can be further increased.

[Feature A5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features sA1 to sA4,
A fourth ball entry means (through gate 35) is provided above the ball entry port of the first passage and allows game balls to enter the fourth ball entry means (through gate 35);
The state transition means includes:
a means for conducting a predetermined lottery when the ball passes through the fourth ball entry means;
a means for transitioning a state of the assistance means to the second state when a result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the control mode is the second control mode, a gaming ball that enters the fourth ball entry means (through gate 35) is configured to circulate from the first passage to the second passage.

According to feature sA5, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball entering the fourth ball entering means is configured to flow from the first passage to the second passage. In one passage, game balls do not circulate downstream of the branch point to the second passage. For this reason, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball that has entered the fourth ball entry means can always be made to enter the first ball entry means. For this reason, it is possible to improve the precision with which the game ball enters the first ball entry means.

[Feature sA6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features sA1 to sA5,
First special information that is the special information acquired when a game ball enters the first ball entrance means, and the special information acquired when a game ball enters the second ball entrance means. and second special information,
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round that is a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the first special information, and a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information. means for executing in parallel a second special information game round;
When the time of the second special information game is defined as the second gaming time, the second gaming time in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode. means for setting a time longer than a time that can be set as the second gaming time in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature sA6, when the control mode is the first control mode and the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, i.e., in the normal state, if the player shoots a game ball toward the ball entrance of the first passage, the game ball can be made to enter the second ball entrance means. However, according to feature sA6, since the time of the second special information game round when the control mode is the first control mode and the judgment mode is the first judgment mode is set to a relatively long time, it is possible to suppress the judgment by the judgment means triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entrance means from being repeatedly executed in a short period of time. As a result, according to feature sA6, it is possible to make the player give up shooting a game ball aimed at the second ball entrance means when the control mode is the first control mode and the judgment mode is the first judgment mode.

<Features sB group>
The feature sB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sB1]
A circulation area (game area PA) in which game balls are circulated;
A first passage (main passage portion 210) provided in the circulation area for circulating game balls;
A second passage (first branch passage portion 220) which is provided in the circulation area and is a passage for circulating game balls and branches off from the middle of the first passage;
A first ball entry means (right-side first starting hole 44) provided in the second passage and through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) into which the game ball circulating through the first passage can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information in response to a game ball entering each of a plurality of ball entry means including at least the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the determination means having, as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 351 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
In a gaming machine comprising:
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) is provided at a branch point of the first passage to the second passage and assists the game ball to enter the second passage;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state, which is a state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second passage, and a second state, which is a state that makes it possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second passage;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second passage than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
A judgment mode switching means (a game ball distribution device 240, a falling hole 252, an MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and a game ball distribution control process of FIG. 380 executed by the MPU 62) capable of switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode with a predetermined probability when a game ball enters the first ball entry means in the second passage;
A reward granting means for granting a reward;
Equipped with
The reward granting means includes:
A bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus when the special information corresponding to the game round to be played satisfies the predetermined condition (when a jackpot is won);
A special condition establishment bonus granting means for granting a bonus when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition (when a special small win is won);
Equipped with
The control means
a means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the special information corresponding to a game round to be executed satisfies the specific condition while the control mode is the second control mode and the judgment mode is the second judgment mode.

According to feature sB1, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball enters the second passage more easily than when the control mode is the first control mode, and there is a high probability that the game ball enters the first passage. The ball enters the ball means. However, when the control mode is the second control mode, when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, the judgment mode is switched from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode with a predetermined probability. Since the mode is switched to the determination mode, there is a possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous situation. Then, when the control mode is the second control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition, the control mode is set to the second control mode. to the first control mode. When the control mode is the first control mode, the game balls tend to flow downstream from the branching point to the second path in the first path, and the game balls enter the second ball entering means with a high probability. do. In this case, since the determination mode is not switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode as in the case of the second passage, the player can enter the second passage without the possibility of being disadvantageous. Game rounds that are triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball means can be played continuously. Therefore, according to feature sB1, in a state where the control mode is the second control mode, the execution is executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means without the possibility of being disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation of transitioning to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which he can play consecutive game rounds. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature B2]
A gaming machine according to feature sB1,
The determination mode switching means
A third passage (second branch passage portion 230) is provided in the circulation area and is a passage for circulating game balls, and branches off from the middle of the second passage;
A third ball entry means (a falling opening 252) through which the game ball circulating through the third passage can enter;
A judgment mode control means for switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode when a game ball enters the third ball entry means;
A game ball distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) is provided at a branch point of the second passage to the third passage, and distributes game balls between a downstream portion of the branch point of the second passage and the third passage;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature sB2, a part of the determination mode switching means can be configured by a hardware configuration including the third passage and the game ball sorting means. For this reason, by configuring the player to be able to see how the game ball sorting means distributes the game balls from the outside, the player is disadvantaged by switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as if the player is afraid that the player will lose the game. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature B3]
A gaming machine according to feature sB2,
The game ball distribution means includes:
The gaming machine, wherein the probability of distributing the gaming ball to the third passage is lower than the probability of distributing the gaming ball to a downstream portion of the branch point in the second passage.

According to feature sB3, the probability that the determination mode switches from the second determination mode to the first determination mode can be set to be relatively low. For this reason, the probability that the player will suffer a disadvantage can be made relatively low.

[Features sB4]
The gaming machine described in any one of features sB1 to feature sB3,
The control means includes:
When the number of executions of the game after the control mode is changed from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control mode. Means for transitioning to the mode (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the first fluctuation stop process in FIG. 360 executed by the MPU 62)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature sB4, when the control mode is the second control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode, the control The control mode is also transferred from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times after the mode is transferred from the first control mode to the second control mode. As explained above, when the control mode is the first control mode, the game ball is executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, without the possibility of being disadvantageous to the player. Games can be played continuously. Therefore, according to feature sB4, it is possible to further give the player a sense of anticipation of transitioning to the special state described above, and as a result, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

[Features sB5]
The gaming machine described in any one of Features sB1 to Features sB4,
A fourth ball entry means (through gate 35) is provided above the ball entrance of the first passage and allows game balls to enter;
The state transition means is
Means for performing a predetermined lottery based on the passing of the fourth ball entering means;
means for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means to the second state when the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result;
Equipped with
When the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball that enters the fourth ball entry means (through gate 35) is configured to flow from the first passage to the second passage. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature sB5, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball entering the fourth ball entering means is configured to flow from the first passage to the second passage. In one passage, game balls do not circulate downstream of the branch point to the second passage. For this reason, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball that has entered the fourth ball entry means can always be made to enter the first ball entry means. For this reason, it is possible to improve the precision with which the game ball enters the first ball entry means.

[Feature sB6]
The gaming machine described in any one of Features sB1 to Features sB5,
First special information that is the special information acquired when a game ball enters the first ball entrance means, and the special information acquired when a game ball enters the second ball entrance means. and second special information,
The game round execution means is
A first special information game round that is a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the first special information, and a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information. means for executing in parallel a second special information game round;
When the time of the second special information game is defined as the second gaming time, the second gaming time in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode. means for setting a time longer than a time that can be set as the second gaming time in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature sB6, when the control mode is the first control mode and the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, i.e., in the normal state, if the player shoots a game ball toward the ball entrance of the first passage, the game ball can be made to enter the second ball entrance means. However, according to feature sB6, since the time of the second special information game round when the control mode is the first control mode and the judgment mode is the first judgment mode is set to a relatively long time, it is possible to suppress repeated execution of judgments by the judgment means in a short period of time triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entrance means. As a result, according to feature sB6, it is possible to cause the player to give up shooting a game ball aimed at the second ball entrance means when the control mode is the first control mode and the judgment mode is the first judgment mode.

<Characteristic sC group>
The feature sC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sC1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) where game balls are distributed,
a first passageway (main passageway section 210) provided in the distribution area and for distributing game balls;
a second passageway (first branch passageway section 220) that is provided in the distribution area and is a passageway for distributing game balls, and that branches off from the middle of the first passageway;
a first ball entry means (right side first starting port 44) provided in the second passage and into which a game ball can enter;
a second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which game balls that have circulated through the first passage can enter;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon entry of a game ball into each of a plurality of ball entry means including at least the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, wherein the determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a first determination mode (low probability mode). a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 351 executed by it),
In a gaming machine equipped with
a third passage (second branch passage section 230) that is provided in the distribution area and is a passage for distributing game balls, and that branches from the middle of the second passage;
a third ball entry means (falling port 252) into which game balls that have circulated through the third passage can enter;
an auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) provided at a branching point of the first passage to the second passage and assisting the entry of the game ball into the second passage;
The state of the auxiliary means is set to a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second passageway, and a first state that makes it possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second passageway. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state of
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for the game ball to enter the second passage than the second passage;
Determination mode control means capable of switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode upon entry of a game ball into the third ball entry means;
A game ball sorting means (gaming ball sorting means) provided at a branching point of the second passageway to the third passageway and distributing game balls between a downstream part of the second passageway from the branching point and the third passageway; sorting device 240);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature sC1, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball is more likely to enter the second passage than when the control mode is the first control mode, and there is a high probability that the game ball will enter the first ball entry means. However, the game ball that entered the first ball entry means may then be sorted from the second passage to the third passage by the game ball sorting device and enter the third ball entry means. When the game ball enters the third ball entry means, the judgment mode is switched from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode, which is unfavorable to the player. In other words, when the control mode is the second control mode, it may be unfavorable to the player. On the other hand, when the control mode is the first control mode, the game ball is more likely to circulate downstream of the branch point to the second passage in the first passage, and there is a high probability that the game ball will enter the second ball entry means. In this case, since there is no configuration equivalent to the third ball entry means like the second passage side, the judgment mode will not be switched from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode, resulting in a disadvantageous state for the player. Therefore, according to feature sC1, by controlling whether the control mode is the first control mode or the second control mode, it is possible to switch between a state that is advantageous to the player and a state that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and tension, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Further, according to feature sC1, by configuring the player to be able to visually check how the game ball sorting means distributes game balls from the outside, a game ball enters the third ball entering means and the determination mode is activated. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as if he or she might be at a disadvantage by switching from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature sC2]
The gaming machine according to feature sC1,
The game ball sorting means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of distributing game balls to the third passage is lower than the probability of distributing game balls to a downstream part of the branch point in the second passage.

According to feature sC2, the probability that the judgment mode will switch from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode can be set relatively low. This makes it possible to relatively reduce the probability that the player will be put in a disadvantageous state.

[Feature sC3]
The gaming machine according to feature sC1 or feature sC2,
The control means includes:
When the number of executions of the game after the control mode is changed from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control mode. Means for transitioning to the mode (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the first fluctuation stop process in FIG. 360 executed by the MPU 62)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature sC3, when the number of game rounds executed after the control mode is shifted from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number, the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode. When the control mode is the first control mode, as described above, there is no possibility of a ball entering the third ball entry means, so the judgment mode is not switched from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode, which does not put the player in a disadvantageous state, and game rounds executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means can be played continuously. Therefore, according to feature sC3, when the control mode is the second control mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of transitioning to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which game rounds executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means can be played continuously without the possibility of putting the player in a disadvantageous state. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature sC4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features sC1 to sC3,
A reward granting means for granting a reward is provided,
The reward granting means includes:
A bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus when the special information corresponding to the game round to be played satisfies the predetermined condition (when a jackpot is won);
A special condition establishment bonus granting means for granting a bonus when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition (when a special small win is won);
Equipped with
The control means
a means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the special information corresponding to a game round to be executed satisfies the specific condition while the control mode is the second control mode and the judgment mode is the second judgment mode.

According to feature sC4, in a state where the control mode is the second control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode, if the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition, the control mode is set to A transition is made from the second control mode to the first control mode. When the control mode is the first control mode, as explained earlier, there is no possibility of the ball entering the third ball entry means, so the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. Therefore, the player is not in a disadvantageous state due to the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and the game rounds that are executed using the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means as an opportunity can be played continuously. Therefore, according to feature sC4, in a state where the control mode is the second control mode, the execution is executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means without the possibility of being disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation of transitioning to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which he can play consecutive game rounds. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature sC5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features sC1 to sC4,
A fourth ball entry means (through gate 35) is provided above the ball entry port of the first passage and allows game balls to enter the fourth ball entry means (through gate 35);
The state transition means includes:
a means for conducting a predetermined lottery in response to the passing of the fourth ball entry means;
a means for transitioning a state of the assistance means to the second state when a result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the control mode is the second control mode, a gaming ball that enters the fourth ball entry means (through gate 35) is configured to circulate from the first passage to the second passage.

According to feature sC5, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball entering the fourth ball entering means is configured to flow from the first passage to the second passage. In one passage, game balls do not circulate downstream of the branch point to the second passage. For this reason, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball that has entered the fourth ball entry means can always be made to enter the first ball entry means. For this reason, it is possible to improve the precision with which the game ball enters the first ball entry means.

[Feature sC6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features sC1 to sC5,
The game device further includes an acquired information storage means for storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a game ball enters the second ball entry means;
The game execution means includes:
A means for executing in parallel a first special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination made by the determination means for the first special information, and a second special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination made by the determination means for the second special information;
a means for setting the second game time in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, to a time longer than a time that can be set as the second game time in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, when the time of the second special information game time is set as a second game time;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature sC6, when the control mode is the first control mode and the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, i.e., in the normal state, if the player shoots a game ball toward the ball entrance of the first passage, the game ball can be made to enter the second ball entrance means. However, according to feature sC6, since the time of the second special information game round when the control mode is the first control mode and the judgment mode is the first judgment mode is set to a relatively long time, it is possible to suppress the judgment by the judgment means triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entrance means from being repeatedly executed in a short period of time. As a result, according to feature sC6, it is possible to make the player give up shooting a game ball aimed at the second ball entrance means when the control mode is the first control mode and the judgment mode is the first judgment mode.

<Characteristic sD group>
The feature sD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sD1]
A circulation area (game area PA) in which game balls are circulated;
A first passage (main passage portion 210) provided in the circulation area for circulating game balls;
A second passage (first branch passage portion 220) which is provided in the circulation area and is a passage for circulating game balls and branches off from the middle of the first passage;
A first ball entry means (right-side first starting hole 44) provided in the second passage and through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) into which the game ball circulating through the first passage can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information in response to a game ball entering each of a plurality of ball entry means including at least the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the determination means having, as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 351 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
In a gaming machine comprising:
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) is provided at a branch point of the first passage to the second passage and assists the game ball to enter the second passage;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state, which is a state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second passage, and a second state, which is a state that makes it possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second passage;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second passage than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
A judgment mode switching means (a game ball distribution device 240, a falling hole 252, an MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and a game ball distribution control process of FIG. 380 executed by the MPU 62) capable of switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode with a predetermined probability when a game ball enters the first ball entry means in the second passage;
A fourth ball entry means (through gate 35) is provided above the ball entry port of the first passage and through which game balls can enter;
Equipped with
The state transition means includes:
a means for conducting a predetermined lottery when the ball passes through the fourth ball entry means;
a means for transitioning a state of the assistance means to the second state when a result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the control mode is the second control mode, a gaming ball that enters the fourth ball entry means is configured to circulate from the first passage to the second passage.

According to feature sD1, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball entering the fourth ball entering means is configured to flow from the first passage to the second passage. In one passage, game balls do not circulate downstream of the branch point to the second passage. For this reason, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball that has entered the fourth ball entry means can always be made to enter the first ball entry means. For this reason, it is possible to improve the precision with which the game ball enters the first ball entry means.

According to feature sD1, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball always enters the first ball entry means, but the judgment mode switching means switches the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode with a predetermined probability, which may put the player at a disadvantage. On the other hand, when the control mode is the first control mode, the game ball is more likely to flow downstream of the branch point to the second passage in the first passage, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means with a high probability. In this case, unlike the second passage side, the judgment mode is not switched from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode, so that the game rounds executed in response to the game ball entering the second ball entry means can be continuously performed without the possibility of putting the player at a disadvantage. Therefore, according to feature sD1, when the control mode is the second control mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of transitioning to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which consecutive game rounds can be played in response to the game ball entering the second ball entry means without the possibility of the player being put in a disadvantageous state. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

[Feature sD2]
A gaming machine according to feature sD1,
The determination mode switching means
A third passage (second branch passage portion 230) is provided in the circulation area and is a passage for circulating game balls, and branches off from the middle of the second passage;
A third ball entry means (a falling opening 252) through which the game ball circulating through the third passage can enter;
A judgment mode control means for switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode when a game ball enters the third ball entry means;
A game ball distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) is provided at a branch point of the second passage to the third passage, and distributes game balls between a downstream portion of the branch point of the second passage and the third passage;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature sD2, a part of the determination mode switching means can be configured by a hardware configuration including the third passage and the game ball sorting means. For this reason, by configuring the player to be able to see how the game ball sorting means distributes game balls from the outside, the player is disadvantaged by switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as if the player is afraid that the player will lose the game. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature sD3]
The gaming machine according to feature sD2,
The game ball sorting means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of distributing game balls to the third passage is lower than the probability of distributing game balls to a downstream part of the branch point in the second passage.

According to feature sD3, the probability that the judgment mode will switch from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode can be set relatively low. This makes it possible to relatively reduce the probability that the player will suffer a disadvantage.

[Feature sD4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features sD1 to feature sD3,
The control means includes:
When the number of executions of the game after the control mode is changed from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control mode. Means for transitioning to the mode (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the first fluctuation stop process in FIG. 360 executed by the MPU 62)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature sD4, when the number of game rounds executed after the control mode has been shifted from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number, the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode. As explained above, when the control mode is the first control mode, game rounds that are executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means can be continuously performed without the possibility of placing the player in a disadvantageous state. Therefore, feature sD4 can give the player an even greater sense of anticipation of the transition to the special state explained above, and as a result, the interest in the game can be further increased.

[Feature sD5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features sD1 to sD4,
Equipped with a benefit granting means for granting benefits,
The benefit granting means is
When the special information corresponding to the game run to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (in the case of winning a jackpot), a privilege granting means is provided when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
When the special information corresponding to the game run to be executed satisfies a specific condition (in the case of winning a special small win), a privilege awarding means is provided when a specific condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
The control means includes:
In a state where the control mode is the second control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the specific condition, the control mode A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for shifting from the second control mode to the first control mode.

According to feature sD5, when the control mode is the second control mode and the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, if the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition, the control mode is transitioned from the second control mode to the first control mode. As explained above, when the control mode is the first control mode, game rounds can be executed successively in response to the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means without the possibility of placing the player in a disadvantageous state. Therefore, feature sD5 can give the player an even greater sense of anticipation of the transition to the special state explained above, and as a result, the interest in the game can be further increased.

[Feature sD6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S5,
The game device further includes an acquired information storage means for storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a game ball enters the second ball entry means;
The game execution means includes:
A means for executing in parallel a first special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination made by the determination means for the first special information, and a second special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination made by the determination means for the second special information;
a means for setting the second game time in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, to a time longer than a time that can be set as the second game time in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, when the time of the second special information game time is set as a second game time;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature sD6, in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode, that is, in the normal state, the player fires the game ball toward the ball entrance of the first passage. In this case, the game ball can be entered into the second ball entry means. However, according to feature sD6, the time period of the second special information game in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode is set to a relatively long time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the judgment by the judgment means triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means from being repeatedly executed in a short period of time. As a result, according to feature sD6, in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode, the player is caused to shoot the game ball aiming at the second ball entering means. You can make them give up.

<Features sE group>
The feature sE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sE1]
A circulation area (game area PA) in which game balls are circulated;
A first passage (main passage portion 210) provided in the circulation area for circulating game balls;
A second passage (first branch passage portion 220) which is provided in the circulation area and is a passage for circulating game balls and branches off from the middle of the first passage;
A first ball entry means (right-side first starting hole 44) provided in the second passage and through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) into which the game ball circulating through the first passage can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information in response to a game ball entering each of a plurality of ball entry means including at least the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the determination means having, as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 351 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
In a gaming machine comprising:
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) is provided at a branch point of the first passage to the second passage and assists the game ball to enter the second passage;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state, which is a state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second passage, and a second state, which is a state that makes it possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second passage;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second passage than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
A judgment mode switching means (a game ball distribution device 240, a falling hole 252, an MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and a game ball distribution control process of FIG. 380 executed by the MPU 62) capable of switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode with a predetermined probability when a game ball enters the first ball entry means in the second passage;
An acquired information storage means for storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
Equipped with
The control means
A means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when a specific condition is satisfied (an MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and a first fluctuation stop process of FIG. 360 executed by the MPU 62),
The game execution means includes:
A means for executing in parallel a first special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination made by the determination means for the first special information, and a second special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination made by the determination means for the second special information;
a means for setting the second game time in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, to a time longer than a time that can be set as the second game time in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, when the time of the second special information game time is set as a second game time;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature sE1, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball enters the second passage more easily than when the control mode is the first control mode, and there is a high probability that the game ball enters the first passage. The ball enters the ball means. However, when the control mode is the second control mode, when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, the judgment mode is switched from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode with a predetermined probability. Since the mode is switched to the determination mode, there is a possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous situation. Then, when the specific condition is satisfied, the control mode is switched from the second control mode to the first control mode. When the control mode is the first control mode, the game balls tend to flow downstream from the branching point to the second path in the first path, and the game balls enter the second ball entering means with a high probability. do. In this case, since the determination mode is not switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode as in the case of the second passage, the player can enter the second passage without the possibility of being disadvantageous. Game rounds that are triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball means can be played continuously. Therefore, according to the feature sE1, in a state where the control mode is the second control mode, the execution is executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means without the possibility of being disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the player will be able to play the game continuously. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to feature sE1, when the control mode is the first control mode and the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, i.e., in the normal state, if a player shoots a game ball toward the ball entrance of the first passage, the game ball can be made to enter the second ball entrance means. However, according to feature sE1, since the time of the second special information game round when the control mode is the first control mode and the judgment mode is the first judgment mode is set to a relatively long time, it is possible to suppress repeated execution of judgments by the judgment means in a short period of time triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entrance means. As a result, according to feature sE1, when the control mode is the first control mode and the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, the player can be made to give up shooting a game ball toward the second ball entrance means.

[Feature sE2]
A gaming machine according to feature sE1,
The determination mode switching means
A third passage (second branch passage portion 230) is provided in the circulation area and is a passage for circulating game balls, and branches off from the middle of the second passage;
A third ball entry means (a falling opening 252) through which the game ball circulating through the third passage can enter;
A judgment mode control means for switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode when a game ball enters the third ball entry means;
A game ball distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) is provided at a branch point of the second passage to the third passage, and distributes game balls between a downstream portion of the branch point of the second passage and the third passage;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature sE2, a part of the determination mode switching means can be configured by a hardware configuration including the third passage and the game ball sorting means. For this reason, by configuring the player to be able to see how the game ball sorting means distributes the game balls from the outside, the player is disadvantaged by switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as if the player is afraid that the player will lose the game. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature sE3]
A gaming machine according to feature sE2,
The game ball distribution means includes:
The gaming machine is characterized in that the probability of diverting the gaming ball to the third passage is lower than the probability of diverting the gaming ball to a downstream portion of the branch point in the second passage.

According to the feature sE3, the probability that the determination mode switches from the second determination mode to the first determination mode can be set to be relatively low. For this reason, the probability that the player will suffer a disadvantage can be made relatively low.

[Features sE4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features sE1 to sE3,
The control means includes:
When the number of executions of the game after the control mode is changed from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control mode. Means for transitioning to the mode (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the first fluctuation stop process in FIG. 360 executed by the MPU 62)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature sE4, when the number of game rounds executed after the control mode has transitioned from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number, the control mode transitions from the second control mode to the first control mode. As explained above, when the control mode is the first control mode, game rounds that are executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means can be played continuously without the possibility of placing the player in a disadvantageous state. Therefore, feature sE4 can give the player an even greater sense of anticipation of transitioning to the special state explained above, and as a result, the interest in the game can be further increased.

[Feature E5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features sE1 to sE4,
A reward granting means for granting a reward is provided,
The reward granting means includes:
A bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus when the special information corresponding to the game round to be played satisfies the predetermined condition (when a jackpot is won);
A special condition establishment bonus granting means for granting a bonus when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition (when a special small win is won);
Equipped with
The control means
a means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the special information corresponding to a game round to be executed satisfies the specific condition while the control mode is the second control mode and the judgment mode is the second judgment mode.

According to feature sE5, in a state where the control mode is the second control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode, if the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition, the player To give players a sense of expectation that they will be able to continuously play the game rounds that are triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means without the possibility of being at a disadvantage. can be granted. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature sE6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features sE1 to sE5,
A fourth ball entry means (through gate 35) is provided above the ball entry opening of the first passage and allows the game ball to enter;
The state transition means is
Means for conducting a predetermined lottery based on the passing of the fourth ball entering means;
means for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means to the second state when the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result;
Equipped with
When the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball that enters the fourth ball entry means (through gate 35) is configured to flow from the first passage to the second passage. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature sE6, when the control mode is the second control mode, a game ball that has entered the fourth ball entry means is configured to flow from the first passage to the second passage, so that the game ball does not flow in the first passage downstream of the branch point to the second passage. Therefore, when the control mode is the second control mode, a game ball that has entered the fourth ball entry means can always be made to enter the first ball entry means. This makes it possible to increase the accuracy of making the game ball enter the first ball entry means.

<Features F group>
The group of features sF is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment.

[Feature sF1]
A circulation area (game area PA) in which game balls are circulated;
A first ball entry means (right first starting hole 44) provided in the circulation area and through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) provided in the circulation area and through which the game ball can enter;
A third ball entry means (a falling hole 252) is provided in the circulation area and through which the game ball can enter;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the first ball entry means;
A state transition means for transitioning a state of the assistance means between a state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entry means and a state that makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the first ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means in different ways;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information in response to a game ball entering each of a plurality of ball entry means including at least the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
a means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the means having, as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 351 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
A judgment mode switching means (a ball entry processing at the ball entry opening 252, an MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the ball entry processing at the ball entry opening of FIG. 349 executed by the MPU 62) capable of switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode when a game ball enters the third ball entry means;
In a gaming machine comprising:
In a second judgment second control state (high probability high support state) in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the third ball entry means;
In a second judgment first control state (high probability low support state) in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the first control mode, it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the third ball entry means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature sF1, in the second judgment second control state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the state of the auxiliary means makes it possible or easy for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means, which may be a trigger for executing a game round, so that it is easy for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means, which may be a trigger for executing a game round. However, in the second judgment second control state, since it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means, the judgment mode is switched from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode, which may be a disadvantageous state for the player. On the other hand, in the second judgment first control state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the first control mode, while it is easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, which may be a trigger for executing a game round, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means, so that it is not possible for the judgment mode to be switched from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode, which may be a disadvantageous state for the player. Therefore, according to feature sF1, in the second determination second control state, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of transitioning to the second determination first control state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game rounds executed in response to the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means can be played consecutively without the possibility of the player being put in a disadvantageous state. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

[Feature sF2]
A gaming machine according to feature sF1,
The control means
A means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times the game has been played after the control mode has transitioned from the first control mode to the second control mode has reached a predetermined number (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the first fluctuation stop processing of FIG. 360 executed by the MPU 62).
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature sF2, when the number of game times executed after the control mode transitions from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number, the control mode transitions from the second control mode to the first control mode. Therefore, in the second judgment second control state, when the number of game times executed after the control mode transitions from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number, a transition to the second judgment first control state is made. As explained above, the second judgment first control state allows consecutive game times to be executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means without the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state for the player. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the number of game times executed after the control mode transitions from the first control mode to the second control mode will reach a predetermined number, and it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

[Feature sF3]
A gaming machine according to feature sF1 or feature sF2,
A reward granting means for granting a reward is provided,
The reward granting means includes:
A bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus when the special information corresponding to the game round to be played satisfies the predetermined condition (when a jackpot is won);
A special condition establishment bonus granting means for granting a bonus when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition (when a special small win is won);
Equipped with
The control means
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed in the second judgment second control state satisfies the specific condition.

According to feature sF3, when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition in the second determination second control state, the control mode transitions from the second control mode to the first control mode, i.e., the second determination first control state is performed. As explained above, the second determination first control state allows game rounds to be executed successively in response to the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means, without the possibility of placing the player in a disadvantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed will satisfy a specific condition, further increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Feature sF4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features sF1 to sF3,
The game device further includes an acquired information storage means for storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a game ball enters the second ball entry means;
The game execution means includes:
A means for executing in parallel a first special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means for the first special information, and a second special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means for the second special information;
a means for setting the second game time in a state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode, to a time longer than a time that can be set as the second game time in the second determination first control state, when the time of the second special information game time is set as a second game time;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature sF4, in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode, that is, in the normal state, the player fires the game ball toward the ball entrance of the first passage. In this case, the game ball can be entered into the second ball entry means. However, according to feature sF4, the time period of the second special information game in the normal state where the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode is set to a relatively long time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress repeated execution of the determination by the determining means in a short period of time triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means. As a result, according to feature sF4, it is possible to make the player give up on firing the game ball aiming at the second ball entry means in the normal state.

<Features Group G>
The group of features sG is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment.

[Feature G1]
A circulation area (game area PA) in which game balls are circulated;
A first ball entry means (right-side first starting hole 44) provided in the circulation area and through which a game ball can enter;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the first ball entry means;
A state transition means for transitioning a state of the assistance means between a state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entry means and a state that makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the first ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) is provided in the circulation area and allows a game ball that has been rejected from entering the first ball entry means by the auxiliary means to enter the second ball entry means;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information in response to a game ball entering each of a plurality of ball entry means including at least the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the determination means having, as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 351 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
In a gaming machine comprising:
The game device further includes an acquired information storage means for storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a game ball enters the second ball entry means;
The game execution means includes:
a parallel execution means for executing in parallel a first special information game round, which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means for the first special information, and a second special information game round, which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means for the second special information;
a second game time setting means for setting the second game time in a state in which the control mode is the second control mode, when the time of the second special information game is set as a second game time, to a time longer than a time that can be set as the second game time in a second judgment first control state (high probability low support state) in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the first control mode;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature sG1, when the control mode is the second control mode, since the state of the auxiliary means is a state that enables or facilitates the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means, the second entry means It becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball means. However, while the control mode is in the first control mode, the second special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering means is retained in the acquired information storage means, and the control mode is in the first control mode. In the state that is the second control mode transferred from the state, it may happen that the determination means makes a determination based on the suspended second special information. Since the determination made by the determination means based on the second special information is generally more advantageous for the player than the determination made by the determination means based on the second special information, the determination made by the determination means based on the suspended second special information is If this is done consecutively, the player will be in an excessively advantageous situation. On the other hand, according to the feature sG1, when the time of the second special information game is set as the second game time, the second game time in the state where the control mode is the second control mode is the second determination period. Since the time is set to be longer than the time that can be set as the second game time in the first control state, it is possible to suppress the second special information held in the acquired information storage means from being repeatedly consumed in a short period of time. , it is possible to prevent a situation from becoming excessively advantageous to the player.

[Features sG2]
The gaming machine according to feature sG1,
The second gaming time setting means includes:
The determination mode is the second determination mode, and the control mode is the second control mode. A game machine characterized by comprising means for setting a time longer than the time that can be set as a game time.

According to feature sG2, the second gaming time in the second determination second control state is set to a longer time than the time that can be set as the second gaming time in the second determination first control state. Therefore, the second special information acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entering means in the gaming state before entering the second determination second control state is retained in the acquired information storage means, and after the transition Second Judgment In the second control state, it may happen that the judgment means makes a judgment based on the suspended second special information. On the other hand, according to feature sG2, the second gaming time in the second determination second control state is set to a longer time than the time that can be set as the second gaming time in the second determination first control state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second special information held in the acquired information storage means from being repeatedly consumed in a short period of time, and it is possible to prevent the player from being in an excessively advantageous state.

[Features sG3]
The gaming machine according to feature sG1 or feature sG2,
The second gaming time setting means includes:
The determination mode is the first determination mode, and the control mode is the first control mode. A game machine characterized by comprising means for setting a time longer than the time that can be set as a game time.

According to feature sG3, in the first judgment first control state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode and the control mode is the first control mode, when the player shoots a game ball toward the first ball entrance, the game ball can be made to enter the second ball entrance means. However, according to feature sG3, since the time of the second special information game round in the state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode and the control mode is the first control mode is set to a relatively long time, it is possible to suppress repeated execution of judgments by the judgment means in a short period of time triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entrance means. As a result, according to feature sG3, in the first judgment first control state, it is possible to give up on shooting a game ball aimed at the second ball entrance means.

<Features H group>
The group of features sH is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sH1]
A circulation area (game area PA) in which game balls are circulated;
A first ball entry means (through gate 35) provided in the circulation area and through which game balls can enter;
A second ball entry means (right-side first starting hole 44) is provided in the circulation area, is located below the first ball entry means, and allows game balls to enter;
A third ball entry means (starting hole unit outlet 251) is provided in the circulation area, is located below the second ball entry means, and allows game balls to enter;
A fourth ball entry means (second starting hole 34) is provided in the circulation area, is located below the first ball entry means, and allows the game ball to enter;
In a gaming machine comprising:
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a gaming state transition means for transitioning, in a first gaming state (high probability high support state) which is a specific gaming state, to a second gaming state (high probability low support state) in which one or more gaming balls which entered the first ball entry means following the multiple gaming balls can enter the fourth ball entry means when each of the multiple gaming balls which enter the first ball entry means in succession also enters both the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means.

According to feature sH1, in a first game state that is a specific game state, each of the plurality of game balls that have entered the first ball entering means is connected to the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means. When the balls enter both sides (when 50 game balls enter both the right side first starting port 44 and the starting port unit internal out port 251 and the game is played 50 times), the game state moves from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. In the second gaming state, one or more game balls that entered the first ball entering means following the plurality of game balls that entered the first ball entering means in the first gaming state are the fourth entering ball. It is in a state where it is possible to enter the ball into the means. Therefore, in the first game state, each of the plurality of game balls that have successively entered the first ball entering means has completed entering both the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means. In this case, the game enters a second gaming state in which it is possible to continuously play game rounds triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means. The second game state is an advantageous state for the player, as it becomes possible to play consecutive game rounds triggered by the entry of the game ball into the fourth ball entry means. Therefore, according to feature sH1, in the first game state, there is a feeling of anticipation and tension as to whether the game ball that entered the first ball entry means will enter both the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature sH2]
The gaming machine described in feature sH1,
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball enters the second ball entry means more easily than the second ball entry means;
Equipped with
The game machine is characterized in that the fourth ball entry means allows a game ball that has been refused entry into the second ball entry means by the auxiliary means to enter the fourth ball entry means.

According to feature sH2, in a state where the control mode is the second control mode, it becomes possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and it becomes impossible for the game ball to enter the fourth ball entry means. possible or difficult. Furthermore, in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and it becomes possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fourth ball entry means. Become. Therefore, by switching the control mode between the first control mode and the second control mode, the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and the game ball can enter the fourth ball entry means. can be easily controlled. Therefore, controllability is excellent.

[Feature sH3]
A gaming machine according to feature sH2,
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information in response to a game ball entering each of a plurality of ball entry means including at least the second ball entry means and the fourth ball entry means;
a means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the means having, as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 351 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
A fifth ball entry means (a falling hole 252) is provided in the circulation area, is located below the second ball entry means, and allows game balls to enter;
A judgment mode switching means capable of switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode when a game ball enters the fifth ball entry means (the game ball distribution device 240, the falling opening 252, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the game ball distribution control process of FIG. 380 executed by the MPU 62)
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature sH3, the game ball that has entered the second ball entry means can enter either the third ball entry means or the fifth ball entry means. Therefore, the game ball that entered the first ball entry means enters the fifth ball entry means after entering the second ball entry means, and the judgment mode does not switch from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode. A sense of urgency can be given to the player. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature sH4]
A gaming machine according to feature sH3,
The control means
A means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times the game has been played after the control mode has transitioned from the first control mode to the second control mode has reached a predetermined number (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the first fluctuation stop processing of FIG. 360 executed by the MPU 62).
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature sH4, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means with a higher probability than when the control mode is the first control mode. However, when the control mode is the second control mode, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the fifth ball entry means after entering the second ball entry means. If the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means, the judgment mode is switched from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode, which may be disadvantageous to the player. Then, when the control mode is the second control mode and the number of game times after the transition to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number, the control mode is switched from the second control mode to the first control mode. When the control mode is the first control mode, there is a high probability that the game ball will enter the fourth ball entry means. In this case, since the game ball that has entered the second ball entry means will not enter the fifth ball entry means, the game rounds triggered by the game ball entering the fourth ball entry means can be played continuously without the possibility of the player being put in a disadvantageous state. Therefore, according to feature sH4, when the control mode is the second control mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of transitioning to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game rounds triggered by the game ball entering the fourth ball entry means can be played continuously without the possibility of the player being put in a disadvantageous state. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

[Feature sH5]
The gaming machine according to feature sH3 or feature sH4,
Equipped with a benefit granting means for granting benefits,
The benefit granting means is
When the special information corresponding to the game run to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (in the case of winning a jackpot), a privilege granting means is provided when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
When the special information corresponding to the game run to be executed satisfies a specific condition (in the case of winning a special small win), a privilege granting means is provided when a specific condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
The control means includes:
In a state where the control mode is the second control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the specific condition, the control mode A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for shifting from the second control mode to the first control mode.

According to feature sH5, when the control mode is the second control mode and the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the control mode is transitioned from the second control mode to the first control mode not only when the number of game times executed after the control mode transitions from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number, but also when the special information corresponding to the game times executed satisfies a specific condition. As described above, when the control mode is the first control mode, game times executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the fourth ball entry means can be continuously performed without the possibility of being placed in a disadvantageous state for the player. Therefore, feature sH5 can further give the player a sense of expectation of transitioning to the special state described above, and as a result, the interest in the game can be further increased.

<Features Group I>
The group of features sI is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sI1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) where game balls are distributed,
a first ball entry means (first starting port 44 on the right side) provided in the distribution area and into which game balls can enter;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into each of a plurality of ball entry means including at least the first ball entry means;
A means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, wherein the determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a first determination mode (low probability mode). a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 351 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is such that it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entry means, and a state that makes it possible or easy for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means. a state transition means for transitioning between;
The control means for controlling the state transition means has a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. a control means having at least a frequency support mode);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means changes the control mode to the second control mode when the number of executions of the game after the control mode is shifted from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times. control mode transition means (an MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and a first fluctuation stop process in FIG. 360 executed by the MPU 62) for transitioning from the first control mode to the first control mode;
In a second determination second control state (high-accuracy, high-support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the control mode transition means causes the control mode to change to the second determination mode. Taking the transition from the second control mode to the first control mode as a trigger, a second determination first control state (high Equipped with a gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state to a certain low support state),
The gaming machine characterized in that the second determination first control state is more advantageous for the player than the second determination second control state.

According to feature sI1, in the second judgment second control state, when the number of game plays executed after the control mode transitions from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number, the game state transitions from the second judgment second control state to the second judgment first control state. The second judgment first control state is more advantageous to the player than the second judgment second control state. For this reason, feature sI1 can give the player a sense of expectation that in the second judgment second control state, the game state will transition to the more advantageous second judgment first control state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

[Feature 2]
A gaming machine according to feature 1,
A judgment mode switching means (a game ball distribution device 240, a falling hole 252, an MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and a game ball distribution control process of FIG. 380 executed by the MPU 62) capable of switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode with a predetermined probability when a game ball enters the first ball entry means;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) provided in the circulation area and through which the game ball can enter;
Equipped with
In the second judgment second control state, it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means, and it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second judgment first control state, it is impossible or difficult for a gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means, and it is possible or easy for a gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means.

According to the feature sI2, in the second determination second control state, the game ball enters the first ball entry means with a higher probability than in the second determination first control state. However, when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, the judgment mode switching means switches the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode with a predetermined probability. This may result in a disadvantageous situation. On the other hand, in the second determination first control state, the game ball enters the second ball entry means with a high probability. In this case, the determination mode is not switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode as in the case where the game ball enters the first ball entrance means, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Game rounds that are triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means can be played continuously without the possibility of the game becoming a game ball. Therefore, according to feature sI2, in the second determination second control state, the game round is executed in response to the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means without the possibility of a disadvantageous situation for the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation of transitioning to the second determination first control state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the second determination can be performed continuously. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature 3]
A gaming machine according to feature sI1 or feature sI2,
A reward granting means for granting a reward is provided,
The reward granting means includes:
A bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus when the special information corresponding to the game round to be played satisfies the predetermined condition (when a jackpot is won);
A special condition establishment bonus granting means for granting a bonus when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition (when a special small win is won);
Equipped with
The control means
a means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the special information corresponding to a game round to be executed satisfies the specific condition while the control mode is the second control mode and the judgment mode is the second judgment mode.

According to feature sI3, in the second determination second control state, in addition to the case where the number of executions of the game after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the execution Also when the special information corresponding to the game round to be played satisfies a specific condition, the control mode is transferred from the second control mode to the first control mode, and the control mode is transferred to the second determination first control state. As explained above, in the second determination first control state, the game round to be executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means is determined without the possibility of being disadvantageous to the player. It can be done continuously. Therefore, according to feature sI3, it is possible to further give the player a sense of anticipation of transitioning to the second determination first control state (for example, the invincibility zone in the eighth embodiment) described above, and As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Features J group>
The group of features sJ is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sJ1]
A circulation area (game area PA) in which game balls are circulated;
A first ball entry means (right first starting hole 44) provided in the circulation area and through which a game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information in response to a game ball entering each of a plurality of ball entry means including at least the first ball entry means;
a means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the means having, as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 351 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the first ball entry means;
A state transition means for transitioning a state of the assistance means between a state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entry means and a state that makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the assist means in different ways;
A reward granting means for granting a reward;
In a gaming machine comprising:
The reward granting means includes:
A bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus when the special information corresponding to the game round to be played satisfies the predetermined condition (when a jackpot is won);
A special condition establishment bonus granting means for granting a bonus when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition (when a special small win is won);
Equipped with
The control means
When the control mode is the second control mode and the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, if the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the specific condition, the control mode is transitioned from the second control mode to the first control mode (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and game state transition processing of FIG. 370 executed by the MPU 62);
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state to a second judgment first control state (high probability high support state) in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when the control mode transition means transitions the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode, in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the first control mode;
The gaming machine, wherein the second determination first control state is more advantageous to a player than the second determination second control state.

According to feature sJ1, when special information corresponding to a game round to be executed in the second judgment second control state satisfies a specific condition, the game state is transitioned from the second judgment second control state to the second judgment first control state. The second judgment first control state is more advantageous to the player than the second judgment second control state. For this reason, feature sJ1 can give the player a sense of expectation that in the second judgment second control state, the game state will transition to the more advantageous second judgment first control state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

[Feature sJ2]
A gaming machine according to feature sJ1,
A judgment mode switching means (a game ball distribution device 240, a falling hole 252, an MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and a game ball distribution control process of FIG. 380 executed by the MPU 62) capable of switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode with a predetermined probability when a game ball enters the first ball entry means;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) provided in the circulation area and through which the game ball can enter;
Equipped with
In the second judgment second control state, it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means, and it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second judgment first control state, it is impossible or difficult for a gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means, and it is possible or easy for a gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means.

According to feature sJ2, in the second determination second control state, the game ball enters the first ball entry means with a higher probability than in the second determination first control state. However, when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, the judgment mode switching means switches the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode with a predetermined probability. This may result in a disadvantageous situation. On the other hand, in the second determination first control state, the game ball enters the second ball entry means with a high probability. In this case, the determination mode is not switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode as in the case where the game ball enters the first ball entrance means, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Game rounds that are triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means can be played continuously without the possibility of the game becoming a game ball. Therefore, according to feature sJ2, in the second determination second control state, the game round is executed in response to the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means without the possibility of a disadvantageous state for the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation of transitioning to the second determination first control state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the second determination can be performed continuously. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature sJ3]
The gaming machine according to feature sJ1 or feature sJ2,
The control means includes:
When the number of executions of the game after the control mode is changed from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for transitioning to a mode.

According to feature sJ3, in the second determination second control state, in addition to the case where the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition, the control mode changes from the first control mode to the second control mode. Also when the number of executions of the game after the transition reaches a predetermined number of times, the control mode is transitioned from the second control mode to the first control mode, and the second determination first control state is transitioned. As explained above, in the second determination first control state, the game round to be executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means is determined without the possibility of being disadvantageous to the player. It can be done continuously. Therefore, according to feature sJ3, it is possible to further give the player a sense of anticipation of transitioning to the second determination first control state (for example, the invincibility zone in the eighth embodiment) described above, and As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic sK group>
The feature sK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sK1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) where game balls are distributed,
Ball entry means (first starting port 44 on the right side) provided in the distribution area and into which game balls can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
A means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, wherein the determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination includes a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a first determination mode (low probability mode). a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode;
a determination mode transition means (ball entrance processing for a falling hole) that transitions the determination performed by the determination means from the second determination mode to the first determination mode when a specific condition is satisfied;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 351 executed by it),
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a specific gaming state (high probability/high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the specific condition can be satisfied, the number of executions of the game after transitioning to the specific gaming state is A gaming state transition means for shifting from the specific gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (high certainty low support state) in which the specific condition cannot be satisfied when a predetermined number of times is reached without the condition being satisfied;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature sK1, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, if a specific condition is met, the judgment executed by the judgment means transitions from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode. On the other hand, in the specific game state, if the specific condition remains unmet for a period until the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, the specific game state transitions to a predetermined game state in which the specific condition cannot be met. Since the specific condition cannot be met in this predetermined game state, the judgment mode does not transition from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode. In the predetermined game state, game rounds triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means can be repeatedly executed.

For this reason, according to feature sK1, in a specific gaming state, it is desired that the specific condition not be satisfied for a period during which the number of times the player executes the game after transitioning to the specific gaming state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times. It is possible to give both a sense of urgency (I hope you don't fall) and a sense of expectation that you want the number of times the game is played to reach a predetermined number before a specific condition is met. If the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number without the specific condition being satisfied, the player is sent to a predetermined gaming state in which the specific condition cannot be satisfied (for example, By continuously playing the game rounds that are triggered by the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means, you will be able to enter the game ball in the near future in the predetermined game state. It is also possible to provide a sense of expectation that the special information acquired upon entering the game ball into the means will satisfy a predetermined condition. In this way, according to the feature sK1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief.

[Feature sK2]
A gaming machine according to feature sK1,
The determination mode transition means is
A ball entry means for transitioning to a judgment mode, which allows a game ball to enter the ball;
A means for determining that the specific condition is established when a game ball enters the ball entry means for transitioning to the determination mode;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature sK2, when a game ball enters the ball entry means for transitioning to the determination mode, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied, and the determination performed by the determination means changes from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. will be migrated. Therefore, according to feature sK2, it is possible for the player to recognize whether or not the specific condition is satisfied based on whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means for transitioning to the determination mode. It can give a greater sense of urgency.

[Feature sK3]
A gaming machine according to feature sK1 or feature sK2,
A first passage (main passage portion 210) provided in the circulation area for circulating game balls;
A second passage (first branch passage portion 220) which is provided in the circulation area and is a passage for circulating game balls and branches off from the middle of the first passage;
A first ball entry means (right side first starting hole 44) is provided in the second passage and serves as the ball entry means;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) as the ball entry means into which the game ball circulating through the first passage can enter;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) is provided at a branch point of the first passage to the second passage and assists the game ball to enter the second passage;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state, which is a state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second passage, and a second state, which is a state that makes it possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second passage;
Equipped with
The determination mode transition means is
When a game ball enters the first ball entry means in the second passage, the determination mode can be switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode with a predetermined probability (the game ball distribution device 240, the falling opening 252, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the game ball distribution control process of FIG. 380 executed by the MPU 62),
The game state transition means includes:
A control means for controlling the state transition means, which has at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second passage than in the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means, and which transitions the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times the game has been played after the control mode has transitioned from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number (an MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and a first fluctuation stop process of FIG. 360 executed by the MPU 62).
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature sK3, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball is more likely to enter the second passage than when the control mode is the first control mode, and the game ball enters the first ball entry means with a high probability. However, when the control mode is the second control mode, if the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the judgment mode switching means switches the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode with a predetermined probability, which may be disadvantageous to the player. Then, when the control mode is the second control mode and the number of game plays after the transition to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number, the control mode is switched from the second control mode to the first control mode. When the control mode is the first control mode, the game ball is more likely to flow downstream of the branch point to the second passage in the first passage, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means with a high probability. In this case, unlike the second passage side, the judgment mode is not switched from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode, so the game rounds that are executed in response to the game ball entering the second ball entry means can be played continuously without the possibility of putting the player in a disadvantageous state.

As a result, according to feature sK3, when the control mode is the second control mode, the player can be given a sense of urgency that the judgment mode will not be switched from the second judgment mode to the unfavorable first judgment mode by the judgment mode switching means (i.e., he or she will not fall) during the period until the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number, and a sense of anticipation that the number of game rounds executed will reach a predetermined number before the judgment mode is switched to the first judgment mode by the judgment mode switching means. Then, when the number of game rounds reaches a predetermined number without the judgment mode being switched to the first judgment mode by the judgment mode switching means, the player can be given a sense of relief that he can transition to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which game rounds triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entry means can be played continuously without the risk of the judgment mode being switched to the first judgment mode and being put in a disadvantageous state, and a sense of expectation that the special information acquired in response to the game ball entering the second ball entry means will soon satisfy the predetermined condition when the control mode is the second control mode by playing consecutive game rounds triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. In this way, according to feature sK3, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as expectation, tension, and relief.

[Features K4]
The gaming machine according to feature sK3,
The determination mode transition means includes:
a third passage (second branch passage section 230) that is provided in the distribution area and is a passage for distributing game balls, and that branches from the middle of the second passage;
a third ball entry means (falling port 252) into which game balls that have circulated through the third passage can enter;
Determination mode control means capable of switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode upon entry of a game ball into the third ball entry means;
A game ball sorting means (gaming ball sorting means) provided at a branching point of the second passageway to the third passageway and distributing game balls between a downstream part of the second passageway from the branching point and the third passageway; sorting device 240);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature sK4, a part of the determination mode transition means can be configured by a hardware configuration including the third passage and the game ball sorting means. For this reason, by configuring the player to be able to see how the game ball sorting means distributes game balls from the outside, the player is disadvantaged by switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as if the player is afraid that the game will be put away. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Features sL group>
The feature sL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sL1]
a firing means for firing a game ball;
A distribution area (gaming area PA) where the fired game balls are distributed;
A ball entry means (center side first starting port 33) provided in the distribution area and into which game balls can enter;
a predetermined area provided in the distribution area and through which game balls can pass (ball entry port 210a of starting port unit 200);
A game state that is entered after a predetermined condition is satisfied in a condition determination that is executed when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and the above state when a game ball enters the ball entry means. A specific gaming state (high accuracy, high support state) in which the game ball can enter the predetermined area by a firing mode (weak right-handed firing mode) different from the firing mode (left-handed firing mode) by the firing means. ), when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, multiple types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second starting port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the first right starting port 44, starting port an information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from a signal from a detection sensor for the in-unit outlet 251 and a signal from a detection sensor for the fall opening 252;
When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the first result (the route that allows the ball to enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (the route that allows the ball to enter the right first starting port 44). A first sorting means (electric accessory 34a) for sorting,
When the first sorting means distributes the second result, the third result (a route that allows the ball to enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (the ball enters the falling port 252) at a predetermined ratio. a second sorting means (game ball sorting device 240) which sorts the ball to one of the possible routes);
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is fourth result information (signal from the detection sensor for the falling hole 252) corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state is changed from the specific gaming state to the specific one. A gaming state transition means for shifting to a predetermined gaming state (low certainty/high support state) different from the gaming state;
Equipped with
The specific gaming state is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined gaming state,
If the period from the start of the game operation that notifies the result of the game to the end of the game operation is defined as one game session, the number of times the game session is executed in the specific gaming state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed number of games) 50 times) or less, the game machine is configured to be able to acquire the fourth result information.

According to feature sL1, when a game ball passes through a predetermined area, one piece of result information is acquired from multiple types of result information. When a game ball passes through a predetermined area, it is assigned to either a first result or a second result, and when it is assigned to the second result, it is assigned to either a third result or a fourth result at a predetermined ratio. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the game state is shifted from a specific game state in which the player has a high advantage to a specific game state in which the player has a low advantage. Furthermore, according to feature sL1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a specified game situation in which the number of times a game is executed in the specific game state is a specified number or less. When the fourth result information is acquired, the game state is shifted to a specified game state in which the player has a low advantage, as described above. For this reason, according to feature sL1, if the specific game state can continue until the number of game plays reaches a predetermined number without information corresponding to the fourth result being obtained, information corresponding to the fourth result will no longer be obtained, and there will be no possibility of the player being placed in a disadvantageous state.

As a result, according to feature sL1, in a specific gaming state, for a period when the number of executions of the game in the specific gaming state is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times, the player is in a predetermined gaming state that is less advantageous for the player. I feel a sense of urgency that I don't want the fourth result information to be acquired (I don't want to fall), which is the trigger for the transition, and I want the number of times the game is played to reach a predetermined number of times before the fourth result information is acquired. It is possible to give a sense of expectation such as: If the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number without obtaining the fourth result information, the gaming state is shifted to a predetermined gaming state and becomes disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to provide both a sense of relief and a sense of expectation that the player can move to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game can be played continuously without risk. In this way, according to the feature sL1, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief.

[Feature sL2]
A gaming machine according to feature sL1,
a means for maintaining the game state of the game next to the game corresponding to the third result information in the specific game state when the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is third result information corresponding to the third result (a signal from a detection sensor for the outlet 251 in the start port unit).

According to feature sL2, when the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is third result information corresponding to the third result, the game state of the next game round is maintained at the specific game state. For this reason, in a specific gaming state, depending on the allocation result of the second allocating means, there are cases where the player is shifted to a predetermined gaming state that is less advantageous for the player, and cases where the specific gaming state is maintained. . Therefore, according to feature sL2, there is an urgent need for the second sorting means not to acquire the fourth result information that would trigger a transition to a predetermined gaming state that is less advantageous for the player (not to fall). It is possible to give an even greater sense of feeling.

[FeaturesL3]
The gaming machine described in feature sL1,
In a specific gaming situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific gaming state exceeds the predetermined number of times (50 times which is the guaranteed number of games), the first result information (for the second starting port 34) corresponding to the first result is A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to acquire signals (signals from a detection sensor).

According to feature sL3, in a specific game state in which the number of game plays exceeds a predetermined number, first result information corresponding to the first result can be obtained. Therefore, according to feature sL3, when obtaining the first result information, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the number of game plays in the specific game state will reach the predetermined number.

[Feature sL4]
A gaming machine according to feature sL1,
The gaming machine is configured to be capable of acquiring third result information (a signal from a detection sensor for the outlet 251 in the start port unit) corresponding to the third result in a specified gaming situation in which the number of times the game has been executed in the specific gaming state is equal to or less than the specified number (50 times, which is the guaranteed number of games).

According to feature sL4, third result information corresponding to the third result can be acquired in a predetermined gaming situation in which the number of executions of the game in the specific gaming state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times. For this reason, according to feature sL4, during a period in which the number of executions of a game in a specific gaming state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, fourth result information that triggers a shift to a predetermined gaming state that is less advantageous for the player It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the third result information, which is not the same, is obtained.

[FeaturesL5]
The gaming machine described in feature sL1,
In a predetermined gaming situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific gaming state is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times (50 times which is the guaranteed number of games), second result information corresponding to the second result (first starting port 44 on the right side) is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to acquire a signal from a detection sensor for a game.

According to feature sL5, in a specified game situation where the number of game rounds in a specific game state is equal to or less than a specified number, the second result information corresponding to the second result that triggers allocation by the second allocation means can be obtained during a period when the number of game rounds in a specific game state is equal to or less than a specified number. The second result triggers allocation by the second allocation means, and the fourth result allocated by the second allocation means triggers a transition to a specified game state where the player has a low advantage. Therefore, according to feature sL5, during a period when the number of game rounds in a specific game state is equal to or less than a specified number, a sense of urgency can be reliably imparted to the player that the fourth result information that triggers a transition to a specified game state where the player has a low advantage is not to be obtained (not to fall).

[FeaturesL6]
The gaming machine described in feature sL1,
In a predetermined gaming situation in which the number of executions of the game in the specific gaming state is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times (50 times which is the guaranteed number of games), second result information corresponding to the second result (right side first starting port 44 The third result information corresponding to the third result (the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the starting port unit) can be acquired. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature sL6, during a period in which the number of executions of a game in a specific gaming state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the second result information corresponding to the second result that triggers the distribution by the second distribution means, and the third Third result information corresponding to the result can be obtained. The second result becomes an opportunity for distribution to be performed by the second distribution means. The third result is one of the two results distributed by the second distribution means, and is not the fourth result that triggers a transition to a predetermined gaming state that is less advantageous for the player. be. Therefore, according to feature sL6, the fourth result information is not a trigger for shifting to a predetermined gaming state that is less advantageous for the player during a period in which the number of executions of the game in the specific gaming state is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the third result information will be acquired.

[FeaturesL7]
The gaming machine described in feature sL1,
At least a first mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second mode (high-frequency support mode) are provided as modes in which the ratio of distribution between the first result and the second result in the first distribution means is different. A gaming machine characterized by having.

According to feature sL7, it is possible to change the ratio of distribution between the first result and the second result in the first distribution means depending on the first mode and the second mode. Therefore, it is possible to change the distribution ratio between the first result and the second result with good controllability. When the second mode is set to a mode in which the proportion of distribution to the first result by the first distribution means is higher than that of the first mode, by switching to the second mode, a predetermined result that is less advantageous to the player can be selected. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the fourth result information that triggers the transition to the gaming state will be acquired. As a result, according to feature sL7, by switching between the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to switch the degree of anticipation and sense of urgency given to the player.

[Feature sL8]
A gaming machine according to feature sL1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the game round following the game round corresponding to the allocation result of the second allocation means being the third result (a route that allows the ball to enter the outlet 251 in the starting port unit) is a game round that is more advantageous to the player than the specified game state.

According to feature sL8, when the allocation result of the second allocation means is the fourth result, the game state is transitioned from the specific game state to the predetermined game state. On the other hand, the game round following the game round corresponding to the case where the allocation result of the second allocation means is the third result is a game round that is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined game state. Therefore, depending on the allocation result of the second allocation means, the game state is switched between a game round that is more advantageous for the player and a game round that is less advantageous. This makes it easy to create a sense of tension and anticipation for the player.

[Feature sL9]
A gaming machine according to feature sL1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the presentation in a game turn corresponding to the allocation result of the second allocation means being the fourth result (a route allowing the ball to enter the drop opening 252) includes presentation content that indicates that the advantage to the player is less than the presentation in a game turn corresponding to the allocation result of the second allocation means being the third result (a route allowing the ball to enter the out opening 251 in the starting opening unit).

According to feature sL9, it is possible to inform the player through the performance whether the distribution result of the second distribution means is the third result or the fourth result, which further improves the interest of the game. be able to.

[Feature sL10]
A gaming machine according to feature sL1,
This gaming machine is characterized in that in the specific game state, if the allocation result of the second allocation means does not result in the fourth result (a route allowing the ball to enter the fall opening 252) during the period until the number of times that the allocation result of the second allocation means results in the third result (a route allowing the ball to enter the out opening 251 in the starting opening unit) reaches the specified number of times (50 times, which is the guaranteed number of games), the game machine will transition again to a game state (high probability low support state (invincible zone) H6) in which transition to the specific game state is guaranteed.

According to feature sL10, in the specific gaming state, if the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number without the allocation result of the second allocating means becoming the fourth result, the specific gaming state is changed again. It is possible to give the player both a sense of relief and a sense of expectation that the player can move to a gaming state that is guaranteed to move to (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment).

[Feature SL11]
A gaming machine according to feature sL1,
The launch mode by the launch means that is most advantageous to the player in the specific game state is a launch mode (weak right-hit launch mode) in which the game ball is more likely to enter the predetermined area than the ball entry means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the launch mode by the launch means which is most advantageous to the player in the specified gaming state is a launch mode in which the gaming ball is more likely to enter the ball entry means than the specified area (a left-handed launch mode in a low-probability low-support state in variant example 14, which results in a low-probability low-support state if it falls in a high-probability high-support state).

According to feature sL11, in a specific gaming state, the player operates the firing means so that the game ball enters the predetermined area more easily than the ball entering means in the particular gaming state. can increase the advantage for In addition, the player can increase the advantage for the player in the predetermined gaming state by operating the firing means in such a manner that the game ball enters the ball entering means more easily than in the predetermined area in the predetermined gaming state. can be increased. Therefore, in a specific gaming state, it is possible to recommend the player to operate the firing means in a firing mode that makes it easy for the game ball to enter a predetermined area. It is possible to recommend the player to operate the firing means in a firing mode that allows the ball to easily enter the ball. Therefore, according to feature sL11, it is possible for the player to fire the game ball in the firing mode of the firing means intended by the designer of the game machine. As a result, according to the feature sL11, it is possible to realize the flow of the game envisioned by the player's designer.

<Features sM group>
The feature sM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sM1]
A launching means for launching a game ball;
A circulation area (a game area PA) in which the launched game balls circulate;
A ball entry means (a central first starting hole 33) provided in the circulation area and through which a game ball can enter;
A predetermined area (ball entrance 210a of the start opening unit 200) provided in the circulation area and through which the game ball can pass;
a specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the game state is entered after a predetermined condition is satisfied in a condition determination executed in response to the game ball entering the ball entry means, in which the game ball can enter the predetermined area by a launch mode (weak right-hand launch mode) different from the launch mode (left-hand launch mode) by the launch means when the game ball enters the ball entry means, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, information acquisition means for acquiring one piece of result information from multiple types of result information (a signal from a detection sensor for the second starting hole 34, a signal from a detection sensor for the right side first starting hole 44, a signal from a detection sensor for the out hole 251 in the starting hole unit, and a signal from a detection sensor for the fall hole 252);
A first distribution means (electric device 34a) for distributing the game ball to either a first result (a route that can enter the second starting hole 34) or a second result (a route that can enter the right first starting hole 44) when the game ball passes through the specified area;
A second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) for distributing the balls to either a third result (a route that allows the ball to enter the out-hole 251 in the starting hole unit) or a fourth result (a route that allows the ball to enter the falling hole 252) at a predetermined ratio when the balls are distributed to the second result by the first distribution means;
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state from the specific game state to a predetermined game state (low probability high support state) different from the specific game state when the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is fourth result information (a signal from a detection sensor for the fall opening 252) corresponding to the fourth result;
Equipped with
The specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state,
The fourth result information is configured to be obtainable in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game has been executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number (50 times, which is the guaranteed number of times of games), where one game is defined as a game from the start of a game action for notifying a game result to the end of the game action;
a means for maintaining the game state of the game next to the game corresponding to the third result information in the specific game state when the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is third result information corresponding to the third result (a signal from a detection sensor for the outlet 251 in the start port unit).

According to the feature sM1, when a game ball passes through a predetermined area, one result information is acquired from a plurality of types of result information. In addition, when the game ball passes through a predetermined area, it is assigned to either the first result or the second result, and when it is assigned to the second result, it is divided into the third result and the fourth result at a predetermined ratio. You can be assigned to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state shifts from a specific gaming state that is highly advantageous to the player to a predetermined gaming state that is less advantageous to the player. be done. Furthermore, according to feature sM1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined gaming situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific gaming state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times. When the fourth result information is acquired, the game is shifted to a predetermined gaming state that is less advantageous for the player, as described above. For this reason, according to feature sM1, in a specific gaming state, if the number of executions of the game can continue until the number of executions reaches a predetermined number without acquiring information corresponding to the fourth result, the fourth Information corresponding to the result is no longer acquired, and the possibility of a disadvantageous situation for the player is eliminated.

As a result, according to feature sM1, in a specific gaming state, for a period when the number of executions of the game in the specific gaming state is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times, the predetermined gaming state is less advantageous for the player. I feel a sense of urgency that I don't want the fourth result information to be acquired (I don't want to fall), which is the trigger for the transition, and I want the number of times the game is played to reach a predetermined number of times before the fourth result information is acquired. It is possible to give a sense of expectation such as: If the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number without obtaining the fourth result information, the gaming state is shifted to a predetermined gaming state and becomes disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to provide both a sense of relief and a sense of expectation that the player can move to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game can be played continuously without risk. In this way, according to the feature sM1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief.

Furthermore, according to feature sM1, if the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the third result information corresponding to the third result, the game state of the next game round is maintained in the specific game state. For this reason, in the specific game state, depending on the allocation result of the second allocation means, there are cases where the game state is transitioned to a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player, and cases where the game state is maintained in the specific game state. Therefore, according to feature sM1, it is possible to create an even greater sense of tension in the player's desire that the fourth result information, which would be a trigger for the second allocation means to transition to a predetermined game state with a low advantage for the player, is not acquired (i.e., the player does not want to fall).

<Features sN group>
The feature sN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sN1]
A launching means for launching a game ball;
A circulation area (play area PA) in which the launched game balls circulate;
A ball entry means (a central first starting hole 33) provided in the circulation area and through which a game ball can enter;
A predetermined area (ball entrance 210a of the start opening unit 200) provided in the circulation area and through which the game ball can pass;
a specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the game state is entered after a predetermined condition is satisfied in a condition determination executed in response to the game ball entering the ball entry means, in which the game ball can enter the predetermined area by a launch mode (weak right-hand launch mode) different from the launch mode (left-hand launch mode) by the launch means when the game ball enters the ball entry means, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, an information acquisition means for acquiring one piece of result information from multiple types of result information (a signal from a detection sensor for the second starting hole 34, a signal from a detection sensor for the right-side first starting hole 44, a signal from a detection sensor for the out hole 251 in the starting hole unit, and a signal from a detection sensor for the fall hole 252);
A first distribution means (electric device 34a) for distributing the game ball to either a first result (a route that can enter the second starting hole 34) or a second result (a route that can enter the right first starting hole 44) when the game ball passes through the specified area;
A second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) for distributing the balls to either a third result (a route that allows the ball to enter the out-hole 251 in the starting hole unit) or a fourth result (a route that allows the ball to enter the falling hole 252) at a predetermined ratio when the balls are distributed to the second result by the first distribution means;
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state from the specific game state to a predetermined game state (low probability high support state) different from the specific game state when the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is fourth result information (a signal from a detection sensor for the fall opening 252) corresponding to the fourth result;
Equipped with
The specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state,
The fourth result information is configured to be obtainable in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game has been executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number (50 times, which is the guaranteed number of times of games), where one game is defined as the time from the start of a game action for notifying a game result to the end of the game action;
a first result information (a signal from a detection sensor for a second starting hole 34) corresponding to the first result can be acquired in a specific game situation in which the number of times the game has been executed in the specific game state exceeds the predetermined number of times (50 times, which is the guaranteed number of times the game is executed).

According to feature sN1, when a game ball passes through a predetermined area, one piece of result information is acquired from multiple types of result information. When a game ball passes through a predetermined area, it is assigned to either a first result or a second result, and when it is assigned to the second result, it is assigned to either a third result or a fourth result at a predetermined ratio. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the game state is shifted from a specific game state in which the player has a high advantage to a specific game state in which the player has a low advantage. Furthermore, according to feature sN1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a specified game situation in which the number of times a game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number or less. When the fourth result information is acquired, the game state is shifted to a specified game state in which the player has a low advantage, as described above. For this reason, according to feature sN1, if the specific game state can continue until the number of game plays reaches a predetermined number without information corresponding to the fourth result being obtained, information corresponding to the fourth result will no longer be obtained, and there will be no possibility of the player being placed in a disadvantageous state.

As a result, according to the feature sN1, in a specific gaming state, for a period when the number of executions of the game in the specific gaming state is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times, a predetermined gaming state that is less advantageous for the player is applied to the player. I feel a sense of urgency that I don't want the fourth result information to be acquired (I don't want to fall), which is the trigger for the transition, and I want the number of times the game is played to reach a predetermined number of times before the fourth result information is acquired. It is possible to give a sense of expectation such as: If the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number without obtaining the fourth result information, the gaming state is shifted to a predetermined gaming state and becomes disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to provide both a sense of relief and a sense of expectation that the player can move to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game can be played continuously without risk. In this way, according to the feature sN1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief.

Furthermore, according to feature sN1, in a specific game state in which the number of game plays exceeds a predetermined number, first result information corresponding to the first result can be obtained. Therefore, according to feature sN1, when obtaining the first result information, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the number of game plays in the specific game state will reach the predetermined number.

<Characteristics group>
The group of features sO is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sO1]
A launching means for launching a game ball;
A circulation area (a game area PA) in which the launched game balls circulate;
A ball entry means (a central first starting hole 33) provided in the circulation area and through which a game ball can enter;
A predetermined area (ball entrance 210a of the start opening unit 200) provided in the circulation area and through which the game ball can pass;
a specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the game state is entered after a predetermined condition is satisfied in a condition determination executed in response to the game ball entering the ball entry means, in which the game ball can enter the predetermined area by a launch mode (weak right-hand launch mode) different from the launch mode (left-hand launch mode) by the launch means when the game ball enters the ball entry means, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, information acquisition means for acquiring one piece of result information from multiple types of result information (a signal from a detection sensor for the second starting hole 34, a signal from a detection sensor for the right side first starting hole 44, a signal from a detection sensor for the out hole 251 in the starting hole unit, and a signal from a detection sensor for the fall hole 252);
A first distribution means (electric device 34a) for distributing the game ball to either a first result (a route that can enter the second starting hole 34) or a second result (a route that can enter the right first starting hole 44) when the game ball passes through the specified area;
A second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) for distributing the balls to either a third result (a route that allows the ball to enter the out-hole 251 in the starting hole unit) or a fourth result (a route that allows the ball to enter the falling hole 252) at a predetermined ratio when the balls are distributed to the second result by the first distribution means;
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state from the specific game state to a predetermined game state (low probability high support state) different from the specific game state when the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is fourth result information (a signal from a detection sensor for the fall opening 252) corresponding to the fourth result;
Equipped with
The specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state,
The fourth result information is configured to be obtainable in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game has been executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number (50 times, which is the guaranteed number of times of games), where one game is defined as a game from the start of a game action for notifying a game result to the end of the game action;
The gaming machine is configured to be capable of acquiring third result information (a signal from a detection sensor for the outlet 251 in the start port unit) corresponding to the third result in a specified gaming situation in which the number of times the game has been executed in the specific gaming state is equal to or less than the specified number (50 times, which is the guaranteed number of games).

According to the feature sO1, when a game ball passes through a predetermined area, one result information is acquired from a plurality of types of result information. In addition, when the game ball passes through a predetermined area, it is assigned to either the first result or the second result, and when it is assigned to the second result, it is divided into the third result and the fourth result at a predetermined ratio. You can be assigned to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state shifts from a specific gaming state that is highly advantageous to the player to a predetermined gaming state that is less advantageous to the player. be done. Further, according to the feature sO1, the fourth result information can be obtained in a predetermined gaming situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific gaming state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times. When the fourth result information is acquired, the game is shifted to a predetermined gaming state that is less advantageous for the player, as described above. For this reason, according to feature sO1, if in a specific gaming state, the number of executions of the game can be continued until the number of executions reaches a predetermined number without acquiring information corresponding to the fourth result, the fourth Information corresponding to the result is no longer acquired, and the possibility of a disadvantageous situation for the player is eliminated.

As a result, according to feature sO1, in a specific gaming state, for a period when the number of executions of the game in the specific gaming state is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times, the predetermined gaming state is less advantageous for the player. I feel a sense of urgency that I don't want the fourth result information to be acquired (I don't want to fall), which is the trigger for the transition, and I want the number of times the game is played to reach a predetermined number of times before the fourth result information is acquired. It is possible to give a sense of expectation such as: If the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number without obtaining the fourth result information, the gaming state is shifted to a predetermined gaming state and becomes disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to provide both a sense of relief and a sense of expectation that the player can move to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game can be played continuously without risk. In this way, according to the feature sO1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief.

Furthermore, according to feature sO1, in a specified gaming situation where the number of game rounds in a specific gaming state is a predetermined number or less, third result information corresponding to the third result can be acquired. For this reason, according to feature sO1, during a period where the number of game rounds in a specific gaming state is a predetermined number or less, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the third result information, rather than the fourth result information that would be a trigger for a transition to a predetermined gaming state that is less advantageous to the player, will be acquired.

<Characteristic sP group>
The feature sP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sP1]
A launching means for launching a game ball;
A circulation area (a game area PA) in which the launched game balls circulate;
A ball entry means (a central first starting hole 33) provided in the circulation area and through which a game ball can enter;
A predetermined area (ball entrance 210a of the start opening unit 200) provided in the circulation area and through which the game ball can pass;
a specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the game state is entered after a predetermined condition is satisfied in a condition determination executed in response to the game ball entering the ball entry means, in which the game ball can enter the predetermined area by a launch mode (weak right-hand launch mode) different from the launch mode (left-hand launch mode) by the launch means when the game ball enters the ball entry means, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, information acquisition means for acquiring one piece of result information from multiple types of result information (a signal from a detection sensor for the second starting hole 34, a signal from a detection sensor for the right side first starting hole 44, a signal from a detection sensor for the out hole 251 in the starting hole unit, and a signal from a detection sensor for the fall hole 252);
A first distribution means (electric device 34a) for distributing the game ball to either a first result (a route that can enter the second starting hole 34) or a second result (a route that can enter the right first starting hole 44) when the game ball passes through the specified area;
A second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) for distributing the balls to either a third result (a route that allows the ball to enter the out-hole 251 in the starting hole unit) or a fourth result (a route that allows the ball to enter the falling hole 252) at a predetermined ratio when the balls are distributed to the second result by the first distribution means;
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state from the specific game state to a predetermined game state (low probability high support state) different from the specific game state when the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is fourth result information (a signal from a detection sensor for the fall opening 252) corresponding to the fourth result;
Equipped with
The specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state,
The fourth result information is configured to be obtainable in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game has been executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number (50 times, which is the guaranteed number of times of games), where one game is defined as a game from the start of a game action for notifying a game result to the end of the game action;
a second result information (a signal from a detection sensor for the right-side first starting hole 44) corresponding to the second result can be acquired in a specified game situation in which the number of times the game has been executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the specified number of times (the guaranteed number of times being 50).

According to feature sP1, when a game ball passes through a predetermined area, one piece of result information is acquired from multiple types of result information. Also, when a game ball passes through a predetermined area, it is assigned to either the first result or the second result, and when it is assigned to the second result, it is assigned to either the third result or the fourth result at a predetermined ratio. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the game state is shifted from a specific game state in which the player has a high advantage to a specified game state in which the player has a low advantage. Furthermore, according to feature sP1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a specified game situation in which the number of times a game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number or less. When the fourth result information is acquired, the game state is shifted to a specified game state in which the player has a low advantage, as described above. For this reason, according to feature sP1, if the specific game state can continue until the number of game plays reaches a predetermined number without information corresponding to the fourth result being obtained, information corresponding to the fourth result will no longer be obtained, and there will be no possibility of the player being placed in a disadvantageous state.

As a result, according to feature sP1, during the period when the number of times that a game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number, the player can be given a sense of urgency that the fourth result information, which will be a trigger for the player to transition to a predetermined game state in which the player has a lower advantage, will not be acquired (the player will not fall), and a sense of expectation that the number of times that the game is executed will reach the predetermined number before the fourth result information is acquired. Then, if the number of times that the game is executed reaches the predetermined number without the fourth result information being acquired, the player can be given a sense of relief and expectation that he or she can transition to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which he or she can play game rounds consecutively without the risk of the game state transitioning to a predetermined game state and becoming disadvantageous. In this way, according to feature sP1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by imparting emotions such as expectation, tension, and relief to the player.

Furthermore, according to feature sP1, in a specified game situation where the number of game rounds in a specific game state is equal to or less than a specified number, the second result information corresponding to the second result that triggers allocation by the second allocation means can be obtained during a period when the number of game rounds in a specific game state is equal to or less than a specified number. The second result triggers allocation by the second allocation means, and the fourth result allocated by the second allocation means triggers a transition to a specified game state where the player has a low advantage. Therefore, according to feature sP1, during a period when the number of game rounds in a specific game state is equal to or less than a specified number, a sense of urgency can be reliably imparted to the player that the fourth result information that triggers a transition to a specified game state where the player has a low advantage is not obtained (the player is not allowed to fall).

<Characteristic sQ group>
The feature sQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sQ1]
A launching means for launching a game ball;
A circulation area (a game area PA) in which the launched game balls circulate;
A ball entry means (a central first starting hole 33) provided in the circulation area and through which a game ball can enter;
A predetermined area (ball entrance 210a of the start opening unit 200) provided in the circulation area and through which the game ball can pass;
a specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the game state is entered after a predetermined condition is satisfied in a condition determination executed in response to the game ball entering the ball entry means, in which the game ball can enter the predetermined area by a launch mode (weak right-hand launch mode) different from the launch mode (left-hand launch mode) by the launch means when the game ball enters the ball entry means, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, information acquisition means for acquiring one piece of result information from multiple types of result information (a signal from a detection sensor for the second starting hole 34, a signal from a detection sensor for the right side first starting hole 44, a signal from a detection sensor for the out hole 251 in the starting hole unit, and a signal from a detection sensor for the fall hole 252);
A first distribution means (electric device 34a) for distributing the game ball to either a first result (a route that can enter the second starting hole 34) or a second result (a route that can enter the right first starting hole 44) when the game ball passes through the specified area;
A second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) for distributing the balls to either a third result (a route that allows the ball to enter the out-hole 251 in the starting hole unit) or a fourth result (a route that allows the ball to enter the falling hole 252) at a predetermined ratio when the balls are distributed to the second result by the first distribution means;
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state from the specific game state to a predetermined game state (low probability high support state) different from the specific game state when the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is fourth result information (a signal from a detection sensor for the fall opening 252) corresponding to the fourth result;
Equipped with
The specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state,
The fourth result information is configured to be obtainable in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game has been executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number (50 times, which is the guaranteed number of times of games), where one game is defined as a game from the start of a game action for notifying a game result to the end of the game action;
a gaming machine configured to be capable of acquiring second result information corresponding to the second result (a signal from a detection sensor for the right-side first starting hole 44) and third result information corresponding to the third result (a signal from a detection sensor for the outlet 251 in the starting hole unit) in a specified gaming situation in which the number of times the game has been executed in the specific gaming state is equal to or less than the specified number (50 times, which is the guaranteed number of games).

According to feature sQ1, when a game ball passes through a predetermined area, one piece of result information is acquired from multiple types of result information. When a game ball passes through a predetermined area, it is assigned to either the first result or the second result, and when it is assigned to the second result, it is assigned to either the third result or the fourth result at a predetermined ratio. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the game state is shifted from a specific game state in which the player has a high advantage to a specific game state in which the player has a low advantage. Furthermore, according to feature sQ1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a specified game situation in which the number of times a game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number or less. When the fourth result information is acquired, the game state is shifted to a specified game state in which the player has a low advantage, as described above. For this reason, according to feature sQ1, if the specific game state can continue until the number of game plays reaches a predetermined number without information corresponding to the fourth result being obtained, information corresponding to the fourth result will no longer be obtained, and there will be no possibility of the player being placed in a disadvantageous state.

As a result, according to feature sQ1, during the period when the number of times that a game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number, the player can be given a sense of urgency that the fourth result information, which will be a trigger for the transition to a predetermined game state in which the player has a lower advantage, is not acquired (the player does not want to fall), and a sense of expectation that the number of times that the game is executed will reach the predetermined number before the fourth result information is acquired. Then, if the number of times that the game is executed reaches the predetermined number without the fourth result information being acquired, the player can be given a sense of relief and expectation that he or she can transition to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which he or she can play game rounds consecutively without the risk of the game state transitioning to a predetermined game state and becoming disadvantageous. In this way, according to feature sQ1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by imparting emotions such as expectation, tension, and relief to the player.

Furthermore, according to feature sQ1, during a period in which the number of times the game is executed in a specific gaming state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, second result information corresponding to a second result that becomes a trigger for distribution by the second distribution means; Third result information corresponding to the third result can be acquired. The second result becomes an opportunity for distribution to be performed by the second distribution means. The third result is one of the two results distributed by the second distribution means, and is not the fourth result, which is the trigger for transitioning to a predetermined gaming state that is less advantageous for the player. be. Therefore, according to feature sQ1, during a period in which the number of times a game is executed in a specific gaming state is less than or equal to a predetermined number, the fourth result information is not the fourth result information that triggers a transition to a predetermined gaming state that is less advantageous for the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the third result information will be acquired.

<Features SR group>
The group of features sR is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sR1]
a firing means for firing a game ball;
A distribution area (gaming area PA) where the fired game balls are distributed;
A ball entry means (center side first starting port 33) provided in the distribution area and into which game balls can enter;
a predetermined area provided in the distribution area and through which game balls can pass (ball entry port 210a of starting port unit 200);
A game state that is entered after a predetermined condition is satisfied in a condition determination that is executed when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and the above state when a game ball enters the ball entry means. A specific gaming state (high accuracy, high support state) in which the game ball can enter the predetermined area by a firing mode (weak right-handed firing mode) different from the firing mode (left-handed firing mode) by the firing means. ), when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, multiple types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second starting port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the first right starting port 44, starting port an information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from a signal from a detection sensor for the in-unit outlet 251 and a signal from a detection sensor for the fall opening 252;
When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the first result (the route that allows the ball to enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (the route that allows the ball to enter the right first starting port 44). A first sorting means (electric accessory 34a) for sorting,
When the first sorting means distributes the second result, the third result (a route that allows the ball to enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (the ball enters the falling port 252) at a predetermined ratio. a second sorting means (game ball sorting device 240) which sorts the ball to one of the possible routes);
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information (signal from the detection sensor for the falling hole 252) corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state is changed from the specific gaming state to the specific gaming state. A gaming state transition means for shifting to a predetermined gaming state (low certainty/high support state) different from the gaming state;
Equipped with
The specific gaming state is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined gaming state,
If the period from the start of the game operation to notify the result of the game to the end of the game operation is defined as one game time, the number of times the game time is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed number of games) 50 times) or less, the fourth result information is configured to be obtainable in a predetermined gaming situation where
At least a first mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second mode (high-frequency support mode) are provided as modes in which the ratio of distribution between the first result and the second result in the first distribution means is different. A gaming machine characterized by having.

According to feature sR1, when a game ball passes through a predetermined area, one piece of result information is acquired from multiple types of result information. When a game ball passes through a predetermined area, it is assigned to either the first result or the second result, and when it is assigned to the second result, it is assigned to either the third result or the fourth result at a predetermined ratio. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the game state is shifted from a specific game state in which the player has a high advantage to a specific game state in which the player has a low advantage. Furthermore, according to feature sR1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a specified game situation in which the number of times a game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number or less. When the fourth result information is acquired, the game state is shifted to a specified game state in which the player has a low advantage, as described above. For this reason, according to feature sR1, if the specific game state can continue until the number of game plays reaches a predetermined number without information corresponding to the fourth result being obtained, information corresponding to the fourth result will no longer be obtained, eliminating the possibility of the player being placed in a disadvantageous state.

As a result, according to feature sR1, during the period when the number of times that a game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number, the player can be given a sense of urgency that the fourth result information, which will be a trigger for the transition to a predetermined game state in which the player has a lower advantage, is not acquired (the player does not want to fall), and a sense of expectation that the number of times that the game is executed will reach the predetermined number before the fourth result information is acquired. Then, if the number of times that the game is executed reaches the predetermined number without the fourth result information being acquired, the player can be given both a sense of relief and a sense of expectation that the game state can be transitioned to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game can be played continuously without the risk of the game state being transitioned to a predetermined game state and being put in a disadvantageous state. In this way, according to feature sR1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by imparting emotions such as expectation, tension, and relief to the player.

Furthermore, according to the feature sR1, the ratio of the distribution of the first result and the second result in the first distribution means can be changed depending on the first mode and the second mode. Therefore, it is possible to change the distribution ratio between the first result and the second result with good controllability. When the second mode is set as a mode in which the ratio of distribution to the first result by the first distribution means is high compared to the first mode, by switching to the second mode, a predetermined result that is less advantageous to the player can be selected. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the fourth result information that triggers the transition to the gaming state will be acquired. As a result, according to feature sR1, by switching between the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to switch the degree of anticipation and sense of urgency given to the player.

<Characteristic sS group>
The feature sS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sS1]
a firing means for firing a game ball;
A distribution area (gaming area PA) where the fired game balls are distributed;
A ball entry means (center side first starting port 33) provided in the distribution area and into which game balls can enter;
a predetermined area provided in the distribution area and through which game balls can pass (ball entry port 210a of starting port unit 200);
A game state that is entered after a predetermined condition is satisfied in a condition determination that is executed upon the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and the above state when a game ball enters the ball entry means. A specific game state (high accuracy, high support state) in which the game ball can enter the predetermined area by a firing mode (weak right-handed firing mode) different from the firing mode (left-handed firing mode) by the firing means (left-handed firing mode). ), when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, multiple types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second starting port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the first right starting port 44, starting port an information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from a signal from a detection sensor for the in-unit outlet 251 and a signal from a detection sensor for the fall opening 252;
When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the first result (the route that allows the ball to enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (the route that allows the ball to enter the right first starting port 44). A first sorting means (electric accessory 34a) for sorting to either one;
When the first sorting means distributes the second result, the third result (a route that allows the ball to enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (the ball enters the falling port 252) at a predetermined ratio. a second sorting means (game ball sorting device 240) which sorts the ball to one of the possible routes);
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is fourth result information (signal from the detection sensor for the falling hole 252) corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state is changed from the specific gaming state to the specific one. A gaming state transition means for shifting to a predetermined gaming state (low certainty/high support state) different from the gaming state;
Equipped with
The specific gaming state is more advantageous for the player than the predetermined gaming state,
If the period from the start of the game operation that notifies the result of the game to the end of the game operation is defined as one game session, the number of times the game session is executed in the specific gaming state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed number of games) 50 times) or less, the fourth result information is configured to be obtainable in a predetermined gaming situation where
When the distribution result of the second distribution means becomes the third result (a route that allows the ball to enter the starting port unit's out port 251), the next game session after the corresponding game session will be in the predetermined game state. A gaming machine characterized by having a game round that is more advantageous for a player than a game machine.

According to feature sS1, when a game ball passes through a predetermined area, one piece of result information is acquired from multiple types of result information. When a game ball passes through a predetermined area, it is assigned to either the first result or the second result, and when it is assigned to the second result, it is assigned to either the third result or the fourth result at a predetermined ratio. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the game state is shifted from a specific game state in which the player has a high advantage to a specific game state in which the player has a low advantage. Furthermore, according to feature sS1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a specified game situation in which the number of times a game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number or less. When the fourth result information is acquired, the game state is shifted to a specified game state in which the player has a low advantage, as described above. For this reason, according to feature sS1, if the specific game state can continue until the number of game plays reaches a predetermined number without information corresponding to the fourth result being obtained, information corresponding to the fourth result will no longer be obtained, and there will be no possibility of the player being placed in a disadvantageous state.

As a result, according to the feature sS1, in a specific gaming state, the player is not allowed to enter a predetermined gaming state that is less advantageous for the player during a period when the number of times the game is executed in the specific gaming state is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times. I feel a sense of urgency that I don't want the fourth result information to be acquired (I don't want to fall), which is the trigger for the transition, and I want the number of times the game is played to reach a predetermined number of times before the fourth result information is acquired. It is possible to give a sense of expectation such as: If the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number without obtaining the fourth result information, the gaming state is shifted to a predetermined gaming state and becomes disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to provide both a sense of relief and a sense of expectation that the player can move to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game can be played continuously without risk. In this way, according to the feature sS1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief.

Furthermore, according to feature sS1, when the distribution result of the second distribution means becomes the fourth result, the gaming state is shifted from the specific gaming state to the predetermined gaming state. On the other hand, when the distribution result of the second distribution means is the third result, the next game session after the corresponding game session will be a game session that is more advantageous for the player compared to the predetermined game state. ing. Therefore, depending on the distribution result of the second distribution means, the gaming state is switched between a game session that is highly advantageous for the player and a game session that is less advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to easily create a sense of urgency and anticipation for the player.

<Features sT group>
The group of features sT is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sT1]
A launching means for launching a game ball;
A circulation area (a game area PA) in which the launched game balls circulate;
A ball entry means (a central first starting hole 33) provided in the circulation area and through which a game ball can enter;
A predetermined area (ball entrance 210a of the start opening unit 200) provided in the circulation area and through which the game ball can pass;
a specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the game state is entered after a predetermined condition is satisfied in a condition determination executed in response to the game ball entering the ball entry means, in which the game ball can enter the predetermined area by a launch mode (weak right-hand launch mode) different from the launch mode (left-hand launch mode) by the launch means when the game ball enters the ball entry means, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, information acquisition means for acquiring one piece of result information from multiple types of result information (a signal from a detection sensor for the second starting hole 34, a signal from a detection sensor for the right side first starting hole 44, a signal from a detection sensor for the out hole 251 in the starting hole unit, and a signal from a detection sensor for the fall hole 252);
A first distribution means (electric device 34a) for distributing the game ball to either a first result (a route that can enter the second starting hole 34) or a second result (a route that can enter the right first starting hole 44) when the game ball passes through the specified area;
A second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) for distributing the balls to either a third result (a route that allows the ball to enter the out-hole 251 in the starting hole unit) or a fourth result (a route that allows the ball to enter the falling hole 252) at a predetermined ratio when the balls are distributed to the second result by the first distribution means;
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state from the specific game state to a predetermined game state (low probability high support state) different from the specific game state when the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is fourth result information (a signal from a detection sensor for the fall opening 252) corresponding to the fourth result;
Equipped with
The specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state,
The fourth result information is configured to be obtainable in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game has been executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number (50 times, which is the guaranteed number of times of games), where one game is defined as a game from the start of a game action for notifying a game result to the end of the game action;
A gaming machine characterized in that the presentation in a game turn corresponding to the allocation result of the second allocation means being the fourth result (a route allowing the ball to enter the drop opening 252) includes content indicating that the advantage to the player is less than the presentation in a game turn corresponding to the allocation result of the second allocation means being the third result (a route allowing the ball to enter the out opening 251 in the starting opening unit).

According to the feature sT1, when a game ball passes through a predetermined area, one result information is acquired from a plurality of types of result information. In addition, when the game ball passes through a predetermined area, it is assigned to either the first result or the second result, and when it is assigned to the second result, it is divided into the third result and the fourth result at a predetermined ratio. You can be assigned to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state shifts from a specific gaming state that is highly advantageous to the player to a predetermined gaming state that is less advantageous to the player. be done. Further, according to feature sT1, the fourth result information can be obtained in a predetermined gaming situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific gaming state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times. When the fourth result information is acquired, the game is shifted to a predetermined gaming state that is less advantageous for the player, as described above. For this reason, according to the feature sT1, if in a specific gaming state, the number of executions of the game can be continued until the number of executions reaches a predetermined number without acquiring the information corresponding to the fourth result, the fourth Information corresponding to the result is no longer acquired, and the possibility of a disadvantageous situation for the player is eliminated.

As a result, according to the feature sT1, in a specific game state, during the period when the number of game rounds in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number, the player can be given a sense of urgency that the fourth result information, which is a trigger for the transition to a predetermined game state in which the player's advantage is low, is not acquired (the player does not want to fall), and a sense of expectation that the number of game rounds will reach the predetermined number before the fourth result information is acquired. Then, if the number of game rounds reaches the predetermined number without the fourth result information being acquired, the player can be given a sense of relief and expectation that he or she can transition to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which game rounds can be played continuously without the risk of the game state being transitioned to a predetermined game state and being put in a disadvantageous state. In this way, according to the feature sT1, the interest in the game can be improved by giving the player emotions such as expectation, tension, and relief. In addition, according to feature sT1, the player can be informed by a special presentation whether the allocation result of the second allocation means is the third result or the fourth result, which can further increase the interest in the game.

<Features sU group>
The feature sU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature sU1]
A launching means for launching a game ball;
A circulation area (a game area PA) in which the launched game balls circulate;
A ball entry means (a central first starting hole 33) provided in the circulation area and through which a game ball can enter;
A predetermined area (ball entrance 210a of the start opening unit 200) provided in the circulation area and through which the game ball can pass;
a specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the game state is entered after a predetermined condition is satisfied in a condition determination executed in response to the game ball entering the ball entry means, in which the game ball can enter the predetermined area by a launch mode (weak right-hand launch mode) different from the launch mode (left-hand launch mode) by the launch means when the game ball enters the ball entry means, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, information acquisition means for acquiring one piece of result information from multiple types of result information (a signal from a detection sensor for the second starting hole 34, a signal from a detection sensor for the right side first starting hole 44, a signal from a detection sensor for the out hole 251 in the starting hole unit, and a signal from a detection sensor for the fall hole 252);
A first distribution means (electric device 34a) for distributing the game ball to either a first result (a route that can enter the second starting hole 34) or a second result (a route that can enter the right first starting hole 44) when the game ball passes through the specified area;
A second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) for distributing the balls to either a third result (a route that allows the ball to enter the out-hole 251 in the starting hole unit) or a fourth result (a route that allows the ball to enter the falling hole 252) at a predetermined ratio when the balls are distributed to the second result by the first distribution means;
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state from the specific game state to a predetermined game state (low probability high support state) different from the specific game state when the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is fourth result information (a signal from a detection sensor for the fall opening 252) corresponding to the fourth result;
Equipped with
The specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state,
The fourth result information is configured to be obtainable in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game has been executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number (50 times, which is the guaranteed number of times of games), where one game is defined as a game from the start of a game action for notifying a game result to the end of the game action;
This gaming machine is characterized in that in the specific game state, if the allocation result of the second allocation means does not result in the fourth result (a route allowing the ball to enter the fall opening 252) during the period until the number of times that the allocation result of the second allocation means results in the third result (a route allowing the ball to enter the out opening 251 in the starting opening unit) reaches the specified number of times (50 times, which is the guaranteed number of games), the game machine will transition again to a game state (high probability low support state (invincible zone) H6) in which transition to the specific game state is guaranteed.

According to feature sU1, when a game ball passes through a predetermined area, one piece of result information is acquired from multiple types of result information. When a game ball passes through a predetermined area, it is assigned to either the first result or the second result, and when it is assigned to the second result, it is assigned to either the third result or the fourth result at a predetermined ratio. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the game state is shifted from a specific game state in which the player has a high advantage to a specific game state in which the player has a low advantage. Furthermore, according to feature sU1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a specified game situation in which the number of times a game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number or less. When the fourth result information is acquired, the game state is shifted to a specified game state in which the player has a low advantage, as described above. For this reason, according to feature sU1, if the specific game state can continue until the number of game plays reaches a predetermined number without information corresponding to the fourth result being obtained, information corresponding to the fourth result will no longer be obtained, and there will be no possibility of the player being placed in a disadvantageous state.

As a result, according to feature sU1, in a specific gaming state, the player is allowed to enter a predetermined gaming state that is less advantageous for the player during a period in which the number of times the game has been executed in the specific gaming state is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times. I feel a sense of urgency that I don't want the fourth result information to be acquired (I don't want to fall), which is the trigger for the transition, and I want the number of times the game is played to reach a predetermined number of times before the fourth result information is acquired. It is possible to give a sense of expectation such as: If the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number without obtaining the fourth result information, the gaming state is shifted to a predetermined gaming state and becomes disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to provide both a sense of relief and a sense of expectation that the player can move to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game can be played continuously without risk. In this manner, according to the feature sU1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief.

Furthermore, according to feature sU1, in a specific game state, if the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number without the distribution result of the second distribution means becoming the fourth result, the specific game is played again. It is possible to give the player both a sense of relief and a sense of expectation that the game state can be shifted to a guaranteed gaming state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment).

<Characteristic sV group>
The feature sV group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature V1]
A launching means for launching a game ball;
A circulation area (a game area PA) in which the launched game balls circulate;
A ball entry means (a central first starting hole 33) provided in the circulation area and through which a game ball can enter;
A predetermined area (ball entrance 210a of the start opening unit 200) provided in the circulation area and through which the game ball can pass;
a specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the game state is entered after a predetermined condition is satisfied in a condition determination executed in response to the game ball entering the ball entry means, in which the game ball can enter the predetermined area by a launch mode (weak right-hand launch mode) different from the launch mode (left-hand launch mode) by the launch means when the game ball enters the ball entry means, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, information acquisition means for acquiring one piece of result information from multiple types of result information (a signal from a detection sensor for the second starting hole 34, a signal from a detection sensor for the right side first starting hole 44, a signal from a detection sensor for the out hole 251 in the starting hole unit, and a signal from a detection sensor for the fall hole 252);
A first distribution means (electric device 34a) for distributing the game ball to either a first result (a route that can enter the second starting hole 34) or a second result (a route that can enter the right first starting hole 44) when the game ball passes through the specified area;
A second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) for distributing the balls to either a third result (a route that allows the ball to enter the out-hole 251 in the starting hole unit) or a fourth result (a route that allows the ball to enter the falling hole 252) at a predetermined ratio when the balls are distributed to the second result by the first distribution means;
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state from the specific game state to a predetermined game state (low probability high support state) different from the specific game state when the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is fourth result information (a signal from a detection sensor for the fall opening 252) corresponding to the fourth result;
Equipped with
The specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state,
The fourth result information is configured to be obtainable in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game has been executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number (50 times, which is the guaranteed number of times of games), where one game is defined as a game from the start of a game action for notifying a game result to the end of the game action;
The launch mode by the launch means that is most advantageous to the player in the specific game state is a launch mode (weak right-hit launch mode) in which the game ball is more likely to enter the predetermined area than the ball entry means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the launch mode by the launch means which is most advantageous to the player in the specified gaming state is a launch mode in which the gaming ball is more likely to enter the ball entry means than the specified area (the launch mode for left-handed hit in a low-probability low-support state in variant example 14, which results in a low-probability low-support state if it falls in a high-probability high-support state).

According to feature sV1, when a game ball passes through a predetermined area, one piece of result information is acquired from multiple types of result information. When a game ball passes through a predetermined area, it is assigned to either the first result or the second result, and when it is assigned to the second result, it is assigned to either the third result or the fourth result at a predetermined ratio. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the game state is shifted from a specific game state in which the player has a high advantage to a specific game state in which the player has a low advantage. Furthermore, according to feature sV1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a specified game situation in which the number of times a game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number or less. When the fourth result information is acquired, the game state is shifted to a specified game state in which the player has a low advantage, as described above. For this reason, according to feature sV1, if the specific game state can continue until the number of game plays reaches a predetermined number without information corresponding to the fourth result being obtained, information corresponding to the fourth result will not be obtained, and there will be no possibility of the player being placed in a disadvantageous state.

As a result, according to feature sV1, in a specific gaming state, the player is allowed to enter a predetermined gaming state that is less advantageous for the player during a period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific gaming state is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times. I feel a sense of urgency that I don't want the fourth result information to be acquired (I don't want to fall), which is the trigger for the transition, and I want the number of times the game is played to reach a predetermined number of times before the fourth result information is acquired. It is possible to give a sense of expectation such as: If the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number without obtaining the fourth result information, the gaming state is shifted to a predetermined gaming state and becomes disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to provide both a sense of relief and a sense of expectation that the player can move to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game can be played continuously without risk. In this way, according to the feature sV1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief.

Furthermore, according to feature sV1, the player can increase the advantage of the player in a specific game state by operating the launching means so that the launching mode is such that the game ball is more likely to enter the specified area than the ball entry means in a specific game state. Also, the player can increase the advantage of the player in a specific game state by operating the launching means so that the launching mode is such that the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entry means than the specified area in a specific game state. Therefore, in a specific game state, it is possible to recommend to the player to operate the launching means in a launching mode that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the specified area, and in a specific game state, it is possible to recommend to the player to operate the launching means in a launching mode that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. Therefore, according to feature sV1, the player can be made to launch the game ball in the launching mode of the launching means intended by the designer of the gaming machine. As a result, according to feature sV1, the flow of the game that the designer of the player envisioned can be realized.

<Features Group A>
The group of features tA is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tA1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) where game balls are distributed,
Ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and into which game balls can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
A means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), and a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination; 1 determination mode (low probability mode); and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 420 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is set to a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a first state that makes it possible or easy to enter the game ball into the ball entry means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state of
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the ball entry means than the second control mode (high frequency support mode);
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a specific gaming state (high-probability, high-support state) in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, until the number of times the game is executed after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times (time saving continuation number) a gaming state in which the specific gaming state is shifted from the specific gaming state to a first predetermined gaming state (low probability high support state) in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode when a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied; A means of transition;
In the first predetermined gaming state, if the special information satisfies a second predetermined condition (value corresponding to time saving provision), an advantageous state continuation means for continuing a state advantageous to the player for a predetermined period;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature tA1, in a specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, if a specific condition is satisfied before the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after transition to the specific gaming state, A transition is made to a first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode. Then, in the first predetermined gaming state, if the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the state advantageous to the player continues for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, according to the feature tA1, in a specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is required to play the game for a predetermined number of times after transitioning to the specific gaming state. It is possible to make the player expect that the specific condition will be satisfied and the specific gaming state will be shifted to the first predetermined gaming state which can be an advantageous state for the player. That is, according to the feature tA1, in a specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, special information is provided to the player by determination in the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the specific condition will be satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches the predetermined number of times, and the specific gaming state will be changed from the specific gaming state. , it is possible to make the player expect a shift to the first predetermined gaming state, which can be an advantageous state for the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature tA2]
The gaming machine according to feature tA1,
The advantageous state continuation means is
In the first predetermined gaming state, when the special information satisfies a second predetermined condition (value corresponding to time saving provision), the control mode by the control means is changed until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: control mode continuation means for continuing the second control mode.

According to feature tA2, in the first predetermined gaming state, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the control mode by the control means is changed until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until a jackpot is won). The second control mode continues as follows. When the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than when the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls he has. The determination means can frequently make a determination regarding the special information acquired when a game ball enters the means. Therefore, if it is possible to shift to the first predetermined gaming state, it is possible to reliably realize that the special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition. Become.

Therefore, according to feature tA2, in a specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is required to perform a specified It is possible to make the player expect that the condition will be met and the specific gaming state will be shifted to the first predetermined gaming state. That is, according to the feature tA2, in a specific game state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the specific condition will be satisfied by the time the number of game runs reaches the predetermined number after the transition to the specific gaming state, and the specific gaming state will be changed from the specific gaming state. , it is possible to make the player expect that the special information will shift to the first predetermined gaming state in which it can be reliably realized that the first predetermined condition is satisfied.

On the other hand, in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition, the player is in a state where it is difficult for the player to reduce the amount of balls he has until the next time the special information is determined by the determining means to satisfy the first predetermined condition (for example, until he wins a jackpot) This provides a sense of security that the second control mode, which facilitates the entry of game balls into the ball entry means, will not end. In this way, according to the feature tA2, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of expectation and security.

[Feature tA3]
A gaming machine according to feature tA2,
a means for transitioning from the specific game state to a second predetermined game state (high probability low support state) different from the specific game state, the determination mode being the second determination mode, when the number of times the game is executed after transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number without the specific condition being satisfied;
The second predetermined gaming state is less advantageous to a player than the first predetermined gaming state.

According to feature tA3, when the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number without the specific condition being satisfied, the game state is transitioned to a second predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode. The second predetermined game state is less advantageous to the player than the first predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, even though the judgment mode is the second judgment mode. For this reason, feature tA3 can make the player feel a sense of tension that the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state will reach a predetermined number without the judgment means determining that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and without the specific condition being satisfied. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

[Feature tA4]
The gaming machine according to feature tA3,
In the second predetermined gaming state, if the specific condition is satisfied, the second predetermined gaming state changes from the second predetermined gaming state to a normal state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for transferring.

Feature tA4 makes the player feel a sense of urgency that a specific condition might be met in the second predetermined game state, causing the game to transition to the normal state. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

[Feature tA5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features tA1 to tA4,
a means for transitioning the determination mode to the first determination mode when the number of times the game has been executed since the determination mode became a second determination mode and transitioned to the specific game state reaches a specific number (ST number) that is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times.

According to feature tA5, the player is given a sense of urgency as to whether the number of executions of the game after entering the specific gaming state will reach a specific number and the determination mode will shift to the first determination mode. It can be held against. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Feature group B>
The group of features tB is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tB1]
A circulation area (game area PA) in which game balls are circulated;
A ball entry means (second starting hole 34) provided in the circulation area and through which a game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determination means having, as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 420 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the ball entry means;
A state transition means for transitioning the state of the assistance means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
In a gaming machine comprising:
a game state transition means for transitioning from the specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode to a first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode when a specific condition (winning a fall lottery) is satisfied before the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number (number of times the time-saving continuation is satisfied), and for transitioning from the specific game state to a second predetermined game state (high probability low support state) in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and which is different from the specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number without the specific condition being satisfied;
The second predetermined gaming state is less advantageous to a player than the first predetermined gaming state.

According to feature tB1, in a specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, if a specific condition is satisfied before the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after transition to the specific gaming state, A transition is made to a first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode. Furthermore, in the specific gaming state, if the number of times the game is executed after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the specific gaming A transition is made to a second predetermined gaming state that is different from the current state. The second predetermined gaming state is less advantageous for the player than the first predetermined gaming state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, although the judgment mode is the second judgment mode. Therefore, according to the feature tB1, in a specific gaming state where the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player has to wait until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after transitioning to the specific gaming state. It is possible to make the player expect that the specific condition will be satisfied and the specific gaming state will be shifted to the first predetermined gaming state. That is, according to the feature tB1, in a specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the specific condition will be satisfied by the time the number of game runs reaches the predetermined number after the transition to the specific gaming state, and the specific gaming state will be changed from the specific gaming state. It is possible to make the player expect to move to the first predetermined gaming state.

Further, according to feature tB1, if the number of times the game is executed after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number without the specific condition being satisfied, a second predetermined Since the transition to the gaming state is made, in the specific gaming state, the special information determined by the determination means does not satisfy the first predetermined condition, and the specific condition is not satisfied, and the gaming cycle after the transition to the specific gaming state is It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the number of executions will reach a predetermined number of times. In this way, according to the feature tB1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

[Feature tB2]
The gaming machine according to feature tB1,
In the first predetermined gaming state, when the special information satisfies a second predetermined condition (value corresponding to time saving provision), the control mode by the control means is changed until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: control mode continuation means for continuing the second control mode.

According to feature tB2, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition in the first predetermined gaming state, the second control mode is continued as the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until a jackpot is won). When the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the ball entry means than when the control mode is the first control mode, and the player is less likely to lose balls, and the determination by the determination means on the special information acquired as a result of the gaming ball entering the ball entry means can be performed with high frequency. Therefore, if it is possible to transition to the first predetermined gaming state, it is possible to reliably achieve that the special information acquired as a result of the gaming ball entering the ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition.

Therefore, according to feature tB2, in a specific gaming state, the specific condition is satisfied for the player before the number of times of playing the game after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times, and the specific condition is satisfied. This makes it possible to further increase expectations that the game will shift from the state to the first predetermined gaming state. In addition, in the first predetermined gaming state that has transitioned from the specific gaming state, the player is required to keep the number of balls in his or her possession in a state where it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls until the next time the determining means determines that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, winning a jackpot). ), it is possible to provide a sense of security that the second control mode, which facilitates the entry of game balls into the ball entry means, will not end. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature tB3]
The gaming machine according to feature tB2,
In the second predetermined gaming state, if the specific condition is satisfied, the second predetermined gaming state changes from the second predetermined gaming state to a normal state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for transferring.

Feature tB3 can make the player feel a sense of urgency that a specific condition might be met in the second predetermined game state, causing the game to transition to the normal state. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

[Feature tB4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features tB1 to tB3,
a means for transitioning the determination mode to the first determination mode when the number of times the game has been executed since the determination mode became a second determination mode and transitioned to the specific game state reaches a specific number (ST number) that is equal to or greater than the predetermined number.

According to feature tB4, the player is given a sense of urgency as to whether the number of executions of the game after entering the specific gaming state will reach a specific number and the determination mode will shift to the first determination mode. It can be held against. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic tC group>
The feature tC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tC1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) where game balls are distributed,
Ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and into which game balls can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
A means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), and a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination; 1 determination mode (low probability mode); and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 420 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is set to a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a first state that makes it possible or easy to enter the game ball into the ball entry means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state of
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the ball entry means than the second control mode (high frequency support mode);
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a first predetermined gaming state (low probability/high support state) in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the special information is different from the first predetermined condition. a control mode in which, when a second predetermined condition (value corresponding to time saving provision) is satisfied, the second control mode is continued as the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition; means of continuation,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature tC1, in a first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the special information satisfies a second predetermined condition different from the first predetermined condition. In this case, the second control mode is continued as the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until a jackpot is won). When the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball enters the ball entry means more easily than when the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls he has. The determination means can frequently perform determination regarding the special information acquired upon entry of a game ball into the ball means. Therefore, according to feature tC1, if it is possible to shift to the first predetermined gaming state, it is ensured that the special information acquired upon entry of the game ball into the ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition. It becomes possible to realize this.

Therefore, feature tC1 can make the player look forward to transitioning to the first predetermined gaming state. Furthermore, in this first predetermined gaming state, the player can be given a sense of security that the second control mode, in which gaming balls can easily enter the ball entry means, will not end until the next time the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until a jackpot is won), while the player is unlikely to lose balls in the state. In this way, feature tC1 can increase the player's interest in the game by giving the player feelings of expectation and security.

[Feature tC2]
The gaming machine according to feature tC1,
In the first predetermined gaming state, if the determining means determines that the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition, the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition. Game machine.

According to feature tC2, in the first predetermined gaming state, if the determining means determines that the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition, the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition. Therefore, in the first predetermined gaming state, either the determining means determines that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition before determining that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, or the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition. When it is determined that the first predetermined condition is satisfied, the second control mode is continued, and finally it is determined that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. Therefore, in the first predetermined gaming state, it is virtually guaranteed that the special information will be determined to satisfy the first predetermined condition. Therefore, according to the feature tC2, it is possible to make the player expect even more the transition to the first predetermined gaming state.

If the configuration is such that if the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition in the first predetermined gaming state, the special information may not satisfy the second predetermined condition, as described above, even though the player is led to expect a transition to the first predetermined gaming state, this expectation may be betrayed and the special information may never satisfy the second predetermined condition even after a transition to the first predetermined gaming state. Feature tC2 makes it possible to avoid this problem and gain the trust of the player.

[Feature tC3]
The gaming machine according to feature tC1 or feature tC2,
In a specific gaming state (high certainty, high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, execution of the gaming round after transition to the specific gaming state; If a specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is satisfied before the number of times reaches a predetermined number (time saving continuation number), the specific gaming state shifts to the first predetermined gaming state (low probability high support state). A game machine characterized by comprising a game state transition means for causing the game to change to a game state.

According to feature tC3, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, if a specific condition is met before the number of game times executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, the specific game state is transitioned to a first predetermined game state. In the first predetermined game state, as explained above, it is possible to reliably realize that the special information acquired in response to the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition. Therefore, according to feature tC3, in the specific game state, the player can be made to expect that a specific condition will be met before the number of game times executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, and that the specific game state will transition to the first predetermined game state. That is, according to feature tC3, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player can expect that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition due to the judgment in the second judgment mode in which there is a high probability that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the player can expect that the specific condition will be met before the number of game plays executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, and the player can transition from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state in which it is certain that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition.

[Feature tC4]
A gaming machine according to feature tC3,
a means for transitioning from the specific game state to a second predetermined game state (high probability low support state) in which a determination mode is a second determination mode and a control mode is a first control mode when the number of executions of the game after transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number without the specific condition being satisfied;
The second predetermined gaming state is less advantageous to a player than the first predetermined gaming state.

According to feature tC4, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the second predetermined gaming state is shifted to. The second predetermined gaming state is less advantageous for the player than the first predetermined gaming state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, although the judgment mode is the second judgment mode. For this reason, according to feature tC4, the number of executions of the game after the transition to the specific gaming state is determined by the determining means without the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition and without the specific condition being satisfied. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not he or she will reach a predetermined number of times. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Feature tD group>
The group of features tD is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tD1]
A circulation area (game area PA) in which game balls are circulated;
A ball entry means (second starting hole 34) provided in the circulation area and through which a game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determination means having a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode;
A judgment mode transition means (fall judgment process) for transitioning the judgment performed by the judgment means from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode when a specific condition (winning the fall lottery) is established;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 420 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
a game state transition means for transitioning from the specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode to a first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) by transitioning the determination mode to the first determination mode by the determination mode transition means when the specific condition is established before the number of executions of the game after transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number (time-saving continuation number);
Equipped with
The first predetermined gaming state is more advantageous to a player than the specific gaming state.

According to feature tD1, since the determination mode transition means shifts the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, it inherently reduces the advantage for the player. On the other hand, according to feature tD1, in a specific game state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the determination mode When a specific condition for operating the transition means is established, the gaming state is shifted from the specific gaming state to a first predetermined gaming state that is highly advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to feature tD1, although the operation by the determination mode transition means would originally discourage the player, the game state is shifted to the first predetermined gaming state that is highly advantageous for the player. Unexpected joy can be given to the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature tD2]
The gaming machine according to feature tD1,
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is set to a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a first state that makes it possible or easy to enter the game ball into the ball entry means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state of
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the ball entry means than the second control mode (high frequency support mode);
In the first predetermined gaming state, when the special information satisfies a second predetermined condition (value corresponding to time saving provision), the control mode by the control means is changed until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. control mode continuation means for continuing the second control mode as
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature tD2, when the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than when the control mode is the first control mode, and the player is less likely to lose balls, and the determination by the determination means on the special information acquired in response to the game ball entering the ball entry means can be executed with high frequency. Therefore, if it is possible to transition to the first predetermined game state, it is possible to reliably realize that the special information acquired in response to the game ball entering the ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition.

Therefore, according to the feature tD2, in a specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is required to perform a specified It is possible to make the player expect that the condition will be satisfied and the specific gaming state will be shifted to the first predetermined gaming state. That is, according to the feature tD2, in a specific game state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, special information is provided to the player by determination in the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the specific condition will be satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches the predetermined number of times, and the specific gaming state will be changed from the specific gaming state. , it is possible to make the player expect that the special information will shift to the first predetermined gaming state in which it can be reliably realized that the first predetermined condition is satisfied.

Meanwhile, in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition, the player can be given a sense of security that the second control mode, in which gaming balls can easily enter the ball entry means, will not end until the next time the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until a jackpot is won), and the player is unlikely to lose any balls remaining. In this way, feature tD2 can increase the player's interest in the game by giving the player feelings of expectation and security.

[Feature tD3]
The gaming machine according to feature tD1 or feature tD2,
The specific game in which the determination mode is the second determination mode when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches the predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied. comprising means for transitioning from the specific gaming state to a second predetermined gaming state (high certainty low support state) different from the specified gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized in that the second predetermined gaming state is less advantageous for the player than the first predetermined gaming state.

According to feature tD3, when the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number without the specific condition being satisfied, the game state is transitioned to a second predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode. The second predetermined game state is less advantageous to the player than the first predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, even though the judgment mode is the second judgment mode. For this reason, feature tD3 can make the player feel a sense of tension that the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state will reach a predetermined number without the judgment means determining that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and without the specific condition being satisfied. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

[Feature tD4]
The gaming machine according to feature tD3,
In the second predetermined gaming state, if the specific condition is satisfied, the second predetermined gaming state changes from the second predetermined gaming state to a normal state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for transferring.

According to feature tD4, in the second predetermined gaming state, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of urgency as if the specific condition will be satisfied and the game will be shifted to the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature tD5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features tA1 to tA4,
When the number of executions of the game after the determination mode becomes the second determination mode and the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a specific number of times (ST number of times) that is greater than or equal to the predetermined number of times; A gaming machine, comprising: means for shifting the determination mode to the first determination mode.

Feature tD5 makes the player feel a sense of urgency that the number of times the game has been played since the transition to the specific game state will reach a certain number and the judgment mode will transition to the first judgment mode. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic tE group>
The feature tE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tE1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) where game balls are distributed,
Ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and into which game balls can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
A means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), and a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination; 1 determination mode (low probability mode); and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode;
determination mode transition means (fall determination processing) for shifting the determination performed by the determination means from the second determination mode to the first determination mode when a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied; ,
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 420 executed by it),
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
In a specific gaming state (high-probability, high-support state) in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, until the number of times the game is executed after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times (time saving continuation number) A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for executing a performance corresponding to a predetermined advantageous state that is an advantageous state for a player when the specific condition is satisfied.

According to feature tE1, since the determination mode transition means shifts the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, it inherently reduces the advantage for the player. On the other hand, according to feature tE1, in a specific gaming state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the judgment mode When the specific condition for operating the transition means is satisfied, a performance corresponding to a predetermined advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is executed. Therefore, according to feature tE1, although the operation by the determination mode transition means would originally discourage the player, a performance corresponding to a predetermined advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is executed. The range of performance can be expanded without being limited by the operation by the judgment mode transition means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature tE2]
The gaming machine according to feature tE1,
In the specific gaming state (high certainty high support state), if the specific condition is satisfied before the number of executions of the game after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number (time saving continuation number), A gaming state transition means for shifting from the specific gaming state to a first predetermined gaming state (low probability high support state) by shifting the determination mode to the first determination mode by the determination mode transition means;
A gaming machine characterized in that the first predetermined gaming state is more advantageous for a player than the specific gaming state.

According to feature tE2, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, if a specific condition for operating the judgment mode transition means is met before the number of game plays executed after transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, the game state is transitioned from the specific game state to a first predetermined game state which is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, according to feature tE2, although the operation by the judgment mode transition means is originally disappointing to the player, the game state is transitioned to the first predetermined game state which is more advantageous to the player, and therefore it is possible to give the player an unexpected joy. As a result, it is possible to further increase the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature tE3]
A gaming machine according to feature tE2,
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the ball entry means;
A state transition means for transitioning the state of the assistance means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
a control mode continuation means for continuing the second control mode as the control mode by the control means, when the special information satisfies a second predetermined condition (a value corresponding to the time-saving provision) in the first predetermined gaming state, until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature tE3, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball enters the ball entering means more easily than when the control mode is the first control mode, and the number of balls held by the player decreases. This allows the determination means to frequently perform determination regarding the special information acquired by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means in a state where the game ball is difficult to enter. Therefore, if it is possible to shift to the first predetermined gaming state, it is possible to reliably realize that the special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition. Become.

Therefore, according to feature tE3, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player can expect that a specific condition will be met before the number of game times executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, and that the specific game state will transition to a first predetermined game state. In other words, according to feature tE3, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player can expect that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition by the judgment in the second judgment mode in which the probability that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition is high, but further, the player can expect that a specific condition will be met before the number of game times executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, and that the specific game state will transition to a first predetermined game state in which it is certain that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition.

On the other hand, in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition, the player is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the amount of balls he has until the next time the special information is determined by the determining means to satisfy the first predetermined condition (for example, until he wins a jackpot). This provides a sense of security that the second control mode, which facilitates the entry of game balls into the ball entry means, will never end. In this manner, according to the feature tE3, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of expectation and security.

[Feature tE4]
A gaming machine according to feature tE2 or feature tE3,
a means for transitioning from the specific game state to a second predetermined game state (high probability low support state) different from the specific game state, the determination mode being the second determination mode, when the number of times the game is executed after transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number without the specific condition being satisfied;
The second predetermined gaming state is less advantageous to a player than the first predetermined gaming state.

According to feature tE4, when the number of times the game is executed after transitioning to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the second predetermined game whose determination mode is the second determination mode is executed. state. The second predetermined gaming state is less advantageous for the player than the first predetermined gaming state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, although the judgment mode is the second judgment mode. For this reason, according to feature tE4, the number of executions of the game after transition to the specific gaming state is determined by the determination means without the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition and without the specific condition being satisfied. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not he or she will reach a predetermined number of times. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature tE5]
The gaming machine according to feature tE4,
In the second predetermined gaming state, if the specific condition is satisfied, the second predetermined gaming state changes from the second predetermined gaming state to a normal state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for transferring.

According to the feature tE5, in the second predetermined gaming state, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether the specific condition will be satisfied and the game will be shifted to the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature tE6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features tE1 to tE5,
a means for transitioning the determination mode to the first determination mode when the number of times the game has been executed since the determination mode became a second determination mode and transitioned to the specific game state reaches a specific number (ST number) that is equal to or greater than the predetermined number.

Feature tE6 can make the player feel a sense of urgency that the number of times the game has been played since the transition to the specific game state will reach a specific number and the judgment mode will transition to the first judgment mode. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

<Feature tF group>
The group of features tF is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tF1]
A launching means for launching a game ball;
A circulation area (a game area PA) in which the launched game balls circulate;
A ball entry means (second starting hole 34) provided in the circulation area and through which a game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determination means having, as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 420 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the ball entry means;
A state transition means for transitioning the state of the assistance means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
In a gaming machine comprising:
a control mode continuation means for causing the control means to continue the second control mode as the control mode when the special information satisfies a second predetermined condition (a value corresponding to time-saving provision) different from the first predetermined condition in a first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, for a period until the number of executions of the game rounds reaches a predetermined number;
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a situation where a gaming ball is launched by the launching means in a predetermined launching manner (right-hit launching manner) that enables the gaming ball to enter the ball entry means, the special information is configured to satisfy the second predetermined condition until the number of times the game has been executed after the start of the second control mode reaches a predetermined number, thereby causing the second control mode to continue until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition.

According to feature tF1, in the first predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, when the special information satisfies a second predetermined condition different from the first predetermined condition, the second control mode is continued as the control mode by the control means for a period until the number of game rounds reaches a predetermined number. In the state in which the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball is easier to enter the ball entry means than in the state in which the control mode is the first control mode, and the player is less likely to lose balls, and the judgment by the judgment means on the special information acquired as a result of the game ball entering the ball entry means can be executed with high frequency. Furthermore, according to feature tF1, in a situation in which the game ball is launched by a predetermined launching mode that allows the game ball to enter the ball entry means, the special information repeatedly satisfies the second predetermined condition until the number of game rounds after the start of the second control mode reaches a predetermined number, so that the second control mode is continued until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. Therefore, according to feature tF1, if it is possible to transition to the first predetermined gaming state, it is possible to reliably realize that the special information acquired in response to the entry of the gaming ball into the ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition.

Therefore, feature tF1 can make the player anticipate a transition to the first predetermined gaming state. Feature tF1 also has the effect of realizing a gameplay in which the second control mode is continued until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, by using a control mode continuation means that continues the second control mode only a predetermined number of times in the first predetermined gaming state. In other words, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which the second control mode is continued until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition the next time, without using a means that continues the second control mode until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition.

[Feature tF2]
A gaming machine according to feature tF1,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first predetermined gaming state, when the judgment means judges that the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition, the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition.

According to the feature tF2, in the first predetermined gaming state, when the determining means determines that the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition, the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition. Therefore, in the first predetermined gaming state, either the determining means determines that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition before determining that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, or the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition. If it is determined that the first predetermined condition is satisfied, the second control mode is continued, and finally it is determined that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. Therefore, in the first predetermined gaming state, it is virtually guaranteed that the special information will be determined to satisfy the first predetermined condition. Therefore, according to the feature tF2, it is possible to make the player expect even more the transition to the first predetermined gaming state.

[Feature tF3]
A gaming machine according to feature tF1 or feature tF2,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a game state transition means for transitioning from a specific game state (high probability, high support state) in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, to the first predetermined game state (low probability, high support state) when a specific condition (winning a fall-out lottery) is met before the number of game turns executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number (number of times the time-saving function continues).

According to feature tF3, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, if a specific condition is met before the number of game times executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, the specific game state is transitioned to a first predetermined game state. In the first predetermined game state, as described above, it is possible to reliably realize that the special information acquired in response to the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition. Therefore, according to feature tF3, in the specific game state, the player can be made to expect that a specific condition will be met before the number of game times executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, and that the specific game state will transition to the first predetermined game state. That is, according to feature tF3, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player can expect that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition due to the judgment in the second judgment mode in which there is a high probability that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the player can expect that the specific condition will be met before the number of game plays executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, and the player can transition from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state in which it is certain that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition.

[Feature tF4]
The gaming machine according to feature tF3,
If the number of executions of the game after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches the predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the control mode is the second determination mode. comprising means for transitioning from the specific gaming state to a second predetermined gaming state (high certainty low support state) which is the first control mode;
A gaming machine characterized in that the second predetermined gaming state is less advantageous for the player than the first predetermined gaming state.

According to feature tF4, when the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number without the specific condition being satisfied, the state is transitioned to a second predetermined game state. The second predetermined game state is less advantageous to the player than the first predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, even though the judgment mode is the second judgment mode. For this reason, feature tF4 can make the player feel a sense of tension that the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state will reach a predetermined number without the judgment means determining that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and without the specific condition being satisfied. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic tG group>
The feature tG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tG1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) where game balls are distributed,
Ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and into which game balls can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
A means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), and a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination; 1 determination mode (low probability mode); and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 420 executed by it),
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a specific gaming state (high-probability, high-support state) in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, until the number of times the game is executed after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times (time saving continuation number) When a specific condition (winning in a falling lottery) is met, the specific gaming state is transferred from the specific gaming state to a first predetermined gaming state (low probability high support state) in which it is guaranteed to transfer to the specific gaming state again. , when the number of executions of the game after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches the predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of transitioning to the specific gaming state again is determined by the first predetermined probability. A gaming machine comprising: a gaming state transition means for shifting from the specific gaming state to a second predetermined gaming state (low-probability, low-support state H1 in modification example 1) lower than the gaming state.

According to feature tG1, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, if a specific condition is satisfied before the number of game times executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a specific number, the specific game state is transitioned to a first predetermined game state in which transition to the specific game state is guaranteed. Also, in a specific game state, if the number of game times executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a specific number without the specific condition being satisfied, the specific game state is transitioned to a second predetermined game state in which the probability of transitioning to the specific game state again is lower than that of the first predetermined game state. Therefore, according to feature tG1, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, a player can expect that a specific condition will be satisfied before the number of game times executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a specific number, and that the specific game state will transition to the first predetermined game state. That is, according to feature tG1, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player can expect that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition due to the judgment in the second judgment mode in which the probability that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition is high, and furthermore, the player can expect that the specific condition will be met before the number of game plays executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, causing a transition from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state.

In addition, according to feature tG1, if the number of game rounds executed after transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number without the specific condition being satisfied, a transition is made to a second predetermined game state in which the probability of transitioning back to the specific game state is lower than that of the first predetermined game state, so that the player can have a sense of tension that in the specific game state, the number of game rounds executed after transition to the specific game state will reach a predetermined number without the determination means determining that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and without the specific condition being satisfied. In this way, feature tG1 can increase the player's interest in the game by imparting feelings of expectation and tension to the player.

[Feature tG2]
The gaming machine according to feature tG1,
The gaming state transition means is
When the specific condition is met, the game state is shifted by switching the determination performed by the determining means between the first determination mode and the second determination mode (fall determination process). A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means.

According to the feature tG2, the game state transition in the game state transition means is performed by switching the determination performed by the determination means between the first determination mode and the second determination mode. For this reason, according to feature tG2, the controllability is excellent.

[Feature tG3]
A gaming machine according to feature tG1,
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the ball entry means;
A state transition means for transitioning the state of the assistance means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine, characterized in that the second predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to feature tG3, in the second predetermined gaming state, since the control mode is the first control mode, it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the ball entry means. For this reason, the second predetermined gaming state is less advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to feature tG3, in the specific gaming state, it is possible to give the player an even greater sense of tension that the number of times a game is played after transitioning to the specific gaming state may reach a specific number without the specific condition being met.

[Feature tG4]
The gaming machine according to feature tG1,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to feature tG4, in the second predetermined gaming state, the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, so the advantage to the player is low. For this reason, feature tG4 can give the player an even greater sense of tension in the specific gaming state, as if the number of play times after the transition to the specific gaming state will reach the predetermined number without the specific condition being met.

<Characteristic tH group>
The group of features tH is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tH1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) where game balls are distributed,
Ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and into which game balls can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
A means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), and a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination; 1 determination mode (low probability mode); and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 420 executed by it),
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a specific gaming state (high-probability, high-support state) in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, until the number of times the game is executed after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times (time saving continuation number) When a specific condition (winning in a falling lottery) is met, the specific gaming state is transferred from the specific gaming state to a first predetermined gaming state (low probability high support state) in which it is guaranteed to transfer to the specific gaming state again. , when the number of executions of the game after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches the predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of transitioning to the specific gaming state again is determined by the first predetermined probability. A gaming state transition means for shifting from the specific gaming state to a second predetermined gaming state (low-probability, low-support state H1 in modification example 1) lower than the gaming state;
The gaming state transition means is
When the specific condition is met, the game state is shifted by switching the determination performed by the determining means between the first determination mode and the second determination mode (fall determination process). A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means.

According to feature tH1, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, if a specific condition is satisfied before the number of times that a game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a specific number, the specific game state is transitioned to a first predetermined game state in which a transition to the specific game state is guaranteed again. Also, in a specific game state, if the number of times that a game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a specific number without the specific condition being satisfied, the specific game state is transitioned to a second predetermined game state in which the probability of transitioning to the specific game state again is lower than that of the first predetermined game state. Therefore, according to feature tH1, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, a player can expect that a specific condition will be satisfied before the number of times that a game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a specific number, and that the specific game state will transition to the first predetermined game state. That is, according to feature tH1, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player can expect that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition due to the judgment in the second judgment mode in which the probability that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition is high, and furthermore, the player can expect that the specific condition will be met before the number of game plays executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, causing a transition from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state.

Furthermore, according to feature tH1, if the number of game rounds executed after transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number without the specific condition being satisfied, a transition is made to a second predetermined game state in which the probability of transitioning back to the specific game state is lower than that of the first predetermined game state, so that the player can have a sense of tension that in the specific game state, the number of game rounds executed after transition to the specific game state will reach a predetermined number without the determination means determining that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and without the specific condition being satisfied. In this way, feature tH1 can increase the player's interest in the game by imparting feelings of expectation and tension to the player.

Furthermore, according to feature tH1, the game state is transitioned in the game state transition means by switching the judgment performed by the judgment means between the first judgment mode and the second judgment mode. For this reason, feature tH1 provides excellent controllability.

<Characteristic tI group>
The feature tI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tI1]
A circulation area (game area PA) in which game balls are circulated;
A ball entry means (second starting hole 34) provided in the circulation area and through which a game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determination means having, as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 420 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the ball entry means;
A state transition means for transitioning the state of the assistance means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
In a gaming machine comprising:
a game state transition means for transitioning from the specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode to a first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) in which transition to the specific game state is guaranteed if a specific condition (winning a fall lottery) is met before the number of times the game is executed after transition to the specific game state reaches a specific number (number of times the time-saving continuation is continued), and for transitioning from the specific game state to a second predetermined game state (low probability low support state H1 in the first modified example) in which the probability of transitioning to the specific game state again is lower than that of the first predetermined game state, in which the number of times the game is executed after transition to the specific game state reaches the specific number without the specific condition being met;
The gaming machine, characterized in that the second predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to feature tI1, in a specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, if a specific condition is satisfied before the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after transition to the specific gaming state, The specific gaming state is transferred to a first predetermined gaming state in which it is guaranteed that the specific gaming state will be transferred again. Furthermore, in the specific gaming state, if the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of transitioning to the specific gaming state again is a first predetermined probability. The specific gaming state is shifted to a second predetermined gaming state lower than the gaming state. Therefore, according to the feature tI1, in a specific gaming state where the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player has to wait until the number of times the game is played reaches a predetermined number after transitioning to the specific gaming state. It is possible to make the player expect that the specific condition will be satisfied and the specific gaming state will be shifted to the first predetermined gaming state. That is, according to the feature tI1, in a specific game state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the specific condition will be satisfied by the time the number of game runs reaches the predetermined number after the transition to the specific gaming state, and the specific gaming state will be changed from the specific gaming state. It is possible to make the player expect to move to the first predetermined gaming state.

Furthermore, according to the feature tI1, when the number of executions of the game after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of transitioning to the specific gaming state again is the first. Since the transition is made to the second predetermined gaming state which is lower than the predetermined gaming state, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition and the specific condition is not satisfied in the specific gaming state. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the number of executions of the game after transitioning to the gaming state will reach a predetermined number. In this way, according to the feature tI1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

Furthermore, according to feature tI1, in the second predetermined gaming state, since the control mode is the first control mode, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entry means. For this reason, the second predetermined gaming state is less advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to the feature tI1, in a specific gaming state, the sense of urgency that the number of executions of the game after transitioning to the specific gaming state will reach a predetermined number without satisfying the specific condition is created. can be granted even more to those who

<Characteristic tJ group>
The feature tJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tJ1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) where game balls are distributed,
Ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and into which game balls can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
A means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), and a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination; 1 determination mode (low probability mode); and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 420 executed by it),
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a specific gaming state (high-probability, high-support state) in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, until the number of times the game is executed after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times (time saving continuation number) When a specific condition (winning in a falling lottery) is met, the specific gaming state is transferred from the specific gaming state to a first predetermined gaming state (low probability high support state) in which it is guaranteed to transfer to the specific gaming state again. , when the number of executions of the game after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches the predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of transitioning to the specific gaming state again is determined by the first predetermined probability. A gaming state transition means for shifting from the specific gaming state to a second predetermined gaming state (low-probability, low-support state H1 in modification example 1) lower than the gaming state;
The gaming machine characterized in that the second predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to feature tJ1, in a specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, if a specific condition is satisfied before the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after transition to the specific gaming state, The specific gaming state is transferred to a first predetermined gaming state in which it is guaranteed that the specific gaming state will be transferred again. Furthermore, in the specific gaming state, if the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of transitioning to the specific gaming state again is a first predetermined probability. The specific gaming state is shifted to a second predetermined gaming state lower than the gaming state. Therefore, according to feature tJ1, in a specific gaming state where the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player is required to play the game for a predetermined number of times after transitioning to the specific gaming state. It is possible to make the player expect that the specific condition will be satisfied and the specific gaming state will be shifted to the first predetermined gaming state. That is, according to the feature tJ1, in a specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, special information is provided to the player by determination in the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the specific condition will be satisfied by the time the number of game runs reaches the predetermined number after the transition to the specific gaming state, and the specific gaming state will be changed from the specific gaming state. It is possible to make the player expect to move to the first predetermined gaming state.

Further, according to the feature tJ1, when the number of executions of the game after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of transitioning to the specific gaming state again is the first. Since the transition is made to the second predetermined gaming state which is lower than the predetermined gaming state, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition and the specific condition is not satisfied in the specific gaming state. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the number of executions of the game after transitioning to the gaming state will reach a predetermined number. In this way, according to the feature tJ1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

Furthermore, according to feature tJ1, in the second predetermined gaming state, the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, so the advantage to the player is low. For this reason, according to feature tJ1, in the specific gaming state, it is possible to give the player an even greater sense of tension that the number of times a game is played after the transition to the specific gaming state will reach the predetermined number without the specific condition being met.

<Characteristic tK group>
The feature tK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tK1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) where game balls are distributed,
Ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and into which game balls can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
A means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), and a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination; 1 determination mode (low probability mode); and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 420 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is set to a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a first state that makes it possible or easy to enter the game ball into the ball entry means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state of
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the ball entry means than the second control mode (high frequency support mode);
gaming state transition means for shifting a gaming state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
Equipped with
The gaming state transition means is
In the first specific gaming state (high probability, high support state), if a specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established, the control mode is switched to the second control mode for a predetermined period (period until the next jackpot is won). a first transition means for transitioning to a first predetermined gaming state (low probability high support state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first specific gaming state by maintaining the first specific gaming state;
In the first specific gaming state, when the specific condition is not met (without winning in the falling lottery) and the predetermined condition is met (the number of game times of the time saving continuation number is executed), the second specific gaming state (a second transition means for transitioning to a high-certain low support state);
In the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, a second predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state) that is less advantageous for the player than the second specific gaming state is caused. 3 transition means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature tK1, even when the same specific condition is met, the function differs between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. When a specific condition is met in the first specific game state, a transition to a game state that is more advantageous to the player is made, and when a specific condition is met in the second specific game state, a transition to a game state that is less advantageous to the player is made. In other words, according to feature tK1, the fulfillment of a specific condition triggers a transition to two game states that offer different advantages to the player, thereby diversifying the playability of the gaming machine.

[Feature tK2]
A gaming machine according to feature tK1,
The game state transition means includes:
a determination mode determination means (fall determination process) for determining, when the specific condition is satisfied, the determination to be executed by the determination means alternatively between the first determination mode and the second determination mode,
The third transition means is
The gaming machine, characterized in that the transition of the game state is performed by the judgment mode determination means switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode.

According to feature tK2, the transition of the game state is performed in the third transition means by switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode by the determination mode decision means. For this reason, feature tK2 has excellent controllability.

[Feature tK3]
A gaming machine according to feature tK1,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the first predetermined gaming state is a state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to feature tK3, in the first predetermined gaming state, the determination mode is the first determination mode, but since it is more advantageous for the player than the first specific gaming state, it is unexpected for the player. can be granted.

[Feature tK4]
A gaming machine according to feature tK1,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the second predetermined gaming state is a state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to feature tK4, in the second specified game state, since the control mode is the first control mode, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. For this reason, the second specified game state is less advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to feature tK4, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension in the second specified game state, as if a specific condition that will be the trigger for transition to the second specified game state is to be met.

[Feature tK5]
The gaming machine according to feature tK1,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second specific gaming state is a state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode.

According to feature tK5, in the second specific gaming state, the determination mode is the second determination mode, which is highly advantageous for the player. For this reason, according to feature tK5, since it is undesirable for the player to shift the gaming state from the highly advantageous second specific gaming state, the specific condition may not be satisfied in the second specific gaming state. A sense of urgency can be given to the player.

[Feature tK6]
A gaming machine according to feature tK1,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the second predetermined gaming state is a state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to feature tK6, in the second predetermined gaming state, since the determination mode is the first determination mode, the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to feature tK6, in the second specific gaming state, it is possible to give the player an even greater sense of urgency as to whether the specific condition that will trigger the transition to the second predetermined gaming state will be satisfied. can.

<Characteristic tL group>
The feature tL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tL1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) where game balls are distributed,
Ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and into which game balls can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
A means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), and a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination; 1 determination mode (low probability mode); and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 420 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is set to a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a first state that makes it possible or easy to enter the game ball into the ball entry means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state of
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the ball entry means than the second control mode (high frequency support mode);
gaming state transition means for shifting a gaming state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
Equipped with
The gaming state transition means is
determination mode determining means (fall determination processing) for selectively determining the determination to be performed by the determining means between the first determination mode and the second determination mode when the specific condition is satisfied; ,
In the first specific gaming state (high probability, high support state), when a specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is satisfied, the control mode is set by the determination mode determining means for a predetermined period (period until the next jackpot is won). ), a first transition means for shifting to a first predetermined gaming state (low probability high support state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first specific gaming state by maintaining the second control mode;
In the first specific gaming state, when the specific condition is not met (without winning in the falling lottery) and the predetermined condition is met (the number of game times of the time saving continuation number is executed), the second specific gaming state (a second transition means for transitioning to a high-certain low support state);
In the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the determination mode is switched by the determination mode determining means to select a second specific gaming state that is less advantageous for the player than the second specific gaming state. a third transition means for transitioning from the second specific gaming state to a second predetermined gaming state (low certainty low support state);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature tL1, even if the same specific condition is established, the function is different between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. When the specific condition is established in the first specific game state, a transition to a game state that is more advantageous to the player is performed, and when the specific condition is established in the second specific game state, a transition to a game state that is less advantageous to the player is performed. In other words, according to feature tL1, the establishment of a specific condition triggers a transition to two game states that are differently advantageous to the player, thereby diversifying the playability of the gaming machine. Also, according to feature tL1, the transition of the game state in the third transition means is performed by switching the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode by the judgment mode determination means. For this reason, according to feature tL1, excellent controllability is achieved.

<Feature tM group>
The group of features tM is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tM1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) where game balls are distributed,
Ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and into which game balls can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
A means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), and a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination; 1 determination mode (low probability mode); and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 420 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is set to a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a first state that makes it possible or easy to enter the game ball into the ball entry means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state of
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the ball entry means than the second control mode (high frequency support mode);
gaming state transition means for shifting a gaming state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
Equipped with
The gaming state transition means is
In the first specific gaming state (high probability, high support state), if a specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established, the control mode is switched to the second control mode for a predetermined period (period until the next jackpot is won). a first transition means for transitioning to a first predetermined gaming state (low probability high support state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first specific gaming state by maintaining the first specific gaming state;
In the first specific gaming state, when the specific condition is not met (without winning in the falling lottery) and the predetermined condition is met (the number of game times of the time saving continuation number is executed), the second specific gaming state (a second transition means for transitioning to a high-certain low support state);
In the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, a second predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state) that is less advantageous for the player than the second specific gaming state is caused. 3 transition means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the first predetermined gaming state is a state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to the feature tM1, even if the same specific condition is satisfied, the function is different depending on whether the game is in the first specific gaming state or in the second specific gaming state. In the first specific gaming state, if a specific condition is met, a transition to a gaming state that increases the advantage for the player is performed, and in the second specific gaming state, if the specific condition is met, , the gaming state changes such that it becomes less advantageous for the player. That is, according to the feature tM1, the establishment of the specific condition triggers a shift to two gaming states with different advantages for the player, so that the gaming properties of the gaming machine can be diversified.

Furthermore, according to feature tM1, in the first predetermined gaming state, the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, which is more advantageous for the player than the first specific gaming state, and therefore can provide a sense of surprise to the player.

<Feature tN group>
The group of features tN is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tN1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) where game balls are distributed,
Ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and into which game balls can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
A means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), and a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination; 1 determination mode (low probability mode); and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 420 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is set to a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a first state that makes it possible or easy to enter the game ball into the ball entry means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state of
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the ball entry means than the second control mode (high frequency support mode);
gaming state transition means for shifting a gaming state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
Equipped with
The gaming state transition means is
In the first specific gaming state (high probability, high support state), if a specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established, the control mode is switched to the second control mode for a predetermined period (period until the next jackpot is won). a first transition means for transitioning to a first predetermined gaming state (low probability high support state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first specific gaming state by maintaining the first specific gaming state;
In the first specific gaming state, when the specific condition is not met (without winning in the falling lottery) and the predetermined condition is met (the number of game times of the time saving continuation number is executed), the second specific gaming state (a second transition means for transitioning to a high-certain low support state);
In the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, a second predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state) that is less advantageous for the player than the second specific gaming state is caused. 3 transition means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine characterized in that the second predetermined gaming state is a state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to feature tN1, even when the same specific condition is met, the function differs between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. When a specific condition is met in the first specific game state, a transition to a game state that is more advantageous to the player is made, and when a specific condition is met in the second specific game state, a transition to a game state that is less advantageous to the player is made. In other words, according to feature tN1, the fulfillment of a specific condition triggers a transition to two game states that offer different advantages to the player, thereby diversifying the playability of the gaming machine.

Further, according to the feature tN1, in the second predetermined gaming state, since the control mode is the first control mode, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entry means. For this reason, the second predetermined gaming state is less advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to the feature tN1, in the second specific gaming state, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether the specific condition that will trigger the transition to the second predetermined gaming state will be satisfied. .

<Feature group tO>
The group of features tO is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tO1]
A circulation area (game area PA) in which game balls are circulated;
A ball entry means (second starting hole 34) provided in the circulation area and through which a game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determination means having a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 420 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the ball entry means;
A state transition means for transitioning the state of the assistance means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
Equipped with
The game state transition means includes:
a first transition means for transitioning to a first predetermined gaming state (low probability high support state) which is more advantageous for a player than the first specific gaming state by maintaining the control mode in a second control mode for a predetermined period (the period until the next big win is won) when a specific condition (winning in a drop-out lottery) is established in the first specific gaming state (high probability high support state);
A second transition means for transitioning to a second specific game state (high probability low support state) when the specific condition is not satisfied (no winning in the fall lottery) and a predetermined condition is satisfied (a game number corresponding to the number of times of time-saving continuation is executed) in the first specific game state;
a third transition means for transitioning the second specific gaming state to a second predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state) which is less advantageous to a player than the second specific gaming state when the specific condition is established;
Equipped with
The second specific game state is a state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode.

According to feature tO1, even when the same specific condition is met, the function differs between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. When a specific condition is met in the first specific game state, a transition to a game state that is more advantageous to the player is made, and when a specific condition is met in the second specific game state, a transition to a game state that is less advantageous to the player is made. In other words, according to feature tO1, the fulfillment of a specific condition triggers a transition to two game states that offer different advantages to the player, thereby diversifying the playability of the gaming machine.

Further, according to the feature tO1, in the second specific gaming state, the determination mode is the second determination mode, which is highly advantageous for the player. For this reason, according to the feature tO1, since it is undesirable for the player to shift the gaming state from the highly advantageous second specific gaming state, the specific condition may not be satisfied in the second specific gaming state. A sense of urgency can be given to the player.

<Characteristic tP group>
The feature tP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature tP1]
A circulation area (game area PA) in which game balls are circulated;
A ball entry means (second starting hole 34) provided in the circulation area and through which a game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determination means having a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 420 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the ball entry means;
A state transition means for transitioning the state of the assistance means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
Equipped with
The game state transition means includes:
a first transition means for transitioning to a first predetermined gaming state (low probability high support state) which is more advantageous for a player than the first specific gaming state by maintaining the control mode in a second control mode for a predetermined period (the period until the next big win is won) when a specific condition (winning in a drop-out lottery) is established in the first specific gaming state (high probability high support state);
A second transition means for transitioning to a second specific game state (high probability low support state) when the specific condition is not satisfied (no winning in the fall lottery) and a predetermined condition is satisfied (a game number corresponding to the number of times of time-saving continuation is executed) in the first specific game state;
a third transition means for transitioning the second specific gaming state to a second predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state) which is less advantageous to a player than the second specific gaming state when the specific condition is established;
Equipped with
The gaming machine, characterized in that the second predetermined gaming state is a state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to the feature tP1, even if the same specific conditions are met, the function is different depending on whether the game is in the first specific gaming state or in the second specific gaming state. In the first specific gaming state, if a specific condition is met, a transition to a gaming state that increases the advantage for the player is performed, and in the second specific gaming state, if the specific condition is met, , the gaming state changes such that it becomes less advantageous for the player. That is, according to the feature tP1, the establishment of the specific condition triggers a transition to two gaming states with different advantages for the player, so that the gaming performance of the gaming machine can be diversified.

Furthermore, according to feature tP1, in the second predetermined gaming state, the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, so the advantage to the player is low. Therefore, according to feature tP1, it is possible to give the player an even greater sense of tension in the second specific gaming state, as if a specific condition that will be the trigger for transitioning to the second specific gaming state is to be met.

<Characteristic uA group>
The feature uA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uA1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determination being made on the second special information with priority over the determination on the first special information, and having a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) as determination modes (lottery modes) for making the determination, in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 461 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
In a gaming machine comprising:
a game state transition means for transitioning from the specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode to a first predetermined game state (high probability low support state) in which the determination mode is the same as the specific game state when the number of times the game is executed after transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number (time-saving continuation number);
an advantageous state continuing means for continuing a state advantageous to a player for a predetermined period of time when a specific condition (winning a drop lottery) is established by the time the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature uA1, in a specific game state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the number of times the game is executed after transitioning to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times, the determination mode changes to the specific game state. A transition is made to the first predetermined gaming state, which is the same second determination mode. Immediately after the transition to the first predetermined gaming state, the second special information acquired in the specific gaming state may remain in the acquired information storage means, and in this case, in the first predetermined gaming state, The determination by the determination means regarding the remaining second special information is performed with priority over the determination by the determination means regarding the first special information. Then, if a specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determination means regarding the remaining second special information ends in the first predetermined gaming state, the state advantageous to the player continues for a predetermined period of time. . Therefore, according to feature uA1, in the first predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is informed that the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. , it is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is different from the specific gaming state. The player can be made to expect that a state advantageous to the player will be executed for a predetermined period of time by satisfying a specific condition before the first predetermined gaming state is ended. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature uA2]
A gaming machine according to feature uA1,
The advantageous state continuing means includes:
a means for transitioning from the first predetermined gaming state to a second predetermined gaming state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode (a state H1b in which the special 2 remaining reserve is consumed in a low probability low support state H1) when the specific condition (winning in a drop lottery) is established before the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state;
a control mode execution means for executing the second control mode as the control mode by the control means when the second special information satisfies a second predetermined condition (a value corresponding to the time-saving provision) in the second predetermined gaming state, until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature uA2, if a specific condition is met by the time the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first specified game state, the state is transitioned to a second specified game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode. Then, in the second specified game state, if the second special information satisfies the second specified condition (a value corresponding to the time-saving grant), the second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first specified condition (for example, until a jackpot is won). In the state in which the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the state in which the control mode is the first control mode, and in a state in which the player is less likely to lose balls, the determination by the determination means on the second special information acquired in response to the game ball entering the second ball entry means can be executed with high frequency. Therefore, if the state is transitioned to the second specified game state and the second special information can satisfy the second specified condition, it is possible to realize that the special information satisfies the first specified condition.

Therefore, according to feature uA2, the player can expect that a specific condition will be met by the time the judgment by the judgment means for the second special information is completed in the first predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, and that the game will transition from the first predetermined game state to the second predetermined game state. In other words, according to feature uA2, in the first predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player can expect that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition by the judgment by the second judgment mode in which the probability that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition is high, but further, the player can expect that a specific condition will be met by the time the judgment by the judgment means for the second special information is completed, and that the game will transition from the first predetermined game state to the second predetermined game state.

On the other hand, if the game transitions to the second predetermined gaming state and the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the player can be given a sense of security that the second control mode, in which game balls can easily enter the second ball entry means, will not end until the next time the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until a jackpot is won), without the player's balls being easily depleted. In this way, feature uA2 can increase the player's interest in the game by giving the player feelings of expectation and security.

[Feature uA3]
A gaming machine according to feature uA2,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for transitioning from the first predetermined gaming state to a normal state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode and the control mode is the first control mode when the specific condition (winning in a fall-down lottery) is established when the judgment means makes the judgment on the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the first predetermined gaming state.

According to feature uA3, in the first predetermined game state, when a specific condition is satisfied when the determination means makes a determination regarding the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the first predetermined game is executed. state to normal state. On the other hand, as described above, in the first predetermined gaming state, the determination means makes a determination regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state before transitioning to the first predetermined gaming state. If the same specific conditions as above are satisfied before the end of the game, the advantageous state for the player continues for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, even if the same specific conditions are met, if a determination is made based on the second special information, the situation will shift to an advantageous state for the player, whereas a determination based on the second special information When the process is completed and the first special information is judged, the state is shifted to the normal state. Therefore, in the first predetermined gaming state, the player feels a sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means may end without the specific condition being satisfied. can be granted to. In this way, according to feature uA3, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

[Feature uA4]
A gaming machine according to feature uA1,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for continuing a state advantageous to a player (low probability high support state H5) for a predetermined period of time when the specific condition (winning a fall-out lottery) is met before the number of times the game is executed after transition to the specific gaming state (high probability high support state) reaches the predetermined number of times (time-saving continuation number of times).

According to feature uA4, in a specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, if a specific condition is satisfied before the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after transition to the specific gaming state. , a state advantageous to the player is executed for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, according to feature uA4, in a specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the specific condition is satisfied before the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after transition to the specific gaming state. Players can be made to expect this. On the other hand, as described above, in a specific gaming state, if the number of times the game is executed after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times, the transition to the first predetermined gaming state and the second special gaming state are performed. It is possible to make the player expect that the specific condition will be satisfied before the determination by the determination means regarding the information is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Therefore, in a specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, even if the specific condition is not satisfied before the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after transitioning to the specific gaming state, Without giving the player a feeling of disappointment, it is possible to make the player expect that the specific condition will be satisfied before the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. . Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic uB group>
The feature uB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uB1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first special information is obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. and acquired information storage means for respectively storing second special information that is the special information;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), the determination regarding the second special information; is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a first determination mode are selected. a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a high probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 461 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a first state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Transitioning from a first specific gaming state (high certainty, high support state) in which the control mode is the second control mode to a first predetermined gaming state (low certainty, low support state) in which the control mode is the first control mode. A game state transition means,
The second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the first specific game state sets a second predetermined condition (value corresponding to time saving provision) different from the first predetermined condition to the first predetermined game. control mode execution means for causing the control means to execute the second control mode as the control mode for a predetermined period when the condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature uB1, the control mode is shifted from the first specific gaming state where the control mode is the second control mode to the first predetermined gaming state where the control mode is the first control mode. Immediately after the transition to the first predetermined gaming state, the second special information acquired in the first specific gaming state may remain in the acquired information storage means, and in this case, in the first predetermined gaming state The determination by the determination means regarding the remaining second special information is performed with priority over the determination by the determination means regarding the first special information. Then, in the first predetermined gaming state, when the remaining second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (for example, a value corresponding to the time saving grant), the second control is performed as a control mode by the control means for a predetermined period. mode is executed. When the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means more easily than when the control mode is the first control mode, making it difficult for the player to reduce the amount of balls he has. In this way, the judgment means can frequently perform judgment on the second special information acquired by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means, and as a result, the second special information It becomes possible to easily realize satisfying the first predetermined condition (for example, winning a jackpot). Therefore, according to the feature uB1, if it is possible to shift to the first predetermined gaming state with the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the second special information is stored under the second predetermined condition (for example, As a result, the second special information acquired upon entering the game ball into the second ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition. (For example, winning a jackpot) can be easily realized. As a result, according to feature uB1, it is possible to make the player expect to move to the first predetermined gaming state with the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be achieved.

[Feature uB2]
A gaming machine according to feature uB1,
The predetermined period is a period until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature uB2, it is possible to shift to the first predetermined gaming state with the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and in the first predetermined gaming state, the second special information is stored in the second predetermined gaming state. If the conditions can be met, it is possible to reliably realize that the second special information acquired upon entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition.

[Features uB3]
The gaming machine described in feature uB2,
The gaming state transition means is
In the first specific gaming state (high-precision, high-support state), when the number of executions of the game after transitioning to the first specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number (time saving continuation number), the control mode means for transitioning from the first specific gaming state to a second specific gaming state (high certainty low support state) in which is the first control mode;
Before the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the first specific gaming state is completed in the second specific gaming state, the specific condition (in the falling lottery) means for transitioning from the second specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state when the winning state is established;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature uB3, in the first specific gaming state, when the number of executions of the game after transitioning to the first specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number (time saving continuation number), the control mode changes to the first specific gaming state. A transition is made to a second specific gaming state which is a control mode. Immediately after transitioning to the second specific gaming state, the second special information acquired in the first specific gaming state may remain in the acquired information storage means, and in this case, in the second specific gaming state The determination by the determination means regarding the remaining second special information is performed with priority over the determination by the determination means regarding the first special information. If the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determining means regarding the remaining second special information ends in the second specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state shifts to the first predetermined gaming state. be done. For this purpose, as explained above, if the second special information can satisfy the second predetermined condition in the first predetermined gaming state, the second special information is acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. Since it is possible to reliably realize that the second special information obtained satisfies the first predetermined condition, the number of executions of the game after the transition to the first specific gaming state reaches the predetermined number of times and the second specific information When transitioning to the gaming state, the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the first specific gaming state ends in the second specific gaming state. Players can be made to expect this. As a result, according to feature uB3, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic uC group>
The feature uC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uC1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determination being made on the second special information with priority over the determination on the first special information, and having a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) as determination modes (lottery modes) for making the determination, in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 461 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
In a gaming machine comprising:
a control mode transition means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times the game is executed after transition to the specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode reaches a first predetermined number of times (time-shortening continuation number of times);
a judgment mode transition means for transitioning the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode when the number of executions of the game after the transition to the specific game state reaches a second predetermined number (ST number) in a first predetermined game state (high probability low support state) after the transition to the first control mode is made;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first predetermined number of times is N1, the second predetermined number of times is N2, and the maximum number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means is N3, the following formula (1) is satisfied.
N2 ≧ N1 + N3 + 1 ... (1)

According to feature uC1, in a specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the number of times the game is executed after transition to the specific gaming state is the first predetermined number of times. When the second control mode is reached, the control mode is transferred from the second control mode to the first control mode. As a result, the specific gaming state is shifted to the first predetermined gaming state in which the control mode is the first control mode. Immediately after the transition to the first predetermined gaming state, the second special information acquired in the specific gaming state may remain in the acquired information storage means. The determination by the determination means regarding the remaining second special information is performed with priority over the determination by the determination means regarding the first special information. Then, in the first predetermined gaming state, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches the second predetermined number of times, the determination mode is shifted from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. According to formula (1), the second predetermined number of times N2 is a value larger than the sum of the first predetermined number of times N1 and the maximum number N3 of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means. Therefore, the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is ended in the first predetermined gaming state.

When transitioning from a specific gaming state to a first predetermined gaming state, that is, when the number of games played after shifting to the specific gaming state reaches the first predetermined number N1 in the specific gaming state, the acquired information is stored in the storage means. Let us consider a case where the number of pieces of second special information obtained is the maximum number N3. When this number of games reaches the first predetermined number of times N1, the control mode shifts to the first control mode, and it becomes impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means. The game ball may enter the second ball entry means just before the ball enters the second ball entry means. A configuration in which the second predetermined number of times N2 matches the sum of the first predetermined number of times N1 and the maximum number N3 of second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means (hereinafter referred to as the configuration of the comparative example) ), this corresponds to a game ball that enters the game ball just before it becomes impossible or difficult to enter the second ball entry means (hereinafter referred to as an "excessive number of game balls"). The determination by the determination means is not performed in the first predetermined gaming state, but is performed in a state after the determination mode is shifted from the second determination mode to the first determination mode (hereinafter referred to as the normal state). When the designer of the gaming machine shifts from a specific gaming state to a first predetermined gaming state, all determinations by the determining means corresponding to the game ball that entered the second ball entering means are completed in the first predetermined gaming state. In the case where the configuration of the comparative example is adopted, the determination by the determination means corresponding to the excessive number of game balls is executed in the normal state, resulting in a game that was not originally envisioned by the designer. There was a risk that he would show off his sexuality.

On the other hand, according to the feature uC1, from the relationship of equation (1), the second predetermined number N2 is the maximum number of times N1 and the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means. Since the number is greater than or equal to the sum of the number N3 and 1, the determination by the determining means corresponding to the excessive number of game balls is necessarily executed in the first predetermined gaming state. Therefore, according to feature uC1, when the specific gaming state shifts to the first predetermined gaming state, the judgment by the determining means corresponding to the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means is the excessive number of game balls. Including, all the games are completed in the first predetermined game state, and it is possible to exhibit the game performance as originally envisioned by the designer. As a result, according to feature uC1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature uC2]
The gaming machine according to feature uC1,
A gaming machine characterized by satisfying the following formula (2).
N2=N1+N3+1...(2)

According to the feature uC2, from the relationship of equation (2), the second predetermined number N2 is the sum of the first predetermined number N1 and the maximum number N3 of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means. Since the number is the sum of 1 and 1, the determination by the determining means corresponding to the excessive number of game balls is always performed in the first predetermined gaming state, similarly to the feature uC1. Therefore, the feature uC2 has the same effect as the feature uC1. That is, according to feature uC2, when the specific gaming state shifts to the first predetermined gaming state, the judgment means corresponding to the game balls that entered the second ball entering means determines whether the above-mentioned excessive number of game balls Including, everything is completed in the first predetermined game state, allowing the game to exhibit the gameplay originally envisioned by the designer, and as a result, the effect of increasing the interest of the game. play.

[Feature uC3]
A gaming machine according to feature uC1 or feature uC2,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with an advantageous state continuation means for continuing a state advantageous to a player for a predetermined period of time if a specific condition (winning a drop-out lottery) is met before the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first specified gaming state.

According to feature uC3, in the first predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode, the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is determined for the player. Although it is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition by the determination in the high second determination mode, furthermore, the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state The system informs the player that if the specific condition is satisfied, the advantageous state for the player will continue for a predetermined period by the time the determination is completed in the first predetermined gaming state transitioned from the specific gaming state. It can make you look forward to it. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features uC4]
The gaming machine described in feature uC3,
The advantageous state continuation means is
Before the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) ) is established, from the first predetermined gaming state to a second predetermined gaming state where the judgment mode is the first judgment mode (aspect H1b in which special 2 remaining is being held in the low-probability low support state H1). a means of transferring,
In the second predetermined gaming state, when the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (a value corresponding to the time saving grant), the control means controls the control unit until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. control mode execution means for executing the second control mode as the control mode;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature uC4, if a specific condition is met by the time the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first specified game state, the state is transitioned to a second specified game state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode. Then, in the second specified game state, if the second special information satisfies the second specified condition (a value corresponding to the time-saving grant), the second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first specified condition (for example, until a jackpot is won). In the state in which the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the state in which the control mode is the first control mode, and in a state in which the player is less likely to lose balls, the determination by the determination means on the second special information acquired in response to the game ball entering the second ball entry means can be executed with high frequency. Therefore, if the transition to the second specified game state is made and the second special information can satisfy the second specified condition, it is possible to realize that the second special information satisfies the first specified condition.

Therefore, according to feature uC4, the player can expect that a specific condition will be met by the time the judgment by the judgment means for the second special information is completed in the first predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, and that the game will transition from the first predetermined game state to the second predetermined game state. In other words, according to feature uC4, in the first predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player can expect that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition by the judgment by the second judgment mode in which the probability that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition is high, but further, the player can expect that a specific condition will be met by the time the judgment by the judgment means for the second special information is completed, and that the game will transition from the first predetermined game state to the second predetermined game state.

On the other hand, if the second predetermined gaming state is entered and the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the determination means will display the special information next time when the player has fewer balls. 1. It is possible to provide a sense of security that the second control mode, which facilitates the entry of game balls into the second ball entry means, does not end until a predetermined condition is met (for example, until a jackpot is won). In this way, according to feature uC4, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of expectation and security.

[Features uC5]
The gaming machine described in feature uC4,
In the first predetermined gaming state, when the determination means makes the determination regarding the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is established. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for shifting from the first predetermined gaming state to a normal state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode.

According to feature uC5, in the first predetermined game state, when the judgment means judges the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, if a specific condition is satisfied, the first predetermined game state is transitioned to the normal state. In contrast, as described above, in the first predetermined game state, if the same specific condition as above is satisfied by the time the judgment means judges the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state before the transition to the first predetermined game state is completed, the state advantageous to the player is continued for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the same specific condition is satisfied, when the judgment is made based on the second special information, the state transitions to an advantageous state for the player, whereas when the judgment on the second special information is completed and the judgment on the first special information is made, the state transitions to the normal state. Therefore, in the first predetermined game state, a sense of urgency can be given to the player that the judgment means judges the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means and the judgment ends without satisfying the specific condition. In this way, feature uC5 can increase the player's interest in the game by giving them feelings of expectation and tension.

[Features uC6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features uC1 to feature uC5,
In the specific gaming state (high probability, high support state), until the number of executions of the game after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches the first predetermined number of times (time saving continuation number), the specific condition (fall lottery) 1. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for continuing a state advantageous to a player (a low probability high support state H5) for a predetermined period when a winning is established.

According to feature uC6, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, if a specific condition is established before the number of game times executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a first predetermined number, a state advantageous to the player continues for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, according to feature uC6, in the specific game state, the player can be made to expect that a specific condition will be established before the number of game times executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a first predetermined number. On the other hand, as described above, in the specific game state, if the number of game times executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the first predetermined number, the first predetermined game state is entered, and the player can be made to expect that a specific condition will be established before the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information is completed in the first predetermined game state. Therefore, even if the specific condition is not met before the number of times the game is played reaches the first predetermined number of times after the transition to the specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player can be made to expect that the specific condition will be met before the judgment by the judgment means for the second special information is completed in the first predetermined game state, without giving the player a feeling of disappointment. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic uD group>
The feature uD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uD1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determination being made on the second special information with priority over the determination on the first special information, and having a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 461 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
In a gaming machine comprising:
A first game state transition means for transitioning from a specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode to a first predetermined game state (high probability low support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode;
a second game state transition means for transitioning the first predetermined game state to a second predetermined game state (a state H1b in which the special 2 remaining reserve is consumed in the low probability low support state H1) when a specific condition (winning in the drop lottery) is established before the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state;
a third game state transition means for transitioning from the first predetermined game state to a third predetermined game state (low probability low support state H1) when the specific condition (winning in the drop lottery) is established after the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state;
Equipped with
The second predetermined gaming state is more advantageous to a player than the third predetermined gaming state.

According to feature uD1, a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode is transitioned to a first predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the first control mode. Then, if a specific condition is established before the judgment means's judgment of the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, a transition is made to a second predetermined game state in which the player is more advantageous. If a specific condition is established after the judgment means's judgment of the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, a transition is made to a third predetermined game state in which the player is less advantageous than the second predetermined game state. Therefore, according to the feature uD1, in the first predetermined gaming state transitioned from the specific gaming state, the player can expect that the specific condition will be established by the time the determination by the determination means of the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. In other words, according to the feature uD1, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player can expect that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition is high, and further, the player can expect that the specific condition will be established by the time the determination by the determination means of the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state.

Furthermore, according to feature uD1, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, Since the transition is made to the third predetermined gaming state which is less advantageous for the player than the second predetermined gaming state, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition in the first predetermined gaming state. , there is a sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state may end in the first predetermined gaming state without the specific condition being satisfied. , can be held by the player. In this way, according to the feature uD1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

[Feature uD2]
A gaming machine according to feature uD1,
The second game state transition means includes:
a means for transitioning from the first predetermined gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state (a state H1b in which the special 2 remaining reserve is consumed in the low probability low support state H1) in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode when the specific condition (winning in the drop lottery) is satisfied before the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state;
a means for executing the second control mode as the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition when the second special information satisfies a second predetermined condition (a value corresponding to the time-saving provision) after the transition to the second predetermined game state;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature uD2, if the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state ends in the first predetermined gaming state, A transition is made to a second predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode. Then, in the second predetermined gaming state, when the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to the time saving grant), the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until the jackpot is won). ), the second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means. When the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means more easily than when the control mode is the first control mode, making it difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls he has. , the determination means can frequently perform determination regarding the second special information acquired upon entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means. Therefore, if the second predetermined gaming state is entered and the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, it is possible to reliably realize that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition.

Therefore, according to feature uD2, the player can expect that a specific condition will be met by the time the judgment by the judgment means for the second special information is completed in the first predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, and that the game will transition from the first predetermined game state to the second predetermined game state. In other words, according to feature uD2, in the first predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player can expect that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition by the judgment by the second judgment mode in which the probability that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition is high, but further, the player can expect that a specific condition will be met by the time the judgment by the judgment means for the second special information is completed, and that the game will transition from the first predetermined game state to the second predetermined game state.

On the other hand, if the game transitions to the second predetermined game state and the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the player can be given a sense of security that the second control mode, in which game balls can easily enter the second ball entry means, will not end until the next time the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until a jackpot is won), without the player's balls being easily depleted. In this way, feature uD2 can increase the player's interest in the game by giving the player feelings of expectation and security.

[Feature uD3]
A gaming machine according to feature uD2,
The third game state transition means includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for transitioning from the first predetermined gaming state to a normal state as the third predetermined gaming state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode and the control mode is the first control mode when the specific condition (winning in a fall-down lottery) is established when the judgment means makes the judgment on the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the first predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature uD3, in the first predetermined game state, when the judgment means judges the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, if a specific condition is satisfied, the first predetermined game state is transitioned to the normal state. In contrast, as described above, in the first predetermined game state, if the same specific condition as above is satisfied by the time the judgment means judges the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state before the transition to the first predetermined game state is completed, the state advantageous to the player is continued for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the same specific condition is satisfied, when the judgment is made based on the second special information, the state transitions to an advantageous state for the player, whereas when the judgment on the second special information is completed and the judgment on the first special information is made, the state transitions to the normal state. Therefore, in the first predetermined game state, a sense of urgency can be given to the player that the judgment means judges the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means and the judgment ends without satisfying the specific condition. In this way, feature uD3 can increase the player's interest in the game by giving them feelings of expectation and tension.

[Feature uD4]
The gaming machine described in feature uD3,
The first gaming state transition means is
In the specific gaming state (high certainty high support state), when the number of executions of the game after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times (time saving continuation number), the first predetermined gaming state is entered. comprising means for transitioning from the specific gaming state,
In the specific gaming state (high probability, high support state), until the number of executions of the game after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches the predetermined number of times (time saving continuation number), the specific condition (in the falling lottery) A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for continuing a state advantageous to a player (low probability high support state H5) for a predetermined period when a winning (winning) is established.

According to feature uD4, in a specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the number of times the game is executed after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. If a specific condition is met by the time the player reaches the goal, the advantageous state for the player continues for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, according to feature uD4, in a specific gaming state, the player is expected to meet the specific condition by the time the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number after transitioning to the specific gaming state. can be done. On the other hand, as described above, in a specific gaming state, if the number of times the game is executed after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times, the transition to the first predetermined gaming state and the second special gaming state are performed. It is possible to make the player expect that the specific condition will be satisfied before the determination by the determination means regarding the information is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Therefore, in a specific gaming state, even if the specific condition is not satisfied before the number of game runs reaches a predetermined number after transition to the specific gaming state, the player is given a feeling of disappointment. Without this, the player can be made to expect that the specific condition will be satisfied before the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information ends in the first predetermined gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic uE group>
The feature uE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uE1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first special information is obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. and acquired information storage means for respectively storing second special information that is the special information;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), the determination regarding the second special information; is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a first determination mode are selected. a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a high probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition;
determination mode transition means (fall determination processing) for shifting the determination performed by the determination means from the second determination mode to the first determination mode when a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied; ,
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 461 executed by it),
In a specific gaming state (high-probability, high-support state) in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the number of executions of the game after transitioning to the specific gaming state has reached a predetermined number (time-saving continuation number) gaming state transition means for shifting from the specific gaming state to a first predetermined gaming state (high certainty low support state) in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode that is the same as the specific gaming state;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
If the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state; 1. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a performance corresponding to a predetermined advantageous state that is an advantageous state for a player.

According to feature uE1, the judgment mode transition means transitions the judgment mode from the second judgment mode to the first judgment mode, which essentially reduces the advantage for the player. In contrast, according to feature uE1, if a specific condition is met before the judgment means's judgment of the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, a presentation corresponding to a predetermined advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is executed. Therefore, according to feature uE1, although the operation by the judgment mode transition means is essentially disappointing to the player, a presentation corresponding to a predetermined advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is executed, so that the range of presentations can be expanded without being limited by the operation by the judgment mode transition means. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature uE2]
A gaming machine according to feature uE1,
an advantageous state continuing means for continuing a state advantageous to a player for a predetermined period of time when the specific condition is established before the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature uE2, in the first predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, special information is provided to the player by determination in the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. may be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state may be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition. By satisfying a specific condition before one predetermined gaming state ends, the player can be made to expect that a state advantageous to the player will continue for a predetermined period of time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features uE3]
The gaming machine described in feature uE2,
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is set to a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a first state that makes it possible or easy to enter the game ball into the ball entry means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state of
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the ball entry means than the second control mode (high frequency support mode);
Equipped with
The advantageous state continuation means is
If the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state; , means for transitioning from the first predetermined gaming state to a second predetermined gaming state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode (an aspect H1b in which the special 2 remaining balance is being used up in the low-probability low support state H1);
In the second predetermined gaming state, if the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (a value corresponding to the time saving grant), the control means controls the control unit until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. control mode execution means for executing the second control mode as the control mode;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature uE3, if a specific condition is satisfied by the time the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the judgment mode is transitioned to the second predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode. Then, in the second predetermined game state, if the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (a value corresponding to the time-saving grant), the second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until a jackpot is won). In the state in which the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the state in which the control mode is the first control mode, and in a state in which the player is less likely to lose balls, the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information acquired as a result of the game ball entering the second ball entry means can be executed with high frequency. Therefore, if the game transitions to the second predetermined game state and the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, it is possible to reliably realize that the second special information satisfies the first predetermined condition.

Therefore, according to feature uE3, the player can expect that a specific condition will be met by the time the judgment by the judgment means for the second special information is completed in the first predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, and that the game will transition from the first predetermined game state to the second predetermined game state. In other words, according to feature uE3, in the first predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player can expect that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition by the judgment by the second judgment mode in which the probability that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition is high, but further, the player can expect that a specific condition will be met by the time the judgment by the judgment means for the second special information is completed, and that the game will transition from the first predetermined game state to the second predetermined game state.

On the other hand, if the second predetermined gaming state is entered and the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the determination means will tell the player that the special information is 1. It is possible to provide a sense of security that the second control mode, which facilitates the entry of game balls into the second ball entry means, does not end until a predetermined condition is met (for example, until a jackpot is won). In this way, according to feature uE3, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of expectation and security.

[Feature uE4]
A gaming machine according to feature uE3,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for transitioning from the first predetermined gaming state to a normal state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode and the control mode is the first control mode when the specific condition (winning in a fall-down lottery) is established when the judgment means makes the judgment on the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the first predetermined gaming state.

According to feature uE4, in the first predetermined game state, when a specific condition is satisfied when the determination means makes a determination regarding the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the first predetermined game is executed. state to normal state. On the other hand, as described above, in the first predetermined gaming state, the determination means makes a determination regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state before transitioning to the first predetermined gaming state. If the same specific conditions as above are satisfied before the end of the game, the advantageous state for the player continues for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, even if the same specific conditions are met, if a determination is made based on the second special information, the situation will shift to an advantageous state for the player, whereas a determination based on the second special information When the process is completed and the first special information is determined, a transition is made to the normal state. Therefore, in the first predetermined gaming state, the player feels a sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means may end without the specific condition being satisfied. can be granted to. In this way, according to the feature uE4, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

[Features uE5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features uE1 to feature uE4,
In the specific gaming state (high probability, high support state), until the number of executions of the game after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches the first predetermined number of times (time saving continuation number), the specific condition (fall lottery) 1. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for continuing a state advantageous to a player (a low probability high support state H5) for a predetermined period when a winning is established.

According to feature uE5, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, if a specific condition is established before the number of game times executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a first predetermined number, a state advantageous to the player continues for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, according to feature uE5, in the specific game state, the player can be made to expect that a specific condition will be established before the number of game times executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a first predetermined number. On the other hand, as described above, in the specific game state, if the number of game times executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the first predetermined number, the first predetermined game state is entered, and the player can be made to expect that a specific condition will be established before the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information is completed in the first predetermined game state. Therefore, even if the specific condition is not met before the number of times the game is played reaches the first predetermined number of times after the transition to the specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player can be made to expect that the specific condition will be met before the judgment by the judgment means for the second special information is completed in the first predetermined game state, without giving the player a feeling of disappointment. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic uF group>
The feature uF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its first modification.

[Feature uF1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) where game balls are distributed,
Ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and into which game balls can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
A means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), and a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination; 1 determination mode (low probability mode); and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 461 executed by it),
a benefit granting means (opening/closing execution mode) for granting a benefit to the player after the end of the game round corresponding to the determination when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition; ,
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is set to a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a first state that makes it possible or easy to enter the game ball into the ball entry means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state of
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the ball entry means than the second control mode (high frequency support mode);
In a situation where the second determination mode continues as the determination mode, when the number of times the predetermined benefit is granted by the benefit granting means reaches a prescribed number of times, the determination mode is changed to the first determination mode. Judgment mode transition means to transition;
In a predetermined gaming state (low probability high support state) in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to time saving grant), the special information control mode execution means for causing the control means to execute the second control mode as the control mode until a first predetermined condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature uF1, in a situation where the second judgment mode continues as the judgment mode, when the number of times a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means reaches a prescribed number of times, the judgment mode is transitioned to the first judgment mode, and in a predetermined game state where the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, when the special information satisfies a second predetermined condition, the second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until a jackpot is won). In a state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball entry means than in a state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for a player to lose balls, and the judgment by the judgment means on the special information acquired as a result of a game ball entering the ball entry means can be executed with high frequency. Therefore, when the number of times a specified bonus has been awarded by the bonus awarding means reaches a specified number while the second judgment mode continues as the judgment mode, the judgment mode is transitioned to the first judgment mode, and when special information satisfies the second specified condition in a specified game state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, it is possible to reliably ensure that the second special information acquired in response to a game ball entering the second ball entry means satisfies the first specified condition, and the bonus awarding means will award a bonus once more.

Therefore, according to feature uF1, when the number of times the bonus has been awarded by the bonus awarding means reaches a prescribed number of times while the second judgment mode is continuing as the judgment mode, the bonus awarding means will award the bonus once more. As a result, according to feature uF1, the awarding of another bonus can give great joy to the player. Furthermore, the player can be given a sense of anticipation that the number of times the bonus awarding means has awarded the predetermined bonus will continue the prescribed number of times. In particular, since it is very important that the number of times the bonus awarding means has awarded the predetermined bonus continues the prescribed number of times, the player can be given an even greater sense of anticipation that the bonus will continue to be awarded once more after the predetermined bonus has been awarded one less than the prescribed number of times.

[Features uF2]
The gaming machine according to feature uF1,
In a specific gaming state (high certainty, high support state) where the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, until the number of executions of the game after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number (time saving continuation number) A gaming machine characterized by comprising a gaming state transition means for shifting from the specific gaming state to the predetermined gaming state (low probability, high support state) when a specific condition (winning in a falling lottery) is satisfied.

According to feature uF2, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, if a specific condition is met before the number of game plays after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, the judgment mode is transitioned to a predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode. In the predetermined game state, as described above, if the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until a jackpot is won), so it is possible to reliably realize that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. Therefore, if the transition to the predetermined game state is made and the special information can satisfy the second predetermined condition, it is possible to reliably realize that the special information acquired as a result of the game ball entering the ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition.

Therefore, according to feature uF2, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player can expect that a specific condition will be met before the number of game times after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, and that the specific game state will transition to a predetermined game state. In other words, according to feature uF2, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player can expect that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition by the judgment in the second judgment mode in which the probability that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition is high, but further, the player can expect that a specific condition will be met before the number of game times after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, and that the specific game state will transition to a predetermined game state in which it is certain that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition.

On the other hand, if the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition in the predetermined gaming state after the transition, the determination means will tell the player that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition next time in a state where the number of balls in possession is difficult to decrease. It is possible to provide a sense of security that the second control mode, which facilitates the entry of game balls into the ball entry means, will not end until the game is satisfied (for example, until a jackpot is won). In this way, according to the feature uF2, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and security.

[Feature uF3]
A gaming machine according to feature uF1 or feature uF2,
a benefit type determination means for determining a benefit type of the benefit to be granted by the benefit granting means,
The determination mode transition means is
a means for incrementing a value of a predetermined counter each time the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value resulting in a jackpot win) and the bonus type determination means determines that the judgment mode after the predetermined bonus is awarded is the bonus type (high probability jackpot) which may become the second judgment mode in a situation where the second judgment mode continues as the judgment mode;
A means for transitioning the judgment mode to the first judgment mode when the value of the predetermined counter reaches the specified number of times (probability change limit number of times) in a situation where the second judgment mode continues as the judgment mode;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature uF3, in a situation where the second determination mode continues as the determination mode, the determination is made after the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and the predetermined benefit is granted by the benefit type determining means. A predetermined counter is updated every time it is determined that the mode is a benefit type that can become the second determination mode. Then, in a situation where the second determination mode continues as the determination mode, when the value of the predetermined counter reaches a predetermined number of times, the determination mode is shifted to the first determination mode. As explained above, in a predetermined game state where the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, if the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the game ball is not allowed to enter the second ball entry means. It becomes possible to realize that the second special information acquired as a trigger satisfies the first predetermined condition, and the benefit is granted once more by the benefit granting means. For this reason, in a situation where the second determination mode continues as the determination mode, the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and the benefit type determination means determines that the special information If it is possible to repeat that the determination mode after the granting of the benefit is a benefit type that can become the second determination mode, the benefit granting means will grant the benefit one more time. Become. Therefore, in a situation where the second determination mode continues as the determination mode, until the value of the predetermined counter reaches the predetermined number of times, the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and the benefit type determining means determines that the predetermined It is possible to further increase the expectation of the player to repeat the determination that the determination mode after the award of the benefit is a benefit type that can become the second determination mode. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic uG group>
The feature uG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its second modification.

[Feature uG1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
A means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), and a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination; 1 determination mode (low probability mode); and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 461 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is set to a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a first state that makes it possible or easy to enter the game ball into the ball entry means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state of
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the ball entry means than the second control mode (high frequency support mode);
In a first predetermined gaming state (high accuracy/low support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is the special information acquired when a game ball enters the first ball entry means. If the special information in item 1 satisfies the first predetermined condition (matches the value that results in a jackpot win), but does not satisfy the other conditions (matches the value that results in a probability-variable jackpot win) (sorting results mode transition means for transitioning the determination mode to the first determination mode and transitioning the control mode to the second control mode when (usually becomes a jackpot);
In a second predetermined gaming state (low probability, high support state) in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the special information is set to the second predetermined condition (for time saving provision). a corresponding value), control mode execution means causes the control means to execute the second control mode as the control mode until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature uG1, in the first predetermined game state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the first special information acquired when the game ball enters the first ball entry means is the first predetermined condition. and other conditions are not satisfied, the determination mode shifts to the first determination mode, and the control mode shifts to the second control mode. Then, in a second predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. The second control mode is executed as a control mode by the control means until the condition is satisfied (for example, until a jackpot is won). When the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball enters the ball entry means more easily than when the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls he has. The determination means can frequently perform determination regarding the special information acquired upon entry of a game ball into the ball means. Therefore, according to feature uG1, in the first predetermined gaming state, if the first special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and the other conditions are not satisfied, the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is made. By doing so, it is possible to reliably realize that the special information acquired in response to the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition.

Therefore, according to feature uG1, in the first predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the first special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and does not satisfy the other conditions, so that the second predetermined When the game state is shifted to, the special information acquired in response to the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means will be checked once again to satisfy the first predetermined condition. As a result, according to feature uG1, in the first predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the first special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and the other conditions are not satisfied. This can give people a sense of expectation. As a result, according to feature uG1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the second predetermined game state entered from the first predetermined game state when the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, if the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the player can be given a sense of security that the second control mode, in which game balls are less likely to be lost and balls are easy to enter the ball entry means, will not end until the next time the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until a jackpot is won). In this way, feature uG1 can increase the player's interest in the game by giving the player feelings of expectation and security.

[Features uG2]
The gaming machine described in feature uG1,
The determination mode is the second determination mode, and in a specific gaming state (high certainty, high support state) different from the first predetermined gaming state, the number of executions of the gaming session after transition to the specific gaming state is A game in which the specific gaming state is shifted to the second predetermined gaming state (low probability high support state) if a specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is satisfied before reaching a predetermined number of times (time saving continuous number of times). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a state transition means.

According to feature uG2, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, if a specific condition is met before the number of game plays after transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, transition is made to a second predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode. In the second predetermined game state, as described above, if the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until a jackpot is won), so it is possible to reliably realize that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. Therefore, if transition to the second predetermined game state is possible, it is possible to reliably realize that the special information acquired in response to the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition.

Therefore, according to feature uG2, in a specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is required to perform a specified It is possible to make the player expect that the condition will be met and the specific gaming state will be shifted to the second predetermined gaming state. In other words, according to feature uG2, in a specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the specific condition will be satisfied by the time the number of game runs reaches the predetermined number after the transition to the specific gaming state, and the specific gaming state will be changed from the specific gaming state. , it is possible to make the player expect that the special information will move to the second predetermined gaming state in which it is possible to reliably realize that the first predetermined condition is satisfied.

[Feature uG3]
A gaming machine according to feature uG2,
a means for transitioning from the specific gaming state to the first specific gaming state (high probability low support state) when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches the predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied;
The first predetermined gaming state is less advantageous to a player than the second predetermined gaming state.

According to feature uG3, when the number of times the game is executed after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the first predetermined game whose determination mode is the second determination mode is executed. state. The first predetermined gaming state is less advantageous for the player than the second predetermined gaming state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, although the judgment mode is the second judgment mode. For this reason, according to feature uG3, in the specific gaming state, the special information determined by the determining means does not satisfy the first predetermined condition, and the specific condition is not satisfied, so that the game after the transition to the specific gaming state is It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether the number of times the game has been executed will reach a predetermined number of times. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature uG4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uG1 to uG3,
a benefit type determination means for determining a benefit type of the benefit to be granted by the benefit granting means,
The mode transition means includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for transitioning the determination mode to the first determination mode and the control mode to the second control mode when, in the first specified gaming state, the first special information satisfies the first specified condition (matching a value that results in a jackpot) and the bonus type determination means determines that the determination mode after the bonus is awarded is the bonus type (normal jackpot) such that the determination mode will be the first determination mode.

According to feature uG4, in the first predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, after the first special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and the benefit is granted by the benefit type determining means. When it is determined that the award type is such that the determination mode is the first determination mode, the determination mode is shifted to the first determination mode and the control mode is shifted to the second control mode. As explained above, in the second predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the special information The second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means until the first predetermined condition is satisfied. For this purpose, according to feature uG4, in the first predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the first special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, and the benefit type determination means grants the benefit. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the award type is determined to be the first determination mode after the determination mode is determined. Therefore, according to feature uG4, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic uH group>
The feature uH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its third modification.

[Feature uH1]
a firing means for firing a game ball;
A distribution area (gaming area PA) where the fired game balls are distributed;
Ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and into which game balls can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
Means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a jackpot win) or a second predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a time saving grant), The determination modes (lottery mode) for making the determination include a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (low probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode. (high probability mode);
If one game round is defined as the start of the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game operation, the game round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 461 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is set to a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a first state that makes it possible or easy to enter the game ball into the ball entry means. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state of
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the ball entry means;
In a first predetermined gaming state (low probability/high support state) in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, the judgment means determines that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to time saving provision). control mode execution means for causing the second control mode to be executed as the control mode by the control means for a period until the number of executions of the game round reaches a predetermined number of times when the game is played;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature uH1, in the first predetermined game state where the determination mode is the first determination mode, when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. Until this point is reached, the second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means. The determination by the determination means is performed in cases where the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, and when the special information satisfies neither the first predetermined condition nor the second predetermined condition. Since the special information is distributed, even if the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition, if the special information can satisfy the second predetermined condition, the control mode is activated only for a period until the number of executions of the game reaches the predetermined number. The second control mode can be executed as follows. In addition, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball enters the ball entering means more easily than when the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls he has. , the determination means can frequently perform determination regarding the special information acquired upon entry of a game ball into the ball entry means. Therefore, according to feature uH1, if it is possible to repeat that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition in the determination means again before the number of executions of the game after the start of the second control mode reaches the predetermined number of times. , it becomes possible to sequentially extend the period during which the second control mode is executed as the control mode, without reducing the number of balls held, until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition.

Therefore, according to feature uH1, in the first predetermined gaming state where the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, even if the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition in the judgment means, the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number. It is possible to repeatedly make the player expect that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition in the determination means. In other words, the special information in the determination means does not satisfy the second predetermined condition and gives the player a sense of urgency that the period until the number of game runs reaches the predetermined number of times will end. can be granted. In this way, according to the feature uH1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

[Feature uH2]
A gaming machine according to feature uH1,
a means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when, in the first predetermined gaming state (low probability high support state), the special information is not determined to satisfy the first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a jackpot win) and the special information is not determined to satisfy the second predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a time-saving award) by the end of a period until the number of game rounds played reaches a predetermined number.

According to feature uH2, in a first predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, if the judgment means judges that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means for a period until the number of game plays reaches a predetermined number, and if the special information is not judged to satisfy the first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a jackpot win) and is not judged to satisfy the second predetermined condition (matching a value that results in time-saving) by the end of this period, the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode. As a result, the first predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode is shifted to a normal state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode and the control mode is the first control mode. Because the normal state is not advantageous to the player, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of urgency, as if the period until the number of game plays reaches the predetermined number will end without the special information being determined to satisfy the first predetermined condition and without the special information being determined to satisfy the second predetermined condition.

[Features uH3]
The gaming machine according to feature uH1 or feature uH2,
In a specific gaming state (high certainty, high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, execution of the gaming round after transition to the specific gaming state; If a specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is satisfied before the number of times reaches a predetermined number (time saving continuation number), the specific gaming state shifts to the first predetermined gaming state (low probability high support state). A game machine characterized by comprising a game state transition means for causing the game to change to a game state.

According to feature uH3, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, if a specific condition is satisfied before the number of game times after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, the specific game state is transitioned to a first predetermined game state. In the first predetermined game state, as described above, if the judgment means can repeatedly make the special information satisfy the second predetermined condition, it is possible to sequentially extend the period during which the second control mode is executed as the control mode without reducing the number of balls held, until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. Therefore, according to feature uH3, in the specific game state, the player can expect that a specific condition will be satisfied before the number of game times after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, and the specific game state will transition to the first predetermined game state. That is, according to feature uH3, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player can expect that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition due to the judgment in the second judgment mode in which there is a high probability that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the player can expect that the specific condition will be established before the number of game plays executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, and the player can transition from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state in which there is a high probability that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition.

[Feature uH4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uH1 to uH3,
a means for transitioning from the specific game state to a second predetermined game state (high probability low support state) in which a determination mode is a second determination mode and a control mode is a first control mode when the number of executions of the game after transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number without the specific condition being satisfied;
The second predetermined gaming state is less advantageous to a player than the first predetermined gaming state.

According to feature uH4, when the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number without the specific condition being satisfied, the state is transitioned to a second predetermined game state. The second predetermined game state is less advantageous to the player than the first predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, even though the judgment mode is the second judgment mode. For this reason, feature uH4 can make the player feel a sense of urgency that the number of game rounds executed after the transition to the specific game state will reach a predetermined number without the judgment means determining that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and without the specific condition being satisfied. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

<Feature group I>
The group of features uI is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uI1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determination being made on the second special information with priority over the determination on the first special information, and having a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 461 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
In a gaming machine comprising:
a control mode transition means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when a predetermined condition (the number of times the game is executed after transition to the specific game state reaches the number of times the time-saving continues) is satisfied in a specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode;
a first re-transition means for re-transitioning to the specific gaming state with a specific probability (re-transitioning to the specific gaming state with a 100% probability) when a specific condition (winning a drop lottery) is established before the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in a first predetermined gaming state (high probability low support state) after the transition to the first control mode is made;
a second re-transition means for re-transitioning to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability when the specific condition (winning in the drop lottery) is established after the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state (transitioning to a high probability high support state with a probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability low support state and being assigned to a probability variable jackpot);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature uI1, in a specific game state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the control mode changes from the second control mode to the first control mode. Moved to control mode. Then, before the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode, the specific When the conditions are met, the game is shifted to a specific gaming state again with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability The probability of being transferred to a specific gaming state is lower than that of the game. Therefore, according to the feature uI1, in the first predetermined gaming state that has transitioned from the specific gaming state, the player is informed by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state. It is possible to expect that the specific condition will be satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined gaming state. That is, according to the feature uI1, in the first predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is informed that, by determination in the second determination mode that the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, Although it is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, furthermore, the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state may be made in the first predetermined gaming state. It is possible to expect that a specific condition will be met by the time the program ends.

Further, according to the feature uI1, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, Since the transition to the specific gaming state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition in the first predetermined gaming state, and the specific condition is satisfied. The system does not create a sense of urgency for the player, as if the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state will end in the first predetermined gaming state. can be set. In this way, according to the feature uI1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

[Feature uI2]
The gaming machine according to feature uI1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific probability is 100%.

According to feature uI2, in the first predetermined gaming state, by the time the determining means finishes determining the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state, If the conditions are met, there is a 100% probability that the game will be transferred to the specific gaming state again. That is, when the specific conditions are met, it is guaranteed that the game will transition to the specific gaming state again. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation.

[Feature uI3]
The gaming machine according to feature uI1 or feature uI2,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined condition is that the number of times the game is executed after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times.

According to feature uI3, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the control mode is maintained in the second control mode until the number of game times executed after transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number. In the state in which the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the state in which the control mode is the first control mode, and in a state in which the player is less likely to lose balls, the judgment means can frequently execute judgment on the second special information acquired in response to the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Therefore, the player can be made to have even greater hope that the second special information acquired in response to the game ball entering the second ball entry means will satisfy the first predetermined condition during the period until the number of game times executed in the specific game state reaches a predetermined number.

<Feature uJ group>
The group of features uJ is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Features uJ1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first special information is obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. and acquired information storage means for respectively storing second special information that is the special information;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), the determination regarding the second special information; is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a first determination mode are selected. a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a high probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 461 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a first state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a specific gaming state (high certainty, high support state) in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game rotation after transition to the specific gaming state) is set. control mode transition means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of executions reaches the number of time saving continuations is established;
The determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is determined in the first predetermined gaming state (high level) after the transition to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is met before the end of the state (low probability support state), the system will re-enter the specified gaming state with a certain probability (it will return to the specified gaming state with a 100% probability). a first re-migration means (transferring);
After the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is determined. ) is established, the game will be transferred to the specific gaming state again with a probability lower than the specific probability (it will be transferred to the high-probability, high-support state again with the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability, low-support state and being assigned to a probability-variable jackpot). a second re-transfer means);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific probability is 100%.

According to the feature uJ1, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the control mode is transitioned from the second control mode to the first control mode. Then, when a specific condition is satisfied by the time when the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state after the transition to the first control mode, the game is transitioned again to the specific game state with a specific probability. On the other hand, when the specific condition is satisfied after the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the game is transitioned again to the specific game state with a probability lower than the specific probability. Therefore, according to the feature uJ1, in the first predetermined game state transitioned from the specific game state, the player can expect that a specific condition will be satisfied by the time when the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state. That is, according to feature uJ1, in a first predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player can expect that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition due to the judgment in the second judgment mode in which the probability that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition is high, but further, the player can expect that the specific condition will be met by the time the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state.

In addition, according to feature uJ1, if a specific condition is established after the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first specified game state, the game state transitions again to the specific game state with a probability lower than the specific probability. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of tension that the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state will end in the first specified game state without the special information satisfying the first specified condition by the determination means in the first specified game state and without the specific condition being established. In this way, feature uJ1 can increase the interest of the game by giving the player feelings of expectation and tension.

Furthermore, according to feature uJ1, if a specific condition is met in the first predetermined gaming state before the determination by the determination means of the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, there is a 100% probability of transitioning back to the specific gaming state. In other words, if a specific condition is met, transitioning back to the specific gaming state is guaranteed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation.

<Characteristic uK group>
The feature uK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uK1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determination being made on the second special information with priority over the determination on the first special information, and having a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) as determination modes (lottery modes) for making the determination, in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 461 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
In a gaming machine comprising:
a control mode transition means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when a predetermined condition (the number of times the game is executed after transition to the specific game state reaches the number of times the time-saving continues) is satisfied in a specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode;
a first re-transition means for re-transitioning to the specific gaming state with a specific probability (re-transitioning to the specific gaming state with a 100% probability) when a specific condition (winning a drop lottery) is established before the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in a first predetermined gaming state (high probability low support state) after the transition to the first control mode is made;
a second re-transition means for re-transitioning to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability when the specific condition (winning in the drop lottery) is established after the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state (transitioning to a high probability high support state with a probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability low support state and being assigned to a probability variable jackpot);
Equipped with
The gaming machine, characterized in that the predetermined condition is that the number of times a game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

According to feature uK1, in a specific game state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the control mode changes from the second control mode to the first control mode. Moved to control mode. Then, before the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode, the specific When the conditions are met, the game is shifted to a specific gaming state again with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability The probability of being transferred to a specific gaming state is lower than that of the game. Therefore, according to the feature uK1, in the first predetermined gaming state that has transitioned from the specific gaming state, the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is applied to the player. It is possible to expect that the specific condition will be satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined gaming state. That is, according to the feature uK1, in the first predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is informed that the special information is determined based on the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. Although it is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, furthermore, the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state may be made in the first predetermined gaming state. It is possible to expect that a specific condition will be met by the time the program ends.

Further, according to feature uK1, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, Since the transition to the specific gaming state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition in the first predetermined gaming state, and the specific condition is satisfied. The system does not create a sense of urgency for the player, as if the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state will end in the first predetermined gaming state. can be set. In this way, according to the feature uK1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

Furthermore, according to feature uK1, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the control mode is maintained in the second control mode until the number of game times executed after transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number. In the state in which the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the state in which the control mode is the first control mode, and in a state in which the player is less likely to lose balls, the judgment means can frequently execute judgment on the second special information acquired in response to the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Therefore, the player can be made to have even greater hope that the second special information acquired in response to the game ball entering the second ball entry means will satisfy the first predetermined condition during the period until the number of game times executed in the specific game state reaches a predetermined number.

<Characteristic uL group>
The feature uL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uL1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first special information is obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. and acquired information storage means for respectively storing second special information that is the special information;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), The determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination for the first special information is given priority over the determination for the first special information, and the first determination mode (low probability mode) is selected for the determination mode (lottery mode). a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a high probability of satisfying the predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 461 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a first state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means;
a game state transition means for transitioning the game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming state transition means is
All of the second information stored in the acquired information storage means in a specific gaming state (high certainty, high support state H4) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode. If a specific condition is satisfied by the time the judgment by the judgment means regarding the special information of (in the event of winning), a first transition means for transitioning to an advantageous gaming state (low probability high support state H5) in which transition to the specific gaming state is guaranteed again;
If the number of executions of the game after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times (ST number) without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of transitioning to the specific gaming state again is determined to be favorable. a second transition means for transitioning to a predetermined gaming state (low certainty low support state H1) lower than the gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the determination means for all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode. If the specific condition is satisfied before the end of the determination, the game is transferred to an advantageous gaming state in which it is guaranteed to transfer to the specific gaming state again. In addition, if the number of times the game is executed after transitioning to a specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times without a specific condition being satisfied, a predetermined game with a lower probability of transitioning to the specific gaming state again than an advantageous gaming state. state.

Therefore, according to the present feature, the player can receive all the It is possible to expect that the specific condition will be satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means regarding the special information No. 2 is completed, and the transition to an advantageous gaming state will occur. That is, according to this feature, in a specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined to be predetermined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is high for the player. It is possible to make the user expect that the condition is satisfied, but furthermore, the specific condition may not be satisfied until the determination means finishes determining all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state. , it is possible to make the player expect to move to an advantageous gaming state. Conventionally, players are only made to expect that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition by the time the determination means finishes determining all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a specific gaming state. However, according to this feature, by the time the determination means finishes determining all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state, the specific condition is satisfied and the state shifts to the advantageous gaming state. It is also possible to make the player expect that the player will be able to do the following. Then, by adopting a configuration that guarantees that the advantageous gaming state continues until the special information satisfies a predetermined condition and a jackpot game is started, and then transitions to the specific gaming state again after the end of the jackpot game, the player In contrast, even if the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition by the time the determination means finishes determining all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the particular gaming state, the special information can be acquired in the particular gaming state. If the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination means finishes determining all the second special information stored in the information storage means, a jackpot game is guaranteed, and the game can shift to the specific gaming state again. It can give you a sense of security that you are guaranteed.

Furthermore, according to this feature, if the number of game rounds executed after transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number without the specific condition being satisfied, a transition is made to a predetermined game state in which the probability of transitioning back to the specific game state is lower than in the advantageous game state. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of tension that the number of game rounds executed after transition to the specific game state will reach a predetermined number without the special information satisfying the predetermined condition by the determination means in the specific game state, and without the specific condition being satisfied by the time the determination means has finished determining all of the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state. In this way, according to this feature, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by imparting to the player feelings of expectation and tension.

[Feature uL2]
A gaming machine according to feature uL1,
The game state transition means includes:
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a means for transitioning the gaming state by alternatively determining the judgment mode between the first judgment mode and the second judgment mode (fall judgment processing) when the specific condition is established.

According to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted by alternatively determining the determination mode between the first determination mode and the second determination mode. Switching the determination mode has a large effect on the advantage for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player have a strong interest in whether or not the specific condition is met, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature uL3]
A gaming machine according to feature uL1 or feature uL2,
The predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to this feature, in the predetermined gaming state, since the control mode is the first control mode, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means, and the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to this feature, the player is given a greater sense of urgency as to whether or not the number of game runs after transitioning to a specific gaming state will reach a predetermined number without a specific condition being met. can be granted.

[Feature uL4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uL1 to uL3,
The predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to this feature, since the determination mode is the first determination mode in the predetermined gaming state, the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to this feature, the player is given a sense of urgency as to whether or not the number of game runs after transitioning to a specific gaming state will reach a predetermined number without a specific condition being met. More can be given.

<Characteristic uM group>
The feature uM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uM1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determining means giving priority to the determination of the second special information over the determination of the first special information, and having a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that of the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 461 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
A game state transition means for transitioning a game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game state transition means includes:
a first transition means for transitioning to a favorable game state (low probability high support state H5) in which transition to the specific game state is guaranteed again if a specific condition is established (if a drop lottery is won) by the time the determination by the determination means is completed for all of the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a specific game state (high probability high support state H4) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode (by the time the mode H6a in which the special 2 remaining reserve is consumed in the high probability low support state H6 is completed);
a second transition means for transitioning to a predetermined game state (low probability low support state H1) in which the probability of transitioning to the specific game state again is lower than that of the advantageous game state, when the number of times the game is executed after transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number (ST number) without the specific condition being satisfied;
Equipped with
The game state transition means includes:
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a means for transitioning the gaming state by alternatively determining the judgment mode between the first judgment mode and the second judgment mode (fall judgment processing) when the specific condition is established.

According to this feature, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, if a specific condition is met before the judgment means finishes judging all of the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game state is transitioned to a favorable game state in which transition to the specific game state is guaranteed again. In addition, if the number of game plays executed after transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number without the specific condition being met, the game state is transitioned to a predetermined game state in which the probability of transitioning to the specific game state again is lower than that of the favorable game state.

Therefore, according to the present feature, the player can receive all the It is possible to expect that the specific condition will be satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information is completed, and that the game will shift to an advantageous gaming state. That is, according to this feature, in a specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined to be predetermined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is high for the player. It is possible to make the user expect that the condition is satisfied, but furthermore, the specific condition is satisfied until the determination means finishes determining all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state. , it is possible to make the player expect to move to an advantageous gaming state.

Furthermore, according to this feature, if the number of game rounds executed after transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number without the specific condition being satisfied, a transition is made to a predetermined game state in which the probability of transitioning back to the specific game state is lower than in the advantageous game state. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of tension that the number of game rounds executed after transition to the specific game state will reach a predetermined number without the special information satisfying the predetermined condition by the determination means in the specific game state, and without the specific condition being satisfied by the time the determination means has finished determining all of the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state. In this way, according to this feature, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by imparting to the player feelings of expectation and tension.

Furthermore, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted by alternatively determining the determination mode between the first determination mode and the second determination mode. Switching the determination mode has a large effect on the advantage for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player have a strong interest in whether or not the specific condition is met, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

<Feature uN group>
The group of features uN is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uN1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determining means giving priority to the determination of the second special information over the determination of the first special information, and having a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that of the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 461 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
A game state transition means for transitioning a game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game state transition means includes:
a first transition means for transitioning to a favorable game state (low probability high support state H5) in which transition to the specific game state is guaranteed again if a specific condition is established (if a drop lottery is won) by the time the determination by the determination means is completed for all of the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a specific game state (high probability high support state H4) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode (by the time the mode H6a in which the special 2 remaining reserve is consumed in the high probability low support state H6 is completed);
a second transition means for transitioning to a predetermined game state (low probability low support state H1) in which the probability of transitioning to the specific game state again is lower than that of the advantageous game state, when the number of times the game is executed after transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number (ST number) without the specific condition being satisfied;
Equipped with
The predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to this feature, the determination means for all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a specific game state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode. If the specific condition is satisfied before the end of the determination, the game is transferred to an advantageous gaming state in which it is guaranteed to transfer to the specific gaming state again. In addition, if the number of times the game is executed after transitioning to a specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number without a specific condition being satisfied, a predetermined game with a lower probability of transitioning to the specific gaming state again than an advantageous gaming state. state.

Therefore, according to the present feature, the player can receive all the It is possible to expect that the specific condition will be satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information is completed, and that the game will shift to an advantageous gaming state. That is, according to this feature, in a specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined to be predetermined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is high for the player. It is possible to make the user expect that the condition is satisfied, but furthermore, the specific condition is satisfied until the determination means finishes determining all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state. , it is possible to make the player expect to move to an advantageous gaming state.

Furthermore, according to this feature, if the number of game rounds executed after transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number without the specific condition being satisfied, a transition is made to a predetermined game state in which the probability of transitioning back to the specific game state is lower than in the advantageous game state. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of tension that the number of game rounds executed after transition to the specific game state will reach a predetermined number without the special information satisfying the predetermined condition by the determination means in the specific game state, and without the specific condition being satisfied by the time the determination means has finished determining all of the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state. In this way, according to this feature, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by imparting to the player feelings of expectation and tension.

Furthermore, according to this feature, in the specified game state, since the control mode is the first control mode, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and the advantage to the player is low. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to give the player an even greater sense of tension, as if the number of game plays executed after the transition to the specific game state will reach the specified number without the specific condition being met.

<Characteristic uO group>
The group of features uO is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uO1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first special information is obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. and acquired information storage means for respectively storing second special information that is the special information;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), The determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination for the first special information is given priority over the determination for the first special information, and the first determination mode (low probability mode) is selected for the determination mode (lottery mode). a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a high probability of satisfying the predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 461 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a first state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means;
a game state transition means for transitioning the game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming state transition means is
All of the second information stored in the acquired information storage means in a specific gaming state (high certainty, high support state H4) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode. If a specific condition is satisfied by the time the judgment by the judgment means regarding the special information of (in the event of winning), a first transition means for transitioning to an advantageous gaming state (low probability high support state H5) in which transition to the specific gaming state is guaranteed again;
If the number of executions of the game after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times (ST number) without the specific condition being satisfied, the probability of transitioning to the specific gaming state again is determined to be favorable. a second transition means for transitioning to a predetermined gaming state (low certainty low support state H1) lower than the gaming state;
Equipped with
The gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to this feature, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, if a specific condition is met before the judgment means finishes judging all of the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game state is transitioned to a favorable game state in which transition to the specific game state is guaranteed again. In addition, if the number of game plays executed after transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number without the specific condition being met, the game state is transitioned to a predetermined game state in which the probability of transitioning to the specific game state again is lower than that of the favorable game state.

Therefore, according to this feature, the player can expect that the specific condition will be met and a transition to an advantageous gaming state will occur before the determination means has completed its determination of all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode. In other words, according to this feature, in a specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player can expect that the special information will satisfy the specified condition due to the determination in the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information will satisfy the specified condition is high, but further, the player can expect that the specific condition will be met and a transition to an advantageous gaming state will occur before the determination means has completed its determination of all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state.

Furthermore, according to this feature, if the number of game rounds executed after transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number without the specific condition being satisfied, a transition is made to a predetermined game state in which the probability of transitioning back to the specific game state is lower than in the advantageous game state. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of tension that the number of game rounds executed after transition to the specific game state will reach a predetermined number without the special information satisfying the predetermined condition by the determination means in the specific game state, and without the specific condition being satisfied by the time the determination means has finished determining all of the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state. In this way, according to this feature, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by imparting to the player feelings of expectation and tension.

Furthermore, according to this feature, in the predetermined gaming state, the determination mode is the first determination mode, which is less advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, the player is given a sense of urgency as to whether or not the number of game runs after transitioning to a specific gaming state will reach a predetermined number without a specific condition being met. More can be given.

<Characteristic uP group>
The feature uP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uP1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determination being made on the second special information with priority over the determination on the first special information, and having a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) as determination modes (lottery modes) for making the determination, in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 461 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game state transition means includes:
a first transition means for maintaining the control mode in the second control mode for a predetermined period (the period until the next big win is won) in a first specific game state (high probability high support state H4) when a specific condition is established (when the player wins in the fall lottery), and for transitioning the state to a first predetermined game state (low probability high support state H5) which is more advantageous for a player than the first specific game state;
A second transition means for transitioning to a second specific gaming state (high probability low support state H6) when the specific condition is not satisfied (when the player does not win the drop lottery) and a second predetermined condition is satisfied (when the game number corresponding to the number of times of time-saving continuation is executed) in the first specific gaming state;
a third transition means for transitioning to a second predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state H1) which is less advantageous for a player than the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is established at the time of the determination by the determination means regarding the first special information in the second specific gaming state (when the player wins the fall lottery at the time of the winning lottery for special 1 in the mode H6b during left hitting);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to this feature, even if the same specific condition is established, the function is different depending on whether it is established in the first specific gaming state or in the second specific gaming state. Specifically, in the first specific gaming state, if a specific condition is satisfied, a transition of the gaming state that increases the advantage for the player (from the first specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state) On the other hand, in the second specific gaming state, if the specific condition is satisfied when the first special information is determined by the determining means, a game that is less advantageous for the player A state transition (transition from the second specific gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state) is performed. In other words, according to this feature, the establishment of the specific condition triggers a transition to a gaming state where the advantage for the player increases, and also triggers a transition to a gaming state where the advantage for the player decreases. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine, and it is possible to easily diversify the gaming features.

According to this feature, when a specific condition is established in the first specific game state, a transition to a game state that is more advantageous to the player is made, so that the player can be made to expect the specific condition to be established in the first specific game state. On the other hand, when a specific condition is established in the second specific game state when the determination means determines the first special information, a transition to a game state that is less advantageous to the player is made, so that the player can be made to not expect the specific condition to be established in the second specific game state. In other words, the player can be made to expect the specific condition to be established in the first specific game state, and then, after the transition to the second specific game state, the player can be made to not expect the specific condition to be established. In this way, the player can be made to feel the exact opposite emotions regarding the establishment of a specific condition as the game state transitions, so that an intonation can be added to the game.

[Feature uP2]
The gaming machine described in feature uP1,
The gaming state transition means is
means for shifting the gaming state by alternatively determining the determination mode between the first determination mode and the second determination mode (fall determination process) when the specific condition is satisfied; A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted by alternatively determining the determination mode between the first determination mode and the second determination mode. Switching the determination mode has a large effect on the advantage for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player have a strong interest in whether or not the specific condition is met, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature uP3]
A gaming machine according to feature uP1 or feature uP2,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the first predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state, the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, but since this is more advantageous to the player than the first specific gaming state, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player.

[Features uP4]
The gaming machine described in any one of features uP1 to feature uP3,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to this feature, in the second predetermined gaming state, since the control mode is the first control mode, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means, which is advantageous for the player. low. Therefore, according to this feature, in the second specific gaming state, when the determining means makes a determination regarding the first special information, the specific condition that triggers the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is not satisfied. A sense of urgency can be given to the player.

[Features uP5]
The gaming machine described in any one of features uP1 to feature uP4,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to this feature, since the determination mode is the first determination mode in the second predetermined gaming state, the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to this feature, in the second specific gaming state, the specific condition that triggers the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is not satisfied when the first special information is determined by the determining means. It is possible to further impart a sense of urgency to the player.

[Feature uP6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uP1 to uP5,
The second specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode.

According to this feature, since the determination mode is the second determination mode in the second specific gaming state, it is highly advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, since it is undesirable for the player to shift the gaming state from the highly advantageous second specific gaming state, in the second specific gaming state, the determining means regarding the first special information It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether a specific condition will be met during the determination.

<Characteristic uQ group>
The feature uQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uQ1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determination being made on the second special information with priority over the determination on the first special information, and having a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) as determination modes (lottery modes) for making the determination, in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 461 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game state transition means includes:
a first transition means for maintaining the control mode in the second control mode for a predetermined period (the period until the next big win is won) in a first specific game state (high probability high support state H4) when a specific condition is established (when the player wins in the fall lottery), and for transitioning the state to a first predetermined game state (low probability high support state H5) which is more advantageous for a player than the first specific game state;
A second transition means for transitioning to a second specific gaming state (high probability low support state H6) when the specific condition is not satisfied (when the player does not win the drop lottery) and a second predetermined condition is satisfied (when the game number corresponding to the number of times of time-saving continuation is executed) in the first specific gaming state;
a third transition means for transitioning to a second predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state H1) which is less advantageous for a player than the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is established at the time of the determination by the determination means regarding the first special information in the second specific gaming state (when the player wins the fall lottery at the time of the winning lottery for special 1 in the mode H6b during left hitting);
Equipped with
The game state transition means includes:
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a means for transitioning the gaming state by alternatively determining the judgment mode between the first judgment mode and the second judgment mode (fall judgment processing) when the specific condition is established.

According to this feature, even if the same specific condition is established, the function is different depending on whether it is established in the first specific gaming state or in the second specific gaming state. Specifically, in the first specific gaming state, if a specific condition is satisfied, a transition to a gaming state that becomes more advantageous for the player is performed, while in the second specific gaming state, If a specific condition is satisfied when the determination means makes a determination regarding the first special information, a transition of the gaming state is performed such that the advantage for the player becomes lower. In other words, according to this feature, the establishment of the specific condition triggers a transition to a gaming state where the advantage for the player increases, and also triggers a transition to a gaming state where the advantage for the player decreases. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved, and it is possible to easily diversify the gaming features.

According to this feature, when a specific condition is met in the first specific game state, a transition to a game state that is more advantageous to the player is made, so that the player can be made to hope that the specific condition will be met in the first specific game state. On the other hand, when a specific condition is met in the second specific game state upon the determination by the determination means of the first special information, a transition to a game state that is less advantageous to the player is made, so that the player can be made to think that he does not want the specific condition to be met in the second specific game state. In other words, depending on the type of game state at the time when the specific condition is met, the player can be made to feel polar opposite emotions, which can add variety to the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, when a specific condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted by alternatively determining the determination mode between the first determination mode and the second determination mode. Switching the determination mode has a large effect on the advantage for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player have a strong interest in whether or not the specific condition is met, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic uR group>
The feature uR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uR1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determination being made on the second special information with priority over the determination on the first special information, and having a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) as determination modes (lottery modes) for making the determination, in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 461 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game state transition means includes:
a first transition means for maintaining the control mode in the second control mode for a predetermined period (the period until the next big win is won) in a first specific game state (high probability high support state H4) when a specific condition is established (when the player wins in the fall lottery), and for transitioning the state to a first predetermined game state (low probability high support state H5) which is more advantageous for a player than the first specific game state;
A second transition means for transitioning to a second specific gaming state (high probability low support state H6) when the specific condition is not satisfied (when the player does not win the drop lottery) and a second predetermined condition is satisfied (when the game number corresponding to the number of times of time-saving continuation is executed) in the first specific gaming state;
a third transition means for transitioning to a second predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state H1) which is less advantageous for a player than the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is established at the time of the determination by the determination means regarding the first special information in the second specific gaming state (when the player wins the fall lottery at the time of the winning lottery for special 1 in the mode H6b during left hitting);
Equipped with
The gaming machine, characterized in that the first predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to this feature, even if the same specific condition is established, the function is different depending on whether it is established in the first specific gaming state or in the second specific gaming state. Specifically, in the first specific gaming state, if a specific condition is satisfied, a transition to a gaming state that becomes more advantageous for the player is performed, while in the second specific gaming state, If a specific condition is satisfied when the determination means makes a determination regarding the first special information, a transition of the gaming state is performed such that the advantage for the player becomes lower. In other words, according to this feature, the establishment of the specific condition triggers a transition to a gaming state where the advantage for the player increases, and also triggers a transition to a gaming state where the advantage for the player decreases. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine, and it is possible to easily diversify the gaming features.

According to this feature, when a specific condition is met in the first specific game state, a transition to a game state that is more advantageous to the player is made, so that the player can be made to hope that the specific condition will be met in the first specific game state. On the other hand, when a specific condition is met in the second specific game state upon the determination by the determination means of the first special information, a transition to a game state that is less advantageous to the player is made, so that the player can be made to think that he does not want the specific condition to be met in the second specific game state. In other words, depending on the type of game state at the time when the specific condition is met, the player can be made to feel polar opposite emotions, which can add variety to the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state, the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, which is more advantageous for the player than the first specific gaming state, and therefore can provide a sense of surprise to the player.

<Feature uS group>
The group of features uS is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uS1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first special information is obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. and acquired information storage means for respectively storing second special information that is the special information;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), the determination regarding the second special information; is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a first determination mode are selected. a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a high probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 461 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a first state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means;
gaming state transition means for shifting a gaming state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming state transition means is
In the first specific gaming state (high probability high support state H4), if a specific condition is met (if you win in the falling lottery), the control mode is activated for a predetermined period (period until winning the next jackpot). a first transition means for shifting to a first predetermined gaming state (low probability high support state H5) which is a gaming state maintained in the second control mode and which is more advantageous for the player than the first specific gaming state; ,
In the first specific gaming state, if the specific condition is not met (without winning the falling lottery) and the second predetermined condition is met (when the number of consecutive game times for time saving is executed), the second predetermined condition is met. 2 a second transition means for transitioning to a specific gaming state (high-accuracy, low-support state H6);
In the second specific gaming state, if the specific condition is satisfied during the determination by the determining means regarding the first special information (during the winning lottery for special 1 in left-handed mode H6b) a third transition means for transitioning to a second predetermined gaming state (low-probability, low-support state H1) that is less advantageous for the player than the second specific gaming state (if the player wins a falling lottery);
Equipped with
The gaming machine characterized in that the second predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to this feature, even if the same specific condition is established, the function differs between when the specific condition is established in the first specific game state and when the specific condition is established in the second specific game state. Specifically, when the specific condition is established in the first specific game state, a transition to a game state in which the player's advantage is increased is made, whereas when the specific condition is established in the second specific game state when the determination means determines the first special information, a transition to a game state in which the player's advantage is decreased is made. In other words, according to this feature, the establishment of a specific condition triggers a transition to a game state in which the player's advantage is increased, and also triggers a transition to a game state in which the player's advantage is decreased, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing a gaming machine and facilitating diversification of gameplay.

According to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state, the gaming state is shifted so that it is more advantageous for the player. 1. It is possible to make the player expect that a specific condition will be satisfied in a specific gaming state. On the other hand, in the second specific gaming state, if the specific condition is satisfied when the first special information is determined by the determining means, the gaming state is shifted such that it is less advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that he does not want the specific condition to be satisfied in the second specific gaming state. In other words, it is possible to make the player feel completely opposite emotions depending on the type of gaming state at the time when the specific condition is satisfied, so it is possible to add excitement to the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, in the second predetermined game state, since the control mode is the first control mode, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and the advantage to the player is low. Therefore, according to this feature, in the second specific game state, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension that a specific condition that will be a trigger for transition to the second specific game state will be established when the determination means determines the first special information.

<Characteristic uT group>
The feature uT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uT1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determination being made on the second special information with priority over the determination on the first special information, and having a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) as determination modes (lottery modes) for making the determination, in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 461 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game state transition means includes:
a first transition means for maintaining the control mode in the second control mode for a predetermined period (the period until the next big win is won) in a first specific game state (high probability high support state H4) when a specific condition is established (when the player wins in the fall lottery), and for transitioning the state to a first predetermined game state (low probability high support state H5) which is more advantageous for a player than the first specific game state;
A second transition means for transitioning to a second specific gaming state (high probability low support state H6) when the specific condition is not satisfied (when the player does not win the drop lottery) and a second predetermined condition is satisfied (when the game number corresponding to the number of times of time-saving continuation is executed) in the first specific gaming state;
a third transition means for transitioning to a second predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state H1) which is less advantageous for a player than the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is established at the time of the determination by the determination means regarding the first special information in the second specific gaming state (when the player wins the fall lottery at the time of the winning lottery for special 1 in the mode H6b during left hitting);
Equipped with
The gaming machine, characterized in that the second predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to this feature, even if the same specific condition is established, the function differs between when the specific condition is established in the first specific game state and when the specific condition is established in the second specific game state. Specifically, when the specific condition is established in the first specific game state, a transition to a game state in which the player's advantage is increased is made, whereas when the specific condition is established in the second specific game state when the determination means determines the first special information, a transition to a game state in which the player's advantage is decreased is made. In other words, according to this feature, the establishment of a specific condition triggers a transition to a game state in which the player's advantage is increased, and also triggers a transition to a game state in which the player's advantage is decreased, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing a gaming machine and facilitating diversification of gameplay.

According to this feature, when a specific condition is met in the first specific game state, a transition to a game state that is more advantageous to the player is made, so that the player can be made to hope that the specific condition will be met in the first specific game state. On the other hand, when a specific condition is met in the second specific game state upon the determination by the determination means of the first special information, a transition to a game state that is less advantageous to the player is made, so that the player can be made to think that he does not want the specific condition to be met in the second specific game state. In other words, depending on the type of game state at the time when the specific condition is met, the player can be made to feel polar opposite emotions, which can add variety to the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, since the determination mode is the first determination mode in the second predetermined gaming state, the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to this feature, in the second specific gaming state, the specific condition that triggers the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is not satisfied when the first special information is determined by the determining means. It is possible to further impart a sense of urgency to the player.

<Feature uU group>
The group of features uU is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uU1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determination being made on the second special information with priority over the determination on the first special information, and having a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) as determination modes (lottery modes) for making the determination, in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 461 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game state transition means includes:
a first transition means for maintaining the control mode in the second control mode for a predetermined period (the period until the next big win is won) in a first specific game state (high probability high support state H4) when a specific condition is established (when the player wins in the fall lottery), and for transitioning the state to a first predetermined game state (low probability high support state H5) which is more advantageous for a player than the first specific game state;
A second transition means for transitioning to a second specific gaming state (high probability low support state H6) when the specific condition is not satisfied (when the player does not win the drop lottery) and a second predetermined condition is satisfied (when the game number corresponding to the number of times of time-saving continuation is executed) in the first specific gaming state;
a third transition means for transitioning to a second predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state H1) which is less advantageous for a player than the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is established at the time of the determination by the determination means regarding the first special information in the second specific gaming state (when the player wins the fall lottery at the time of the winning lottery for special 1 in the mode H6b during left hitting);
Equipped with
The second specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode.

According to this feature, even if the same specific condition is established, the function differs between when the specific condition is established in the first specific game state and when the specific condition is established in the second specific game state. Specifically, when the specific condition is established in the first specific game state, a transition to a game state in which the player's advantage is increased is made, whereas when the specific condition is established in the second specific game state when the determination means determines the first special information, a transition to a game state in which the player's advantage is decreased is made. In other words, according to this feature, the establishment of a specific condition triggers a transition to a game state in which the player's advantage is increased, and also triggers a transition to a game state in which the player's advantage is decreased, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing gaming machines and facilitating diversification of gameplay.

According to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state, the gaming state is shifted in such a way that the advantage for the player becomes higher. 1. It is possible to make the player expect that a specific condition will be satisfied in a specific gaming state. On the other hand, in the second specific gaming state, if the specific condition is satisfied when the first special information is determined by the determining means, the gaming state is shifted in such a way that the advantage for the player becomes lower. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that he does not want the specific condition to be satisfied in the second specific gaming state. In other words, it is possible to make the player feel completely opposite emotions depending on the type of gaming state at the time when the specific condition is satisfied, so it is possible to add excitement to the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, in the second specific game state, the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, so that the player has a high advantage. Therefore, according to this feature, since the transition of the game state from the second specific game state, which is highly advantageous, is undesirable for the player, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension that a specific condition may be established when the judgment means judges the first special information in the second specific game state.

<Characteristics of uIA group>
The group of features uIA is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature uIA1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determination being made on the second special information with priority over the determination on the first special information, and having a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) as determination modes (lottery modes) for making the determination, in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 461 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
In a gaming machine comprising:
a control mode transition means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when a predetermined condition (the number of times the game is executed after transition to the specific game state reaches the number of times the time-saving continues) is satisfied in a specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode;
a first re-transition means for re-transitioning to the specific gaming state with a specific probability (re-transitioning to the specific gaming state with a 100% probability) when a specific condition (winning a drop lottery) is established before the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in a first predetermined gaming state (high probability low support state) after the transition to the first control mode is made;
a second re-transition means for re-transitioning to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability when the specific condition (winning in the drop lottery) is established after the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state (transitioning to a high probability high support state with a probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability low support state and being assigned to a probability variable jackpot);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to this feature, in a specific game state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control mode changes from the second control mode to the first control mode. Moved to control mode. Then, before the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode, the specific When the conditions are met, the game is shifted to a specific gaming state again with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability The probability of being transferred to a specific gaming state is lower than that of the game. Therefore, according to the present feature, in the first predetermined gaming state that has transitioned from the specific gaming state, the player is informed by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state. It is possible to expect that the specific condition will be satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined gaming state. That is, according to the present feature, in the first predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode that the special information has a high probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition. Although it is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, furthermore, the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state may be made in the first predetermined gaming state. It is possible to expect that a specific condition will be met by the time the program ends.

Further, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, Since the transition to the specific gaming state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition in the first predetermined gaming state, and the specific condition is satisfied. The system does not create a sense of urgency for the player, as if the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state will end in the first predetermined gaming state. can be set. In this way, according to the present feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

[Feature uIA2]
The gaming machine described in feature uIA1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific probability is a 100% probability.

According to this feature, if a specific condition is met in the first predetermined gaming state before the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, there is a 100% probability of transitioning back to the specific gaming state. In other words, if a specific condition is met, transitioning back to the specific gaming state is guaranteed. This can provide the player with a greater sense of expectation.

[Feature uIA3]
The gaming machine according to feature uIA1 or feature uIA2,
The gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined condition is that the number of times the game is executed after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times.

According to this feature, in a specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the number of times the game is executed after transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. The control mode is maintained in the second control mode until. When the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means more easily than when the control mode is the first control mode, making it difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls he has. , the determination means can frequently perform determination regarding the second special information acquired upon entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means. Therefore, during the period until the number of executions of the game round in the specific game state reaches a predetermined number, the second special information acquired by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means is transferred to the first ball entry means. It is possible to make the player expect even more that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

[Feature uIA4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uIA1 to uIA3,
In the specific game state (high probability high support state H4), a means for displaying a first image (a first specific background image corresponding to the chance zone in the modified example 12) as a background image;
a means for displaying a second image (a third specific background image corresponding to a final chance zone in the modified example 12) different from the first image as a background image during a period (special 2 remaining reserved consumption H6a) until the determination by the determining means for the second special information is completed after the specific game state has been shifted to the first specified game state (high probability low support state H6);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to this feature, the background image displayed in a specific gaming state and the background image displayed after the transition from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state until the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information is completed. The background image displayed during the period will be different. Therefore, it is possible to make the player clearly distinguish and recognize the two states, and it is also possible to draw attention to changes in the game state.

[Feature uIA5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uIA1 to uIA4,
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a means for executing an effect suggesting that a favorable event has occurred (an effect of entering a secure mode in variant example 12) when the specific condition is met (when a fall is won in the fall lottery) in the specific gaming state (high probability high support state H4).

In a normal gaming machine, it is not desirable for the player if a specific condition is met (winning a lottery in a lottery). However, in the gaming machine having this feature, unlike a normal gaming machine, it is preferable for the player that the specific condition is satisfied in the above situation.

According to this feature, when a specific condition is met in a specific gaming state, an effect that suggests that an advantageous event has occurred is executed, so it is clearly shown to the player that an advantageous event has occurred. It becomes possible to recognize the

[Feature uIA6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uIA1 to feature uIA5,
After the predetermined condition is established and the transition to the first predetermined gaming state occurs, the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information ends in the first predetermined gaming state (high certainty low support state H6). Means for executing a performance that suggests that an advantageous event has occurred (advantageous event occurrence alternative performance in Modification Example 12) when the specific condition is satisfied by the time the specified condition is met (when a fall is won in a fall lottery). A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In a normal gaming machine, the fulfillment of a specific condition (winning a fall in the fall lottery) is undesirable for the player. However, in a gaming machine with this feature, unlike a normal gaming machine, the fulfillment of a specific condition in the above situation is desirable for the player.

According to this feature, after a predetermined condition is met and a transition to a first predetermined gaming state occurs, if a specific condition is met before the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, a presentation is executed that suggests that an advantageous event has occurred, making it possible for the player to clearly recognize that an advantageous event has occurred.

[Feature uIA7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uIA1 to uIA6,
The game round is composed of a variable display period in which a predetermined pattern is variably displayed, and a stationary display period in which the predetermined pattern is stationary displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the judgment,
The control mode transition means is provided with a means (control at time t5 in FIG. 489) for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode at the start of the variable display period in a game round in which the specified condition is satisfied.

According to this feature, the control mode is switched from the second control mode to the first control mode at the start of the variable display period in a game in which a predetermined condition is satisfied, so that it is possible to prevent the assist means from transitioning to the second state during the execution of the game next to the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, causing the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a breakdown in the game playability of the gaming machine caused by the game ball entering the second ball entry means during the execution of the game next to the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied.

[Feature uIA8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uIA1 to feature uIA7,
The game round is composed of a variable display period in which a predetermined symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and a stop display period in which the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the determination,
The control mode transition means is means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode at the end of the variable display period in the game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied (time t9 in FIG. 490). A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the control mode is transferred from the second control mode to the first control mode at the end of the variable display period in the game session in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the control mode is stopped in the game session in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. By setting the display period to a predetermined length or more, the auxiliary means transitions to the second state and the game ball enters the second state during the execution of the game round following the game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to avoid the ball from entering the ball means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a breakdown in the game performance of the gaming machine due to the game ball entering the second ball entry means during the execution of the next game round after the game round in which the predetermined condition has been met. becomes.

[Features uIA9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uIA1 to feature uIA8,
The game round is composed of a variable display period in which a predetermined symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and a stop display period in which the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the determination,
The control mode transition means is means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the stop display period elapses in the game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied (time t12 in FIG. 491). A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, when the stop display period in a game in which a predetermined condition is satisfied has elapsed, the control mode is switched from the second control mode to the first control mode, so that the assist means can be switched to the second state during the game in which the game following the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is executed, and the game ball can be made to enter the second ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a new gameplay in which the game ball can be made to enter the second ball entry means during the game in which the game following the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is executed.

[Feature uIA10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uIA1 to uIA9,
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for executing an effect (a through-passage promotion effect in variant 15) that encourages a player to pass a gaming ball through a specified ball entry area (through gate 35) under specified circumstances.

According to this feature, in a predetermined situation, an effect is executed that prompts the player to pass the game ball into a predetermined ball entry area, so that the player is informed of the novelty of this gaming machine, which is different from a normal gaming machine. It is possible to make the player aware of how to play the game in accordance with the nature of the game.

[Feature uIA11]
The gaming machine described in any one of features uIA1 to feature uIA10,
In a predetermined situation, when a game ball passes through a predetermined ball entry area (through gate 35), a production that suggests that an advantageous state is started for the player (advantageous state start production in modification 15) is provided. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for executing.

According to this feature, in a predetermined situation, when the game ball passes through a predetermined ball entry area, an effect is executed that suggests that a state advantageous to the player will start, so the player is not required to play the game. It is possible to make the player recognize that when the ball passes through a predetermined ball entry area, a state advantageous to the player starts, which is different from that of a normal gaming machine.

[Feature uIA12]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uIA1 to uIA11,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the state of the assistance means transitions to the second state in the first specified gaming state (high probability low support state H6), a means is provided for executing an effect (special ball entry promotion effect 2 in variant example 15) that encourages the player to enter the second ball entry means.

According to this feature, when the state of the auxiliary means changes to the second state in the first predetermined game state, an effect is performed that prompts the player to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware of how to play the game in accordance with the new game nature of this gaming machine, which is different from a normal gaming machine.

[Feature uIA13]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uIA1 to feature uIA12,
When the number of stored pieces of the second special information reaches a predetermined number (4 pieces) in the first predetermined gaming state (high probability low support state H6), the number of pieces of stored second special information becomes the predetermined number. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying information corresponding to the result (advantageous confirmed effect in Modification 15).

According to this feature, when the number of stored pieces of second special information reaches a predetermined number in the first predetermined gaming state, information corresponding to the number of stored pieces of second special information reaching a predetermined number is displayed, so that the player can recognize that, unlike normal gaming machines, there is something special about the number of stored pieces of second special information reaching a predetermined number in the first predetermined gaming state.

[Feature uIA14]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uIA1 to feature uIA13,
A gaming machine characterized in that it does not include means for suspending and storing a predetermined lottery (common lottery) that is a trigger for transitioning the auxiliary means from the first state to the second state.

According to this feature, since there is no means for suspending and storing the predetermined lottery (general drawing lottery) that is the trigger for transitioning the auxiliary means from the first state to the second state, the reserved predetermined lottery is It is possible to avoid automatic execution at a timing not intended by the player. Therefore, by adjusting the timing at which the game ball enters the ball entering means that triggers the transition of the state of the auxiliary means, a new game feature is created in which the timing at which the auxiliary means transitions to the second state is adjusted. can be provided to

[Feature uIA15]
A gaming machine according to any one of features uIA1 to uIA14,
When the specific condition is established in the specific game state (high probability high support state H4) (when a fall is won in the fall lottery), a means for transitioning the judgment mode to a second predetermined game state (low probability high support state H5) in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode;
A predetermined ball entry port (high probability transition winning entry port 34e in variant example 18) into which a game ball can enter in the second predetermined game state;
a means for transitioning the judgment mode to the second judgment mode when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entrance;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to this feature, when a specific condition is met in a specific game state (when a fall is won in the fall lottery), the judgment mode transitions to a second predetermined game state (low probability high support state H5) in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode, but if the game ball can be inserted into the predetermined ball entrance in the second predetermined game state, the judgment mode transitions again to the second judgment mode. Here, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the second control mode continues until the next big win is won when the time-saving grant is won in the second predetermined game state, if the time-saving grant is won in the second predetermined game state and the game ball can be inserted into the predetermined ball entrance, the second control mode continues until the next big win is won, and the game state transitions to the judgment mode being the second judgment mode. This game state is very advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to provide the player with a new game in which the game ball is inserted into the predetermined ball entrance in the second predetermined game state, and the game transitions to an even more advantageous game state.

<Characteristic uIB group>
The feature uIB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the 10th embodiment and its 12th modification.

[Feature uIB1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
a second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first special information is obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. acquisition information storage means for storing second special information that is the special information;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), the determination regarding the second special information; is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a first determination mode are selected. a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a high probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition;
If one game round is defined as the start of the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game operation, the game round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 461 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a first state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a specific gaming state (high certainty, high support state) in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game rotation after transition to the specific gaming state) is set. control mode transition means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of executions reaches the number of time saving continuations is established;
The determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is in the first predetermined gaming state (high level) after the transition to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is met before the end of the state (low probability support state), the system will re-enter the specified gaming state with a certain probability (it will return to the specified gaming state with a 100% probability). a first re-migration means (transferring);
After the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) ) is established, the specific gaming state is re-transferred to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability (the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability low support state and being assigned to the probability-variable jackpot is to re-transfer to the high-probability high support state) a second re-transfer means);
In addition,
Means capable of displaying a first image (the first specific background image corresponding to the chance zone in Modification 12) as a background image in the specific gaming state (high-precision, high-support state H4);
The period after the transition from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state (high certainty low support state H6) until the end of the judgment by the judgment means regarding the second special information (Special 2 remaining period) Means capable of displaying a second image different from the first image (a third specific background image corresponding to the final chance zone in Modification 12) as a background image during pending digestion H6a);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the control mode is transitioned from the second control mode to the first control mode. Then, when a specific condition is satisfied by the time when the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state after the transition to the first control mode, the game is transitioned again to the specific game state with a specific probability. On the other hand, when the specific condition is satisfied after the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the game is transitioned again to the specific game state with a probability lower than the specific probability. Therefore, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state transitioned from the specific game state, the player can expect that a specific condition will be satisfied by the time when the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state. That is, according to this feature, in a first predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player can expect that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition due to the judgment in the second judgment mode in which there is a high probability that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the player can expect that the specific condition will be established by the time the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state.

Furthermore, according to this feature, if a specific condition is established after the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, a transition to the specific game state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability. Therefore, in the first predetermined game state, the special information is not determined to satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not established, and the player can be made to feel a sense of tension that the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state will end in the first predetermined game state. In this way, according to this feature, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by imparting to the player feelings of expectation and tension.

In addition, according to this feature, the background image displayed in the specific game state is different from the background image displayed during the period from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state until the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information is completed. This allows the player to clearly distinguish between the two states and to pay attention to changes in the game state.

<Characteristic uIC group>
The feature uIC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the 10th embodiment and its 12th modification.

[Feature uIC1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first special information is obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. and acquired information storage means for respectively storing second special information that is the special information;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), the determination regarding the second special information; is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a first determination mode are selected. a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a high probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 461 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a first state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a specific gaming state (high certainty, high support state) in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game rotation after transition to the specific gaming state) is set. control mode transition means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of executions reaches the number of time saving continuations is established;
The determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is in the first predetermined gaming state (high level) after the transition to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is met before the end of the state (low probability support state), the system will re-enter the specified gaming state with a certain probability (it will return to the specified gaming state with a 100% probability). a first re-migration means (transferring);
After the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) ) is established, the game will be transferred to the specific gaming state again with a probability lower than the specific probability (it will be transferred to the high-probability, high-support state again with the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability, low-support state and being assigned to a probability-variable jackpot). a second re-transfer means);
In addition,
When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific gaming state (high probability high support state H4) (when a fall is won in the fall lottery), an effect that suggests that an advantageous event has occurred (safety in modification 12) A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a mode entry effect).

According to this feature, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the control mode is transitioned from the second control mode to the first control mode. Then, when a specific condition is satisfied by the time when the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state after the transition to the first control mode, the game is transitioned again to the specific game state with a specific probability. On the other hand, when the specific condition is satisfied after the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the game is transitioned again to the specific game state with a probability lower than the specific probability. Therefore, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state transitioned from the specific game state, the player can expect that a specific condition will be satisfied by the time when the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state. That is, according to this feature, in a first predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player can expect that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition due to the judgment in the second judgment mode in which there is a high probability that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the player can expect that the specific condition will be established by the time the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state.

Further, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, Since the transition to the specific gaming state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition in the first predetermined gaming state, and the specific condition is satisfied. The system does not create a sense of urgency for the player, as if the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state will end in the first predetermined gaming state. can be set. In this way, according to the present feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

In addition, in a normal gaming machine, the fulfillment of a specific condition (winning a fall in the fall lottery) is undesirable for the player. However, in a gaming machine with this feature, unlike a normal gaming machine, the fulfillment of a specific condition in the above situation is desirable for the player.

According to this feature, when a specific condition is met in a specific gaming state, an effect that suggests that an advantageous event has occurred is executed, so it is clearly shown to the player that an advantageous event has occurred. It becomes possible to recognize the

<Feature uID group>
The feature uID group is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its twelfth modification.

[Feature uID1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determination being made on the second special information with priority over the determination on the first special information, and having a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) as determination modes (lottery modes) for making the determination, in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 461 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
In a gaming machine comprising:
a control mode transition means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when a predetermined condition (the number of times the game is executed after transition to the specific game state reaches the number of times the time-saving continues) is satisfied in a specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode;
a first re-transition means for re-transitioning to the specific gaming state with a specific probability (re-transitioning to the specific gaming state with a 100% probability) when a specific condition (winning a drop lottery) is established before the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in a first predetermined gaming state (high probability low support state) after the transition to the first control mode is made;
a second re-transition means for re-transitioning to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability when the specific condition (winning in the drop lottery) is established after the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state (transitioning to a high probability high support state with a probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability low support state and being assigned to a probability variable jackpot);
and
a means for executing a presentation suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred (an advantageous event occurrence selection presentation in variant example 12) when the specific condition is satisfied (when a fall is won in the fall-down lottery) before the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information is completed in the first predetermined gaming state (high probability low support state H6) after the specified condition is satisfied and the game state transitions to the first predetermined gaming state (high probability low support state H6), the means for executing a presentation suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred (an advantageous event occurrence selection presentation in variant example 12)

According to this feature, in a specific game state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control mode changes from the second control mode to the first control mode. Moved to control mode. Then, before the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode, the specific When the conditions are met, the game is shifted to a specific gaming state again with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability The probability of being transferred to a specific gaming state is lower than that of the game. Therefore, according to the present feature, in the first predetermined gaming state that has transitioned from the specific gaming state, the player is informed by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state. It is possible to expect that the specific condition will be satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined gaming state. That is, according to the present feature, in the first predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode that the special information has a high probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition. Although it is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, furthermore, the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state may be made in the first predetermined gaming state. It is possible to expect that a specific condition will be met by the time the program ends.

Furthermore, according to this feature, if a specific condition is established after the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, a transition to the specific game state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability. Therefore, in the first predetermined game state, the special information is not determined to satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not established, and the player can be made to feel a sense of tension that the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state will end in the first predetermined game state. In this way, according to this feature, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by imparting to the player feelings of expectation and tension.

In addition, in a normal gaming machine, the fulfillment of a specific condition (winning a fall in the fall lottery) is undesirable for the player. However, in a gaming machine with this feature, unlike a normal gaming machine, the fulfillment of a specific condition in the above situation is desirable for the player.

According to this feature, after the predetermined condition is satisfied and the transition to the first predetermined gaming state occurs, the specific condition is satisfied before the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. In this case, since an effect suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred is executed, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that an advantageous event has occurred.

<Characteristic uIE group>
The feature uIE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the 10th embodiment and its 13th modification.

[Feature uIE1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first special information is obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. and acquired information storage means for respectively storing second special information that is the special information;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), the determination regarding the second special information; is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a first determination mode are selected. a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a high probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 461 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a first state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a specific gaming state (high certainty, high support state) in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game rotation after transition to the specific gaming state) is set. control mode transition means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of executions reaches the number of time saving continuations is established;
The determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is in the first predetermined gaming state (high level) after the transition to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is met before the end of the state (low probability support state), the system will re-enter the specified gaming state with a certain probability (it will return to the specified gaming state with a 100% probability). a first re-migration means (transferring);
After the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) ) is established, the specific gaming state is re-transferred to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability (the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability low support state and being assigned to the probability-variable jackpot is to re-transfer to the high-probability high support state) a second re-transfer means);
Equipped with
The game round is composed of a variable display period in which a predetermined symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and a stop display period in which the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the determination,
The control mode transition means is means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode at the start of the variable display period in the game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied (time t5 in FIG. 489). A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, in a specific game state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control mode changes from the second control mode to the first control mode. Moved to control mode. Then, before the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode, the specific When the conditions are met, the game is shifted to a specific gaming state again with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability The probability of being transferred to a specific gaming state is lower than that of the game. Therefore, according to the present feature, in the first predetermined gaming state that has transitioned from the specific gaming state, the player is informed by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state. It is possible to expect that the specific condition will be satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined gaming state. That is, according to the present feature, in the first predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode that the special information has a high probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition. Although it is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, furthermore, the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state may be made in the first predetermined gaming state. It is possible to expect that a specific condition will be met by the time the program ends.

Furthermore, according to this feature, if a specific condition is established after the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, a transition to the specific game state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability. Therefore, in the first predetermined game state, the special information is not determined to satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not established, and the player can be made to feel a sense of tension that the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state will end in the first predetermined game state. In this way, according to this feature, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by imparting to the player feelings of expectation and tension.

Further, according to this feature, the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode at the start of the variable display period in the game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the control mode is transferred from the second control mode to the first control mode in the game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied It is possible to avoid that the auxiliary means transitions to the second state during the execution of the next game round and the game ball enters the second ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a breakdown in the game performance of the gaming machine due to the game ball entering the second ball entry means during the execution of the next game round after the game round in which the predetermined condition has been met. becomes.

<Feature uIF group>
The feature uIF group is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its fourteenth modification.

[Feature uIF1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first special information is obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. and acquired information storage means for respectively storing second special information that is the special information;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), the determination regarding the second special information; is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a first determination mode are selected. a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a high probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 461 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a first state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a specific gaming state (high certainty, high support state) in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game rotation after transition to the specific gaming state) is set. control mode transition means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of executions reaches the number of time saving continuations is established;
The determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is in the first predetermined gaming state (high level) after the transition to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is met before the end of the state (low probability support state), the system will re-enter the specified gaming state with a certain probability (it will return to the specified gaming state with a 100% probability). a first re-migration means (transferring);
After the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is determined. ) is established, the game will be transferred to the specific gaming state again with a probability lower than the specific probability (it will be transferred to the high-probability, high-support state again with the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability, low-support state and being assigned to a probability-variable jackpot). a second re-transfer means);
Equipped with
The game round is composed of a variable display period in which a predetermined symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and a stop display period in which the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the determination,
The control mode transition means is means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode at the end of the variable display period in the game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied (time t9 in FIG. 490). A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, in a specific game state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control mode changes from the second control mode to the first control mode. Moves to control mode. Then, before the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode, the specific When the conditions are met, the game is shifted to a specific gaming state again with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability The probability of being transferred to a specific gaming state is lower than that of the game. Therefore, according to the present feature, in the first predetermined gaming state that has transitioned from the specific gaming state, the player is informed by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state. It is possible to expect that the specific condition will be satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined gaming state. That is, according to the present feature, in the first predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode that the special information has a high probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition. Although it is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, furthermore, the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state may be made in the first predetermined gaming state. It is possible to expect that a specific condition will be met by the time the program ends.

Furthermore, according to this feature, if a specific condition is established after the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, a transition to the specific game state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability. Therefore, in the first predetermined game state, the special information is not determined to satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not established, and the player can be made to feel a sense of tension that the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state will end in the first predetermined game state. In this way, according to this feature, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by imparting to the player feelings of expectation and tension.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the control mode is transferred from the second control mode to the first control mode at the end of the variable display period in a game session in which a predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the control mode is transferred from the second control mode to the first control mode in a game session in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. By setting the stop display period to a predetermined length or more, the auxiliary means transitions to the second state during the execution of the game round following the game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the game ball changes to the second state. It is possible to avoid the ball from entering the ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a breakdown in the game performance of the gaming machine due to the game ball entering the second ball entry means during the execution of the next game round after the game round in which the predetermined condition has been met. becomes.

<Characteristic uIG group>
The group of features uIG is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its fifteenth modification.

[Feature uIG1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first special information is obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. and acquired information storage means for respectively storing second special information that is the special information;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), the determination regarding the second special information; is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a first determination mode are selected. a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a high probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 461 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a first state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a specific gaming state (high certainty, high support state) in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game rotation after transition to the specific gaming state) is set. control mode transition means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of executions reaches the number of time saving continuations is established;
The determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is in the first predetermined gaming state (high level) after the transition to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is met before the end of the state (low probability support state), the system will re-enter the specified gaming state with a certain probability (it will return to the specified gaming state with a 100% probability). a first re-migration means (transferring);
After the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) ) is established, the specific gaming state is re-transferred to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability (the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability low support state and being assigned to the probability-variable jackpot is to re-transfer to the high-probability high support state) a second re-transfer means);
Equipped with
The game round is composed of a variable display period in which a predetermined symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and a stop display period in which the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the determination,
The control mode transition means is means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the stop display period elapses in the game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied (time t12 in FIG. 491). A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the control mode is transitioned from the second control mode to the first control mode. Then, when a specific condition is satisfied by the time when the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state after the transition to the first control mode, the game is transitioned again to the specific game state with a specific probability. On the other hand, when the specific condition is satisfied after the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the game is transitioned again to the specific game state with a probability lower than the specific probability. Therefore, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state transitioned from the specific game state, the player can expect that a specific condition will be satisfied by the time when the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state. That is, according to this feature, in a first predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player can expect that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition due to the judgment in the second judgment mode in which there is a high probability that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the player can expect that the specific condition will be established by the time the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state.

Furthermore, according to this feature, if a specific condition is established after the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, a transition to the specific game state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability. Therefore, in the first predetermined game state, the special information is not determined to satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not established, and the player can be made to feel a sense of tension that the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state will end in the first predetermined game state. In this way, according to this feature, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by imparting to the player feelings of expectation and tension.

In addition, according to this feature, the control mode is switched from the second control mode to the first control mode when the stopped display period in the game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied has elapsed, so that the auxiliary means is switched to the second state during the execution of the game round following the game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, making it possible to cause the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a new gameplay in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means during the execution of the game round following the game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied.

<Characteristics of IH group>
The group of features uIH is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its fifteenth modification.

[Feature uIH1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determination being made on the second special information with priority over the determination on the first special information, and having a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) as determination modes (lottery modes) for making the determination, in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 461 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
In a gaming machine comprising:
a control mode transition means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when a predetermined condition (the number of times the game is executed after transition to the specific game state reaches the number of times the time-saving continues) is satisfied in a specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode;
a first re-transition means for re-transitioning to the specific gaming state with a specific probability (re-transitioning to the specific gaming state with a 100% probability) when a specific condition (winning a drop lottery) is established before the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in a first predetermined gaming state (high probability low support state) after the transition to the first control mode is made;
a second re-transition means for re-transitioning to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability when the specific condition (winning in the drop lottery) is established after the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state (transitioning to a high probability high support state with a probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability low support state and being assigned to a probability variable jackpot);
and
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for executing an effect (a through-passage promotion effect in variant 15) that encourages a player to pass a gaming ball through a specified ball entry area (through gate 35) under specified circumstances.

According to this feature, in a specific game state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control mode changes from the second control mode to the first control mode. Moved to control mode. Then, before the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode, the specific When the conditions are met, the game is shifted to a specific gaming state again with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability The probability of being transferred to a specific gaming state is lower than that of the game. Therefore, according to the present feature, in the first predetermined gaming state that has transitioned from the specific gaming state, the player is informed by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state. It is possible to expect that the specific condition will be satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined gaming state. That is, according to the present feature, in the first predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode that the special information has a high probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition. Although it is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, furthermore, the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state may be made in the first predetermined gaming state. It is possible to expect that a specific condition will be met by the time the program ends.

Furthermore, according to this feature, if a specific condition is established after the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, a transition to the specific game state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability. Therefore, in the first predetermined game state, the special information is not determined to satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not established, and the player can be made to feel a sense of tension that the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state will end in the first predetermined game state. In this way, according to this feature, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by imparting to the player feelings of expectation and tension.

In addition, this feature executes an effect that encourages the player to pass the game ball through a specified ball entry area in a specified situation, so that the player can recognize how to play this game machine in accordance with its new gameplay characteristics that differ from those of ordinary game machines.

<Features Group II>
The group of features uII is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its fifteenth modification.

[Feature uII1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
a second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first special information is obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. acquisition information storage means for storing second special information that is the special information;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), the determination regarding the second special information; is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a first determination mode are selected. a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a high probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 461 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a first state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a specific gaming state (high certainty, high support state) in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game rotation after transition to the specific gaming state) is set. control mode transition means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of executions reaches the number of time saving continuations is established;
The determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is in the first predetermined gaming state (high level) after the transition to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is met before the end of the state (low probability support state), the system will re-enter the specified gaming state with a certain probability (it will return to the specified gaming state with a 100% probability). a first re-migration means (transferring);
After the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) ) is established, the specific gaming state is re-transferred to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability (the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability low support state and being assigned to the probability-variable jackpot is to re-transfer to the high-probability high support state) a second re-transfer means);
In addition,
In a predetermined situation, when a game ball passes through a predetermined ball entry area (through gate 35), a production that suggests that an advantageous state is started for the player (advantageous state start production in modification 15) is provided. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for executing.

According to this feature, in a specific game state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control mode changes from the second control mode to the first control mode. Moved to control mode. Then, before the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode, the specific When the conditions are met, the game is shifted to a specific gaming state again with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability The probability of being transferred to a specific gaming state is lower than that of the game. Therefore, according to the present feature, in the first predetermined gaming state that has transitioned from the specific gaming state, the player is informed by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state. It is possible to expect that the specific condition will be satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined gaming state. That is, according to the present feature, in the first predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode that the special information has a high probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition. Although it is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, furthermore, the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state may be made in the first predetermined gaming state. It is possible to expect that a specific condition will be met by the time the program ends.

Furthermore, according to this feature, if a specific condition is established after the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, a transition to the specific game state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability. Therefore, in the first predetermined game state, the special information is not determined to satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not established, and the player can be made to feel a sense of tension that the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state will end in the first predetermined game state. In this way, according to this feature, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by imparting to the player feelings of expectation and tension.

In addition, according to this feature, when a gaming ball passes through a specified ball entry area in a specified situation, a presentation is executed that suggests that a state advantageous to the player will begin, making it possible for the player to recognize that the passing of the gaming ball through the specified ball entry area will initiate a state advantageous to the player that differs from that in normal gaming machines.

<Characteristics uIJ group>
The group of features uIJ are extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its fifteenth modification.

[Feature uIJ1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first special information is obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. and acquired information storage means for respectively storing second special information that is the special information;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), the determination regarding the second special information; is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a first determination mode are selected. a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a high probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 461 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a first state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a specific gaming state (high certainty, high support state) in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game rotation after transition to the specific gaming state) is set. control mode transition means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of executions reaches the number of time saving continuations is established;
The determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is in the first predetermined gaming state (high level) after the transition to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is met before the end of the state (low probability support state), the system will re-enter the specified gaming state with a certain probability (it will return to the specified gaming state with a 100% probability). a first re-migration means (transferring);
After the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) ) is established, the specific gaming state is re-transferred to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability (the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability low support state and being assigned to the probability-variable jackpot is to re-transfer to the high-probability high support state) a second re-transfer means);
In addition,
In the first predetermined gaming state (high-accuracy/low-support state H6), when the state of the auxiliary means transitions to the second state, a game is performed in which a game ball is entered into the second ball entering means. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a performance (special 2 ball entry promotion performance in Modification Example 15) to prompt a player.

According to this feature, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the control mode is transitioned from the second control mode to the first control mode. Then, when a specific condition is satisfied by the time when the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state after the transition to the first control mode, the game is transitioned again to the specific game state with a specific probability. On the other hand, when the specific condition is satisfied after the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the game is transitioned again to the specific game state with a probability lower than the specific probability. Therefore, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state transitioned from the specific game state, the player can expect that a specific condition will be satisfied by the time when the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state. That is, according to this feature, in a first predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player can expect that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition due to the judgment in the second judgment mode in which there is a high probability that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the player can expect that the specific condition will be established by the time the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state.

Furthermore, according to this feature, if a specific condition is established after the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, a transition to the specific game state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability. Therefore, in the first predetermined game state, the special information is not determined to satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not established, and the player can be made to feel a sense of tension that the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state will end in the first predetermined game state. In this way, according to this feature, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by imparting to the player feelings of expectation and tension.

In addition, according to this feature, when the state of the assist means transitions to the second state in the first predetermined gaming state, an effect is executed that encourages the player to make the gaming ball enter the second ball entry means, so that the player can recognize a way of playing that is in line with the new gameplay characteristics of this gaming machine, which differ from normal gaming machines.

<Characteristic uIK group>
The feature uIK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its fifteenth modification.

[Feature uIK1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determination being made on the second special information with priority over the determination on the first special information, and having a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) as determination modes (lottery modes) for making the determination, in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 461 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
In a gaming machine comprising:
a control mode transition means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when a predetermined condition (the number of times the game is executed after transition to the specific game state reaches the number of times the time-saving continues) is satisfied in a specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode;
a first re-transition means for re-transitioning to the specific gaming state with a specific probability (re-transitioning to the specific gaming state with a 100% probability) when a specific condition (winning a drop lottery) is established before the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in a first predetermined gaming state (high probability low support state) after the transition to the first control mode is made;
a second re-transition means for re-transitioning to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability when the specific condition (winning in the drop lottery) is established after the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state (transitioning to a high probability high support state with a probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability low support state and being assigned to a probability variable jackpot);
and
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the number of stored pieces of the second special information reaches a predetermined number (4) in the first predetermined gaming state (high probability low support state H6), a means is provided for displaying information corresponding to the number of stored pieces of the second special information reaching the predetermined number (a confirmed advantageous performance in variant example 15).

According to this feature, in a specific game state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control mode changes from the second control mode to the first control mode. Moved to control mode. Then, before the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode, the specific When the conditions are met, the game is shifted to a specific gaming state again with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability The probability of being transferred to a specific gaming state is lower than that of the game. Therefore, according to the present feature, in the first predetermined gaming state that has transitioned from the specific gaming state, the player is informed by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state. It is possible to expect that the specific condition will be satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined gaming state. That is, according to the present feature, in the first predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode that the special information has a high probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition. Although it is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, furthermore, the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state may be made in the first predetermined gaming state. It is possible to expect that a specific condition will be met by the time the program ends.

Furthermore, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, Since the transition to the specific gaming state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition in the first predetermined gaming state, and the specific condition is satisfied. The system does not create a sense of urgency for the player, as if the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state will end in the first predetermined gaming state. can be set. In this way, according to the present feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player emotions such as a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

In addition, according to this feature, when the number of stored pieces of second special information reaches a predetermined number in the first predetermined gaming state, information corresponding to the number of stored pieces of second special information reaching a predetermined number is displayed, so that, unlike normal gaming machines, the player can recognize that there is something special about the number of stored pieces of second special information reaching a predetermined number in the first predetermined gaming state.

<Characteristic uIL group>
The features uIL are extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its sixteenth modification.

[Feature uIL1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determination being made on the second special information with priority over the determination on the first special information, and having a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) as determination modes (lottery modes) for making the determination, in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than in the first determination mode;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 461 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a period from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
In a gaming machine comprising:
a control mode transition means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when a predetermined condition (the number of times the game is executed after transition to the specific game state reaches the number of times the time-saving continues) is satisfied in a specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode;
a first re-transition means for re-transitioning to the specific gaming state with a specific probability (re-transitioning to the specific gaming state with a 100% probability) when a specific condition (winning a drop lottery) is established before the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in a first predetermined gaming state (high probability low support state) after the transition to the first control mode is made;
a second re-transition means for re-transitioning to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability when the specific condition (winning in the drop lottery) is established after the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state (transitioning to a high probability high support state with a probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability low support state and being assigned to a probability variable jackpot);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that it does not have a means for retaining and storing a predetermined lottery (a regular lottery) that triggers the transition of the auxiliary means from the first state to the second state.

According to this feature, in a specific game state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control mode changes from the second control mode to the first control mode. Moved to control mode. Then, before the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode, the specific When the conditions are met, the game is shifted to a specific gaming state again with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability The probability of being transferred to a specific gaming state is lower than that of the game. Therefore, according to the present feature, in the first predetermined gaming state that has transitioned from the specific gaming state, the player is informed by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state. It is possible to expect that the specific condition will be satisfied before the determination ends in the first predetermined gaming state. That is, according to the present feature, in the first predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode that the special information has a high probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition. Although it is possible to expect that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, furthermore, the determination by the determination means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state may be made in the first predetermined gaming state. It is possible to expect that a specific condition will be met by the time the program ends.

Furthermore, according to this feature, if a specific condition is established after the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, a transition to the specific game state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability. Therefore, in the first predetermined game state, the special information is not determined to satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not established, and the player can be made to feel a sense of tension that the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state will end in the first predetermined game state. In this way, according to this feature, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by imparting to the player feelings of expectation and tension.

Further, according to this feature, since there is no means for holding and storing a predetermined lottery (general drawing lottery) that is a trigger for transitioning the auxiliary means from the first state to the second state, the reserved predetermined lottery is not provided. It is possible to prevent the lottery from being automatically executed at a timing not intended by the player. Therefore, by adjusting the timing at which a game ball enters the ball entering means that triggers the transition of the state of the auxiliary means, a new game feature is created in which the timing at which the auxiliary means transitions to the second state is adjusted. can be provided to

<Characteristic uIM group>
The feature uIM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the 10th embodiment and its 18th modification.

[Feature uIM1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first special information is obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. and acquired information storage means for respectively storing second special information that is the special information;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), the determination regarding the second special information; is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a first determination mode are selected. a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a high probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process in FIG. 461 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a first state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a specific gaming state (high certainty, high support state) in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, a predetermined condition (game rotation after transition to the specific gaming state) is set. control mode transition means for transitioning the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of executions reaches the number of time saving continuations is established;
The determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is in the first predetermined gaming state (high level) after the transition to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is met before the end of the state (low probability support state), the system will re-enter the specified gaming state with a certain probability (it will return to the specified gaming state with a 100% probability). a first re-migration means (transferring);
After the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the falling lottery) is determined. ) is established, the game will be transferred to the specific gaming state again with a probability lower than the specific probability (it will be transferred to the high-probability, high-support state again with the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability, low-support state and being assigned to a probability-variable jackpot). a second re-transfer means);
In addition,
When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific gaming state (high probability high support state H4) (when a fall is won in the falling lottery), a second predetermined gaming state in which the judgment mode is the first judgment mode ( means for transitioning to a low certainty high support state H5);
A predetermined ball entrance opening into which a game ball can enter in the second predetermined gaming state (high-precision transition winning opening 34e in Modification Example 18);
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry opening, means for shifting the determination mode to the second determination mode using the entry as a trigger;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, in a specific game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the control mode is transitioned from the second control mode to the first control mode. Then, when a specific condition is satisfied by the time when the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state after the transition to the first control mode, the game is transitioned again to the specific game state with a specific probability. On the other hand, when the specific condition is satisfied after the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, the game is transitioned again to the specific game state with a probability lower than the specific probability. Therefore, according to this feature, in the first predetermined game state transitioned from the specific game state, the player can expect that a specific condition will be satisfied by the time when the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state. That is, according to this feature, in a first predetermined game state in which the judgment mode is the second judgment mode, the player can expect that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition due to the judgment in the second judgment mode in which there is a high probability that the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition, but furthermore, the player can expect that the specific condition will be established by the time the judgment by the judgment means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state.

Furthermore, according to this feature, if a specific condition is established after the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed in the first predetermined game state, a transition to the specific game state is made again with a probability lower than the specific probability. Therefore, in the first predetermined game state, the special information is not determined to satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not established, and the player can be made to feel a sense of tension that the determination by the determination means on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state will end in the first predetermined game state. In this way, according to this feature, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by imparting to the player feelings of expectation and tension.

Further, according to this feature, when a specific condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state (when a fall is won in a falling lottery), a second predetermined gaming state (low probability high support The state moves to state H5), but if the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entrance in the second predetermined gaming state, the determination mode shifts to the second determination mode again. Here, in the case where a configuration is adopted in which the second control mode continues until the next jackpot win when the time saving award is won in the second predetermined gaming state, when the time saving award is won in the second predetermined gaming state and the predetermined If the game ball can enter the ball entrance, the second control mode will continue until the next jackpot win, and the game state will be in which the determination mode is the second determination mode. This gaming state is very advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to provide the player with a new game in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entrance in the second predetermined game state and the game state shifts to a more advantageous game state.

<Characteristic vA group>
The feature vA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, modification 10 of the eleventh embodiment corresponds to this.

[Feature vA1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first special information is obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. and acquired information storage means for respectively storing second special information that is the special information;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), the determination regarding the second special information; determination means for performing the determination with priority over the determination regarding the first special information;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a first state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a predetermined gaming state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a, 35b) is satisfied, the control means controls the assistance with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the electric prize short opening). comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state,
In the predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine is capable of continuously displaying a specific effect image (a chance image included in the omen preview effect) for a predetermined number of the game rounds regarding the first special information;
The specific effect image can be displayed in the gaming round for the second special information a specific number of times that is less than or equal to the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined gaming state. a first display means (representation of game round V21 in FIG. 516);
a second display means capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game round regarding the first special information, which is executed continuously after the end of the game round regarding the second special information for the specific number of times; (Production of game round U23 in FIG. 516) and
In the game round regarding the first special information, which is executed consecutively after the end of the game round regarding the second special information a specific number of times, a specific condition (the determination result of the second determination is negative) effect image switching means capable of switching the specific effect image to a predetermined effect image (special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect) when the above is established;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature vA1, in a predetermined game state, a specific effect image is displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of game times for the first special information. When a game ball enters the second ball entry means, a specific effect image is displayed in a specific number of game times for the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. Then, a specific effect image is displayed in a game time for the first special information that is executed consecutively after the end of the specific number of game times for the second special information. For this reason, when the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state includes special information that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high expectation in which special information that satisfies a first predetermined condition exists, a specific effect image is displayed to give a notice to the player that there is a possibility that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Moreover, when a specific number of game times for the second special information, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, is executed, the specific effect image is displayed in the game times, so that the game times for the second special information can be played without interrupting the flow of the preview effect and without any sense of incongruity. In addition, by repeatedly displaying the specific effect image for each game time, the player can be made to expect that the possibility of the existence of special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition has increased. On the other hand, if the specific effect image is always displayed even when the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect image is unnecessarily repeated, and there is a risk that the reliability of the preview effect will decrease. In contrast, according to the feature vA1, when a specific condition is established in a game time for the first special information that is executed consecutively after the end of a specific number of game times for the second special information, the specific effect image is switched to the specific effect image, so that when the specific condition is established, the appearance of an extra specific effect image can be suppressed. Therefore, feature vA1 can improve the reliability of the preview performance and increase the interest of the game.

[Feature vA2]
The gaming machine described in feature vA1,
The effect image switching means includes:
Means capable of switching the image to be displayed from the specific effect image displayed by the first display means (Modification 10, which is executed continuously after the end of the game round V21 for Special 2 Pending 1) In the game round U23 regarding suspension, the chance effect is switched to the same color effect with the same symbol for the continuation of the special 1 continuous effect)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature vA2, since it is possible to switch the image to be displayed from the specific effect image displayed in the game round regarding the first special information that is executed continuously after the end of the game round regarding the second special information, If the image to be displayed is a predetermined effect image, the specific effect is displayed consecutively during a predetermined number of game times regarding the first special information that is executed before the game time regarding the second special information is started. It is possible to maintain the expectation that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists based on the image. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the level of expectation for the existence of the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition from being increased unnecessarily, and therefore, according to feature vA2, the level of confidence in the preview performance is further increased. can be improved.

[Feature vA3]
A gaming machine according to feature vA1 or feature VA2,
The predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to feature vA3, in a specified game state in which the control mode is the first control mode, a preview presentation for the first special information can be performed.

[Feature vA4]
The gaming machine described in any one of features vA1 to feature vA3,
The effect image switching means includes:
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying the predetermined performance image with an expectation level that is substantially the same as the expectation level when the specific performance image is displayed.

According to feature vA4, the expectation level when a specific performance image is displayed and the expectation level when the predetermined performance image is displayed are substantially the same, so it is possible to reliably prevent the expectation level of the presence of the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition from being unnecessarily increased. Therefore, according to feature vA4, it is possible to further improve the reliability of the preview performance.

[Feature vA5]
The gaming machine described in any one of features vA1 to feature vA4,
The effect image switching means includes:
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying the predetermined performance image with a higher expectation level than the expectation level when the specific performance image is displayed.

According to feature vA5, the degree of expectation when the predetermined effect image is displayed does not exceed the degree of expectation that there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition among the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means. If a predetermined effect image is displayed in a state where no relationship is maintained, the expectation level when the predetermined effect image is displayed is higher than the expectation level when the specific effect image is displayed. By increasing the value, it becomes possible to give a higher level of expectation to the player. Therefore, according to feature vA5, the reliability of the preview performance can be further improved.

[Feature vA6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features vA1 to vA5,
The configuration for displaying the specific effect image continuously for the predetermined number of game times regarding the first special information includes:
a means for displaying the specific effect image at a position shifted forward or backward with respect to a display surface of a pattern for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means, which is displayed during the game round (when the display of an effect in which a specific character appears in variant 5 is applied to the layer structure of variant 1, the effect in which the specific character appears is positioned in front of the pattern layer).

According to feature vA6, in a predetermined gaming state, when displaying a specific effect image consecutively for a predetermined number of gaming times regarding the first special information, a display surface of a symbol for announcing the result of determination by the determining means. Since the specific effect image is displayed at a position shifted forward and backward, drawing can be controlled independently in each of the layer where the specific effect image is displayed and the layer where the symbols are displayed. Therefore, according to feature vA6, control can be simplified.

[Feature vA7]
The gaming machine described in any one of features vA1 to feature vA6,
The first display means is
Means capable of displaying the specific effect image at a position shifted forward and backward relative to the display surface of the symbol for announcing the result of the judgment by the judgment means displayed in the game round (in modification 5) When the display of the effect in which the specific character appears is applied to the layer structure of Modification 1, the effect in which the specific character appears is located in front of the pattern layer.

According to feature vA7, when displaying a specific effect image in a specific number of play times for the second special information that is less than or equal to the upper limit number of second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a specific game state, the specific effect image is displayed at a position shifted forward or backward from the display surface of the pattern for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means, so that drawing can be controlled independently for the layer where the specific effect image is displayed and the layer where the pattern is displayed. Therefore, feature vA7 can simplify control.

[Feature vA8]
The gaming machine described in any one of features vA1 to feature vA7,
The second display means:
Means capable of displaying the specific effect image at a position shifted forward and backward relative to the display surface of the symbol for announcing the result of the judgment by the judgment means displayed in the game round (in modification 5) When the display of the effect in which the specific character appears is applied to the layer structure of Modification 1, the effect in which the specific character appears is located in front of the pattern layer.

According to feature vA8, when displaying a specific effect image in a game session regarding the first special information that is executed consecutively after a specific number of game sessions regarding the second special information, Since the specific effect image is displayed at a position that is shifted forward and backward relative to the display surface of the symbol used to announce the result of the judgment, the specific effect image is displayed at the same level as the layer where the specific effect image is displayed and the level where the symbol is displayed. Drawing can be controlled independently. Therefore, according to feature vA8, control can be simplified.

[Feature vA9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features vA1 to vA8,
The effect image switching means is
a means for displaying the specified effect image at a position shifted forward or backward with respect to a display surface of a pattern for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means, which is displayed during the game round (when the display of an effect in which a specific background zone appears in variant example 5 is applied to the layer structure of variant example 1, the effect in which the specific background zone appears is positioned in front of the pattern layer).

According to feature vA9, when displaying a predetermined effect image when a specific condition is satisfied in a game round regarding the first special information stored by the acquired information storage means, a method for announcing the result of the determination by the determination means is provided. Since the predetermined effect image is displayed at a position that is shifted forward and backward relative to the display surface of the symbol, drawing is controlled independently on each layer where the predetermined effect image is displayed and the layer where the symbol is displayed. be able to. Therefore, according to feature vA9, control can be simplified.

<Characteristic vB group>
The feature vB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to this.

[Feature vB1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first special information is obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. and acquired information storage means for respectively storing second special information that is the special information;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), the determination regarding the second special information; determination means for performing the determination with priority over the determination regarding the first special information;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a first state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a predetermined gaming state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a, 35b) is satisfied, the control means controls the assistance with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the electric prize short opening). comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state,
In the predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine is capable of continuously displaying a specific effect image (a chance image included in the omen preview effect) for a predetermined number of the game rounds regarding the first special information;
The specific effect image can be displayed in the gaming round for the second special information a specific number of times that is less than or equal to the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined gaming state. a first display means (representation of game round V21 in FIG. 516);
a second display means capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game round regarding the first special information, which is executed continuously after the end of the game round regarding the second special information for the specific number of times; (Production of game round U23 in FIG. 516) and
In the game round regarding the first special information, which is executed consecutively after the end of the game round regarding the second special information a specific number of times, a specific condition (the determination result of the second determination is negative) effect image switching means capable of switching the specific effect image to a predetermined effect image (special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect) when the above is established;
Equipped with
The effect image switching means includes:
Means capable of switching the image to be displayed from the specific effect image displayed by the first display means (Modification 10, which is executed continuously after the end of the game round V21 for Special 2 Pending 1) In the game round U23 regarding suspension, the chance effect is switched to the same color effect for the continuation of special 1 continuous effect.)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature vB1, in a predetermined game state, a specific effect image is displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of game times for the first special information. When a game ball enters the second ball entry means, the specific effect image is displayed in a specific number of game times for the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. Then, the specific effect image is displayed in a game time for the first special information that is executed consecutively after the end of the specific number of game times for the second special information. For this reason, when the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state includes special information that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high expectation in which special information that satisfies a first predetermined condition exists, a specific effect image is displayed to give a notice to the player that there is a possibility that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Moreover, when a specific number of game times for the second special information, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, is executed, the specific effect image is displayed in the game times, so that the game times for the second special information can be played without interrupting the flow of the preview effect and without any sense of incongruity. In addition, by repeatedly displaying the specific effect image for each game time, the player can be made to expect that the possibility of the existence of special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition has increased. On the other hand, if the specific effect image is always displayed even when the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect image is unnecessarily repeated, and there is a risk that the reliability of the preview effect will decrease. In contrast, according to the feature vB1, when a specific condition is established in a game time for the first special information that is executed consecutively after the end of a specific number of game times for the second special information, the specific effect image is switched to the specific effect image, so that when the specific condition is established, the appearance of an extra specific effect image can be suppressed. Therefore, feature vB1 can improve the reliability of the preview performance and increase the interest of the game.

Further, according to feature vB1, it is possible to switch the image to be displayed from the specific effect image displayed in the game round regarding the first special information that is executed continuously after the end of the game round regarding the second special information. Therefore, if the image to be displayed is a predetermined effect image, it will be displayed continuously for the predetermined number of game times regarding the first special information that was executed before the game time regarding the second special information was started. It is possible to maintain the level of expectation that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists based on the specific effect image. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation for the existence of the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition from being increased unnecessarily, and therefore, according to feature vB1, the reliability of the preview performance is further increased. can be improved.

<Features vC group>
The group of features vC is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to the group of features vC.

[Feature vC1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determining means giving priority to the determination on the second special information over the determination on the first special information;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a time from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
In a gaming machine comprising:
The control means includes a means for switching the state of the auxiliary means from the first state to the second state with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the short electric role opening) when a predetermined condition (a game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established in a predetermined game state,
The gaming machine is capable of displaying a specific effect image (a chance eye included in a premonition notice effect) in succession for a predetermined number of times of the game regarding the first special information in the predetermined game state,
A first display means (showing the game time V21 in FIG. 516) capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game times for the second special information a specific number of times that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state;
A second display means (a performance of a game round U23 in FIG. 516 ) capable of displaying the specific performance image in the game round for the first special information, which is executed continuously after the game round for the second special information of the specific number of times is completed;
A presentation image switching means for switching the specific presentation image to a predetermined presentation image (a presentation of the same color for the first consecutive presentation) when a specific condition (the result of the second judgment is negative) is satisfied in the first special information game, which is executed consecutively after the end of the second special information game of the specific number of times;
Equipped with
The predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to feature vC1, in a predetermined game state, a specific effect image is displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of game times for the first special information. When a game ball enters the second ball entry means, a specific effect image is displayed in a specific number of game times for the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. Then, a specific effect image is displayed in a game time for the first special information that is executed consecutively after the end of the specific number of game times for the second special information. For this reason, when the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state includes special information that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high expectation in which special information that satisfies a first predetermined condition exists, a specific effect image is displayed to give a notice to the player that there is a possibility that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Moreover, when a specific number of game times for the second special information, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, is executed, the specific effect image is displayed in the game times, so that the game times for the second special information can be played without interrupting the flow of the preview effect and without any sense of incongruity. In addition, by repeatedly displaying the specific effect image for each game time, the player can be made to expect that the possibility of the existence of special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition has increased. On the other hand, if the specific effect image is always displayed even when the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect image is unnecessarily repeated, and there is a risk that the reliability of the preview effect will decrease. In contrast, according to the feature vC1, when a specific condition is established in a game time for the first special information that is executed consecutively after the end of a specific number of game times for the second special information, the specific effect image is switched to the specific effect image, so that when the specific condition is established, the appearance of an extra specific effect image can be suppressed. Therefore, feature vC1 can improve the reliability of the preview performance and increase the interest in the game.

Further, according to feature vC1, in a predetermined gaming state where the control mode is the first control mode, a preview effect regarding the first special information can be performed.

<Feature vD group>
The group of features vD is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to the group of features vD.

[Feature vD1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first special information is obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. and acquired information storage means for respectively storing second special information that is the special information;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), the determination regarding the second special information; determination means for performing the determination with priority over the determination regarding the first special information;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a first state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a predetermined gaming state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a, 35b) is satisfied, the control means controls the assistance with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the electric prize short opening). comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state,
In the predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine is capable of continuously displaying a specific effect image (a chance image included in the omen preview effect) for a predetermined number of the game rounds regarding the first special information;
The specific effect image can be displayed in the gaming round for the second special information a specific number of times that is less than or equal to the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined gaming state. a first display means (representation of game round V21 in FIG. 516);
a second display means capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game round regarding the first special information, which is executed continuously after the end of the game round regarding the second special information for the specific number of times; (Production of game round U23 in FIG. 516) and
In the game round regarding the first special information, which is executed consecutively after the end of the game round regarding the second special information a specific number of times, a specific condition (the determination result of the second determination is negative) performance image switching means capable of switching the specific performance image to a predetermined performance image (special 1 same-color performance for continuation of continuous performance) when the following is established;
Equipped with
The effect image switching means includes:
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying the predetermined performance image with an expectation level that is substantially the same as the expectation level when the specific performance image is displayed.

According to feature vD1, in a predetermined game state, a specific effect image is displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of game times for the first special information. When a game ball enters the second ball entry means, a specific effect image is displayed in a specific number of game times for the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. Then, a specific effect image is displayed in a game time for the first special information that is executed consecutively after the end of the specific number of game times for the second special information. For this reason, when the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state includes special information that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high expectation in which special information that satisfies a first predetermined condition exists, a specific effect image is displayed to give a notice to the player that there is a possibility that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Moreover, when a specific number of game times for the second special information, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, is executed, the specific effect image is displayed in the game times, so that the game times for the second special information can be played without interrupting the flow of the preview effect and without any sense of incongruity. In addition, by repeatedly displaying the specific effect image for each game time, the player can be made to expect that the possibility of the existence of special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition has increased. On the other hand, if the specific effect image is always displayed even when the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect image is unnecessarily repeated, and there is a risk that the reliability of the preview effect will decrease. In contrast, according to the feature vD1, when a specific condition is established in a game time for the first special information that is executed consecutively after the end of a specific number of game times for the second special information, the specific effect image is switched to the specific effect image, so that when the specific condition is established, the appearance of an extra specific effect image can be suppressed. Therefore, feature vD1 can improve the reliability of the preview performance and increase the interest of the game.

Further, according to feature vD1, the degree of expectation when the specific effect image is displayed and the degree of expectation when the predetermined effect image is displayed are approximately the same, so that the first It is possible to reliably prevent the expectation level of the existence of special information from being unnecessarily increased. Therefore, according to feature vD1, the reliability of the preview performance can be further improved.

<Features vE group>
The group of features vE is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to the group of features vE.

[Feature vE1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first special information is obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. acquired information storage means for storing second special information that is the special information;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), the determination regarding the second special information; determination means for performing the determination with priority over the determination regarding the first special information;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a first state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a predetermined gaming state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a, 35b) is satisfied, the control means controls the assistance with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the electric prize short opening). comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state,
In the predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine is capable of continuously displaying a specific effect image (a chance image included in the omen preview effect) for a predetermined number of the game rounds regarding the first special information;
The specific effect image can be displayed in the gaming round for the second special information a specific number of times that is less than or equal to the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined gaming state. a first display means (representation of game round V21 in FIG. 516);
a second display means capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game round regarding the first special information, which is executed continuously after the end of the game round regarding the second special information for the specific number of times; (Production of game round U23 in FIG. 516) and
In the game round regarding the first special information, which is executed consecutively after the end of the game round regarding the second special information a specific number of times, a specific condition (the determination result of the second determination is negative) effect image switching means capable of switching the specific effect image to a predetermined effect image (special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect) when the above is established;
Equipped with
The effect image switching means includes:
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying the predetermined performance image with a higher expectation level than the expectation level when the specific performance image is displayed.

According to feature vE1, in a predetermined game state, a specific effect image is displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of game times for the first special information. When a game ball enters the second ball entry means, a specific effect image is displayed in a specific number of game times for the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. Then, a specific effect image is displayed in a game time for the first special information that is executed consecutively after the end of the specific number of game times for the second special information. For this reason, when the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state includes special information that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high expectation in which special information that satisfies a first predetermined condition exists, a specific effect image is displayed to give a notice to the player that there is a possibility that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Moreover, when a specific number of game times for the second special information, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, is executed, the specific effect image is displayed in the game times, so that the game times for the second special information can be played without interrupting the flow of the preview effect and without any sense of incongruity. In addition, by repeatedly displaying the specific effect image for each game time, the player can be made to expect that the possibility of the existence of special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition has increased. On the other hand, if the specific effect image is always displayed even when the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect image is unnecessarily repeated, and there is a risk that the reliability of the preview effect will decrease. In contrast, according to the feature vE1, when a specific condition is established in a game time for the first special information that is executed consecutively after the end of a specific number of game times for the second special information, the specific effect image is switched to the specific effect image, so that when the specific condition is established, the appearance of an extra specific effect image can be suppressed. Therefore, feature vE1 can improve the reliability of the preview performance and increase the interest of the game.

Further, according to feature vE1, the degree of expectation when the predetermined effect image is displayed is the degree of expectation that there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition among the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means. If a predetermined effect image is displayed while maintaining a relationship that does not exceed By increasing the level of expectation, it becomes possible to give a higher level of expectation to the player. Therefore, according to feature vE1, it is possible to further improve the reliability of the preview performance.

<Characteristic vF group>
The feature vF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to this.

[Feature vF1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determining means giving priority to the determination on the second special information over the determination on the first special information;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a time from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
In a gaming machine comprising:
The control means includes a means for switching the state of the auxiliary means from the first state to the second state with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the short electric role opening) when a predetermined condition (a game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established in a predetermined game state,
The gaming machine is capable of displaying a specific effect image (a chance eye included in a premonition notice effect) in succession for a predetermined number of times of the game regarding the first special information in the predetermined game state,
A first display means (showing the game time V21 in FIG. 516) capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game times for the second special information a specific number of times that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state;
A second display means (a performance of a game round U23 in FIG. 516 ) capable of displaying the specific performance image in the game round for the first special information, which is executed continuously after the game round for the second special information of the specific number of times is completed;
A presentation image switching means for switching the specific presentation image to a predetermined presentation image (a presentation of the same color for the first consecutive presentation) when a specific condition (the result of the second judgment is negative) is satisfied in the first special information game, which is executed consecutively after the end of the second special information game of the specific number of times;
Equipped with
The configuration for displaying the specific effect image continuously for the predetermined number of game times regarding the first special information includes:
a means for displaying the specific effect image at a position shifted forward or backward with respect to a display surface of a pattern for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means, which is displayed during the game round (when the display of an effect in which a specific character appears in variant 5 is applied to the layer structure of variant 1, the effect in which the specific character appears is positioned in front of the pattern layer).

According to feature vF1, in a predetermined game state, a specific effect image is displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of game times for the first special information. When a game ball enters the second ball entry means, a specific effect image is displayed in a specific number of game times for the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. Then, a specific effect image is displayed in a game time for the first special information that is executed consecutively after the end of the specific number of game times for the second special information. For this reason, when the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state includes special information that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high expectation in which special information that satisfies a first predetermined condition exists, a specific effect image is displayed to give a notice to the player that there is a possibility that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Moreover, when a specific number of game times for the second special information, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, is executed, the specific effect image is displayed in the game times, so that the game times for the second special information can be played without interrupting the flow of the preview effect and without any sense of incongruity. In addition, by repeatedly displaying the specific effect image for each game time, the player can be made to expect that the possibility of the existence of special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition has increased. On the other hand, if the specific effect image is always displayed even when the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect image is unnecessarily repeated, and there is a risk that the reliability of the preview effect will decrease. In contrast, according to the feature vF1, when a specific condition is established in a game time for the first special information that is executed consecutively after the end of a specific number of game times for the second special information, the specific effect image is switched to the specific effect image, so that when the specific condition is established, the appearance of an extra specific effect image can be suppressed. Therefore, feature vF1 can improve the reliability of the preview performance and increase the interest of the game.

Further, according to feature vF1, in a predetermined gaming state, when displaying a specific effect image consecutively for a predetermined number of gaming times regarding the first special information, a pattern for announcing the result of the determination by the determining means is displayed. Since the specific effect image is displayed at a position shifted forward and backward relative to the display surface, it is possible to control drawing independently on each of the layer where the specific effect image is displayed and the layer where the design is displayed. can. Therefore, according to feature vF1, control can be simplified.

<Characteristic vG group>
The feature vG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to this.

[Feature vG1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determining means giving priority to the determination on the second special information over the determination on the first special information;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a time from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
In a gaming machine comprising:
The control means includes a means for switching the state of the auxiliary means from the first state to the second state with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the short electric role opening) when a predetermined condition (a game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established in a predetermined game state,
The gaming machine is capable of displaying a specific effect image (a chance eye included in a premonition notice effect) in succession for a predetermined number of times of the game regarding the first special information in the predetermined game state,
A first display means (showing the game time V21 in FIG. 516) capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game times for the second special information a specific number of times that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state;
A second display means (a performance of a game round U23 in FIG. 516 ) capable of displaying the specific performance image in the game round for the first special information, which is executed continuously after the game round for the second special information of the specific number of times is completed;
A presentation image switching means for switching the specific presentation image to a predetermined presentation image (a presentation of the same color for the first consecutive presentation) when a specific condition (the result of the second judgment is negative) is satisfied in the first special information game, which is executed consecutively after the end of the second special information game of the specific number of times;
Equipped with
The first display means is
a means for displaying the specific effect image at a position shifted forward or backward with respect to a display surface of a pattern for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means, which is displayed during the game round (when the display of the effect in which a specific character appears in variant 5 is applied to the layer structure of variant 1, the effect in which a specific character appears is positioned in front of the pattern layer).

According to feature vG1, in a predetermined game state, a specific effect image is displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of game times for the first special information. When a game ball enters the second ball entry means, a specific effect image is displayed in a specific number of game times for the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. Then, a specific effect image is displayed in a game time for the first special information that is executed consecutively after the end of the specific number of game times for the second special information. For this reason, when the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state includes special information that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high expectation in which special information that satisfies a first predetermined condition exists, a specific effect image is displayed to give a notice to the player that there is a possibility that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Moreover, when a specific number of game times for the second special information, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, is executed, the specific effect image is displayed in the game times, so that the game times for the second special information can be played without interrupting the flow of the preview effect and without any sense of incongruity. In addition, by repeatedly displaying the specific effect image for each game time, the player can be made to expect that the possibility of the existence of special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition has increased. On the other hand, if the specific effect image is always displayed even when the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect image is unnecessarily repeated, and there is a risk that the reliability of the preview effect will decrease. In contrast, according to the feature vG1, when a specific condition is established in a game time for the first special information that is executed consecutively after the end of a specific number of game times for the second special information, the specific effect image is switched to the specific effect image, so that when the specific condition is established, the appearance of an extra specific effect image can be suppressed. Therefore, feature vG1 can improve the reliability of the preview performance and increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to feature vG1, when a specific effect image is displayed during a specific number of play times for the second special information that is less than or equal to the upper limit number of second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a specific game state, the specific effect image is displayed at a position shifted forward or backward from the display surface of the pattern for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means, so that the drawing can be controlled independently for the layer where the specific effect image is displayed and the layer where the pattern is displayed. Therefore, according to feature vG7, control can be simplified.

<Characteristic vH group>
The feature vH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to this.

[Feature vH1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determining means giving priority to the determination on the second special information over the determination on the first special information;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a time from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
In a gaming machine comprising:
The control means includes a means for switching the state of the auxiliary means from the first state to the second state with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the short electric role opening) when a predetermined condition (a game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established in a predetermined game state,
The gaming machine is capable of displaying a specific effect image (a chance eye included in a premonition notice effect) in succession for a predetermined number of times of the game regarding the first special information in the predetermined game state,
A first display means (showing the game time V21 in FIG. 516) capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game times for the second special information a specific number of times that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state;
A second display means (a performance of a game round U23 in FIG. 516 ) capable of displaying the specific performance image in the game round for the first special information, which is executed continuously after the game round for the second special information of the specific number of times is completed;
A presentation image switching means for switching the specific presentation image to a predetermined presentation image (a presentation of the same color for the first consecutive presentation) when a specific condition (the result of the second judgment is negative) is satisfied in the first special information game, which is executed consecutively after the end of the second special information game of the specific number of times;
Equipped with
The second display means is
a means for displaying the specific effect image at a position shifted forward or backward with respect to a display surface of a pattern for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means, which is displayed during the game round (when the display of an effect in which a specific character appears in variant 5 is applied to the layer structure of variant 1, the effect in which the specific character appears is positioned in front of the pattern layer).

According to feature vH1, in a predetermined game state, a specific effect image is displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of game times for the first special information. When a game ball enters the second ball entry means, a specific effect image is displayed in a specific number of game times for the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. Then, a specific effect image is displayed in a game time for the first special information that is executed consecutively after the end of the specific number of game times for the second special information. For this reason, when the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state includes special information that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high expectation, in which special information that satisfies a first predetermined condition exists, a specific effect image is displayed to give a notice to the player that there is a possibility that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Moreover, when a specific number of game times for the second special information, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, is executed, the specific effect image is displayed in the game times, so that the game times for the second special information can be played without interrupting the flow of the preview effect and without any sense of incongruity. In addition, by repeatedly displaying the specific effect image for each game time, the player can be made to expect that the possibility of the existence of special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition has increased. On the other hand, if the specific effect image is always displayed even when the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect image is unnecessarily repeated, and there is a risk that the reliability of the preview effect will decrease. In contrast, according to the feature vH1, when a specific condition is established in a game time for the first special information that is executed consecutively after the end of a specific number of game times for the second special information, the specific effect image is switched to the specific effect image, so that when the specific condition is established, the appearance of an extra specific effect image can be suppressed. Therefore, feature vH can improve the reliability of the preview performance and increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to feature vH1, when displaying a specific effect image in a game for the first special information that is executed consecutively after the end of a specific number of game rounds for the second special information, the specific effect image is displayed at a position shifted forward or backward from the display surface of the pattern for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means, so that the drawing can be controlled independently for the hierarchical layer on which the specific effect image is displayed and the hierarchical layer on which the pattern is displayed. Therefore, according to feature vH1, it is possible to simplify the control.

<Features Group I>
The group of features vI is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to the group of features vI.

[Feature vI1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determining means giving priority to the determination on the second special information over the determination on the first special information;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a time from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
In a gaming machine comprising:
The control means includes a means for switching the state of the auxiliary means from the first state to the second state with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the short electric role opening) when a predetermined condition (a game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established in a predetermined game state,
The gaming machine is capable of displaying a specific effect image (a chance eye included in a premonition notice effect) in succession for a predetermined number of times of the game regarding the first special information in the predetermined game state,
A first display means (showing the game time V21 in FIG. 516) capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game times for the second special information a specific number of times that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state;
A second display means (a performance of a game round U23 in FIG. 516 ) capable of displaying the specific performance image in the game round for the first special information, which is executed continuously after the game round for the second special information of the specific number of times is completed;
A presentation image switching means for switching the specific presentation image to a predetermined presentation image (a presentation of the same color for the first consecutive presentation) when a specific condition (the result of the second judgment is negative) is established in the first special information game, which is executed consecutively after the end of the specific number of games for the second special information game;
Equipped with
The effect image switching means is
a means for displaying the specified effect image at a position shifted forward or backward with respect to a display surface of a pattern for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means, which is displayed during the game round (when the display of an effect in which a specific background zone appears in variant example 5 is applied to the layer structure of variant example 1, the effect in which the specific background zone appears is positioned in front of the pattern layer).

According to feature vI1, in a predetermined game state, a specific effect image is displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of game times for the first special information. When a game ball enters the second ball entry means, a specific effect image is displayed in a specific number of game times for the second special information that is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. Then, a specific effect image is displayed in a game time for the first special information that is executed consecutively after the end of the specific number of game times for the second special information. For this reason, when the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state includes special information that is scheduled to perform an effect with a high expectation in which special information that satisfies a first predetermined condition exists, a specific effect image is displayed to give a notice to the player that there is a possibility that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Moreover, when a specific number of game times for the second special information, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, is executed, the specific effect image is displayed in the game times, so that the game times for the second special information can be played without interrupting the flow of the preview effect and without any sense of incongruity. In addition, by repeatedly displaying the specific effect image for each game time, the player can be made to expect that the possibility of the existence of special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition has increased. On the other hand, if the specific effect image is always displayed even when the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect image is unnecessarily repeated, and there is a risk that the reliability of the preview effect will decrease. In contrast, according to the feature vI1, when a specific condition is established in a game time for the first special information that is executed consecutively after the end of a specific number of game times for the second special information, the specific effect image is switched to the specific effect image, so that when the specific condition is established, the appearance of an extra specific effect image can be suppressed. Therefore, feature vI1 can improve the reliability of the preview performance and increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to feature vI1, when a specific condition is met in a game round for the first special information stored by the acquired information storage means and a predetermined effect image is displayed, the predetermined effect image is displayed at a position shifted forward or backward from the display surface of the pattern for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means, so that the drawing can be controlled independently for the layer where the predetermined effect image is displayed and the layer where the pattern is displayed. Therefore, according to feature vI1, it is possible to simplify the control.

<Characteristic vJ group>
The group of features vJ is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to this group.

[Feature vJ1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determining means giving priority to the determination on the second special information over the determination on the first special information;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a time from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
In a gaming machine comprising:
The control means includes a means for switching the state of the auxiliary means from the first state to the second state with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the electric long release) when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established in a predetermined game state,
A predetermined suggestion information display means (the performance of the game round U32 in FIG. 521) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (a bubble image included in the premonition notice performance) in the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information;
A specific game state generating means (a long open state of the electric device 34a in normal operation) capable of generating a specific game state in which the game turn for the second special information can be executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state (a game state in which the game turn for the special 2 reservation can be executed);
A specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image (a shell image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for the special 2 reserve 1) corresponding to the specific game during the occurrence of the specific game state;
A continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed (a means for displaying a reduced image of the captured image in the special 2 exclusive performance display area SA),
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature vJ1, predetermined suggestion information is displayed in a predetermined number of gaming times regarding the first special information. For this purpose, when there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition among the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means and there is special information that is scheduled to be performed with a high degree of expectation, the predetermined suggestion is made. The information can provide a notice to the player that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists among the first special information. Further, according to feature vJ1, a specific game in which a specific number of gaming times regarding the second special information can be executed is greater than or equal to the upper limit number of second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined gaming state. condition may occur. Then, while the specific game state is occurring, a specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game round regarding the second special information, and by displaying the specific game image in the game round regarding the second special information that takes a long time, the game It is possible to improve the interest of people. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information ends, the game time for the second special information is executed before the game round for the second special information starts. There is a possibility that some players may completely forget that the preview performance has appeared in a predetermined number of game rounds regarding the first special information given. Furthermore, by displaying a specific game image during the game session regarding the second special information, it becomes even easier to forget that the preview effect appeared during the predetermined number of game sessions regarding the first special information. . On the other hand, according to feature vJ1, when displaying a specific game image and executing a game round regarding the second special information, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting that the preview performance has appeared, and to remind the user that the preview performance regarding the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to feature vJ1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature vJ2]
A gaming machine according to feature vJ1,
The continuous display means includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for displaying, as the specified suggestive information to be continuously displayed, specified suggestive information (a reduced image of a captured image) including the state as it was displayed during the game round for the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round for the second special information executed by displaying the specific game image.

According to feature vJ2, in a specific game state in which a game round regarding the second special information can be executed, the state remains displayed in the game round regarding the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round. Since the predetermined suggestion information including , is continuously displayed, it is possible to more reliably remind the user that the preview performance regarding the first special information is continuing.

[Features vJ3]
The gaming machine according to feature vJ1 or feature vJ2,
The continuation display means is
The game regarding the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round regarding the second special information executed by displaying the specific game image as the predetermined suggestion information that is continuously displayed. A gaming machine comprising means for displaying predetermined suggestion information (in a modified example, an image in which a captured image is changed to increase the amount of bubbles) by changing the information displayed in the previous game.

According to feature vJ3, in a specific game state in which a game round regarding the second special information can be executed, the information displayed in the game round regarding the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round is changed. The specified suggested information will continue to be displayed. For this reason, it becomes possible to provide the predetermined suggestion information in various ways, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Features vJ4]
The gaming machine described in any one of Features vJ1 to Features vJ3,
The predetermined suggestion information display means includes:
A gaming machine comprising means for displaying the predetermined suggestion information in a position that does not obstruct the visual recognition of a symbol for announcing the result of the determination by the determining means that is displayed in the game round.

Feature vJ4 prevents the pattern for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means from becoming difficult to see due to the specified suggestive information. This can further increase the interest in the game.

[Features vJ5]
The gaming machine described in any one of Features vJ1 to Features vJ4,
The predetermined suggestion information display means includes:
Means for displaying the predetermined suggestion information at a position shifted forward and backward relative to the display surface of the symbol for announcing the result of the judgment by the judgment means displayed in the game round (a layer in Modification 1) A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a display using a

According to feature vJ5, when displaying the predetermined suggestion information in a predetermined number of gaming rounds regarding the first special information, the position is shifted forward and backward relative to the display surface of the symbol for announcing the result of the determination by the determination means. Since the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, the display can be controlled independently for each of the hierarchy where the predetermined suggestion information is displayed and the hierarchy where the symbols are displayed. Therefore, according to feature vJ5, control can be simplified.

[Features vJ6]
The gaming machine described in any one of Features vJ1 to Features vJ5,
The continuation display means is
Means for displaying the predetermined suggestion information at a position shifted forward and backward relative to the display surface of the symbol for announcing the result of the judgment by the judgment means displayed in the game round (a layer in Modification 1) A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a display using a

According to feature vJ6, when a specific game image is displayed and a game round for the second special information is executed, the specified suggestive information is displayed at a position shifted forward or backward from the display surface of the pattern for notifying the result of the judgment by the judging means, so that the display can be controlled independently for the layer where the specified suggestive information is displayed and the layer where the pattern is displayed. Therefore, according to feature vJ6, it is possible to simplify the control.

[Features vJ7]
The gaming machine described in any one of Features vJ1 to Features vJ6,
The specific game image display means is
Means for displaying the specific game image at a position shifted forward and backward relative to the display surface of the symbol for announcing the result of the judgment by the judgment means displayed in the game round (layer of modification 1) A gaming machine characterized in that, in its structure, an upper layer displaying an image SH of a shellfish is located in front of a pattern layer.

According to feature vJ7, when a specific game image corresponding to a specific game is displayed during the occurrence of a specific game state, the specific effect image is displayed at a position shifted forward or backward from the display surface of the pattern for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means, so that the drawing can be controlled independently for the layer where the specific effect image is displayed and the layer where the pattern is displayed. Therefore, feature vJ7 can simplify the control.

[Features vJ8]
The gaming machine described in any one of Features vJ1 to Features vJ7,
The predetermined suggestion information suggests the situation in the game round regarding the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round about the second special information executed by displaying the specific game image. A gaming machine characterized in that it includes information (information expressing the captured image described as a modified example in text).

According to feature vJ8, in a specific game state in which a game round for the second special information can be executed, information suggesting the situation in the game round for the first special information executed immediately before the start of that game round is continuously displayed. This makes it possible to provide the specified suggestive information in various ways, further increasing the interest of the game.

[Feature vJ9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features vJ1 to vJ8,
The predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to feature vJ9, in a specified game state in which the control mode is the first control mode, a preview presentation for the first special information can be performed.

<Characteristic vK group>
The group of features vK is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to this group.

[Feature vK1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first special information is obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. and acquired information storage means for respectively storing second special information that is the special information;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), the determination regarding the second special information; determination means for performing the determination with priority over the determination regarding the first special information;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a first state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a predetermined gaming state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a, 35b) is satisfied, the control means controls the assistance with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the electric prize opening). comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state,
Predetermined suggestion information display means (performance of game round U32 in FIG. 521) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (image of bubbles included in the precursor preview performance) in a predetermined number of the game rounds regarding the first special information;
A specific gaming state (specifically 2. A specific game state generating means (long open state of the electric accessory 34a during normal operation) that can generate a game state in which the game times regarding the second hold can be executed);
A specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image corresponding to the specific game (shellfish image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for special 2 pending 1) during the occurrence of the specific game state;
a continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information when displaying the specific game image and executing the game round regarding the second special information; (means for displaying in the presentation display area SA),
Equipped with
The continuation display means is
The game regarding the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round regarding the second special information executed by displaying the specific game image as the predetermined suggestion information that is continuously displayed. 1. A gaming machine comprising means for displaying predetermined suggestion information (an image reduced from a captured image) including the state as displayed in the game.

According to feature vK1, predetermined suggestion information is displayed in a predetermined number of gaming times regarding the first special information. For this purpose, when there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition among the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means and there is special information that is scheduled to be performed with a high degree of expectation, the predetermined suggestion is made. The information can provide a notice to the player that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists among the first special information. Further, according to feature vK1, a specific game in which a specific number of game times regarding the second special information can be executed is greater than or equal to the upper limit number of second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined gaming state. condition may occur. Then, while the specific game state is occurring, a specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game round regarding the second special information, and by displaying the specific game image in the game round regarding the second special information that takes a long time, the game It is possible to improve the interest of people. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information ends, the game time for the second special information is executed before the game round for the second special information starts. There is a possibility that some players may completely forget that the preview performance has appeared in a predetermined number of game rounds regarding the first special information given. Furthermore, by displaying a specific game image during the game session regarding the second special information, it becomes even easier to forget that the preview effect appeared during the predetermined number of game sessions regarding the first special information. . On the other hand, according to feature vK1, when displaying a specific game image and executing a game round regarding the second special information, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting that the preview performance has appeared, and to remind the user that the preview performance regarding the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to feature vK1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to feature vK1, in a specific game state in which a game round for the second special information can be executed, the predetermined suggestive information including the state in which it was displayed in the game round for the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round continues to be displayed, so that it is possible to more reliably remind the player that the preview performance for the first special information is continuing.

<Feature vL group>
The group of features vL is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to this group.

[Feature vL1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determining means giving priority to the determination on the second special information over the determination on the first special information;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a time from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
In a gaming machine comprising:
The control means includes a means for switching the state of the auxiliary means from the first state to the second state with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the electric long release) when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established in a predetermined game state,
A predetermined suggestion information display means (the performance of the game round U32 in FIG. 521) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (a bubble image included in the premonition notice performance) in the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information;
A specific game state generating means (a long open state of the electric device 34a in normal operation) capable of generating a specific game state in which the game turn for the second special information can be executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state (a game state in which the game turn for the special 2 reservation can be executed);
A specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image (a shell image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for the special 2 reserve 1) corresponding to the specific game during the occurrence of the specific game state;
A continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed (a means for displaying a reduced image of the captured image in the special 2 exclusive performance display area SA),
Equipped with
The continuous display means includes:
A gaming machine comprising a means for displaying, as the predetermined suggestive information to be continuously displayed, predetermined suggestive information obtained by modifying the information displayed in the game round for the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round for the second special information executed by displaying the specific game image (in a modified example, an image in which the amount of bubbles is increased in comparison with the captured image).

According to feature vL1, predetermined suggestion information is displayed in a predetermined number of gaming times regarding the first special information. For this purpose, when there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition among the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means and there is special information that is scheduled to be performed with a high degree of expectation, the predetermined suggestion is made. The information can provide a notice to the player that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists among the first special information. Further, according to feature vL1, a specific game in which a specific number of gaming times regarding the second special information can be executed is greater than or equal to the upper limit number of second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined gaming state. condition may occur. Then, while the specific game state is occurring, a specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game round regarding the second special information, and by displaying the specific game image in the game round regarding the second special information that takes a long time, the game It is possible to improve the interest of people. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information ends, the game time for the second special information is executed before the game round for the second special information starts. There is a possibility that some players may completely forget that the preview performance has appeared in a predetermined number of game rounds regarding the first special information given. Furthermore, by displaying a specific game image during the game session regarding the second special information, it becomes even easier to forget that the preview effect appeared during the predetermined number of game sessions regarding the first special information. . On the other hand, according to feature vL1, when displaying a specific game image and executing a game round regarding the second special information, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting that the preview performance has appeared, and to remind the user that the preview performance regarding the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to feature vL1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to feature vL1, in a specific gaming state in which a game round regarding the second special information can be executed, information displayed in a game round regarding the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round concerned. The predetermined suggestion information that has been changed will continue to be displayed. For this reason, it is possible to provide the predetermined suggestion information in various ways, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic vM group>
The feature vM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to this.

[Feature vM1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determining means giving priority to the determination on the second special information over the determination on the first special information;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a time from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
In a gaming machine comprising:
The control means includes a means for switching the state of the auxiliary means from the first state to the second state with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the electric long release) when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established in a predetermined game state,
A predetermined suggestion information display means (the performance of the game round U32 in FIG. 521) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (a bubble image included in the premonition notice performance) in the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information;
A specific game state generating means (a long open state of the electric device 34a in normal operation) capable of generating a specific game state in which the game turn for the second special information can be executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state (a game state in which the game turn for the special 2 reservation can be executed);
A specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image (a shell image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for the special 2 reserve 1) corresponding to the specific game during the occurrence of the specific game state;
A continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed (a means for displaying a reduced image of the captured image in the special 2 exclusive performance display area SA),
Equipped with
The predetermined suggestion information display means
A gaming machine comprising a means for displaying the specified suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of a pattern that is displayed during the game round and that notifies the user of the result of the judgment made by the judgment means.

According to the feature vM1, the specified suggestion information is displayed in a specified number of game times for the first special information. For this reason, when there is special information that is scheduled to perform a highly anticipated performance in which special information that satisfies the first specified condition is present among the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the specified suggestion information can be used to notify the player that the first special information that satisfies the first specified condition is present among the first special information. Also, according to the feature vM1, a specific game state can be generated in which a specific number of game times for the second special information can be executed, which is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a specified game state. Then, during the occurrence of the specific game state, a specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute a game time for the second special information, and by displaying a specific game image in this long game time for the second special information, the player's interest can be improved. On the other hand, since the game rounds for the second special information take a long time, when the game rounds for the second special information end, some players may completely forget that the preview effect appeared in the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information that were executed before the game rounds for the second special information began. Furthermore, by displaying the specific game image in the game rounds for the second special information, it becomes even easier to forget that the preview effect appeared in the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. In contrast, according to the feature vM1, when the specific game image is displayed and the game rounds for the second special information are executed, the specific suggestive information is continuously displayed, so that the player is prevented from forgetting that the preview effect appeared and can be reminded that the preview effect for the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to the feature vM1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to feature vM1, it is possible to prevent the pattern for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means from becoming difficult to see due to the predetermined suggestive information. This can further increase the interest in the game.

<Feature vN group>
The group of features vN is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to this group.

[Feature vN1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first special information is obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. and acquired information storage means for respectively storing second special information that is the special information;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), the determination regarding the second special information; determination means for performing the determination with priority over the determination regarding the first special information;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a first state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a predetermined gaming state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a, 35b) is satisfied, the control means controls the assistance with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the electric prize opening). comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state,
Predetermined suggestion information display means (performance of game round U32 in FIG. 521) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (image of bubbles included in the precursor preview performance) in a predetermined number of the game rounds regarding the first special information;
A specific gaming state (specifically 2. A specific game state generating means (long open state of the electric accessory 34a during normal operation) that can generate a game state in which the game times regarding the second hold can be executed);
A specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image corresponding to the specific game (shellfish image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for special 2 pending 1) during the occurrence of the specific game state;
a continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information when displaying the specific game image and executing the game round regarding the second special information; (means for displaying in the presentation display area SA),
Equipped with
The predetermined suggestion information display means includes:
Means for displaying the predetermined suggestion information at a position shifted forward and backward relative to the display surface of the symbol for announcing the result of the judgment by the judgment means displayed in the game round (a layer in Modification 1) A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a display using a

According to feature vN1, predetermined suggestion information is displayed in a predetermined number of gaming times regarding the first special information. For this purpose, when there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition among the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means and there is special information that is scheduled to be performed with a high degree of expectation, the predetermined suggestion is made. The information can provide a notice to the player that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists among the first special information. Further, according to feature vN1, a specific game in which a specific number of gaming times regarding the second special information can be executed is greater than or equal to the upper limit number of second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined gaming state. condition may occur. Then, while the specific game state is occurring, a specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game round regarding the second special information, and by displaying the specific game image in the game round regarding the second special information that takes a long time, the game It is possible to improve the interest of people. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information ends, the game time for the second special information is executed before the game round for the second special information starts. There is a possibility that some players may completely forget that the preview performance has appeared in a predetermined number of game rounds regarding the first special information given. Furthermore, by displaying a specific game image during the game session regarding the second special information, it becomes even easier to forget that the preview effect appeared during the predetermined number of game sessions regarding the first special information. . On the other hand, according to feature vN1, when displaying a specific game image and executing a game round regarding the second special information, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting that the preview performance has appeared, and to remind the user that the preview performance regarding the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to feature vN1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to feature vN1, when the specified suggestion information is displayed during a specified number of game rounds for the first special information, the specified suggestion information is displayed at a position shifted forward or backward from the display surface of the pattern for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means, so that the display can be controlled independently for the hierarchical level where the specified suggestion information is displayed and the hierarchical level where the pattern is displayed. Therefore, according to feature vN1, it is possible to simplify the control.

<Characteristic vO group>
The feature vO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to this.

[Feature vO1]
A first ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting hole 34) through which the game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means for respectively storing first special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, and second special information, which is the special information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
a determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win), the determining means giving priority to the determination on the second special information over the determination on the first special information;
A game round execution means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game round control process of FIG. 511 executed thereby) that executes one game round when the game round is defined as a time from the start of a game operation that notifies the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
An auxiliary means (electric device 34a) for assisting the game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
a state transition means for transitioning a state of the assist means between a first state which makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state which makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means having at least a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first control mode, as control modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means;
In a gaming machine comprising:
The control means includes a means for switching the state of the auxiliary means from the first state to the second state with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the electric long release) when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is established in a predetermined game state,
A predetermined suggestion information display means (the performance of the game round U32 in FIG. 521) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (a bubble image included in the premonition notice performance) in the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information;
A specific game state generating means (a long open state of the electric device 34a in normal operation) capable of generating a specific game state in which the game turn for the second special information can be executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state (a game state in which the game turn for the special 2 reservation can be executed);
A specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image (a shell image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for the special 2 reserve 1) corresponding to the specific game during the occurrence of the specific game state;
A continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed (a means for displaying a reduced image of the captured image in the special 2 exclusive performance display area SA),
Equipped with
The continuous display means includes:
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for displaying the specified suggestive information at a position shifted forward or backward from a display surface of a pattern for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means, which is displayed during the game round (display using layers in variant example 1).

According to the feature vO1, the specified suggestion information is displayed in a specified number of game times for the first special information. For this reason, when there is special information that is scheduled to perform a highly anticipated performance in which special information that satisfies the first specified condition is present among the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the specified suggestion information can be used to notify the player that the first special information that satisfies the first specified condition is present among the first special information. Also, according to the feature vO1, a specific game state can be generated in which a specific number of game times for the second special information can be executed, which is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a specified game state. Then, during the occurrence of the specific game state, a specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute a game time for the second special information, and by displaying a specific game image in this long game time for the second special information, the player's interest can be improved. On the other hand, since the game rounds for the second special information take a long time, when the game rounds for the second special information end, some players may completely forget that the preview effect appeared in the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information that were executed before the game rounds for the second special information began. Furthermore, by displaying the specific game image in the game rounds for the second special information, it becomes even easier to forget that the preview effect appeared in the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. In contrast, according to the feature vO1, when the specific game image is displayed and the game rounds for the second special information are executed, the specific suggestive information is continuously displayed, so that the player is prevented from forgetting that the preview effect appeared and can be reminded that the preview effect for the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to the feature vO1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to feature vO1, when displaying a specific game image and executing a game round regarding the second special information, the front and back of the symbol for announcing the result of the determination by the determination means are shifted. Since the predetermined suggestion information is displayed at the position shown in FIG. Therefore, according to the feature vO1, control can be simplified.

<Feature vP group>
The group of features vP is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to the group of features vP.

[Feature vP1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first special information is obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. and acquired information storage means for respectively storing second special information that is the special information;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), the determination regarding the second special information; determination means for performing the determination with priority over the determination regarding the first special information;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a first state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a predetermined gaming state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a, 35b) is satisfied, the control means controls the assistance with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the electric prize opening). comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state,
Predetermined suggestion information display means (performance of game round U32 in FIG. 521) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (image of bubbles included in the precursor preview performance) in a predetermined number of the game rounds regarding the first special information;
A specific gaming state (specifically 2. A specific game state generating means (long open state of the electric accessory 34a during normal operation) that can generate a game state in which the game times regarding the second hold can be executed);
A specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image corresponding to the specific game (shellfish image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for special 2 pending 1) during the occurrence of the specific game state;
a continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information when displaying the specific game image and executing the game round regarding the second special information; (means for displaying in the presentation display area SA),
Equipped with
The specific game image display means is
Means for displaying the specific game image at a position shifted forward and backward relative to the display surface of the symbol for announcing the result of the judgment by the judgment means displayed in the game round (layer of modification 1) A gaming machine characterized in that, in its structure, an upper layer displaying an image SH of a shellfish is located in front of a pattern layer.

According to feature vP1, predetermined suggestion information is displayed in a predetermined number of gaming times regarding the first special information. For this purpose, when there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition among the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means and there is special information that is scheduled to be performed with a high degree of expectation, the predetermined suggestion is made. The information can provide a notice to the player that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists among the first special information. Further, according to feature vP1, a specific game in which a specific number of game times regarding the second special information can be executed is greater than or equal to the upper limit number of second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined gaming state. condition may occur. Then, while the specific game state is occurring, a specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game round regarding the second special information, and by displaying the specific game image in the game round regarding the second special information that takes a long time, the game It is possible to improve the interest of people. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information ends, the game time for the second special information is executed before the game round for the second special information starts. There is a possibility that some players may completely forget that the preview performance has appeared in a predetermined number of game rounds regarding the first special information given. Furthermore, by displaying a specific game image during the game session regarding the second special information, it becomes even easier to forget that the preview effect appeared during the predetermined number of game sessions regarding the first special information. . On the other hand, according to feature vP1, when displaying a specific game image and executing a game round regarding the second special information, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting that the preview performance has appeared, and to remind the user that the preview performance regarding the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to feature vP1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to feature vP1, when a specific game image corresponding to a specific game is displayed during the occurrence of a fixed game state, the specific effect image is displayed at a position shifted forward or backward from the display surface of the pattern for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means, so that the drawing can be controlled independently for the layer where the specific effect image is displayed and the layer where the pattern is displayed. Therefore, according to feature vP1, it is possible to simplify the control.

<Feature vQ group>
The group of features vQ is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to this group.

[Feature vQ1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first special information is obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. and acquired information storage means for respectively storing second special information that is the special information;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), the determination regarding the second special information; determination means for performing the determination with priority over the determination regarding the first special information;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a first state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a predetermined gaming state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a, 35b) is satisfied, the control means controls the assistance with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the electric prize opening). comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state,
Predetermined suggestion information display means (performance of game round U32 in FIG. 521) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (image of bubbles included in the precursor preview performance) in a predetermined number of the game rounds regarding the first special information;
A specific gaming state (specifically 2. A specific game state generating means (long open state of the electric accessory 34a during normal operation) that can generate a game state in which the game times regarding the second hold can be executed);
A specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image corresponding to the specific game (shellfish image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for special 2 pending 1) during the occurrence of the specific game state;
a continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information when displaying the specific game image and executing the game round regarding the second special information; (means for displaying in the presentation display area SA),
Equipped with
The predetermined suggestion information suggests the situation in the game round regarding the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round about the second special information executed by displaying the specific game image. A gaming machine characterized in that it includes information (information expressing the captured image described as a modified example in text).

According to the feature vQ1, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed in a predetermined number of game times for the first special information. For this reason, when there is special information that is scheduled to perform a highly anticipated performance in which special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition is present among the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the predetermined suggestion information can be used to notify the player that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition is present among the first special information. Also, according to the feature vQ1, a specific game state can be generated in which a specific number of game times for the second special information can be executed, which is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a specific game state. Then, during the occurrence of the specific game state, a specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute a game time for the second special information, and by displaying the specific game image in this long game time for the second special information, the player's interest can be improved. On the other hand, since the game rounds for the second special information take a long time, when the game rounds for the second special information end, some players may completely forget that the preview effect appeared in the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information that were executed before the game rounds for the second special information began. Furthermore, by displaying the specific game image in the game rounds for the second special information, it becomes even easier to forget that the preview effect appeared in the predetermined number of game rounds for the first special information. In contrast, according to the feature vQ1, when the specific game image is displayed and the game rounds for the second special information are executed, the specific suggestive information is continuously displayed, so that the player is prevented from forgetting that the preview effect appeared and can be reminded that the preview effect for the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to the feature vQ1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to feature vQ1, in a specific game state in which a game round for the second special information can be played, information suggesting the situation in the game round for the first special information that was played immediately before the start of that game round is continuously displayed. This makes it possible to provide the specified suggestive information in various ways, further increasing the interest of the game.

<Feature vR group>
The group of features vR is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its modifications. In particular, case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to this group.

[Feature vR1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first special information is obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. and acquired information storage means for respectively storing second special information that is the special information;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot), the determination regarding the second special information; determination means for performing the determination with priority over the determination regarding the first special information;
If one gaming round is defined as the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation, the gaming round execution means (main control MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game time control process of FIG. 511 executed by it),
auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means;
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a first state that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
The control means for controlling the state transition means includes a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a predetermined gaming state, when a predetermined condition (the game ball passes through the through gates 35a, 35b) is satisfied, the control means controls the assistance with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the electric prize opening). comprising means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state,
Predetermined suggestion information display means (performance of game round U32 in FIG. 521) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (image of bubbles included in the precursor preview performance) in a predetermined number of the game rounds regarding the first special information;
A specific gaming state (specifically 2. A specific game state generating means (long open state of the electric accessory 34a during normal operation) capable of generating a game state in which the game times regarding the second hold can be executed);
A specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image corresponding to the specific game (shellfish image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for special 2 pending 1) during the occurrence of the specific game state;
a continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information when displaying the specific game image and executing the game round regarding the second special information; (means for displaying in the presentation display area SA),
Equipped with
The gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to feature vR1, predetermined suggestion information is displayed in a predetermined number of gaming times regarding the first special information. For this purpose, when there is special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition among the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means and there is special information that is scheduled to be performed with a high degree of expectation, the predetermined suggestion is made. The information can provide a notice to the player that the first special information that satisfies the first predetermined condition exists among the first special information. Further, according to feature vR1, a specific game in which a specific number of game times regarding the second special information can be executed is greater than or equal to the upper limit number of second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined gaming state. condition may occur. Then, while the specific game state is occurring, a specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game round regarding the second special information, and by displaying the specific game image in the game round regarding the second special information that takes a long time, the game It is possible to improve the interest of people. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information ends, the game time for the second special information is executed before the game round for the second special information starts. There is a possibility that some players may completely forget that the preview performance has appeared in a predetermined number of game rounds regarding the first special information given. Furthermore, by displaying a specific game image during the game session regarding the second special information, it becomes even easier to forget that the preview effect appeared during the predetermined number of game sessions regarding the first special information. . On the other hand, according to feature vR1, when displaying a specific game image and executing a game round regarding the second special information, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting that the preview performance has appeared, and to remind the user that the preview performance regarding the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to feature vR1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to feature vR1, in a predetermined gaming state where the control mode is the first control mode, a preview performance regarding the first special information can be performed.

<Characteristic wA group>
The feature wA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature wA1]
Ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired when a game ball enters the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game;
A game time control means for controlling the game time operation when one game time operation is defined as the start of the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game operation. ,
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is determined from the highest to the lowest set corresponding to the level of the possibility. Suspension changing means suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted suspension display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting the direction of change in the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
A pre-execution pending display area (already executed pending display icon Z) in which a predetermined number of pending display information corresponding to the gaming session after execution of the gaming session operation by the gaming session control means can be displayed as executed pending display information (already executed pending display icon Z). an executed pending display means for displaying a pending display area Dz);
Equipped with
The display mode of the unexecuted pending display information includes a first display mode (for example, green display color) and a second display mode (for example, a green display color), which is a higher stage than the first display mode among the plurality of stages. for example, a red display color),
When specific pending display information moves to the executed pending display area, under certain conditions (by moving the variable execution pending display icon Y to the executed pending display area, a predetermined number of executed pending display In a situation where all executed pending display icons Z displayed in area Dz are arranged in the same display color), when the specific pending display information is displayed in the second display mode It is more advantageous for the player if the game is displayed in the first display mode (already executed pending notice).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, in the unplayed pending display area, the number of unplayed pending display information corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed, and in the already played pending display area, the game time control means The hold display information corresponding to the game round after the game round operation is executed is displayed as the already executed hold display information. When specific pending display information moves to the executed pending display area, under certain conditions, the specific pending display information is displayed in the first display mode more than in the second display mode. It is more advantageous for the player if it is displayed. For this reason, even if the first display mode has a lower possibility that the special information corresponding to the pending display information satisfies the predetermined condition than the second display mode, under certain conditions, the pending display information may be displayed in the second display mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the first display mode remains the same without changing the display mode, and the game moves to the executed/pending display area. In addition, the first display mode of the pending display information may include special information about the advantage for the player that is different from the stage of the possibility that the special information set for the first display mode satisfies the predetermined condition. It can give meaning. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature wA2]
A gaming machine according to feature wA1,
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for changing the display mode of the already executed pending display information displayed in the already executed pending display area (the assist setting process of step S9 in FIG. 567, which corresponds to cases 3 and 4).

According to this feature, the display mode of the executed pending display information displayed in the executed pending display area may change. Here, being under a specific condition means that, for example, specific pending display information moves to the executed pending display area, so that all of the executed pending display information in the executed pending display area is displayed in the same manner. Assuming that the display formats are all the same, the player may be informed that, for example, the display format of all executed pending display information displayed in a predetermined number of executed pending display areas will be displayed in the same manner. Even in a situation where the execution and pending display information is not completely aligned, the display format of the executed and pending display information displayed in the executed and pending display area may change, and specific pending display information may be displayed in the executed and pending display area. By shifting, it is possible to create a feeling of expectation that all the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas will be arranged in the same display mode. Then, the display mode of the executed pending display information actually displayed in the executed pending display area changes, and the specific pending display information is moved to the executed pending display area, so that a predetermined number of executed pending display When all the executed pending display information displayed in the area is arranged in the same display mode, it is possible to give great pleasure to the player.

[Feature wA3]
The gaming machine according to feature wA1 or feature wA2,
A gaming machine characterized in that a display shape of the executed pending display information is different from a display shape of the unplayed pending display information.

According to this feature, the display shape of the executed hold display information is different from the display shape of the not executed hold display information, making it easy to distinguish between the not executed hold display information and the executed hold display information. This makes it easy to tell that specific hold display information has moved from the not executed hold display area to the variable execution hold display area to the executed hold display area. Therefore, the improved visibility can further increase the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature wA4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to wA3,
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state of the gaming machine from a first game state to a second game state which is more advantageous to a player than the first game state;
a means for not executing control in the second game state such that, when the specific reserved display information is moved to the executed reserved display area, it is more advantageous for a player when the specific reserved display information is displayed in the first display mode than when the specific reserved display information is displayed in the second display mode;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to this feature, in the second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, when the specific pending display information moves to the executed pending display area, the specific pending display information is transferred to the second gaming state. Control is not executed such that the advantage for the player is higher when the first display mode is displayed than when the first display mode is displayed. The second gaming state is already more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the need for the above-mentioned new control is lower than in the first gaming state. Therefore, in this feature, in the second gaming state, control can be simplified by not performing the above-mentioned new control, and in the first gaming state, specific pending display information is displayed in the executed pending display area. As mentioned above, it is more advantageous for the player if specific pending display information is displayed in the first display mode than in the second display mode. By executing the new control, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature wA5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to wA4,
The predetermined number of the already executed pending display information that can be displayed in the already executed pending display area is fixed (configuration of modified example 13).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the predetermined number of already executed pending display information that can be displayed in the already executed pending display area is fixed, the difficulty level at which the display mode of all already executed pending display information displayed in the already executed pending display area is the same is fixed. This makes it possible to prevent the difficulty level from changing and giving the player unnecessary expectations or disappointment.

[Feature wA6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to wA5,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for erasing the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area based on the satisfaction of an erasure condition (erasing the already executed hold display icon Z after a predetermined time has elapsed after it is determined that no game is being played).

According to this feature, by erasing the played pending display information displayed in the played pending display area based on the fulfillment of the deletion condition, when a player is replaced, the accumulated play by the previous player can be saved. It is possible to suppress the remaining execution/pending display information. For this reason, when a player is replaced, it is possible to start the game with no completed execution pending display information in the completed execution pending display area, and the completed execution pending display information remains in the executed pending display area. There is no need for the player to feel troubled.

[Feature wA7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to wA6,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for executing an effect (female character effect setting processing) indicating a high advantage for the player when the specific pending display information moves to the already executed pending display area in the first display mode under the specific condition.

According to this feature, when specific pending display information moves to the executed pending display area in the first display mode under specific conditions, an effect indicating that it is highly advantageous for the player is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a higher sense of expectation.

[Feature wA8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to wA7,
a special game state generating means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to a player after the game operation ends when the determining means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The high advantage to the player is that the occurrence of the special game state is confirmed.

According to this feature, when specific pending display information moves to the executed pending display area, if the specific pending display information is displayed in a first display mode under specific conditions, the occurrence of a special game state is confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of anticipation when the pending display information that moves to the executed pending display area is displayed in the first display mode under specific conditions. Therefore, this feature can further increase the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature wA9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to feature wA8,
A gaming machine characterized in that the suspension changing means includes means for changing a display color of the unplayed suspension display information as one aspect of changing the display mode of the unplayed suspension display information.

According to this feature, by changing the display color of the unexecuted pending display information, it is possible to indicate the degree of possibility that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Moreover, since the display mode is a display color, it is obvious at a glance whether all the images are the same color. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Features wA10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to feature wA9,
Means for changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area from the first display mode to the second display mode (processing for removing the same color when removed in FIG. 568 ) A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area can be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode. When the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, when the unexecuted hold display information is transferred to the executed hold display area as specific hold display information, it will not be transferred in the first display mode. For this reason, the player is expecting that the specific hold display information is displayed in the first display mode in the unexecuted hold display area, and that the specific hold display information will be transferred to the executed hold display area in the first display mode under specific conditions, thereby increasing the advantage for the player, but the display mode changes to the second display mode, and the expected advantage is not given, which disappoints and makes the player feel disappointed. On the other hand, the expectation remains for the second display mode, in which the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information is more likely to satisfy the specified condition than the first display mode. In this way, this feature allows players to experience the ups and downs of opposing emotions, such as hope and disappointment, further increasing interest in the game.

[Feature wA11]
The gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to feature wA10,
Of the plurality of unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area, one of the unexecuted pending display information closest to the executed pending display area is displayed in a manner other than the first display mode. A gaming machine comprising means for changing the display mode from the above display mode to the first display mode (assist setting process in the executed pending notice process in FIG. 567).

According to this feature, among the plurality of pieces of unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area, one piece of unexecuted pending display information closest to the executed pending display area is displayed in the first display mode. There are cases where the display mode is changed from another display mode to the first display mode, so if the specific pending display information to be transferred to the completed execution pending display area is displayed in the first display mode under specific conditions, it may be difficult for the player to This can bring great joy to players who have been hoping for a phenomenon such as a high advantage to occur.

[Feature wA12]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to wA11,
A gaming machine characterized by having a means (processing for removing the same color when a miss) for changing one of the multiple unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area, which is closest to the executed hold display area, from the first display mode to a display mode other than the first display mode.

According to this feature, among the multiple pieces of unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area, one piece of unexecuted hold display information closest to the executed hold display area may be changed from the first display mode to a display mode other than the first display mode, which can cause great disappointment to players who were hoping that a particular piece of hold display information moving to the executed hold display area would be displayed in the first display mode under certain conditions, providing a high advantage to the player.

[Feature wA13]
The gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to feature wA12,
The first display mode is a first display color of the unexecuted pending display information,
The second display mode is a second display color of the unexecuted pending display information,
a first display color changing means for changing the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area from a display color other than the first display color to the first display color ( (assist setting processing in pending notice processing),
When changing the display color by the first display color changing means, the shape of the unexecuted pending display information of which the display color is to be changed is changed to the display color displayed in the unexecuted pending display area. (Modification 5)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is changed from a display color other than the first display color to the first display color, and when changing this display color, the The shape of the unexecuted pending display information whose display color is to be changed is different from the shape of unexecuted pending display information other than the unexecuted pending display information whose display color is to be changed, which is displayed in the unexecuted pending display area. Since the shape is changed to a shape of 1, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the fact that the unexecuted pending display information whose display color is to be changed changes to the first display color, giving the player a further sense of anticipation. can do.

[Feature wA14]
The gaming machine according to any one of features wA1 to feature wA13,
Display mode changing means for changing the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area from a display mode other than the first display mode to the first display mode (for executed pending preview shown in FIG. 567) assist setting process),
When changing the display mode by the display mode changing means, moving objects (tangible objects such as flower petals, confetti, fireballs, etc., and intangible objects such as light beams, laser beams, radio waves, etc.) are added to the unexecuted pending display information for which the display mode is to be changed. (modification 5)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, when the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is changed from a display mode other than the first display mode to the first display mode, a moving object is made to reach the unexecuted pending display information, so that the player can focus on the unexecuted pending display information whose display mode is to be changed changing to the first display mode, creating even more anticipation in the player.

<Characteristics Group B>
The group of features wB is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Features wB1]
Ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired when a game ball enters the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game;
A game time control means for controlling the game time operation when one game time operation is defined as the start of the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game operation. ,
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is determined from the highest to the lowest set corresponding to the level of the possibility. Suspension changing means suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted suspension display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting the direction of change in the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
A pre-execution pending display area (already executed pending display icon Z) in which a predetermined number of pending display information corresponding to the gaming session after execution of the gaming session operation by the gaming session control means can be displayed as executed pending display information (already executed pending display icon Z). an executed pending display means for displaying a pending display area Dz);
means for changing the display mode of the executed pending display information displayed in the executed pending display area (assist setting process of step S9 in FIG. 567, cases 3 and 4 apply);
Equipped with
The display mode of the unexecuted pending display information includes a first display mode (for example, green display color) and a second display mode (for example, a green display color), which is a higher stage than the first display mode among the plurality of stages. for example, a red display color),
When specific pending display information moves to the executed pending display area, under certain conditions (by moving the variable execution pending display icon Y to the executed pending display area, a predetermined number of executed pending display In a situation where all executed pending display icons Z displayed in area Dz are arranged in the same display color), when the specific pending display information is displayed in the second display mode It is more advantageous for the player if the game is displayed in the first display mode (already executed pending notice).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, in the unplayed pending display area, the number of unplayed pending display information corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed, and in the already played pending display area, the game time control means The hold display information corresponding to the game round after the game round operation is executed is displayed as the already executed hold display information. When specific pending display information moves to the executed pending display area, under certain conditions, the specific pending display information is displayed in the first display mode more than in the second display mode. It is more advantageous for the player if it is displayed. For this reason, even if the first display mode has a lower possibility that the special information corresponding to the pending display information satisfies the predetermined condition than the second display mode, under certain conditions, the pending display information may be displayed in the second display mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the first display mode remains the same without changing the display mode, and the game moves to the executed/pending display area. In addition, the first display mode of the pending display information may include special information about the advantage for the player that is different from the stage of the possibility that the special information set for the first display mode satisfies the predetermined condition. It can give meaning. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the display mode of the executed hold display information displayed in the executed hold display area may change. Here, if the specific condition is, for example, a situation in which the display modes of the executed hold display information in the executed hold display area are all aligned to the same display mode by the transfer of the specific hold display information to the executed hold display area, the player may have a sense of expectation that, even in a situation in which the display modes of all the executed hold display information displayed in the specified number of executed hold display areas will not be aligned to the same display mode, the display mode of the executed hold display information displayed in the executed hold display area may change and the specific hold display information may transfer to the executed hold display area, causing all the executed hold display information displayed in the specified number of executed hold display areas to be aligned to the same display mode. And when the display mode of the executed hold display information displayed in the executed hold display area actually changes and the specific hold display information transfers to the executed hold display area, causing all the executed hold display information displayed in the specified number of executed hold display areas to be aligned to the same display mode, the player can be given great joy.

<Features wC group>
The group of features wC is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature wC1]
A ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the ball entry means;
An acquired information storage means (first reserve area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number;
an unexecuted hold display means for displaying an unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icons H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
A determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win) for each game;
a game operation control means for controlling a game operation when a game operation is defined as one game operation from the start of the game operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
a hold changing means for indicating the possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition by changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information according to a plurality of stages from high to low set according to the high and low of the possibility;
means for limiting a direction of change in the display mode of the pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the higher side;
a pre-executed hold display means for displaying a pre-executed hold display area (pre-executed hold display area Dz) capable of displaying a predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game after the game control means executes the game operation as pre-executed hold display information (pre-executed hold display icon Z);
Equipped with
The display mode of the pending display information includes at least a first display mode (e.g., a green display color) and a second display mode (e.g., a red display color) which is a higher level than the first display mode among the plurality of levels,
The display shape of the executed hold display information is different from the display shape of the unexecuted hold display information,
When specific hold display information moves to the already executed hold display area, under specific conditions (when the variable execution hold display icon Y moves to the already executed hold display area, all of the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas Dz are aligned in the same display color), it is more advantageous for the player when the specific hold display information is displayed in the first display mode than when it is displayed in the second display mode (already executed hold notice).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, in the unplayed pending display area, the number of unplayed pending display information corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed, and in the already played pending display area, the game time control means The hold display information corresponding to the game round after the game round operation is executed is displayed as the already executed hold display information. When specific pending display information moves to the executed pending display area, under certain conditions, the specific pending display information is displayed in the first display mode more than in the second display mode. It is more advantageous for the player if it is displayed. For this reason, even if the first display mode has a lower possibility that the special information corresponding to the pending display information satisfies the predetermined condition than the second display mode, under certain conditions, the pending display information may be displayed in the second display mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the first display mode remains the same without changing the display mode, and the game moves to the executed/pending display area. In addition, the first display mode of the pending display information may include special information about the advantage for the player that is different from the stage of the possibility that the special information set for the first display mode satisfies the predetermined condition. It can give meaning. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the display shape of the executed pending display information is different from the display shape of the unexecuted pending display information, it becomes easy to distinguish between the unexecuted pending display information and the executed pending display information. For this reason, it becomes easy to determine that specific pending display information has moved from the unexecuted pending display area, through the variable execution pending display area, to the executed pending display area. Therefore, by improving visibility, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic wD group>
The feature wD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature wD1]
Ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired when a game ball enters the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game;
A game time control means for controlling the game time operation when one game time operation is defined as the start of the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means and the end of the game operation. ,
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is determined from the highest to the lowest set corresponding to the level of the possibility. Suspension changing means suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted suspension display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting the direction of change in the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
A pre-execution pending display area (already executed pending display icon Z) in which a predetermined number of pending display information corresponding to the gaming session after execution of the gaming session operation by the gaming session control means can be displayed as executed pending display information (already executed pending display icon Z). an executed pending display means for displaying a pending display area Dz);
a gaming state transition means capable of shifting the gaming state of the gaming machine from a first gaming state to a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state;
Equipped with
The display mode of the unexecuted pending display information includes a first display mode (for example, green display color) and a second display mode (for example, a green display color), which is a higher stage than the first display mode among the plurality of stages. for example, a red display color),
When specific pending display information moves to the executed pending display area, under certain conditions (by moving the variable execution pending display icon Y to the executed pending display area, a predetermined number of executed pending display In a situation where all executed pending display icons Z displayed in area Dz are arranged in the same display color), when the specific pending display information is displayed in the second display mode It is more advantageous for the player if the game is displayed in the first display mode (play pending notice),
In the second gaming state, when the specific pending display information moves to the executed pending display area, the specific pending display information is displayed in the first display mode compared to the case where the specific pending display information is displayed in the second display mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for not executing a control that is more advantageous to a player when displayed in the display mode.

According to this feature, the unexecuted pending display area displays a number of pieces of unexecuted pending display information corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and the executed pending display area displays pending display information corresponding to the play times after the play times control means executes the play times operation as executed pending display information. When a specific pending display information is transferred to the executed pending display area, under certain conditions, it is more advantageous for the player if the specific pending display information is displayed in the first display mode than in the second display mode. For this reason, even if the first display mode is one in which the possibility that the special information corresponding to the pending display information satisfies a predetermined condition is lower than that in the second display mode, under certain conditions, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the pending display information will not change to the second display mode but will remain in the first display mode and be transferred to the executed pending display area. In addition, the first display mode of the pending display information can be given a special meaning of advantage to the player that is different from the stage of the possibility that the special information set for the first display mode satisfies the predetermined condition. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, in the second game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, when the specific reserved display information moves to the executed reserved display area, the control is not executed so that the player is more advantageous when the specific reserved display information is displayed in the first display mode than when it is displayed in the second display mode. The second game state is already more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the need for the above-mentioned new control is lower than in the first game state. Therefore, in this feature, the control can be simplified by not executing the above-mentioned new control in the second game state, and in the first game state, the interest in the game can be improved by executing the above-mentioned new control such that the player is more advantageous when the specific reserved display information moves to the executed reserved display area than when it is displayed in the second display mode.

<Features Group E>
The group of features wE is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature wE1]
A ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the ball entry means;
An acquired information storage means (first reserve area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number;
an unexecuted hold display means for displaying an unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icons H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
A determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win) for each game;
a game operation control means for controlling a game operation when a game operation is defined as one game operation from the start of the game operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
a hold changing means for indicating the possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition by changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information according to a plurality of stages from high to low set according to the high and low of the possibility;
means for limiting a direction of change in the display mode of the pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the higher side;
a pre-executed hold display means for displaying a pre-executed hold display area (pre-executed hold display area Dz) capable of displaying a predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game after the game control means executes the game operation as pre-executed hold display information (pre-executed hold display icon Z);
Equipped with
The display mode of the pending display information includes at least a first display mode (e.g., a green display color) and a second display mode (e.g., a red display color) which is a higher level than the first display mode among the plurality of levels,
the predetermined number of the already-executed pending display information that can be displayed in the already-executed pending display area is fixed;
When specific hold display information moves to the already executed hold display area, under specific conditions (when the variable execution hold display icon Y moves to the already executed hold display area, all of the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas Dz are aligned in the same display color), it is more advantageous for the player when the specific hold display information is displayed in the first display mode than when it is displayed in the second display mode (already executed hold notice).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, in the unplayed pending display area, the number of unplayed pending display information corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed, and in the already played pending display area, the game time control means The hold display information corresponding to the game round after the game round operation is executed is displayed as the already executed hold display information. When specific pending display information moves to the executed pending display area, under certain conditions, the specific pending display information is displayed in the first display mode more than in the second display mode. It is more advantageous for the player if it is displayed. For this reason, even if the first display mode has a lower possibility that the special information corresponding to the pending display information satisfies the predetermined condition than the second display mode, under certain conditions, the pending display information may be displayed in the second display mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the first display mode remains the same without changing the display mode, and the game moves to the executed/pending display area. In addition, the first display mode of the pending display information may include special information about the advantage for the player that is different from the stage of the possibility that the special information set for the first display mode satisfies the predetermined condition. It can give meaning. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, since the predetermined number of already executed pending display information that can be displayed in the already executed pending display area is fixed, the difficulty level at which the display mode of all already executed pending display information displayed in the already executed pending display area is the same is fixed. This makes it possible to prevent the difficulty level from changing and giving the player unnecessary expectations or disappointment.

<Characteristic wF group>
The feature wF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature wF1]
A ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the ball entry means;
An acquired information storage means (first reserve area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number;
an unexecuted hold display means for displaying an unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icons H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
A determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win) for each game;
a game operation control means for controlling a game operation when a game operation is defined as one game operation from the start of the game operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
a hold changing means for indicating the possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition by changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information according to a plurality of stages from high to low set according to the high and low of the possibility;
means for limiting a direction of change in the display mode of the pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the higher side;
a pre-executed hold display means for displaying a pre-executed hold display area (pre-executed hold display area Dz) capable of displaying a predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game after the game control means executes the game operation as pre-executed hold display information (pre-executed hold display icon Z);
a means for erasing the already-executed pending display information displayed in the already-executed pending display area based on the establishment of an erasure condition (erasing the already-executed pending display icon Z after a predetermined time has elapsed since it is determined that no game is being played);
Equipped with
The display mode of the pending display information includes at least a first display mode (e.g., a green display color) and a second display mode (e.g., a red display color) which is a higher level than the first display mode among the plurality of levels,
When specific hold display information moves to the already executed hold display area, under specific conditions (when the variable execution hold display icon Y moves to the already executed hold display area, all of the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas Dz are aligned in the same display color), it is more advantageous for the player when the specific hold display information is displayed in the first display mode than when it is displayed in the second display mode (already executed hold notice).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, in the unplayed pending display area, the number of unplayed pending display information corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed, and in the already played pending display area, the game time control means The hold display information corresponding to the game round after the game round operation is executed is displayed as the already executed hold display information. When specific pending display information moves to the executed pending display area, under certain conditions, the specific pending display information is displayed in the first display mode more than in the second display mode. It is more advantageous for the player if it is displayed. For this reason, even if the first display mode has a lower possibility that the special information corresponding to the pending display information satisfies the predetermined condition than the second display mode, under certain conditions, the pending display information may It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the first display mode remains the same without changing the display mode, and the game moves to the executed/pending display area. In addition, the first display mode of the pending display information may include special information about the advantage for the player that is different from the stage of the possibility that the special information set for the first display mode satisfies the predetermined condition. It can give meaning. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, by erasing the play pending display information displayed in the play pending display area based on the fulfillment of the deletion condition, when a player is replaced, the game by the previous player can be deleted. It is possible to prevent the stored execution/pending display information from remaining. For this reason, when a player is replaced, it is possible to start the game with no played pending display information in the played pending display area, and the played pending display information remains in the played pending display area. There is no need for the player to feel troubled.

<Features wG group>
The group of features wG is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature wG1]
A ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the ball entry means;
An acquired information storage means (first reserve area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number;
an unexecuted hold display means for displaying an unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icons H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
A determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win) for each game;
a game operation control means for controlling a game operation when a game operation is defined as one game operation from the start of the game operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
a hold changing means for indicating the possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition by changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information according to a plurality of stages from high to low set according to the high and low of the possibility;
means for limiting a direction of change in the display mode of the pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the higher side;
a pre-executed hold display means for displaying a pre-executed hold display area (pre-executed hold display area Dz) capable of displaying a predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game after the game control means executes the game operation as pre-executed hold display information (pre-executed hold display icon Z);
Equipped with
The display mode of the pending display information includes at least a first display mode (e.g., a green display color) and a second display mode (e.g., a red display color) which is a higher level than the first display mode among the plurality of levels,
When specific hold display information moves to the already executed hold display area, under specific conditions (such as when the variable execution hold display icon Y moves to the already executed hold display area, causing all of the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas Dz to have the same display color), it is more advantageous for the player when the specific hold display information is displayed in the first display mode than when it is displayed in the second display mode (already executed hold notice),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for executing an effect (female character effect setting processing) indicating a high advantage for the player when the specific pending display information moves to the already executed pending display area in the first display mode under the specific condition.

According to this feature, the unexecuted pending display area displays a number of pieces of unexecuted pending display information corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and the executed pending display area displays pending display information corresponding to the play times after the play times control means executes the play times operation as executed pending display information. When a specific pending display information is transferred to the executed pending display area, under certain conditions, it is more advantageous for the player if the specific pending display information is displayed in the first display mode than in the second display mode. For this reason, even if the first display mode is one in which the possibility that the special information corresponding to the pending display information satisfies a predetermined condition is lower than that in the second display mode, under certain conditions, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the pending display information will not change to the second display mode but will remain in the first display mode and be transferred to the executed pending display area. In addition, the first display mode of the pending display information can be given a special meaning of advantage to the player that is different from the stage of the possibility that the special information set for the first display mode satisfies the predetermined condition. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, when specific pending display information moves to the executed pending display area in the first display mode under specific conditions, an effect indicating that it is highly advantageous for the player is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation.

<Characteristics of the WH group>
The group of features wH is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its fifteenth modification.

[Feature wH1]
A ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the ball entry means;
An acquired information storage means (first reserve area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number;
an unexecuted hold display means for displaying an unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icons H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
A determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win) for each game;
A game operation control means for controlling a game operation (a variable game that varies a pattern) when a game operation that notifies a result of the judgment by the judgment means is performed from the start of the game operation to the end of the game operation, the game operation being regarded as one game operation;
a special game state generating means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to a player after the end of the game operation when the determining means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
a hold changing means for indicating the possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition by changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information according to a plurality of stages from high to low set according to the high and low of the possibility;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the higher side;
a pre-executed hold display means for displaying a pre-executed hold display area (pre-executed hold display area Dz) capable of displaying a predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game after the game control means executes the game operation as pre-executed hold display information (pre-executed hold display icon Z);
Equipped with
The display mode of the pending display information includes at least a first display mode (white color) which is the lowest of the plurality of stages, and a second display mode (a color higher than white, for example, blue color) which is a stage higher than the first display mode,
When all of the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is in the second display mode, and all of the not yet executed hold display information displayed in the not yet executed hold display area is in the first display mode, the game operation in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game operation (a predetermined premium reach performance can be executed to display a predetermined premium image).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, when all of the executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of executed hold display areas is in the second display mode (blue) and all of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is in the first display mode (white), a game action of a predetermined mode can be displayed as a game round action, so that the player can have a new and unprecedented sense of expectation that all of the executed hold display information displayed in the executed hold display areas will be in the second display mode and all of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area will be in the first display mode.

In particular, in conventional gaming machines, even if the pending display information corresponding to a play of a play operation is displayed in a display mode that is likely to satisfy a predetermined condition after the play operation is performed, if the pending display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the play operation ends, the display mode becomes meaningless.

However, according to this feature, the hold display information corresponding to the game round after the execution of the game round operation is displayed as the played hold display information, and all the held hold display information that is displayed in the predetermined number of played hold display areas. When the display information is in the second display mode and all the unplayed pending display information displayed in the unplayed pending display area is in the first display mode, a gaming operation in a predetermined mode is displayed as a gaming round operation. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the play pending display information corresponding to the game round in which the game round operation ended without satisfying the predetermined conditions, and it is possible to attract the attention of the players. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features wH2]
The gaming machine described in feature wH1,
All the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas is in the first display mode (white), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the second display mode (blue), the gaming machine is capable of displaying a result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state (an image announcing a jackpot win) as a result of the gaming round. .

According to this feature, all the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas is the first display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is the second display mode, the result corresponding to the occurrence of the special game state can be displayed as the result of the game, so that the player can see all the completed plays displayed in the played pending display area. We have created a new expectation that has never existed before, such as wanting the pending display information to be aligned in the first display format and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area to be aligned in the second display format. You can hold it.

In particular, in conventional gaming machines, after the execution of a game round operation, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round operation is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy a predetermined condition. However, if the game round ends without the pending display information satisfying the predetermined conditions, the display mode will lose its meaning.

However, according to this feature, when the pending display information corresponding to the play round after the play round operation is executed is displayed as executed pending display information, and all of the executed pending display information displayed in a predetermined number of executed pending display areas is in the first display mode, and all of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the second display mode, a result corresponding to the occurrence of a special play state can be displayed as the result of the play round. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the executed pending display information corresponding to the play round in which the play round operation has ended without satisfying the predetermined conditions, and to attract the player's interest. As a result, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature wH3]
The gaming machine according to feature wH1 or feature wH2,
A gaming machine comprising means for changing the display mode of the executed pending display information in the executed pending display area (changing the display mode of the executed pending display icon Z in the executed pending display area Dz). .

According to this feature, since it is provided with a means for changing the display mode of the executed pending display information in the executed pending display area, it is possible to tell the player, for example, that the executed pending display information is displayed in a predetermined number of executed pending display areas. Even in a situation where the display format of all executed pending display information is not the same, the display format of the executed pending display information displayed in the executed pending display area may be different. It is possible to create a sense of expectation that this will change and all the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas will be arranged in the same display mode. Then, the display mode of the executed pending display information actually displayed in the executed pending display area changes, and all the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas are displayed in the same way. If the format is all the same, it will bring great joy to the player, and there is also an additional requirement that all unplayed pending display information displayed in the unplayed pending display area should be arranged in the same display format. It can give a sense of expectation.

[Feature wH4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wH1 to wH3,
A gaming machine characterized in that the already executed hold display information in the already executed hold display area is displayed in a display manner different from the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area.

According to this feature, the executed hold display information in the executed hold display area is displayed in a different display format from the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area, so that the player can be made aware that the executed hold display information is different from the unexecuted hold display information. As a result, when executed hold display information is being displayed, it is possible to avoid the player misunderstanding that there is unexecuted hold information that has not yet been played.

[Features wH5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wH1 to feature wH4,
A gaming machine characterized in that the number of pieces of completed execution pending display information displayed in the completed execution pending display area is a constant number.

According to this feature, the number of already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area is fixed, so the difficulty level at which all of the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area is aligned in the same display mode is fixed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the difficulty level changing and giving the player unnecessary expectations or disappointment.

[Feature WH6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wH1 to wH5,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for erasing the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area based on the satisfaction of an erasure condition (erasing based on the satisfaction of the erasure condition that a predetermined time has elapsed).

According to this feature, since the executed pending display information displayed in the executed pending display area is erased based on the fulfillment of the deletion condition, for example, the executed pending display information displayed in the executed pending display area is It is possible to prevent the next player from feeling bothered by the execution pending display information remaining.

Specifically, for example, a case will be described in which a configuration is adopted in which the deletion condition is satisfied when no game is played for a predetermined period of time in the gaming machine. When this configuration is adopted, if a player who was playing on the gaming machine stops playing, and the next player starts playing on the gaming machine after a predetermined period of time, the previous game The played/pending display information stored by the player's games is erased at the timing when the next player starts playing the game. Therefore, the next player does not feel bothered by the fact that the played pending display information stored by the previous player's game remains in the played pending display area.

In other words, this feature makes it possible to provide the next player with a situation in which they can start playing without there being any already-executed pending display information from the previous player's play in the already-executed pending display area.

[Feature WH7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wH1 to wH6,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for executing a predetermined suggestive effect (an effect in which a female character WM appears) when all of the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is in the second display mode and all of the not yet executed hold display information displayed in the not yet executed hold display area is in the first display mode.

According to this feature, all the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas is the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is the first display mode, since it is provided with a means for executing a predetermined suggestive effect, it is clearly shown to the player that all executed pending displays displayed in a predetermined number of executed pending display areas are displayed. It is possible to recognize that the condition that the information is in the second display mode and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode is satisfied, and the condition is It is possible to make the students recognize that there is a special meaning in the fact that this has been established.

[Feature WH8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wH1 to wH7,
The second display mode (blue) is a display mode that is one level higher than the first display mode (white) among the plurality of levels.

According to this feature, the second display mode is a display mode that is one level higher than the first display mode among the plurality of levels. In other words, the second display mode is the display mode at the second lowest level. Generally, even if the pending display information in the first display mode at the lowest level or the second display mode at the second lowest level is displayed, the player does not have great expectations.

However, with this feature, when the amount of pending display information displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode increases, and all of the executed pending display information displayed in the executed pending display area is in the second display mode, and all of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode, a game operation of a predetermined mode can be displayed as a game round operation.

Therefore, according to this feature, even in a situation where the reserved display information in the first display mode or the second display mode, for which the player does not generally have high expectations, is displayed, the player will have a sense of expectation that perhaps the reserved display information in the first display mode or the second display mode will continue to increase, and as a result, all of the executed reserved display information displayed in the executed reserved display area will be in the second display mode, and all of the unexecuted reserved display information displayed in the unexecuted reserved display area will be in the first display mode. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to give special meaning to the reserved display information in the first display mode or the second display mode, for which the player does not generally have high expectations, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature wH9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wH1 to wH8,
A gaming machine characterized in that the possibility of the special game state occurring varies depending on the type of display mode of the already executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed pending display areas.

According to this feature, the possibility that a special gaming state will occur differs depending on the type of display mode of the played pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of played pending display areas. It is important to check not only whether all the executed pending display information displayed in the display area is arranged in the same display format, but also the type of display mode of the executed pending display information displayed in a predetermined number of executed pending display areas. It is possible to draw the attention of the players to whether the game is complete, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature WH10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wH1 to wH9,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a means for changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area (changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display icon H in the unexecuted hold display area Dh).

According to this feature, since the device is provided with a means for changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area, for example, even in a situation where the display modes of all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area do not match up to the same display mode, the player can be made to feel a sense of expectation that perhaps the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area will change and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area will match up to the same display mode. And when the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area actually changes and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area matches up to the same display mode, the player can be given great joy and can be made to feel even more expectation that all the already-executed hold display information displayed in the already-executed hold display area will match up to the same display mode.

<Features group I>
The group of features wI is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its fifteenth modification.

[Feature wI1]
Ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired when a game ball enters the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game;
If the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation is defined as one game rotation operation, the corresponding game rotation operation (variable game in which symbols are varied) a game time control means for controlling the
special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the end of the gaming operation when the determining means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is determined from the highest to the lowest set corresponding to the level of the possibility. Suspension changing means suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted suspension display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting the direction of change in the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
A pre-execution pending display area (already executed pending display icon Z) in which a predetermined number of pending display information corresponding to the gaming session after execution of the gaming session operation by the gaming session control means can be displayed as executed pending display information (already executed pending display icon Z). an executed pending display means for displaying a pending display area Dz);
means for changing the display mode of the executed pending display information in the executed pending display area (changes the display mode of the executed pending display icon Z in the executed pending display area Dz);
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, a first display mode (white) which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and a second display mode (white) which is a higher stage than the first display mode. a color higher than white, such as blue),
All the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas is in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the second display mode. In the case of display mode 1, the gaming operation in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the gaming operation (a predetermined premium reach effect can be executed and a predetermined premium image can be displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, when all of the executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of executed hold display areas is in the second display mode (blue) and all of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is in the first display mode (white), a game action of a predetermined mode can be displayed as a game round action, so that the player can have a new and unprecedented sense of expectation that all of the executed hold display information displayed in the executed hold display areas will be in the second display mode and all of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area will be in the first display mode.

In particular, in conventional gaming machines, even if the pending display information corresponding to a play of a play operation is displayed in a display mode that is likely to satisfy a predetermined condition after the play operation is performed, if the pending display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the play operation ends, the display mode becomes meaningless.

However, according to this feature, the hold display information corresponding to the game round after the execution of the game round operation is displayed as the played hold display information, and all the held hold display information that is displayed in the predetermined number of played hold display areas. When the display information is in the second display mode and all the unplayed pending display information displayed in the unplayed pending display area is in the first display mode, a gaming operation in a predetermined mode is displayed as a gaming round operation. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the play pending display information corresponding to the game round in which the game round operation ended without satisfying the predetermined conditions, and it is possible to attract the attention of the players. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, since a means for changing the display mode of the executed hold display information in the executed hold display area is provided, the player can be made to feel a sense of expectation that, even in a situation where the display modes of all the executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed hold display areas are not aligned in the same display mode, the display mode of the executed hold display information displayed in the executed hold display area may change and all the executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed hold display areas may be aligned in the same display mode. And when the display mode of the executed hold display information displayed in the executed hold display area actually changes and all the executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed hold display areas is aligned in the same display mode, the player can be given great joy and can be made to feel even more expectation that all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area will also be aligned in the same display mode.

<Characteristic wJ group>
The feature wJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the 12th embodiment and its 15th modification.

[Feature wJ1]
A ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the ball entry means;
An acquired information storage means (first reserve area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number;
an unexecuted hold display means for displaying an unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icons H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
A determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win) for each game;
A game operation control means for controlling a game operation (a variable game that varies a pattern) when a game operation that notifies a result of the judgment by the judgment means is performed from the start of the game operation to the end of the game operation, the game operation being regarded as one game operation;
a special game state generating means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to a player after the end of the game operation when the determining means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
a hold changing means for indicating the possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition by changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information according to a plurality of stages from high to low set according to the high and low of the possibility;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the higher side;
a pre-executed hold display means for displaying a pre-executed hold display area (pre-executed hold display area Dz) capable of displaying a predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game after the game control means executes the game operation as pre-executed hold display information (pre-executed hold display icon Z);
Equipped with
The display mode of the pending display information includes at least a first display mode (white color) which is the lowest of the plurality of stages, and a second display mode (a color higher than white, for example, blue color) which is a stage higher than the first display mode,
The already-executed hold display information in the already-executed hold display area is displayed in a display manner different from the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area,
When all of the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is in the second display mode, and all of the not yet executed hold display information displayed in the not yet executed hold display area is in the first display mode, the game operation in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game operation (a predetermined premium reach performance can be executed to display a predetermined premium image).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, all the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas is in the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area When the pending display information is in the first display mode (white), a predetermined mode of gaming operation can be displayed as the gaming operation, so that the player can see all of the previously executed pending display area. There is a new expectation that has never existed before, such as wanting the execution pending display information to be aligned in the second display format and all the pending execution display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area to be aligned in the first display format. can be held.

In particular, in conventional gaming machines, after the execution of a game round operation, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round operation is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy a predetermined condition. However, if the game round ends without the pending display information satisfying the predetermined conditions, the display mode will lose its meaning.

However, according to this feature, when the pending display information corresponding to the game round after the game round operation is executed is displayed as executed pending display information, and all of the executed pending display information displayed in a predetermined number of executed pending display areas is in the second display mode, and all of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode, a game operation of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game round operation. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the executed pending display information corresponding to a game round in which the game operation has ended without satisfying a predetermined condition, and to attract the player's interest. As a result, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the executed hold display information in the executed hold display area is displayed in a different display mode from the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area, so that the player can be made aware that the executed hold display information is different from the unexecuted hold display information. As a result, when executed hold display information is being displayed, it is possible to avoid the player misunderstanding that there is unexecuted hold information that has not yet been played.

<Characteristic wK group>
The feature wK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the 12th embodiment and its 15th modification.

[Feature wK1]
Ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired when a game ball enters the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game;
If the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation is defined as one game rotation operation, the corresponding game rotation operation (variable game in which symbols are varied) a game time control means for controlling the
special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the end of the gaming operation when the determining means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is determined from the highest to the lowest set corresponding to the level of the possibility. Suspension changing means suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted suspension display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting the direction of change in the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
A pre-execution pending display area (already executed pending display icon Z) in which a predetermined number of pending display information corresponding to the gaming session after execution of the gaming session operation by the gaming session control means can be displayed as executed pending display information (already executed pending display icon Z). an executed pending display means for displaying a pending display area Dz);
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, a first display mode (white) which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and a second display mode (white) which is a higher stage than the first display mode. a color higher than white, such as blue),
The executed pending display information displayed in the executed pending display area is a constant number,
All the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas is in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the second display mode. In the case of display mode 1, the gaming operation in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the gaming operation (a predetermined premium reach effect can be executed and a predetermined premium image can be displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, when all of the executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of executed hold display areas is in the second display mode (blue) and all of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is in the first display mode (white), a game action of a predetermined mode can be displayed as a game round action, so that the player can have a new and unprecedented sense of expectation that all of the executed hold display information displayed in the executed hold display areas will be in the second display mode and all of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area will be in the first display mode.

In particular, in conventional gaming machines, after the execution of a game round operation, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round operation is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy a predetermined condition. However, if the game round ends without the pending display information satisfying the predetermined conditions, the display mode will lose its meaning.

However, according to this feature, when the pending display information corresponding to the game round after the game round operation is executed is displayed as executed pending display information, and all of the executed pending display information displayed in a predetermined number of executed pending display areas is in the second display mode, and all of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode, a game operation of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game round operation. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the executed pending display information corresponding to a game round in which the game operation has ended without satisfying a predetermined condition, and to attract the player's interest. As a result, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, since the number of executed pending display information displayed in the executed pending display area is a fixed number, all executed pending display information displayed in the executed pending display area is displayed in the same manner. The difficulty level of all the items will be constant. Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving the player an unnecessary sense of anticipation or disappointment due to a change in the difficulty level.

<Characteristic wL group>
The feature wL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the 12th embodiment and its 15th modification.

[Feature wL1]
A ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the ball entry means;
An acquired information storage means (first reserve area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number;
an unexecuted hold display means for displaying an unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icons H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
A determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win) for each game;
A game operation control means for controlling a game operation (a variable game that varies a pattern) when a game operation that notifies a result of the judgment by the judgment means is performed from the start of the game operation to the end of the game operation, the game operation being regarded as one game operation;
a special game state generating means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to a player after the game operation ends when the determining means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
a hold changing means for indicating the possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition by changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information according to a plurality of stages from high to low set according to the high and low of the possibility;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the higher side;
a pre-executed hold display means for displaying a pre-executed hold display area (pre-executed hold display area Dz) capable of displaying a predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game after the game control means executes the game operation as pre-executed hold display information (pre-executed hold display icon Z);
a means for erasing the executed pending display information displayed in the executed pending display area based on the establishment of an erasure condition (erasing based on the establishment of an erasure condition that a predetermined time has elapsed);
Equipped with
The display mode of the pending display information includes at least a first display mode (white color) which is the lowest of the plurality of stages, and a second display mode (a color higher than white, for example, blue color) which is a stage higher than the first display mode,
When all of the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is in the second display mode, and all of the not yet executed hold display information displayed in the not yet executed hold display area is in the first display mode, the game operation in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game operation (a predetermined premium reach performance can be executed to display a predetermined premium image).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, all the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas is in the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area When the pending display information is in the first display mode (white), a predetermined mode of gaming operation can be displayed as the gaming operation, so that the player can see all of the previously executed pending display area. There is a new expectation that has never existed before, such as wanting the execution pending display information to be aligned in the second display format and all the pending execution display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area to be aligned in the first display format. can be held.

In particular, in conventional gaming machines, after the execution of a game round operation, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round operation is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy a predetermined condition. However, if the game round ends without the pending display information satisfying the predetermined conditions, the display mode will lose its meaning.

However, according to this feature, when the pending display information corresponding to the game round after the game round operation is executed is displayed as executed pending display information, and all of the executed pending display information displayed in a predetermined number of executed pending display areas is in the second display mode, and all of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode, a game operation of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game round operation. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the executed pending display information corresponding to a game round in which the game operation has ended without satisfying a predetermined condition, and to attract the player's interest. As a result, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the executed hold display information displayed in the executed hold display area is erased based on the establishment of an erasure condition, so it is possible to prevent the next player from feeling annoyed that the executed hold display information from the previous player's play remains in the executed hold display area, for example.

Specifically, for example, a case will be described in which a configuration is adopted in which the deletion condition is satisfied when no game is played for a predetermined period of time in the gaming machine. When this configuration is adopted, if a player who was playing on the gaming machine stops playing, and the next player starts playing on the gaming machine after a predetermined period of time, the previous game The played/pending display information stored by the player's games is erased at the timing when the next player starts playing the game. Therefore, the next player does not feel bothered by the fact that the played pending display information stored by the previous player's game remains in the played pending display area.

In other words, this feature makes it possible to provide the next player with a situation in which they can start playing without there being any already-executed pending display information from the previous player's play in the already-executed pending display area.

<Characteristic wM group>
The feature wM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the 12th embodiment and its 15th modification.

[Feature wM1]
A ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the ball entry means;
An acquired information storage means (first reserve area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number;
an unexecuted hold display means for displaying an unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icons H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
A determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win) for each game;
A game operation control means for controlling a game operation (a variable game that varies a pattern) when a game operation that notifies a result of the judgment by the judgment means is performed from the start of the game operation to the end of the game operation, the game operation being regarded as one game operation;
a special game state generating means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to a player after the game operation ends when the determining means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
a hold changing means for indicating the possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition by changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information according to a plurality of stages from high to low set according to the high and low of the possibility;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the higher side;
a pre-executed hold display means for displaying a pre-executed hold display area (pre-executed hold display area Dz) capable of displaying a predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game after the game control means executes the game operation as pre-executed hold display information (pre-executed hold display icon Z);
Equipped with
The display mode of the pending display information includes at least a first display mode (white color) which is the lowest of the plurality of stages, and a second display mode (a color higher than white, for example, blue color) which is a stage higher than the first display mode,
When all of the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is in the second display mode and all of the not yet executed hold display information displayed in the not yet executed hold display area is in the first display mode, the game operation in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game operation (a predetermined premium reach performance can be executed to display a predetermined premium image),
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for executing a predetermined suggestive effect (an effect in which a female character WM appears) when all of the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is in the second display mode and all of the not yet executed hold display information displayed in the not yet executed hold display area is in the first display mode.

According to this feature, all the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas is in the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area When the pending display information is in the first display mode (white), a predetermined mode of gaming operation can be displayed as the gaming operation, so that the player can see all of the previously executed pending display area. There is a new expectation that has never existed before, such as wanting the execution pending display information to be aligned in the second display format and all the pending execution display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area to be aligned in the first display format. can be held.

In particular, in conventional gaming machines, even if the pending display information corresponding to a play of a play operation is displayed in a display mode that is likely to satisfy a predetermined condition after the play operation is performed, if the pending display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the play operation ends, the display mode becomes meaningless.

However, according to this feature, the hold display information corresponding to the game round after the execution of the game round operation is displayed as the played hold display information, and all the held hold display information that is displayed in the predetermined number of played hold display areas. When the display information is in the second display mode and all the unplayed pending display information displayed in the unplayed pending display area is in the first display mode, a gaming operation in a predetermined mode is displayed as a gaming round operation. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the play pending display information corresponding to the game round in which the game round operation ended without satisfying the predetermined conditions, and it is possible to attract the attention of the players. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, a means is provided for executing a predetermined suggestive performance when all of the executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of executed hold display areas is in the second display mode and all of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is in the first display mode, so that the player can be made to clearly recognize that the condition that all of the executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of executed hold display areas is in the second display mode and all of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is in the first display mode has been met, and can be made to recognize that there is something special about the meeting of this condition.

<Characteristic wN group>
The feature wN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the 12th embodiment and its 15th modification.

[Feature wN1]
Ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired when a game ball enters the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game;
If the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation is defined as one game rotation operation, the corresponding game rotation operation (variable game in which symbols are varied) a game time control means for controlling the
special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the end of the gaming operation when the determining means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is determined from the highest to the lowest set corresponding to the level of the possibility. Suspension changing means suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted suspension display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting the direction of change in the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
A pre-execution pending display area (already executed pending display icon Z) in which a predetermined number of pending display information corresponding to the gaming session after execution of the gaming session operation by the gaming session control means can be displayed as executed pending display information (already executed pending display icon Z). an executed pending display means for displaying a pending display area Dz);
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, a first display mode (white) which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and a second display mode (white) which is a higher stage than the first display mode. a color higher than white, such as blue),
The second display mode (blue) is a display mode at a higher level than the first display mode (white) among the plurality of stages,
All the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas is in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the second display mode. In the case of display mode 1, the gaming operation in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the gaming operation (a predetermined premium reach effect can be executed and a predetermined premium image can be displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, when all of the executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of executed hold display areas is in the second display mode (blue) and all of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is in the first display mode (white), a game action of a predetermined mode can be displayed as a game round action, so that the player can have a new and unprecedented sense of expectation that all of the executed hold display information displayed in the executed hold display areas will be in the second display mode and all of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area will be in the first display mode.

In particular, in conventional gaming machines, even if the pending display information corresponding to a play of a play operation is displayed in a display mode that is likely to satisfy a predetermined condition after the play operation is performed, if the pending display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the play operation ends, the display mode becomes meaningless.

However, according to this feature, when the pending display information corresponding to the game round after the game round operation is executed is displayed as executed pending display information, and all of the executed pending display information displayed in a predetermined number of executed pending display areas is in the second display mode, and all of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode, a game operation of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game round operation. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the executed pending display information corresponding to a game round in which the game operation has ended without satisfying a predetermined condition, and to attract the player's interest. As a result, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the second display mode is a display mode at a higher level than the first display mode among the plurality of levels. In other words, the second display mode is the display mode at the second lowest level. Generally, even if the pending display information in the first display mode at the lowest level or the second display mode at the second lowest level is displayed, the player does not have great expectations.

However, with this feature, when the amount of pending display information displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode increases, and all of the executed pending display information displayed in the executed pending display area is in the second display mode, and all of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode, a game operation of a predetermined mode can be displayed as a game round operation.

Therefore, according to this feature, even in a situation where pending display information is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode, in which the player does not generally have high expectations, the game Perhaps the pending display information in the first display mode and the second display mode will continue to increase, and as a result, all the executed pending display information displayed in the executed pending display area will be changed to the second display mode. This creates a sense of expectation that all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area will be aligned in the first display mode. As a result, according to this feature, special significance can be given to the pending display information in the first display mode and the second display mode, for which players generally do not have great expectations. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic wO group>
The feature wO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the 12th embodiment and its 15th modification.

[Feature wO1]
Ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired when a game ball enters the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game;
If the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation is defined as one game rotation operation, the corresponding game rotation operation (variable game in which symbols are varied) a game time control means for controlling the
special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the end of the gaming operation when the determining means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is determined from the highest to the lowest set corresponding to the level of the possibility. Suspension changing means suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted suspension display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting the direction of change in the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
A pre-execution pending display area (already executed pending display icon Z) in which a predetermined number of pending display information corresponding to the gaming session after execution of the gaming session operation by the gaming session control means can be displayed as executed pending display information (already executed pending display icon Z). an executed pending display means for displaying a pending display area Dz);
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, a first display mode (white) which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and a second display mode (white) which is a higher stage than the first display mode. a color higher than white, such as blue),
All the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas is in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the second display mode. In the case of display mode 1, the game operation in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game round operation (a predetermined premium reach effect can be executed and a predetermined premium image can be displayed);
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability that the special game state will occur varies depending on the type of display mode of the completed execution pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of completed execution pending display areas.

According to this feature, all the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas is in the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area When the pending display information is in the first display mode (white), a predetermined mode of gaming operation can be displayed as the gaming operation, so that the player can see all of the previously executed pending display area. There is a new expectation that has never existed before, such as wanting the execution pending display information to be aligned in the second display format and all the pending execution display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area to be aligned in the first display format. can be held.

In particular, in conventional gaming machines, even if the pending display information corresponding to a play of a play operation is displayed in a display mode that is likely to satisfy a predetermined condition after the play operation is performed, if the pending display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the play operation ends, the display mode becomes meaningless.

However, according to this feature, the hold display information corresponding to the game round after the execution of the game round operation is displayed as the played hold display information, and all the held hold display information that is displayed in the predetermined number of played hold display areas. When the display information is in the second display mode and all the unplayed pending display information displayed in the unplayed pending display area is in the first display mode, a gaming operation in a predetermined mode is displayed as a gaming round operation. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the play pending display information corresponding to the game round in which the game round operation ended without satisfying the predetermined conditions, and it is possible to attract the attention of the players. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the possibility of a special game state occurring differs depending on the type of display mode of the executed hold display information displayed in the specified number of executed hold display areas, so it is possible to attract the player's interest not only in whether the executed hold display information displayed in the specified number of executed hold display areas all have the same display mode, but also in what type of display mode the executed hold display information displayed in the specified number of executed hold display areas has, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

<Characteristics wP group>
The group of features wP is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its fifteenth modification.

[Feature wP1]
Ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired when a game ball enters the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game;
If the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation is defined as one game rotation operation, the corresponding game rotation operation (variable game in which symbols are varied) a game time control means for controlling the
special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the end of the gaming operation when the determining means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is determined from the highest to the lowest set corresponding to the level of the possibility. Suspension changing means suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted suspension display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting the direction of change in the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
A pre-execution pending display area (already executed pending display icon Z) in which a predetermined number of pending display information corresponding to the gaming session after execution of the gaming session operation by the gaming session control means can be displayed as executed pending display information (already executed pending display icon Z). an executed pending display means for displaying a pending display area Dz);
means for changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information in the unexecuted pending display area (changes the display mode of the unexecuted pending display icon H in the unexecuted pending display area Dh);
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, a first display mode (white) which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and a second display mode (white) which is a higher stage than the first display mode. a color higher than white, such as blue),
All the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas is in the second display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the second display mode. In the case of display mode 1, the gaming operation in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the gaming operation (a predetermined premium reach effect can be executed and a predetermined premium image can be displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, all the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas is in the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area When the pending display information is in the first display mode (white), a predetermined mode of gaming operation can be displayed as the gaming operation, so that the player can see all of the previously executed pending display area. There is a new expectation that has never existed before, such as wanting the execution pending display information to be aligned in the second display format and all the pending execution display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area to be aligned in the first display format. can be held.

In particular, in conventional gaming machines, after the execution of a game round operation, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round operation is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy a predetermined condition. However, if the game round ends without the pending display information satisfying the predetermined conditions, the display mode will lose its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the hold display information corresponding to the game round after the execution of the game round operation is displayed as the played hold display information, and all the held hold display information that is displayed in the predetermined number of played hold display areas. When the display information is in the second display mode and all the unplayed pending display information displayed in the unplayed pending display area is in the first display mode, a gaming operation in a predetermined mode is displayed as a gaming round operation. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the play pending display information corresponding to the game round in which the game round operation ended without satisfying the predetermined conditions, and it is possible to attract the attention of the players. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the present feature, since it is provided with a means for changing the display mode of the unplayed pending display information in the unplayed pending display area, it is possible to tell the player, for example, that the unplayed pending display information is displayed in the unplayed pending display area. Even in a situation where all the unexecuted pending display information is not displayed in the same display format, the display format of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area may change. This can create a sense of expectation that all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area will be arranged in the same display format. Then, the display style of the unexecuted pending display information actually displayed in the unexecuted pending display area changes, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is aligned in the same display format. In this case, it is possible to give great joy to the players, and also create an additional expectation that all the executed pending display information displayed in the executed pending display area should be arranged in the same display format. can give.

<Characteristic wQ group>
The feature wQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the 12th embodiment and its 15th modification.

[Feature wQ1]
A ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the ball entry means;
An acquired information storage means (first reserve area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number;
an unexecuted hold display means for displaying an unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icons H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
A determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win) for each game;
A game operation control means for controlling a game operation (a variable game that varies a pattern) when a game operation that notifies a result of the judgment by the judgment means is performed from the start of the game operation to the end of the game operation, the game operation being regarded as one game operation;
a special game state generating means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to a player after the end of the game operation when the determining means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
a hold changing means for indicating the possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition by changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information according to a plurality of stages from high to low set according to the high and low of the possibility;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the higher side;
a pre-executed hold display means for displaying a pre-executed hold display area (pre-executed hold display area Dz) capable of displaying a predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game after the game control means executes the game operation as pre-executed hold display information (pre-executed hold display icon Z);
Equipped with
The display mode of the pending display information includes at least a first display mode (white color) which is the lowest of the plurality of stages, and a second display mode (a color higher than white, for example, blue color) which is a stage higher than the first display mode,
When all of the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is in the second display mode and all of the not yet executed hold display information displayed in the not yet executed hold display area is in the first display mode, the game operation in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game operation (a predetermined premium reach performance can be executed to display a predetermined premium image),
A gaming machine characterized in that, when all of the already executed hold display information displayed in the specified number of already executed hold display areas is in the first display mode (white) and all of the not yet executed hold display information displayed in the not yet executed hold display area is in the second display mode (blue), a result corresponding to the occurrence of the special game state as a result of the game round (an image announcing a jackpot win) can be displayed.

According to this feature, all the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas is in the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area When the pending display information is in the first display mode (white), a predetermined mode of gaming operation can be displayed as the gaming operation, so that the player can see all of the previously executed pending display area. There is a new expectation that has never existed before, such as wanting the execution pending display information to be aligned in the second display format and all the pending execution display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area to be aligned in the first display format. can be held.

In particular, in conventional gaming machines, after the execution of a game round operation, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round operation is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy a predetermined condition. However, if the game round ends without the pending display information satisfying the predetermined conditions, the display mode will lose its meaning.

However, according to this feature, when the pending display information corresponding to the game round after the game round operation is executed is displayed as executed pending display information, and all of the executed pending display information displayed in a predetermined number of executed pending display areas is in the second display mode, and all of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the first display mode, a game operation of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game round operation. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the executed pending display information corresponding to a game round in which the game operation has ended without satisfying a predetermined condition, and to attract the player's interest. As a result, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, when all of the executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of executed hold display areas is in the first display mode and all of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is in the second display mode, a result corresponding to the occurrence of a special game state can be displayed as the result of a game round, so that the player can have a new and unprecedented sense of expectation that all of the executed hold display information displayed in the executed hold display areas will be in the first display mode and all of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area will be in the second display mode.

<Characteristics of R group>
The group of features wR is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its fifteenth modification.

[Feature wR1]
Ball entry means (first starting port 33) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of a winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired when a game ball enters the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit;
an unexecuted pending display area (unexecuted pending display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted pending display information (unexecuted pending display icon H) corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means; unexecuted pending display means for displaying;
determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot) for each game;
If the period from the start of the gaming operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means to the end of the gaming operation is defined as one game rotation operation, the corresponding game rotation operation (variable game in which symbols are varied) a game time control means for controlling the
special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the end of the gaming operation when the determining means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area satisfies the predetermined condition is determined from the highest to the lowest set corresponding to the level of the possibility. Suspension changing means suggesting by changing the display mode of the unexecuted suspension display information according to a plurality of stages;
means for limiting the direction of change in the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the upper side;
A pre-execution pending display area (already executed pending display area) in which a predetermined number of pending display information corresponding to the gaming session after execution of the gaming session operation by the gaming session control means can be displayed as executed pending display information (already executed pending display icon Z). an executed pending display means for displaying a pending display area Dz);
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information, a first display mode (white) which is the lowest among the plurality of stages, and a second display mode (white) which is a higher stage than the first display mode. a color higher than white, such as blue),
All the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas is in the first display mode (white), and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the second display mode (blue), the gaming machine is capable of displaying a result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state (an image announcing a jackpot win) as a result of the gaming round. .

According to this feature, when all of the executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of executed hold display areas is in the first display mode and all of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is in the second display mode, a result corresponding to the occurrence of a special game state can be displayed as the result of a game round, so that the player can have a new and unprecedented sense of expectation that all of the executed hold display information displayed in the executed hold display areas will be in the first display mode and all of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area will be in the second display mode.

In particular, in conventional gaming machines, after the execution of a game round operation, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round operation is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy a predetermined condition. However, if the game round ends without the pending display information satisfying the predetermined conditions, the display mode will lose its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the hold display information corresponding to the game round after the execution of the game round operation is displayed as the played hold display information, and all the held hold display information that is displayed in the predetermined number of played hold display areas. When the display information is in the first display mode and all the unplayed pending display information displayed in the unplayed pending display area is in the second display mode, it corresponds to the occurrence of a special gaming state as a result of a game round. The results can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the play pending display information corresponding to the game round in which the game round operation ended without satisfying the predetermined conditions, and it is possible to attract the attention of the players. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features wR2]
The gaming machine described in feature wR1,
A gaming machine comprising means for changing the display mode of the executed pending display information in the executed pending display area (changing the display mode of the executed pending display icon Z in the executed pending display area Dz). .

According to this feature, since it is provided with a means for changing the display mode of the executed pending display information in the executed pending display area, it is possible to tell the player, for example, that the executed pending display information is displayed in a predetermined number of executed pending display areas. Even in a situation where the display format of all executed pending display information is not the same, the display format of the executed pending display information displayed in the executed pending display area may be different. It is possible to create a sense of expectation that this will change and all the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas will be arranged in the same display mode. Then, the display mode of the executed pending display information actually displayed in the executed pending display area changes, and all the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas are displayed in the same way. If the format is all the same, it will bring great joy to the player, and there is also an additional requirement that all unplayed pending display information displayed in the unplayed pending display area should be arranged in the same display format. It can give a sense of expectation.

[Features wR3]
The gaming machine according to feature wR1 or feature wR2,
The gaming machine characterized in that the executed pending display information in the executed pending display area is displayed in a different display manner from the unexecuted pending display information in the unexecuted pending display area.

According to this feature, the executed hold display information in the executed hold display area is displayed in a different display format from the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area, so that the player can be made aware that the executed hold display information is different from the unexecuted hold display information. As a result, when executed hold display information is being displayed, it is possible to avoid the player misunderstanding that there is unexecuted hold information that has not yet been played.

[Features wR4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features wR1 to feature wR3,
A gaming machine characterized in that the amount of the executed pending display information displayed in the executed pending display area is a constant number.

According to this feature, the number of already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area is fixed, so the difficulty level at which all of the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area is aligned in the same display mode is fixed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the difficulty level changing and giving the player unnecessary expectations or disappointment.

[Feature wR5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wR1 to wR4,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for erasing the already executed pending display information displayed in the already executed pending display area based on the satisfaction of an erasure condition (erasing based on the satisfaction of the erasure condition that a predetermined time has elapsed).

According to this feature, the executed hold display information displayed in the executed hold display area is erased when the erase condition is met, so it is possible to prevent the next player from feeling annoyed that the executed hold display information from the previous player's play remains in the executed hold display area, for example.

Specifically, for example, a case will be described in which a configuration is adopted in which the erasure condition is met when no play has been performed on the gaming machine for a predetermined period of time. When this configuration is adopted, if a player who has been playing on the gaming machine stops playing, and the next player starts playing on the gaming machine after the predetermined period of time has passed, the executed pending display information stored by the previous player's play is erased at the timing when the next player starts playing. Therefore, the next player will not feel annoyed by the executed pending display information stored by the previous player's play remaining in the executed pending display area.

In other words, this feature makes it possible to provide the next player with a situation in which they can start playing without there being any already-executed pending display information from the previous player's play in the already-executed pending display area.

[Feature wR6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wR1 to wR5,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for executing a predetermined suggestive effect (an effect in which a female character WM appears) when all of the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is in the first display mode and all of the not yet executed hold display information displayed in the not yet executed hold display area is in the second display mode.

According to this feature, a means is provided for executing a predetermined suggestive performance when all of the executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of executed hold display areas is in the first display mode and all of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is in the second display mode. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the condition that all of the executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of executed hold display areas is in the first display mode and all of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is in the second display mode has been met, and to recognize that there is something special about the meeting of this condition.

[Feature wR7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wR1 to wR6,
The second display mode (blue) is a display mode that is one level higher than the first display mode (white) among the plurality of levels.

According to this feature, the second display mode is a display mode that is one level higher than the first display mode among the multiple levels. In other words, the second display mode is a display mode that is the second lowest level. In general, even if pending display information is displayed in the lowest first display mode or the second lowest second display mode, the player will not feel high expectations.

However, with this feature, the amount of pending display information displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode increases, and all the executed pending display information displayed in the executed pending display area is displayed in the first display mode. When all unplayed pending display information displayed in the unplayed pending display area is aligned in the second display mode, a result corresponding to the occurrence of a special gaming state may be displayed as a result of the game round. .

Therefore, according to this feature, even in a situation where pending display information is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode, in which the player does not generally have high expectations, the game The user may continue to increase the amount of pending display information in the first display mode and the second display mode, and as a result, all the pending display information displayed in the executed pending display area will change to the first display mode. This creates a sense of expectation that all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area will be aligned in the second display mode. As a result, according to this feature, special significance can be given to the pending display information in the first display mode and the second display mode, for which players generally do not have great expectations. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature wR8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wR1 to wR7,
A gaming machine characterized in that the possibility of the special game state occurring varies depending on the type of display mode of the already executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed pending display areas.

According to this feature, the possibility that a special gaming state will occur differs depending on the type of display mode of the played pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of played pending display areas. It is important to check not only whether all the executed pending display information displayed in the display area is arranged in the same display format, but also the type of display mode of the executed pending display information displayed in a predetermined number of executed pending display areas. It is possible to draw the attention of the players to whether the game is complete, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature wR9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features wR1 to wR8,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a means for changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area (changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display icon H in the unexecuted hold display area Dh).

According to this feature, since it is provided with a means for changing the display mode of the unplayed pending display information in the unplayed pending display area, it is possible to tell the player, for example, that all of the unplayed pending display information displayed in the unplayed pending display area Even if the display format of the unexecuted pending display information is never the same, the display format of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area may change. , it is possible to create a feeling of expectation that all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area will be arranged in the same display mode. Then, the display style of the unexecuted pending display information actually displayed in the unexecuted pending display area changes, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is aligned in the same display format. In this case, it is possible to give great joy to the players, and also create an additional expectation that all the executed pending display information displayed in the executed pending display area should be arranged in the same display format. can give.

<Characteristics wS group>
The group of features wS is extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its fifteenth modification.

[Feature wS1]
A ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the ball entry means;
An acquired information storage means (first reserve area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number;
an unexecuted hold display means for displaying an unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icons H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
A determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win) for each game;
A game operation control means for controlling a game operation (a variable game that varies a pattern) when a game operation that notifies a result of the judgment by the judgment means is performed from the start of the game operation to the end of the game operation, the game operation being regarded as one game operation;
a special game state generating means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to a player after the end of the game operation when the determining means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
a hold changing means for indicating the possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition by changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information according to a plurality of stages from high to low set according to the high and low of the possibility;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the higher side;
a pre-executed hold display means for displaying a pre-executed hold display area (pre-executed hold display area Dz) capable of displaying a predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game after the game control means executes the game operation as pre-executed hold display information (pre-executed hold display icon Z);
A means for changing the display mode of the executed hold display information in the executed hold display area (changing the display mode of the executed hold display icon Z in the executed hold display area Dz);
Equipped with
The display mode of the pending display information includes at least a first display mode (white color) which is the lowest of the plurality of stages, and a second display mode (a color higher than white, for example, blue color) which is a stage higher than the first display mode,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when all of the already executed hold display information displayed in the specified number of already executed hold display areas is in the first display mode (white) and all of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display areas is in the second display mode (blue), a result corresponding to the occurrence of the special game state as a result of the game round (an image announcing a jackpot win) can be displayed.

According to this feature, all the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas is the first display mode, and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is the second display mode, the result corresponding to the occurrence of the special game state can be displayed as the result of the game, so that the player can see all the completed plays displayed in the played pending display area. We have created a new expectation that has never existed before, such as wanting the pending display information to be aligned in the first display format and all the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area to be aligned in the second display format. You can hold it.

In particular, in conventional gaming machines, after the execution of a game round operation, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round operation is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy a predetermined condition. However, if the game round ends without the pending display information satisfying the predetermined conditions, the display mode will lose its meaning.

However, according to this feature, when the pending display information corresponding to the play round after the play round operation is executed is displayed as executed pending display information, and all of the executed pending display information displayed in a predetermined number of executed pending display areas is in the first display mode, and all of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the second display mode, a result corresponding to the occurrence of a special play state can be displayed as the result of the play round. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the executed pending display information corresponding to the play round in which the play round operation has ended without satisfying the predetermined conditions, and to attract the player's interest. As a result, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Further, according to the present feature, since it is provided with a means for changing the display mode of the executed pending display information in the executed pending display area, it is possible to tell the player, for example, that if the executed pending display information is displayed in a predetermined number of executed pending display areas. Even if the display format of all executed pending display information is not the same, the display of executed pending display information displayed in the executed pending display area may be different. It is possible to create a sense of expectation that the mode will change and all the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas will be aligned in the same display mode. Then, the display mode of the executed pending display information actually displayed in the executed pending display area changes, and all the executed pending display information displayed in the predetermined number of executed pending display areas are displayed in the same way. If the format is all the same, it will bring great joy to the player, and there is also an additional requirement that all unplayed pending display information displayed in the unplayed pending display area should be arranged in the same display format. It can give a sense of expectation.

<Characteristic wT group>
The feature wT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the 12th embodiment and its 15th modification.

[Feature wT1]
A ball entry means (first starting hole 33) through which a game ball can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (a value of a winning random number counter C1) when a game ball enters the ball entry means;
An acquired information storage means (first reserve area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number;
an unexecuted hold display means for displaying an unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icons H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
A determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value that results in a big win) for each game;
A game operation control means for controlling a game operation (a variable game that varies a pattern) when a game operation that notifies a result of the judgment by the judgment means is performed from the start of the game operation to the end of the game operation, the game operation being regarded as one game operation;
a special game state generating means for generating a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to a player after the game operation ends when the determining means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
a hold changing means for indicating the possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition by changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information according to a plurality of stages from high to low set according to the high and low of the possibility;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the higher side;
a pre-executed hold display means for displaying a pre-executed hold display area (pre-executed hold display area Dz) capable of displaying a predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game after the game control means executes the game operation as pre-executed hold display information (pre-executed hold display icon Z);
Equipped with
The display mode of the pending display information includes at least a first display mode (white color) which is the lowest of the plurality of stages, and a second display mode (a color higher than white, for example, blue color) which is a stage higher than the first display mode,
The already-executed hold display information in the already-executed hold display area is displayed in a display manner different from the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when all of the already executed hold display information displayed in the specified number of already executed hold display areas is in the first display mode (white) and all of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display areas is in the second display mode (blue), a result corresponding to the occurrence of the special game state as a result of the game round (an image announcing a jackpot win) can be displayed.

According to this feature, when all of the executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of executed hold display areas is in the first display mode and all of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is in the second display mode, a result corresponding to the occurrence of a special game state can be displayed as the result of a game round, so that the player can have a new and unprecedented sense of expectation that all of the executed hold display information displayed in the executed hold display areas will be in the first display mode and all of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area will be in the second display mode.

In particular, in conventional gaming machines, after the execution of a game round operation, the pending display information corresponding to the game round of the game round operation is displayed in a display mode that is highly likely to satisfy a predetermined condition. However, if the game round ends without the pending display information satisfying the predetermined conditions, the display mode will lose its meaning.

However, according to this feature, when the pending display information corresponding to the play round after the play round operation is executed is displayed as executed pending display information, and all of the executed pending display information displayed in a predetermined number of executed pending display areas is in the first display mode, and all of the unexecuted pending display information displayed in the unexecuted pending display area is in the second display mode, a result corresponding to the occurrence of a special play state can be displayed as the result of the play round. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the executed pending display information corresponding to the play round in which the play round operation has ended without satisfying the predetermined conditions, and to attract the player's interest. As a result, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the executed hold display information in the executed hold display area is displayed in a different display mode from the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area, so that the player can be made aware that the executed hold display information is different from the unexecuted hold display information. As a result, when executed hold display information is being displayed, it is possible to avoid the player misunderstanding that there is unexecuted hold information that has not yet been played.

The inventions of the above feature groups solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives, such as structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, and simplifying control.

Various technical improvements have also been made with the aim of improving the soundness of gaming, such as discovering and deterring fraudulent actions by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

In gaming machines like the ones mentioned above, further technological improvements are desired in order to increase the enjoyment of the game, reduce the processing load of the gaming machine, optimize processing, simplify control, and provide a more sound gaming experience.

It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one or more of the configurations included in each of the above characteristic groups are appropriately combined. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

Below, the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each feature group described above can be applied or is applied to each feature group will be shown.

Pachinko gaming machine: A gaming machine comprising: a launching means for launching gaming balls towards a gaming area based on a launching operation by a player; a ball entry means provided in the gaming area and into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter; an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on a gaming ball entering the ball entry means; an acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means; and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player when the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition.

Slot machine or other reel-type gaming machine: A gaming machine that includes a pattern display means for variably displaying multiple patterns, a start means for starting the variable display of the multiple patterns due to the operation of a start operation means, a stop means for stopping the variable display of the multiple patterns due to the operation of a stop operation means or due to the passage of a predetermined time, and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player according to the pattern after the stop.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, but can be realized in various configurations without departing from the spirit thereof. The technical features included in the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, and feature groups may be used as appropriate to solve some or all of the above-mentioned problems or to achieve some or all of the above-mentioned effects. , it is possible to replace or combine them. Further, unless the technical feature is described as essential in this specification, it can be deleted as appropriate.

10...Pachinko machine 11...Outer frame 12...Pachinko machine body 13...Inner frame 14...Front door frame 15...Hinge 16...Hinge 17...Cylinder lock 18. ..Window part 19...Glass unit 20...Upper plate 21...Lower plate 22...Ejection port 23...Lever 24...Direction operation button 25...Operation handle 30... Game board 31... Guidance rail 31a... Inner rail part 31b... Outer rail part 60... Main control device 70... Payout control device 71... Payout device 80... Launch control device 81 ...Game ball launch mechanism 85...Power supply device 90...Audio light emission control device 100...Display control device

[form]
a game process execution means capable of executing a predetermined game process when a predetermined power is supplied;
a power interruption processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined power interruption processing when it is determined that the predetermined power is interrupted in a predetermined state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine that can enter a playable state when the predetermined power is supplied in a predetermined manner after a power outage,
a displacement means that is movable between a first position and a second position, and can be in a predetermined non-energized state when located in the first position and can be in a predetermined energized state when located in the second position;
a storage means capable of retaining predetermined information during a power outage;
It can be displaced into a pressed state in which it is pressed and a non-pressed state in which it is not pressed, and when the predetermined power is supplied in the pressed state, at least part of the information stored in the storage means is initialized. an initialization switch that can be
a means for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means when the predetermined power is supplied after a power interruption;
a state determination means for determining a state of the displacement means when the predetermined power is supplied to the gaming machine;
a process execution means for determining information corresponding to a position of the displacement means by the state determination means at a predetermined timing after the predetermined power is supplied to the gaming machine, executing a first process in a first case where it is determined by the determination that information corresponding to the displacement means being located at the first position is set, and executing a second process which is different from the first process and is for displacing the displacement means to the first position in a second case where it is determined by the determination that information corresponding to the displacement means being located at the first position is not set;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Claims (1)

A ball entry means capable of entering the game ball;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information in response to a game ball entering the ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information acquired when a game ball enters the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number;
an unexecuted hold display means for displaying an unexecuted hold display area capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
A determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition for each game;
a game operation control means for controlling a game operation when a game operation is defined as one game operation from the start of the game operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game operation;
a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to a player after the game operation ends when the determining means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
a hold changing means for indicating the possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition by changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information according to a plurality of stages from high to low set according to the high and low of the possibility;
means for limiting a direction of change of the display mode of the pending display information to one direction from the lower side to the higher side;
a previously executed hold display means for displaying a previously executed hold display area capable of displaying a predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game after the game control means executes the game operation as previously executed hold display information;
Equipped with
The display mode of the unexecuted pending display information includes at least a first display mode which is the lowest of the plurality of stages, and a second display mode which is a stage higher than the first display mode,
A gaming machine characterized in that when all of the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is in the second display mode, and all of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is in the first display mode, the gaming operation in a predetermined mode can be displayed as the gaming round operation.

Images